Copyright: (c) 1992 - 1998 Corel Corporation. All rights reserved -   Friday, July 10, 1998 11:03:03.
Citation: (c) 1992 - 1998 Corel Corporation. All rights reserved.


3DMF Import dialog box


Lets you preview the modified 3D image before you import it.


Click and drag in the 3D View window to scale the size of the 3D image. It can appear as a close or distant object.


Click and drag in the 3D View window to rotate the 3D image. As you view the 3D image from various angles, the lighting and shadows change accordingly.


You can alter the size of the 3D image in the 3D View window. Click and drag outwards to enlarge the image, or click and drag inwards to shrink it.


Click and drag the 3D image to move it around inside the 3D View window.


Click and drag in the 3D View window to rotate the 3D image, presenting various camera views. The 3D image maintains any lighting and shadow effects present before the rotation.


Click here to hide user-interface elements, such as handles, that let you manipulate and rotate the 3D image.


3DMF Import dialog, Size tab


Displays the width of the file. To change the file width, type in a new value, or use the scroll arrows to adjust the existing value.


Displays the height of the file. To change the file height, type in a new value, or use the scroll arrows to adjust the existing value.


Displays the resolution of the image. To change the resolution, type in a new value, or use the scroll arrows to adjust the existing value.


Displays the measurement options for the height and width of the image. To use another measurement, click the down arrow and choose one from the list.


Enable this check box to maintain the aspect ratio between the height and the width of the image. When this check box is enabled, the dimensions will automatically change to reflect the original image size.


Resets the size properties to their default settings.


3DMF Import dialog, Render tab


Specifies the rendering mode. To use another rendering option, click the down arrow and choose one from the list.


Sets options for the chosen render setting.


3DMF Import dialog, Distant Lights tab


Enable to display light options.


Displays the type of light being modified. To select another light option, click the down arrow and choose one from the list.


Click to bring up a color palette which can be used to modify the color of the light source.


Move the slider to adjust the brightness of the image.


Enter a number in this percentage box to adjust the brightness of the image.


Enable to turn on shadows in the image.


Displays lighting options. Click and drag the yellow patches to alter the direction of the light source.


Click to shift the light source to the front of the image.


Click to shift the light source to the back of the image.


Click to shift the light source to the front/back of the image.


Click to add a light source.


Click to subtract a light source.


Print Options - General tab


Indicates which device driver is selected. Click the arrow to access a list of other available printer and imagesetter drivers.

If the driver you need is not listed, install it by using the usual Windows procedure.


Provides the status of the current printing device.


Provides information about the current printing device.


Provides path of the current printing device.


Opens a Windows dialog box which allows you to set printing options not controlled by Corel.


Creates a .PRN file from your print job (instead of actually printing).


Prepares the .PRN file for printing from a Macintosh computer.


When Print to file is enabled, you can specify options for printing from a Macintosh computer or for separating files.

When Print to file is disabled, you can specify options for collating pages in your document.


Prints all pages in your document.


Prints only the chapters you specify.


Displays a list of chapters that you can print.


Displays a list of documents that you can print.


Prints only the page currently displayed.


Prints only the objects that are currently selected.


Specifies the pages, or the range of pages, to print.

A dash (-) between numbers defines a range of sequential pages (e.g., 1-5 will print pages 1 to 5).

A comma (,) between numbers defines a series of non-sequential pages (e.g., 1,5 will print pages 1 and 5 only).

Any combination of dashes and commas is supported (e.g., 1-3, 5, 7, 10-12 will print pages 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 10, 11 and 12).

Inserting a tilde (~) between two numbers will cause those two pages plus every second page in between to print. For example, 1~6 will print pages 1, 3, 5 and 6. If you enter 2~6, pages 2, 4 and 6 will print.

The option works in conjunction with the Print Left/Right Pages option.


Specifies the pages, or the range of pages, to print.

A dash (-) between numbers defines a range of sequential pages (e.g., 1-5 will print pages 1 to 5).

A comma (,) between numbers defines a series of non-sequential pages (e.g., 1,5 will print pages 1 and 5 only).

Any combination of dashes and commas is supported (e.g., 1-3, 5, 7, 10-12 will print pages 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 10, 11 and 12).

Inserting a tilde (~) between two numbers will cause those two pages plus every second page in between to print. For example, 1~6 will print pages 1, 3, 5 and 6. If you enter 2~6, pages 2, 4 and 6 will print.

The option works in conjunction with the Print Odd/Even Pages option.


Allows you to specify whether left, right, or both left and right pages will be printed.


Allows you to specify whether odd, even, or both odd and even pages will be printed.


Identifies the number of copies that will be printed. When printing to file, request one copy only, with no collation.


Prints one full set of the selected pages before printing the second full set (e.g., a first set of pages 1 to 10 will print, before the second set of pages 1 to 10 will print, and so on).

If you do not enable Collate, the requested number of copies of each selected page will print before the next page will print (e.g., five copies of page 1 will print before five copies of page 2 will print, and so on).


Lets you select a print style (a configuration of print settings).


Saves a print style (a configuration of print settings).


Opens the print preview. You can see how your work will appear when printed and change print options from within the print preview.


Print Options - Layout tab


Resets the position of the printed image.


Automatically scales your image so that it fits the printable page. Unless Maintain aspect ratio is enabled, Fit to Page will distort your image.


Places the printed image in the position specified in the list box on the right.


Specifies the position of the printed image when the button on the left is enabled.


Scales the width of your printed image (not the original document) by the specified percentage.


Scales the height of your printed image (not the original document) by the specified percentage.


Constrains resizing and scaling so that the height and width ratio of the image is maintained.


Allows you to print large print jobs on multiple sheets, or tiles, that can later be assembled to form the whole document.


Allows you to set the amount that images on each tile overlap with images on adjacent tiles.


Allows you to set the amount that images on each tile overlap with images on adjacent tiles based on a percentage of the page width.


Enables a limit for bleeds. The bleed limit determines how far beyond the crop marks an image can extend when printed.

The corresponding value identifies how far beyond the crop marks the bleed can extend.


Provides preset page layouts and allows you to store custom styles.


Provides a list of preset or saved signature layouts.


Stores the N-up format.


Provides an approximate preview of the current layout settings.


Print Options - Separations tab


Separates a color image into its component colors, causing each component color to print out on a single sheet.

If you used a process color model (which uses four colors to simulate any color), you'll get up to four sheets per page.

If you used spot colors, one sheet per color is printed.


Allows you to print the separations in color (i.e., on a color printer). Separations are usually printed in black, with a screen to represent shading. This option allows you to print the separations in color instead.


Specifies Hexachrome process color. Hexachrome color uses 6 inks instead of 4, with the addition of orange and green to the regular process colors of yellow, magenta, cyan and black.


Sets Hexachrome color to use high density inks when printing solid colors. Hexachrome color uses 6 inks instead of 4, with the addition of orange and green to the regular process colors of yellow, magenta, cyan and black.


Converts any spot colors present in your print job to process colors. This does not affect the print job itself, only the way it is printed.


Prints all plates, including those that contain no image. Printing empty plates wastes film and adds to the cost of your print job. Generally, you'll want to leave this option disabled.


Causes any object that contains 95% black or more to overprint underlying objects. This is a useful option for print jobs containing a lot of black text, but it should be used with caution on print jobs with a high graphics content.


Creates color trapping by assigning an outline to an object that is the same color as the object's fill, and by then having the outline overprint underlying objects.

To be able to apply Auto-spreading to an object, it must

•	not already have an outline

•	be filled with a uniform fill

•	not already be designated to overprint

The maximum trap value defines the amount of spread that autotrapping assigns to an object, along with the object's color. The lighter the color, the greater the percentage of the maximum trap value. The darker the color, the smaller the percentage of the maximum trap value.

The value for Text Above determines the minimum font size to which auto-spreading is applied. Applying auto-spreading to small font sizes can make the text illegible.


Specifies fixed width auto-spreading. When this option is enabled, the auto-spread outline assigned to each object is always the same width.


Allows you to adjust the advanced settings of your color separations, which includes setting halftone screens and creating color trapping. Do not adjust these settings without first talking to your service bureau or printing shop.


Opens the Advanced Separations Setting dialog box that allows you to set advanced screening parameters such as screening technology, screen frequency and angle per color plate, overprinting per plate, halftone dot type, etc.


Specifies which color separation(s) to print.

The list of colors shows all separations used in your print job. You can choose to print all separations, one separation only, or any combination of separations.


Print Options - Advanced dialog


Identifies the imagesetter and screening technology that will be used to image your job.

Proprietary screening technologies supported by Corel include AGFA Balanced screening, Linotronic RT and, HQS screening.


Identifies the resolution (in dots per inch, or "dpi") at which the job will be printed.


Identifies the basic screen frequency (in lines per inch, or "lpi") at which the job will be printed.

The higher the screen frequency setting, the more intense the colors and the sharper the image. The lower the screen frequency, the lighter the colors and the less sharp the image.

A high frequency gives you fewer levels of gray; a low frequency gives you more levels of gray.

The upper limit of your screen frequency is define by the type of printing press to be used and the type of paper stock.


Shows all separations used in your print job. Click each one to change frequency, angle, and to enable overprinting.


Allows you to specify a halftone screen for your drawing if you are printing to a PostScript device. A halftone screen is a pattern of shapes that is used to simulate shades of colors (i.e. darker to lighter) while using the same ink. Dot, line, diamond, elliptical, and Euclidean are only a few of the available halftone types.


Print Options - Prepress tab


Prints a negative image when enabled.


Specifies that the film emulsion faces down when enabled.

Emulsion is the coating of light-sensitive material on a piece of film.


Provides a graphical representation of the selected film options (emulsion up or down and negative or positive).


Prints the filename, current date, and time (and tile number, if applicable) at the bottom of the sheet.

If applicable, color separation information (color, screen frequency and angle, plate number) is printed at the top of the sheet.

To see the file information, you must define a working page size that is smaller than the dimensions of the actual sheet of paper or film that is used to image the work. If not, you can request that the file information be printed within the page.


Causes the file information to print within the page. If the working page size is identical to the paper or film size, enable Position Within Page. Make sure the print job is positioned so that the file information does not overlap it.


Specifies the text that is displayed in the file information.


Places page numbers on the printed sheets. To see the page numbers, you must define a working page size that is smaller than the dimensions of the actual sheet of paper or film that is used to image the work.


Prints crop marks. These marks are used as alignment aids when trimming the printed output down to its final size.

To see the crop marks, you must define a working page size that is smaller than the dimensions of the actual sheet of paper or film that is used to image the work.


Prints crop marks only along the outer edge of the sheet. This option is often preferable when you are printing multiple layouts per sheet.


Prints registration marks on each sheet. These marks serve as guides for aligning color separations.

To see the registration marks, you must define a working page size that is smaller than the dimensions of the actual sheet of paper or film that is used to image the work.


Specifies the appearance of the registration marks.


Prints a bar of the six basic colors (red, green, blue; cyan, magenta, yellow) beside your print job. These color patches are used to verify the quality of the printed output.

To see the calibration bar, you must define a working page size that is smaller than the dimensions of the actual sheet of paper or film that is used to image the work.


Prints a Densitometer Scale, a bar of varying shades of gray, on each separation sheet. This is an advanced feature that allows you to check the accuracy, quality, and consistency of the output with an instrument called a densitometer.

To see the densitometer scale, you must define a working page size that is smaller than the dimensions of the actual sheet of paper or film that is used to image the work


Lets you customize the densitometer scale.


Print Options - PostScript tab


Specifies the PostScript level. Only enable PostScript level 2 or PostScript 3 if you are certain you will be printing on a PostScript 2 or PostScript 3 device.


Ensures that the PostScript file conforms to the Document Structuring Convention. Some prepress devices such as color trapping software require that the PostScript file conform to DSC.


Compresses bitmaps using JPEG compression when printing them. Enabling this option can reduce the size of your print job.


Specifies the degree of JPEG compression used when printing bitmaps.


Defines bitmaps in RGB values instead of the usual CMYK values that are found in PostScript files. Use this option when you are outputting to RGB devices (e.g., slidemakers). Also use this option when you are printing to CMY devices. It is easier for these devices to translate from RGB to CMY than from CMYK to CMY.


Tells the service bureau's OPI server to substitute the corresponding high-resolution images for the low-resolution ones in your file. This substitution is done before your print file is rasterized and imaged to film.


Replaces the low-resolution Desktop Color Separation placeholder with high-resolution Desktop Color Separation images in the PostScript file. If this option is not enabled, the service bureau must replace the low-resolution files when the print file is rasterized and imaged to film.


Identifies the basic halftone screen frequency at which your job will print.

Screen frequency is expressed as a number of lines per inch (lpi). This value refers to the number of lines of dots (or other shapes) that make up a halftone screen. A halftone screen is a pattern of shapes of various sizes that is used to simulate a continuous tone image. Check with your service bureau for the optimum setting for your print job.


Downloads Type 1 fonts to the output device. Generally, this option is enabled because it is particularly beneficial when you want to print large tracts of text that use only a few fonts. Printing is faster as each font is first downloaded, and then only referenced by text that uses it.

If you disable this option, fonts are output as graphics (either curves or bitmaps). This may be useful if the file contains a large number of fonts that would take longer to download, or would not download at all, because of large size.


Converts True Type fonts to Type 1 fonts. If you enabled the Download Type 1 Fonts option, by default the Convert True Type to Type 1 is also enabled. This ensures that True Type fonts are converted to Type 1 fonts so that they can be downloaded.

Only disable this option if your output device has difficulty interpreting the Type 1 fonts.


Allows one or more warnings to be issued if objects that are too complex and could cause printing problems are detected.


Warns you of potential banding (the appearance of discreet strips in a fill) which is caused by to few steps in a fountain fill, when it is enabled.

This warning only applies to linear fountain fills.


Warns you if your print job contains too many spot colors. You can change the number of colors that triggers this warning in the Special Settings list box.


Warns you if your print job contains too many fonts. You can change the number of fonts that triggers this warning in the Special Settings list box.


Specifies the maximum allowable number of control points per curve. Reducing this number helps alleviate printing problems caused by objects that are too complex.


Indicates the level of flatness that will be applied to curves when you print. Increasing the flatness reduces printing time and therefore is useful when you need to produce quick proofs. Be careful however as a flatness level set too high will produce distorted curves.


Causes Corel to automatically increase the flatness in increments of 2, as needed. Attempts to print an object will stop when the flatness value exceeds the value set in the Set Flatness To box by 10. At this point, the printer skips the problematic object and goes on to the next object.


Enables an analysis of your file and the various print settings you have specified, and, if necessary, automatically increases the number of steps used to render fountain fills to avoid banding.

This option may increase print time, but it will ensure the best possible rendering of fountain fills.


Enables an analysis of your file and the various print settings you have specified. If the number of steps in a fountain fill is greater than the number that your output device can render, the number of steps used to render the fountain fill is decreased automatically.


Print Options - Miscellaneous tab


Ensures that colors are reproduced accurately based on the current color profiles. You can select a new color profile by clicking the Set Profiles button.


The name of the currently selected color profile.


This value reflects the number of steps that will be used to render any fountain fills in your print job. A low value will print faster but the transition between shades may be coarse, which causes what is known as banding. A higher value will result in a smoother blend but longer printing times.

Fountain steps that are set in the Options dialog box only affect the way fountain fills display on your monitor. To control how the fountain fills actually print, you must set the value for fountain steps here or in the Fountain Fill dialog box.


Prints only vector graphics unless combined with Print bitmaps or Print text.


Prints only pictures and graphics unless combined with Print hidden pictures or Print text.


Prints only hidden pictures unless combined with Print pictures and graphics or Print text.


Prints only bitmaps unless combined with Print vectors or Print text.


Prints only text unless combined with Print vectors or Print bitmaps.


Prints only text unless combined with Print pictures and graphics or Print hidden pictures.


Scales everything that will be printed so that it fits within the printable page of the current printer. Use this setting to proof a large layout on your desktop printer.

This option is only intended for proofing, and should be disabled for the final output. If you wish to scale your print job to fill the printable page, you should use the fit to page option. Position and size measurements reflect the size of the final output, not the size of the proof.


Prints all text in black.


Prints using the full color capabilities of the selected printing device.


Prints all colors in black.


Prints all colors in grayscale.


Prints a job information sheet with your print job. This report contains information about the application that produced the job, the driver that was used, the print settings, the font information, and the file links.


Allows you to choose an option and assign a new setting to it.


Opens the Job Information Sheet dialog box, which allows you to specify which categories of information you want included in the report.


Opens a dialog box that lets you select color profiles.


Print Options - Info Settings


Shows the contents of the Print Job Information Sheet.


Allows you to specify what information the Print Job Information Sheet will contain.


Sends the Print Job Information Sheet to a .TXT file.


Allows you to specify the .TXT file the Print Job Information Sheet is sent to.


Sends the Print Job Information Sheet to a printer.


Allows you to specify the printer the Print Job Information Sheet is sent to.


Standard toolbar


Displays a list of available print styles.


Saves the current print options in a print style with a name that you specify.


Deletes the current print style.


Opens the Print Options dialog box.


Prints the document.


Displays a list of preset zoom settings.


Specifies full screen preview.


Close the print preview.


Pick Tool and Property Bar


Lets you select, position, and scale images in your document.


Specifies one of several preset positions for the placement of your print job on the page


Specifies the placement of your print job on the page. The X value indicates the distance from the left edge of the printable page. The Y value indicates the distance from the top edge of the printable page.


Resizes your printed image (not the original document) according to the width and height specified.


Scales your printed image (not the original document) by the specified percentage.


Identifies the unit of measurement that is used when you specify the layout of your print job.


Signature Layout tool and Property bar


Lets you specify and edit signature layouts.


Saves the present layout settings.


Deletes the selected layout.


Switches between a preview of your print job and a preview of the current signature layout or N-up format.


Specifies the number of working pages to position on the printable page.


Allows you to print on both sides of the page. When you enable this option, and you print to a non-double sided printer, Corel automatically runs a wizard that ensures all of the pages are ordered and oriented correctly.


Allows you to specify the distance between each working page that is placed on the printable page.


Arranges the pages appropriately for perfect binding.


Arranges the pages appropriately for saddle stitching.


Arranges the pages appropriately for stacking and collating.


Selects a page to be placed on the layout sheet.


Allows you to specify whether the top of the selected page points up or down.


N-up tool and Property bar


Lets you specify and edit an N-up format.


Provides a list of preset or custom N-up formats.


Saves the present N-up format.


Deletes the selected N-up format.


Specifies the number of frames to be placed on the printable page.


Places the current working page in each frame of the printable page.


Keeps the frame size equal to the working page size.


Allows you to specify the distance between each frame that is placed on the printable page.


Automatically sets the gutters.


Allows you to set the top/left page margins.


Allows you to set the bottom/right page margins.


Makes the right margin equal to the left margin, and the bottom margin equal to the top margin.


Automatically sets the margins.


Marks Placement tool and property bar


Lets you add, remove, and position printers' marks.


Resets the position of the bounding box.


Sets the position of the bounding box. By repositioning the bounding box, you can change the position of printers' marks.


Zoom tool and property bar


Lets you magnify portions of the document.


Increases the magnification of the document.


Decreases the magnification of the document.


Displays items in drawing at their actual size.


Sets the magnification to display the selected image.


Increase or decreases the magnification to display the entire image as large as possible.


Sets the magnification to display the entire page.


Sets the magnification to display the width of the page.


Sets the magnification to display the height of the page.


Opens the Zoom dialog box


Status Bar


Displays the name of the currently selected image.


Lets you select a printing device.


Displays the name of the current printing device.


Indicates whether you're printing a composite print job or color separations.


Indicates whether you're printing a negative image and whether you're printing a mirrored imaged.


Lets you tile large images so that they are printed on several sheets of paper.


Displays information about the current tiling settings. Tiling lets you print large images on several sheets of paper.


Indicates the current mouse position.


Indicates the current range of pages to be printed.


File Menu


Saves the current print options in a print style.


Prints the current page.


View menu


Displays the image to be printed. If this option is disabled, the print preview represents the position of the image with a box.


Automatically sets the view options to best simulate the output of your printer.


Displays the image in color. This setting provides an accurate representation of color printer output.


Displays the image in grayscale. This setting provides an accurate representation of non-color printer output.


Displays a composite color image (all colors on one page).


Displays each color separation on a different page.


Displays the print preview's toolbar.


Displays the print preview's status bar.


Displays the print preview's rulers.


Displays a dotted line around the edge of the page that indicates the limit of the printable area.


Displays PostScript fills as they will be printed. When PostScript fills aren't rendered, the fills are replaced with a pattern of "PS"s.


Displays the currently selected tile.


Opens the Go To dialog box. You can use this dialog to navigate your document.


Settings Menu


Open the Print Options dialog box to the General tab.


Opens the Print Options dialog box to the Layout tab.


Opens the Print Options dialog box to the Separations tab.


Opens the Print Options dialog box to the Prepress tab.


Open the Print Options dialog box to the PostScript tab.


Open the Print Options dialog box to the Miscellaneous tab.


Opens the Print Job Information Sheet dialog box.


Opens the Duplex Printing wizard. This wizard helps you produce double-sided output using a single-sided printer.


Opens the Driver Compatibility dialog box. This dialog box contains options that let you fine-tune printer performance.


Help menu


Opens the Help.


Open the About dialog box which provides information about the application.


Zoom dialog


Sets the magnification to 200%.


Sets the magnification to 100%.


Sets the magnification to 75%.


Sets the magnification to 50%.


Sets the magnification to 25%.


Sets the magnification to a percentage that you specify.


Previews the result of the current zoom settings.


Go To dialog


Specifies the page number to go to.


Specifies the side of the page to go to.


Specifies the color separation to go to.


Displays a list of pages.


Driver compatibility


Specifies the printer to which the options in this dialog will apply.


Displays the capabilities of the printer specified in the above list box.


Sends text to the printer as graphics. Doing this can sometimes correct problems with incorrectly printed fonts.


Switches to clipping controlled by the software. Clipping is the process through which portions of a fill that should not be visible are removed. If you encounter a problem printing non-uniform fills, switch to clipping controlled by the software.


Determine whether bitmaps are sent to non-PostScript printers all at once or in smaller blocks (below 64 KB) called chunks. Usually, the driver tells the application which method it can or cannot handle. If you find that bitmaps do not print as expected, try forcing bitmaps to be printed in smaller chunks.


Lets the printing device render bezier curves and paths.


Uses the specified color profile.


Sends the printed page to the driver already split into bands.

Some non-PostScript printers can't hold a full page in memory and must print the page in multiple passes, or "bands." The default setting lets the printer driver split the page into bands before sending it to the printer. If this proves too slow, or you encounter problems, send the page to the driver already split into bands.


Specifies a color profile.


Save Print style


Displays the present print style, or a name you have typed for a new style.


Provides a list of the present print options and allows you to change them.


Warning dialogs


Cancels the print job.


Continues printing. It is possible that part or all of the print job won't appear correctly.


IDisables this warning for the rest of this print job.


Provides information about this warning.


Skips the object that is causing the PostScript error. If you skip an object it won't appear in the final output.


The following fixes are only temporary fixes. Apr. 98


Click this to display an overview of this dialog box.

For Help on an item, click ? at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item.


Itemizes in list/details form.


Click to display more options.


Opens a Help file containing a list of Corel Approved Service Bureaus.


Printing from the copy editor

When you print from the Corel VENTURA copy editor you don't have access to all of the available printing options. You can select a printer and specify which pages you want to print, but you can't set any of the PostScript or Prepress options that are available when you aren't printing from the copy editor.


Color Dialog and Roll-Up


Displays a color viewer that lets you select colors from different visual representations of the visible spectrum. Hold down the button to choose from several different color viewers.


Click this button to display a mixing area which you can use to mix and select colors. Hold down the button to choose from various types of mixing area.


Click this button to use a fixed color palette. Palettes are listed in the Type list box. You may want to use the palettes if you are working with spot or process color systems by DIC, DuPont, FOCOLTONE, PANTONE, TOYO, or TRUMATCH. By using these palettes along with a color reference book, you can be reasonably certain of how the colors will look when printed.


Displays the custom color palettes. Custom palettes are editable and can include any type of color.


The content of this list box changes depending on the color selection button you have enabled at the top of the dialog box. When using the Color Viewer or the Mixing Area, the box lists the color models you can use to select colors. When you enable either of the palettes buttons, the box lists the various palettes that you can display in the dialog box.


Lists the various palettes that you can display.


Displays or hides the right side of this dialog box.


Changes the reference color (the current color in the application) to the currently selected color in this dialog box.


Shows the color of the selected object or the currently selected color in the application. A dot in the corner of the color indicates that the color is a spot color.


Shows how the color of the selected object or the currently selected color in the application will appear when printed. A dot in the corner of the color indicates that the color is a spot color.


Indicates that the color at the top-left of the color preview is not printable.


Indicates that the color at the bottom-left of the color preview is not printable.


Displays the current and new colors.


Shows the color that is currently selected in this dialog box. A dot in the corner of the color indicates that the color is a spot color.


Shows how the color that is currently selected in this dialog box will appear when printed. Click this color to make it the currently selected color. A dot in the corner of the color indicates that the color is a spot color.


Displays options for displaying and working with colors.


Adds the current color to the end of the color palette being displayed in the on-screen color palette.


Displays a color component value for the currently selected color. The letter next to the box identifies the component name, i.e., C for cyan when using the CMYK model, R for red when using the RGB model, and so on. For colors in the custom palette, the components correspond to the color model or color matching palette through which the color was edited.


Displays the name of the current color. You can specify a new name for a custom color here or type the name of an existing color to display that color.


Lets you select a color by clicking. Drag the slider on the right and position the square in the color selection area to select a color.


Mixers


Click to choose a color to use in the Color Blender. The color you choose here will blend with the three other colors chosen in the blend if you click the Auto-Blend button.


Displays the blended colors. Select colors to blend in the color pickers at each corner of this box.


Lets you mix the current color with colors in the mixing area. You can choose brush attributes such as size and edge type by clicking the options button.


Selects a color from the mixing area.


Specifies the degree of blending between the current color and the colors in the mixing area. A higher percentage makes the current color more transparent.


Lets you mix and select colors.


Color Harmonies


Lets you select colors that look good together. Color harmonies work by superimposing a shape over a color wheel. As you move one corner of the shape around the wheel the other corners also move. The colors at each corner are always complimentary, contrasting, or harmonious, depending on the shape you select.


Displays a grid of colors derived from the position of the black and white circles on the above color wheel.


Lets you select the shape that is superimposed on the color wheel. Different shapes produce different relationships between the colors that are displayed in the grid below the color wheel.


Changes the appearance of the colors in the color grid below the color wheel.


Changes the number of colors displayed in the color grid below the color wheel.


Fixed Palettes


Displays the PANTONE® Spot Colors palette. Since spot colors correspond to solid inks and are not CMYK-based, each unique color applied to an object results in an additional color separation plate.


Displays the PANTONE® Hexachrome colors which are based on the CMYK color model but adds two additional inks for a total of six inks and a broader range of colors.


Displays the palette that uses colors available through the PANTONE® Process Color system, which is based on the CMYK color model. The first 2,000 colors are two-color combinations; the remainder are three-color and four-color combinations. Colors are based on CMYK, and therefore do not add additional color separation plates.


Displays an independent palette (not based on a color-matching system or your image) which provides 256 colors uniformly spread between red, green, and blue.


Displays the color palette which originates from the FOLCOLTONE color matching system that provides a range of spot colors built with the process colors, cyan, magenta, yellow, and black (CMYK).


Displays the palette that uses the TRUMATCH® color matching system which is based on the CMYK color model and, therefore, colors do not add additional color separation plates. Colors are organized by hue (red to violet), saturation (deep to pastel), and brightness (adding or removing black). Colors can be displayed by name or swatch using the Show Color Names command found in the flyout menu .


Displays the 8-bit palette of 256 colors used by the web browser, Netscape Navigator(TM). By only using colors found on this palette, you ensure that your image colors will display clearly on systems using this browser.


Displays the 8-bit palette of 256 colors used by the web browser, Microsoft® Internet Explorer. By using only colors on this palette, you ensure that your image colors will display clearly on systems using this browser.


Offers colors that are available through the DuPont® Spectramaster solid color library. This library was developed to provide a paint color selection and matching tool for industrial coatings and colorants. Colors are based on Lab and are converted to RGB for display and CMYK for printing.


Displays the palette of colors that are available through the TOYO COLOR FINDER system. The range of colors offered here includes those created using TOYO process inks and those that are reproduced using TOYO standard inks.


Displays the palette of colors that are available through the DIC Color Guide, DIC Color Guide Part II, and DIC Traditional Colors of Japan. Colors in these palettes are created by mixing DIC brand inks.


Displays a color palette that is based on the Lab color model. Colors defined using this model have three components: lightness (L*), green to red chromaticity (a*), and blue to yellow chromaticity (b*).


Custom palettes


Displays the contents of the current color palette. You can display or hide the names of the colors by clicking the options button.


Displays the current user-defined inks. User defined inks are spot colors.


Specifies a tint for the currently selected spot color. A tint lets you make a spot color lighter.


Connection dialog


Specifies the serial port to which the color measurement device is connected.


Open the Calibrate dialog box.


Color Roll-up


Lets you select a color from the current image.


Applies the current color as the outline.


Applies the current color as the fill.


Click the color model list box to choose from color models and other color selection methods such as Palette and Color Blender.


Palette Editor


Controls


Opens an existing color palette.


Creates a new color palette.


Saves the current color palette.


Saves the current color palette with a name that you specify.


Shows a list of the currently loaded color palettes. Select the palette you want to edit.


Shows the colors in the current custom palette. Use the scroll bar on the right to display the colors of the palette that are not visible. Select colors from this grid to modify them.


Replaces the selected color on the right with the selected color on the left.


Add the selected color or colors on the left to the current palette. Select a color from the current palette to position the new color or colors before that color.


Removes the selected color or colors from the current color palette.


Searches the current color palette for the color that is closest to the selected color on the left.


Lets you sort the colors in the current color palette.


Returns the color palette to its state when you last saved it.


Shows the name and color values of the currently selected color.


Open the Duotone dialog box.


Color Management


Color corrects the colors on the monitor based on the monitor's color profile.


Color corrects the colors on the monitor so that they accurately reflect printer output.


Selects the printer type to use to simulate color on your monitor.


Highlights colors that can't be printed using the selected warning color.


Specifies the warning color for colors that can't be printed.


Specifies the transparency of the selected warning color. Making the warning color transparent lets you view the image even when the colors are outside of the printer's color gamut.


General


Produces a separate printing plate for each FOCOLTONE color. When you print your work each FOCOLTONE color will require a separate ink.


Produces a separate printing plate for each TOYO color. When you print your work each TOYO color will require a separate ink.


Produces a separate printing plate for each DIC color. When you print your work each DIC color will require a separate ink.


Determines whether CMYK values range from 0 to 100 (percentages) or 0 to 255. When displaying values as percentages, 100 is equivalent to 255.


Handles spot colors as CMYK colors when printing to a composite printer.


Simulates the output of a separations printer on a composite printer. This is useful for proofing your work.


Automatic color matching uses the most appropriate gamut mapping method for each object.

The Illustration method shifts only those colors which are outside of the printer's gamut. This ensures that colors within the printer's gamut will retain the color characteristics you defined. This method is suited to vector illustrations.

Photographic gamut mapping shifts all colors in the image toward the color space of the active printer. This maintains the relationships between colors, resulting in smooth transitions. For this reason, this method is suited to bitmap photographic images.


Profiles


Lists all preset monitor profiles.


Lists all preset scanner profiles.


Lists all preset composite printer profiles.


Lists all preset separations printer profiles.


Lists the manufacturers of the device for which you need a color profile.


Lists the model of the device for which you need a color profile.


Opens the Corel Color Profile wizard.


PostScript Options


Specifies the shape of the dots in the halftone screen.


Specifies the screen frequency of the halftone screen.


Specifies the screen angle of the halftone screen.


Using PostScript options with spot colors

Commercial printing presses are unable to produce true shading but can create the illusion of shading by printing images made up of tiny dots. The size of the dots determines the different levels of shading (i.e., the bigger the dots, the darker the shade). A halftone screen is necessary to convert images with true shading into images made up of tiny dots.

Originally, a halftone screen was an opaque screen with thousands of tiny holes. An image with shading was photographed through this screen using special photographic paper or film. The resulting image would consist entirely of dots. This image could then be used to create printing plates.

Now, however, you can create halftone images without using screens or cameras. To ensure that your bitmaps print correctly, you must correctly set the halftone screen frequency and bitmap resolution. You can set halftone screen settings for individual spot colors.

Halftone screen frequency

The halftone screen frequency determines the number of dots used to create the image. The screen frequency is measured in lines per inch (lpi). This measurement refers to the number of rows of dots per inch.

When you choose a screen frequency, remember that the higher the screen frequency, the sharper the image. However, there are limits to screen frequency which are determined by the type of printing press on which you are printing, and the type of paper you are using. In general, a screen frequency of 85 lpi works on newsprint, and a frequency of 100 lpi works on bond and glossy paper. If possible, consult your service bureau or printing shop to find out the screen frequency you should use.

Screen angle

Because each halftone screen consists of a regular pattern of shapes, it creates a pattern on the printed image. When the separations are combined, the patterns created by each separate halftone screen interact. This interaction can create an undesirable effect, called a moiré pattern.

Moiré patterns are eliminated by changing the screen angle of each color separation. If you were using an actual screen and a camera, you would rotate the screen 15 degrees for each separation by hand. However, since you are using software to create halftone screens, you have to change certain print options to change the screen angle.

When you print color separations, the screen angles are set automatically. If you change these settings incorrectly, your image might not print properly.

Halftone type

The halftone type refers to the type of dot that is being used to create the halftone. Typically, a halftone screen consists of rows of evenly spaced round, or diamond-shaped dots. However, it is possible to use halftone screens that have dots that are shaped differently. In fact, halftone screens can even use straight lines instead of dots to create an image. You can experiment with different halftone types to create interesting effects.


Palettes Docker window


The Palettes Docker window lets you browse the palettes on your computer and load them into the on-screen Color Palette.


Displays a list of the palettes stored on your computer.


Opens the Open Palette dialog box, which lets you browse your computer for palettes and open them.


X-Rite


Closes the dialog box.


Begins the calibration process.


Shows the progress of the calibration process.


Hold the color measurement device over the target on the reflection standard. When the device has finished taking a reading, this number should match the X value.


Hold the color measurement device over the target on the reflection standard. When the device has finished taking a reading, this number should match the Y value.


Hold the color measurement device over the target on the reflection standard. When the device has finished taking a reading, this number should match the Z value.


Opens the Corel Approved Partners Help file which contains information about the Corel Approved Service Bureau program and the Corel Training Partners program.


Rulers display the dimensions of the Publication Window, which is helpful for sizing and positioning objects. You can also use the rulers to change paragraph indents, adjust page margins, change the width of columns, and set tab stops using the mouse.

Clicking a ruler and dragging brings a guideline onto the screen. Clicking the point where the rulers meet and dragging toward the center of the screen brings out a set of crosshairs.

Clicking on View, Rulers turns the display of the rulers on and off.


Rulers display the dimensions of the Publication Window, which is helpful for sizing and positioning objects. You can also use the rulers to change paragraph indents, adjust page margins, change the width of columns, and set tab stops using the mouse.

Clicking a ruler and dragging brings a guideline onto the screen. Clicking the point where the rulers meet and dragging toward the center of the screen brings out a set of crosshairs.

Clicking View, Rulers turns the display of the rulers on and off.


Creates a new publication based on the default stylesheet and page tag or on a built-in template.


Access external devices and control input devices, such as scanners or video capture boards, without leaving Corel VENTURA. The dialog box that opens depends on the manufacturer of your scanner.


Selects a TWAIN image input source such as Corel Image Source or HP Deskscan II. The list of available sources depends on the scanner driver(s) installed on your computer.


Searches for an existing chapter and adds it to your active publication.


Adds a new chapter to your publication.


Stores the current version of a publication. A publication must be saved before it is archived.


Converts the active publication to an Adobe Acrobat portable electronic publication, which creates an Adobe Acrobat file, complete with text, graphics, and photos, that anyone with the appropriate viewing software can read.


Converts the active publication to an Envoy portable electronic publication. Corel VENTURA built-in support for Envoy creates an Envoy electronic publication, complete with text, graphics, and photos, that anyone with the appropriate viewing software can read.


Publishes your publication to HTML (Hypertext Markup Language). You can have your publication converted automatically, or you can customize the conversion as required.


Publishes Web publications in the Java Programming Language. When you publish your publication using Corel Barista, a Web page (HTM file), is created with the filename and location that you specify.


Exports selected text files in industry-standard ASCII, ANSI, and RTF formats. When you export a text file, you can retain or discard the formatting codes and other information Corel VENTURA inserts in the text.


Imports pictures, illustrations, photographs, and charts created with paint, draw, charting, and scanning programs.


Imports stylesheets [image] including all of the tags [image] from other publications.


Opens publications saved in various text file formats, such as word processing or desktop publishing file formats.


Creates a publication using another publication as a template.


Opens the Publication Properties dialog box, which gives you quick access to options such as setting up multiuser access for your publications, choosing a publication layout format, and adjusting picture resolution.


Exports pictures that you have created or modified in Corel VENTURA.


Retrieves a an archived publication from the list of archived files.


Retrieves any publication from the list of archived files. It opens a copy of the old version of a publication, which can then be saved on your computer and used like any other file.


Saves all open publications.


Saves the current page as an Encapsulated PostScript picture, which you can then place in a publication using the File, Import Picture command.


Reduces printing time by printing the publication without complex fills. It also substitutes EPS pictures with image headers or bitmaps. If an EPS picture lacks a header, a gray rectangle prints instead of the picture.


Updates the tables of contents and index, along with autonumbering and cross-references, in the active publication.


Creates a Cascading Style Sheet.


Returns you to the last saved version of your publication. Use this option if you don't want to save the changes you've made since you last saved your publication.


Launches CorelSCAN, which is an application that guides you through the process of creating quality scanned images.


Provides information such as the name and location of the file, the file size, and the number of pages contained in the publication.


Removes the selected item.


Duplicates the selected item. Use the Tools, Options command (Selection page) to set the amount by which the duplicate is offset from the original.


Edits items, such as cross-reference and index markers, inserted using the Insert Item command (Insert menu). The command becomes available when you place the insertion point immediately before or after the item.


Makes text follow a curve, an angled line, or, the edge of a graphic object.


Groups all selected frames of graphic objects together so they can be selected and manipulated as a single object.


Pastes, embeds, or links the contents of the Clipboard. Embedding an object allows you to edit it in the originating application, without leaving Corel VENTURA. Linking updates the object whenever changes are made to it in the originating application.


Restores what the Undo command reversed.


Searches for, and optionally replaces specified items in the active publication.


Reverses the last action. Immediately after you undo an action, the Undo command changes to Redo, allowing you to restore what you reversed.


Breaks up the selected group into its individual objects. If you have more than one sublevel of grouping, the Ungroup command breaks up one level of grouping at a time.


Disables the editing of page tag objects, such as frames and graphic objects.


Launches the Internet browser and loads the item, such as a URL, that you defined in the Hyperlink. A browser must be installed on your computer for this option to work. Use it to verify if the Hyperlink you created is correct prior to publishing to HTML.


Allows you to make changes to the selected Hyperlink.


Opens an image and simultaneously applies color correction to it. The color correction method is based on the scanner you selected while setting up device profiles in the Corel Color Profile Wizard.


Inserts a footnote reference at the insertion point. The reference appears when the Footnotes command in the View menu is enabled.


Inserts an equation at the insertion point.


Inserts the current chapter number at the insertion point.


Inserts the date, time, or both at the insertion point.


Inserts an endnote reference at the insertion point.


Inserts a cross-reference marker at the insertion point. The marker marks the location that the cross-reference points to. To insert the cross-reference use the Insert > Cross-reference command (Insert menu).


Inserts the current page number at the insertion point. Use the Chapter command (Format menu) to set the numbering style and starting number.


Inserts a variable marker at the insertion point. Variables enable you to mark locations in the publication that contain text that you know will change, such as dates, publication version numbers, and names of customers or products. Use the Publication command (Format menu) to specify the text you want to insert at the variable marker locations.


Opens a dialog box that allows you to insert a number or cross-reference based on either the location of the insertion point or the location of a marker.


Allows you to add comments to your file that are not to be displayed or printed.


Inserts a Hyperlink, such as a URL or email address, at the insertion point.


Inserts a counter in the caption frame containing the insertion point. Use counters to number pictures or other items in drawn frames.


Inserts a counter in the caption frame containing the insertion point. Use counters to number tables or other items in drawn frames.


Holding down the mouse button on this tool opens the Insert Tools flyout.


Deletes pages inserted using the Insert Pages command (Page menu). Named text and pictures on inserted pages remain in the Files list. Frames, graphic objects, and unnamed text are deleted with the page.


Adds one or more pages to the active publication. By default, autonumbering and footnote numbers start over on the inserted pages, rather than continuing from the previous pages.


Switches the order in which layered objects appear. In other words, it sends the front object to the back and sends the back object to the front. This command becomes available when you select two or more frames or graphic objects.


Brings the selected frame or graphic object back by one.


Brings the selected frame or graphic object forward by one, in front of other objects.


Places the selected object beneath all objects on its layer. This command is available only when you have one or more objects selected.


Places the selected object on top of all objects on its layer. This command is available only when you have one or more objects selected.


Holding down the mouse button on this tool opens the Order flyout, which allows you to change the order in which layered objects appear in your publication.


Adds page numbering to your publication.


Opens the Figure numbering dialog box, which allows figure numbering options, such as inserting a figure number and number style.


Opens the Table Numbering dialog box, which allows table numbering options, such as inserting a table number and number style.


If you have a frame selected, this option will bring you to the next frame in the active publication.


If you have a frame selected, this option will bring you back to the previous frame in the active publication.


Alternately enables and disables the selection of a frame.


Adjusts your on-screen colors so that they are displayed as accurately as possible.


Shows or hides column guides in all open publications.


Show or hides footnotes and endnotes in your publication.


Moves through the publication by displaying the next, previous, first, last, or a specific page. You can also jump to the page where text from a particular file starts, and then jump to the other pages that contain text from that file. Use this feature to quickly locate text in publications, such as magazines, in which text flows in frames on different pages.


Shows or hides grids in all open publications.


Shows or hides guidelines in all open publications.


Displays or hides all imported pictures in the publication. When you hide pictures, Corel VENTURA displays an X inside the frames containing them, which speeds up the screen redraw process.


Displays or hides the picture in the selected frame. When you hide a picture, Corel VENTURA displays an X inside its frame, which makes the screen redraw more quickly.


Switches the active publication to Page Layout view, which displays the publication the way it looks when it is printed.


Switches the active publication to Page Tag view, allowing you to make formatting changes to the page tag.


Displays or hides the footer on the current page only.


Displays or hides the header on the current page only.


Updates the Publication Window to reflect changes you recently made to your publication.

You can also use this command to allow the screen to finish redrawing following a display interrupt. A display interrupt stops the screen during a redraw whenever the mouse button or a key is pressed. If you are working on a page with illustrations, interruptible refresh can save time by allowing you to select tools and commands without waiting for the screen to redraw completely. You can turn Interruptible Refresh on and off using the Options dialog box (Tools menu).


Displays or hides the rulers, which you can use to set tabs, margins, and columns.


Switches the active publication to Copy Editor view, which speeds up the text editing process by displaying text without formatting, pictures, or frames.


Opens the Options dialog box, which allows you to display or hide toolbars, create toolbars, reset toolbars to their original settings, add or remove toolbar buttons, and change toolbar button sizes.


Controls how large or small a publication appears on the screen. You can enlarge the display to make the publication easier to read, or reduce the display to view an entire page or several pages at once.


Hides column guides, frame borders, guidelines, grids, and items the ¶ button shows or hides. Use the Frame Borders command (View manu), the ¶ button, and the Options command (Tools menu) to redisplay the items.


Displays or hides the footer on the current page.


Displays or hides the header on the current page.


Displays or hides the Status Bar.


Displays or hides the Property Bar.


Displays or hides the Standard toolbar.


Displays or hides the Workspace toolbar.


Displays the available toolbars. Enable the check box next to a toolbar to display it. Click the toolbar's name tag to rename it.


Displays or hides the Recording And Script toolbar.


Displays or hides the Spell Checker toolbar.


Displays or hides the Table Functions toolbar.


Displays or hides the Text toolbar.


Displays or hides the Find And Replace toolbar.


Aligns frames with columns.


Aligns frames with the text baseline.


Aligns frames vertically and horizontally with the nearest grid marker.


Displays or hides the borders around frames. Since borders don't print, hiding them gives you a better idea of how pages will look when printed.


Aligns frames with nearby guidelines. The horizontal edges will align with the horizontal guidelines and the vertical edges will align with the vertical guidelines.


Aligns frames with snap points on stationary objects. These snap points are located at each of object's nodes and are displayed as blue squares when alignment occurs.


Embeds an object, such as a picture, in your publication.


Lists the paragraph tags in the active publication. Clicking a tag name applies the tag's formatting to the paragraph that contains the insertion point.

When you override formatting in a tag, Corel VENTURA places a symbol next to the tag name.


Applies page tags to a current page or to pages that currently use page tags.


Allows you to make modifications to Artistic Text. You must select a frame containing Artistic Text before using this command.


Converts bitmaps to a 16-color, or 4-bit, bitmap. It uses a fixed palette of the 16 VGA colors to reproduce all the colors in an image.


Applies the Paletted color mode to a bitmap. This is an 8-bit color mode that stores and displays bitmaps using up to 256 colors.


Converts a bitmap to the 1-bit Black-and-White color mode. Use this color mode to create line art and simple objects.


Converts a bitmap to use the CMYK color mode to print using cyan (C), magenta (M), yellow (Y), and black (K) [image] the process colors that are used to print color separations.


Enhances a grayscale bitmap with one to four additional colors.


Converts a bitmap to the 8-bit Grayscale color mode. Each pixel in a grayscale bitmap has a brightness value ranging from 0 (black) to 255 (white). It uses 256 shades of gray to display an image.


Converts a bitmap to an RGB bitmap. RGB bitmaps have three 8-bit channels. Each channel is assigned one of the primary colors: red, green, or blue.


Automatically adjusts a skewed or imperfectly positioned bitmap and positions it squarely on the page.


Flips a bitmap horizontally to obtain a mirror image of it.


Opens the Resample dialog box, which changes the resolution or size of a bitmap and alters the number of pixels it contains.


Opens the Chapter Properties dialog box, which allows you to format the layout, counters, typography, and footnotes in a chapter.


Changes the formatting properties defined in the selected character tag. Also specifies the text Corel VENTURA inserts before and after characters are formatted with a specific tag.


Converts the selected frame or graphic object to a series of curves and lines that you can edit with the Node Edit tool.


Adjusts the spacing of all letters (tracking) or selected letters pairs (kerning) for the font available on your computer. You can also use this command to import tracking information from other publications and import and export kerning pair sets.


Opens the Frame Properties dialog box, which allows you format the placement, margins, columns, contents, typography, and rules of the selected frame.


Opens the Page Tag Properties dialog box, which allows you to format the layout, margins, columns, contents, typography, and rules of the selected page tag.


Opens the Paragraph Properties dialog box, which allows you to format the font, alignment, spacing, tabs, effects, breaks, typography, and rules of the selected paragraph.


Updates the numbering of automatically numbered paragraphs. Use this command after adding, deleting, or moving auto numbered paragraphs.


Opens the Text Properties dialog box, which allows you to format the selected text.


Opens the Table Properties dialog box, which allows you to format your table, such as add or delete rows or change the skew.


Creates a table of contents and an index for the current publication.


Displays all of the tags used in the active publication. This tool is used to manage the tags. Depending on the item you select, the Tag Window displays all of the tags used for that item.


Removes formatting applied using the Paragraph Overrides command (Format menu) or adds it to a paragraph tag.


Opens the Paragraph Conditions dialog box. Depending of the conditions you set, you can choose to display or hide a paragraph.


Formats the selected paragraph only, leaving the formatting defined in the paragraph's tag unchanged.


Changes the appearance of the selected paragraph and its tag.


Opens the Page Properties dialog box, which gives you quick access to options for setting page layout, margins, columns, contents, typography, and rules.


Provides you with chapter information, such as typography, footnotes, endnotes, and auto numbering and allows you to modify these and other chapter settings.


Opens the Frame Tag Properties dialog box, which allows you to format the placement, margins, columns, contents, typography, and rules for the selected frame tag.


Allows you to fuse multiple objects, such as curves, lines, or graphic objects, to create a new shape.


Provides you with page information, such as layout, margins, columns, contents, typography, and rules and allows you to change these and other page settings.


Automatically fills the selected cells in a column from top to bottom with a series of data by incrementing the value in the selected cell. You can use this command, to automatically fill cells with the days of the week or months of the year.


Automatically fills the selected cells of a row from right to left with a series of data by incrementing the value in the first selected cell. You can use this command, for example, to automatically fill cells with the days of the week or months of the year.


Automatically fills the selected cells of a row from left to right with a series of data by incrementing the value in the first selected cell. You can use this command to automatically fill cells with the days of the week or months of the year.


Automatically fills the selected cells in a column from bottom to top, with a series of data by incrementing the value in the selected cell. You can use this command, for example, to automatically fill cells with the days of the week or months of the year.


Allows you to choose options such as the direction of your table fill and fill type.


Opens the Cell Properties dialog box, which allows you to format the cell borders in a table.


Allows you to select preset shading and borders for a table.


Deletes a selected column.


 Deletes a selected row.


Deletes a selected table.


Inserts a column to the left or to the right of the cell that contains the insertion point.


Inserts a row above or below the cell that contains the insertion point.


Updates the result of a calculation performed by inserting a mathematical formula in a table cell.


Selects the column that contains the insertion point.


Selects the row that contains the insertion point.


Selects the table that contains the insertion point.


Provides you with a sum of the values in the cells above or to the left of the cell containing the insertion point.


Type an equal sign (=) followed by the function name in the insert formula box to apply a function to a range of cells.


Inserts a table at the insertion point. Click the button, and then drag until Corel VENTURA displays the number of rows and columns you want in your table.


Opens the Corel VENTURA Function wizard, which inserts a built-in function into your current table.


Inserts a table at the insertion point. Click the button, drag until the number of rows and columns that you want is displayed.


Combines the selected cells to create one cell. The contents of the upper-left cell in the selection remain in the resulting larger cell.


Selects the cell that contains the insertion point.


Sorts information in the selected row or column alphabetically, numerically, or by date.


Sort the contents of a column, row, or table from the first letter of the alphabet, the lowest number, or the earliest date.


Sort the contents of a column, row, or table from the last letter of the alphabet, the highest number, or the latest date.


Divides cells combined using the Merge Cells command into individual cells.


Aligns frames with graphic objects.


Gives you fast access to other applications included with Corel VENTURA that you have installed.


Inserts symbols, such as ANSI codes, and special characters in your publication.


Opens the Corel Color Profile Wizard, which tunes existing color profiles.


Lets you select a color profile. Accurate color profiles are necessary to reproduce colors accurately in your final output.


Customizes toolbars, menu commands, and shortcut key assignments.


Launches Corel DataBase Publisher and starts a new recipe.


Launches the Corel DataBase Publisher wizard.


Prompts you to choose the recipe to be updated. Corel DataBase Publisher will then run the selected recipe and update the output file.


Prompts you to choose the recipe file to be edited. Corel DataBase Publisher is then launched and the selected recipe is loaded.


Runs Corel add-ons, which are programs written in a standard computing language that add custom features to Corel VENTURA.


Displays a window with a list of chapters, style sheets, text files, and other items in the active publication.


Allows you to make changes to the way grids and guidelines appear in your publication.


Enable to display both the automatic and discretionary hyphenation points for a selected word.


Marks words as index entries.


Creates a new VENTURA Library file. These files can contain items such as text, pictures, tags, and even entire chapters. You can move items from pages to an open VENTURA Library file, from a VENTURA Library file to pages, and between open VENTURA libraries.


Opens a VENTURA Library file. These files can contain items such as text, pictures, tags and even entire chapters. You can move items from pages to an open VENTURA Library file, from a VENTURA Library file to pages, and between open VENTURA libraries.


Displays a window with a list of chapters, style sheets, text files, and other items in the active publication. You can use the VENTURA Navigator to create, rename, and delete chapters, stylesheets, and master pages. You can also use the VENTURA Navigator to move through the publication using the table of contents, index, or cross-references.


Opens the Options dialog box, which allows you to customize your current workspace.


Customizes the rulers displayed in the active Publication Window. Use this command to change the size of the rulers, the unit of measure they use, the location of the zero points, and the default alignment for new tabs added using the horizontal ruler.


Checks the spelling of all or part of the publication's text and finds possible grammatical or stylistic errors.


Replaces a word in the publication with a synonym (a word with the same or similar meaning).


Corrects capitalization errors and replaces straight quotes with typographic quotes as you type. You can also use Type Assist to automatically correct words you frequently misspell or words that you want to replace when you type an abbreviation of the word.


Resets the unit of measure found in all the dialog boxes to the unit of measure that you specify.


Starts the Prepare For Service Bureau wizard, which guides you through the steps involved in preparing and gathering files for professional output at a service bureau.


Allows you to choose colors from various color palettes. You can also create and customize a palette for your conversion, and you can save it as a custom palette file (.CPL) for use with other applications.


Lets you edit a script using Corel SCRIPT Editor.


Lets you create or modify any Corel VENTURA script.


Saves a copy of the selected internal script as an external script.


Replays a Corel VENTURA script in a publication.


Starts recording your Corel VENTURA keystroke, mouse, toolbar, and menu actions.


Opens the Scripts dialog box, which allows you to execute a Corel VENTURA script.


Saves a Corel VENTURA script for later use in the same publication or in other publications.


Interrupts the recording of a Corel VENTURA script.


Switches to the corresponding VENTURA Navigator window. Use the Navigator (Tools menu) to open a VENTURA Navigator.


Closes all open publications for you simultaneously. It will prompt you to save the publications that have unsaved changes.


Allows you to switch between VENTURA Library windows.


Switches to the corresponding VENTURA Library file.


Provides information about the product support for Corel applications.


Opens the Corel VENTURA online tutorial.


Creates a new paragraph tag for the selected paragraph. You can copy properties from an existing paragraph tag or select new tag properties.


Removes a paragraph tag from your publication.


Opens the Paragraph Tag Properties dialog box, which allows you to change properties, such as font, alignment, or typography, of a selected paragraph tag.


Allows you to change the name of an existing Paragraph Tag.


Allows you to create a frame tag for the selected frame. You can copy properties from an existing frame tag or select new tag properties.


Remove a selected frame tag from your publication.


Opens the Frame Tag Properties dialog box, which allows you to change properties, such as placement, margins, or typography, of a selected frame tag.


Allows you to change the name of a frame tag.


Creates a character tag. You can copy properties form another tag or create new tag properties.


Removes a selected character tag from your publication.


Opens the Character Tag Properties dialog box, which allows you to change properties, such as font or color, of a selected character tag.


Allows you to change the name of a character tag.


Allows you to create a rule tag by assigning new tag properties or coping properties from an existing rule tag.


Removes a selected rule tag from your publication.


Opens the Rule Tag Properties dialog box, which allows you to change the properties of a selected rule tag.


Changes the name of a rule tag.


Allows you to create a page tag by assigning new tag properties or coping properties from an existing page tag.


Removes a selected page tag from your publication.


Opens the Page Tag Properties dialog box, which allows you to change properties, such as layout, typography, or margins, of a selected page tag.


Allows you to change the name of a page tag.


Restores the borders applied to the selected table or cell when the table was first created.


Changes the borders of all four sides of the selected table or cell to a double line. To apply different rules to each side, use the Cell Borders command (Table menu).


Hides the borders on all four sides of the selected table or cell. To apply different rules to each side, use the Cell Borders command (Table menu).


Changes the borders of all four sides of the selected table or cell to a single line. To apply different rules to each side, use the Cell Borders command (Table menu).


Changes the borders of all four sides of the selected table or cell to a thick line. To apply different rules to each side, use the Cell Borders command (Table menu).


Deletes a picture from a page tag.


Deletes a picture from a page.


Deletes a picture file from a frame.


Deletes a text file from a page.


Deletes a text file from a frame.


Creates a frame around a picture in the size the picture was originally created at.


Deletes the selected OLE object from your publication.


Selects all frames containing the same text file.


Allows you to extend a single frame across two pages by dragging, resizing, skewing, or rotating the frame across the pages. You must be in Facing Pages view to perform this function.


Appears when you apply formatting to the text that makes the text unable to fit in the frame, table, or page, or to flow to a new frame, table, or page.


Provides you with picture file information, such as the name, location, and size of the file. It also allows you to make changes to the screen display and view other details.


Provides you with file information, such as the chapter number of the publication or whether the file is embedded.


Draws a preset path in the shape of an ellipse around a selected picture. The shape masks out portions of the picture outside the boundaries of the shape. Text on the page flows around the shape rather than the rectangular frame containing the picture.


Draws a preset path in the shape of a diamond around a selected picture. The shape masks out portions of the picture outside the boundaries of the shape. Text on the page flows around the shape rather than the rectangular frame containing the picture.


Draws a preset path in the shape of a heart around a selected picture. The shape masks out portions of the picture outside the boundaries of the shape. Text on the page flows around the shape rather than the rectangular frame containing the picture.


Draws a preset path in the shape of an octagon around a selected picture. The shape masks out portions of the picture outside the boundaries of the shape. Text on the page flows around the shape rather than the rectangular frame containing the picture.


Draws a preset path in the shape of an inverted rectangle around a selected picture. The shape masks out portions of the picture outside the boundaries of the shape. Text on the page flows around the shape rather than the rectangular frame containing the picture.


Draws a preset path in the shape of a rectangle around a selected picture. The shape masks out portions of the picture outside the boundaries of the shape. Text on the page flows around the shape rather than the rectangular frame containing the picture.


Draws a preset path in the shape of a rounded rectangle around a selected picture. The shape masks out portions of the picture outside the boundaries of the shape. Text on the page flows around the shape rather than the rectangular frame containing the picture.


Draws a preset path in the shape of a trapezoid around a selected picture. The shape masks out portions of the picture outside the boundaries of the shape. Text on the page flows around the shape rather than the rectangular frame containing the picture.


Draws a preset path in the shape of a right trapezoid around a selected picture. The shape masks out portions of the picture outside the boundaries of the shape. Text on the page flows around the shape rather than the rectangular frame containing the picture.


Draws a preset path in the shape of a tear drop around a selected picture. The shape masks out portions of the picture outside the boundaries of the shape. Text on the page flows around the shape rather than the rectangular frame containing the picture.


Draws a preset path in the shape of a star around a selected picture. The shape masks out portions of the picture outside the boundaries of the shape. Text on the page flows around the shape rather than the rectangular frame containing the picture.


Draws a preset path in the shape of a bubble around a selected picture. The shape masks out portions of the picture outside the boundaries of the shape. Text on the page flows around the shape rather than the rectangular frame containing the picture.


Draws a preset path around a selected picture. The shape masks out portions of the picture outside the boundaries of the shape. Text on the page flows around the shape rather than the rectangular frame containing the picture.


Imports a text file and places it at the insertion point.


Converts a vector picture to a graphic object.


Converts a vector graphic to a frame.


Draws a path around the perimeter of an imported picture allowing text to flow around the shape of the picture.


Converts graphic objects to pictures in vector format.


Updates a paragraph tag.


Updates a page tag.


Updates a frame tag.


Holding down the mouse button on this tool opens the Fill Tools flyout.


Opens a dialog box that contains two-color bitmap patterns you can use to fill the selected object.


Applies a white fill to selected objects.


Applies 10% black fill to selected objects.


Applies a solid black fill to selected objects.


Applies a 30% black fill to selected objects.


Applies a 50% black fill to selected objects.


Applies a 70% black fill to selected objects.


Opens the Fill dialog box, which allows you to create and apply a fill color.


Opens the Fountain Fill dialog box, which allows you to create and apply fountain fills such as linear, radial, conical, or square path.


Opens the Pattern dialog box, which allows you to apply bitmap pattern fills to selected objects.


Removes the fill from the selected object, leaving it transparent.


Opens the PostScript Texture Fill dialog box, which allows you to fill selected objects with a pattern fill designed using the PostScript language.


Opens the Texture Fill dialog box, which allows you to apply texture fills to selected objects.


Opens the Pattern Fill dialog box, which allows you to apply full-color bitmap fills to selected objects.


Opens the Pattern Fill dialog box, which allows you to apply pattern fills to selected objects.


Holding down the mouse button on this tool opens the Outline Tools flyout.


Opens the Outline Pen dialog box, which allows you to set and apply outline pen attributes, such as color, width, style, nib shape, and corners.


Opens the Outline Color dialog box, which allows you to create and apply a custom outline color.


Applies a white outline to the selected object. Click this tool with no object selected to make white the default outline color for any new graphic objects you create.


Applies 30% black outline to selected objects.


Applies 50% black outline to selected objects.


Applies a solid black outline to selected objects.


Removes the outline from the selected object.


Sets the outline thickness to 0.2 points for the selected object.

Click this tool with no objects selected to make the default line thickness 0.2 points.


Sets the outline thickness to 2 points for the selected object.

Click this tool with no objects selected to make the default line thickness 2 points.


Sets the outline thickness to 16 points for the selected object.

Click this tool with no objects selected to make the default outline thickness 16 points.


Sets the outline thickness to 24 points for the selected object.

Click this tool with no objects selected to make the default outline thickness 24 points.


Sets the outline thickness to 8 points for the selected object.

Click this tool with no objects selected to make the default line thickness 8 points.


Sets the outline thickness to 0.5 points for the selected object.

Click this tool with no objects selected to make the default line thickness 0.5 points.


Anchors a selected frame to a location in the text so that the frame moves with the text.


Draws straight lines and curves as though you were using a pencil on paper.


Draws curves using a connect-the-dots style of drawing in which you specify the start and end points of the line or curve you want to draw.


Draws a rectangle.


Draws an ellipse.


Draws a rectangular shaped frame.


Draws an elliptical shaped frame.


Draws a rectangular frame with rounded corners.


Draws a star-shaped frame.


Draws a bubble-shaped frame.


Draws a diamond-shaped frame.


Draws a heart-shaped frame.


Draws an inverted rectangular frame.


Draws a preset frame.


Draws a trapezoid-shaped frame.


Selects multiple frames and objects created with the graphics tools. After clicking the tool, drag a box to enclose the items you want to select.


Draws an octagon-shaped frame.


Draws a right trapezoid-shaped frame.


Draws a teardrop-shaped frame.


Modifies the shape of lines and curves drawn with the graphics tools and non-rectangular frames drawn with the Frame tool.


Selects text, frames, tables, and objects. You can use the Pick tool to resize and rotate objects.


Draws a polygon.


Draws a star.


Applies special effects, such as shaping text to a path.


Points to or labels graphic objects. It consists of a two-segment line and frame that are grouped together.


Magnifies a portion of the screen for you. After clicking the icon, hold down the mouse button and drag a box around the area you want to magnify.


Holding down the mouse button on this tool opens the Zoom Tools flyout.


Selects paragraphs of text for formatting purposes.


Drag areas of your publication into view. Using the Hand Pan Tool is like moving a piece of paper on the top of a desk with your hand.


Lets you scroll through your publication quickly without using the arrow keys or the scroll bars.


Displays the publication at the size at which it will print.


Displays the entire page.


Makes the page fit within the top and bottom of the Publication Window.


Makes the page fit within the left and right edges of the Publication Window.


Shows more of a publication's page or pages. Click the Zoom tool on the area from which you want to expand the view.


Zooms in on all selected objects.


Displays adjacent pages in a double-sided publication side by side.


Displays your publication at 25% of its actual size.


Displays your publication at 35% of its actual size.


Displays your publication at 50% of its actual size.


Displays your publication at 66% of its actual size.


Displays your publication at 76% of its actual size.


Displays your publication in its actual size.


Displays your publication at 200% of its actual size.


Displays your publication at 500% of its actual size.


Displays your publication at 1000% of its actual size.


Displays your publication at 1250% of its actual size.


Places text in the first paragraph formatted to the specified primary or secondary paragraph tag that appears at the top of the page.


Places text from the first paragraph of the current page formatted with a specified tag to the header or footer frame.


Places text from the last paragraph of the current page formatted with a specified tag to the header or footer frame.


Inserts the time at the insertion point.


Formats the selected text as bold. Select bolded text and click the button to remove bold.


Formats the selected text with an underline. Select the underlined text and click the button to remove the underline.


Formats the selected text with a double underline. Select the double underlined text and click the button to remove the double underline.


Formats the selected text as italic. Select the italicized text and click the button to remove italics.


Formats the selected text with an overscore.


Formats the selected text with a strike-thru.


Formats the selected text as small caps.


Formats the selected text with an alternate font size.


Creates characters smaller than and positioned below the x-height of the other characters in a word or text string.


Creates characters smaller than and positioned above the x-height of the other characters in a word or text string.


Removes formatting applied using the Text command (Format menu), or the Text toolbar.


Capitalizes the first letter of every word in the selected text.


Changes the selected text to uppercase.


Changes the selected text to lowercase.


Increases the spacing between pairs of characters when they appear next to one another in a given font.


Decreases the spacing between pairs of characters when they appear next to one another in a given font.


Enlarges the point size of the selected text.


Reduces the point size of the selected text.


Centers the selected text between the left and right margins or indents.


Changes the alignment of the selected text to full alignment and aligns the last line of a paragraph at the left margin or left indent.


Aligns the selected paragraph to the left or right of a designated character (usually the decimal point).


Aligns the last line of a selected paragraph with both the left and right margins or indents.


Aligns the selected text with the left margin or the left indent.


Aligns the selected text with the right margin or the right indent.


Aligns the last line of a selected paragraph between the left and right margins or indents.


Aligns the last line of a selected paragraph with the right margin or right indent.


Increases the spacing between the lines of the selected text.


Decreases the spacing between the lines of the selected text.


Adds a node to the selected curve object.


Breaks apart the curve object into two or more subpaths at the selected node.


Converts the selected line segment to a curve segment.


Changes the selected node to a cusp node. Use this command when you want to add a sharp bend to a curve object.


Deletes node(s) from the selected curve object.


Connects end node(s) on segments that are part of the same path. Use this command to close an open path or make two different paths on the same curve object into a single continuous curve.


Converts the selected curve segment to a line segment.


Eliminates extra node(s) without significantly altering the shape of the selected curve object.


Converts the selected node to a smooth node. Use this command when you want a different curvature on each side of the node.


Converts the selected node to a symmetrical node. Use this command when you want the same curvature on both sides of the node.


Holding down the mouse button on this tool opens the Align Tools flyout.


Aligns objects in a frame with the bottom of the frame.


Aligns objects in a frame with the left side of the frame.


Aligns objects in a frame with the right side of the frame.


Aligns objects in a frame with the top of the frame.


Centers a frame between the right and left margins.


Centers a frame between the top and bottom margins.


Makes the selected frames or graphic objects the same width. The last object you select maintains its height.


Makes the selected frames or graphic objects the same width and height. The last object you select maintains its width and height.


Makes the selected frames or graphic objects the same width. The last object you select maintains its width.


Equalizes the horizontal spacing between three or more selected frames or graphic objects.


Equalizes the vertical spacing between three or more selected frames or graphic objects.


Aligns the objects from left to right within a frame. The objects also appear centered between the top and the bottom of the frame.


Stacks the objects from top to bottom within a frame. The objects also appear centered between the right and left sides of the frame.


Holding down the mouse button on this tool opens the Frame Alignment Tools flyout.


Opens the Frame Columns flyout, which allows you to apply preset columns to a frame to control text flow.


Applies a three-column format to the selected frame.


Applies a four-column format to the selected frame.


Applies a five-column format to the selected frame.


Applies a dashed line to a three-column frame.


Applies a dashed line to a four-column frame.


Applies a one-column format to the selected frame.


Applies a two-column format to the selected frame.


Applies an assigned paragraph tag to the selected paragraph.


Inserts an em dash at the insertion point. An em dash is the width of an uppercase M in the point size of the current font.


Inserts an en dash at the insertion point. An en dash is half the size of an em dash.


Allows you to manually insert a hyphen. Discretionary hyphens print only in words appearing at the end of a line.


Inserts a space that is the width of an upper case M in the point size of the current font.


Inserts a space that is half the width of an upper case M in the point size of the current font.


Inserts a special space used to keep words from being separated at the end of a line.


Inserts the Copyright character at the insertion point.


Inserts the Registered Trademark character at the insertion point.


Inserts the Trademark character at the insertion point.


Inserts the Ellipsis character at the insertion point.


Inserts the Single Opening Quote character at the insertion point.


Inserts the Single Closing Quote character at the insertion point.


Inserts the Double Opening Quote character at the insertion point.


Inserts the Double Closing Quote character at the insertion point.


Inserts the Figure Space character at the insertion point.


Inserts the Thin Space character at the insertion point.


Displays dots for spaces in Copy Editor View.


Shows or hides codes in Copy Editor View.


Inserts a manual page break at the insertion point.


Opens the Object Properties dialog box, which allows you to format object properties, such as the fill and outline, of your selected object.


Displays the first page of the next chapter in the active publication.


Displays the first page of the previous chapter in the active publication.


Shows or hides symbols used to represent tabs, ends of paragraphs, line breaks, special spaces, discretionary hyphens as well as the location of index entries, frame anchors, and other hidden items.


Lets you arrange two or more paragraphs evenly across a page.


Sets the selected object to overprint fill. This is a method of ensuring proper color registration when you print color separations.


Sets the selected object to overprint outline. This is a method of ensuring proper color registration when you print color separations.


Opens the Publication Properties dialog box, which allows you to modify the multiuser access rights of a publication. You can also modify other publication properties such as text defaults or conditions.


Closes the active publication.


Imports a chapter from another publication and adds it to the end of the active publication.


Adds a blank chapter to the end of the active publication.


Places an item on the Clipboard into your publication.


Changes the layout of the active publication and sets up conditions for publishing different versions of the publication and definitions for Corel VENTURA automatic text insertion features.


Saves the active publication with the same name and in the same location specified when the publication was first saved.


Saves the active publication with the name and in the location you specify.


Allows you to change the stylesheet used to format text in the active publication.


Opens the Check Out Status dialog box, which allows you to view which components of the publication are checked out and by which user.


Deletes a picture from a chapter.


Deletes a text file from a chapter.


Inserts a picture in your publication.


Inserts a text file in your publication.


Copies the selected item so that you can place it in another chapter, publication or VENTURA library.


Removes the selected item from the publication or the VENTURA Library.


Places a previously cut or copied item from the VENTURA Navigator window or VENTURA Library into the selected publication, chapter, or library.


Reorders the chapters in the selected publication by moving the chapter before the selected location.


Reorders the chapters in the selected publication by moving the chapter after the selected location.


Opens the Tag Window, which displays all of the existing tags for the item you selected.


Updates the table of contents and index along with auto numbering and cross-references in the active publication.


Allows you to change the name of the selected item.


Removes the selected item from the publication.


Opens the selected chapter or tables of contents.


Checks in the selected chapter if it is checked out. Checking in updates that chapter in the publications page tag.


Reverts you to the last checked-in version of the publication; you will lose all the current changes you made to the publication.


Checks out a multiuser publication, which gives you exclusive rights to edit that publication's stylesheet, publication properties, and chapter. While one user has an item checked out, all other users can view a read-only copy of that item, but cannot edit it.


Retrieves the latest checked-in version of the selected item in the multiuser publication. If you selected the publication, only the stylesheet will be updated. If you selected a chapter, only that chapter will be updated.


Checks in the selected chapter and all its stylesheets if they are checked out. Checking in updates that chapter and its stylesheets in the publication's page tag.


Reverts you to the last checked-in versions of your publications chapters and stylesheets. You will lose all the current changes you made to these items.


Checks out all chapters and stylesheets in a publication, which gives you exclusive rights to edit them. While one user has a chapter checked out, all other users can view a read-only copy of that chapter, but cannot edit it.


Retrieves the latest checked-in version of the selected item in the multiuser publication.


Displays the name of the VENTURA Library file, its location, and who has components of the file checked out.


Opens the Corel VENTURA Library file that is associated with the item you selected.


Sorts text and picture files alphabetically by name as identified by the filename extension.


Sorts text and picture files alphabetically by type as identified by the filename extension.


Updates the VENTURA Navigator window to reflect changes made in the publication that affect the tables of contents.


Allows you to select a folder that contains an external script.


Updates the internal and external script list.


Inserts an index entry at the insertion point.


Adds the selected index entry word to the index. A word must be selected in your publication to enable this function.


Updates the VENTURA Navigator window to reflect changes made to the publication that affect the index.


Copies a page tag from your publication and the Clipboard.


Removes a page tag from your publication and copies it to the Clipboard.


Creates a page tag in your publication.


Updates markers and cross-references in your publication.


Adds a picture to your publication by adding it to a selected page tag.


Opens the browse dialog box, which allows you to search for a file.


Creates a blank publication, based on the default stylesheet.


Opens an existing publication in a new Publication Window. You can quickly open one of the last publications you worked on by clicking its name at the bottom of the menu.


Opens an archived version of the active publication.


Displays the contents of the selected item, such as a table of contents or an index, for all open publications.


Hides the contents of the selected item, such as a table of contents or an index, for all open publications.


Stops the process of copying an item.


Copies the properties of a selected item to a publication in the VENTURA Navigator window.


Associates a VENTURA Library text file or stylesheet to a selected publication, which allows you to get updated versions of the text file or stylesheet from the VENTURA Library file.


Moves the selected item to a new location.


Displays information about the selected item and lets you attach a name and comment to it.


Controls who can access and make changes to a multiuser VENTURA Library file.


Checks in the VENTURA Library file.


Checks out a VENTURA Library file. You must check out a VENTURA Library file to be able to add items, edit items, or delete items from it.


Copies the selected item from the VENTURA Library file to the Clipboard.


Removes the selected item from the VENTURA Library file and copies it to the Clipboard.


Removes the selected item from the VENTURA Library file.


Allows you to control the display of items in the VENTURA Library window.


Searches the VENTURA Library file for an item with the name you specify.


Searches for the next item with the name specified using the Find command.


Copies the contents of the Clipboard to the VENTURA Library file.


View information about the VENTURA Library file, such as the number of items it contains and when it was created and last modified.


Saves the VENTURA Library with its current filename and location.


Switches the state of the VENTURA Library between single-user and multiuser.


Arranges items in the VENTURA Library window alphabetically, by type, by date, or by size.


Cancels a check out operation, reversing all changes.


Shows or hides the names appearing next to the icons.


Changes the size of the icons in the VENTURA Library window.


Gets the most recent version of a VENTURA Library file, even if the file is checked out.


Lets you view the check out status of the selected VENTURA Library file to see which user is accessing the file.


Enables you to view samples of the fonts. Simply place your cursor on a font and the preview will appear to the right of the font list.


Select this option to display True Type fonts in the Font List boxes.


Select this option to display Type 1 fonts in the Font List boxes.


Select this option to display device fonts in the Font List boxes. Device fonts are natively supported by your printer.


Select this option to display True Type symbols in the Font List boxes.


Select this option to display Type 1 symbols in the Font List boxes.


Select this option to display device symbols in the Font List boxes. Device symbols are natively supported by your printer.


Select this option if you want to use the Bitstream Font Navigator to temporarily install fonts that are used in the publication, but not installed on your computer. If Bitstream Font Navigator cannot find the font, PANOSE Font Matching will be used.


Opens the Font Options dialog box, which allows you to change the font settings of your publication.


Retrieves the most recent checked-in version of a selected item, even if the item is checked out.


Checks in the selected item if it is checked out. Checking in updates the item in the applicable publication tag.


Retrieves the selected item and gives you exclusive rights to work with that item.


Reverts you to the last checked-in version of the item; you will lose all the current changes you made to that item.


Displays a horizontal grid when you are viewing index entries.


Displays an outline around the selected index entry.


Displays a vertical grid when you are viewing index entries.


Click this button to search for or replace with a paragraph return.


Click this button to search for or replace with a tab.


Click this button to search for or replace with an Em Space.


Click this button to search for or replace with an en space.


Click this button to search for or replace with a non-breaking space.


Click this button to search for or replace with a thin space.


Click this button to search for or replace with a figure space.


Click this button to search for or replace with a line break.


Click this button to search for or replace with a discretionary hyphen.


Click this button to search for or replace with an open quote.


Click this button to search for or replace with a close quote.


Click this button to search for or replace with an open double quote.


Click this button to search for or replace with a close double quote.


Click this button to search for or replace with the Copyright special character.


Click this button to search for or replace with the Registered Trademark special character.


Click this button to search for or replace with the Trademark special character.


Click this button to search for or replace with an en dash.


Click this button to search for or replace with an em dash.


Select this option to replace with the contents of the clipboard.


Select this option to replace attributes without changing the text with which they appear.


Use the Any Text and Any Character options to replace attributes without changing the text with which they appear.


Use wildcards to find words with specific characters or to find character strings. A question mark (?) finds all words with individual characters between other text (for example, "b?t" finds "bat" and "bet"). An asterisk (*) finds text strings (for example, "b*d" finds "bad" and "battered").


Click this button to search for a box character.


Click this button to search for or replace with a number/cross-reference.


Click this button to search for an equation.


Click this button to search for or replace with a footnote.


Click this button to search for or replace with an endnote.


Click this button to search for a frame anchor.


Click this button to search for or replace with an index entry.


Click this button to search for or replace with a marker.


Click this button to search for paragraph properties.


Click this button to search for or replace with a date and time.


Click this button to search for or replace with a variable marker.


Click this button to search for or replace with a hyperlink.


Select to create a new tab stop. You can change the options for each tab stop by clicking a column in the tab list and selecting an option or by typing a value.


Select to remove every tab in the tab list.


Select to remove the tab selected in the tab list.


Displays a horizontal grid when viewing tab list.


Displays an outline around the selected tab when viewing the tab list.


Displays a vertical grid when viewing tab list.


Shows a list of characters you can use to fill the space between the end of the paragraph and the right margin.


Shows all generated tags in a publication.


Inserts a tag in the publication.


Copies the selected tag and places it on the Clipboard.


Removes the selected tag. You can also choose to reformat it as an existing tag.


Inserts a tag which was cut or pasted from another location in the publication.


Allows you to change the name of an existing tag.


Removes the selected tag and places it on the Clipboard.


Lets you import simple or multiple tags from another publication, including publications created in previous versions of Corel VENTURA.


Creates an index in your publication.


Creates a table of contents in your publication.


Click to preview the text using the kerning values.


Removes rulers from view.


Changes the unit of measure of the horizontal ruler to agates.


Changes the unit of measure of the horizontal ruler to centimeters.


Changes the unit of measure of the horizontal ruler to ciceros.


Changes the unit of measure of the horizontal ruler to inches.


Changes the unit of measure of the horizontal ruler to inches (decimal).


Changes the unit of measure of the horizontal ruler to picas.


Opens the Options dialog box, which allows you to change the ruler settings, such as units of measure, origin, and ruler zero point.


Removes all the tabs from the selected paragraph or paragraph tag.


Center aligns the text underneath the tab stop.


Removes the selected tab from the paragraph or paragraph tag.


Aligns the text to the left or right of a designated character (usually the decimal point).


Left aligns the text that follows the tab stop.


Right aligns the text before the tab stop.


Changes the unit of measure of the vertical ruler to agates.


Changes the unit of measure of the vertical ruler to centimeters.


Changes the unit of measure of the vertical ruler to ciceros.


Changes the unit of measure of the vertical ruler to inches.


Changes the unit of measure of the vertical ruler to inches decimal.


Changes the unit of measure of the vertical ruler to picas.


Adds tabs to paragraphs and allows you to set the default alignment for each tab you create.


Select your preferred unit of measurement for both the horizontal and vertical ruler display.


Holding down the mouse button on this tool opens the Zoom flyout.


Allows you to move between chapters in your publication.


Lists all the available character tags.


Opens the Tag Window, which displays all of the tags for the item you selected.


Shows the five most recently used colors on the color picker. Click the arrow to display other available colors.

Click on a color to apply it to the fill of the selected text, graphic object, or frame. Right-click on a color to apply it to the outline of the selected text, graphic object, or frame.


Changes the number of pages displayed on screen. Click the button and then drag until you have selected the number of pages you would like to view.


Displays an alphabetical list of all text and picture files available for placement in the current chapter.


Lists the fonts that can be applied to the selected text.


Opens the Text Properties dialog box, which allows you to format the selected text, such as choosing the type of font.


Changes the point size of the selected text.


Opens the Text Properties dialog box, which allows you to format the selected text, such as the size of the font.


Allows you to change the font style of your selected text.


Lists the paragraph tags in the active publication and allows you to apply a tag to the paragraph containing the insertion point.


Toggles Tag Paragraph Mode on and off.


Allows you to change the point size of the font in the selected text.


Allows you to specify an angle of rotation for the selected frame. A positive value rotates clockwise, while a negative value rotates counterclockwise.


Opens the Frame Properties dialog box, which allows you to modify frame properties, such as the rotation angle of the frame.


Allows you to specify the height of the selected frame.


Opens the Frame Properties dialog box, which allows you to modify frame properties, such as the size and position of the frame.


Allows you to specify the type the desired width of the selected frame.


Allows you to specify type the horizontal position of the selected frame. This position is measured from the left side of the page.


Type the vertical position of the selected frame. This position is measured from the top of the page.


Allows you to change the height of a graphic object.


Opens the Object Properties dialog box, which allows you to format object properties such as the height of your selected object.


Allows you to change the width of a graphic object.


Opens the Object Properties dialog box, which allows you to format object properties, such as the width of your selected object.


Allows you to change the x-origin or the horizontal position of a graphic object.


Opens the Object Properties dialog box, which allows you to format object properties, such as the x-origin your selected object.


Allows you to change the y-origin or the vertical position of a graphic object.


Opens the Object Properties dialog box, which allows you to format Object Properties such as the y-origin your selected object.


Displays a list of the frame tags in the current publication.


Allows you to choose how text flows around the outside of the selected frame.


Opens the Frame Properties dialog box, which allows you to modify frame properties such as placement, margins, or typography.


Allows you to choose where you would like a caption to be placed around the outside of a frame.


Opens the Frame Properties dialog box, which allows you to modify frame properties such as adding a caption.


Opens a flyout from which you can choose a variety of line-ending shapes to apply to an open path. Press ESC key to exit without making a selection.


Opens the Outline Pen dialog box, which allows you to set and apply outline pen attributes such as color, width, style, nib shape, and arrowheads.


Opens a flyout from which you can choose a variety of line styles. Press ESC key to exit without making a selection.


Opens the Outline Pen dialog box, which allows you to set and apply outline pen attributes, such as color, width, style, nib shape, and arrowheads.


Opens a flyout from which you can choose a variety of endpoint shapes to apply to an open path. Press ESC key to exit without making a selection.


Allows you to change the thickness of a line.


Increases or reduces the horizontal spacing between selected characters and words.


Changes the alignment of the selected paragraph.


Adjusts the spacing between lines of text in a selected paragraph.


Adjusts the spacing between the selected paragraphs.


Adjusts the space below a selected paragraph.


Adjusts the space above a selected paragraph.


Opens the Paragraph Properties dialog box which allows you to format the font, alignment, spacing, tabs, effects, breaks, typography, and rules of the selected paragraph.


Sets the angle of the top row of cells in the selected table.


Opens the Table Properties dialog box, which allows you to format your table; for example, adding or deleting rows or changing the skew.


Allows you to specify the height of the row if it is skewed.


Opens the Table Properties dialog box, which allows you to format your table; for example, by adding or deleting rows or changing the skew.


Sets the angle of the first column of cells in the selected table.


Changes the left border of the selected cell. If a range of cells is selected, only the border of the uppermost cell in the range changes.


Opens the Rules dialog box, which allows you to apply a rule tag to the top, bottom, left, or right rule.


Changes the top border of the selected cell. If a range of cells is selected, only the border of the uppermost cell in the range changes.


Changes the right border of the selected cell. If a range of cells is selected, only the border of the uppermost cell in the range changes.


Allows you to change the width of a column or table.


Allows you to change the column width.


Adds or removes outside borders of the selected table.


Changes the number of header (top) rows in the selected table.


Adds or removes borders from the sides of the cells in the selected table.


Adds or removes borders from the top of the cells in the selected table.


Displays an alphabetical list of all text files in the active chapter.


Opens chapters from the active publication in Copy Editor view.


Adds the word displayed in the Spell Check and Thesaurus box to the selected User Word List.


Shows the name of the active word lists. Words correctly spelled but missing from the main dictionary, such as special terms and acronyms, can be added to an active word list so that future occurrences of the word are not questioned.


Ignores all further instances of the word displayed in the Fix Mistake box.


Displays misspelled words or words not in the selected dictionary.


Moves backward from one misspelled word to the previous misspelled word in the active publication.


Moves forward from one misspelled word to the next misspelled word in the active publication.


Indicates the zoom level at which the active publication is being displayed.


Indicates the width and height of the selected item.


Indicates the rotation angle of a selected item.


Displays the name of the selected chapter.


Displays the name of the selected item in the active publication.


Displays the name of the selected frame.


Indicates the page tag name of the item selected.


Indicates the cursor's position.


Indicates the page number of the selected page in the publication. It also indicates whether you are on the right or left page in a publication.


Indicates when CAPS LOCK is enabled.


Indicates when NUMBER LOCK is enabled.


Indicates when a Script is being recorded.


Indicates when SCROLL LOCK is enabled.


Inserts a page in the active publication.


Inserts a chapter in the active publication.


Allows you to change the location, style, and text of the headers and footers in your publication.


Copies the page tag properties of a page to a facing page.


Repeats the page tag properties of a page on an opposite page.


Positions the frame on the baseline of the text containing the anchor symbol.


Positions the frame directly above the anchor symbol.


Positions the frame directly below the anchor symbol.


Positions the frame at the top of the text column containing the anchor symbol.


Positions the frame at the bottom of the text column containing the anchor symbol.


Positions the frame outside the column of text containing the anchor symbol; the frame may still be inside the page margins.


Positions the frame outside the page margins.


Positions the frame next to the paragraph containing the anchor symbol.


Positions the frame at the same relative location on the page so that when text moves to a new page, the frame occupies the same location on the new page as it did on the old page.


Opens the writing tool Grammatik, which proofreads your publication for errors in grammar and style.


Lists alternative spelling suggestions. No suggestion will appear if an alternative word cannot be found.


Ignores all further instances of the selected misspelled word.


Adds the selected misspelled word to the user word list.


Automatically verifies the spelling of your text as you type.


Moves the selected item to the insertion point in the publication.


Copies the selected text at the insertion point in the publication.


Applies all tags belonging to the dragged item to the selected item.


Applies the text properties of the dragged text to the selected text.


Applies the paragraph properties of the dragged paragraph to the selected paragraph.


Copies text in a caption above the selected frame.


Copies text in a caption below the selected frame.


Copies the selected frame at the insertion point.


Anchors the selected frame at the insertion point so the frame moves with the text.


Copies the rules from one frame to another frame.


Copies the frame attributes from one frame to another object.


Copies the frame tag from one frame to another frame.


Groups the selected object together, which allows you to make changes to multiple objects at the same time. You can also make a change to a single item in a group without breaking up the group.


Copies the shape attributes from one object to another object.


Copies the rule attributes from one paragraph to another.


Copies the fill attributes from one object to another object.


Copies the fill attributes from a frame to another object.


Copies the selected item at the insertion point in the publication.


Stops the drag and drop process and keeps the selected item intact.


Copies the fill attributes from a shape to another object.


Copies the rule attributes from an object to another object.


Locates words or text attributes, such as font, color, or underlining, throughout the active publication.


Enter the replacement text, or click the down arrow and select from the most recent entries.


Click this button to find the next instance of the text attribute specified in the Find box.


Click this button to find the previous instance of the text attribute specified in the Find box.


Click this button to change the selected text attributes in the Replace box to that specified and to find the next occurrence.


Click this button to find all occurrences of the text attributes specified in the Find box and replace them with the text and/or attributes in the tag specified in the Replace box.


Narrows your find and replace search. For example, you can search through the current chapter or from the beginning of the publication.


Searches for, and optionally replaces, specified text, formatting or special items. For example, index entries or cross-references.


Opens the text properties dialog box, which enables you to search for text attributes such as, font type, underline, font color, or manual kerning values.


Disables the search for text attributes.


Opens the Gamma dialog box, which allows you to adjust the midtones in your image without affecting the shadows or highlights.


Opens the Brightness-Contrast-Intensity dialog box, which allows you to lighten or darken your image and to adjust the distinction between light and dark areas.


Opens the Posterize dialog box, which allows you to reduce the number of tonal values and to map all existing colors to the closest match. This process simplifies the image by removing tonal gradations and creating larger areas of flat color.


Opens the Color Balance dialog box, which allows you to adjust the mixture of colors in your image. For example, in an RGB image, you can increase or decrease the amount of red, green, or blue tones.


Opens the Replace Colors dialog box, which allows you to select specific colors from your image and replace them.


Opens the Level Equalization dialog box, which allows you to adjust the balance of highlights, shadows, and midtones in your image.


Opens the Sample/Target Balance dialog box, which allows you to perform color correction on your image by shifting color values from a sample color (taken from the image) to a target color you select from a color model.


Opens the Tone Curve dialog box, which allows you to adjust the tonal range of your image with precision.


Automatically adjusts the relationship between the highlights, shadows, and midtones of your image.


Reduces the saturation of each color in your image to 0, which converts each color to its grayscale equivalent. This allows you to make your image appear as grayscale without converting its color mode.


Opens the Band Pass dialog box, which allows you to adjust the balance of sharp and smooth areas in your image.


Opens the Displace dialog box, which allows you to alter your image using a displacement map (you can use any bitmap image as a displacement map).


Opens the Edge Detect dialog box, which allows you to find the edges of elements in your image and convert them to lines on a background of a single color.


Opens the Offset dialog box, which allows you to change the position of your image on its background.


Opens the Pixelate dialog box, which allows you to break up your image into square, rectangular, or concentric arc cells.


Opens the Puzzle dialog box, which allows you to break down your image into puzzle-like pieces or blocks that resemble a jigsaw puzzle.


Opens the Ripple dialog box, which allows you to create vertical or horizontal rippled waves throughout your image.


Opens the Shear dialog box, which allows you to distort an image along a path that you define using a shear curve.


Opens the Swirl dialog box, which allows you to create a swirling distortion effect on your image. You can select the direction and angle of the distortion.


Opens the Tile dialog box, which allows you to reproduce your image as a series of tiles on a grid.


Opens the Trace Contour dialog box, which allows you to trace image edges.


Opens the User Defined dialog box, which allows you to design your own effect filter using a convolution matrix.


Opens the Wet Paint dialog box, which allows you to create the illusion that your image is a painting that is still wet and dripping.


Opens the Wind dialog box, which allows you to smear your image in a specific direction to create the effect of wind blowing across your image.


Opens the Whirlpool dialog box, which allows you to apply a pattern of fluid lines over your image.


Opens the 3D Rotate dialog box, which allows you to rotate your image as if it were one side of a three-dimensional box.


Opens the Emboss dialog box, which allows you to transform your image into a relief.


Opens the Map To Object dialog box, which allows you to wrap your image around a sphere or cylinder.


Opens the Mesh Warp dialog box, which allows you to distort your image by manipulating the panels of a grid.


Opens the Page Curl dialog box, which allows you to create the impression that a corner of your image has rolled in on itself.


Opens the Perspective dialog box, which allows you to create the sense of three-dimensional depth, as if your image were on a flat plane receding into the distance.


Opens the Pinch/Punch dialog box, which allows you to warp your image by either "pinching" it away from you or "punching" it toward you.


Opens the Zig Zag dialog box, which allows you to distort an image by bending the image lines that run from the center of the image to its edge.


Opens the Canvas dialog box, which allows you to add various textures to your image.


Opens the Glass Block dialog box, which allows you to create the effect of viewing your image through thick glass blocks.


Opens the Impressionist dialog box, which allows you to convert your image to impressionist style brushstrokes.


Opens the Smoked Glass dialog box, which allows you to apply a transparent, colored tint over your image.


Opens the Vignette dialog box, which allows you to frame your image in a variety of ways.


Opens the Directional Smooth dialog box, which allows you to smooth edges and surfaces to give them anti-aliased edges without distorting your image.


Opens the Gaussian Blur dialog box, which allows you to produce a hazy effect. The image is blurred according to a gaussian distribution.


Opens the Jaggy Despeckle dialog box, which allows you to create a soft, blurred effect with minimal distortion.


Opens the Low Pass dialog box, which allows you to remove sharp edges and detail from an image, leaving smooth gradients and low frequency detail.


Opens the Motion Blur dialog box, which allows you to create the illusion of motion in your image.


Opens the Radial Blur dialog box, which allows you to create a blurring effect that radiates from a point you set.


Opens the Smooth dialog box, which allows you to tone down differences in adjacent pixels while smoothing the overall image or selected area.


Opens the Soften dialog box, which allows you to smooth and tone down harsh edges with only minimal loss of image detail.


Opens the Bit Planes dialog box, which allows you to reduce your image to basic RGB color components and emphasize tonal changes.


Opens the Halftone dialog box, which allows you to give your image the appearance of a color halftone.


Opens the Psychedelic dialog box, which allows you to change the colors in your image into bright, psychedelic colors.


Opens the Solarize dialog box, which allows you to transform colors. The effect depends on the relative amount of each color component.


Opens the Add Noise dialog box, which allows you to add random pixels with different types of distribution.


Opens the Diffuse dialog box, which allows you to spread out the pixels of your image to create the effect of an out-of-focus lens.


Opens the Dust and Scratch dialog box, which allows you to reduce image noise by eliminate dust and scratch faults when applying it to masked selection.


Opens the Maximum dialog box, which allows you to brighten pixel values based on the maximum pixel value of neighboring pixels.


Opens the Median dialog box, which allows you to remove noise and detail by sorting the colors of adjacent pixels in your image.


Opens the Minimum dialog box, which allows you to darken an image by adjusting pixel values based on the minimum pixel value of neighboring pixels.


Opens the Remove Noise dialog box, which allows you to soften your image and reduce the speckled effect that can occur during scanning or video-capturing.


Opens the 3D Stereo Noise dialog box, which allows you to create a stereogram (three-dimensional image) out of line art and simple images that have well-defined edges.


Opens the Lens Flare dialog box, which allows you to produce rings of light on your image that simulate the flare that appears on a photograph when the camera is aimed toward a direct bright light.


Opens the Lighting Effects dialog box, which allows you to add light sources to your image.


Opens the Adaptive Unsharp dialog box, which allows you to sharpen edge detail by statistical analysis of the values of neighboring pixels.


Opens the Directional Sharpen dialog box, which analyzes neighboring pixels to determine the direction in which to apply the greatest amount of sharpening.


Opens the Find Edges dialog box, which allows you to detect the outlines of forms in your image and convert the outlines to soft or solid lines.


Opens the High Pass dialog box, which allows you to remove low-frequency detail and shading.


Opens the Sharpen dialog box, which allows you to accentuate the edges in your image by finding the edges and increasing the contrast between adjacent pixels.


Opens the Unsharp Mask dialog box, which allows you to accentuate edge detail and focus blurred areas in your image.


Opens the Deinterlace dialog box, which allows you to smooth video images by removing the odd or even scan lines and filling them in with detail taken from the image.


Opens the Threshold dialog box, which allows you to set a specific brightness value as a threshold so that all pixels that fall below this threshold will become black and all pixels above the threshold won't be affected.


Inverts the colors in your image, turning it into a negative.


Accesses a word processor, such as Corel WordPerfect or Microsoft Word, directly from Corel VENTURA. This allows you to edit Corel VENTURA text files in your word processor. The available word processor is based on your Windows RTF file association.


Accesses CorelDRAW and Corel PHOTO-PAINT from Corel VENTURA, which allows you to edit Corel VENTURA pictures in either application. Corel DRAW and Corel PHOTO-PAINT must be installed on your computer.


Opens the Frame Tag Properties dialog box. Allows you to format the placement, margins, columns, contents, typography, and rules for the selected frame tag.


Retrieves the latest checked-in version of the multiuser publication.


Reserves the active publication so that only you can make changes to it. After you check out the publication, the command name changes to Check In.


Saves changes to the publication and allows other users to work on it.


Cancels a check-out operation and discards all changes that were made to the publication.


Shows whether the active publication or any of its components, such as individual chapters and stylesheets, are checked out and, if so, by whom. This command becomes available when the Set-Multi User command is enabled.


Opens the Publication Properties dialog box, which allows you to define read–write privileges for a publication.


Imports a paragraph tag from another publication into the active publication.


Imports a frame tag from another publication into the active publication.


Imports a character tag from another publication into the active publication.


Imports a page tag from another publication into the active publication.


Imports a rule tag from another publication into the active publication.


Opens the Frame Properties dialog box, which allows you to modify frame properties, such as placement, margins, or typography.


Moves frames and graphic objects created on a page in Page Layout view to that page's page tag.


Opens the Paragraph Tag Conditions dialog box, which allows you to define the conditions of your paragraph tags.


Updates a tag with formatting changes made to the tag and then applies the new formatting to each item referencing that tag.


Allows you to create links that can launch and point your Internet browser to a World Wide Web site.


Allows you to edit links that launch and point your Internet browser to a World Wide Web site.


Customized Corel VENTURA command.


misc printing


Proceeds to the next page.


Returns to the previous page.


_Publish as HTML dialog box


Type the location and filename you want to save the HTML document with.


Click this button to set the saving location and filename of the HTML document.


Enable this check box to automatically launch your browser when you click the Publish button.


Click this button to show or hide the HTML Setup controls, which you use to customize the conversion to HTML.


Closes this dialog box, saves the conversion options you've specified, and publishes your HTML document.


Click this button if you want to customize the mapping of Corel VENTURA tags to HTML tags.


Click this button to specify how you want to convert pictures in the document.


Click this button to specify how you want to convert the Table of Contents, cross-references, and index in the document.


Click this button to further customize the conversion and to include additional information in the resulting HTML document such as the document's address (i.e., URL) on the World Wide Web.


Click this button to use the HTML conversion information from another document as the basis for publishing the active document. You must have the other document open to proceed with the setup.


Click this button to convert the entire publication to HTML.


Click this button to convert the active chapter to HTML.


Click this button to convert the active page to HTML.


Click this button to convert the active page to HTML with Cascading Style Sheet layout. CSS Layout enables absolute positioning, which places all of the publication elements that are on the Corel VENTURA page in the same position on the HTML page.


Click this button to view the statistics for your HTML document.


Text HTML Formatting


Enable this check box to access and customize the Tag Name and HTML Tag lists.


Lists the names of the paragraph or character tags in the Corel VENTURA publication and the HTML tag they are currently mapped to. To change the mapping, click a tag in the HTML Tag list and choose a new HTML tag from the list that appears.


Click this button to change the attributes of the selected HTML tag.


Click this button to undo changes to the selected tag's mapping.


Click this button to undo all the changes you made to HTML tag mapping assignments.


Displays the formatting attributes currently defined in the HTML tag. You can change these attributes using the Attributes button.


Paragraph HTML Properties (font tab)


# IDH_HTMLPROPS_ICONS_PP_HTMLICON_B_FILE_BNClick this button to find the icon's location and filename through the Open dialog box.


Enable the Absolute button to access the list box, where you set the font size of the HTML tag to one of seven browser-dependent sizes.


Choose the font size of the HTML tag from one of the seven browser-dependent sizes. A value of 1 displays text using the browser's smallest font size; a value of 7 uses the largest font size.

You must enable the Absolute button to access this list box.


Enable the Relative to Base button to access the list box, where you set the font size of the HTML tag relative to the base font size. You can set the base font size using the Options button in the Publish As HTML dialog box. When you set the base font size, you designate one of the HTML font sizes as the base font size and then set the font sizes in the HTML tags relative to this base font size.


Choose the font size of the HTML tag relative to the base font size. For example, choosing +1 makes the tag's font size one size larger than the base font size.

You must enable the Relative To Base button to access this list box.


Enable this button to set the font size of the selected HTML tag to the current base font size. You specify which of the seven sizes is the base size using the Options button in the Publish as HTML dialog box.


Applies bold formatting to the HTML tag's font.


Applies italic formatting to the HTML tag's font.


Applies underline formatting to the HTML tag's font.


Places a line through text formatted with the HTML tag.


Applies superscript formatting to the HTML tag's font. Superscript text uses a small font size and is placed above the baseline.


Applies subscript formatting to the HTML tag's font. Subscript text uses a small font size and is placed below the baseline.


Enable the Font check box to access the list box, where you choose the font the HTML tag uses. If you disable the check box, the browser determines the font.


Choose the font you want the selected HTML tag to use.

You must enable the Font check box to access this list box.


Enable the Color check box to access the list box, where you choose a text color for the HTML tag. If you disable the check box, the browser determines the text color.


Choose the text color that you want the HTML tag to use.

You must enable the Color check box to access this list box.


Paragraph HTML Properties (Align/Space tab


Choose the paragraph alignment you want for the selected HTML tag.


Places a blank line above the text the HTML tag applies to.


Places a blank line below the text the HTML tag applies to.


Paragraph HTML Properties (Rules)


Enable this check box to add a rule above the paragraph.


Select a horizontal alignment for the rule.


Enable this check box to set the height of the rule. Height refers to the thickness of the rule.

Pixels are dots on the screen that combine to form an image. Pixels let you set an exact measurement.


Type the height of the rule in pixels.

Pixels are dots on the screen that combine to form an image. Pixels let you set an exact measurement.


Enable this button to set the width of the rule as a percentage of the page. For example, if you set the width at 50%, the rule would be half the width of the page.


Enable this button to set the width of the rule in pixels.

Pixels are dots on the screen that combine to form an image. Pixels let you set an exact measurement.


Enable this button to set the width of the rule in pixels. Pixels are dots on the screen that combine to form an image. Pixels let you set an exact measurement.


Enable this check box to set the width of the rule. Width refers to the length of the rule.

Pixels are dots on the screen that combine to form an image. Pixels let you set an exact measurement.


Type the width of the rule in pixels.

Pixels are dots on the screen that combine to form an image. Pixels let you set an exact measurement.


Enable this check box to apply 3D shading to the horizontal rule.


Enable this check box to use a picture as a ruling line.

You must enable the Above check box to access this check box.


Type the filename of the picture in this text box.


Click this button to find the picture's location and filename through the Open dialog box.


Enable this check box to use a picture as a ruling line. Enter the filename of the picture in the text box.

You must enable the Below check box to access this check box.


Enable this check box to add a ruling line below the paragraph.


Enable this check box to set the height of the rule. Height refers to the thickness of the rule.


Pixels are dots on the screen that combine to form an image. Pixels let you set an exact measurement.


Type the width of the rule.

Pixels are dots on the screen that combine to form an image. Pixels let you set an exact measurement.


Paragraph HTML Properties (Icons tab)


Enable this check box to add an icon at the beginning of the paragraph.


Type the icon's location and filename in this text box.


Enable this check box to add an icon at the end of the paragraph.


Paragraph HTML Properties (List Item tab)


Specify which level in the list you want to format.


Enable this check box to remove spaces at the beginning of each paragraph in the list.


Enable this button to add a bullet before each paragraph in the list. The browser used to view the HTML document determines which character or symbol is used for the bullet.


Enable this button to number the paragraphs in the list. Choose a numbering format from the Numbering Style list box.


Choose the type of numbering you want to apply to the list item tag.

You must enable the Numbered List button to access this list box.


Paragraph HTML Properties (Custom Tags)


Type the opening tag of the custom tag pair.


Type the closing tag of the custom tag pair.


Enable this button to place the custom tag pair inside the paragraph tags.


Enable this button to place the custom tag pair outside the paragraph tags.


HTML Pictures dialog box


Enable this check box to include the pictures in your Corel VENTURA publication in your HTML document.


Lets you choose the picture file format that the pictures in the Corel VENTURA publication are converted to.


Choose the picture file format that the pictures in the Corel VENTURA publication are converted to. The GIF format generally displays faster than the JPEG format; however, JPEG compresses the graphic to a smaller size. The PNG (Portable Network Graphic) file format provides a portable, legally unencumbered, well-compressed, well-specified standard for lossless bitmapped image files.


Enable this check box to copy linked GIF or JPEG files to the HTML directory with no processing. Any scaling you perform in Corel VENTURA will have no effect. Embedded graphics and file formats other than GIF or JPEG are not effected.


Choose one of the following methods for displaying pictures in your HTML document:

•	embed the graphic as a full-size inline image (default)

•	display a thumbnail (miniature), which readers can click to display the graphic at full size

•	use a text hotspot to access the graphic (which is stored in a separate file)


Choose one of the following methods for displaying pictures in your HTML document:

•	embed the picture as a full-size inline image (default)

•	display a thumbnail (miniature), which readers can click to display the picture at full size

•	use a text hotspot to access the picture (which is stored in a separate file)


Specify the default width of the border surrounding a picture, in pixels.


Specify the amount of space placed above and below the picture, in pixels.


Specify the amount of space placed on each side of the picture, in pixels.


Click this button to specify the thumbnail size as a percentage of the original picture size and to access the number box.


Specify the thumbnail's size as a percentage of the original picture size.

You must enable the Percent Of Original button to access this box.


Click this button to specify an exact thumbnail size. Specify the Vertical and Horizontal measurements, in pixels, in the number boxes.


Specify the vertical measurement, in pixels.


Specify the horizontal measurement, in pixels.


Provides a helpful hint when you are publishing your picture as a Text link.


HTML Links (Main Table Of Contents)


Enable this check box to specify the table of contents you want to use include in your HTML document.

This check box is only accessible if your Corel VENTURA publication contains a table of contents.


Choose the table of contents to include in your HTML document.

In order to choose a table of contents, your Corel VENTURA publication must contain a table of contents.


Specify whether you want the table of contents in the HTML document formatted as a bulleted list or a numbered list.


Click this button to format the table of contents as a bulleted list.


Click this button to format the table of contents as a numbered list.


HTML Links (Index and cross-references)


Enable this check box to convert the Corel VENTURA publication's index to hyperlinks.


Choose the index file you want to include in the HTML document.

You must enable the Create HTML Index check box to access this list box.


Enable this button to convert cross-references in the Corel VENTURA publication to hyperlinks.


HTML Options (General)


For more information, see the following:

•	Setting the font size in an HTML document

•	Converting tabs to spaces in an HTML document


Specify the base HTML font size. When you set the base font size, you designate one of the HTML font sizes as the base font size and then set the font sizes in the HTML tags relative to this base font size.

HTML font sizes are unitless and range from 7 (largest) to 1 (smallest). The actual font size varies depending on the browser used to view the HTML document.


Map the font sizes in the Corel VENTURA publication to the seven HTML font sizes.

HTML font sizes are unitless and range from 7 (largest) to 1 (smallest). The actual font size varies depending on the browser used to view the HTML document.


Enable this check box to convert tabs in your Corel VENTURA publication to spaces in your HTML document.

HTML does not support tabs, so if you do not convert tabs to spaces, the tabs in the Corel VENTURA publication do not appear in the HTML document.


Specify the number of spaces you want to replace a single tab with.


HTML Options (header)


Type the information you want to appear in the header.


Type a title for the HTML document. The default title is the name of the document.


Type the Uniform Resource Locator (URL) you want referenced for relative addressing.


Specify the refresh properties of your HTML page. For example, you can set the browser to reload (update) the HTML document every five minutes, or you can have the browser display one document for a certain period of time, and then load another document.


HTML Options (Frames)


Enable this check box to display the table of contents, index and other lists in the HTML document in frames instead of on the page.

You must publish your entire document to HTML (including items such as a table of contents, an index, a list of chapters, and a list of figures) in order to add frames to your publication.


Displays a preview of the frame layout for the HTML document.


Click this button to modify the attributes applied to the frames in your HTML document.


Lists the publication components that are created by Corel VENTURA.


Enable this check box to place the table of contents in a frame.


Enable this check box to place the index in a frame.


Enable this check box to place the list of chapters in a frame.


Enable this check box to place the list of figures in a frame.


Click this button to use a solid color as the background for the browser's main pane.


The portion of the browser window that displays the body of the Corel VENTURA publication.


Enable this check box to use a picture as the background for the browser's main pane.


Type the location and filename of the picture you want to use as a background.


Click the Browse button to find the picture's location and filename in the Open dialog box.


Enable this check box to use the background applied to the Corel VENTURA publication's page as the background for the browser's main pane.


The portions of the browser window that display the VENTURA generated components (table of contents, index, list of chapters, and list of figures) of the HTML publication.


Click this button to use a solid color as the background for the frames that contain the Corel VENTURA generated components (table of contents, index, list of chapters, and list of figures) of the HTML publication.


Enable this check box to use a picture as the background for the frames that contain the VENTURA generated components (table of contents, index, list of chapters, and list of figures) of the HTML publication.


Click the Browse button to locate the picture in the Open dialog box.


Lets you choose backgrounds for the main frame and for the portions of the browser window that display the Corel VENTURA generated components (table of contents, index, list of chapters, and list of figures) of the HTML publication.


HTML Frame Properties (Contents)


Displays a preview of the frame layout for the HTML document. You can resize a frame by dragging its borders.


Determines whether left, top, and bottom frames appear in the HTML document. Layout also determines the size of the left frame.


Enable this check box to place a frame along the left side of your HTML document window.


Enable this check box to make the left frame extend the length of the HTML document window. If you disable this check box, the left frame only extends to the base of the top frame.

Your HTML document must contain a top frame in order for this check box to affect the left frame.


Enable this check box to place a frame along the top of your HTML document window.


Enable this check box to place a frame along the bottom of your HTML document window.


Displays information on the frame's name and on the location and filename of its contents.


Displays the name of the selected frame. You select a frame by clicking it in the preview window.


Displays the type of information the selected frame will contain. You can choose a file Corel VENTURA generates, such as the table of contents or the index, or you can choose a file you created.


Choose the contents of the selected frame. You select a frame by clicking it in the preview window.


Click this button to find the frame content's location and filename in the Link To File dialog box.


HTML Frame Properties (Attributes)


Lets you control the scrolling attributes and the margin size of frames. You can also control whether the user can resize frames and whether frames have a border.


Choose a scrolling attribute for the selected frame. Auto inserts scroll bars if the frame's contents are too large to fully appear in the frame. Yes means that the scroll bars are present at all times. No means that the scroll bars never appear.


Type the width of the selected frame's margin in pixels. You select a frame by clicking it in the preview window.


Type the height of the selected frame's margin in pixels. You select a frame by clicking it in the preview window.


Enable this check box to let users resize the frames in your HTML document.


Enable this check box to add a border to the edge of your frames.


HTML Options (Cascading Style Sheet)


Enable this check box to publish your HTML document with a Cascading Style Sheet.


Click this button to generate and use a Cascading Style Sheet based on the Corel VENTURA style sheet.


Click this button to embed the style sheet into each of your files.


Click this button to link the Cascading Style Sheet to an external style sheet that has been previously created.


Type the location and filename of the external style sheet to which you want to link the Cascading Style Sheet.


Click this button to find the location and filename of the external style sheet in the Cascading Style Sheet dialog box.


Import HTML Setup


Lists open Corel VENTURA publications that have been previously converted to HTML format. Choose the one you want to use as the model for converting the active document.


Enable this check box to use the selected publication's HTML text settings.


Enable this check box to use the selected publication's picture settings.


Enable this check box to use the selected publication's HTML link settings.


Enable this check box to use the selected publication's option settings.


Publication HTML Statistics


The Publication HTML Statistics dialog box

The Publication HTML Statistics dialog box provides information about your HTML document. This information includes the document's saving location and the number of publication elements being used in the HTML document.


Shows where the HTML version of the Corel VENTURA publication is located.


Displays information about the composition the Corel VENTURA publication, such as the number of empty frames and objects created with the drawing tools it contains. For information about the relevance of this information, click the Help button.


Publish As Cascading Style Sheet dialog box


Type the location and filename of the Cascading Style Sheet.


Click this button to find the location and filename of the Cascading Style Sheet in the Save As dialog box.


Choose a Corel VENTURA tag to represent the <BODY> style in the Cascading Style Sheet.


Enable this check box to export only tags that are HTML elements.


Enable this check box to specify only styles that are different from the <BODY> style.


Publish as Adobe Acrobat dialog box


Enable this check box if the document contains hidden text that you want to appear in the Acrobat document. The hidden text will appear as an icon in the left margin of the Acrobat document. Clicking the icon displays the text in a separate window.


Enable this check box to include URLs. You should only enable this check box if you are running Adobe Acrobat Distiller 3. If you are using version 2.0, you should disable this check box.


Publish as Corel Barista dialog


Click this button to save the entire document in a single file.


Click this button to save each page in the document as a separate file. This option is useful if the document is large and will take a long time to download as a whole.

Corel VENTURA links the individual pages together so that the reader can move between them using Corel Barista's navigation tools.


Type the location and filename of the Corel Barista document. By default, the file is saved in the COREL\BARISTA folder and is given the same name as the Corel VENTURA document.

If you save the Corel Barista file in a different folder, you must copy the contents of the BARISTA folder to that folder.


Click this button to choose the saving location and filename of the Corel Barista document in the Main Corel Barista document dialog box.


Click this button to choose the location of the Corel Barista class files if they are not in the same place as the Corel Barista document.


Type the location of the Corel Barista class files if they are not in the same place as the Corel Barista document. An http site, which all users of the Corel Barista document can access, is best.


Choose the portion of the publication you want to publish to Corel Barista.


Choose the picture file format that the pictures in the Corel VENTURA publication are converted to. The GIF format generally displays faster than the JPEG format; however, JPEG compresses the graphic to a smaller size.


Closes this dialog box, saves the conversion options you've specified, and publishes your Corel Barista document using these conversion options.


Frame Properties (Placement tab)


For more information, see the following:

•	Setting frame size

•	Locking and unlocking frame size and position

•	Anchoring frames

•	Rotating frames

•	Setting text flow between frames

•	Setting text flow within and around frames


Controls the frame anchor settings.


These controls let you set and lock the selected frame's size and position.


Type the width of the selected frame.

You can change the unit of measurement by right-clicking the Width box, clicking Units, and clicking a unit of measurement.


The unit of measurement used to determine the frame's width. You can change the unit of measurement by right-clicking the Width box, clicking Units, and clicking a unit of measurement.


Type the height of the selected frame.

You can change the unit of measurement by right-clicking the Height box, clicking Units, and clicking a unit of measurement.


The unit of measurement used to determine the frame's height. You can change the unit of measurement by right-clicking the Height box, clicking Units, and clicking a unit of measurement.


Type the horizontal position of the selected frame. This position is measured from the left side of the page.

You can change the unit of measurement by right-clicking the X box, clicking Units, and clicking a unit of measurement.


The unit of measurement used to determine the frame's horizontal position. You can change the unit of measurement by right-clicking the X box, clicking Units, and clicking a unit of measurement.


Type the vertical position of the selected frame. This position is measured from the top of the page.

You can change the unit of measurement by right-clicking the Y box, clicking Units, and clicking a unit of measurement.


The unit of measurement used to determine the frame's vertical position. You can change the unit of measurement by right-clicking the Y box, clicking Units, and clicking a unit of measurement.


Enable this check box to keep the selected frame at the current size and position settings.


Disable this check box to remove the frame anchor from the selected frame. This check box is not accessible if the selected frame is not anchored.

To anchor a frame, select it with the Pick Tool, then click the Frame Anchor Tool, and click in the text where you want to anchor the frame.


Choose a frame anchor position for the selected frame.


Choose the horizontal alignment of the frame relative to the anchor symbol.

The Binding Side options apply to double-sided documents. They place the frame in relation to the inside edge of the page.


Choose the horizontal alignment of the frame relative to the anchor symbol.

The Binding Side options apply to double-sided document. They place the frame in relation to the inside edge of the page.


Specify where you want to position the anchored frame in relation to the baseline of the text the frame is anchored to. A positive value positions the frame above the baseline, while a negative value positions the frame below the baseline.

You can change the unit of measurement by right-clicking the Shift box, clicking Units, and clicking a unit of measurement.


The unit of measurement used to determine the selected frame's position in relation to the baseline. You can change the unit of measurement by right-clicking the Shift box, clicking Units, and clicking a unit of measurement.


Specify where you want to position the anchored frame in relation to the baseline of the text the frame is anchored to. A positive value positions the frame above the baseline, while a negative value positions the frame below the baseline.


Type a name for the frame anchor. Corel VENTURA provides a name by default.


Specify angles of rotation for the selected frame and its contents.


Specify an angle of rotation for the selected frame. A positive value rotates counterclockwise, while a negative value rotates clockwise.


Specify an angle of rotation for the selected frame's contents. A positive value rotates counterclockwise, while a negative value rotates clockwise.


Controls how text flows around and within the selected frame.


Choose how text flows around the outside of the selected frame.


Choose how text flows within the selected frame.


Frame Properties (Margins)


For more information regarding frames, see the following:

•	Setting frame margins

For more information regarding pages, see the following:

•	Setting page margins


Choose whether the inside margins are different, the same, or mirrored on the publication's left and right pages.


Controls the size of the margins inside the selected frame or page for the Left or Right page.


Type the amount of space you want between the bottom of the frame or page and its contents.

You can change the unit of measurement by right-clicking the Bottom box, clicking Units, and clicking a unit of measurement.


The unit of measurement used to determine the inside, bottom margin. You can change the unit of measurement by right-clicking the Bottom box, clicking Units, and clicking a unit of measurement.


Controls the size of the margins inside the selected frame or page.


Type the amount of space you want between the left side of the frame or page and its contents.

You can change the unit of measurement by right-clicking the Left box, clicking Units, and clicking a unit of measurement.


The unit of measurement used to determine the inside, left margin. You can change the unit of measurement by right-clicking the Left box, clicking Units, and clicking a unit of measurement.


Type the amount of space you want between the right side of the frame or page and its contents.

You can change the unit of measurement by right-clicking the Right box, clicking Units, and clicking a unit of measurement.


The unit of measurement used to determine the inside, right margin. You can change the unit of measurement by right-clicking the Right box, clicking Units, and clicking a unit of measurement.


Type the amount of space you want between the top of the frame or page and its contents.

You can change the unit of measurement by right-clicking the Top box, clicking Units, and clicking a unit of measurement.


The unit of measurement used to determine the inside, top margin. You can change the unit of measurement by right-clicking the Top box, clicking Units, and clicking a unit of measurement.


Controls the size of the margins outside the selected frame.


Type the amount of space you want between the top of the frame and the surrounding text.

You can change the unit of measurement by right-clicking the Top box, clicking Units, and clicking a unit of measurement.


The unit of measurement used to determine the top, outside margin. You can change the unit of measurement by right-clicking the Top box, clicking Units, and clicking a unit of measurement.


Type the amount of space you want between the bottom of the frame and the surrounding text.

You can change the unit of measurement by right-clicking the Bottom box, clicking Units, and clicking a unit of measurement.


The unit of measurement used to determine the bottom, outside margin. You can change the unit of measurement by right-clicking the Bottom box, clicking Units, and clicking a unit of measurement.


Type the amount of space you want between the left side of the frame and the surrounding text.

You can change the unit of measurement by right-clicking the Left box, clicking Units, and clicking a unit of measurement.


The unit of measurement used to determine the left, outside margin. You can change the unit of measurement by right-clicking the Left box, clicking Units, and clicking a unit of measurement.


Type the amount of space you want between the right side of the frame and the surrounding text.

You can change the unit of measurement by right-clicking the Right box, clicking Units, and clicking a unit of measurement.


The unit of measurement used to determine the right, outside margin. You can change the unit of measurement by right-clicking the Right box, clicking Units, and clicking a unit of measurement.


Click the Presets button to access preset margin options.

Click the Details button to create the margin settings yourself.


Click this button to apply preset inside margin settings to the selected frame.


Click this button to apply preset inside and outside margin settings to the selected frame.


Click this button to apply preset outside margin settings to the selected frame.


Click this button to apply preset top and bottom outside margins to the selected frame.


Frame Properties (Columns)


For more information regarding frames, see:

•	Adding and formatting columns

For more information regarding pages, see:

•	Applying custom columns to a page

•	Applying preset columns to a page


Choose whether the columns are different, the same, or mirrored on the publication's left and right pages.


Controls the column attributes for the Left or Right page.


Type the number of columns you want to insert.


Click this button to make the columns and the gutters (spaces) between the columns the same width.


Specify values for the column attributes.

•	# [image] displays the column you are setting attributes for. Columns are numbered from left to right.

•	Width [image] type a width for the column.

•	Gutter [image] type the amount of space you want between the selected column and the column beside it.

•	Rules [image] type a width for a vertical rule. The vertical rule appears to the right of the column.

•	Color [image] click the color button and choose a color for the vertical rule.

•	Style [image] click the Outline Pen and set attributes for the line style of the vertical rule.


Displays the combined width of the columns.


Displays the amount by which the combined column width exceeds the frame or page width.


Controls how text displays within the columns.


Choose the direction you want the text in your columns to flow.


Choose how the text is distributed between the columns. If you choose On, the text is distributed evenly among the columns. If you choose Off, the text is not distributed evenly among the columns. If you choose Default, the column balance settings for the chapter are used.


Enable this check box to print inter-column rules over the background color.


Click the Presets button to access preset column options.

Click the Details button to create the column settings yourself.


Click this button to apply one preset column.


Click this button to apply two preset columns.


Click this button to apply three preset columns.


Click this button to apply four preset columns.


Click this button to disable the column balance setting. Column balance divides the text evenly between columns.


Click this button to enable the column balance setting. Column balance divides the text evenly between columns.


Click this button to insert lines between the columns.


Click this button so that lines are not inserted between the columns.


Click one of the icons to apply preset columns to your publication.


Frame Properties (Contents)


For more information regarding both frames and pages, see the following:

•	Resizing and shifting picture files and frames

•	Setting halftone screening for frames

•	Controlling picture display settings for a frame

•	Creating hyperlinks


Choose the filename of the picture file that you want to display. If a picture file is already displayed, its name appears by default.


Click to edit the attributes of the picture file.


Enable this check box to create a hyperlink using the picture file.


Displays the hyperlink's setup.


Click this button to define the hyperlink's settings.


Choose the filename of the text file that you want to display. If a text file is already displayed, its name appears by default.


Click to control whether the text file is embedded or if it is set to export on save.


Controls the size and position of the picture within the selected frame or page.


Type the width of the picture. If the width you type exceeds the width of the frame or page, Corel VENTURA crops the picture.

You can change the unit of measurement by right-clicking the Width box, clicking Units, and clicking a unit of measurement.

The Fit Picture To Frame check box must be disabled in order to access the Width box. This setting does not affect the width of the frame or page.


The unit of measurement used to determine the width of the picture. You can change the unit of measurement by right-clicking the Width box, clicking Units, and clicking a unit of measurement.

The Fit Picture To Frame check box must be disabled in order to access the Width box.


Type the height of the picture. If the height you type exceeds the height of the frame or page, Corel VENTURA crops the picture.

You can change the unit of measurement by right-clicking the Height box, clicking Units, and clicking a unit of measurement.

The Fit Picture To Frame check box and the Maintain Aspect Ratio check box must be disabled in order to access the Height box. This setting does not affect the height of the frame or page.


The unit of measurement used to determine the height of the picture. You can change the unit of measurement by right-clicking the Height box, clicking Units, and clicking a unit of measurement.

The Fit Picture To Frame check box and the Maintain Aspect Ratio check box must be disabled in order to access the Height box.


Type the distance you want to move the picture horizontally within the frame or page. A positive value moves the picture to the left; a negative value moves the picture to the right.

You can change the unit of measurement by right-clicking the Horizontal Shift box, clicking Units, and clicking a unit of measurement.


The unit of measurement used to determine the horizontal shift of the picture. You can change the unit of measurement by right-clicking the Horizontal Shift box, clicking Units, and clicking a unit of measurement.


Type the distance you want to move the picture vertically within the frame or page. A positive value moves the picture towards the top; a negative value moves the picture towards the bottom.

You can change the unit of measurement by right-clicking the Vertical Shift box, clicking Units, and clicking a unit of measurement.


The unit of measurement used to determine the vertical shift of the picture. You can change the unit of measurement by right-clicking the Vertical Shift box, clicking Units, and clicking a unit of measurement.


Enable this check box to make the picture the same size as the frame or page. The picture automatically changes size when the frame is resized.

Disabling this check box lets you resize the picture independently of the frame or page.


Enable this check box to keep the ratio of the picture's width to its height the same. If you disable this check box, the picture may become distorted.


Returns the picture to the size it was originally created at.


Click this button to access the settings for halftone screening. Halftone screening creates the appearance of shading in your picture. Your picture must be a bitmap and it must be grayscale in order to apply halftone screening.


Frame Properties - Halftone Screening dialog box


Type the number of lines (or rows) of halftone dots printed per inch. The screen frequency affects the number of gray levels in the printed output: the higher the screen frequency, the higher the level of output resolution necessary to create an adequate number of gray levels.


Type the angle used to print the halftone dots.


Type the shape of the dots the printer uses to print the picture. The Default type uses the printer's default screen parameters, unless they are overridden in the Print dialog box. A dot screen with 60 lines per inch, at 45 degrees, has typical screen parameters for a 300 dpi laser printer.


Frame Properties - Picture File Properties dialog box (General tab)


Displays the filename. You can change this name by typing a new name in the Name box.


Displays the drive the file is stored in and if the file is embedded.

If the file is external, you can click the Embed button to embed it.


Click this button to embed an externally referenced picture.


Displays the file type.


Displays the file's size.


Displays the date and time at which the file was last modified.


(screen display tab)


Enable this check box to display the picture using the attributes you set for the publication. You can display and view these attributes by clicking the Publication Properties button.


Click this button to access the Publication Properties dialog box, where you can create publication-wide picture display settings.


Choose if the picture displays at full resolution or if its resolution has a top limit.


Type a maximum horizontal resolution size for the picture.


Type a maximum vertical resolution size for the picture.


Enable this check box if you want the maximum horizontal and vertical resolution sizes to be the same.


Choose if the picture can have an unlimited or a limited memory size.


Type the maximum memory size for the picture in kilobytes.


Enable this check box to allow Corel VENTURA to use a color palette that matches the colors used in pictures in the publication. Enabling the check box can reduce the memory needed to display images by eliminating unnecessary colors, but can result in a reduction of the image quality. The palette used to display the pictures does not affect how they print.


(details tab)


Type a description of the picture.


Displays the dimensions of the picture in pixels.


Displays the picture's color mode. The color mode is a system that defines the number and kind of colors that make up a bitmap picture. Black and white, Grayscale, RGB, and CMYK are examples of popular color modes.


Displays the picture's resolution. Resolution determines the amount of detail and information a picture contains. Resolution refers to the spacing of pixels in the image and is measured in pixels per inch (ppi) or dots per inch (dpi).


Frame Properties - Text File Properties dialog box


Click this button to choose the drive and folder to which the file will export.


Choose the type of text file you want to export as.


Enable this check box to set the text file to export when it is saved.


Click this button to set the exporting options for the RTF text file format.


Frame Properties (Typography)


For more information regarding frames, see:

•	Setting the first baseline for a page or a frame

•	Applying automatic kerning to a frame or a frame tag

•	Setting vertical justification for frames and frame tags

For more information regarding pages, see:

•	Controlling widows and orphans

•	Setting the first baseline for a page or a frame

•	Applying automatic kerning to a page or a page tag

•	Setting vertical justification for pages and page tags


Controls the appearance of widows and orphans.


Choose the minimum number of lines that can be isolated at the top of the selected frame or page.

A widow occurs when the last lines of a paragraph appear at the top of a frame or page, while the rest of the paragraph appears in the previous frame or page.


Choose the minimum number of lines that can be isolated at the bottom of the selected frame or page.

An orphan occurs when the first lines of a paragraph appear by themselves at the bottom of a frame or page, while the rest of the paragraph appears in the following frame or page.


Controls the first baseline and pair kerning for text.


Choose where the first line of text begins. Choosing Cap Height aligns uppercase letters with the top of the frame or page. Choosing Inter-Line moves text down by an amount equal to its interline spacing. Interline spacing is the spacing between lines of text in a paragraph.


Choose whether pair kerning is on or off. Kerning reduces the spacing between two consecutive characters. With certain letter pairs, such as AV, moving the letters closer together improves their appearance when printed.


Controls the vertical justification for the selected frame.


Choose the type of vertical justification for the selected frame or page. Vertical justification is the process that forces text to reach the exact bottom of each frame or page by adding vertical space between lines of text.

Carding adds spaces in increments equal to the interline spacing; feathering adds space as it is needed.


Type the maximum amount of space you want between elements, such as paragraphs and tables, during vertical justification. For example, typing 200% doubles all the maximum settings specified for each element.


Choose whether the selected frame can be moved when Corel VENTURA vertically justifies pages. If you choose Off, Corel VENTURA does not add any space above or below the frame.


Type the maximum amount of space Corel VENTURA can add above the frame when it vertically justifies pages.

You can change the unit of measurement by right-clicking the Maximum At Top box, clicking Units, and clicking a unit of measurement.


Type the maximum amount of space Corel VENTURA can add below the frame when it vertically justifies pages.

You can change the unit of measurement by right-clicking the Maximum At Bottom box, clicking Units, and clicking a unit of measurement.


The unit of measurement used to determine the maximum amount of space at the bottom of the frame. You can change the unit of measurement by right-clicking the Maximum At Bottom box, clicking Units, and clicking a unit of measurement.


The unit of measurement used to determine the maximum amount of space at the top of the frame. You can change the unit of measurement by right-clicking the Maximum At Top box, clicking Units, and clicking a unit of measurement.


Frame Properties (General)


For more information regarding frames, see:

•	Setting frame fill

•	Working with caption frames

•	Creating vertical rules on a frame or page

•	Setting the name for frames and frame anchors

•	Using frames

•	Viewing formatting differences from an item's tag

For more information regarding pages, see:

•	Filling objects

•	Creating vertical rules on a frame or page

•	Page layout and design

•	Viewing formatting differences from an item's tag


Controls the frame or page fill.


Displays a preview of the frame or page fill.


Choose the frame tag to apply to the selected frame or the page tag to apply to the page.


Choose a location for the frame caption.


Type a name for the selected frame.


Click this button to edit the fill.


Enable this check box to overprint the fill. The Overprint Fill option causes obscured portions of objects to print when they are under the overprinted object's fill.


Click this button to create vertical rules and specify settings for them.


Frame Tag Properties


For more information about frame tags, see:

•	Setting frame fill

•	Working with caption frames

•	Creating vertical rules on a frame or page

•	Using frame tags

For more information about page tags, see:

•	Filling objects

•	Creating vertical rules on a frame or page

•	Using page tags


Enable this check box to omit the frame height specification from the frame tag.


Enable this check box to omit the frame width specification from the frame tag.


Enable this check box to omit a specific horizontal position from the frame tag.


Enable this check box to omit a specific vertical position from the frame tag.


Choose the frame tag that applies to the selected frame or the page tag that applies to the page.


Page Properties


For more information, see the following:

•	Setting page size and orientation

•	Hiding headers or footers on a page

•	Rotating the contents of a page


Choose a paper size for the page.


Controls the size of the page.


Click this button to give the page a portrait orientation. Portrait orients the page so that it prints from left to right across its shortest dimension.


Click this button to give the page a landscape orientation. Landscape orients the page so that it prints from left to right across its longest dimension.


Type the page width.

You can change the unit of measurement by right-clicking the Width box, clicking Units, and clicking a unit of measurement.


The unit of measurement used to determine the width of the page. You can change the unit of measurement by right-clicking the Width box, clicking Units, and clicking a unit of measurement.


Type the page height.

You can change the unit of measurement by right-clicking the Height box, clicking Units, and clicking a unit of measurement.


The unit of measurement used to determine the height of the page. You can change the unit of measurement by right-clicking the Height box, clicking Units, and clicking a unit of measurement.


Enable this check box to show the header on the page.


Enable this check box to show the footer on the page.


Type an angle of rotation for the page's contents. A positive value rotates clockwise, while a negative value rotates counterclockwise.


Displays a preview of the page's layout.


Enable this check box if you have text that is in a frame that is layered behind the page, and you want the text to appear on the page. Text does not appear if the page has a fill or a picture.


Controls the vertical justification for the page.


Contols the frame or page fill.


Displays the differences between the frame's or page's current settings and the frame or page tag.

You can update the frame or page tag to include these differences by clicking the Update Tag button.


New from template


Click this button to use the content and formatting of an existing publication as the starting point for the new publication.


Click this button to use an existing publication as a template for the new publication. If the publication you want to use isn't displayed, click the Browse button to locate it.


Click this button to locate the publication you want to use as a template for the new publication.


Displays the sample templates and the publications you can use to create a new publication. If the publication you want to use isn't displayed, click the Browse button to locate it.

To add your own publication to this list, save it in the Ventura/Samples folder and it will appear on the General tab. If you create a new folder in the Sample folder, the name of the folder appears as a separate tab in the New From Template dialog box.


Click to display large icons.


Click to display small icons.


Click to display details, such as file size.


Enable the check box beside each item you want to include in the new publication.

Click the plus sign to display the contents of each chapter.


Import Text


Enable this check box to add the file to the File List. The File List displays an alphabetical list of all text and picture files available for placement in the current chapter.


Enable this check box to add the file at the current location of the cursor.


Enable this check box to set the text file to export on save. Using the Export On Save option, you can create a text file that is linked to an application outside of Corel VENTURA.


Enable this check box to suppress PANOSE Font Matching. PANOSE Font Matching provides replacement fonts for fonts that are used in a publication but are not installed on your computer. If you disable PANOSE Font Matching, fonts will be substituted according to a Corel VENTURA substitution table.


Enable this check box to ignore the text file's markup codes. Markup codes apply formatting to a text file.


Enable this check box to ignore the text file's paragraph styles. All text is assigned the Body Text paragraph tag by default. This check box does not effect text files which use Corel VENTURA markup code.


Import Picture


Enable this check box to link to a high resolution file. OPI is a way for you to include high-resolution scanned pictures in your publication without dramatically increasing the file size. For more information, see "Using Open Prepress Interface."


Enable this check box to embed the picture file in the Corel VENTURA publication.


Export Text


Enable this check box to export the text file without the VENTURA markup code. Corel VENTURA uses this coding to format your publication.

This check box is not accessible to RTF text files.


Click this button to set the export options for RTF text files.

This button is only accessible to RTF text files.


Export Text (RTF Export Options dialog box)


For more information, see "Exporting text."


Choose the type of markup code that the character tags in the RTF text file export with.


Choose the type of markup code that the color in the RTF text file exports with.


Choose the type of markup code that the paragraph overrides in the RTF text file export with. If you choose RTF & Corel VENTURA Markup, the text is exported with RTF markup codes if possible and Corel VENTURA markup codes if RTF codes can't be used.


Choose the type of markup code that the paragraph tags in the RTF text file export with.


Choose the type of markup code that the special characters in the RTF text file export with. If you choose RTF & Corel VENTURA Markup, the text is exported with RTF markup codes if possible and Corel VENTURA markup codes if RTF codes can't be used.


Choose the type of markup code that the special items in the RTF text file export with. If you choose RTF & Corel VENTURA Markup, the text is exported with RTF markup codes if possible and Corel VENTURA markup codes if RTF codes can't be used.


Choose the type of markup code that the tables in the RTF text file export with.


Choose the type of markup code that the text attributes in the RTF text file export with. If you choose RTF & Corel VENTURA Markup, the text is exported with RTF markup codes if possible and Corel VENTURA markup codes if RTF codes can't be used.


Find and Replace


Type the text you want to search for. To search for text attributes (font, color, underlining, etc.) only, leave the Find box empty.

If you are searching for a tag, choose the tag name.

You can search for text with letters in common by using a wildcard:

To find	Example

Any single character, use ?	b?t finds "bat" and "bet."

Any string of characters, use *	b*d finds "bad" and "battered."

To search for the characters *, ?,<, > and \ precede the character with \ [image] for example to search for ? type \?.


If you are searching for text or an attribute, choose Text. If you are searching for a tag, choose the type of tag.


Click this button to find the next instance of the text, attribute, or tag specified in the Find box.


Click this button to change the text, attribute, or tag to what you specified in the Replace box, and to proceed to the next instance of the text, attribute, or tag.


Click this button to find and replace all the instances of the text, attribute, or tag specified in the Find box with the text, attribute, or tag in the Replace box. These replacements are made at the same time rather than on an instance by instance basis.


Click this button to choose a publication element, such as a cross-reference, footnote, or frame anchor, to search the publication for or to replace the found item with.

The cursor must be planted in the Find or the Replace list box in order to access the Items button. If the cursor is planted in either of these boxes, but the item in the box is a tag, you still cannot access the Items button.


Click this button to choose a special character, such as an em dash, a tab, or a line break, to search the publication for or to replace the found item with.

The cursor must be planted in the Find or the Replace list box in order to access the Special button. If the cursor is planted in either of these boxes, but the item in the box is a tag, you still cannot access the Special button.


Type the text, attribute, or tag which you want to replace the text, attribute, or tag in the Find box with. Leave the Replace box empty if you want to delete the text or attribute you are searching for. If you are searching for a tag, leaving the Replace box empty produces no result.


If you want to replace the item in the Find box with text, choose Text. If you want to replace it with a tag, choose the type of tag.


Displays the text attributes you specify through the Attribute button.


Choose the text attributes, such as font type, underline, or font color, that you want to add to the find or the replace section. These attributes appear in the spaces below the Find and Replace list boxes.


Click this button to access controls that let you limit your search to letter case, whole words, or the active chapter. You can also search forward and backward.


Type the name of the marker. Markers act as targets for cross-references and hyperlinks.


For more information, see the following:

•	Using endnotes

•	Using footnotes


If you access this box while your cursor is planted in the Find box, type the footnote or endnote text you want to look for. If you access this box while your cursor is planted in the Replace box, type the text you want to place in the footnote or endnote.


If you access this box while your cursor is planted in the Find box, type the hidden text you want to look for. If you access this box while your cursor is planted in the Replace box, type the hidden text you want to use as replacement text.


Find and Replace (date and time)


Choose the style you want the date and time to display in.


Enable to insert the date and time as markup code that displays the date and time that you last used when you saved your publication or when you updated the numbering in your publication.


Choose the language you want the date and time to appear in.


Click this button to customize the date and time settings.


These controls let you customize the format in which the date and time display in your publication.


Type the format codes in the order in which you want the date and time to appear. The format codes are case sensitive.

You can include your own text before or after the date and time format codes by typing the text in quotation marks.


Displays a preview of your custom format.


Click this button to save your custom format.


Click this button to delete a custom format you no longer need.


find and replace (frame anchor)


Type the name of the frame anchor you want to find.


find and replace (variable markers)


Choose a variable from the list.

A variable is a placeholder for text that changes according to the variable's definition. You can insert variables for information that is likely to change during preparation of the publication. When you change the variable definitions, all of the variable markers show the new information.


find and replace (hyperlink)


Choose the type of hyperlink you want to find.


Type the text that appears in your publication at the location of the hyperlink you want to find.


Choose how the item called by the hyperlink displays.

Default loads the hyperlink to your browser's default.

Top redraws the window with the new URL, regardless of the current frame layout.

Parent loads the hyperlink in the Frameset parent of the document.

Self loads the URL into the same frame from which the hyperlink was launched.

Blank launches a new browser and blank window and displays the document there.


Choose the type of link.


Choose the marker that is associated with the hyperlink. Markers act as targets for hyperlinks.

This list box is only accessible if Chapter or Any are selected in the Type list box.


find and replace (options)


Enable this check box to search only the active chapter.


Enable this check box to search the publication from its beginning. If the Current Chapter check box is enabled, it searches the active chapter from its beginning.


Enable this check box to search the publication from its finish to its beginning. If the Current Chapter check box is enabled, it searches the active chapter from its finish to its beginning.


Gives the replacement text the same capitalization as the search text.


Searches for text with the same capitalization as the search text.


Searches only for complete words and doesn't search for instances where the search word is part of a larger word. For example, if you enable Match Whole Word and search for the word "place", words containing "place", such as "replace" or "placement", won't be found.


Publication Information


Displays the name of the publication you are viewing information for.


Insert Hyperlink


Lets you control the type of Internet protocol the hyperlink uses.


Click this button to create a hyperlink that jumps to an Internet URL.


Click this button to create a hyperlink that jumps to an email address.


Click this button to create a hyperlink that jumps to a file.


Click this button to create a hyperlink that jumps to a chapter.


Choose the .MAP file that you want to use as an image map.


Click this button to create an image map. An image map is a hypergraphic found in an HyperText Markup Language (HTML) document that contains clickable areas that link to Universal Resource Locators (URLs) on the World Wide Web.


Type the text you want to appear in your publication at the location of the hyperlink.


Lets you control the attributes of the hyperlink.


Type the Internet URL the hyperlink jumps to.


If you are creating a hyperlink to an Internet URL, click this button to go to the Internet URL you specified in the URL box.

If you are creating a hyperlink to a file, click this button to find the location and filename of that file.


Choose one of the following methods for the hyperlink to appear on the monitor:

•	Default [image] loads the hyperlink to your browser's default

•	Top [image] redraws the window with the new URL, regardless of the current frame layout

•	Parent [image] loads the hyperlink in the Frameset parent of the document

•	Self [image] loads the URL into the same frame from which the hyperlink was launched

•	Blank [image] launches a new browser and blank window and displays the document there


Type the email address you want the hyperlink to jump to.


Type the location and filename of the file you want the hyperlink to jump to.


Choose the chapter you want the hyperlink to jump to.


Choose the text marker that you want the hyperlink to be associated with.

The Marker list box is only accessible when you are creating a hyperlink using a chapter.


Click this button to add or remove HTML attributes from the hyperlink you are creating.


Provides a helpful hint on how to create a hyperlink. Try clicking a new radio button (for instance, the File radio button or the Email Address radio button) to see the hint change.


Click this button to add the attribute you specified.


Type the name of the HTML code in the Name column. Type the value of the attribute in the Value column.


Click this button to delete the selected attribute.


Click this button to change the attributes of the Display Text.


Zoom


Click this button to zoom in closer to the publication.


Click this button to display the publication at its actual size.


Click this button to zoom out from the publication.


Type a custom magnification factor.


Type the number of pages you want displayed across the width of the document window.


Displays adjacent pages in a double-sided publication side-by-side.


Click to display the full page.


Click to display the full height of the page.


Click to display the full width of the page.


Change Password (Publication Properties-multiuser tab)


Type the current password.


Type the new password.


Type the new password again to confirm it.


Chapter Properties (Footnotes and Endnotes tabs-convert button)


Click this button to convert all of the endnotes in your publication to footnotes. All of the endnotes are converted, not just selected entries.


Click this button to convert all of the footnotes in your publication to endnotes. All of the footnotes are converted, not just selected entries.


Click this button to access the Convert Notes dialog box, where you can convert your footnotes to endnotes or your endnotes to footnotes.


Print (Options tab)


Enable this check box if you are publishing an Adobe Acrobat document and you want to generate hyperlinks from cross-references and entries in the table of contents and index.


Type a value in the Thickness column to set the size of the specified line.

If you want Corel VENTURA to automatically adjust the thickness of the line, enable the Auto-adjust To Font check box.


Type a value in the Baseline Shift column to set the position of specified line: typing a positive value shifts the line up; typing a negative value shifts the line down.


Type the font size for the specified character in the Font column.


Type the position for the specified character in the Baseline Shift column.


Multiuser (Enter Password)


Displays the name of the publication you are opening.


Displays your user name.


Type your password to access the publication.


Multiuser (create multiuser publication)


Enable the check box to create a working copy. A multiuser publication must have both a master copy and a working copy.


Enable the check box to open the existing working copy on your computer.


Navigator (file/page tag exists)


Click this button to rename the file.


Click this button to replace the existing file with the new file.


Click the Replace button to replace the existing file with the new file or click the Rename button to rename the new file.


Click the Replace button to replace the existing page tag with the new page tag or click the Rename button to rename the new page tag.


Click this button to rename the page tag.


Click this button to replace the existing page tag with the new page tag.


For more information, see "Using publication statistics, notes, and keywords."


Fit artistic text to path


Choose how you want to arrange the letters on the path.


Choose how you want to position the text vertically with respect to the path.


Enable this check box to flip the text to the opposite side of the path and reverse the path's start and end nodes.


Click a triangle to determine side of the graphic object which the text fits around.


Specify how far above or below the path you want to position the text.


Specify how far along the path you want to position the text.


Changing default fill, outline pen, outline color


Click OK to change the default outline color for graphics. Click Cancel to exit the dialog box without making changes.


Click OK to change the default outline pen for graphics. Click Cancel to exit the dialog box without making changes.


Click OK to change the default fill for graphic objects. Click Cancel to exit the dialog box without making changes.


Navigator Properties


Enable this check box to show the drive letter and folder name where files are stored.


Enable this check box to show filenames that extend beyond the width of the VENTURA Navigator window.


Enable this check box to show the file extensions for text and picture files.


Save Texture As


Type the name of the new texture.


Choose the library in which you want to save the new texture.


Header/footer format


Describes the selected format.


Click a picture to apply a preset header.


Use the arrow buttons to move up or down the list of preset headers.


Click a picture to apply a preset footer.


Use the arrow buttons to move up or down the list of preset footers.


Type the text you want to appear on the first and second lines of the header.


Type the text you want to appear on the first line of the header.


Type the text you want to appear on the second line of the header.


Type the text you want to appear on the first and second lines of the footer.


Type the text you want to appear on the first line of the footer.


Type the text you want to appear on the second line of the footer.


Cut and delete tags (from tag window)


Choose the tag you want to delete.


Choose the tag you want to reformat with.


Load File into Chapters


Click this button to import the file into all of the chapters in your publication.


Click the chapter you want to import the file into.


Toolbars (Print Preview)


Click this button to customize the toolbar display.


Drag the slider to the right to increase the size of the button.


Drag the slider to the right to increase the size of the border.


Enable to show the text associated with buttons below the image.


Enable to show titles on floating toolbars.


Publish As HTML


Click the Yes button to overwrite the existing HTML file.


Click to overwrite all existing HTML files for the publication.


Manage Paragraph Properties


Click to remove the properties from the tag selected in the list box. Select the properties you want to remove in the Select Properties section.


Click to apply an item as a property of the tag selected in the list box.


Choose a tag to which you want to apply the overridden properties.


Enable to select all of the listed properties.


Enable to select alignment.


Enable to select breaks.


Enable to select hyphenation.


Enable to select indents.


Enable to select font, size, style, and color.


Enable to select drop caps or bullet.


Enable to select rules.


Enable to select spacing.


Enable to select tabs.


Enable to select typography.


Enable to view information on the file.


Enable to view information on the publication.


Enable to view information on the fonts used in the publication.


Click to print the information displayed in the Publication Information dialog box.


Click to save the information in the Publication Information dialog box.


Displays publication information. You determine what information is displayed by enabling the File, Publication, or Fonts check boxes. You can enable all three check boxes, two check boxes, or just one check box.


Click to insert the selected symbol or special character into the publication at the position of the insertion point.


Manage Paragraph Properties dialog box

Use this dialog box to apply overridden properties to the selected paragraph's tag or to remove them from the selected paragraph. Overridden properties are properties that have been applied to the paragraph but are not part of the paragraph's tag. This dialog box allows you to select which overridden properties you want applied to the tag or which overridden properties you want removed. When you apply the properties to the tag, each paragraph to which that tag is applied will be updated with the new formatting.

To remove overridden paragraph tag properties, click the Remove From button, and enable the check box for the properties you want removed.

To update overridden paragraph tag properties to the paragraph tag, click the Transfer To button, choose the paragraph tag to which you want the properties applied, and enable the check box for the properties you want removed.


To create a new rule tag, type a name in the Rule Tag Name list box. To update an existing tag, choose it from the list box.


Applies the formatting to the selected item and leaves the dialog box open.


Use theAuto-Adjust Range dialog box to redistribute shades of color for the selected bitmap. For more information, see "Correcting and adjusting bitmap tone."


The Global section allows you to define color management settings, printing default settings, Type Assist settings, bitmap effect settings, and filter types. These settings apply to all of your Corel VENTURA publications. For more information, see the following:

•	Reproducing colors accurately

•	Customizing the print preview

•	Using preset printing options

•	Specifying the chapters or pages to print

•	Managing plug-in filters

•	Changing the filters and file type association options


Choose one of the solutions from the Suggested Fix list, and click this button to correct the formatting error.


Provides a description of the formatting error.


Displays a list of the suggested solutions to the formatting error. To fix the error, click one of the suggestions from the list, and click the Apply Fix button. Or, click the Properties button. The appropriate dialog box will open allowing you to


Proceeds to the next formatting error in the publication.


Returns to the previous formatting error in the publication.


Displays the hyphenation points for the selected word.


Click the button to let Corel VENTURA open the appropriate dialog box so that you can correct the error.


Enable this check box if you want to display the Format Error dialog box which provides a brief explanation of the error.


Enable this check box if you do not want the red X displayed in frames or on pages with formatting errors.


Display information about why the formatting error has occurred. For more information, see "Fixing formatting errors in frames and pages."


Click this button to access the Fix Format Error dialog box which povides suggestions for fixing the formatting error. For more information, see "Fixing formatting errors in frames and pages."


Enable this check box if you do not what this dialog box displayed for every formatting error. With the check box enabled, the Fix Format Error dialog box, which povides suggestions for fixing the formatting error, will automatically open. If you want this dialog box displayed again, enable the Display Format Error Explanation check box in the Fix Format Error dialog box.


Enable this button to install the missing font using Bitstream Font Navigator. If the button is unavailable, you must have enabled font matching using Bitstream Font Navigator Font Catalog. For more information, see "Using Bitstream Font Navigator."


Enable this button to make the font substitution using Bitstream Font Navigator permanent. A permanent substitution means that the same substitution will be made each time a publication is opened that contains the missing font. For more information, see "Using Bitstream Font Navigator."


Displays a list of the fonts used in the publication that are not installed on your computer, and the substituted font. To change the substituted font, click a missing font, and choose a font to use as a substitute from the Use PANOSE Substitute list box.

The Status column indicates whether the substitution is permanent or temporary. A permanent substitution means that the same substitution will be made each time a publication is opened that contains the missing font. A temporary substitution means that the substitution will be made for the current session.


Enable the Use PANOSE Substitute button and choose a substitution font from the list box to use a PANOSE Font Matching substitution for the missing font. For more information, see "Using PANOSE Font Matching."


Enable this button to make the font substitution using Bitstream Font Navigator temporary. A temporary substitution means that the substitution will be made for the current session. For more information, see "Using Bitstream Font Navigator."


Displays a list of the files that were exported when the publication was saved, but can no longer be located. The files in this list will still appear in the publication, and will be exported again when you save the publication.


Outline pen


Enable this check box to apply the fill behind the graphic object so that only the portion of the outline that is outside the perimeter of the graphic object is visible. With this check box disabled, the outline will be applied over the graphic object and will straddle its perimeter.


Type a value in the Angle box to change the angle of the nib.


Choose an arrowhead to apply to the start of an open path or a line drawn with the Freehand tool or the Bezier tool.


Choose an arrowhead to apply to the end of an open path or a line drawn with the Freehand tool or the Bezier tool.


Click this button to display a menu of options for editing, creating, and deleting arrowheads.


Use this section of the dialog box to define options for adding arrowheads to the starting an ending points of open paths.


Enable the 4X check box to magnify the central point of the arrowhead. The central point is indicated by an X.


Displays a magnified, editable image of your arrowhead. You can edit the arrowhead using the following controls:

Drag a node marked in red to stretch the arrowhead in one direction.

Drag a node marked in red to scale the arrowhead evenly.

Drag a node marked in red to move the arrowhead without changing its size or shape.


Click the Center In X button to center the arrowhead horizontally along the line.


Click the Reflect In X button to flip the arrowhead horizontally along the line.


Click the Center In Y button to center the arrowhead vertically along the line.


Click the Reflect In Y button to flip the arrowhead vertically along the line.


Use this section of the dialog box to define the nib shape and angle to create calligraphic effects.


Choose a color for the outline fill.


Use this section to select a corner shape when lines meet at the corner of a frame or graphic object.


Choose a style for the outline from the list box. If you want to edit the style, choose a style, and click the Edit Style button.


Click the Default button to reset the Stretch and Angle values to their default settings.


Choose a style for the outline from the Style list box, and click the Edit Style button to access the Edit Line Style dialog box in which you can change the spacing of the outline.


Type a value in the Stretch box to determine the effect that you want. Lower values create a more pronounced calligraphic effect.


Use this section to select a line cap for the outline.


Enable this button to apply square the ends of the outline.


Enable this button to apply rounded ends to the outline. The diameter of the line cap is equal to the width of the line and causes the line to extend slightly beyond the frame or graphic object.


Enable this button to apply square ends that extend half of the line width beyond the end of the line.


Enable this button to apply a square corner when lines meet at the corner of a frame or graphic object.


Enable this button to apply a rounded corner when lines meet at the corner of a frame or graphic object.


Enable this button to truncate the corner when lines meet at the corner of a frame or graphic object.


Previews the shape and orientation of the nib, showing the effects of the Stretch and Angle values.

You can also change the shape and angle of the nib by dragging in the preview box. To change the Stretch value, click the center of the previewed shape and drag to set the size. To change the Angle value, click towards the outer edge and drag to rotate the nib.


Type a value for the thickness of the outline. To change the units, click a unit from the list box.


Click a unit for the width of the outline from the list box.


Object Properties dialog box


Outline page


Click this button to adjust the settings for the outline.


Removes the outline from the selected graphic object.


Type a value for the thickness of the outline.


Details page


Displays the distance from the top-left edge of the page to the center of the graphic object's selection box.


Type a value to set the height of the selected graphic object.

To change the units of measure, right-click the box, click Units, and click a unit.


Displays the distance from the top-left edge of the page to the position of the center of rotation for the graphic object.


Type a value to set the width of the selected graphic object.

To change the units of measure, right-click the box, click Units, and click a unit.


Type a value to set the horizontal position of the graphic object's top-left selection handle relative to the page margin.

To change the units of measure, right-click the box, click Units, and click a unit.


Type a value to set the vertical position of the graphic object's top-left selection handle relative to the page's top margin.

To change the units of measure, right-click the box, click Units, and click a unit.


Curve page


Displays the horizontal and vertical position of the first node from the top-left edge of the page. The horizontal distance is displayed first: the vertical distance is displayed second.


Indicates whether the curve is open, such as a line, or closed, such as a circle, ellipse, star, or rectangle. A fill can only be applied to a closed curve.


Displays the horizontal and vertical position of the last node from the top-left edge of the page. The horizontal distance is displayed first: the vertical distance is displayed second.


Displays the number of nodes along the curve object. The nodes appear when you click the curve using the Node Edit tool.


Displays the number of subpaths in the curve object. A subpath is created when you break the graphic object into smaller parts using the Node Edit tools.


Ellipse object properties


Enable a button to change the shape of the selected graphic object. To see the changes, click the Apply button.


Enable this button to draw the pie or arc in a clockwise direction.


Enable this button to draw the pie or arc in a counter-clockwise direction.


Type a value for the angle at which you want the pie or arc graphic object to begin. If you have enabled the Ellipse button, typing a value in this box will change the shape to a pie.


Type a value for the angle at which you want the pie or arc graphic object to end. If you have enabled the Ellipse button, typing a value in this box will change the shape to a pie.


Polygon shape


Type a value for the number of points you want the polygon to have; for example, a triangle has 3 points, a pentagon has 5 points, and so on. The minimum number of points in the polygon is 3: the maximum number is 500.

If you type a value, press TAB to update the example in the Sample window. If you use the arrows at the side of the number box, the example is updated automatically.


Displays the shape of the polygon. To change the shape of the polygon, type a value in the Number Of Points box.

If you type a value, press TAB to update the example in the Sample window. If you use the arrows at the side of the number box, the example is updated automatically.


Rectangle shape


Use the slider or type a value in the box to adjust the roundness of the rectangle's corners. When you round the corners of a rectangle, nodes are inserted at the corners and an arc is drawn between the new nodes. You can change the size of the arc by adjusting the corner nodes of the graphic object. If you change one of the corners, the other corners change as well.


Page Fill / Frame Fill dialog boxes


Displays controls for choosing and editing two-color, full-color, and bitmap patterns.


Click this button to adjust the settings for the selected fill.


Displays controls for choosing and editing fountain fills.


Removes the fill from the selected item.


Displays controls for choosing postscript fills.


Displays controls for choosing texture fills.


Displays controls for choosing uniform color fills.


Displays the current uniform fill color. To change the color, select a color from the palette. To adjust the color, click the Edit button.


Bitmap Pattern fill


Creates a pattern using a bitmap.


Displays a sample of the selected bitmap pattern. To select another pattern, click the sample box, and click another pattern.


Choose a color for the foreground of the pattern.


Choose a color for the background of the pattern.


Creates a full-color pattern composed of lines and fills. Full-color fills are tend to be smoother and more complex than bitmap fills and are generally easier to manipulate.


Displays a sample of the selected two color pattern. To select another pattern, click the sample box, and click another pattern.


Creates a two-color pattern using the two colors you select using the Front and Back color buttons.


Displays a sample of the selected full-color pattern. To select another pattern, click the sample box, and click another pattern.


Enable this button to specify an offset for the columns of tiles.


Opens the Two-Color Pattern Editor which allows you to design your own pattern.


Deletes the current pattern.


Type a value for the height of the tiles used to apply the fill.


Opens the Import dialog box from which you can import a graphic file to use as a pattern.


Enable this button to specify an offset for the rows of tiles.


Use this section of the dialog box to offset the rows or columns of tiles used to apply the fill.


Type an offset value for the rows or columns of tiles.


Enable this check box to fill the selected item with one tile of the pattern fill. The tile will resize to fill the entire item.


Use this section of the dialog box to adjust the size of the tiles used to apply the fill.


Enable this button to apply a preset size for the tiles used to apply the fill. If you want to specify a size, type the values in the Width and Height boxes.


Type a value for the width of the tiles used to apply the fill.


Type a value to set the placement of the first tile used to apply the fill. A positive value shifts the first tile to the right; a negative value shifts the first tile to the left.


Type a value to set the placement of the first tile used to apply the fill. A positive value shifts the first tile down; a negative value shifts the first tile up.


Use this section of the dialog box to set the placement of the first tile used to apply the fill. Positive values shift the first tile to the right or down; negative values shift the first tile to the left or up.


Click this button to display or hide controls for setting the position of the first tile used to apply the fill and the row or offsets for subsequent tiles.


Click this button to display or hide controls for setting the position of the first tile used to apply the fill and the row or column offsets for subsequent tiles.


Changes the resolution of the Two-Color Pattern Editor grid to a 16 by 16 grid. Any edits that you have made will be lost if you change the resolution.


Changes the resolution of the Two-Color Pattern Editor grid to a 32 by 32 grid. Any edits that you have made will be lost if you change the resolution.


Changes the resolution of the Two-Color Pattern Editor grid to a 64 by 64 grid. Any edits that you have made will be lost if you change the resolution.


Changes the pen size to a 1 grid square.


Changes the pen size to a 2 grid square.


Changes the pen size to a 4 grid square.


Changes the pen size to an 8 grid square.


Texture fill


Displays a sample of the selected texture fill. To select another fill, click the sample box, and click another fill.


Choose a texture library from which to select a texture fill.


Choose a texture fill from the current texture library. You can also choose a texture by clicking the sample box, and clicking a text fill. To change texture libraries, choose a new library from the list box above.


Choose a texture library from which to select a texture fill. To create a new library, type a name in the box, and click the Add button ( [image]). To remove a library, choose a library from the list, and click the Remove button ( [image]).


Displays the textures in the current texture library. Click a texture to display a preview in the window to the right.


Use this section of the dialog box to set the parameters for the current texture. Changing these parameters alters the appearance of the texture.

To view the effect of your changes to the texture's parameters, click the Preview button. If you have not made any changes, the Preview button varies the selected texture by randomly changing all unlocked parameters. Click the [image] button to lock a parameter, or click the [image] button to unlock a parameter.


Choose a color for texture parameter. To view the changes to the texture, click the Preview button.


Choose a texture library from the Texture Library list box, and click the Remove
button ( [image]) to delete the texture library.


Click this to display an overview of this dialog box.

For Help on an item, click [image] at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item.


Type a value for the parameter. To view the changes to the texture, click the Preview button.


Opens the Texture Options dialog box, which you can use to set the resolution and maximum tile width of the fill.


Choose the resolution at which the fill will print. You can also type a value in the box.


Choose a value for the maximum width of the fill at full resolution. You can also type a value in the box.


Displays the amount of memory the fill will use at the current maximum tile width. If you want to conserve memory, reduce the Maximum Tile Width value.


Restores the default settings for the selected texture fill.


Updates the texture preview to reflect any changes to the texture parameters.

If you have not made any changes, the Preview button varies the selected texture by randomly changing all unlocked parameters. Click the [image] button to lock a parameter, or click the [image] button to unlock a parameter.


Displays a sample of the selected texture fill.


Type a name in the Texture Library box, and click the Add
button ( [image]) to create a new texture library.


Fountain Fill dialog


Choose a color from which to start the fountain fill's color progression.


Choose a color with which to end the fountain fill's color progression.


Choose a style for how the fountain fill is applied.


Displays the fountain fill you have defined. You can change the orientation or rotation of the fill by clicking in the Sample window and dragging the angle indicator.


Changes the angle of linear, conical, and square fountain fills. Positive values rotate the fill counter-clockwise, negative values rotate it clockwise.


Use the Color Blend section of the dialog box to set the colors and the blend for your fountain fill. Enable the Two Color button to make the fill a blend of two colors that you select from the From and To buttons. Enable the Custom button to create a fountain fill that includes more colors and allows you to specify the position of each color in the blend.


Type a value in the Position box, and choose an intermediate color from the Current box. You can also double-click the sample box below the Position box to create a position for the color.


Displays the position of the selected intermediate color. The position is also shown by a marker along the sample box below. You can change a marker's position by adjusting the value in this box.


Displays controls that let you customize your fountain fill by adding intermediate colors. You can add up to 99 intermediate colors to the fill. You can also specify the position with the blend where you want the intermediate colors to appear.


Determines how much of the fill is comprised of the beginning and ending colors before they start blending in with the next color. Higher values allow the colors to remain solid longer before blending. Lower values result in smoother blending between the two colors. The maximum setting is 45%. The Edge Pad box is not available for conical fills.


Displays the selected fountain fill. You can change the orientation or rotation of the fill by clicking in the sample window and moving the cursor. Hold down CTRL while dragging to constrain the angle of rotation to 15 degree intervals.


Determines the intermediate colors for the fill using a counter-clockwise path around the color wheel.


Determines the intermediate colors for the fill using a clockwise path around the color wheel.


Opens the PostScript Options dialog box which you can use to adjust the halftone screen settings for spot colors.


Choose a preset from the list, and click the Remove
button ( [image]) to remove a fountain fill preset.


Choose a preset fountain fill from the Presets list box. To save a fountain fill, type a name in the Presets box, and click the Add button ( [image]). To remove a preset, choose a preset from the list, and click the Remove button ( [image]).


Type a name in the Presets box, and click the Add
button ( [image]) to save the fountain fill.


Set the position in the fill where the two colors converge. You can either move the slider or type a value in the number box.


Determines the intermediate colors for the fill using a straight line starting at the From color and ending at the To color.


Changes the appearance of fountain fills by adding or removing steps or bands used to display color blends. Increasing the number of steps provides a smoother blend of the colors, but can result in increased printing times. Decreasing the number of steps makes the color blends less smooth, an effect known as banding, but can result in faster printing times.

When the Steps box is locked, the box is grayed out and the fill prints with the number of steps specified in the Print Options dialog box and displays with the number of steps specified in the Options dialog box. When the Steps box is unlocked, you can change the value. Click the [image] button to lock the Steps box, or click the [image] button to unlock the box.


Displays controls to set the starting and ending colors of your fill, and the path that the colors follow across the color wheel; for example, a straight line, a clockwise path, or a counter-clockwise path.


Choose a type to specify how the fountain fill is applied.


Changes the appearance of a radial, conical, or square fountain fill so that the center point does not appear in the center of the fill. Negative values shift the center to the left, positive values shift the center to the right.


Changes the appearance of a radial, conical, or square fountain fill so that the center point does not appear in the center of the fill. Negative values shift the center down, positive values shift the center up.


Postscript fill


Choose a PostScript fill from the list box. To view a sample of the fill, enable the Preview Fill check box.


Enable the Preview Fill check box to display a sample of the PostScript fill in the preview window.


Displays a sample of the PostScript fill if the Preview Fill check box is enabled.


Displays a list of the PostScript fills. To change the current fill, select one from the list. To display a preview of the fill, enable the Preview Fill check box.


Type a value for the parameter. To view the changes to the fill, click the Refresh button.


Regenerates the PostScript fill preview using the current parameters.


Grid & Guidelines Properties dialog box


Grid tab


Type the number of horizontal and vertical grid lines you want per unit of measurement. To space the lines less than one whole unit apart, type fractional values; for example, to space the grid lines at half inch intervals, type 0.5.

To change the unit of measure, right-click the Horizontal or Vertical box, click Units, and click a unit.


Type values for the horizontal (X) and vertical (Y) starting point for the grid relative to the upper-left corner of the page.

To change the unit of measure, right-click the X or Y box, click Units, and click a unit.


Guidelines tab


Type a value in the Horizontal or Vertical box, and click the Add button to set the position of guidelines relative to the top or the left edge of the page.

To change the unit of measure, right-click the Horizontal or Vertical box, click Units, and click a unit.


Removes all of the existing horizontal or vertical guidelines on a page. Click the Horizontal or Vertical box, and then click the Clear All button to remove the existing Horizontal or Vertical guidelines.


Choose a guideline from the Horizontal or Vertical list, and click the Delete button to remove the guidelines from the page.


Type a value in the Horizontal box, and click the Add button to set the position of guidelines relative to the top of the page. If you want to move an existing guideline, choose it from the list, type a new value, and click the Move button.

To change the unit of measure, right-click the Horizontal box, click Units, and click a unit.


Displays the position of existing horizontal guidelines for the page.


Choose a guideline from the Horizontal or Vertical list, type a new value in the Horizontal or Vertical box, and click the Move button to change the position of the guideline.


Type a value in the Vertical box, and click the Add button to set the position of guidelines relative to the left edge of the page. If you want to move an existing guideline, choose it from the list, type a new value, and click the Move button.

To change the unit of measure, right-click the Vertical box, click Units, and click a unit.


Displays the position of existing vertical guidelines for the page.


Add-ons dialog box


Displays information about the selected add-on function.


Click the New button to install an add-on.


Displays the location of the selected add-on. For example, the VENTURA8 add-on, provided with Corel VENTURA 8, is located in the X:\COREL\GRAPHICS8\VENTURA\ADDONS folder where "X" indicates the drive where you installed Corel VENTURA.


Choose an add-on function from the Currently Installed Add-ons window, and click the Run button to execute the add-on's function. If the add-on's functions are not displayed, click the plus sign ( [image]). If no add-ons are listed in the Currently Installed Add-ons list, click the New button, and choose the add-on you want to install.


Displays the currently installed add-ons. You can click the plus sign ( [image]) next to the add-on to display the functions of that add-on. If no add-ons are listed in the Currently Installed Add-ons list, click the New button, and choose the add-on you want to install.


Removes an installed add-on. Choose the add-on from the Currently Installed Add-ons list, and click the Uninstall button to remove the add-on. The add-on is not deleted from your computer, and you can install it again if you want to use it.


Tag Window


Click the tab corresponding to the tags you want to display, edit, or apply in the current publication.

For more information about using the Tag Window, see "Managing tags and stylesheets."


Displays properties for each tag. You can change the properties by clicking the box twice to display a list box or a number box, and then choosing a property or typing a value.

For more information about using the Tag Window, see "Managing tags and stylesheets."


Import tags dialog boxes


Displays the filename of the publication from which you are importing tags.


Selects all of the tags listed in the dialog box. The tags listed are only tags of the type selected in the Tag Window. For example, if the Paragraph tab in the Tag Window is displayed, the tags listed will be paragraph tags.


Displays the paragraph tags you can import from the selected publication (*.VP) or stylesheet file (*.STY).


Displays the rule tags you can import from the selected publication (*.VP).


Displays the character tags you can import from the selected publication (*.VP).


Displays the tags you can import from the selected publication (*.VP) or chapter file (*.CHP).


Displays the page tags or master pages you can import from the selected publication (*.VP) or stylesheet file (*.STY).


Imports the selected tag(s) into the current publication.


Displays the tag that has the same name as a tag in the current publication. Click the Replace button to overwrite the existing tag. Click Rename to rename the tag you are importing.


Allows you to rename all of the tags you are importing if tags with the same names already exist in the publication.


Allows you to rename the tag you are importing if a tag with that name already exists in the current publication.


Replaces all of the tags in the current publication that have the same name as the tags you are importing.


Replaces the tag in the current publication with the tag you are importing.


New Tag dialog boxes


For more information, see the following:

•	Creating paragraph tags

•	Creating character tags

•	Creating frame tags

•	Creating page tags

•	Creating rule tags


Choose a tag on which to base the new tag from the Copy Properties From list box. If you want to base the tag on a formatted item (such as a page, paragraph, or frame), choose <Selected item> from the list box.


Type a name for the new tag in the New Tag Name box.


Click the New Tag Properties button to format the new tag.


Table Properties dialog box


Position tab


For more information, see the following:

•	Aligning and indenting your table

•	Changing the spacing in and around your table


Use this section of the dialog box to set the width, indent, or alignment for the table. Do any of the following:

•	Enable the Custom Width check box and type a value in the Custom Width box to set a specific width for the table. If the Custom Width check box is disabled, the table will be as wide as the page, column, or frame.

•	Choose an alignment option from the Alignment list box to set the position of the table within the column or frame.

The Alignment box is only available if the Custom Width check box is enabled. The alignment you choose will only have an effect if the table is narrower than the page, column, or frame.

•	Type the amount of space you want between the table and the edge of the page, column, or frame in the Table Indent box.

The Table Indent box is only available if the Custom Width check box is enabled. The indent you enter will only have an effect if the table is narrower than the page, column, or frame.

To change the unit of measure, right-click the Table Indent box, click Units, and click a unit.


Type the amount of space you want between the cell borders and the cell contents in the Inter-Row and Inter-Column boxes.

To change the unit of measure, right-click the box, click Units, and click a unit.


Use this section of the dialog box to specify the space above and below the table.


Type values in the At Top or the At Bottom box for the maximum amount of space Corel VENTURA can add above or below the table as it vertically justifies the page, column, or frame.

For more information about vertical justification, see "Using vertical justification." For more information about applying vertical justification to tables, see "Changing the spacing in and around your table."

To change the unit of measure, right-click the box, click Units, and click a unit.


Enable the Custom Width check box and type a value in the Custom Width box to set a specific width for the table. If the Custom Width check box is disabled, the table will be as wide as the page, column, or frame.

To change the unit of measure, right-click the Custom Width box, click Units, and click a unit.


Choose an alignment option from the Alignment list box to set the position of the table within the column or frame.

The Alignment box is only available if the Custom Width check box is enabled. The alignment you choose will only have an effect if the table is narrower than the page, column, or frame.


Type the amount of space you want between the table and the edge of the page, column, or frame in the Table Indent box.

The Table Indent box is only available if the Custom Width check box is enabled. The indent you enter will only have an effect if the table is narrower than the page, column, or frame.

To change the unit of measure, right-click the Table Indent box, click Units, and click a unit.


Type the amount of space you want between the edge of the page, column, or frame and the table in the Table Indent box.

The Table Indent box is only available if the Custom Width check box is enabled. The indent you enter will only have an effect if the table is narrower than the page, column, or frame.

To change the unit of measure, right-click the Table Indent box, click Units, and click a unit.


Type the amount of space you want between the table and the paragraph following it.

To change the unit of measure, right-click the Below box, click Units, and click a unit.


Type the amount of space you want between the table and the paragraph preceding it.

To change the unit of measure, right-click the Above box, click Units, and click a unit.


General tab


For more information, see the following:

•	Creating tables

•	Changing table and cell border properties

•	Controlling table flow and setting repeating headers

•	Changing table and column widths


Use this section of the dialog box to set the width of the columns.

Type the number corresponding to the column for which you want to adjust the width in the Column box. The columns are referenced numerically from left to right; for example, the leftmost column is column 1, the column to the right of the leftmost column is column 2. To set the width, do one of the following:

•	Enable the Proportional button to set a width that is proportional to those of the other columns in the table. A proportional-width column uses whatever space is left over after the fixed-width columns have been set. If you change the width of the table, the proportional-width columns will also change.

The value you type in the Proportional box determines how much leftover space is allocated. For example, if Column 1 is set at 4 and Column 2 at 1, the first column will be four times as wide as the second column.

•	Enable the Fixed button to set the width of the column to a specific width and type the value in the Fixed box. A fixed-width column will always remain that width even after the width of the table changes.

To change the unit of measure, right-click the Fixed box, click Units, and click a unit.


Type the number of header rows you want in the table in the Header Rows box. When a page or column break splits the table, the header rows automatically repeat in the subsequent page or column.


Type values in the Rows and Columns boxes to define the dimensions of the table.


Use this section of the dialog box to apply rules to the table borders.

Choose a rule you want to apply to the perimeter of the table from the Around list box.

Choose a rule you want to apply to the horizontal or vertical borders in the table from the Horizontal or Vertical list boxes.


Enable this check box to allow a table that is too large to fit on the page or in the column to flow to the next page or column. Disable this check box to keep the table within the same column or page. If a table is too large to fit on the page or in the column and the Allow Table To Break Across Pages check box is disabled, a red X will appear and the table will disappear. To make the table reappear, change the size of the table or enable the Allow Table To Break Across Pages option.


Choose a rule you want to apply to the perimeter of the table.


Type the number corresponding to the column for which you want to adjust the width. The columns are referenced numerically from left to right; for example, the leftmost column is column 1, the column to the right of the leftmost column is column 2.


Enable the Fixed button to set the width of the column to a specific width and type the value in the Fixed box. A fixed-width column will always remain that width even after the width of the table changes.

To change the unit of measure, right-click the Fixed box, click Units, and click a unit.


To change the unit of measure, right-click the Fixed box, click Units, and click a unit.


Choose a rule you want to apply to the horizontal borders in the table.


Enable the Proportional button to set a width that is proportional to those of the other columns in the table. A proportional-width column uses whatever space is left over after the fixed-width columns have been set. If you change the width of the table, the proportional-width columns will also change.

The value you type in the Proportional box determines how much leftover space is allocated. For example, if Column 1 is set at 4 and Column 2 at 1, the first column will be four times as wide as the second column.


Choose a rule you want to apply to the vertical borders in the table.


Skew tab


For more information, see the following:

•	Skewing your table using presets

•	Skewing your table using custom settings


Click a picture to apply preset skewing options to the table.


Type a value in the Skew Angle box to set the skew of the first column of the table. A positive value skews the column downward, and a negative value skews the column upward. You can type any value from -45° to 45°.


Type a value in the Skew Angle box to set the skew of the top row of the table. A positive value skews the row to the right, and a negative value skews the row to the left. You can type any value from -70° to 70°.


Enable this check box to leave the right border of the last cell in the skewed row flush with the rest of the table. If this check box is disabled, the skewed cell can pass outside of the page, column, or frame margin.


Enable this check box to set the skew of the text in the cells of the first column to the same angle as the column.


Use this section of the dialog box to define custom skew settings for the first column of the table.


Click the Presets button to display preset skewing options.

Click the Details button to display more advanced skewing options.


Type a value in the Row Height box to set the size of the top row of the table. This is most useful when skewing the text in the top row.

To change the unit of measure, right-click the Row Height box, click Units, and click a unit.


Displays the amount of skew as a linear measure as shown in the picture below.


Enable this check box to leave the left border of the first cell in the skewed row flush with the rest of the table. If this check box is disabled, the skewed cell can pass outside of the page, column, or frame margin.


Enable the check boxes for each cell in which you want the text skewed at the same angle as the cell. The cells are referenced from left to right; for example, the leftmost cell in the row is cell 1, the cell immediately to the right of the leftmost cell in the row is cell 2, and so on.


Use this section of the dialog box to define custom skew settings for the top row of the table.


Click the Apply button to apply the formatting to the table and keep the dialog box open.


Auto Format (tables) dialog box


Click a picture to apply preset shading and borders to a table.


Sort dialog


Enable the Ascending button to sort the data from the first letter of the alphabet, the lowest number, or the earliest date.


Enable the Case Sensitive check box to sort lowercase words before capitalized words.


Enable this option to sort only the selected column rather than the entire table.


Choose the type of data by which you want to sort the column or table; for example, text, numbers, or dates.


Enable the Descending button to sort the data from the last letter of the alphabet, the highest number, or the latest date.


Choose the column you want to use to sort the table. The columns are referenced from left to right.

If you only want to sort that column and not the entire table, enable the Sort Column Only check box.


Choose an additional column that Corel VENTURA can use to sort the table data. This column will be used to resolve sorting conflicts that arise when cells in the first column being used to sort the table contain the same information.


Choose an additional column that Corel VENTURA can use to sort the table data. This column will be used to resolve sorting conflicts that arise when cells in the first and second column being used to sort the table contain the same information.


Choose the column and the type of data by which you want Corel VENTURA to sort the table.


Choose the column and the type of data that Corel VENTURA will use to resolve sorting conflicts that arise when cells in the first column being used to sort the table contain the same information.


Choose the column and the type of data that Corel VENTURA will use to resolve sorting conflicts that arise when cells in the first and second column being used to sort the table contain the same information.


Fill Series dialog box


Enable the AutoFill button to fill the selected cells with a series based on the pattern in the cells. For more information, see "Automatically filling table cells with data."


Enable the date button to automatically fill the selected cells with a series of dates. Enable a Date Unit button to specify the unit in the date that is incremented. You can also enable the Step button in the Options section of the dialog box and type a value by which the date is incremented in the Step Value box.

For the AutoFill feature to work correctly, the date must be in a format that is recognized by Corel VENTURA. For information about date formats, see "Inserting the date and time."


Specify whether a series of dates will increase by days, weekdays, months, or years. The Date Unit options are available when the Date button is enabled in the Type section of the dialog box.


Enable the button corresponding to direction in which you want Corel VENTURA to automatically fill the selected cells.


Enable the Growth button to create a growth series or geometric growth trend. With the Growth button enabled, the Options section of the dialog box becomes active. You can enable the Step button so that each cell value is multiplied in turn by the value in the Step Value box. Or you can enable the Trend button so that a geometric growth trend is calculated based on the values in the selected cells. If you enable the Trend button, Corel VENTURA may change values that are already in the selected cells to fit the detected trend.


Enable the Linear button to create a linear series or linear best-fit trend. With the Linear button enabled, the Options section of the dialog box becomes active. You can enable the Step button so that each cell value increases or decreases by the amount in the Step Values box. Or you can enable the Trend button so that a linear trend is calculated based on the values in the selected cells. If you enable the Trend button, Corel VENTURA may change values that are already in the selected cells to fit the detected trend.


Use the Options section of the dialog box to define a step value for the series or to define a trend.

Enable the Step button and type a value in the Step Value box to specify the amount by which to increase or decrease the series. Only one value is required in the selected cells, but it must be the first or last cell in the selection.

Enable the Trend button to calculate a linear or exponential growth series. The step values for the trend are calculated from values in the selected cells. If the first two cells in the selection do not contain values, the data in the initial cell will repeat in the other cells in the selection.

For more information, see "Automatically filling table cells with data."


Enable the type of series you want to create.


Enable the Step button, and type a value in the Step Value box to specify the amount by which to increase or decrease the series. Only one value is required in the selected cells, but it must be the first or last cell in the selection. For more information, see "Automatically filling table cells with data."


Enable the Stop Value check box, and type a value in the Stop Value box to set the endpoint for the series.


Enable the Trend button to calculate a linear or exponential growth series. The step values for the trend are calculated from values in the selected cells. If the first two cells in the selection do not contain values, the data in the initial cell will repeat in the other cells in the selection. For more information, see "Automatically filling table cells with data."


Insert row and column dialogs


Click the After button to insert the row(s) after the selected row.


Click the Before button to insert the row(s) before the selected row.


Type the number of rows you want to insert into the table in the Rows box.


Type the number of rows you want to insert into the table in the Number box, and click the Before or After button to specify the position of the inserted rows.


Click the Before button to insert the column(s) to the left of the selected column.


Type the number of columns you want to insert into the table in the number box, and click the Before or After button to specify the position of the inserted rows. Before inserts the column to the left of the selected column; After inserts the column to the right of the selected column.


Click the After button to insert the column(s) to the right of the selected column.


Type the number of columns you want to insert into the table in the number box.


Function Wizard dialog box


Returns to the previous window.


Inserts the function in the selected cell and closes the Function Wizard dialog box.


Select the category containing the function you want to insert. Each function contained in the category is displayed in the Function Name list.


Displays a description of the selected function. For more information about Corel VENTURA table functions, see "Corel VENTURA table functions."


Select the category containing the function you want to insert. Each function is displayed in the Function Name list. A description of the function is displayed at the bottom of the dialog box.


Lists the functions contained in the selected category. To set the parameters for the function, choose the function, and click the Next button.


Proceeds to the next window.


Allows you to embed another function within a function. For more information, see "Nesting functions using the Function Wizard dialog box."


Displays the final value produced by the function. The format of the value depends on the option choosen from the Numeric Format box. If the value displayed does not seem correct, make sure you are using an appropriate number format.


Choose the format in which you want the product of the function displayed.


Use the scroll bar to display the portion of the function you want to view.


Choose a language format for some of the date and time functions.


Use this section to specify the parameters of the function. The product of the function is displayed in the Solution box. As you specify more values or parameters, the product is updated.


Describes the parameter containing the insertion point. For more information about Corel VENTURA table functions, see "Corel VENTURA table functions."


Type a value or parameter for the function.


Displays the product or sum of the values in the parameter box. For example, if you type "3 + 3" in the parameter box, this box displays "6."


Choose the value you want to convert from the list. For more information, see "Corel VENTURA conversion table functions."


Choose the value to which you want the value converted. For more information, see "Corel VENTURA conversion table functions."


Choose the format in which you want the product of the function displayed. For more information, see "Corel VENTURA conversion table functions."


Allows you to embed another function within the conversion function. For more information, see "Corel VENTURA conversion table functions."


Inserts the function in the selected cell and closes the Function Wizard dialog box. For more information, see "Corel VENTURA conversion table functions."


Use this dialog box to specify the conversion you want to perform. For more information, see "Corel VENTURA conversion table functions."


Choose a prefix for the selected metric unit. For more information, see "Corel VENTURA conversion table functions."


Type the value you want to convert. For more information, see "Corel VENTURA conversion table functions."


Displays the results of the conversion. For more information, see "Corel VENTURA conversion table functions."


VENTURA Library window


The VENTURA Library window displays the contents of a VENTURA Library file. To add an item from a VENTURA Library file to a publication, you can drag the item to your publication in VENTURA Navigator, you can drag a tag to the Tag Window, and you can drag text and picture files to a page or frame in your publication. To add an item to a VENTURA Library file, you must first check out the VENTURA Library file.


Checks in the VENTURA Library file.


Checks out the VENTURA Library file. You must check out a VENTURA Library file to be able to add items, edit items, or delete items from it.


Updates the view in the VENTURA Navigator window. This button does not update all of the cross-references in the publication.


VENTURA Library Filter Properties dialog box


Enable the Publication Components check box to display chapters, page tags, and stylesheets contained in the VENTURA Library file in the VENTURA Library window.


Enable the Files check box to display text and picture files contained in the VENTURA Library file in the VENTURA Library window.


Enable the Frames check box to display frames contained in the VENTURA Library file in the VENTURA Library window.


Enable the Graphics check box to display graphic objects and Artistic text contained in the VENTURA Library file in the VENTURA Library window.


Enable the OLE Objects check box to display OLE objects contained in the VENTURA Library file in the VENTURA Library window.


Enable the Tags check box to display paragraph, frame, character, and rule tags contained in the VENTURA Library file in the VENTURA Library window. Page tags are displayed if the Publication Components check box is enabled.


Enable the Text check box to display text items contained in the VENTURA Library file in the VENTURA Library window. Text items are created if you drag selected text from your publication to the VENTURA Library file.


VENTURA Library Find dialog box


Type the name of the item you want to find in the current VENTURA Library file, and click the Find button.


VENTURA Library Properties dialog box


Displays the date when the VENTURA Library file was created.


Displays the name and location of the VENTURA Library file.


Displays the date when the VENTURA Library file was modified.


Displays the number of items in the VENTURA Library file.


Displays the version number of the VENTURA Library file. All VENTURA Library files opened in Corel VENTURA 8 will display as a version 8 VENTURA Library file.


Displays the size of the VENTURA Library file item in bytes.


Displays the date when the item was added to the VENTURA Library file.


Provides a space for you to add a description of the VENTURA Library file item.


Displays the name of the selected VENTURA Library file item. You can change the name of the item by typing a new name in the Name box.


VENTURA Navigator


VENTURA Navigator displays the contents of open publications, lets you import picture and text files into publications, lets you move, add, and delete chapters, remove text files, and manage your indexes, cross-references, and tables of contents. You can also use VENTURA Navigator to run and manage scripts, and apply, create, and delete page tags. You can choose what VENTURA Navigator displays from the list box at the top of the VENTURA Navigator window.

For more for information about VENTURA Navigator, see "Using VENTURA Navigator."


Select a word in your publication, and click the Add button to add the word to the index. You must select the index file before you can add the word to it.


Updates the selected index file.


You can choose one of the six VENTURA Navigator display options from the list box. For more for information about VENTURA Navigator, see "Using VENTURA Navigator."


Scripts dialog box


For more information, see the following:

•	Playing back a recording and running a script

•	Editing scripts in Corel VENTURA

•	Exporting and importing scripts

•	Renaming and deleting internal scripts

•	Scripts and wizards included with Corel VENTURA


Displays the scripts available for the current publication. Internal scripts are indicated by the [image] icon, and external scripts are indicated by the [image] icon. For more information about internal and external scripts, see "Internal and external scripts."

The location of the external scripts is displayed beside the Available Scripts list. If an external script ( [image]) is not displayed, click the Browse button and locate the script.


Click the Browse button to change the folder that contains the external scripts ( [image]) listed in the Available Scripts list box. For more information about external scripts, see "Internal and external scripts."


Removes the selected internal script ( [image]) from the current publication.


Provides a description of the selected script in the Available Scripts list box. The description is stored in the script's first two lines as remark (REM) statements.


Lets you edit the selected script in the Available Scripts list box using Corel SCRIPT Editor.


Saves a copy of the selected internal script as an external script. Internal scripts are indicated by the [image] icon, and external scripts are indicated by the [image] icon. For more information about internal and external scripts, see "Internal and external scripts."


Saves a copy of the selected external script as an internal script. Internal scripts are indicated by the [image] icon, and external scripts are indicated by the [image] icon. For more information about internal and external scripts, see "Internal and external scripts."


Displays the current path for the external scripts listed in the Available Scripts list box.

Click the Browse button to change the folder that contains the external scripts ( [image]) listed in the Available Scripts list box. For more information about external scripts, see "Internal and external scripts."


Lets you rename the selected internal script ( [image]) in the Available Scripts list box.


Executes the selected script in the Available Scripts list box.


Scripts Save dialog box


Saves the script as an external script. External scripts are accessible from other publications; whereas, internal scripts are only accessible from the publication in which they are saved as an internal script. When you save a script, they are saved internally unless you click the External button.


Type a name for the script you are saving in the Name box.


Type a description for the script you are saving in the Description box. The description is stored in the script's first line as a remark (REM) statement. The description will appear in the Scripts dialog box when you select the script from the Available Scripts list box. If the script is assigned to a toolbar button, the description will appear in the Status Bar when you place the cursor over the button.


Insert Number/Cross-reference dialog box


For more information, see the following:

•	Inserting chapter and page numbers in a publication

•	Inserting figure or table numbers in a publication

•	Cross-referencing text

•	Cross-referencing a frame

•	Cross-referencing caption text

•	Cross-referencing sections


Choose the format you want to use to separate multiple references.


Choose a format for the inserted number or cross-reference.


Choose the item you want to number or the item you want to cross-reference.


Enable the Reference All Occurrences check box to display the location of each occurrence of the cross-referenced marker.


Choose the type of number or cross-reference you want to insert.


Multiuser dialog boxes


For more information, see the following:

•	Viewing a multiuser publication's check out status

•	Viewing the check out status of a VENTURA Library file


Displays who has components of a multiuser publication or a VENTURA Library file checked out.


Displays the location of the master multiuser publication or the location of the VENTURA Library file.


Chapter Properties dialog box


Counters tab (Chapter Properties)


Enable the Continue From Previous check box for each counter that you want to continue numbering from the previous chapter.


Set the starting number for each counter type for the current chapter. If you want to continue numbering from the previous chapter, enable the Continue From Previous check box.

Setting zero (0) as a start number is only valid for numeric numbering styles.


Choose a numbering style for the counters in the publication.


Counters are numbers that are used to number chapters, pages, and figures or tables in frames. Chapter and page numbers are automatically applied, and you can display them in any frame, text, header, or footer. Figure and table numbers provide two numbering schemes for numbering items in frames. For example, you can use table and figure numbers to number frames that contain tables, graphics, pictures, or text.

Counter settings for page, chapter, figure, and table numbers are set for each chapter individually. You can also choose to continue the numbering from the previous chapter, and you can specify the starting number and style for any counter.


Override counters dialogs


For more information, see the following:

•	Changing page numbering and numbering styles

•	Changing figure or table numbering and numbering styles


Enable the Increment From Last Counter check box to continue numbering from the last figure or table number.


Choose a number style for the current counter. If you want to change the numbering style for all of the counters, click Publication, Chapter Properties, click the Counters tab, and choose a number style from the Numbering Style list boxes.


Type the number at which you want this counter to start numbering in the Starting Number box.


Endnotes tab (Chapter Properties)


Click the Properties button to access the Text Properties dialog box to format the endnote reference marks in the text of the publication.

For information about formatting the endnote references at the end of the chapter, see "Formatting the tags used for footnote and endnote references."


To choose a custom numbering style for endnotes, enable the Custom Mark button and type the characters you want to use in the Custom Mark box. Each mark must be separated by a space; for example, if you want to use an asterisk (*) as your endnote reference, you must type * ** *** **** ***** in the Custom Mark box, with spaces between each incremental mark. Corel VENTURA uses the following scheme as a default for custom footnote or endnote references: * ** *** **** + ++ +++ ++++. This means that the first footnote or endnote uses the symbol * and the fifth uses +.


Enable the Endnotes check box to access the endnote formatting options and modify endnote settings. The Endnotes check box will be enabled if you have already inserted endnotes in the publication. If you have imported text that contains endnotes into the publication, you will have to enable the Endnotes check box to display the imported endnotes.


Choose a format style for how the endnote reference marks or numbers will appear in the endnotes file.


Use the options in this dialog box to format the numbering style, starting number, and properties of endnotes.

For information about formatting how endnotes appear at the end of the chapter, see "Formatting the tags used for footnote and endnote references."


To choose a preset numbering style for endnotes, enable the Number Style button and choose a style from the Number Style list box.


Type the number you want for the first endnote in the chapter in the Start Number box.


Footnotes tab (Chapter Properties)


Click the Properties button to access the Text Properties dialog box to format the footnote reference marks in the text of the publication.

For information about formatting the footnote references at the bottom of the page, see "Formatting the tags used for footnote and endnote references."


Choose whether you want to restart the footnote numbering on each page or continue in sequence throughout the chapter.


To choose a custom numbering style for footnotes, enable the Custom Mark button and type the characters you want to use in the Custom Mark box. Each mark must be separated by a space; for example, if you want to use an asterisk (*) as your footnote reference, you must type * ** *** **** ***** in the Custom Mark box, with spaces between each incremental mark. Corel VENTURA uses the following scheme as a default for custom footnote or endnote references: * ** *** **** + ++ +++ ++++. This means that the first footnote or endnote uses the symbol * and the fifth uses +.


Enable the Use Page Columns check box if you want the footnote frame to use the same columns as the page.


Enable the Footnotes check box to access the footnote formatting options and modify footnote settings. The Footnotes check box will be enabled if you have already inserted footnotes in the publication. If you have imported text that contains footnotes into the publication, you will have to enable the Footnotes check box to display the imported footnotes.


Enable the Keep With Reference check box if you want Corel VENTURA to keep footnote reference text on the same page as the footnote reference marks. With the check box enabled, Corel VENTURA may move text to the following page if there is not enough room in the footnote frame for the reference text. For more information, see "Keeping a footnote on the same page as its reference marker."


Choose a format style for how the footnote reference marks or numbers will appear in the footnote frame at the bottom of the page.


Use the options in this dialog box to format the numbering style, starting number, and properties of footnotes.

For information about formatting the footnote references at the bottom of the page, see "Formatting the tags used for footnote and endnote references."


Use the options in this section of the dialog box to define a separator line between the footnote reference text in the footnote frame and the main text in the publication.


Use the this section of the dialog box to set footnote options.


Type a value for the vertical height (or thickness) of the footnote separator line in the Height box. To access the Height box, the Add Separator Line check box must be enabled.

To change the unit of measure, right-click the Height box, click Units, and click a unit.


Type a value for the maximum height of the footnote frame.

To change the unit of measure, right-click the Height box, click Units, and click a unit.


To choose a preset numbering style for footnotes, enable the Number Style button and choose a style from the Number Style list box.


Enable the Add Separator Line to add a horizontal rule (or line) to separate the footnote text from the main text in the publication.


Type the amount of space you want between the separator line and the main text in the publication.

To change the unit of measure, right-click the Space Above box, click Units, and click a unit.


Type the number you want for the first footnote in the chapter or the page in the Start Number box.


Type a value for the horizontal width of the separator line in the Width box. To access the Width box, the Add Separator Line check box must be enabled.

To change the unit of measure, right-click the Width box, click Units, and click a unit.


General tab (Chapter Properties dialog box)


For more information, see the following:

•	Setting single- or double-sided pages for a chapter

•	Setting the interline spacing used during vertical justification

•	Using hanging punctuation

•	Applying conditions to a chapter


Click the Conditions button to define conditions for the chapter. Conditions allow you to either hide or include the chapter in the publication, depending on the conditions applied to it. For more information, see "Creating publications with conditions."


Enable the Double-Sided button if you want to use facing pages in the chapter. With the Double-Sided button enabled, Corel VENTURA will allow you to format the chapter using both left- and right-facing pages.


Use the options in this section of the dialog box to define single- or double-sided pages for the chapter and whether the chapter starts on the a left or right page.


Use the options in this section of the dialog box to define the interline snap and vertical justification settings. For more information about interline snap, see "Enabling Snap To." For more information about the interline setting for vertical justification, see "Setting the interline spacing used during vertical justification."


Click the Delete button to remove the selected set of characters from the hanging punctuation list. To delete individual characters, click in the Punctuation column and position the insertion point next to the character you want to delete, then press BACKSPACE or DELETE.


Click the Insert button, and then type the character(s) you want Corel VENTURA to treat as hanging punctuation.


Use this section of the dialog box to define hanging punctuation marks. Hanging punctuation is set outside the margins and help to eliminate the visual misalignment that occurs when punctuation falls at the beginning or end of lines of text.

To add new punctuation marks, click in the Punctuation column and type the characters you want to hang in the margins. To specify how far into the margin you want the character to extend, type the value in the Overhang % column. To edit existing settings, click in the appropriate box, and make the adjustments.


Enable the Paragraph Tag button, and choose the paragraph tag that has the interline spacing value you want to use as the interline spacing value for the Snap To Inter-Line and vertical justification settings.

For more information about interline snap, see "Enabling Snap To." For more information about the interline setting for vertical justification, see "Setting the interline spacing used during vertical justification."


Enable the Single-Sided button if you want to use single-sided pages in the chapter. With single-sided pages, all of the pages in the chapter will be either left or right pages, depending on what you have selected from the Start On list box.


Choose whether to start the chapter on a right page, left page, or either page.

If you choose Left Page or Right Page, the chapter will always start on a left or right page. If you choose Left/Either Page or Right/Either Page, the chapter will begin on either page depending on where the previous chapter ended. If it is the first chapter in the publication, it will begin on the left page if you choose Left/Either Page, and it will begin on the right page if you choose Right/Either Page.


Enable the Custom button, and type the value you want to use as the interline spacing value for the Snap To Inter-Line and vertical justification settings.

To change the units of measure, right-click the Custom box, click Units, and click a unit.

For more information about interline snap, see "Enabling Snap To." For more information about the interline setting for vertical justification, see "Setting the interline spacing used during vertical justification."


AutoNumbering tab (Chapter Properties dialog box)


Enable the Across Chapters check box to continue numbering from the previous chapter. With the Across Chapters check box enabled, the options in the dialog box are unavailable.


Click one of the boxes to apply a preset autonumbering option. You can click the Details button to adjust the settings.


Displays the autonumbering options you have defined. To change the options, use the following table.

Column	Function

Level	Shows the hierarchy of levels used in the autonumbering scheme. You can change the number of levels by typing a value in the Number Of Levels box.

Include	Enable the Include check box to include the number (or letter) of the previous level with the current level.

Prefix	Type a character or text you want to appear before the number for the current level.

Number Style	Choose a numbering style for each level.

Suffix	Type a character or text you want to appear after the number for the current level.

Paragraph Tag	Choose the paragraph tag you want to automatically number for each level. Each time a selected paragraph tag is applied in the publication, Corel VENTURA will apply a number to it when you update the publication.

Start #	Type a starting number or letter for each level. The default starting number is 1.


Click the Properties button to access the Text Properties dialog box to format the automatically generated numbers that Corel VENTURA inserts in the publication.

You can also format the numbers by formatting the paragraph tags applied to the automatically generated numbers. For example, the level 1 number uses the Z_SEC1 paragraph tag, the level 2 number uses the Z_SEC2 paragraph tag, and the level 3 number uses the Z_SEC3 paragraph tag. For more information about formatting paragraph tags, see "Formatting paragraph tags."


Enable the AutoNumbering check box to access the autonumbering options.


Click in the Prefix or Suffix box, and click the Insert button to insert a chapter number or tab character. The Insert button is only accessible if the insertion point is in the Prefix or Suffix box.


Type the number of levels of autonumbered paragraphs you want to use in the Number Of Levels box. You can use up to a maximum of 20. Each level allows you to define a different paragraph tag that Corel VENTURA will automatically number.


Click the Details button to display more advanced options, or click the Presets button to display preset options. If you choose one of the Preset autonumbering options, you can click the Details button to adjust the settings.


Typography tab (Chapter Properties dialog box)


For more information, see the following:

•	Setting the default first baseline for a chapter

•	Distributing text evenly among columns

•	Enabling automatic kerning for a chapter

•	Controlling widows and orphans

•	Setting the default vertical justification for a chapter


Use the Chapter Defaults section to define the first baseline, column balance, pair kerning, and widow and orphan settings for the chapter. The chapter settings can be changed for specific pages, page tags, frames, and frame tags used in the chapter.


Defines where the first line of text begins on a page or in a frame. Choose Cap-Height if you want the first baseline to be placed so that the uppercase letters in the paragraph align with the top margin, or choose Inter-Line if you want the first baseline to be placed at a distance equal to the interline spacing of the first paragraph on the page or in the frame.

The chapter settings can be changed for specific pages, page tags, frames, and frame tags used in the chapter.


Type a value for the maximum amount of space that Corel VENTURA can add below frames as it vertically justifies the text on a page. The setting made in the Chapter Properties dialog box is the default setting for the chapter, but you can change the setting for frames and frames tags in the chapter.

To change the unit of measure, right-click the Maximum At Bottom box, click Units, and click a unit.

For more information about vertical justification, see "Using vertical justification."


Enable the Column Balance check box if you want Corel VENTURA to automatically distribute text among the columns on a page or in a frame for the chapter. For example, you can use Column Balance when you have headings formatted to extend across columns so that the headings will not interrupt the flow of text between columns.


Enable the Also Use Automatic Hyphenation Points check box to allow Corel VENTURA to use both the automatic hyphenation points and discretionary hyphenation points for words that fall at the end of a line of text.


Choose whether Corel VENTURA can move frames as it vertically justifies pages. If you choose Moveable, Corel VENTURA will add space above the frame if it is necessary. If you choose Fixed, no space will be added above the frame, and the frame will remain in the same position on the page even when vertical justification is applied.

This setting is the default setting for the chapter, but you can change the setting for frames and frame tags.

For more information about vertical justification, see "Using vertical justification."


The Within Frame/Page list box lets you control how Corel VENTURA adds space to make the text reach the bottom of the page, frame, or column using vertical justification. You can choose Carding, which adds space in increments equal to the interline spacing, or you can choose Feathering, which adds the exact amount of space needed to make the text align with the bottom of the page, frame, or column.

If you want the text in adjacent columns to line up, choosing Carding produces better results. However, you can try to minimize the discrepancies by setting the spacing for all paragraphs in the publication to be multiples of the interline spacing.

For more information about vertical justification, see "Using vertical justification."


Type a value for the maximum amount of space Corel VENTURA can add between lines of text, between paragraphs, around tables, and around frames when vertical justification is applied in the Maximum Justification box. For example; if the value in the Maximum Justification box is 100%, Corel VENTURA can add the full amount of the interline space setting to vertically justify the text on the page or in the frame. If the value in the Maximum Justification box is 200%, Corel VENTURA can add twice the full amount of the interline space setting.

For more information about vertical justification, see "Using vertical justification."


Type a value for the minimum number of orphan lines that can appear in the chapter. Orphans are lines of text that are isolated at the top of a page, frame, or column. By default Corel VENTURA sets this value to 2, but you can set the value between 1 and 5 lines of text.

You can change the setting for pages, page tags, frames, and frame tags used in the chapter.


Enable the Pair Kerning check box to allow Corel VENTURA to automatically apply kerning values set in the Edit Tracking & Kerning dialog box.

Pair Kerning is available for fonts that have built-in kerning information or for the kerning values you set in the Edit Tracking & Kerning dialog box. Type 1 and TrueType fonts have this information already defined; whereas most symbol fonts, such as Wingdings and Dingbats, do not. For more information about kerning, see "Adjusting kerning."


Type a value for the maximum amount of space that Corel VENTURA can add above frames as it vertically justifies the text on a page. The setting made in the Chapter Properties dialog box is the default setting for the chapter, but you can change the setting for frames and frames tags in the chapter.

To change the unit of measure, right-click the Maximum At Bottom box, click Units, and click a unit.

For more information about vertical justification, see "Using vertical justification."


Type a value for the minimum number of widow lines that can appear in the chapter. Widows are lines of text that are isolated at the bottom of a page, frame, or column. By default Corel VENTURA sets this value to 2, but you can set the value between 1 and 5 lines of text.

You can change the setting for pages, page tags, frames, and frame tags used in the chapter.


Use the Vertical Justification section of the dialog box to define the default vertical justification settings for the chapter. Vertical justification is the process that forces text to reach the exact bottom of each column, frame, or page by adding space between paragraphs, between lines of text, and above and below frames and tables. The chapter settings will apply to pages and frames in the chapter, but you can change these settings for specific pages, page tags, frames, and frame tags.

For more information about vertical justification, see "Using vertical justification."


Insert Index Entry dialog box


Creates a category for index entries. Categories allow you to create multiple indexes in the same publication. For more information, see "Using categories to create multiple indexes."


Choose the index entry, and click the Properties button to access the Text Properties dialog box to format the index entry.

You can also format how the index appears by formatting the paragraph tags applied to the index entries when the index is displayed in the publication. For more information, see "Formatting an index."


Deletes the selected category. Categories allow you to create multiple indexes in the same publication. For more information, see "Using categories to create multiple indexes."


Choose the category to which you want to assign the index entry. Categories allow you to create multiple indexes in the same publication. For more information, see "Using categories to create multiple indexes."


Choose the type of index entry you want to insert from the Type list box. Index Entry inserts a normal index entry; See and See Also inserts a cross-referenced index entry.


Displays the index entry, the level for the entry, and the sort key used to organize the entry in the index.

The # column displays the level of each entry. You can have up to 14 levels for an index entry. Level 1 is the main entry, and subsequent levels are subentries which appear below the main index entry. For example, a level 1 entry appears under the index letter heading in the index, level 2 entries appear under the level 1 entry, and so on.

The Index Entry column displays the word containing the insertion point or the index entry being edited. You can change the entry by typing in the Index Entry column.

The Sort column allows you to insert index entries under different letters in the index. For example, you can insert "1998" under "N," by changing the Sort Key entry in the Insert Index Entry or Edit Index Entry dialog box. If you use sort keys, you cannot assign the same sort key to more than one index entry. For example, an "N" cannot be used as the sort key for the index entries 1997, 1998, and 1999. To have these entries appear under N, you can use N as the sort key for one of the entries, NN or NI for another, and NNN or NIN for another entry.


Type the number of subentries you want to appear below the main index entry. A level 1 entry appears under the index letter heading in the index, level 2 entries appear under the level 1 entry, and so on.


Table Of Contents/Index Properties dialog box


Select the text in the Prefix, Number Format, or Suffix box, and click the Properties button to access the Text Properties dialog box to format how the text is displayed when the index is inserted into the publication.

You can also format how the index appears by formatting the paragraph tags applied to the index entries when the index is displayed in the publication. For more information, see "Formatting an index."


Choose the chapter to which you want the index file saved from the Chapter list box. You can either type a name for the chapter or choose an existing chapter. If you type a name for the chapter, Corel VENTURA will create a new chapter with that name.

Type a name for the index file in the File list box. You can also choose an existing file from the list box. If you choose an existing file, the file will be overwritten when the index file is updated.


Displays the category names that you have created for the index entries in the publication. Enable the check box next to a category to include entries assigned to that category in the index. The Default category is created by Corel VENTURA and is the category to which all index entries are assigned unless you create another index category.

Categories allow you to create multiple indexes in the same publication. For more information, see "Using categories to create multiple indexes."


Choose the chapter to which you want the index file saved. You can either type a name for the chapter or choose an existing chapter. If you type a name for the chapter, Corel VENTURA will create a chapter with that name.


Choose a character to separate multiple index entries from the Delimiter list box. You can also type in a specific character if you want to use a character that is not in the list.


Type a name for the index file in the File list box. You can also choose an existing file from the list box. If you choose an existing file, the file will be overwritten when then index file is updated.


Displays the formatting you have defined for how the index entries appear when the index is inserted into the publication.

Click in the Number Format column, and choose a preset numbering format, or click the Insert button and insert page numbers, chapter numbers, or tab characters. The preset numbering formats insert a combination of chapter [C#] and page numbers [P#] either with or without prefixes; for example, "Pg" and "Chp."

Click in the Prefix or Suffix columns, type any text you want to appear before or after the number format. You can also click the Insert button to insert a tab character.


Click in the Number Format box, and click the Insert button to insert a page number, chapter number, or tab character. Click in the Prefix or Suffix box, and click the Insert button to insert a tab character.


Enable the Letter Headings check box if you want to display letter headings in the index when it is inserted into the publication.


Choose an index file from the Title list box, and click the Remove button to remove the index file from the publication.


Type a title for the index file in the Title box, and click the Add button to create an index file.


Use this section of the dialog box to define the text used for the "See" and "See Also" references.


Displays the current "See" prefix for index cross-references. If you want to change the prefix, type a new prefix in the See box.


Displays the current "See Also" prefix for index cross-references. If you want to change the prefix, type a new prefix in the See Also box.


Choose an existing index file from the Title list box, or type a title for the index file in the Title box and click the
Add button ( [image]) to create an index file. Click the Remove button ( [image]) to remove the index file from the publication


Click the Update button to update the selected index. When you update an index, Corel VENTURA scans the publication for words marked as index entries and saves the words to the index file.


Choose the chapter to which you want the table of contents file saved from the Chapter list box. You can either type a name for the chapter or choose an existing chapter. If you type a name for the chapter, Corel VENTURA will create a chapter with that name.

Type a name for the table of contents file in the File list box. You can also choose an existing file from the list box. If you choose an existing file, the file will be overwritten when then table of contents file is updated.


Choose the chapter to which you want the table of contents file saved. You can either type a name for the chapter or choose an existing chapter. If you type a name for the chapter, Corel VENTURA will create a new chapter with that name.


Displays the formatting you have defined for how the table of contents appears when it is inserted into the publication.

Click in the Match Tag box, and choose a paragraph tag for each level used in the table of contents. When you update the table of contents, Corel VENTURA scans the publication for paragraphs that have the specified paragraph tags applied and saves the text of the paragraphs to the table of contents file.

Click in the At Level column if you want to change the level. If you want to add levels, click the Add Level button.

Select the text in the Format box, and click the Properties button to format how the table of contents entries for that level will appear. You can also format how the table of contents appears by formatting the paragraph tags used when the table of contents is inserted into the publication. For more information, see "Formatting a table of contents."

Click in the Format box, and click the Insert button to insert a page number, chapter number, section number, or tab character. For more information, see "Displaying chapter, page, and section numbers in a table of contents."


Type a name for the table of contents file in the File list box. You can also choose an existing file from the list box. If you choose an existing file, the file will be overwritten when the table of contents file is updated.


Click the Add Level button to include other levels in the table of contents. Each level allows you to specify a different paragraph tag. When you update a table of contents, Corel VENTURA scans the publication for paragraphs that have specific paragraph tags applied and saves the text of the paragraphs to the table of contents file. You can define which paragraph tags are used in the table of contents by choosing a tag from the Match Tag list box for each table of contents level.


Click in the Format box, and click the Insert button to insert a page number, chapter number, section number, or tab character. For more information, see "Displaying chapter, page, and section numbers in a table of contents."


Choose a table of contents file from the Title list box, and click the Remove button to remove the table of contents file from the publication.


Type a title for a table of contents file in the Title box, and click the Add button to create a table of contents file.


Select the text in the Format box, and click the Properties button to format how the table of contents entries for that level will appear.

You can also format how the table of contents appears by formatting the paragraph tags used when the table of contents is inserted into the publication. For more information, see "Formatting a table of contents."


Choose a level, and click the Remove Level button to remove that level from the table of contents.


Choose an existing table of contents file from the Title list box, or type a title for a table of contents file in the Title box and click the Add button ( [image]) to create a table of contents file. Click the Remove button ( [image]) to remove the table of contents file from the publication.


Click the Update button to update the selected table of contents. When you update a table of contents, Corel VENTURA scans the publication for paragraphs that have specific paragraph tags applied and saves the text of the paragraphs to the table of contents file. You can define which paragraph tags are used in the table of contents by choosing a tag from the Match Tag list box for each table of contents level.


Publication Properties


General tab (Pub Properties)


For more information, see the following:

•	Choosing a publication layout

•	Allowing page tag objects to be edited from Page Layout view

•	Embedding fonts with Bitstream TrueDoc

•	Defining breaking characters

•	Specifying the chapters or pages to print


Use the list to enable the characters you want Corel VENTURA to use as a breaking character. If your publication contains lines of text that extend up to or beyond the right margin, you can enable the check box for the character at which Corel VENTURA will break the line and begin a new line.


Enable the Embed Fonts Using Bitstream TrueDoc check box to include TrueDoc font information in the current publication. Using TrueDoc ensures the publication displays and prints correctly from computers that do not have the PostScript or TrueType fonts used in the publication installed.

For more information about TrueDoc, see "Using Bitstream TrueDoc."


Enable the Embed Fonts Using Bitstream TrueDoc check box to include TrueDoc font information in the current publication. Using TrueDoc ensures the publication displays and prints correctly from computers that do not have the PostScript or TrueType fonts used in the publication installed.

For more information about TrueDoc, see "Using Bitstream TrueDoc."

Click the Update Font List button to regenerate the font information to include only the fonts used in the publication rather than all of fonts referenced by the tags in the document. Omitting font information for unused fonts will reduce the publication's file size.


Choose a layout style you want to use for the publication from the Layout list box. A picture of each style is displayed in the Layout window.


Choose an option from the Print Blank Pages list box to indicate whether you want Corel VENTURA to insert a blank page between chapters that end on the same page (left or right) as the next chapter. Inserting a blank page ensures that each chapter begins on the correct page when printing on both sides of the paper. Choosing Ask Always lets you decide whether you want to insert blank pages when you print the publication. For more information, see "Setting up a print job."


Disable the Lock Page Tag Objects if you want to edit page tag objects, such as frames or graphic objects, in Page Layout view. Enable the check box if you only want to be able to edit page tag objects in Page Tag view.

If you do edit page tag objects in Page Layout view, you can right-click the object, click Arrange, Move To Page Tag to update the edited object to the page tag. The edited object will be automatically updated on each page that uses that page tag.


Click the Update Font List button to update the Font List information for the publication; for example, you can click the Update Font List button to remove font information for fonts that you are no longer using in the publication.


Replacements tab (Pub Properties)


For more information, see the following:

•	Defining text-before or text-after settings

•	Using variables


Displays a "Hint" as to how to use this dialog box. For more information, see the following:

•	Defining text-before or text-after settings

•	Using variables


If you have enabled the Text Before/After button, type a name for the replacement text in the Name box, and click this button to create a text-before/text-after setting. To define the replacement text, type the text in the Defined Text box.

If you have enabled the Variable Definition button, type a name for the variable in the Variable Marker box, and click this button to create a variable marker. To define the replacement text, type the text in the Substitutions box.


Displays the text that will be inserted at each location where the text-before or text-after setting is applied or where the variable marker is inserted in the publication.

To edit the text, choose a replacement setting from the list, and edit the text in the Substitutions box.


Enable the Text Before/After button to define the text-before or text-after settings for the publication. For more information, see "Defining text-before or text-after settings."


Lists the text-before or text-after definitions or the variables defined in the publication, depending on whether you have enabled the Text Before/After or the Variable Definition button at the top of the dialog box.


Enable the Variable Definition button to define variable markers and their replacement text for the publication. For more information, see "Using variables."


Choose a text-before or text-after setting or a variable marker from the list, and click the Delete button to remove the replacement setting.

Deleted variable markers will remain in the publication; therefore, if you create a variable marker with the same name as one you have deleted, the replacement text will be inserted at the position of that marker.


Choose a text-before or text-after setting or a variable marker from the list, type a new name in the Name box or Variable Marker box, and click the Rename button to rename the replacement.

When you rename a text-before or text-after setting, you will have to reapply the setting to the paragraph, paragraph tag, or character tag if you want the text to appear before or after that paragraph or each instance of the paragraph or character tag.

When you rename a variable marker, the definition of the variable marker is removed (for example, variable markers inserted into your publication will no longer have a definition and their replacement text will not appear). To update previously inserted markers for a renamed variable marker, you must reinsert the markers individually. For more information about inserting variables, see "Defining and inserting variable markers."


Displays the replacement text that will be inserted at each location where the text-before or text-after setting is applied or where the variable marker is inserted in the publication.

To edit the text, choose a replacement setting from the list, and edit the text in the Defined Text or Substitutions box, depending on whether you have enabled the Text Before/After or the Variable Definition button at the top of the dialog box.


Displays the name of the selected text-before or text-after setting or the variable marker, depending on whether you have enabled the Text Before/After or the Variable Definition button at the top of the dialog box.

To create a text-before or text-after setting or a variable marker, type a name in this box, and click the Add button.


MultiUser tab (Pub Properties)


Click the Add User button to allow a user to have access rights to the mutliuser publication. Once the user is added, the administrator can enable the check boxes in the Access Rights box to define the user's access rights. For more information, see "Adding and deleting users."


Click the Delete User button to remove a user from the Access Rights list. That user will still be able to access the publication if access rights are defined for the "Everyone" user. The "Everyone" user is a default user that you can remove or for which you can change the access rights. For more information, see "Adding and deleting users."


Displays a list of each user of the multiuser publication and their access rights. To change access rights, enable or disable the check boxes for each user in the following columns:

•	Admin [image] allows the user to change the access rights of other users

•	Publication [image] allows the user to edit the publication properties and stylesheet for the publication

•	Chapter [image] allows the user to check out and edit chapters in the publication

•	View [image] allows the user to view a read-only copy of the publication


Enable the MultiUser Access button to make the publication a multiuser publication. Multiuser publications allow different users to work on the same publication at the same time by allowing users to check out and check in chapters and stylesheets of a publication. For a user to check out a multiuser publication, they must have access rights assigned by the publication's administrator. The publication's administrator is the user who sets the publication as a multiuser publication. For more information, see "Multiuser publishing."


Choose a user from the Access Rights box, and click the Change Password button to create or change a password for that user.


Type a password in the New Password box and again in the Confirm New Password boxes. It is not necessary to have a password to be able to access a multiuser publication.


Type the name of the new user in the Name box.


Conditions tab (Pub Properties)


To define a new condition, type the name in the Condition list box, and click the Add button. Condition names cannot contain spaces. If you insert a space in the name, Corel VENTURA will ignore the space.


To remove a condition, choose the condition's name from the Conditions list box, and click the Delete button.


Displays the conditions defined for the publication and whether they are enabled or disabled. When a condition is enabled, each item in the publication what has that condition assigned to it is displayed. When a condition is disabled, each item in the publication what has that condition assigned to it is not displayed.

To define a new condition, type the name in the Condition list box, and click the Add button. Condition names cannot contain spaces. If you insert a space in the name, Corel VENTURA will ignore the space.

To remove a condition, choose the condition's name from the Conditions list box, and click the Delete button.

For more information about conditions, see "Creating publications with conditions."


To define a new condition, type the name in the Condition list box, and click the Add button. Condition names cannot contain spaces. If you insert a space in the name, Corel VENTURA will ignore the space.

To remove a condition, choose the condition's name from the Conditions list box, and click the Delete button.

For more information about conditions, see "Creating publications with conditions."


Picture Defaults (Pub Properties)


Enable the Generate Optimized Palette check box to allow Corel VENTURA to use a color palette that matches the colors used in pictures in the publication. Enabling the check box can reduce the memory needed to display images by eliminating unnecessary colors but can result in a reduction of the image quality. The palette used to display the pictures does not affect how they print.


Choose Limit Resolution from the Resolution list box, and type values in the Horizontal and Vertical boxes to set a specific resolution for how the pictures in the publication will display. This resolution only affects how Corel VENTURA displays the picture, not how it prints.

If you enable the Use Identical Values check box, you can change the value in either the Horizontal or the Vertical box; Corel VENTURA will insert the same value in the other.


Choose Limit Resolution from the Resolution list box, and type values in the Horizontal and Vertical boxes to set a specific resolution for how the pictures in the publication will display. This resolution only affects how Corel VENTURA displays the picture, not how it prints.

If you enable the Use Identical Values check box, you can change the value in either the Horizontal or Vertical box and Corel VENTURA will insert the same value in the other.

Choose Limit Memory Usage To from the Memory list box, and type a value in the KB box to set a specific memory allocation (in kilobytes) for pictures in the publication.


Choose Limit Memory Usage To from the Memory list box, and type a value in the KB box to set a specific memory allocation (in kilobytes) for pictures in the publication.


Choose an option from the Memory list box to set the default memory allocation for pictures in the publication.

Choose Limit Memory Usage To, and type a value in the KB box to set a specific memory allocation for pictures in kilobytes.

Choose Unlimited Memory Usage to use whatever memory is needed to display the picture.


Choose an option from the Resolution list box to set the default resolution setting for pictures in the publication. This resolution only affects how Corel VENTURA displays the picture, not how it prints.

Choose Full Resolution to use the picture's full resolution.

Choose Limit Resolution, and type values in the Horizontal and Vertical boxes to set a specific resolution. If you enable the Use Identical Values check box, you can change the value in either the Horizontal or the Vertical box; Corel VENTURA will insert the same value in the other.


Text Defaults (Pub Properties)


Click the Other button, and click the Browse button to specify a location to which you want linked text files exported when you save the publication.


Choose the file type to which you want the linked text files in the publication exported when you save the publication. For more information about the Export On Save command, see "Embedding and linking text files."

If you choose the RTF file format, click the Options button to set the text export options. These options will apply to all linked RTF files in the publication.


To set the location to which linked text files are exported when you save the publication, click one of the following buttons:

•	With Publication [image] exports the text files to the same location as the publication

•	Use Original [image] exports the text file to its original location

•	Other, and click the Browse button to specify a location to which you want the text files exported


Displays the location to which linked text files are exported when you save the publication. To set the location, click one of the following buttons:

•	With Publication [image] exports the text files to the same location as the publication

•	Use Original [image] exports the text file to its original location

•	Other, and click the Browse button to specify a location to which you want the text files exported


Choose Rich Text Format (RTF) from the File Type list box, and click the Options button to set the text export options. These options will apply to all linked RTF files in the publication.


Update Publication dialog


For more information, see the following:

•	Updating counters

•	Updating an index file

•	Updating a table of contents file

•	Publishing to Adobe Acrobat


Enable the Numbering check box to update page numbers, chapter numbers, figure and table numbers, endnotes, footnotes, automatically numbered paragraphs, and cross-references in the publication.

For more information, see the following:

•	Updating counters

•	Autonumbering paragraphs formatted with tags

•	Viewing and updating markers and cross-references


Enable the Index check box to update the publication's index.


Enable the Table Of Contents check box to update the publication's table of contents.


Enable the Generate Hyperlinks For Adobe Acrobat check box to allow Corel VENTURA to create hyperlinks from tables of contents, indexes, and cross-references when you publish to Adobe Acrobat format. You must enable the check box and update the publication before the hyperlinks will be created.


Tracking and Kerning dialog box


Click the Import Tracking From Publication button to import tracking values from another publication. The tracking values in the current publication will be replaced with the imported values. The tracking values you import are specific to the font selected in the Edit Tracking & Kerning dialog box.


Closes the dialog box without importing or exporting kerning pair values.


Exports the kerning values for the selected font as an ASCII text file. You can edit this file in a word processor or other text editor and you can import the file into another Corel VENTURA publication. The kerning values you import are specific to the font selected in the Edit Tracking & Kerning dialog box.


Click the Import Kerning From Publication button to import kerning values for the selected font from another Corel VENTURA publication into the current publication. The kerning values in the current publication will be replaced with the imported values. The kerning values you import are specific to the font selected in the Edit Tracking & Kerning dialog box.


Click the Load Kern Pair Sets button to import kerning values that have been exported from a Corel VENTURA publication to a text file. The kerning values you import are specific to the font selected in the Edit Tracking & Kerning dialog box.


Click a character or character pair from the Kerning Values list, type a new kerning value in the Value box, and click the Replace button to change the kerning value.

Type a character or character pair in the Kern Pairs box, type a kerning value in the Value box, and click the Add button to set a new kerning value.

Kerning values are expressed as a percentage of an em. An em is a unit of measure that is equal in height and width in the current font size; for example, if the font size is 12 points, an em is 12 points wide.


Choose a character or character pair from the Kerning Values list, and move the slider to adjust the kerning value. You can also type a kerning value in the Value box.


Click the Copy button to copy the selected kerning pair. Copying a kerning pair allows you to paste the kerning value to another font. Choose the font to which you want to paste the kerning value from the list box at the top of the dialog box, and click the Paste button.

To select multiple consecutive pairs, hold down SHIFT and select the kerning values. To select multiple non-consecutive pairs, hold down CTRL and select the kerning values.


Choose a kerning value from the Kerning Values list, and click the Delete button to remove the value.


Choose a character or character pair from the Kerning Values list or type the characters in the Kern Pairs box, type a kerning value in the Value box, and click the Replace button to change the kerning value.

Type a character or character pair in the Kern Pairs box, type a kerning value in the Value box, and click the Add button to set a new kerning value.

Kerning values are expressed as a percentage of an em. An em is a unit of measure that is equal in height and width in the current font size; for example, if the font size is 12 points, an em is 12 points wide.


Choose a character or character pair from the Kerning Values list, and type a kerning value in the Value box to adjust the kerning value. You can also move the slider below the Sample window to adjust the kerning values.

Kerning values are expressed as a percentage of an em. An em is a unit of measure that is equal in height and width in the current font size; for example, if the font size is 12 points, an em is 12 points wide.


Click the Preview button if you want to see how your kerning settings look at different font sizes. In the Preview dialog box, you can change the preview text, and change the font size to see how your settings will look.


Type the text that you want to display in the Preview window using the current kerning values in the Sample box. You can also select text in the publication and click Publication, Tracking & Kerning if you want to preview specific text. Click the Preview button to preview the text using the kerning values you have specified.


Choose a kern pair from the Kerning Values list, and click the Reset To Default button to reset the kerning values to the default settings for the font.

If you want to reset all of the values, click the Reset All button.


Click the Reset All button to reset the default kerning values for the font.


Choose a character or character pair from the Kerning Values list, and move the slider to adjust the kerning value. The Sample window displays the results. You get the same results if you type a kerning value in the Value box.


Click the Add All button to include all of the font sizes in the sample.


Choose a font size you want to include in the sample, and click the Add button. To add all of the font sizes, click the Add All button.


Choose a font size you want to include in the sample from the list on the left, and click the Add button. To add all of the font sizes, click the Add All button.


Displays the font sizes to be included in the sample.


Choose a font size you want to remove from the sample from the list on the right, and click the Remove button. To remove all of the font sizes, click the Remove All button.


Click the Remove All button to remove all of the font sizes from the sample.


Enable the check box for each font you want included in the sample.


Enable the Including Tracking check box to include tracking samples with the kerning samples.


Choose the font for which you want to adjust the tracking or kerning values.


Click the Import/Export button to allow you to import tracking and kerning values from other publications and to export kerning values to a text file. Kerning values exported to a text file can be imported into other publications.


Click the Generate Example button to create tracking and kerning examples. You can choose which fonts and font sizes you want to include in the example.


Choose the font style for which you want to adjust the tracking or kerning values.


Type the text and point size for the text you want to preview using the settings defined in the Edit Tracking & Kerning dialog box.


Type a value for the point size at which you want to preview the kerning settings.


Type the text you want to preview using the current kerning settings.


Choose the tracking setting you want highlighted in Graph view. The highlighted setting is indicated by a red line. You can then adjust the tracking setting by moving the nodes of the highlighted line in the graph.


Use the scroll bar to display the portion of the Graph window or Sample window you want to view.


Type a tracking value for the Loose setting. Tracking values are expressed as a percentage of an em. An em is a unit of measure that is equal in height and width in the current font size; for example, if the font size is 12 points, an em is 12 points wide.

The results are displayed in either Sample view or Graph view. If you type the values, you must press TAB to update the display. If you use the arrows at the side of the number box, the display is automatically updated.


Type a tracking value for the Normal setting. Tracking values are expressed as a percentage of an em. An em is a unit of measure that is equal in height and width in the current font size; for example, if the font size is 12 points, an em is 12 points wide.

The results are displayed in either Sample view or Graph view. If you type the values, you must press TAB to update the display. If you use the arrows at the side of the number box, the display is automatically updated.


Type the point size for which you want to edit or view the tracking settings.


Type a tracking value for the Tighter setting. Tracking values are expressed as a percentage of an em. An em is a unit of measure that is equal in height and width in the current font size; for example, if the font size is 12 points, an em is 12 points wide.

The results are displayed in either Sample view or Graph view. If you type the values, you must press TAB to update the display. If you use the arrows at the side of the number box, the display is automatically updated.


Type a tracking value for the Very Loose setting. Tracking values are expressed as a percentage of an em. An em is a unit of measure that is equal in height and width in the current font size; for example, if the font size is 12 points, an em is 12 points wide.

The results are displayed in either Sample view or Graph view. If you type the values, you must press TAB to update the display. If you use the arrows at the side of the number box, the display is automatically updated.


Type a tracking value for the Very Tight setting. Tracking values are expressed as a percentage of an em. An em is a unit of measure that is equal in height and width in the current font size; for example, if the font size is 12 points, an em is 12 points wide.

The results are displayed in either Sample view or Graph view. If you type the values, you must press TAB to update the display. If you use the arrows at the side of the number box, the display is automatically updated.


Type a value for the level of magnification in the display window. If you increase the magnification, you can make more precise adjustments to the tracking values using in Graph view. However, increasing the magnification too much can move the tracking lines out of view.


Click the Graph View button to display a graphical representation of the tracking settings. In Graph view, each line represents one of the settings, such as Very Tight, Tighter, and Loose. To highlight a setting, choose it from the list box above the graph. Each node on the line represents a tracking setting for a font size, and the slope of the graph represents the tracking settings for the font sizes between each node. The tracking values are displayed on the X-axis, and the font sizes are displayed on the Y-axis. To change a setting, type a value in the boxes at the side of the graph or drag a node to a new position. To change the point size of the font, type a value in the Point Size box.


Click the Sample View button to display an example of the tracking settings using text. To change the text, type the new text in the Sample box. To change a setting, type a value in the boxes at the side of the dialog box. To change the point size of the font, type a value in the Point Size box.


The Sample view displays examples of each tracking setting using text. To change the text, type the new text in the Sample box. To change a setting, type a value in the boxes at the side of the dialog box. To change the point size of the font, type a value in the Point Size box.


The Graph view displays a graphical representation of the tracking settings. Each line represents one of the settings, such as Very Tight, Tighter, and Loose. To highlight a setting, choose it from the list box above the graph. Each node on the line represents a tracking setting for a font size, and the slope of the graph represents the tracking settings for the font sizes between each node. The tracking values are displayed on the X-axis, and the font sizes are displayed on the Y-axis. To change a setting, type a value in the boxes at the side of the graph or drag a node to a new position. To change the point size of the font, type a value in the Point Size box.


Type the text you want to display in the Sample window.


Apply Page Tag dialog box


For more information, see the following:

•	Applying a page tag to a single page

•	Applying page tags to multiple pages


Use this section of the dialog box to specify the pages to which you want to apply the selected page tag. To apply a page tag, do any of the following:

•	Click the Current Page button to apply the selected page tag to the selected page.

•	Click the To Pages That Currently Use Page Tag button, and choose the page tag you want to replace from the list box.

•	Click the Pages button, and type the page range in the number boxes to apply the selected page tag to those pages.

•	Click the Current Chapter button to apply the selected page tag to each page in the chapter.

•	Enable the Left Pages check box to apply the selected page tag to the left pages in the page range you have specified or the current chapter.

•	Enable the Right Pages check box to apply the selected page tag to the right pages in the page range you have specified or the current chapter.


Click the Current Chapter button to apply the selected page tag to each page in the chapter.


Click the Current Page button to apply the selected page tag to the selected page.


Click the Pages button, and type the page range in the number boxes to apply the selected page tag to those pages.


Enable the Left Pages check box to apply the selected page tag to the left pages in the page range you have specified or the current chapter.


Choose the page tag you want to apply to the selected page from the Apply Page Tag list.


Click the To Pages That Currently Use Page Tag button, and choose the page tag you want to replace from the list box.


Enable the Right Pages check box to apply the selected page tag to the right pages in the page range you have specified or the current chapter.


Insert Pages dialog box


Click the After button to insert the new page(s) after the current page.


Click the Before button to insert the new page(s) before the current page.


Choose the chapter to which you want the page(s) inserted.


Type the number of pages you want inserted in the Number Of Pages box.


Choose the page tag you want applied to the inserted pages from the Page Tag list box.


Delete Pages dialog box


Choose the chapter from which you want the page(s) deleted.


If you want to delete a single page, type the page number in the Delete Page box.

If you want to delete a range of pages, type the page number of the first page in the range that you want to delete.


Enable the Thru Page check box, and type the page number of the last page in the range in the Thru Page box.


Go To Page dialog box


Click this button to go to the first page in the publication.


Click this button to go to the last page in the publication.


Click this button to go to the next page in the publication.


Click this button to go to the previous page in the publication.


Enable the Chapter check box, and choose the chapter you want to go to from the list box.


Closes the dialog box.


Enable the File check box, and choose the text file you want to go to from the list box.


Choose which page numbers to use to locate a page. Page Number numbers coincide with the physical location of the page within the document and would differ from the Page Counter numbers when numbering is restarted at some point in the publication [image] for example, at the beginning of each chapter.

The page number area of the Status Bar displays the physical page number followed by the page counter number in parentheses. The physical page is the actual page in the publication, and the counter number depends on your page counter settings.


Type the page number you want to go to in the Page box.


Click the Go To button to move to the page, chapter, or file you have selected.


Equation editor


Choose a type size for the selected equation elements or for the elements that you subsequently type.

If you want to set a specific size, choose Other, and use the Explicit Font Properties dialog box to set a font size.

If you want to change the value for the Subscript, Sub-subscript, Symbol and Sub-symbol sizes, click the Font tab and adjust the settings in the Size section of the dialog box. You cannot change the size of Normal; it is always the same as the type size of the paragraph in which the equation is being inserted.


Choose a font or font style for the selected equation elements or for the elements that you subsequently type.

If you want to choose a specific font or font style, choose Other, and use the Explicit Font Properties dialog box to set the font or font style.

If you want to change the Standard or Greek styles, click the Font tab and adjust the settings in the Font section of the dialog box.


Choose a zoom value for the equation in the Edit Equation window. You can enlarge the display to make it easier to view and edit parts of an equation, or you can reduce the display to view a long equation. To display the equation at the size that it will appear in the publication, choose 100%.


Click the EQN button to create an equation using the Corel VENTURA EQN Language. For more information, see "Using Corel VENTURA EQN Language."


Click the color button, and choose a color for the selected equation element(s).


Click to display a list of relational symbols. To insert a symbol, choose it from the list.

The list omits the inequality symbols < (less than) and > (greater than), since these can be entered using the keyboard.


Click to display a list of fences or delimiters used to enclose equation elements. To insert a symbol, choose it from the list.


Click to display a list of templates for creating fractions, radicals, and long-division layouts. To insert a template, choose it from the list.


Click to display a list of templates for creating subscripts and superscripts and for placing elements above or below one another. To insert a template, choose it from the list.

To attach a left-side subscript or superscript, place the insertion point to the left of the element to which you want to attach the template.


Click to display a list of templates for various types of sums. To insert a template, choose it from the list.


Click to display a list of templates for various kinds of integrals. To insert a template, choose it from the list.


Click to display a list of templates used to create expressions with bars under or over them. To insert a template, choose it from the list.


Click to display a list of templates used to create vector expressions. To insert a template, choose it from the list.


Click to display a list of templates used to create products, coproducts, and set-theory intersections and unions. To insert a template, choose it from the list.


Click to display a list of templates used to create matrices. To insert a template, choose it from the list.


Click to display the alignment symbol ( [image]) and a list of spacing and ellipses symbols. To insert a symbol, choose it from the list.

Use the alignment symbol to align multiple lines of equations. Inserting the symbol in each line shifts the line horizontally so that the alignment symbols line up vertically.

Use the spacing symbols to insert spaces between characters and templates.

Use the ellipse symbols to indicate that items have been omitted.


Click to display a list of primes, hats, bars, dots and other embellishments. To apply an embellishment, select an equation element, and choose an embellishment from the list. To delete an embellishment, position the insertion point to the right of the embellished character, and choose No Embellishment from the list or press BACKSPACE.


Click to display a list of operator symbols. To insert a symbol, choose it from the list.

The angle brackets (< and >) are a fixed size; if you want expanding brackets, click the fourth button in the first column, and choose an angle bracket from the list.


Click to display a list of arrow symbols. To insert a symbol, choose it from the list.


Click to display a list of logical symbols. To insert a symbol, choose it from the list.


Click to display a list of Set Theory symbols. To insert a symbol, choose it from the list.


Click to display a list of symbols for infinity, summation, product, angle, and other symbols. To insert a symbol, choose it from the list.


Click to display Greek characters. You can also insert Greek characters by typing CTRL + G, then typing the corresponding character.


Enable the Overprint check box to have the equation print over the background color. This option is only relevant when printing color separations. For more information about overprinting, see "Color trapping."


Click the Presets button to choose from a list of preset equations. For more information about inserting preset equations, see "Inserting and editing equations." For more information about adding equations to a list of presets, see "Adding an equation to the list of presets."


Click the Refresh button to refresh the display of the equation in the Edit Equation window.


The Edit Equation window displays the equation you are creating or editing.


Choose a font and style for the lowercase Greek characters from the list boxes.

The font you choose for the Greek characters should be the Symbol font to ensure that all symbols appear correctly.


Click the Defaults button to restore the default size settings for the subscript, superscript, sub-subscript, sub-superscript, symbol, and sub-symbol characters.


Displays a sample equation highlighting the element for which you are changing the size. The sample equation changes when you click in the Subscript/Superscript, Sub-Subscript/Superscript, Symbol, or Sub-symbol boxes.


Click the Defaults button to restore the default font and font style for the lowercase Greek, Uppercase Greek, and Symbol characters.


Type a font size for subscript and superscript characters. The default setting is 58% of the font size of the paragraph into which the equation is inserted.

To change the unit of measure, click a unit from the list box. If you choose %, the font size will be relative to the paragraph into which the equation is being inserted. The other settings set a specific size for the character.


Type a font size for sub-subscript and super-superscript characters. The default setting is 42% of the font size of the paragraph into which the equation is inserted.

To change the unit of measure, click a unit from the list box. If you choose %, the font size will be relative to the paragraph into which the equation is being inserted. The other settings set a specific size for the character.


Type a font size for sub-symbol characters. The default setting is 100% of the font size of the paragraph into which the equation is inserted.

To change the unit of measure, click a unit from the list box. If you choose %, the font size will be relative to the paragraph into which the equation is being inserted. The other settings set a specific size for the character.


Type a font size for symbol characters. The default setting is 150% of the font size of the paragraph into which the equation is inserted.

To change the unit of measure, click a unit from the list box. If you choose %, the font size will be relative to the paragraph into which the equation is being inserted. The other settings set a specific size for the character.


Choose a font and style for the symbol characters from the list boxes.

The font you choose for the symbol characters should be the Symbol font to ensure that all symbols appear correctly.


Choose a font and style for the uppercase Greek characters from the list boxes.

The font you choose for the Greek characters should be the Symbol font to ensure that all symbols appear correctly.


Click the Defaults button to reset the default spacing settings for the equation elements. All of the default settings are restored when you click the Defaults button.


Choose the equation element for which you want to set the spacing.


Click a unit for the spacing of the selected equation element.


Type a value for the spacing of the selected equation element.


Displays a sample equation highlighting the equation elements for which you are setting the spacing.


Choose a font for the selected equation element from the Font list box.


Type a value for the font size of the selected equation element in the Size box.

To change the unit of measure, right-click the box, click Units, and click a unit.


Choose a font style for the selected equation element from the Style list box.


Click the Apply button to insert the portion of the equation you have just typed into the equation and keep the dialog box open. If you want to add more equation elements, delete the elements you have already applied to the equation before typing more elements.


Type the equation using Corel VENTURA EQN Language. For more information, see "Using Corel VENTURA EQN Language."


Using the Matrix Settings dialog box

Use the Matrix Settings dialog box to set the number of rows and columns for a matrix in the equation and to specify how the rows and columns are aligned.

The Rows Settings section

Type the number of rows you want in the matrix in the Rows box. The maximum number of rows in a matrix is 31.

Click the Top, Baseline, or Bottom button to specify how you want the entries in each row to align.

Enable the Equal Row Height check box to make each row the height of the tallest row. Matrix row heights are determined by the tallest row. If you disable the check box, Corel VENTURA determines the height of each row depending on the contents of the row.

The Columns Settings section

Type the number of columns you want in the matrix in the Columns box. The maximum number of columns in a matrix is 31.

Click the Left, Center, Right, At =, or At . buttons to specify how you want the entries in each column to align. The At = button aligns the contents of the column at equal signs (=) and other equality and inequality signs. The At . button aligns decimal points with one another in the column. The decimal points can be periods or commas.

Enable the Equal Column Width check box to make each column the width of the widest row. Matrix column widths are determined by the widest column. If you disable the check box, Corel VENTURA determines the width of each column depending on the contents of the column.


Click the Left, Center, Right, At =, or At . buttons to specify how you want the entries in each column to align.

The At = button aligns the contents of the column at equal signs (=) and other equality and inequality signs.

The At . button aligns decimal points with one another in the column. The decimal points can be periods or commas.


Enable the Equal Column Width check box to make each column the width of the widest row. Matrix column widths are determined by the widest column. If you disable the check box, Corel VENTURA determines the width of each column depending on the contents of the column.


Type the number of columns you want in the matrix in the Columns box. The maximum number of columns in a matrix is 31.


Click the Top, Baseline, or Bottom button to specify how you want the entries in each row to align.


Enable the Equal Row Height check box to make each row the height of the tallest row. Matrix row heights are determined by the tallest row. If you disable the check box, Corel VENTURA determines the height of each row, depending on the contents of each column.


Type the number of rows you want in the matrix in the Rows box. The maximum number of rows in a matrix is 31.


Click the File button to change the equation preset file. For more information, see "Adding an equation to the list of presets."


Select a preset equation, and click OK to add it to the Edit Equation window of the Insert Equation or Edit Equation dialog box.


Insert Symbol


Click the Shortcut Key button to assign or change the keyboard shortcut assigned to a character. You can only assign shortcuts to characters that are not available on the keyboard. For more information about keyboard shortcuts, see "Assigning keyboard shortcuts to symbols and special characters."


Choose the font containing the characters you want to display. To insert a character, choose it from the grid, and click the Insert button or double-click the character.


Displays each character in the selected font. To insert a character, choose it from the grid, and click the Insert button or double-click the character. To display a large size image of the character, click the character and hold the mouse button down.


Displays the ANSI code for the selected character.


Displays the keyboard shortcut assigned to the selected character.


Displays the character, name, and keyboard shortcut for the special characters for the selected font. Choose the character you want to insert into the publication, and click the Insert button or double-click the character.


Insert Variable Marker


Allows you to define variables for the publication.


Conditions / Tag Conditions dialog box


Choose a condition from the Conditions Available list and click the Add button to apply the condition to the selected item. If you want to add more than one condition, you must use the Boolean operators (And +, Or |, or Not !) to separate the conditions.


Click the And + button to allow you to apply another condition to the selected item.


Lists the conditions assigned to the selected item.


Displays a list of the available conditions that you can apply to the item.


Click the Not ! button to exclude the item when that condition is enabled.


Click the Or | button to allow you to apply another condition to the selected item. Or | prints or displays the item when either condition is enabled.


Allows you to define the conditions for the publication.


Current Match dialog


Choose a paragraph tag used for a Current Match running header. A Current Match header takes text in the first paragraph formatted with the specified primary or secondary paragraph tag that appears at the top of a page. If the primary tag is not used on the current page, the secondary tag is used. If the secondary tag is not used on the current page, the last occurrence of the secondary tag is used.


Artistic text dialog box


Enable this check box to only display fonts that are used in the publication in the Font List boxes.


Enable this button to disable Bitstream Font Navigator from temporarily installing fonts that are used in the publication but not installed on your computer.


Enable this button to use Bitstream Font Navigator to temporarily install fonts that are used in the publication but not installed on your computer. If Bitstream Font Navigator cannot find the font, PANOSE Font Matching will be used.


Enable this check box to display a sample of the font in the Font List boxes.


Type a value for the number of recently used fonts that you want displayed at the top of the Font List.


Click this button to set PANOSE Font Matching preferences.


Enable this check box to display True Type fonts in the Font List boxes.


Enable this check box to display Type 1 fonts in the Font List boxes.


Enable this check box to display Type 1 symbols in the Font List boxes.


Enable this check box to display True Type symbols in the Font List boxes.


Displays the increment by which the value is changed using the arrows at the side of the number box.


Displays the maximum setting for the value.


Displays the minimum setting for the value.


Type a value for the setting in the Full Value box.


Enable this check box to automatically underline misspelled words. The words are only underlined in the Edit Text dialog box, and not once the Artistic text has been inserted into the publication.

To correct a misspelled word, right-click the word, and choose an alternate spelling.


Enable this check box to underline words that have been ignored with a blue wavy line. The words are only underlined in the Edit Text dialog box, and not once the Artistic text has been inserted into the publication.


Type a value for the number of spelling suggestions you want displayed when you right-click a misspelled word in the Edit Text dialog box.


Choose a position for the Artistic text. You can choose Superscript, Subscript, or None. Superscript sets the Artistic text as superscript; Subscript sets the Artistic text as subscript; None sets the Artistic text as normal.


Makes the selected or subsequently typed text bold.


Centers the text between the margins.


Justifies all of the lines of text to both right and left margins.


Aligns the text to both right and left margins.


Italicizes the selected or subsequently typed text.


Aligns the text to the left margin.


Applies no alignment to the text.


Shows or hides nonprinting characters, such as paragraph markers, spaces, and tabs.


Aligns the text to the right margin.


Underlines the selected or subsequently typed text.


Click the Format Text button to set the text attributes for the Artistic text.


Lets you import text into the Edit Text dialog box.


Type the text to which you want to apply Artistic text effects in the Edit Text window.


Click the Options button to set text options, to change the case, to access the writing tools, and to set other options.


Use the Scroll Bar to view text that is longer than can be displayed in the Edit Text window.


Use this section of the dialog box to set the alignment options for text.


Type a value for the rotation you want to apply to the selected characters. A positive value rotates the characters in a counter-clockwise direction, and a negative value rotates the characters in a clockwise direction.


Type a value to move the selected characters horizontally along the baseline. A positive value moves the characters to the right, and a negative value moves the characters to the left.


Use this section of the dialog box to shift characters relative to the baseline and rotate selected characters.


Type a value to move the selected characters vertically relative to the baseline. A positive value moves the characters above the baseline, and a negative value moves the characters below the baseline.


Choose an option to set the case for the Text.


Choose the font you want to apply to the text. Typing a letter scrolls the list to the first font that starts with that letter. Typing the letter repeatedly, scrolls down the list one font at a time.


Use the Font Properties section of the dialog box to set the font, font size, style, and position attributes for the text.


Adjusts the spacing between character pairs.


Choose an overscore line option for the text.


Click the Edit button to adjust the settings for the line.


Choose a position for the text. You can choose Superscript, Subscript, or None. Superscript sets the text as superscript; Subscript sets the text as subscript; None sets the text as normal.


Displays a preview of the formatting you have set for the text.


Type the font size you want to apply to the text.


Choose a strike-thru line option for the text.


Choose the font style you want to apply to the text. The availability of styles depends on the font you have selected.


Choose an underlining option for the text.


Choose an option to set the case for the text.


Type a value for the amount of space you want between characters. The unit used is a percentage of the width of a space character for the selected font and font size.


Use this section of the dialog box to set the spacing between characters and words and between lines in a paragraph.


Type a value for the amount of space you want between lines in a paragraph.

To change the unit of measure, click a unit from the list box.


Type a value for the amount of space you want between words. The unit used is a percentage of the width of a space character for the selected font and font size.


Type a value in the Thichness box to set the width of each line. Type a value in the Baseline Shift box to set the position of each line: a postive value shifts the line up, and a negative value shifts the line down.

To change the unit, click a unit from the Units list box. The unit for the second line will always be the same as the unit selected for the first line.


Type a value in the Thichness box to set the width of the line. Type a value in the Baseline Shift box to set the position of the line: a postive value shifts the line up, and a negative value shifts the line down.

To change the unit, click a unit from the Units list box.


About dialog box


Displays copyright information about this product.


Displays copyright information regarding this product.


Opens the Serial/PIN dialog box where you can enter your serial and personal identification number (PIN) for the product.


Displays liscencing information regarding this product.


Displays the registration information about this product.


Displays copyright and licensing information regarding this product.


Opens the System Info dialog box where you can get information about your system, display, printing, Corel EXE and DLL files, and system DLL files.


Displays the system information for the chosen category.


Saves the displayed system information as a text file (SYSINFO.TXT) in the X:\COREL\GRAPHICS8\CONFIG folder, where "X" indicates the drive where you installed the application.


Prints the copyright and licensing information regarding this product.


Displays the copyright and licensing information regarding this product.


Displays the personal identification number (PIN). This number is not needed to run the software but is necessary to receive customer support.


Displays the serial number located on your proof of purchase.


Vertical rules dialog box


Panose Font Matching Preferences


Enable this check box to allow PANOSE Font Matching when you open a publication that uses fonts not installed on your computer.


Choose a default font to use in place of missing fonts when PANOSE Font Matching cannot find a more suitable substitute.


Move the slider to the left to increase the precision with which substitutions are made. Move the slider to the right to reduce the precision.


Allows you to specify fonts used to match fonts not installed on your computer.


Enable this check box to display the PANOSE Font Matching results when you open a publication that uses fonts not installed on your computer.


Allows you to match Window-based fonts with Macintosh-based fonts and to match fonts to alternate spellings of the font's name.


Allows you to create a font matching exception.


Allows you to edit the selected font matching exception.


Displays the name of the font that is not installed on your computer.


Choose a font you want to use as a replacement for the specified font that is not installed on your computer.


Displays a list of font matching exceptions. Use this dialog box to specify particular font matching settings.


Removes the selected font matching setting.


Type the name of a font that is not installed on your computer for which you want to specify a font matching exception.


Type the alternate spelling for the font.


Choose the Window-based font for which you want to add an alternate spelling.


Choose the Window-based font for which you want to edit an alternate spelling.


Allows you to add an alternate spelling for a font name.


Allows you to edit an alternate spelling for a font name.


Displays the Windows and Macintosh names for fonts. PANOSE Font Matching can use either name for the font. You can also use this list to match other Windows-based fonts to a particular font.


Removes the selected Alternate Spellings font matching setting.


Random Number box things


Displays the current unit setting for the value.


Displays the increment and unit by which the value is changed using the arrows at the side of the number box.


Displays the maximum setting for the value for the current unit.


Displays the minimum setting for the value for the current unit.


Corel on the WEB - Edit links


Allows you to make changes to a name that corresponds to a URL that appears in the Corel On The Web submenu.


Type in the menu text that corresponds to a URL that appears in the Corel On The Web submenu.


Allows you to make changes to a URL that corresponds to the menu text that appears in the Corel On The Web submenu.


Type in a URL that corresponds to the menu text that will appear in the Corel On The Web submenu.


Allows you to create a link that can launch and point your Internet browser to a Word Wide Web site.


Allows you to edit an item that appears in the Corel On The Web submenu. You can change the menu text or the URL.


Displays a list of details for all links in the Corel On The Web submenu.


Select an item and click this button to move the item down the Corel On The Web menu.


Select an item and click this button to move the item up the Corel On The Web menu.


Deletes a selected item from the Corel On The Web Menu.


Open dialog box


Displays a thumbnail of the currently selected file if the check box below is enabled. If the file is not a graphics file, the Preview window appears with an X through it.


Enable the check box to view a thumbnail of the selected file. If the file is not a graphics file, the Preview window appears with an X through it.


Click the down arrow to display a list of the different methods you can use for opening files. You can load the whole image, crop the image as it opens, or resample the image as it opens.


Click the down arrow to display a list of the different methods you can use for opening files. You can load the whole image, crop the image as it opens, resample the image as it opens, or load only a section of the image.


Click to view file information such as image size, file format, keywords, and notes.


Click to view file information such as file format and notes.


Click to view file information such as image size, file format and notes.


Displays the image's dimensions and color mode.


Displays the text or image's file format information, and any notes that are associated with the selected file. When importing a picture, the image's dimensions and color mode are also displayed. Enable the Preview check box to preview the file you are importing.


Displays the image's dimensions and color mode.


Displays the image's file format.


Displays the image's file format.


Displays any keywords that are associated with the selected file.


Displays any notes that are associated with the selected file.


Displays any notes that are associated with the selected file.


Enable this check box to suppress the filter's dialog box. The filter's default settings will be used.


Enable this check box to maintain layers and pages when importing files.


Enable this check box to link the bitmap externally instead of saving it in the image file. This saves disk space and allows the image to be loaded and edited faster.


Enable this check box when importing TIFF (or CT) files to link a low resolution place holder image to a high resolution file. These TIFF (or CT) images become known as OPI images. When your service bureau receives your print file, the OPI server substitutes the high-resolution images for the low-resolution images. If there are no OPI images in your file, the Maintain OPI Links option will not be available at print time.


Enable this check box to check for a watermark when importing files. This option alerts you when an image is encoded with a Digimarc watermark. The presence of a Digimarc watermark indicates that there is a copyright claim on the file. The watermarks provide a mechanism for you to contact the creator about the image or one like it.


Crop Image dialog box


These controls allow you to define and perfect the cropping area.


Displays the path, filename, and extension of the image.


Displays the image with a cropping box around it. Click and drag the nodes to perfect the size of the cropping box. Use the Hand tool to move the cropping box to a different part of the image.


Displays the height of the cropping box. To change the height, type in a value or adjust the existing one using the scroll arrows.


Defines the height of the cropping box. To adjust the height of the cropping box, type in a value or adjust the existing one using the scroll arrows.


Defines the width of the cropping box. To adjust the width, type in a value or adjust the existing one using the scroll arrows.


Displays the width of the cropping box. To change the width, type in a value or adjust the existing one using the scroll arrows.


July 7, 97 The following CS topics in the Crop Image dialog need to be rewritten. Compile without this rtf and figure out which IDs correspond to which UI items.


Displays the amount on top of the image area to be cropped off.


Displays the amount on top of the image area to be cropped off.


Displays the amount of the area on the left side of the image to be cropped off.


Displays the amount of the area on the left side of the image to be cropped off.


Click to select the entire image.


Displays the unit of measurement used to calculate the size and position of the cropping box. To use another, click the down arrow and choose one from the list.


Displays the unit of measurement used to calculate the size and position of the cropping box. To use another, click the down arrow and choose one from the list.


Displays the size of the new, cropped image.


Displays the size of the new, cropped image.


Resample dialog box


Displays the path, filename, and extension of the image.


Displays the width of the image using the unit of measurement selected in the units box. You can adjust the width using either of two methods: you can type in a new value or use the scroll arrows to adjust the current value in the number box, or you can type in a value in the Percentage box. The change is reflected in both boxes.


Displays the width of the image using the unit of measurement selected in the units box. You can adjust the width using either of two methods: you can type in a new value or use the scroll arrows to adjust the current value in the number box, or you can type in a value in the Percentage box. The change is reflected in both boxes.


Displays the height of the image using the unit of measurement selected in the units box. You can adjust the height using either of two methods: you can type in a new value or use the scroll arrows to adjust the current value in the number box, or you can type in a value in the Percentage box. The change is reflected in both boxes.


Displays the height of the image using the unit of measurement selected in the units box. You can adjust the height using either of two methods: you can type in a new value or use the scroll arrows to adjust the current value in the number box, or you can type in a value in the Percentage box. The change is reflected in both boxes.


Displays the current width of the image as a percentage of its original width.


Displays the current height of the image as a percentage of its original height.


Displays the current width of the image as a percentage of its original width.


Displays the current height of the image as a percentage of its original height.


Displays the image's current width.


Displays the image's current height.


Displays the unit of measurement used to calculate image height and width.


Displays the unit of measurement used to calculate image height and width.


Displays the horizontal resolution of the image in pixels, or dots per inch (dpi). To change the resolution, type in a new value, or use the scroll arrows to adjust the existing value. Ensure the Identical Values control is enabled if you wish to keep the horizontal and vertical resolutions identical.


Displays the vertical resolution of the image in pixels, or dots per inch (dpi). To change the resolution, type in a new value, or use the scroll arrows to adjust the existing value. Ensure the Identical Values control is enabled if you wish to keep the horizontal and vertical resolutions identical.


Displays the horizontal resolution of the image in pixels, or dots per inch (dpi). To change the resolution, type in a new value, or use the scroll arrows to adjust the existing value. Ensure the Identical Values control is enabled if you wish to keep the horizontal and vertical resolutions identical.


Displays the vertical resolution of the image in pixels, or dots per inch (dpi). To change the resolution, type in a new value, or use the scroll arrows to adjust the existing value. Ensure the Identical Values control is enabled if you wish to keep the horizontal and vertical resolutions identical.


Displays the horizontal resolution of the image in pixels, or dots per inch (dpi). To change the resolution, type in a new value, or use the scroll arrows to adjust the existing value. Ensure the Identical Values control is enabled if you wish to keep the horizontal and vertical resolutions identical.


Displays the vertical resolution of the image in pixels, or dots per inch (dpi). To change the resolution, type in a new value, or use the scroll arrows to adjust the existing value. Ensure the Identical Values control is enabled if you wish to keep the horizontal and vertical resolutions identical.


Displays the original vertical resolution of the image in pixels, or dots per inch (dpi).


Enable this check box to force the horizontal and vertical resolution values to be identical. When you enter a value in one box, the other changes automatically.


Displays the original file size of the image in bytes.


Displays the size the file will be after resampling.


Displays the original file size of the image in bytes.


Displays the size the file will be after resampling.


These controls allow you to change the resolution of your image.


Enable to maintain equal horizontal and vertical values. When this check box is enabled, when you enter a value in one box, the other will change automatically.


Bitmap dialog box


This group of controls allows you to change color characteristics of your image.


Displays the selected color mode. The number of bits a color mode uses determines both the horsepower it requires from your system as well as the number of colors or shades it is capable of producing. One bit can either be on or off, so 1-bit color is capable of creating just two colors: 0 (off) is black, and 1 (on) is white. To use another color mode, click the down arrow and choose one from the list.

•	black and white = 1-bit

•	256 shades of gray = 8-bit

•	16 colors = 4-bit

•	paletted color = 8-bit

•	16 million colors = 24-bit

•	CMYK = 32-bit


Enable this check box to use image dithering. Dithering is a method of enhancing the color in images that use 16 or 256 colors or shades of gray.


Enable this check box to use a color profile when exporting the image.


This group of controls allows you to change the dimensions of your image.


Displays the image's export dimensions. To use another dimension, click the down arrow and choose one from the list. If you don't select a size, the original file dimensions are used.


Displays the width of the file in pixels. To change the file width, type in a new value, or use the scroll arrows to adjust the existing one.


Displays the height of the file in pixels. To change the file height, type in a new value, or use the scroll arrows to adjust the existing one.


Displays the width of the file in pixels. To change the file width, type in a new value, or use the scroll arrows to adjust the existing one.


Displays the height of the file in pixels. To change the file height, type in a new value, or use the scroll arrows to adjust the existing one.


This group of controls allows you to change the resolution of your image.


Displays the resolution of the file. To use another resolution, click the down arrow and choose one from the list, or type new values in the Horizontal and Vertical boxes below.


Displays the vertical resolution of the file. To use another, type a new value in the box, or use the scroll arrows to adjust the existing one.


Displays the horizontal resolution of the file. To use another, type a new value in the box, or use the scroll arrows to adjust the existing one.


Displays the horizontal resolution of the file. To use another, type a new value in the box, or use the scroll arrows to adjust the existing one.


Displays the horizontal resolution of the file. To use another, type a new value in the box, or use the scroll arrows to adjust the existing one.


Displays the vertical resolution of the file. To use another, type a new value in the box, or use the scroll arrows to adjust the existing one.


Displays the vertical resolution of the file. To use another, type a new value in the box, or use the scroll arrows to adjust the existing one.


Enable to maintain equal horizontal and vertical values. When this check box is enabled, when you enter a value in one box, the other will change automatically.


This group of controls allows you to select a method of anti-aliasing for your image. Anti-aliasing removes jagged edges from bitmap images by adding intermediate colors or shades of gray, thereby smoothing the transition between colors.


Click if you don't want to use anti-aliasing. Anti-aliasing removes jagged edges from bitmap images by adding intermediate colors or shades of gray, thereby smoothing the transition between colors.


Click to use the Normal method of anti-aliasing. Anti-aliasing removes jagged edges from bitmap images by adding intermediate colors or shades of gray, thereby smoothing the transition between colors. The Normal option works well for images composed of straight lines [image] curves and text are excluded from the process.


Click to use the Super-sampling method of anti-aliasing. Anti-aliasing removes jagged edges from bitmap images by adding intermediate colors or shades of gray, thereby smoothing the transition between colors. The Super-sampling option anti-aliases both curves and text, but is more memory intensive than the Normal option.


Displays the estimated size of the file before it is compressed. Compressed files will be smaller than the displayed value.


Displays the estimated size of the file before it is compressed. Compressed files will be smaller than the displayed value.


Selects the number of fountain steps used when exporting the image.


Selects the number of fountain steps used when exporting the image.


Enable this check box to mask an area outside of the current selected objects.


Enable this check box to maintain the aspect ratio between the height and the width of the image. When this check box is enabled, the dimensions will automatically change to reflect the original image size.


Resets the bitmap properties to their default settings.


Save dialog box


Displays the compression type that will be used when you save the file. To use another type of compression, click the down arrow and choose one from the list.


Enable this check box to save only selected objects.


Enable this check box to suppress the filter's dialog box. The filter's default settings will be used.


Allows you to add notes that will be saved with the file.


Allows you to add notes that will be saved with the file.


Type in any keywords you want to associate with the file. You can use keywords to search for files on your system. You can type single words, phrases, or combinations of both. Separate keywords with commas.


Type in any keywords you want to associate with the file. You can use keywords to search for files on your system. You can type single words, phrases, or combinations of both. Separate keywords with commas.


Enable this check box to embed fonts in the file. Use this option if you aren't sure what fonts are available on other systems or output devices you will be using with this file.


Click to open the Advanced Settings dialog box.


Displays the version of the Corel application you are running.


Displays the version of the Corel application you are running.


Displays the file size of the file's thumbnail. To change the file size, click the down arrow and choose a size from the list.


Displays the file size of the file's thumbnail. To change the file size, click the down arrow and choose a size from the list.


Displays the selected compression type. To use another, click the down arrow and choose one from the list.


Click to save the image.


Click to close the dialogue box without saving any changes you've made.


File Types dialog box, Associate tab


Displays the name of the Corel application you are running.


Lists all the file extensions you can associate with the Corel application you are running. To associate a file extension with the application, enable its check box.


Provides a description of the selected filter.


Provides a description of the selected filter.


Resets the Associate page properties to their default settings.


File Types dialog box, Filters tab


Lists the available filter types. Double-click a filter type to open a list of available filters. To add a filter to the active filters list, select it and click Add.


Lists the active filters. To add a filter to the active filters list, select it in the window to the left and click Add.


Lists the active filters. To add a filter to the active filters list, select it in the window to the left and click Add.


Use to add a filter to the list of active filters. Select the file in the window to the left, and click Add.


Use to remove a filter from the list of active filters. Select a file in the list, and click Remove.


Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to rearrange filters in the active filters list. Select the filter you want to move, then click Move Up or Move Down until it is positioned in the list as you wish.


Provides a description of the selected filter.


Resets the file format properties to their original default settings.


Resample dialog box


Displays the picture's original width.


Displays the width of the picture using the unit of measurement selected in the units box. You can adjust the width using either of two methods: you can type in a new value or use the scroll arrows to adjust the current value in the number box, or you can type in a value in the Percentage box. The change is reflected in both boxes.


Displays the height of the picture using the unit of measurement selected in the units box. You can adjust the height using either of two methods: you can type in a new value or use the scroll arrows to adjust the current value in the number box, or you can type in a value in the Percentage box. The change is reflected in both boxes.


Displays the picture's original height.


Displays the current width of the picture as a percentage of its original width.


Displays the current height of the picture as a percentage of its original height.


Displays the unit of measurement used to calculate picture's height and width.


Displays the unit of measurement used to calculate picture's height and width.


Displays the horizontal resolution of the picture in pixels, or dots per inch (dpi). To change the resolution, type in a new value, or use the scroll arrows to adjust the existing value. Enable the Identical Values check box if you want to keep the horizontal and vertical resolutions identical.


Displays the original horizontal resolution of the picture in pixels, or dots per inch (dpi).


Displays the vertical resolution of the picture in pixels, or dots per inch (dpi). To change the resolution, type in a new value, or use the scroll arrows to adjust the existing value. Enable the Identical Values check box if you want to keep the horizontal and vertical resolutions identical.


Displays the original vertical resolution of the picture in pixels, or dots per inch (dpi).


Enable this check box to force the horizontal and vertical resolution values to be identical. When you enter a value in one box, the other changes automatically.


Displays the size the file will be after resampling.


Displays the original file size of the picture in bytes.


Enable this check box to average the adjacent pixels and create new pixels based on the average values.


Enable this check box to maintain the current picture proportions, both in dimensions and resolution. When you type a value in one box, the value in the other box adjusts automatically.


Enable this check box to maintain the original file size of the picture; that is, the amount of space it takes up on your hard drive. Changing the resolution without changing the picture's dimensions affects the picture size.


Convert


Convert to 1 bit


Click to produce an picture using just black and white values, but using the Error Diffusion method of dithering to produce the illusion of varying shades of gray. This method is more expensive in terms of system requirements than the Ordered method of dithering.


Click to produce an picture using just black and white values, but using the Error Diffusion method of dithering to produce the illusion of varying shades of gray. This method is more expensive in terms of system requirements than the Ordered method of dithering.


Click to produce a black and white picture using dots of various sizes. On printers that cannot print dots of different sizes, the halftone is produced by printing different numbers of dots in a given area.


Click to produce a black and white picture using dots of various sizes. On printers that cannot print dots of different sizes, the halftone is produced by printing different numbers of dots in a given area.


Click to convert the picture to black and white line art.


Click to convert the picture to black and white line art.


Click to produce an picture using just black and white values, but using Ordered dithering to create the illusion of varying shades of gray. This option is less expensive in terms of system requirements than the Error Diffusion method of dithering.


Click to produce an picture using just black and white values, but using Ordered dithering to create the illusion of varying shades of gray. This option is less expensive in terms of system requirements than the Error Diffusion method of dithering.


Displays the halftone screen. The halftone is produced by printing different numbers of dots in a given area. The halftone screen determines the shape of that given area.


Displays the halftone screen. The halftone is produced by printing different numbers of dots in a given area. The halftone screen determines the shape of that given area.


Controls the line frequency of the halftone screen.


Controls the line frequency of the halftone screen.


Controls the line frequency of the halftone screen.


Displays the selected unit of measurement that is used to calculate the line frequency. Click the down arrow to choose a different unit of measurement.


Controls the screen angle of the halftone screen.


Controls the screen angle of the halftone screen.


Click this button to reset all the controls in this dialog box to their default settings.


Click this button to enable the single, large Result Window Preview mode.


Click Preview to see how your picture will look if you apply the effect using the current settings.


Click this button to disable the on-screen preview.


Click this button to display both the Original and the Result windows.


Click Preview to see how your picture will look if you apply the effect using the current settings.


Click this button to have the Result window automatically update to reflect any changes you make to settings in the dialog box.


Click this button to access the bitmap effect filters.


Click this button to disable the on-screen preview.


Click Preview to see how your picture will look if you apply the effect using the current settings.


Click this button to enable the single, large Result Window Preview mode.


Click this button to have the Result window automatically update to reflect any changes you make to settings in the dialog box.


Displays how your picture will look if you apply the effect using the current settings. Click Preview to update the Result window, or click the lock button to have the Result window update continuously.


Displays how your picture will look if you apply the effect using the current settings. Click Preview to update the Result window, or click the lock button to have the Result window update continuously.


Displays how your picture looks before you apply the effect.


Displays how your picture looks before you apply the effect.


Displays how your picture will look if you apply the effect using the current settings. Click Preview to update the Result window, or click the lock button to have the Result window update continuously.


Displays how your picture will look if you apply the effect using the current settings. Click Preview to update the Result window, or click the lock button to have the Result window update continuously.


Convert to Paletted


Click a tab to access picture conversion options.


(Options tab)


Creates a smoothly blurred appearance on the picture. When you smooth a picture, Corel VENTURA analyzes the color differences around each pixel and blends the color transitions where abrupt color changes occur. Smoothing often creates a more accurate color palette.


Opens the Open Palette dialog box, which lets you locate and open a custom palette to use when converting a picture to the 8-bit Paletted color mode.


Provides a list of palette types that you can use to convert a picture. You can choose a preset palette or choose Custom to create your own customized color palette.


Provides a list of dithering types. Dithering is the process of arranging adjacent pixels of various shades to achieve a particular color. Choose None to disable dithering. Choose Ordered to approximate color blends using fixed dot patterns. Choose Error Diffusion to approximate color blends by scattering pixels irregularly, making edges and colors softer. Ordered dithering type applies more quickly than Error Diffusion but is less accurate.


Displays the number of colors you want to include in an Adaptive or Optimized palette. Additional colors will not be added if you select more colors than are used in the picture. Black and white pictures are the exception: a palette with 256 shades of grays is created when the picture is converted.


Specifies a target color for an Optimized conversion, which means that more colors in the specified color's range are used in the conversion.


Displays a target color for the paletted conversion, which means that more colors within this color's range are used in the conversion. You can choose the range sensitivity color in two ways: open the color picker and click a color or open the color picker and click the Other button to choose additional colors or create your own.


Resets the range sensitivity color. A default color is displayed, based on the dominant tones in the current picture.


Provides a list of preset conversion options. You can add or delete settings from the Preset list box using the Add and Remove buttons.


Deletes the selected preset options from the Preset list box. These options are no longer available and cannot be retrieved.


Saves the conversion options you specified in the Presets list box. You can use these conversion options on different pictures or in different Corel VENTURA sessions.


(Range Sensitivity tab)


Returns the Importance and Lightness sliders to their default values.


Determines how much emphasis is placed on this color (and others related to it) in the Optimized conversion. Higher importance values mean that more shades of this color (and those related to it) are included in the color palette [image] to the point where other colors in the picture are excluded.


Move the slider toward the minus sign to lower the emphasis that is placed on this color (and others related to it) in the Optimized conversion.


Move the slider toward the plus sign to raise the emphasis that is placed on this color (and others related to it) in the Optimized conversion.


Returns the Importance slider to its default value.


Determines the tolerance or sensitivity of the conversion process to the lightness component of the range sensitivity color.


Move the slider toward the minus sign to lower the sensitivity of the conversion process to the lightness component of the range sensitivity color.


Move the slider toward the plus sign to raise the sensitivity of the conversion process to the lightness component of the range sensitivity color.


Returns the Lightness slider to its default value.


Determines the tolerance or sensitivity of the conversion process to the green/red component of the range sensitivity color.


Move the slider toward the minus sign to lower the sensitivity of the conversion process to the green/red component of the range sensitivity color.


Move the slider toward the plus sign to raise the sensitivity of the conversion process to the green/red component of the range sensitivity color.


Returns the A (Green Red Axis) slider to its default value.


Determines the tolerance or sensitivity of the conversion process to the blue/yellow component of the range sensitivity color.


Move the slider toward the minus sign to lower the sensitivity of the conversion process to the blue/yellow component of the range sensitivity color.


Move the slider toward the plus sign to raise the sensitivity of the conversion process to the blue/yellow component of the range sensitivity color.


Returns the B (Blue Yellow Axis) slider to its default value.


Displays the color that you've specified as the range sensitivity color for your Optimized conversion. More colors within this color's range are used in the Optimized palette.


(processed palette tab)


Displays the colors in the processed palette that you are using to convert the current picture.


Opens the Color Table, which lets you customize a selected color in the processed palette.


Opens the Save Palette As dialog box, which lets you save the processed palette that you've created for use on other pictures in future Corel VENTURA sessions. You can open the palettes that you save by clicking the Open button on the Options page of the Convert To Paletted dialog box. Custom palettes are saved with the .CPL file extension.


Convert to Duotone


Displays the dynamic ink curves. The horizontal plane displays the 256 possible shades of gray in a grayscale picture (0 is black; 255 is white). The vertical plane represents the intensity of an ink (from 1 to 100 per cent) that is applied to the corresponding grayscale values.


Displays how each ink is applied along the grayscale model. This allows you to visually review the percentage of color that is added to each grayscale pixel.


Enable to display all dynamic ink curves in the tone curve grid. The number of ink curves varies with the Duotone conversion Type: Monotone, Duotone, Tritone, and Quadtone.


Displays the selected ink mode. Click the down arrow to choose from all available ink modes.

•	A monotone is a grayscale picture that is printed with a single ink. The single ink produces all the shadows, midtones, and highlights in the picture. A monotone is like a conventional grayscale picture.

•	A duotone is a grayscale picture that is printed with two inks, usually a black ink and a colored ink. The black ink is applied to shadow areas and the colored ink is applied to midtones and highlight areas. This adds a colored tint to the grayscale picture.

•	A tritone is a grayscale picture that is printed with three inks, usually a black ink and two colored inks.

•	A quadtone is a grayscale picture that is printed with four inks, usually a black ink and three colored inks.


Displays the selected ink colors. The default ink is a PANTONE Process color. To choose a different color, double-click the ink's name to open the Color dialog box.


Displays the selected overprint ink colors and how they will appear when printed to a composite printer. To choose or create a new color, double-click a color in the list, which opens the Select Color dialog box.


Displays how much ink is applied to each point on the ink curve. Position indicates the grayscale value of each point, whereas value indicates the percentage of ink that is applied to the pixels at each point.


Resets the selected item to the settings that were present when you first opened the tab.


The functionality of the Load button depends on which tab of the Duotone dialog box is selected. On the General tab, the Load button opens the Load Duotone File dialog box, where you can access duotone (.CPD) files. On the Inks tab, the Load button opens the Load Ink File dialog box, where you can access ink (.CIK) files.


The functionality of the Save button depends on which tab of the Duotone dialog box is selected. On the General tab, the Save button opens the Save Duotone File dialog box, where you can save the current set of ink curves. On the Inks, tab, the Save button opens the Save Ink File dialog box, where you can save the selected ink file.


Enable this check box to view overprint areas onscreen.


Click to reset the selected ink curve to its default settings.


Resets all items in the overprints list to the settings that were present when you first opened the tab.


Displays all variations of the current ink colors.


Level Equalization


Move the slider or type a value in the box to set the gamma curve value. Adjusting the gamma curve value allows you to pick up detail in a low contrast image without significantly affecting the shadows or highlights. This adjustment does affect all the values in your image, but is curve-based so the changes are weighted toward the midtones.


Move the slider or type a value in the box to set the gamma curve value. Adjusting the gamma curve value allows you to pick up detail in a low contrast image without significantly affecting the shadows or highlights. This adjustment does affect all the values in your image, but is curve-based so the changes are weighted toward the midtones.


Move the slider or type a value in the box to set the gamma curve value. Adjusting the gamma curve value allows you to pick up detail in a low contrast image without significantly affecting the shadows or highlights. This adjustment does affect all the values in your image, but is curve-based so the changes are weighted toward the midtones.


Move the slider or type a value in the box to set the gamma curve value. Adjusting the gamma curve value allows you to pick up detail in a low contrast image without significantly affecting the shadows or highlights. This adjustment does affect all the values in your image, but is curve-based so the changes are weighted toward the midtones.


Click to enable the eyedropper tools to set input values.


Click to enable the eyedropper tools to set input values.


Click to set input and output values for your lightest and darkest pixels. Set values by clicking either the Set Input Values or Set Output Values button, clicking an eyedropper tool, and selecting a sample color in your picture.


Click to set input and output values for your lightest and darkest pixels. Set values by clicking either the Set Input Values or Set Output Values button, clicking an eyedropper tool, and selecting a sample color in your picture.


Click to set input and output values for your lightest and darkest pixels. Set values by clicking either the Set Input Values or Set Output Values button, clicking an eyedropper tool, and selecting a sample color in your picture.


Click to set input and output values for your lightest and darkest pixels. Set values by clicking either the Set Input Values or Set Output Values button, clicking an eyedropper tool, and selecting a sample color in your picture.


Click to enable the eyedropper tools to set output values.


Click to enable the eyedropper tools to set output values.


Displays the channel you are currently editing. Click the down arrow to select a different channel. You can edit each channel separately, or you can adjust them simultaneously in the composite channel.


Displays the channel you are currently editing. Click the down arrow to select a different channel. You can edit each channel separately, or you can adjust them simultaneously in the composite channel.


Displays the channel you are currently editing. Click the down arrow to select a different channel. You can edit each channel separately, or you can adjust them simultaneously in the composite channel.


Displays the channel you are currently editing. Click the down arrow to select a different channel. You can edit each channel separately, or you can adjust them simultaneously in the composite channel.


Enable this check box to redistribute the pixel values throughout the entire tone range automatically.


Enable this check box to redistribute the pixel values throughout the entire tone range automatically.


Click to open the Auto-Adjust Range dialog box, which allows you to adjust the percentage of outlying pixels on either end of the tonal range that Corel VENTURA will ignore when you use the Auto-Adjust option.


Click to open the Auto-Adjust Range dialog box, which allows you to adjust the percentage of outlying pixels on either end of the tonal range that Corel VENTURA will ignore when you use the Auto-Adjust option.


Type a value to set a clipping range for the brightest pixels in your picture. All pixels that fall between this value and the value you set as the brightest pixel value in the output range will map to the brightest pixel value. For example, if you set 240 as your brightest pixel value and 220 as your Input Value Clipping for the high end of the range, the pixels that fall between 220 and 255 will all map to 240.


Type a value to set a clipping range for the brightest pixels in your picture. All pixels that fall between this value and the value you set as the brightest pixel value in the output range will map to the brightest pixel value. For example, if you set 240 as your brightest pixel value and 220 as your Input Value Clipping for the high end of the range, the pixels that fall between 220 and 255 will all map to 240.


Type a value to set a clipping range for the darkest pixels in your picture. All pixels that fall between this value and the value you set as the darkest pixel value in the output range will map to the darkest pixel value. For example, if you set 20 as your darkest pixel value and 40 as your Input Value Clipping for the low end of the range, the pixels that fall between 0 and 40 will all map to 20.


Type a value to set a clipping range for the darkest pixels in your picture. All pixels that fall between this value and the value you set as the darkest pixel value in the output range will map to the darkest pixel value. For example, if you set 20 as your darkest pixel value and 40 as your Input Value Clipping for the low end of the range, the pixels that fall between 0 and 40 will all map to 20.


A graphic representation of the number of pixels at each of the 256 possible brightness values.


A graphic representation of the number of pixels at each of the 256 possible brightness values.


Move these handles to set a threshold based on the output range, which you control by moving the handles that area below the histogram. The brightness values that fall outside the Input Value Clipping range will map to the brightness values specified in the output range. For example, if the output range spans the values 20 to 240, and you type 40 and 220 in the Input Value Clipping boxes, the values between 0 and 40 will all map to 20, and the values between 220 and 255 will all map to 240. This increases the number of pixels at each extreme of the brightness scale.


Move these handles to set a threshold based on the output range, which you control by moving the handles that area below the histogram. The brightness values that fall outside the Input Value Clipping range will map to the brightness values specified in the output range. For example, if the output range spans the values 20 to 240, and you type 40 and 220 in the Input Value Clipping boxes, the values between 0 and 40 will all map to 20, and the values between 220 and 255 will all map to 240. This increases the number of pixels at each extreme of the brightness scale.


Move these handles to adjust the values of the darkest and lightest pixels in your picture. The handle on the left represents the value of the darkest pixels, and the handle on the right represents the value of the lightest pixels. To compress the tonal range of your picture, move the handles closer together. The pixels that fall outside the new tonal range will map to the output values you set here.


Move these handles to adjust the values of the darkest and lightest pixels in your picture. The handle on the left represents the value of the darkest pixels, and the handle on the right represents the value of the lightest pixels. To compress the tonal range of your picture, move the handles closer together. The pixels that fall outside the new tonal range will map to the output values you set here.


Displays the output brightness value of the lightest pixels in your picture. To adjust this value, type a value or adjust the existing value using the scroll arrows. All pixels in your picture that are lighter than this value will map to it after equalization.


Displays the output brightness value of the lightest pixels in your picture. To adjust this value, type a value or adjust the existing value using the scroll arrows. All pixels in your picture that are lighter than this value will map to it after equalization.


Displays the output brightness value of the darkest pixels in your picture. To adjust this value, type a value or adjust the existing value using the scroll arrows. All pixels in your picture that are darker than this value will map to it after equalization.


Displays the output brightness value of the darkest pixels in your picture. To adjust this value, type a value or adjust the existing value using the scroll arrows. All pixels in your picture that are darker than this value will map to it after equalization.


Displays the current clipping percentage; that is, the percentage of the most extreme brightness values Corel VENTURA will ignore when identifying the lightest and darkest values in the histogram. To change the percentage, type a value in the box or use the scroll arrows. This option is only available if you have disabled the Automatic check box.


Displays the current clipping percentage; that is, the percentage of the most extreme brightness values Corel VENTURA will ignore when identifying the lightest and darkest values in the histogram. To change the percentage, type a value in the box or use the scroll arrows. This option is only available if you have disabled the Automatic check box.


Enable this check box to have Corel VENTURA automatically clip the outlying brightness values in your picture; that is, to ignore a percentage of the most extreme brightness values when identifying the lightest and darkest pixels in the histogram. Disable this check box if you want to set the clipping percentage yourself.


Enable this check box to have Corel VENTURA automatically clip the outlying brightness values in your picture; that is, to ignore a percentage of the most extreme brightness values when identifying the lightest and darkest pixels in the histogram. Disable this check box if you want to set the clipping percentage yourself.


Sample/Target Balance


Use to select sample colors from the shadow areas of your picture. To set the target colors using the Select Colors dialog box, double-click the colors in the Target column. This opens the Select Color dialog box.


Use to select sample colors from the shadow areas of your picture. To set the target colors using the Select Colors dialog box, double-click the colors in the Target column. This opens the Select Color dialog box.


Use to select sample colors from the midtone areas of your picture. To set the target colors using the Select Colors dialog box, double-click the colors in the Target column. This opens the Select Color dialog box.


Use to select sample colors from the midtone areas of your picture. To set the target colors using the Select Colors dialog box, double-click the colors in the Target column. This opens the Select Color dialog box.


Use to select sample colors from the highlight areas of your picture. To set the target colors using the Select Colors dialog box, double-click the colors in the Target column. This opens the Select Color dialog box.


Use to select sample colors from the highlight areas of your picture. To set the target colors using the Select Colors dialog box, double-click the colors in the Target column. This opens the Select Color dialog box.


A graphic representation of the number of pixels at each of the 256 possible brightness values.


A graphic representation of the number of pixels at each of the 256 possible brightness values.


A graphic representation of the 256 possible brightness values. The histogram above indicates how many pixels are at each level in your picture.


A graphic representation of the 256 possible brightness values. The histogram above indicates how many pixels are at each level in your picture.


Enable this check box to have Corel VENTURA automatically clip the outlying brightness values in your picture; that is, to ignore a percentage of the most extreme brightness values when identifying the lightest and darkest pixels in the histogram. Disable this check box if you want to set the clipping percentage yourself.


Enable this check box to have Corel VENTURA automatically clip the outlying brightness values in your picture; that is, to ignore a percentage of the most extreme brightness values when identifying the lightest and darkest pixels in the histogram. Disable this check box if you want to set the clipping percentage yourself.


Displays the sample and target colors side-by-side. To edit a target color using the Select Color dialog box, double-click it.


Displays the sample and target colors side-by-side. To edit a target color using the Select Color dialog box, double-click it.


Displays the channel in which you are working. Click the down arrow to select a different channel. You can edit the values of each channel separately, edit them simultaneously in the composite channel, or view the value of one channel while applying the changes to all channels.


Displays the channel in which you are working. Click the down arrow to select a different channel. You can edit the values of each channel separately, edit them simultaneously in the composite channel, or view the value of one channel while applying the changes to all channels.


Enable this check box if you always want to adjust all channels, even if you are viewing just one. For example, if you are working in the red channel and have this check box enabled, the changes are applied to all channels.


Enable this check box if you always want to adjust all channels, even if you are viewing just one. For example, if you are working in the red channel and have this check box enabled, the changes are applied to all channels.


Displays the current clipping percentage; that is, the percentage of the most extreme brightness values Corel VENTURA will ignore when identifying the lightest and darkest values in the histogram. To change the percentage, type a value or adjust the current value using the scroll arrows. This option is only available if you have disabled the Automatic check box.


Displays the current clipping percentage; that is, the percentage of the most extreme brightness values Corel VENTURA will ignore when identifying the lightest and darkest values in the histogram. To change the percentage, type a value or adjust the current value using the scroll arrows. This option is only available if you have disabled the Automatic check box.


Tone Curve


Displays the channel whose response curve you are currently editing. Click the down arrow to select a different channel. Each channel has its own response curve, although you can adjust them simultaneously by working in the composite channel.


Displays the channel whose response curve you are currently editing. Click the down arrow to select a different channel. Each channel has its own response curve, although you can adjust them simultaneously by working in the composite channel.


Displays the channel whose response curve you are currently editing. Click the down arrow to select a different channel. Each channel has its own response curve, although you can adjust them simultaneously by working in the composite channel.


Displays the channel whose response curve you are currently editing. Click the down arrow to select a different channel. Each channel has its own response curve, although you can adjust them simultaneously by working in the composite channel.


Displays the selected curve-editing style. Click the down arrow to display a list of available editing styles.

•	Curve allows you to shape the curve by clicking and dragging, and smoothes the distribution of values. Drag the curve to adjust its shape.

•	Linear allows you to draw the curve by clicking and dragging, but it keeps the segments between nodes straight.

•	Freehand allows you to draw the curve by clicking and dragging.

•	Gamma corrections are weighted toward the midtones. You can adjust the gamma curve value in three ways: move the slider, adjust the number in the box, or drag the curve.


Displays the selected curve-editing style. Click the down arrow to display a list of available editing styles.

•	Curve allows you to shape the curve by clicking and dragging, and smoothes the distribution of values. Drag the curve to adjust its shape.

•	Linear allows you to draw the curve by clicking and dragging, but it keeps the segments between nodes straight.

•	Freehand allows you to draw the curve by clicking and dragging.

•	Gamma corrections are weighted toward the midtones. You can adjust the gamma curve value in three ways: move the slider, adjust the number in the box, or drag the curve.


Allows you to adjust the gamma values when you select gamma as the curve-editing style. You can adjust the gamma curve value in three ways: move the slider, adjust the number in the box, or drag the curve.


Allows you to adjust the gamma values when you select gamma as the curve-editing style. You can adjust the gamma curve value in three ways: move the slider, adjust the number in the box, or drag the curve.


Allows you to adjust the gamma values when you select gamma as the curve-editing style. You can adjust the gamma curve value in three ways: move the slider, adjust the number in the box, or drag the curve.


Allows you to adjust the gamma values when you select gamma as the curve-editing style. You can adjust the gamma curve value in three ways: move the slider, adjust the number in the box, or drag the curve.


Displays the name of the response curve, if it has been previously saved.


Displays the name of the response curve, if it has been previously saved.


Click to open the Load Tone Map File dialog box, which allows you to load preset and previously saved response curves. Response curve files are saved with the extension .MAP.


Click to open the Load Tone Map File dialog box, which allows you to load preset and previously saved response curves. Response curve files are saved with the extension .MAP.


Click to open the Save Tone Map dialog box, which allows you to save customized response curves. Response curve files are saved with the extension .MAP.


Click to open the Save Tone Map dialog box, which allows you to save customized response curves. Response curve files are saved with the extension .MAP.


Displays the selected response curve. The response curve is a visual representation of the balance between shadows, midtones, and highlights in your picture that extends from the shadow range to the highlight range. By adjusting the curve, you affect the relationship between these ranges in your picture. Curve-based editing allows you to pin-point a problem area and to produce subtle or pronounced change in that area. The changes you make dissipate according to the curve as you move away from the targeted area.


Displays the selected response curve. The response curve is a visual representation of the balance between shadows, midtones, and highlights in your picture that extends from the shadow range to the highlight range. By adjusting the curve, you affect the relationship between these ranges in your picture. Curve-based editing allows you to pin-point a problem area and to produce subtle or pronounced change in that area. The changes you make dissipate according to the curve as you move away from the targeted area.


Represents the tonal range of the channel on the vertical plane.


Represents the tonal range of the channel on the vertical plane.


Represents the tonal range of the channel on the horizontal plane.


Represents the tonal range of the channel on the horizontal plane.


Click to invert the response curve.


Click to invert the response curve.


Click to flip the response curve vertically.


Click to flip the response curve vertically.


Click to flip the response curve horizontally.


Click to flip the response curve horizontally.


Resets the response curve to the default shape, which is a straight line that extends between the darkest and lightest values in your picture.


Resets the response curve to the default shape, which is a straight line that extends between the darkest and lightest values in your picture.


Click to smooth the shape of the response curve you have drawn in Freehand editing style. Keep clicking until the curve is as smooth as you want.


Click to smooth the shape of the response curve you have drawn in Freehand editing style. Keep clicking until the curve is as smooth as you want.


Click to balance the response curve so that the colors in your picture appear solid with hard edges.


Click to balance the response curve so that the colors in your picture appear solid with hard edges.


Click to open the Auto-Adjust Range dialog box, which lets you set black and white limits.


Click to open the Auto-Adjust Range dialog box, which lets you set black and white limits.


Enable this check box to display the response curves for all channels at once.


Enable this check box to display the response curves for all channels at once.


Brightness, Contrast, Intensity


Move the slider or type a value in the box to adjust the brightness values of the pixels in your picture. This control shifts all pixel values up or down the tonal range, lightening or darkening all colors equally.


Move the slider or type a value in the box to adjust the brightness values of the pixels in your picture. This control shifts all pixel values up or down the tonal range, lightening or darkening all colors equally.


Move the slider or type a value in the box to adjust the contrast in your picture. Adjusting the contrast increases or decreases the difference between the lightest and darkest pixels in your picture.


Move the slider or type a value in the box to adjust the brightness values of the pixels in your picture. This control shifts all pixel values up or down the tonal range, lightening or darkening all colors equally.


Move the slider or type a value in the box to adjust the intensity of your picture. Increasing the intensity brightens the lighter areas of your picture without washing out the dark areas. Contrast and intensity usually go hand-in-hand, because an increase in contrast sometimes washes out detail in shadows and highlights, and an increase in intensity can bring it back.


Move the slider or type a value in the box to adjust the intensity of your picture. Increasing the intensity brightens the lighter areas of your picture without washing out the dark areas. Contrast and intensity usually go hand-in-hand, because an increase in contrast sometimes washes out detail in shadows and highlights, and an increase in intensity can bring it back.


Color Balance


Move the slider to shift the balance of cyan and red in your picture.


Move the slider to shift the balance of cyan and red in your picture.


Move the slider to shift the balance of magenta and green in your picture.


Move the slider to shift the balance of magenta and green in your picture.


Move the slider to shift the balance of yellow and blue in your picture.


Move the slider to shift the balance of yellow and blue in your picture.


Enable this check box if you want the changes applied to the darkest pixels in your picture.


Enable this check box if you want the changes applied to the darkest pixels in your picture.


Enable this check box if you want the changes applied to the midtones in your picture.


Enable this check box if you want the changes applied to the midtones in your picture.


Enable this check box if you want the changes applied to the lightest pixels in the picture.


Enable this check box if you want the changes applied to the lightest pixels in the picture.


Enable to maintain the brightness values of your picture. If you leave this check box unchecked, the overall lightness or darkness of your picture may be affected by color correction.


Enable to maintain the brightness values of your picture. If you leave this check box unchecked, the overall lightness or darkness of your picture may be affected by color correction.


Gamma


Type a value to set the gamma curve value. Adjusting the gamma curve value allows you to pick up detail in a low contrast picture without significantly affecting the shadows or highlights. This adjustment does affect all the values in your picture, but because it is curve-based, the changes are weighted toward the midtones.


Type a value to set the gamma curve value. Adjusting the gamma curve value allows you to pick up detail in a low contrast picture without significantly affecting the shadows or highlights. This adjustment does affect all the values in your picture, but because it is curve-based, the changes are weighted toward the midtones.


Move the slider to set the gamma curve value. Adjusting the gamma curve value allows you to pick up detail in a low contrast picture without significantly affecting the shadows or highlights. This adjustment does affect all the values in your picture, but because it is curve-based, the changes are weighted toward the midtones.


Move the slider to set the gamma curve value. Adjusting the gamma curve value allows you to pick up detail in a low contrast picture without significantly affecting the shadows or highlights. This adjustment does affect all the values in your picture, but because it is curve-based, the changes are weighted toward the midtones.


Hue, Saturation, Lightness


Move the slider or type a value to shift the hues along the color wheel. Hue is the most basic of color components in that it is what makes red, blue, etc. Compare the Original Color and New Color spectrums to see how the changes will affect your picture's colors.


Move the slider or type a value to shift the hues along the color wheel. Hue is the most basic of color components in that it is what makes red, blue, etc. Compare the Original Color and New Color spectrums to see how the changes will affect your picture's colors.


Move the slider or type a value in the box to shift the saturation of all colors in your picture. Saturation refers to the purity of your colors. Fully saturated colors contain no black, whereas fully desaturated colors appear as their grayscale equivalents. Compare the Original Color and New Color spectrums to see how the changes will affect the colors in your picture.


Move the slider or type a value in the box to shift the saturation of all colors in your picture. Saturation refers to the purity of your colors. Fully saturated colors contain no black, whereas fully desaturated colors appear as their grayscale equivalents. Compare the Original Color and New Color spectrums to see how the changes will affect the colors in your picture.


Move the slider or type a value to shift the lightness of all colors in your picture. Lightness refers to the amount of black or white your colors contain. Compare the Original Color and New Color spectrums to see how the changes will affect the colors in your picture.


Move the slider or type a value to shift the lightness of all colors in your picture. Lightness refers to the amount of black or white your colors contain. Compare the Original Color and New Color spectrums to see how the changes will affect the colors in your picture.


Displays the original colors in your picture. Compare with the New Color spectrum to see how the changes will affect the colors in your picture.


Displays the original colors in your picture. Compare with the New Color spectrum to see how the changes will affect the colors in your picture.


Displays the adjusted color spectrum. Compare with the Original Color spectrum to see how the changes will affect the colors in your picture.


Displays the adjusted color spectrum. Compare with the Original Color spectrum to see how the changes will affect the colors in your picture.


Click the button above the picture channel that is affected by the lens. Each channel can be altered separately in the same lens application. Master refers to a general overall effect on all channels. Working on individual channels allows for finer adjustments.


Click the button above the picture channel that is affected by the lens. Each channel can be altered separately in the same lens application. Master refers to a general overall effect on all channels. Working on individual channels allows for finer adjustments.


Click the button above the picture channel that is affected by the lens. Each channel can be altered separately in the same lens application. Master refers to a general overall effect on all channels. Working on individual channels allows for finer adjustments.


Click the button above the picture channel that is affected by the lens. Each channel can be altered separately in the same lens application. Master refers to a general overall effect on all channels. Working on individual channels allows for finer adjustments.


Click the button above the picture channel that is affected by the lens. Each channel can be altered separately in the same lens application. Master refers to a general overall effect on all channels. Working on individual channels allows for finer adjustments.


Click the button above the picture channel that is affected by the lens. Each channel can be altered separately in the same lens application. Master refers to a general overall effect on all channels. Working on individual channels allows for finer adjustments.


Click the button above the picture channel that is affected by the lens. Each channel can be altered separately in the same lens application. Master refers to a general overall effect on all channels. Working on individual channels allows for finer adjustments.


Click the button above the picture channel that is affected by the lens. Each channel can be altered separately in the same lens application. Master refers to a general overall effect on all channels. Working on individual channels allows for finer adjustments.


Click the button above the picture channel that is affected by the lens. Each channel can be altered separately in the same lens application. Master refers to a general overall effect on all channels. Working on individual channels allows for finer adjustments.


Click the button above the picture channel that is affected by the lens. Each channel can be altered separately in the same lens application. Master refers to a general overall effect on all channels. Working on individual channels allows for finer adjustments.


Click the button above the picture channel that is affected by the lens. Each channel can be altered separately in the same lens application. Master refers to a general overall effect on all channels. Working on individual channels allows for finer adjustments.


Click the button above the picture channel that is affected by the lens. Each channel can be altered separately in the same lens application. Master refers to a general overall effect on all channels. Working on individual channels allows for finer adjustments.


Click the button above the picture channel that is affected by the lens. Each channel can be altered separately in the same lens application. Master refers to a general overall effect on all channels. Working on individual channels allows for finer adjustments.


Click the button above the picture channel that is affected by the lens. Each channel can be altered separately in the same lens application. Master refers to a general overall effect on all channels. Working on individual channels allows for finer adjustments.


Click the button above the picture channel that is affected by the lens. Each channel can be altered separately in the same lens application. Master refers to a general overall effect on all channels. Working on individual channels allows for finer adjustments.


Click the button above the picture channel that is affected by the lens. Each channel can be altered separately in the same lens application. Master refers to a general overall effect on all channels. Working on individual channels allows for finer adjustments.


Replace Colors


Displays the color you want to replace in the picture. Use the Eyedropper tool to sample a specific color from the picture, or click the down arrow and click a color on the color picker. For a larger selection of colors, click Others and choose a color from the color dialog box.


Displays the color you want to replace in the picture. Use the Eyedropper tool to sample a specific color from the picture, or click the down arrow and click a color on the color picker. For a larger selection of colors, click Others and choose a color from the color dialog box.


Click to choose the color you want to replace. The color bar on the Old Color in the color picker section changes to that color.


Click to choose the color you want to replace. The color bar on the Old Color in the color picker section changes to that color.


Displays the color you want to use as a replacement. Click the down arrow and click a color on the color picker. For a larger selection of colors, click Others and choose a color from the Color dialog box. Move the Hue, Saturation, and Lightness sliders to fine-tune this color.


Displays the color you want to use as a replacement. Click the down arrow and click a color on the color picker. For a larger selection of colors, click Others and choose a color from the Color dialog box. Move the Hue, Saturation, and Lightness sliders to fine-tune this color.


Choose the new, replacement color. The color bar on the New Color in the color picker section changes to that color.


Choose the new, replacement color. The color bar on the New Color in the color picker section changes to that color.


Move the slider to control the hue of the replacement color. Hue is the main attribute in a color that distinguishes it from other colors. Blue, green, and yellow, for example, are all hues.


Move the slider to control the hue of the replacement color. Hue is the main attribute in a color that distinguishes it from other colors. Blue, green, and yellow, for example, are all hues.


Move the slider to shift the saturation of all colors in your picture. Saturation refers to the purity of your colors. Fully saturated colors contain no black, whereas fully desaturated colors appear as their grayscale equivalents. Compare the Original Color and New Color spectrums to see how the changes will affect your picture's colors.


Move the slider to shift the saturation of all colors in your picture. Saturation refers to the purity of your colors. Fully saturated colors contain no black, whereas fully desaturated colors appear as their grayscale equivalents. Compare the Original Color and New Color spectrums to see how the changes will affect your picture's colors.


Move the slider to control the lightness of the replacement color. Lightness refers to the amount of black or white in a color.


Move the slider to control the lightness of the replacement color. Lightness refers to the amount of black or white in a color.


Move the slider to increase or decrease the range of colors that is replaced in your picture.


Move the slider to increase or decrease the range of colors that is replaced in your picture.


Enable the Ignore Grayscale check box to ignore all gray pixels. All gray pixels will remain gray if the check box is enabled; if the check box is disabled, these pixels will be changed to the replacement color based on saturation and lightness values alone.


Enable the Ignore Grayscale check box to ignore all gray pixels. All gray pixels will remain gray if the check box is enabled; if the check box is disabled, these pixels will be changed to the replacement color based on saturation and lightness values alone.


Enable the Single Destination Color check box to replace all colors that fall within the current range with the new color. If the check box is disabled, the application of the new color appears in transparent proportions as represented by the white areas in the Mask Preview.


Enable the Single Destination Color check box to replace all colors that fall within the current range with the new color. If the check box is disabled, the application of the new color appears in transparent proportions as represented by the white areas in the Mask Preview.


Displays the areas of your picture that are affected by the color replacement. White areas are fully affected, gray areas are partially affected, and black areas are unaffected. To adjust the tolerance, move the Range slider.


Displays the areas of your picture that are affected by the color replacement. White areas are fully affected, gray areas are partially affected, and black areas are unaffected. To adjust the tolerance, move the Range slider.


DeInterlace


Click to remove even horizontal lines from scanned or interlaced video images.


Click to remove even horizontal lines from scanned or interlaced video images.


Click to remove odd horizontal lines from scanned or interlaced video images.


Click to remove odd horizontal lines from scanned or interlaced video images.


Duplication fills in the spaces with copies of the adjacent lines of pixels.


Duplication fills in the spaces with copies of the adjacent lines of pixels.


Interpolation fills in the spaces with colors created by averaging the surrounding pixels.


Interpolation fills in the spaces with colors created by averaging the surrounding pixels.


Posterize


Move to control the intensity of the posterization. Posterization simplifies the gradations of color in your picture.


Move to control the intensity of the posterization. Posterization simplifies the gradations of color in your picture.


Threshold


Click to have all the values that fall below the threshold map either to black (the default) or to the low-level value you set.


Click to have all the values that fall below the threshold map either to black (the default) or to the low-level value you set.


Click to have all the values that fall above the threshold map set either to white (the default) or to the high-level value you set.


Click to have all the values that fall above the threshold map set either to white (the default) or to the high-level value you set.


Click to have all the values that fall below the threshold map set either to black (the default) or to the low-level value you set.


Click to have all the values that fall below the threshold map set either to black (the default) or to the low-level value you set.


Click to convert your picture to black and white. The values that fall below the threshold level map go to the low level value, and the values that fall above the threshold level map go to the high level value. If you do not set low and high levels, the defaults are 0 (black) and 255 (white).


Click to convert your picture to black and white. The values that fall below the threshold level map go to the low level value, and the values that fall above the threshold level map go to the high level value. If you do not set low and high levels, the defaults are 0 (black) and 255 (white).


Displays the current clipping percentage; that is, the percentage of the most extreme brightness values Corel VENTURA will ignore when identifying the lightest and darkest values in the histogram. To change the percentage, type a value or adjust the current value using the scroll arrows. This option is only available if you have disabled the Automatic check box.


Displays the current clipping percentage; that is, the percentage of the most extreme brightness values Corel VENTURA will ignore when identifying the lightest and darkest values in the histogram. To change the percentage, type a value or adjust the current value using the scroll arrows. This option is only available if you have disabled the Automatic check box.


Enable this check box to have Corel VENTURA automatically clip the outlying brightness values in your picture; that is, to ignore a percentage of the most extreme brightness values when identifying the lightest and darkest pixels in the histogram. Disable this check box if you want to set the clipping percentage yourself.


Enable this check box to have Corel VENTURA automatically clip the outlying brightness values in your picture; that is, to ignore a percentage of the most extreme brightness values when identifying the lightest and darkest pixels in the histogram. Disable this check box if you want to set the clipping percentage yourself.


A graphic representation of the number of pixels at each of the 256 possible brightness values.


A graphic representation of the number of pixels at each of the 256 possible brightness values.


Move the pointers to adjust the threshold values.


Move the pointers to adjust the threshold values.


Displays the current low-level value. To adjust the value, type a value in the box, or drag the pointer that is below the histogram.


Displays the current low-level value. To adjust the value, type a value in the box, or drag the pointer that is below the histogram.


Displays the current threshold value. To adjust the value, type a value in the box, or drag the pointer that is below the histogram.


Displays the current threshold value. To adjust the value, type a value in the box, or drag the pointer that is below the histogram.


Displays the current high-level value. To adjust the value, type a value in the box, or drag the pointer that is below the histogram.


Displays the current high-level value. To adjust the value, type a value in the box, or drag the pointer that is below the histogram.


Band Pass


Move the slider to adjust the size of the inner band radius. This band specifies the low-frequency components of a picture.


Move the slider to adjust the size of the inner band radius. This band specifies the low-frequency components of a picture.


Move the slider to adjust the size of the outer band radius. This band specifies the high-frequency detail of a picture.


Move the slider to adjust the size of the outer band radius. This band specifies the high-frequency detail of a picture.


Move the Inner Band slider to adjust the weighting of the inner band. To eliminate smooth areas, set the inner band weighting to 0.


Move the Inner Band slider to adjust the weighting of the inner band. To eliminate smooth areas, set the inner band weighting to 0.


Move the Middle Band slider to adjust the weighting of the middle band. To eliminate intermediate areas, set the middle band weighting to 0.


Move the Middle Band slider to adjust the weighting of the middle band. To eliminate intermediate areas, set the middle band weighting to 0.


Move the Outer Band slider to adjust the weighting of the outer band. To eliminate sharp areas, set the outer band weighting to 0.


Move the Outer Band slider to adjust the weighting of the outer band. To eliminate sharp areas, set the outer band weighting to 0.


Displays a graphic representation of the bands, which represent the frequency response of your picture. To adjust the size of the bands, move the Inner Radius and Outer Radius sliders.


Displays a graphic representation of the bands, which represent the frequency response of your picture. To adjust the size of the bands, move the Inner Radius and Outer Radius sliders.


Displace


Click to tile the displacement map over your picture.


Click to stretch the displacement map to cover the original picture.


Click to stretch the edges of your picture to fill in areas left empty by the displacement process.


Click to use the opposite edge of your picture to fill in areas left empty by the displacement process.


Move the slider to shift your picture horizontally from left to right.


Move the slider to shift your picture vertically from top to bottom.


Displays the name of the selected displacement map.


Displays the selected displacement map.


Click to open the Load Displacement Map Files dialog box, which allows you to load a picture to use as a displacement map.


Edge Detect


Move the slider to set the intensity of the effect.


Move the slider to set the intensity of the effect.


Click to apply a white fill to all areas of your picture that are not part of the outlined picture.


Click to apply a white fill to all areas of your picture that are not part of the outlined picture.


Click to apply a black fill to all areas of your picture that are not part of the outlined picture.


Click to apply a black fill to all areas of your picture that are not part of the outlined picture.


Click to apply the color you choose to all areas of your picture that are not part of the outlined picture.


Click to apply the color you choose to all areas of your picture that are not part of the outlined picture.


Click the down arrow, and click a color from the color picker to choose a color. Click the Others button to create or select a custom color.


Click the down arrow, and click a color from the color picker to choose a color. Click the Others button to create or select a custom color.


Use to select a color from the picture.


Use to select a color from the picture.


Offset


Move the slider to adjust the amount of horizontal shifting.


Move the slider to adjust the amount of horizontal shifting.


Move the slider to adjust the amount of vertical shifting.


Move the slider to adjust the amount of vertical shifting.


Enable this check box to set the horizontal and vertical shift values in relation to the size of the object. With a vertical shift value of 50, your picture will shift along the vertical plane a distance equal to exactly half the vertical size of the picture.


Enable this check box to set the horizontal and vertical shift values in relation to the size of the object. With a vertical shift value of 50, your picture will shift along the vertical plane a distance equal to exactly half the vertical size of the picture.


Click to use the opposite edge of the picture to fill the empty areas.


Click to use the opposite edge of the picture to fill the empty areas.


Click to stretch the edges of the picture to fill in empty areas.


Click to stretch the edges of the picture to fill in empty areas.


Click to fill the empty areas with the color you choose.


Click to fill the empty areas with the color you choose.


Use to select a color from the picture.


Use to select a color from the picture.


Click the down arrow, and click a color from the color picker to choose a color. Click the Others button to create or select a custom color.


Click the down arrow, and click a color from the color picker to choose a color. Click the Others button to create or select a custom color.


Pixelate


Click to break up your picture into square blocks.


Click to break up your picture into square blocks.


Click to break up your picture into rectangular blocks.


Click to break up your picture into rectangular blocks.


Click to break up your picture into concentric arcs.


Click to break up your picture into concentric arcs.


Move the slider to adjust the width of the blocks. In circular mode, width is the arc-width of each block (in degrees).


Move the slider to adjust the width of the blocks. In circular mode, width is the arc-width of each block (in degrees).


Move the slider to adjust the height of the blocks. In circular mode, height is the difference in radius between the block's inner and outer curves.


Move the slider to adjust the height of the blocks. In circular mode, height is the difference in radius between the block's inner and outer curves.


Move the slider to adjust the opacity of the effect.


Move the slider to adjust the opacity of the effect.


Puzzle


Click to fill in empty areas with black.


Click to fill in empty areas with black.


Click to fill in empty areas with white.


Click to fill in empty areas with white.


Click to fill in empty areas with the original picture.


Click to fill in empty areas with the original picture.


Click to fill in empty areas with a negative of the original picture.


Click to fill in empty areas with a negative of the original picture.


Click the down arrow, and click a color from the color picker to choose a color. Click the Others button to create or select a custom color.


Click the down arrow, and click a color from the color picker to choose a color. Click the Others button to create or select a custom color.


Click the down arrow, and click a color from the color picker to choose a color. Click the Others button to create or select a custom color.


Click the down arrow, and click a color from the color picker to choose a color. Click the Others button to create or select a custom color.


Use to select a color from the picture.


Use to select a color from the picture.


Enable this check box to force the height and width of the blocks to be the same.


Enable this check box to force the height and width of the blocks to be the same.


Move the slider to adjust the width of the puzzle blocks.


Move the slider to adjust the width of the puzzle blocks.


Move the slider to adjust the height of the puzzle blocks.


Move the slider to adjust the height of the puzzle blocks.


Move the slider to adjust the amount of shifting that occurs.


Move the slider to adjust the amount of shifting that occurs.


Ripple


Click to apply the effect of a ripple created by one wave on the picture.


Click to apply the effect of a ripple created by one wave on the picture.


Click to apply a ripple effect of two identical waves perpendicular to each other.


Click to apply a ripple effect of two identical waves perpendicular to each other.


Click to apply a ripple effect of two waves perpendicular to each other, with one wave having twice the amplitude of the other.


Click to apply a ripple effect of two waves perpendicular to each other, with one wave having twice the amplitude of the other.


Enable this check box to apply distortion to the ripple.


Enable this check box to apply distortion to the ripple.


Move the slider to adjust the distance between each wave cycle. Larger values create greater distances between each wave and result in a smaller number of waves.


Move the slider to adjust the distance between each wave cycle. Larger values create greater distances between each wave and result in a smaller number of waves.


Move the slider to adjust the amount of displacement the wave creates. The greater the number, the greater the wave displacement.


Move the slider to adjust the amount of displacement the wave creates. The greater the number, the greater the wave displacement.


Move the slider to adjust the direction of the ripple effect.


Move the slider to adjust the direction of the ripple effect.


Shear


Move the slider to adjust the degree to which your picture conforms to the curve. Set the value at 100 per cent to have the picture conform completely to the curve.


Move the slider to adjust the degree to which your picture conforms to the curve. Set the value at 100 per cent to have the picture conform completely to the curve.


Click to use the opposite edge of the picture to fill empty areas.


Click to use the opposite edge of the picture to fill empty areas.


Click to stretch the edges of the picture to fill empty areas.


Click to stretch the edges of the picture to fill empty areas.


Click to fill empty areas with the color you choose.


Click to fill empty areas with the color you choose.


Use to select a color from the picture.


Use to select a color from the picture.


Click the down arrow, and click a color from the color picker to choose a color. Click the Others button to create or select a custom color.


Click the down arrow, and click a color from the color picker to choose a color. Click the Others button to create or select a custom color.


Click to load saved shear maps.


Click to load saved shear maps.


Displays the name of the selected Shear map.


Displays the name of the selected Shear map.


Click to open the Save Shear Map Files dialog box, which allows you to save shear maps in the Shearmap directory as .SHR files.


Click to open the Save Shear Map Files dialog box, which allows you to save shear maps in the Shearmap directory as .SHR files.


Displays the current Shear map. Drag to reshape the response curve.


Displays the current Shear map. Drag to reshape the response curve.


Displays the selected editing style. To use a different editing style, click the down arrow and choose a style from the list.


Displays the selected editing style. To use a different editing style, click the down arrow and choose a style from the list.


Click to display the response curve from left to right.


Click to display the response curve from left to right.


Click to display the response curve from top to bottom.


Click to display the response curve from top to bottom.


Click to smooth the response curve when you are using Freehand editing style. Each time you click, the response curve is smoothed slightly more.


Click to smooth the response curve when you are using Freehand editing style. Each time you click, the response curve is smoothed slightly more.


Swirl


Click to swirl your picture in a clockwise direction.


Click to swirl your picture in a clockwise direction.


Click to swirl your picture in a counterclockwise direction.


Click to swirl your picture in a counterclockwise direction.


Move the slider to adjust the number of partial rotations. For example, if you set the Whole Rotations value to 1, and the Additional Degrees value to 90, your picture will be rotated 450 degrees, or 1.25 times.


Move the slider to adjust the number of partial rotations. For example, if you set the Whole Rotations value to 1, and the Additional Degrees value to 90, your picture will be rotated 450 degrees, or 1.25 times.


Move the slider to adjust the number of whole rotations that occur.


Move the slider to adjust the number of whole rotations that occur.


Displays the filter's settings as you change them.


Displays the filter's settings as you change them.


Enable to set the center point. Click this button, then click where you want to place the center point. Disable to access the Hand and Zoom tools.


Enable to set the center point. Click this button, then click where you want to place the center point. Disable to access the Hand and Zoom tools.


Enable to set the center point. Click this button, then click where you want to place the center point. Disable to access the Hand and Zoom tools.


Tile


Move the slider to adjust the number of times the picture appears along the horizontal axis.


Move the slider to adjust the number of times the picture appears along the horizontal axis.


Move the slider to adjust the number of times the picture appears along the vertical axis.


Move the slider to adjust the number of times the picture appears along the vertical axis.


Enable this check box to force an identical number of horizontal and vertical tiles. When this option is enabled, moving one slider also moves the other.


Enable this check box to force an identical number of horizontal and vertical tiles. When this option is enabled, moving one slider also moves the other.


Trace Contour


Move the slider to set the brightness threshold that is used for outlining.


Move the slider to set the brightness threshold that is used for outlining.


Click to trace the areas of your picture where the brightness levels of the pixels fall below the value you have set using the Level slider.


Click to trace the areas of your picture where the brightness levels of the pixels fall below the value you have set using the Level slider.


Click to trace the areas of your picture where the brightness levels of the pixels exceed the value you have set using the Level slider.


Click to trace the areas of your picture where the brightness levels of the pixels exceed the value you have set using the Level slider.


User Defined


Enable this check box to ensure that color values remain within the range of 0 to 255.


Enable this check box to ensure that color values remain within the range of 0 to 255.


Type a divisor value. After Corel VENTURA multiplies each matrix value by the brightness value of the corresponding pixel, it adds the products together, and divides the sum by the value you type in the Divisor box. The divisor scales the resulting pixel values to the correct range.


Type an offset value. This is the value that will be added to the final pixel values just before the effect is applied.


Type a description or name for the User Defined filter.


Type a description or name for the User Defined filter.


Click to open the Load User Defined Filter Files dialog box.


Click to open the Load User Defined Filter Files dialog box.


Click to open the Save User Defined Filter Files dialog box.


Type values into the Filter Values matrix. The matrix represents one pixel of the picture and its surrounding pixels. Corel VENTURA multiplies each matrix value by the brightness value of the corresponding pixel in the picture, adds the products together, divides the sum by the divisor value, adds the offset value, and then applies the result to the pixel that is being evaluated.


Type values into the Filter Values matrix. The matrix represents one pixel of the picture and its surrounding pixels. Corel VENTURA multiplies each matrix value by the brightness value of the corresponding pixel in the picture, adds the products together, divides the sum by the divisor value, adds the offset value, and then applies the result to the pixel that is being evaluated.


Type values into the Filter Values matrix. The matrix represents one pixel of the picture and its surrounding pixels. Corel VENTURA multiplies each matrix value by the brightness value of the corresponding pixel in the picture, adds the products together, divides the sum by the divisor value, adds the offset value, and then applies the result to the pixel that is being evaluated.


Type values into the Filter Values matrix. The matrix represents one pixel of the picture and its surrounding pixels. Corel VENTURA multiplies each matrix value by the brightness value of the corresponding pixel in the picture, adds the products together, divides the sum by the divisor value, adds the offset value, and then applies the result to the pixel that is being evaluated.


Type values into the Filter Values matrix. The matrix represents one pixel of the picture and its surrounding pixels. Corel VENTURA multiplies each matrix value by the brightness value of the corresponding pixel in the picture, adds the products together, divides the sum by the divisor value, adds the offset value, and then applies the result to the pixel that is being evaluated.


Type values into the Filter Values matrix. The matrix represents one pixel of the picture and its surrounding pixels. Corel VENTURA multiplies each matrix value by the brightness value of the corresponding pixel in the picture, adds the products together, divides the sum by the divisor value, adds the offset value, and then applies the result to the pixel that is being evaluated.


Type values into the Filter Values matrix. The matrix represents one pixel of the picture and its surrounding pixels. Corel VENTURA multiplies each matrix value by the brightness value of the corresponding pixel in the picture, adds the products together, divides the sum by the divisor value, adds the offset value, and then applies the result to the pixel that is being evaluated.


Type values into the Filter Values matrix. The matrix represents one pixel of the picture and its surrounding pixels. Corel VENTURA multiplies each matrix value by the brightness value of the corresponding pixel in the picture, adds the products together, divides the sum by the divisor value, adds the offset value, and then applies the result to the pixel that is being evaluated.


Type values into the Filter Values matrix. The matrix represents one pixel of the picture and its surrounding pixels. Corel VENTURA multiplies each matrix value by the brightness value of the corresponding pixel in the picture, adds the products together, divides the sum by the divisor value, adds the offset value, and then applies the result to the pixel that is being evaluated.


Type values into the Filter Values matrix. The matrix represents one pixel of the picture and its surrounding pixels. Corel VENTURA multiplies each matrix value by the brightness value of the corresponding pixel in the picture, adds the products together, divides the sum by the divisor value, adds the offset value, and then applies the result to the pixel that is being evaluated.


Type values into the Filter Values matrix. The matrix represents one pixel of the picture and its surrounding pixels. Corel VENTURA multiplies each matrix value by the brightness value of the corresponding pixel in the picture, adds the products together, divides the sum by the divisor value, adds the offset value, and then applies the result to the pixel that is being evaluated.


Type values into the Filter Values matrix. The matrix represents one pixel of the picture and its surrounding pixels. Corel VENTURA multiplies each matrix value by the brightness value of the corresponding pixel in the picture, adds the products together, divides the sum by the divisor value, adds the offset value, and then applies the result to the pixel that is being evaluated.


Type values into the Filter Values matrix. The matrix represents one pixel of the picture and its surrounding pixels. Corel VENTURA multiplies each matrix value by the brightness value of the corresponding pixel in the picture, adds the products together, divides the sum by the divisor value, adds the offset value, and then applies the result to the pixel that is being evaluated.


Type values into the Filter Values matrix. The matrix represents one pixel of the picture and its surrounding pixels. Corel VENTURA multiplies each matrix value by the brightness value of the corresponding pixel in the picture, adds the products together, divides the sum by the divisor value, adds the offset value, and then applies the result to the pixel that is being evaluated.


Type values into the Filter Values matrix. The matrix represents one pixel of the picture and its surrounding pixels. Corel VENTURA multiplies each matrix value by the brightness value of the corresponding pixel in the picture, adds the products together, divides the sum by the divisor value, adds the offset value, and then applies the result to the pixel that is being evaluated.


Type values into the Filter Values matrix. The matrix represents one pixel of the picture and its surrounding pixels. Corel VENTURA multiplies each matrix value by the brightness value of the corresponding pixel in the picture, adds the products together, divides the sum by the divisor value, adds the offset value, and then applies the result to the pixel that is being evaluated.


Type values into the Filter Values matrix. The matrix represents one pixel of the picture and its surrounding pixels. Corel VENTURA multiplies each matrix value by the brightness value of the corresponding pixel in the picture, adds the products together, divides the sum by the divisor value, adds the offset value, and then applies the result to the pixel that is being evaluated.


Type values into the Filter Values matrix. The matrix represents one pixel of the picture and its surrounding pixels. Corel VENTURA multiplies each matrix value by the brightness value of the corresponding pixel in the picture, adds the products together, divides the sum by the divisor value, adds the offset value, and then applies the result to the pixel that is being evaluated.


Type values into the Filter Values matrix. The matrix represents one pixel of the picture and its surrounding pixels. Corel VENTURA multiplies each matrix value by the brightness value of the corresponding pixel in the picture, adds the products together, divides the sum by the divisor value, adds the offset value, and then applies the result to the pixel that is being evaluated.


Type values into the Filter Values matrix. The matrix represents one pixel of the picture and its surrounding pixels. Corel VENTURA multiplies each matrix value by the brightness value of the corresponding pixel in the picture, adds the products together, divides the sum by the divisor value, adds the offset value, and then applies the result to the pixel that is being evaluated.


Type values into the Filter Values matrix. The matrix represents one pixel of the picture and its surrounding pixels. Corel VENTURA multiplies each matrix value by the brightness value of the corresponding pixel in the picture, adds the products together, divides the sum by the divisor value, adds the offset value, and then applies the result to the pixel that is being evaluated.


Type values into the Filter Values matrix. The matrix represents one pixel of the picture and its surrounding pixels. Corel VENTURA multiplies each matrix value by the brightness value of the corresponding pixel in the picture, adds the products together, divides the sum by the divisor value, adds the offset value, and then applies the result to the pixel that is being evaluated.


Type values into the Filter Values matrix. The matrix represents one pixel of the picture and its surrounding pixels. Corel VENTURA multiplies each matrix value by the brightness value of the corresponding pixel in the picture, adds the products together, divides the sum by the divisor value, adds the offset value, and then applies the result to the pixel that is being evaluated.


Type values into the Filter Values matrix. The matrix represents one pixel of the picture and its surrounding pixels. Corel VENTURA multiplies each matrix value by the brightness value of the corresponding pixel in the picture, adds the products together, divides the sum by the divisor value, adds the offset value, and then applies the result to the pixel that is being evaluated.


Type values into the Filter Values matrix. The matrix represents one pixel of the picture and its surrounding pixels. Corel VENTURA multiplies each matrix value by the brightness value of the corresponding pixel in the picture, adds the products together, divides the sum by the divisor value, adds the offset value, and then applies the result to the pixel that is being evaluated.


Type values into the Filter Values matrix. The matrix represents one pixel of the picture and its surrounding pixels. Corel VENTURA multiplies each matrix value by the brightness value of the corresponding pixel in the picture, adds the products together, divides the sum by the divisor value, adds the offset value, and then applies the result to the pixel that is being evaluated.


Type values into the Filter Values matrix. The matrix represents one pixel of the picture and its surrounding pixels. Corel VENTURA multiplies each matrix value by the brightness value of the corresponding pixel in the picture, adds the products together, divides the sum by the divisor value, adds the offset value, and then applies the result to the pixel that is being evaluated.


Enable this check box to keep the values entered in the matrix symmetrical. For example, if you enter a value in the top left box with this check box enabled, that same value will appear in the other three corner boxes.


Enable this check box to keep the values entered in the matrix symmetrical. For example, if you enter a value in the top left box with this check box enabled, that same value will appear in the other three corner boxes.


Wet Paint


Move the slider to adjust the size of the paint drip.


Move the slider to adjust the size of the paint drip.


Move the slider to adjust the range of colors that drip. Negative values cause the dark colors to drip; positive values cause the light colors to drip.


Move the slider to adjust the range of colors that drip. Negative values cause the dark colors to drip; positive values cause the light colors to drip.


Wind


Move the slider to adjust the opacity of the effect.


Move the slider to adjust the opacity of the effect.


Move the slider to set the intensity of the effect.


Move the slider to set the intensity of the effect.


Displays the angle from which the wind approaches the picture. To change the wind's direction, type an angle in the box, or click a location on the edge of the dial.


Displays the angle from which the wind approaches the picture. To change the wind's direction, type an angle in the box, or click a location on the edge of the dial.


Displays the angle from which the wind approaches the picture. To change the wind's direction, type an angle in the box, or click a location on the edge of the dial.


Displays the angle from which the wind approaches the picture. To change the wind's direction, type an angle in the box, or click a location on the edge of the dial.


Whirlpool


Move the slider to adjust the spacing between swirls.


Move the slider to adjust the smear length.


Move the slider to adjust the amount of twisting in each swirl.


Move the slider to adjust the amount of detail in the streaks.


Enable this check box to allow the filter to warp your picture. Disable it to maintain the shapes of the elements in your picture.


Displays the currently used Whirlpool style. To use another, click the down arrow and choose one from the list.


Click to delete the currently used Whirlpool style.


Click to save the currently used style.


3D Rotate


Displays a preview of the rotated picture.


Enable this check box to ensure that all parts of your picture remain within the Image Window.


Enable this check box to ensure that all parts of your picture remain within the Image Window.


Displays a three-dimensional box that you manipulate to change the perspective of your picture. The shaded plane of the box represents the picture. Move the vertical and horizontal sliders to rotate and position the three-dimensional model.


Displays a three-dimensional box that you manipulate to change the perspective of your picture. The shaded plane of the box represents the picture. Move the vertical and horizontal sliders to rotate and position the three-dimensional model.


Move the slider to rotate the picture horizontally.


Move the slider to rotate the picture horizontally.


Move the slider to rotate the picture vertically.


Move the slider to rotate the picture vertically.


Click to have the preview automatically update to reflect any changes you make to settings in the dialog box.


Click Preview to see how your picture will look if you apply the effect using the current settings.


Emboss


Click to create a relief using the original picture colors.


Click to create a relief using the original picture colors.


Click to create a relief using gray as the embossing color. This produces an overall gray picture with moderate, embossed highlights.


Click to create a relief using gray as the embossing color. This produces an overall gray picture with moderate, embossed highlights.


Click to create a relief using black as the embossing color. This produces an overall black picture with high-contrast, embossed highlights.


Click to create a relief using black as the embossing color. This produces an overall black picture with high-contrast, embossed highlights.


Click to create a relief using the color you choose.


Click to create a relief using the color you choose.


Click the down arrow, and click a color from the color picker to choose a color. Click the Others button to create or select a custom color.


Click the down arrow, and click a color from the color picker to choose a color. Click the Others button to create or select a custom color.


Use to select a color from the picture.


Use to select a color from the picture.


Move the slider to adjust the depth of the ridges and crevices in the relief.


Move the slider to adjust the depth of the ridges and crevices in the relief.


Type a value to adjust the amount of background color the relief will contain.


Type a value to adjust the amount of background color the relief will contain.


Move the slider to adjust the amount of background color the relief will contain.


Move the slider to adjust the amount of background color the relief will contain.


Displays the current angle at which the light is hitting the relief. Set a new angle by moving the arrow.


Displays the current angle at which the light is hitting the relief. Set a new angle by moving the arrow.


Displays the current angle at which the light is hitting the relief. Type a new value or adjust the existing value using the scroll arrows.


Displays the current angle at which the light is hitting the relief. Type a new value or adjust the existing value using the scroll arrows.


Map to Object


Click to have your picture appear to wrap around a sphere.


Click to have your picture appear to wrap around a sphere.


Click to have your picture appear to wrap around a horizontal cylinder.


Click to have your picture appear to wrap around a horizontal cylinder.


Click to have your picture appear to wrap around a vertical cylinder.


Click to have your picture appear to wrap around a vertical cylinder.


Move the slider to adjust the direction and amount of wrapping. Negative percentage values wrap the picture toward the back (convex); positive percentage values wrap the picture toward the front (concave).


Move the slider to adjust the direction and amount of wrapping. Negative percentage values wrap the picture toward the back (convex); positive percentage values wrap the picture toward the front (concave).


Provides a list of preset quality levels that you can use when applying the filter.


Provides a list of preset quality levels that you can use when applying the filter.


Displays the filter's settings as you change them.


Displays the filter's settings as you change them.


Mesh Warp


Displays your picture with the grid over it. Drag the nodes that intersect gridlines to distort your picture.


Move the slider to adjust the number of gridlines. The more gridlines there are, the more control you have while you manipulate your picture.


Move the slider, or type a number in the box, to adjust the number of gridlines. The more gridlines there are, the more control you have while you manipulate your picture.


Displays the current Mesh Warp style. If you have previously saved Mesh Warp styles, they appear in this list. To use a different style, click the down arrow and choose a new style from the list.


Displays the current Mesh Warp style. If you have previously saved Mesh Warp styles, they appear in this list. To use a different style, click the down arrow and choose a new style from the list.


Click to open the Save Meshwarp Files dialog box.


Click to delete the current Mesh Warp style.


Click this button to have the preview window automatically update to reflect any changes you make to settings in the dialog box.


Click Preview to see how your picture will look if you apply the effect using the current settings.


Page Curl


Click if you want the page curl on the top left corner of the picture.


Click if you want the page curl on the top left corner of the picture.


Click if you want the page curl on the top right corner of the picture.


Click if you want the page curl on the top right corner of the picture.


Click if you want the page curl on the bottom left corner of the picture.


Click if you want the page curl on the bottom left corner of the picture.


Click if you want the page curl on the bottom right corner of the picture.


Click if you want the page curl on the bottom right corner of the picture.


Click to have the page curl begin along the top or bottom edge of your picture. You can set the location of the curl by clicking one of the buttons on the left.


Click to have the page curl begin along the top or bottom edge of your picture. You can set the location of the curl by clicking one of the buttons on the left.


Click to have the page curl begin along the left or right edge of your picture. You can set the location of the curl by clicking one of the buttons on the left.


Click to have the page curl begin along the left or right edge of your picture. You can set the location of the curl by clicking one of the buttons on the left.


Move the slider to adjust the width of the page curl. Increase the value to extend the page curl along the horizontal edge of the picture.


Move the slider to adjust the width of the page curl. Increase the value to extend the page curl along the horizontal edge of the picture.


Move the slider to adjust the height of the page curl. Increase the value to extend the page curl along the vertical edge of the picture.


Move the slider to adjust the height of the page curl. Increase the value to extend the page curl along the vertical edge of the picture.


Displays the current curl color. To choose another color, click the down arrow, and click a color from the color picker.


Displays the current curl color. To choose another color, click the down arrow, and click a color from the color picker.


Use to select a color for the curl from the picture.


Use to select a color for the curl from the picture.


Displays the current background color. To choose another color, click the down arrow, and click a color from the color picker.


Displays the current background color. To choose another color, click the down arrow, and click a color from the color picker.


Use to select a color for the background from the picture.


Use to select a color for the background from the picture.


Click to make the curl completely opaque.


Click to make the curl completely opaque.


Click to change the transparency of the curl.


Click to change the transparency of the curl.


Perspective


Displays your picture. To preview the current Perspective settings, click Preview or the Auto-Preview button.


Enable this check box to ensure that all parts of your picture remain visible in the Image Window.


Enable this check box to ensure that all parts of your picture remain visible in the Image Window.


Click to enable the Perspective editing mode, which allows you to move two nodes at the same time in opposite directions, providing the illusion of distance and perspective.


Click to enable the Perspective editing mode, which allows you to move two nodes at the same time in opposite directions, providing the illusion of distance and perspective.


Click to enable the Shear editing mode, which allows you to skew the picture by moving two nodes simultaneously.


Click to enable the Shear editing mode, which allows you to skew the picture by moving two nodes simultaneously.


Displays a two-dimensional model of your picture that has nodes in each corner. Drag the nodes to manipulate the perspective of the picture.


Displays a two-dimensional model of your picture that has nodes in each corner. Drag the nodes to manipulate the perspective of the picture.


Click this button to have the preview window automatically update to reflect any changes you make to settings in the dialog box.


Click Preview to see how your picture will look if you apply the effect using the current settings.


Pinch/Punch


Move the slider to adjust the pinch or punch effect. Positive values apply a pinch effect, whereas negative values apply a punch effect.


Move the slider to adjust the pinch or punch effect. Positive values apply a pinch effect, whereas negative values apply a punch effect.


Click to set the center point. Click this button, then click where you want to place the center point.


Click to set the center point. Click this button, then click where you want to place the center point.


Click to set the center point. Click this button, then click where you want to place the center point.


Displays the filter's settings as you change them.


Displays the filter's settings as you change them.


Zig Zag


Click to use distortion waves that resemble pond ripples.


Click to use distortion waves that resemble pond ripples.


Click to use distortion waves that extend outward from a central point and phase out toward the edges of your picture. This creates an effect that looks like the surface of a pond after you've thrown in a small stone.


Click to use distortion waves that extend outward from a central point and phase out toward the edges of your picture. This creates an effect that looks like the surface of a pond after you've thrown in a small stone.


Click to use distortion waves that extend from the center of your picture. This creates an effect that looks like the surface of a pond after you've thrown in a large stone.


Click to use distortion waves that extend from the center of your picture. This creates an effect that looks like the surface of a pond after you've thrown in a large stone.


Move the slider to adjust the number of distortion waves. The maximum number of waves that can be produced depends on the dimensions of your picture. If the Result window does not display the effect, the number is too high. This occurs mostly with pictures that have small dimensions.


Move the slider to adjust the number of distortion waves. The maximum number of waves that can be produced depends on the dimensions of your picture. If the Result window does not display the effect, the number is too high. This occurs mostly with pictures that have small dimensions.


Move the slider to adjust the number of distortion waves. The maximum number of waves that can be produced depends on the dimensions of your picture. If the Result window does not display the effect, the number is too high. This occurs mostly with pictures that have small dimensions.


Move the slider to adjust the number of distortion waves. The maximum number of waves that can be produced depends on the dimensions of your picture. If the Result window does not display the effect, the number is too high. This occurs mostly with pictures that have small dimensions.


Move the slider to set the intensity of the distortion.


Move the slider to set the intensity of the distortion.


Move the slider to set the intensity of the distortion.


Move the slider to set the intensity of the distortion.


Displays the filter's settings as you change them.


Displays the filter's settings as you change them.


Click to set the center point. Click this button, then click where you want to place the center point.


Click to set the center point. Click this button, then click where you want to place the center point.


Click to set the center point. Click this button, then click where you want to place the center point.


Canvas


Move the slider to adjust the transparency of the effect.


Move the slider to adjust the transparency of the effect.


Move the slider to adjust the embossing of the effect. Embossing gives the canvas a raised, relief effect.


Move the slider to adjust the embossing of the effect. Embossing gives the canvas a raised, relief effect.


Move the slider to adjust the horizontal offset of the canvas map.


Move the slider to adjust the horizontal offset of the canvas map.


Move the slider to adjust the vertical offset of the canvas map.


Move the slider to adjust the vertical offset of the canvas map.


Click to enable the Offset slider so that you can adjust rows of tiles.


Click to enable the Offset slider so that you can adjust rows of tiles.


Click to enable the Offset slider so that you can adjust columns of tiles.


Click to enable the Offset slider so that you can adjust columns of tiles.


Click to disable tiling of the canvas map. This stretches the canvas map to fit your image.


Click to disable tiling of the canvas map. This stretches the canvas map to fit your image.


Move the slider to adjust the offset of the canvas map tiles. Click either the Rows or Columns button (to the left) to determine whether you offset the tiles in a horizontal or vertical fashion.


Move the slider to adjust the offset of the canvas map tiles. Click either the Rows or Columns button (to the left) to determine whether you offset the tiles in a horizontal or vertical fashion.


Displays the current canvas map.


Displays the current canvas map.


Displays the name of the selected canvas map.


Displays the name of the selected canvas map.


Click to open the Load Canvas Map Files dialog box.


Click to open the Load Canvas Map Files dialog box.


Glass Block


Move the slider to adjust the width of the glass blocks.


Move the slider to adjust the width of the glass blocks.


Move the slider to adjust the height of the glass blocks.


Move the slider to adjust the height of the glass blocks.


Enable this check box to force the width and height of the glass blocks to be the same. When this option is enabled, moving one slider also moves the other slider.


Enable this check box to force the width and height of the glass blocks to be the same. When this option is enabled, moving one slider also moves the other slider.


Impressionist


Move the slider to determine the amount of pixel displacement that occurs along the horizontal axis.


Move the slider to determine the amount of pixel displacement that occurs along the horizontal axis.


Move the slider to determine the amount of pixel displacement that occurs along the vertical axis.


Move the slider to determine the amount of pixel displacement that occurs along the vertical axis.


Enable this check box to force the horizontal and vertical pixel displacement values to be the same. When this option is enabled, moving one slider also moves the other slider.


Enable this check box to force the horizontal and vertical pixel displacement values to be the same. When this option is enabled, moving one slider also moves the other slider.


Smoked Glass


Move the slider to adjust the opacity of the tint.


Move the slider to adjust the opacity of the tint.


Move the slider to adjust the amount of blurring (blurring produces distortion that mimics how your image would appear if you viewed it through glass).


Move the slider to adjust the amount of blurring (blurring produces distortion that mimics how your image would appear if you viewed it through glass).


Click the down arrow, and click a color from the color picker. To choose from a larger selection of colors, click Others, which opens the Select Color dialog box.


Click the down arrow, and click a color from the color picker. To choose from a larger selection of colors, click Others, which opens the Select Color dialog box.


Use to select a color from the image.


Use to select a color from the image.


Vignette


Click to use black as the frame color.


Click to use black as the frame color.


Click to use white as the frame color.


Click to use white as the frame color.


Click to use another color as the frame color. Choose the color from the color picker or use the eyedropper to select a color.


Click to use another color as the frame color. Choose the color from the color picker or use the eyedropper to select a color.


Click the down arrow, and click a color from the color picker for the frame color. To choose from a larger selection of colors, click Others, which opens the Select Color dialog box.


Click the down arrow, and click a color from the color picker for the frame color. To choose from a larger selection of colors, click Others, which opens the Select Color dialog box.


Use to select a color from the image.


Use to select a color from the image.


Click to use an oval fame.


Click to use an oval fame.


Click to use a circular frame.


Click to use a circular frame.


Click to create a rectangular frame.


Click to create a rectangular frame.


Click to create a square frame.


Click to create a square frame.


Move the slider to adjust the size of the frame.


Move the slider to adjust the size of the frame.


Move the slider to adjust the fade rate between the image and the frame.


Move the slider to adjust the fade rate between the image and the frame.


Directional Smooth


Move the slider or type a value in the box to set the intensity of the effect.


Move the slider or type a value in the box to set the intensity of the effect.


Gaussian Blur


Type a value to set the intensity of the effect.


Move the slider to set the intensity of the effect.


Type a value to set the intensity of the effect.


Move the slider to set the intensity of the effect.


Jaggy Despeckle


Move the slider to adjust the number of neighboring pixels evaluated, or type a value in the box.


Move the slider to adjust the number of neighboring pixels evaluated, or type a value in the box.


Move the slider to adjust the number of neighboring pixels evaluated, or type a value in the box.


Move the slider to adjust the number of neighboring pixels evaluated, or type a value in the box.


Enable this check box to force the width and height values to be the same. When this is enabled, moving one slider will also move the other.


Enable this check box to force the width and height values to be the same. When this is enabled, moving one slider will also move the other.


Low Pass


Move the slider to set the intensity of the effect. Move the slider to the right to reduce harsh transitions between shadows and highlights.


Move the slider to set the intensity of the effect. Move the slider to the right to reduce harsh transitions between shadows and highlights.


Move the slider to adjust the number of pixels that are successively selected and evaluated when you apply the effect.


Move the slider to adjust the number of pixels that are successively selected and evaluated when you apply the effect.


Motion Blur


Move the slider to determine the intensity of the effect.


Move the slider to determine the intensity of the effect.


Type a value to determine the intensity of the effect.


Type a value to determine the intensity of the effect.


Type an angle value in the box to set the direction of blurring.


Type an angle value in the box to set the direction of blurring.


Click the edge of the dial to set the direction of blurring.


Click the edge of the dial to set the direction of blurring.


Click to have the blurring ignore the pixels that fall outside the image.


Click to have the blurring ignore the pixels that fall outside the image.


Click to have the blurring start with the paper color.


Click to have the blurring start with the paper color.


Click to have the blurring start with the colors at the edge of the image.


Click to have the blurring start with the colors at the edge of the image.


Radial Blur


Use to set the center point. Click this button, then click where you want to place the center point. Disable to access the Hand and Zoom tools.


Use to set the center point. Click this button, then click where you want to place the center point. Disable to access the Hand and Zoom tools.


Use to set the center point. Click this button, then click where you want to place the center point. Disable to access the Hand and Zoom tools.


Move the slider to adjust the range of the effect.


Move the slider to adjust the range of the effect.


Click to make your image appear to spin around the center point.


Click to make your image appear to spin around the center point.


Click to blur your image outward from a center point. The center point is protected from change, and the effect becomes more prevalent as you move away from the center point.


Click to blur your image outward from a center point. The center point is protected from change, and the effect becomes more prevalent as you move away from the center point.


Click to apply a high-quality level, but at a slightly slower speed.


Click to apply a high-quality level, but at a slightly slower speed.


Click to apply a low-quality level, but at a faster speed.


Click to apply a low-quality level, but at a faster speed.


Smooth


Move the slider or type a value to set the intensity of the effect.


Move the slider or type a value to set the intensity of the effect.


Soften


Move the slider or type a value to set the intensity of the effect.


Move the slider or type a value to set the intensity of the effect.


Bit Planes


Enable this check box to force the values of the red, green, and blue color planes to be the same. When this option is enabled, moving one slider will move the other two sliders at the same time.


Enable this check box to force the values of the red, green, and blue color planes to be the same. When this option is enabled, moving one slider will move the other two sliders at the same time.


Move the slider or type a value to adjust the sensitivity of the effect on the red plane. Higher values produce coarser changes. At the highest settings your image will show large, flat areas where the image is brightest and darkest. At the lowest settings, your image will show the finest levels of tone variation.


Move the slider or type a value to adjust the sensitivity of the effect on the red plane. Higher values produce coarser changes. At the highest settings your image will show large, flat areas where the image is brightest and darkest. At the lowest settings, your image will show the finest levels of tone variation.


Move the slider or type a value to adjust the sensitivity of the effect on the red plane. Higher values produce coarser changes. At the highest settings your image will show large, flat areas where the image is brightest and darkest. At the lowest settings, your image will show the finest levels of tone variation.


Move the slider or type a value to adjust the sensitivity of the effect on the red plane. Higher values produce coarser changes. At the highest settings your image will show large, flat areas where the image is brightest and darkest. At the lowest settings, your image will show the finest levels of tone variation.


Move the slider or type a value to adjust the sensitivity of the effect on the green plane. Higher values result in coarser changes. At the highest settings the image will show large, flat areas where the image is brightest and darkest. At the lowest settings, the image will show the finest levels of tone variation.


Move the slider or type a value to adjust the sensitivity of the effect on the green plane. Higher values result in coarser changes. At the highest settings the image will show large, flat areas where the image is brightest and darkest. At the lowest settings, the image will show the finest levels of tone variation.


Move the slider or type a value to adjust the sensitivity of the effect on the green plane. Higher values result in coarser changes. At the highest settings the image will show large, flat areas where the image is brightest and darkest. At the lowest settings, the image will show the finest levels of tone variation.


Move the slider or type a value to adjust the sensitivity of the effect on the green plane. Higher values result in coarser changes. At the highest settings the image will show large, flat areas where the image is brightest and darkest. At the lowest settings, the image will show the finest levels of tone variation.


Move the slider or type a value to adjust the sensitivity of the effect on the blue plane. Higher values result in coarser changes. At the highest settings the image will show large, flat areas where the image is brightest and darkest. At the lowest settings, the image will show the finest levels of tone variation.


Move the slider or type a value to adjust the sensitivity of the effect on the blue plane. Higher values result in coarser changes. At the highest settings the image will show large, flat areas where the image is brightest and darkest. At the lowest settings, the image will show the finest levels of tone variation.


Move the slider or type a value to adjust the sensitivity of the effect on the blue plane. Higher values result in coarser changes. At the highest settings the image will show large, flat areas where the image is brightest and darkest. At the lowest settings, the image will show the finest levels of tone variation.


Move the slider or type a value to adjust the sensitivity of the effect on the blue plane. Higher values result in coarser changes. At the highest settings the image will show large, flat areas where the image is brightest and darkest. At the lowest settings, the image will show the finest levels of tone variation.


Move the slider to adjust the sensitivity of the effect on the gray plane. Higher values result in coarser changes. At the highest settings the image will show large, flat areas where the image is brightest and darkest. At the lowest settings, the image will show the finest levels of tone variation.


Move the slider to adjust the sensitivity of the effect on the gray plane. Higher values result in coarser changes. At the highest settings the image will show large, flat areas where the image is brightest and darkest. At the lowest settings, the image will show the finest levels of tone variation.


Color Halftone


Move the slider to set the angle of the cyan color screen. The angle of the screen determines how the color mixes with the other screens. You can adjust the screen angles to produce a wider range of colors.


Move the slider to set the angle of the cyan color screen. The angle of the screen determines how the color mixes with the other screens. You can adjust the screen angles to produce a wider range of colors.


Move the slider to set the angle of the cyan color screen. The angle of the screen determines how the color mixes with the other screens. You can adjust the screen angles to produce a wider range of colors.


Move the slider to set the angle of the cyan color screen. The angle of the screen determines how the color mixes with the other screens. You can adjust the screen angles to produce a wider range of colors.


Move the slider to set the angle of the magenta color screen. The angle of the screen determines how the color mixes with the other screens. You can adjust the screen angles to produce a wider range of colors.


Move the slider to set the angle of the magenta color screen. The angle of the screen determines how the color mixes with the other screens. You can adjust the screen angles to produce a wider range of colors.


Move the slider to set the angle of the magenta color screen. The angle of the screen determines how the color mixes with the other screens. You can adjust the screen angles to produce a wider range of colors.


Move the slider to set the angle of the magenta color screen. The angle of the screen determines how the color mixes with the other screens. You can adjust the screen angles to produce a wider range of colors.


Move the slider to set the angle of the yellow color screen. The angle of the screen determines how the color mixes with the other screens. You can adjust the screen angles to produce a wider range of colors.


Move the slider to set the angle of the yellow color screen. The angle of the screen determines how the color mixes with the other screens. You can adjust the screen angles to produce a wider range of colors.


Move the slider to set the angle of the yellow color screen. The angle of the screen determines how the color mixes with the other screens. You can adjust the screen angles to produce a wider range of colors.


Move the slider to set the angle of the yellow color screen. The angle of the screen determines how the color mixes with the other screens. You can adjust the screen angles to produce a wider range of colors.


Move the slider to set the angle of the black color screen. The angle of the screen determines how the color mixes with the other screens. You can adjust the screen angles to produce a wider range of colors.


Move the slider to set the angle of the black color screen. The angle of the screen determines how the color mixes with the other screens. You can adjust the screen angles to produce a wider range of colors.


Move the slider to set the angle of the black color screen. The angle of the screen determines how the color mixes with the other screens. You can adjust the screen angles to produce a wider range of colors.


Move the slider to set the angle of the black color screen. The angle of the screen determines how the color mixes with the other screens. You can adjust the screen angles to produce a wider range of colors.


Move the slider to adjust the range of the effect.


Move the slider to adjust the range of the effect.


Psychedelic


Move the slider or type a value to set the intensity of the effect.


Move the slider or type a value to set the intensity of the effect.


Solarize


Move the slider or type a value to set the intensity of the effect.


Move the slider or type a value to set the intensity of the effect.


Add Noise


Move the slider or type a value to set the intensity of the effect.


Move the slider or type a value to set the intensity of the effect.


Move the slider to set the density of the noise (random pixels) you are adding.


Move the slider to set the density of the noise (random pixels) you are adding.


Enable this check box to apply randomly colored noise to the image.


Enable this check box to apply randomly colored noise to the image.


Click to apply noise along a Gaussian distribution curve. Most of the colors that are added using this setting will resemble the original colors.


Click to apply noise along a Gaussian distribution curve. Most of the colors that are added using this setting will resemble the original colors.


Click to apply noise using the Spike method. This produces a thin, light-colored grain.


Click to apply noise using the Spike method. This produces a thin, light-colored grain.


Click to apply noise using the Uniform method. This results in an overall granular appearance.


Click to apply noise using the Uniform method. This results in an overall granular appearance.


Diffuse


Move the slider or type a value to set the intensity of the effect.


Move the slider or type a value to set the intensity of the effect.


Dust and Scratch


Move the slider or type a value to determine how large a change in value must occur to any pixel before the effect is applied.


Move the slider or type a value to set the range of the effect. Move the slider to the right to increase the number of pixels that are successively selected and evaluated when you apply the effect.


Move the slider or type a value to determine how large a change in value must occur to any pixel before the effect is applied.


Move the slider or type a value to set the range of the effect. Move the slider to the right to increase the number of pixels that are successively selected and evaluated when you apply the effect.


Maximum


Move the slider or type a value to set the intensity of the effect.


Move the slider or type a value to set the range of the effect. Move the slider to the right to increase the number of pixels that are successively selected and evaluated when you apply the effect.


Move the slider or type a value to set the intensity of the effect.


Move the slider or type a value to set the range of the effect. Move the slider to the right to increase the number of pixels that are successively selected and evaluated when you apply the effect.


Median


Move the slider or type a value to wet the range of the effect. Move the slider to the right to increase the number of pixels that are successively selected and evaluated when you apply the effect.


Move the slider or type a value to wet the range of the effect. Move the slider to the right to increase the number of pixels that are successively selected and evaluated when you apply the effect.


Minimum


Move the slider to set the intensity of the effect.


Move the slider or type a value to set the range of the effect. Move the slider to the right to increase the number of pixels that are successively selected and evaluated when you apply the effect.


Move the slider to set the intensity of the effect.


Move the slider or type a value to set the range of the effect. Move the slider to the right to increase the number of pixels that are successively selected and evaluated when you apply the effect.


Remove Noise


Enable this check box to have the noise reduction level that is required to improve image quality calculated automatically.


Move the slider or type a value to set the brightness level at which pixels are considered noise.


Enable this check box to have the noise reduction level that is required to improve image quality calculated automatically.


Move the slider or type a value to set the brightness level at which pixels are considered noise.


3D Stereo Noise


Move the slider or type a value to adjust the depth of the stereogram image.


Enable this check box to show two dots that help you focus on the stereogram image. Adjust your focus so that the two dots become three, and then move your gaze up to the image.


Move the slider or type a value to adjust the depth of the stereogram image.


Enable this check box to show two dots that help you focus on the stereogram image. Adjust your focus so that the two dots become three, and then move your gaze up to the image.


Lens Flare


Click to have the preview window automatically update to reflect any changes you make to settings in the dialog box.


Click to create a lens flare effect that mimics focal lengths between 50 mm (standard lens, normal perspective) and 300 mm (telephoto/zoom lenses, magnified perspective).


Click to create a lens flare effect that mimics a moderate wide-angle lens.


Click to create a lens flare effect that mimics a moderate telephoto/zoom lens.


Move the slider to determine the intensity of the light. The effect of the brightness setting varies with different lens types.


Displays the color of the flash. To change the color, click the down arrow and click a color on the color picker. To choose from a larger selection of colors, click Others, which opens the Select Color dialog box.


Displays a preview of your picture with the current settings applied to it.


Use to select a color from the image.


Click Preview to see how your picture will look if you apply the effect using the current settings.


Lighting Effects


Displays a preview of your picture with the current settings applied to it.


Click to apply the Spotlight light source type.


Click to apply the Directional light source type.


Click to turn the light source on.


Displays the color of the light source. To change the color, click the down arrow and click a color on the color picker. To choose from a larger selection of colors, click Other, which opens the Select Color dialog box.


Move the slider or type a value to adjust the brightness of the light(s).


Move the slider or type a value to adjust light cone size settings. A low setting produces a narrow, more intense point of light (like a flashlight). A higher setting produces a wide, diffused ray of light that illuminates a much larger area (like a ceiling lamp). The range is from 1 to 180 degrees.


Move the slider or type a value to adjust the amount of fading at the edge of the light shaft. A lower value provides a softer transition between lit and unlit areas.


Type an angle value in the box to set the direction of the light source.


Click the edge of the dial to set the direction of the light source.


Click to apply the Omni preset light source type.


Move the slider to adjust the amount of white the light sources contain.


Click to add a light source.


Click to delete the selected light source from the Preview window. To select a light source, click it in the Preview window.


Click to view the light source(s) in the Preview window.


Click to have the preview window automatically update to reflect any changes you make to settings in the dialog box.


Click Preview to see how your picture will look if you apply the effect using the current settings.


Type the horizontal coordinate for the position of the light source. You can also move the light source by dragging it in the Preview window.


Type the horizontal coordinate for the position of the light source. You can also move the light source by dragging it in the Preview window.


Type the vertical coordinate for the position of the light source. You can also move the light source by clicking and dragging it in the Preview window.


Type the vertical coordinate for the position of the light source. You can also move the light source by clicking and dragging it in the Preview window.


Lists all available preset lighting styles. Match different preset light styles with preset light types to find the lighting effect you need. To use another light style, click the down arrow and choose a style from the list.


Lists all available preset lighting styles. Match different preset light styles with preset light types to find the lighting effect you need. To use another light style, click the down arrow and choose a style from the list.


Click to open the Save Preset dialog box, which allows you to save your settings as a preset lighting style.


Click to open the Preset dialog box, which allows you to delete the current lighting style from the Styles list box.


Move the slider or type a value to set the intensity of the ambient light. Positive values add light; negative values subtract light.


Click to turn the ambient light on.


Displays the color of the ambient light. To change the color, click the down arrow and click a color on the color picker. To choose from a larger selection of colors, click Other, which opens the Select Color dialog box.


Move the slider or type a value to adjust the brightness of the image.


Displays the channel in which you are creating a texture. To work in another channel, click the down arrow and choose a channel from the list. If you don't want to use a texture, choose None.


Move the slider to adjust the amount of texture on the surface of your image. A higher value results in more raised surfaces for the light to bounce off of.


Move the slider to adjust the contrast of the texture. A setting of 0 uses all 256 grayscale values, whereas a setting of 100 uses just the values 0 and 255 (black and white).


Adaptive Unsharp


Move the slider or type a value to set the intensity of the effect.


Move the slider or type a value to set the intensity of the effect.


Directional Sharpen


Move the slider or type a value to set the intensity of the effect.


Move the slider or type a value to set the intensity of the effect.


Find Edges


Click to create a sharp, crisp outline.


Move the slider or type a value to set the intensity of the effect.


Click to create a smooth, blurred outline.


Click to create a sharp, crisp outline.


Move the slider or type a value to set the intensity of the effect.


Click to create a smooth, blurred outline.


High Pass


Move the slider to set the intensity of the effect. Move the slider to the right to remove more shadow detail.


Move the slider to set the range of the effect. Move the slider to the right to increase the number of pixels that are successively selected and evaluated when you apply the effect.


Move the slider to set the intensity of the effect. Move the slider to the right to remove more shadow detail.


Move the slider to set the range of the effect. Move the slider to the right to increase the number of pixels that are successively selected and evaluated when you apply the effect.


Sharpen


Move the slider to determine how great a change in value must occur to any pixel before the effect is applied.


Move the slider to determine the amount of edge sharpening.


Move the slider to determine how great a change in value must occur to any pixel before the effect is applied.


Move the slider to determine the amount of edge sharpening.


Unsharp Mask


Type a value to set the intensity of the effect.


Move the slider to set the intensity of the effect.


Move the slider to set the range of the effect. Move the slider to the right to the right to increase the number of pixels that are successively selected and evaluated when you apply the effect.


Move the slider or type a value to determine how great a change in value must occur to any pixel before the effect is applied.


Type a value to set the intensity of the effect.


Move the slider to set the intensity of the effect.


Move the slider to set the range of the effect. Move the slider to the right to the right to increase the number of pixels that are successively selected and evaluated when you apply the effect.


Move the slider or type a value to determine how great a change in value must occur to any pixel before the effect is applied.


The Publication Window is the area of the screen in which you view and work on active publications. Each active publication that you open appears in a separate active window.


Shifts the view in the Publication Window to display portions of a publication that are outside the current viewing area. The scroll bars allow you to shift the view both horizontally and vertically.


Toolbars place controls on your screen that allow you to easily access Corel VENTURA features. Each button on a toolbar is associated with a different feature.


Shows information about the active publication, the selected item, and the action you are performing.


Opens an existing publication in a new window.


Closes the active publication without exiting Corel VENTURA.


Saves the active publication with same the name and in the same location specified when the publication was first saved. If you are saving a publication for the first time, the Save As dialog box appears.


Saves the active publication with the name and in the location you specify. It also compresses the file.


Opens the Print dialog box, which allows you to print your work, modify print options, and change the printer and its properties.


Opens the Print Preview dialog box, which allows you to see how your printed publication will look before you print it.


Allows you to send a publication as an attachment to an email message. To mail a publication you must have a MAPI-compliant email application installed on your computer.


Displays the filenames of the most recently opened publications. To open one of these files, click the File menu, then type the publication's number or click its name.


Displays the file names of the most recent publications that were opened. To open one of these files, display the File menu, then type the publication's number, or click its name.


No Help topic is associated with this item.


Copies the selected item and places it on the Clipboard.


Removes the selected item and places it on the Clipboard.


Places the contents of the Clipboard on the current page.


Repeats your last command or action when possible.


Selects all text in the current chapter, all frames and graphic objects on the current page, or all cells in the selected table. All operations you perform apply to all the selected items.


Reverses the last text, tag, graphic object, or frame editing action you performed. Immediately after you undo an action, the Redo command becomes available, allowing you to restore what you reversed. You can set the number of actions that can be undone, using the Tools, Options command (Selection tab).


Restores what the Undo command reversed.


Opens a new Publication Window with the same contents as the active window. If you change the contents of an active publication in an active window, all of the other windows that contain the same publication reflect those changes.


Lines up Publication Windows that have been reduced to icons along the bottom of the Application Window.


Arranges active Publication Windows so that they overlap. Select the Publication Window you want to work in by clicking its Title Bar.


Arranges active Publication Windows top to bottom, with no overlapping.


Arranges Publication Windows side by side, with no overlapping.


Divides the active Publication window into two panes. Each pane scrolls independently, allowing you to work on different parts of a publication at the same time or to display different views of the same publication.

To remove the split, double-click the bar between the panes, or drag it to the bottom or top of the Publication Window.


Displays information about the version of Corel VENTURA you are running. You can also use this command to display information about your system, display, network, printer, Corel .EXE and .DLL files, and system .DLL files.


Closes Corel VENTURA.


Opens the Corel VENTURA online help.


Changes the cursor to the What's This? cursor. When you click an application object with this cursor, a context-sensitive Help topic about that object is displayed in a pop-up window.


Inserts OLE objects in the publication.


Lists linked OLE objects in the active publication and allows you to change, update, and break the links, as well as open the application used to create the object. This command is not available if the active publication contains no links.


Allows you to convert an OLE object to another type of OLE object.


Changes the icon that represents the embedded information in your document.


Displays commands for editing the selected embedded object or converting it into another object type.


Choose a language for the selected numbering style. The Language list box is only available for numbering styles which use words; for example, One, Two or ONE, TWO.


Options dialog box


Workspace page


Enable this check box to set the new workspace as the current workspace.


Type a description of the workspace. This description appears in the description box below the Workspaces Available list on the Workspace page of the Options dialog box.


Type a name for the workspace.


Choose the workspace on which to base the new workspace. For example, if the _default workspace was set as the current workspace and you made changes to the settings, choose _default from the list box. The new workspace will include the changes you have made to the _default workspace.


Select a workspace from the Workspaces Available list, and click the Delete button to remove the workspace.


Provides a description of the workspace if one is available.


Click the New button to save a new workspace using the current settings in the Workspace category options.


Select a workspace from the Workspaces Available list, and click the Set As Current button to apply the workspace settings.


Displays a list of the available workspace settings. The current workspace setting is displayed in bold lettering and is displayed in the Current Workspace line.


General page


For more information, see the following:

•	Using automatic spell checking

•	Automatically updating paragraph tags

•	Automatically planting the cursor in a frame

•	Rotating frames

•	Undoing actions

•	Redoing and repeating actions

•	Setting what Corel VENTURA opens on startup

•	Converting quotes, quotation marks, and double hyphens when importing text


Enable this check box to automatically convert straight quotes (") and double hyphens when you import text.


Enable the Custom button, and type the marks to which you want Corel VENTURA to convert straight quotes in the boxes.


Enable the Close' button to convert a single straight quote to a single typographical quote. Enable the Custom button, and type a mark in the box to convert a single straight quote to a custom mark.


Select whether you want to convert double dashes or hyphens to em dashes or en dashes when you import text.


Enable the 'Open button to convert a single straight quote to a single typographical quote. Enable the Custom button, and type a mark in the box to convert a single straight quote to a custom mark.


Enable this check box to automatically underline misspelled words.


Choose an action you want Corel VENTURA to perform when you launch the application.


Enable this check box to automatically update paragraph formatting to the paragraph's tag. Each paragraph which references that tag will be updated.


Enable this check box to automatically position the cursor in frames that you create using the Frame tool.


Select an option to specify what straight quotes will be conveted to when you import text.


Enable this button if you want to convert straight quotes to typographic quotes ( [image] or [image]).


Enable this button if you want to convert straight quotes to German-style quotes.


Enable this button if you want to convert straight quotes to French-style quotes.


Click this button to redisplay all dialog box warning messages that you have disabled.


Enable this check box to rotate the contents of a frame when the frame is rotated.


Type the number of actions that can be undone or redone. You can have up to 99 undo/redo levels; however, the more undo/redo levels you use, the more system resources are used to store each action.


View page


Enable this button to have Corel VENTURA display colors using its own dithering scheme. This option only controls how colors are displayed, not how they print.

To use this option, you must have a monitor or graphics adapter that can display 256 simultaneous colors and a Windows screen driver that uses this capability.


Type a pixel size to set as the minimum size that is displayed as recognizable text. Greeked text appears as a series of gray bars rather than recognizable text and reduces the time it takes to redraw a screen which contains text that is smaller than the specified size.


Enable this check box to view the column guides. To change the color of the column guides, click the Column Guides button in the View Colors section of the dialog box, and choose a color.


Choose a color for the column guides. To view the column guides, enable the Column Guides check box in the Default View Settings section.


Choose a color for the frame borders. To view the frame borders, enable the Show Frame Borders check box in the Default View Settings section.


Enable this check box to view the frame borders. To change the color of the frame borders, click the Frame Borders button in the View Colors section of the dialog box, and choose a color.


Enable this check box to display the frame continuation arrows and frame order numbers.


Enable this check box to display generated tags in the Paragraph Tag List box on the property bar.


Choose a color for the grid.


Choose a color for the guidelines.


Enable this check box to allow you to interrupt the screen refresh by clicking the mouse, pressing ESC, or pressing a key.


Enable this check box to display the filename of the picture in the frame when the pictures are hidden.


Enable this check box to highlight loose lines. Loose lines are lines of justified text in which word spacing exceeds the maximum word spacing defined for the paragraph. To change the color of the loose lines, click the Loose Lines button in the View Colors section of the dialog box, and choose a color.


Choose the color used to highlight loose lines. Loose lines are lines of justified text in which word spacing exceeds the maximum word spacing defined for the paragraph. To view the highlight color, enable the Loose Lines check box in the Default View Settings section.


Enable this check box to keep the Frame tool selected after you draw a frame.


Enable this check box to display captions as you pass the cursor over toolbars and button.


Enable this check box to display tab and return symbols.


Choose a color to outline the edges of a page and to separate the header and footer frames from the main part of the page. This color is used in both Page Layout view and Page Tag view.


Enable this button to have Corel VENTURA display colors using your monitor driver's default dithering scheme. If you have a 256-color adapter, your screen may redraw faster with this option selected. However, only 15 of these colors will be used in the dithering scheme. This option only controls how colors are displayed, not how they print.

To use this option, you must have a monitor or graphics adapter that can display 256 simultaneous colors and a Windows screen driver that uses this capability.


Copy Editor page


Enable the Show Codes check box to view the markup codes in Copy Editor. To change the color used to display the markup code, click the Code Color button, and choose a color.


Choose a color used to display the markup codes. To view the markup codes in Copy Editor view, enable the Show Codes check box.


Type a value for the tab spacing in Copy Editor view.

To change the unit of measurement, right-click the box, click Units, and click a unit.


Choose the font you want to be used in Copy Editor view. Typing a letter scrolls the list to the first font that starts with that letter. Typing the letter repeatedly, scrolls down the list one font at a time.

If samples of the fonts are not being displayed, right-click the list and click Show Font Preview so that a check mark appears beside the option.


Enable this check box to display dots in place of spaces.


Type the font size you want to be used in Copy Editor view.

To change the units of measure, right-click the Size box, click Units, and click a unit.


Type a value for the width of the left column in the Copy Editor view. This column is used to display the names of the paragraph tags which have been applied to the text.

To change the unit of measurement, right-click the box, click Units, and click a unit.


Selection page


Type a value for the incremental angle of motion when you perform any of the following operations with CTRL held down: skewing or rotating, drawing straight lines with the Freehand tool, and adjusting control points when drawing with the Bezier tool.


Type a value to set the size of the frame selection handles.


Type a value for how close you must place the cursor to a frame, graphic object, or cell border before you can select it. If text is very close to the edge of the border, lower this setting to keep the insertion point from changing to the pointer.

To change the unit of measurement, right-click the box, click Units, and click a unit.


Type a value for the amount of offset from the original when you duplicate frames and graphic objects using the Edit, Duplicate command. Positive values shift the duplicate to the right or down; negative values shift the duplicate to the left or up.

To change the unit of measure, click the right mouse button inside the Horizontal box and select Units.


Type a value for how far the selected frame or graphic object moves when you press the direction keys on the numeric keypad.

To change the unit of measure, click the right mouse button inside the Vertical box and select Units.


Type a value for how close you must move a frame or graphic object to a grid line or guideline before snapping to the line.

To change the unit of measurement, right-click the box, click Units, and click a unit.


Page page


For more information, see the following:

•	Changing the page viewing options

•	Using the on-screen alignment tools


Enable this check box to display the grid.


Enable this check box to lock the guidelines on the page. With the guidelines locked you can only move them by adjusting the settings in the Grid & Guidelines Properties dialog box which you access from the Tools menu.


Enable this check box to show the guidelines.


Type a value to set the size of the pasteboard. The pasteboard is the white area around the page that acts as a worktable and that allows you to explicitly select a page. Explicitly selecting a page changes the Property Bar commands to allow you to format the page.

To change the units of measure, right-click the box, click Units, and click a unit.


Type a value to set the space between pages when viewing multiple pages or scrolling between pages.

To change the units of measure, right-click the box, click Units, and click a unit.


Enable this check box to display the horizontal and vertical rulers.


Enable this check box to automatically snap frames and graphic objects to the grid lines as you move the frames and graphic objects on the page.


Enable this check box to automatically snap frames and graphic objects to the guidelines as you move them on the page.


Enable this check box to automatically snap frames and graphic objects to the borders of other frames, graphic objects, and pages as you move them on the page.


Rulers page


Enable this button to set the zero point of the ruler relative to the current frame. The ruler's zero point will change for each frame that you select.


Type a value to set the position of the ruler origin. For example, if you set the ruler origin to be 4 inches, the zero point on the ruler will be 4 inches in from the page margin.

To change the unit of measurement, right-click the box, click Units, and select unit.


Choose the default alignment setting for tab stops that you add using the rulers. To add a tab stop using the ruler, click a paragraph, then click the white space of the ruler at the position where you want the tab stop.


Enable this button to set the zero point of the ruler relative to the page margins.


Choose a unit for the horizontal ruler.


Fonts page


Enable this check box to display device fonts in the Font List boxes. Device fonts are natively supported by your printer.


Enable this check box to display device symbols in the Font List boxes. Device symbols are natively supported by your printer.


Enable this check box to only display fonts that are used in the publication in the Font List boxes.


Enable this check box to display fonts that have been temporarily installed by Bitstream Font Navigator. Bitstream Font Navigator temporarily installs fonts that are included in a publication but not installed on you computer.


Enable this check box if you want to use Bitstream Font Navigator to temporarily install fonts that are used in the publication but not installed on your computer. If Bitstream Font Navigator cannot find the font, PANOSE Font Matching will be used.


Enable this check box to display a sample of the font in the Font List boxes.


Enable this check box to display Type 1 fonts in the Font List boxes.


Enable this check box to display Type 1 symbols in the Font List boxes.


Enable this check box to display True Type fonts in the Font List boxes.


Enable this check box to display True Type symbols in the Font List boxes.


Click this button to set PANOSE Font Matching preferences.


Units page


Choose a unit to use for the columns and margins for both pages and frames.


Choose a unit to use for the dimensions and position of frames and graphic objects and the dimensions of pages.


Choose a unit to use for fonts size.


Choose a unit to use for horizontal spacing for paragraphs.


Choose a unit to use for paragraph spacing.


Choose a unit to use for setting the size of lines and rules.


Choose a unit to use for vertical spacing for paragraphs.


Increment settings


Type a value to use as the increment for changing values in number boxes. Theses increments are only used when you use the arrows at the side of the number boxes.


Save page


For more information, see the following:

•	Saving and backing up publications (Overview)

•	Importing text

•	Opening documents that were not created in Corel VENTURA

•	Default settings for importing pictures

•	Hyphenation in previous versions of Corel VENTURA

•	Changing the language for the default template

•	Editing and restoring the default template


Enable the Auto-backup Every check box and type a value in the Minutes box to set a time for when Corel VENTURA will automatically save your publication. If you do not want Corel VENTURA to automatically save your work, disable the check box.


Enable this check box to automatically create new paragraph tags based on paragraphs with overridden properties when you import text. By allowing Corel VENTURA to create new paragraph tags, a new paragraph tag will be created for each paragraph style with overridden properties, and you can significantly reduce the size of the Corel VENTURA publication when it is saved.


Restores the DEFAULT.VP template to its original settings. Restart Corel VENTURA to use the new template.


Lets you choose a default language for your publications. Select a language and click the Reset Default Template button to set the default language.

This control also sets the default language used when you open version 3 to 4.2 publications. If you only want to set the language used for version 3 to 4.2 publications, do not click the Reset Default Template button.


Enable this check box if you want backup copies of your publications to be saved with the prefix "Backup Of" before the name. You must enable the Make Backup On Save check box to access this check box.


Enable this check box if you want Corel VENTURA to make a backup of the last saved version of the publication each time you save.


Enable this button if you want to embed all imported pictures, regardless of the size.


Enable this button if you want Corel VENTURA to keep pictures over a certain size external. Type a value for the minimum size of pictures that will be imbedded in the KBytes box.


Enable the Warn Before Embedding Imported Pictures Over button if you want Corel VENTURA to allow you to decide whether or whether not to embed pictures over a certain size. Type a value for the minimum size of pictures that will display this warning when you import the pictures in the KBytes box.

Enable the Keep Imported Picture Files External If Larger Than button if you want Corel VENTURA to keep pictures over a certain size external. Type a value for the minimum size of pictures that will be imbedded in the KBytes box.


Enable this button if you want to keep all pictures externally referenced.


Enable this button if you want Corel VENTURA to allow you to decide whether or whether not to embed pictures over a certain size. Type a value for the minimum size of pictures that will display this warning when you import the pictures in the KBytes box.


Enable this check box if you want to not save the drive name with linked or external names. This allows you to locate the file even if the file has been moved to a different drive but still has the same folder names.


Plug-Ins page


Removes the selected bitmap effects plug-in from Corel VENTURA.


Enable this check box if you want to initialize the enabled plug-ins when you start Corel VENTURA.


Lets you add a new plug-in for bitmap effects.


Displays the location of the folders that contain the bitmap plug-ins. Enable each plug-in that you want to apply to the workspace, and disable any others. You can access the plug-ins when you are applying bitmap effects. Disabling a plug-in does not remove it from the list, it only removes it from the list of bitmap effects. If you want to remove a plug-in, select it from the list and click the Remove button. If you want to add a new plug-in, click the Add button.


Customize pages - Toolbars


Tag Window Columns


Select a Tag Window property from the Tag Properties list, and click the Add button to display that property in the Tag Window.


Select a Tag Window property from the Selected Properties list, and click this button to change the position of that property in the Tag Window. The top to bottom display in the Options dialog box is displayed left to right in the Tag Window.


Select a Tag Window property from the Selected Properties list, and click the Remove button to remove that property from the Tag Window display.


Displays a list of the properties that are currently being displayed in the Tag Window.


Displays a list of the properties that can be added to the Tag Window.


Choose the type of tag for which you want to customize the Tag Window display.


Global - Color management


Corrects the color displayed on your monitor using the monitor's color profile.


Applies the color profile settings to text.


Choose the warning color to use to highlight colors that cannot be printed on your printer.


Enable this button to simulate the color display on your monitor based on a composite printer.


Use the slider to specify the transparency of the selected warning color. Using a higher transparency lets you view the image even when the colors are out of the printer's color range. Using a lower transparency means that the gamut warning color will replace colors in the picture that cannot be printed on your printer.


Highlights colors that cannot be printed on your printer with the selected warning color.


Corrects the color displayed on your monitor to reflect the default printer's output.


Enable this button to simulate the color display on your monitor based on a separations printer.


Printing defaults


For more information, see the following:

•	Customizing the print preview

•	Using preset printing options

•	Specifying the chapters or pages to print


Choose an option from the list to determine how your publication is displayed when you use Print Preview. The following table describes each mode.

Mode	Description

None	Substitutes a gray box for any pages in the publication.

Normal	Displays the publication as if you were viewing it in Page Layout view.

Normal & Low Res Bitmaps	Displays the publication as if you were viewing it in Page Layout view but using low resolution bitmaps.


Choose the default setting for the range of pages that will be enabled when you access the Print dialog box. You can change the range each time you go to print the publication.


Choose a preset printing style to set as the default style.


Type Assist


Type a word or character in the Replace box, type a replacement in the With box, and click the Add button to create a Type Assist replacement setting.


Capitalizes the first letter following a sentence end. A sentence end is defined by a period (.), and exclamation mark (!), or a question mark (?). In Spanish, the marks ¿ and ¡ are also supported.


Automatically capitalizes the names of days.


Changes the second capital in a word to lowercase. If the capitals are followed by a space or period or the word contains other capitals, no change will be made.


Select a replacement setting, and click the Delete button to remove the Type Assist setting.


Select a replacement setting, type a new replacement in the With box, and click the Replace button to change the Type Assist setting.


Type a word or character that you want Type Assist to replace.


Dislays a list of the Type Assist replacements. The character or word that you type is displayed on the left, and the replacement is displayed on the right.


Allows Type Assist to make the replacements defined in the Replacement Text section of the dialog box.


Changes standard quotation marks (") to typographical
quotes ( [image] or [image]).


Type a word or character that you want Type Assist to use as a replacement for the word or character you type.


Filters and associations


Bitmap effects


Enable to preview a bitmap effect on your screen.


Enable to display a single, large Result window when previewing a bitmap effect.


Enables the last Preview Method you used in the bitmap effect dialog box.


Enable to automatically fill a bitmap effect dialog box with the values you previously used.


Paragraph properties dialog box


Align tab (Paragraph Properties dialog box)


For more information, see the following:

•	Aligning paragraphs

•	Indenting and outdenting lines


Choose Absolute from the Vertical list box, and type a value for the distance from the top of the page that you want the paragraph to start.

Once you have set the vertical alignment of the paragraph, text that you add to the paragraphs above will not push the current paragraph down; instead, the text from the two paragraphs will overlap.

To change the unit of measurement, right-click the box, click Units, and click a unit.


Enable the Add Width Of Preceding Line check box to indent the specified number of lines of the paragraph a distance equal to the length of the last line of the preceding paragraph. If you have specified a distance in the Amount box, that value will be added to the length of the last line of the preceding paragraph. To set the number of lines you want indented, type the number of lines in the Indent box.


Click a picture to apply a preset outdent option.


Click a picture to apply a preset alignment or indent option.


Click a picture to apply a preset alignment option.


Click the Presets button to access preset alignment and indent options.

Click the Details button to access options for creating custom alignments and indents.


Click a picture to apply a preset indent option.


Use this section of the dialog box to align the paragraph to a specific character (usually a decimal point) at a specific position.


Use the Line Indents section of the dialog box to set the number of lines of the paragraph that you want to indent.


Use the Paragraph Indents section of the dialog box to specify the left and right indent for the paragraph, and whether that position changes if the paragraph appears on a left or right page. If you want the paragraph to have the same position on a left or right page, choose All from the Page list box, and type the values in the In From Left and In From Right boxes.


Use the Text Alignment section of the dialog box to set the paragraph's horizontal and vertical position within the frame, column, or page.


Type the character you want to use as the alignment character in the Decimal box. You can type any character available on the keyboard. The default is a period (or decimal point). To use a character that is not available on the keyboard, type its ANSI code number in the ANSI box.

To determine a character's ANSI code, click Insert, Symbol and click the character. The ANSI code is the two- or three-digit number that appears in the top right corner of the dialog box.


Type value for the distance from the right margin that you want to set the decimal alignment.

To change the unit of measurement, right-click the In From Right box, click Units, and click a unit.


Enable the Hanging Punctuation check box to apply the hanging punctuation settings defined in the Chapter Properties dialog box to the paragraph. Hanging punctuation eliminates the visual misalignment that occurs when punctuation falls at the beginning or end of lines of text by allowing the punctuation to appear outside of the margins.

For more information about hanging punctuation, see "Using hanging punctuation."


Choose the horizontal alignment for the paragraph from the Horizontal list box.


Type a value for the distance that you want the lines of the paragraph indented in the Amount box.

To change the unit of measure, right-click the Amount box, click Units, and click a unit.


Type the number of lines of the paragraph that you want indented in the Indent box.


To set the indents for when the paragraph appears on a left page, choose Left from the Page list box, and type the values in the In From Left and In From Right boxes.

To set the indents for when the paragraph appears on a right page, choose Right from the list box, and type the values in the In From Left and In From Right boxes.

To set the indents for when the paragraph appears on either page, choose All from the Page list box, and type the values in the In From Left and In From Right boxes.


Type a value for the indent in from the left margin in the In From Left box.

To change the unit of measurement, right click the In From Left box, click Units, and choose a Unit.


Type a value for the indent in from the right margin in the In From Right box.

To change the unit of measurement, right click the In From Right box, click Units, and choose a Unit.


Click the Justified Settings button to access more options for specifying how Corel VENTURA justifies text.


Choose the vertical position of the paragraph in the frame or on the page.

The following table describes each alignment option.

Alignment option	Resulting position

Top	Aligns the paragraph under the preceding paragraph or to the top of the page or frame.

Middle	Aligns the paragraph to the middle of the page or frame. Paragraphs that follow are forced to the following page or to the next continuation frame.

Bottom	Aligns the paragraph to the bottom of the page or frame. Paragraphs that follow are forced to the following page or to the next continuation frame.

Absolute	Aligns the paragraph to the position specified in the number box. To set the vertical position of the paragraph, type the value in the number box. The paragraph will always appear at that position. This may result in preceding paragraphs overlapping the paragraph to which an absolute vertical alignment has been set. To change the unit of measure, right-click the number box, click Units, and click a unit.


Breaks tab (Paragraph Properties dialog box)


For more information, see the following:

•	Using breaks and spacing

•	Allowing paragraphs to span columns

•	Setting paragraph tag sequences


Use this section of the dialog box to define page, column, and line breaks. For more information, see "Using breaks and spacing."


Choose a column break option for the paragraph from the Column Break list box. The following table describes each option.

Column break option	Function

None	Specifies that no column break is required

Before	Starts the paragraph at the top of the next column

After	Makes the paragraph the last one in the column

Before And After	Makes the paragraph the only one in the column


Choose the paragraph tag that will be automatically applied to the next paragraph. When you press ENTER, Corel VENTURA will automatically apply the selected paragraph tag to the next paragraph.

If you want the following paragraph to use the same paragraph tag, choose <Current Tag> from the list box. If you want the following paragraph to use the same overridden paragraph properties, choose <Current Properties> from the list box.


Use this section of the dialog box to define the column spanning options for the selected paragraph. For example, if you have text that occupies two-columns on a page, you can set the title to span both columns.

Enable the Span Across All Columns button to have the paragraph span all columns in a multicolumn layout. If you use this option, you should also use column balance for the frame or page, otherwise text may not flow properly between columns. For information about column balance, see "Allowing paragraphs to span columns."

To make the paragraph span a set number of columns, enable the Span Across Only button, and type the number of columns in the Columns box.


The In Line With Previous Paragraph options works in conjunction with side-by-side paragraphs. If you have made side-by-side paragraphs, enable the In Line With Previous Paragraph check box to place the beginning of the paragraph on the same line as the last line of the previous paragraph. Disable the check box to place the paragraph on the same line as the last line of the previous paragraph.

To prevent the paragraph from overlapping the preceding paragraph, enable the Add Width Of Preceding Line check box on the Align tab.


Enable the Keep With Next Paragraph check box to keep the selected paragraph on the same page or column as the paragraph immediately following it. If there is not enough room for both paragraphs on the page or column, Corel VENTURA will move them to the next page or column. You can use this option to keep a heading and the first paragraph that follows it on the same page.


Enable the Keep With Previous Paragraph check box to keep the selected paragraph on the same page or column as the paragraph preceding it. If there is not enough room for both paragraphs on the page or column, Corel VENTURA will move them to the next page or column. You can use this option to keep a heading and the first paragraph that follows it on the same page.


Choose a line break option for the paragraph from the Line Break list box. The following table describes each option.

Line break option	Function

None	Specifies that no line break is required

Before	Inserts a line break before the paragraph

After	Inserts a line break after the paragraph

Before And After	Inserts a line break before and after the paragraph


Choose a page break option for the paragraph from the Page Break list box. The following table describes each option.

Page break option	Function

None	Specifies that no page break is required

Before	Starts the paragraph at the top of the next page

After	Makes the paragraph the last one on the page

Before And After	Makes the paragraph the only one on the page

Before/Until Left	Makes the paragraph the first one on the next left page

Before/Until Right	Makes the paragraph the first one on the next right page


Enable the Span Across All Columns button to have the paragraph span all columns in a multicolumn layout. If you use this option, you should also use column balance for the frame or page, otherwise text may not flow properly between columns. For information about column balance, see "Allowing paragraphs to span columns."


To make the paragraph span a set number of columns, enable the Span Across Only button, and type the number of columns in the Columns box. For information about column balance, see "Allowing paragraphs to span columns."


Controls whether breaks are allowed within the paragraph. If there is not enough room for the entire paragraph at the bottom of a page or column, the paragraph will be moved to the next page or column.


Font tab (Paragraph Properties dialog box)


Click the Background button, and choose a background color for the selected paragraph.


Click the Fill button to select a background fill for the selected paragraph.


Enable the Overprint check box to have the paragraph's background print over any objects that are layered beneath the paragraph. This option is only relevant when printing color separations. For more information about overprinting, see "Color trapping."


Use the Color section of the dialog box to define font and background colors for the paragraph.


Choose the font you want to apply to the selected paragraph. Typing a letter scrolls the list to the first font that starts with that letter. Typing the letter repeatedly scrolls down the list one font at a time.

If samples of the fonts are not being displayed, right-click the list box and click Show Font Preview so that a check mark appears beside the option.

Missing fonts appear in the Font list box with a [image] symbol and the name of the substituted font in parentheses next to the font name.


Use the Font Properties section of the dialog box to set the font, font size, style, and position attributes for the paragraph.


Click the Font Color button, and choose a color for the selected paragraph.


Click the Fill button to select a fill or outline for the text in the selected paragraph.


Enable the Overprint check box to have the paragraph print over any objects that are layered beneath it. This option is only relevant when printing color separations. For more information about overprinting, see "Color trapping."


Enable the Column Wide Background button if you want the paragraph's background to extend to the full width of the page, column, or frame.


Enable the Overscore check box to apply a line above the selected paragraph.

You can change the thickness and position of the line by clicking the Settings button.


Enable the Strike-Thru check box to apply a line through the selected paragraph.

You can change the thickness and position of the line by clicking the Settings button.


Choose a position for the paragraph. You can choose Superscript, Subscript, or None. Superscript sets the entire paragraph as superscript; Subscript sets the entire paragraph as subscript; None sets the paragraph as normal.

You can change the settings for the Superscript or Subscript options by clicking the Settings button.


Click the Settings button to change the Overscore, Strike-thru, Underline, Superscript, and Subscript settings.


Type the font size you want to apply to the paragraph.

To change the unit of measure, right-click the Size box, click Units, and click a unit.


Choose the font style you want to apply to the selected paragraph. The availability of styles depends on the font you have selected.


Choose an underline option for the selected paragraph.

You can change the settings for the underline options by clicking the Settings button and adjusting the settings.


Choose an option to set the case for the selected paragraph. Uppercase sets all of the characters in uppercase letters; None lets you specify the case for each letter.


Effects tab (Paragraph Properties dialog box)


For more information, see the following:

•	Creating bulleted lists

•	Adding and removing drop caps


Click the Background button, and choose a background color for the bullet character or drop cap.


Click the Fill button to select a background fill for the bullet character or drop cap.


Enable the Overprint check box to have the bullet character or drop cap background print over any objects that are layered beneath the paragraph. This option is only relevant when printing color separations. For more information about overprinting, see "Color trapping."


Type the ANSI code of the character you want to use as the bullet. The character is displayed in the Character box.


Click the Character button to choose a bullet character.


Type a value for the distance between the bullet character and the paragraph. If you want to only indent the first line of the paragraph, enable the First Line Only check box.

To change the unit of measurement, right-click the Position box, click Units, and click a unit.


If you want to only indent the first line of the paragraph, enable the First Line Only check box.


Use the Indent section of the dialog box to set the paragraph indent after the bullet character.


Enable the Custom Spacing check box, and type the number of lines you want the character to drop in the Number Of Lines box. If you disable the check box, Corel VENTURA will use the size of the drop cap to decide the number of lines to drop the character.


Type the number of lines you want to drop the initial character in the paragraph.


Use this section of the dialog box to set the number of lines you want to drop the initial character in the paragraph.

Enable the Custom Spacing check box, and type the number of lines you want the character to drop in the Number Of Lines box. If you disable the check box, Corel VENTURA will use the size of the drop cap to decide the number of lines to drop the character.


Click a picture to apply a preset drop cap format.


Click a picture to apply a preset bullet format.


Click a picture to apply a preset bullet or drop cap format.


Click the Presets button to access preset bullet and drop cap options.

Click the Details button to access options for creating custom bullets and drop caps.


Type a value for the distance from the baseline you want to shift the drop cap or bullet character. Positive numbers shift the character up; negative numbers shift it down.

To change the unit of measurement, right-click the Shift up box, click Units, and click a unit.


Choose Bullet Character from the Effect Type list box to define custom bullets.

Choose Drop Cap to format custom drop caps.

Choose No Effect to remove bullet or drop cap effects from the paragraph.


Choose the font you want to apply to the selected paragraph. Typing a letter scrolls the list to the first font that starts with that letter. Typing the letter repeatedly scrolls down the list one font at a time.

If samples of the fonts are not being displayed, right-click the list and click Show Font Preview so that a check mark appears beside the option.

Missing fonts appear in the Font list box with a [image] symbol and the name of the substituted font in parentheses next to the font name.


Use the Font Color section of the dialog box to define font and background colors for the bullet character or drop cap.


Click the Font Color button, and choose a color for the bullet character or drop cap.


Click the Fill button to select a fill or outline for the bullet character or drop cap.


Enable the Overprint check box to have the bullet character or drop cap print over any objects that are layered beneath it. This option is only relevant when printing color separations. For more information about overprinting, see "Color trapping."


Type the number of characters in the paragraph you want to drop.


Enable the Overscore check box to apply a line above the drop cap or bullet character.

You can change the thickness and position of the line by clicking the Settings button on the Font tab.


Enable the Strike-Thru check box to apply a line through the drop cap or bullet character.

You can change the thickness and position of the line by clicking the Settings button on the Font tab.


Type the font size you want to apply to the bullet character or drop cap.

To change the unit of measure, right-click the Size box, click Units, and click a unit.


Choose the font style you want to apply to the bullet character or drop cap. The availability of styles depends on the font you have selected.


Choose an underline option for the bullet character or the drop cap.


General tab (Paragraph Properties dialog box)


For more information, see the following:

•	Enabling automatic hyphenation

•	Defining text-before or text-after settings for a publication's components

•	Assigning a language to text

•	Viewing formatting differences from an item's tag

•	Using paragraph tags


Enable the Automatic Hyphenation check box to allow Corel VENTURA to automatically hyphenate the paragraph using the hyphenation list for the language word list applied to the paragraph. You can apply a language to the paragraph by choosing one from the Language list box. You can change the automatic hyphenation settings by clicking the Settings button.

If you want to use both discretionary hyphens and automatic hyphens in the chapter, click Publication, Chapter Properties, click the Typography tab, and enable The Also Use Automatic Hyphenation Points check box.

For more information about hyphenation, see "Hyphenating text."


Choose a language for the paragraph from the Language list box. The language is used when you have Automatic Hyphenation enabled or when you use Spell Checker and Grammatik. Automatic Hyphenation automatically inserts hyphens to break up words that appear at the end of a line of text. Spell Checker and Grammatik use the language to verify the spelling and grammar in the selected paragraph.


This section of the dialog box displays the paragraph's formatting differences from the tag that is applied to the paragraph.

If you want to apply the formatting of the selected paragraph to its tag, click the Update Tag button. Each paragraph that uses the tag will also be updated with the new formatting.


Choose a new paragraph tag to apply to the selected paragraph.


Choose a predefined text string that you want to appear after the paragraph. To create a text string, choose Define.

If you apply a text-after setting to a paragraph tag, the selected text will be inserted after each paragraph to which that tag is applied.


Choose a predefined text string that you want to appear before the paragraph. To create a text string, choose Define.

If you apply a text-before setting to a paragraph tag, the selected text will be inserted before each paragraph to which that tag is applied.


Click the Settings button to define hyphenation settings for the paragraph or paragraph tag. You must enable the Automatic Hyphenation check box to be able to click the Settings button.


Choose a tag type from the Tag Type list box to categorize the tag; for example, a heading, list item, or table text. If you use the Tag Window, you can use the tag type to sort the tags.


Type a new name for the paragraph tag in the Tag Name box. You cannot rename the Body Text paragraph tag nor any of the generated tags, such as Z_HEADER or Z_FOOTER.


Use this section of the dialog box to define the text-before and text-after settings for the paragraph. For more information about text-before or text-after settings, see "Defining text-before or text-after settings."


Vertical rules dialog


Type the number of rules you want. You can use up to eight.


Enable the Overprint check box to have the vertical rules print over any objects beneath them. This option is only relevant when printing color separations. For more information about overprinting, see "Color trapping."


Displays the vertical rule settings. To format vertical rules, do any of the following:

•	To add a vertical rule, type the number of rules in the No. Of Rules box. You can use up to eight.

•	Type the distance you want each rule to be from the left margin in the Position box.

•	Type a value for the width of each rule in the Rules box.

•	Click the Color button and choose a color for each rule.

•	Click the Outline Pen button and choose any of the style options.


Choose a layout setting to specify what happens if the page on which the vertical rules are applied changes from a left page to a right page or from a right page to a left page. The following table explains each option. If you are using single-sided pages, this option is not necessary.

Choose ...	To ...

Different On Left And Right Pages	Allow you to specify unique settings if the page on which the vertical rules are applied changes

Same On Left And Right Pages	Copy the settings to the opposite page if the page on which the vertical rules are applied changes

Mirrored On Left And Right Pages	Mirror the settings to the opposite page if the page on which the vertical rules are applied changes


Displays whether the current page on which the vertical are being applied is a left or right page.


Hyphens dialog box


Use this section of the dialog box to adjust hyphenation settings.

The Hyphenation Zone settings do not apply to words containing discretionary hyphens.


Type the minimum number of letters in the word that can be left after a hyphen.

The Hyphenation Zone settings do not apply to words containing discretionary hyphens.


Type the minimum number of letters that a word must have before a hyphen can appear in a word.

The Hyphenation Zone settings do not apply to words containing discretionary hyphens.


Type the minimum number of letters that a word must have before a hyphen can be inserted. For example, if you do not want words of less than five characters hyphenated, type 4.

The Hyphenation Zone settings do not apply to words containing discretionary hyphens.


Enable this check box to allow hyphenation in capitalized words.


Enable this check box to allow hyphenation in the last word in a paragraph.


Enable this check box to allow hyphenation in the last word in a column, frame, or page.


Type the maximum number of consecutive lines that can end with a hyphen.


Enable this check box if you do not want to set a limit for the number of consecutive lines that can end with a hyphen.


Justified Settings dialog (Align tab, Paragraph Properties)


Enable the Automatic Letter Spacing check box to let Corel VENTURA add space within a word that is in a line of justified text. Type the values for the maximum amount of space that can be added in the Maximum Limit box. This setting is specified in percentages of an em. An em is a unit of measurement that is equal in height and width in the current font size; for example, if the font size is 12 points, an em is 12 points wide.


Type values in the Ems% column for the amount of space Corel VENTURA can add between words in a line of justified text. An em is a unit of measurement that is equal in height and width in the current font size; for example, if the font size is 12 points, an em is 12 points wide.


Type values in the Ems% column for the maximum amount of space Corel VENTURA can add between words in a line of justified text. An em is a unit of measurement that is equal in height and width in the current font size; for example, if the font size is 12 points, an em is 12 points wide.


Type values in the Proportion % column for the maximum amount of space Corel VENTURA can add between words in a line of justified text. This value is proportional to the default word spacing built into the font; for example, a proportional value of 100% uses the full word spacing for that font.


Type values in the Proportion % column or Ems % column to set the maximum spacing that Corel VENTURA can add between words in a line of justified text. The Proportion % value is proportional to the default word spacing built into the font; for example, a proportional value of 100% uses the full word spacing for that font. The Ems% value is a unit of measurement that is equal in height and width in the current font size; for example, if the font size is 12 points, an em is 12 points wide. You can type the value in either column. The other column will automatically display the equivalent measurement.


Type values in the Ems% column for the minimum amount of space Corel VENTURA can add between words in a line of justified text. An em is a unit of measurement that is equal in height and width in the current font size; for example, if the font size is 12 points, an em is 12 points wide.


Type values in the Proportion % column for the minimum amount of space Corel VENTURA can add between words in a line of justified text. This value is proportional to the default word spacing built into the font; for example, a proportional value of 100% uses the full word spacing for that font.


Type values in the Proportion % column or Ems % column to set the minimum spacing that Corel VENTURA can add between words in a line of justified text. The Proportion % value is proportional to the default word spacing built into the font; for example, a proportional value of 100% uses the full word spacing for that font. The Ems% value is a unit of measurement that is equal in height and width in the current font size; for example, if the font size is 12 points, an em is 12 points wide. You can type the value in either column. The other column will automatically display the equivalent measurement.


Type values in the Proportion % column for the amount of space Corel VENTURA can add between words in a line of justified text. This value is proportional to the default word spacing built into the font; for example, a proportional value of 100% uses the full word spacing for that font.


Dialog buttons (Paragraph Properties)


Applies the formatting defined in the dialog box to the item's tag.


Space tab (Paragraph Properties dialog box)


For more information, see the following:

•	Adding space at the top of a column

•	Adjusting line spacing automatically if the font size changes

•	Changing interline spacing

•	Changing interparagraph spacing and spacing above and below paragraphs

•	Rotating paragraphs


Choose how you want the spacing adjusted when the font size of the paragraph changes.

Choose ...	To ...

Add	Change the spacing by the same amount as the font; for example, if you increase the font size by two points, the spacing increases by two points. Type the value you want added in the + Font Size column of the Line Spacing section of the dialog box.

Percentage	Change the spacing by a percentage of the font size; for example, in a paragraph with 10 point type and 12 point interline spacing, increasing the point size by two (an increase of 20%) adds 2.4 points (20% of 12 points) to the interline spacing value. Type the value you want added in the % Font Size column of the Line Spacing section of the dialog box.

None	Not allow Corel VENTURA to automatically update spacing if the font size changes. You can still adjust the line spacing settings automatically.


Enable the Add Above Space At Column Top check box to add the Above line spacing value above the paragraph at the top of a page, column, or frame.

This setting must be enabled to increase the space above header and footer text and text at the top of a caption or footnote frame.


Enable the Grow Inter-Line Space To Fit check box to increase the interline spacing to accommodate characters larger than the normal paragraph font.

This option should be disabled to allow text to flow properly around frames anchored in a line of text.


Use this section of the dialog box to set the spacing options for the paragraph.


Enable the Above Space Only At Column Top check box to add the Above line spacing value to the paragraph only when it appears at the top of a page, column, or frame.


Use this section of the dialog box to rotate the selected paragraph.


Type a value in each of the boxes for the amount by which the line spacing will change if the font size changes. You can set how this value is applied by choosing an option from the Auto-Adjust list box.


Type a value for the angle by which you want to rotate the paragraph.


Type the maximum amount of vertical space that the rotated paragraph can occupy. If the line length of a paragraph rotated 90 or 270 degrees exceeds the limit, Corel VENTURA wraps the text to the next line. For paragraphs rotated 180 degrees, this setting controls the vertical position.

To change the unit of measurement, right-click the Max Height box, click Units, and click a unit.


Type the amount of space you want added between the current paragraph and the paragraph above it in the Above box.

If the Above setting for the current paragraph is greater than the Below setting for the preceding paragraph, Corel VENTURA uses the larger of the two settings.

For more information about calculating total space between paragraphs, see "Using interline and cap-height settings for first baselines."

To change the unit of measurement, right-click the Above box, click Units, and click a unit.


Type a value for the amount by which the Above line spacing value will change if the font size changes. You can set how this value is applied by choosing an option from the Auto-Adjust list box.


Type the amount of space you want added between the current paragraph and the paragraph below it in the Below box.

If the Below setting for the current paragraph is greater than the Above setting for the following paragraph, Corel VENTURA uses the larger of the two settings.

For more information about calculating total space between paragraphs, see "Using interline and cap-height settings for first baselines."

To change the unit of measurement, right-click the Below box, click Units, and click a unit.


Type a value for the amount by which the Below line spacing value will change if the font size changes. You can set how this value is applied by choosing an option from the Auto-Adjust list box.


Type the amount of space you want added between the lines of text in the current paragraph in the Inter-Line box. Typical values for text which is between 8 and 13 points in size is 120% to 130% of the font size. Larger font sizes generally requires less interline spacing; for example 100% to 120% of the font size.

To change the unit of measurement, right-click the Inter-Line box, click Units, and click a unit.


Type a value for the amount by which the Inter-Line line spacing value will change if the font size changes. You can set how this value is applied by choosing an option from the Auto-Adjust list box.


Type the amount of space you want added between paragraphs. This spacing only takes effect between paragraphs with identical Inter-Paragraph spacing values.

If the Below line space value for the current paragraph and the Above line space value for the next paragraph differ, Corel VENTURA sets the spacing to the larger of the two values. For more information about calculating total space between paragraphs, see "Using interline and cap-height settings for first baselines."

To change the unit of measurement, right-click the Inter-Paragraph box, click Units, and click a unit.


Type a value for the amount by which the Inter-Paragraph line spacing value will change if the font size changes. You can set how this value is applied by choosing an option from the Auto-Adjust list box.


Click a picture to apply preset rotation settings.


Click a picture to apply preset spacing or rotation settings.


Click a picture to apply preset spacing.


Click the Presets button to access preset spacing and rotation settings.

Click the Details button to access options for creating custom spacing and rotation settings.


Tabs tab (Paragraph Properties)


Click the Add Tab button to create a new tab stop. You can change the options for each tab stop by clicking a columns in the tab list and selecting an option, or by typing a value.


Click the Set Tabs Every button to set evenly spaced tab stops at the interval specified in the box.


Type a value for the interval you want between the evenly spaced tabs, and click the Set Tabs Every button. Corel VENTURA will insert a tab a each interval.

To change the unit of measurement, right-click the box, click Units, and click a unit.


Click the Delete Tab button to remove the tab selected in the tab list.


Click the Delete All button to remove every tab in the tab list.


List each tab stop for the current paragraph.

To ...	Do this ...

Add a tab stop	Click the Add Tab button.

Change the position of a tab	Click in the Position column, and type a value for the position.

Change the alignment of a tab	Click in the Align column, and choose an option.

Add leader characters	Click in the Leader column and choose a character from the list or type a character. To use a character that is not available on the keyboard, hold down ALT and type its ANSI code on the numeric keypad. To determine a character's ANSI code, click Insert, Insert Item, Symbol, click the ANSI character in the Symbol dialog box and look for the three-digit number at the top of the dialog box.

Delete a tab	Select the tab from the list, and click the Delete Tab button.


Choose a character or type the character you want to use to fill the space between the end of the paragraph and the right margin.


Type a number from 0 to 9 to set the space between the leader characters. The higher the number, the greater the spacing.


Use this section of the dialog box to set the trailing leaders for paragraphs that do not end at the right margin.


Typography tab (Paragraph Properties dialog box)


For more information, see the following:

•	Setting vertical justification for paragraphs and paragraph tags

•	Adjusting the tracking of characters and words

•	Applying automatic kerning to paragraphs and paragraph tags


Enable the Automatic Kerning check box to have Corel VENTURA apply kerning to characters in the paragraph. Automatic kerning reduces the space between certain pairs of letters; for example, "AW" and "Ta."

To use automatic kerning, you must enable it for the chapter. Click Publication, Chapter Properties, click the Typography tab, and enable the Pair Kerning check box.

For more information about kerning, see "Adjusting kerning."


Type a value for the amount of space you want between characters and words in unjustified text in either the Proportion% or Em% box. A proportional value of 100% uses the default word spacing built into the font.

You can set the spacing as either a proportion of the font's regular word spacing, by typing the value in the Proportion % box, or in fractions of an em space, by typing the value in the Em% box. An em is a unit of measurement that is equal in height and width in the current font size; for example, if the font size is 12 points, an em is 12 points wide. Since the value changes with the font size, you do not need to change the word spacing values if you change the font size.


Type a value for the maximum amount of vertical space Corel VENTURA can add above the paragraph when vertical justification is applied.

To change the unit of measurement, right-click the box, click Units, and click a unit.

For more information about vertical justification, see "Using vertical justification."


Type a value for the maximum amount of vertical space Corel VENTURA can add below the paragraph when vertical justification is applied.

To change the unit of measurement, right-click the box, click Units, and click a unit.

For more information about vertical justification, see "Using vertical justification."


Type a value for the maximum amount of vertical space Corel VENTURA can add between lines of a paragraph when vertical justification is applied.

To change the unit of measurement, right-click the box, click Units, and click a unit.

For more information about vertical justification, see "Using vertical justification."


Use this section of the dialog box to define the vertical justification settings for the paragraph. For more information about vertical justification, see "Using vertical justification."


Rules tab (Paragraph Properties dialog box)


Choose a rule tag to apply around the page, frame, paragraph, table, or table cell from the Rule Tag list box.


Choose a rule tag that you have created from the Rule Tag list box, and click the Delete button to remove the rule tag. You cannot remove the default rule tags; for example, you cannot remove the Hidden, Single, Thick, or Double rule tag.


Enable the Overprint check box to have the rule print over any objects beneath it. This option is only relevant when printing color separations. For more information about overprinting, see "Color trapping."


Click the Add button to save the formatting as a new rule tag or to update the formatting of an existing rule tag.


Displays the formatting options for the rule.

Enable the check box in the # column for the number of lines you want to use for the rule. Each rule can use up to three lines.

Type a value for the width of each line you have used in the Size column. To change the unit of measure, click the box to select it, then right-click the box, click Units, and click a unit.

Click the color button in the Color column, and click a color for each rule.

Click the Outline Pen tool in the Pen column, and use the Outline Pen dialog box to set options for the rule.

Type a value in the Space column to adjust the space between lines and the position of the line around the border of the frame, page, or paragraph. To change the unit of measurement, click the box to select it, then right-click the box, click Units, and click a unit.


Displays the total thickness of the rule, including each line used and the space between each line.


Displays the placement and formatting of the rule.


Choose the distance you want to extend the rule. If you choose Custom, you can type custom values in the Length and Indent boxes.


Type a value for the distance by which you want to indent the rule. To access the Indent box, you must choose Custom from the Extent list box.

To change the unit of measurement, right-click the box, click Units, and click a unit.


Click the Inside Rules button to apply the rule inside the border of the frame or page.


Click the Outside Rules button to apply the rule outside the border of the frame or page.


Displays the location where the rules will be applied around the frame, paragraph, or page. As you pass the cursor over the edges a gray indicator appears indicating to which edge the rule will be applied. To select an edge of the frame, paragraph, or page, click one of the edges so that the rule location indicators appear in black. To select another edge, hold CTRL and select another edge. You can also click in the middle to select all of the edges.

To apply a rule, click one of the presets (if they are available) or use the controls to the right of the Edge Selection box to define the rules.


Click a picture to apply a preset drop shadow. You can then click the Details button if you want to make any adjustments to the preset drop shadow.


Applies a rule above the frame, page, or paragraph. To specify the rule, choose a rule from the Rule Tag list box.


Applies a rule above and below the frame, page, or paragraph. To specify the rule, choose a rule from the Rule Tag list box.


Applies a rule below the frame, page, or paragraph. To specify the rule, choose a rule from the Rule Tag list box.


Applies a rule around the frame, page, or paragraph. To specify the rule, choose a rule from the Rule Tag list box.


Click the color button and choose a color for the rule.


Applies a rule to the left edge of the frame, page, or paragraph. To specify the rule, choose a rule from the Rule Tag list box.


Applies a rule to the left and right edges of the frame, page, or paragraph. To specify the rule, choose a rule from the Rule Tag list box.


Choose a rule tag to apply to the top, bottom, left, or right rule.


Removes any rules that have been applied.


Applies a rule to the right edge of the frame, page, or paragraph. To specify the rule, choose a rule from the Rule Tag list box.


Click the Presets button to access preset drop shadow settings.

Click the Details button to access options for creating custom rules.


Use the Rules tab to apply rules around frames, paragraphs, or pages.


Type a value for the length of the rule. To access the Length box, you must choose Custom from the Extent list box.

To change the unit of measurement, right-click the box, click Units, and click a unit.


Rule Tag Properties dialog box


Enable the Overprint check box to have the rule print over the object to which it is applied. This option is only relevant when printing color separations. For more information about overprinting, see "Color trapping."


Settings dialog (Font tab Para Props)


Enable the Auto-Adjust To Font check box if you want Corel VENTURA to automatically adjust the thickness of the overscore, strike-thru, and underline lines if you change the font size of the paragraph.


Use this section of the dialog box to set the tracking values for the paragraph.


Type a value in the Thickness column to set the size of the second underline line. Type a value in the Baseline Shift column to set the position of the underline line: typing a positive value shifts the underline line up; typing a negative value shifts the underline line down. If you choose Double from the Underline list box on the Font tab of the Paragraph Properties dialog box, Corel VENTURA applies Underline 1 and Underline 2 to the paragraph.

To change the unit of measurement, right-click the box, click Units, and click a unit.

If you want Corel VENTURA to automatically adjust the thickness of the line, enable the Auto-Adjust To Font check box.


Use this section of the dialog box to define the superscript and subscript settings for the paragraph.


Use this section of the dialog box to set the size and position of overscore, strike-thru, and underline lines for the paragraph.


Enable the Margin Width Lines to extend overscore, strike-thru, and underlines lines the full width of the page, column, or frame.


Type a value in the Thickness column to set the size of the overscore line. Type a value in the Baseline Shift column to set the position of the overscore line: typing a positive value shifts the overscore line up; typing a negative value shifts the overscore line down.

To change the unit of measurement, right-click the box, click Units, and click a unit.

If you want Corel VENTURA to automatically adjust the thickness of the line, enable the Auto-adjust To Font check box.


Use the Alternate Size section of the dialog box to set the font size used for small caps and the Alternate position setting for a character tag applied to text in the paragraph.


Type a value for the font size you want to use for small caps in the Font Size box. This font size is also used when you apply a character tag with the Alternate position setting to text in the paragraph.

To change the unit of measurement, right-click the box, click Units, and click a unit.


Type a value in the Thickness column to set the size of the strike-thru line. Type a value in the Baseline Shift column to set the position of the strike-thru line: typing a positive value shifts the strike-thru line up; typing a negative value shifts the strike-thru line down.

To change the unit of measurement, right-click the box, click Units, and click a unit.

If you want Corel VENTURA to automatically adjust the thickness of the line, enable the Auto-Adjust To Font check box.


Type the font size for subscript characters in the Font column. Type the position of the subscript characters in the Baseline Shift column: a positive value moves the characters up; a negative value moves the characters down.

To change the unit of measurement, right-click the box, click Units, and click a unit.


Type the font size for superscript characters in the Font column. Type the position of the superscript characters in the Baseline Shift column: a positive value moves the characters up; a negative value moves the characters down.

To change the unit of measurement, right-click the box, click Units, and click a unit.


Choose a tracking setting from the Type list box.


Type a value in the Custom box to specify a tracking value. This setting is specified in percentages of an em. An em is a unit of measurement that is equal in height and width in the current font size; for example, if the font size is 12 points, an em is 12 points wide.


Enable the Apply Tracking To Last Character check box if you want the tracing settings to be applied to the last character in the line.


Type a value in the Thickness column to set the size of the underline line. Type a value in the Baseline Shift column to set the position of the underline line: typing a positive value shifts the underline line up; typing a negative value shifts the underline line down.

To change the unit of measurement, right-click the box, click Units, and click a unit.

If you want Corel VENTURA to automatically adjust the thickness of the line, enable the Auto-Adjust To Font check box.


Character Tag Properties dialog box


Font tab (Character Tag Properties dialog box)


Click the Background button, and choose a background color for the character tag.


Click the Fill button to select a background fill for the character tag.


Enable the Overprint check box to have the character tag's background print over any objects that are layered beneath the text to which the character tag is applied. This option is only relevant when printing color separations. For more information about overprinting, see "Color trapping."


Use the Color section of the dialog box to define font and background colors for the character tag.


Choose the font you want to apply to the character tag. Typing a letter scrolls the list to the first font that starts with that letter. Typing the letter repeatedly scrolls down the list one font at a time.

If samples of the fonts are not being displayed, right-click the list box and click Show Font Preview so that a check mark appears beside the option.

Missing fonts appear in the Font list box with a [image] symbol and the name of the substituted font in parentheses next to the font name.


Use the Font Properties section of the dialog box to set the font, font size, style, and position attributes for the text to which the character tag is applied.


Click the Font Color button, and choose a color for the character tag.


Enable the Overprint check box to have the text to which the character tag is applied print over any objects that are layered beneath the text. This option is only relevant when printing color separations. For more information about overprinting, see "Color trapping."


Type a value to specify the kerning for the text to which the character tag is applied. Kerning lets you increase or decrease the space between pairs of characters, such as AW and Ta. A positive value increases the space between the characters; a negative value decreases the space between the characters.

This setting is specified in percentages of an em. An em is a unit of measurement that is equal in height and width in the current font size; for example, if the font size is 12 points, an em is 12 points wide.


Enable the Overscore check box to apply a line above the text to which the character tag is applied. The thickness and position of the line is determined by the settings for the paragraph or paragraph tag over which the character tag is applied.


Choose a position for the text to which the character tag is applied. You can choose None, Superscript, Subscript, Alternate, or As Is. The following table describes each option.

Choose ...	To set the text to which the character tag is applied as ...

Superscript	Superscript

Subscript	Subscript

None	Normal, which turns off the position settings for the paragraph or paragraph tag over which the character tag is applied

Alternate	The alternate size defined for the paragraph or paragraph tag. The alternate size is also used when small caps are applied to text. To change the alternate size, click format Paragraph Properties or Paragraph Tag Properties, click the Font tab, click the Settings button, and type a value in the Font Size box in the Alternate Size section of the dialog box.

As Is	The position defined in the paragraph or paragraph tag


Type a value to vertically shift the text to which the character tag is applied. A negative value shifts the text down from the baseline; a positive value shifts it up.

To change the unit of measurement, right-click the Shift Up box, click Units, and click a unit.


Type the font size you want to apply to the character tag.

To change the unit of measure, right-click the Size box, click Units, and click a unit.


Enable the Strike-Thru check box to apply a line through the text to which the character tag is applied. The thickness and position of the line is determined by the settings for the paragraph or paragraph tag over which the character tag is applied.


Choose the font style you want to apply to the character tag. The availability of styles depends on the font you have selected.

Choosing None turns off the style setting defined for the paragraph or paragraph tag over which the character tag is applied. As Is retains the style setting for the paragraph or paragraph tag.


Choose an underline option for the character tag. The thickness and position of the line is determined by the settings for the paragraph or paragraph tag over which the character tag is applied.


Choose an option to set the case for the character tag. Uppercase sets all of the characters in uppercase letters; None turns off the setting specified for the paragraph or paragraph tag over which the character tag is applied; As Is retains the setting specified for the paragraph or paragraph tag.


General tab (Character Tag Properties dialog box)


For more information, see the following:

•	Enabling automatic hyphenation

•	Defining text-before or text-after settings for a publication's components

•	Assigning a language to text

•	Using character tags


Enable the Automatic Hyphenation check box to allow Corel VENTURA to automatically hyphenate the text to which the character tag is applied using the hyphenation list for the language word list applied to the character tag. You can apply a language to the character tag by choosing one from the Language list box. You can change the automatic hyphenation settings by clicking the Settings button.

If the check box is clear, that means that the Automatic Hyphenation check box is disabled. If the check box is unavailable, that means that the check box is enabled. With the check box enabled, Corel VENTURA will automatically apply hyphenation only if the Automatic Hyphenation check box is enabled for the paragraph.

If you want to use both discretionary hyphens and automatic hyphens in the chapter, click Publication, Chapter Properties, click the Typography tab, and enable The Also Use Automatic Hyphenation Points check box.

For more information about hyphenation, see "Hyphenating text."


Choose a language for the character tag from the Language list box. The language is used when you have Automatic Hyphenation enabled or when you use Spell Checker and Grammatik. Automatic Hyphenation automatically inserts hyphens to break up words that appear at the end of a line of text. Spell Checker and Grammatik use the language to verify the spelling and grammar in the text to which the character tag is applied.


Choose a predefined text string that you want to appear after the character tag. To create a text string, choose Define.

The selected text will be inserted after each instance where the character tag is applied.


Choose a predefined text string that you want to appear before the character tag. To create a text string, choose Define.

The selected text will be inserted after each instance where the character tag is applied.


Click the Settings button to define hyphenation settings for the character tag. You must enable the Automatic Hyphenation check box to be able to click the Settings button.


Type a new name for the character tag in the Tag Name box. You cannot rename the Bold, Italic, or Underline default character tags.


Use this section of the dialog box to define the text-before and text-after settings for the character tag. For more information about text-before or text-after settings, see "Defining text-before or text-after settings."


Text Properties dialog box


Choose the font you want to apply to the selected text. Typing a letter scrolls the list to the first font that starts with that letter. Typing the letter repeatedly scrolls down the list one font at a time.

If samples of the fonts are not being displayed, right-click the list box and click Show Font Preview so that a check mark appears beside the option.

Missing fonts appear in the Font list box with a [image] symbol and the name of the substituted font in parentheses next to the font name.


Click the Color button, and choose a color for the selected text.


Enable the Overprint check box to have the text print over any objects that are layered beneath it. This option is only relevant when printing color separations. For more information about overprinting, see "Color trapping."


Type a value to specify the kerning for the selected text. Kerning lets you increase or decrease the space between pairs of characters, such as "AW" and "Ta." A positive value increases the space between the characters; a negative value decreases the space between the characters.

This setting is specified in percentages of an em. An em is a unit of measurement that is equal in height and width in the current font size; for example, if the font size is 12 points, an em is 12 points wide.


Enable the Overscore check box to apply a line above the selected text. The thickness and position of the line is determined by the settings for the paragraph or paragraph tag over which the text formatting is applied.


Choose a position for the selected text. You can choose None, Superscript, Subscript, or Alternate. The following table describes each option.

Choose ...	To set the text as ...

Superscript	Superscript

Subscript	Subscript

None	Normal, which turns off the position settings for the paragraph or paragraph tag over which the text properties are applied

Alternate	The alternate size defined for the paragraph or paragraph tag. The alternate size is also used when small caps are applied to text. To change the alternate size, click format Paragraph Properties or Paragraph Tag Properties, click the Font tab, click the Settings button, and type a value in the Font Size box in the Alternate Size section of the dialog box.


Type a value to shift the text vertically. A negative value shifts the text down from the baseline; a positive value shifts it up.

To change the unit of measurement, right-click the Shift Up box, click Units, and click a unit.


Type the font size you want to apply to the selected text.

To change the unit of measure, right-click the Size box, click Units, and click a unit.


Enable the Strike-Thru check box to apply a line through the selected text. The thickness and position of the line is determined by the settings for the paragraph or paragraph tag over which the text properties are applied.


Choose the font style you want to apply to the character tag. The availability of styles depends on the font you have selected.

Choosing None turns off the style setting defined for the paragraph or paragraph tag over which the text properties are applied. As Is retains the style setting for the paragraph or paragraph tag.


Choose an underline option for the selected text. The thickness and position of the line is determined by the settings for the paragraph or paragraph tag over which the text properties are applied.


Choose an option to set the case for the selected text. None turns off the setting specified for the paragraph or paragraph tag over which the text properties are applied; Uppercase sets all of the characters in uppercase letters; Small Caps sets the characters as capital letters and applies the alternate size defined for the paragraph or paragraph tag over which the text properties are applied. To change the alternate size, click format Paragraph Properties or Paragraph Tag Properties, click the Font tab, click the Settings button, and type a value in the Font Size box in the Alternate Size section of the dialog box.


Tools, Options, Customize dialog box


Customize


Displays a list of the available toolbars. A check mark beside a toolbar indicates an active toolbar.


Use the Button slider to resize the toolbar buttons.


Use the Border slider to resize the button borders.


Enable to show titles on floating toolbars.


Enable to show text below bitmap images on toolbar buttons.


Click to create a new toolbar. The new toolbar is added at the bottom of the list and a blinking cursor appears next to its check box so that you can type a name for it.


Use this button to reset the toolbar you have selected to its default configuration. When you select a custom toolbar that you have created yourself, use this button to delete it.


Displays the available commands. Double-click a command category to open it.


Shows the new keyboard combination that you want to assign to the command. If you need to make a correction, press the BACKSPACE key.

You can have up to four layers of keystrokes. For example, the key combination CTRL + ALT + 1, 2, 3, 4 is accomplished by holding down the CTRL and ALT keys, then pressing the 1, 2, 3, and 4 keys in succession.


Displays any commands assigned to the keyboard combination you typed. You cannot have the same combination for more than one command.


 Enable to delete conflicting shortcut key.


 Enable to highlight the command which no longer has a keyboard shortcut. You will then be prompted to enter a new shortcut in the Press New Shortcut Key box.


Displays any existing shortcut keys for the current command.


The name of the current keyboard assignment set.


Gives a short description of the selected shortcut.


Assigns the new keyboard combination to the current command.


Deletes the selected shortcut keys.


Resets the keyboard assignments to their original configuration.


Displays the commands, table assignment, key stroke combination and description associated with each shortcut key.


View All


Displays the list of available shortcut keys and their names. The current workspace is also displayed.


Opens the Save As dialog box which allows you to save your keyboard shortcuts as a text file.


Click this button to access the Keyboard Shortcuts dialog box, which lets you save your keyboard shortcuts as a text file or print them directly to your printer.


Closes this dialog without saving any attributes.


Adds the selected command to the menu.


Removes the selected command from the menu.


Adds a separating line to a menu below the current selection.


Adds a new menu.


Moves the current menu or menu entry up.


Moves the current menu or menu entry down.


Displays the current menu structure. Double-click a menu or submenu to open it.


Gives a short description of the selected command.


Resets the menu assignments to their original configuration.


Displays the command buttons for the current command category. Click a button to see its description, or drag it to add it to any toolbar on the screen.


Choose the Property Bar you want to customize from this list box. Drag the appropriate toolbar item icon to the Property Bar on your screen to add it to that Property Bar.


Gives a short description of the selected toolbar command.


Toggles between wide and narrow color swatch borders.


Toggles between large and small color swatches.


Shows and hides the No Color swatch.


Specifies the number of rows of colors to be displayed while the Color Palette is docked.


Changes the effect of right-clicking a color swatch on the palette.


Holding down the right mouse button for one second on the Color Palette, display a pop-up menu.


Displays the Roll-Ups and Roll-Up groups that arrange to the left side of the screen.


Displays the Roll-Ups and Roll-Up groups that arrange to the right side of the screen.


Moves the current Roll-Up or Roll-Up group from the right list to the left list.


Moves the current Roll-Up or Roll-Up group from the left list to the right list.


Adds a new, empty Roll-Up group to the left list.


Displays the name of the Roll-Up configuration that will appear on start up.


Allows you to change toolbar buttons so that text appears instead of bitmaps.


The text that appears in this box will now appear in the toolbar instead of the bitmap. Or, you can change the text to anything you like.


Allows you to change the bitmaps that appear in toolbar buttons. Use the controls shown to change the appearance of the bitmap.


Allows you to change the bitmap as displayed in the Preview window. Click one of the color swatches shown in the Color Palette, then click inside the Preview Window with the left mouse button.


Displays the four colors that are used in the creation of a typical button: dark gray (for shadows), white (for highlights), light gray (for the face), and black (for the text).

Click one of the color swatches shown, then click inside the Preview window with the left mouse button.


Click a color in either of the color palettes, then click inside the Preview window with the left mouse button in the grid to fill squares, or click with the right mouse button in the grid to erase squares.


Shows a preview of what the button will look like in its three states. The first example is how the button will appear on the toolbar when it is available. The second option shows how the button will appear when it is not available. And, the third option shows how the button will appear when it is depressed.


Click the Restore Defaults button to reverse all changes that you have made to the button.


What's New


On-screen look and feel


Corel VENTURA now includes even more leading-edge technology that's easier to use. You can organize on-screen features into personal workspaces, and control almost every aspect of your screen's appearance and functionality. Docking dialog boxes streamline your favorite tools into a single, interactive window, while a new "flat look" gives all toolbars and dialog boxes a cleaner, sharper appearance.


A "flat look" updates on-screen elements, such as buttons, with a fresh, uncluttered appearance.


With Corel VENTURA 8, you can create different workspace environments for different purposes. You can then save Workspaces and apply them when you require.


Docking dialogs streamline many frequently used dialog boxes. You can dock these dialog boxes to the side of the Publication Window, or float them anywhere above the active publication.


Corel VENTURA 8 includes several powerful customization features that let you create your own unique workspaces and maximize your productivity by placing the menus and commands you use most often at the location of your choice. You can customize the keyboard shortcut keys, menus, toolbars, and Status Bar by changing their appearance, placement on screen, and more. You can also customize your import/export filters and file associations.


Productivity and performance


Corel VENTURA improves your productivity and performance by enhancing many time-saving features. Context-sensitive drag helps you perform many common procedures quickly. Eliminate spelling and common typing errors with the Interactive Spell Checker. You’ll also find that Corel VENTURA has extensive, customizable keyboard accelerator support.


The context-sensitive drag feature simplifies many procedures by letting you drag an item using the right mouse button. For instance, you can now click a frame with the right mouse button, drag it to text, and anchor the frame. You can click selected text with the right mouse button, drag it to a frame, and add it as a caption. You can also click selected text with the right mouse button, drag it to text, and apply the tag of the text you dragged to the stationary text.


To make tasks quicker and easier to perform, Corel VENTURA has an extensive list of keyboard accelerator keys. While many conventional keyboard accelerators, such as CTRL+C and CTRL+V, are implemented, a unique set of keyboard accelerators is included to maximize the full capabilities of Corel VENTURA.


Corel VENTURA 8 lets you control the horizontal and vertical resolution of a picture. By changing these settings you can increase the speed with which a picture opens and displays on redraw.


Spell Checker helps you ensure that your publications are error-free by checking your work for spelling and common typing errors. You can customize Spell Checker to check your entire publication or to check a range of text, or a single word, that you select. You can also check for duplicated words and irregular capitalization. When Spell Checker comes across a misspelled word, it offers you a list of alternate spelling suggestions and gives you the option of manually correcting the word yourself.


Graphics Capability


Corel VENTURA 8 includes new functionality that makes editing pictures and working with special effects easier and faster. Your collection of special effects filters can be expanded by installing third-party plug-ins. You'll find sharing pictures between applications much easier now that you can export picture file formats. You also have the ability to create a greater range of graphic objects because you can combine several objects to create one object.


Corel VENTURA lets you install special effect filters, called plug-ins, that are produced by third party companies. You can initialize third-party plug-in filters at start-up so that they are immediately available. If you do not initialize these filters at start-up, they are automatically initialized the first time you access the Format, Bitmap menu.


You can import and edit vectors directly in Corel VENTURA. Enhanced functionality lets you edit your vectors with greater speed and gives you the option of exporting your vectors as either vectors or bitmaps.


To make sharing pictures between applications simpler, Corel VENTURA now lets you export a wide variety of picture file formats, including CorelDRAW (CMX), Corel PHOTO-PAINT (CPT), Adobe Illustrator (AI), Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPG), Tagged Image File Format (TIFF), and AutoCAD Drawing (DXF). This means that you can manipulate a bitmap or vector in Corel VENTURA and then export the edited picture to use in a document you are working on in another application.


Corel VENTURA now lets you fuse multiple objects, such as curves, lines, or graphic objects, to create a completely new shape. The object that is produced is a curve object.

If the original objects overlap, the overlapping areas are removed to create clipping holes that allow you to see what's underneath. If the objects don't overlap, they still become part of a single object but maintain their spatial separation.


Corel VENTURA 8 has an expanded collection of bitmap effects that allow you to manipulate your pictures to create almost any effect.


Integration


Tighter integration between Corel VENTURA and other Corel applications and utilities enhances the functionality and ease of use of Corel VENTURA. You can access Corel PHOTO-PAINT, CorelDRAW, and Corel WordPerfect (or another word processing application) directly from Corel VENTURA using new right-click functionality. Many of the writing tools in Corel WordPerfect, such as the interactive Spell Checker and Grammatik, have also been incorporated into Corel VENTURA.


New right-click functionality allows you to access other Corel applications directly from Corel VENTURA and edit publication components in these applications. Bitmaps can be edited in Corel PHOTO-PAINT, vectors can be edited in CorelDRAW, and text can be edited in Corel WordPerfect (or another word processing application).


Improved menu and dialog box organization makes Corel VENTURA 8 more intuitive, which means that creating a publication is easier for new users and more efficient for existing users. The menu and dialog structure is consistent with that of other Corel applications, such as Corel PHOTO-PAINT, which helps you move between applications with ease.


New writing tools, including the interactive Spell Checker, Grammatik, thesaurus, and hyphenation features, help you create error-free publications. While Spell Checker looks for spelling errors, Grammatik checks for grammar errors using customizable grammatical rules.


Internet Features


When you want to create a publication for the World Wide Web, Corel VENTURA helps you convert your publication quickly. You can convert and publish your publication with the click of a button using the default settings or you can fully customize the conversion.

Corel VENTURA also offers support for .GIF and .JPG files, and for the relatively new PNG file format. Improved 8-bit support reduces your image file size and ensures optimum quality. The GIF animation file format gives you added control when importing and exporting.


Corel VENTURA 8 lets you customize the frames in your HTML document. You choose the number of frames to include and you define the frame attributes. You can also specify the contents of each frame.


Corel Barista is a Java-based publishing technology that lets you use Corel VENTURA to publish Web documents in the Java Programming Language. Corel Barista also supports HTML features like hyperlinks, pictures, tables, and multicolumn WYSIWYG (What You See Is What You Get) documents.


When you link a Cascading Style Sheet to an HTML document, the document uses the Cascading Style Sheet to define its style formatting. You choose which Cascading Style Sheet to apply to the HTML document and what portion of the document uses the Cascading Style Sheet. You also have the ability to modify the Cascading Style Sheet by editing it in a text editor.


Hyperlinks let you create links within your publication to other publications on the World Wide Web, or to another part of the same publication. Using hyperlinks, you can give your users access to a range of additional information that is applicable to your publication.


Corel VENTURA now supports Internet protocols for Internet URLs, Email addresses, Files, and Chapters.


When you publish to HTML, typeset equations are now converted to JPG file format.


Color and Printing


Choosing colors and printing your work is faster, easier, and more accurate using the new color and printing features. New color-management features ensure that the colors you choose are displayed and printed correctly, and PostScript 3 support enhances the final printed publication.


The printing interface is streamlined and printing options are more accessible. You can now manipulate Signature Layout styles and N-up formats directly in the Print Preview window. The Print Preview window also includes a property bar that provides easy access to the available print options. This property bar makes tasks such as adding and moving printers' marks much simpler.


Corel VENTURA 8 lets you convert a bitmap to a different color mode. This gives you control over how the bitmap is displayed and printed, and over the bitmap's file size.


You can now print PostScript documents using PostScript 3. Linear fountain fills are rendered at the printing device's resolution which improves the image's quality and printing time. PostScript 3 also handles complex objects efficiently without causing errors or reducing quality.


You can now simulate the output of a color separations printer on a composite printer. FOCOLTONE, TOYO, and DIC colors can now be treated as spot colors. You can also create your own custom spot colors using user-defined inks.


Color correction adjusts your on-screen colors so that they are displayed as accurately as possible. If you color correct display colors only, the on-screen colors are adjusted according to your monitor's color profile. If you also display simulated printer colors, the on-screen colors are adjusted according to your monitor's color profile and your printer's color profile. The color matching mode determines how colors are adjusted when corrections are necessary.


Getting started


Overview: Getting started
Getting started

Corel VENTURA is a desktop publishing program that you can use to create any type of publication. Whether you use it to produce memos, multichapter books, or your own home page on the Internet, Corel VENTURA has the tools and power you need to get the job done quickly. Corel VENTURA lets you produce professional looking publications within a structured and manageable environment. Its customizable interface is easy to use, and its advanced tools simplify the publishing process.

The Getting Started chapter tells you how to perform basic operations in Corel VENTURA. Everything from creating and saving a publication to using VENTURA Library files and VENTURA Navigator is described.

The Corel VENTURA tutorial

The Corel VENTURA tutorial teaches you how to use the tools and commands of Corel VENTURA. For example, the tutorial teaches you how to

•	open, save, and close a publication

•	work with text

•	structure a publication

•	use Artistic text

•	create graphic objects

•	apply bitmap effects

•	publish as HTML

•	create tables

To access the Corel VENTURA tutorial, click Help, Tutorial.

 More Detailed Information


Understanding the components of a publication


Overview: Understanding the components of a publication
Understanding the components of a publication

Each Corel VENTURA 8 publication consists of a stylesheet and one or more chapters.

Click each part of the following picture to learn about the components of a Corel VENTURA 8 publication.

Publication

A publication is a file with a .VP extension. It consists of two major components [image] a stylesheet that specifies page layout information and one or more chapters that contain text, pictures, and graphic objects.

Stylesheet

The stylesheet contains information that determines the layout of the publication. This information is organized into tags that contain the attributes that are applied to pages, paragraphs, characters, frames, and rules. You can change the layout of your publication by changing any of the attribute settings in a stylesheet or by loading a different stylesheet.

Each Corel VENTURA 8 publication contains only one stylesheet. In Corel VENTURA 5 and earlier versions, stylesheets were associated with chapters, and a publication could contain several stylesheets. Multiple stylesheets are no longer necessary in a publication since you can apply different page tags within a publication. When you import a publication from an earlier version of Corel VENTURA with more than one stylesheet, you will be given the option of merging multiple stylesheets or selecting one of the available stylesheets.

Page tags

Page tags let you define a page's layout, for example, you can define page size and orientation, headers and footers, and repeating frames. You can then apply that layout to any page in your publication by applying the page tag. Every publication includes at least one page tag, and you can create as many page tags as you need. In previous versions of Corel VENTURA, page tags were referred to as Master Pages.

Paragraph tags

Paragraph tags include information about the text properties that apply to a paragraph. The text properties include font, alignment, and spacing. When you change the text properties for a paragraph tag, the changes are applied to all paragraphs that share the tag. Every publication includes at least one paragraph tag, and you can create as many paragraph tags as you need.

Character tags

Character tags include text attributes that you can apply to selected text. You can use character tags to format any characters in your publication without affecting any other text.

Frame tags

Frame tags contain information about frame properties, including size, shape, and position. When you apply a frame tag to a frame, the properties contained in the tag are applied to the frame. If you change the settings for a frame tag, all frames that share the tag change. Every publication includes at least one frame tag, and you can create as many frame tags as you need.

Rule tags

Rule tags contain information about ruling lines. A rule tag can be applied to a page, paragraph, frame, or table cell. Properties for rules include location, size, thickness, and color.

Internal scripts

Scripts, sometimes called macros, are computer programs which have been recorded or written using the Corel SCRIPT programming language. Scripts can automate repetitive tasks for you. An internal script is embedded into a publication's stylesheet and can only be executed or edited if a publication that uses that stylesheet is open and active. For more information about scripting, see "Recordings and scripts."

Chapter

A chapter is the component of a publication that holds the text, graphic objects, and pictures. A publication must contain at least one chapter, and you can add as many chapters as you need.

Text

Text can be typed directly into Corel VENTURA or imported from text editors or word processing applications.

Graphic objects

Graphic objects are any objects created with the Corel VENTURA drawing tools.

Pictures

Pictures are graphic images, such as bitmaps or vectors that are imported into a VENTURA publication. They can be embedded in your publication or referenced as external files.

 Related Topics


The Corel VENTURA 8 welcome screen


Overview: The Corel VENTURA 8 welcome screen
The Corel VENTURA 8 welcome screen

The Corel VENTURA welcome screen automatically opens when you launch Corel VENTURA. The welcome screen lets you choose what you want to do in a session. For example, you can choose to start a new publication or to open the last publication you worked with in Corel VENTURA.

 Related Topics


Using the Corel VENTURA welcome screen

You can disable the Corel VENTURA welcome screen if you don't want it to display when you launch Corel VENTURA.

To choose a welcome screen option

•	Click the icon that corresponds to the option you want to choose.

To disable the welcome screen

•	Disable the Show This Welcome Screen At Startup check box.

 Related Topics


Setting what Corel VENTURA opens on startup

The Options dialog box lets you set what Corel VENTURA opens each time it starts.

To set what Corel VENTURA opens on startup

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, click General.

3.	Choose one of the following from the On Corel VENTURA Start-Up list box:

•	Welcome Screen [image] to open the Corel VENTURA welcome screen giving you access the many start-up options

•	None [image] to launch Corel VENTURA only

•	Start A New Publication [image] to open a new publication using the default template

•	Open An Existing Publication [image] to open the Open dialog box

•	Open The Last Edited Publication [image] to open the last publication you had open

•	Select A Template [image] to open the New From Template dialog box

•	Start Corel VENTURA Tutorial [image] to start the Corel VENTURA tutorial

 Note

•	You can also control what Corel VENTURA does when it launches by using start-up switches. For more information, see "Start-up switches for Corel VENTURA."

 Related Topics


Creating and opening publications


Overview: Creating and opening publications
Creating and opening publications

Every publication you create is based on a template. In Corel VENTURA, a template is a shell that consists of publication elements such as chapters, a stylesheet, frames, text, pictures, and graphic objects. This shell provides the layout for your publication, and you provide the content.

•	You can open publications that were created in Corel VENTURA 7 and Corel VENTURA 8, or you can use a script (7to8Converter.CSC) to open publications created in Corel VENTURA 7. For more information about scripts, see "Recordings and scripts." For more information about scripts included with Corel VENTURA, see "Scripts and wizards included with Corel VENTURA." You can also open documents that were not originally created in Corel VENTURA.

Using templates

A template is a preset layout that forms the basis for a publication. Each time you click File, New, a new Corel VENTURA publication is created based on the DEFAULT.VP template. You can use the template as is, or you can change the settings as you format your publication. You can even change the default template so that each time you create a new publication, your settings are used. For example, if you always use a landscape page layout, you can edit the default template so that each time you click File, New, a new publication is created with a landscape layout.

Templates save you time, especially when you are creating publications such as newsletters and magazines that often use the same layout from one issue to the next. When you create a new publication from a template, the stylesheet, which contains the tags used in the template, publication properties, formatting, and layout, such as text flow and frame positions, are applied to your new publication. You can also choose which chapters, text files, and picture files you want included from the template.

To help you get started with page layout in Corel VENTURA, many professionally designed templates are included. You can find samples of these templates in the last chapter of the Corel VENTURA User Guide.

As the following picture shows, templates make creating a publication easier by providing you with the layout for your publication.

 Related Topics


Creating a new publication using the default template

The default template is created the first time you open Corel VENTURA.

To create a new publication using the default template

•	Click File, New.

 Notes

•	The DEFAULT.VP template is stored in the X:\COREL\GRAPHICS8\VENTURA\SAMPLES folder, where "X" indicates the drive where you installed Corel VENTURA.

•	The initial measurement settings for DEFAULT.VP are determined by the Measurement System setting in the Regional Settings of the Windows Control Panel. If your computer is set to Metric, the DEFAULT.VP template is an A4 page and the units are set in millimeters. If your computer is set to U.S., the DEFAULT.VP template is 8.5 X 11 inch page. For information about changing the template, see "Editing and restoring the default template." For information about setting measurement units in Corel VENTURA, see "Changing the unit of measurement options."

 Related Topics


Creating a new publication using a sample template

Corel VENTURA includes many sample templates that you can use. The samples are contained in the X:\COREL\GRAPHICS8\VENTURA\SAMPLES folder, where "X" indicates the drive where you installed Corel VENTURA.

To create a publication using a sample template

1.	Click File, New From Template.

2.	Click the Open Copy button.

3.	Click the tab that contains the sample publication you want to use as a template.

4.	Double-click the sample publication.

 Note

•	Additional sample templates are available on the Corel VENTURA installation CD-ROM in the X:\VENTURA\SAMPLES folder, where "X" indicates your CD-ROM drive.

 Related Topics


Creating a new publication using another publication as a template

Any Corel VENTURA publication can be used as a template. A template includes the stylesheet, and can include any chapters and text or picture files used in the template publication. By default, all chapter and component files of the template are included in the new publication. If there are components you do not want to use, you can remove them when you open the publication as a template. If you enable all of the check boxes, a complete copy of the entire source publication is created.

To create a publication using another publication as a template

1.	Click File, New From Template.

2.	Click the Create Template button.

3.	Do one of the following:

•	Click the Browse button, and open the publication you want to use as a template.

•	Click the tab that contains the sample publication you want to use as a template, and open the sample publication.

4.	Click the plus sign ( [image]) to display the contents of each chapter.

5.	Enable the check boxes for the items you want to include in the new publication.

You must select at least one chapter to open as a template, but you do not have to select any of the chapter's contents.

 Notes

•	When you use an existing publication as a template for a new publication, at least one chapter has to be selected in the existing publication.

•	A working copy of a Multiuser publication that was created by another user cannot be opened as a template. For example, if two users have access to the same computer or files, both have unique usernames, and the first has created a working copy of a Multiuser publication, the second user will not be able to open the working copy of the Multiuser publication as a template. The second user must create their own working copy to use as a template. For more information about Multiuser publications, see "Multiuser publishing."

 Related Topics


Editing and restoring the default template

Each new Corel VENTURA publication that is created when you click File, New, is based on the DEFAULT.VP template file. Some of the settings available in the default template include page size, margins, and the language used by the paragraph tags. Most of the settings are available in the Publication Properties and the Chapter Properties dialog boxes. The following procedure explains how to change the page size and orientation for the DEFAULT.VP template file.

You can also restore the default template to its original settings.

To edit the default page size and orientation

1.	Click File, New.

2.	Click View, Page Layout.

3.	Click Page, Page Tag Properties, and click the Layout tab.

4.	In the Page Size section, do any of the following:

•	Choose a preset page size from the list box.

•	Type values in the Width and Height boxes.

5.	To set the orientation, click one of the following buttons:

•	Portrait [image] sets the height of the page greater than the width

•	Landscape [image] sets the width of the page greater than the height

6.	Click File, Save As.

7.	Choose the X:\COREL\GRAPHICS8\VENTURA\SAMPLES folder from the Save In list box, where "X" indicates the drive where you installed Corel VENTURA.

8.	Type DEFAULT.VP in the Filename box.

9.	Click the Save button.

To restore the default template

1.	Close Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, click Save.

3.	Click the Reset Default Template button.

To manually restore the default template

1.	Close Corel VENTURA.

2.	Click the Start button on the Windows Taskbar.

3.	Click Find, Files Or Folders.

4.	Type DEFAULT.VP in the Named list box.

5.	Choose the drive where you installed Corel VENTURA from the Look In list box.

6.	Click the Find Now button.

7.	When the search is finished, right-click DEFAULT.VP, and click Delete.

8.	Restart Corel VENTURA.

 Notes

•	The initial settings for the DEFAULT.VP template are created when you first open Corel VENTURA. If you delete the file, a new one is created the next time you open Corel VENTURA. If you create a new DEFAULT.VP template, each new publication you create using the File, New command will be based on the new DEFAULT.VP template.

•	You can also change the language used by the default paragraph tags that are used by the DEFAULT.VP template. For more information, see "Changing the language for the default template."

 Related Topics


Opening Corel VENTURA 7 and 8 publications

Corel VENTURA 8 can open publications that were created in a previous session or in Corel VENTURA 7. However, if you open a Corel VENTURA 7 publication in Corel VENTURA 8, and then save over the Corel VENTURA 7 version, you cannot re-open the publication in Corel VENTURA 7. You also lose any links you created to a VENTURA Library file in Corel VENTURA 7. If you do not save the Corel VENTURA 8 version of the publication over the Corel VENTURA 7 version, you can still open the publication in Corel VENTURA 7, and the links to the VENTURA Library files will still work in Corel VENTURA 7. For more information about libraries, see "Using VENTURA Library files."

To open a Corel VENTURA 8 publication

1.	Click File, Open.

2.	Choose the drive where the publication is stored from the Look In list box.

3.	Double-click the folder where the publication is stored.

4.	Double-click the publication name.

To open a publication created in Corel VENTURA 7

1.	Click File, Open.

2.	Choose the drive where the publication is stored from the Look In list box.

3.	Double-click the folder where the publication is stored.

4.	Double-click the publication name.

 Tip

•	You can enable the Hide All Pictures check box in the Open dialog box, if you want to open a publication without displaying its pictures.

 Note

•	If you want to open multiple Corel VENTURA 7 and Corel VENTURA 8 publications, a conversion script (7to8Converter.CSC) will help you do so. For more information about scripts, see "Recordings and scripts." For more information about scripts included with Corel VENTURA, see "Scripts and wizards included with Corel VENTURA."

 Related Topics


Opening pre-Corel VENTURA 7 publications

You can open publications created in earlier versions of Corel VENTURA and VENTURA Publisher from as far back as VENTURA 3. A conversion wizard helps you convert publications that were created in the earlier versions of Corel VENTURA and VENTURA. The wizard only appears with publications that have multiple stylesheets.

If you want to convert multiple publications that were created in earlier versions, a conversion script (VCONVERT.CSC) helps you do so. The script will only work on publications that were created in Corel VENTURA 5 or in an earlier version.

To convert a Corel VENTURA 5 publication

1.	Click File, Open.

2.	Choose *.PUB from the Files Of Type list box.

3.	Choose the drive where the publication is stored from the Look In list box.

4.	Double-click the folder where the publication is stored.

5.	Click the publication name.

6.	Type a name for the publication in the File Name box.

7.	Click Open.

If the publication used more than one stylesheet, the Convert Previous Version Styles wizard opens. The wizard guides you through the rest of the process.

To convert a pre-Corel VENTURA 5 publication

1.	Click File, Open.

2.	Choose *.CHP from the Files Of Type list box.

3.	Choose the drive where the publication is stored from the Look In list box.

4.	Double-click the folder where the publication is stored.

5.	Click the publication name.

6.	Type a name for the publication in the File Name box.

7.	Click Open.

 Tip

•	When you convert publications that contain pictures, you can set whether the pictures are embedded or kept external. For more information, see "Default settings for importing pictures."

 Related Topics


Opening documents that were not created in Corel VENTURA

You can open documents that were not created in Corel VENTURA as if they were publications. These documents include plain text, word processing, and desktop publishing files. For example, you can open Corel WordPerfect, Microsoft Word, and Rich Text Format (RTF) file formats in Corel VENTURA.

The advantages of opening a document (rather than importing text) is that the many of the formatting attributes in the original document such as page size, margins, font properties, bullets, and underlining are preserved. Some of the features not supported include:

•	embedded pictures

•	hidden text

•	interline spacing

•	kerning

•	macros

•	multiple page layouts (the first one in the document is used throughout)

•	OLE objects

Corel VENTURA lets you control how paragraph styles used in text file documents such as Corel WordPerfect or Microsoft Word are treated when opened. You can choose to keep overridden properties in the imported styles, or you can choose to create new paragraph tags based on paragraphs with overridden properties. By allowing Corel VENTURA to create new paragraph tags, a new paragraph tag will be created for each paragraph style with overridden properties, and you can significantly reduce the size of the Corel VENTURA publication when it is saved.

See "Importing and exporting text" for more information about importing text files. For more information about the file types you can open, and how Corel VENTURA treats different file formats, see "Imported text file formats" in the online Help reference section.

To open a document created in another application

1.	Click File, Open.

2.	Choose the drive where the document is stored from the Look In list box.

3.	Double-click the folder where the document is stored.

4.	Choose the file format you want to open from the Files Of Type list box:

•	All Files [image] displays files of all types

5.	Double-click the document name.

 Notes

•	Spreadsheet files such as Corel Quattro Pro, Microsoft Excel, and Lotus 1-2-3 are opened as Corel VENTURA tables.

•	The All Files option, in the Files of Type list box, displays all of the files in a folder, regardless of each file's type.

•	For tips on opening documents not created in Corel VENTURA, see "Tips on importing and exporting text."

To set how Corel VENTURA treats overridden paragraph styles when opening documents

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, click Save.

3.	Do one of the following:

•	Enable the Create Tags From Paragraph Overrides On Import And Open check box to create new tags for imported paragraph styles with overridden properties.

•	Disable the Create Tags From Paragraph Overrides On Import And Open check box to maintain overridden paragraph tag properties.

 Note

•	It is strongly recommended that you enable the Create Tags From Paragraph Overrides On Import And Open check box as it will significantly decrease the size of a Corel VENTURA publication. This setting applies to your Corel VENTURA workspace. This setting does not effect text files which use Corel VENTURA markup code.

 Related Topics


Saving and backing up publications


Overview: Saving and backing up publications
Saving and backing up publications

As you create and edit publications, remember to save your files. If the publication has already been saved, use the Save command to update the file under its existing filename. If you are saving a publication for the first time, use the Save As command to assign a new filename and a storage location.

The Auto Backup feature lets you automatically save your publications as you work on them. You set the time interval between backups. Even with the Auto Backup feature enabled, you still have to save your publications when you close them.

The Backup On Save feature keeps a copy of the last saved version of your publication in the same folder as the original publication. The Backup On Save feature ensures that you always have the most recent and the second-most recent versions of your publication available.

 Related Topics


Saving a publication

When you save a publication for the first time, you assign it a name and choose a folder in which to store it. Corel VENTURA also provides Auto Backup and Backup On Save features. For more information about these features, see "Using the Auto Backup feature" and "Making a backup copy when you save."

To save a publication for the first time

1.	Click File, Save.

2.	Choose the drive where you want to store the publication from the Save In list box.

3.	Double-click the folder where you want to save the publication.

4.	Type a name for the publication in the File Name text box.

5.	Click Save.

To save an existing publication

•	Click File, Save.

To save a publication to a new location or with a new name

1.	Click File, Save As.

2.	Choose the drive where you want to store the publication from the Save In list box.

3.	Double-click the folder where you want to save the publication.

4.	Type a name for the publication in the File Name text box.

5.	Click Save.

 Note

•	If you don't want to save the changes you've made since you last saved, you can click File, Revert to return to the last saved version of your publication.

•	The Save As command also compresses a publication's file size.

 Related Topics


Using the Auto Backup feature

With Auto Backup enabled, open publications are saved automatically as you work on them. If the publication is closed normally, the Auto Backup copy is deleted. If the program stops unexpectedly, you will be prompted to open the Auto Backup copy the next time you open Corel VENTURA.

To enable the Auto Backup feature

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, click Save.

3.	Enable the Auto Backup Every check box.

4.	In the Minutes box, type the interval at which you want Corel VENTURA to save publications.

 Note

•	Auto Backup files are saved in the Windows TEMP folder.

•	If you use the Auto Backup feature with a multiuser publication, the backup publication is based on your working copy and loses its multiuser properties. It will only work on your computer. If you want to apply the changes in the backup publication to the multiuser publication, you must cut and paste the appropriate sections.

 Related Topics


Making a backup copy when you save

By default, a backup copy of a publication is saved to the same folder as the publication and is named "Backup of [publication name].$VP". You can open the backup in the same way as you open other publications. Before you can open the file, you need to choose Corel VENTURA Backup ($VP) from the Files Of Type list box. For information about opening publications, see "Opening Corel VENTURA 7 and 8 publications."

To make a backup copy automatically when you save

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, click Save.

3.	Enable the Make Backup On Save check box.

The Make Backup On Save check box is enabled by default.

 Tip

•	Disable the Make Backup On Save check box to prevent the creation of a backup copy.

 Related Topics


Using publication statistics, notes, and keywords

When you open a publication to which you've added notes and keywords, the information you specified when you saved the publication appears in the Open dialog box. The information also appears in Windows Explorer if you right-click the filename, click Properties, and click the Summary tab. You can also view statistical information for your publication in Windows Explorer. The publication must be closed in order to view information in Windows Explorer. The statistical information includes

•	the dates on which the publication was created, modified, accessed, and printed

•	the user who last saved the publication

•	the revision number of the publication

•	the total time spent editing the publication

To add notes to a file

1.	Click File, Save As.

2.	Type the information you want to record about the file in the Notes box.

3.	Click Save.

To assign keywords to your files

1.	Click File, Save As.

2.	Type the keywords you want to assign to the file in the Keywords box.

If you want to add more than one keyword, separate each keyword with a comma.

3.	Click Save.

 Tip

•	If you want to add notes or keywords to a previously saved file, you must click File, Save As to access the Notes or Keywords box. Clicking File, Save will not allow you to access these boxes.

To view publication information

1.	Click File, Publication Info

2.	Enable the check box beside any of the following to view the information for that category

•	File

•	Publication

•	Fonts

 Tips

•	You can print publication information by clicking the Print button

•	You can save publication information by clicking the Save As button.

To view publication statistics in Windows Explorer

1.	In Windows Explorer, right-click the publication name, and click Properties.

2.	Click the Statistics tab.

 Note

•	The publication must be closed in order to view statistics.

 Related Topics


Closing and exiting Corel VENTURA


Overview: Closing and exiting Corel VENTURA
Closing and exiting Corel VENTURA

You can close the active publication and still keep Corel VENTURA open, or you can use the Exit command to close both the active publication and Corel VENTURA.

 Related Topics


Closing and exiting Corel VENTURA

The Close command closes the active publication but leaves Corel VENTURA open. The Close All command closes all of the publications you have open and leaves Corel VENTURA open. The Exit command closes Corel VENTURA along with all of the publications you have open.

To close a publication

•	Click File, Close.

 Tip

•	You can also close a publication by clicking Window, Close.

To close all open windows

•	Click Window, Close All.

To exit Corel VENTURA

•	Click File, Exit.

 Note

•	You are prompted to save modified publications when closing or exiting.


Viewing your publication


Overview: Viewing your publication
Viewing your publication

Corel VENTURA offers a number of ways to view your publication. Each view has different features and is best suited for particular types of information and work. You can display multiple publications at the same time in any of these views.

Page Layout view

In Page Layout view, what you see is what you get (WYSIWYG) [image] your publication pages display in the same way that they will print, with all of the pictures and formatting visible. However, if you hide your pictures, they will not display on screen but will still appear on the page when you print your publication.

Page Layout is the best view to use when you are formatting and laying out publications.

Copy Editor view

You use the Copy Editor view to edit the active text file without viewing the formatting, tables, or pictures it contains. The left side of the Publication Window shows the Corel VENTURA markup code that has been applied to each section of your text. You can make changes to the tag properties by applying different tags or by modifying the attributes of specific tags.

In Copy Editor view, codes for attributes (bold, italics, and underlines) and special items (index entries, frame anchors, and cross-references) appear enclosed in boxes wherever they are inserted in the text. These codes cannot be edited as text, but they can be deleted or hidden.

Corel VENTURA tags display on the left side of the Publication Window in Copy Editor view.

Page Tag view

Page Tag view displays the page-layout formatting that is applied to a page tag. Page size and orientation, margins and columns, grid settings and guidelines, headers and footers, page numbering, frames, and color are shown in Page Tag view. Any formatting you apply to page tags automatically applies to all pages that are based on that page tag.

Both the left and right pages display in Page Tag view.

Split-screen view

There are many options for viewing publications in split-screen view. You can view different parts of the same publication at one time, or the same part of the publication in different views. You can scroll through one part of a publication [image] the last page, for example [image] while maintaining a fixed view of another area, such as the first page. You can use a zoomed-in view in one window and a full-page view in another. When you view the same part of a publication in different windows, each window display updates as you work.

Split-screen view lets you look at different parts of a publication at the same time.

About the Zoom tools

The Zoom tools allow you to increase or decrease the on-screen size of your publication without affecting its actual size. The Zoom In tool magnifies the publication; the Zoom Out tool makes the publication smaller. For more information about Zoom tools, see "Changing the zoom level."

Setting viewing options

Corel VENTURA allows you to customize the way you view your publications. For example, you can choose to hide or display pictures and nonprinting items. You can also refresh the screen and you can control picture display settings. For more information about viewing options, see "Setting the view preferences."

 Related Topics


Switching views

Corel VENTURA provides four different views [image] Copy Editor view, Page Layout view, Page Tag view, and split-screen view. When you are in split-screen view, you can display each split in a different view. For example, you can display one split in Copy Editor view and another split in Page Layout view.

The Splitter Bar is located below the upward scroll arrow in the top right corner of the publication window.

To switch to Copy Editor view

•	Click View, Copy Editor.

To switch to Page Layout view

•	Click View, Page Layout.

To switch to Page Tag view

•	Click View, Page Tag.

To switch to split-screen view

1.	Click Window, Split.

2.	Drag the Splitter Bar and click where you want the split located.

To close split-screen view

•	Double-click the Splitter Bar.

 Tips

•	Click the Copy Editor View button on the Status Bar to open the Copy Editor view.

•	Click the Page Layout View button on the Status Bar to open the Page Layout view.

•	Click the Page Tag View button on the Status Bar to open the Page Tag view.

•	You can also drag the Splitter Bar from the top of the scroll bar and click where you want to split the view, or you can double-click the Splitter Bar to split the window in half.

 Related Topics


Customizing Copy Editor view

You can customize Copy Editor view so that the markup codes and spaces do not display. When the markup codes are displayed, you can modify the amount of screen space they occupy.

To hide the markup codes

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, click Copy Editor.

3.	Disable the Show Codes check box.

To hide space marker dots in Copy Editor view

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, click Copy Editor.

3.	Disable the Show Dots For Spaces check box.

To modify the amount of screen space markup codes occupy

•	Click and drag the slider to the right of the markup codes.

 Note

•	For more information, see "Changing the Copy Editor view options."

•	If you print in Copy Editor view, your publication prints exactly as it appears on screen.

 Related Topics


Viewing multiple publications at the same time

During a Corel VENTURA session, you can have multiple publications open at the same time. You can view these publications one at a time, or you can set the Publication Window to show all of the publications. If you tile the Publication Windows, you see them with no overlapping. If you cascade the Publication Windows, they overlap and you select the Publication Window you want to work in by clicking its Title Bar. The number of publications you can have open at the same time is determined by the memory capacity of your computer.

To cascade multiple Publication Windows

•	Click Window, Cascade.

To tile multiple Publication Windows horizontally

•	Click Window, Tile Horizontally.

To tile multiple Publication Windows vertically

•	Click Window, Tile Vertically.

To minimize Publication Windows

•	Click the Minimize button.

To arrange the icons of minimized Publication Windows

•	Click Window, Arrange Icons.

 Related Topics


Changing the zoom level

The Zoom tools let you set the portion of the Publication Window that you see at one time. You can use the Zoom tools on an entire page, multiple pages, or a selection.

The Zoom Tool flyout lets you choose from the following preset zoom levels:

•	Zoom In [image] magnifies a portion of the screen

•	Zoom Out [image] zooms out by a factor of two each time you click, or returns to the view you were in before the last zoom in

•	Zoom To Actual Size [image] displays the publication at the size at which it will print

•	Zoom To Page [image] displays the entire page

•	Magnify To Full Width [image] reduces or enlarges the display of the page so that it fits within the left and right edges of the Publication Window

•	Magnify To Full Height [image] reduces or enlarges the display of the page so that it fits within the top and bottom edges of the Publication Window

•	Facing Page Zoom [image] displays adjacent pages in a double-sided publication side by side

•	Zoom To Selected [image] zooms in on selected objects

You can also access the Pan tool and the Auto Scroll tool from the Zoom Tool flyout. For more information about the Pan tool, see "Using the Pan Tool." For more information on Auto Scroll, see "Using Auto Scroll."

To increase the zoom level

1.	Open the Zoom Tool flyout, and click the Zoom In button.

2.	Click the area of your publication you want to see in more detail.

To decrease the zoom level

•	Open the Zoom Tool flyout, and click the Zoom Out button.

To zoom to the publication's actual size

•	Open the Zoom Tool flyout, and click the Zoom To Actual Size button.

To zoom to the page

•	Open the Zoom Tool flyout, and click the Zoom To Page button.

To magnify to the page's full width

•	Open the Zoom Tool flyout, and click the Magnify To Full Width button.

To magnify to the page's full height

•	Open the Zoom Tool flyout, and click the Magnify To Full Height button.

To zoom to facing pages

•	Open the Zoom Tool flyout, and click the Facing Page Zoom button.

To zoom in on a selection

1.	Select the item you want to zoom in on.

2.	Open the Zoom Tool flyout, and click the Zoom To Selected button.

 Tip

•	If the cursor is planted, Zoom To Selected zooms to the cursor.

To select a preset zoom level

1.	Click View, Zoom.

2.	Enable the button beside the magnification level you want.

To select a custom zoom level

1.	Click View, Zoom.

2.	Type a custom zoom level in the Zoom Value box.

To view multiple pages

1.	Click View, Zoom.

2.	Type the number of pages you want to view in the Horizontal Pages box.

 Tips

•	Click the Magnify To Full Height button on the Status Bar to zoom to full height.

•	Click the Magnify To Full Width button on the Status Bar to zoom to full width.

•	Click the Zoom To Page button on the Status Bar to zoom to the page.

•	Click the Zoom To Multiple Pages button on the Status Bar to zoom to multiple pages.

 Related Topics


Hiding the pictures in your publication

Hiding the pictures in your publication can significantly decrease the time it takes to scroll through your publication. You can hide all the pictures in the publication or only selected pictures.

The picture's filename appears on hidden pictures. You can hide the filename by disabling the Label Hidden Pictures setting.

To hide or display all pictures

•	Click View, Hide All Pictures.

To hide or display a specific picture

1.	Place the cursor over the edge of the picture, and click to select it.

2.	Click View, Hide This Picture.

To hide the label on a hidden picture

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, click View.

3.	Disable the Label Hidden Pictures check box.

 Note

•	For more information about picture viewing options, see "Setting the view preferences."

 Related Topics


Hiding and displaying nonprinting items

Nonprinting items are items that appear onscreen but that are not printed. They include rulers, frame borders, the grid, guidelines, column guides, loose lines, tabs, and paragraph returns. You can choose to hide or display all nonprinting items, or you can hide or display the grid, guidelines, column guides, or frame borders individually. The Show Tabs & Returns button lets you hide or display tab symbols, paragraph returns, insert item indicators ( [image]), and end of file markers ( [image]).

To hide or display all nonprinting items

•	Click the Nonprinting Items button on the Standard toolbar.

To hide or display tabs, paragraph returns, and indicators

•	Click the Tabs & Returns button on the Standard toolbar.

To hide or display rulers

•	Click View, Rulers.

To hide or display the grid

•	Click View, Grid.

To hide or display guidelines

•	Click View, Guidelines.

To hide or display column guides

•	Click View, Column Guides.

To hide or display frame borders

•	Click View, Frame Borders.

 Related Topics


Refreshing the screen

The Interruptible Refresh option lets you stop a screen redraw. If you enable Interruptible Refresh, you can save time by interrupting the drawing of objects on screen.

The Refresh Window feature is particularly useful when you edit nodes. When you use the Node Edit tool, you need to refresh the screen in order to see the changes you make. You can manipulate several nodes and then refresh the screen, but all of the changes you made between each screen refresh are counted as one action. If you use the Undo command, all the actions between the two screen refreshes are undone.

To enable Interruptible Refresh

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, click View.

3.	In the Default View Settings section, enable the Interruptible Refresh check box.

To disable the Interruptible Refresh feature

1.	Click Tool, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, click View.

3.	In the Default View Settings section, disable the Interruptible Refresh check box.

To interrupt a screen refresh

•	Click anywhere in the publication window with the mouse.

To refresh the screen

•	Click the Refresh Window button on the Workspace toolbar.

 Tip

•	You can also refresh the screen by pressing CTRL + W.

•	You can also interrupt a screen refresh by pressing PAGE UP or PAGE DOWN.

 Related Topics


Controlling picture display settings for a publication

You can control the resolution and memory settings for all pictures in a publication using the Publication Properties dialog box. The resolution and memory size settings work in combination and they work best when they are increased or decreased together. These settings affect the way a picture appears on screen, but not how it appears when printed.

To use pictures at full resolution

1.	Click Publication, Publication Properties.

2.	Click the Picture Defaults tab.

3.	Choose Full Resolution from the Resolution list box.

 Tip

•	Using pictures at full resolution works best if picture memory size is set to Unlimited Memory Usage.

To set a limit for picture resolution

1.	Click Publication, Publication Properties.

2.	Click the Picture Defaults tab.

3.	Choose Limit Resolution To from the Resolution list box.

4.	Enable the Use Identical Values check box if you want the values in the Horizontal and Vertical boxes to be the same.

5.	Type the horizontal resolution in the Horizontal box.

6.	Type the vertical resolution in the Vertical box.

To set an unlimited memory size for pictures

1.	Click Publication, Publication Properties.

2.	Click the Picture Defaults tab.

3.	Choose Unlimited Memory Usage from the Memory list box.

To limit picture memory size

1.	Click Publication, Publication Properties.

2.	Click the Picture Defaults tab.

3.	Choose Limit Memory Usage To from the Memory list box.

4.	Type the size you want to limit memory size to in the KB box.

To use an optimized palette with pictures

1.	Click Publication, Publication Properties.

2.	Click the Picture Defaults tab.

3.	Enable the Generate Optimized Palette check box.

 Notes

•	You can also control picture settings for individual pictures. For more information, see "Controlling picture display settings for a frame."

•	For more information about picture viewing options, see "Setting the view preferences."

 Tip

•	If you change the default template, you can apply these settings to each publication you create by clicking File, New. For more information, see "Editing and restoring the default template."

 Related Topics


Using VENTURA Navigator


Overview: Using VENTURA Navigator
Using VENTURA Navigator

VENTURA Navigator gives you a quick way to move around your publications and to perform common procedures. Using VENTURA Navigator, you can open and import files, move within and between your publications, and maintain tables of contents and indexes.

The VENTURA Navigator is a very powerful tool for Corel VENTURA. For example, in Page Layout view, you can drag a file from the VENTURA Navigator to a page or frame. Or you can import a text or picture file by dragging it from Windows Explorer to a chapter in the VENTURA Navigator. This section of the documentation provides basic information about using VENTURA Navigator. Detailed information about VENTURA Navigator is available in other sections.

VENTURA Navigator has six display options, each of which is based on a multileveled tree structure that is similar to Windows Explorer. You can have up to five VENTURA Navigator windows open at the same time, each with a different display option showing.

The Publication Manager is the default display option that appears when you open VENTURA Navigator. The Publication Manager shows all open publications and allows you to rearrange publication components within and between these open publications. Most publication components can be cut, copied, or dragged and dropped between publications.

VENTURA Navigator option...	Displays...

Publication Manager	All open publications, as well as all the text files and pictures they contain

Table of contents	The table of contents file and all entries for each open publication

Index	The index file(s) and all index entries for each open publication

Markers/Cross-references	Cross-references and cross-reference markers contained in all open publications. VENTURA Navigator indicates which cross-references and markers are unresolved.

Page tags	The page tags in all open publications and the picture files they contain

Scripts	All externally saved scripts and all internal scripts for open publications. For more information about scripts, see "Internal and external scripts."

You can use VENTURA Navigator to view your publication. Below is a list of some Publication Manager icons displayed in the VENTURA Navigator window and what each indicates.

Icon	Indicates

An active publication

An open, but not active publication

A stylesheet

A chapter

An embedded text file

A linked text file

An embedded picture file

An external picture file

A missing external picture file

 Related Topics


Opening and closing the VENTURA Navigator window

You can have up to five VENTURA Navigator windows open at the same time. The VENTURA Navigator window opens in the same position and size as when you last closed it.

To display a VENTURA Navigator window

•	Click Tools, VENTURA Navigator.

To close a VENTURA Navigator window

•	Click the Close button at the top right of the VENTURA Navigator window.

 Tip

•	You can also open a VENTURA Navigator window by clicking the VENTURA Navigator button on the Standard toolbar.

 Related Topics


Moving and resizing the VENTURA Navigator window

You can make the VENTURA Navigator window almost any size you want. You resize both docked and undocked VENTURA Navigator windows in the same way. You can also dock, or attach, the VENTURA Navigator window to one of the sides of the Publication Window.

To resize the VENTURA Navigator window

1.	Position the cursor over an edge of the VENTURA Navigator window so that the cursor becomes an arrow.

2.	Drag the edge of the VENTURA Navigator window.

To move the VENTURA Navigator window

•	Click the VENTURA Navigator Title Bar, and drag the VENTURA Navigator window to the location you want.

To dock the VENTURA Navigator window

•	Double-click the VENTURA Navigator Title Bar.

 Tip

•	You can also dock the VENTURA Navigator window by dragging it to the side of the Publication Window that you want it docked to.

To move the position of the docked VENTURA Navigator window

•	Click the VENTURA Navigator Title Bar, and drag the VENTURA Navigator window to the new position.

To minimize or restore a docked VENTURA Navigator window

•	Click the Double-Arrow button in the VENTURA Navigator Title Bar.

To undock the VENTURA Navigator window

•	Double-click the VENTURA Navigator Title Bar

 Tip

•	You can also undock the VENTURA Navigator window by dragging it to the middle of the Publication Window.

 Related Topics


Changing display options in VENTURA Navigator

VENTURA Navigator supports six different display options, each of which show various types of information. For example, in Publication Manager you can see a listing of all of the Corel VENTURA publications you have open. The other display options show the publication's table of contents, index, markers/cross references, page tags, and scripts.

To change the view in the VENTURA Navigator window

1.	If the VENTURA Navigator window is not open, click Tools, VENTURA Navigator.

2.	Choose a new view from the VENTURA Navigator list box.

 Related Topics


Renaming files using VENTURA Navigator

Corel VENTURA automatically assigns names to the files in a Corel VENTURA publication. You can change these names to reflect the contents of the files in the VENTURA Navigator. However, you cannot change the names of linked, external, or export on save files.

To rename a file using VENTURA Navigator

1.	If VENTURA Navigator is not open, click Tools, VENTURA Navigator.

2.	Choose Publication Manager from the list box.

3.	Click the plus sign (+) beside the chapter that contains the file you want to rename.

4.	Right-click the filename, and click Rename.

5.	Type a new filename.

6.	Press ENTER.

 Tip

•	You can also rename a file using VENTURA Navigator by selecting the filename, pressing F2, and typing the new name over the old name.

 Related Topics


Working with text and picture files


Overview: Working with text and picture files
Working with text and picture files

Corel VENTURA can import a wide variety of file formats, for example, text file formats such as Corel WordPerfect, Microsoft Word, and ASCII, and picture file formats such as CorelDRAW, Adobe Photoshop, and AutoCAD. For a full listing of the text file formats Corel VENTURA can import, see "Imported text file formats" in the online Help Reference section. For a full listing of the picture file formats Corel VENTURA can import, see "Imported picture file formats" in the online Help Reference section.

You can also add text to Corel VENTURA publications by typing it. Typed text can be added to an imported text file or typed text can become its own text file. For more information about text files created by typing, see "Adding text files to frames."

Corel VENTURA treats bitmaps and vectors as pictures. A bitmap is composed of individual pixels and is sometimes called a raster. Bitmaps offer greater subtleties of shading and texture than vectors, but they also require more memory and take longer to print. A vector is a collection of lines. Vectors give you sharper lines and require less printing resources than bitmaps. Corel PHOTO-PAINT is an example of a bitmap editing application and CorelDRAW is an example of a vector editing application.

Objects you create with the drawing tools in Corel VENTURA are called graphic objects and are not classified as pictures.

Corel VENTURA can also export pictures to a variety of formats. For a full listing of the picture file formats Corel VENTURA can export, see "Exported picture file formats" in the online Help Reference section.

 Note

•	Text and pictures can also be imported into Corel VENTURA using object linking and embedding (OLE). See Object linking and embedding (OLE) in the online help Reference section for details.

•	For more information about working with text properties, see "Working with text."

 More Detailed Information
 Related Topics


Importing and exporting text


Overview: Importing and exporting text
Importing and exporting text

Importing text

Corel VENTURA lets you import text into your publication that was created in other desktop publishers, text editors, word processors, and spreadsheets. You can import text files directly into frames in your publication, or you can import these files to the File List. A single publication can contain any number of imported text files. For information about the file formats Corel VENTURA imports and how Corel VENTURA treats different file formats, see "Imported text file formats" in the online Help Reference section.

Imported text files are embedded into Corel VENTURA publications. At the same time, embedded text files can be linked to external files using the Export On Save option. Linked text files can be edited in text editors or word processors.

Exporting text

Corel VENTURA can export the text in your publication as ANSI, ASCII, ASCII 8-bit, or Rich Text Format (RTF) files. These files can be imported into any application that supports these formats, such as Corel WordPerfect.

 Note

•	Instead of importing text, you can open documents that were not created in Corel VENTURA as if they were publications. The advantages of opening a document (rather than importing text) is that the many of the formatting attributes in the original document such as page size, margins, and column layout are preserved. See "Opening documents that were not created in Corel VENTURA" for more information.

 Related Topics


Overview: Tips on importing and exporting text
Tips on importing and exporting text

If the text file you import does not look the way you expected it to, the following tips may explain its appearance.

Importing limitations

Because each application handles information in a text file differently, it's not always possible to translate precisely the contents of one format to another. The amount of variation depends on the format used to import or export the file. As a result, you may receive unexpected results when your text file contains the following:

•	hidden text

•	headers and footers

•	justification

•	embedded pictures

•	multiple columns (see Multicolumn layouts below)

•	non-uniform fills

•	macros

•	style sheets

•	OLE objects

Page size and margins

When you import text, the original page size settings are automatically adjusted to the current page size settings in Corel VENTURA. This may affect the placement of text.

Multicolumn layouts

Multicolumn publications import into Corel VENTURA with their columns intact provided they are in one of the following file formats and are opened using the File, Open command:

•	Corel WordPerfect version 6 or later

•	Rich Text Format (*.RTF)

•	Microsoft Word for Windows version 6 or later

•	Ami Professional version 2 or later

•	WordStar

•	XYWrite

In publications in which the number of columns varies, the column layout for the first page is used throughout.

Password-protected text files

To import a password-protected text file into Corel VENTURA, you must open the file in the word processor in which it was created, save it under a different filename without password protection, and then import the new file.

Text enclosed in angle [< >] brackets

Corel VENTURA interprets text enclosed by angle brackets (such as HTML code) as markup code when opening text files. To use the angled brackets without having them interpreted as a markup code, type two brackets in a row in the text file before opening it in Corel VENTURA. For example,

[<<text in brackets>>]

If you import text files, you can enable the Ignore Markup check box to have Corel VENTURA treat angle brackets as text.

Double hyphens, quotes, and quotation marks

Unless you specify otherwise, Corel VENTURA converts two consecutive hyphens into an em dash and inch marks into typographic quotation marks. You can specify the type of quote marks you want Corel VENTURA to use. You can also specify the type of quotation marks you want Corel VENTURA to use, such as German or French style. For more information about converting quotes, quotation marks, and double hyphens, see "Converting quotes, quotation marks, and double hyphens when importing text."

Double spaces

In imported text files, Corel VENTURA converts double spaces in a sentence to a single space followed by a nonbreaking space. This prevents line breaks from occurring between spaces, which would disrupt the alignment of left-aligned text. Sentence-ending punctuation marks, such as periods and colons, are normally followed by a single space in typeset publications. You can use the UnSpace script to eliminate double spaces after you import a text file. For more information about scripts, see "Recordings and scripts." For more information about scripts included with Corel VENTURA, see "Scripts and wizards included with Corel VENTURA."

 Note

•	For a full listing of the text file formats Corel VENTURA can import, see "Imported text file formats" in the online Help Reference section.

 Related Topics


Importing text

When you import text, you have the option of loading it directly into a selected frame, adding it to the File List, or inserting it at the cursor. For more information about importing files to the File List, see "Importing files to the File List."

When you import text into a frame, you may find that the frame is too small to display all the text. You can either increase the size of the frame or increase the number of frames. To display your text in linked frames, see "Setting text flow between frames."

Corel VENTURA imports as much of the formatting from text files as is possible. However, it ignores most of the page layout information, such as page breaks, margins, and column settings. You can apply page layout settings to the text file once it is imported into Corel VENTURA. As well, you may not have all of the fonts used in the text file you are importing. Corel VENTURA replaces the missing fonts with the closest match available. For more information, see "Matching Fonts."

Frames can contain text and picture files. However, they cannot contain more than one file of each type. If you try to add a text file to a frame that already contains a text file, the new text file replaces the existing file. However, you can add files of different types to the same frame. For example, if you add a text file to a frame that already contains a picture file, the text is superimposed on the picture.

Corel VENTURA lets you control how paragraph styles used in text file documents such as Corel WordPerfect or Microsoft Word are treated when opened. You can choose to keep overridden properties in the imported styles, or you can choose to create new paragraph tags based on paragraphs with overridden properties. By allowing Corel VENTURA to create new paragraph tags, a new paragraph tag will be created for each paragraph style with overridden properties, and you can significantly reduce the size of the Corel VENTURA publication when it is saved.

To import text into a frame or onto a page

1.	Select the frame or page by clicking its border with the Pick tool.

2.	Click File, Import Text.

3.	Choose a file format from the Files Of Type list box.

4.	Choose the drive where the file is stored from the Look In list box.

5.	Double-click the folder where the file is stored.

6.	Click the filename.

7.	Click the Options button if the Options section is not displayed.

8.	Disable the Insert At Cursor check box.

9.	Enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Export On Save [image] exports the text file each time the publication is saved. See "Embedding and linking text files" for more information.

•	Suppress Panose [image] disables Panose font matching. For more information, see "Using PANOSE Font Matching."

•	Ignore Style [image] ignores paragraph styles used in text file formats such as Corel WordPerfect or Microsoft Word. All text is assigned the Body Text paragraph tag by default. If you disable the Ignore Style check box, see the "To set how Corel VENTURA treats overridden paragraph styles when importing documents" procedure which follows in this section. This option does not effect text files which use Corel VENTURA markup code.

•	Ignore Markup [image] treats angle brackets (< >) as text; not markup code. This option should be enabled when importing text files such as HTML which may contain angle brackets.

10.	Click the Import button.

 Note

•	Frames can only hold one text file at a time. If try to import text into a frame which already has text in it, the text file will import into the publication but will not be placed in the frame. The imported file will appear in the File List and you can then manipulate it within the publication. See "Using the File List" for more information about the File List.

To import text at the cursor

1.	Place the cursor where you want the text to be imported.

2.	Click File, Import Text.

3.	Choose a file format from the Files Of Type list box.

4.	Choose the drive where the file is stored from the Look In list box.

5.	Double-click the folder where the file is stored.

6.	Click the filename.

7.	If the Options section is not displayed, click the Options button.

8.	Enable the Insert At Cursor check box and any other check boxes noted in step 9 in the previous procedure.

9.	Click the Import button.

 Notes

•	You can use the Insert At Cursor option to import text into a frame which already holds a text file. Text imported using the Insert At Cursor option becomes part of the text file already in the frame.

•	For a full listing of the text file formats Corel VENTURA can import, see "Imported text file formats" in the online Help Reference section.

•	Spreadsheet files such as Corel Quattro Pro, Microsoft Excel, and Lotus 1-2-3 are imported as Corel VENTURA tables.

 Tips

•	You can also import text by right-clicking the publication at the place where you want to insert a file, and clicking Text, Import.

•	You can drag a text file from Windows Explorer to a chapter in the VENTURA Navigator. Files added in this manner appear in the File List.

•	If you want to import a file that is not in a file format Corel VENTURA supports, you can convert the file to an ASCII text file. See your word processor's documentation for instructions on creating ASCII files.

To set how Corel VENTURA treats overridden paragraph styles when importing documents

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, click Save.

3.	Do one of the following:

•	Enable the Create Tags From Paragraph Overrides On Import And Open check box to create new tags for imported paragraph styles with overridden properties.

•	Disable the Create Tags From Paragraph Overrides On Import And Open check box to maintain overridden paragraph tag properties.

 Note

•	It is strongly recommended that you enable the Create Tags From Paragraph Overrides On Import And Open check box as it will significantly decrease the size of a Corel VENTURA publication. This setting applies to your workspace and doesn't effect files which use Corel VENTURA markup code.

 Related Topics


Embedding and linking text files

By default, a text file is embedded in a publication when you import it; it does not remain linked to its source file. By using the Export On Save option, you can create a linked text file for any named text file in a publication. Linked text files can be one of the following formats: ASCII, ASCII 8-bit, ANSI, or Rich Text Format (RTF). For example, you can import a Corel WordPerfect document and when saving the publication, a linked text file is created using one of the four text file formats. You can make changes to linked files using a text editor or word processor.

When you open a publication that includes linked text files, Corel VENTURA checks your computer (or network) for the linked text files and loads them into the publication you are opening. If the linked text file differs from the text file in the publication, Corel VENTURA imports the linked text file and overwrites the text in the publication. Deleting a linked text file from your computer will not affect a publication; the last-saved version of the publication will still include the text from the linked text file.

Any time while a publication is open you can create a link to a text file, or break a link and embed text.

 Note

If you have a publication and a linked text file open at the same time, you will lose changes to the linked file when the publication is saved.

To link a text file during import

1.	Click File, Import Text.

2.	Enable the Export On Save check box.

 Note

•	For more information about importing text, see "Importing text."

To set publication defaults for linked files

1.	Click Publication, Publication Properties.

2.	Click the Text Defaults tab.

3.	Click one of the following:

•	With Publication [image] save to the same folder where the publication is stored

•	Use Original [image] saves to the folder where the imported file originally resided

•	Other [image] click the Browse button to set the location of the file

4.	Choose a default file type to export to from the File Type list box.

If you choose the RTF file format, click the Options button to set text export options. These export options will apply to all linked RTF files in the publication. See "Exporting text" for more information about RTF export options.

 Notes

•	Linked (or Export On Save) text files from publications which have not been previously saved (or named) reside in the same folder as the default template (DEFAULT.VP). Typically, this folder is named X:\COREL\GRAPHICS8\VENTURA\SAMPLES where 'X" indicates the drive where you installed Corel VENTURA.

•	If you change the default template, you can apply these settings to each publication you create by clicking File, New. For more information, see "Editing and restoring the default template."

To link an embedded text file

1.	Select the frame or page that contains the text you want to export.

2.	Right-click, and click Text, Text File Properties.

3.	Enable the Export On Save check box.

4.	Click the Browse button, and choose the drive and folder where you want to save the file.

5.	Choose a file format from the File Type list box.

If you choose the RTF file format, click the Options button to set text export options. These export options will apply to all linked RTF files in the publication. See "Exporting text" for more information about RTF export options.

To link an embedded text file using VENTURA Navigator

1.Click Tools, VENTURA Navigator.

2.	Choose Publication Manager from the VENTURA Navigator list box.

3.	Click the plus sign (+) beside the chapter that contains the text file you want to link.

4.	Right-click the text file's name, and click Text File Properties.

5.	Follow steps 4 to 5 from the previous procedure.

 Note

•	In the VENTURA Navigator window, embedded text files are represented with the [image] icon and linked files are represented with the [image] icon.

To break the link to a linked text file

1.	Select the frame or page that contains the text you want to embed.

2.	Right-click, and click Text, Text File Properties.

3.	Disable the Export On Save check box.

To break the link to a linked text file using VENTURA Navigator

1.Click Tools, VENTURA Navigator.

2.	Choose Publication Manager from the VENTURA Navigator list box.

3.	Click the plus sign (+) beside the chapter that contains the linked text file.

4.	Right-click the text file's name, and click Text File Properties.

5.	Disable the Export On Save check box.

 Note

•	The EnableExportOnSave.CSC script lets you set Export On Save preferences for all text files in a publication. For more information about scripts, see "Recordings and scripts." For more information about scripts included with Corel VENTURA, see "Scripts and wizards included with Corel VENTURA."

 Related Topics


Dragging text into your publication

Another way to import text to your publication is to drag blocks of text from one publication to another. You can drag text from Microsoft Windows applications and from other Corel VENTURA publications into a Corel VENTURA publication. If you drag text into your Corel VENTURA publication, it is removed from the original publication.

To drag text into your publication

1.	Arrange your desktop so that the active publication's window and the window of the document that contains the text you want to drag are both visible.

2.	Select the text you want to move or copy.

3.	Drag the text where you want to position it. To copy the text, press CTRL while you release the mouse button.

 Related Topics


Removing extra carriage returns

Text produced with a word processor often includes extra carriage returns when imported into Corel VENTURA. If you type @PARAFILTR ON = as the first line of your text file, then any extra carriage returns are removed when you import the text file into Corel VENTURA.

To remove extra carriage returns from a text file

1.	Open the text file in a word processor or text editor.

2.	On the first line of the file, type @PARAFILTR ON =

3.	Save the text file.

4.	Import the file into Corel VENTURA.

 Tip

•	The phrase "@PARAFILTR ON = " must be on a line by itself and there must be a space before and after the equal sign (=).

 Related Topics


Converting quotes, quotation marks, and double hyphens when importing text

Corel VENTURA can automatically convert quotation marks and double hyphens. The double hyphens are converted to em dashes or en dashes, while straight quotation marks and single quotes are converted according to the options you select. These settings will apply to all text you import into any of your Corel VENTURA publications.

To convert quotations marks when importing text

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, click General.

3.	Enable the Use Typographical Quotes And Dashes check box.

4.	In the Convert Quotes To section, click one of the following buttons:

•	Typographical style ( [image])

•	German style ( [image])

•	French style button ( [image])

•	Custom, and type the left quotation mark in the first box and the right quotation mark in the second box.

To convert single quotes when importing text

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, click General.

3.	Enable the Use Typographical Quotes And Dashes check box.

4.	In the Convert Single Opening Quote To section, click one of the following buttons:

•	'open

•	Custom, and type the single opening quote in the box

5.	In the Convert Single Closing Quote To section, click one of the following buttons:

•	close'

•	Custom, and type the single closing quote in the box

To convert double dashes when importing text

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, click General.

3.	Enable the Use Typographical Quotes And Dashes check box.

4.	In the Convert Double Dashes To section, click one of the following buttons:

•	Em Dash

•	En Dash

 Note

•	These conversion settings will also apply when you open Corel VENTURA publications that were created in versions earlier than Corel VENTURA 7.

 Related Topics


Editing text in Corel WordPerfect or other word processors

If Corel WordPerfect (or another word processor) is installed on your computer, you can access it directly from Corel VENTURA to edit Corel VENTURA text files.

You can also use another word processor, such as Microsoft Word, to edit text files in Corel VENTURA. The Edit In command opens the word processor with which RTF files are associated. For more information about setting file associations in Windows, open the Windows Help (click Start, Help) and in the Index see "associating, file types with programs."

To edit a text file in Corel WordPerfect or other word processors

1.	Right-click the text file.

2.	Click Text, Edit In Wpwin8 (for Corel WordPerfect).

If you have Microsoft Word installed the command name may be Edit In Winword.

3.	In the word processor, edit the text file.

4.	Click File, Save.

5.	Close the word processor.

 Notes

•	For the best results, the word processor should be closed before you use the Edit In command.

•	Text files are transferred between Corel VENTURA and your word processor using the RTF file format. The RTF options are the same as those used for Export On Save. You can set the RTF options in the Publication Properties dialog box by clicking Publication, Publication Properties, Text Defaults.

 Related Topics


Exporting text

You can export text files in the industry standard ASCII, ASCII 8-bit, ANSI, and RTF formats. When you export text files, you have the option of retaining or discarding the Corel VENTURA markup codes.

To export a text file as an ANSI, ASCII, or ASCII 8-bit text file

1.	Select the frame or page that contains the text you want to export.

2.	Click File, Export Text.

3.	Choose a location from the Save In list box.

4.	Type a filename in the File Name box.

5.	Choose one of the following file formats from the Save As Type list box:

•	ANSI Text (*.TXT)

•	ASCII Text (*.TXT)

•	ASCII 8-bit Text (*.TXT)

6.	Click Save.

 Tip

•	If you export the text as ANSI, ASCII, or ASCII 8-bit text, Corel VENTURA will include the markup code used to format the text. If you want to export the text without the markup code, enable the Export Without Corel VENTURA Markup check box.

To export a text file as a Rich Text Format (RTF) file

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the previous procedure.

2.	Choose Rich Text Format (*.RTF) from the Save As Type list box.

3.	Click the Options button.

4.	Choose one of the following options for each property:

•	No Markup [image] exports the text without markup codes

•	Corel VENTURA Markup [image] exports the text with Corel VENTURA markup codes

•	RTF Markup [image] exports the text with RTF markup codes. Formatting not supported by the RTF file format will be lost.

•	RTF & Corel VENTURA Markup [image] exports the text with RTF markup codes if possible and Corel VENTURA markup codes if RTF codes can't be used

 Note

•	Using the RTF Markup option only may result in the loss of information or text formatting. This includes the following items:

•	CMYK coloring is converted to RGB coloring.

•	Frame anchors are lost.

•	Footnotes and endnotes are dropped.

•	Most types of cross-referencing codes and special items are dropped. This includes variables, equations, counters, and formulas.

 Related Topics


Importing and exporting pictures


Overview: Importing and exporting pictures
Importing and exporting pictures

If you want to add a picture created in another program to a publication, you need to import the picture into Corel VENTURA. When importing pictures into Corel VENTURA, you can choose whether to save the picture as part of your Corel VENTURA publication or to create an external reference to the picture. You can use both methods for different pictures in the same publication, or even for the same picture if it appears more than once in the publication.

Saving pictures as part of a Corel VENTURA publication: Embedding

When you import a picture into a Corel VENTURA publication by embedding, it is copied into the publication and becomes part of the Corel VENTURA file. Embedding ensures that the picture always remains part of the publication and will not be "misplaced" when the publication files are copied to another location. If you are not sharing the picture with anyone else, and if the picture will not be changed after it's imported into Corel VENTURA, you will probably want to embed it into your publication. However, you should check the size of a picture before embedding it. If you are concerned with file sizes, Corel VENTURA will warn you when you are trying to import a file greater than the size you specified in the Options dialog box. You can then choose to either embed the file or place the picture as a referenced picture instead.

Externally referenced pictures

Externally referenced files are useful for very large pictures, pictures that are shared, or pictures that need to be updated from time to time. If any changes are made to an externally referenced picture since the publication that contains it was last opened, Corel VENTURA will update the picture to reflect these changes. However, you need to keep track of the files not directly embedded in your publication because Corel VENTURA will not be able to use them if they are moved to a new location. If the files are moved to another location, Corel VENTURA will try to find them using logical possibilities suggested by the path and filename.

Exporting pictures

You can also export a picture you have created or manipulated in Corel VENTURA for use in another application. When you export a picture, you save it to a new location. You choose both the location and the file format in which to save the picture.

 Note

•	When you import a vector graphic, it displays in Corel VENTURA as a bitmap but it prints as a vector graphic.

 Related Topics


Importing pictures

When the picture file size exceeds the size you specify in the save options, Corel VENTURA will ask you if you want to leave the picture external instead of embedding it. If you click yes, the picture remains a separate file and cannot be edited within Corel VENTURA. If you click no, you are able to edit the picture, but the size of your publication may become very large. For information on changing the picture file size, see "Default settings for importing pictures."

Frames can contain text and picture files. However, they cannot contain more than one file of each type. If you try to add a text file to a frame that already contains a text file, the new text file replaces the existing file. However, you can add files of different types to the same frame. For example, if you add a text file to a frame that already contains a picture file, the text is superimposed on the picture.

You can also import pictures to the File List. For more information, see "Importing files to the File List."

 Note

•	Imported vectors display as bitmaps in Corel VENTURA, but print as vectors. Vectors will appear correctly in Normal mode of Print Preview.

•	The Corel VENTURA CD-ROM disks include thousands of vectors and bitmaps which can be imported and used in your publications. These pictures can also be manipulated in Corel VENTURA. The location of each picture is identified in the Corel Libraries Catalog.

•	For a full listing of the picture file formats Corel VENTURA can import, see "Imported picture file formats" in the online Help Reference section.

To import a picture into a frame

1.	Select a frame.

2.	Click File, Import Picture.

3.	Choose a drive from the Look In box.

4.	Double-click the folder where the file is stored.

5.	Choose the file.

6.	If the picture is a bitmap, select one of the following from the list box:

•	Full Image [image] imports the full picture directly into the selected frame

•	Crop [image] opens the Crop Image dialog box where you can change the area of the picture that is imported

•	Resample [image] opens the Resample Image dialog box where you can change the dimensions and resolution of the picture

7.	Click the Import button.

 Note

•	For more information about cropping and resampling bitmaps, see "Reformatting bitmaps during import."

To import and embed a picture in a frame

1.	Follow steps 1 to 5 from the previous procedure.

2.	If the Options are not displayed, click the Options button.

3.	Enable the Embedded check box.

4.	Click the Import button.

To import a picture by dragging

1.	Arrange your desktop so that the active publication's window and the window of the document that contains the picture you want to import are both visible.

2.	Select the picture.

3.	Drag the picture into your publication.

Corel VENTURA automatically creates a frame around the picture.

To import a picture into multiple chapters

1.	Deselect all frames and the base frame.

2.	Click File, Import Picture.

3.	Choose a drive from the Look In box.

4.	Double-click the folder where the file is stored.

5.	Choose the file.

6.	If the picture is a bitmap, select one of the following from the list box:

•	Full Image [image] imports the full picture directly into the selected frame

•	Crop [image] opens the Crop Image dialog box where you can change the area of the picture that is imported

•	Resample [image] opens the Resample Image dialog box where you can change the dimensions and resolution of the picture

7.	Click the Import button.

 Notes

•	In the VENTURA Navigator, embedded picture files are represented with the [image] icon and external picture files are represented with the [image] icon.

•	In the VENTURA Navigator, external picture files which cannot be located by a publication when it opens are represented with the [image] icon. To locate a missing file, select the file in VENTURA Navigator, right-click, select Browse and search for the file.

 Tips

•	You can import both picture and text files into a frame by selecting the frame, and clicking Import from the File List.

•	You can drag a picture file from Windows Explorer to a chapter in the VENTURA Navigator. Files added in this manner appear in the File List.

 Related Topics


Reformatting bitmaps during import

When you import a bitmap, you can crop it or you can change its dimensions and resolution. Cropping cuts away selected areas on a picture without affecting the resolution or dimensions of the areas that remain.

Instead of using an entire picture, cropping lets you use a portion of a picture in your publication.

You can change the picture's resolution by upsampling or downsampling. Upsampling is the practice of increasing picture resolution (i.e., adding more pixels per unit of measurement). Downsampling refers to the practice of decreasing picture resolution.

You can also change a bitmap's size or resolution after importing. For more information, see "Resampling bitmaps."

To crop a picture during import

1.	Click File, Import Picture.

2.	In the Import Picture dialog box, select the file.

3.	Choose Crop from the list box beside the Options button.

4.	Click the Import button.

5.	Do one of the following:

•	Drag the handles on the bounding box in the Preview window to define a cropping area.

•	Type values in the Top, Left, Width, and Height boxes. You can also choose a unit of measurement from the Units list box.

 Tip

•	You can select the entire picture by clicking the Select All button in the Crop Image dialog box.

To change a picture's dimensions during import

1.	Click File, Import Picture.

2.	In the Import Picture dialog box, select the file.

3.	Choose Resample from the list box beside the Options button.

4.	Click the Import button.

5.	In the Resample Image dialog box, type values in the Width and Height boxes.

 Tip

•	You can change a picture's dimensions proportionately by enabling the Maintain Aspect Ratio check box.

To change a picture's resolution during import

1.	Click File, Import Picture.

2.	In the Import Picture dialog box, select the file.

3.	Choose Resample from the list box beside the Options button.

4.	Click the Import button.

5.	In the Resample dialog box, type values in the Horizontal and Vertical Resolution boxes.

 Tip

•	You can change a picture's resolution proportionately by enabling the Identical Values check box.

 Related Topics


Default settings for importing pictures

You can set Corel VENTURA to make picture files embedded or externally referenced when you import pictures or when you convert pre-Corel VENTURA 7 publications. You can also set Corel VENTURA to let you choose whether or not a picture file is embedded or externally referenced on an individual basis, when you use the File menu's Import command.

To embed all picture files during import

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, click Save.

3.	Enable the Embed All Imported Pictures button.

To externally reference all picture files during import

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, click Save.

3.	Enable the Externally Reference All Imported Pictures button.

To warn when picture file size exceeds threshold during import

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, click Save.

3.	Enable the Warn Before Embedding Imported Pictures Over button.

4.	Type a threshold kilobyte size in the KBytes box.

To set a threshold for automatically embedding or externally referencing pictures

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, click Save.

3.	Enable the Keep Imported Picture Files External If Larger Than button.

4.	Type a threshold kilobyte size in the KBytes box.

 Note

•	Pictures that you drag or scan into a publication use the value you set in the KBytes box in the previous procedure. Pictures that are below the value are automatically embedded and pictures that are above the value are externally referenced.

 Related Topics


Embedding externally referenced pictures

Even after a picture file has been imported, you can change it from an externally referenced file to an embedded file. Keep in mind that embedded picture files require more memory than externally referenced files.

To embed an externally referenced picture

1.	Select the frame that contains the externally referenced picture file.

2.	Right-click the frame, and click, Picture, Picture File Properties.

3.	Click the General tab.

4.	Click the Embed button.

To embed an externally referenced picture using the VENTURA Navigator

1.	If VENTURA Navigator is not open, click Tools, VENTURA Navigator.

2.	Choose Publication Manager from the list box.

3.	Click the plus sign (+) beside the chapter that contains the picture you want to embed.

4.	Right-click the picture filename, and click Embed.

 Note

•	In the VENTURA Navigator, embedded picture files are represented with the [image] icon and external picture files are represented with the [image] icon.

 Related Topics


Editing pictures in CorelDRAW and Corel PHOTO-PAINT

If CorelDRAW and Corel PHOTO-PAINT are installed on your computer, you can access both these programs directly from Corel VENTURA and edit Corel VENTURA pictures in the appropriate program. Vectors are edited in CorelDRAW and bitmaps are edited in Corel PHOTO-PAINT. Both embedded pictures and externally referenced pictures can be edited in CorelDRAW and Corel PHOTO-PAINT.

To edit a picture in CorelDRAW

1.	Right-click the frame that contains the picture you want to edit in CorelDRAW.

2.	Click Picture, Edit In CorelDRAW.

3.	In CorelDRAW, edit the picture.

4.	Click File, Save.

5.	Close CorelDRAW.

To edit a picture in Corel PHOTO-PAINT

1.	Right-click the frame that contains the picture you want to edit in Corel PHOTO-PAINT.

2.	Click Picture, Edit In Corel PHOTO-PAINT.

3.	In Corel PHOTO-PAINT, edit the picture.

4.	Click File, Save.

5.	Close Corel PHOTO-PAINT.

 Tips

•	If you add a layer (such as Artistic text) to a Corel VENTURA picture in Corel PHOTO-PAINT, you must click Objects, Combine in Corel PHOTO-PAINT before saving the file. If you don't click Objects, Combine, only the topmost layer of the picture will display.

•	Editing an externally referenced picture opens an instance of CorelDRAW or Corel PHOTO-PAINT. If you edit multiple publications, more than one instance of CorelDRAW or Corel PHOTO-PAINT may open.

 Notes

•	The VectorEdit and BitmapEdit settings in the [EditIn] section of the VENTURA.INI file identify the CorelDRAW (VectorEdit) and Corel PHOTO-PAINT (BitmapEdit) versions that Corel VENTURA supports. You can find out what version of Corel products you are running by clicking Help, About. If you install new releases of CorelDRAW or Corel PHOTO-PAINT you should edit the [EditIn] section of the VENTURA.INI file. Insert the version number in the appropriate line after a semicolon; for example

[EditIn]

VectorEdit=7.467;8.353

BitmapEdit=7.467;8.356

•	The VENTURA.INI file can be edited using any text editor and is located in X:\COREL\GRAPHICS8\WORKSPACE\VENTURA8\_BOOTDEFAULT, where "X" indicates the drive where you installed Corel VENTURA. You should not have Corel VENTURA running when editing VENTURA.INI.

 Related Topics


Exporting pictures

You can export a Corel VENTURA picture to use in other applications.

To export a picture

1.	Select the frame that contains the picture you want to export.

2.	Click File, Export Picture.

3.	Choose the drive and folder where you want to save the picture.

4.	Type the name of the picture file in the File Name box.

5.	Choose a picture file format from the Save As Type list box.

6.	Click the Save button.

 Note

•	For a full listing of the picture file formats Corel VENTURA can export, see "Exported picture file formats" in the online Help reference section.

 Related Topics


Exporting a page as an EPS file

Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) files can be printed on any postscript printer and can also be imported into other applications. When EPS files are imported, they are displayed as a low resolution graphic if they include an image header. If they do not include the image header, they will appear as a gray box. When printed to a postscript printer, EPS files will print at the full resolution. For more information about EPS files, see "Preparing a print job for a commercial press."

You can export individual pages as EPS files which you can either print on a postscript printer, or import as a graphic into another Corel VENTURA publication or a document created in another application which has a postscript interpreter or filter.

To export a page as an EPS file

1.	Click the page you want to export.

2.	Click File, Export Page As EPS.

3.	Type a name in the File Name box.

4.	Click the Save button.

5.	Use the EPS Export dialog box to set your EPS preferences.

 Related Topics


Using the File List


Overview: Using the File List
Using the File List

The File List displays an alphabetical list of all text and picture files available for placement in the current chapter. Clicking a filename in the File List places the file in the selected frame, page, or page tag. You'll find the File List on the Property Bar when a frame or a page is selected.

In addition to imported text files, the File List also displays text files which are created when you type into a frame. For more information about text files created by typing, see "Adding text files to frames."

 Related Topics


Importing files to the File List

When you import to the File List, the imported file is not displayed in your publication but it is saved with a publication. You can then place files from the File List in your publication's frames and pages.

To import a text file to the File List

1.	Click File, Import Text.

2.	Choose the file format from the Files Of Type list box.

3.	Choose the drive where the file is stored from the Look In list box.

4.	Double-click the folder where the file is stored.

5.	Choose the file.

6.	If the Options section is not displayed, click the Options button.

7.	Enable the Add To File List check box.

8.	Click the Import button.

To import a picture file to the File List

1.	Click File, Import Picture.

2.	Choose the file format from the Files Of Type box.

3.	Choose the drive from the Look In list box.

4.	Double-click the folder where the file is stored.

5.	Choose the file.

6.	If the Options section is not displayed, click the Options button.

7.	Enable the Add To File List check box.

8.	Click the Import button.

 Note

•	Text files placed on a page tag appear in the page tag's File List as "Unnamed Files" because page tags cannot support flowing text files.

 Tip

•	You can drag a text or picture file from Windows Explorer to a chapter in the VENTURA Navigator. Files added in this manner also appear in the File List.

 Related Topics


Adding files to a frame or page from the File List

The File List appears on the Property Bar when a frame or a page is selected. You can use the File List to insert files in either a frame or a page.

To add a text file to a Page using the File List

1.	Click the Pick tool.

2.	Click the Pasteboard.

3.	Choose a file from the File List.

To add a text file to a frame using the File List

1.	Click the Pick tool.

2.	Click the border of the frame to which you want to add a text file.

3.	Choose a file from the File List.

To add a picture file to a page using the File List

1.	Click the Pick Tool.

2.	Click the Pasteboard.

3.	Choose a file from the File List.

To add a picture file to a frame using the File List

1.	Click the Pick Tool.

2.	Click the border of the frame to which you want to add a picture file.

3.	Choose a file from the File List.

 Tip

•	In Page Layout view, you can drag a file from the File List in the VENTURA Navigator window to the page or frame.

•	The page tag File List cannot contain text files.

 Related Topics


Removing files from frames and chapters using the File List

The File List lets you delete picture and text files from frames. However, when you remove files using the File List, they are not deleted from the publication. If you want to delete files from a publication you must use the VENTURA Navigator.

To remove a text or picture file from a frame

1.	Select the border of the frame that contains the file you want to delete.

2.	Click the File List box.

3.	Click one of the following:

•	Remove Text File From Frame

•	Remove Picture File From Frame

To remove a text file from a chapter

1.	Select the border of the frame that contains the text file you want to delete.

2.	Click the File List box.

3.	Click Remove Text File From Chapter.

 Tip

•	Corel VENTURA provides a script (FindUnusedFiles.CSC) that finds the unused files in your publication. For more information about scripts, see "Recordings and scripts."

To delete a file from a publication

1.	If the VENTURA Navigator is not open, click Tools, VENTURA Navigator.

2.	Choose the Publication Manager from the list box.

3.	Locate the file you want to delete.

4.	Right-click the filename and click Delete.

 Related Topics


Copying and moving Corel VENTURA publications


Overview: Copying and moving Corel VENTURA publications
Copying and moving Corel VENTURA publications

You can move or copy a Corel VENTURA publication that is not linked to VENTURA Library files or to externally referenced text or picture files to another folder on your computer. In Windows Explorer right-click the name of the publication you want to move or copy, and click Cut or Copy and then Paste.

When you want to move or copy a publication that uses links to VENTURA libraries or externally referenced files, use Copy With Links to make sure that the links between the Corel VENTURA publication and the referenced items are not broken.

 Related Topics


To copy or move a publication to another location

You can copy an entire publication, including linked and externally referenced text and picture files, to a specified folder on your computer.

To copy publications while keeping links intact

1.	In Windows Explorer, right-click the name of the publication you want to copy, click Copy With Links To, and the destination to place the copy.

2.	If the destination is a folder, select the folder to which you want to copy the publication.

 Notes

•	If you want to copy or move the publication to another folder on your computer without copying or moving linked and externally referenced files, use the Copy or Cut commands in Windows Explorer instead. To keep the references to linked and external files in the copied or moved publication active, set Corel VENTURA to use fixed paths for linked or externally referenced files as shown in the following procedure.

•	You can copy a master copy or working copy of a multiuser publication using Copy With Links To, but the resulting copy of the publication will not be multiuser.

•	In publications with stylesheets or text files that are linked from libraries, the library will be copied as well as the publication.

•	You can use Copy With Links To on a publication even if a file that is linked to the publication is open, however, any changes you have made to the linked item since saving will not be reflected in the resulting copy of the publication.

To use fixed paths for linked or external files

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, click Save.

3.	Disable the Use Relative Paths For Linked And External Items check box.

 Note

•	Corel VENTURA lets you use relative paths for linked or external files. This means that when you save a publication, the reference to the linked or external files does not reference the drive letter, only the folder path. Therefore, you can move a publication's linked or external files between drives, and the references to the linked or external files will not be lost.

To use relative paths for linked or external files

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, click Save.

3.	Enable the Use Relative Paths For Linked And External Items check box.


Working with chapters and pages


Overview: Working with chapters and pages
Working with chapters and pages

Every publication you create consists of at least one chapter. A chapter is a basic publication component that contains the text and picture files you add to it. You can view the files of any chapter using VENTURA Navigator. VENTURA Navigator also lets you add or delete chapters and provides you with a quick way to restructure your publication by copying or moving chapters within or between publications.

A page is another basic publication component. You can add or delete single or multiple pages.

 Related Topics


Adding and deleting chapters

You can add and delete chapters at any point in the development of your publication. However, every publication must have at least one chapter, and you cannot delete a chapter if it is the only chapter in the publication. Every chapter must also have at least one page.

To add a chapter

1.	If VENTURA Navigator is not open, click Tools, VENTURA Navigator.

2.	Choose Publication Manager from the VENTURA Navigator list box.

3.	Right-click the publication, and click New Chapter.

The new chapter is added to the end of the publication, and the default chapter name is highlighted to let you rename it.

4.	Type a name for the new chapter.

5.	Press ENTER.

6.	Drag the chapter to the location you want in the publication.

 Tip

•	You can also add a new chapter by clicking Publication, New Chapter, or by clicking the chapter name, and then New Chapter. When you click the chapter name, the new chapter is based on the chapter you clicked.

To add a chapter created in VENTURA 3 and 4 and Corel VENTURA 5

1.	If VENTURA Navigator is not open, click Tools, VENTURA Navigator.

2.	Choose Publication Manager from the VENTURA Navigator list box.

3.	Right-click the publication, and click Import Chapter.

4.	Choose the drive where the chapter is stored from the Look In list box.

5.	Double-click the folder where the chapter is stored.

6.	Click the chapter name.

7.	Click Open.

The Style Wizard opens to combine tags.

To delete a chapter

1.	If VENTURA Navigator is not open, click Tools, VENTURA Navigator.

2.	Choose Publication Manager from the VENTURA Navigator list box.

3.	Right-click the chapter you want to remove, and click Delete.

4.	In the Confirm Delete dialog box, click Yes.

 Related Topics


Adding and deleting pages

When you reach the end of a page as you type, Corel VENTURA adds a new page automatically. However, if you want to add a page within a chapter, you must use the Insert Pages command.

Corel VENTURA deletes excess pages at the end of a publication automatically. You can manually delete pages from anywhere in a publication, but you cannot delete pages with text on them. If you want to delete a page that contains text, you must first remove the text from the page.

To add single or multiple pages

1.	Click Page, Insert Pages.

2.	Type the number of pages to add.

3.	Enable one of the following buttons:

•	Before [image] to add the page(s) before a specified page number

•	After [image] to add the page(s) after a specified page number

4.	In the Page box, type the page number of the page before which or after which you want to add the page(s).

5.	From the Chapter list box, choose the chapter to which to add the pages.

6.	From the Page Tag list box, choose the page tag on which to base the added pages.

To remove a single page

1.	Click Page, Delete Pages.

2.	Type the number of the page you want to delete in the Delete Page box.

3.	From the Chapter list box, choose the name of the chapter in which the page appears.

To remove multiple pages

1.	Click Page, Delete Pages.

2.	Type the number of the first page you want to delete in the Delete Page box.

3.	Enable the Thru Page check box, and type the number of the last page you want to delete.

4.	From the Chapter list box, choose the name of the chapter in which the pages appear.

 Tip

•	You can also delete a selected page by pressing ALT + D.

 Related Topics


Copying and moving chapters and chapter components

You can reorder the chapters in your publications and you can move chapters and chapter components (such as pictures and text files) between publications. If you want to reuse a chapter, you can copy it and place it within the same publication or in a different publication.

When you copy a chapter, one copy remains in the original location while the other copy is placed in the new location. However, if you cut a chapter, it is removed from the original publication. When you cut, copy, or drag chapters between publications, both publications must be open for you to access and move the chapters and chapter components. Every publication must have at least one chapter, and you cannot cut a chapter if it is the only chapter in the publication.

To reorder a chapter by dragging

1.	If VENTURA Navigator is not open, click Tools, VENTURA Navigator.

2.	Choose Publication Manager from the VENTURA Navigator list box.

3.	Drag the chapter to the location you want.

To move chapter components within a publication

1.	If VENTURA Navigator is not open, click Tools, VENTURA Navigator.

2.	Choose Publication Manager from the VENTURA Navigator list box.

3.	Hold down SHIFT and drag the chapter component to the location you want.

 Tip

•	If you don't hold down SHIFT, you will copy the chapter component instead of moving it.

To move chapters and chapter components between publications

1.	If VENTURA Navigator is not open, click Tools, VENTURA Navigator.

2.	Choose Publication Manager from the VENTURA Navigator list box.

3.	Hold down SHIFT and drag the chapter to the location you want.

To copy and paste chapters and chapter components between publications

1.	If VENTURA Navigator is not open, click Tools, VENTURA Navigator.

2.	Choose Publication Manager from the VENTURA Navigator list box.

3.	Right-click the chapter you want to move, and click Copy.

4.	Right-click the title of the publication to which you want to move the chapter, and click Paste.

The chapter is placed at the end of the publication's list of chapters.

To cut and paste chapters and chapter components between publications

1.	If VENTURA Navigator is not open, click Tools, VENTURA Navigator.

2.	Choose Publication Manager from the VENTURA Navigator list box.

3.	Right-click the chapter you want to move, and click Cut.

4.	Right-click the title of the publication to which you want to move the chapter, and click Paste.

The chapter is placed at the end of the publication's list of chapters.

 Notes

•	The tags used to format your publication are stored in the publication's stylesheet, and not as part of a chapter. Therefore, if you move or copy a chapter from one publication to another, you may also have to move or copy the tags that you have applied in that chapter.

Tags that appear in the moved or copied chapter, but are not part of the publication's stylesheet are given the properties of a default tag. For example, if a paragraph tag does not exist in the publication into which the chapter was copied, Corel VENTURA applies the properties of the default paragraph tag (Body Text) to the missing tag. Each paragraph to which that tag was applied will display the properties of the default tag, and the missing tag will appear in the Tag Window in uppercase letters. If you want to copy the properties of the missing tag, you must copy the tag from the other publication or edit the tag's properties. For more information about copying tags, see "Copying tags from other publications." For more information about editing tags, see "Editing tag properties."

 Tip

•	In Page Layout view, you can drag files from VENTURA Navigator directly to a page.

 Related Topics


Moving through the publication


Overview: Moving through the publication
Moving through the publication

Corel VENTURA offers a variety of ways for you to move around your publication.

The Go To Page command

The Go To Page command, available from the Page menu and by right-clicking a file name in VENTURA Navigator, lets you move to a specific page, chapter, or file in your publication.

VENTURA Navigator

You can go directly to many publication elements using VENTURA Navigator. Double-click the chapter, file, picture, index entry, or other publication element to move directly to it. If you double-click a text file in VENTURA Navigator and it doesn't take you there, then the text file is not placed in the page. If you double-click a picture in VENTURA Navigator and it doesn't take you there, then the picture is not in a frame. For information about placing text in a frame, see "Adding text files to frames." For information about placing picture files in frames, see "Adding picture files to frames."

Scrolling

The scroll bar contains single arrows which let you move up or down by small amounts. It also contains double arrows which let you move up or down one page at a time. You can move to the top of your publication by clicking the top of the scroll bar or you can move to the bottom of your publication by clicking the bottom of the scroll bar. You can drag the slider to move any distance you want.

 Tip

•	For information about using shortcuts to move through your publication, see "Navigation shortcuts" in the online Help reference section.

 Related Topics


Moving between pages and chapters

You can move between the pages in your publication using the scroll bar, and between chapters using the Status Bar.

To move to the previous page

•	Click the Double Up Arrow button on the vertical scroll bar.

To move to the next page

•	Click the Double Down Arrow button on the vertical scroll bar.

To move to the first page of the previous chapter

•	Click the Go To Previous Chapter button on the Status Bar.

To move to the first page of the next chapter

•	Click the Go To Next Chapter button on the Status Bar.

 Related Topics


Using Auto Scroll

Auto Scroll lets you scroll through your publication quickly and without using the arrow keys or the scroll bars. Point the Auto Scroll arrow in the direction you want to move, and Auto Scroll scrolls through the publication for you. The scrolling speed increases if you move the arrow further away from the Auto Scroll tool and slows if you move the arrow closer to the Auto Scroll tool.

To move through a publication using Auto Scroll

1.	Open the Zoom tool flyout, and click the Auto Scroll tool.

2.	Click inside your publication.

3.	Do one of the following:

•	Move the mouse to the top of the page to move upward through the publication. An Up Arrow appears with the Auto Scroll tool.

•	Move the mouse to the bottom of the page to move downward through the publication. A Down Arrow appears with the Auto Scroll tool.

•	Move the mouse to the left of the page to move to the left. A Left Arrow appears with the Auto Scroll tool.

•	Move the mouse to the right of the page to move to the right. A Right Arrow appears with the Auto Scroll tool.

To stop Auto Scrolling

•	Click the mouse.

 Tip

•	You can also stop Auto Scrolling by pressing a key.

 Related Topics


Using the Pan Tool

When your publication is larger than its window, you can use the Pan Tool to drag areas of your publication into view. Using the Pan Tool is like moving a piece of paper on the top of a desk with your hand.

To move through a publication using the Pan Tool

1.	Open the Zoom flyout, and click the Pan Tool.

2.	Click in the publication, and drag in the direction you want to view.

 Related Topics


Moving to a specific section of the publication

You can move to a specific page, chapter, or text file of your publication using either VENTURA Navigator or the Go To Page command. You can move to a specific picture file using the VENTURA Navigator. If you use the Go To Page command to move to a text file, the text file must be loaded in a frame or the Go To Page command will not work.

If you use VENTURA Navigator to go to a text file, you can cycle through the pages of that text file by double-clicking. If you double-click a picture or frame that is repeated in the chapter, continuous double-clicking will move you from one occurrence of the picture or frame to the next.

To move to a specific page using the Go To Page command

1.	Click Page, Go To Page.

2.	Type the page number you want to move to in the Page box.

3.	Choose the type of page numbering you want from the Page Mode list box.

You can choose either Page Number or Page Counter.

4.	Click the Go To button.

To move to a specific chapter using the Go To Page command

1.	Click Page, Go To Page.

2.	Enable the Chapter check box.

3.	Choose the chapter you want to move to from the Chapter list box.

4.	Click the Go To button.

To move to a specific text file using the Go To Page command

1.	Click Page, Go To Page.

2.	Enable the File check box.

3.	Choose the file you want to move to from the File List box.

4.	Click the Go To button.

To move to a specific chapter, picture file, or text file using VENTURA Navigator

1.	If VENTURA Navigator is not open, click Tools, VENTURA Navigator.

2.	Double-click the name of the chapter, picture, or text file you want to move to.

 Related Topics


Moving between open publications

Publications must be open in order for you to move between them. In the Window menu, the active publication is preceded by a check mark. In VENTURA Navigator, the Open Book icon indicates the active publication.

To move between publications using VENTURA Navigator

1.	If VENTURA Navigator is not open, click Tools, VENTURA Navigator.

2.	Double-click the name of the publication you want to move to.

To move between publications using the Window menu

•	Click Window, and click the name of the publication you want to move to.

 Related Topics


Using VENTURA Library files


Overview: Using VENTURA Library files
Using VENTURA Library files

VENTURA Library files are collections of items such as pictures, text files, and stylesheets, that are conveniently organized so that you can add them to your publications. VENTURA Library files are displayed in their own windows so you can view their contents and add items from them to your publications easily. You can create your own VENTURA Library files and add many different kinds of items.

A VENTURA Library file can include the following items:

•	picture files

•	text files

•	selected text

•	chapters

•	frames

•	style sheets

•	OLE objects

•	graphic objects

•	tables

•	paragraph, frame, character, page, and rule tags

VENTURA Library files are useful for accessing items you want to organize. For example, you can create a VENTURA Library file for items you use often in your publications, or for all the items you use in a single publication. You could place a copy of a tag you created in one publication VENTURA Library file so that you can copy the tag to another publication.

You can link VENTURA Library text files and stylesheets to your publication. Linking puts a copy of the text file or stylesheet in your publication, but also allows you, or another user, to edit the text file or stylesheet and save the changes in the VENTURA Library file. Then other users who have the text file or stylesheet linked to their publication can get an updated copy without adding the file to their publication again. For more information about linking text files and stylesheets to a publication, see "Linking VENTURA Library text files and stylesheets."

Corel VENTURA 8 includes several VENTURA Library files with different themes which have already been created for you. These VENTURA Library files are in the X:\COREL\GRAPHICS8\VENTURA\LIBRARY folder, where "X" indicates the drive on your computer where Corel VENTURA 8 is located.

 Related Topics


Creating and opening VENTURA Library files

You can create a VENTURA Library file, or you can open an existing VENTURA Library file, including Corel VENTURA 7 Library files.

To create a VENTURA Library file

1.	Click Tools, VENTURA Library, New.

2.	Choose the drive and folder where you want to save your VENTURA Library file from the Save In list box.

3.	Type the name of the VENTURA Library file in the File Name box.

4.	Choose the Corel VENTURA Library (.VLB) file format from the Save as Type list box.

5.	Click Save.

To open an existing VENTURA Library file

1.	Click Tools, VENTURA Library, Open.

2.	Choose the drive where the VENTURA Library file is stored in the Look In list box.

3.	Double-click the folder where the VENTURA Library file is stored.

4.	Double-click the publication name.

 Note

•	Opening a Corel VENTURA 7 library launches the library conversion wizard.

•	The file extension for a VENTURA Library file is .VLB.

•	You can have multiple VENTURA Library files open at the same time.

•	Before you add or delete items from a VENTURA Library file, you need to check it out. For more information on checking out a VENTURA Library file, see "Adding and deleting items in VENTURA Library files."

 Related Topics


Saving and closing VENTURA Library files

Corel VENTURA automatically saves the contents of a VENTURA Library file each time the VENTURA Library file is closed. However, if you add a text file or stylesheet to a VENTURA Library file and then want to link the text file or stylesheet to your publication, you must save the VENTURA Library file. Before you close a VENTURA Library file, you must check it in to save changes you've made to linked text files and stylesheets.

To save a VENTURA Library file

•	Click the Check In button in the VENTURA Library window.

 Note

•	To add and delete items in the VENTURA Library file after checking it in, you must check it out.

To close a VENTURA Library file

1.	Click the Check In button in the VENTURA Library window.

2.	Click the Close button at the top-right corner of the VENTURA Library window.

 Related Topics


Adding and deleting items in VENTURA Library files

There are many ways to add items to VENTURA Library files [image] from the VENTURA Navigator, from Windows Explorer, from the Tag Window, from another VENTURA Library file, or from a publication you are working on.

You can delete items from VENTURA Library files easily. You may want to delete an item from a VENTURA Library file if you remove it from a publication and do not want to add it to any other publications.

Before you add or delete any items from a VENTURA Library, you must check the VENTURA Library out. When you check out a VENTURA Library file, no other user can add and delete items in it.

To add an item from the VENTURA Navigator to a VENTURA Library file

1.	Click the Check Out button in the VENTURA Library window.

2.	Click Tools, VENTURA Navigator.

3.	Drag the item from the VENTURA Navigator window to the VENTURA Library window.

To add an item from Windows Explorer to a VENTURA Library file

1.	Click the Check Out button in the VENTURA Library window.

2.	Open Windows Explorer.

3.	Drag the file from Windows Explorer to the VENTURA Library window.

To add an item from a VENTURA Library file to another VENTURA Library file

1.	Click the Check Out button in the VENTURA Library window.

2.	Click Tools, VENTURA Library, Open.

3.	Choose the drive where the VENTURA Library file is stored in the Look In list box.

4.	Double-click the folder where the VENTURA Library file is stored.

5.	Double-click the library name.

6.	Click the Check Out button in the second VENTURA Library window.

7.	Drag the item from one VENTURA Library window to the other VENTURA Library window.

To add an item from a publication to a VENTURA Library file

1.	Click the Check Out button in the VENTURA Library window.

2.	In the publication, select the item you want to add.

3.	Drag the item to the VENTURA Library window.

To add a table from a publication to a VENTURA Library file

1.	Click the Check Out button in the VENTURA Library window.

2.	In the publication, select the table you want to add.

3.	Drag the table to the VENTURA Library window.

To add a tag from a publication to a VENTURA Library file

1.	Click the Check Out button in the VENTURA Library window.

2.	Click Tools, Tag Window.

3.	Drag a tag from the Tag Window to the VENTURA Library window.

To delete an item from a VENTURA Library file

1.	Click the Check Out button in the VENTURA Library window.

2.	Right-click an item, and click delete.

 Note

•	To rename an item after you've added it to a VENTURA Library file, click the Check Out button, right-click the item, and click Properties. Type a name in the Name box. This name is a reference name and does not affect the filenames of picture and text files.

 Related Topics


Using VENTURA Library file items in your publications

VENTURA Library files let you use items simply by dragging them to the location where you want them in your publication. By doing this, you add a copy of the item to your publication.

You can also use text files and stylesheets in your publication by linking them. Linking lets more than one user share text files and stylesheets. For more information on linking text files and stylesheets, see "Linking VENTURA Library text files and stylesheets."

To use a VENTURA Library file item in a publication

1.	Open the VENTURA Library file.

2.	Select an item and drag it to the desired location.

To add a	drag to

text or picture file	a page in the active document or a chapter in the VENTURA Navigator window (see Note)

selected text	the page containing the insertion point

chapter	a document in the VENTURA Navigator window (see Note)

frame	a page in the active document

stylesheet	any page in the active document or a document in the VENTURA Navigator window

OLE object	a page in the active document

graphic object	a page in the active document

table	the page containing the insertion point

tag	a page in the active document (The tag is added to the tag list in the Property Bar, or to the publication or the stylesheet in the VENTURA Navigator)

 Notes

•	A text file added to the library from the VENTURA Navigator or Windows Explorer and dragged onto a page is placed in the base page frame or the selected drawn frame.

•	Externally-referenced files in a chapter become embedded when you add the chapter to a VENTURA Library file. If you want the files to remain external, add the chapter to your publication, then re-import the files.

•	To search for an item in a VENTURA Library file, right-click outside the items in the VENTURA Library window, and click Find. Type the name of the item you want to find in the Find Item Name box.

 Related Topics


Setting VENTURA Library viewing options

You can set a VENTURA Library window to display in different ways and to show different types of information. For example, you can display the items in a VENTURA Library window in large icons, sort them by date, and filter out tags. You can also view the following properties of a VENTURA Library file in the Library Properties dialog box:

•	file name

•	version number

•	the total number of items in the VENTURA Library file

•	the date on which an item was created

•	the date on which an item was modified

To change the view in a VENTURA Library window

1.	Right-click outside the items in the VENTURA Library window, and click View.

2.	Choose one of the following:

•	Large Icons

•	Small Icons

To view the names of items in a VENTURA Library window

1.	Right-click outside the items in the VENTURA Library window, and click View.

2.	Click Details.

To view items in a VENTURA Library window by name, type, date, or size

1.	Right-click outside the items in the VENTURA Library window, and click Sort.

2.	Choose one of the following:

•	By Name

•	By Type

•	By Date (earliest to latest)

•	By Size (smallest to largest)

To filter the VENTURA Library window view

1.	Right-click outside the items in the VENTURA Library window, and click Filter.

2.	Disable the check box beside each item you don't want to view in your VENTURA Library window.

You can choose from Publication Components, Files, Frames, Pictures, OLE Objects, Tags, and Text.

To view the properties of an item in a VENTURA Library window

•	Right-click an item, and click Properties.

To change a VENTURA Library item's name

1.	Right-click the icon of a VENTURA Library item, and click Properties.

2.	Type a new name in the Name text box.

To change a VENTURA Library item's description

1.	Right-click the icon of a VENTURA Library item, and click Properties.

2.	Type a new description in the Description text box.

 Related Topics


Viewing the check out status of a VENTURA Library file

Viewing the check out status shows you if the VENTURA Library file and the items in it are checked out and by whom. This tells you if an item is free to be checked out and if someone is editing an item you have linked to your publication.

To view the check out status of VENTURA Library file

1.	Right-click in the VENTURA Library window.

2.	Click Multiuser, Check Out Status.

 Note

•	If someone is editing a linked item, you know you will have to get the latest version of that item when the person is finished editing. For more information about getting the latest version of a VENTURA Library file item, see "Getting the latest version of a linked VENTURA Library text file or stylesheet."

•	If you did not start Corel VENTURA with a user name (that is, you are not on a computer network), then an asterisk will appear instead of a user name when you view the check out status of a VENTURA Library file item you have checked out.

 Related Topics


Linking VENTURA Library text files and stylesheets


Overview: Linking VENTURA Library text files and stylesheets
Linking VENTURA Library text files and stylesheets

Text files and stylesheets in VENTURA Library files can be shared by multiple users on the same network. This allows all users to contribute to and use all text files and stylesheets in VENTURA Library files accessible through the network. You can use this feature to let multiple users edit a text file that everyone has linked to their publications, or to let one user maintain a consistent stylesheet that all users link to their publications.

 Related Topics


Linking a VENTURA Library text file or stylesheet to your publication

Linking a VENTURA Library text file or stylesheet to your publication allows you to get updated versions of the text file or stylesheet from the VENTURA Library file. Linking is a way to share a text file or stylesheet between publications. When a VENTURA Library text file or stylesheet is linked to your publication, the copy that is in your publication is read-only and cannot be edited unless you check it out. In order to create a link, the VENTURA Library file must be checked in and you must save the publication before you establish a link. For more information on editing VENTURA Library text files and stylesheets, see "Editing linked VENTURA Library text files and stylesheets."

The VENTURA Navigator has special icons for VENTURA Library text files and stylesheets.

Icon	Item

Linked text file

Linked stylesheet

To link a text file or stylesheet from a VENTURA Library file

1.	Open the VENTURA Library file containing the item you want to link.

2.	Open the publication into which you want the text file or stylesheet linked.

3.	Open the VENTURA Navigator window.

4.	Do one of the following:

•	Press SHIFT + CTRL and drag the text file to the chapter in the VENTURA Navigator window.

•	Press SHIFT + CTRL and drag the stylesheet to the publication in the VENTURA Navigator window.

 Note

•	You can open a VENTURA Library file by right-clicking the linked item in the VENTURA Navigator window, then clicking Linked Item, Open Library. The VENTURA Library file associated with the item will open.

 Related Topics


Viewing the link status of VENTURA Library file items

Viewing the link status shows you the name of the VENTURA Library file, its location, and, if the VENTURA Library file is checked out. You can also see if someone else has the VENTURA Library file item linked to your publication checked out.

To view the link status of a VENTURA Library file item

1.	Right-click the linked VENTURA Library file item in the VENTURA Navigator window.

2.	Click Linked Item, Link Status.

 Note

•	If someone is editing a linked item, you know you will have to get the latest version of that item when the person is finished editing. For more information about getting the latest version of a VENTURA Library file item, see "Getting the latest version of a linked VENTURA Library text file or stylesheet."

•	If you did not start Corel VENTURA with a user name (that is, you are not on a computer network), then an asterisk will appear instead of a user name when you view the link status of a VENTURA Library file item you have linked to your publication.

•	You can open a VENTURA Library file by right-clicking the linked item in the VENTURA Navigator window, then clicking Linked Item, Open Library. The VENTURA Library file associated with the item will open.

 Related Topics


Getting the latest version of a linked VENTURA Library text file or stylesheet

Getting the latest version of a text file or stylesheet from a VENTURA Library file updates your copy of the stylesheet or text file with the most recent checked in changes made to it. You can get the latest version even if the stylesheet or text file is currently checked out.

To get the latest version of a VENTURA Library file text file or stylesheet

1.	In the VENTURA Navigator window, right-click the linked item.

2.	Click Linked Item, Get Latest Version.

 Note

•	You can open a VENTURA Library file by right-clicking the linked item in the VENTURA Navigator window, then clicking Linked Item, Open Library. The VENTURA Library file associated with the item will open.

 Related Topics


Editing linked VENTURA Library text files and stylesheets


Overview: Editing linked VENTURA Library text files and stylesheets
Editing linked VENTURA Library text files and stylesheets

In order for you to edit text files and stylesheets linked to your publications, you have to check them out. When you have checked out your linked VENTURA Library text files or stylesheets, simply edit them as you would text files and stylesheets that are embedded in your publication. In order to save changes to linked VENTURA Library text files and stylesheets you have edited, you must check them in.

For more information about checking out and checking in VENTURA Library text files and stylesheets, see "Checking out linked VENTURA Library text files and stylesheets."

 Related Topics


Checking out linked VENTURA Library text files and stylesheets

A stylesheet or text file in a VENTURA Library file can be linked to publications on the computers of many users. However, only one user can edit the stylesheet or text file at a time [image] the user who has the stylesheet or text file checked out. Before you check out a VENTURA Library file stylesheet or text file, it must be linked to your publication.

Undoing a check out of a VENTURA Library file item makes the copy of the item in your publication read-only and reverts the copy of the stylesheet or text file in the VENTURA Library file to that state it was before you checked it out. Any changes you have made since you checked it out last will be lost.

You can undo a check out of a stylesheet or text file that another user has checked out. The stylesheet or text file reverts to the state it was in before it was checked out, and it becomes available for another user to check out. The copy of the stylesheet or text file remains linked to the publication of the user who checked it out, but their copy becomes read-only.

When you save a VENTURA Library file item you have checked out, the changes you have made are saved to the copy in your publication, not to the VENTURA Library file itself. In order to update the VENTURA Library file, you have to check the item in. When you check in an item, the changes are saved, and the copy you have in your Corel VENTURA publication becomes read-only. In order to continue working on the item, you have to check it out.

To check out a VENTURA Library file text file or stylesheet

1.	Right-click the linked VENTURA Library file text file or stylesheet in the VENTURA Navigator window.

2.	Click Linked Item, Check Out.

 Note

•	A VENTURA Library text file or stylesheet can only be edited in Corel VENTURA 8.

To undo a check out of a VENTURA Library file text file or stylesheet

1.	Right-click the linked VENTURA Library text file or stylesheet in the VENTURA Navigator window.

2.	Click Linked Item, Link Status.

3.	Click the linked item.

4.	Right-click, then click Undo Check Out.

To check in a linked VENTURA Library file text file or stylesheet

1.	Right-click the linked VENTURA Library text file or stylesheet in the VENTURA Navigator window.

3.	Click Linked Item, Check In.

 Note

•	You can open a VENTURA Library file by right-clicking the linked text file or stylesheet in the VENTURA Navigator window, and clicking Linked Item, Open Library. The VENTURA Library file associated with the text file or stylesheet will open.


Using tags


Overview: Using tags
Using tags

Tags are one of the most useful and powerful formatting features of Corel VENTURA. Tags, which are sometimes referred to as styles in word processing applications, are collections of formatting attributes that you can apply to pages, paragraphs, selected text, rules, or frames. The tags for each publication are stored in an stylesheet.

The following picture shows a publication with different paragraph tags applied to the text.

The benefit of using tags to format your publication is that they allow you to create a consistent look throughout your publication while only defining your formatting once. Tags can be formatted directly and then applied throughout your publication or you can format your pages, paragraphs, selected text, rules, or frames individually, and then create a tag from that formatting.

For example, when you want to format a paragraph in your publication you can select the paragraph and use the Paragraph Properties dialog box to format that paragraph. You can repeat this process for each paragraph in your publication. However, you can save time by creating a paragraph tag with that formatting and apply it to any paragraph in your publication. This way, the formatting is done only once, but all of your paragraphs have the same formatting applied.

Tags also make it fast and easy to incorporate design changes. If you decide to make formatting changes, you only need to modify the appropriate tag and all of the items in your publication using that tag are automatically reformatted. For example, if you want to change the font used for your paragraphs, you can choose a new font for the tag, and all of the paragraphs will update automatically.

Corel VENTURA tags

Corel VENTURA uses the following types of tags:

•	Page tags [image] allow you to apply the same page size and orientation, margins, columns, repeating graphic objects and frames, headers, and footers, and other page formatting to any page in your publication. Each page tag includes both a left- and right-facing.

•	Paragraph tags [image] allow you to apply the same font properties, text color, alignment, spacing, text effects, such as superscript and subscript, and other paragraph properties to any paragraph in your publication.

•	Character tags [image] allow to apply the same font properties, text color, and position, such as superscript and subscript, to any text you select using the Pick tool. Character tags can also be applied to text that is already formatted with a paragraph tag.

•	Frame tags [image] allow you to apply the same margins, columns, contents, and other frame formatting to any frame in your publication. Frame tags also allow you to omit the size and position from the frame tag. This allows you to apply the same formatting, while letting you change the frame's size and position on the page without having to update the tag.

•	Rule tags [image] allow you to apply the same rules to any page, paragraph, frame, table, or table cell in your publication. Each rule is comprised of up to three parallel lines which can be formatted independently.

Using the Tag Window

The Tag Window lets you manage all of your tags. Using the Tag Window, you can create new tags, change tag formatting, apply tags, and import tags from other publications. You can even change tag properties directly inside the Tag Window. For more information, see "Viewing and customizing the Tag Window."

 Note

•	Each page, paragraph, frame, and rule in your publication has a tag applied to it by default. For example, when you insert a page in your publication, the Default Page tag is applied, and each new paragraph has the Body Text paragraph tag applied.

 Related Topics


Overview: Updating and overriding tag formatting
Updating and overriding tag formatting

Even with a tag applied to an item in your publication, you can still apply formatting to it individually. For example, if you are using a paragraph tag which uses the Times New Roman font, you can select any paragraph which has that tag applied and change the font to Wingdings. The formatting change applies only to that paragraph and does not affect the tag. This is referred to as overriding a tag. You can override the formatting of any paragraph, frame, or page tag used in your publication. For more information about overriding tags, see "Overriding tag properties."

When you override a tag, a flag ( [image]) appears in the tag's list box on the Property Bar when you select the item. In the example above, this flag appears in the Paragraph Tag list box on the Property Bar. You can also view the formatting differences from the tag using the properties dialog box for the selected item. For more information, see "Viewing formatting differences from an item's tag."

If you have overridden a tag, you can update the changes to the tag. This applies the changes to the tag, and every paragraph using that tag is updated immediately. You can also create a new tag based on the formatting changes.

For more information about updating tags, see the following:

•	"Updating page tag properties."

•	"Updating paragraph tag properties."

•	"Updating frame tag properties."

 Related Topics


Undoing and redoing changes


Overview: Undoing and redoing changes
Undoing and redoing changes

The Undo command reverses changes you make to your publication, starting with the most recent change and moving back one by one. If you undo an action and then realize you want to keep it, you can use the Redo command to redo the action you last undid. The Undo/Redo command is publication specific, so even if you open multiple publications, the command remembers which actions were executed in which publication.

The Undo list is useful if you need to undo a series of actions. It shows each action you have performed in chronological order and lets you choose the actions you want to undo. Once you choose an action, every action you performed after it will be undone. The Redo list works in the same way, but each of the actions are redone instead of undone.

 Related Topics


Undoing actions

You can reverse up to 99 actions using the Undo command. You can choose to undo your actions one at a time using the Undo command or all at once using the Undo List button. The number of levels you can undo depends on how many undo levels you have set in the Options dialog box. Corel VENTURA must keep a temporary file for each undo level, so the more undo levels you set, the more system resources are required.

The Undo command works specially when you are using the Node Edit tool. When you use the Node Edit tool, you need to refresh the screen in order to see the changes you make. You can manipulate several nodes and then refresh the screen, but all of the changes you made between each screen refresh are counted as one action. If you use the Undo command, all the actions between the two screen refreshes are undone. For information about using the Node Edit tool, see "Shaping frames."

You can also undo all of the changes you have made since you last saved using the Revert command. Revert returns you to the last saved copy of your publication.

To undo the last action you performed

•	Click Edit, Undo.

To undo a series of actions

1.	Click the Undo List button on the Standard toolbar.

2.	Choose the first action that you want to undo.

The action you select and all actions you have performed since that action are reversed.

To set the number of undo levels

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, click General.

3.	Type a value in the Undo/Redo Levels box.

To revert to the last saved copy of your publication

•	Click File, Revert.

 Related Topics


Redoing and repeating actions

You can use the Redo command to reinstate an action. If you want to redo a series of actions, you can use the Redo list. If you want to repeat the last action you performed, the Repeat command lets you repeat it as many times as you want.

To redo an action you have just undone

•	Click Edit, Redo.

To redo a series of actions

1.	Click the Redo List button on the Standard toolbar.

2.	Choose the first action that you want to redo.

To repeat the last action you performed

•	Click Edit, Repeat.

 Related Topics


Using context-sensitive dragging


Overview: Using context-sensitive dragging
Using context-sensitive dragging

Context-sensitive drag simplifies many procedures by letting you drag an item using the right mouse button. When you drop the item, a menu appears that lets you choose the action you want to perform. Context-sensitive drag is most effective with text, graphic objects, and frames.

When you drag one of these items, symbols appear that indicate the type of item that is being dragged and the type of item it is being dragged to. The symbol on the left indicates the item you are dragging, while the symbol on the right indicates the item you are dragging to. The attributes of the item that is being dragged are applied to the stationary item.

Context-sensitive drag lets you perform a range of actions [image] many are specific to the items you are working with, however, moving and copying are universal to all items. The following examples are just some of the actions you can perform using context-sensitive drag.

•	You can anchor a frame by clicking it with the right mouse button, dragging it to the text you want to anchor it to, and choosing Anchor Frame from the menu that appears.

•	You can click selected text with the right mouse button, drag it to a frame, and add it as a caption.

•	You can quickly format text by clicking the text that contains the formatting you want with the right mouse button, dragging it to the text you want to format, and choosing Apply Tag, Apply Properties, Apply Fill, or Apply Rules from the menu that appears.


Working with bitmaps


Overview: Working with bitmaps
Working with bitmaps

Bitmaps are made of individual dots called pixels (picture elements) that are arranged and colored differently to form a pattern. When you zoom in on a bitmap, you can see the individual squares that make up the total image. Increasing the size of a bitmap has the effect of increasing individual pixels, making lines and shapes appear jagged. Reducing the size of a bitmap also distorts the original image because pixels are removed to reduce the overall image size.

Bitmaps, as well as vector graphics, must be imported into Corel VENTURA before you can work with them. You cannot manipulate an externally referenced bitmap or a bitmap inserted as an Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) object. Bitmaps and vector graphics, once imported into Corel VENTURA frames, are called pictures and differ from graphic objects. Bitmaps and vectors are created in other applications and inserted in Corel VENTURA publications, but graphic objects are created with the drawing tools found in Corel VENTURA. For more information about importing bitmaps, and about the difference between bitmaps and vector graphics, see "Importing and exporting pictures."

Corel VENTURA lets you modify your bitmaps in a variety of ways. You can change a bitmap's orientation, size, and resolution, convert a bitmap to a different color mode, or adjust a bitmap's color and tone. You can apply special effects to a bitmap, such as adding a light source. You can also scan images directly into Corel VENTURA and then use the bitmap editing tools to retouch and enhance them.

 Notes

•	For a full listing of the picture file formats Corel VENTURA supports, see "Imported picture file formats."

•	You can edit both embedded and externally referenced bitmaps directly in Corel PHOTO-PAINT by right-clicking them in Corel VENTURA and clicking Picture, Edit In Corel PHOTO-PAINT.

 More Detailed Information


Changing bitmap orientation, size, and resolution


Overview: Changing bitmap orientation, size, and resolution
Changing bitmap orientation, size, and resolution

After you import a bitmap into Corel VENTURA, you can change its orientation, size, and resolution.

You can create a mirror image of a bitmap by flipping it, or you can straighten and deskew it to position it properly on the page. You can increase or decrease its dimensions individually or resample the width and height proportionately.

You can change a bitmap's resolution by unsampling or downsampling. Unsampling increases a bitmap's resolution (that is, adds more pixels per unit of measurement). Downsampling decreases image resolution. In Corel VENTURA, downsampling provides much better results than unsampling. Unsampling adds pixels that don't exist, which Corel VENTURA accomplishes through a process known as interpolation.

You'll rarely need to increase image resolution, but if you do, it is better to rescan the original image at a higher resolution than to unsample.

 Note

•	Bitmaps must be embedded before you can manipulate them. In Corel VENTURA, you cannot manipulate an externally referenced bitmap or a bitmap inserted as an OLE object. You can edit both embedded and externally referenced bitmaps directly in Corel PHOTO-PAINT by right-clicking them in Corel VENTURA and clicking Picture, Edit In Corel PHOTO-PAINT.

 Related Topics


Deskewing a bitmap

You can automatically adjust a skewed or imperfectly positioned bitmap and position it squarely on the page. Deskewing is very useful for correcting scanned images that were misaligned on the scanning surface.

To deskew a bitmap

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Deskew.

 Related Topics


Flipping a bitmap

You can flip a bitmap to obtain a mirror image of it. You can flip bitmaps horizontally or vertically.

To flip a bitmap horizontally

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Flip Horizontally.

To flip a bitmap vertically

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Type 180 in the Rotation Angle box on the Property Bar.

 Note:

•	To flip the bitmap to its original vertical position, type 360 in the Rotation Angle box on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Resampling bitmaps

Resampling changes the resolution or size of a bitmap and alters the number of pixels it contains. You can increase the resolution by increasing the number of pixels or decrease the resolution by decreasing the number of pixels.

You can resize a bitmap using absolute or percentage values, change the horizontal and vertical bitmap resolution (dots-per-inch), and correct any bitmap distortion that was created during resampling.

To resize a bitmap

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Resample.

3.	Type values in the Width and Height boxes.

 Tip

•	You can view the bitmap's dimensions in another unit of measurement by choosing the option you want from the Image Size list box.

To resize a bitmap using percentage values

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Type a value in the Width and Height boxes to the immediate left of the percent signs (%).

To adjust a bitmap's resolution

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Resample.

3.	Type values in the Horizontal DPI and Vertical DPI boxes.

 Tips

•	Enabling the Anti-Alias check box creates a smooth, clear bitmap by removing jagged edges.

•	Enabling the Maintain Aspect Ratio check box lets you preserve the current bitmap proportions, both in dimension and resolution. When you type a value in one box, the value in the other box will adjust automatically.

•	Enabling the Maintain Original Size check box lets you change the resolution and processing quality without affecting the bitmap file size.

•	You can resize and resample a bitmap while importing it into Corel VENTURA. For more information about importing bitmaps, see "Importing pictures".

 Related Topics


Changing a bitmap's color mode


Overview: Changing a bitmap's color mode
Changing a bitmap's color mode

When you display and print bitmaps in Corel VENTURA, the colors that you see are based on color modes. Color modes define the color characteristics of a bitmap and are described in terms of their component colors and bit depth. For example, the RGB (24-bit) mode is composed of red, green, and blue values and has a bit depth of 24 bits (which means that it can produce 16 million colors). Similarly, the CMYK (32-bit) mode is composed of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black values and has a bit depth of 32 bits (which means that it can produce over 4 billion colors).

In addition to determining the number of colors that a bitmap can contain, color modes affect the number of channels and the file size of a bitmap. When you convert a bitmap from one color mode to another, you are not only changing the way that your computer deals with the bitmap, you are also shifting it into another color space. Color spaces are models used to organize visual color. When you shift a bitmap from one color space to another, the appearance of the bitmap can change noticeably. For example, when you convert an RGB bitmap to the CMYK color mode, the color values in the RGB color gamut that lie outside the CMYK color gamut are adjusted to fall within the CMYK gamut. The subtle color values that are lost in conversions cannot be recovered by converting the bitmap back to the original color mode.

Because the conversion process can result in a loss of color information, it's best to edit the bitmap in its original color mode and then convert it to a new color mode. If you want to edit the original bitmap after you convert it or if you want to convert the bitmap to many different color modes, save a copy of the original bitmap. Some bitmaps cannot be converted directly to other color modes. The color modes that are not available for the selected bitmap are disabled in the Convert submenu of the Format menu.

There are seven color modes available in Corel VENTURA:

•	Black-and-White (1-bit)

•	16-color (4-bit)

•	Grayscale (8-bit)

•	Duotone (8-bit)

•	Paletted (8-bit)

•	RGB (24-bit)

•	CMYK (32-bit)

 Notes

•	For more information about color modes and color models, see "Working with color."

•	Bitmaps must be embedded before you can manipulate them. In Corel VENTURA, you cannot manipulate an externally referenced bitmap or a bitmap inserted as an OLE object. You can edit both embedded and externally referenced bitmaps directly in Corel PHOTO-PAINT by right-clicking them in Corel VENTURA and clicking Picture, Edit In Corel PHOTO-PAINT.

•	You can also import bitmaps in the Grayscale (16-bit)), RGB (48-bit), or NTSC video color mode. However, in Corel VENTURA, you cannot convert already imported bitmaps to any of these three color modes.

 More Detailed Information
 Related Topics


Converting bitmaps to the Black-and-White, 16-colors, Grayscale, RGB, and CMYK color modes


Overview: Converting bitmaps to the Black-and-White, 16-colors, Grayscale, RGB, and CMYK color modes
Converting bitmaps to the Black-and-White, 16-colors, Grayscale, RGB, and CMYK color modes

When you convert a bitmap to a different color mode, you are changing the structure of the colors that make up the bitmap. This change can affect how the bitmap is displayed and printed and can also affect its file size. Before you convert a bitmap and alter its color characteristics, remember that you are actually shifting the bitmap to a different color space which could result in a loss of information.

Converting to Black-and-White

The Black-and-White color mode is a 1-bit color mode that stores bitmaps as two solid colors [image] black and white [image] with no gradations. Convert to the Black-and-White color mode to create line art and simple graphics.

Converting to 16-colors

A 16-color, or 4-bit, bitmap uses a fixed palette of the 16 VGA colors to attempt to reproduce all the colors in an image. Dithering (alternating pixels of different colors) gives the illusion of creating a color not in the palette. For example, orange might be represented by dithering red and yellow pixels.

Because of the dithering, a bitmap may look significantly different at different zoom values.

Converting to Grayscale

Each pixel in a grayscale bitmap has a brightness value ranging from 0 (black) to 255 (white). The 8-bit Grayscale color mode uses these 256 shades of gray to display an image. If you want to convert a bitmap to the Duotone color mode, you must first convert the bitmap to the Grayscale color mode.

Converting to RGB

RGB bitmaps have three 8-bit channels. Each channel is assigned one of the primary colors [image] red, green, or blue. The RGB color mode is the mode that computer monitors use to display colors.

Converting to CMYK

Use the CMYK color mode to print bitmaps using cyan, magenta, yellow, and black, the process colors that are used to print color separations. When you convert to the CMYK color mode, each pixel in the original bitmap is assigned a value for each of the corresponding process inks. Before you convert bitmaps to CMYK, it's important to calibrate your system correctly. For more information about calibration, see "Working with color."

 Note

•	Bitmaps must be embedded before you can manipulate them. In Corel VENTURA, you cannot manipulate an externally referenced bitmap or a bitmap inserted as an OLE object. You can edit both embedded and externally referenced bitmaps directly in Corel PHOTO-PAINT by right-clicking them in Corel VENTURA and clicking Picture, Edit In Corel PHOTO-PAINT.

 Related Topics


Converting a bitmap to the Black-and-White color mode

Black-and-White is a 1-bit color mode with two possible colors: black and white. This color mode is useful for line art and simple bitmaps.

There are four methods for converting bitmaps to black-and-white:

•	Line Art [image] produces high contrast black and white images. All colors with a grayscale value lower than the specified Threshold value turn black; all colors with a grayscale value higher than the specified Threshold value turn white.

•	Ordered [image] organizes the gray levels into repeating geometric patterns of black and white pixels. Solid colors are emphasized and image edges are hard. Ordered dithering is best suited to uniform colors such as those that appear in charts and graphs.

•	Error Diffusion [image] scatters black and white pixels randomly, making edges and colors softer. Error diffusion is best suited to photographic images.

•	Halftone [image] creates different shades of gray by varying the pattern of black and white pixels on the image.

To convert a bitmap to the Black-and-White color mode using the Line Art conversion method

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Convert, Black & White (1-bit).

3.	Enable the Line Art button.

4.	Type a value in the Threshold box.

To convert a bitmap to the Black-and-White color mode using the Ordered or Error Diffusion conversion method

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Convert, Black & White (1-bit).

3.	Enable the Ordered or the Error Diffusion button.

To convert a bitmap to the Black-and-White color mode using the Halftone conversion method

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Convert, Black & White (1-bit).

3.	Enable the Halftone button.

4.	Choose an option from the Screen Type list box.

5.	Type a value in the Lines Per Unit box.

6.	Type a value for the angle of the halftone screen in the Degrees box.

 Related Topics


Converting a bitmap to the 16-colors mode

You can convert a bitmap to the 16-colors mode to create non-photographic quality bitmaps when you are printing to a low-end color printer or when you want to minimize the demands on your computer's resources.

To convert a bitmap to the 16-colors mode

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Convert, 16-colors (4-bit).

 Related Topics


Converting a bitmap to the Grayscale color mode

Although Grayscale bitmaps are often referred to as "black-and-white," they are actually composed of many shades of gray, ranging from black to white.

The following illustration shows a bitmap converted from the RGB color mode to the Grayscale color mode.

To convert a bitmap to the Grayscale color mode

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Convert, Grayscale.

 Tip

•	If you want to convert a bitmap to the Duotone color mode, you must first convert the bitmap to the Grayscale color mode.

 Related Topics


Converting a bitmap to the RGB color mode

When you convert a bitmap to the RGB color mode, it is displayed using varying amounts of red (R), green (G), and blue (B). The RGB color mode is often used to create digital images because it is based on the color model used by most color monitors.

The following illustration shows a bitmap converted from the CMYK color mode to the RGB color mode.

To convert a bitmap to the RGB color mode

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Convert, RGB Color (24-bit).

 Related Topics


Converting a bitmap to the CMYK color mode

The CMYK color mode is based on cyan, magenta, yellow, and black inks. You can use the CMYK color mode to create professional-quality images that you can print to color separations or to a CMYK printer. Before you convert to the CMYK color mode, specify a color profile in Corel Color Profile wizard. By default, Corel Color Profile wizard uses a Generic Profile for CMYK conversions. For more information about the Corel Color Profile wizard, see "Setting and tuning color profiles".

The following illustration shows a bitmap converted from the RGB color mode to the CMYK color mode.

To convert a bitmap to the CMYK color mode

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Convert, CMYK Color (32-bit).

 Note

•	When you convert a bitmap from the RGB color mode to the CMYK color mode, you shift it to a smaller color space, and this results in a loss of color information. The color of your RGB bitmap may change noticeably.

 Related Topics


Converting bitmaps to the Paletted color mode


Overview: Converting bitmaps to the Paletted color mode
Converting bitmaps to the Paletted color mode

The Paletted color mode is an 8-bit color mode that stores and displays bitmaps using up to 256 colors. You can convert a complex bitmap to the Paletted color mode to reduce file size [image] which is especially important for Internet publications [image] and to allow more precise control over the colors chosen for the converted bitmap.

When you convert a bitmap to the Paletted color mode, Corel VENTURA creates a color index or palette which lists the colors in the bitmap. Corel VENTURA can produce the palette from the bitmap itself, from predefined palettes, or from custom palettes originally created from other bitmaps. For more precise control over the colors contained in the palette, you can specify the number of colors and the range sensitivity to apply throughout the conversion.

Smoothing

When you smooth a bitmap, Corel VENTURA analyzes the color differences around each pixel in your bitmap and blends the color transitions where abrupt color changes occur. Smoothing creates a softly blurred appearance on the bitmap.

Dithering

Dithering places pixels with specific colors or values relative to other pixels of specific colors. The relationship of one colored pixel to another helps to create the appearance of additional colors; however, these colors do not actually exist in the palette. There are two types of dithering: error diffusion and ordered dithering. Error diffusion scatters pixels irregularly, making edges and colors softer. Ordered dithering places pixels on the page so that solid colors are emphasized and edges are harder.

Range sensitivity

You can specify a range sensitivity color for the palette if you want more colors in the specified color's range to be used in the conversion.

 Note

•	Bitmaps must be embedded before you can manipulate them. In Corel VENTURA, you cannot manipulate an externally referenced bitmap or a bitmap inserted as an OLE object. You can edit both embedded and externally referenced bitmaps directly in Corel PHOTO-PAINT by right-clicking them in Corel VENTURA and clicking Picture, Edit In Corel PHOTO-PAINT.

 Related Topics


Converting a bitmap to the Paletted color mode

You can convert bitmaps to the Paletted color mode by choosing one of ten possible palette types.

The following illustration shows a bitmap converted to the Paletted color mode with the Range sensitivity set for the blue colors in the image.

To convert a bitmap to the Paletted color mode

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Convert, Paletted (8-bit).

3.	In the Convert To Paletted dialog box, click the Options tab.

4.	Choose a palette type from the Palette list box:

•	Uniform [image] provides a range of 256 colors with equal parts of red, green, and blue

•	Standard VGA [image] provides the Standard VGA 16-color palette

•	Adaptive [image] preserves the bitmap's individual colors (the entire color spectrum)

•	Optimized [image] creates a palette based on the highest percentage of colors in the bitmap. If you choose Optimized, you can also select a range sensitivity color for your palette. For more information, see "Choosing a range sensitivity color for a paletted bitmap".

•	Black Body [image] contains colors that are based on temperature, for example, black (cold), red, orange, yellow, and white (hot)

•	Grayscale [image] provides 256 shades of gray, ranging from black (0) to white (255)

•	System [image] provides the predefined palette of colors used by your operating system

•	Microsoft Internet Explorer [image] provides the predefined Microsoft Internet Explorer colors

•	Netscape Navigator [image] provides the predefined Netscape Navigator colors

•	Custom [image] allows you to add colors to create your own customized color palette. If you choose Custom, click the Open button beside the Palette list box, locate the custom palette in the Open Palette dialog box, and click Open.

5.	Choose a dithering option from the Dithering list box:

•	None [image] disables dithering

•	Ordered [image] approximates color blends using fixed dot patterns. This dithering type applies more quickly than Error Diffusion but is less accurate.

•	Error Diffusion [image] approximates color blends by scattering pixels irregularly, making edges and colors softer

 Tips

•	You can also set conversion options by choosing one of the preset conversion settings from the Presets list box.

•	Because all conversions result in some loss of information, it's a good idea to preview the colors that will be used to display the paletted bitmap on the Processed Palette page of the Convert To Paletted dialog box. Previewing lets you alter the conversion options without permanently affecting the bitmap.

 Related Topics


Saving and loading conversion options for a paletted bitmap

After you choose a palette and set the dithering and range sensitivity for the conversion of your bitmap, you might want to save your settings for later use with other bitmaps.

To save your conversion options

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Convert, Paletted (8-bit).

3.	Select the desired conversion options.

4.	Click the Add button.

5.	Type a name in the Save New Preset As box in the Save Preset dialog box.

The palette, dithering, smoothing, and color sensitivity options are saved as a preset that you can use in future Corel VENTURA sessions.

To load preset conversion options

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Convert, Paletted (8-bit).

3.	Choose a conversion preset from the Presets list box.

The palette, dithering, smoothing, and color sensitivity options stored in the preset are applied to the current bitmap.

 Note

•	To preview the bitmap conversion in the Result window, select your options, then click the Preview button.

To load a custom color palette

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Convert, Paletted (8-bit).

3.	Click the Open button.

4.	In the Open Palette dialog box, choose the drive where the color palette is stored.

5.	Double-click the folder where the color palette is stored.

6.	Double-click the filename.

 Tip

•	To remove a preset that you have saved, choose the name from the Presets list box and click the Remove button.

 Related Topics


Choosing a range sensitivity color for a paletted bitmap

When you choose a range sensitivity color for a bitmap, that color acts as the focus color for the paletted conversion. You can also adjust the color and specify how important that color is in the bitmap that you are converting. Range sensitivity is only available when you choose the Optimized palette type.

To choose a range sensitivity color for a paletted bitmap

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Convert, Paletted (8-bit).

3.	In the Convert To Paletted dialog box, click the Options tab and choose Optimized from the Palette list box.

4.	Enable the Color Range Sensitivity To box.

5.	Do one of the following:

•	Click the Eyedropper tool and click a color on the bitmap.

•	Click the Color Range Sensitivity To color picker, and choose a color.

•	Click the Other button at the bottom of the Color Range Sensitivity To color picker to see more colors or to create your own.

6.	Click the Range Sensitivity tab.

7.	Move any of the following sliders:

•	Importance [image] determines how much emphasis is placed on the range sensitivity color in the conversion. Higher importance values mean that more shades of this color are included in the color palette. The conversion is concentrated on the areas of the bitmap that contain the range sensitivity color.

•	Lightness [image] adjusts the tolerance sensitivity of the conversion process to the lightness component of the range sensitivity color

•	A (Green Red Axis) [image] adjusts the tolerance sensitivity of the conversion process to the green/red component of the range sensitivity color

•	B (Blue Yellow Axis) [image] adjusts the tolerance sensitivity of the conversion process to the blue/yellow component of the range sensitivity color

 Tips

•	To view the range of colors that you've chosen for your palette, Click the Processed Palette tab.

•	You can reset the range sensitivity by clicking the Reset button on the Options page.

•	You can reset a range sensitivity button by clicking the Reset button beside the option name on the Range Sensitivity page. If you want to reset all the values on the page, click the Reset All button.

 Related Topics


Editing the processed palette

Using the Color Table, you can edit individual colors in the palette that you've chosen to convert your bitmaps.

To edit the processed palette

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Convert, Paletted (8-bit).

3.	In the Convert To Paletted dialog box, click the Processed Palette tab.

4.	Click the Edit button.

5.	Use the commands and controls in the Color Table to edit the selected color.

 Note

•	For more information about the Color Table, see "Working with color."

 Related Topics


Saving the processed palette

After you create and customize a palette for your conversion, you can save it as a custom palette file (.CPL) for use with other applications.

To save the processed palette

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Convert, Paletted (8-bit).

3.	In the Convert To Paletted dialog box, choose a palette and set the conversion and range sensitivity options.

4.	Click the Processed Palette tab to view the colors in your palette.

5.	Click Save.

6.	From the Save In box, choose the drive where you want to store your palette.

7.	Double-click the folder where you want to store your palette.

8.	Type a name in the File Name box.

9.	Click Save.

 Note

•	For more information about converting a bitmap to the Paletted color mode, see "Converting a bitmap to the Paletted color mode" and "Choosing a range sensitivity color for a paletted bitmap."

 Related Topics


Converting bitmaps to the Duotone color mode


Overview: Converting bitmaps to the Duotone color mode
Converting bitmaps to the Duotone color mode

A bitmap in the Duotone color mode is simply a grayscale bitmap that has been enhanced with one to four additional colors. Use the Duotone color mode to add a touch of color to grayscale bitmaps or to create interesting effects using the tone curve settings. A duotone bitmap can be monotone, duotone, tritone, or quadtone.

Duotone type	Description

Monotone	A grayscale bitmap created using a single ink

Duotone	A grayscale bitmap created using two inks. In most cases, the first ink is black and the second is colored.

Tritone	A grayscale bitmap created using three inks. In most cases, the first ink is black and the second and third inks are colored.

Quadtone	A grayscale bitmap created using four inks. In most cases the first ink is black and the second, third, and fourth inks are colored.

Tone curves

When you convert a grayscale bitmap to the Duotone color mode, the Duotone dialog box displays a tone curve grid which consists of the dynamic ink curves that will be used throughout the conversion. The horizontal plane, or x-axis, displays the 256 possible shades of gray in a grayscale bitmap (0 is black; 255 is white). The vertical plane or y-axis illustrates the intensity of an ink (from 0 to 100 percent) that is applied to the corresponding grayscale values. For example, a grayscale pixel with a color value of 25 will be printed with a 25-percent tint of the ink color. By adjusting the tone curves, you can control the color and intensity of the ink that is applied to your bitmap. After conversion, you can edit your tone curves at any time.

Overprint colors

Once you have adjusted the tone curves for the duotone conversion, you can further customize the colors that will be used to display your bitmap by choosing overprint colors. When a bitmap is displayed, each color is applied to the screen in sequence, creating a layered effect. Overprint colors are the colors that appear on your bitmap when two or more colors overlap.

The Overprint page in the Duotone dialog box displays all possible instances when the colors that you have chosen for the duotone conversion can overlap. Associated with each instance is the color that is produced by the overlap. You can also choose new overprint colors in the Select Color dialog box.

 Note

•	Bitmaps must be embedded before you can manipulate them. In Corel VENTURA, you cannot manipulate an externally referenced bitmap or a bitmap inserted as an OLE object. You can edit both embedded and externally referenced bitmaps directly in Corel PHOTO-PAINT by right-clicking them in Corel VENTURA and clicking Picture, Edit In Corel PHOTO-PAINT.

 Related Topics


Converting a grayscale bitmap to the Duotone color mode

Convert grayscale bitmaps to the Duotone color mode when you want to add hints of color to their grayscale values. You can convert a grayscale bitmap using up to four inks. You can adjust the curve of a Duotone ink to control the shade of the ink that is used in the conversion, to make the ink used darker or lighter.

The following illustration shows a grayscale bitmap converted to the Duotone color mode and enhanced with green.

You can also change the colors that are applied as enhancements to your duotone image by choosing new colors from the Select Color dialog box.

To convert a grayscale bitmap to Duotone

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Convert, Duotone (8-bit).

3.	In the Duotone dialog box, click the Curves tab.

4.	Choose an option from the Type list box.

•	Monotone [image] creates a grayscale bitmap that is printed with a single ink

•	Duotone [image] creates a grayscale bitmap that is printed with two inks. In most cases, one ink is black and one is colored.

•	Tritone [image] creates a grayscale bitmap that is printed with three inks. In most cases, one ink is black and the others are colored.

•	Quadtone [image] creates a grayscale bitmap that is printed with four inks.

The corresponding inks are displayed in the Type window. You can select an ink to display the duotone curve on the grid.

Adjusting the Duotone curve of an ink

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Convert, Duotone (8-bit).

3.	In the Duotone dialog box, click the Curves tab.

4.	Click an ink color from the Type window.

5.	Click the ink tone curve on the grid to create a node.

This node adjusts the percentage of color at that point on the curve.

6.	Position your pointer over the node that you want to edit.

A Hand icon appears when the node is in edit mode.

7.	Drag the node to adjust the curve.

To choose a new ink color for duotone conversions

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	Double-click an ink color in the Type window.

3.	In the Select Color dialog box, choose a new color from one of the models.

 Tips

•	Enable the Show All check box to display all of the ink tone curves on the grid at once.

•	To view the bitmap in Duotone color mode, enable the Eye icon.

•	Click the Null button to return the current ink tone curve to its default position on the grid.

•	You can reset all the options on the Curves page by clicking the Reset button at the bottom of the dialog box.

 Related Topics


Loading and saving inks for Duotone conversions

After you choose a Duotone type and customize the tone curves for the inks that will be used in the conversion, you can save the settings for later use on different bitmaps. The next time that you want to convert a bitmap to the Duotone color mode, you can load the saved inks directly in the Duotone dialog box.

New inks are chosen for overprint colors. Overprints occur when two colors overlap in the Duotone conversion.

To save inks for duotone conversion

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Convert, Duotone (8-bit).

3.	In the Duotone dialog box, click the Curves tab.

4.	Select the conversion options.

5.	Click Save.

6.	In the Save Duotone Files dialog box, choose the drive where you want to store the duotone file.

7.	Double-click the folder where you want to store the duotone file.

8.	Type a name for the file in the File Name box.

To load inks for duotone conversion

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	Click the Load button.

3.	In the Load Duotone Files dialog box, choose the drive where the duotone file is stored.

4.	Double-click the folder where the duotone file is stored, and click the filename.

5.	Click Open.

 Related Topics


Specifying how overprint colors display on screen

You can determine how overprint colors display on your bitmap by modifying colors on the Overprint page in the Duotone dialog box.

To specify how overprint colors display onscreen

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Convert, Duotone (8-bit).

3.	In the Duotone dialog box, click the Overprint tab.

4.	Enable the Use Overprint check box.

5.	Double-click the color that you want to edit.

6.	In the Select Color dialog box, choose a new color from one of the models.

 Tip

•	You can click More in the Select Color dialog box and verify the original color and the new color in the Reference Color and New Color boxes. For more information about the Select Color dialog box, see "Working with color."

•	You can reset a selected overprint color by clicking the Reset Current button or reset all overprint colors by clicking the Reset All button.

 Related Topics


Correcting and adjusting bitmap color


Overview: Correcting and adjusting bitmap color
Correcting and adjusting bitmap color

Corel VENTURA lets you correct and adjust bitmap color using a variety of tools and commands.

Sample/Target Balance

The Sample/Target Balance dialog box lets you color correct a bitmap by shifting color values from a sample color to the target color you select from a color model. You can apply sample target balance on three levels, adjusting bitmap colors individually from the low-point (shadow), mid-point (midtones), and high-point (highlights).

Color Balance

The Color Balance dialog box lets you adjust the color values in your bitmaps. For example, in an RGB bitmap, you can increase or decrease the amount of red, green, or blue tones. The Color Balance dialog box lets you shift the colors between CMY color values and RGB color values. This is useful for correcting color casts. For example, if the red parts of your bitmap are too red, you can shift color values from red to cyan. You can also use the Color Balance dialog box to change the hue values for your entire bitmap.

Hue/Saturation/Lightness

The Hue/Saturation/Lightness dialog box lets you adjust the bitmap's hue, saturation, and lightness values [image] all at once or channel by channel. This is useful for changing the intensity of colors or for changing their hue entirely. Hue is a measure of the "color" (for example, green is a hue). Saturation is a measure of the depth of color. Lightness is an expression of the overall percentage of white.

Replace Colors

The Replace Colors dialog box lets you replace one bitmap color with another color. Depending on the range you set, you can use the Replace Colors dialog box to replace a single color or to shift the entire bitmap from one range of color to another.

Desaturate

The Desaturate command converts each color in a bitmap to its grayscale equivalent. This command allows you to create a grayscale bitmap without actually changing the color mode.

Deinterlace

The Deinterlace dialog box removes even or odd horizontal lines from scanned images. You can fill the spaces left by the discarded lines using either of two methods: duplication fills in the spaces with copies of the adjacent lines of pixels, while interpolation fills in the spaces with colors created by averaging the surrounding pixels.

Invert

The Invert command automatically changes each color in a bitmap to its photographic opposite. Invert a bitmap to create the appearance of a color photographic negative.

Posterize

The Posterize dialog box lets you reduce the number of tonal values in a bitmap and to map all existing colors to the closest match in the colors that are left. This process removes tonal gradations and creates larger areas of flat color.

Threshold

The Threshold dialog box lets you set a specific brightness value as a threshold. Pixels with brightness values above or below the threshold will display in white or black depending on the threshold option you select. Other pixels are not affected and preserve their color. The Bi-Level option changes all pixels to either black or white (according to the position of their brightness value in relation to the threshold you set). You can also set a threshold for the entire bitmap or a threshold for a specific color channel.

 Note

•	Bitmaps must be embedded before you can manipulate them. In Corel VENTURA, you cannot manipulate an externally referenced bitmap or a bitmap inserted as an OLE object. You can edit both embedded and externally referenced bitmaps directly in Corel PHOTO-PAINT by right-clicking them in Corel VENTURA and clicking Picture, Edit In Corel PHOTO-PAINT.

 Related Topics


Adjusting the color values

You can color correct a bitmap by shifting the color values in a single channel or in all the channels at once.

To shift a bitmap's color values

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Adjust, Sample/Target Balance.

3.	Choose one of the following from the Channel list box:

•	a color channel, for example, Red [image] changes the color values of the selected channel only

•	RGB Channels [image] changes the color values of all the channels

4.	Click the Low-Point Eyedropper tool (marked with a black dot).

5.	Click a point of dark color on the bitmap.

The Sample color bar for the low-point range changes to the color you have sampled.

6.	Double-click the Target color bar for the low-point range.

7.	In the Select Color dialog box, choose a target color.

All colors at or below the level of darkness of the sample color you chose are shifted in the direction of the target color.

8.	Repeat steps 2 to 7 for the mid-point and high-point using the other two Eyedropper tools.

 Tips

•	You can use the Clipping controls to set the range of the histogram display. Enable the Clip Automatically check box to have Corel VENTURA automatically clip the outlying brightness values in your image; that is, to ignore a percentage of the most extreme brightness values when identifying the lightest and darkest pixels in the histogram. Disable this check box if you want to set the clipping percentage yourself.

 Note

•	The channels that appear in the Channel list box depend on the color mode of the bitmap. There is one composite channel, as well as one channel for each color component.

 Related Topics


Adjusting color balance

You can use the Color Balance dialog box to shift the colors between complementary pairs of the primary (RGB) and secondary (CMY) colors.

To shift a bitmap's color balance

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Adjust, Color Balance.

3.	Enable the check boxes for the tonal ranges you want to shift.

4.	In the Color Channel section, move the sliders to set color levels for each of the three channels (Cyan-Red, Magenta-Green, and Yellow-Blue).

 Tip

•	Enable the Preserve Luminance check box if you want to ensure that the brightness levels aren't affected.

 Related Topics


Adjusting hue, saturation, and lightness

You can use the Hue/Saturation/Lightness dialog box to alter the Hue, Saturation, and Lightness values of an entire bitmap or of one or more of its color channels.

In the color preview section, you can see how the color of the original bitmap (Original Color color bar) compares with the adjusted values (New Color color bar). In the examples below, the Hue slider was moved to a value of -180.

Original Color

New Color

Notice that the color in the center of the original color bar is a light blue, while the color at the center of the new color bar is red [image] all of the light blues will appear red.

To adjust the hue, saturation, and lightness values of an entire bitmap

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Adjust, Hue-Saturation-Lightness.

3.	Move the Hue slider to shift the colors of all the pixels.

4.	Move the Saturation slider to set the strength of the colors.

A saturation setting of -100 results in a grayscale image, while a setting of 100 produces unnaturally vibrant colors.

5.	Move the Lightness slider to determine the brightness.

White is expressed with positive values; black [image] with negative values.

 Note

•	The Hue-Saturation-Lightness command is available only for RGB, CMYK, and paletted bitmaps. It isn't available for black-and-white or grayscale bitmaps.

To adjust the hue, saturation, and lightness values of a color channel

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Adjust, Hue-Saturation-Lightness.

3.	In the Channels section, enable one of the buttons.

4.	Follow steps 3 to 5 from the previous procedure.

 Tip

•	Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each color channel you want to adjust.

 Related Topics


Replacing bitmap colors

You can use the Replace Colors dialog box to replace bitmap colors with other colors.

The following illustration shows a bitmap after the Replace Colors dialog was used to replace a range of yellow-orange colors with violet.

To replace a bitmap's colors

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Adjust, Replace Colors.

3.	Click the Old Color eyedropper tool, and on the bitmap, click the color that you want to replace. The color bar on the Old Color color picker displays the color you've clicked.

4.	Click the New Color eyedropper tool, and on the bitmap, click a replacement color. The color bar on the New Color color picker displays the color you've clicked.

5.	In the Adjust section, move any of the following sliders:

•	Hue [image] sets the color

•	Saturation [image] sets the depth of the new color

•	Lightness [image] sets the level of white in the new color

•	Range [image] sets the range of affected colors. Applying the effect with a range of 1 affects only a single color; applying a range of 100 shifts most of the colors in the direction of your new color.

 Tips

•	Enable the Ignore Grayscale check box to ignore all gray pixels in the bitmap. If this check box is disabled, gray pixels will be changed to the replacement color based on saturation and lightness values alone.

•	Enable the Single Destination Color check box to replace all colors that fall within the current range with the new color.

•	You can also choose the color you want to replace by clicking the Old Color picker.

•	You can also choose the color you want to use to replace a color by choosing a color from the New Color color picker.

 Related Topics


Desaturating bitmap color

You can convert all bitmap colors to their grayscale equivalents.

The following illustration shows a bitmap after the Desaturate command has been used to remove colors from it.

To desaturate bitmap color

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Adjust, Desaturate.

 Related Topics


Removing scan lines from a bitmap

You can remove horizontal lines from scanned bitmaps.

To remove scan lines from a bitmap

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Transform, Deinterlace.

3.	In the Scan Lines section, enable one of the following buttons:

•	Even Lines [image] removes even lines

•	Odd Lines [image] removes odd lines

4.	In the Replacement Method section, enable one of the following buttons:

•	Duplication [image] fills in the spaces with copies of the adjacent lines of pixels

•	Interpolation [image] fills in the spaces with colors created by averaging the surrounding pixels

 Related Topics


Inverting bitmap colors

You can invert the colors in a bitmap and create the appearance of a color photographic negative.

The following illustration shows the effect of inverting the colors of a bitmap.

(bml retouch_invert.bmp}

To invert a bitmap's colors

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Transform, Invert.

 Related Topics


Posterizing a bitmap

You can reduce groups of colors to solid colors and exaggerate the edges between areas of color.

The following illustration shows the effect of posterizing a bitmap.

To posterize a bitmap

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Transform, Posterize.

3.	Move the Level slider to determine the level at which posterizing begins.

The values of the Level slider range from 1 to 32. A value of 1 results in the most drastic posterizing; a level of 32 has no effect on most bitmaps.

 Related Topics


Adjusting the Threshold levels

You can convert a bitmap, or parts of a bitmap, to black or white.

To adjust the threshold levels

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Transform, Threshold.

3.	In the Color section, enable one of the following Threshold buttons:

•	To Black [image] sets the amount of black in the final bitmap

•	To White [image] sets the amount of white in the final bitmap

•	Bi-Level [image] lets you divide the bitmap colors between high and low values

4.	Choose one of the following from the Channel list box:

•	a color channel, for example, Red [image] changes the color values of the selected channel only

•	RGB channels [image] changes the color values of all the channels

5.	Move the Low-Level slider to set the brightness level of the darkest color.

A value of zero is black; higher values are shades of gray.

6.	Move the High-Level slider to set the brightness level of the lightest bitmap color.

7.	Move the Threshold slider to set the brightness level at which colors are converted to black or white.

 Note

•	The High level slider is unavailable when the To Black button is enabled; the Low Level slider is unavailable when the To White button is enabled.

 Tip

•	When you choose a color channel from the Channel list box, choose the color mode name to alter all channels at once.

•	To view a histogram of the changes you make to your bitmap, enable the Automatically check box in the Histogram Display Clipping section. Histogram clipping changes the level of sensitivity of the histogram, ensuring that you will be able to see all the levels on your screen at once.

 Related Topics


Correcting and adjusting bitmap tone


Overview: Correcting and adjusting bitmap tone
Correcting and adjusting bitmap tone

Corel VENTURA features several dialog boxes, commands, and tools that let you control the relationship between bitmap shadows, midtones, and highlights, and that let you adjust the brightness, intensity, and lightness of the colors in your bitmap.

Level Equalization

The Level Equalization dialog box lets you adjust shadow, midtone, and highlight areas by redistributing shades from darkest to lightest. Level equalization is an effective way to preserve shadow and highlight detail that could be lost when you adjust the brightness, contrast, or intensity of a bitmap's tone. By defining the start and end points of your tonal range, you can redistribute the pixel values throughout the entire tonal range. A histogram displays the distribution of pixels according to brightness. The Level Equalization dialog box can also be used to create color gradations when posterization has occurred; to lighten or darken any combination of the shadows, midtones, or highlights; to compress brightness values to printable limits; and to adjust the gamma curve (midtones).

Tone Curve

The Tone Curve dialog box lets you perform color corrections with more precise, local control over individual pixel values. You can pinpoint a problem area and produce a subtle or pronounced change in that area that dissipates [image] according to the tone curve [image] as you move away from the targeted area. The Tone Curve dialog box lets you take current pixel brightness values and change them to different values. The response curve in the dialog box is a visual representation of the balance between shadows, midtones, and highlights. You can choose from a number of preset response curves or create and save your own.

Auto Equalize

The Auto Equalize command automatically redistributes shades of color. Equalization makes the darkest colors black, the lightest colors white, and equally distributes the colors in between.

Brightness-Contrast-Intensity

The Brightness-Contrast-Intensity dialog box lets you adjust the brightness, contrast, and intensity of bitmap tones. The Brightness slider lets you lighten or darken a bitmap. The Contrast slider adjusts the distinction between light and dark areas. The Intensity slider affects the brighter areas of a picture by making them brighter or darker. Contrast and intensity usually go hand in hand, because an increase in contrast sometimes washes out detail in shadows and highlights, but an increase in intensity can restore this detail.

Gamma

Gamma is a method of tonal correction that takes the human eye's perception of neighboring values into account. For example, if you were to place one 10-percent-gray circle on a black background and an identical gray circle on a white background, the circle surrounded by black will appear lighter to the human eye than the circle surrounded by white, regardless of the fact that the circles are identical.

The Gamma dialog box lets you pick up detail in a low-contrast bitmap without significantly affecting the shadows or highlights. Gamma affects all bitmap values but is curve-based so that the changes are weighted toward the midtones.

 Note

•	Bitmaps must be embedded before you can manipulate them. In Corel VENTURA, you cannot manipulate an externally referenced bitmap or a bitmap inserted as an OLE object. You can edit both embedded and externally referenced bitmaps directly in Corel PHOTO-PAINT by right-clicking them in Corel VENTURA and clicking Picture, Edit In Corel PHOTO-PAINT.

 Related Topics


Adjusting the balance of shadows, midtones, and highlights

You can manipulate the tonal range by accentuating or toning down detail in shadow or highlight areas, correcting overexposure or underexposure, or by generally adjusting the tonal range. The Auto Equalize command performs a flat equalization by redistributing a significant portion of the tonal range between 0 and 255 automatically, while the Level Equalization and Tone Curve dialog boxes provide more advanced control.

To adjust the tonal range using the Auto Equalize command

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Adjust, Auto Equalize.

To adjust the tonal range using the Level Equalization dialog box

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Adjust, Level Equalization.

3.	In the Eyedropper Sampling section, enable one of the following buttons and click the corresponding eyedropper tool:

•	Set Input Values [image] sets input values for the lightest and darkest pixels

•	Set Output Values [image] sets output values for the lightest and darkest pixels

4.	Click a color on the bitmap.

5.	Choose a color channel from the Channel list box.

6.	Move the Gamma Adjustment slider to adjust the midtones.

7.	Drag the arrows below the histogram to adjust the values of the shadows and highlights.

 Tips

•	Enable the Automatically check box to automatically clip the outlying brightness values in the bitmap. A percentage of the most extreme brightness values are ignored when the lightest and darkest pixels in the histogram are identified.

•	Enable the Auto-Adjust check box to redistribute the pixel values throughout the entire tonal range automatically

•	You can also adjust the values for the shadows and highlights by typing values in the Output Range Compression boxes.

•	You can also set the amount of clipping by disabling the Automatically check box and typing a value in the Display Clipping Percent box.

To adjust the tonal range using the Tone Curve dialog box

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Adjust, Tone Curve.

3.	Choose a color channel from the Channel list box.

4.	Choose one of the following editing methods from the Edit Style list box:

•	Curve{bcmt emdash.bmp}the Response Curve is a curve shape

•	Linear{bcmt emdash.bmp}the Response Curve is a line shape. To add nodes, click and drag.

•	Freehand{bcmt emdash.bmp}the Response Curve is a line shape

•	Gamma{bcmt emdash.bmp}the Response Curve is a curve shape you can alter by adjusting the slider

5.	Edit the response curve by clicking and dragging it in the direction you want.

 Tips

•	To smooth a Freehand curve, click and hold the Smooth button until the curve is smooth.

•	If you choose Gamma from the Edit Style list box, you can also move the slider below the Edit Style list box to set a gamma curve value. When you use a Gamma edit style, the most pronounced changes in your bitmap will occur in the midtones.

•	You can flip the tone response curve by clicking the buttons above the Null button in the Tone Curve dialog box.

 Related Topics


Saving and loading customized response curves

You can save your response curves for use whenever you adjust the tonal range of a bitmap using the Tone Curve dialog box. By reusing your response curves, you can save time while ensuring that the tonal range of your bitmaps is uniform.

To save a customized response curve

1.	Follow all steps in the previous procedure.

2.	Click Save.

3.	In the Save Tone Curve Files dialog box, choose a folder in which you want to save the response curve.

4.	Type a name for the file in the File Name box.

To load a customized response curve

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Adjust, Tone Curve.

3.	Click Open.

4.	In the Load Tone Curve Files dialog box, double-click a response curve file.

 Related Topics


Adjusting the brightness, contrast, and intensity

The Brightness-Contrast-Intensity dialog box lets you adjust the brightness, contrast, and intensity of bitmap tones.

The following illustration shows the effect of adjusting the brightness, contrast, and intensity of a bitmap.

To adjust a bitmap's brightness, contrast, and intensity

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Adjust, Brightness-Contrast-Intensity.

3.	Move any of the following sliders:

•	Brightness [image] lets you lighten or darken a bitmap

•	Contrast [image] lets you adjust the distinction between light and dark areas

•	Intensity [image] lets you adjust the brighter areas of a picture by making them brighter or darker

 Related Topics


Adjusting a bitmap's midtones

The Gamma dialog box and the Gamma edit style in the Tone Curve dialog box affect all the values in the bitmap, but in a non-linear fashion, so that the most pronounced changes occur in the midtones. The Level Equalization dialog box lets you adjust the midtones independently of the shadows and highlights.

Adjusting the midtones lets you increase the detail in a low-contrast bitmap without affecting the shadows or highlights.

To adjust midtones using the Gamma dialog box

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Adjust, Gamma.

3.	Move the Gamma slider to set a gamma curve value.

Higher values brighten midtones; lower values darken midtones.

To adjust midtones using the Level Equalization dialog box

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Adjust, Level Equalization.

3.	Move the Gamma Adjustment slider to adjust the gamma values.

To adjust midtones using the Tone Curve dialog box

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Adjust, Tone Curve.

3.Choose a color channel from the Channel list box.

4.	Choose Gamma from the Edit Style list box.

5.	Move the slider below the Edit Style list box to adjust the gamma curve.

6.	Repeat steps 3 to 5 for additional color channels.

 Related Topics


Applying special effects to bitmaps


Overview: Applying special effects to bitmaps
Applying special effects to bitmaps

The effects filters available in Corel VENTURA can completely change the look of your bitmap. You can choose from a variety of filters: two-and three-dimensional, artistic, blur, color transform, noise, render, and sharpen filters.

How effects filters work

Effects filters execute a predefined series of commands to produce a specific effect. They automatically calculate the values and characteristics of every pixel in your bitmap and then alter the pixels according to these new values. For example, when you apply the Motion Blur filter to a bitmap, the filter analyzes all pixel values, then "smears" the values in a specified direction, creating the illusion of motion.

Common controls

The effects filters include the following common controls:

Control	Description

Enable to preview the effect on screen.

Enable to display a single, large Result window or to disable the on-screen preview.

Enable to display Original and Result windows.

Click to preview your bitmap.

If the On-Screen Preview button is disabled, click the large Preview button.

Enable to automatically update the preview as you make adjustments to the settings.

You can also pan around your bitmap using the Hand tool that appears when you move your cursor over the Original window. You can zoom in on your bitmap in the Original window by clicking in the window; you can zoom out by right-clicking.

Plug-in filters

Corel VENTURA also supports plug-in filters from third-party companies. These filters are called plug-ins because they "plug in" to the application platform. Once you add the plug-in filters through the Options dialog box, you can access them by clicking Format, Bitmap, Plug-Ins.

 Note

•	Bitmaps must be embedded before you can manipulate them. In Corel VENTURA, you cannot manipulate an externally referenced bitmap or a bitmap inserted as an OLE object. You can edit both embedded and externally referenced bitmaps directly in Corel PHOTO-PAINT by right-clicking them in Corel VENTURA and clicking Picture, Edit In Corel PHOTO-PAINT.

•	To change the method of previewing bitmap effects, click Tools, Options. In the Global section, click Bitmap Effects. Enable a check box in the Initial Preview Method section.

 More Detailed Information
 Related Topics


Using the two-dimensional filters


Overview: Using the two-dimensional filters
Using the two-dimensional filters

Two dimensional filters let you apply effects that give your bitmaps a flat look.

Band Pass filter

The Band Pass filter lets you adjust the balance of sharp and smooth areas in a bitmap. The Frequency plot displays smooth and sharp areas, where each pixel in the plot represents a particular frequency that exists in the bitmap. Therefore, a pixel in the Frequency plot does not relate spatially to a given pixel in the bitmap. Smooth areas of the plot represent low frequencies, while sharp areas represent high frequencies. By adjusting the radius and weightings of the bands, you can screen out unwanted features in your bitmap. A low weighting for the center of the plot de-emphasizes the smooth areas of the bitmap; a high weighting for the outside of the plot emphasizes bitmap detail. To eliminate unwanted noise, isolate the frequency of the noise within the middle band and reduce its weighting to zero.

Displace filter

The Displace filter alters a bitmap, using a displacement map that determines the distortion pattern of the altered bitmap. Values from the displacement map are used to map negative and positive. Corel VENTURA includes a number of sample displacement maps (. PCX files) you can use; however, you can load any bitmap as a displacement map. The Displace filter evaluates the color value of pixels in both bitmaps, and then shifts the active bitmap according to the values of the displacement map. The result is that values from the displacement map appear as forms, colors, and warp patterns in your bitmap. By moving the sliders, you can shift the bitmap horizontally or vertically, controlling both the degree and direction of the displacement, while leaving the displacement map bitmap in place.

Edge Detect filter

The Edge Detect filter, like the Trace Contour and Find Edges filters, finds the edges of elements in your bitmap, then converts the edges to lines on a background of a single color. The Sensitivity slider determines the amount of edge enhancement. You can use black, white, or any color you choose to fill the areas of the bitmap that are not a part of the outline. For best results, use the Edge Detect filter on high-contrast bitmaps, such as bitmaps that include text.

Offset filter

The Offset filter lets you correct bitmap positioning. It shifts a bitmap according to the values set using the Horizontal and Vertical Shift sliders. When a bitmap is shifted, an empty area is produced where the bitmap was previously positioned. There are three options for filling the empty area: use a color, enable the Wrap Around button to produce a tiling effect, or enable the Repeat Edges button to produce a stretched effect.

Pixelate filter

The Pixelate filter breaks up your bitmap into square, rectangular, or circular cells. Enable the Square or Rectangular buttons to create a blocky, exaggerated, digital appearance, or the Circular button to create a spiderweb effect.

Puzzle filter

The Puzzle filter breaks down the bitmap into puzzle-like pieces, or blocks, resembling a jigsaw puzzle. You can control the block width, height, and offset to create blocks that range in shape from simple squares to ice shards. You can fill the spaces left between the pieces with white, black, a color you choose, the original bitmap, or the inverse bitmap.

Ripple filter

The Ripple filter creates single- or dual-rippled waves throughout the bitmap. You can select the distance between the wave cycles, the amount of displacement the waves create, and the angle the waves travel through your bitmap.

Shear filter

The Shear filter distorts a bitmap along a horizontal or vertical path that you define using a shear curve. By manipulating nodes on the shear curve, you create curves that determine the shape and amount of the shearing. Your bitmap will conform to the curve you have defined. There are three options for filling the area left empty by the displacement: use a color, enable the Wrap Around button to produce a tiling effect, or enable the Repeat Edges button to produce a stretched effect.

Swirl filter

The Swirl filter creates a swirling distortion on your bitmap according to the direction, number of whole rotations, and angle you specify. The bitmap swirls around a center point that you can reposition, in either a clockwise or counterclockwise direction, completing the number of whole rotations you set. A lower value in the Whole Rotations box results in a swirling effect, while a higher value results in a concentric effect. A wire mesh thumbnail of the swirl pattern displays the filter's settings as you change them.

Tile filter

The Tile filter reproduces your bitmap as a series of tiles on a grid. When you move the Horizontal and Vertical sliders, the values you set represent the number of bitmaps duplicated on each axis. You can use the Tile filter in combination with flood fills to create backgrounds or to preview a wallpaper effect for Web pages or for your Windows desktop.

Trace Contour filter

The Trace Contour filter creates edges of different intensities by tracing bitmap elements using the 16 colors of the standard VGA palette. You can set the threshold level and whether you want the upper or lower edges traced. The Trace Contour filter works best if the subject of your bitmap stands out.

User Defined filter

The User Defined filter allows you to create your own blur, sharpen, or edge detect special effects. The User Defined dialog box contains a matrix with 25 boxes (5 X 5) that represents a single pixel of your bitmap (the center box) and its adjacent pixels (the boxes around the center). The values you enter into the matrix determine the range and type of effect you create. You can enter positive or negative values in any distribution over the matrix. If you leave a box empty, its value is zero.

Corel VENTURA comes with a number of sample user-defined effects. These effects have been provided to help you see the effects certain values create when entered into the matrix.

Wet Paint filter

The Wet Paint filter creates the illusion that your bitmap is a painting that is still wet. The effects can range from subtle changes in the luminescence of colors to streaks of wet paint dripping down your bitmap. You can set the percentage and degree of wetness, and control the size of the drips. You can also control the range of colors that are affected.

Wind filter

The Wind filter blurs your bitmap in a specific direction, creating the effect of wind blowing across the objects in your bitmap. You can set the direction, opacity, and strength of the wind effect.

Whirlpool filter

The Whirlpool filter applies a pattern of fluid lines over your bitmap. There are a number of preset styles you can use or customize. You can also create your own effect by setting the smear length, spacing, twist, and streak detail.

 Note

•	Bitmaps must be embedded before you can manipulate them. In Corel VENTURA, you cannot manipulate an externally referenced bitmap or a bitmap inserted as an OLE object. You can edit both embedded and externally referenced bitmaps directly in Corel PHOTO-PAINT by right-clicking them in Corel VENTURA and clicking Picture, Edit In Corel PHOTO-PAINT.

 Related Topics


Applying the Band Pass filter

You can use the Band Pass filter to adjust the balance of sharp and smooth areas in a bitmap.

To apply the Band Pass filter

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, 2D Effects, Band Pass.

3.	Move the Inner and Outer Radius sliders to adjust the radius for both the inner and outer filter bands.

4.	Move the Inner, Middle, and Outer Band sliders to adjust band weightings.

 Note

•	The Band Pass filter performs a number of intensive calculations that may take some time to apply, even on faster machines. Watch the Percent Done indicator on the Status Bar to keep track of its progress.

•	This filter supports all color models except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit grayscale, paletted and black-and-white.

 Related Topics


Applying the Displace filter

You can use the Displace filter to alter a bitmap according to a displacement map you choose. Experiment with the settings to create various effects.

Applying the Displace filter

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, 2D Effects, Displace.

3.	Click the Load button.

4.	In the Load Displacement Map Files dialog box, choose a bitmap file to use as a displacement map, and click Open.

5.	In the Undefined Areas section, enable one of the following buttons:

•	Repeat Edges [image] stretches the edges of the bitmap to fill in exposed areas

•	Wrap Around [image] fills the exposed areas with the opposite side of the bitmap

6.	In the Scale Mode section, enable one of the following buttons:

•	Tile [image] repeats the displacement bitmap to cover the bitmap area

•	Stretch To Fit [image] uses a single map stretched over the entire bitmap area

7.	Move the Horizontal and Vertical Scale sliders to set the amount of displacement.

 Note

•	The sample displacement maps are found in the folder X:\COREL\GRAPHICS8\CUSTOM\DISPLACE where X indicates the drive where Corel VENTURA is installed.

•	This filter supports all color models except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit grayscale, and black-and-white.

 Related Topics


Applying the Edge Detect filter

The Edge Detect filter finds the edges of elements in your bitmap, then converts the edges to lines on a background of a single color. You can use the Edge Detect filter on high-contrast bitmaps, for example, bitmaps that contain text, for the clearest results. This filter supports all color models except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit grayscale, paletted and black-and-white.

To apply the Edge Detect filter

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, 2D Effects, Edge Detect.

3.	Move the Sensitivity slider to define the sensitivity value for the effect.

The higher the value, the more edges are enhanced.

4.	In the Background Color section, enable one of the following buttons to select a color for the background:

•	Black

•	White

•	Other

 Tip

•	You can also select a color for the background by clicking the Eyedropper tool and clicking a color on the bitmap.

 Related Topics


Applying the Offset filter

You can use the Offset filter to correct bitmap positioning. It shifts the bitmap according to the values set using the Horizontal and Vertical Shift sliders.

To apply the offset filter

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, 2D Effects, Offset.

3.	In the Shift section, move the sliders to set the horizontal and vertical shift.

5.	In the Fill Empty Area With section, enable one of the following buttons:

•	Wrap Around [image] fills the exposed areas with the opposite side of the bitmap

•	Repeat Edges [image] stretches the edges of the bitmap to fill in exposed areas

•	Color [image] fills the exposed areas with the color you click from the color picker or the color you click on the bitmap using the Eyedropper tool.

 Tip

•	To view shift coordinates as percentages rather than degrees, enable the Shift Value As % Of Dimensions check box.

 Note

•	This filter supports all color models except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit grayscale, and black-and-white.

 Related Topics


Applying the Pixelate filter

You can use the Pixelate filter to give your bitmap a blocky appearance or a circular, spiderweb look. Experiment with the settings until you achieve the effect you want.

To apply the Pixelate filter

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, 2D Effects, Pixelate.

3.	In the Pixelate Mode section, enable one of the following buttons:

•	Square [image] maintains equal Width and Height settings

•	Rectangular [image] allows you to set Width and Height individually

•	Circular [image] builds pixels out from the center in a radial pattern

4.	Move the Width and Height sliders to define the size of the blocks.

5.	Move the Opacity (%) slider to set the transparency of the effect.

 Note

•	This filter supports all color models except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit grayscale, and black-and-white.

 Related Topics


Applying the Puzzle filter

The Puzzle filter breaks your bitmap down into puzzle-like pieces. You can set the size of the puzzle pieces, the distance between the pieces, and the color of the background.

To apply the Puzzle filter

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, 2D Effects, Puzzle.

3.	In the Fill Empty Area With section, enable one of the following buttons:

•	Black [image] fills the empty area with black

•	White [image] fills the empty area with white

•	Other [image] fills the empty area with the color you click from the color picker, or the color you click on the bitmap using the Eyedropper tool.

•	Original Image [image] fills the empty area with the original bitmap

•	Inverse Image [image] fills the empty area with a negative of the original bitmap

4.	Move the Block Width and Block Height sliders to set the dimensions of the puzzle pieces.

5.	Move the Max. Offset slider to set the distance between pieces.

 Tip

•	To keep the dimensions of the puzzle pieces identical, enable the Square Blocks check box.

 Note

•	This filter supports all color models except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit grayscale, and black-and-white.

 Related Topics


Applying the Ripple filter

You can use the Ripple filter to make the surface of your bitmap appear like rippled waves of water. Apply the effect of a single wave ripple or the effect of two waves coming from different directions.

To apply the Ripple filter

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, 2D Effects, Ripple.

3.	In the Ripple Mode section, enable one of the following buttons:

•	Single Wave [image] applies the ripple effect created by one wave

•	Dual Wave 1:1 [image] applies a ripple effect of two identical waves perpendicular to each other

•	Dual Wave 2:1 [image] applies a ripple effect of two waves perpendicular to each other, with one wave having twice the amplitude of the other

4.	Move the Period slider to adjust the distance between each wave cycle.

Higher values create waves that are far apart, while lower values create waves that are close together.

5.	Move the Amplitude slider to set the amount of displacement each ripple creates.

Higher values create high peaks and low valleys, while lower values create soft, rolling waves.

6.	Move the Direction Angle slider to set the direction of the ripple.

 Tip

•	Enable the Distort Ripple check box to apply waves with jagged edges.

 Note

•	This filter supports all color models except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit grayscale, and black-and-white.

 Related Topics


Applying the Shear filter

You can use the Shear filter to distort a bitmap along a path that can be customized, or you can use one of the preset shear curves. You can also use customized Shear filters.

To apply the Shear filter

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, 2D Effects, Shear.

3.	Move the Scale slider to adjust the degree to which your bitmap conforms to the curve.

4.	In the Fill Undefined Area With section, enable one of the following buttons:

•	Wrap Around [image] fills exposed areas with the opposite edge of the bitmap

•	Repeat Edges [image] stretches the edges of the bitmap to fill in exposed areas

•	Other Color [image] fills exposed areas with the color you click from the color picker or the color you click on the bitmap with the Eyedropper tool.

5.	Choose one of the following editing styles from the Edit Style list box:

•	Curve [image] lets you distort the bitmap along a curve

•	Linear [image] lets you distort the bitmap along a straight path

•	Freehand [image] lets you distort the bitmap along an irregular path that you define

•	Gamma [image] lets you distort the bitmap along a gamma curve

6.	In the Shear Map section, enable one of the following buttons to set an orientation for the distortion path:

•	Horizontal

•	Vertical

7.	Click and drag the shear curve to define the path.

 Note

•	This filter supports all color models except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit grayscale, and black-and-white.

To load a customized Shear style

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, 2D Effects, Shear.

3.	Click the Load button.

4.	In the Load Shear Map Files dialog box, double-click a shear map file.

To save a customized Shear style

1.	Follow all steps in the "To load a Shear filter" procedure to customize a shear curve.

2.	In the Shear dialog box, click Save.

3.	From the Save Shear Map Files list box, choose the folder where you want save the Shear style.

4.	Type a name for the file in the File Name box and click Save.

 Tip

•	Since moving the Scale slider allows you to set the intensity of distortion, set a gentle curve, then use the slider to experiment with different settings.

•	If you choose Freehand from the Edit Style list box, you can click the Smooth button to set a gentler curve.

 Related Topics


Applying the Swirl filter

The Swirl filter lets you set the intensity, direction, and position of the swirling effect you apply to your bitmap.

To apply the Swirl filter

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, 2D Effects, Swirl.

3.	Click the Set Center button.

4.	Position the cursor over the bitmap in the Publication window, and click to set a center point around which the bitmap swirls.

5.	In the Direction section, enable one of the following buttons to set the direction of rotation:

•	Clockwise

•	Counter-Clockwise

6.	Move the Whole Rotations slider to set the number of times the base swirl rotates.

7.	Move the Additional Degrees slider to choose the degree of rotation.

 Note

•	This filter supports all color models except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit grayscale, black-and-white.

•	If you want to zoom in on the bitmap in the Original window, you must first disable the Set Center button.

 Related Topics


Applying the Tile filter

The Tile filter reproduces your bitmap as a series of tiles. This filter is especially useful for previewing how your bitmap will look as a tiled background for Web pages.

To apply the Tile filter

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, 2D Effects, Tile.

3.	Move the Horizontal slider to set the number of tile columns.

4.	Move the Vertical slider to set the number of tile rows.

 Tip

•	Enable the Identical Values check box if you want to maintain equal values for columns and rows. This ensures that the tiles maintain their relative proportions.

 Note

•	This filter supports all color models except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit grayscale, and black-and-white.

 Related Topics


Applying the Trace Contour filter

The Trace Contour filter creates edges of different intensities by tracing bitmap elements using the 16 colors of the standard VGA palette. For the clearest results, use the Trace Contour filter on high-contrast bitmaps, for example, bitmaps that contain text.

To apply the Trace Contour filter

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, 2D Effects, Contour.

3.	Move the Level slider to set the threshold level.

The threshold level determines which pixels will be affected based on the pixel's brightness levels (ranging from 1 to 255).

4.	Enable one of the following buttons:

•	Lower [image] traces colors with brightness values that are below the edge threshold

•	Upper [image] traces colors with brightness values that exceed the edge threshold

 Note

•	This filter supports all color models except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit grayscale, paletted and black-and-white.

 Related Topics


Applying the User Defined filter

The User Defined filter lets you create your own blur, sharpen, and edge detect special effects, based on values you enter into a 5 X 5 matrix. To help you see the effects certain values create, try loading some of the sample effects. You can save the User Defined filters you create and use them again later.

This filter supports all color models except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit grayscale, paletted and black-and-white.

To load sample user-defined effect filters

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, 2D Effects, User Defined.

3.	Click the Load button.

4.	In the Load User Defined Filter Files, double-click a user-defined file.

5.	Click Open.

To create a user-defined effect filter

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, 2D Effects, User Defined.

3.	Type a value in the matrix's central box.

This value will be multiplied by the current pixel.

4.	Type values in the boxes surrounding the central box.

All values in the matrix are multiplied by the corresponding pixels in your bitmap and added together to get the new value of the current pixel.

5.	Type a number in the Divisor box.

After the new value has been calculated for the current pixel, Corel VENTURA divides the value by this number. The result becomes the final color value of the current pixel [image] a value between 1 and 255 (higher and lower values clip to this range).

6.	Type a value in the Offset box.

The offset value shifts the final result of the calculations up or down the brightness scale. Positive values brighten the entire bitmap, while negative values darken it.

 Tips

•	To keep the values entered in the matrix symmetrical, enable the Symmetric check box.

•	Enable the Auto Compute Divisor check box to maintain the overall brightness of the bitmap. Auto Compute sets the divisor value so that the result of the calculations is always in the range 1 to 255. This allows individual colors to be shifted without affecting the overall brightness of the bitmap.

To save a user-defined filter

1.	Follow the steps in the previous procedure to create a user-defined filter.

2.	In the User Defined dialog box, click Save.

3.	In the Save User Defined Filter Files dialog box, choose the folder where you want to store the filter.

4.	Type a filename in the File Name box.

 Note

•	The sample user-defined filters are found in the folder \GRAPHICS8\CUSTOM\USERDEF.

 Related Topics


Applying the Wet Paint filter

You can apply successive combinations of positive and negative wetness values to the same bitmap to produce some incredible effects. For example, if you apply a negative Wetness value to an object, it will appear to have a drop shadow that smears down the page.

To apply the Wet Paint filter

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, 2D Effects, Wet Paint.

3.	Move the Percentage slider to set the size of drips.

4.	Move the Wetness slider to determine which colors will drip.

Negative values cause dark colors to drip, and positive values cause light colors to drip.

 Note

•	This filter supports all color models except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit grayscale, paletted, and black-and-white.

 Related Topics


Applying the Wind filter

The Wind filter makes your bitmap appear blurred, as if the surface were smeared by a strong breeze. You can control the strength and direction of the wind.

To apply the Wind filter

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, 2D Effects, Wind.

3.	Move the Opacity slider to set the transparency of the effect.

Higher values produce visible distortion and blurring, while lower values produce a more subtle effect.

4.	Move the Strength slider to set the strength of the wind.

5.	Move the Direction dial to set the direction of the wind.

 Tip

•	You can also set the direction of the wind by typing a value in the Direction box.

 Note

•	This filter supports all color models except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit grayscale, paletted, and black-and-white.

 Related Topics


Applying the Whirlpool filter

The Whirlpool filter applies a pattern of fluid lines over your bitmap.

This filter is memory-intensive and can take a while to apply and preview. Try experimenting with lower values first, and gradually increase the values. This filter supports all color models except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit grayscale, paletted, and black-and-white.

To apply the Whirlpool filter

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, 2D Effects, Whirlpool.

3.	Move the Spacing slider to set the frequency of the whirls.

4.	Move the Smear Length slider to set the length of the fluid streamlines.

The longer the smear, the smoother the whirl will be. Short smears can produce noisy results.

5.	Move the Twist slider to control the whirl method.

High values make the fluid flow around the whirls much like whirlpools, whereas low values make the fluid flow out of the whirls like fountains.

6.	Move the Streak Detail slider to set the level of smearing.

Higher values create darker streaks.

7.	Enable the Warp check box to distort the pixels in the bitmap along the whirls.

To load a preset Whirlpool filter style

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, 2D Effects, Whirlpool.

3.	Choose a Whirlpool style from the Style list box.

To save a customized Whirlpool filter style

1.	Follow the steps in the "To apply a whirlpool filter" procedure to create a whirlpool effect.

2.	In the Whirlpool dialog box, click Save.

3.	Type a filename in the Save New Preset As box.

To delete a preset Whirlpool filter style

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, 2D Effects, Whirlpool.

3.	Choose a Whirlpool style from the Style list box.

4.	Click the Delete button.

 Related Topics


Using the three-dimensional filters


Overview: Using the three-dimensional filters
Using the three-dimensional filters

Three-dimensional filters give your bitmaps the illusion of depth.

3D Rotate filter

The 3D Rotate filter rotates the bitmap horizontally and vertically, according to the limits you set. The bitmap is rotated as if it were one side of a three-dimensional box. The Preview window shows the perspective of the bitmap with the current settings. The plane of the box that is shaded represents the bitmap. The Best Fit check box ensures that the entire bitmap is visible in the frame, that is, the bitmap fits within the frame and its ends aren't cut out.

Emboss filter

The Emboss filter transforms your bitmap into a relief, making the details appear as ridges and crevices on a flat surface. The Direction dial indicates the location of the light source relative to the bitmap. You can use the original bitmap colors, gray, black, or any other color as the embossing color. The Emboss filter works best on bitmaps with medium to high contrast.

Map To Object filter

The Map To Object filter creates the illusion that the bitmap has been wrapped around a sphere, or a horizontal or vertical cylinder. The value you set using the Percentage slider determines the direction and amount of the effect. Negative values wrap the bitmap toward the back; positive values wrap the bitmap toward the front. You can set the quality of the effect by choosing a display option from the Quality list box. A wire mesh thumbnail of the mapping pattern displays the filter's settings as you change them.

Mesh Warp filter

The Mesh Warp filter distorts a bitmap according to the manipulation of nodes on a grid. You determine the number of nodes and the number of grid panels, with a maximum of 10 gridlines. Higher numbers of nodes and a tighter grid provide finer control over small details in your bitmap. Moving a node does not affect the position of the other nodes; however, altering one node affects all connected gridlines.

Page Curl filter

The Page Curl filter is used to give the impression that a corner of your bitmap has rolled in on itself. Controls in the Page Curl dialog box let you specify a corner for the curl, the orientation and size of the curl, and the curl's transparency. You can choose colors for the curl as well as for the background that becomes visible as a result of the bitmap curling away.

Perspective filter

The Perspective filter allows you to give your bitmap a sense of three-dimensional depth, as if it were on a flat plane receding into the distance. The exposed areas of the bitmap are filled with white color. Enable the Best Fit check box to ensure that the entire bitmap is visible in the frame.

Pinch/Punch filter

The Pinch/Punch filter warps your bitmap by either "pinching" the bitmap away from you or "punching" it toward you. Negative values apply a punch effect; positive values apply a pinch effect. You can position the pinch/punch effect on your bitmap by setting the center point. A wire mesh thumbnail of the pinch/punch pattern displays the filter's settings as you change them.

Zig Zag filter

The Zig Zag filter distorts a bitmap by producing waves of straight lines and angles that twist the bitmap from its adjustable center point outwards. A wire mesh thumbnail of the zigzag pattern displays the filter's settings as you change them.

 Note

•	Bitmaps must be embedded before you can manipulate them. In Corel VENTURA, you cannot manipulate an externally referenced bitmap or a bitmap inserted as an OLE object. You can edit both embedded and externally referenced bitmaps directly in Corel PHOTO-PAINT by right-clicking them in Corel VENTURA and clicking Picture, Edit In Corel PHOTO-PAINT.

 Related Topics


Applying the 3D Rotate filter

You can use the 3D Rotate filter to rotate your bitmap as if it were one side of a three-dimensional box. The shaded side of the box represents your bitmap.

To apply the 3D Rotate filter

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, 3D Effects, 3D Rotate.

3.	Move the Vertical and Horizontal sliders to set the degree of rotation.

 Tip

•	If you want a different plane of the three-dimensional model to represent the bitmap, hold down CTRL and click the plane to select it.

•	Enable the Best Fit check box to ensure that the entire bitmap is visible in the frame.

•	To set the bitmaps's degree of rotation, click the three-dimensional model and drag it.

 Note

•	This filter supports all color models except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit grayscale, and black-and-white.

 Related Topics


Applying the Emboss filter

You can use the Emboss filter to transform your bitmap into a relief, making the details appear as ridges and crevices on a flat surface. If you want more precise control over the lighting angle, intensity, color, and contrast, emboss your bitmap using the Lighting Effects dialog box. For more information, see "Applying the Lighting Effects filter."

To apply the Emboss filter

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, 3D Effects, Emboss.

3.	In the Emboss Color section, enable any of the buttons to set the color of the embossed bitmap.

4.	Move the Depth slider to set the amount of embossing around the edges.

This affects the depth of the ridges and crevices.

5.	Move the Level slider to set the amount of background color the relief contains.

6.	Click a point along the edge of the Direction dial to select a direction for the light source.

 Tips

•	You can also set the color of the embossed bitmap by clicking the Eyedropper tool and clicking a color on the bitmap.

•	You can also select a direction for the light source by typing a value in the Direction box.

 Note

•	This filter supports all color models except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit grayscale, paletted and black-and-white.

 Related Topics


Applying the Map To Object filter

The Map To Object filter lets you create exciting visual effects by wrapping your bitmap around a three-dimensional object.

To apply the Map To Object filter

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, 3D Effects, Map To Object.

3.	In the Mapping Mode section, enable one of the following buttons:

•	Spherical [image] wraps your bitmap around a sphere

•	Horizontal Cylinder [image] wraps your bitmap around a horizontal cylinder

•	Vertical Cylinder [image] wraps your bitmap around a vertical cylinder

4.	Move the Percentage slider to set the amount of wrapping.

Negative values wrap the bitmap toward the back; positive values wrap the bitmap toward the front.

5.	Choose a quality level from the Quality list box.

 Tip

•	For best results with the horizontal and vertical cylinders, try using a high Percentage setting.

 Note

•	This filter supports all color models except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit grayscale, and black-and-white.

 Related Topics


Applying the Mesh Warp filter

The Mesh Warp filter distorts a bitmap according to the manipulation of nodes on a grid. You can save and delete Mesh Warp filter styles.

To apply the Mesh Warp filter

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, 3D Effects, Mesh Warp.

3.	Move the No. Gridlines slider to set the number of grid panels.

4.	Drag the nodes on the Mesh Warp filter grid to produce the distortion you want.

To save a customized Mesh Warp filter style

1.	Follow the steps in the previous procedure to create a Mesh Warp filter style.

2.	In the Mesh Warp dialog box, click Save.

3.	From the Save In list box, choose a folder where you want to save the Mesh Warp style.

4.	Type a name for the file in the File Name box and click Save.

To delete a customized Mesh Warp filter style

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, 3D Effects, Mesh Warp.

3.	Choose a Mesh Warp filter style from the Style list box.

4.	Click the Remove button.

 Note

•	This filter supports all color models except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit grayscale, paletted and black-and-white.

 Related Topics


Applying the Page Curl filter

The Page Curl filter is used to give the impression that a corner of your bitmap has rolled in on itself.

To apply the Page Curl filter

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, 3D Effects, Page Curl.

3.	In the Adjust section, click any of the buttons for corner selection.

4.	Enable one of the following buttons:

•	Vertical [image] starts the curl at the top or bottom edge of the bitmap

•	Horizontal [image] starts the curl at the left or right edge of the bitmap

5.	Move the Width % and Height % sliders to determine the curl's size.

6.	Click the Curl color picker, and click a color.

7.	Click the Background color picker, and click a color.

8.	Enable one of the following buttons:

•	Opaque Curl button [image] makes the curl a solid color

•	Transparent Curl [image] makes the underlying bitmap visible through the curl

 Tip

•	You can also select a color for the curl and the background by clicking the Eyedropper tool and clicking a color on the bitmap.

 Note

•	This filter supports all color models except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit grayscale, paletted and black-and-white.

 Related Topics


Applying the Perspective filter

The Perspective filter changes the perspective of your bitmap, giving it a three-dimensional look.

To apply the Perspective filter

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, 3D Effects, Perspective.

3.	Enable one of the following buttons:

•	Perspective [image] allows you to move two nodes in the model outline toward or away from each other at the same time.

•	Shear [image] maintains the distance between two nodes in the model outline as you skew the bitmap.

4.	Drag the nodes in the model outline to achieve the desired amount of perspective.

 Tip

•	Enable the Best Fit check box to ensure that the entire bitmap is visible in the frame.

 Note

•	This filter supports all color models except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit grayscale, and black-and-white.

 Related Topics


Applying the Pinch/Punch filter

You can use the Pinch/Punch filter to warp your bitmap in three-dimensions by either "pinching" the bitmap away from you, or "punching" it toward you.

To apply the Pinch/Punch filter

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, 3D Effects, Pinch/Punch.

3.	Click the Set Center button.

4.	Position the cursor over the bitmap, and click to set a center point around which the pinch/punch effect originates.

5.	Move the Punch/Pinch (-/+) slider to set the intensity of the effect.

 Note

•	This filter supports all color models except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit grayscale, and black-and-white.

•	If you want to zoom in on the bitmap, disable the Set Center button.

 Related Topics


Applying the Zig Zag filter

You can create a variety of dramatic effects using the Zig Zag filter, for example, you can make your bitmap appear twisted in a series of concentric circles.

To apply the Zig Zag filter

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, 3D Effects, Zig Zag.

3.	Click the Set Center button.

4.	Position the cursor over the bitmap, and click to set a center point around which the bitmap zigzags.

5.	In the Type section, enable one of the following buttons:

•	Pond Ripples [image] distorts the bitmap in overlapping concentric circles

•	Out From Center [image] makes the bitmap radiate outward uniformly

•	Around Center [image] limits the distortion to a small area around the bitmap's center

6.	Move the Waves slider to set the number of waves.

7.	Move the Strength slider to set the intensity of the crests and troughs of the distortion waves.

 Notes

•	This filter supports all color models except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit grayscale, and black-and-white.

•	If you choose the Around Center Type, you can move the Damping slider to adjust the softness of the zigzag. High Damping values soften the zigzag.

•	If you want to zoom in on the bitmap, disable the Set Center button.

 Related Topics


Using the artistic filters


Overview: Using the artistic filters
Using the artistic filters

Canvas filter

The Canvas filter allows you to apply a textured surface, or canvas map, to a bitmap. There are a number of preset canvas maps to choose from, including linen, stucco, bread, and cement. You can load any bitmap as an embossed canvas map. This means you can also use this filter to merge two bitmaps. You have control over the transparency, tile placement, and embossing level. The bitmaps that work best as canvas maps have medium to high contrast.

Glass Block filter

The Glass Block filter mimics the effect of viewing a bitmap through a number of thick glass blocks. You can set the dimensions of individual blocks. Since the values you set with the Horizontal and Vertical sliders are in pixels, smaller values produce a low-level pixelation effect, while larger numbers produce a diamond glass pattern. For best results, use values in the range of 25 to 75.

Impressionist filter

The Impressionist filter gives your bitmap the look of an Impressionist painting by converting your bitmap to dabs of solid color. The higher the values you set with the Horizontal and Vertical sliders, the greater the blurring of the original bitmap.

Smoked Glass filter

The Smoked Glass filter applies a transparent, colored tint over the bitmap. The Tint slider controls the opacity of the effect. A tint value of 100 is completely opaque, covering the bitmap with a solid color. The Percent slider lets you control the amount of blurring applied to the bitmap to create the appearance of glass distortion.

Vignette filter

The Vignette filter creates a frame around your bitmap. A vignette can have a soft or hard edge, can be one of four shapes, and can be any color. Use a vignette with a higher fade rate to create a dreamy, nostalgic effect.

 Note

•	Bitmaps must be embedded before you can manipulate them. In Corel VENTURA, you cannot manipulate an externally referenced bitmap or a bitmap inserted as an OLE object. You can edit both embedded and externally referenced bitmaps directly in Corel PHOTO-PAINT by right-clicking them in Corel VENTURA and clicking Picture, Edit In Corel PHOTO-PAINT.

 Related Topics


Applying the Canvas filter

The Canvas filter gives the surface of your bitmap an embossed, textured look. For best results, use a canvas map that has highly contrasting features.

To apply the Canvas filter

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Artistic, Canvas.

3.	Click the Load button.

4.	In the Load Canvas Map Files dialog box, double-click a canvas map file.

5.	Move the Transparency slider to set the transparency of the effect.

A transparency setting of 100 percent allows emboss values to be applied without significantly affecting the colors in your bitmap.

6.	Move the Emboss slider to set the depth of the effect.

A value of 100 gives you emboss values as they appear in the canvas map, while values between 100 and 200 exaggerates dark and light values in the map for a greater illusion of depth.

7.	Move the X and Y Offset sliders to set the amount that the entire canvas map pattern will be offset horizontally (X) and vertically (Y).

8.	Click a Tile Offset button to determine how each row or column of tiles will be offset from the others.

9.	Move the Offset slider to set the amount of offset.

 Note

•	This filter supports all color models except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit grayscale, paletted, and black-and-white.

•	The Offset slider is only available if you choose Rows or Columns to offset the tiles.

 Related Topics


Applying the Glass Block filter

You can use the Glass Block filter to give your bitmap the effect of being viewed through a number of glass blocks. For best results, use mid-range block sizes.

To apply the Glass Block filter

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Artistic, Glass Block.

3.	Move the Horizontal and Vertical sliders to set block dimensions.

 Tip

•	To keep the block dimensions identical, enable the Square Blocks check box.

 Note

•	This filter supports all color models except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit grayscale, and black-and-white.

 Related Topics


Applying the Impressionist filter

You can use the Impressionist filter to make your bitmap look like an Impressionist painting.

To apply the Impressionist filter

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Artistic, Impressionist.

3.	Move the Horizontal and Vertical sliders to set the amount of scatter.

 Tip

•	To maintain equal horizontal and vertical values, enable the Identical Values check box.

 Note

•	This filter supports all color models except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit grayscale, and black-and-white.

 Related Topics


Applying the Smoked Glass filter

The Smoked Glass filter places a colored tint over your bitmap, like a sheet of colored glass. You can control the opacity and blurriness of the glass.

To apply the Smoked Glass filter

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Artistic, Smoked Glass.

3.	Move the Tint slider to set the opacity of the effect.

4.	Move the Percent slider to set the level of blur.

The lower the level of blur, the sharper the bitmap.

5.	Click the Color picker, and click a color.

 Tip

•	You can also select a color for the tint by clicking the Eyedropper tool and clicking a color from the bitmap.

 Note

•	This filter supports all color models except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit grayscale, paletted, and black-and-white.

 Related Topics


Applying the Vignette filter

Add professional-looking framing effects to your bitmaps with the Vignette filter. You can set the shape, color, and fade rate of the frames.

To apply the Vignette filter

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Artistic, Vignette.

3.	In the Color section, enable one of the following buttons:

•	Black [image] applies a black frame

•	White [image] applies a white frame

•	Other [image] allows you to choose a frame color from the color picker or from the bitmap using the Eyedropper tool

4.	In the Shape section, enable one of the following buttons:

•	Ellipse

•	Circle

•	Rectangle

•	Square

5.	Move the Offset slider to set the size of the center of the frame.

Move the slider to the left to increase the size of the frame; move the slider to the right to decrease the size of the frame.

6.	Move the Fade slider to set the fade-out rate.

 Note

•	This filter supports all color models except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit grayscale, paletted and black-and-white.

 Related Topics


Using the blur filters


Overview: Using the blur filters
Using the blur filters

The filters in the Blur flyout menu alter the pixels of your bitmap to soften, smooth, or blend edges, or create motion effects.

Directional Smooth filter

The Directional Smooth smoothes edges and surfaces, giving your bitmap anti-aliased edges without distorting the bitmap. This filter analyzes the value of pixels with similar tonal values to determine the direction in which to apply the greatest amount of smoothing.

Gaussian Blur filter

The Gaussian Blur filter produces a hazy effect, blurring the bitmap according to a Gaussian distribution, which spreads the pixel information outward using bell-shaped curves.

Jaggy Despeckle filter

The Jaggy Despeckle filter scatters colors in a bitmap, creating a soft, blurred effect with minimal distortion. It is most effective for removing the jagged edges that can appear in line art or high-contrast bitmaps. The Jaggy Despeckle dialog box has options for controlling height and width values. You can change the values individually or keep them identical. Setting the values independently will mildly diffuse the bitmap with minimum loss of detail.

Low Pass filter

The Low Pass filter removes sharp edges and detail from a bitmap, leaving smooth gradients and low-frequency detail. You can control the percentage and radius of the effect using the sliders. At higher settings, the Low Pass filter creates a blurring effect that erases much of the bitmap's detail.

Motion Blur filter

The Motion Blur filter creates the illusion of movement in a bitmap. You can set the direction of motion. You can also control the distance of the effect: the higher the distance value, the more blurring occurs.

Radial Blur filter

The Radial Blur filter creates a blurring effect that spins around or radiates outward from a central point. You can reposition the center point, set the intensity of the effect, choose between two blur modes, and set the quality of the effect.

Smooth filter

The Smooth filter tones down differences in adjacent pixels, resulting in only a slight loss of detail. It is an excellent tool for removing dithering that results when converting a bitmap in Paletted color mode to RGB. You can apply the filter to the entire bitmap or a selected area only. Because the results are very subtle effect, you may have to zoom in to see its impact. Try applying it several times to increase the intensity of the effect. The difference between the Smooth filter and the Directional Smooth filter is subtle and may only be apparent at a high resolution. The Smooth filter blends all neighboring pixels equally, while the Directional Smooth filter blurs lightly along the edges of your bitmap.

Soften filter

The Soften filter smoothes and tones down harsh edges with only minimal loss of bitmap detail. You can set the intensity of the effect. The difference between the Smooth and Soften filters is subtle and may only be apparent at a high resolution.

 Note

•	Bitmaps must be embedded before you can manipulate them. In Corel VENTURA, you cannot manipulate an externally referenced bitmap or a bitmap inserted as an OLE object. You can edit both embedded and externally referenced bitmaps directly in Corel PHOTO-PAINT by right-clicking them in Corel VENTURA and clicking Picture, Edit In Corel PHOTO-PAINT.

 Related Topics


Applying the Directional Smooth filter

The Directional Smooth filter applies a very subtle amount of blurring to your bitmap, so that the bitmap isn't distorted.

To apply the Directional Smooth filter

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Blur, Directional Smooth.

3.	Move the Percentage slider to set the intensity of the effect.

 Note

•	This filter supports all color models except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit grayscale, paletted, and black-and-white.

 Related Topics


Applying the Gaussian Blur filter

The Gaussian Blur filter produces a hazy effect, blurring the bitmap according to a Gaussian distribution, which spreads the pixel information outward using bell-shaped curves.

To apply the Gaussian Blur filter

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Blur, Gaussian Blur.

3.	Move the Radius slider to set the intensity of the effect.

 Note

•	This filter supports all color models except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit grayscale, paletted, and black-and-white.

 Related Topics


Applying the Jaggy Despeckle filter

The Jaggy Despeckle filter applies a soft, blurred effect to your bitmap. It is especially effective on bitmaps with a high amount of contrast.

To apply the Jaggy Despeckle filter

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Blur, Jaggy Despeckle.

3.	Move the Width and Height sliders to set the sharpness of the effect.

 Tip

•	Enable the Symmetric check box to maintain equal width and height values.

 Note

•	This filter supports all color models except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit grayscale, paletted, and black-and-white.

 Related Topics


Applying the Low Pass filter

Use the Low Pass filter to remove sharp edges and detail from your bitmap. High settings will erase much of the bitmap's detail.

To apply the Low Pass filter

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Blur, Low Pass.

3.	Move the Percentage slider to set the intensity of the effect.

4.	Move the Radius slider to set the range of the effect.

 Note

•	This filter supports all color models except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit grayscale, paletted, and black-and-white.

 Related Topics


Applying the Motion Blur filter

The Motion Blur filter blurs your bitmap like a photograph of a moving object.

To apply the Motion Blur filter

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Blur, Motion Blur.

3.	Move the Distance slider to set the intensity of the effect.

4.	Click a position on the edge of the Direction dial.

5.	In the Off-Image Sampling section, enable one of the following buttons:

•	Ignore Pixels Outside Image [image] ignores pixels that fall outside of the bitmap

•	Use Paper Color [image] starts the blurring with white color

•	Sample Nearest Edge Pixel [image] starts the blurring with the colors at the edge of the bitmap

 Tip

•	You can also set the direction of movement by typing a value in the Direction box.

 Note

•	This filter supports all color models except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit grayscale, paletted, and black-and-white.

 Related Topics


Applying the Radial Blur filter

You can use the Radial Blur filter to give your bitmap a blurred effect that radiates out from a central point. Choose the fast quality level to speed up the effect.

To apply the Radial Blur filter

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Blur, Radial Blur.

3.	Click the Set Center button.

4.	Position the cursor over the bitmap, and click to set a center point around which the radial blur originates.

5.	Move the Amount slider to set the intensity of the effect.

6.	In the Mode section, enable one of the following buttons:

•	Spin [image] rotates the blur around the center point

•	Zoom [image] blurs outward from the center point

7.	In the Quality section, enable one of the following buttons:

•	Best [image] gives the greatest quality level, but is slower to apply

•	Fast [image] results in a lower quality level, but is quicker to apply

 Note

•	This filter supports all color models except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit grayscale, paletted and black-and-white.

•	If you want to zoom in on the bitmap, disable the Set Center button.

 Related Topics


Applying the Smooth filter

The Smooth filter applies an extremely subtle amount of blurring to your bitmap that may only be apparent at high zoom levels. Unlike the Directional Smooth filter, which blurs along the edges of your bitmap, the Smooth filter blurs all pixels equally.

To apply the Smooth filter

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Blur, Smooth.

3.	Move the Percentage slider to set the intensity of the effect.

 Note

•	This filter supports all color models except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit grayscale, paletted, and black-and-white.

 Related Topics


Applying the Soften filter

The Soften filter slightly blurs your bitmap, retaining a high level of detail. Try using the Smooth filter for a similar effect.

To apply the Soften filter

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Blur, Soften.

3.	Move the Percentage slider to set the intensity of the effect.

 Note

•	This filter supports all color models except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit grayscale, paletted, and black-and-white.

 Related Topics


Using the color transform filters


Overview: Using the color transform filters
Using the color transform filters

Bit Planes filter

The Bit Planes filter reduces the bitmap to basic RGB color components and emphasizes tonal changes. For example, certain areas appear as solid blocks because there is little change in tone. Since gradient fills have a high degree of color tone change, the Bit Planes filter is very useful for analyzing the number of steps in gradients.

Halftone filter

The Halftone filter gives your bitmap the appearance of a color halftone. Halftone bitmaps are made up of small dots in four colors: cyan, magenta, yellow, and black. Corel VENTURA allows you to control the size of the dots used and the angle at which the cyan, magenta, and yellow dots are printed. As in commercial color printing, the screen angles you set determine how the halftone dots on the screens line up and how the color blends when all the screens are seen together. You can adjust the screen angles to produce a wider range of colors.

Your bitmap must be in the RGB color model before you can convert it to a halftone.

Psychedelic filter

The Psychedelic filter changes the colors in your bitmap to bright, electric colors such as orange, hot pink, cyan, and lime green.

Solarize filter

The Solarize filter, like the Invert filter, transforms colors to appear like those of a negative photographic image. In photographic terms, solarization is a darkroom technique in which a sudden flash of light is used to darken unfilled areas of a print. Unlike the Invert filter (which produces a negative that actually inverts the bitmap colors), you control the intensity of the effect with the Solarize filter.

 Note

•	Bitmaps must be embedded before you can manipulate them. In Corel VENTURA, you cannot manipulate an externally referenced bitmap or a bitmap inserted as an OLE object. You can edit both embedded and externally referenced bitmaps directly in Corel PHOTO-PAINT by right-clicking them in Corel VENTURA and clicking Picture, Edit In Corel PHOTO-PAINT.

 Related Topics


Applying the Bit Planes filter

The Bit Planes filter reduces the bitmap to basic RGB color components and represents the tonal changes of your bitmap with solid areas of color. It is particularly useful for analyzing bitmap gradients.

To apply the Bit Planes filter

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Color Transform, Bit Planes.

3.	Move the Color Plane sliders.

The Color Plane sliders control the sensitivity of the effect. Higher values display fewer tonal changes and gradient steps. At the highest setting, the bitmap contains a large amount of black and white areas since the effect is displaying only extreme tone changes. Lower values display more tonal changes and gradations. At the lowest setting, a photographic bitmap appears to be covered with colored noise.

 Tip

•	Enable the Apply To All Planes check box to maintain equal values among the sliders.

 Note

•	This filter supports all color models except black-and-white.

 Related Topics


Applying the Halftone filter

Use this filter to give your bitmap the appearance of a color halftone.

To apply the Halftone filter

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Color Transform, Halftone.

3.	Move the Max Radius slider to set the maximum radius of a halftone dot.

4.	In the Channel Angle section, move the corresponding sliders to set the angle of each of the color screens.

 Note

•	This filter supports all color models except 48-bit RGB, Lab, 16-bit grayscale, paletted, and black-and-white.

 Related Topics


Applying the Psychedelic filter

The Psychedelic filter transforms the colors of your bitmap into shocking, bright colors. Small changes to the Level slider setting make a great difference.

To apply the Psychedelic filter

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Color Transform, Psychedelic.

3.	Move the Level slider to set the intensity of the effect.

 Note

•	This filter supports all color models except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit grayscale, paletted and black-and-white.

 Related Topics


Applying the Solarize filter

The Solarize filter makes your bitmap look like a negative photographic image.

To apply the Solarize filter

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Color Transform, Solarize.

3.	Move the Level slider to set the intensity of the effect.

 Note

•	This filter supports all color models except black-and-white.

 Related Topics


Using the noise filters


Overview: Using the noise filters
Using the noise filters

In bitmap editing, noise is defined as the random pixels across the bitmap that resemble static on television screens. Use the noise filters to create, control, or eliminate noise.

Add Noise filter

The Add Noise filter creates a granular effect that adds a texture to a flat or overly blended bitmap. There are three noise types you can choose from: uniform, spike, and Gaussian. Uniform provides an overall granular appearance, applying colors randomly. Spike uses colors that are distributed around a narrow curve and produces a thin, light-colored grain. Gaussian prioritizes colors along a Gaussian curve and results in more light and dark pixels than the uniform noise.

Diffuse filter

The Diffuse filter spreads out the pixels of your bitmap to fill in blank spaces and remove noise. Depending on the level you set, the effect can appear smooth or blurry, or it can produce a soft, double-edged look as if the bitmap were being seen through a photographer's diffusion lens.

Dust And Scratch filter

The Dust And Scratch filter reduces bitmap noise by averaging pixel values. This works something like adding water to a dry watercolor painting so that adjacent colors bleed into each other. As the name implies, this filter is extremely useful for eliminating dust and scratch faults in a bitmap.

Maximum filter

The Maximum filter removes noise by adjusting pixel values based on the maximum pixel value of neighboring pixels. This filter also causes a mild blurring effect if applied in large percentages or more than once. The highest setting will completely obscure your bitmap.

Median filter

The Median filter removes noise and detail by averaging the colors of adjacent pixels in the bitmap. Like the Dust And Scratch filter, this filter determines the median value of neighboring pixels to smooth the bitmap. A median effect, however, blurs a bitmap to a greater extent than the Dust And Scratch filter.

Minimum filter

The Minimum filter darkens a bitmap by adjusting pixel values based on the minimum pixel value of neighboring pixels. The Radius slider controls the number of neighboring pixels that are successively selected and evaluated in the minimum filter process. A large radius value will result in a more profound filter effect than a small radius value. Use the Percentage slider to control the amount of darkening. Higher settings or multiple applications will probably reduce bitmap detail.

Remove Noise filter

The Remove Noise filter softens the bitmap and reduces the speckled effect that can occur during the scanning or video capturing process. The Remove Noise filter compares each pixel to surrounding pixels and calculates an average. Each pixel with a brightness value that exceeds the threshold value you set is removed. This effect operates similarly to the Jaggy Despeckle effect; however, it also removes random pixel noise in the bitmap.

 Note

•	Bitmaps must be embedded before you can manipulate them. In Corel VENTURA, you cannot manipulate an externally referenced bitmap or a bitmap inserted as an OLE object. You can edit both embedded and externally referenced bitmaps directly in Corel PHOTO-PAINT by right-clicking them in Corel VENTURA and clicking Picture, Edit In Corel PHOTO-PAINT.

 Related Topics


Applying the Add Noise filter

Use the Add Noise filter to create a granular effect that adds random pixels across your bitmap. You can choose from three different types of noise, set the amount of noise, and apply pixels of different colors.

To apply the Add Noise filter

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Noise, Add Noise.

3.	In the Noise Type section enable one of the following buttons:

•	Gaussian [image] prioritizes colors along a Gaussian curve. Most colors added by the Add Noise filter either closely resemble the original colors or extend the boundaries of the specified range

•	Spike [image] uses colors that are distributed around a narrow curve. It produces a thinner, lighter colored grain

•	Uniform [image] provides an overall granular appearance, applying noise randomly.

4.	Move the Level slider to adjust the intensity and value range affected by the noise.

5.	Move the Density slider to set the amount of noise pixels per inch.

 Tip

•	Enable the Color Noise check box to apply colorful pixels of noise.

 Note

•	This filter supports all color models except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit grayscale, paletted, and black-and-white.

 Related Topics


Applying the Diffuse filter

The Diffuse filter removes noise by spreading out the pixels of your bitmap to fill in blank spaces. The intensity of the effect can vary quite noticeably, depending on the Level slider setting you choose.

To apply the Diffuse filter

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Noise, Diffuse.

3.	Move the Level slider to set the intensity of the effect.

 Note

•	This filter supports all color models except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit grayscale, paletted, and black-and-white.

 Related Topics


Applying the Dust and Scratch filter

The Dust and Scratch filter lets you repair damage to an image. It reduces bitmap noise by averaging pixel values.

To apply the Dust and Scratch filter

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Noise, Dust & Scratch.

3.	Move the Threshold slider to reduce image noise.

Threshold determines how great a change in value must occur to any pixel before the effect is applied.

4.	Move the Radius slider to set the range of pixels the dialog box uses to produce the effect.

 Related Topics


Applying the Maximum filter

Use the Maximum filter to remove noise from your bitmap.

To apply the Maximum filter

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Noise, Maximum.

3.	Move the Percentage slider to set the intensity of the effect.

With the high Percentage slider settings, your bitmap will appear significantly blurred.

4.	Move the Radius slider to determine the number of neighboring pixels included in the filtering process.

 Note

•	This filter supports all color models except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit grayscale, paletted, and black-and-white.

 Related Topics


Applying the Median filter

The Median filter removes noise from your bitmap by blurring neighboring pixels.

To apply the Median filter

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Noise, Median.

3.	Move the Radius slider to set the number of neighboring pixels the filter uses to calculate the median.

 Note

•	This filter supports all color models except paletted and black-and-white.

 Related Topics


Applying the Minimum filter

The Minimum filter removes noise by darkening the pixels of your bitmap.

To apply the Minimum filter

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Noise, Minimum.

3.	Move the Percentage slider to set the intensity of the effect.

High Percentage slider settings may result in some loss of bitmap detail.

4.	Move the Radius slider to set the number of neighboring pixels the filter darkens.

 Note

•	This filter supports all color models except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit grayscale, paletted, and black-and-white.

 Related Topics


Applying the Remove Noise filter

Use the Remove Noise filter to soften your bitmap and to remove random pixel noise.

To apply the Remove Noise filter

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Noise, Remove Noise.

3.	Move the Threshold slider to determine the brightness level at which noise is removed.

 Tip

•	Enable the Auto check box if you want Corel VENTURA to set the threshold for you.

 Note

•	This filter supports all color models except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit grayscale, paletted, and black-and-white.

 Related Topics


Using the render filters


Overview: Using the render filters
Using the render filters

The render filters offer ways of simulating lighting, photographic realism, and the appearance of three-dimensional depth.

3D Stereo Noise filter

The 3D Stereo Noise filter generates a dithered noise pattern. The result is a bitmap that has the appearance of 3D depth when viewed a certain way. The 3D Stereo Noise filter is particularly suited to high-contrast line art and grayscale images. You may not see any result at all with a complex bitmap. To view the effect, focus your eyes on the bitmap as if you were staring through it. Try moving it closer and farther away from you until shapes begin to resolve themselves in a three-dimensional space on your page.

Lens Flare filter

The Lens Flare filter produces rings of light on your bitmap that simulate the flare that appears on a photograph when the camera is aimed toward a direct bright light. In a camera, this occurs because the light is being passed through a series of lenses, each of which affects the light's intensity and spread. Lens flares will differ from lens to lens, depending on focal length and lens magnification. The Lens Flare filter provides you with three different lens types. Use the Lens Flare filter to add a touch of photographic realism to bitmaps.

Lighting Effects filter

The Lighting Effects filter offers a range of tools for adding up to 20 light sources to your RGB bitmaps. This allows you to add dramatic special effects: shine a spotlight on the subject of your bitmap, or use colored lighting to set a mood. You can control the color, brightness, and sharpness of a light source.

 Note

•	Bitmaps must be embedded before you can manipulate them. In Corel VENTURA, you cannot manipulate an externally referenced bitmap or a bitmap inserted as an OLE object. You can edit both embedded and externally referenced bitmaps directly in Corel PHOTO-PAINT by right-clicking them in Corel VENTURA and clicking Picture, Edit In Corel PHOTO-PAINT.

 Related Topics


Applying the 3D Stereo Noise filter

Use the 3D Stereo Noise filter to create a dithered noise pattern that has a three-dimensional appearance when viewed a certain way. For best results, use bitmaps with a high level of contrast.

To apply the 3D Stereo Noise filter

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Render, 3D Stereo Noise.

3.	Move the Depth slider to set the intensity of the effect.

 Note

•	This filter supports all color models except 48-bit RGB, Lab, 16-bit grayscale, paletted, and black-and-white.

 Tip

•	Enable the Show Dots check box if you want two dots added to the bitmap. The dots help you focus correctly on the bitmap. Adjust your focus so that the two dots become three, and then move your gaze up the page to the bitmap.

 Related Topics


Applying the Lens Flare filter

The Lens Flare filter simulates bright light striking a camera lens, the flare created, as well as the bright flare point, is refracted into a series of small lightened circles.

To apply the Lens Flare filter

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Render, Lens Flare.

3.	In the Lens Flare dialog box, click the preview bitmap to set the center of the flare.

4.	In the Lens Type section, enable one of the following buttons:

•	50-300 mm Zoom [image] creates a lens flare effect common to focal lengths between 50 mm (standard lens, normal perspective) and 300 mm (telephoto/zoom lenses, magnified perspective)

•	35 mm Prime [image] creates a lens flare effect common to a moderate wide-angle lens

•	105 mm Prime [image] creates a lens flare effect common to a moderate telephoto lens

5.	Click the Color picker, and click a color for the filter.

6.	Move the Brightness slider to set the flare's brightness.

 Tip

•	You can also select a color for the filter by clicking the Eyedropper tool and clicking a color on the bitmap.

 Note

•	This filter supports only the 24-bit RGB color model.

 Related Topics


Applying the Lighting Effects filter

Add light sources, ambient lighting, or both to your bitmap with the Lighting Effects filter. You can control the color, brightness, and contrast of the light sources.

Your bitmap must be 24-bit RGB or 8-bit grayscale to work with this filter.

To add light sources using the Lighting Effects filter

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Render, Lighting Effects.

3.	On the Light Source page, enable one of the following buttons:

•	Spotlight [image] provides a beam of light with clearly defined edges. You can aim, elevate, and focus spotlights.

•	Directional [image] provides even lighting with no hot center. You can aim a directional light. This option is especially useful for defining textures when relief is being applied to your bitmap.

4.	Click the Color picker, and click a color for the light source.

5.	Drag the light source selector to set the position and angle of the light.

6.	Enable the On check box to turn the light source on.

7.	Move any of the following sliders:

•	Brightness [image] sets the light source intensity

•	Cone Size [image] controls the width of the pool of light, from 0 to 180 degrees

•	Edge [image] controls the softness of the edge of the pool of light, and is expressed as a percentage of the sharpest level of focus

•	Opacity [image] sets a brightness value to be applied across the bitmap pixels without factoring tonal values

8.	Click the Omni button to apply the Omni preset light source type.

 Tip

•	To add or remove light sources, click the Add and Subtract Light Source buttons. You can add and define up to 20 light sources.

•	To hide the light source in the Preview window, click the Reveal/Hide Light Source button. You can also set the angle more precisely by entering an exact value in the Angle box on the Light Source page.

 Note

•	Settings on the Light Source page affect only the current light source, while the settings on the Atmosphere page affect the whole bitmap.

To apply ambient lighting using the Lighting effects filter

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Click the Atmosphere tab

3.	In the Ambient section, move the Brightness slider to set the Ambient light intensity.

4.	Click the Color picker, and click a color for the ambient lighting.

5.	Enable the On check box to turn the Ambient light on.

6.	In the Image section, move the Brightness slider to set the light intensity of the bitmap.

7.	Choose a channel from the Channel list box.

8.	In the Texture section, move the Relief slider to adjust the amount of texture on the surface of your bitmap.

9.	Move the Contrast slider to adjust the contrast of the texture.

A setting of 0 uses all 256 grayscale values; whereas, a setting of 100 uses just the values 0 and 255 (black and white).

To create an embossed relief using light

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Render Lighting Effects.

3.	Choose a style from the Style list box.

4.	On the Atmosphere page, choose a channel from the Channel list box.

5.	Move the Relief slider to set the depth of the relief.

6.	Move the Contrast slider to set the amount of contrast in the relief.

To save a Lighting Effects filter style

1.	Follow the steps in the "To apply ambient lighting using the Lighting Effects filter", and the "To add a light source using the Lighting Effect filter" procedure to create a lighting style.

2.	Click the Plus button.

3.	Type a filename for the style in the Save Preset box.

To load a lighting style

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Render, Lighting Effects.

3.	Choose a style from the Style list box.

To delete a lighting style

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Render Lighting Effects.

3.	Choose a style from the Style list box.

4.	Click the Minus button.

 Related Topics


Using the sharpen filters


Overview: Using the sharpen filters
Using the sharpen filters

The sharpen filters increase the contrast between the pixels of your bitmap to improve the focus and enhance edges.

Adaptive Unsharp filter

The Adaptive Unsharp filter accentuates edge detail by analyzing the pixel value of neighboring pixels. The filter preserves more bitmap detail than other sharpening effects that are applied across the bitmap; however, the results are subtle and may only be apparent in high-resolution bitmaps.

Directional Sharpen filter

The Directional Sharpen filter analyzes pixels of similar shades to determine the direction in which to apply the greatest amount of sharpening. Sharpening makes bitmap edges and contours more distinct.

Find Edges filter

The Find Edges filter detects the outlines of forms in your bitmap and converts them to soft or solid lines.

High Pass filter

The High Pass filter removes low-frequency detail and shading. The effect can give a bitmap an ethereal, glowing quality. It emphasizes the highlights and luminous areas of a bitmap. At higher settings, the High Pass filter removes most of the bitmap detail, leaving only the edge details clearly visible. If you only want to emphasize highlights, use lower settings.

Sharpen filter

The Sharpen filter accentuates the edges in a bitmap by increasing the contrast between adjacent pixels.

Unsharp Mask filter

The Unsharp Mask filter accentuates edge detail and brings some blurred areas in the bitmap into focus.

 Note

•	Bitmaps must be embedded before you can manipulate them. In Corel VENTURA, you cannot manipulate an externally referenced bitmap or a bitmap inserted as an OLE object. You can edit both embedded and externally referenced bitmaps directly in Corel PHOTO-PAINT by right-clicking them in Corel VENTURA and clicking Picture, Edit In Corel PHOTO-PAINT.

 Related Topics


Applying the Adaptive Unsharp filter

Use the Adaptive Unsharp filter to sharpen edge detail in your bitmap.

To apply the Adaptive Unsharp filter

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Sharpen, Adaptive Unsharp.

3.	Move the Percentage slider to determine the degree of sharpening.

 Note

•	This filter supports all color models except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit grayscale, paletted, and black-and-white.

 Related Topics


Applying the Directional Sharpen filter

The Directional Sharpen filter enhances edge detail in your bitmap. Bitmap pixels of similar shades determine the direction in which the sharpening is applied.

To apply the Directional Sharpen filter

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Sharpen, Directional Sharpen.

3.	Move the Percentage slider to determine the degree of sharpening.

 Note

•	This filter supports all color models except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit grayscale, paletted, and black-and-white.

 Related Topics


Applying the Find Edges filter

You can use the Find Edges filter to convert outlines to soft or solid lines. For the clearest results, use the Find Edges filter on high-contrast bitmaps; for example, bitmaps that contain text.

To apply the Find Edges filter

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Sharpen, Find Edges.

3.	Enable one of the following buttons:

•	Soft [image] creates a smooth, blurred outline

•	Solid [image] creates a sharp, crisp outline

4.	Move the Level slider to define a sensitivity value.

The higher the sensitivity value, the more the edges are enhanced.

 Note

•	This filter supports all color models except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit grayscale, paletted, and black-and-white.

 Related Topics


Applying the High Pass filter

The High Pass filter removes bitmap detail by emphasizing the highlights and luminous areas of your bitmap. Most bitmap detail is removed on high percentage settings.

To apply the High Pass filter

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Sharpen, High Pass.

3.	Move the Percentage slider to set the intensity of the effect.

Higher values remove most of the bitmap detail, leaving only the edge details clearly visible. Lower percentage settings emphasize highlights only.

4.	Move the Radius slider to determine how far colors will bleed outward from the edges.

Radius values represent the number of pixels that will be affected.

 Note

•	This filter supports all color models except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit grayscale, paletted, and black-and-white.

 Related Topics


Applying the Sharpen filter

The Sharpen filter accentuates edge detail by bringing blurred areas in your bitmap into focus. In addition, contrast between neighboring pixels is increased.

To apply the Sharpen filter

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Sharpen, Sharpen.

3.	Move the Edge Level (%) slider to set the intensity of the effect.

4.	Move the Threshold slider to determine how much a pixel's color value must change before the effect is applied.

 Note

•	This filter supports all color models except 48-bit RGB, 16-bit grayscale, paletted, and black-and-white.

 Related Topics


Applying the Unsharp Mask filter

You can use the Unsharp Mask filter to sharpen the focus of a bitmap by increasing its edge detail.

To apply the Unsharp Mask filter

1.	Select a frame that contains a bitmap.

2.	Click Format, Bitmap, Sharpen, Unsharp Mask.

3.	Move the Percentage slider to set the intensity of the effect.

4.	Move the Radius slider to control how many pixels are evaluated at once.

A larger radius value results in a more pronounced effect.

5.	Move the Threshold slider to determine which pixels are affected.

Pixels with a grayscale value that is higher than the threshold value are affected.

 Related Topics


Managing plug-in filters


Overview: Managing plug-in filters
Managing plug-in filters

Corel VENTURA lets you add and remove filters, called plug-ins, that are produced by companies other than Corel. Certain plug-ins have special requirements in order to function properly in Corel VENTURA (for example, that the bitmap be in a certain color model). You may need to convert a bitmap to a suitable color model, or the plug-in may not be usable in Corel VENTURA. To identify the requirements of a given plug-in, refer to the documentation provided with that plug-in.

 Related Topics


Adding and removing plug-in filters

You can customize the special effects that are available from the Format, Bitmap menu by adding or removing third-party plug-in filters.

To add a plug-in filter

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, click Workspace, Plug-Ins.

3.	Click the Add button.

4.	In the Select A Plug-In Folder dialog box, double-click the folder where the filters you want to add are stored.

To remove a plug-in filter

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, click Workspace, Plug-Ins.

3.	In the Plug-In Folders list, select the folder where the filter you want to remove is stored.

4.	Click the Remove button.

 Related Topics


Initializing third-party filters when opening Corel VENTURA

You can initialize third-party plug-in filters at start-up so that they are immediately available. If you do not initialize these filters at start-up, they are automatically initialized the first time you access the Format, Bitmap menu. If you do not plan to use any special effects, you can save a few seconds at start-up by turning off the initialize option.

To initialize third-party filters when opening Corel VENTURA

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, click Workspace, Plug-Ins.

3.	Enable the Initialize Filters At Start-Up check box.

 Related Topics


Scanning images


Overview: Scanning images
Scanning images

If you have a scanner, you can scan images directly into Corel VENTURA. The quality of the scanned image depends on the quality of the original image. You can make alterations to the image once it is in Corel VENTURA. You must install the TWAIN software supplied with Corel VENTURA before you can scan. TWAIN is an open interface that lets you create an image using a scanner and then import the image into your publication without leaving Corel VENTURA. Your scanner must support TWAIN.

 Related Topics


Scanning images

You use your scanner to produce digital images of line art, drawings, photographs, and even three-dimensional objects. First, you need to hook up your scanner and install the scanner software, following the instructions provided by the scanner's manufacturer. You then need to identify the scanner source in Corel VENTURA. The source is the scanner you're using to create scanned images. You can use CorelSCAN to configure your scanner and to scan images. The images you scan must fit on the scanner bed to be reproduced accurately.

To select a source

1.	Click File, Acquire Image, Select Source.

2.	Choose a scanner model from the list.

3.	Click the Select button.

To scan an image

•	Click File, Acquire Image, Acquire.

The dialog box that opens depends on the manufacturer of your scanner. For more information, see the documentation provided with your scanner.

To use CorelSCAN

•	Click File, Acquire Image, Acquire From CorelSCAN.

For more information about using CorelSCAN, click the Help button in the CorelSCAN 8 dialog box.

 Tip

•	Keep in mind that image quality will only be as good as your output sources allow. It is a waste of disk space to scan an image at a high color depth if the monitor or printer you're using is not capable of producing such a wide range of color.

•	The Deinterlace filter removes even or odd horizontal lines from scanned images. For more information about the Deinterlace filter, see "Removing scan lines from a bitmap."


Printing


Overview: Printing
Printing

Corel provides extensive printing options designed for both desktop and commercial printing. You have control over what you print, the size and position of a print job, and the order and orientation of the pages of a print job. You can preview a print job to see how it will look when you print. Most of the printing features that are provided are not required to print simple documents on a desktop printing device. If you are looking for basic printing instructions, see "Setting up a print job."

If you are using a PostScript printing device and are having trouble printing, see "Using PostScript to optimize a print job." You can also fix certain problems by adjusting settings, as explained in "Fine-tuning a print job." We recommend that you do not adjust these settings unless you are having trouble printing.

If you plan to print a document on a commercial printing press, see "Printing on a commercial press." This section contains information about creating printing plates, preparing images for printing on commercial printing presses, and other issues of which you should be aware.

 More Detailed Information


Setting up a print job


Overview: Setting up a print job
Setting up a print job

It is essential that you select and properly configure the appropriate printing device driver before you print. Consult the printing device manufacturer's instructions, the Windows documentation, or the service bureau or printing shop that will be printing the work to find out how best to set up the printing device driver.

When setting up a printing device, it is important that you know the size of paper on which you are printing. The paper size should reflect the settings in the Page Properties dialog box. If the print job is larger than the paper on which you are printing, you can "tile" the work so that it is spread across several pieces of paper. You can then assemble the separate pages to create a single sheet.

You have a great deal of control over what parts of a publication you print. You can print an entire publication or specific pages or chapters. You can choose to print all pictures and graphics, and text, or you can choose not to print pictures and graphics, hidden pictures, or text. You can also specify the number of copies you want to print, and whether you want the copies collated. Collating is useful when you are printing multipage documents. If you enable the Collate check box, a complete copy of each document is printed before the next copy is printed. If collating is disabled, all the copies of the first page are printed before copies of the second page are printed, and so on. Also, if you print multiple chapters, you can insert a blank page between two chapters that don't end and begin on consecutive pages. For example, if chapter 21 ends on page 123 and chapter 22 begins on page 125, then a blank page can be inserted as page 124.

 Tip

•	The PrintScheduler script lets you set up a print job so that it prints automatically at another time. For example, use the PrintScheduler to print a publication on a network printer during off-peak hours. For more information about scripts see "Recordings and scripts." For more information about scripts included with Corel VENTURA, see "Scripts and wizards included with Corel VENTURA."

 Related Topics


Printing a document

Once your printing device is properly configured, you may often find that you can print without changing any of the default settings.

To print a document

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the Print button.

 Related Topics


Selecting and configuring a printing device

Because printing device installation is controlled by Windows and because every type of printing device has different device properties, refer to the printing device manufacturer's documentation and the Windows documentation for more information about installing and setting up a printing device.

By default, if you try to print a print job with an orientation different from that specified in the device properties, a message warns you and asks if you want to adjust the printing device paper orientation. You can disable this warning and the paper orientation is automatically adjusted.

To select a printing device

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Choose a printing device from the Name list box.

If the device driver you require is not listed, install it following the usual Windows procedure.

If you're proofing or printing a job in-house, choose the device driver for the local printing device.

If you're sending a file to a service bureau, choose the device driver that's specified by the service bureau.

To set the printing device properties

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the Properties button.

3.	Do one of the following:

•	Set only the Paper Size, Orientation, Tray, and Resolution if you're printing to a PostScript device. Leave all other options at their default settings and set them from the Print dialog box instead.

•	Set all relevant options here if you're printing to a non-PostScript device.

To disable the Page Orientation Warning

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the Miscellaneous tab.

3.	In the Special Settings section, choose Page Orientation Warning from the Options list and choose Off from the setting list.

 Related Topics


Using a printing device color profile

The printing device color profile helps to ensure accurate color reproduction. You can enable or disable this feature when you print, but you must initially set it up using the Corel Color Profile wizard.

To enable the current printing device color profile

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the Miscellaneous tab.

3.	Enable the Use Color Profile check box.

To choose a printing device color profile

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the Miscellaneous tab.

3.	Click the Set Profiles button.

4.	Choose a color profile from one of the following list boxes:

•	Composite Printing device [image] if you aren't printing color separations

•	Separations Printing device list box [image] if you are printing color separations

To run the Corel Color Profile Wizard

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	Double-click Color Management and click Profiles.

3.	Click the Color Profile Wizard button.

 Related Topics


Printing multiple copies

You can print multiple copies of the same document. If you are printing a document with multiple pages, you might want to collate the copies.

Collating allows you to print one full set of the selected pages before printing the second full set (for example, a set of pages 1 to 10 prints before a second set of pages 1 to 10 prints, and so on).

To print multiple copies

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Type the number of copies you need in the Number Of Copies box.

3.	Enable the Collate check box if you want the copies collated.

 Related Topics


Specifying the chapters or pages to print

You can choose to print the entire publication, just specific chapters, or just specific pages. You can also choose to automatically insert a blank page between two chapters that don't end and begin on consecutive pages.

To print the entire publication

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Enable the Publication button.

To print specific chapters

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Enable the Chapters button.

3.	Choose the chapters you want to print from the chapters list box.

To print only the current page

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Enable the Current Page button.

To print specific pages

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Enable the Pages button.

3.	Choose one of the following from the Pages list box:

•	Left Pages

•	Right Pages

•	Left And Right

4.	In the Pages box, type the pages you want to print.

•	A dash (-) between numbers defines a range of sequential pages (for example, 1-5 prints pages 1 to 5).

•	A comma (,) between numbers defines a series of nonsequential pages (for example, 1, 5 prints pages 1 and 5 only).

•	Any combination of dashes and commas is supported (for example, 1-3, 5, 7, 10-12 prints the following pages: 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 10, 11, and 12).

•	Inserting a tilde (~) between two numbers causes those two pages plus every second page in between to print. For example,1~6 prints the following pages: 1, 3, 5, and 6. If you type 2~6, pages 2, 4, and 6 print.

To insert a blank page between chapters

1.	Click Publication, Publication Properties.

2.	Click the General tab.

3.	Choose one of the following from Print Blank Pages list box:

•	Ask Always [image] prompts you when a blank page is required

•	Always Insert [image] automatically inserts a blank page when required

•	Never Insert [image] never inserts a blank page

 Note

•	By default, the print range is set to the current page. To change the default print range click Tools, Options. Then double-click Global, click Printing Defaults, and choose a default range from the Default Print Range list box.

 Related Topics


Specifying the text, pictures, or graphics to print

You can set up a print job so that all text and pictures and graphics in a document print, or you can choose between printing text or pictures and graphics alone.

To print text

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the Miscellaneous tab.

3.	Enable the Print Text check box

4.	Enable the Print All Text In Black check box if you want to print text in black instead of in color.

To print pictures and graphics

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Enable the Print Pictures And Graphics check box.

If this check box is disabled, then pictures that aren't hidden are replaced by their file names. Hidden pictures don't print and aren't replaced by their filenames.

3.	Enable the Print Hidden Pictures check box if you want to print hidden pictures.

You can't print hidden pictures if the Print Pictures & Graphics check box isn't enabled.

 Related Topics


Printing large print jobs as tiles

If the print job you want to print is larger than the paper on which it is to be printed, you can choose to print it as tiles. Portions of each page of the print job are printed on separate sheets of paper that you can assemble into one large sheet.

To print large print jobs as tiles

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the Layout tab.

3.	Enable the Print Tiled Pages check box.

4.	Type a value (for example, .25 inches) or a percentage of the page size in the Tile Overlap box to specify by how much you want the tiles to overlap.

To print large print jobs as tiles in the Print Preview window

1.	Click File, Print Preview.

2.	Click Settings, Layout.

3.	Follow steps 3 and 4 from the previous procedure.

 Related Topics


Using preset printing options

A print style is a set of saved printing options. Print styles are useful because they let you avoid setting all the printing options each time you print.

To select a print style

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Choose a print style from the Print Style list box.

To create a print style

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	In the Print dialog box, set the printing options.

3.	Click the General tab.

4.	Click the Save As button.

5.	Type a name for the style in the Save Print Style As box.

To edit a print style

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Choose a print style from the Print Style list box.

3.	Follow steps 2 to 5 from the previous procedure.

To delete a print style

1.	Click File, Print Preview.

2.	Choose a print style from the Print Style list box.

3.	Click File, Delete Print Style.

 Note

•	When you save a print style, a dialog box opens that includes a section called Settings To Save In Style. The settings in this section correspond to the printing options you've already selected. You can specify which settings to include in a print style in this dialog box.

•	Some options saved in a print style may actually be stored in the .INI file of the application.

 Tips

•	You can also select, edit, save and delete print styles from the Print Preview window.

•	If you close the Print dialog box before you print, all of the changes you have made to the print options are discarded. If you do not want to lose these changes and you need to close the dialog box (that is, you need to change the work before you print), save the settings as a print style, or click the Apply button before you click the Cancel button.

 Related Topics


Printing multiple pages on a single printed sheet


Overview: Printing multiple pages on a single printed sheet
Printing multiple pages on a single printed sheet

If each page of a document is smaller than the sheet of paper on which it is printed, or if you shrink the pages of a document, then you can print several pages on a single sheet of paper. There are two methods for printing multiple pages of a document on a single printed sheet: using signature layout styles and using N-up formats. Although these methods are similar, each one is appropriate for different tasks.

Signature layout styles let you determine the order and orientation of each page on the printed sheet. This allows you to arrange the pages of a document on the printed sheet for folding, trimming, and binding. Use signature layout styles if you are creating documents that require folding such as greeting cards or newsletters. Also, you can create custom signature layout styles for magazines, books, and any other type of document that requires that you arrange several smaller pages on a large sheet of paper.

N-up formats let you arrange several signature layouts on a single printed sheet or print multiple copies of the same signature layout on a single printed sheet. This is useful if you are printing on paper that can fit more than one copy of a signature layout or if you want to print thumbnail proofs of a document.

 Related Topics


Choosing signature layout styles

The default signature layout style reflects the layout of the document you are printing. You can select a different signature layout style in the Print dialog box. This won't effect the original document, only the way it is printed. For example, if you have a four-page document set up as full page but would like to print it as a top-fold or side-fold card, you can choose the appropriate card style in the Print dialog box.

To choose a signature layout style

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the Layout tab.

3.	Choose a signature layout style from the Signature Layout list box.

 Related Topics


Creating custom signature layout styles

You can create a custom signature layout styles in the Print Preview window. Creating a custom signature layout style lets you arrange the pages of a document on a printed sheet in whatever way you wish. The ability to customize signature layout styles is useful if you need to arrange the pages of large documents, such as books or magazines, on large sheets of paper for folding and trimming. After you have created a custom signature layout style you can save it for future use. Use the Property Bar to change the signature layout options.

To edit a signature layout style in the Print Preview window

1.	Click File, Print Preview.

2.	Click the Signature Layout tool.

3.	Type the number of pages to include on each printed page in the Pages Across/Down boxes.

4.	Type the size of the gutters in the Gutter Spacing boxes.

The top box controls horizontal gutter spacing [image] space between side-by-side pages [image] and the bottom box controls vertical gutter spacing [image] space between pages positioned above or below each other.

5.	Click each numbered box in the Print Preview window and choose a page number and an angle.

The page number determines which page of the document is printed in that position. The angle determines whether the page is printed top up (0 degrees) or top down (180 degrees).

6.	Enable the Double Sided Layout button if you are printing on both sides of the paper.

7.	Click the Signature Layout tabs at the bottom of the Print Preview window to view each side of a double-side layout.

 Note

•	When you enable the Double Sided Layout option and you print on a nonduplex printing device, a wizard automatically provides instructions on how to insert the paper into the printing device.

To save a layout style in the Print Options dialog box

1.	Follow the steps from the previous procedure, and click the Save Signature Layout button (+).

2.	Type a name for the signature layout style in the Save As box.

To delete a layout style in the Print Options dialog box

1.	Follow the steps from the "To choose a signature layout style in the Print Preview window" procedure

2.	Click the Delete Signature Layout button (-).

 Related Topics


Using N-up formats

You can print several pages on a single sheet of paper using the N-up Format tool. When you use this tool, each page is placed into a single frame which is defined by the intersection of one row and column in the N-up format. The first page is placed in the frame at the top left of the sheet of paper and each subsequent page is placed from left to right and top to bottom. Use the Property Bar to change the N-up format options.

If you use an N-up format with a signature layout style that already places several pages on a single sheet of paper (for example, tent-card), then the signature layout is placed in one frame.

To use a preset N-up format

1.	Click File, Print Preview.

2.	Click the N-up Format tool.

3.	Choose a preset N-up format from the N-up Format list box.

To create an N-up format

1.	Click File, Print Preview.

2.	Click the N-up Format tool.

3.	Type the number of rows and columns you want to print on each sheet of paper in the Rows/Columns boxes.

4.	Disable the Auto Margins button and type the size of the margins in the Top/Left Margins, Bottom/Right Margins boxes to manually set the margins.

5.	Enable the Equal Margins button if you want the left and right margins to be equal, and you want the top and bottom margins to be equal.

6.	Disable the Auto Gutter Spacing button, and type the size of the gutters in the Gutter Spacing boxes to manually set the gutters.

7.	Enable the Clone Frame button if you want all the frames on each sheet of paper to contain the same printed page.

For example, if there are nine frames on a printed sheet of paper, then page one appears nine times on the first sheet of paper, page two appears nine times on the second sheet, and so on. In this way you can print multiple copies of one page on a single sheet.

8.	Enable the Maintain Document Page Size button if you want each frame to be the same size as the page size specified in the document.

For example, if you create a document on an 8.5 by 11 inch page, the frames are constrained to that size. Thus, if you print on an 11 by 17 inch sheet of paper and specify 2 rows by 2 columns, some of the frames will not fit on the page.

To save an N-up format

1.	Follow steps the from the previous procedure

2.	Click the Save N-up format button (+).

3.	Type a name for the settings in the Save As box.

To delete an N-up format

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the "To create an N-up format" procedure.

2.	Choose an N-up format from the N-up Format list box.

3.	Click the Delete N-up format button (-).

 Related Topics


Previewing, sizing, and positioning a print job


Overview: Previewing, sizing, and positioning a print job
Previewing, sizing, and positioning a print job

The Print Preview window lets you see how the work appears when printed. It shows you the position and size of the print job on the paper. You can also see printing devices' marks such as crop marks and color calibration bars.

If you are using a Full Page or Manual signature layout style, you can change the position and size of the print job on the printed page. If you are printing bitmaps, use caution when sizing print jobs. Enlarging bitmaps may cause the output to appear jagged or pixelated.

 Related Topics


Previewing a print job

Print Preview lets you see what the work looks like when printed.

To preview a print job

•	Click File, Print Preview.

To move from page to page in the Print Preview window

•	Click one of the arrow buttons below the Print Preview window. The button pointing left flips back through the pages and the button pointing right flips forward through the pages. The arrow buttons are only accessible when print options are set for more than one page, not when print options are set to print the current page only.

 Tip

•	The Go To dialog box provides an alternative method for moving from page to page. To open the Go To dialog box, click View, Go To.

To print the page being previewed

•	Click File, Print This Sheet Now.

To magnify the page being previewed

1.	Click File, Print Preview.

2.	Click View, Zoom.

3.	Do one of the following:

•	Click one of the preset zoom levels

•	Enable the percent button and type a value in the Percent box.

To preview individual color separations

1.	Click File, Print Preview.

2.	Click View, Preview Separations, Separations.

You can only view individual color separations if you have enabled the Print Separations check box in the Print Options dialog box.

3.	Click the appropriate tab at the bottom of the Print Preview window to view each color separation.

 Tips

•	You can zoom in on a portion of the Print Preview by using the Zoom tool. To zoom in, click the Zoom tool and click the area you want to magnify. To zoom out, Right-click and click Zoom Out.

•	The Auto (Simulate Output) preview type in the View menu automatically sets the preview type to the settings that match the printing device driver. For example, if you are printing to a black-and-white printing device, the preview is grayscale. The Auto (Simulate Output) preview type is enabled by default. If you change the preview settings, then Auto (Simulate Output) is disabled. You can revert to the automatic settings by enabling Auto (Simulate Output).

 Related Topics


Customizing the print preview

If you want to increase the speed of the print preview, you can hide the print job. You can also specify a color or a grayscale preview.

To hide the print job

1.	Click File, Print Preview.

2.	Click View, and disable Show Image.

When Show Image is disabled, the print job is represented by a bounding box that you can use to position and size it.

To specify a color or grayscale Print Preview

1.	Click File, Print Preview.

2.	Do one of the following:

•	Click View, Preview Color, Color

•	Click View, Preview Color, Grayscale

 Tips

•	In addition to hiding the print job, you can display a high-resolution or low-resolution print preview from the Corel VENTURA Options dialog box. To do so, click Tools, Options. Then double-click Global, click Printing Defaults, and choose Normal (high-resolution), Low Res, or None (no image) from the Print Preview Mode list box.

•	Displaying individual color separations in grayscale instead of color can be helpful when you are studying color distribution. Yellow is particularly difficult to see against a white background. Even magenta and cyan, if sparse, are easier to see when displayed in grayscale.

 Related Topics


Sizing a print job

You can alter the size of each page of the print job, leaving the original unaffected. The height and width ratio of a print job is known as its "aspect." If you are sizing or scaling a print job using the Print Preview, it is a good idea to enable the Maintain Aspect Ratio check box to prevent distortion.

To size the print job

1.	Click File, Print Preview.

2.	Click the Pick Tool, and click the print job preview.

3.	Type values in the Width and Height boxes on the Property Bar.

 Note

•	You can only size a print job this way when you are using the Full Page layout style with no rows or columns or when you are using the Manual layout style.

 Tip

•	You can also size each page of a print job by dragging the handles in the Print Preview window.

To fit the print job to the page

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the Layout tab.

3.	Enable the Fit To Page button.

The Fit To Page option might distort the print job if you do not enable the Maintain Aspect Ratio check box.

To maintain the aspect ratio of the print job

•	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure, and enable the Maintain Aspect Ratio check box.

 Related Topics


Positioning a print job

You can alter the position of each page of a print job on the printed page, leaving the original unaffected.

If you select the Manual Signature Layout style, you can place several pages on a single sheet of paper. Each of these pages can be sized and positioned individually.

To position the print job on the printed page

1.	Click File, Print Preview.

2.	Click the Pick tool and click the print job preview.

3.	Type values in the Top (distance from the top of the printable area) and Left (distance from the left side of the printable area) boxes on the Property Bar.

 Tip

•	You can also position each page of a print job by dragging the "X" in the center of the image to the desired position in the Print Preview window.

To automatically position the print job on the printed page

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the Layout tab.

3.	Enable the Reposition Images To button.

4.	Choose one of the following from the list box beside the Reposition Images To button:

•	Center Of Page

•	Top Center

•	Left Center

•	Right Center

•	Bottom Center

•	Top Left Corner

•	Top Right Corner

•	Bottom Left Corner

•	Bottom Right Corner

 Related Topics


Using PostScript to optimize a print job


Overview: Using PostScript to optimize a print job
Using PostScript to optimize a print job

PostScript is a page description language used to send instructions to a PostScript device about how to print each page. All the elements in a print job (for example, curves and text) are represented by lines of PostScript code that the printing device uses to produce the document.

PostScript is not the only method for sending a printing device instructions, and some printing devices are not compatible with PostScript. However, there are several functions that are unavailable if you are not using the PostScript printing device language. For example, without PostScript, you cannot adjust color separations and halftone screens.

There are three levels of PostScript. PostScript 1 is the first PostScript language and it has certain limitations (see following). Using PostScript 2 greatly reduces potential printing errors. PostScript 3 is the latest version of PostScript and is faster than the previous versions of PostScript. If you are using a PostScript 2 or PostScript 3 printing device, make sure that you enable the PostScript 2 or PostScript 3 options on the PostScript page in the Print dialog box.

Limitations of PostScript 1

Certain problems may arise when you use PostScript 1 that have been largely eliminated in PostScript 2 and PostScript 3.

•	If a print job contains complex vector objects, then a PostScript 1 printing device may not be able to print it.

To create vector curves, a PostScript device prints a series of short straight lines at varying angles. Each of these lines is considered a segment. Also, any straight line between two nodes is considered a segment. PostScript 1 devices can't print vector graphics with more than 1500 segments. This limits the allowable number of nodes in any vector object to approximately 500.

•	If you use a complex fill (for example, a texture fill, or a PostScript fill) in an object, the allowable number of nodes is reduced to approximately 300.

•	If you fill a text object with a texture fill, then a PostScript 1 device may not print it.

•	If you use a texture fill in an object with any subpaths (for example, a donut made from a circle within a circle), a PostScript 1 device can't print it.

There are several ways to work around these limitations:

•	Break complex graphics up into several less complex graphics. This may not be possible if you are using complicated line attributes or complex fills.

•	Avoid using complex fills on graphics that aren't large enough to warrant intricate detail.

•	Avoid using complex fills with complex outlines and using complex fills in text.

•	Limit the number of nodes per object.

•	Use the PostScript features designed to reduce complexity and warn you of potential printing problems.

 Related Topics


Using PostScript 2 or 3

PostScript 2 and PostScript 3 are more advanced PostScript languages. Using a PostScript 2 or PostScript 3 printing device can reduce printing errors and let you use features that are unavailable if you use a PostScript 1 printing device. If you try to use PostScript 2 or PostScript 3 options and you are not using a PostScript 2 or PostScript 3 device, then the work will not print properly. If you are not certain whether you will be printing on a PostScript 2 or 3 Device, don't enable these options.

PostScript 2 and 3 lets you use JPEG compression to compress the bitmaps in a print job to make the file size smaller. Also, PostScript 2 and PostScript 3 uses a faster method for rendering vector graphics.

To use PostScript 2 or PostScript 3

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the PostScript tab.

3.	Choose Level 2 or PostScript 3 from the Compatibility list box.

To compress bitmaps in a .PRN file

1.	Follow the steps in the previous procedure.

2.	Enable the Use JPEG Compression check box.

3.	Move the Quality Factor slider to the right to increase compression and reduce the quality of the bitmaps.

 Tip

•	You can access the Print dialog box from the Print Preview window by clicking the Options button on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Printing a complex print job

Complex print jobs can often cause a PostScript 1 print job to fail. You can use the following options to ensure that your print jobs print properly.

To test for complex vector graphics

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the PostScript tab.

3.	Enable the Complex Objects check box.

To reduce curve complexity by increasing flatness

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Type a value in the Set Flatness To box.

This value determines how smooth a curve will appear when printed. As the flatness increases, curves begin to appear as connected straight lines. If you are having problems with complex objects, start by leaving this value at 1.00 and enable the Auto Increase Flatness check box. If this doesn't help, increase the flatness by 2 and try again.

3.	Enable the Auto Increase Flatness check box if you want the printing device to increase the flatness of an object that is too complex by increments of 2.

When the Auto Increase Flatness option is enabled, the maximum allowable flatness value is defined by the value in the Set Flatness To box, plus 10. If a curve is still too complex when the flatness value exceeds this limit, the printing device skips the problematic curve. If the printing device skips a curve, then the curve doesn't appear in the final output. You will not be informed while you print that this has happened. The problem only becomes evident when you look at the final output. For this reason, it is important to inspect proofs before you publish the work.

To reduce curve complexity by limiting control points

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the "To test for complex vector objects" procedure.

2.	Type a value in the Maximum Points Per Curve box.

Reducing the number of points per curve helps alleviate printing problems caused by curves that are too complex. A lower number of points per curve will not reduce quality, but it will increase printing time.

 Tip

•	You can access the Print dialog box from the Print Preview window by clicking the Options button on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Font and spot color warnings

If a print job contains too many fonts or too many spot colors, it may not print properly. You can set the PostScript options so that you are warned if a print job contains more than a set number of spot colors or fonts. You can change the number of spot colors and fonts that trigger the warnings by changing the Spot Color Separations Warning and the Fonts Warning Threshold settings.

To test for too many spot colors

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the PostScript tab.

3.	Enable the Too Many Spot Colors check box.

To test for too many fonts

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Enable the Too Many Fonts check box.

To set the Spot Color Separations Warning option

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the Miscellaneous tab.

3.	In the Special Settings section, choose Spot Color Separations Warning from the Option list and choose On from the Setting list.

To set the Fonts Warning Threshold option

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	In the Special Settings section, choose Fonts Warning Threshold from the Option list and choose a number from the Setting list.

 Related Topics


Optimizing fountain fills for printing

You can optimize the printing of fountain fills in two ways. First, you can test for and correct fountain fill banding. Banding is the appearance of stripes across a fountain fill and occurs when a fountain fill does not contain enough steps. Second, you can reduce the complexity of fountain fills to decrease printing time.

By enabling both the Auto Increase Fountain Steps and Optimize Fountain Fills options, you can increase the number of fountain steps that require more steps and reduce the number of steps in fountain fills that are too complex.

These options are available for PostScript devices only.

To test fountain fills for banding

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the PostScript tab.

3.	Enable the Banded Fountain Fill check box.

This warning only applies to linear fountain fills.

To automatically increase fountain steps

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure

2.	Enable the Auto Increase Fountain Steps check box.

The Auto Increase option increases the number of steps that are used to render fountain fills. This may increase printing time but will ensure the best possible rendering of fountain fills.

To optimize fountain fills to reduce complexity

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the "To verify fountain fills for banding" procedure

2.	Enable the Optimize Fountain Fills check box.

 Related Topics


Downloading Type 1 fonts

By default, the printing device driver downloads Type 1 fonts to the printing device. If you disable the Download Type 1 Fonts option, then fonts are printed as graphics (either curves or bitmaps). This may be useful if the file contains a large number of fonts that would take an unacceptably long time to download or would fail to download because of their size.

This option is available for PostScript devices only.

To download Type 1 fonts

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the PostScript tab.

3.	Enable the Download Type 1 Fonts check box.

 Note

•	If you enable the Download Type 1 Fonts check box, by default the Convert True Type To Type 1 check box is also enabled. This ensures that True Type fonts are converted to Type 1 fonts so that they can be downloaded. Only disable this option if the output device has difficulty interpreting Type 1 fonts.

 Related Topics


Setting bitmap font options

Bitmap versions of TrueType fonts look better at small point sizes and print faster than regular fonts. Because bitmap fonts consume a large amount of PostScript memory, you may need to limit the number of bitmap fonts in a print job to avoid a PostScript printing error.

A bitmap version of a font is created in a PostScript printing device's memory if the font meets the following criteria:

•	The printed character size is no larger than the bitmap font size threshold. The default is 75 pixels, which corresponds to 18 points at 300 dpi, 9 points at 600 dpi, and 4.5 points at 1200 dpi.

You can change the bitmap font size threshold (see below).

•	The text is not scaled or skewed.

•	The text does not have an outline or a fill other than a uniform fill.

•	The text does not have any nonlinear transformations applied to it.

•	The document is not being printed using the Sizing options or Fit To Page option in the Print dialog box.

To limit the number of bitmap fonts created

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the Miscellaneous tab.

3.	In the Special Setting section choose Bitmap Font Limit from Options list and type a value between 0 and 250 in the Settings list.

To set the bitmap font size threshold

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	In the Special Setting section choose Bitmap Font Size Threshold from Options list and type a value between 0 and 1000 in the Settings list.

 Tip

•	You can access the Print dialog box from the Print Preview window by clicking the Options button on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Printing color bitmaps in RGB

PostScript output normally uses the four-color, CMYK (cyan, magenta, yellow, and black) color model to print bitmaps. If you are printing color bitmaps to an RGB (red, green, and blue) or CMY (cyan, magenta, and yellow) printing device, enable the Output Color Bitmaps in RGB check box. RGB devices receive RGB values, instead of CMYK values. CMY printing devices have an easier time converting RGB to CMY (three-color model to three-color model) than converting CMYK to CMY (four-color model to three-color model).

This option is available for PostScript devices only.

To output color bitmaps in RGB

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the PostScript tab.

3.	Enable the Output Color Bitmaps In RGB check box.

 Tip

•	You can access the Print dialog box from the Print Preview window by clicking the Options button on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Fine-tuning a print job


Overview: Fine-tuning a print job
Fine-tuning a print job

If you encounter a problem printing fonts or bitmaps, the options explained in this section might help to fix the problem. If you are having trouble printing, try to determine what part of the print job is causing the problem. For example, the fonts may not be printing properly, or a bitmap may not print at all. Then, look for a topic that relates to that type of problem.

The Driver Compatibility dialog box contains many of the options you can use to fine-tune a print job. This dialog box lets you set options for each printing device driver individually. You can also view each devices capabilities in this dialog box.

 Related Topics


Setting the number of fountain steps while printing

You can specify the number of steps in the fountain fills in a print job. A low number of steps prints faster, but the transition between shades may be rather coarse, causing what is known as "banding." A higher value results in a smoother blend, but the printing time is longer.

You can assign a custom fountain fill to an object in a Corel application. A custom fountain fill overrides the settings in the Print dialog box.

To specify fountain steps in printing options

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the Miscellaneous tab.

3.	Type a value in the Fountain Steps box.

 Related Topics


Printing bitmaps in small chunks

You can determine whether bitmaps are sent to non-PostScript printing devices all at once or in smaller blocks (below 64 KB), called chunks. Usually, the driver tells the application which method it can or cannot handle. If you find that bitmaps do not print as expected, try forcing bitmaps to be printed in smaller chunks. If you are already printing bitmaps as chunks, you can specify the degree to which each chunk overlaps adjacent chunks. This overlap reduces the grid pattern that can appear on some printing devices when printing bitmaps that have been sent as chunks.

To print bitmaps in small chunks

1.	Click File, Print Preview.

2.	Click Settings, Driver Compatibility.

3.	From the list box, choose the non-PostScript printing device driver that you want to change.

4.	Enable the Output Bitmaps In 64K Chunks check box.

To set Bitmap Chunk Overlap Pixels

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the Miscellaneous tab.

3.	In the Special Settings section choose Bitmap Chunk Overlap Pixels from Options list and type the number of pixels by which each bitmap chunk overlaps the next in the Settings list.

 Related Topics


Printing color print jobs in black or grayscale

When you print color work on a black-and-white printing device, you can specify whether you want solid colors converted to solid black or a shade of gray that approximates its hue.

To print color print jobs in black or grayscale

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the Miscellaneous tab.

3.	Enable one of the following buttons:

•	All Colors As Black

•	All Colors As Grayscale

 Related Topics


Controlling color bitmap conversion to grayscale

By default color bitmaps are reduced to grayscale if they are sent to a grayscale printing device. Transmission time is much faster this way, and the file size is smaller. If you choose to send bitmaps as color, the printing device converts the bitmaps to grayscale, which results in slower transmission time and a larger file size.

This option is available for PostScript devices only.

To control bitmap conversion to grayscale

1.	Click File, Print Preview.

2.	Click Settings, Miscellaneous Options.

3.	In the Special Settings section choose Grayscale Driver Bitmap Output from the Options list and choose one of the following from the Settings list:

•	Send Color Bitmaps As Grayscale

•	Send Color Bitmaps As Color

 Tip

•	If you want to print a document on a color printing device but you want to use a grayscale printing device driver, then choose Send Color Bitmaps As Color. This is useful if you want to proof a document on a composite printing device using an imagesetter's printing device driver.

 Related Topics


Printing bitmaps as RGB images

By default, bitmap images are sent to the printing device without being converted to 24-bit RGB (red, green, blue) images. However, some older printing devices can't print bitmaps that are 8-bit or less. If you are having trouble printing a bitmap that is not a 24-bit, RGB image, try setting up the print job so that all bitmaps are converted to RGB. However, this can increase the size of the print job.

To print bitmaps as RGB

1.	Click File, Print Preview.

2.	Click Settings, Miscellaneous Options.

3.	In the Special Settings section choose Print Bitmaps As RGB from the Options list and choose On from the Settings list.

 Related Topics


Assigning control over printing device bands

Some non-PostScript printing devices can't hold a full page in memory and must print the page in multiple passes, or "bands." The default setting lets the printing device driver split the page into bands before sending it to the printing device. If this proves too slow, or you encounter problems, you can split a print job into bands before it is sent to the printer driver.

To split a print job into bands before it is sent to the printer driver

1.	Click File, Print Preview.

2.	Click Settings, Driver Compatibility.

3.	From the list box, choose the non-PostScript printing device driver that you want to change.

4.	Enable the Send Bands to Driver check box.

 Note

•	This option is only available in Windows 95.

 Related Topics


Assigning control over fill clipping

Any fill other than a uniform fill requires clipping if the object is not rectangular, because these fills are sent to printing devices as bitmaps, and bitmaps are always rectangular. Clipping is the process through which portions of a fill that should not be visible are removed. The default setting is clipping controlled by the driver, because that usually means faster processing. If you encounter a problem printing nonuniform fills, switch to clipping controlled by the software.

This option applies to non-PostScript printing devices only.

To assign control over fill clipping

1.	Click File, Print Preview.

2.	Click Settings, Driver Compatibility.

3.	From the list box, choose the non-PostScript printing device driver that you want to change.

4.	Enable the Use Software Clipping For Fills check box.

 Related Topics


Specifying the text output method for non-PostScript printing devices

If you are printing to a non-PostScript printing device, text is sent to the printing device as text (that is, using the appropriate font) whenever possible. However, it may sometimes be better to send text as graphics (that is, not using the font) because text objects can be incorrectly printed over by pictures.

To send all text as graphics

1.	Click File, Print Preview.

2.	Click Settings, Driver Compatibility.

3.	From the list box, choose the non-PostScript printing device driver that you want to change.

4.	Enable the All Text As Graphics check box.

 Related Topics


Using Print Merge


Printing on a commercial press


Overview: Printing on a commercial press
Printing on a commercial press

If you plan to print on a commercial press, you will most likely deal with a service bureau and a printing shop. These two businesses can be separate or affiliated. Some larger establishments may offer both services under one roof. The service bureau will take your file and image it onto film. The printing shop will use the film from a service bureau to make printing plates.

Film can be created using a camera or an imagesetter. Creating film with a camera usually requires camera-ready output that you've created on a PostScript laser printing device. Producing film this way may save you money, but don't try to produce complex color material using laser printed output because desktop printing devices are not precise enough.

An imagesetter creates film directly from a file. There are several different types of files that a service bureau may be able to use. See "Preparing a print job for a commercial press" for more information and ask the service bureau about your options.

The service bureau should provide you with either overlay proofs, blueprints, or laminate proofs made from the film. The type of proof you require depends on the complexity of the print job. Once you are satisfied with the proofs, the film can be sent to press.

If the service bureau and printing shop are entirely separate, you must ensure that the service bureau provides the film in the form that the printing shop requires (that is, positive or negative film, emulsion up or down, etc.). Also, make sure that the printing shop has proofs of the final product and instructions about the print job (for example, number of copies, type and size of paper). These proofs and your instructions serve as a contract between you and the printing shop.

The press operators will set up and adjust the press so that the printed output matches the contract proofs as closely as possible. When color quality and accuracy are crucial, you may be asked to be present at printing time to approve any color adjustments that need to be made.

For an in depth discussion of commercial printing, see the Corel Commercial Printing Guide included with this Corel application.

 More Detailed Information
 Related Topics


Preparing a print job for a commercial press


Overview: Preparing a print job for a commercial press
Preparing a print job for a commercial press

When you send a print job to a commercial press, you can either send camera-ready paper output, or send the work on disk. If you are creating a file to send to an imagesetter, talk to the service bureau about the best file format and printing device settings to use.

If you are creating a file, the service bureau will need either a .PRN or a native file from the application you are using. Always provide a final printout of the work to the service bureau, even if it's only a black-and-white representation. This will help them identify and assess any potential problems. You can use the Prepare For Service Bureau wizard to guide you through the process of sending a file to the service bureau.

PRN file

You can exercise full control over prepress settings and save the print job in a .PRN file. This print file is sent directly to an output device by the service bureau.

Be sure to review and confirm all settings with the service bureau. They will not be able to verify or fix a .PRN file. Any problems will only be apparent on output.

Include a sheet with all the prepress settings that you have specified. This can be done automatically from the Options dialog box. Or, check with the service bureau representatives; they usually have an order form that outlines all the essential prepress settings.

Native file format

If you don't have the time or knowledge to prepare printing files, service bureaus equipped with the application in which you created your work can take the original files (for example, .CDR files in CorelDRAW or .VP files in Corel VENTURA) and apply the required prepress settings. Some service bureaus may actually prefer to handle the prepress settings themselves. If you choose to send the original files, make sure that you include any linked files (for example, pictures linked in Corel VENTURA). Also, make sure that the service bureau has the fonts that you used in the original files.

Using a bleed to extend images to the edge of the page

Most printing presses are unable to print images to the edge of the paper. If you plan for certain areas of the print job to extend to the edge of the page, you need to print on paper that is larger than the size you ultimately want. This larger paper can then be trimmed so that the image extends to the paper's edge. When you use this method for printing to the edge of the page, it is wise to allow for a "bleed." A bleed is the amount that images extend past the edge of the final page size. By bleeding images, you allow for a margin of error during the printing and trimming process.

Printing devices' marks

Printing devices' marks provide information about how the work should be printed. You can place printing devices' marks in the .PRN files or on camera-ready paper output. The available printing devices' marks are crop marks, registration marks, color calibration bars, densitometer scales, page numbers, and file information.

 Related Topics


Using the Prepare For Service Bureau wizard

The Prepare For Service Bureau wizard guides you through the process of preparing a file for output at a service bureau. Use the wizard instead of the normal printing options. The wizard is most effective when the service bureau provides you with a service bureau profile. The profile is created using a separate wizard called the Service Bureau Profiler. The service bureau can include all the information you need to set up the print job so that it will print properly. The profile is a file with the .CSP extension. When you start the Prepare For Service Bureau wizard, it will ask you which profile you want to use.

To use the Prepare For Service Bureau wizard

•	Click File, Prepare For Service Bureau.


Printing to a file

Printing to a file is required when you want to send a .PRN file to a service bureau to be printed on an imagesetter. Make sure you select the appropriate printing device driver when you print to file. Consider the following when printing to a file:

•	When you are preparing a file for printing on an imagesetter, the page size of the print job (that is, the size of the film on which the document is imaged) will be larger than the page size of the document (that is, the size of the document) to allow for printing devices' marks.

•	If you are printing to a PostScript 2 or PostScript 3 printing device, you can use make the print job smaller by using JPEG to compress bitmaps.

•	The service bureau may require that the .PRN file conforms to the Document Structuring Convention (DSC). If this is the case, you must enable the Conform To DSC option.

If you unsure about which settings to choose, consult the service bureau.

To print to file

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Enable the Print To File check box.

3.	Click the Print button.

4.	In the Print to File dialog box, choose a drive and folder

5.	Type a filename in the File Name box.

The appropriate extension (.PRN) is appended to the filename.

To compress bitmaps in a .PRN file

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the PostScript tab.

3.	Choose PostScript 2 or PostScript 3 from the Compatibility list box.

4.	Enable the Use JPEG Compression check box.

5.	Move the Quality Factor slider to the right to increase compression and reduce the quality of the bitmaps.

To conform to DSC

•	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure and enable the Conform To DSC check box.

 Note

•	PostScript files created using the Print To File option contain two Control-D (^D) characters that prevent the PostScript file from printing on any PostScript device controlled by Macintosh computers. Click the File Options button and enable the For Mac option to remove the ^D characters from the files.

•	You can choose to print each chapter, page, or printing plate to a separate .PRN file. Click the More Options button and enable Chapters To Separate Files, Pages To Separate Files, or Plates To Separate Files.

 Tip

•	The PrintOnePage script lets you print the active Corel VENTURA publication to a file, one page at a time, using the default print settings. For more information about scripts see "Recordings and scripts." For more information about scripts included with Corel VENTURA, see "Scripts and wizards included with Corel VENTURA."

 Related Topics


Printing negative film

An imagesetter produces images on film that usually need to be negatives. You can set up the print job to produce negative images, but if the service bureau's equipment also produces negatives, that results in positive film.

To print a negative

1.	Click File, Print Preview.

2.	Click the Invert button.

Do not choose negative film if you are printing to a desktop printing device.

 Related Topics


Printing film with the emulsion down

Emulsion is the coating of light-sensitive material on a piece of film. Normally, print jobs printed to a laser printing device are printed with the emulsion up. Other types of reproduction may call for either emulsion up or down. Printing with the emulsion down produces a backward image.

To specify emulsion down

1.	Click File, Print Preview.

2.	Click the Mirror button.

 Related Topics


Setting a bleed limit

When you use a bleed to extend the print job to the edge of the page, set a bleed limit. A bleed limit is the extent to which an image can extend beyond the crop marks. Usually, a bleed limit of .125 to .25 inches is sufficient. Any object extending beyond that uses memory needlessly and may cause problems when you print multiple pages with bleeds on a single sheet of paper.

Remember, a bleed requires that the paper you are printing on is larger than the size of paper you ultimately want, and the print job must extend beyond the edge of the final paper size.

Consult the service bureau or printing shop to determine the appropriate bleed limit for the job.

To set a bleed limit

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the Layout tab.

3.	Enable the Bleed Limit check box.

4.	Type a bleed limit in the Bleed Limit box.

 Related Topics


Printing crop marks and registration marks

Crop marks are printed at the corners of the page and represent the size of the paper. Crop marks can be used as guides for trimming the paper.

If you are printing multiple pages per sheet (for example, 2 rows by 2 columns) and you are not cutting these pages into individual sheets, you can enable the Exterior Crop Marks Only check box. If you disable this option, crop marks will be placed around each row and column.

Also, if you are printing process color separations and you are printing to a PostScript printing device, you can set up the crop marks on every separation rather than on the black separation only. This may be useful if you want to trim individual separations.

Registration marks print on each sheet of a color separation. Registration marks are required to line up the printing plates on a color press (see "Creating color separations"). If you are printing to a PostScript printing device, you can select from several different registration mark styles.

To see crop marks and registration marks, the paper you are printing on must be larger than the page size of the document you are printing.

To print crop marks

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the Prepress tab.

3.	Enable the Crop Marks check box.

To print exterior crop marks only

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the Prepress tab.

3.	Enable the Exterior Crop Marks Only check box.

To print composite crop marks

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the Miscellaneous tab.

3.	In the Special Settings section choose Composite Crop Marks from the Options list and choose Output In CMYK from the Settings list.

To print registration marks

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the Prepress tab.

3.	Enable the Print Registration Marks button.

4.	Choose a registration mark style from the Style list box.

 Related Topics


Printing color calibration bars and densitometer scales

Color calibration bars are color scales that print on each sheet of a color separation. Calibration bars are required to ensure accurate color reproduction (see "Creating color separations"). To see calibration bars, the page size of the print job must be larger than the page size of the work you are printing.

A densitometer scale is a series of gray boxes ranging from light to dark. These boxes are required to test the density of halftone images (see "Working with bitmaps and halftone screens"). You can position the densitometer scale anywhere on the page. You can also customize the levels of gray that appear in each of the seven squares on the densitometer scale.

To print color calibration bars

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the Prepress tab.

3.	Enable the Color Calibration Bar check box.

To print a densitometer scale

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure

2.	Enable the Densitometer scales check box.

3.	If you want to customize the levels of gray in one of the densitometer scale squares, click the appropriate number in the Densities list box (the top of the list is the lightest box) and type a new density for that square.

To position a densitometer scale

1.	Click File, Print Preview.

2.	Drag the densitometer scale to its new position.

In most circumstances it is best to position the densitometer scale outside the final printed area.

 Related Topics


Printing page numbers and file information

Page numbers are useful when collating material that does not include page numbers in the document or when the page numbers in the document don't correspond to the actual number of pages.

File information includes the color profile you used, the halftone settings, the name of the file, the date and time the work was created, and the plate number (useful when printing color separations). When you enable the Print File Information check box, you can specify a job name (also called a slug line) that will be included with the file information.

To see page numbers and file information, the paper on which you are printing must be larger than the page size of the document you are printing. However, you can print file information inside the document's page by enabling the Position Within Page option.

To print page numbers

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the Prepress tab.

3.	Enable the Print Page Numbers check box.

To print a file information

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the Prepress tab.

3.	Enable the Print File Information check box.

4.	Enable the Position Within Page check box if you want the file information to appear on the document's page.

5.	Type a job name in the Job Name/Slug Line box if you want the Job Name/Slug Line to be different.

 Related Topics


Positioning printing devices' marks

You can change the position of all the printing devices' marks by changing the position of the Marks Alignment Rectangle in the Print Preview window.

To change the position of printing devices' marks

1.	Click File, Print Preview.

2.	Click the Marks Placement tool.

3.	Type values in the Marks Alignment Rectangle on the Property Bar.

 Tip

•	You can also change the position of printing devices' marks by dragging the bounding box in the Print Preview window.

 Related Topics


Printing a job information sheet

Including a job information sheet with the print job will help the service bureau or print shop to deal more effectively with any problems that arise.

To print a job information sheet with the print job

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the Miscellaneous tab.

3.	Enable the Print Job Information Sheet check box.

4.	Click the Info Settings button and specify the categories of information that are to be included and whether the job information is to be saved to a file, printed, or both.

 Related Topics


Working with bitmaps and halftone screens


Overview: Working with bitmaps and halftone screens
Working with bitmaps and halftone screens

If the document you are sending to the service bureau or print shop contains bitmaps (for example, scanned images or photographs), you will need to set up halftone screens for the bitmaps.

Halftones

Commercial printing presses can't produce true shading but can create the illusion of shading by printing images made up of tiny dots. The size of the dots determines the different levels of shading (that is, the bigger the dots, the darker the shade). A halftone screen is necessary to convert images with true shading to images made up of tiny dots.

Originally, a halftone screen was an opaque screen with thousands of tiny holes. An image with shading was photographed through this screen using special photographic paper or film. The resulting image consisted entirely of dots. This image was then used to create printing plates.

Now, however, you can create halftone images without using screens or cameras. To ensure that the bitmaps print correctly, you must correctly set the halftone screen frequency and bitmap resolution.

Halftone screen frequency

The halftone screen frequency determines the number of dots used to create the image. The screen frequency is measured in lines per inch (lpi). This measurement refers to the number of rows of dots per inch.

When you choose a screen frequency, remember that the higher the screen frequency, the sharper the image. However, there are limits to screen frequency that are determined by the type of printing press on which you are printing and the type of paper you are using. In general, a screen frequency of 85 lpi works on newsprint, and a frequency of 100 lpi works on bond and glossy paper. If possible, consult the service bureau or printing shop to find out the screen frequency you should use.

Bitmap resolution

When you create a halftone image, the bitmap's resolution, measured in dots per inch (dpi), should be no less than twice the halftone screen frequency. For example, if you use a 150 lpi screen, the bitmap should have a resolution of at least 300 dpi.

 Related Topics


Overview: Using Open Prepress Interface
Using Open Prepress Interface

Corel offers Open Prepress Interface (OPI) support. OPI is a way for you to include high-resolution scanned images in the work without dramatically increasing the file size. To accomplish this, the service bureau professionally scans the images on a high-end scanner. They keep the high-resolution version of the scans and give you low-resolution equivalents. You import the low-resolution images into the document, using them for position only (FPO). Working with FPO images keeps the document size smaller and speeds up screen redrawing time. When you send the print job back to the service bureau for final imaging to film, the high resolution files are automatically substituted.

 Notes

•	You must import FPO images correctly or they will not be replaced at print time.

•	You can only scale, crop, and rotate FPO images. You can't apply any other effects.

 Related Topics


Setting the halftone screen frequency

If you are printing halftone images, you need to set the screen frequency properly. Consult the service bureau to determine the appropriate screen settings.

This option is available for PostScript devices only.

To set the screen frequency

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the PostScript tab.

3.	Choose a value (in lines per inch) from the Screen Frequency list box.

Consult the service bureau for the optimum setting for the job.

 Note

•	When the screen frequency is set to Default, the image is printed using the default screen frequency of the output device.

 Related Topics


Maintaining OPI and DCS links

Open Prepress Interface (OPI) lets you use low resolution images as placeholders for the high resolution images that appear in the final work. To use OPI links, you must enable the Link To High Resolution File For Output Using OPI check box when importing the .TIF (or .CT) files, unless you are using a .EPS file as a placeholder. These images become known as OPI images. When the service bureau receives the print file, the OPI server substitutes the high-resolution images for the low-resolution images. If there are no OPI images in the file, the Maintain OPI Links option will not be available at print time.

If you import the bitmaps correctly, the Maintain OPI Links option is enabled automatically. To proof a file that contains OPI images on a device that doesn't have the high-resolution files (for example, the desktop printing device), disable the Maintain OPI Links option.

The service bureau may also send you a Desktop Color Separation (DCS) file to act as the low-resolution placeholder. If they do this, make sure you find out whether the service bureau wants you to let them resolve the DCS links. If they want to resolve the links themselves, then you will have to change the Resolve DCS Links setting.

This option is available for PostScript devices only.

To maintain OPI links

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the PostScript tab.

3.	Enable the Maintain OPI Links check box.

To let the Service bureau resolve DCS links

1.	Follow the steps from the previous procedure

2.	Disable the Resolve DCS Links check box.

 Related Topics


Creating color separations


Overview: Creating color separations
Creating color separations

If you send color work to a service bureau or printing shop, either you or the service bureau will need to create color separations.

Color separations are necessary because a printing press applies only one color of ink to a sheet of paper at a time. A color separation is created by first isolating each color element in a print job. Each color element is then used to create a sheet of film. Each sheet of film is used to apply one color of ink to the sheet of paper.

Printing presses produce color using either process color or spot colors. The number of colors you plan to use will be the main factor in deciding which method to use.

Process color

If the project requires full color (for example, it contains scans of color photographs), then you need to use process color. Process color is a method of producing virtually any color using only four ink colors: cyan, magenta, yellow, and black (known as CMYK). The final colors are produced by mixing percentages of these four inks. Process color only requires four color separations.

Corel now supports a new type of process color, called Hexachrome. Hexachrome color uses six different ink colors (cyan, magenta, yellow, black, orange, and green) to produce full color. To use Hexachrome color effectively, use the Hexachrome color palette. Hexachrome color is sometimes called high-fidelity color. Talk to the service bureau about whether you should use Hexachrome color.

Spot color

If the project makes use of only one, two, or three colors (including black) then you'll probably use spot colors, such as those offered by PANTONE. Spot color uses a different ink for each color and each color requires its own color separation. If your budget is limited, consider

•	obtaining a two-color look by printing on colored paper and using only one spot color

•	using tints (percentages) of spot colors to create shadows or highlights, thus giving the impression of a broader color range

Both process and spot color

Some projects require both spot and process colors. For example, a marketing brochure may require the use of a spot color to faithfully render the corporate color and the use of process color to reproduce scans of photographs. Remember, though, that each additional spot color requires extra film, plates, and ink, adding to the cost of printing.

A word about palettes

You can work on different elements of the document from different palettes and different color models. Ultimately, however, all colors must be printed with process and spot color inks. Colors defined in the RGB or HSB models are translated automatically into CMYK (process) values. As for spot colors, you can convert them to CMYK at printing time. For more information, see "Working with color."

 Note

•	Pay close attention to the number of colors used, especially if you are importing clipart. Make sure you only use the colors you have chosen (that is, process color or spot color).

 Related Topics


Overview: Printing color halftones
Printing color halftones

If you are printing process color halftones, you need to use a halftone screen for each different color separation, see "Working with bitmaps and halftone screens" for more information.

Screen angle

Because each halftone screen consists of a regular pattern of shapes, it creates a pattern on the printed image. When the separations are combined, the patterns created by each separate halftone screen interact. This interaction can create an undesirable effect, called a moiré pattern.

Moiré patterns are eliminated by changing the screen angle of each color separation. If you were using an actual screen and a camera, you would rotate the screen 15 degrees for each separation by hand. However, since you are using software to create halftone screens, you have to change certain print options to change the screen angle.

When you print color separations, the screen angles are set automatically. If you change these settings incorrectly, the print job might not print properly.

Screen technology

The screen technology should be set to match the type of imagesetter the service bureau will be using. Talk to the service bureau to determine the correct setting. If you are not using an imagesetter or if you are unable to speak to the service bureau, use the standard defaults.

Halftone type

The halftone type refers to the type of dot that is being used to create the halftone. Typically, a halftone screen consists of rows of evenly spaced round, or diamond-shaped dots. However, it is possible to use halftone screens that have dots that are shaped differently. In fact, halftone screens can even use straight lines instead of dots to create an image. You can experiment with different halftone types to create interesting effects.

 Related Topics


Overview: Ensuring predictable color when printing
Ensuring predictable color when printing

Accurate and consistent color rendition from device to device is essential when printing in color. All components of a computer system (scanner, monitor, and printing device) must exchange color information in a manner that ensures a predictable result. This is accomplished by calibrating the various devices in a computer and tuning color profiles using the Corel Color Profile wizard.

For the colors on the screen to approximate the colors on the printed page as closely as possible, enable the color correction options. For more information, see "Working with color."

 Tip

•	You can simulate the color output of a printing press on a composite printing device. To do so, click Tools, Options. Then double-click Global, Color Management, General, and enable the Composite Printing device Simulates Color Output Of Separations Printing device check box.

 Related Topics


Printing color separations

When printing color separations to file, you can create a .PRN file that includes all separations, one separation only, or any combination of separations, depending on the complexity of the print job.

Generally, you should be able to save all the color separation information in one .PRN file. However, if the print job contains special effects and several color separations (for example, CMYK plus a number of spot colors), saving all color separation information in one .PRN file might result in an unacceptably large file. In this case, create a .PRN file for each separation. Include the separation name in the filename for easier file identification.

When printing color separations, you can produce a sheet of paper or film even when there is nothing on it (for example, there may be only yellow and black on a page but the cyan and magenta plates will be printed anyway). Normally, you would leave this option disabled to avoid wasting costly film. However, there may be instances when you want to force plates that are blank to print.

To print color separations

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the Separations tab.

3.	Enable the Print Separations check box.

To print color separations from the Print Preview window

1.	Click File, Print Preview.

2.	Enable the Enable Color Separations button.

To use Hexachrome process color

1.	Follow the steps in the "To print color separations" procedure

2.	Enable the Hexachrome Plates check box.

3.	If you are printing on a device that uses high solid ink density, then enable the High Solid Ink Density check box.

Consult the service bureau to determine whether you need to enable this option.

To select specific color separations

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the "To print color separations" procedure.

2.	Enable the check boxes for the color separations to be printed from the color separations list box at the bottom of the dialog box.

 Tip

•	To print separations in color, enable the Print Separations In Color check box.

 Related Topics


Converting spot colors to process colors

If a document contains spot colors but you want to print using process color, you can convert the spot colors to process colors. If you don't convert the colors, each spot color is printed on a different color separation. Changing the spot colors to process colors when you print does not affect the document itself, only the way it is printed.

FOCOLTONE, TOYO, and DIC colors are now treated as spot colors by default. You can treat any of these color palettes as process colors if you prefer.

To convert spot colors to process colors

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the Separations tab.

3.	Enable the Print Separations check box.

4.	Enable the Convert Spot Colors To CMYK check box.

To treat FOCOLTONE, TOYO, and DIC colors as process colors

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	Under the Global category, double-click Color Management, and click General.

3.	Disable any of the following check boxes:

•	Treat FOCOLTONE Colors As Spot Inks

•	Treat TOYO Colors As Spot Inks

•	Treat DIC Colors As Spot Inks

 Related Topics


Customizing a halftone screen

Setting the halftone screens correctly is critical when printing color separations. Screens that are improperly set can result in undesirable moiré patterns and poor color reproduction. Consult the service bureau before you change any of these settings. If you are uncertain, use the default settings.

To customize a halftone screen

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the Separations tab.

3.	Enable the Print Separations check box.

4.	Enable the Use Advanced Settings check box.

5.	Click the Advanced button.

6.	Change any of the following settings:

•	Screening technology

•	Halftone type (for example, Line or Diamond)

•	printing device or imagesetter resolution

•	the screen frequency and angle of any or all of the color separations.

 Tip

•	You can set the screen frequency, screen angle, and overprint options for spot colors as well as process colors. For example, if you have a fountain fill made up of two spot colors, you can now set one to print at 45 degrees and the other at 90 degrees.

 Related Topics


Color trapping


Overview: Color trapping
Color trapping

Color trapping is necessary to compensate for poor color registration. Poor color registration occurs when the printing plates used to print each color, called color separations, are not aligned perfectly. Poor registration causes unintentional white slivers to appear between adjoining colors. Trapping is accomplished by intentionally overlapping colors so that minor problems with alignment will not be noticed.

The print job needs color trapping if two colors touch. Many service bureaus prefer to create color trapping themselves by using a specialized trapping program. Consult the service bureau about trapping if you are unfamiliar with the process.

Color trapping is achieved by overprinting. Normally, portions of an object that are obscured by another object are not printed. However, if the top object is set to overprint, the obscured portions of any underlying objects print anyway, causing an overlap. This makes white gaps between different colors unlikely to occur. Overprinting works best when the top color is much darker than the underlying color; otherwise, an undesirable third color might result (for example, red over yellow might result in an orange object).

Depending on the color trapping options you choose, overprinting might only affect an object's outline or its fill. This means that if an object with a red outline is set to overprint its outline only, then any portions of another object that are obscured by the first object's outline are printed. This overlap creates a color trap.

 Related Topics


Color trapping by overprinting selected objects

You can set specific objects to overprint before you open the Print dialog box. You can overprint each object's fill, outline, or both.

The Overprint Fill option causes obscured portions of objects to print when they are under the overprinted object's fill. The Overprint Outline option causes obscured portions of objects to print when they are under the overprinted object's outline. When setting the outline thickness, keep in mind that the outline straddles the path that defines the object's shape. Therefore, an outline of 0.30 points actually creates a trap of 0.15 points.

To trap by overprinting selected objects

1.	Using the Pick tool, right click the object that requires color trapping and click Overprint.

2.	Click one or both of the following options:

•	Overprint Fill

•	Overprint Outline

 Note

•	You can also overprint paragraph text, paragraph backgrounds, and ruling lines when you set the properties of these items.

 Related Topics


Color trapping by overprinting selected color separations

You can overprint specific color separations. You can specify whether you want to overprint graphics, text, or both. Remember that if you set a light color to overprint, dark colors that would normally be obscured by the lighter color are printed and show through. Therefore, it is best not to overprint a light color separation.

To trap by overprinting selected color separations

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the Separations tab.

3.	Enable the Print Separations check box.

4.	Enable the Use Advanced Settings check box.

5.	Click the Advanced button.

6.	Choose the color separation to overprint in the Color list.

7.	Click the Overprint Graphics icon in the Overprint column if you want to overprint graphics on the separation.

The graphic appears darker when the separation is set to overprint.

8.	Click the Overprint Text icon in the Overprint column if you want to overprint text on the separation.

 Related Topics


Color trapping automatically

There are two methods for automatically creating color trapping: always overprinting black and auto-spreading.

Always overprinting black creates a color trap by causing any object that contains 95% or more black to overprint any underlying objects. It is a useful option for artwork containing a lot of black text, but it should be used with caution on artwork with a high graphics content. If the service bureau recommends a black threshold value other than 95%, adjust the threshold.

Auto-spreading creates color trapping by assigning an outline to an object that is the same color as the object's fill and having it overprint underlying objects. Auto-spreading is created for all objects in the file that meet these three conditions:

•	They don't already have an outline.

•	They are filled with a uniform fill.

•	They haven't already been designated to overprint.

To trap by always overprinting black

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the Separations tab.

3.	Enable the Print Separations check box.

4.	Enable the Always Overprint Black check box.

To set the Overprint Black threshold

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the Miscellaneous tab.

3.	In the Special Settings section choose Overprint Black Threshold from the Options list and type a number in the Settings list.

The number you type represents the percentage of black above which black objects overprint.

To trap by auto-spreading

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the "To trap by always overprinting black" procedure.

2.	Enable the Auto-Spreading check box.

3.	Type a value in the Maximum box.

The amount of spread assigned to an object depends on the maximum trap value and the object's color. The lighter the color, the greater the percentage of the maximum trap value. The darker the color, the smaller the percentage of the maximum trap value.

4.	Enable the Fixed Width check box if you want the spread width to be fixed.

The Maximum Value box changes to the Width box when you enable the Fixed Width check box. The value in this box determines the fixed width of the color spread.

5.	Type a value in the Text Above box.

This value represents the minimum size to which auto-spreading is applied. If you set this value too low, small text may be rendered illegible when auto-spreading is applied.

 Related Topics


Customizing Corel VENTURA


Overview: Customizing Corel VENTURA
Customizing Corel VENTURA

Corel VENTURA has powerful customization features that let you create your own unique workspace and maximize your productivity. You can create and modify features such as toolbars, menus, and keyboard shortcuts. You can also change Corel VENTURA default settings to suit your working style. You can create and save different workspaces, and add and remove file import filters as well as different applications included with Corel VENTURA. You can also choose from different startup switches, which allow you to control what happens when Corel VENTURA starts. For example, you can set Corel VENTURA to print or open a previously saved publication when Corel VENTURA starts.

 More Detailed Information


Customizing menus, toolbars, and keyboard shortcuts


Overview: Customizing menus, toolbars, and keyboard shortcuts
Customizing menus, toolbars, and keyboard shortcuts

Corel VENTURA lets you change the appearance, behavior, and location of the menus and toolbars, as well as modify your keyboard shortcuts.

You can customize both the right mouse button menus and the menus and commands in the Menu Bar. For example, you can add and remove individual commands and menu command separators, and you can rename and rearrange commands and menus, as well as change the shortcuts for accessing menu commands. You can also remove menus from the Menu Bar.

You have complete control over the placement and content of the toolbars, including the Status Bar and the Property bar. You can create and delete custom toolbars and display, hide, move and resize any toolbar. You can also modify each toolbar by adding, removing, resizing, and rearranging buttons, boxes and list boxes, and you can change the look of toolbar buttons.

Corel VENTURA has preset keyboard shortcuts, but you can edit these presets, or remove them, or add your own shortcuts. Changes you make apply to your Corel workspace, not just the current publication.

Once you've changed a default menu, toolbar, or keyboard shortcut, you can always restore it to its original configuration.

 More Detailed Information
 Related Topics


Customizing menus


Overview: Customizing menus
Customizing menus

Corel customization features let you adjust the Menu Bar, most of the menus it contains, and the right mouse button menus. You can add commands to the existing menus or add new menus to the Menu Bar or the right mouse button menus. You can also remove menu commands or entire menus for the Menu Bar and right mouse button menus. Further, you can change the name or order of menus and the commands in the Menu Bar. You can add command separators to any menu in the Menu Bar and change menu command shortcuts. You can restore the original settings of any default menu.

The only menus that you cannot customize are the Tag Window menu, the VENTURA Navigator menu, and the VENTURA Library right mouse button menu.

 Related Topics


Adding and removing Menu Bar menus

Corel VENTURA lets you customize the Menu Bar by adding new menus for commands or features that you use most often. You can also remove menus that you no longer need.

To add a menu to the Menu Bar

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, double-click Customize, and click Menus.

3.	Choose Main Menu from the Menu list box.

4.	Click the Add Menu button.

5.	Type a name for the new menu.

6.	Click the Up or Down button to position the menu.

To remove a menu from the Menu Bar

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	In the list of menus, click the menu you want to remove.

3.	Click the Remove button.

 Tip

•	You can also remove the menu by pressing DELETE.

 Note

•	If you remove the Tools menu, you will still be able to access the Options dialog box by right-clicking any toolbar, and clicking Customize. You can then restore the Tools menu if you choose to.

 Related Topics


Adding and removing Menu Bar menu commands

You can customize your work environment by choosing which commands appear in a menu. You can also remove commands that you no longer need.

To add a command to a menu

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, double-click Customize, and click Menus.

3.	In the Commands list, double-click the category that contains the command you want to add, and click the command you want to add.

4.	Choose Main Menu from the Menu list box.

5.	In the list of menus, double-click the menu to which you want to add a command.

6.	Click the Add button.

7.	Click the Up or Down button to position the menu command.

 Tip

•	You can also add a menu command by dragging it from the Commands list and dropping it over the name of the menu to which you want to add it.

 Note

•	The keyboard shortcut for a menu or command is ALT + the letter to the right of the ampersand (&) in the menu or command name.

To remove a command from a menu

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Choose Main Menu from the Menu list box.

3.	In the list of menus, double-click the menu from which you want to remove a command, and click the command you want to remove.

4.	Click the Remove button.

 Tip

•	You can also remove a menu command by dragging it from the list of menus and dropping it anywhere outside the Options dialog box.

 Related Topics


Adding and removing right mouse button menu commands

You can customize the right mouse button menus by adding or removing commands.

To add a command to a right mouse button menu

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, double-click Customize, and click Menus.

3.	In the Commands list, double-click the folder that contains the command you want to add, and click the command you want to add.

4.	Choose a right mouse button menu from the Menu list box.

5.	In the list of menus, double-click the menu to which you want to add a command.

6.	Click the Add button.

7.	Click the Up or Down button to position the menu command.

To remove a command from a right mouse button menu

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	From the Menu list box, choose the right mouse button menu from which you want to remove a command.

3.	In the list of menus, double-click the menu from which you want to remove a command, and click the command you want to remove.

4.	Click the Remove button.

 Related Topics


Renaming menus and menu commands

You can change the names of menus and commands that appear in the Menu Bar and the right mouse button menus.

To rename a menu

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, double-click Customize, and click Menus.

3.	From the Menu list box, choose the menu group that contains the menu you want to rename.

4.	In the list of menus, right-click the menu you want to rename, and click Rename.

5.	Type a new name for the menu.

6.	Press ENTER.

To rename a menu command

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	In the list of menus, double-click the menu that contains the command you want to rename.

3.	Right-click the command, and click Rename.

4.	Type a new name for the command.

5.	Press ENTER.

 Note

•	The keyboard shortcut for a menu or command is ALT + the letter to the right of the ampersand (&) in the menu or command name.

 Related Topics


Restoring the default menu and command settings

If you've modified menus and commands and later decide that you prefer their original values, you can restore the default menu settings.

To restore the default menu and command settings

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, double-click Customize, and click Menus.

3.	From the Menu list box, choose the menu group you want to restore.

4.	Click the Reset button.

 Related Topics


Rearranging menus and menu commands

Corel VENTURA lets you rearrange menus within the Main Menu Bar and also rearrange menu commands within each individual menu to suit better your working style.

To rearrange menus

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, double-click Customize, and click Menus.

3.	From the Menu list box, choose Main menu.

4.	In the list of menus, click the menu you want to move.

5.	Click the Up or Down button to position the menu.

 Note

•	Moving a menu down in the list moves it to the left on the Menu Bar. Moving a menu up in the list moves it to the right on the Menu Bar.

 Tip

•	You can also move a menu by dragging it and dropping it before or after another menu in the list of menus.

To rearrange menu commands

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	In the list of menus, double-click the menu that contains the menu command you want to move.

3.	Click the menu command you want to move.

4.	Click the Up or Down button to position the menu.

 Tip

•	You can also move a menu command by dragging it and dropping it before or after another command in the list of menus.

 Related Topics


Adding and removing menu command separators

You can add and remove menu command separators [image] the horizontal lines between commands in a menu [image] to create groups of commands.

To add a menu command separator

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, double-click Customize, and click Menus.

3.	From the Menu list box, choose the menu group that contains the menu to which you want to add a separator.

4.	In the list of menus, double-click the menu to which you want to add a separator, and click the command below which you want the separator to appear.

5.	Click the Separator button.

 Tip

•	To move a command separator to a new position, choose the separator, and click the Up or Down button.

To remove a menu command separator

1.	Follow steps 1and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	From the Menu list box, choose the menu group that contains the menu from which you want to remove a separator.

3.	In the list of menus, double-click the menu that contains the separator you want to remove, and click the separator you want to remove.

4.	Click the Remove button.

 Related Topics


Changing menu command keyboard shortcuts

You can change the menu command keyboard shortcuts through the Customize Menus page of the Options dialog box. The Menus page gives you the convenience of changing a menu command keyboard shortcut when you're renaming the command or changing its position. The keyboard shortcut for a menu or command is ALT + the letter to the right of the ampersand (&) in the menu or command name. You can change the shortcut by typing an ampersand (&) in front of a different letter.

To change menu command shortcuts

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, double-click Customize, and click Menus.

3.	From the Menu list box, choose a menu group.

4.	In the list of menus, double-click the menu that contains the command whose shortcut you want to change.

5.	Right-click the command, and click Rename.

A text cursor appears after the last character in the menu name and a selection box appears around the name.

6.	Insert an ampersand (&) before the letter you want to use as a shortcut.

7. Remove all other ampersands in the command name.

8. Press ENTER.

 Note

•	You can also use the Shortcuts Keys page of the Options dialog box to arrange menu command shortcuts. The Shortcuts Keys page offers more sophisticated controls for assigning new menu shortcuts or changing existing ones. For more information about how to change menu shortcuts using the Shortcuts Keys page, see "Assigning and deleting keyboard shortcuts."

 Related Topics


Customizing toolbars


Overview: Customizing toolbars
Customizing toolbars

You can customize any toolbar in Corel VENTURA. You can hide or display toolbars, move them anywhere inside the Application Window, or dock them to its edges. You can resize toolbars; create, delete, and rename custom toolbars; and display toolbar and button text labels.

You can also modify each toolbar by adding, removing, copying, rearranging, and resizing toolbar controls, such as buttons, boxes, and list boxes. You can also edit the toolbar button icons or replace them with text.

If you've changed any of the default toolbars, you can restore their original settings at any time.

 Related Topics


Hiding and displaying toolbars

You can hide toolbars to increase the area of your Publication Window and display them whenever you want.

To hide a toolbar

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, click Customize.

3.	In the Toolbars list, disable the check box next to the toolbar that you want to hide.

To display a toolbar

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	In the Toolbars list, enable the check box next to the toolbar that you want to display.

 Tip

•	You can also click View, Toolbars to open the Customize page of the Options dialog box through which you can hide and display the toolbars you want.

 Related Topics


Moving and resizing toolbars

You can move a toolbar anywhere inside the Application Window. Placing a toolbar inside the Publication Window turns it into a floating toolbar with a Title Bar. Placing a toolbar against any of the four sides of the Application Window docks the toolbar to that sides, making it part of the border.

You can also change the size of the toolbar when it is floating (removed from the window border), but not when it is docked.

To move a toolbar

•	Click the toolbar's border, and drag the toolbar to a new position.

When you drag the toolbar to the Publication Window, it becomes a floating toolbar.

To dock a toolbar

•	Click the toolbar border, and drag the toolbar toward the edge of the Application Window until it changes shape.

To resize a floating toolbar

1.	Place the cursor on the edge of the toolbar.

The cursor changes to a double-sided arrow.

2.	Drag the edge of the toolbar to resize it.

 Note

•	To cancel resizing, right-click while you drag, or press ESC.

 Tip.

•	Double-clicking a floating toolbar docks the toolbar to its last docked position.

 Related Topics


Creating and deleting custom toolbars

You can create custom toolbars that contain the buttons that you use most often. These toolbars can be deleted at any time.

To create a custom toolbar

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, click Customize.

3.	Click the New button.

4.	Type a name for the new toolbar.

 Tip

•	You can also drag a button from the display in the Toolbars section of the Options dialog box to any place in the Publication Window to create a new toolbar.

To delete a custom toolbar

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	In the Toolbars list, click the name of a toolbar.

3.	Click the Delete button.

 Tip

•	You can also click View, Toolbars to open the Customize page of the Options dialog box.

•	You can hide, but not delete Corel VENTURA default toolbars.

 Related Topics


Renaming toolbars

You can change the name of any custom toolbar if you wish to use it for a number of different projects.

To rename a toolbar

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, click Customize.

3.	In the Toolbars box, right-click a custom toolbar.

4.	Click Rename.

A text cursor appears after the last character in the menu name and a highlighting box appears around the name.

5.	Type a new name for the toolbar, and press ENTER.

 Note

•	You cannot rename Corel VENTURA default toolbars.

 Tip

•	You can also click View, Toolbars to open the Customize page of the Options dialog box through which you can rename a custom toolbar.

 Related Topics


Restoring toolbars

If you've customized any of the Corel VENTURA default toolbars, you can restore their original settings at any time.

To restore the original settings of a default toolbar

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, click Customize.

3.	In the Toolbars list, right-click a default toolbar, and click Reset.

 Tip

•	You can also click View, Toolbars to open the Customize page of the Options dialog box.

 Related Topics


Adding, removing, copying, and moving toolbar controls

You can add and remove toolbar controls such as buttons, boxes, and list boxes, and You can move controls to a new position on a toolbar or to a different toolbar. You can also copy the same control to different toolbars.

To ...	Do This ...

Move a toolbar control	Hold down ALT, and drag the toolbar control to its new position on the same or another toolbar.

Copy a toolbar control 	Hold down CTRL + ALT, and drag the toolbar control to another toolbar.

Remove a toolbar control	Hold down ALT, and drag the toolbar control to the Publication Window.

 Note

•	Right-clicking while you drag, or pressing ESC, cancels any of the above operations.

To add a command control to a toolbar

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, double-click Customize, and click Toolbars.

3.	In the Commands list, double-click the folder that contains the command control you want to add, and click the command.

The control icon assigned to the command by default is highlighted with a gray border. If no control is highlighted, cick any of the available icons.

4.	Drag the control icon from the Options dialog box to the toolbar.

 Note

•	You cannot add or remove toolbar controls from the Toolbox or from any of its flyouts.

 Related Topics


Resizing toolbar controls

You can change the size of any control on a toolbar such as boxes, list boxes, and buttons, as well as toolbar borders.

To resize a toolbar control

1. Display the toolbar whose control you want to resize.

2.	Click Tools, Options.

3.	In the Workspace category, double-click Customize, and click Toolbars.

4.	On the toolbar (that is, outside the Options dialog box) click the toolbar control you want to resize.

Although the Options dialog box is open, you can select objects on the toolbar.

5.	Drag the sides of the toolbar control to resize it.

To resize toolbar buttons

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, click Customize.

3.	In the Size section, move the Button slider to adjust the size of the buttons on your toolbars.

To resize button borders

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	In the Size section, move the Border slider to adjust the size of the border.

 Tip

•	You can also click View, Toolbars to open the Customize page of the Options dialog box.

 Related Topics


Displaying toolbar and button text labels

You can add title bars to floating toolbars, and you can display the command name associated with a button under the button's icon.

To display toolbar and button text labels

1.	Click Tools, Option.

2.	In the Workspace category, click Customize.

3.	Enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Show Titles on Floating Toolbars

•	Show Button Text Below Image

 Tip

•	You can also click View, Toolbars to open the Customize page of the Options dialog box.

 Related Topics


Replacing toolbar button icons with text

You can change toolbar buttons so that text appears on them instead of bitmaps.

To replace a toolbar button icon with text

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, double-click Customize, and click Toolbars.

3.	On a toolbar on the Corel VENTURA work area, right-click a button, and click Properties.

Although the Options dialog box is open, you can access tools on the toolbar.

4.	Enable the Show Text button, in the Button Properties dialog box.

 Tip

•	You can right-click a toolbar and click Customize to open the Customize Toolbars page of the Options dialog box.

•	You can change the button's default text by typing new text in the box below the Show Text button.

 Note

•	You can restore a toolbar button's default text by clicking the Restore Defaults button in the Button Properties dialog box.

 Related Topics


Editing a toolbar button icon

You can change any button icon, that is, the bitmap that appears on a toolbar button.

To edit a toolbar button icon

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, double-click Customize, and click Toolbars.

3.	On a toolbar on the Corel VENTURA work area, right-click a button, and click Properties.

Although the Options dialog box is open, you can access buttons on the toolbar.

4.	Enable the Show Image button in the Button Properties dialog box.

5. Click a color in either of the color palettes.

6. Click a square in the grid to apply the color.

7. Continue applying different colors until you've created the new icon.

 Tips

•	To delete all colors from the Preview window and start creating a new icon from scratch, right-click in the Preview window and click Clear.

•	You can also open the Toolbars page of the Options dialog box by right-clicking a toolbar and clicking Customize.

 Note

•	If you want to restore the original button icon, click the Restore Defaults button.

 Related Topics


Customizing the Status Bar and the Property Bar


Overview: Customizing the Status Bar and the Property Bar
Customizing the Status Bar and the Property Bar

The Status Bar is usually located at the bottom of the Application Window and displays information about the current publication such as the chapter name, page number, and cursor position. You can change its appearance, move it to another position on the screen, and hide or display it.

The Property Bar displays different controls depending on what kind of object you have selected. Each of these context-sensitive configurations is preset in Corel VENTURA; however, you can change the Property Bar settings by adding and removing controls.

You can restore the original settings of the Status Bar and Property Bar at any time.

 Related Topics


Changing the appearance of the Status Bar

The Status Bar displays useful information about your publication or about the specific object on which you are working. You can customize the Status Bar to display exactly the type of information you want the way you want it displayed. Changing the appearance of the Status Bar involves adding or removing information fields.

To add an information field to the Status Bar

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, double-click Customize, and click Toolbars.

3.	Double-click the Status Bar folder in the Commands list.

4.	Drag a field from the dialog box onto the Status Bar.

To remove an information field from the Status Bar

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	Drag a field from the Status Bar to the Publication Window.

 Tips

•	To change the spacing between two fields, drag a field toward or away from its neighboring field.

•	You can also right-click the Status Bar, and click Customize to open the Customize Toolbars page of the Options dialog box .

 Related Topics


Moving, resizing, and resetting the Status Bar

You can move the Status Bar to the top or the bottom of the Application Window. You can also change the size of the Status Bar and its controls, and restore its default settings.

To move the Status Bar

•	Right-click the Status Bar, and click Position, Top or Bottom.

To resize the Status Bar

•	Right-click the Status Bar, and click Size, One Line or Two Lines.

To resize a Status Bar control

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, double-click Customize, and click Toolbars.

3.	On the Status Bar, click a control.

A selection box appears around the control.

4.	Pass the cursor over the left or right edge of the selected box until the cursor changes to a double-sided arrow.

5.	Drag to resize the control.

 Note

•	You can change only the width of the Status Bar controls.

To restore the Status Bar default settings

•	Right-click the Status Bar, and click Reset Status Bar.

 Related Topics


Hiding or displaying the Status Bar

You can hide the Status Bar and display it again any time you need it.

To hide or display the Status Bar

•	Click View, Status Bar.

If no check mark appears next to the command name, the Status Bar is hidden. If a check mark does appear, the Status Bar is displayed.

 Tip

•	You can also hide the Status Bar by right-clicking it and clicking Hide Status Bar.

 Related Topics


Customizing the Property Bar

The Property Bar displays different controls such as buttons, boxes, and list boxes, depending on what item you have selected or where the cursor is positioned. You can customize each version of the Property Bar. For example, when you select a frame, the Property Bar displays the controls for adjusting the Single Frame settings. You can add, remove, move, and resize Property Bar controls. You can restore the original Property Bar settings at any time.

To add a control to the Property Bar

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, double-click Customize, and click Toolbars.

3.	From the Property Bar list box, choose the Property Bar configuration to which you want to add a control.

The selected configuration of the Property Bar is displayed in the Application Window.

4.	In the Commands list box, double-click the folder that contains the command for which you want to add a control and click a command.

If the command already has a default control, such as Save or Open for example, that control is displayed with a selection box around it. You must use the default control for the command.

6.	Drag the control from the Options dialog box to the Property Bar.

To remove a control from the Property Bar

•	Hold down ALT, and drag the control from the Property Bar to the Publication window.

To move a Property Bar control

•	Hold down ALT, and drag the control to another position on the Property Bar, or to another toolbar.

To resize a Property Bar control

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, double-click Customize, and click Toolbars.

3.	Select a property bar from the Property Bar list box which contains the control you want to resize.

4.	Click the property bar control you want to resize. Although the Options dialog box is open, you can select controls on the Property Bar.

5.	Drag the sides of the control to resize it.

 Related Topics


Restoring the Property Bar original settings

The Property Bar's appearance changes depending on what item has been selected and what actions you are performing. After you've customized any configuration of the Property Bar, you can restore the original settings at any time. When you restore the Property Bar setting, any changes you have made to any configuration of the Property Bar are lost.

To restore the Property Bar original settings.

1.	Click Tools, Option.

2.	In the Workspace category, click Customize.

3.	Click Property Bar, in the Toolbars list.

4.	Click the Reset button.

 Tip

•	You can also click View, Toolbars to open the Customize page of the Options dialog box.

 Related Topics


Customizing keyboard shortcuts


Overview: Customizing keyboard shortcuts
Customizing keyboard shortcuts

Keyboard shortcuts can help you work more efficiently and productively. In Corel VENTURA, you can assign new keyboard shortcuts and modify existing ones. You can delete shortcuts you no longer need, and you can restore the original settings of default shortcuts. You can also view and print the list of all current keyboard shortcuts and save it as a .CSV file, a text file which can be read by other programs.

 Related Topics


Assigning and deleting keyboard shortcuts

Keyboard shortcuts give you a faster way to access certain commands or actions. Because many keyboard shortcuts are already assigned as defaults, when you modify them or add new ones, you may run into conflicts with existing keyboard shortcut assignments. Corel VENTURA lets you delete or reassign conflicting keyboard shortcuts.

To assign a new keyboard shortcut

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, double-click Customize, and click Shortcut Keys.

3.	In the Commands list, double-click the folder that contains the command to which you want to assign a keyboard shortcut, and click the command.

4.	Type the keyboard shortcut in the Press New Shortcut Key box.

You can have up to four layers of keystrokes for a keyboard shortcut. For example, the key combination CTRL + ALT + 1, 2, 3, 4 is accomplished by holding down CTRL and ALT and pressing 1, 2, 3, and 4 in succession.

5.	Click the Assign button.

 Notes

•	If you make a mistake when typing a keyboard combination, or if the shortcut is assigned to another command, press BACKSPACE and type a new letter combination.

•	You can enable the Delete Conflicting Shortcut check box, so that the existing shortcut will be deleted in case of keyboard conflict. For example, CTRL + N is the default shortcut for the File New command. If you want to assign this shortcut to the New Library command and you have enabled the Delete Conflicting Shortcut check box, the CTRL + N shortcut will be deleted as a shortcut for the File New command and reassigned to the New Library command.

•	If you've enabled the Delete Conflicting Shortcut check box, you can also enable the Navigate To Conflict check box so that you can type a new shortcut to replace the one being deleted.

•	A number of keyboard shortcuts cannot be changed. These keys include F1, ALT + F6, ALT + TAB, ALT + ESC, CTRL + ESC, and CTRL + /.

To delete a keyboard shortcut

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, double-click Customize, and click Shortcut Keys.

3.	In the Commands list, double-click the folder that contains the command whose shortcut you want to delete, and click the command.

4.	In the Current Shortcut Keys box, select the shortcut.

5.	Click Delete.

 Related Topics


Viewing or printing the keyboard shortcuts list

You can view the list of all assigned shortcuts and you can print it using the controls on the Shortcut Keys page of the Options dialog box or using a script. Using the Shortcut Keys page generates a table of shortcuts. Using a script lists the shortcuts in the order in which they appear in the menus.

To view and print the keyboard shortcuts list

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, double-click Customize, and click Shortcut Keys.

3.	Click the View All button.

4.	Click Print.

To view and print the keyboard shortcuts list using a script

1.	Click Tools, Corel SCRIPT, Run/Manage Scripts.

2.	Select KeyboardShortcuts from the Available Scripts box.

3.	Click the Run button.

The list is generated in Corel VENTURA.

4.	Click File, Print.

 Related Topics


Restoring keyboard shortcuts

After you've changed a default keyboard shortcut, you can restore the original settings at any time.

To restore a keyboard shortcut

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, double-click Customize, and click Shortcut Keys.

3.	In the Commands list, double-click the folder that contains the command whose shortcut you want to restore, and click the command.

4.	Click the Reset button.

 Related Topics


To save the keyboard shortcuts list as a .CSV file

You can save the keyboard shortcut list as a .CSV file which can be read by applications such as word processors or spreadsheet programs.

To save the keyboard shortcut list as a .CSV file

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, double-click Customize, and click Shortcut Keys.

3.	Click the View All button.

4.	In the Shortcut keys dialog box, click the Export To CSV button.

5.	In the Save As dialog box, double-click the folder in which you want to save the file.

6.	Type a filename in the File Name box.

7.	Click Save.

 Related Topics


Setting preferences in Corel VENTURA


Overview: Setting preferences in Corel VENTURA
Setting preferences in Corel VENTURA

The Options dialog box lets you customize the workspace according to your preferences. Changes that you make to the Corel VENTURA default settings, as well as any customization of toolbars, menus, and keyboard shortcuts, apply to all of your publications and can be saved as a workspace. For more information about saving your workspaces, see "Using customized workspaces."

Through the Options dialog box you can adjust any of the following settings:

•	View options, such as column guide colors, frame border colors, image dithering schemes, and other viewing preferences

•	Copy Editor options, such as displaying Corel VENTURA markup codes and default fonts for the Copy Editor view

•	Item selection options, such as frame selection sensitivity, constrain angle, and frame handle size

•	Page viewing options, such as page gap and pasteboard sizes

•	Unit settings, such as units of measurement for different controls and the increments by which the unit settings can change

•	Filter and Associate options, such as the selection of import and export filters and the selection of Corel VENTURA associated file types

You can also choose from a number of startup switches, depending on what action you want executed when Corel VENTURA opens. You can add and delete Web links and edit the command names used to access particular Web sites.

 Note

•	For information about options not shown here, click the Help button in the Options dialog box.

 More Detailed Information
 Related Topics


Changing the viewing options


Overview: Changing the viewing options
Changing the viewing options

Corel VENTURA allows you to adjust many of the basic viewing options. You can change the color of grid lines, frame borders, column guides, and other screen elements. You can choose between the Corel and Windows color dithering scheme and you can set the greeked text threshold. You can also choose which screen elements, such as column guides and generated tags, will be displayed or hidden. Changes you make to these options apply to your Corel VENTURA workspace, not just the current publication.

 Related Topics


Changing the color of frame borders, guidelines, and other screen guides

You can change the default color settings for the grid, frame borders, guidelines, and other screen elements, such as loose lines, column guides, and page tag borders.

To change the color of guidelines, frame borders, and other screen elements

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, click View.

3.	In the View Colors section, click any of the following color pickers:

•	Column Guides

•	Frame Borders

•	Grid

•	Guidelines

•	Loose Lines

•	Page Tag Borders

4.	Click a color from the color palette.

 Tip

•	You can click the Other button on the Color palette to create a custom color

 Note

•	To see the color changes to loose lines (if there are any) and column guides, enable the Loose Lines and Column Guides check boxes in the Default View Settings section of the Options dialog box.

 Related Topics


Changing the dithering scheme for displaying colors

Screen dithering is a method of enhancing the display of monitors that are capable of 16-bit color (about 65,000 colors), or less. It works by averaging the depth of pixels in a given area to create additional colors or shades of gray.

In Corel VENTURA, you can choose between Corel dithering and Windows dithering.

To change the dithering scheme used for displaying colors

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, click View.

3.	In the View Colors section, enable one of the following buttons:

•	Corel Dithering [image] to display color using the Corel dithering scheme

•	Windows Dithering [image] to display color using the screen driver's default dithering scheme

 Notes

•	If you have a 256-color adapter, your screen may redraw faster with Windows dithering. However, only 15 of these colors will be used in the dithering scheme.

•	Both Corel and Windows dithering control only how Corel VENTURA displays colors on the screen and have no effect on the printed output.

•	To use either option, you must have a monitor or graphics adapter that can display 256 simultaneous colors and a Windows screen driver that uses this capability.

 Related Topics


Setting the view preferences

You can enable or disable the display of on-screen items such as column guides, frame continuation indicators, generated tags, tabs and returns, ToolTips, frame borders, loose lines, and the file names of hidden pictures. You can also keep the Frame tool selected after you draw a frame and interrupt the screen refresh as needed.

To set the view preferences

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, click View.

3.	In the Default View Settings section, enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Columns Guides [image] displays all column guides

•	Draw Multiple Objects [image] keeps the Frame tool selected after you draw a frame

•	Frame Continuation [image] displays continuation arrows and frame order numbers

•	Label Hidden Pictures [image] displays the filename of the picture in the frame when a picture is hidden

•	Generated Tags [image] displays generated tags, such as header, footer, and caption tags in the Paragraph Tag List box on the Property Bar

•	Interruptible Refresh [image] allows you to interrupt the screen refresh by clicking the mouse, pressing ESC, or pressing a key

•	Show Frame Borders [image] displays frame borders on all frames

•	Tabs And Returns [image] displays tab and return symbols

•	Show Tool Tips [image] displays captions as you pass the cursor over toolbars and buttons

•	Loose Lines [image] highlights all lines of justified text in which word spacing exceeds the maximum word spacing defined for the paragraph. (The maximum word spacing is defined on the Typography page of the Paragraph Tag Properties or the Paragraph Properties dialog box.)

 Related Topics


Setting the greeked text threshold for displaying small fonts

Greeking displays fonts using fewer pixels than specified. Thus, text appears on the screen as a series of gray bars rather than as recognizable type. This process reduces the time it takes to redraw a screen that includes text that is too small to be legible at the given zoom level.

To set the greeked text threshold

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, click View.

3.	Type a pixel size in the Greek Text Below box.

 Note

•	Greeking does not affect printed text.

 Related Topics


Changing the Copy Editor view options


Overview: Changing the Copy Editor view options
Changing the Copy Editor view options

Copy Editor view lets you view the text of in a publication without seeing frames, graphics, objects, or other formatting. The Copy Editor view settings do not affect how your publication looks in Page Layout view or Page Tag view. For more information about using Copy Editor view, see "Viewing your publication."

 Related Topics


Setting the Copy Editor view preferences

You can choose a font and size for the text in Copy Editor view. You can also choose whether any code will be displayed and in what color. You can specify the width of the tag column, the spacing for the default tabs, and whether spaces should be represented as dots.

To set the Copy Editor view preferences

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, click Copy Editor.

3.	Do any of the following:

•	Type a value in the Default Tab Every box to set the tab spacing for Copy Editor view.

•	Type a value in the Tag Column Width box to set the space for the column used for tags display.

•	Click the Code Color color picker, and click a color for the mark-up codes display.

•	Choose a default font from the Font list box.

•	In the Size box, type a value for the default font size of the text displayed in Copy Editor view.

•	Enable the Show Codes check box to display Corel VENTURA mark-up codes. For example, the markup codes for an underlined word are displayed as follows: <U>word<U*>.

•	Enable the Show Dots For Spaces check box to display dots in the place of spaces.

 Notes

•	The Default Tab Every setting does not affect the default tab spacing in your publication; it only affects the spacing in Copy Editor view. Regardless of the tab spacing, one tab in Copy Editor view translates to one tab in Page Layout view, even if the default tab spacing is different.

•	The font and font setting size for Copy Editor view does not affect the paragraph or character formatting used in the publication.

•	The dots for spaces do not appear when the publication is viewed or printed. They are used only to indicate how many spaces lie between each word.

•	If you print from Copy Editor view, your publication prints exactly as it appears on the screen. If you do not want tag names or markup codes to print, disable the Show Codes check box in step 3.


Changing the Selection options


Overview: Changing the Selection options
Changing the Selection options

You can change selection options, such as frame sensitivity, constraint angle, and frame handle size.

 Related Topics


Changing the frame-selection sensitivity

The frame-selection sensitivity specifies how close you must move the cursor to a frame, graphic, or cell border before it can be selected.

To change the frame-selection sensitivity

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, click Selection.

3.	In the Frame Selection row, type values in the following boxes:

•	Horizontal

•	Vertical

 Note

•	To change the unit of measurement, right-click the Horizontal or Vertical box, click Units, and click a unit of measurement.

 Related Topics


Changing the constrain angle

The constrain angle lets you set the incremental angle of motion when you perform any of the following operations with CTRL held down: skewing or rotating, drawing straight lines with the Freehand tool, and adjusting control points when drawing with the Bezier tool. All of these actions use the same constrain angle.

To change the constrain angle

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, click Selection.

3.	Type a value in the Constrain Angle box.

 Related Topics


Setting the frame handle size

Corel VENTURA lets you adjust the Thickness of the frame handle size. Frames with wider handles are easier to select and manipulate.

To set the frame handle size

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, click Selection.

3.	Type a value in the Frame Handle Size box.

 Note

•	The frame handle size can be any value between 2 and 100 pixels.

 Related Topics


Changing the page viewing options


Overview: Changing the page viewing options
Changing the page viewing options

In Corel VENTURA, you can change the size of the on-screen page gap and the pasteboard. The pasteboard is the non-printing area beyond the edge of the printed page that you can use to store frames or graphics while you decide where to place them on the page. The on-screen page gap is the blank space on the top, bottom, left, and right sides between the pages in Page Layout view or Multiple Page view. For more information about page views, see "Viewing your publication."

 Related Topics


Setting the on-screen page gap

Corel VENTURA allows you to set the page gap space between pages, when viewing multiple pages in Page Layout view or Multiple Page view. The horizontal value determines the gap between pages viewed side by side. The vertical value determines the gap below the pages.

To set the on-screen page gap

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, click Page.

3.	In the On-screen Page Gap section, type values in the following boxes:

•	Horizontal [image] sets the horizontal page gap

•	Vertical [image] sets the vertical page gap

 Note

•	To change the unit of measurement for the on-screen page gap, right-click the Horizontal or Vertical box, click Units, and click a unit of measurement.

 Related Topics


Setting the size of the pasteboard

Corel VENTURA allows you to define the size of the pasteboard.

To set the size of the pasteboard

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, click Page.

3.	In the Pasteboard/Page Gap section, type values in the following boxes:

•	Top

•	Bottom

•	Left

•	Right

 Note

•	If you set the width of the pasteboard to zero, you can only select the page by first selecting a frame, such as the header or footer frame, and then pressing TAB until the page is selected. However, you can still format the page using the Format, Page Properties or Format, Page Tag Properties commands.

 Related Topics


Changing unit of measurement options


Overview: Changing unit of measurement options
Changing unit of measurement options

In Corel VENTURA you can choose a preferred unit of measurement for the font size, columns and margins, lines, underlines, and horizontal and vertical spacing. You can also specify the increment by which the measurement value in a box should change when you use the scroll arrows on the box.

 Related Topics


Changing the unit of measurement options

You can set the units of measurement used in all of your publications as well as the increment by which a measurement will change when you use the scroll arrows on number box. For example, if you select millimeters as the unit measurement for columns and margins, a millimeter increment of 10 will allow you to move your columns or margins only by 10-millimeter increments.

To change the unit of measurement options for a publication

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, click Units.

3.	Choose a unit or measurement from the following list boxes:

•	Font Size

•	Dimension And Positioning

•	Columns And Margins

•	Lines

•	Underlines

•	Horizontal Spacing

•	Vertical Spacing

•	Rulers

To set the increment of change for a specific unit of measurement

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, double-click Units, and click Increment settings.

3.	Type increment values for any of the unit of measurement options.


Using customized workspaces


Overview: Using customized workspaces
Using customized workspaces

A workspace is a specific configuration that defines features such as customized toolbars, menus, or keyboard shortcuts. You can create and save as many workspaces as you need and apply a different workspace for every project and publication. For more information about customizing your workspace, see the following:

•	Customizing menus, toolbars, and keyboard shortcuts

•	Customizing the Status Bar and the Property Bar

•	Setting preferences in Corel VENTURA

If you are more familiar with other desktop publishing applications, Corel VENTURA contains workspaces which are similar to Adobe PageMaker and QuarkXPress. These workspaces help you learn to work with Corel VENTURA quickly and effectively.

 Related Topics


Creating and saving customized workspaces

You can create and save customized workspace settings for any feature in Corel VENTURA. When you create a new workspace, you can base it on an existing workspace, then modify it to suit your needs.

To create and save a customized workspace

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	Click the Workspace category.

3.	Click the New button.

4.	In the New Workspace dialog box, type the name of the new workspace in the Name Of New Workspace box.

5. Choose an option from the Base New Workspace On list box.

6.	Type a description of the workspace in the Description Of New Workspace box.

 Tip

•	If you want to apply the new workspace immediately, enable the Set As Current Workspace check box.

 Related Topics


Applying a workspace

You can apply a different workspace configuration depending on the publication you're working on.

To apply a workspace

1. Click Tools, Options.

2.	Click the Workspace category.

3.	Choose a workspace from the Workspaces Available list.

4.	Click the Set As Current button.

 Related Topics


Modifying and deleting customized workspaces

You can modify customized workspaces at any time and you can delete any of the saved workspaces.

To modify a customized workspace

1. Click Tools, Options.

2.	Click the Workspace category.

3.	Choose a workspace from the Workspaces Available list.

4.	Click the Set As Current button.

5. In the Options dialog box, choose the settings you want for the workspace.

To delete a customized workspace

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	Click the Delete button.

 Note

•	You cannot delete the Corel VENTURA default workspace.

 Related Topics


Changing the filters and file type association options


Overview: Changing the filters and associate options
Changing the filters and file type association options

Corel VENTURA provides a number of filters for importing and exporting text, picture and spreadsheet file formats. You can specify which filters you want to be available in the Import and Export dialog boxes and in what order the filters should be listed. For more information about the different types of filters, see "Import and export file formats."

File type associations allow you to open a particular text file type directly in Corel VENTURA. When you double-click a file of a type associated with Corel VENTURA, Corel VENTURA launches with that file open.

 Related Topics


Adding, removing, and rearranging filters

Corel VENTURA is installed with a default list of import and export filters. Depending on the type of files you work with on a regular basis, you can add filters to the list or remove the ones you don't need any more. The file filters are organized into three categories: raster, for bitmap images; vector, for vector graphics; and text. You can change the order of filters on the list according to your preferences.

To add a filter

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Global category, click Filters.

3.	Double-click a filter category in the Available File Types list.

4.	Choose the filter you want to add.

5.	Click the Add button.

6.	Click the Move Up or Move Down button to position the filter in the list.

To remove a filter

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Choose a filter from the Active Filters list.

3.	Click the Remove button.

To change a filter's position in the list of filters

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the "To add a filter" procedure.

2.	Choose a filter in the Active Filters list.

3.	Click the Move Up or Move Down button to position the filter in the list.

 Related Topics


Restoring the default list of filters

After you've added, removed, or rearranged filters, you can restore the default list of filters at any time.

To restore the default list of filters

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Global category, click Filters.

3.	Click the Reset button.

 Related Topics


Enabling and disabling file type associations with Corel VENTURA

Corel VENTURA provides a list of the file types that you can choose to associate with Corel VENTURA. You can disable the file type association for the file types you don't need any more.

To enable a file type association with Corel VENTURA

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Global category, double-click Filters, and click Associate.

3.	Enable the check box for each file type you want to associate with Corel VENTURA.

To disable a file type association with Corel VENTURA

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Disable the check box for the file types you no longer want associated with Corel VENTURA.

 Note

•	You can associate only text files with Corel VENTURA.

 Related Topics


Restoring the default file type association settings

If you've modified the default file type association, you can restore them at any time.

To restore the default file type association settings

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Global category, double-click Filters, and click Associate.

3.	Click the Reset button.

 Related Topics


Installing, uninstalling, and launching applications


Overview: Installing, uninstalling, and launching applications
Installing, uninstalling, and launching applications

Corel VENTURA comes with several other applications, such as Corel PHOTO-PAINT, Corel CAPTURE, and Corel SCRIPT Editor. You can install and uninstall these applications separately. For example, if you have done a complete install but later decide that you don't need a particular application, you can uninstall it. If you have already done a custom install and you want to install an application, you can easily do so.

You can launch any of the applications included with the Corel VENTURA directly from Corel VENTURA, using the Application Launcher button on the Standard toolbar. The Application Launcher button displays a list of Corel applications you can open. You can add application names to and remove them from the Application Launcher list.

 Related Topics


Installing only selected applications

A custom installation allows you to install only selected applications included with Corel VENTURA.

To do a custom installation of selected applications

1.	Close all applications, including Corel VENTURA.

2.	Insert the Corel VENTURA installation CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.

3.	Open the Corel VENTURA installation disk on the screen and double-click the SETUP.EXE file.

4.	Follow the instructions on your screen.

The Corel Setup wizard guides you through the installation process.

5.	Enable the Custom Setup button, on the Corel VENTURA 8 Setup Options screen.

6.	On the Corel VENTURA 8 Components screen, enable the check boxes for each application you want to install.

7.	Complete the installation process.

 Related Topics


Uninstalling selected applications

You can uninstall any of the Corel VENTURA applications that you have installed.

To uninstall selected applications

1.	Close all open applications, including Corel VENTURA.

2.	Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.

3.	Click Programs, Corel VENTURA 8, Corel Uninstaller.

4.	Follow the instructions provided by the Corel Uninstaller wizard.

 Notes

•	If Corel VENTURA doesn't appear on the Programs menu, click the Start button, then click Find, Files Or Folders. Use the Find dialog box to locate the Corel Uninstaller program file (UNINSTAL.EXE).

•	To remove all Corel VERSIONS program files, you must disable Corel VERSIONS through the Windows Control Panel before you start Corel Uninstaller. To do this, click the Start button on the Windows taskbar, and click Settings, Control Panels. Double-click Corel VERSIONS, and click Enable Version Control so that a check mark no longer appears next to the command name. For more information about Corel Versions, see "Archiving publications."

 Related Topics


Launching applications from Corel VENTURA

While you're working in Corel VENTURA, you can launch any of the other applications provided with Corel VENTURA. Using the Application Launcher button on the Standard toolbar. You might find the Application Launcher particularly useful if you intend to work back and forth between Corel VENTURA and another application.

To launch applications from Corel VENTURA

1. Click the Application Launcher button on the Standard toolbar.

2. Click the application you want to run.

 Related Topics


Adding applications to and removing them from the Application Launcher list

You can use the Application Launcher button to launch not only Corel applications, but also Corel SCRIPT executable files as well as applications from other vendors. The Application Launcher list is determined at the time of installation, but you can modify it later. You can add applications to and remove them from the Application Launcher list by editing the CORELAPP.INI file.

To add an application to the Application Launcher list

1.	Open a text editor, such as Windows Notepad or the Corel SCRIPT Editor.

2.	Open the CORELAPP.INI file located in the C:\COREL\GRAPHICS8\CONFIG folder.

3.	Find the [Applications] section in the CORELAPP.INI file.

4.	Type the name of the application as you want it to appear on the Application Launcher list.

5.	Type an equals sign (=) and the path to the folder where the application is located.

6.	Type the application's executable filename. For example, if you want to add CorelDRAW to the list, the entry should look like the following:

CorelDRAW=C:\COREL\GRAPHICS8\PROGRAMS\CORELDRW.EXE

 Note

•	If you modified the default installation path (C:\COREL\GRAPHICS8\WORKSPACE\VENTURA8) when you installed Corel VENTURA, perform the above procedure by substituting the default folder names with the names of the folders in which you've installed Corel VENTURA.

To remove an application from the Application Launcher list

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	Delete the line containing the name of the application you want to remove.

For example, if you want to remove CorelDRAW from the list, you'll have to delete the following line:

CorelDRAW=C:\Corel\graphics8\Programs\coreldrw.exe

 Related Topics


Startup switches for Corel VENTURA


Overview: Startup switches for Corel VENTURA
Startup switches for Corel VENTURA

Startup switches are commands that allow you to control what happens when Corel VENTURA starts. These commands can be used whenever you need them or each time the application launches. You can also create a number of desktop shortcuts that use different switches. What follows is a list of the startup switches that can be used with Corel VENTURA. For more information about using the startup switches, see "Using Corel VENTURA startup switches."

Startup options	Action executed

VENTURA.EXE	Starts Corel VENTURA

VENTURA.EXE file	Starts Corel VENTURA and opens a previously saved publication; file specifies the filename, including extension, and the full path of the publication

VENTURA.EXE /p file	Prints a previously saved publication at the default printer port; file specifies the name, including extension, and full path of the publication to open and print

VENTURA.EXE /pt file port	Prints a previously saved publication at a specified printer port; file specifies the name, including the extension, and full path of the publication to open and print; port specifies the printer port. In cases where the printer name is more than one word, enclose it with quotation marks; for example, "ABC Printer Model".

VENTURA.EXE /os	Prevents the execution of the OnStart auto script. For more information about auto scripts, see "Using Corel VENTURA auto scripts."

VENTURA.EXE /osscript	Prevents the execution of the OnStart auto script and lets you specify a script to run instead. The script parameter specifies the name and path of the script to execute instead of the OnStart auto script. Do not leave a space between the switch (/os) and the script name (script). For more information about auto scripts, see "Using Corel VENTURA auto scripts."

VENTURA.EXE /d	Prevents the execution of auto scripts during a Corel VENTURA session. For more information about auto scripts, see "Using Corel VENTURA auto scripts."

VENTURA.EXE /uusername	Specifies the user's name if it is different from the network login name: username specifies a network login identification. Do not leave a space between the switch (/u) and the network login identification (username).

VENTURA.EXE /uusername /spass	Specifies a network login identification (username) and password (pass) for publications that have access-rights protection. This option is used in conjunction with another option that opens a Corel VENTURA publication. Do not leave a space between the switch (/u or /s) and the parameter that follows. For information about publication access rights, see "Multiuser publishing."

VENTURA.EXE /u"User Name"	Specifies the user's name if it is different from the network login name. If the user name is two separate words, such as User Name, then the user name must be enclosed in quotation marks; for example, use VENTURA.EXE /u"User Name" to open Corel VENTURA as User Name.

VENTURA.EXE /n	Prevents the displaying of the Corel VENTURA startup screen. This option cannot be used in conjunction with other startup switches or options.

 Related Topics


Using Corel VENTURA startup switches

Corel VENTURA allows you to choose from a variety of startup switches, that is, ways to start the application, depending on the kind of work you are doing. For more information about startup switches, or commands, see "Startup switches for Corel VENTURA."

To use a Corel VENTURA startup switch

1.	Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.

2.	Click Run.

3.	In the Run dialog box, type VENTURA.EXE, a space, and the appropriate switch in the Open box.

 Notes

•	When you use more than one startup switch, you need to add a space between each command.

•	For information about setting a permanent startup switch, see "Setting a permanent startup switch for Corel VENTURA."

 Tip

•	Click the Browse button, locate the VENTURA.EXE file, click Open, and type a space and the appropriate switch following the command line in the Open box.

 Related Topics


Setting a permanent startup switch for Corel VENTURA

You can use the same startup switch every time you open Corel VENTURA. For more information about start-up switches, see "Startup switches for Corel VENTURA."

To set a permanent startup switch for Corel VENTURA

1.	Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.

2.	Click Settings, Taskbar.

3.	Click the Start Menu Programs tab.

4.	Click the Advanced button.

Windows Explorer opens and displays the contents of the Start menu.

5.	Click the Programs icon.

6.	In the right column, double-click the folder where Corel VENTURA is installed.

7.	Right-click the Corel VENTURA 8 program icon, and click Properties.

8.	In the Corel VENTURA 8 Properties dialog box, click the Shortcut tab.

9.	In the Target line, type a space and the startup switch after VENTURA.EXE.

For example, to start Corel VENTURA without viewing the start-up screen, the Target line should read

X:\COREL\GRAPHICS8\PROGRAMS\VENTURA.EXE /n

where "X" indicates the drive on which Corel VENTURA is installed.

Each time you start Corel VENTURA using the Start button on the Windows taskbar, that startup switch will be applied. If you access Corel VENTURA from Windows Explorer, the startup switch will not be applied.

 Note

•	When you use more than one start-up switch, you must add a space between command.

 Tips

•	You can also right-click the Windows taskbar and click Properties to open the Taskbar Properties dialog box.

•	If you have a Corel VENTURA shortcut icon on your desktop, right-click the icon, click Properties, click Shortcut, and type a space and the startup switch following the command line in the Target box. You can also create a number of different shortcuts on your desktop and set different startup switches for each one.

 Related Topics


Starting Corel VENTURA with a user name

User names are an essential part of the Corel VENTURA multiuser feature. If you are not connected to a network and do not have a user name, you cannot create or access multiuser publications. For more information about multiuser publishing, see "Multiuser publishing and archiving publications."

To start Corel VENTURA with a user name

1.	Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar, and click Run.

2.	Type the full pathname as follows:

X:\COREL\GRAPHICS8\PROGRAMS\VENTURA.EXE u/username

where "X" indicates the drive where Corel VENTURA is installed.

Your user name can be anything you choose. If you want your user name to be two words separated by a space, enclose both words in your user name with quotation marks. For example, X:\COREL\GRAPHICS8\PROGRAMS\VENTURA.EXE u/"user name".

 Note

•	"User name" is a Corel VENTURA startup switch. For more information and a list of other Corel VENTURA startup switches, see "Startup switches for Corel VENTURA".

•	Each time you want to open any multiuser publication, you will have to open Corel VENTURA with the same user name.

 Related Topics


Changing Web links in Corel VENTURA


Overview: Changing Web links in Corel VENTURA
Changing Web links in Corel VENTURA

The Corel On The Web submenu in the Help menu contains a list of links that can launch and point your Internet browser to a World Wide Web site.

In Corel VENTURA, you can manage all of your links so that any World Wide Web site is quickly and easily accessible. The Edit Links dialog box displays a list of details for all the links in the Corel On the Web submenu. These details include the name of each command that is currently displayed in the submenu and its corresponding Uniform Resource Locator (URL). The controls provided let you add, delete, and edit either the URL or the command names, and change the order of the commands in the submenu.

 Related Topics


Adding, deleting and editing Web links in Corel VENTURA

The Corel On The Web submenu allows you to access any Web site of interest to you. You can add and delete Web links, according to your preferences. You can also edit the Uniform Resource Locator (URL) of an existing link, or you can edit the name of the command used to access a particular Web site.

To add a Web link

1.	Click Help, Corel On the Web, Edit Links.

2.	Click the Add button.

3.	In the Link Details dialog box, type a name for the command in the Menu Text For Link box. Insert an ampersand (&) before the letter you want to use as the shortcut to that command.

4.	Type the Web site address in the Corresponding URL box.

5.	Click OK.

6.	Click the Move Up or Move Down button to reposition the command in the Corel On The Web submenu.

To delete a Web link

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	From the Menu Text list, choose the command that corresponds to the link you want to delete.

3.	Click the Remove button.

To edit a Web link

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the "To add a Web link" procedure.

2.	Choose the URL from the URL list.

3.	Click the Edit button.

4.	In the Link Details dialog box, type a new URL in the Corresponding URL box

To edit a Web link command

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the "To add a Web link" procedure.

2.	Choose the command from the Menu Text list.

3.	Click the Edit button.

4.	In the Link Details dialog box, type a new name for the command in the Menu Text For Link box.

 Related Topics


To rearrange commands in the Corel On The Web submenu

You can change the order of the commands in the Corel On The Web submenu so that you can link to your favorite web sites easily.

To change the order of a command in the Corel On The Web submenu

1.	Click Help, Corel On the Web, Edit Links.

2.	Choose a command from the Menu Text list.

3.	Click the Move Up or Move Down button to position the command on the submenu.

 Related Topics


Filling and outlining


Overview: Filling and outlining
Filling and outlining

When you add a graphic, a frame, or text to your publication, you'll notice that it has default fill and outline attributes. The fill is the color or pattern contained in the object. The outline is the line that defines the object. You can change fills and outlines by using the Fill and Outline flyouts in the Toolbox.

With Corel VENTURA, you can apply a fill and outline to both open and closed objects. Text objects are considered to be closed paths, so you can specify both fill and outline attributes. Normally, however, text objects are filled but have no outline properties.

Corel VENTURA provides several types of fills: uniform fills, fountain fills, pattern fills, texture fills, and postscript fills. When you choose No Fill for an object, the object is transparent and objects behind show through.

Corel VENTURA allows you to adjust the outline attributes for text and objects. You can think of each object as being drawn with a nib of adjustable size, shape, and color. These nib attributes can apply to a particular object or to all objects, frames, or text you add to your publication.

 Note

•	For information about color basics and using colors in Corel VENTURA, see "Working with color."

 More Detailed Information


Filling objects


Overview: Filling objects
Filling objects

You can change the appearance of objects or text by using a fill. By filling an object, you apply colors or patterns to the inside of its borders. If you leave an object without a fill, or remove its fill, the object becomes transparent. The following fills are available in Corel VENTURA:

•	Uniform fills are even-colored, solid fills that can be applied to any object.

•	Fountain fills display a progression between two colors following a linear, radial, conical, or square path. You can use preset fountain fills included with Corel VENTURA to simulate the appearance of neon tubes, metal cylinders, and a variety of other real-life objects.

•	Pattern fills are pregenerated, symmetrical pictures that easily lend themselves to tiling. You can import bitmaps or vector graphics for use as pattern fills, or you can create simple two-color bitmap patterns. The effect you create is similar to the one you create by applying wallpaper to a wall. There are three types of pattern fills: two-color, full-color, and bitmap.

•	Texture fills are fractally-generated pictures that you can use to give your object the appearance of natural materials. You can select from a series of pregenerated textures or generate your own variations.

•	PostScript texture fills are special pattern fills designed using PostScript language. Some textures are extremely complex, and large objects containing PostScript texture fills may take some time to print or to update on screen. Therefore, Corel VENTURA represents PostScript texture fills on screen with the letters "PS" rather than the actual texture.

In all cases, you can apply fills to specific objects or set a default fill so that every object you draw has the same fill. For more information about setting default fills, see "Setting the default fill."

 More Detailed Information
 Related Topics


Working with uniform fills


Overview: Working with uniform fills
Working with uniform fills

Uniform fills are even-colored, solid fills that can be applied to any object. You can choose between color models, color-matching systems, and color mixers for filling objects with solid colors. (The default display is the CMYK color model.)

 Related Topics


Applying a uniform fill

The Uniform Fill dialog box allows you to apply a uniform fill to frames, graphic objects, pages, and text. You can also apply a uniform fill using the Object Properties dialog box, the Frame Properties dialog box, and the Paragraph Properties dialog box.

To apply a uniform fill using the Uniform Fill dialog box

1.	Select a frame, graphic object, page, or text with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click Fill Color Dialog to open the Uniform Fill dialog box.

3.	Click a color on the Color Bar that appears along the right side of the Uniform Fill dialog box.

 Note

•	For information about choosing a color from a specific color model, see "Working with color."

To apply a uniform fill to a graphic object using the Object Properties dialog box

1.	Right-click a graphic object with the Pick tool, and click Graphics Properties.

2.	Click the Fill tab.

3.	Click the Uniform Fill button.

4.	Choose a color from the Color Palette.

To apply a uniform fill to a frame using the Frame Properties dialog box

1.	Right-click a frame with the Pick tool, and click Frame Properties.

2.	Click the General tab.

3.	Click the Edit button.

4.	Follow steps 3 and 4 from the previous procedure.

To apply a uniform fill to text using the Paragraph Properties dialog box

1.	Right-click text with the Pick tool, and click Paragraph Properties.

2.	Click the Font tab.

3.	Click the Outline/Fill button.

4.	Follow steps 3 and 4 from "To apply a uniform fill to an object using the Object Properties dialog box" procedure.

 Tip

•	You can access the Uniform Fill dialog box from the on-screen Color Palette on the toolbar. The Color Palette stores the last five colors you used in your current publication. You can quickly apply any of these colors by clicking the corresponding color swatch, or you can open the Color Palette and choose new colors.


Working with fountain fills


Overview: Working with fountain fills
Working with fountain fills

A fountain fill [image] also known as a gradient fill or a ramp fill [image] is a progression of colors through the Color Wheel following a linear, radial, conical, or square path.

There are two types of fountain fills: two-color and custom. Two-color fountain fills have a direct blend from one color to another. Custom fills, however, allow you to create a cascade of different colors. You can create custom fountain fills by changing the direction of the fill, adding intermediate colors, or changing the angle of the fill.

The following picture shows that fountain fills can follow a linear, radial, conical, or square path.

 Related Topics


Applying a two-color fountain fill

A two-color fountain fill is a fill that flows smoothly from one color to another. The fill can flow in a straight line across the object or text (linear), in concentric circles from the center of the object or text (radial), in rays from the center of the object or text (conical), or in concentric squares from the center of the object or text (square).

Fountain fills add depth and color to your publications. You can see how your fill appears in the Preview window found in the Fountain Fill dialog box.

To apply a two-color fountain fill using the Fountain Fill dialog box

1.	Select a frame, graphic object, page, or text with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click Fountain Fill Dialog.

3.	Enable the Two-Color button.

4.	Choose the type of fountain fill you want from the Type list box.

5.	Click the From color picker, and click the color you want at the start of the fountain fill's color progression.

6.	Click the To color picker, and click the color you want at the end of the fountain fill's color progression.

7.	Move the Mid-Point slider to set the mid-point between the two colors.

8.	Click one of the following buttons:

•	Direct [image] determines the intermediate fill colors according to hue and saturation changes along a straight line, beginning at the From color and continuing across the Color Wheel to the To color

•	Clockwise Color Path [image] blends colors along a clockwise path around the Color Wheel

•	Counterclockwise Color Path [image] blends colors along a counterclockwise path around the Color Wheel

 Tip

•	Type a name in the Presets box of the Fountain Fill dialog box, and click the Add button to save the fountain fill.

To apply a two-color fountain fill to a graphic object using the Object Properties dialog box

1.	Right-click a graphic object with the Pick tool, and click Graphics Properties.

2.	Click the Fill tab.

3.	Click the Fountain Fill button.

4.	In the Fountain Fill section, click the button that corresponds to the type of fountain fill you want to apply.

5.	Follow steps 4 and 5 from the previous procedure.

To apply a two-color fountain fill to a frame using the Frame Properties dialog box

1.	Right-click a frame with the Pick tool, and click Frame Properties.

2.	Click the General tab.

3.	Click the Edit button.

4.	Click the Fountain Fill button.

5.	In the Fountain Fill section, click the button that corresponds to the type of fountain fill you want to apply.

6.	Follow steps 4 and 5 from the "To apply a two-color fountain fill using the Fountain Fill dialog box" procedure.

To apply a two-color fountain fill to text using the Paragraph Properties dialog box

1.	Right-click the text with the Pick tool, and click Paragraph Properties.

2.	Click the Font tab.

3.	Click the Outline/Fill button.

4.	Click the Fountain Fill button.

5.	In the Fountain Fill section, click the button that corresponds to the type of fountain fill you want to apply.

6.	Follow steps 4 and 5 from the "To apply a two-color fountain fill using the Fountain Fill dialog box" procedure.

 Tip

•	Click the Edit button in the Object Properties, Frame Properties, and Paragraph Properties dialog boxes to refine further the attributes of your fill.

 Related Topics


Applying a preset fountain fill

Corel VENTURA provides a number of preset fountain fills that you can use to simulate the appearance of neon tubes, metal cylinders, and a variety of other real-life objects. You can see how your fill appears in the Preview window found in the Fountain Fill dialog box.

To apply a preset fountain fill

1.	Select a frame, graphic object, page, or text with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click Fountain Fill Dialog.

3.	Choose a preset fountain fill from the Presets list box.

 Tip

•	You can also access the preset fountain fills by clicking the Edit button in the Object Properties and Frame Properties dialog boxes.

 Related Topics


Creating and applying custom fountain fills

Corel VENTURA allows you to customize your fountain fills by adding intermediate colors using the Preview Ribbon. You can also specify where you want the intermediate colors to appear by moving the markers that appear above the Preview Ribbon. You can add up to 99 intermediate colors to your fountain fill.

To apply a custom fountain fill using the Fountain Fill dialog box

1.	Select a frame, graphic object, page, or text with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click Fountain Fill Dialog.

3.	Enable the Custom button.

4.	Double-click the Preview Ribbon to add a color marker.

5.	Click a color in the Color Palette to assign it to the marker.

6.	Repeat steps 3 and 4 until you get the color you want.

 Tips

•	You can move existing markers by dragging them along the Preview Ribbon. You can delete markers by double-clicking them.

•	You can change the color of a marker by selecting it and clicking a color swatch in the Color Palette.

 Related Topics


Saving custom fountain fills

Once you've created a custom fountain fill, you can save it so that you can use it again.

To save a custom fountain fill

1.	Select a frame, graphic object, page, or text with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click Fountain Fill Dialog.

3.	Type a name for the new fountain fill in the Presets box.

4.	Click the Add button to save the custom fountain fill.

New patterns are added to the pattern list and placed in alphabetical order.

 Tip

•	You can also access the preset fountain fills by clicking the Edit button in the Object Properties and Frame Properties dialog boxes.

 Related Topics


Customizing fountain fills


Overview: Customizing fountain fills
Customizing fountain fills

Customizing fountain fills can affect the way that they appear on screen, as well as the way that they print. There are a number of ways to determine how fountain fills are printed and displayed.

Controlling the display

To improve the appearance of fountain fills on screen, increase the number of steps that are drawn on screen, using the Steps box in the Options section of the Fountain Fill dialog box.

Controlling the printing

To improve the appearance of fountain fills, you can adjust the number of steps that are printed, using the Fountain Steps box on the Miscellaneous page of the Print Options dialog box. This setting does not affect how fountain fills are displayed on screen, just how they are printed.

Adjusting overall quality

To improve the appearance of fountain fills both on screen and when printed, you can increase the number of steps used to display the fountain fill. You do this using the Steps box in the Fountain Fill dialog box. This setting overrides the settings found in the Print Options dialog box when unlocked. However, since this value increases the number of bands that are printed, fountain fills with values lower than 20 will print faster, but the transition between shades may be coarse, which causes an effect known as "banding." Fountain fills with higher values (over 40) provide a smoother blend but require longer printing times. When the Steps box is locked, the settings found in the Print Options dialog box determine the appearance of fountain fills.

You can also change a fountain fill's color, center point, mid-point, angle, edge pad, and direction.

 Note

•	For more information about printing fountain fills, see "Controlling the printing of fountain fills."

 Related Topics


Controlling the display of fountain fills

You can change the number of steps used to display fountain fills in your publications. Using fewer steps to display fountain fills can improve the redraw speed of your screen.

To control the display of fountain fills

1.	Select a frame, graphic object, page, or text with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click Fountain Fill Dialog.

3.	Click the Lock button that appears to the right of the Steps box to unlock the Steps box.

4.	Type a value in the Steps box to change the number of steps used to display and print the fountain fill.

 Related Topics


Controlling the printing of fountain fills

Printing fountain fills can take less time if you reduce the number of steps the printer uses to create them. When you are ready to print the final version of your publication, reset the number of steps so that the fountain fills print the way you want. It is recommended that you increase the number of steps for the default setting (that is, 128 for PostScript printers and 64, or higher, for non-PostScript printers). If you are printing at a resolution greater than 1200 dpi or using a large fountain fill, you may want to use more than 200 steps to maintain a smooth fill.

If you've specified a different number of steps in the Fountain Fill dialog box, that setting overrides any values you set in the Options and Print Options dialog boxes.

To control the printing of fountain fills

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the Miscellaneous tab.

3.	Type the number of steps in the Fountain Steps box.

 Related Topics


Adjusting a fountain fill's quality

When you create a fountain fill, the space required to blend the colors is divided by the number of fountain steps displayed in the Steps box. By default, Corel VENTURA displays each object with the same number of fountain steps, making small objects seem more detailed than larger objects. By unlocking the Steps option, you can override all other settings. You can then increase the number of steps used to print larger objects, making them appear the same as fills displayed in smaller objects. The number of steps specified in the Fountain Fill dialog box overrides the step settings specified in the Options and Print dialog boxes.

To adjust the quality of a fountain fill using the Fountain Fill dialog box

1.	Select a frame, graphic object, page, or text with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click Fountain Fill Dialog.

3.	Click the Lock button that appears to the right of the Steps box to unlock the Steps box.

4.	Type a value in the Steps box to change the number of steps used to display and print the fountain fill.

 Related Topics


Changing colors in a two-color fountain fill

Once you have created a two-color fountain fill, you may want to change its appearance without altering its pattern. You can change its appearance by changing the colors used to create the fountain fill. You can see how your fill appears in the Preview window found in the Fountain Fill dialog box.

To change the colors of a two-color fountain fill

1.	Select a frame, graphic object, page, or text with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click Fountain Fill Dialog.

3.	Click the From color picker, and click a color for the start of the fountain fill's color progression.

4.	Click the To color picker, and click a color for the end of the fountain fill's color progression.

 Note

•	For more information about changing the color of custom fountain fills, see "Creating and applying custom fountain fills."

 Tip

•	To create or choose a custom color, you can also click the Custom button in the Fountain Fill dialog box.

 Related Topics


Changing a fountain fill's center point

Most fountain fills radiate from a point that appears in the center of the fill. Radial and square fountain fills progress in a series of concentric circles or squares from the center of the object outward. Conical fountain fills progress in a circular path from the center of the object outward. Linear fountain fills, however, do not have a center point.

Repositioning the center point so that it doesn't appear at the center of the object allows you to alter the appearance of the fountain fill. Negative values shift the center to the left, positive values shift the center to the right.

The following picture shows that adjusting the center-point alters the appearance of radial, square, and conical fills.

To change the center point using the Fountain Fill dialog box

1.	Select a graphic object or text with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click Fountain Fill Dialog.

3.	Choose the type of fountain fill you want from the Type list box.

4.	Type a value in the Horizontal box to position the center point.

A value of -50% places the center point on the left edge of your object; a value of 50% places it on the right edge.

5.	Type a value in the Vertical box to position the center point.

A value of -50% places the center point on the bottom edge of your object; a value of 50% places it on the top edge.

To change the center point using the Fountain Fill dialog box and mouse

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	In the Preview Fountain Fill box, click where you want to position the center point.

 Related Topics


Changing a fountain fill's mid-point

The mid-point is an imaginary line between two colors in a fountain fill. The value of the mid-point represents the position of the mid-point in relation to two fountain fill colors. By adjusting this value, you can set the point at which two colors in a fountain fill converge. For example, in a two-color fountain fill using the colors black and white, a value of 50 positions the mid-point in the center of the fill so that half of the fountain fill is black and half is white. Increasing the mid-point value to 99 results in a fountain fill dominated by black; decreasing the mid-point value to 1 results in a fountain fill dominated by white.

The following picture shows that adjusting the mid-point of a fountain fill adjusts the point at which two colors in a fountain fill converge.

To change the mid-point using the Fountain Fill dialog box

1.	Select a graphic object or text with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click Fountain Fill Dialog.

3.	Move the Mid-Point slider to change the start and end color proportions.

 Tip

•	You can also adjust the mid-point by typing a specific value (from 1 to 99) in the box to the right of the Mid-Point slider.

 Related Topics


Changing a fountain fill's angle

You can change the angle of linear, conical, and square fountain fills. Changing the angle affects the slant of the fountain fill. Positive values rotate the fill counterclockwise; negative values rotate it clockwise.

The following picture shows how adjusting the angle of gradation affects the slant of linear, conical, and square fountain fills.

To change a fountain fill's angle using the Fountain Fill dialog box

1.	Select a graphic object or text with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click Fountain Fill Dialog.

3.	Type a value in the Angle box to angle the fill.

To change the angle using the Fountain Fill dialog box and mouse

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	In the Preview window, click where you want to angle the fill.

 Note

•	Since Radial fountain fills progress in a series of concentric circles, you can't change their angle.

 Related Topics


Changing a fountain fill's edge pad

The edge pad value determines how long the beginning and ending colors remain as solid colors before they start blending with the next color in the fountain fill. Higher values allow the colors to remain solid longer before blending, causing the colors to spread more quickly. Lower values result in a smooth transformation between the two colors. The maximum setting is 49%.

The following picture shows that adjusting the edge pad value determines how long the beginning and ending colors remain as solid colors before they start blending with the next color in linear, radial, and square fountain fills.

To change the edge pad using the Fountain Fill dialog box

1.	Select a graphic object or text with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click Fountain Fill Dialog.

3.	Type a value in the Edge Pad box to set the amount of the fill taken up by the fill's start and end colors.

 Note

•	The Edge Pad option is not available for conical fills.

 Related Topics


Changing a fountain fill's direction

You can change the direction of a fountain fill. By default, fountain fill colors progress along a straight line. This relationship is illustrated in the Color Wheel, which shows a straight line blending the start color with the end color as it passes through the color spectrum.

You can also blend the colors in a clockwise or counterclockwise direction. This allows you to include the spectrum of colors between the colors in your blend. The Counterclockwise Rotation button allows you to blend from one color to the other in a counterclockwise direction. This is illustrated in the Color Wheel by an elliptical line, showing the path the blend uses to travel around the color spectrum. The Clockwise Rotation button allows you to blend from one color to the other in a clockwise direction.

The following picture shows that adjusting the direction of a fountain fill lets you blend colors directly through the color wheel, or in a clockwise or counterclockwise direction.

To change the blend direction in a two-color fountain fill

1.	Select a graphic object or text with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click Fountain Fill Dialog.

3.	In the Color Blend section, click one of the following buttons:

•	Direct [image] determines the intermediate fill colors according to hue and saturation changes along a straight line, beginning at the From color and continuing across the Color Wheel to the To color

•	Clockwise Rotation button [image] blends the fill colors along a clockwise path around the Color Wheel

•	Counterclockwise Rotation button [image] blends the fill colors along a counterclockwise path around the Color Wheel

 Related Topics


Working with pattern fills


Overview: Working with pattern fills
Working with pattern fills

Pattern fills are pregenerated images that are extremely useful for creating tiles. You can fill a graphic object completely with one image, but you would typically use a series of repeated images to form a tiled fill. You can import bitmaps or vector graphics for use as pattern fills, or you can create simple two-color pattern fills.

 Related Topics


Working with two-color pattern fills


Overview: Working with two-color pattern fills
Working with two-color pattern fills

A two-color pattern fill is a simple picture composed of only "on" and "off" pixels. The only colors included in the bitmap are the two that you assign.

You can choose a two-color bitmap from a variety of existing patterns that are included with Corel VENTURA, create a bitmap pattern using the Two-Color Pattern Editor, or import your own 1-bit bitmap. The pregenerated two-color pattern fills are designed so that they interlock to fill an object with seamless tiles.

You can choose from a variety of two-color pattern fills included with Corel VENTURA:

For information about importing a multicolored pattern, see "Working with bitmap pattern fills."

 Related Topics


Applying a two-color pattern fill

You can fill frames, graphic objects, pages, and text with a two-color pattern fill. Corel VENTURA provides several preset, two-color patterns that you can use as is or change to suit your needs.

To apply a two-color pattern fill using the Pattern Fill dialog box

1.	Select a frame, graphic object, page, or text with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click Pattern Fill Dialog.

3.	Enable the Two-Color button.

4.	Click the Pattern picker, and choose the pattern you want from the list.

5.	Click the Front color picker, and choose a color for the bitmap pattern's foreground.

6.	Click the Back color picker, and choose a color for the bitmap pattern's background.

To apply a two-color pattern fill to a graphic object using the Object Properties dialog box

1.	Right-click a graphic object with the Pick tool, and click Graphics Properties.

2.	Click the Fill tab.

3.	Click the Pattern Fill button.

4.	Follow steps 3 to 5 from the previous procedure.

To apply a two-color pattern fill to a frame using the Frame Properties dialog box

1.	Right-click a frame with the Pick tool, and click Frame Properties.

2.	Click the General tab.

3.	Click the Edit button.

4.	Click the Pattern Fill button.

5.	Follow steps 3 to 5 from the "To apply a two-color pattern fill using the Pattern Fill dialog box" procedure.

To apply a two-color pattern fill to text using the Paragraph Properties dialog box

1.	Right-click the text with the Pick tool, and click Paragraph Properties.

2.	Click the Font tab.

3.	Click the Outline/Fill button.

4.	Click the Fill tab.

5.	Click the Pattern Fill button.

6.	Follow steps 3 to 5 from the "To apply a two-color pattern fill using the Pattern Fill dialog box" procedure.

 Tip

•	Enable the Scale Pattern With Object check box if you want to maintain the ratio between the size of the pattern fill and the object you are filling.

 Related Topics


Creating two-color pattern fills

You can create your own two-color pattern fill from scratch by modifying an imported bitmap. The two-color pattern fills you create are added to the end of the list of preset patterns.

To create a new two-color pattern fill

1.	Select a frame, graphic object, page, or text with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click Pattern Fill Dialog.

3.	Enable the Two-Color button.

4.	Click the Create button.

5.	In the Bitmap Size section, enable one of the following buttons to set the resolution of the pattern:

•	16 x 16 [image] changes the resolution of the Edit Grid to 16 x 16 squares

•	32 x 32 [image] changes the resolution of the Edit Grid to 32 x 32 squares

•	64 x 64 [image] changes the resolution of the Edit Grid to 64 x 64 squares

6.	Enable one of the following buttons to determine how many squares in the publication area are filled when you click with the mouse:

•	1 x 1 [image] changes the pen size to a 1 grid square

•	2 x 2 [image] changes the pen size to a 2 x 2 square

•	4 x 4 [image] changes the pen size to a 4 x 4 square

•	8 x 8 [image] changes the pen size to an 8 x 8 square

7.	Click over the grid to fill squares and create a pattern.

 Tip

•	Right-click over the grid to erase squares.

To create a two-color pattern fill from an imported bitmap

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Click the Load button.

3.	In the Import dialog box, choose a file and click Open.

 Tip

•	For best results, import bitmaps with only two colors.

 Related Topics


Removing a two-color bitmap pattern fill

You can remove a two-color pattern fill from the list of preset patterns.

To remove a two-color bitmap pattern fill

1.	Select a frame, graphic object, page, or text with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click Pattern Fill Dialog.

3.	Click the Pattern picker, and choose a pattern from the list.

4.	Click the Delete button.

 Related Topics


Working with full-color pattern fills


Overview: Working with full-color pattern fills
Working with full-color pattern fills

A full-color pattern is a picture composed of lines and fills, instead of dots of color like a bitmap. These vector graphics are smoother and more complex than bitmaps used in two-color and bitmap pattern fills and are generally easier to manipulate.

You can choose a full-color pattern from a variety of pregenerated patterns that are included with Corel VENTURA, or you can import any CorelDRAW file (or other vector files) to use as a full-color pattern. Unlike two-color and bitmap patterns, there is no limit to the number of colors that can be included in a full-color pattern.

You can choose from a variety of full-color pattern fills included with Corel VENTURA:

 Related Topics


Applying a full-color pattern fill

You can fill frames, graphic objects, pages, or text with a pattern composed of repeating vector images. Corel VENTURA provides several preset, full-color pattern fills that you can use as is or change to suit your needs.

To apply a full-color pattern fill to a graphic object using the Pattern Fill dialog box

1.	Select the graphic object with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click Pattern Fill Dialog.

3.	Enable the Full Color button.

4.	Click the Pattern Picker, and choose the pattern you want from the list.

To apply a full-color pattern fill to text using the Pattern Fill dialog box

1.	Select the text with the Pick tool.

2.	Follow steps 2 to 4 from the previous procedure.

To apply a full-color pattern fill to a graphic object using the Object Properties dialog box

1.	Right-click the graphic object with the Pick tool, and click Graphics Properties.

2.	Click the Fill tab.

3.	Click the Pattern Fill button.

4.	Follow steps 3 and 4 from the "To apply a full-color pattern fill to a graphic object using the Pattern Fill dialog box" procedure.

To apply a full-color pattern fill to a frame using the Frame Properties dialog box

1.	Right-click a frame with the Pick tool, and click Frame Properties.

2.	Click the General tab.

3.	Click the Edit button.

4.	Click the Pattern Fill button.

5.	Follow steps 3 and 4 from the "To apply a full-color pattern fill to a graphic using the Pattern Fill dialog box" procedure.

To apply a full-color pattern fill to text using the Paragraph Properties dialog box

1.	Right-click the text with the Pick tool, and click Paragraph Properties.

2.	Click the Font tab.

3.	Click the Outline/Fill button.

4.	Click the Fill tab.

5.	Click the Pattern Fill button.

6.	Follow steps 3 and 4 from the "To apply a full-color pattern fill to a graphic using the Pattern Fill dialog box" procedure.

 Tip

•	Enable the Scale Pattern With Object check box if you want to maintain the ratio between the size of the pattern fill and the object you are filling.

 Related Topics


Creating full-color pattern fills

You can import a vector graphic to create a full-color pattern fill. The full-color pattern fills you create are added to the end of the list of preset patterns.

To create full-color pattern fills from imported vector graphics

1.	Select a frame, graphic object, page, or text with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click Pattern Fill Dialog.

3.	Enable the Full Color button.

4.	Click the Load button.

5.	In the Import dialog box, choose a file and click Open.

 Related Topics


Removing a full-color pattern fill

You can remove a full-color pattern fill from the list of preset patterns.

To remove a full-color pattern fill

1.	Select a frame, graphic object, page, or text with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click Pattern Fill Dialog.

3.	Enable the Full Color button.

4.	Click the Pattern Picker, and choose a pattern from the list.

5.	Click the Delete button.

 Related Topics


Working with bitmap pattern fills


Overview: Working with bitmap pattern fills
Working with bitmap pattern fills

A full-color bitmap is like a color picture you can get with an electronic photograph. Since bitmaps can vary in complexity, it is best to use less complex bitmaps for fill patterns. Complex bitmaps are memory-intensive and slow to display. The complexity of a bitmap is determined by its size, resolution, and bit depth.

You can choose a full-color bitmap from a variety of pregenerated patterns that are included with Corel VENTURA, or you can import an existing bitmap.

If you want to import a simple, two-color or black-and-white bitmap, see "Working with two-color pattern fills."

You can choose from a variety of bitmap pattern fills included with Corel VENTURA:

 Related Topics


Applying a bitmap pattern fill

You can fill frames, graphic objects, pages, and text with a pattern composed of repeating bitmap images. Corel VENTURA provides several preset bitmap pattern fills that you can use as is or change to suit your needs.

To apply a bitmap pattern fill using the Pattern Fill dialog box

1.	Select a frame, graphic object, page, or text with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click Pattern Fill Dialog.

3.	Enable the Bitmap button.

4.	Click the Pattern picker, and choose the pattern you want from the list.

To apply a bitmap pattern fill to a graphic object using the Object Properties dialog box

1.	Right-click a graphic object with the Pick tool, and click Graphics Properties.

2.	Click the Fill tab.

3.	Click Pattern Fill Dialog.

4.	Follow steps 3 and 4 from the previous procedure.

To apply a bitmap pattern fill to a frame using the Frame Properties dialog box

1.	Right-click a frame with the Pick tool, and click Frame Properties.

2.	Click the General tab.

3.	Click the Edit button.

4.	Click Pattern Fill dialog.

5.	Follow steps 3 and 4 from the "To apply a bitmap pattern fill using the Pattern Fill dialog box" procedure.

To apply a bitmap pattern fill to text using the Paragraph Properties dialog box

1.	Right-click the text with the Pick tool, and click Paragraph Properties.

2.	Click the Font tab.

3.	Click the Outline/Fill button.

4.	Click Pattern Fill Dialog.

5.	Follow steps 3 and 4 from the "To apply a bitmap pattern fill using the Pattern Fill dialog box" procedure.

 Tip

•	Enable the Scale Pattern With Object check box if you want to maintain the ratio between the size of the pattern fill and the object you are filling.

 Related Topics


Creating bitmap pattern fills

You can import a bitmap to create a bitmap pattern fill. The bitmap fills you create are added to the end of the list of preset patterns.

To create bitmap pattern fills from imported bitmaps

1.	Select a frame, graphic object, page, or text with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click Pattern Fill Dialog.

3.	Enable the Bitmap button.

4.	Click the Load button.

5.	In the Import dialog box, choose a file and click Import.

 Related Topics


Removing a bitmap pattern fill

You can remove a bitmap pattern fill from the list of preset patterns.

To remove a bitmap pattern fill

1.	Select a frame, graphic object, page, or text with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click Pattern Fill Dialog.

3.	Enable the Bitmap button.

4.	Click the Pattern picker, and choose a pattern from the list.

5.	Click the Delete button.

 Related Topics


Customizing pattern fills


Overview: Customizing pattern fills
Customizing pattern fills

You can customize a pattern fill by rotating, skewing, and adjusting the tile size or the center of the pattern. You can customize two-color, full-color, and bitmap pattern fills by using the Fill Tool flyout, the Object Properties dialog box, the Frame Properties dialog box, or the Paragraph Properties dialog box.

 Related Topics


Changing a pattern fill's tile size

You can change the dimensions of the pattern tile used to fill a frame, graphic object, page, or text. By decreasing the size of a pattern tile, you increase the pattern's density. The pattern fill displayed can be resized manually, using the tiling handles, or precisely, using the Pattern Fill dialog box.

To set the size of bitmap pattern fill tiles using the Pattern Fill dialog box

1.	Select a frame, graphic object, page, or text with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click Pattern Fill Dialog.

3.	Enable one of the following buttons:

•	Two-Color

•	Full-Color

•	Bitmap

4.	Type a value in the Width box.

The maximum tile width is 60 inches. The minimum tile width is 0.1 inches.

5.	Type a value in the Height box.

The maximum tile width is 60 inches. The minimum tile width is 0.1 inches.

 Tip

•	To change the size of the tiles quickly, enable the Small (25% of width and height, or 4x4), Medium (50% of width and height, or 2x2), or Large (100% of width and height, or one tile) button in the Tile section of the Pattern Fill dialog box.

 Related Topics


Setting the offset of a pattern fill

By setting the offset of a pattern fill, you can alter a fill's tiling pattern. When you adjust the horizontal or vertical offset of the first tile, your adjustments affect the rest of the pattern. The Preview window in the Pattern Fill dialog box reflects any changes you make to the pattern fill's offset.

To set the offset of a pattern fill using the Pattern Fill dialog box

1.	Select a frame, graphic object, page, or text with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click Pattern Fill Dialog.

3.	Enable one of the following buttons:

•	Two-Color

•	Full-Color

•	Bitmap

4.	Click the Tiling button.

5.	Type a value in the X box to set the horizontal offset.

Increasing the value in the X box shifts the pattern to the right; decreasing the value moves the pattern to the left.

6.	Type a value in the Y box to set the vertical offset.

Increasing the value in the Y box shifts the pattern down; decreasing the value moves the pattern up.

 Related Topics


Working with texture fills


Overview: Working with texture fills
Working with texture fills

A texture fill is a random, fractally generated fill that you can use to give your objects a natural appearance. Texture fills significantly increase the size of your file and the time it takes to print. Therefore, you may want to use these fills sparingly, especially with larger objects or frames.

You can use colors from any color model or palette for texture fills. Since texture fills can only hold RGB colors, however, a color shift can occur when you display or print the publication. To preserve the colors you use in your texture fills, be sure to configure your system using the Corel Color Profile Wizard included with Corel VENTURA. For more information, see the online Help.

You can choose from a variety of texture fills included with Corel VENTURA (see the picture below). For more information about working with texture fills, see "Corel Color Profile Wizard" in the online Help file.

 Related Topics


Applying a texture fill

Texture fills can be applied to frames, graphic objects, and text. Texture fills are fills that look like clouds, water, twine, weaves, and other natural and fabricated substances. Corel VENTURA provides several preset texture fills that you can use as is or change to suit your needs.

To apply a texture fill using the Texture Fill dialog box

1.	Select a frame, graphic object, page, or text with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click Texture Fill Dialog.

3.	Choose a texture library from the Texture Library list box.

4.	Choose a texture from the Texture list.

To apply a texture fill to a graphic object using the Object Properties dialog box

1.	Right-click a graphic object with the Pick tool, and click Graphics Properties.

2.	Click the Fill tab.

3.	Click the Texture Fill button.

4.	Choose a texture library from the first list box.

5.	Choose a texture from the second list box.

To apply a texture fill to a frame using the Frame Properties dialog box

1.	Right-click a frame with the Pick tool, and click Frame Properties.

2.	Click the General tab.

3.	Click the Edit button.

4.	Follow steps 2 to 5 from the previous procedure.

To apply a texture fill to a text using the Paragraph Properties dialog box

1.	Right-click the text with the Pick tool, and click Paragraph Properties.

2.	Click the Font tab.

3.	Click the Outline/Fill button.

4.	Click the Fill tab.

5.	Follow steps 3 to 5 from the "To apply a texture fill to a graphic object using the Object Properties dialog box" procedure.

 Related Topics


Creating custom texture fills

Using the Texture Fill dialog box, you can create custom texture fills by modifying a preset texture. You can then save and delete any custom texture you create.

To create a custom texture fill

1.	Select a frame, graphic object, page, or text with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click Texture Fill Dialog.

3.	Choose a texture library from the Texture Library list box.

4.	Choose a texture from the Texture list.

5.	In the Style Name section, modify the texture settings as required.

 Tip

•	Use the Preview button to view your changes before saving a custom texture fill.

To save a custom texture fill

1.	Select a frame, graphic object, page, or text with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click Texture Fill Dialog.

3.	Follow steps 3 and 4 from the previous procedure.

4.	Click the Add button beside the Texture Library list box.

5.	Type a name in the Texture Name box.

The name can be up to 32 characters long, including spaces.

6.	From the Library Name list, choose the library in which you want to save the texture.

To delete a custom texture fill

1.	Select a frame, graphic object, page, or text with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click Texture Fill Dialog.

3.	Follow steps 3 and 4 from the "To create a custom texture fill" procedure.

4.	Click the Delete button beside the Texture Library list box.

 Related Topics


Adjusting texture fills


Overview: Adjusting texture fills
Adjusting texture fills

You can adjust a texture fill by rotating, skewing, and resetting the tile size or the center of the texture. You can adjust texture fills interactively by using the tiling vector.

 Related Topics


Changing a texture fill's size and bitmap resolution

You can change the size and resolution of the texture fill used to fill a graphic object or text. Decreasing the width of a texture tile increases the texture's density. Increasing the bitmap resolution of a texture tile increases the sharpness of the tiling pattern.

To change a texture fill's size and bitmap resolution

1.	Select a frame, graphic object, page, or text with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click Texture Fill Dialog.

3.	Click the Options button.

4.	Choose a value from the Maximum Tile Width list box.

The maximum tile width is 2049 pixels. The minimum tile width is 65 pixels.

5.	Choose a bitmap resolution from the Bitmap Resolution list box.

The maximum bitmap resolution is 400 dpi. The minimum bitmap resolution is 75 dpi.


Working with PostScript texture fills


Overview: Working with PostScript texture fills
Working with PostScript texture fills

A PostScript texture fill is a texture fill designed using PostScript language. Some textures are extremely complex, and large graphic objects or text containing PostScript texture fills may take some time to print or to update on screen. Therefore, Corel VENTURA represents PostScript fills on screen with the letters "PS" rather than the actual texture.

Since the PostScript Texture dialog box contains a preview window where you can preview the texture, you don't have to print to see the PostScript texture fill you choose. In addition, the Status Bar contains the name of the PostScript texture fill used.

You can choose from a variety of Postscript texture fills included with Corel VENTURA:

 Note

•	PostScript texture fills will print on virtually any type of printer because Corel VENTURA interprets them internally before they are rendered to a non-PostScript device.

 Related Topics


Applying a PostScript texture fill

You can fill frames, graphic objects, or text with PostScript texture fills. Corel VENTURA provides several preset Postscript texture fills that you can use as is or change to suit your needs.

To apply a PostScript texture fill using the PostScript Texture dialog box

1.	Select a graphic object or text with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click PostScript Fill Dialog.

3.	Choose a texture from the list.

 Tip

•	Enable the Preview Fill check box to preview the texture with the current settings.

To apply a PostScript texture fill to a graphic object using the Object Properties dialog box

1.	Right-click a graphic object with the Pick tool, and click Graphics Properties.

2.	Click the Fill tab.

3.	Click the PostScript Fill button.

4.	Choose a texture from the list.

 Tip

•	Enable the Preview Fill check box to preview the texture with the current settings.

To apply a PostScript texture fill to a frame using the Frame Properties dialog box

1.	Right-click a frame with the Pick tool, and click Frame Properties.

2.	Click the General tab.

3.	Click the Edit button.

4.	Follow steps 3 and 4 from the previous procedure.

To apply a PostScript texture fill to text using the Paragraph Properties dialog box

1.	Right-click the text with the Pick tool, and click Paragraph Properties.

2.	Click the Font tab.

3.	Click the Outline/Fill button.

4.	Click the Fill tab.

5.	Follow steps 3 and 4 from the "To apply a PostScript texture fill to a graphic object using the Object Properties dialog box" procedure.

 Notes

•	The settings listed in the Parameters section of the PostScript Texture dialog box vary depending on the type of PostScript texture fill selected.

•	PostScript texture fills are complex and may take some time to update onscreen. Therefore, Corel VENTURA represents PostScript texture fills onscreen with the letters "PS."

 Tip

•	To display the PostScript texture fill in the PostScript Texture dialog box, enable the Preview Fill check box.


Managing fills


Overview: Managing fills
Managing fills

In addition to filling frames, graphic objects, text, and pages with a wide variety of colors and patterns, Corel VENTURA lets you leave graphic objects or text unfilled or transparent. You can also copy fills from one graphic object to another and thus eliminate the need to recreate complex fills. Once you create a fill that you like, you can make it the default fill so that it is automatically applied to all new graphic objects.

 Related Topics


Copying fills

Once you apply a fill to a frame, graphic object, text, or page, you can copy the same fill to another object. This allows you to use the same fill on several graphic objects without having to recreate it each time.

To copy a graphic object's fill to another graphic object using the mouse

1.	Using the Pick tool, right-click the object that contains the attributes you want to copy.

2.	Drag over the object to which you want to copy the attributes.

3.	Release the mouse button, and click Copy Fill Here.

To copy an object's fill to another object using the Object Properties dialog box

1.	Using the Pick tool, right-click the object you want to modify, and click Graphics Properties.

2.	Click the Fill tab.

3.	Click the Update From button.

4.	Click the graphic object that contains the fill properties you want to copy.

 Tip

•	You can also access the Object Properties dialog box by clicking Format, Graphics, Graphics Properties.

 Related Topics


Setting the default fill

When you create a graphic object, Corel VENTURA fills the graphic object with the default fill, which is set to 10% black. You can modify the default fill settings so that the modified settings are applied to any new graphic object you create.

To change the default fill for new graphic objects using the Fill Color dialog box

1.	Click the pasteboard to select the page.

2.	Hold down SHIFT and click the pasteboard again to deselect any objects.

3.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click one of the following:

•	Fill Color Dialog [image] to set a uniform fill default

•	Fountain Fill Dialog [image] to set a fountain fill default

•	Pattern Fill Dialog [image] to set a pattern fill default

•	Texture Fill Dialog [image] to set a texture fill default

4.	Click OK.

5.	Modify the fill attributes as required.

 Related Topics


Removing fills

You may want to remove the fill from a frame, graphic object, or text so that the objects behind show through.

To remove a fill using the Fill Tool flyout

1.	Click a frame, graphic object, or text with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click No Fill.

To remove a graphic object's fill using the Object Properties dialog box

1.	Right-click the object with the Pick tool, and click Graphics Properties.

2.	Click the Fill tab.

3.	Click the No Fill button.

To remove a frame's fill using the Frame Properties dialog box

1.	Right-click a frame with the Pick tool, and click Frame Properties.

2.	Click the General tab.

3.	Click the Edit button.

4.	Follow steps 2 and 3 from the previous procedure.

To remove the fill from text using the Paragraph Properties dialog box

1.	Right-click the text with the Pick tool, and click Paragraph Properties.

2.	Click the Font tab.

3.	Click the Outline/Fill button.

4.	Follow steps 2 and 3 from the "To remove a graphic object's fill using the Object Properties dialog box" procedure.

 Related Topics


Outlining objects


Overview: Outlining objects
Outlining objects

The graphic objects, frames, and text you add to your publication can have an outline that you can manipulate in a variety of ways. You can think of these objects as being drawn with a nib of adjustable size, shape, and color. These nib attributes can apply to a particular object, or to all objects you add to your publication.

In addition to the size, shape, and color of the nib, you can also change the shape of an outline's ends. Lines or objects with open paths can have ends that are rounded, square, cropped, or tipped with arrowheads and other line-ending shapes. Objects with closed paths (squares, polygons, etc.) naturally have no end-points, but you can still choose from pointed, rounded, or cropped corners.

 More Detailed Information
 Related Topics


Working with uniform outlines


Overview: Working with uniform outlines
Working with uniform outlines

Uniform outlines are solid outlines that can be applied to most graphic objects, frames, and text. In addition to specifying the outline's color, you can change its width and style. You can also apply line-ending shapes, such as arrowheads, to the line or curve.

 Related Topics


Applying outline colors

You can apply outline colors to frames, graphic objects, or text by using the Outline Pen dialog box and the Outline Color dialog box. Also, you can use the Object Properties dialog box to apply an outline color to a graphic object, and the Frame Properties dialog box to apply an outline color to a frame.

To apply an outline color using the Outline Pen dialog box

1.	Click a graphic object or text with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Outline Tool flyout, and click Outline Pen.

3.	Choose a color from the Color list box.

 Tip

•	Click the Other button to create or choose a custom color.

To apply an outline color using the Outline Color dialog box

1.	Select a graphic object or text with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Outline Tool flyout, and click Outline Color.

3.	Click one of the following buttons, and choose a color:

•	Color Viewers

•	Mixers

•	Fixed Palettes

•	Custom Palettes

 Tips

•	Click the More button to create your own colors.

•	Click the Tint button to adjust the color palettes.

To apply an outline color to a graphic object using the Object Properties dialog box

1.	Right-click a graphic object with the Pick tool, and click Graphics Properties.

2.	Click the Outline tab.

3.	Choose a color from the Color list box.

To apply an outline color to a frame using the Frame Properties dialog box

1.	Right-click a frame with the Pick tool, and click Frame Properties.

2.	Click the Rules tab.

If the Details button is displayed, proceed to step 3.

If the Presets button is displayed, proceed to step 4.

3.	Click the Details button.

4.	Click the Quick tab.

5.	Click the frame located in the top row, second from the left.

6.	Choose a color from the Color list box.

 Note

•	For information about color viewers, mixers, fixed palettes, and custom palettes, see "Working with color."

 Related Topics


Adjusting an outline's width

The width of an outline is the thickness of the line in points. You can adjust the thickness of the outline of a graphic object, text, or frame and change the appearance of the object.

To adjust the outline width using the Outline Pen dialog box

1.	Select a graphic object or text with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Outline Tool flyout, and click Outline Pen.

3.	Type a value in the Width box.

To adjust the outline width of a graphic object using the Object Properties dialog box

1.	Right-click a graphic object with the Pick tool, and click Graphics Properties.

2.	Click the Outline tab.

3.	Type a value in the Width box.

To adjust the width of a frame using the Frame Properties dialog box

1.	Right-click a frame with the Pick tool, and click Frame Properties.

2.	Click the Rules tab.

If the Details button is displayed, proceed to step 3.

If the Presets button is displayed, proceed to step 4.

3.	Click the Details button.

4.	Click the Quick tab.

5.	Click the frame located in the top row, second from the left.

6.	Click the Advanced tab.

7.	Type a value in the Size box.

 Tips

•	A number of preset outline widths are also available from the Outline Tool flyout. Options include: Hairline, 1/2 Point, 2 Point (Thin), 8 Point (Medium), 16 Point (Medium-Thick), and 24 Point (Thick).

•	You can also adjust the width of a frame by selecting a preset outline width from the Rule Tag list box.

 Related Topics


Setting the corner shape

Setting the corner shape of an outline can greatly affect the appearance of lines and curves in a graphic object, especially if the object has a particularly thick outline or if the object is particularly small.

You can choose one of the Corner Styles: Mitered, Rounded, or Bevelled.

To set a graphic object's corner shape

1.	Select a graphic object with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Outline Tool flyout, and click Outline Pen.

3.	In the Corners section, enable one of the following buttons:

•	Mitered Corners

•	Rounded Corners

•	Beveled Corners

 Related Topics


Setting the line cap shape

The shape of the line cap affects the appearance of the end points of open paths. Rounded and extended line caps make the line of an open path slightly longer.

You can choose one of the Line Cap Styles: Square, Rounded, or Extended corners.

To set a graphic object's line cap shape

1.	Select a graphic object with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Outline Tool flyout, and click Outline Pen.

3.	In the Line Caps section, enable one of the following buttons:

•	Square Line Caps

•	Rounded Line Caps

•	Extended Square Line Caps

 Related Topics


Applying outline styles

Corel VENTURA provides more than 20 preset outline styles. Outline styles include dotted lines, dashed lines, and more. You can apply outline styles to frames, graphic objects, and text. Applying an outline style does not change the shape of the outline or the amount of space it occupies. You can also edit a preset outline style to suit your needs.

To apply an outline style using the Outline Pen dialog box

1.	Select a graphic object or text with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Outline Tool flyout, and click Outline Pen.

3.	Choose an outline style from the Style selector.

To apply an outline style to a graphic object using the Object Properties dialog box

1.	Right-click the object with the Pick tool, and click Graphics Properties.

2.	Click the Outline tab.

3.	Choose an outline style from the Style selector.

To apply an outline style to a frame using the Frame Properties dialog box

1.	Right-click a frame with the Pick tool, and click Frame Properties.

2.	Click the Rules tab.

If the Details button is displayed, proceed to step 3.

If the Presets button is displayed, proceed to step 4.

3.	Click the Details button.

4.	Click the Quick tab,

5.	Click the frame located in the top row, second from the left.

6.	Click the Advanced tab.

7.	Choose an outline style from the Rule Tag list box.

To apply an outline style to text using the Paragraph Properties dialog box

1.	Right-click the text with the Pick tool, and click Paragraph Properties.

2.	Click the Font tab.

3.	Click the Outline/Fill button.

4.	Click the Outline tab.

5.	Choose an outline from the Style selector.

 Related Topics


Editing outline styles

Corel VENTURA provides more than 20 preset outline styles. You can edit any of the preset outlines to suit your needs.

To edit the outline style of a graphic object or text using the Outline Pen dialog box

1.	Select a graphic object or text with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Outline Tool flyout, and click Outline Pen.

3.	Choose an outline style from the Style Selector.

4.	Type a value in the Width box.

5.	Choose a line color from the Color list box.

6.	In the Corners section, enable a button to choose a corner style.

7.	In the Line Caps section, enable a button to choose a line cap shape.

To edit a frame's outline style using the Outline Pen dialog box

1.	Select a frame with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Outline Tool flyout, and click Outline Pen.

3.	Click the Rules tab.

4.	Click the Quick tab.

If the Details button is displayed, proceed to step 4. If the Presets button is displayed, proceed to step 5.

5.	Click the Details button.

6.	Click the frame located in the top row, second from the left.

7.	Click the Advanced tab.

8.	Choose Single from the Rule Tag list box.

9.	Follow steps 2 to 5 from the previous procedure.

 Related Topics


Behind Fill

Since outlines are usually applied after fill is applied, half of the outline lies inside the frame, graphic object, or text and the other half lies outside the frame, graphic object, or text. When you enable the Behind Fill check box, the outline is drawn first, and then the fill is placed on top of the outline. Consequently, half of the outline is covered by the fill. By using the Behind Fill option, you can apply an outline to a stylized font, such as a script font.

To enable the Behind Fill option using the Outline Pen dialog box

1.	Select a graphic object or text with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Outline Tool flyout, and click Outline Pen.

3.	Enable the Behind Fill check box.

To enable the Behind Fill option for graphic objects using the Object Properties dialog box

1.	Right-click a graphic object with the Pick tool, and click Graphics Properties.

2.	Click the Outline tab.

3.	Enable the Behind Fill check box.

To enable the Behind Fill option for frames using the Frame Properties dialog box

1.	Right-click a frame with the Pick tool, and click Frame Properties.

2.	Click the Rules tab.

If the Default button is displayed, proceed to step 3.

If the Presets button is displayed, proceed to step 4.

3.	Click the Details button.

4.	Click the Quick tab.

5.	Click the frame located in the top row, second from the left.

6.	Enable the Behind Fill check box.

 Related Topics


Creating calligraphic outlines

You can give a graphic object or text a hand-drawn look using the Calligraphy settings in the Outline Pen dialog box. By adjusting these settings, you can vary the outline thickness of the outline of a graphic object or text.

The following picture shows that you can use calligraphy settings to give an object a hand-drawn appearance by varying the thickness of its outline.

To create a calligraphic outline

1.	Select a graphic object or text with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Outline Tool flyout, and click Outline Pen.

3.	In the Corners section, enable one of the following buttons:

•	Mitered Corners

•	Round Corners

•	Beveled Corners

4.	Type a value in the Stretch box.

Low values make a square nib rectangular and a round nib oval, creating a more pronounced calligraphic effect.

5.	Type a value in the Angle box.

The angle controls the orientation of the pen in relation to the page.

 Tips

•	You can adjust the values in the Stretch and Angle boxes interactively by dragging in the Preview window. Experiment to find the shape you want.

•	To change an outline width after you create a calligraphic outline, change the value in the Width box.

•	Click the Default button to restore the outline's original settings.

 Related Topics


Applying and modifying line-ending shapes


Overview: Applying and modifying line-ending shapes
Applying and modifying line-ending shapes

Corel VENTURA allows you to use a number of preset line-ending shapes and to create new line-ending shapes from scratch or from presets. You can modify a line-ending shape after it has been applied to a line or a curve.

 Related Topics


Applying line-ending shapes

Corel VENTURA provides several preset line-ending shapes that you can apply to an open path. You can apply a line-ending shape to the start, the end, or both the start and end of an open path.

To apply line-ending shapes using the Property Bar

1.	Select a line or curve with the Pick tool.

2.	Click the Arrowhead selector, and choose the shape you want for the start of the line.

3.	Click the End Point selector, and choose the shape you want for the end of the line.

To apply line-ending shapes using the Outline Pen dialog box

1.	Select a line or curve with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Outline Tool flyout, and click Outline Pen.

3.	In the Arrows section, click a selector and choose a line-ending shape.

The selector on the left displays line-ending shapes for the start of the line or curve.

The selector on the right displays line-ending shapes for the end of the line or curve.

To apply line-ending shapes using the Object Properties dialog box

1.	Right-click a line or curve with the Pick tool, and click Graphics Properties.

2.	Click the Outline tab.

3.	Click a Selector below the Style selector, and choose the line-ending shape you want.

The selector on the left displays line-ending shapes for the start of the line or curve.

The selector on the right displays line-ending shapes for the end of the line or curve.

 Related Topics


Switching line-ending shapes

If you change the direction of a line or curve, you can switch line-ending shapes from one line to another. You can also remove the line-ending shape from the end of a line or curve.

To switch a line-ending shape from one end of the line to another using the Outline Pen dialog box

1.	Select a line or curve with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Outline Tool flyout, and click Outline Pen.

3.	In the Arrow section, click a selector and choose a line-ending shape.

4.	Click the Options button, and click Swap.

To remove an arrowhead

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Click the Options button, and click None.

 Tip

•	You can also access line-ending options by clicking the Edit button in the Object Properties dialog box.

 Related Topics


Creating line-ending shapes

If you don't find a preset line-ending shape that you like, you can modify a preset line-ending shape to create your own. The maximum number of line-ending shapes you can have is 100. If you already have this many line-ending shapes and want to create new ones, you must delete some of the existing shapes first. For more information about line-ending shapes, see "Deleting line-ending shapes." New line-ending shapes appear at the bottom of the corresponding selector in the Arrows section of the Outline Pen dialog box.

To create line-ending shapes using the Outline Pen dialog box

1.	Open the Outline Tool flyout, and click Outline Pen.

2.	In the Arrows section, click a selector and choose a preset line-ending shape.

3.	Click the Options button below the line ending shape, and click New.

4.	Drag the side handles along the shape's box to stretch the shape vertically or horizontally.

5.	Drag the corner handles to change the size of the line-ending shape.

6.	Drag the hollow nodes along the shape's outline.

7.	Click one of the following buttons to center the shape:

•	Center In X button [image] to center the shape vertically on the line. The letter "X" refers to the horizontal axis.

•	Center In Y button [image] to center the shape horizontally on the line. The letter "Y" refers to the vertical axis.

8.	Click one of the following buttons to flip the shape:

•	Reflect In X button [image] to flip the shape vertically on the line. The letter "X" refers to the horizontal axis.

•	Reflect In Y button [image] to flip the shape horizontally on the line. The letter "Y" refers to the vertical axis.

 Tips

•	To get a closer view of the line-ending shape, enable the 4X Zoom check box in the Edit Arrowhead dialog box.

•	You can also access the line-ending shape options by clicking the Edit button in the Object Properties dialog box.

 Related Topics


Modifying applied line-ending shapes

When you apply a line-ending shape to an open path, its size is determined by the thickness of the path's outline. If you increase the thickness of the path, the size of the line-ending shape increases proportionately. You can create a larger line-ending shape without changing the outline of the open path using the Edit Arrowhead dialog box to stretch the arrowhead. You can also use this dialog box to reposition the line-ending shape relative to the end of the path, to center the line-ending shape, or to flip it horizontally or vertically.

To stretch a line-ending shape

1.	Select a line or curve with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Outline Tool flyout, and click Outline Pen.

3.	In the Arrows section, click a selector and choose a preset line-ending shape.

4.	Click the Options button below the line-ending shape, and click New.

5.	Drag the side handles along the shape's box to stretch the shape vertically or horizontally.

To reposition a line-ending shape

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the previous procedure.

2.	Drag the hollow nodes along the line-ending shape's outline.

To center a line-ending shape

1.	Follow steps 1 and 4 from the "To stretch a line-ending shape" procedure.

2.	Click one of the following buttons:

•	Center In X button [image] to center the shape vertically on the line. The letter "X" refers to the horizontal axis.

•	Center In Y button [image] to center the shape horizontally on the line. The letter "Y" refers to the vertical axis.

To flip a line-ending shape

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the "To stretch a line-ending shape" procedure.

2.	Click one of the following buttons:

•	Reflect In X button [image] to flip the shape vertically on the line. The letter "X" refers to the horizontal axis.

•	Reflect In Y button [image] to flip the shape horizontally on the line. The letter "Y" refers to the vertical axis.

 Tips

•	To get a closer view of the line-ending shape, enable the 4X Zoom check box in the Edit Arrowhead dialog box.

•	You can also access the line-ending shape options by clicking the Edit button in the Object Properties dialog box.

 Related Topics


Deleting line-ending shapes

You can delete a line-ending shape that you have created. The maximum number of line-ending shapes you can create and delete is 100.

To delete line-ending shapes using the Outline Pen dialog box

1.	Select a line or curve with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Outline Tool flyout, and click Outline Pen.

3.	In the Arrows section, click a selector and choose a line-ending shape.

4.	Click the Options button below the line-ending shape, and click Delete.

 Tip

•	You can also access the line-ending shape options by clicking the Edit button in the Object Properties dialog box.

 Related Topics


Managing outlines


Overview: Managing outlines
Managing outlines

Corel VENTURA lets you copy outlines from a graphic object, text, or frame to another or create your own outlines. After you have created an outline, you can make it the default outline that is applied to all new objects. You can also change the default settings for the outline, and you can remove the outline.

 Related Topics


Copying outlines

After you apply an outline to a graphic object, or frame, you can copy the same outline to another object. You can copy the outline from a graphic object to another graphic object or a frame, and you can copy the outline from a frame to another frame. This allows you to use the same outline on several objects, without having to recreate it each time.

To copy an object's outline to another object using the Object Properties dialog box

1.	Using the Pick tool, right-click the graphic object you want to modify, and click Graphics Properties.

2.	Click the Outline tab.

3.	Click the Update From button.

4.	Click the object that contains the outline properties you want to copy.

 Tip

•	You can also access the Object Properties dialog box by clicking Format, Graphics, Graphics Properties.

 Related Topics


Setting the default outline

Whenever you create a line or curve, Corel VENTURA applies the default outline properties. When you modify the default settings, the modified settings are applied to any new objects you create. You can, however, change the outline of any individual object.

To change the default outline for new objects using the Outline Pen dialog box

1.	Click the pasteboard to select the page.

2.	Hold down SHIFT, and click the pasteboard again.

3.	Open the Outline Tool flyout, click Outline Pen.

4.	Click OK.

5.	In the Outline Pen dialog box, modify the outline attributes.

 Related Topics


Removing outlines

You can remove the outline of a graphic object, frame, or text.

To remove an outline from a graphic object using the Outline Tool flyout

1.	Select a graphic object or text with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Outline Tool flyout, and click No Outline.

To remove an outline from a graphic object using the Object Properties dialog box

1.	Right-click a graphic object with the Pick tool, and click Graphics Properties.

2.	Click the Outline tab.

3.	Click the No Outline button.

To remove an outline from a frame using the Frame Properties dialog box

1.	Right-click a frame with the Pick tool, and click Frame Properties.

2.	Click the Rules tab.

3.	Click the Quick tab.

If the Details button is displayed, proceed to step 4. If the Presets button is displayed, proceed to step 5.

4.	Click the Details button.

5.	Click the first frame in the top row.

To remove an outline from text using the Paragraph Properties dialog box

1.	Right-click the text with the Pick tool, and click Paragraph Properties.

2.	Click the Font tab.

3.	Click the Outline/Fill button.

4.	Follow steps 2 and 3 from the "To remove an outline from a graphic object using the Object Properties dialog box" procedure.

 Related Topics


Installing, matching, and displaying fonts


Overview: Installing, matching, and displaying fonts
Installing, matching, and displaying fonts

Fonts are sets of characters in a given typeface and point size. Corel VENTURA 8 makes it easy to manage the fonts you have on your computer, and lets you make the best use of them.

Installing fonts

More than a thousand different fonts are included with Corel VENTURA 8. These fonts are in Windows TrueType and Adobe Type 1 format. You can install any font on the Corel VENTURA 8 CD-ROM at any time.

Matching fonts

When you open a publication created on a different computer, you may find that the publication contains fonts that are not installed on your computer. Corel VENTURA 8 lets you find the fonts on your computer that best match the missing fonts and automatically substitute them in the publication.

Displaying fonts

The Font page of the Options dialog box allows you to set the fonts you can use and change the font display settings.

 More Detailed Information


Installing fonts


Overview: Installing fonts
Installing fonts

When you open Corel VENTURA 8, it searches your computer for three types of fonts: Windows TrueType, Adobe Type 1, and Device fonts. Device fonts are fonts that are included with a hardware device such as a printer. By default, Corel VENTURA 8 lists these fonts in the Fonts list box on the Property Bar toolbar. When you install a font on your computer, it is added to the list in the Font list box.

A symbol appears next to each font on the Fonts list to show what type of font it is.

Symbol	Font type

Windows TrueType

Adobe Type 1

Device

 Related Topics


Installing Windows TrueType fonts

The Windows TrueType fonts available on the Corel VENTURA 8 CD-ROM can be installed through Windows.

You can use Microsoft Windows to install third-party or custom Windows TrueType fonts that are not included with Corel VENTURA 8.

To install Windows TrueType fonts from the Corel VENTURA 8 CD-ROM

•	Do a custom install of Corel VENTURA 8, and enable the check boxes next to the fonts you want to install.

To install third-party or custom Windows TrueType fonts

1.	Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar, and click Settings, Controls Panel.

2.	Double-click the Fonts icon.

3.	Click File, Install New Font.

4.	Choose the drive where the fonts are stored from the Drives box.

5.	Choose the folder where the fonts are stored from the Folders box.

6.	Choose the fonts you want to install from the List Of Fonts box.

The fonts are installed to the FONTS folder in the folder where Windows is installed..

 Tip

•	To navigate to the FONTS folder quickly, click the Start button on the Windows toolbar, then click Run. Type "Fonts" in the Open box.

 Related Topics


Installing Adobe Type 1 fonts

Adobe Type 1 fonts require Adobe Type Manager to install them on your computer. Corel VENTURA 8 includes Adobe Type Manager to install Adobe Type 1 fonts.

To install the Adobe Type Manager

1.	Insert the Corel VENTURA 8 CD-ROM with Adobe Type Manager on it in your CD-ROM drive.

2.	In Windows Explorer, double-click the folder where Adobe Type Manager is stored on the CD-ROM.

3.	Double-click INSTALL.EXE.

For more information about installing Adobe Type 1 fonts, see the online Help in Adobe Type Manager.

 Related Topics


Matching fonts


Overview: Matching fonts
Matching fonts

Corel VENTURA 8 includes three font technologies to help you deal with the problem of publications that incorporate fonts not installed on your computer: Bitstream Font Navigator to manage the fonts on your computer, PANOSE Font Matching to substitute missing fonts in publications, and Bitstream TrueDoc to embed fonts in your publications.

Bitstream Font Navigator

Bitstream Font Navigator lets you manage the fonts on your computer. When you open Bitstream Font Navigator for the first time, it creates a list of all the fonts stored on your computer. You can then use this list to add, delete, and organize the fonts on your computer.

PANOSE Font Matching

PANOSE Font Matching searches the fonts on your computer for the one that most closely matches a font that is in a publication but not installed on your computer.

 Note

•	Replacement fonts are not always an exact match of the original and can affect the character spacing, page layout, and appearance of the text in the publication.

Bitstream TrueDoc

Other users you share your publication with may not have the fonts you use installed on their computers. Bitstream TrueDoc ensures that others can open the publications you create without having fonts missing. You can use Bitstream TrueDoc to embed a copy of the required fonts in your publication so that the publication will appear as you created it.

 More Detailed Information
 Related Topics


Using Bitstream Font Navigator


Overview: Using Bitstream Font Navigator
Using Bitstream Font Navigator

Bitstream Font Navigator is a font manager that lets you find, organize, and install fonts on your computer. When you first open Bitstream Font Navigator, it creates a Font Catalog [image] a list of all the fonts found in the drive or folder you specified. After the Font Catalog is created, you can add fonts from the Font Catalog to the Font list box in Corel VENTURA and use these fonts in your publication, even if they are not installed.

The Bitstream Font Navigator comes with an online Help file to help you use its features. You can find the Bitstream Font Navigator application and Help files in the X:\COREL\GRAPHICS8\FONTNAV folder, where "X" represents the letter of the drive where Corel VENTURA 8 is located.

If you don't have Bitstream Font Navigator installed on your computer, you can install it by performing a custom install. For more information about doing a custom install, see "Installing only selected applications."

 Related Topics


Enabling and disabling font matching using Bitstream Font Navigator

Bitstream Font Navigator has a font-matching capability that you can enable and disable. You may want to disable this feature because it does not give you the same control over font matches that PANOSE Font Matching gives you.

If you enable the Use Bitstream Font Navigator Font Catalog button, Corel VENTURA looks for fonts that are missing from a publication in the Bitstream Font Navigator Font Catalog before using Panose Font Matching to substitute the missing fonts.

To enable the Bitstream Font Navigator Font Catalog for font matching

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, click Font.

3.	Enable the Use Bitstream Font Navigator Font Catalog check box.

 Note

•	If Corel VENTURA can't find the Font Catalog or if the Font Catalog does not contain the missing font, Corel VENTURA then relies on PANOSE Font Matching to substitute a suitable font for the missing font. For more information about PANOSE Font Matching, see "Using PANOSE Font Matching."

 Related Topics


Adding fonts from the Font Catalog to the Font list box

You can add any fonts listed in the Font Catalog to the Font list box in Corel VENTURA and use them in your publications [image] even if they are not installed on your computer.

The Font list box, located on the Property Bar, displays the fonts available for use in Corel VENTURA. The fonts you add from the Font Catalog that are not installed on your computer appear in the Font list box with a dimmed icon.

To add fonts from the Font Catalog to the Font list

1.	In Windows Explorer, double-click FONTNAV.EXE in the X:\COREL\GRAPHICS8\FONTNAV folder. "X" represents the drive on your computer where Corel VENTURA 8 is located.

2.	Follow the instructions provided by the Font Navigator wizard.

3.	Close Bitstream Font Navigator.

4.	Start Corel VENTURA.

5.	Right-click in the Font list box, and click Font Navigator Fonts.

 Related Topics


Using PANOSE Font Matching


Overview: Using PANOSE Font Matching
Using PANOSE Font Matching

PANOSE Font Matching provides replacement fonts for fonts that are used in a publication but are not installed on your computer. When you open a publication that uses fonts you don't have, the Font Matching Results dialog box opens and displays a possible replacement. You can accept the suggested font substitution or modify it to substitute another font. The substitution affects the way a publication displays and prints only [image] the original fonts used in the publication do not change.

Manufacturers register their fonts with PANOSE and each font is assigned a unique identification number based on its visual characteristics. When a substitute font is required, PANOSE searches through the fonts stored on your computer to find the best possible replacement. The success of this system relies on the number of possible replacement fonts you have on your computer.

Font Matching Exceptions file

Whenever you substitute a matching font for a missing font, you can save the match by saving to a Font Matching Exceptions file. Then, whenever you open a publication that uses the same missing font, PANOSE Font Matching substitutes the missing font with the match stored in the Font Matching Exceptions file. The Font Matching Exceptions file is especially useful if you use font substitutions other than those provided by PANOSE Font matching.

Alternate Spellings list

You can use the Alternate Spellings list to match two equivalent fonts that are spelled differently, to match Windows fonts to their Macintosh equivalents, or to record any changes in font names. PANOSE Font Matching uses the Alternate Spelling list to find an equivalent font replacement.

 Notes

•	PANOSE Font Matching does not distinguish between Adobe Type 1 and Windows TrueType fonts. For example, if a publication uses Adobe Type 1 fonts and you only have Windows TrueType fonts installed on your computer, PANOSE Font Matching automatically substitutes an equivalent Windows TrueType font.

•	PANOSE Font Matching will also automatically substitute missing fonts in Artistic text and text in imported CorelDRAW files (.CDR and .CMX).

•	PANOSE Font Matching does not apply to text copied from the Clipboard.

•	Early versions of Corel VENTURA (version 4.2 and earlier) do not support PANOSE Font Matching. However, if you use Corel VENTURA 8 to open a publication created in a version 4.2 or earlier, missing fonts will be substituted, most likely with Times New Roman, if available.

 Related Topics


Enabling and disabling PANOSE Font Matching

By default, PANOSE Font Matching is enabled when you start Corel VENTURA 8. If you disable PANOSE Font Matching, fonts will be substituted according to a Corel VENTURA font substitution table.

You can suppress PANOSE Font Matching when you import a file by enabling the Suppress PANOSE check box in the Import Text dialog box.

To enable or disable PANOSE Font Matching

1.	Click Tool, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, click Font.

3.	Click the PANOSE Font Matching button.

4.	Enable or disable the Allow Font Matching check box.

 Related Topics


Changing the match for missing fonts

PANOSE Font Matching automatically displays its font matching results when you open or import a publication that uses fonts that are not installed on your computer. You can accept the substitute fonts, or you can change the match and substitute different fonts. You can save the match to the Font Matching Exception file for use whenever the font is missing.

Missing fonts appear in the Font list box with [image] and the name of the substituted font in parentheses next to their names.

To change the match for missing fonts

1.	Open a publication that uses fonts that are not installed in Corel VENTURA.

2.	Choose the matched font you want to change in the Missing Font box.

3.	Choose a substitute font from the Substituted Font list box.

4.	Repeat steps 2 and 3 for other font matches you want to change.

To save font matches to the Font Matching Exception file

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the previous procedure.

2.	Click OK.

3.	Click Yes

 Notes

•	If Bitstream Font Navigator substitutes a font that is stored on your computer but not yet installed, you can enable the Install Font From Bitstream Font Navigator Font Catalog button in the Font Matching Results dialog box to install the font.

•	PANOSE Font Matching does not distinguish between Adobe Type 1 and Windows TrueType fonts. If a font of one type is missing, the equivalent font of the other type will be substituted, with no notice given of the substitution. PANOSE Font Matching will also automatically substitute missing fonts in Artistic text and paragraph text in imported CorelDRAW files (.CDR and .CMX), with no notification of the substitution.

 Related Topics


Saving font matches to the Font Matching Exceptions file

The Font Matching Exceptions file contains custom font substitutions that PANOSE Font Matching uses instead of the default font matches. You can modify the Font Matching Exceptions file by adding, editing, and removing font matches.

To add font matches to the Font Matching Exceptions file

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, click Font.

3.	Click the PANOSE Font Matching button.

4.	Click the Exceptions button.

5.	Click the Add button.

6.	In the Missing font box, type the name of the font that is missing from the publication.

7.	Choose a font from the Substituted Font list box.

To edit font matches in the Font Matching Exceptions file

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the previous procedure.

2.	Choose a matching exception from the list.

3.	Click the Edit button.

4.	In the Missing font box, type the name of the font that is missing from the publication.

5.	Choose a font from the Substituted Font list box.

To remove font matches from the Font Matching Exceptions file

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the "To add font matches to the Font Matching Exceptions file" procedure.

2.	Choose a matching exception from the list.

3.	Click the Remove button.

 Note

•	You can give copies of the Font Matching Exceptions file (PANOSE.BIN) to people who will use your publication to ensure consistency when your publication is viewed or printed on computers that do not have these fonts installed.

 Related Topics


Customizing PANOSE Font Matching

Customizing PANOSE Font Matching lets you show the results of the PANOSE Font Matching when you open a publication, adjust the precision of the font matches, and choose a default font that will be used whenever a more suitable substitute font cannot be found for a missing font.

To customize PANOSE Font Matching

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, click Font.

3.	Click the PANOSE Font Matching button.

4.	Enable the Allow Font Matching check box.

5.	Enable the Show Mapping Results check box.

Enabling the Show Mapping Results check box displays the PANOSE Font Matching results when you open a publication that uses fonts that are not installed on your computer. You must enable the Show Mapping Results check box if you want to change font substitutions before they are applied in your publication.

6.	Move the Substitution Tolerance slider to the left or right.

Moving the slider to the left increases the precision with which substitutions are made. Moving the slider to the right to reduces the precision.

7.	Choose a font from the Default Font list box.

The default font is used in place of missing fonts when PANOSE Font Matching cannot find a more suitable substitute.

 Related Topics


Matching Macintosh fonts to Windows fonts

If you import a file from a Macintosh-based application into Corel VENTURA, you may need to specify Windows-equivalent fonts for Macintosh fonts in the document. You can do this using the Alternate Spellings list. The Alternate Spellings list lets you permanently substitute fonts without altering the Font Matching Exceptions file.

To match a Macintosh font to a Windows font

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, click Font.

3.	Click the PANOSE Font Matching button.

4.	Click the Spellings button.

5.	Click the Add button.

6.	Choose a Windows font name from the Windows Name list box.

7.	Type the Macintosh spelling for the font in the Macintosh Name box.

 Related Topics


Editing the Alternate Spellings list

PANOSE Font Matching lets you change the spelling of font names. You can also add and remove fonts from the Alternate Spellings list.

To edit the spelling of a font name

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, click Fonts.

3.	Click the PANOSE Font Matching button.

4.	Click the Spellings button.

5.	Click the Edit button.

6.	Edit the font name in the Windows Font Name box.

7.	Edit the font name in the Macintosh Name box.

To add fonts to the Alternate Spellings list

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the previous procedure.

2.	Click the Add button.

3.	Type a font name in the Windows Font Name box.

4.	Type a font name in the Macintosh Name box.

To remove two equivalent fonts from the Alternate Spellings list

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the "To the spelling of a font name" procedure.

2.	From the Alternate Spellings list, choose two fonts.

3.	Click the Remove button.

 Related Topics


Using Bitstream TrueDoc


Overview: Using Bitstream TrueDoc
Using Bitstream TrueDoc

Bitstream TrueDoc lets you view or print Corel VENTURA 8 publications from any computer or printer, even if these devices do not have the fonts used in the original publication. Bitstream TrueDoc records the shape of the characters (regardless of the font format or complexity of the character shape) and embeds these representations into your publication. In addition, TrueDoc provides true WYSIWYG (What You See Is What You Get) capability, so that you can distribute electronic publications knowing that they will look the same to you and to your readers.

If you don't have Bitstream TrueDoc installed on your computer, you can install it by performing a custom install. For more information about doing a custom install, see "Installing only selected applications".

 Note

•	TrueDoc fonts are unavailable for use in other applications. For example, if you want to publish a Corel VENTURA 8 publication with embedded Bitstream TrueDoc fonts to Adobe Acrobat, Adobe Acrobat will not be able to use the embedded fonts.

 Related Topics


Embedding fonts with Bitstream TrueDoc

Since Bitstream TrueDoc records and embeds a "picture" of each character in your publication, your publication will always have the required fonts, even if it is viewed or printed from a computer that does not have these fonts installed. You need to enable the Embed Fonts Using Bitstream TrueDoc check box on the General page of the Publication Properties dialog box before you can include Bitstream TrueDoc font information in your publication.

To embed fonts

1.	Click Publication, Publication Properties.

2.	Click the General tab.

3.	Enable the Embed Fonts Using Bitstream TrueDoc check box.

 Notes

•	When you print to a file, Corel VENTURA embeds the original Adobe Type 1 or Windows TrueType fonts, regardless of whether the fonts are embedded with Bitstream TrueDoc. If you send your publication for commercial printing (the publication file, not the print output file), you should disable the Embed Fonts Using Bitstream TrueDoc check box so the publication will print using the higher quality Adobe Type 1 or Windows TrueType fonts.

•	Bitstream TrueDoc creates fonts used by Artistic text and paragraph text in imported .CDR and .CMX files, provided that the publication contains regular text or empty paragraphs formatted with the same fonts.


Displaying fonts


Overview: Displaying fonts
Displaying fonts

The Fonts page of the Options dialog box allows you to set the fonts you can use and change the font display settings.

 Related Topics


Customizing the Font list display

You can customize the Font list on the Property Bar to display only the types of fonts you want to use. You can choose character fonts and symbol fonts, or TrueType, Type 1, and Device fonts. You can display all the fonts found by the Font Navigator or only the fonts used in your publication. You can even display a sample of each font you highlight as you scroll down the Font list.

To set the Font list display options

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, click Font.

3.	Enable the check boxes of the fonts you want to appear in the Font list.

To display only the fonts in the active publication

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Enable the Show Publication Fonts Only check box.

To enable font sample display

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the "To set the Font list display options" procedure.

2.	Enable the Show Font Sample in Drop Down Font Lists check box.

 Tip

•	You can also open the Fonts page of the Options dialog box by right-clicking the Font list on the Property Bar and clicking Font Options.


Working with text


Overview: Working with text
Working with text

The powerful text-handling capabilities of Corel VENTURA give you complete control over the design and arrangement of text. Page Layout and Copy Editor views allow you to type, format, and edit text easily. By applying text attributes, you can quickly change font, line, and character attributes; by using character tags and paragraph tags, you can quickly achieve consistent formatting throughout a publication.

Corel VENTURA also provides a wide range of features for the positioning and flow of text. You can use any of the following:

•	breaks

•	spacing

•	indents

•	tabs

•	alignment

You can also insert the date and time, special characters, and symbols in your publication.

To enhance the visual impact of a publication, you can use bulleted lists, rules, drop caps, and drop shadows. In addition, you can apply conditions to a publication's components to define which components are displayed, or you can use variables to update quickly information that is likely to change.

 Notes

•	Corel VENTURA also provides a tool for creating Artistic text which allows you to create graphic effects with text. Each block of text functions as a separate graphic object. For information, see "Working with Artistic text."

•	For information about importing and exporting text, see "Importing and exporting text."

 More Detailed Information


Typing and editing text


Overview: Typing and editing text
Typing and editing text

Corel VENTURA allows you to type text in Page Layout view and in Copy Editor view. As you type, text automatically wraps at the right margin and flows to the next line. You can also find and replace both text and formatting in your publication. You can search for and replace paragraph marks or inserted items, including markers, equations, index entries, footnotes, endnotes, and hidden text.

By using the Cut, Copy, and Paste commands, you can move selections of text within a publication or from one publication to another. The Cut and Copy commands allow you to place information on the Clipboard, and the Paste command allows you to add information to your text. You can also delete individual characters or text blocks.

 Notes

•	Corel VENTURA allows you to type and edit text in imported text files. When you type text on a page or in a frame that doesn't have a text file in it, a new text file is created. For more information about file list, see "Using the file list."

•	When you type text in a new Corel VENTURA publication, an embedded text file is created. In versions 7 and 8 of Corel VENTURA, text files are automatically embedded in the publication file but can be exported as separate text files. (In earlier versions of Corel VENTURA, text files remained as separate files that were identified by pointers in the publication file.) For information about importing and exporting text, see "Importing and exporting text."

 More Detailed Information
 Related Topics


Typing text


Overview: Typing text
Typing text

You can type text in a publication using either Page Layout view or Copy Editor view. As you type, text automatically wraps at the right margin and flows to the next line. When you enable the Show Tabs & Returns button on the Property Bar, the Paragraph marker ( [image]) indicates the end of a paragraph, and the End Of File marker ( [image]) indicates the end of a text file.

The following picture shows text typed in Page Layout view and in Copy Editor view.

 Note

•	Before you start typing text, make sure that the insertion point, not the cursor, appears on the page.

 Related Topics


Typing text in Page Layout view

When you start a new publication, the Publication window displays Page Layout view, and the cursor is placed automatically at the beginning of the first line of the page. You can type text directly on the page or in a frame. For more information about typing text in frames, see "Working with text files in frames."

To type text on a page in Page Layout view

1.	Click the Pick tool.

2.	Position the cursor on the page.

3.	Type text.

 Tip

•	Press ENTER only when you want to start a new paragraph.

To type text in a frame in Page Layout view

1.	Click the Pick tool.

2.	Position the cursor in a frame.

3.	Type text in the frame.

 Related Topics


Typing text in Copy Editor view

You can use Copy Editor view not only for editing text but also for typing text. For more information about using Copy Editor view to edit text, see "Editing text in Page Layout view and Copy Editor view."

To type text in Copy Editor view

1.	Click View, Copy Editor.

2.	Click the Pick tool.

3.	Position the cursor.

4	Type text.

 Tips

•	To switch from Page Layout view to Copy Editor view, you can also click the Copy Editor View button on the Status Bar.

•	To change the size of the column that contains the paragraph tag names, drag the splitter bar to the left or right.

 Related Topics


Editing text


Overview: Editing text
Editing text

Corel VENTURA allows you to edit text quickly and easily. You can select or deselect either individual characters or a block of text by using the mouse or keyboard shortcuts. You can edit text by using the Cut, Copy, and Paste commands. The Find & Replace command allows you to search for and replace specified text, formatting, or special items in your publication.

 Related Topics


Selecting and deselecting text

When you select text, you indicate that you want your next action to apply to that block of text. When you deselect text, you indicate that you want to stop manipulating that block of text.

Selecting text using the mouse

To select...	Do this...

A word	Double-click the word.

A bulleted list	Select the list items.

A sentence	Hold down CTRL, and click the sentence.

A paragraph 	Triple-click the paragraph, or hold down ALT and click the paragraph.

Multiple paragraphs	Hold down CTRL + ALT, and click each paragraph.

Sequential paragraphs	Hold down SHIFT, and click each paragraph with the Paragraph tool.

Text from the cursor to another point	Hold down SHIFT, and click where you want to end the selection.

Text on a page or across pages	Click and drag over the text you want to select.

Any amount of text	Click and drag over the text you want to select.

 Notes

•	If text is selected and you start typing, the selected text is replaced with the text you type.

•	Using the Paragraph tool or ALT + click selection methods in combination with the CTRL key allows you to apply tags to multiple paragraphs. Using either selection method alone or with the CTRL keys also allows you to use the Property Bar to apply formatting to selected paragraphs.

 Tips

•	When text is very close to the edge of a frame, it can be difficult to select. Decreasing the value in the Frame Selection box on the Selection page in the Options dialog box (Tools menu) will keep the insertion point from changing to the cursor when it gets close to the frame boundary.

•	Selecting the Paragraph tool and clicking a paragraph is the same as holding ALT and clicking a paragraph.

Selecting text using keyboard shortcuts

Press...	To select...

SHIFT + [image] or 	A character

SHIFT + CTRL + [image] or 	From the cursor to the start or end of a word

SHIFT + [image] or 	From the cursor up or down one line

SHIFT + HOME or END	From the cursor to the start or end of a line

SHIFT + CTRL + [image] or 	From the cursor to the start or end of a paragraph

CTRL + SHIFT + HOME or END	From the cursor to the start or end of a text file

CTRL + A	All text in the selected frame, series of linked frames, active chapter, or text file

 Note

•	You can assign your own keyboard shortcuts to the functions you use most often. For more information about customizing keyboard shortcuts, see "Customizing keyboard shortcuts."

To deselect text

•	Click outside of the selected text.

 Tips

•	To deselect text, you can also press ESC.

•	To deselect all objects in your publication, click the page border, then hold down SHIFT and click the page border again.

To deselect one or more characters or paragraphs

•	Hold down SHIFT, and click the character(s) or paragraph(s) you want to deselect.

 Related Topics


Editing text in Page Layout view and Copy Editor view

You can edit text in either Page Layout view or Copy Editor view.

To edit text in Page Layout view

1.	Select the text you want to edit.

2.	Edit the text.

To edit text in Copy Editor view

1.	In Page Layout view, select the text you want to edit.

2.	Click View, Copy Editor.

3.	Edit the text.

 Note

•	You can customize Copy Editor view. For more information, see "Setting the Copy Editor view preferences."

•	In Page Layout view or Copy Editor view, you can change the case of selected text by right-clicking it choosing Attribute, Uppercase, Lowercase, or Capitalize.

 Tip

•	When you are working with a long publication, it is easier and quicker to use Copy Editor view to make major revisions of text because only the text in your publication is displayed. Frames, tables, bullets, and graphic objects are not displayed.

 Related Topics


Cutting, copying, and pasting text

You can move selected text anywhere in your publication or from one publication to another by using the Cut, Copy, and Paste commands, by using keyboard shortcuts, or by dragging the text.

When copying and pasting text, keep in mind the following:

To copy and paste...	Do the following...

Text only	Copy the text, but not the paragraph marker ( [image]). Corel VENTURA pastes the text into the active paragraph and removes the original paragraph tag name and properties.

Text and paragraph tag name	Copy the text and the paragraph marker ( [image]). Corel VENTURA pastes the text and the paragraph marker into a new paragraph and tags that paragraph with the original paragraph tag name. The properties of the paragraph tag are not copied [image] only the name.

Text, paragraph properties, and tag name	Copy the text, the paragraph marker ( [image]) and any portion of the preceding paragraph. Corel VENTURA pastes the text as two or more new paragraphs. The first paragraph contains the portion of the preceding paragraph, including its paragraph tag name; the second paragraph contains the focus paragraph, including its paragraph tag name, properties, and custom settings (if any). The properties of the paragraph tag are not copied for either paragraph.

Paragraph tag name and its attributes	Select a paragraph with the Paragraph tool and copy it. Corel VENTURA copies the paragraph tag to the style sheet of the active publication. If a paragraph tag with the same name currently exists, you have to define whether to replace or rename a paragraph tag. Paragraph attributes or text are not copied to the active publication [image] only the paragraph tag.

To cut and paste text

1.	Select the text you want to cut.

2.	Click Edit, Cut.

3.	Position the cursor where you want to paste the text.

4.	Click Edit, Paste.

To copy and paste text

1.	Select the text you want to copy.

2.	Click Edit, Copy.

3.	Position the cursor where you want to copy the text.

4.	Click Edit, Paste.

 Tips

•	Press CTRL + X to cut selected text to the Clipboard.

•	Press CTRL + C to copy selected text to the Clipboard.

•	Press CTRL + V to paste text from the Clipboard.

•	Text that has been copied or cut to the Clipboard can be pasted into other Windows-based programs that can read text information.

•	You can also paste text from other Windows-based programs into a Corel VENTURA publication. However, the text formatting supported in Corel VENTURA varies.

To move text to another publication

1.	Open the publication from which you want to cut the text.

2.	Click View, Page Layout.

3.	Select the text you want to move.

4.	Click Edit, Cut.

5.	Position the cursor in the publication where you want to add text.

6.	Click Edit, Paste.

To drag text within a publication

1.	Select the text you want to move.

2.	Drag the text where you want to position it.

 Tips

•	To drag and copy text, press CTRL while you release the mouse button.

•	You can drag text from Page Layout view to the Copy Editor view, but you can't drag text from the Copy Editor view to Page Layout view.

To drag text to another publication

1.	Arrange two publications so that you can view them both at the same time.

2.	Select the text you want to move.

3.	Drag the selected text to the other publication.

 Tips

•	To copy the text to the position of the insertion point, press CTRL while you release the mouse button.

•	To drag text from the active publication to an open publication, select the text in the active publication, then drag it to a filename on the Application Bar.

 Related Topics


Pasting text from other programs

You can paste text from other Windows-based programs into a Corel VENTURA publication using the Paste or Paste Special commands. With the Paste command, Corel VENTURA attempts to preserve the formatting of the copied text. ASCII and ANSI text will paste in using the Corel VENTURA publication's defaults for Paragraph text, whereas text pasted from a Rich Text File (RTF) will retain the font, size, line, and character attributes of the original file. Most other text file formats will be treated as RTF.

The Paste Special command gives you options on how to treat the text before pasting.

Pasting text from other Windows-based programs

1.	Copy text from a Windows-based program to the Clipboard (usually Edit, Cut or Edit, Copy).

2.	Position the cursor where you want to copy the text.

3.	Click Edit, Paste.

Pasting text with a specified format from other Windows-based programs

1.	Copy text from a Windows-based program to the Clipboard (usually Edit, Cut or Edit, Copy).

2.	Position the cursor where you want to copy the text.

3.	Click Edit, Paste Special.

4.	Select a format from the As list box.

If you want to paste the text as an OLE-linked object, proceed to step 5.

5.	Click the Paste Link button.

 Note

•	The Paste Special command is not available in the Copy Editor.

 Related Topics


Deleting text

You can delete blocks of text or individual characters.

To delete text

1.	Select a character or a block of text you want to delete.

2.	Click Edit, Delete.

 Note

•	Deleted text is not placed on the Clipboard.

 Tips

•	You can also delete selected text by pressing DELETE.

•	To delete one word to the left of the cursor, press CTRL + BACKSPACE.

•	To delete one word to the right of the cursor, press CTRL + DELETE.

 Related Topics


Finding and replacing text

You can find and replace specified text, formatting, or special items in your publication. Corel VENTURA searches the publication and highlights the first occurrence of the word or phrase it finds. You can then choose whether to replace the item once, replace all occurrences, or find the next occurrence. You can delete all occurrences of a string of text if you leave the Replace list box empty when you search and replace.

You can use the following options in the Find & Replace dialog box to define your search:

Option	Description

Attribute button	Allows you to search for text attributes, such as a font type, underline, font color, or manual kerning values

Options button	Allows you to limit your search to letter case, whole words, or only the active chapter. You can also search forward and backward.

Special button	Allows you to find and replace special characters that appear in your text, such as a tab or an em dash. You can use the Any Text and Any Character options to find only the attributes you want to change. You can use the Found Text option to replace attributes without changing the text with which they appear.

You can use wildcards to find words with specific characters or to find character strings. A question mark (?) finds all words with individual characters between other text (for example, "b?t" finds "bat" and "bet"). An asterisk (*) finds text strings (for example, "b*d" finds "bad" and "battered").

Items button	Allows you to search for special items, including footnotes, endnotes, cross-references, variables, dates, and index entries.

Tags	Allows you to add, remove, and replace tags, using the list boxes beside the Find and Replace list boxes. You can also replace tags with text attributes or replace text at the same time you replace a tag. For more information about working with tags, see "Managing tags and stylesheets."

To find text

1.	Click Edit, Find & Replace.

2.	Choose Text from the list box that appears to the right of the Find list box.

3.	Type the text for which you want to search in the Find list box.

4.	Click the Find Next button.

 Note

•	You can also find text with attributes applied to it.

To find and replace one occurrence of an item

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the previous procedure.

2.	Choose Text from the list box that appears to the right of the Replace list box.

3.	Type the replacement text in the Replace list box.

4.	Click the Replace button to replace only that occurrence of the item.

To find and replace all occurrences of an item

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the "To find text" procedure.

2.	Choose Text from the list box that appears to the right of the Replace list box.

3.	Type the replacement text in the Replace list box.

4.	Click the Replace All button to replace all occurrences of the text.

To find and replace specific properties applied to text

1.	Click Edit, Find & Replace.

2.	Choose Text from the list box that appears to the right of the Find list box.

3.	Type the text for which you want to search in the Find list box.

4.	Click the Attribute button, click Attributes, and choose a text property from the Text Properties dialog box.

5.	Choose Text from the list box that appears to the right of the Replace list box.

6.	Type the replacement text in the Replace list box.

7.	Click the Find Next button to begin the search.

8.	Click one of the following buttons:

•	Replace [image] to replace a single occurrence of the found text

•	Replace All [image] to replace all occurrences of the found text

To find and replace special items

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Click in the Find list box to enable the Special button.

3.	Click the Special button.

4.	Choose an option from the Special list.

5.	Follow steps 5 to 8 from the previous procedure.

 Notes

•	If you are searching and replacing text with attributes, the attributes appear below the Find list box and the Replace list box. The previous find and replace values are stored in the Find and Replace list boxes.

•	When you want to replace formatting attributes with text, make sure that you select the Text option from the list box that appears to the right of the Replace list box.

 Tips

•	Press CTRL + F to open the Find & Replace dialog box.

•	To replace formatting attributes without losing text, type the <<%>> code for Found Text in the Replace list box.

To remove attributes from a previous search

1.	Click Edit, Find & Replace.

2.	Position the cursor in the list box from which you want to remove the attributes.

3.	Click the Attribute button, and click No Attributes.

To find inserted items

1.	Click Edit, Find & Replace.

2.	Choose Text from the list box that appears to the right of the Find list box.

3.	Click in the Find list box to enable the Items button.

4.	Click the Items button.

5.	From the Items list, choose the type of inserted items for which you want to search.

6.	Click the Find Next button.

To find index entries

1.	Click Edit, Find & Replace.

2.	Choose Text from the list box beside the Find list box.

3.	Type any of the following in the Find list box:

•	<<$I[]>> [image] to search only for entries in the default category

•	<<$I(Category name)>> [image] to search for index entries in the category you have specified

•	<<$ILevelN>> [image] to search for entries that are at the level you specify, where "N" is a number from 1 to 14

•	<<$ILevel1;Level10>> [image] to search for entries that are at multiple levels. You must separate the levels with a semicolon.

•	<<$I(Category name)LevelN>> [image] to search for entries that are in the category and at the level you specify

 Notes

•	In Page Layout view and Page Tag view, the Find & Replace command finds and replaces Artistic text at the same time as regular text.

•	You can search for but you cannot replace box characters, equations, and frame anchors.

 Related Topics


Using the Find & Replace toolbar

The Find & Replace toolbar provides easy access to the find-and-replace options as you edit text. You can right-click the appropriate list box and choose the items for which you want to do search and replace (for example, paragraph tag, text, etc.).

To display the Find & Replace toolbar

1.	Click View, Toolbars.

2.	Enable the Find & Replace checkbox in the Toolbars list.

The Find & Replace toolbar provides the following buttons:

Button	Description

Find Next	Searches for the next occurrence of the item specified in the Find list box

Find Previous	Searches for the last occurrence of the item specified in the Find list box

Replace	Replaces the found item with the item specified in the Replace list box and searches for the next occurrence

Replace All	Replaces all occurrences of the item specified in the Find list box with the item in the Replace list box

Search Options	Controls the direction and scope (the entire publication or the current chapter only) of the search and whether Corel VENTURA searches for whole words only and words with the same capitalization as the item in the Find list box

Find & Replace	Opens the Find & Replace dialog box

 Related Topics


Setting text attributes for text and paragraphs


Overview: Setting text attributes for text and paragraphs
Setting text attributes for text and paragraphs

You can change the appearance of selected text by applying a new font and font attributes. A font is a set of characters in a given design and point size. For example, the following picture provides examples of different fonts:

The following examples display different font sizes:

Keep in mind that the same point size can look different when you apply it to several different fonts, as demonstrated in the following picture:

Once you choose a font and a font size, you can apply a wide range of text attributes, including font styles (for example, bold or italic), font color, underline, strike-thru, overscore, uppercase, and lowercase.

You can also create, apply, and format character tags. For more information about tags, see "Using character tags" and "Using paragraph tags."

 More Detailed Information
 Related Topics


Applying text attributes


Overview: Applying text attributes
Applying text attributes

Applying text attributes involves changing fonts, using underlines and line attributes, changing the case of characters, using hanging punctuation, and changing text to subscript and superscript.

The following table outlines the available options for applying text attributes:

Font attributes	Description

Font	Displays the font name. The fonts available on your computer depend on the fonts you have installed. For more information about fonts, see "Installing, matching, and displaying fonts."

Size	Specifies the font size. You can change the unit of measurement by right-clicking in the box, clicking Units, and click a unit of measurement.

Style	Displays the available font styles: Normal, Bold, Normal Italic, and Bold Italic. The availability of styles depends on the font you choose.

Shift Up	Specifies the text position relative to the text baseline (vertical). Positive values move the text up; negative values move the text down. The unit of measurement can be changed by right-clicking in the box, clicking Units, and clicking a unit of measurement.

Kerning	Sets the kerning value as a fraction of an em space. An em space is a relative unit of measurement equal to the point size of the current font; for example, in a 12 point font, an em space is 12 points wide. Since the value is relative to the font size, you do not need to change the word spacing values when the font size changes.

This attribute is available for selected text or character tags. For information about setting kerning values for paragraphs or paragraph tags, see "Adjusting kerning."

Underline	Displays the available underlining styles: None, Single, Double, and Word. The Word underline option applies a single underline to each word but not to the spaces between words.

Strike-thru	The Single strike-thru option places a line through the text.

Overscore	The Single overscore option places a line over the text.

Case	Displays the character case options: None (character case stays as typed), Uppercase, and Small Caps.

The Small Caps setting is only available for selected text or character tags.

Position	Displays the text position options: None, Superscript, Subscript, and Alternate.

Color	Displays the colors you can apply to text. Selected text and character tags are limited to uniform color. Paragraphs and paragraph tags can use other types of fills, such as fountain and pattern fills, which are available in the Paragraph Properties dialog box. For more information about using fills and colors, see "Filling and outlining."

Overprint 	Enables a paragraph to print over the background color. This option is relevant only when printing color separations. For more information, see "Color trapping."

Background color	Displays the background color for paragraphs or paragraph tags. Colors can be uniform or pattern fills, which are available in the Paragraph Properties dialog box. For more information about using fills and colors, see "Filling and outlining."

This option is only available for selected paragraphs or paragraph tags.

If background color is not enabled, the Color list box contains an X.

Background overprint	Enables a paragraph's background to print over objects beneath it.

This option is relevant only when printing color separations. For more information, see "Color trapping."

Column-wide background 	When background color is enabled, the background extends to the edge of the column.

 Tips

•	You can fine-tune the font options for paragraph and paragraph tags by clicking the Settings button in the Paragraph Properties dialog box. For example, you can set the thickness of overscores and underlines and their baseline shifts, the font size of superscripts and subscripts, and any of the following options: Margin Width Lines, Auto-adjust To Font, Character Tracking, and Alternate Size (the size of small caps).

•	If you select text that has mixed settings (for example, two different font sizes), the control setting in the Paragraph Properties dialog box may be blank or grayed, or it may contain "As Is."

To apply text attributes

1.	Select the text.

2.	Click Format, Text Properties.

3.	Apply any of the text attributes listed in the table above.

 Note

•	You can apply the same features to tags. For more information about tags, see "Using character tags."


Formatting paragraphs


Overview: Formatting paragraphs
Formatting paragraphs

Corel VENTURA offers a full range of features that help you manage the positioning, flow, and look of text. Some of the features you can apply to paragraphs are:

•	fonts and font attributes

•	horizontal and vertical alignment

•	breaks and spacing

•	tabs and indents

•	drop caps and drop shadows

•	bullets and rules

•	vertical justification

•	automatic hyphenation

You can apply the same features to tags. For more information about tags, see "Using character tags" and "Using paragraph tags."

 More Detailed Information
 Related Topics


Working with paragraphs


Overview: Working with paragraphs
Working with paragraphs

Some of the features you can apply to paragraphs are fonts, font attributes, indents, horizontal and vertical alignment, and bullets. You can also rotate paragraphs or position paragraphs side-by-side. To enhance the visual impact of your publication, you can apply rules or add drop caps and drop shadows to paragraphs. For information about applying font attributes, see "Applying text attributes."

 Related Topics


Indenting paragraphs

Indents let you adjust the space between the margins and your text. You can specify indents for one or more lines in a paragraph, or you can indent an entire paragraph. You can also indent lists of items that appear in separate paragraphs to align them with a decimal point or with a special character.

Corel VENTURA allows you to use the horizontal ruler to set paragraph indents for individual paragraphs. By default, the horizontal ruler is disabled. When it is enabled, it appears above the Publication window. For more information, see "Indenting and outdenting lines."

To indent a paragraph using a custom indent setting

1.	Click a paragraph.

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Properties.

3.	Click the Align tab.

If the Details button is displayed, proceed to step 4. If the Presets button is displayed, proceed to step 5.

4.	Click the Details button.

5.	From the Page list box, choose one of the following options:

•	All

•	Left

•	Right

6.	Type a value for the left indent in the In From Left box.

7.	Type a value for the right indent in the In From Right box.

To indent paragraphs relative to a decimal point

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the previous procedure.

2.	Type a value in the In From Right box to specify how far from the right margin you want the alignment point for a decimal aligned paragraph to be.

3.	Type a decimal point in the Character box in the Decimal Alignment section.

 Related Topics


Indenting and outdenting lines

You can apply two typographical effects to lines, an indent or an outdent. An indent moves one or more lines to the right of the paragraph margin; an outdent moves one or more lines to the left of the paragraph margin. You can choose a preset line indent or outdent setting, or you can specify your own line indent settings.

The following picture shows the preset settings for one-line indent, one-line outdent, two-line indent, and three-line outdent:

To indent or outdent one or more lines using a preset setting

1.	Click a paragraph.

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Properties.

3.	Click the Align tab.

If the Details button is displayed, proceed to step 4. If the Preset button is displayed, proceed to step 5.

4.	Click the Details button.

5.	Choose a setting from the Page list box.

To indent one or more lines using custom settings

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

If the Details button is displayed, proceed to step 2. If the Presets button is displayed, proceed to step 3.

2.	Click the Details button.

3.	Type a value in the Lines box to specify the number of lines to indent.

4.	Type a value in the Amount box to specify the distance between the left margin and the indented line(s). In the case of right justified text, specify the distance between the right margin and the indented line(s).

To outdent one or more lines using custom settings

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the "To indent a paragraph using a custom indent setting" procedure.

If the Details button is displayed, proceed to step 2. If the Presets button is displayed, proceed to step 3.

2.	Click the Details button.

3.	Type a value in the Indent box to specify the number of lines to outdent.

4.	Type a negative value in the Amount box.

 Tips

•	You can also use the horizontal ruler located at the top of the Publication Window to indent lines in a paragraph. To indent the first line in a paragraph, move the top slider (the upside-down triangle). To indent all lines in a paragraph, position the cursor in the paragraph you wish to indent and drag the two sliders.

•	Enable the Add Width Of Preceding Line check box if you want to indent the first line of a paragraph by an amount equal to the last line of the previous paragraph.

•	To change the unit of measurement used in any of the procedures above, right-click a dialog control that uses a measurement setting, click Units, and click a unit of measurement.

 Related Topics


Aligning paragraphs

You can align paragraphs horizontally or vertically on a page.

The following picture shows the presets for horizontal alignment of text.

Corel VENTURA provides the following horizontal and vertical paragraph alignment options:

Horizontal alignment options	Description

Left	Aligns the paragraph at the left margin or the left indent

Center	Centers the paragraph between the left and right margins or indents

Right	Aligns the paragraph at the right margin or the right indent

Justified (Last Line Left)	Aligns the last line of a paragraph at the left margin or the left indent

Justified (Last Line Centered)	Aligns the last line of a paragraph between the left and right margins or indents

Justified (Last Line Right)	Aligns the last line of a paragraph at the right margin or the right indent

Justified (Last Line Justified)	Aligns the last line of a paragraph with both the left and right margins or indents

Decimal	Aligns the paragraph to the left or right of a designated character (usually the decimal point)

Vertical alignment options	Description

Top	Aligns the first line of the paragraph with the top margin

Middle	Centers the paragraph between the top and bottom margins

Bottom	Aligns the last paragraph with the bottom margin

Absolute	Starts the paragraph at a specific distance from the top margin. The paragraph always appears at this position, which may result in the overlapping of the preceding paragraphs with this paragraph.

To align a paragraph horizontally using presets

1.	Click a paragraph.

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Properties.

3.	Click the Align tab.

If the Presets button is displayed, proceed to step 4. If the Details button is displayed, proceed to step 5.

4.	Click the Presets button.

5.	Click in one of the following boxes:

•	Left

•	Center

•	Right

•	Justified

To align a paragraph horizontally using the Horizontal list box

1.	Click a paragraph.

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Properties.

3.	Click the Align tab.

If the Details button is displayed, proceed to step 4. If the Presets button is displayed, proceed to step 5.

4.	Click the Details button.

5.	Choose an alignment option from the Horizontal Alignment list box.

 Tip

•	To preserve the appearance of text that is aligned to the left or right margins, enable the Hanging Punctuation check box. For more information about hanging punctuation, see "Using hanging punctuation."

To set word spacing limits for justified text

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the "To align a paragraph horizontally using presets" procedure.

2.	Choose a justified text option from the Horizontal list box.

3.	Click the Justified Settings button.

4.	In either the Proportion % column or the Ems % column, change the value in the Min. Word Spacing box to set the smallest amount of space you want to allow between two words.

5.	In either the Proportion % column or the Ems % column, change the value in the Max. Word Spacing box to set the largest amount of space you want to allow between two words.

To align a paragraph vertically using presets

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

If the Details button is displayed, proceed to step 2. If the Presets button is displayed, proceed to step 3.

2.	Click the Details button.

3.	From the Vertical list box, choose one of the following:

•	Top

•	Middle

•	Bottom

•	Absolute

 Note

•	If you choose Absolute from the Vertical list box, type a value in the box on the right side of the Vertical list box to specify the distance.

 Related Topics


Aligning the last line in a paragraph

Corel VENTURA allows you to align the last line in a paragraph.

The following picture shows the alignment options you can use: Justified (Last Line Left), Justified (Last Line Centered), Justified (Last Line Right), and Justified (Last Line Justified).

To align the last line in a paragraph

1.	Click a paragraph.

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Properties.

3.	Click the Align tab.

If the Details button is displayed, proceed to step 4. If the Presets button is displayed, proceed to step 5.

4.	Click the Details button.

5.	From the Horizontal list box, choose one of the following:

•	Justified (Last Line Left) [image] aligns the last line at the left margin or the left indent

•	Justified (Last Line Centered) [image] centers the last line between the left and right margins or indents

•	Justified (Last Line Right) [image] aligns the last line at the right margin or the right indent

•	Justified (Last Line Justified) [image] aligns the last line with both the left and right margins or indents

 Tip

•	To preserve the appearance of text that is aligned to the left or right margins, enable the Hanging Punctuation check box. For more information about hanging punctuation, see "Using hanging punctuation."

 Related Topics


Using hanging punctuation

Hanging punctuation is punctuation that is positioned outside the margins of the text. This feature is used to preserve the appearance of text that is aligned to the left or right margins. You can use the preset hanging punctuation marks in Corel VENTURA, or you can use your own and add them to the presets.

To define hanging punctuation

1.	Click Publication, Chapter Properties.

2.	Click the General tab.

3.	Click the Insert button.

4.	In the Punctuation column, type the punctuation marks that you want to add.

5.	In the Overhang % column, type a value to specify the amount you want the punctuation marks to overhang.

To use hanging punctuation

1.	Click a paragraph.

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Properties.

3.	Click the Align tab.

If the Details button is displayed, proceed to step 4. If the Presets button is displayed, proceed to step 5.

4.	Click the Details button.

5.	Enable the Hanging Punctuation check box.

 Related Topics


Arranging paragraphs side by side

You can arrange two or more paragraphs side by side by changing settings in the Paragraph Properties dialog box or by using the Side-By-Side Paragraphs button. However, if you want to use the Side-By-Side Paragraphs button, you need to add it to a toolbar before you can use it. For more information, see "Customizing toolbars."

To arrange two paragraphs side by side using the Paragraph Properties dialog box

1.	Click the paragraph you want to position to the right.

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Properties.

3.	Click the Align tab.

If the Details button is displayed, proceed to step 4. If the Presets button is displayed, proceed to step 5.

4.	Click the Details button.

5.	Type a value in the In From Left box to move the paragraph in from the left margin, and click the Apply button.

6.	Select the paragraph you want to position to the left.

7.	Type a value in the In From Right box to move the paragraph in from the right margin, and click the Apply button.

8.	Click the Breaks tab.

9.	Choose None from the Line Break list box.

To arrange two paragraphs side by side using the Side-By-Side Paragraphs button

1.	Select two paragraphs.

2.	Click the Side-By-Side Paragraphs button.

 Note

•	If you retag one of the paragraphs before you place the paragraphs side by side, Corel VENTURA automatically tags any subsequent paragraphs with one tag first and then the other. You can disable this cycle of alternating tags by setting the Next Tag value to Current Tag on the Breaks Page of the Paragraph Tag Properties dialog box.

 Tips

•	To select more than one paragraph, hold down CTRL and select each paragraph.

•	To arrange contiguous paragraphs side by side, you can select the paragraphs, then right-click and click Make Side-By-Side.

 Related Topics


Rotating paragraphs

Corel VENTURA allows you to rotate paragraphs at any angle.

You can also rotate text within a paragraph by drawing a frame around the text and rotating the frame or the frame's contents. For more information about frames, see "Working with frames and graphic objects."

To rotate a paragraph using a preset format

1.	Click a paragraph.

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Properties.

3.	Click the Space tab.

If the Presets button is displayed, proceed to step 4. If the Details button is displayed, proceed to step 5.

4.	Click the Presets button.

5.	Click in one of the following boxes:

•	0

•	90

•	180

•	270

To rotate a paragraph using a custom format

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

If the Details button is displayed, proceed to step 2. If the Presets button is displayed, proceed to step 3.

2.	Click the Details button.

3.	Type a value in the Angle box to specify the rotation angle.

4.	Type a number in the Maximum Height box to specify the maximum amount of vertical space that you want the rotated text to occupy.

 Note

•	When you rotate paragraphs, make sure there is enough vertical space to accommodate the text by adjusting the value in the Maximum Height box. For example, a line of text six inches long that is rotated 90 degrees requires a maximum height of six inches, or 432 points.

To rotate text in a frame

1.	Select a frame.

2.	Click Format, Frame Properties.

3.	Click the Placement tab.

4.	Type a value in the following boxes:

•	Contents Rotation box [image] to rotate the text within the frame

•	Frame Rotation box [image] to rotate both the frame and its contents

 Related Topics


Creating bulleted lists

Bullets make it easy to differentiate items in a list or to add emphasis to selected paragraphs. You can create bulleted lists by applying a preset bullet format, or you can create your own bullet format. For more information about tags, see "Using tags."

The following picture shows the preset bullet formats Corel VENTURA provides:

To create a bulleted list using a preset bullet format

1.	Select the paragraphs for which you want to create a bulleted list.

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Properties.

3.	Click the Effects tab.

If the Presets button is displayed, proceed to step 4. If the Details button is displayed, proceed to step 5.

4.	Click the Presets button.

5.	Click in one of the following boxes:

•	Round Bullet

•	Indent Bullet

•	Asterisk Bullet

•	Check Bullet

To create a bulleted list using a custom bullet format

1.	Select the paragraphs for which you want to create a bulleted list.

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Properties.

3.	Click the Effects tab.

If the Details button is displayed, proceed to step 4. If the Presets button is displayed, proceed to step 5.

4.	Click the Details button.

5.	Choose Bullet Character from the Effect Type list box.

6.	Select the font that contains the symbol you want to use as a bullet.

Common fonts include Symbol and Windings fonts.

7.	Choose a bullet character from the Character list box.

 Notes

•	You can also set other font properties for bullets, including size, style, underline, strike-thru, and overscore.

•	You can also choose a bullet character by choosing the character's ANSI number from the ANSI box.

 Tips

•	To lower the bullet's position, type a negative value in the Shift Up box in the Paragraph Properties dialog box; to raise a bullet's position, type a positive value in the Shift Up box.

•	To change the amount of space between the bullet and the text that follows the bullet, change the value in the Position box in the Paragraph Properties dialog box.

•	To change the color of the bullet character, choose a color from the Foreground list box in the Paragraph Properties dialog box.

•	To change the background color of the bullet character, choose a color from the Background list box in the Paragraph Properties dialog box.

 Related Topics


Adding and removing drop caps

Drop caps are used at the beginning of paragraphs for visual impact. You can apply a preset drop cap, or you can format your own drop cap.

The following picture shows a paragraph without a drop cap (on the left) and a paragraph with a drop cap (on the right).

The following picture shows the drop caps presets Corel VENTURA provides:

To add a preset drop cap to a paragraph

1.	Click a paragraph.

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Properties.

3.	Click the Effects tab.

If the Presets button is displayed, proceed to step 4. If the Details button is displayed, proceed to step 5.

4.	Click the Presets button.

5.	Click one of the following drop caps presets:

•	Drop Cap

•	First-Line Drop Cap

•	Reverse Drop

•	2-Letter Drop Cap

To add a custom drop cap to a paragraph

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

If the Details button is displayed, proceed to step 2. If the Presets button is displayed, proceed to step 3.

2.	Click the Details button.

3.	Choose Drop Cap from the Effect Type list box.

4.	From the Length list box, choose the number of characters or words you want to format with drop caps.

 Note

•	You can specify the font, the font size, color, position, and the style for a custom drop cap.

 Tips

•	To define the number of lines a drop cap will occupy, enable the Custom Spacing check box and type a value in the Number of Lines box of the Paragraph Properties dialog box.

•	To shift a drop cap up, type a positive value in the Shift Up box in the Paragraph Properties dialog box; to shift a drop cap down, type a negative value in the Shift Up box.

To remove a drop cap

1.	Click a paragraph that contains a drop cap.

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Properties.

3.	Click the Effects tab.

If the Details button is displayed, proceed to step 4. If the Presets button is displayed, proceed to step 5.

4.	Click the Details button.

5.	Choose No Effect from the Effect Type list box.

 Related Topics


Setting text flow options between paragraphs

Normally each paragraph in your publication continues directly below the previous paragraph, or it continues at the top of the next column or page.

Breaks determine the interruption in the flow of text from one paragraph to the next. By changing the break settings, you can control where a paragraph starts. After a break, the next paragraph can begin on a new line, at the top of a new column, at the top of a new page or frame, or at the top of the next right or left page.

By default, a paragraph breaks when it reaches the end of a page or column. You can prevent breaks within the paragraph to keep the entire paragraph on one page. You can also prevent breaks between paragraphs to keep both paragraphs on the same page or to start the second paragraph on the same line as the last line of the first paragraph.

To prevent breaks within a paragraph

1.	Click a paragraph.

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Properties.

3.	Click the Breaks tab.

4.	Disable the Allow Breaks Within Paragraph check box.

To start a paragraph in line with the previous paragraph

1.	Select the paragraph.

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Properties.

3.	Click the Breaks tab, and enable the In Line With Previous Paragraph check box.

4.	Click the Align tab, and enable the Add Width Of Preceding Line check box.

5.	Click the Apply button to apply the settings and leave the Paragraph Properties dialog box open.

6.	Select the previous paragraph.

7.	Click the Breaks tab, and choose None from the Line Break list box.

To keep paragraphs together

1.	Click a paragraph.

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Properties.

3.	Click the Breaks tab.

4.	Enable one of the following check boxes:

•	Keep With Next Paragraph [image] to keep the paragraph together with the following paragraph

•	Keep With Previous Paragraph [image] to keep the paragraph together with the previous paragraph

•	In Line With Previous Paragraph [image] to place the beginning of the paragraph on the same line as the first line of the previous paragraph

 Related Topics


Defining breaking characters

If your publication contains lines of text that extend up to or beyond the right margin, you can define a character at which Corel VENTURA will break the line and begin a new line.

To define a breaking character

1.	Click Publication, Publication Properties.

2.	Click the General tab.

3.	Choose a character from the Character list box.

4.	In the Break column, enable the check box for that character.

 Notes

•	In Corel VENTURA 7 and earlier versions, En Space, Em Space, Thin Space, and Figure Space are breaking characters; in VENTURA 8, all characters, except real space, are nonbreaking. To make a character a breaking character, you have to enable that character's check box on the General page of the Publication Properties dialog box.

•	A dash is also considered a non-breaking character. Words that contain dashes will not break unless you specify that they should.

 Related Topics


Adding rules and drop shadows to a paragraph

Rules are formatted lines that are used for borders around paragraphs, pages, frames, tables, and tablecells. Rules allow you to accentuate components of your publication by adding a formatted border around them. Corel VENTURA offers a number of rule presets that can be added quickly to any paragraph. For information about applying rules, see "Creating and formatting rules."

For visual impact, you can also add a preset drop shadow to a paragraph. Drop shadows are made up of two sets of ruling lines: one for the shadow and the other for the border.

To add rules to a paragraph

1.	Click a paragraph.

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Properties.

3.	Click the Rules tab.

4.	Click the Quick tab.

If the Details button is displayed, proceed to step 5. If the Presets button is displayed, proceed to step 6.

5.	Click the Details button.

6.	Click one of the preset rule options.

7.	Choose an option from the Rule Tag list box.

8.	Click the Color button, and choose a color for the rule.

9.	Choose one of the following from the Extents list box:

•	Paragraph [image] to extend the horizontal rule to the width of the first line of the paragraph

•	Margin [image] to extend the horizontal rule to the width of the margin

•	Column [image] to extend the horizontal rule to the width of the column

•	Frame [image] to extend the horizontal rule to the width of the frame

•	Custom [image] to define values in the Length and Indent boxes

 Notes

•	If you choose Custom from the Extent list box on the Quick page of the Paragraph Tag Properties dialog box, you have to type values in the Length and the Indent boxes.

•	You can click a paragraph with either the Pick tool or the Paragraph tool.

•	For more information about creating rule tags that you can apply to other paragraphs, frames, pages, or tablecells in your publication, see "Using rule tags."

•	You can customize the length of the horizontal rule only.

To add custom rules to a paragraph

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	Click the Advanced tab.

If the Details button is displayed, proceed to step 3. If the Presets button is displayed, proceed to step 4.

3.	Click the Details button.

4.	Click in the Edge Selection box, and click the edges to which you want to add a custom rule.

To select a single edge, click close to the edge. To select all edges, click the center of the Edge Selection box.

5.	In the Number (#) column, enable one or more rule check boxes.

6.	In the Size column, click an enabled row, and type a value to set the width of the rule.

7.	In the Color column, click the color button to define a color for the rule.

8.	In the Pen column, click the Outline Pen tool, and set the rule's attributes.

9.	In the Space column, type a value to define the space between the lines.

 Note

•	If you have enabled only one rule check box, the Space column can be used only to adjust that line relative to the normal position of the rule.

 Tips

•	To save a formatted rule as a tag, type a new tag name in the Rule Tag box, and click the Add button to add the new tag to the Rule Tag list.

•	Click the Update Tag button is you want to save the current Rule Tag settings to the paragraph tag of the currently selected paragraph.

•	You can create rules on the left or right edge of the selected paragraph that are larger than the height of the paragraph by using the Space value in the fourth row of the rule formatting section of the dialog box. After you have defined a rule for the left or right edge, click the top or bottom rule in the Edge Selection box, and type a value in the Space box in the fourth row of the rule formatting section. You do not have to apply a rule to the top or bottom edge. This value will extend the rule vertically beyond the height of the paragraph.

To apply a drop shadow to a paragraph

1.	Click a paragraph.

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Properties.

3.	Click the Rules tab.

If the Presets button is displayed, proceed to step 4. If the Details button is displayed, proceed to step 5.

4.	Click the Presets button.

5.	Click in one of the boxes.

 Related Topics


Using breaks and spacing


Overview: Using breaks and spacing
Using breaks and spacing

Breaks and spacing let you adjust space between words and paragraphs, and where text appears on your page. Breaks are spaces between lines, paragraphs, columns, and pages. Spacing is the space between lines within paragraphs, as well as the space around paragraphs. Typographic spacing refers to the distance between individual words.

 Related Topics


Inserting breaks

Breaks are spaces between lines, paragraphs, columns, and pages. The following table lists the different types of breaks that you can use and gives a brief description of each:

Type of break	Description

Line break ( [image])	A line break, sometimes called a soft return, ends a line without beginning a new paragraph.

Paragraph break ( [image])	Begins a new paragraph

Column	Forces text in a paragraph to flow to the next column without ending the paragraph

Page	Begins a new page

To insert a line break at the insertion point

1.	Click in a paragraph.

2.	Press SHIFT + ENTER.

To insert a paragraph break at the insertion point

1.	Click in a paragraph.

2.	Press ENTER.

To insert a page break at the insertion point

1.	Click in a paragraph.

2.	Press CTRL + ENTER.

To format the line break of a paragraph

1.	Click in a paragraph.

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Properties.

3.	Click the Breaks tab.

4.	Choose an option from the Line Break list box.

•	None [image] to specify that no line break is required

•	Before [image] to insert a line break before the selected paragraph

•	After [image] to insert a line break after the selected paragraph

•	Before & After [image] to insert a line break both before and after the selected paragraph.

To format the page breaks of a paragraph

1.	Click in a paragraph.

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Properties.

3.	Click the Breaks tab.

4.	Choose an option from the Page Break list box.

•	None [image] to specify that no page break is required

•	Before [image] to start the paragraph at the top of the next page

•	After [image] to make the paragraph the last one on a page

•	Before And After [image] to make the paragraph the only one on the page

•	Before/Until Left [image] to make the paragraph the first one on the next left page

•	Before/Until Right [image] to make the paragraph the first one on the next right page

To format the column breaks of a paragraph

1.	Click in a paragraph.

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Properties.

3.	Click the Breaks tab.

4.	In the Column Break list box, choose one of the following:

•	None [image] to specify that no column break is required

•	Before [image] to insert a column break before the selected paragraph

•	After [image] to insert a column break after the selected paragraph

•	Before & After [image] to insert a column break both before and after the selected paragraph

 Tip

•	To format a paragraph tag, click Format, Paragraph Tag Properties.

 Related Topics


Inserting nonbreaking and typographic spacing

A nonbreaking space prevents two words from being separated at the end of a line. A typographic space separates two words by a fixed space that does not change width during justification. If the line wraps, the typographic space appears at the beginning of the next line as if it were a character.

You can also use keyboard shortcuts to insert typographic spaces. The Special Characters page of the Symbol dialog box provides the shortcut keys assigned to the special characters listed. For more information, see "Text shortcuts."

To insert a nonbreaking space

1.	Click between two words.

2.	Delete the space between the words.

3.	Click Insert, Symbol.

4.	Click the Special Characters tab.

5.	Choose Nonbreaking Space from the Character list.

6.	Click the Insert button.

To insert typographic spaces

1.	Click between two words.

2.	Delete the space between the words.

3.	Click Insert, Symbol.

4.	Click the Special Characters tab.

5.	Choose one of the following from the Character list:

•	Em Space [image] inserts a space equal to the point size of the current font

•	En Space [image] inserts a space which is half the width of an em space

•	Figure Space [image] inserts a space as wide as a number in the font you are using

•	Thin Space [image] inserts a space as wide as a period in the font you are using

 Related Topics


Changing interparagraph spacing and spacing above and below paragraphs

Interparagraph spacing, the amount of space between paragraphs, is applied only when two paragraphs have the same interparagraph spacing.

You can add extra space before and after a paragraph. If two paragraphs have extra spacing above and below, only the greater amount of spacing is applied. If two paragraphs have the same interparagraph spacing, as well as spacing above or below, the spacing above or below is applied in addition to the interparagraph spacing.

To change interparagraph spacing

1.	Select two or more paragraphs.

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Properties.

3.	Click the Space tab.

If the Details button is displayed, proceed to step 4. If the Presets button is displayed, proceed to step 5.

4.	Click the Details button.

5.	Type a value in the Inter-paragraph box.

To change the spacing above and below of a paragraph

1.	Click a paragraph.

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Properties.

3.	Click the Space tab.

If the Details button is displayed, proceed to step 4. If the Presets button is displayed, proceed to step 5.

4.	Click the Details button.

5.	Type a value in the Above box.

6.	Type a value in the Below box.

 Tips

•	You can set the line spacing to adjust automatically if the font size changes. For more information, see "Adjusting line spacing automatically if the font size changes."

•	You change the unit of measurement used in any of the procedures above. Right-click in a dialog control that specifies a measurement setting, click Units, and click a unit of measurement.

Dialog controls that specify percentages, angles, or degrees cannot be modified.

 Related Topics


Changing interline spacing

Interline spacing is the spacing between lines of text in a paragraph. You can change the interline spacing when you need to accommodate mixed font sizes, equations, or pictures. You can also set the interline spacing to adjust automatically.

To change interline spacing using a preset format

1.	Select a paragraph.

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Properties.

3.	Click the Space tab.

If the Presets button is displayed, proceed to step 4. If the Details button is displayed, proceed to step 5.

4.	Click the Presets button.

5.	Click in one of the following boxes:

•	Single Space

•	Double Space

•	1.5 Space

•	Triple Space

To change interline spacing using a custom format

1.	Click a paragraph.

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Properties.

3.	Click the Space tab.

If the Details button is displayed, proceed to step 4. If the Presets button is displayed, proceed to step 5.

4.	Click the Details button.

5.	Type a value in the Inter-line box.

To grow interline space to fit

1.	Click a paragraph.

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Properties.

3.	Click the Space tab.

If the Details button is displayed, proceed to step 4. If the Presets button is displayed, proceed to step 5.

4.	Click the Details button.

5.	Enable the Grow Inter-line Space To Fit.

 Tips

•	You can set the line spacing to adjust automatically if the font size changes. For more information, see "Adjusting line spacing automatically if the font size changes."

•	You change the unit of measurement used in any of the procedures above. Right-click in a dialog control that specifies a measurement setting, click Units, and click a unit of measurement.

•	Dialog controls that specify percentages, angles, or degrees cannot be modified.

 Related Topics


Adding space at the top of a column

You can format a paragraph or a paragraph tag to add space above a paragraph when the paragraph begins at the top of a column.

To add space above a paragraph at the top of a column

1.	Click a paragraph.

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Properties.

3.	Click the Space tab.

If the Details button is displayed, proceed to step 4. If the Presets button is displayed, proceed to step 5.

4.	Click the Details button.

5.	Enable the Add Above Space At Column Top check box.

If you want to add space above the selected paragraph only if the paragraph is at the top of a column or frame, enable the Above Space Only At Column Top check box.

 Related Topics


Adjusting line spacing automatically if the font size changes

You can set Corel VENTURA to adjust automatically the interline spacing and the spacing above and below paragraphs if the font size changes.

To adjust automatically line spacing if the font size changes

1.	Click a paragraph.

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Properties.

3.	Click the Space tab.

If the Details button appears on the Space page, proceed to step 4. If the Presets button appears, proceed to step 5.

4.	Click the Details button.

5.	From the Auto-Adjust list box, choose one of the following:

•	Percentage [image] changes the spacing in proportion to the font size

•	Add [image] changes the spacing by an absolute amount (for example, if the font size increases by two points, the spacing also increases by two points)

•	None [image] makes no adjustment

 Related Topics


Hyphenating text


Overview: Hyphenating text
Hyphenating text

Hyphenation lets you reduce the raggedness of text along the right margin by dividing a word that falls at the end of a line instead of forcing the whole word to the next line.

The following picture shows a paragraph with hyphenation and a paragraph without hyphenation.

There are two types of hyphenation in Corel VENTURA: automatic hyphenation and discretionary hyphenation.

Automatic hyphenation

With automatic hyphenation, Corel VENTURA 8 will hyphenate words for you, using the language you choose to determine the placement of hyphens within words. You can enable automatic hyphenation for individual paragraphs, paragraph tags, or character tags.

Discretionary hyphenation

Adding hyphenation to text manually is called discretionary hyphenation. You can add your own hyphenation instead of or in addition to automatic hyphenation.

Hyphenation for multiple languages

Corel VENTURA 8 includes hyphenation for many languages. To use hyphenation for a language other than English, perform a custom install of Corel VENTURA and install the writing tools for that language.

 Note

•	You must enable automatic hyphenation to use both automatic and discretionary hyphenation. For more information, see "Enabling automatic hyphenation."

 Related Topics


Enabling automatic hyphenation

You must enable the Automatic Hyphenation check box to use both automatic and discretionary hyphens. You can apply automatic hyphenation to a selected paragraph, a paragraph tag, or a character tag. The setting for a character tag takes effect only if automatic hyphenation has been enabled for the paragraph that contains the text bearing the character tag.

To enable automatic hyphenation for a paragraph

1.	Click a paragraph.

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Properties.

3.	Click the General tab.

4.	Enable the Automatic Hyphenation check box.

5.	Choose a language from the Dictionary list box.

To enable automatic hyphenation for a character tag

1.	Select text that is formatted with a character tag.

2.	Click Format, Character Tag Properties.

3.	Click the General tab.

4.	Enable the Automatic Hyphenation check box.

5.	Choose a language from the Dictionary list box.

 Note

•	To change the settings for automatic hyphenation, see "Changing automatic hyphenation settings."

 Related Topics


Creating a character tag for hyphenation

You can create a character tag exclusively for hyphenation. A character tag can be applied to text that already has a paragraph tag; therefore, creating a character tag for hyphenation allows you to apply hyphenation to text without editing your paragraph properties or paragraph tag properties.

To create a character tag for hyphenation

1.	Select the text to which you want to apply the character tag.

2.	Click Tools, Tag Window.

3.	Click the New Tag button.

4.	Type a name in the New Tag Name box.

5.	Choose a tag from the Copy Properties list box.

6.	Click the New Tag Properties button.

7.	Click the General Tab.

8.	Enable the Automatic Hyphenation check box.

9.	Choose a language from the Dictionary list box.

 Note

•	To change the settings for automatic hyphenation, see "Changing automatic hyphenation settings."

 Related Topics


Changing automatic hyphenation settings

You can change automatic hyphenation settings for a paragraph, a paragraph tag, or a character tag to determine where hyphens appear. For all three, you can choose to enable hyphenation in uppercase words and set hyphenation zones. For a paragraph or paragraph tag, you can also define how many consecutive lines can end with a hyphen and whether to allow hyphens at the end of a paragraph, column or page.

To change automatic hyphenation settings for a paragraph

1.	Select a paragraph.

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Properties.

3.	Click the General tab.

4.	Enable the Automatic Hyphenation check box.

5.	Choose a language from the Dictionary list box.

6.	Click the Settings button.

7.	In the Hyphenation Zones section, type a value in any of the following boxes:

•	Minimum Word Size To Hyphenate [image] defines the shortest word that can be hyphenated

•	Minimum Number Of Letters Before Hyphen box [image] defines the minimum number of letters before a hyphen

•	Minimum Number Of Letters After Hyphen box [image] defines the minimum number of letters after a hyphen

8.	Type a value in the Number Of Successive Hyphens box.

The value in the Number of Successive Hyphens box limits the number of lines in a sequence that can end with a hyphen.

9.	In the Allow Hyphens section, define any of the following:

•	At Column Or Page End check box [image] allows hyphenation of the last word in a column or at the end of a page when enabled

•	In Last Word Of Paragraph check box [image] allows hyphenation in the last word of a paragraph when enabled

•	In Uppercase Words check box [image] allows hyphenation in uppercase words when enabled

To change automatic hyphenation settings for a character tag

1.	Select text that is formatted with a character tag.

2.	Click Format, Character Tag Properties.

3.	Follows steps 3 to 9 from the previous procedure.

 Notes

•	To allow an unlimited number of lines to end with hyphens, enable the Unlimited check box in the Successive Hyphens section.

•	The value in the Number Of Successive Hyphens box applies to both automatic and discretionary hyphenation. For example, if you set this value to two, you cannot insert a discretionary hyphenation and make a third line end in a hyphen.

•	Settings in the Hyphenation Zone section of the Hyphenation Settings dialog box do not apply to words that contain discretionary hyphens.

•	When the In Uppercase Words check box is enabled, the setting applies to words that contain both automatic or discretionary hyphens.

 Related Topics


Inserting discretionary hyphens

A discretionary hyphen is a hyphen you insert manually. You can insert discretionary hyphens to customize your own hyphenation points for a word or to suppress automatic hyphenation in a word.

To insert a discretionary hyphen in a word

1.	Click in a word.

2.	Press CTRL + SHIFT + H.

To suppress automatic hyphenation for a word

1.	Click before the first letter of a word.

2.	Press CTRL + SHIFT + H.

 Notes

•	You cannot insert discretionary hyphens in a paragraph unless automatic hyphenation is enabled for that paragraph. For more information, see "Enabling automatic hyphenation."

•	By default, if a word includes both discretionary and automatic hyphenation, Corel VENTURA will decide which to use to break the word according to spelling and text flow. For information about changing the setting so that only the discretionary hyphen is used, see "Using only discretionary hyphens."

•	A discretionary hyphen disappears when the word in which it is inserted is not at the end of a line.

 Tips

•	Copy Editor view displays discretionary hyphens whether automatic hyphenation is enabled or disabled. To view hyphens in Page Layout view, click in the word, hold down CTRL + ALT, and press H. This will show you the automatic hyphenation points, as well as any discretionary hyphens you have added. You cannot view hyphens in Page Layout view unless automatic hyphenation is enabled.

•	The Markup code for a discretionary hyphen is [image].

 Related Topics


Using only discretionary hyphens

A discretionary hyphen is a hyphen you insert manually. A discretionary hyphen will appear on the screen and be printed only if the word in which it is inserted is at the end of a line. For example, if you add text before a word with a discretionary hyphen, and the word with the hyphen in it moves to the next line, the hyphen will not appear on screen or be printed.

You can suppress automatic hyphenation and use only discretionary hyphens in specific words, individual paragraphs, paragraph tags, and character tags. You can also suppress automatic hyphenation in words that already contain discretionary hyphens for an entire chapter. This allows you to use automatic hyphenation in a chapter, but disable it for certain paragraphs, characters, and words so that you can use discretionary hyphenation.

To use only discretionary hyphens in a chapter

1.	Click Publication, Chapter Properties.

2.	Click the Typography tab.

3.	Disable the Also Use Automatic Hyphenation Points check box.

To use only discretionary hyphens in a paragraph

1.	Select a paragraph.

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Properties.

3.	Click the General tab.

4.	Choose Discretionary Hyphenation Only from the Language list box.

5.	Click Publication, Chapter Properties.

6.	Click the Typography tab.

7.	Disable the Also Use Automatic Hyphenation Points check box.

To use only discretionary hyphens in a character tag

1.	Select text that is formatted with a character tag.

2.	Click Format, Character Tag Properties.

3.	Follow steps 3 to 7 from the previous procedure.

 Notes

•	Spell Checker and Grammatik use the default language (for example, English-U.S. for the English version of VENTURA 8) setting to check words and paragraphs that use the Discretionary Hyphenation Only option.

•	You can insert discretionary hyphens in a paragraph but they won't be applied unless automatic hyphenation is enabled for that paragraph. For more information, see "Enabling automatic hyphenation."

 Related Topics


Viewing hyphenation points in a word

You can view both the automatic and discretionary hyphenation points for any word when the Automatic Hyphenation check box is enabled for an individual paragraph, paragraph tag, or character tag. This can help you choose where to place discretionary hyphens.

To view hyphenation points in a word

1.	Click in a word.

2.	Press CTRL + ALT + H.

 Note

•	If you want to use only the discretionary hyphenation, click a word, then click Format, Paragraph Properties, and click the General Tab. Choose Discretionary Hyphenation Only from the Language list box.

 Related Topics


Choosing the language used to hyphenate text

Corel VENTURA 8 lets you hyphenate text that is written in a different language. By enabling the Automatic Hyphenation check box and assigning a language to an individual paragraph, a paragraph tag, or a character tag, Corel VENTURA hyphenates the text according to the hyphenation conventions for that language.

To use hyphenation for a language other than English, perform a custom install of Corel VENTURA and install the writing tools for that language.

To specify the language used to hyphenate a paragraph

1.	Click a paragraph.

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Properties.

3.	Click the General tab.

4.	Enable the Automatic Hyphenation check box.

5.	Choose a language from the Dictionary list box.

To specify the language used to hyphenate a character tag

1.	Select text that is formatted with a character tag.

2.	Click Format, Character Tag Properties.

3.	Follow steps 3 to 5 from the previous procedure.

 Note

•	The file extension for hyphenation word lists is .HYD.

 Related Topics


Editing the hyphenation exception list

You can use the hyphenation exception list (HYPHUSER.DIC) to customize your own list of words you either don't want to hyphenate or want to hyphenate differently. For example, you can type your company's name without hyphens in the hyphenation exception list and Corel VENTURA will not hyphenate it.

You can edit the hyphenation list using any text editor, including Microsoft Notepad or Microsoft Wordpad. If you use a text editor, save the file as ASCII text.

You can also edit the hyphenation exception list using the HyphenationEditor.CSC script. For more information about scripts, see "Recordings and scripts." For more information about scripts included with Corel VENTURA , see "Scripts and wizards included with Corel VENTURA".

You must use only lower case letters when adding words to the hyphenation exception list. The following are some examples of how to type words in the hyphenation exception list:

Type	Result

ventura	This word will never appear hyphenated.

eat-en	This word will hyphenate as necessary at the designated spot.

con-sid-er-able	This word will appear hyphenated as necessary in any of the three designated spots.

When you edit the hyphenation exception list, you must restart Corel VENTURA for your changes to take effect.

To edit the hyphenation exception list in a text editor

1.	Open the file HYPHUSER.DIC in a text editor.

2.	Type words you want to add to the hyphenation exception list.

3.	Save the file as ASCII text.

 Notes

•	You must save the hyphenation exception list to X:\COREL\GRAPHICS8\VENTURA folder with the filename HYPUSER.DIC. If your changes to the list do not appear in your text, check to see that you have saved the list to the proper folder with the proper filename.

•	You can use the hyphen key on the keyboard when you edit the hyphenation exception list.

 Related Topics


Installing third-party hyphenation lists

Third-party hyphenation lists are custom hyphenation lists not included with Corel VENTURA. These are most useful when you are using a language that was not supplied with Corel VENTURA, when you are using a dialect of a language supplied with Corel VENTURA, or when you are using word sets with large, complex words, such as scientific, engineering, or medical terminology. For information about developing your own hyphenation list, see the "Developing third-party hyphenation lists" in the online Help Reference section.

To install a third-party hyphenation list in Corel VENTURA

1.	Close Corel VENTURA.

2.	Copy the third-party hyphenation list (.VPH) file to the X:\COREL\GRAPHICS8\VENTURA folder where "X" indicates the drive letter where you installed Corel VENTURA.

3.	Open Corel VENTURA.

 Note

•	After a third-party hyphenation list is installed, you can apply it to paragraphs, paragraph tags, and character tags as you would a language. For more information about applying hyphenation lists, see "Choosing the language used to hyphenate text."

 Related Topics


Hyphenation in previous versions of Corel VENTURA

Previous versions of Corel VENTURA (3.x to 4.2) did not store the language list with the file. To use hyphenation in chapters created in previous versions of Corel VENTURA, you must choose the hyphenation language.

To use hyphenation in chapters created using previous versions of Corel VENTURA

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, click Save.

3.	Choose a language from the Default Language list box.

 Related Topics


Working with tabs


Overview: Working with tabs
Working with tabs

Tabs let you indent lines in a paragraph or align a list of items for better readability.

By default, tab stops are set at regular intervals determined by the unit of measurement you are using. You can add or remove tab stops, control the location and alignment of tab stops, choose the type of leader character used to fill the space created by the tab, and set the spacing between the leader characters. You can also use the horizontal ruler to set tabs.

 Related Topics


Inserting and removing tab stops

You can add tab stops to and remove them from individual paragraphs or paragraph tags. You can insert tab stops individually using the Paragraph Properties dialog box or the horizontal ruler, or you can have Corel VENTURA insert tab stops at evenly spaced intervals. The horizontal ruler lets you add and remove tabs, change the spacing of tabs, and view your publication at the same time.

To insert a tab stop using the Paragraph Properties dialog box

1.	Click a paragraph.

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Properties.

3.	Click the Tabs tab.

4.	Click the Add Tab button.

5.	Type a number in the active Position cell to specify the location of the tab.

 Note

•	The number in the Position cell is the position of the tab stop relative to the left margin of the page or frame.

To insert a tab stop using the horizontal ruler

1.	Click a paragraph.

2.	Click in the white area of the horizontal ruler to add a tab.

 Note

•	If the horizontal ruler does not appear, click View, Rulers.

To insert evenly spaced tab stops at specified intervals

1.	Click a paragraph.

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Properties.

3.	Click the Tabs tab.

4.	Type a number in the box beside the Set Tabs Every button to specify the interval at which the tabs are set.

5.	Click the Set Tabs Every button.

 Note

•	Adjusting the tab stops using the horizontal ruler adjusts the tab settings for the Body Text paragraph tag.

To remove a tab stop using the Paragraph Properties dialog box

1.	Select a paragraph.

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Properties.

3.	Click the Tabs tab.

4.	In the Position column, click the cell containing the tab that you want to delete.

5.	Click the Delete button.

To remove a tab stop using the horizontal ruler

1.	Select the paragraph.

2.	Click the tab you want to remove and drag it off the white area of the horizontal ruler.

 Tip

•	To clear all tab stops, right-click the white area in the horizontal ruler, and click Clear All Tabs.

 Related Topics


Changing the position of tab stops

You can change the position of a tab in a paragraph tag or paragraph using the Paragraph Tag Properties, Paragraph Properties dialog box, or the horizontal ruler. Using the Paragraph Tag Properties dialog box and Paragraph Properties dialog box gives you more control over the exact spacing of the tab stop than does using the horizontal ruler, which lets you change the position of the tab stop and view your publication at the same time.

To change the position of a tab stop

1.	Click a paragraph.

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Properties.

3.	Click the Tabs tab.

4.	In the Position column, click the cell containing the tab that you want to move.

5.	Type a value in the cell to specify a new position for the tab.

To change the position of a tab stop using the horizontal ruler

1.	Click a paragraph.

2.	Drag a tab marker to another position in the white area of the horizontal ruler.

 Related Topics


Specifying tab alignment

Tab alignment changes the way text is arranged when a tab stop is used. Tab alignment is especially useful when you have a column of text you want arranged in a specific way. For example, if you have a column of numbers, you can align them using the decimal point option.

To change the alignment of text relative to a tab stop

1.	Click a paragraph.

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Properties.

3.	Click the Tabs tab.

4.	In the Align column, click the cell that contains the alignment setting that you want to change.

5.	From the list box in the cell, choose one of the following:

•	Left [image] left aligns the text that follows the tab stop

•	Center [image] center aligns the text underneath the tab stop

•	Right [image] right aligns the text before the tab stop

•	Decimal [image] aligns the text to the left or right of a designated character (usually the decimal point)

 Tip

•	To use the default tab settings, click the Set Tabs Every button on the Tabs page of the Paragraph Properties dialog box (Format menu).

To change the alignment of a tab stop using the horizontal ruler

1.	Click a paragraph.

2.	Right-click the tab marker, and click an alignment option.

 Related Topics


Setting tab stops with leader characters

A leader is a string of characters that appears between items separated by tab stops. In the following example, the leader characters are the periods between "Item 1," "Item 2," and "Item 3."

Item 1 ....... Item 2 ....... Item 3

A leader helps draw the eye from one tab stop to the next, usually illustrating a relationship between information at the tab stops. For example, you can use leaders in a table of contents to show the page number that corresponds to a title.

A trailing leader starts after the last word in a paragraph and finishes at the right margin. You can use trailing leaders to create blanks in your publication that the reader can write in. For example, you can use trailing leaders to create questionnaires and forms.

You can set leaders for each tab stop, but only one trailing leader for each paragraph.

To set a tab stop with a leader character

1.	Click a paragraph.

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Properties.

3.	Click the Tabs tab.

4.	In the Leader column, click in the box that contains the tab you want to format.

5.	Choose a leader from the Leader list box.

6.	In the Spacing column, click in the box that corresponds to the same tab stop.

7.	Type the number of spaces you want between leader characters.

To set a trailing leader character

1.	Click a paragraph.

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Properties.

3.	Choose a character from the Character list box.

4.	Type a number in the Spacing box.

 Tip

•	To create a solid line, choose the underscore character (_) from the Character list box and type 0 in the Spacing box.

 Related Topics


Using character tags


Overview: Using character tags
Using character tags

Character tags contain information about the font, size, color, appearance, and hyphenation characteristics of a single character or selected text within your publication. When you use a tag to format characters or selected text, you can quickly apply formatting and make changes to each instance of that tag. For more information about tags, see "Managing tags and stylesheets."

 Related Topics


Creating character tags

You can create character tags from selected text or by using the Tag Window.

To create a character tag

1.	Select the text to which you want to apply a tag.

2.	Choose New Character Tag from the Character Tag List box on the Property Bar.

3.	Type a name in the New Tag Name box.

If you want to use the properties of an existing character tag, choose that tag from the Copy Properties From list box. Otherwise, proceed to step 4.

4.	Click the New Tag Properties button to format your tag.

5.	In the Character Tag Properties dialog box, choose the formatting options for your tag.

To create a character tag using the Tag Window

1.	Click Tools, Tag Window.

2.	Click the Character tab.

3.	Click the New Tag button.

4.	Follow steps 3 to 5 from the previous procedure.

 Note

•	For information about formatting selected text or characters, see "Setting text attributes for text and paragraphs."

 Related Topics


Applying character tags

Character tags are applied to specific characters or text in a paragraph. You can apply a character tag directly to selected text or by using the Tag Window.

To apply character tags

1.	Select the text.

2.	Choose a tag from the Character Tag list box on the Property Bar.

To apply a character tag using the Tag Window

1.	Select the text.

2.	Click Tools, Tag Window.

3.	Click the Character tab.

4.	Double-click the character tag you want to apply to the selected text.

 Note

•	If the selected text is already formatted with a paragraph tag, the character tag is applied over the paragraph tag. Attributes that are not defined by the character tag will change as the paragraph changes.

 Related Topics


Formatting character tags

When you change the formatting attributes of a character tag, the changes affect all of the text that references that character tag.

To format a character tag

1.	Click Tools, Tag Window.

2.	Click the Character tab.

3.	Click the tag you want to format.

4.	Click the Tag Properties button.

5.	In the Character Tag Properties dialog box, choose the formatting options for the character tag.

 Note

•	For more information about formatting selected text or characters, see "Setting text attributes for text and paragraphs."

 Related Topics


Using paragraph tags


Overview: Using paragraph tags
Using paragraph tags

A paragraph tag is a group of text attributes, such as font, line spacing, and alignment, that you can apply to text. Therefore, paragraph tags allow you to achieve quickly consistent formatting throughout a publication.

The paragraph tag properties are the same as the paragraph properties. These are:

•	font attributes

•	alignment

•	spacing

•	tabs

•	drop caps

•	bullets

•	breaks

•	typography

•	rules

You format paragraph tags the same way you format paragraphs. The only difference is that the formatting applies to each paragraph referencing that paragraph tag. For more information about formatting paragraphs, see "Working with paragraphs."

A tag does not prevent you from formatting a paragraph. If you want to apply formatting to a specific paragraph, such as changing the font or adding a drop cap, you can do so without affecting the tag and without affecting the other paragraphs using that tag. This is called overriding a tag. For more information about overriding tags, see "Overriding and updating tag properties."

 Related Topics


Creating paragraph tags

You can create paragraph tags by using a formatted paragraph in your publication or by using the Tag Window.

To create a paragraph tag using a formatted paragraph

1.	Select a formatted paragraph.

2.	Choose New Paragraph Tag from the Paragraph Tag List box on the Property Bar.

3.	Type a name for the new tag in the New Tag Name box.

4.	Choose Selected Paragraph from the Copy Properties From list box.

5.	Click the New Tag Properties button to format your tag.

6.	In the Paragraph Tag Properties dialog box, choose the formatting options for the paragraph tag.

 Note

•	For more information about formatting paragraphs, see "Formatting paragraphs."

To create a paragraph tag using the Tag Window

1.	Click Tools, Tag Window.

2.	 Click the Paragraph tab.

3.	Click the New Tag button.

4.	Follow steps 4 to 6 from the previous procedure.

 Tip

•	To create a new paragraph tag, you can also right-click the tag list in the Tag Window, and click New Paragraph Tag.

 Related Topics


Applying paragraph tags

By using the Property Bar or the Tag Window, you can apply paragraph tags at any time as you create your publication.

To apply a paragraph tag

1.	Select a paragraph.

2.	Choose a paragraph tag from the Paragraph Tag List box on the Property Bar.

To apply a paragraph tag using the Tag Window

1.	Select a paragraph.

2.	Click Tools, Tag Window.

3.	Click the Paragraph tab.

4.	Double-click the paragraph tag you want to apply to the selected paragraph.

 Tip

•	To select a paragraph, you can use the Pick tool, the Paragraph tool, or you can hold down ALT and click the paragraph with the Pick tool.

 Related Topics


Formatting paragraph tags

Corel VENTURA allows you to format a paragraph tag or to change the formatting of an existing paragraph tag. When you format a paragraph tag, each paragraph to which that tag is applied is automatically updated with the new formatting. You can also use a paragraph tag to view a paragraph's formatting differences. For more information about viewing a paragraph's formatting differences from its tag, see "Viewing formatting differences from an item's tag."

To format a paragraph tag using the Tag Window

1.	Click Tools, Tag Window.

2.	Click the Paragraph tab.

3.	Click the paragraph tag you want to format.

4.	Click the Tag Properties button.

5.	In the Paragraph Tag Properties dialog box, choose the formatting options for the paragraph.

 Note

•	You format a paragraph tag the same way you format a paragraph. For more information about formatting paragraphs, see "Formatting paragraphs."

 Related Topics


Creating toolbar buttons, menu commands, and keyboard shortcuts for paragraph tags

For quicker access to paragraph tags, you can create a menu command, toolbar button, or keyboard shortcut. For more information about creating menu commands, toolbar buttons, or keyboard shortcuts, see "Customizing menus, toolbars, and keyboard shortcuts."

To create a toolbar button for a paragraph tag

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, double-click Customize, and click Toolbars.

3.	In the Commands list, double-click Paragraph Tags.

4.	Click a paragraph tag.

5.	Drag a button from the Options dialog box to a toolbar.

 Tip

•	The Property Bar is a context sensitive toolbar, that is, its contents change depending on what you have selected. If you want the toolbar button to be displayed always, place it on a toolbar other than the Property Bar.

To create a menu command for a paragraph tag

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, double-click Customize, and click Menus.

3.	In the Commands list, double-click Paragraph Tags.

4.	Click a paragraph tag.

5.	Choose Main Menu from the Menu list box.

6.	In the list of menus, double-click the menu to which you want to add the command.

7.	Click the Add button.

8.	Click the Up or Down buttons to position the tag.

To create a keyboard shortcut for a paragraph tag

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, double-click Customize, and click Shortcut Keys.

3.	Double-click Paragraph Tags in the Commands list.

4.	Click a paragraph tag.

5.	Type the keyboard combination in the Press New Shortcut Key box.

You can have up to four layers of keyboard combinations beyond CTRL and ALT. For example, the key combination CTRL + ALT + 1, 2, 3, 4 is accomplished by holding down CTRL and ALT, and then pressing 1, 2, 3, and 4 in succession.

6.	Click the Assign button.

 Notes

•	The Assign button is disabled if the keyboard combination you want to use is assigned to another operation.

•	If you open a publication that does not use the same paragraph tag, the toolbar button, menu command, or keyboard shortcut will still exist, but they will not be applied to the paragraph tag.

 Related Topics


Using common tags with paragraph tags

A common tag provides an alternative to creating a toolbar button, menu command, or keyboard shortcut for a paragraph tag. Regular toolbar buttons, menu commands, and keyboard shortcuts apply to a Corel VENTURA workspace, not to a specific publication. Common tags apply to a specific publication. Therefore, if you open a publication on a different computer, the common tag keyboard shortcut will remain active. There are 10 common tag keyboard shortcuts (CTRL + 0 to CTRL + 9), which Corel VENTURA assigns to some of the default paragraph tags. However, you can change those assignments, and you can assign other common tag keyboard shortcuts to other paragraph tags.

To assign a paragraph tag to a common tag keyboard shortcut

1.	Click Tools, Tag Window.

2.	Click the Paragraph tab.

3.	Click in the Shortcut Key column for the paragraph tag to which you want to assign a common tag keyboard shortcut, and click again to open the list box.

A regular double-click applies the tag at the position of the cursor.

4.	Choose a Common Tag keyboard shortcut.

To apply a paragraph tag using a Common Tag keyboard shortcut

1.	Select a paragraph.

2.	Press the Common Tag keyboard shortcut for the paragraph tag you want to apply.

 Note

•	You can also assign common tags to toolbar buttons or menu commands. For more information, see "Customizing toolbars" or "Adding and removing Menu Bar menu commands."

 Related Topics


Setting paragraph tag sequences

By setting paragraph tag sequences, you can automatically apply the paragraph tag or the paragraph properties of the previous paragraph to the paragraph that follows. Tag sequencing is useful if you often apply the same paragraph tag in a publication, or if you want to apply the format of a paragraph to the paragraph that follows.

To set the next tag in a tag sequence

1.	Select a paragraph.

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Tag Properties.

3.	Click the Breaks tab.

4.	Choose an option from the Next Tag list box.

 Related Topics


Scripts for viewing paragraph tag properties

Corel VENTURA provides a number of scripts that let you view your paragraph tag properties. Scripts are a series of commands that are automatically performed for you when you run the script. The StylesheetInformation.csc script generates a list of the attributes of the paragraph tags in your publication. The TagSampler.csc script provides previews of the paragraph tags in your publication. For more information about using scripts, see "Using Corel SCRIPT." and "Recordings and scripts." For more information about scripts included with Corel VENTURA, see "Scripts and wizards included with Corel VENTURA."

To generate a list of paragraph tag attributes

1.	Click Tools, Corel SCRIPT, Run/Manage Scripts.

2.	Choose StylesheetInformation from the Available Scripts list box.

3.	Click Run.

4.	Follow the on-screen instructions provided by the Style Information wizard.

To preview paragraph tag formatting

1.	Click Tools, Corel SCRIPT, Run/Manage Scripts.

2.	Choose TagSampler from the Available Scripts list box.

3.	Click Run.

4.	Follow the on-screen instructions provided by the Tag Preview wizard.

 Note

•	The Stylesheet Information script generates a list of paragraph tags in any of the following formats: Corel VENTURA, Corel Quattro Pro, Corel SCRIPT, Microsoft Excel, or a text file.

 Related Topics


Updating paragraph tag properties

If you change the properties of a paragraph without updating or changing its paragraph tag, a flag ( [image]) appears in the Paragraph Tag List box to indicate that the selected paragraph has the paragraph tag applied to it but also has additional formatting not defined by the paragraph tag. You can then create a new tag from the paragraph or update the paragraph tag. For information about creating a new paragraph tag, see "Creating paragraph tags."

To update paragraph tag properties

1.	Select a formatted paragraph.

If a flag ( [image]) appears in the Paragraph Tag List box, proceed to step 2.

2.	Choose Update "selected paragraph tag name" from the Paragraph Tag List box on the Property Bar.

 Note

•	You can also update formatting changes to paragraph tags automatically. For more information, see "Automatically updating paragraph tags."

 Tip

•	To update a paragraph tag, you can also click the Update Tag button in the Paragraph Properties dialog box.

 Related Topics


Automatically updating paragraph tags

Corel VENTURA lets you choose whether a paragraph tag is automatically updated when you use the Property Bar to change the following properties of the tag: alignment, font, font style, font size, and underline options. When you update the tag, all paragraphs in your publication that reference that tag are also updated.

To allow paragraph tags to be updated automatically

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, click General.

3.	Enable the Tag Paragraph Mode button.

 Related Topics


Autonumbering paragraphs formatted with tags

Using the Autonumbering feature, you can automatically number paragraphs that have been formatted with tags. The paragraph numbering begins with the start number you specify. If you want to restart the numbering or create two or more lists of automatically numbered paragraphs in the same chapter, you must use a break tag to reset the automatic counter and begin counting at the next paragraph defined as a level 1 Autonumbering paragraph.

The following picture shows autonumbering of tag-formatted paragraphs.

You can apply different numbering formats to selected paragraph tags only; however, you can apply Autonumbering across different chapters and disable it for others. You can create numbered lists that are structured using multiple levels (for example, headings and subheadings) that have a different numbering style.

To number paragraphs using a preset style

1.	Click Publication, Chapter Properties.

2.	Click the Autonumbering tab.

3.	Enable the Autonumbering check box.

4.	Click the Presets button.

5.	Click in one of the preset autonumbering boxes.

To number paragraphs using a custom style

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	In the Level box, type the number of autonumbering levels.

3.	In the Include column, enable the check box to include the number of the previous paragraph.

4.	In the Prefix or Suffix columns, type the character you want to use to separate paragraph numbers.

5.	Click in the Number Style box, and choose a style from the list box.

6.	Click the Paragraph Tag box, and choose a paragraph tag you want to number.

7.	In the Start No box, type a starting number for each level you use.

 Tip

•	To add the Chapter Number and the Tag Character options to the Prefix and Suffix columns, click in a box, click the Insert button, and choose an option.

To use a break tag to restart autonumbering

1.	Click Tools, Tag Window.

2.	Click the Paragraph tab.

3.	Click the New Tag button.

4.	Type a tag name in the New Paragraph Tag box (for example, "Break Tag").

5.	From the Copy Properties From list box, choose the tag on which you want to base the break tag, and click OK.

6.	Select the paragraph you want to use to restart autonumbering.

7.	Choose the break tag from the Paragraph Tag List box on the Property Bar.

 Note

•	When you use a break tag, make sure you do not use it for any formatting other than to restart paragraph numbering.

To stop and restart autonumbering at a specific position

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the "To number paragraphs using a preset style" procedure.

2.	In the Level box, type the number of autonumbering levels you want to use.

Add an extra number for the break tag.

3.	Click in the Number Style box, and choose None from the list box.

4.	Click in the Paragraph Tag box for Level 1, and choose the break tag you've created.

5.	Type a starting value of 0 in the Start box.

6.	Follow steps 2 to 7 from the "To number paragraphs using a custom style" procedure to define the remaining levels.

7. Click OK.

8.	Click Publication, Update Autonumbering.

To apply autonumbering across chapters

1.	Position the cursor in a chapter following the chapter to which Autonumbering has been applied.

2.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the "To number paragraphs using a preset style" procedure.

3.	Enable the Across Chapters check box.

To disable autonumbering in a chapter

1.	Place the cursor in a chapter.

2.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the "To number paragraphs using a preset style" procedure.

3.	Disable the Autonumbering check box.

To update autonumbering

•	Click Publication, Update Autonumbering.

 Notes

•	To use autonumbering in frames, the text files must be named. For information about naming text files, see "Adding text files to frames."

•	You cannot use the AutoNumbering feature to number paragraphs in a table.

•	If you have added paragraphs among automatically numbered paragraphs, you will have to update the publication.

 Tip

•	To update autonumbering, you can also click Publication, Update Publication, and enable the items you want to update.

 Related Topics


Inserting symbols, special characters, and variables


Overview: Inserting symbols, special characters, and variables
Inserting symbols, special characters, and variables

Corel VENTURA allows you to insert symbols and special characters in text. Symbols and special characters are extended characters in a font. Symbols are characters that are neither numbers nor letters (for example, [image], [image]); special characters are typographic characters (for example, [image], or em ( [image]) and en ( [image]) dashes). Most fonts contain a mixture of symbols and special characters that you can use in addition to the letters, numbers, symbols, and punctuation marks available on your keyboard. Some fonts may not include the same characters as others.

You can also insert complex mathematical equations or expressions into your publications as typeset text. For example, if your publication is a scientific newsletter, you can easily add any necessary equations. Equations are inserted as objects in your publication and do not have to be placed within a table or produce results (like functions and formulas).

A number of preset equations are available, as are the tools and symbols to develop your own equations. When you create an equation, Corel VENTURA inserts it into your publication as a single item within the text or, if you prefer, within a frame. Therefore, you cannot edit the equation within the body of the text. You can only edit an equation using the Edit Equation dialog box. For more information about using equations, see "Working with Equations" in the online Help reference section.

Included with Corel VENTURA is Corel BARCODE Wizard. This tool steps you through the process of creating your own bar codes for a wide range of industry-standard formats.

You can also use variables in your publication. A variable contains text that changes according to the variable's current definition. Variables are used to insert information that is likely to change as you're creating your publication (for example, document version numbers or names of customers or products). When you update your publication, Corel VENTURA inserts the variable current definition at all specified locations in the publication.

 More Detailed Information
 Related Topics


Adding symbols and special characters


Overview: Adding symbols and special characters
Adding symbols and special characters

You can use the Insert Symbol dialog box to insert symbols and special characters into your publication. The Insert Symbol dialog box contains two pages: the Symbols page and the Special Characters page. The Symbols page displays all the characters available for a given font; the Special Characters page provides a list of the most commonly used typographical characters.

The following picture shows the symbols available on the Symbols page.

You can add symbols and special characters into your publication in the following ways:

•	Choose a symbol or special character from the Insert Symbol dialog box.

•	Type the ANSI code for the symbol or special character that you want to insert.

•	Assign a keyboard shortcut to the symbols and special characters that you use most often, and use that shortcut to insert the item into your text.

•	Assign the symbols and special characters that you use most often to a menu or a toolbar.

•	Use Type Assist to insert special characters that do not appear on your keyboard. For example, you can create a replacement for /R that would automatically insert the ® character. For more information, see "Adding and deleting Type Assist replacements."

 Related Topics


Using the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) character set

The ANSI character set is a standardized numeric code that contains more than 200 numbers, letters, and symbols. Each character is represented by an ANSI numeric code (for example, the ANSI code for the uppercase letter "L" is 76). The ANSI codes for each letter, number, and symbol always remain the same, regardless of the font you are using. For more information about using ANSI codes, see "Character sets and ANSI codes" in the online Help Reference section.

To insert a symbol or special character by typing its ANSI code

1.	Position the cursor where you want a symbol to appear.

2.	From the Font list box on the Property Bar, choose the font in which the symbol or special character appears.

3.	Press NUM LOCK.

4.	Press ALT, and using the numeric keypad, type 0 followed by the appropriate three-digit ANSI code on the numeric keypad.

To determine the ANSI code for a symbol or special character

1.	Click Insert, Symbol.

2.	Click the Symbols tab.

3.	Choose a symbol or special character from the list.

The corresponding ANSI code appears in the top left corner of the Symbol page.

 Note

•	Before you insert a symbol or special character using its ANSI code, you must choose the font in which the symbol or special character appears. Otherwise, the character that appears may not be the same character you chose.

 Related Topics


Inserting symbols and special characters

Corel VENTURA lets you insert special characters and symbols wherever you need them in your publication. The Insert Symbol dialog box lets you choose common typographic characters from the Special Characters page, while the Symbols page displays all of the available characters for the selected font. The dialog box remains open until you click the Close button.

When you choose a symbol on the Symbols page, the corresponding American National Standards Institute (ANSI) code appears in the top right corner. You can use this ANSI code to insert the symbol into your publication without opening the Insert Symbol dialog box. For information about assigning keyboard shortcuts to symbols or special characters, see "Assigning keyboard shortcuts to symbols and special characters."

To insert a symbol

1.	Position the cursor where you want a symbol to appear.

2.	Click Insert, Symbol.

3.	Click the Symbols tab.

4.	Choose a font from the Font list box.

5.	Choose a symbol from the list of symbols.

6.	Click the Insert button.

 NoteS

•	Font properties determine which fonts are listed in the Font list box.

•	If you want to insert a symbol without using the mouse, select the symbol by navigating with the arrow keys, then click ENTER, TAB, ENTER.

To insert a special character

1.	Position the cursor where you want a special character to appear.

2.	Click Insert, Symbol.

3.	Click the Special Characters tab.

4.	Choose a special character from the list of characters.

5.	Click the Insert button.

To insert a symbol or special character using a keyboard shortcut

1.	Position the cursor where you want a symbol or special character to appear.

2.	From the Font list box on the Property Bar, choose the font in which the symbol appears.

3.	Press the keyboard shortcut.

 Note

•	Reserved or invalid symbols are often displayed with a square ( [image]). The space character (ANSI 32) is usually displayed as a blank cell in the top left corner of the list.

 Tips

•	To see an enlarged view of a symbol in the Insert Symbol dialog box, hold down the mouse button as you click the symbol.

•	To open the Insert Symbol dialog box, you can also click the Insert Symbol button on the Standard toolbar.

 Related Topics


Assigning keyboard shortcuts to symbols and special characters

You can assign keyboard shortcuts to the symbols and special characters that you use most often. When you assign a shortcut to a symbol, you are assigning the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) code for that symbol to the keyboard shortcut. You can assign a keyboard shortcut key to a symbol only if the symbol has an ANSI value of 128 or greater. For more information about keyboard shortcuts, see "Assigning and deleting keyboard shortcuts." For more information about inserting symbols and special characters using keyboard shortcuts, see "Inserting symbols and special characters."

To assign keyboard shortcuts to special characters

1.	Click Insert, Symbol.

2.	Click the Special Characters tab.

3.	Choose a special character to which you want to assign a keyboard shortcut.

4.	Click the Shortcut Key button.

5.	Double-click the Common Symbols folder in the Commands list.

6.	Choose the special character from the Commands list.

7.	Type a key combination (for example, ALT + T) in the Press New Shortcut Key box.

8.	If the keyboard shortcut is already assigned to another command, do any of the following:

•	Type another key combination in the Press New Shortcut Key box.

•	Enable the Delete Conflicting Shortcut check box to remove the keyboard shortcut from the command to which it is currently assigned.

•	Enable the Navigate To Conflict On Assign check box to remove automatically the old key combination and assign a new combination to the command.

9.	Click the Assign button.

To assign keyboard shortcuts to symbols

1.	Click Insert, Symbol.

2.	Click the Symbol tab.

3.	Choose a symbol from the list, and note the ANSI code that appears in the top left corner of the Symbol page.

4.	Click the Shortcut Key button.

5.	Double-click the Extended Characters folder in the Commands list.

6.	Choose the ANSI code for the symbol from the Commands list.

7.	Follow steps 7 to 9 from the previous procedure.

 Note

•	If you want to insert a symbol using a keyboard shortcut, you must choose the font in which the symbol appears before you press the key combination.

 Related Topics


Assigning symbols and special characters to menus and toolbars

You can add symbols and special characters to menus and toolbars. When you assign a symbol or special character, you are assigning the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) code for that symbol or special character to the menu or toolbar. Therefore, you must know the ANSI code for the symbol or special character before you can assign it to a menu or toolbar. For more information about determining the ANSI code for symbols or special characters, see "Inserting symbols and special characters."

To add a special character to a menu

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, double-click Customize, and click Menus.

3.	Double-click the Special Characters folder in the Commands list.

4.	Choose a special character from the Commands list.

5.	Choose Main Menu from the Menu list box.

6.	In the list of menus, double-click the menu to which you want to add the special character.

7.	Click the Add button.

To add a special character to a toolbar

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, double-click Customize, and click Toolbars.

3.	Double-click the Common Symbols folder in the Commands list.

4.	Click the special character name in the Commands list.

5.	Drag the button to the toolbar.

 Tip

•	To choose a special character, you can also click the Special Character button that appears to the right of the Commands list.

To add symbols to a menu

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, double-click Customize, and click Menus.

3.	Double-click the Extended Characters folder in the Commands list.

4.	Choose a symbol from the Commands list.

5.	Choose Main Menu from the Menu list box.

6.	In the list of menus, double-click the menu to which you want to add the symbol.

7.	Click the Add button.

To add symbols to a toolbar

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, double-click Customize, and click Toolbars.

3.	Double-click the Extended Characters folder in the Commands list.

4.	Choose a symbol from the Commands list.

A box appears around the button that corresponds to the symbol you select.

5.	Drag the button to the toolbar.

 Note

•	You can add special characters and symbols to menus and toolbars only if the symbol or special character has an ANSI value of 128 or greater.

•	Before using a menu or toolbar to insert a special character or symbol, you must choose the font in which the symbol appears.

 Related Topics


Adding the date and time to a publication


Overview: Adding the date and time to a publication
Adding the date and time to a publication

Corel VENTURA lets you insert the date and time in a number of preset formats. You can also create your own format for the date and time, insert the date and time in different languages, and update the date and time whenever you update your publication.

 Related Topics


Inserting the date and time

You can insert the date, the time, or both anywhere in your publication by using a preset format. When you insert the date and time as characters, Corel VENTURA inserts your computer's current date and time as characters (for example, 31-Oct-97).

To insert the date and time using a preset format

1.	Position the cursor where you want the date and time to appear.

2.	Click Insert, Date & Time.

3.	Choose a format from the Formats list.

4.	Choose a language from the Language list box.

To set system short date and long date styles

1.	Click Start, Settings, Control Panel.

2.	Double-click Regional Settings.

3.	Click the Date tab.

4.	Choose any of the options from the Short Date Style or the Long Date Style list boxes.

 Note

•	When you insert the date and time code and enable the Update With Publication Numbering check box, Corel VENTURA inserts the date and time as a markup code (for example, <<$Xenud-MMM-yy>>), displaying the date and time that you last used when you saved your publication or when you updated the numbering in your publication. To update numbering, click Publication, Update Publicaton.

 Tip

•	To open the Insert Date & Time dialog box, click the Insert button, and click the Date & Time button.

 Related Topics


Customizing date and time formats

Corel VENTURA lets you create your own date and time format by typing the appropriate codes in the order in which you want the date and time to appear. The Sample box shows a preview of your custom format.

You can save a custom format when you insert it, and you can delete it when it is no longer needed. Use the codes in the tables below to customize formats for the date and time. Since the format codes are case sensitive, you must use uppercase characters where it is indicated in the list. You can also use spaces, colons, and other characters in your formats that are not used as codes.

To insert a custom date and time

1.	Position the cursor where you want the date and time to appear.

2.	Click Insert, Date & Time.

3.	Choose a language for the date and time from the Language list box.

4.	Click the Custom button.

5.	Type the format codes you want to use in the Format String box (see tables below).

To save a custom date and time

1.	Follow steps 1 to 5 from the previous procedure.

2.	Click Save.

To delete a custom date and/or time

1.	Click Insert, Date & Time.

2.	Choose the custom format from the Formats list.

3.	Click the Custom button.

4.	Click the Delete button.

To display date codes	Type this format code

Day of the month (1 [image] 31)	d

Day of the month (01 [image] 31)	dd

Day of the week (Sun [image] Sat)	ddd

Day of the week (Sunday [image] Saturday)	dddd

Day as an ordinal (for example, 13th, 3rd)	dt

Week of the year, numerical (for example, 1 [image] 54)	w

Week of the year, numerical (for example, 01 [image] 54)	ww

Month (1 [image] 12)	M

Month (01 [image] 12)	MM

Month (Jan [image] Dec)	MMM

Month (January [image] December)	MMMM

Day of the year (1 [image] 366)	y

Day of the year (001 [image] 366)	yyy

Year (00 [image] 99)	yy

Year (1900 [image] 2099)	yyyy

Day, month, or year in Roman numerals	Type "R" or "r" after the day, month, or year code

Quarter of the year (e.g. 1st , 2nd, 3rd, 4th) 	qt

To display time codes	Type this format code

Hours as 0 [image] 12 (12 [image] hour clock)	h

Hours as 00 [image] 12 (12 [image] hour clock)	hh

Hours as 0 [image] 23 (24 [image] hour clock)	H

Hours as 00 [image] 23 (24 [image] hour clock)	HH

Minutes as 0 [image] 59	m

Minutes as 00 [image] 59	mm

Seconds as 0 [image] 59	s

Seconds as 00 [image] 59	ss

AM/PM in lowercase	a

AM/PM in uppercase 	A

 Tip

•	To include your own text before or after the date and time format codes, type the text in quotation marks. For example, if you type the following in the Format String box:

"Today's date is:" dd/mm/yy

the date and time display as follows:

Today's date is: 01/08/97

 Related Topics


Using variables


Overview: Using variables
Using variables

Variables allow you to mark text that you know will change (for example, dates, publication version numbers, and names of customers or products). Once you define a variable marker, you can insert it in your publication, or you can delete it either individually or globally.

The following picture shows a variable defined as John Doe (on the left). The variable has been changed to Bob Smith (on the right).

You can also edit and rename a variable definition. When you change a variable, Corel VENTURA substitutes the new definition for the variable at each location of the variable marker.

 Related Topics


Defining and inserting variable markers

You can define as many variable markers as required, and you can insert them in any location in your publication.

To define a variable marker

1.	Click Publication, Publication Properties.

2.	Click the Replacements tab.

3.	Enable the Variable Definition button.

4.	Type a name for the marker in the Variable Marker box.

5.	In the Substitutions box, type the text you want to display at the location of the variable marker.

6.	Click the Add button.

7.	Repeat steps 4 to 6 for every variable marker you want to define.

To insert a variable marker in your publication

1.	Click where you want the variable marker to appear in your publication.

2.	Click Insert, Variable.

3.	Choose a variable from the Name list.

 Notes

•	If the Show Tabs & Returns button is enabled, a variable marker is indicated by a red degree symbol ( [image]) in Page Layout view.

•	A variable marker has the following coding in red text (<$R[V*, ... ]>) in Copy Editor view.

 Tip

•	To edit a variable definition, click the Define button in the Insert Variable Marker dialog box.

 Related Topics


Editing a variable definition

When you need to update information in your publication, such as a name or address, you can edit the variable definition by defining new substitution text. All occurrences of the variable marker will display the new definition. You can also rename a variable marker.

To edit a variable definition

1.	Click Publication, Publication Properties.

2.	Click the Replacements tab.

3.	Click the Variable Definition button.

4.	Choose the variable you want to edit from the Variable Marker list box.

5.	Type new definition for the variable marker in the Substitutions box.

To rename a variable marker

1.	Follow steps 1 to 5 from the previous procedure.

2.	Type a new name in the Variable Marker box.

3.	Click the Rename button.

 Notes

•	When you rename a variable marker, the definition of the variable marker is removed (for example, variable markers inserted into your publication will no longer have a definition and their substitution text won't appear). To update previous markers for a renamed variable marker, you have to reinsert them individually. For more information about inserting variables, see "Defining and inserting variable markers."

•	In Page Layout view, a nonprinting marker (a round circle bitmap) is placed in the text to indicate that hidden text is inserted. The marker is displayed only when the Show Tabs & Returns button is enabled.

•	A variable marker is indicated by a red degree symbol ( [image]) in Page Layout view.

•	A variable marker has the following coding (<$R[V*, ... ]>) in Copy Editor view.

 Tip

•	Variable markers are indicated by a [image] icon in the VENTURA Navigator window. To view variable markers in the VENTURA Navigator window, click Tools, VENTURA Navigator, and choose Numbers/Cross-references from the VENTURA Navigator list box. You can then right-click the variable marker, and click Go To, to display the marker in the publication.

 Related Topics


Deleting variable markers

You can delete variable markers from a publication either individually or globally.

To delete an individual variable marker in Page Layout view

1.	Click View, Page Layout.

2.	Click immediately in front of the variable marker that you want to delete.

3.	Press DELETE.

 Note

•	A variable marker is indicated by a red degree symbol ( [image]) in Page Layout view.

To delete an individual variable marker in Copy Editor view

1.	Click View, Copy Editor.

2.	Follow steps 2 and 3 from the previous procedure.

 Note

•	A variable marker has the following coding in red text (<$R[V*, ... ]>) in Copy Editor view.

To delete a variable marker globally

1.	Click Publication, Publication Properties.

2.	Click the Replacements tab.

3.	Click the Variable Definition button.

4.	Choose a variable from the Variable Marker list.

5.	Click the Delete button.

 Related Topics


Inserting hidden text


Overview: Inserting hidden text
Inserting hidden text

The Insert Hidden Text command allows you to add comments to your files that are not to be displayed or printed. You can insert hidden text in both Page Layout view and Copy Editor view; however, hidden text is visible only when you are in Copy Editor view.

To insert hidden text

1.	Place the cursor where you want to type hidden text.

2.	Press ALT + SHIFT + H.

3.	Type text in the Insert Hidden Text dialog box.

 Notes

•	In Copy Editor view, hidden text is displayed in red and is surrounded by the hidden text codes.

•	If hidden text in Copy Editor view is not visible, enable the Show Codes button.

•	In Page Layout view, a nonprinting marker ( [image]) is placed in the text to indicate that hidden text is inserted. The marker is displayed when the Show Tabs & Returns button is enabled.

 Tips

•	To hide text that is otherwise visible in the body of your publication, either change the font color to match the background of a paragraph or use object conditions. For more information about font colors, see "Applying text attributes." For more information about object conditions, see "Defining a publication's conditions."

•	You can also use the Insert Hidden Text command to insert hidden text. However, you need to add it to a menu first. For more information about adding a command to a menu, see "Customizing menus, toolbars, and keyboard shortcuts."

 Related Topics


Inserting bar code objects


Overview: Inserting and editing bar code objects
Inserting and editing bar code objects

You can create and edit your own bar codes in Corel VENTURA using the Bar Code wizard.

To insert bar code objects

1.	Select the frame you want to add a bar code to.

2.	Click Insert, Object.

3.	Click Corel BARCODE 8.0 from the Object Type list.

4.	Follow the steps provided by Corel BARCODE Wizard.

You can click the Back button at any time to make changes to a previous step.

Click the Help button at any time for more information.

5.	Preview your bar code and make changes, if required.

To edit bar code objects

1.	Double-click the bar code object you want to edit.

2.	Follow step 4 from the previous procedure.

 Note

•	Bar codes generated by the Bar Code wizard are OLE objects and as such cannot be rotated in Corel VENTURA.

 Related Topics


Defining text-before or text-after settings


Overview: Defining text-before or text-after settings
Defining text-before or text-after settings

Corel VENTURA lets you define and edit text that will appear before or after selected paragraphs, paragraph tags, or character tags throughout your publication. For example, if a paragraph tag is applied to information taken from another source, you can define a text-after reference containing the source information and set your paragraph tag to place that text always after the paragraph. Because you can define any number of text-before or text-after references, you can have one for each source you reference in your publication.

 Related Topics


Defining text-before or text-after settings for a publication

Text-before and text-after settings are defined for the publication as a whole and then applied to any paragraph, paragraph tag, or character tag in your publication.

To set text-before or text-after properties for a publication

1.	Click Publication, Publication Properties.

2.	Click the Replacements tab.

3.	Enable the Text Before/After button.

4.	Type a name for the text in the Name box.

5.	Type the text you want to insert before or after any paragraph tag or character tag.

6.	Click the Add button.

7.	Repeat steps 4 to 6 for every text-before and text-after reference.

 Related Topics


Defining text-before or text-after settings for a publication's components

Once you define text-before or text-after references, you can apply them to paragraph tags or character tags and display the text before or after every character or paragraph referencing the tag. You can also apply it to individual paragraphs throughout your publication. For more information about defining your text-before or text-after settings, see "Defining text-before or text-after settings for a publication."

To set text-before and text-after references for a paragraph or for a paragraph tag

1.	Click Format, Paragraph Properties.

2.	Click the General tab.

3.	Choose a text reference name from the Before list box.

4.	Choose a text reference name from the After list box.

 Note

•	To set text-before or text-after references for a paragraph tag, you can also use the Paragraph Tag Properties command.

To set text-before and text-after references for a character tag

1.	Click Tools, Tag Window.

2.	Click the Character tab.

3.	Right-click a character tag to which you want to add text before or after, and click Character Tag Properties.

5.	Click the Font tab.

6.	Follow steps 3 and 4 from the previous procedure.

 Tip

•	To define text-before and text-after settings, you can also click the Define button in the Text Before/After section of the Paragraph Properties dialog box.

 Related Topics


Creating publications with conditions


Overview: Creating publications with conditions
Creating publications with conditions

By creating a publication with conditions, you can include or exclude text, depending on the parameters (conditions) set by you.

The following picture shows three publications with conditions applied to a frame. Each frame displays a different picture but the publications are the same.

You can apply conditions to the following components of a publication: chapters, paragraphs, frames, tables, paragraph tags, and frame tags. Components to which conditions haven't been assigned are displayed regardless of the publication's conditions.

AND, OR, and NOT Boolean operators

You can also apply Boolean operators [image] AND, OR, and NOT [image] to your publication. These Boolean operators, which are especially useful for creating multilingual publications, allow you to create publications with various combinations of conditions.

For example, suppose you were producing a publication in three languages: English, French, and Italian. The following table shows how you can use the operators to control the version of the publication in which a particular component appears:

Use this operator...	To...

AND; for example, English + French	Display/print text when English and French are both enabled

OR; for example, English | French	Display/print text when English and/or French are enabled

NOT, for example, English + French + ! Italian	Display/print text when English and French are enabled, but not when Italian is enabled

 Related Topics


Defining a publication's conditions

Before applying conditions to one or more elements of your publication, you have to define the conditions you want to use.

To define a publication's conditions

1.	Click Publication, Publication Properties.

2.	Click the Conditions tab.

3.	In the list box, type a name for the condition you want to add to the publication.

4.	Click the Add button.

5.	Repeat steps 1 to 4 for each condition you want to define.

 Notes

•	If you use spaces in condition names, the names appear without spaces in the condition table on the left side of the dialog box.

•	You can also define a publication's conditions by right-clicking on a publication in the VENTURA Navigator and choosing Publication Properties.

 Related Topics


Applying conditions to a chapter

You can apply conditions to individual chapters in your publication.

To apply conditions to a chapter

1.	Click Tools, VENTURA Navigator.

2.	Right-click the chapter for which you want to assign conditions, and click Chapter Properties.

3.	Click the General tab.

4.	Click the Conditions button.

5.	Choose a condition from the Conditions Available list.

6.	Click the Add button.

7.	Click any of the following buttons to apply advanced Boolean conditions:

•	And + [image] to display or print the chapter when two conditions are enabled

•	Or | [image] to display or print the chapter when one or more conditions are enabled

•	Not !to exclude the chapter when a condition is enabled

8.	Choose another condition from the Conditions Available list if you have used any of the options in step 7.

 Note

•	For more information about using the AND, OR, and NOT Boolean operators, see "Creating publications with conditions."

 Tip

•	You can also set a publication's conditions by clicking the Conditions button on the General page of the Chapter Properties dialog box (Publication menu).

 Related Topics


Applying conditions to paragraphs, frames, and tables

You can apply conditions to any paragraph, frame, or table in your publication. Depending on the conditions set, you can choose to display or hide a paragraph, frame, or table. For more information about defining a publication's conditions, see "Defining a publication's conditions."

To apply conditions to a paragraph

1.	Select a paragraph.

2.	Click Format, Conditions.

3.	Choose a condition from the Conditions Available list.

4.	Click the Add button.

5.	Click any of the following buttons to apply advanced Boolean conditions:

•	And + [image] to display or print a paragraph when two conditions are enabled

•	Or | [image] to display or print a paragraph when one or more conditions are enabled

•	Not !to exclude a paragraph when a condition is enabled

6.	Choose another condition from the Conditions Available list if you have used any of the options in step 5.

To apply conditions to a frame

1.	Select a frame.

2.	Click Format, Conditions.

3.	Choose a condition from the Conditions Available list.

4.	Click the Add button.

5.	Click any of the following buttons to apply advanced Boolean conditions:

•	And + [image] to display or print a frame when two conditions are enabled

•	Or | [image] to display or print a frame when one or more conditions are enabled

•	Not !to exclude a frame when a condition is enabled

6.	Choose another condition from the Conditions Available list if you have used any of the options in step 5.

To apply conditions to a table

1.	Click in a table.

2.	Click Format, Conditions.

3.	Choose a condition from the Conditions Available list.

4.	Click the Add button.

5.	Click any of the following buttons to apply advanced Boolean conditions:

•	And + [image] to display or print a table when two conditions are enabled

•	Or | [image] to display or print a table when one or more conditions are enabled

•	Not !to exclude a table when a condition is enabled

6.	Choose another condition from the Conditions Available list if you have used any of the options in step 5.

 Notes

•	Components of your publication that do not have a condition assigned to them always display and print.

•	If you want to use a frame that is anchored to a paragraph and that is either shown or hidden along with the paragraph, you must assign the same condition to both the frame and the paragraph.

•	For more information about using the AND, OR, and NOT Boolean operators, see "Creating publications with conditions."

 Related Topics


Applying conditions to paragraph tags and frame tags

You can use tags to apply conditions to a publication's components. When you set conditions as part of a paragraph tag's or frame tag's properties, you can apply the tag to a paragraph or frame to set conditions in the publication.

To apply conditions to a paragraph tag

1.	Click a paragraph formatted with the tag to which you want to apply conditions.

2.	Click Format, Tag Conditions.

3.	Choose a condition from the Conditions Available list.

4.	Click the Add button.

5.	Click any of the following buttons to apply advanced Boolean conditions:

•	And + [image] to display or print the item when two conditions are enabled

•	Or | [image] to display or print the item when one or more conditions are enabled

•	Not !to exclude the item when a condition is enabled

6.	Choose another condition from the Conditions Available list if you have used any of the options in step 5.

To apply conditions to a frame tag

1.	Click a frame formatted with the tag to which you want to apply conditions.

2.	Follow steps 2 to 6 from the previous procedure.

 Note

•	For more information about using the AND, OR, and NOT Boolean operators, see "Creating publications with conditions."

 Tip

•	You can also set a publication's conditions by clicking the Set Publication Conditions button in the Conditions dialog box.

 Related Topics


Setting a publication's conditions

After you have defined conditions for a publication, you can determine which components are displayed in the publication. For more information about defining conditions for a publication, see "Defining a publication's conditions."

To set a publication's conditions

1.	Click Publication, Publication Properties.

2.	Click the Conditions tab.

3.	In the On column, click one or more check boxes to enable or disable any of the available conditions.

 Notes

•	Components of your publication that do not have a condition assigned to them always display and print.

•	For information about defining conditions, see "Defining a publication's conditions."

 Related Topics


Using frames


Overview: Using frames
Using frames

Frames are a basic design element of all Corel VENTURA publications. Every item you add to a publication, such as text, a picture, or a table, is placed in a frame. Frames give you flexibility in your publication layout because they do not restrict you to a continuous text flow. You can use frames to continue stories from page to page or to create special effects with pictures and text. You can also place frames on the page tags so that they appear throughout a publication.

While this chapter deals with the frames you create using the Frame Tool flyout, Corel VENTURA also lets you use five other types of frames. These frame types are discussed in the chapters referred to below.

This picture shows the different frame types.

Page

Pages contain the main text of publications and allow text to flow continuously. Each page has a page tag associated with it. Page tags were referred to as Master Pages in previous versions of Corel VENTURA. They let you set up items such as headers and footers, repeating frames, page margins, and orientation for any number of pages in your publication. However, you can change a page without changing the page tag. For example, you can draw a frame on the page, or change the page margins, without affecting the page tag. For more information about pages, see "Formatting pages."

Header and footer frames

Header and footer frames appear at the top and bottom of the page and are placed on the page tag. Header and footer frames can adjust automatically when text is added or deleted. For more information, see "Using headers and footers."

Caption frames

Caption frames let you add text to a frame to explain or identify its contents. For more information, see "Working with caption frames."

Footnote frames

Footnote frames appear at the bottom of the page and hold footnote text. They can adjust automatically when text is added or deleted. For more information, see "Inserting footnotes."

 More Detailed Information


Creating and deleting frames


Overview: Creating and deleting frames
Creating and deleting frames

Frames are drawn with the Frame tool and can contain text, pictures, and fills. You can specify that the cursor be automatically placed in each frame you create. By default, the cursor is not automatically planted in frames.

You can delete most frames that you no longer want in your publication; however, you cannot delete header, footer, and footnote frames.

 Related Topics


Drawing a frame

You can create and situate frames anywhere in a publication using the Frame tool. The Frame Tool flyout lets you chose from a number of predesigned Frame tool shapes. For example, you can create heart-shaped, diamond-shaped, or star-shaped frames. The following frame tools are available from the Frame Tool flyout.

Frame Tool	Frame shape

Rectangle

Ellipse

L90

Bubble

Right trapezoid

Heart

Inverted rectangle

Rounded rectangle

Octagon

L270

Diamond

Left trapezoid

Star

Tear drop

To create a frame

1.	Open the Frame Tool flyout, and click the desired frame tool.

2.	Click where you want to position the frame, and drag diagonally to make the frame the size and shape you want.

 Note

•	You can also create a frame from a graphic object. For more information, see "Converting a graphic object to a frame."

 Tips

•	To create a square frame, hold down CTRL while dragging the Rectangle Frame tool.

•	To create a circlular frame, hold down CRTL while dragging the Ellipse Frame tool.

•	You can also create a frame with default settings by clicking the Frame tool and then clicking your publication to place the frame.

 Related Topics


Automatically planting the cursor in a frame

By default, the cursor is not planted in frames you create. If you enable the Plant Caret In Drawn Frames check box, the text cursor (also called a caret) will automatically appear in every frame you draw.

To automatically plant the cursor in a frame

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, click General.

3.	Enable the Plant Caret In Drawn Frames check box.

 Related Topics


Deleting frames

You can delete frames individually or in groups. When you delete a frame, its contents are deleted from the page but they are still accessible from the File list on the Property Bar. For more information about the File list, see "Using the File list."

To delete a frame

1.	Select the frame.

2.	Click Edit, Delete.

To delete multiple frames

1.	Click the Marquee tool.

2.	Click and drag around the frames you want to delete.

3.	Click Edit, Delete.

 Tip

•	You can also delete a selected frame, or group of frames, by pressing DELETE.

 Related Topics


Selecting frames


Overview: Selecting frames
Selecting frames

You can select frames individually or in groups. The advantage of selecting a group of frames is that you can apply a change to multiple frames at the same time. You can also select a group composed of frames and graphic objects and apply a change to both types of objects at the same time.

 Related Topics


Selecting frames explicitly or implicitly

You can select frames explicitly or implicitly. Clicking the border of a frame selects it explicitly and the frame displays the following characteristics

•	Frame continuation handles ( [image]) and a gray border line appear at the top and bottom of the frame border. Frame continuation handles allow you to flow text between frames. For more information, see "Setting text flow between frames."

•	The frame's number appears on the top border, beside the frame continuation handle. Continued frames are numbered in sequence. Each series of continued frames is numbered independently.

•	Black frame handles appear at the middle of each side and at each corner of the frame. Frame handles are used to resize frames.

The cursor is not planted inside explicitly selected frames.

Clicking inside a frame selects it implicitly. Implicitly selected frames look the same as explicitly selected frames, except that the frame handles on implicitly selected frames are gray.

Implicitly selecting a frame plants the cursor inside the frame.

To explicitly select a frame

•	Click the border of the frame. If the frame is a rectangle, you must click either the top or bottom frame border.

To implicitly select a frame

•	Click inside the frame.

 Related Topics


Selecting multiple frames

You can select frames in groups and apply changes to multiple frames at the same time. If you select a group using the Marquee tool, the entire frame must be surrounded by the selection box. Frames that are not entirely surrounded are not included in the selection.

To select multiple frames

•	Hold down the SHIFT key while you click the top or bottom border of each frame.

To marquee select multiple frames

1.	Click the Marquee tool.

2.	Click and drag around the frames you want to select.

To add a frame to a selection

1.	Click the border of the first frame.

2.	Hold down SHIFT and select the next frame.

To select an obscured frame

1.	Click the page.

2.	Press TAB to toggle to the frame.

 Related Topics


Deselecting frames

You deselect a frame by clicking anywhere in the Publication Window, outside of the frame.

To deselect a frame

•	Click outside the selection box of the frame.

 Tip

•	To deselect all objects in your publication, click the page border, hold down SHIFT, then click the page border again.

 Related Topics


Sizing and shaping frames


Overview: Sizing and shaping frames
Sizing and shaping frames

You can change the size of any frame you create. Size can be changed by an approximate amount using the mouse or by a specific amount using the Frame Properties dialog box.

You can also change the shape of your frames. Using the Node Edit tool, you can manipulate each frame node independently. You can also round the corners of square and rectangular frames and create pie shapes out of elliptical frames. When you use the Node Edit tool, you need to refresh the screen in order to see the changes you make. You can manipulate several nodes and then refresh the screen, but all of the changes you made between each screen refresh are counted as one action. If you use the Undo command, all the actions between the two screen refreshes are undone. For information about refreshing the screen, see "Refreshing the screen."

 Related Topics


Setting frame size

You can size a frame an approximate amount with the mouse or a specific amount using the Frame Properties dialog box. Using a mouse, you can size a frame horizontally, vertically, or both. If you drag the frame's corner handles, you scale it both horizontally and vertically. If you drag a side handle, you scale only that side of the frame. For more information about setting frame handle size, see "Setting the frame handle size."

You can change the unit of measurement for frames by right clicking a size or position setting in the Frame Properties dialog box. You need to change the unit of measurement for each setting individually.

To resize a frame with your mouse

1.	Select a frame with the Pick Tool.

2.	Click and drag one of the following handles:

•	corner handle [image] sizes both horizontally and vertically

•	side handle [image] sizes only one side of the frame

 Tips

•	To maintain aspect ratio, hold down CTRL while dragging.

•	To enlarge from the center, hold down SHIFT while dragging.

•	To enlarge from the center and maintain aspect ratio, hold down CTRL and SHIFT while dragging.

To size a frame by a specific amount

1.	Select a frame with the Pick Tool.

2.	Click Format, Frame Properties,

3.	Click the Placement tab.

4.	Type the dimensions for the frame in the Width and Height boxes.

To change the unit of measurement for size

1.	Select the frame.

2.	Click Format, Frame Properties.

3.	Click the Placement tab.

4.	Right click the setting you want to change the unit of measurement for.

5.	Click Units.

6.	Click the unit of measurement you want to use.

 Tip

•	You can also change frame size using the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Applying preset frame shapes

You can quickly change the shape of a frame by applying a preset frame shape to it. You must customize your toolbar through the Options dialog box before you can use the preset frame shapes.

To access a preset frame shape

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, click Customize, and then click Toolbars.

3.	In the Commands section, click Frame Tool.

4.	Click a preset frame shape.

5.	Drag the shape onto your desktop.

To apply a preset frame shape to a frame

1.	Select a frame with the Pick Tool.

2.	Click a preset frame shape.

 Related Topics


Shaping frames

In general, a frame must be composed of lines instead of curves before its shape can be manipulated. All of the pre-designed frame shapes in Corel VENTURA, with the exception of the rectangle and ellipse frame shapes, are already composed of curves. You can alter a rectangle or ellipse frame so that it is composed of curves and use the Node Edit tool to change the frame's shape. The Convert To Curves command only affects the selected frame. It does not affect the frame shape in the frame tool flyout.

To shape a frame with the Node Edit tool

1.	Select a frame with the Node Edit tool.

2.	Click and drag a node.

 Tip

•	Press the Refresh Window button to see the results of the node editing. You can also refresh by clicking Window, Refresh Window.

To apply the Convert To Curves command to a frame

1.	Select a frame with the Pick Tool.

2.	Click Format, Arrange, Convert To Curves.

 Tips

•	Instead of clicking Format, Arrange, Convert To Curves, you can also click the Convert To Curves button on the Property Bar

•	To move several nodes at once, hold down SHIFT, click the nodes to select them, and drag one of the nodes.

•	For more detailed information and procedures about shaping curve objects, see "Shaping curve objects."

 Related Topics


Rounding the corners of square and rectangular frames

You can round the corners of a square or rectangular frame without applying the Convert To Curves command to the frame. When you round the corners, each corner node splits in two and an arc is drawn between the two nodes. The amount of rounding is determined by how far apart you separate the two nodes.

You can soften the look of a square or rectangular frame by rounding its corners.

To round the corners of a frame

1.	Select a frame with the Node Edit tool.

2.	Drag one of the corner nodes along the outline of the frame.

As you drag, the four corner nodes each divide into two nodes and a round corner forms in between. As you continue to drag, the corners become increasingly round.

3.	Release the mouse button when the corners are as round as you want.

 Tip

•	Press the Refresh Window button to see the results of the node editing.

 Related Topics


Turning an elliptical frame into a pie shaped frame

You can create a pie shaped frame out of an elliptical frame without applying the Convert To Curves command to the frame.

To turn an elliptical frame into a pie shaped frame

1.	Select a frame with the Node Edit tool.

2.	Drag the node until the pie shape is the size you want.

 Tip

•	Press the Refresh Window button to see the results of the node editing.

 Related Topics


Moving and positioning frames


Overview: Moving and positioning frames
Moving and positioning frames

Corel VENTURA lets you move and position frames in a variety of ways. For example, you can move a frame to a new location using the mouse, the Frame Properties dialog box, the nudge feature, or the Cut and Paste commands. The Cut command removes the frame from the publication and places it on the Clipboard. The frame remains on the Clipboard until you place another object on the Clipboard. Only one object can be placed on the Clipboard at a time.

After you set a frame's position, you can lock it into place so that it cannot be moved. Locking a frame also prevents it from being resized. If you prefer, you can anchor a frame relative to the text around it. An anchored frame moves whenever the text it is anchored to moves.

Along with moving and repeating frames, you can position them by spreading them across pages, rotating them, and skewing their angle. You can spread a frame across two facing pages so that a portion of the frame appears on one page and the other portion appears on the opposite page. Rotating a frame turns it on its center axis. A frame and its contents can be rotated together or the contents of the frame can be rotated separately. You cannot rotate an OLE object, but the frame that contains the OLE object can be rotated. If you simply want to slant a frame from left to right, or from top to bottom, you can use the skew feature rather than rotating the frame.

 Related Topics


Moving a frame

You can move frames by an approximate amount using the mouse or by a specific amount using the Frame Properties dialog box.

You can change the unit of measurement for frame movement by right clicking a size or position setting in the Frame Properties dialog box. You need to change the unit of measurement for each setting individually.

To move a frame using the mouse

1.	Select a frame with the Pick Tool.

2.	Click and drag the selected frame to the desired location on the page.

To move a frame by a specific amount

1.	Select a frame with the Pick Tool.

2.	Click Format, Frame Properties.

3.	Click the Placement tab.

4.	Type a horizontal location in the X box.

The X origin is set relative to the left edge of the page.

5.	Type a vertical location in the Y box.

The Y origin is set relative to the top edge of the page.

To change the unit of measurement for position

1.	Select the frame.

2.	Click Format, Frame Properties.

3.	Click the Placement tab.

4.	Right click the setting you want to change the unit of measurement for.

5.	Click Units.

6.	Click the unit of measurement you want to use.

 Tip

•	You can also move a frame by a specific amount using the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Nudging a frame

You can nudge a frame in a particular direction using the arrow keys. The nudge distance determines how far a selected object moves when you press one of these keys. The default nudge amount is 0.10 inches. Using the Options dialog box, you can adjust the nudge distance to any distance and unit you choose. You can choose different settings for horizontal and vertical nudging.

To nudge a frame

1.	Select the frame.

2.	Press an arrow key to move the frame in the direction represented by the key. For example, press the right arrow key to move the frame to the right.

To change the nudge distance

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, click Selection.

3.	Type values for the nudge distance in the Horizontal and Vertical boxes in the Nudge row.

To change the nudge unit of measurement

1.	Select the frame.

2.	Click Tools, Options.

3.	In the Workspace category, click Selection.

4.	Right click the setting you want to change the unit of measurement for.

5.	Click Units.

6.	Click the unit of measurement you want to use.

 Related Topics


Cutting and pasting frames

Cutting a frame removes it from the publication and places it on the Clipboard. When you paste a frame, it appears in the same relative position on the new page as it occupied on the previous page. You can then move the frame to a new position.

To cut and paste frames

1.	Select a frame with the Pick Tool.

2.	Click Edit, Cut.

3.	Click the frame's new location.

4.	Click Edit, Paste.

 Note

•	Cut frames retain the contents of the original frame.

•	The frame remains on the Clipboard until another object replaces it.

 Related Topics


Anchoring frames

Anchoring lets you align a frame relative to the text surrounding it. If the text the frame is anchored to moves, then the frame also moves. You can also delete frame anchors.

Corel VENTURA indicates that a frame is anchored by placing an anchor symbol in the top-left corner of the frame.

To anchor a frame

1.	Select a frame with the Pick Tool.

2.	Click the Frame Anchor tool.

3.	Click in the text where you want to anchor the frame.

To choose an anchor type

1.	Select a frame with the Pick Tool.

2.	Click the Anchor Tool.

3.	Right-click the place in the publication where you want the frame to be anchored.

4.	Choose one of the following anchor types:

•	In-Line [image] positions the frame on the baseline of the text containing the anchor symbol

•	Above/Below Line [image] positions the frame directly above or below the anchor symbol

•	Column Top/Bottom [image] positions the frame at the top or bottom of the text column containing the anchor symbol

•	Outside Column [image] positions the frame outside the column of text containing the anchor symbol; the frame may still be inside the page margins

•	Outside Frame [image] positions the frame outside the page margins

•	Within Paragraph [image] positions the frame next to the paragraph containing the anchor symbol

•	Same Page [image] positions the frame at the same relative location on the page so that when text moves to a new page, the frame occupies the same location on the new page as it did on the old page

The Same Page anchor type anchors the frame so that when text moves to a new page, the frame occupies the same location on the new page as it did on the old page.

The Above Anchor Line and Below Anchor Line anchor types anchor the frame directly above or directly below the text.

This frame is anchored in a line of text.

To edit frame anchor settings

1.	Select the anchored frame with the Pick Tool.

2.	Click Format, Frame Properties.

3.	Click the Placement tab.

4.	Change any of the settings in the Frame Anchor section.

To delete a frame anchor

1.	Select the anchored frame with the Pick Tool.

2.	Click Format, Frame Properties.

3.	Click the Placement tab.

4.	Disable the Frame Anchor check box.

 Tip

•	You can change the position and alignment of a frame anchor on the Placement page of the Frame Properties dialog box.

•	If you want to lock the size of an anchored frame or if you want to create a frame that stays in one place and is not positioned relative to the text around it, you can lock the frame. For information about locking frames, see "Locking and unlocking frame size and position."

 Related Topics


Locking and unlocking frame size and position

The size and position of a locked frame cannot be changed. Even when the text around it moves, a locked frame maintains its position.

To lock a frame's size and position

1.	Select a frame with the Pick Tool.

2.	Click Format, Frame Properties.

3.	Click the Placement tab.

4.	Enable the Lock Size & Position check box.

To unlock a frame's size and position

1.	Select the frame you want to unlock.

2.	Click Format, Frame Properties.

3.	Click the Placement tab.

4.	Disable the Lock Size & Position check box.

 Note

•	You can also anchor frames so that they remain with the text that surrounds them. For more information, see "Anchoring frames."

 Related Topics


Spreading frames across pages

You can extend a single frame across two pages by dragging, resizing, skewing, or rotating the frame across the pages using the mouse. To spread a frame across pages, you must be in Facing Pages view. The frame belongs to the left page and when you are in Facing Pages view you can only plant and spread a frame from the left page. Once you return to single page view, you can edit the frame from the left page but you cannot rotate or skew the frame.

To spread a frame by dragging

1.	Open the Zoom Tool flyout, and click the Facing Page Zoom button.

2.	Select a frame with the Pick Tool.

3.	Drag the frame across the two pages.

To spread a frame by resizing

1.	Open the Zoom Tool flyout, and click Facing Pages Zoom.

2.	Select a frame with the Pick Tool.

3.	Click the frame handle and drag across the pages to the desired size.

To spread a frame by skewing

1.	Open the Zoom Tool flyout, and click Facing Pages Zoom.

2.	Select a frame with the Pick Tool.

3.	Click the frame border so that the frame handles turn into double-headed arrows.

4.	Click and drag the arrows to skew the frame across the pages.

To spread a frame by rotating

1.	Open the Zoom Tool flyout, and click Facing Pages Zoom.

2.	Select a frame with the Pick Tool.

3.	Click the frame border so that the frame handles turn into double-headed arrows and a small circle appears in the center of the frame.

4.	Drag the circle in the center of the frame to set the axis of rotation.

5.	Drag one of the corner arrows to rotate the frame across the pages.

 Note

•	If you want to position a frame across two pages, you must use the mouse. Adjusting the position of the frame using the Frame Properties dialog box or the X-Origin or Width boxes on the Property Bar will create a bleed. Bleeds occur when the frame and its contents run to the edge of the page and do not appear on the facing page.

 Related Topics


Rotating frames

You can rotate a frame using a mouse or by setting the exact degree of rotation in the Frame Properties dialog box. When you select a frame, the small circle in the frame's center represents its axis of rotation. You change the axis of rotation with the mouse, by dragging this circle to a new position.

As this picture shows, rotating frames helps you give your publication an interesting look.

A frame and its contents can be rotated together, or you can rotate a frame's contents separately. The value you set in the Contents Rotation box, of the Frame Properties dialog box, rotates only the contents of the frame while the value you set in the Frame Rotation box affects both the frame and its contents by default. If you want the value in the Frame Rotation box to affect the frame but not the frame contents, you must change the frame property settings in the Options dialog box.

To rotate a frame using the mouse

1.	Select the border of a frame with the Pick Tool.

2.	Click the border again so that double-headed arrows appear in place of the handles and a small circle appears in the center of the frame.

3.	Drag one of the corner arrows to rotate the frame.

To rotate a frame by a specific amount

1.	Select the border of a frame with the Pick Tool.

2.	Click Format, Frame Properties.

3.	Click the Placement tab.

4.	Type a value from 0 degrees to 360 degrees in the Frame Rotation box.

 Tip

•	You can also access the Frame Rotation box on the Property Bar.

To change the center of rotation of a frame

1.	Select the border of a frame with the Pick Tool.

2.	Click the border again so that double-headed arrows appear in place of the handles and a small circle appears in the center of the frame.

3.	Drag the circle in the center of the frame to set the axis of rotation.

 Tip

•	If you want to return the center of rotation to 0 degrees, you must type 0 in the Rotation Angle box on the Property Bar.

To rotate a frame's contents independently of the frame

1.	Select the border of a frame with the Pick Tool.

2.	Click Format, Frame Properties.

3.	Click the Placement tab.

4.	Type a value from 0 degrees to 360 degrees in the Contents Rotation box.

To enable the rotate contents with frame setting

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, click General.

3.	Enable the Rotate Contents With Frame check box.

To disable the rotate contents with frame setting

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, click General.

3.	Disable the Rotate Contents With Frame check box.

 Related Topics


Skewing frames

Skewing slants a frame from left to right or from top to bottom. The frame contents do not skew.

To skew a frame

1.	Select a frame with the Pick Tool.

2.	Click the frame border so that the nodes turn into double-headed arrows.

3.	Click and drag the arrows to skew the frame.

 Tip

•	To control the amount of skew, hold down CTRL while you drag the arrows to skew in 15-degree increments. You can change the skew angle by adjusting the constrain angle setting. For more information about adjusting the constrain angle, see "Changing the constrain angle."

 Related Topics


Repeating frames


Overview: Repeating frames
Repeating frames

Frames can be repeated within and between publications using the Copy and Paste commands. The Copy command places a copy of the frame on the Clipboard, but leaves the original frame in the publication. Once a frame is on the Clipboard, you can use the Paste command to place it in a publication. The frame remains on the Clipboard until you copy another object onto the Clipboard. Only one object can be placed on the Clipboard at a time.

However, you can repeat frames in your publication without using the Clipboard. The duplicate command lets you copy a selected frame directly on screen. You can also place the frame on a page tag, so that it appears on every page to which that page tag is applied.

 Related Topics


Copying and pasting frames

Copying a frame places a copy of the frame on the Clipboard. When you paste the frame, it appears in the same relative position on the new page as it occupied on the previous page. You can then move the frame to a new position.

To copy and paste frames

1.	Select a frame with the Pick Tool.

2.	Click Edit, Copy.

3.	Click the frame's next location.

4.	Click Edit, Paste.

 Tip

•	Copied frames retain the contents of the original frame.

•	The frame remains on the Clipboard until another object replaces it.

 Related Topics


Duplicating frames

The Duplicate command copies the selected frame directly on screen and offsets the duplicate slightly from the original frame. The duplicate frame retains all of the original frame's attributes and contents but has no lasting connection to the original frame. You can change the amount by which the duplicate is offset from the original in the Options dialog box.

To duplicate a frame

1.	Select a frame with the Pick Tool.

2.	Click Edit, Duplicate.

3.	Drag the second frame to its new position.

To change the offset value for duplicated objects

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, click Selection.

3.	Type values for the offset distance you want in the Horizontal and Vertical boxes in the Duplicate Offset row.

Positive values shift the duplicate to the right or down; negative values shift the duplicate to the left or up.

 Related Topics


Repeating frames using page tags

If you want a frame to appear on multiple pages of your publication, you can place it on a page tag. The frame then appears on every page to which the page tag is applied.

If you are in Page Layout view, you can delete the frame from any individual page and it will still remain on the page tag. In order to select and delete the frame in Page Layout view, you must disable the Lock Page Tag Objects check box in the Publication Properties dialog box. If the Lock Page Tag Objects check box is enabled, you can only select and manipulate page tag objects in Page Tag view. Deleting the frame in Page Tag view deletes it from the page tag. For more information about working with page tags, see "Using page tags."

Placing a frame on a page tag makes it appear on every page that uses that page tag.

To place a frame on a page tag

1.	Click View, Page Tags.

2.	Draw the frame or cut and paste it from a publication page.

To delete a frame from a page tag

1.	Click View, Page Tags.

2.	Select the frame that you want to remove from your publication.

3.	Click Edit, Delete.

To delete a frame that is on a page tag from a specific page

1.	Click Publication, Publication Properties.

2.	Click the General tab.

3.	Disable the Lock Page Tag Objects check box.

4.	Click OK.

5.	Select the frame on the specific page.

6.	Click Edit, Delete.

7.	Click Publication, Publication Properties.

8.	Click the General tab.

9.	Enable the Lock Page Tag Objects check box.

 Related Topics


Grouping and aligning frames


Overview: Grouping and aligning frames
Grouping and aligning frames

Frames can be arranged in a variety of ways. You can group them together, align them, layer them, or use the Snap To settings to line them up. Grouping frames together lets you apply changes to multiple frames at the same time. If there are changes you want to make to several frames in a group, you can create a subgroup within a group. The changes you make to the subgroup do not affect the group as a whole. You can also select a single frame from a group and apply changes to it individually.

You can align frames to each other or to the horizontal or vertical center of a page. You can layer frames and then adjust the layering order. You can also use the Snap To settings to line frames up with publication components, such as guidelines, the grid, or columns.

 Related Topics


Grouping and ungrouping frames

Grouping frames allows you to apply changes to multiple frames at the same time. You can also make a change to a single item in a group without breaking up the group.

To group frames

1.	Hold down SHIFT and select the frames.

2.	Click Format, Arrange, Group.

To group frames using the marquee tool

1.	Click the Marquee tool.

2.	Click and drag around the frames you want to select.

3.	Click Format, Arrange, Group.

To ungroup frames

1.	Select the group by clicking one of its frames.

2.	Click Format, Arrange, Ungroup.

To select a single frame within a group

•	Hold down ALT, and select the frame.

 Tips

•	If you have grouped together two or more groups, click Format, Arrange, Ungroup to ungroup the groups one at a time.

•	You can also perform the previous procedures by right-clicking a frame, and clicking Arrange.

 Related Topics


Changing the layering order of frames

If you want to change the layering order of frames, you must ensure that the layered frames are not grouped. The To Front, To Back, Forward One, Back One, and Reverse Order commands only work with ungrouped frames.

This picture shows an example of layered frames.

To change the layering order of a frame

1.	Select a frame with the Pick Tool.

2.	Click Format, Arrange, and click one of the following:

•	To Front

•	To Back

•	Forward One

•	Back One

To reverse the order of all frames

1.	Select a group of frames with the Marquee tool.

2.	Click Format, Arrange, Reverse Order.

 Tip

•	You can also perform the above procedures using the Order button on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Aligning frames

The Align commands let you align the sides of selected frames to each other or to the vertical or horizontal center of the page. You can align objects to their left or right sides, or you can align them to their tops or bottoms.

The Space commands let you distribute selected items vertically or horizontally by placing equal spaces between them.

To align the sides of frames

1.	Select the frames with the Pick Tool.

2.	Click Format, Align, and click any of the following:

•	Align Left

•	Align Right

•	Align Top

•	Align Bottom

To align frames to the center of the page

1.	Select the frames with the Pick Tool.

2.	Click Format, Align, and click one of the following:

•	Center Vertical

•	Center Horizontal

To set the horizontal space between frames

1.	Select the frames you want to set the spacing for.

2.	Click Format, Align, Space Across.

To set the vertical space between frames

1.	Select the frames you want to set the spacing for.

2.	Click Format, Align, Space Down.

 Related Topics


Enabling Snap To

The Snap To settings make precise alignment easy by forcing frames to line up with an object, guideline, grid, column, or text baseline.

To enable Snap To

•	Click Format, Snap To, and click one of the following:

•	Objects [image] aligns frames to snap points on stationary objects. These snap points are located at each of an object's nodes and are displayed as blue squares when alignment occurs. You can see an object's nodes by clicking it with the Node Edit tool.

•	Guidelines [image] aligns frames to nearby guidelines. Horizontal edges align with horizontal guidelines; vertical edges align with vertical guidelines.

•	Grid [image] aligns frames so that they line up vertically and horizontally with the nearest grid marker.

•	Columns [image] aligns frames so that they line up with columns.

•	Inter-line [image] aligns frames so that they line up with the text baseline.

 Tip

•	You can also enable the snap to settings on the Page page of the Options dialog box.

 Related Topics


Changing the frame or graphic snapping sensitivity

The snapping sensitivity specifies how close you must move a frame or graphic object to a grid line or guideline before the object snaps to the line.

To change the frame or graphic snapping sensitivity

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, click Selection.

3.	Type values for the snapping sensitivity you want in the Horizontal and Vertical boxes in the Frame And Graphic Snap row.

 Note

•	To change the units, right-click the number box, click Units, and click a unit.

 Related Topics


Working with text files in frames


Overview: Working with text files in frames
Working with text files in frames

In Corel VENTURA, you can add text to a frame by typing inside the frame, by inserting text that is already present in Corel VENTURA, or by importing text from another application. Frames can contain both picture and text files; however, they cannot contain more than one file of each type. If you try to add a text file to a frame that already contains a text file, the new text file replaces the existing file. However, you can add files of different types to the same frame. For example, if you add a text file to a frame that already contains a picture file, the text is superimposed on the picture.

You can control the way text files display using the text flow and typography settings. For example, if a text file is too large to fit in a frame, you can flow the text between several frames and display the entire text file. You can also direct text flow inside a frame, by setting the point where text begins to flow, and outside a frame, by setting the sides of the frame text flows on. The typography settings also let you control widows and orphans, the baseline, and character pair kerning. If the formatting you apply to text is too large to fit within the frame or page that contains the text, a red X appears. Corel VENTURA will diagnose the error and fix it for you if you use the Format Error command.

 Related Topics


Adding text files to frames

You can add text files that were created in Corel VENTURA to a frame, or you can import text files that were created in other applications into Corel VENTURA frames. You can also add a text file by typing in a frame. For more information about importing text files, see "Importing and exporting text." Frames can only hold one text file.

To add a text file to a frame using the VENTURA Navigator

1.	Select a frame with the Pick Tool.

2.	If the VENTURA Navigator is not open, click Tools, VENTURA Navigator.

3.	Choose the Publication Manager from the list box.

4.	Locate the file you want to add.

5.	Drag the file from the VENTURA Navigator into the selected frame and release the mouse button.

To add a text file to a frame using the File list

1.	Select the frame you want to add a file to.

2.	Choose a filename from the File list on the Property Bar.

 Note

•	Frames can only hold one text file. If you use the File List to add a text file to a frame already containing a text file, the original text file will be removed from the frame but not from the publication. The new imported text file will attach to the frame.

To add text to a page or frame by typing

1.	Click inside a frame with the Pick Tool.

2.	Type within the page or frame.

 Notes

•	Text you type into a page or frame that already contains a text file becomes part of the text file you are typing in.

•	If text is typed into a page that doesn't contain any text, an embedded named text file is created. The text file is automatically named and can be viewed within a chapter in the VENTURA Navigator. Embedded text files are represented by the [image] icon.

•	If text is typed into a frame that doesn't contain any text, an embedded unnamed text file is created. Unnamed text files are not represented in the VENTURA Navigator.

Naming a text file in a frame

1.	Select a frame with the Pick Tool.

2.	Right-click within the frame, and click Text, Text File Properties.

3.	Type a name in the Name box.

To import text into a frame

1.	Select the frame by clicking its border with the Pick tool.

2.	Click File, Import Text.

3.	Choose a file format from the Files Of Type list box.

4.	Choose the drive where the file is stored from the Look In list box.

5.	Double-click the folder where the file is stored.

6.	Click the filename.

7.	Click the Options button if the Options section is not displayed.

8.	Disable the Insert At Cursor check box.

9.	Enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Export On Save [image] exports the text file each time the publication is saved. See "Embedding and linking text files" for more information.

•	Suppress Panose [image] disables Panose font matching. For more information, see "Using PANOSE Font Matching."

•	Ignore Style [image] ignores paragraph styles used in text file formats such as Corel WordPerfect or Microsoft Word. All text is assigned the Body Text paragraph tag by default. If you disable the Ignore Style check box, see the "To set how Corel VENTURA treats overridden paragraph styles when importing documents" procedure in "Importing text." This option does not effect text files which use Corel VENTURA markup code.

•	Ignore Markup [image] treats angle brackets (< >) as text; not markup code. This option should be enabled when importing text files such as HTML which may contain angle brackets.

10.	Click the Import button.

 Note

•	Frames can only hold one text file at a time. If you try to import text into a frame which already has text in it, the text file will import into the publication but will not be placed in the frame. The imported file will appear in the File List and you can then manipulate it within the publication. See "Using the File List" for more information about the File List.

You can import text into a frame which already holds a text file by using the previous procedure and enabling the Insert At Cursor check box in the Import Text dialog box. The first step should be replaced with placing the cursor where you want the text to be imported. The imported text becomes part of the text file already in the frame.

 Tips

•	You can also import text files into a frame by selecting the frame and clicking Import from the File list.

•	If the text file is too large to display fully in the frame, you can either resize the frame or set text flow between several frames. For more information about resizing frames, see "Setting frame size." For more information about setting text flow, see "Setting text flow between frames."

 Related Topics


Deleting text files from frames

When you delete a file from a frame, it is not deleted from the publication and is still accessible from the File list on the Property Bar. To remove the file from the publication, you must use the VENTURA Navigator. For more information about the File list, see "Using the File list."

To delete a text file from a frame

•	Right-click the border of the frame, and click Text, Remove Text From Frame.

To delete a text file from a publication

1.	If the VENTURA Navigator is not open, click Tools, VENTURA Navigator.

2.	Choose the Publication Manager from the list box.

3.	Locate the file you want to delete.

4.	Right-click the filename, and click Delete.

 Related Topics


Setting text flow between frames

You can direct text flow to a new frame or to an existing frame using the frame continuation handles that appear at the top and bottom of each frame's border. You can also delete a frame that contains flowed text, you can do so without deleting the text or interrupting the text flow. Once you remove a frame, the text file reorders itself to flow in the correct order without the frame.

Corel VENTURA lets you direct text flow between frames.

Frame continuation handles and a gray border line appear at the top and bottom of the frame border. The number of the frame also appears on the top border, beside the frame continuation handle. Continued frames are numbered in sequence. Each series of continued frames is numbered independently. Black frame handles appear at the middle of each side and at each corner of the frame. Frame handles are used to resize frames.

To direct text flow to a new frame

1.	Select the first frame with the Pick Tool.

2.	Click the down arrow in the lower-right corner of the frame so that the mouse pointer becomes the Frame Continuation tool ( [image]).

3.	Click the location where you want the new frame.

The new frame has the same properties as the first frame.

To direct text flow to an existing frame

1.	Select a frame with the Pick Tool.

2.	Click the down arrow in the lower-right corner of the frame so that the mouse pointer becomes the Frame Continuation tool ( [image]).

3.	Position the frame continuation tool over the border of the frame you want to continue text to.

The frame continuation tool becomes the mouse pointer.

4.	Click the border of the frame.

To remove a frame without deleting the text that flows through it

1.	Select a frame with the Pick Tool.

2.	Right-click the top or bottom border of the frame, and click Text, Remove Text From Frame.

3.	Right-click the top or bottom border of the frame, and click Delete.

4.	Click the Refresh Window button.

 Note

•	After you delete the frame, the entire text file may not be visible without it and you may have to add a frame at another spot in your publication to display the whole text file. You can add a new frame at any point in the text flow.

To place a frame further up in a text flow

1.	Select a frame with the Pick Tool.

2.	Click the downward frame continuation arrow at the bottom-right corner of the frame.

3.	Position the Frame Continuation tool over the border of the upper frame. The Frame Continuation tool becomes the mouse pointer.

4.	Click the border of the frame.

To place a frame further back in a text flow

1.	Select a frame with the Pick Tool.

2.	Click the upward frame continuation arrow at the top-right corner of the frame.

3.	Position the Frame Continuation tool over the border of the lower frame. The Frame Continuation tool becomes the mouse pointer.

4.	Click the border of the frame.

 Note

•	If you add a frame to a text flow, but there is not enough text to flow into it, you cannot type in the frame until the previous frames in the text flow are filled. If you try to type in the frame, the text will automatically be placed in the previous frame.

 Related Topics


Setting text flow within and around frames

You can set the point from which text flows within a frame, such as the highest left or highest right point. You can also set how text flows around the outside of a frame. For example, text can flow at the top and bottom of the frame, or it can flow continuously from the left to the right of the frame.

To set text flow inside a frame

1.	Select a frame with the Pick Tool.

2.	Click Format, Frame Properties.

3.	Click the Placement tab.

4.	Choose one of the following options from the Within Frame list box in the Text Flow section:

•	Highest [image] flows text from the highest point within the frame

•	Highest Left [image] flows text from the highest point on the left side of the frame

•	Highest Right [image] flows text from the highest point on the right side of the frame

To set text flow outside a frame

1.	Select a frame with the Pick Tool.

2.	Click Format, Frame Properties.

3.	Click the Placement tab.

4.	Choose one of the following options from the Outside Frame list box in the Text Flow section:

•	Above/Below [image] flows text at the top and the bottom of the frame

•	Straddle Text [image] flows text continuously to the left and right of the frame

•	Text Flows Left [image] flows text on the left side of the frame

•	Left, Then Right [image] flows text down the left side of the frame and then down the right side of the frame

•	Text Through Frame [image] flows text behind the frame and is hidden behind the frame's contents

•	Text Flows Right [image] flows text on the right side of the frame

You can set how text flows around or through a frame.

 Note

•	To flow text around a frame, the frame must be higher in the layer order than the text you want to flow around it. See "Changing the layering order of frames" for more information.

 Related Topics


Fixing text formatting errors in frames and pages

Corel VENTURA can help you fix formatting errors that occur in frames, tables, or pages that contain text. A red X appears if you try to apply formatting to the text that makes it unable to fit in the frame, table, or page or to flow to a new frame, table, or page. You can fix the formatting error manually or you can let Corel VENTURA fix the error for you. Some typical formatting errors include:

•	the paragraph formatting does not allow the text to fit or to break

•	the margins are too wide

•	a single, large object or a number of smaller objects are forcing the text off of the page or out of the frame or table

To set Corel VENTURA to fix formatting errors

1.	Right-click the border of the frame that contains the red X.

2.	Click Format Error.

3.	Click the Fix Error button.

4.	Click the Apply Fix button.

 Tip

•	If you want to fix the error yourself, you can access the Frame Properties dialog box by clicking the Properties button in the Fix Format Error dialog box.

•	You can view previous errors by clicking the backward arrow button.

•	You can view subsequent errors by clicking the forward arrow button.

 Related Topics


Working with picture files in frames


Overview: Working with picture files in frames
Working with picture files in frames

Pictures can be added or deleted from a publication. Pictures can either be imported into frames from other applications, or pictures that are already in Corel VENTURA can be inserted into frames. Frames can contain both picture and text files; however, they cannot contain more than one file of each type. If you try to add a picture file to a frame that already contains a picture file, the new picture file replaces the existing file. However, you can add files of different types to the same frame. For example, if you add a text file to a frame that already contains a picture file, the text is superimposed on the picture.

You can control the way picture files display using the picture and frame resizing options, as well as the halftone screening, resolution, and memory size settings. A halftone screen has a grid pattern that simulates the appearance of shading in a printed image by converting a continuous-tone image into an image composed of tiny dots of various sizes. Resolution determines the amount of detail a picture contains and refers to the spacing of pixels in the picture.

 Related Topics


Adding picture files to frames

You can add files that were created in Corel VENTURA to a frame, or you can import files that were created in other applications into Corel VENTURA frames. For more information about importing picture files, see "Importing and exporting pictures."

To add a picture file to a frame using the VENTURA Navigator

1.	Select a frame with the Pick Tool.

2.	If the VENTURA Navigator is not open, click Tools, VENTURA Navigator.

3.	Choose the Publication Manager from the list box.

4.	Locate the file you want to add.

5.	Drag the file from the VENTURA Navigator into the selected frame and release the mouse button.

To add a picture file to a frame using the File list

1.	Select a frame with the Pick Tool.

2.	Choose a filename from the File list on the Property Bar.

 Note

•	Frames can only hold one picture file. If you use the File List to add a picture file to a frame already containing a picture file, the original picture file will be removed from the frame but not from the publication.

To import a picture into a frame

1.	Select a frame with the Pick Tool.

2.	Click File, Import Picture.

3.	Choose a drive from the Look In box and double-click the folder where the file is stored.

4.	Choose the file.

5.	If the image is a bitmap, choose one of the following from the list box:

•	Full Image [image] imports the full image into the frame

•	Crop [image] opens the Crop Image dialog box where you can select the portion of the image to import into the frame

•	Resample [image] opens the Resample Image dialog box where you can alter the size and resolution of the image

6.	Click the Import button.

 Tip

•	You can also import picture files into a frame by selecting the frame and clicking Import from the File list.

 Related Topics


Deleting picture files from frames

When you delete a file from a frame, it is not deleted from the publication and is still accessible from the File list on the Property Bar. To remove the file from the publication, you must use the VENTURA Navigator. For more information about the File list, see "Using the File list."

To delete a picture file from a frame

•	Right-click the border of the frame, and click Picture, Remove Picture From Frame.

To delete a picture file from a publication

1.	If the VENTURA Navigator is not open, click Tools, VENTURA Navigator.

2.	Choose the Publication Manager from the list box.

3.	Locate the file you want to delete.

4.	Right-click the filename, and click Delete.

 Related Topics


Resizing and shifting picture files and frames

You can resize pictures and frames separately or together. If you resize a picture and then decide you want to return it to the size it was originally created at, you can click the Reset Picture Size button. You can also use the Size Frame To Picture command to make a frame that surrounds a picture the size the picture was originally created at. If you use the Size Frame To Picture command, and the Fit Picture To Frame check box is enabled, the frame fits the picture perfectly and each time you resize the frame, the picture resizes the same amount.

To resize a picture independently of its frame while maintaining aspect ratio

1.	Select a frame with the Pick Tool.

2.	Click Format, Frame Properties.

3.	Click the Contents tab.

4.	Disable the Fit Picture To Frame check box.

5.	Enable the Maintain Aspect Ratio check box.

Maintaining aspect ratio adjusts the height in proportion to the width and prevents the picture from becoming distorted.

6.	Type a value in the Width box.

 Tip

•	If you want to adjust the height and the width of your picture separately, disable the Maintain Aspect Ratio check box. Your picture may become distorted.

To resize a picture to fit its frame

1.	Select a frame with the Pick Tool.

2.	Click Format, Frame Properties.

3.	Click the Contents tab.

4.	Enable the Fit Picture To Frame check box.

5.	Do one of the following:

•	Enable the Maintain Aspect Ratio check box to maintain the original dimensions of your picture.

•	Disable the Maintain Aspect Ratio check box if you don't need the picture to maintain its original dimensions.

If you maintain the aspect ratio, the picture appears as it did before you fit the picture to the frame. If you don't maintain aspect ratio, the picture may become distorted when you fit it to its frame.

To resize a frame to fit its picture

1.	Select a frame with the Pick Tool.

2.	Right-click, and click Picture, Size Frame To Picture.

To shift a picture in its frame

1.	Select a frame with the Pick Tool.

2.	Click Format, Frame Properties.

3.	Click the Contents tab.

4.	Type a value in the Horizontal Shift box to shift the picture horizontally. A positive value shifts the picture to the left; a negative value shifts it to the right.

5.	Type a value in the Vertical Shift box to shift the picture vertically. A positive value shifts the picture up; a negative value shifts it down.

 Tip

•	You can also shift a picture in its frame by holding down ALT and using the mouse to move the picture.

To reset a picture to its original size

1.	Select a frame with the Pick Tool.

2.	Click Format, Frame Properties.

3.	Click the Contents tab.

4.	Click the Reset Picture Size button.

To change the unit of measurement for picture resizing

1.	Click Format, Frame Properties.

2.	Click the Contents tab.

3.	Right-click the value whose unit of measurement you want to change.

4.	Click Units, the unit of measurement you want.

 Related Topics


Wrapping a frame around a picture

Autowrap is a powerful tool for shaping frames containing irregularly shaped pictures. Autowrap creates a path around the contour of a picture. The path is approximate, rather than an exact contour. You can use the Node Edit tool to further manipulate the shape of the path.

After applying Autowrap to a frame, you can flow text around it. For more information about flowing text around frames, see "Setting text flow within and around frames."

You have other options to edit frame shapes (including autowrapped frames) in Corel VENTURA. You can manually edit a frame using the Node Edit tool. See "Shaping frames." for more information. You can also apply a preset frame shape to an existing frame. See "Applying preset frame shapes" for more information.

To wrap a frame around a picture

1.	Select a frame with the Pick Tool.

2.	Right-click, and click Picture, Autowrap.

 Tips

•	You can only have one size of margin around the outside of an autowrapped picture. The largest margin size you specify is automatically used for all the margin settings.

•	Autowrapping changes the shape of the frame. Frame shape is not a property of the frame tag.

 Note

•	The Corel VENTURA Autowrap tool can also be used to wrap frames around imported pictures which have had a path applied to them in a picture editing application such as CorelDRAW, Corel PHOTO-PAINT, or Adobe Photoshop. Paths, which may also be called clipping paths, masks, or selections, are shapes drawn or placed over a picture that act as window through which only part of the picture inside the shape will show.

Corel VENTURA supports paths (or masks) in imported pictures from Corel PHOTO-PAINT (CPT) and Adobe Photoshop (PSD). Paths in EPS and TIF picture files are also supported. For more information about the picture file formats Corel VENTURA supports, see "Imported picture file formats" in the online Help Reference section.

 Related Topics


Setting halftone screening for frames

Halftone screening creates the appearance of shading in your picture. When you select a halftone type, you specify the shape of the dots the printer uses to print the picture. The Default type uses the printer's default screen parameters, unless you specify other parameters in the Print dialog box. The screen frequency specifies the number of lines of halftone dots printed per inch. The screen frequency affects the number of gray levels in the printed output: the higher the screen frequency, the higher the level of output resolution necessary to create an adequate number of gray levels.

To set halftone screening

1.	Select a frame with the Pick Tool.

2.	Click Format, Frame Properties.

3.	Click the Contents tab.

4.	Click the Halftone Screening button.

5.	Choose a shape from the Halftone Type list box.

6.	Type an angle in the Screen Angle box.

7.	Type a frequency in the Frequency box.

 Tip

•	Your picture must be a bitmap and it must be grayscale in order to apply halftone screening. For more information, see "Converting a bitmap to the Grayscale color mode."

 Related Topics


Controlling picture display settings for a frame

By default, frames use the publication's picture display settings. You can control the resolution and memory settings for a picture in a frame using the Frame Properties dialog box. The resolution and memory size settings work in combination and they work best when they are increased or decreased together. For information about setting picture display settings for the publication, see "Controlling picture display settings for a publication."

To display a picture at full resolution

1.	Select a frame with the Pick Tool.

2.	Click Frame, Frame Properties.

3.	Click the Contents tab.

4.	Click the Picture File Properties button.

5.	Choose Full Resolution from the Resolution list box.

To set a limit for picture resolution

1.	Select a frame with the Pick Tool.

2.	Click Frame, Frame Properties.

3.	Click the Contents tab.

4.	Click the Picture File Properties button.

5.	Choose Limit Resolution To from the Resolution list box.

6.	Enable the Use Identical Values check box if you want the values in the Horizontal and Vertical boxes to be the same.

7.	Type the horizontal resolution in the Horizontal box.

8.	Type the vertical resolution in the Vertical box.

To set an unlimited picture memory size

1.	Select a frame with the Pick Tool.

2.	Click Frame, Frame Properties.

3.	Click the Contents tab.

4.	Click the Picture File Properties button.

5.	Choose Unlimited Memory Usage from the Memory list box.

To limit picture memory size

1.	Select a frame with the Pick Tool.

2.	Click Frame, Frame Properties.

3.	Click the Contents tab.

4.	Click the Picture File Properties button.

5.	Choose Limit Memory Usage To from the Memory list box.

6.	Type the size you want to limit memory size to in the KB box.

To use an optimized palette with a picture

1.	Select a frame with the Pick Tool.

2.	Click Frame, Frame Properties.

3.	Click the Contents tab.

4.	Click the Picture File Properties button.

5.	Enable the Generate Optimized Palette check box.

 Related Topics


Using margins and columns in frames


Overview: Using margins and columns in frames
Using margins and columns in frames

Both margins and columns let you control text flow. Frames support two types of margins [image] inside margins and outside margins. Inside margins let you determine the amount of space between the border of a frame and the text inside it. Outside margins let you specify the amount of space between the border of a frame and the text outside it.

You can control how text flows within a frame by using columns. Corel VENTURA offers preset column settings or you can create your own column settings.

 Related Topics


Setting frame margins

Frame margins control the space around the outside or the inside of a frame. You can set your own spacing or use preset margins. You can change the unit of measurement for margin settings in the Frame Properties dialog box. Changing the unit of measurement for one margin automatically changes the unit of measurement for all frame margins. For information about setting margins for your entire publication, see "Setting page margins."

To set margins inside a frame

1.	Select a frame with the Pick Tool.

2.	Click Format, Frame Properties.

3.	Click the Margins tab.

4.	If the Details button is displayed, proceed to step 5. If the Presets button is displayed, proceed to step 6.

5.	Click the Details button.

6.	In the Inside Margins section of the dialog box, choose one of the following from the Margin Layout list box:

•	Same On Left And Right Pages

•	Different On Left And Right Pages

•	Mirrored On Left And Right Pages

5.	Click the Left Page tab and type the margin dimensions in the Left, Right, Top, and Bottom boxes.

6.	Click the Right Page tab and type the margin dimensions in the Left, Right, Top, and Bottom boxes.

To set margins outside a frame

1.	Select a frame with the Pick Tool.

2.	Click Format, Frame Properties.

3.	Click the Margins tab.

4.	If the Details button is displayed, proceed to step 5. If the Presets button is displayed, proceed to step 6.

5.	Click the Details button.

6.	Type the margin dimensions in the Left, Right, Top, and Bottom boxes in the Outside Margins section.

To apply preset margins

1.	Select a frame with the Pick Tool.

2.	Click Format, Frame Properties.

3.	Click the Margins tab.

4.	If the Presets button is displayed on the Margins page, proceed to step 5, if the Details button is displayed, proceed to step 6.

5.	Click the Presets button.

6.	Click one of the following buttons:

•	Outside Margin

•	Inside Margin

•	Inside & Outside Margins

•	Top & Bottom

To change the unit of measurement for margins

1.	Select a frame with the Pick Tool.

2.	Click Format, Frame Properties.

3.	Click the Margins tab.

4.	Right-click the margin setting you want to change the unit of measurement for.

5.	Click Units.

6.	Click the unit of measurement you want to use.

 Related Topics


Adding and formatting columns

You can add preset columns to your frames, or you can create your own custom columns. Once you add columns, you can apply formatting, such as rules or column balance, to them.

Columns have an overprint option that lets you print intercolumn rules over the background color. Overprint works with color separation, which is the process of separating the colors in an image into the primary printing colors of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black. In overprinting, the color on top prints directly over the color on the bottom.

You use overprinting when a dark color needs to be printed on top of a light color or to produce special effects with two colors.

To add preset columns

1.	Click a frame with the Pick Tool.

2.	Click Format, Frame Properties.

3.	Click the Columns tab.

If the Presets button is displayed on the Columns page, proceed to step 4. If the Details button appears, proceed to step 5.

4.	Click the Presets button.

5.	Choose one of the following options:

•	One Column

•	Two Columns

•	Three Columns

•	Four Columns

6.	Choose one of the following options for column balance:

•	No Column Balance [image] disables column balance so that text may not be evenly distributed between columns

•	Column Balance [image] distributes text evenly between the columns

7.	Choose one of the following preset separators, if you chose an option other than One Column.

•	Intercolumn Rules

•	No Intercolumn Rules

To add custom columns

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Click the Columns tab.

If the Details button is displayed on the Columns page, proceed to step 3. If the Presets button appears, proceed to step 4.

3.	Click the Details button.

4.	Choose a layout from the Column Layout list box.

5.	Type the number of columns you want in the Number Of Columns box.

6.	Do any of the following:

•	Type a width in the Width column corresponding to the column you want to adjust on the page. The columns are numbered from left to right.

•	Type a value in the Gutter column to add space between columns.

7.	If you want to add vertical rules as separators between your columns, do any of the following.

•	Type a vertical rule width in the Rulers column that corresponds to the column after which you want to place a vertical rule.

•	Click the Color button in the Color column, and select a color for the vertical rule.

•	Click the Outline Pen in the Style column, to set a style for the vertical rule.

8.	Enable the Overprint check box if you want to print intercolumn rules over the background color.

To set column text flow

1.	Click the frame you want to set column text flow for.

2.	Click Format, Frame Properties.

3.	Click the Columns tab.

If the Details button is displayed on the Columns page, proceed to step 3. If the Presets button appears, proceed to step 4.

4.	In the Column Text Flow list box, click one of the following:

•	First Left Then Right

•	First Right Then Left

To set column balance in a frame

1.	Click the frame you want to set column balance for.

2.	Click Format, Frame Properties.

3.	Click the Columns tab.

If the Details button is displayed on the Columns page, proceed to step 3. If the Presets button appears, proceed to step 4.

4.	In the Column Balance list box, click one of the following:

•	On

•	Off

•	Default

 Note

•	The Column Balance list box lets you specify whether you want Corel VENTURA to distribute text so that it is distributed as evenly as possible between columns. Selecting Default sets Column Balance to the settings for the entire chapter.

 Related Topics


Creating and formatting rules


Overview: Creating and formatting rules
Creating and formatting rules

Corel VENTURA uses two kinds of rules in your publications: vertical rules and rules used as borders. Vertical rules appear as vertical lines within or at the edge of a frame or a page. You can use up to eight vertical rules, and they can be placed anywhere in a frame or a page. Each one of the eight rules can have different properties, such as color, width, etc.

You can also use rules to border frames, pages and paragraphs. Rules are comprised of a top, bottom, left, or right rule around an object such as a frame, page, or paragraph. Each rule can consists of up to three parallel lines. Corel VENTURA lets you choose from a number of preset options for rules, such as drop shadows. You can also create your own style for a rule. Styles that you create can be saved as rule tags. A rule tag stores the formatting properties of that rule and can be applied to pages, frames, paragraphs and tables. For more information about rule tags, see "Using rule tags."

For more information about applying rules to paragraphs, see "Adding rules and drop shadows to a paragraph."

Some examples of how you can use rules to isolate the frame's contents from the text in a document.

 Related Topics


Creating vertical rules on a frame or page

Vertical rules are vertical lines that you can place on a frame or a page. You can define up to eight rules, use different colors for each, and define their width.

To create vertical rules for a frame

1.	Select a frame with the Pick Tool.

2.	Click Format, Frame Properties.

3.	Click the General tab.

4.	Click the Vertical Rules button.

5.	Choose one of the following from the Vertical Rules Layout list box:

•	Same On Left And Right Pages [image] keeps the vertical rule settings the same if pages are inserted before the page

•	Mirrored On Left And Right Pages [image] mirrors the vertical rule settings if pages are inserted before the page

•	Different On Left And Right Pages [image] lets you set the vertical rule settings independently if pages are inserted before the page

6.	Type the number of vertical rules you want in the Number Of Rules box.

7.	Do any or all of the following to format each vertical rules:

•	Type the distance you want each rule to be from the left margin in the Position box.

•	Type a value for the width of each rule in the Rules box.

•	Click the Color button and choose a color for each rule.

•	Click the Outline Pen button and choose any of the style options.

To create vertical rules on a page

1.	Click View, Page Layout.

2.	Click a page.

3.	Click Page, Page Properties.

4.	Follow steps 3 to 7 from the previous procedure.

 Note

•	You can also apply vertical rules between columns. For information, see "Applying intercolumn rules between columns."

 Related Topics


Applying drop shadows to a frame

You can choose from a number of preset drop shadows that you can apply to your frames. Drop shadows are rules that go on the outside of your frame and create the appearance of shadows.

To apply a drop shadow to a frame

1.	Click a frame with the Pick Tool.

2.	Click Format, Frame Properties.

3.	Click the Rules tab.

If the Presets button is displayed, proceed to step 4. If the Details button is displayed, proceed to step 5.

4.	Click the Presets button.

5.	Click one of the drop shadow options.

 Note

•	If a frame is not rectangular, only drop shadows that go around the entire frame border appear. Top, bottom, or side drop shadow settings do not appear on non-rectangular frame shapes.

 Related Topics


Applying preset rules to a frame

Corel VENTURA lets you apply preset rules around your frames. You can choose the color and a style. If you want to create custom rules, see "Creating rule tags."

To apply a preset rule to a frame

1.	Select a frame with the Pick Tool.

2.	Click Format, Frame Properties.

3.	Click the Rules tab.

If the Presets button is displayed, proceed to step 4. If the Details button is displayed, proceed to step 5.

4.	Click the Details button.

5.	Click the Quick tab.

6.	Click one of the rule options from the right side of the dialog box.

7.	Choose a rule tag from the Rule Tag list box.

8.	Click the Color button, and choose a color for the rule.

9.	Choose one of the following options from the Extents list box:

•	Frame [image] extends the rule to the dimension of the frame

•	Custom [image] sets the length of the rule by typing values in the Length and Indent boxes

 Note

•	If a frame is not rectangular, only rules that go around the entire frame border appear. Top, bottom, or side rule settings do not appear on non-rectangular frame shapes.

 Related Topics


Applying custom rules to a frame

Rules allow you to create and apply formatted borders for frames and frame tags. You can use up to three lines for each rule. You can also select one of the preset rule options on the Quick page and customize the rule on the Advanced page.

To apply custom rules to a frame

1.	Select a frame with the Pick Tool.

2.	Click Frame, Frame Properties

3.	Click the Rules tab.

If the Details button is displayed, proceed to step 4. If the Presets button is displayed, proceed to step 5.

4.	Click the Details button.

5.	Click the Advanced tab.

6.	Click in the Edge Selection box to select the edge(s) to which you want to apply the rules.

To select an edge, click the cursor along any edge you want. To select all of the edges, you can click the center of the Edge Selection box.

7.	Click either of the following buttons.

•	Inside Rules button [image] places rules inside the frame border

•	Outside Rules button [image] places rules outside the frame border

8.	Do any of the following:

•	Enable the check boxes for each rule you want to use in the Number (#) column. You can use up to three rules.

•	Type a value in the Size column.

•	Click the color button in the Color column, and select a color.

•	Click the Outline Pen tool in the Pen column, and use the Outline Pen dialog box to set options for your rules.

•	Type a value in the Space column to adjust the space between the lines. If you have enabled only one line, the Space column can only be used to adjust that line relative to the normal position of the rule.

9.	Choose one of the following options from the Extents list box:

•	Frame [image] extends the rule to the dimensions of the page

•	Custom [image] sets the length of the rule by typing values in the Length and Indent boxes

 Notes

•	You can also apply rules to a page by selecting a page, clicking Page, Page Properties, and following steps 3 to 9 from the "To apply a preset rule to a frame" procedure.

•	If a frame is not rectangular, only rules that go around the entire frame border appear. Top, bottom, or side rule settings do not appear on non-rectangular frame shapes.

•	You can save your customized rule as a rule tag by clicking the Add button and typing a name for the tag. You can then apply the tag to other frames in your publication. For more information about rule tags, see "Using rule tags."

 Related Topics


Using rule tags


Overview: Using rule tags
Using rule tags

Rule tags store information about rules, which are the lines that you can apply around pages, paragraphs, frames, and tables. Rule tags define the location, size, thickness, and color of the rules. Rule tags can be applied to pages, frames, paragraphs, and tables. For more information about tags, see "Managing tags and stylesheets."


Creating rule tags

You can create a rule tag and apply a rule and its formatting throughout your publication.

To create a rule tag

1.	Click Tools, Tag Window.

2.	Click the Rule tab.

3.	Click the New Tag button.

4.	Type a name in the New Tag Name box.

5.	Click the New Tag Properties button.

6.	Do any of the following:

•	Enable the check boxes for each rule you want to use in the Number (#) column. You can use up to three rules.

•	Type a value in the Size column.

•	Click the color button in the Color column, and select a color.

•	Click the Outline Pen tool in the Pen column, and use the Outline Pen dialog box to set options for your rules.

•	Type a value in the Space column to adjust the space between the lines. If you have enabled only one line, the Space column can only be used to adjust that line relative to the normal position of the rule.

 Note

•	If you want to apply a rule to a cell border, you must first create the rule tag. For more information about using rule tags for cell borders, see "Changing table and cell border properties."

 Related Topics


Applying rule tags

Rule tags can be applied to any paragraph, frame, page, or table in your publication. Unlike other tags in your publication, the same rule tag can be applied to different objects. For example, you can apply the same rule tag to a page or to a frame.

To apply a rule tag

1.	Click the Pick tool.

2.	Select a paragraph, frame, or page.

3.	Click Tools, Tag Window.

4.	Click the Rule tab.

5.	Double-click the rule tag.

To apply a rule tag to table cells

1.	Select the table cells.

2.	Click Table, Cell Properties.

3.	Choose a rule tag from the Rule Tag list box.

4.	Select the edges you want the rule applied to by clicking in the Edge Selection section. You must select a new rule tag for each edge you select.

 Tip

•	You can also apply a rule tag to a table by choosing one of the preset options from the right side of the Cell Properties dialog box.

 Related Topics


Editing rule tags

You can change the formatting of your rule tags. The changes apply to all the rules to which that tag is applied.

To edit a rule tag

1.	Click Tools, Tag Window.

2.	Click the Rule tab.

3.	Click the tag for which you want to edit the formatting.

4.	Click the Tag Properties button.

5.	Do any of the following:

•	Enable the check boxes for each rule you want to use in the Number (#) column. You can use up to three rules.

•	Type a value in the Size column.

•	Click the color button in the Color column, and select a color.

•	Click the Outline Pen tool in the Pen column, and use the Outline Pen dialog box to set options for your rules.

•	Type a value in the Space column to adjust the space between the lines. If you have enabled only one line, the Space column can only be used to adjust that line relative to the normal position of the rule.

 Related Topics


Applying captions, names, conditions, and fills to frames


Overview: Applying captions, names, conditions, and fills to frames
Applying captions, names, conditions, and fills to frames

A caption frame lets you add text to a frame to explain or identify its contents. You can also insert a counter in a caption frame to number pictures and tables in frames. If you move or delete the frames, Corel VENTURA updates the caption numbering automatically.

Each frame has a name which you can customize. This name is used to create markers for cross-references, or for hyperlinks when you publish your publication electronically.

Conditions let you tailor your publication output according to your audience. Instead of editing a publication every time you need to add or omit specific frames, you can use conditions to produce different versions of the same publication.

A fill is a color or pattern used as a background for a frame or graphic object. You can add uniform, fountain, pattern, texture, and PostScript fills to frames.

 Related Topics


Working with caption frames

You can place the caption frame on any side or on two opposite sides of a frame. If you move a caption frame to a new position, the caption text is kept if you choose a single caption location (such as left). However, if you choose to move the caption to two locations, such as left and right, the caption text is lost.

Caption frames let you add text or counters to a frame to explain or identify its contents.

To add a caption to a frame

1.	Select a frame with the Pick Tool.

2.	Click Format, Frame Properties.

3.	Click the General tab.

4.	Choose the location for the caption from the Caption Location list box.

5.	Type the caption in the Caption frame.

To remove a caption

1.	Select a frame with the Pick Tool.

2.	Click Format, Frame Properties.

3.	Click the General tab.

4.	Choose None from the Caption Location list box.

To move a frame caption to a new position

1.	Select a frame with the Pick Tool.

2.	Click Format, Frame Properties.

3.	Click the General tab.

4.	Choose the new location for the caption from the Caption Location list box.

To add counters to captions

1.	Create a caption using the method in "To add a caption to a frame."

2.	Click inside the caption frame.

3.	Click the Insert button on the Property Bar to access the Insert flyout.

 Note

•	You can create cross-references to the text in your caption frames. For more information, see "Cross-referencing caption text."

 Related Topics


Setting the name for frames and frame anchors

A frame takes on the name of the file you place in it. This name is customizable and is used for creating markers. Markers act as targets for hyperlinks. For more information about markers, see "Creating hyperlinks." The frame anchor name is generated automatically by Corel VENTURA. You can, however, customize the frame anchor name.

To name a frame

1.	Select a frame with the Pick Tool.

2.	Click Format, Frame Properties.

3.	Click the General tab.

4.	Type a name in the Frame Name box.

To name a frame anchor

1.	Select an anchored frame with the Pick Tool.

2.	Click Format, Frame Properties.

3.	Click the Placement tab.

4.	Type a name in the Anchor Name box.

 Note

•	You cannot give two frames the same name.

 Related Topics


Setting frame conditions

You must have conditions set in the Publication Properties dialog box before you can apply conditions to a frame. If you want to set conditions, click the Set Publication Conditions button in the Frame Conditions dialog box. For a complete discussion about setting conditions, see "Defining a publication's conditions."

To set frame conditions

1.	Select a frame with the Pick Tool.

2.	Click Format, Conditions.

3.	Choose the condition to which you want to assign the frame from the Conditions Available list box.

4.	Click the Add button.

5.	Use the And, Or, and Not buttons to include or exclude the frame from other versions of the conditional publication.

 Note

•	If you want a frame to be anchored to a paragraph and to be shown or hidden along with the paragraph, assign the same condition to both the frame and the paragraph.

 Related Topics


Setting frame fill

You can add fills, which are the color inside an object, to frames. You can change the fill of a frame at any time or you can remove its fill. For a complete discussion about using fills in Corel VENTURA, see "Filling objects."

This picture shows an example of a fountain fill.

To fill your frame with a uniform fill

1.	Select a frame with the Pick Tool.

2.	Click Format, Frame Properties.

3.	Click the General tab.

4.	Click the Edit button.

5.	Click the Uniform Fill button.

6.	Choose a fill color from the Color list box.

To fill your frame with a fountain fill

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the previous procedure.

2.	Click the Fountain Fill button.

3.	Choose the first color for the fill from the From list box.

4.	Choose the second color for the fill from the To list box.

5.	Click one of the following buttons to set the type of fountain fill you want:

•	linear

•	radial

•	conical

•	square

To fill your frame with a pattern fill

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from "To fill your frame with a uniform fill" procedure.

2.	Click the Pattern Fill button.

3.	Enable the button beside one of the following types of patterns:

•	2-color

•	full color

•	bitmap

4.	Choose the color in the front of the pattern from the Front Color list box.

5.	Choose the color in the back of the pattern from the Back Color list box.

6.	Choose the pattern from the Pattern list box.

To fill your frame with a texture fill

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from "To fill your frame with a uniform fill" procedure.

2.	Click the Texture Fill button.

3.	Choose the library from which to choose textures from the Texture Library list box.

4.	To choose a pattern, do one of the following:

•	Choose a pattern from the Pattern text list box.

•	Choose a pattern from the Pattern Preview list box.

5.	Click the More button.

6.	Choose the library from which to choose textures from the Texture Library list box.

7.	Choose a texture from the Texture list.

8.	Modify the settings for your chosen pattern as you desire. You can lock any of these settings by enabling the Lock button beside each setting's box.

9.	Click the Options box.

10.	Choose the bitmap resolution from the Bitmap Resolution list box. Bitmap resolution is measured in dots per inch (dpi).

11.	Choose the maximum amount by which the texture fill can be tiled from the Maximum Tile Width list box. The resolution is measured in pixels.

To fill your frame with a PostScript Texture fill

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from "To fill your frame with a uniform fill" procedure.

2.	Click the PostScript Texture Fill button.

3.	Choose a fill from the PostScript list box.

4.	Enable the Preview Fill check box to see a preview of the fill.

5.	Click the More button.

6.	Choose a fill from the PostScript list box.

7.	Modify the settings for your chosen fill as you desire.

 Tip

•	You can also fill frames using the Fill Tool flyout.

 Related Topics


Using frame tags


Overview: Using frame tags
Using frame tags

Frame tags let you quickly apply identical formatting to multiple frames in your publication. Frame tags contain information about frame attributes such as fills, columns, and margins. For example, you can create a sidebar frame tag for a newsletter. Then each time you need to create a sidebar, you can apply the frame tag and that frame will have the same properties as the other sidebar frames in your publication. You format frame tags in the same way that you format frames. The only difference is that the formatting applies to each frame referencing that tag.

You can create frame tags without specifying a size and position for each frame the tag is applied to. If you omit frame size and position from the tag, you can set the size and position of each frame individually. If you specify the size and position in the tag, each frame to which the frame tag is applied will be the same size and in the same position on the page.

Frame tag attributes include

•	frame size

•	frame position

•	margins

•	columns

•	typography

•	rules

•	fills

•	caption frame location

A tag does not prevent you from formatting a frame. If you want to apply formatting to a specific frame, such as adjusting the inside or outside margins or adding columns, you can do so without affecting the tag and without affecting the other frames using that tag. This is called overriding a tag. For more information about overriding tags, see "Overriding and updating tag properties."

 Related Topics


Creating frame tags

You can create a new frame tag or base a frame tag on an existing frame's properties.

To create a frame tag using the Tag Window

1.	Click Tools, Tag Window.

2.	In the Tag Window, click the Frame tab.

3.	Click the New Tag button.

4.	Type a name in the New Tag Name box.

5.	Choose Selected Frame from the Copy Properties From list box.

6.	Click the New Tag Properties button to format your tag.

7.	In the Frame Tag Properties dialog box, choose the formatting options for the frame tag.

Formatting a frame tag is the same as formatting a frame.

To create a frame tag from an existing frame's properties

1.	Select a frame with the Pick Tool.

2.	Choose New Frame Tag from the Frame Tag List box on the Property Bar.

3.	Follow steps 4 to 7 from the previous procedure.

 Tip

•	The Selected Frame option in the Copy Properties From list box refers to the frame you selected. You can also choose the default frame or a frame tag you created previously from the Copy Properties From list box.

 Note

•	The Frame Tag Properties dialog box lets you omit the frame position and size values from the frame tag's properties. With these attributes disabled, you can set the size and location of each frame independently of the tag. All other formatting attributes are still applied to the frame. You can disable the Width, Height, X, and Y values by enabling the Omit From Tag check boxes on the Placement page of the Frame Tag Properties dialog box.

 Related Topics


Applying frame tags

You can apply a frame tag to any frame in your publication.

To apply a frame tag

1.	Click the Pick tool.

2.	Select a frame to which you want to apply a tag by clicking its border.

3.	Choose a frame tag from the Frame Tag list box on the Property Bar.

To apply a frame tag using the Tag Window

1.	Select a frame with the Pick Tool.

2.	Click Tools, Tag Window.

3.	Click the Frame tab.

4.	Double-click the frame tag you want to apply to the selected frame.

 Tips

•	You can apply tags to multiple selected frames.

•	You can also find and replace tags in a publication. For more information, see "Finding and replacing tags"

 Note

•	The default frame tag settings omit the frame size and position when the tag is applied; therefore, you can move the frame and adjust the size without having to update the tag.

 Related Topics


Editing frame tags

When you change a frame tag's properties, the properties are applied to each frame that references the tag.

To edit a frame tag from the Tag Window

1.	Click Tools, Tag Window.

2.	Click the Frame tab.

3.	Click the tag you want to edit.

4.	Click the Tag Properties button.

5.	In the Frame Tag Properties dialog box, chose the formatting options for your frame tag.

To edit a frame tag

1.	Select a frame with the Pick Tool.

2.	Click Format, Frame Tag Properties.

3.	In the Frame Tag Properties dialog box, choose the formatting options for your frame tag.

 Note

•	The Frame Tag Properties dialog box lets you omit the frame position and size values from the frame tag's properties. With these attributes disabled, you can set the size and location of each frame independently of the tag. All other formatting attributes are still applied to the frame. You can disable the Width, Height, X and Y values, by enabling the Omit From Tag check boxes on the Placement page of the Frame Tag Properties dialog box.

 Tip

•	You can also right-click the frame tag you want to edit in the Tag Window, and click Frame Tag Properties.

 Related Topics


Omitting the frame size and position from a frame tag

When you format frame tags, you can omit the frame size and position from the frame tag properties. This allows you to adjust the width, height, and horizontal and vertical placement on the page without having to change the frame tag. All of the other attributes defined for the tag are still applied.

To omit the frame size from a frame tag

1.	Click Tools, Tag Window.

2.	Click the Frame tab.

3.	Click the tag you want to edit.

4.	Click the Tag Properties button.

5.	Click the Placement tab.

6.	Enable the Omit From Tag check boxes for the following settings:

•	Width

•	Height

To omit the frame position from a frame tag

1.	Follow steps 1 to 5 from the previous procedure.

2.	Enable the Omit From Tag check boxes for the following settings:

•	X

•	Y

 Related Topics


Updating frame tag properties

If you change the properties of a frame without updating or changing its frame tag, a flag ( [image]) appears in the Frame Tag List box indicating that the selected frame has the frame tag applied but has additional formatting not defined by the frame tag. You can either create a new tag from the frame or update the frame tag. For information about creating a new frame tag, see "Creating frame tags."

To update a frame tag's properties

1.	Select a frame with the Pick Tool.

If a flag ( [image]) appears in the Frame Tag List box, go on to step 2.

2.	Choose Update "selected frame tag name" from the Frame Tag List box on the Property Bar.

 Note

•	You can also update a frame tag by clicking the Update Tag button in the Frame Properties dialog box after making your changes.

 Related Topics


Glossary

16-color mode

A sizes

Accelerator keys

Active window

Agates

Agate lines

Anchor

ANSI

Anti-aliasing

Antonym

Artistic Text

Ascender

Ascending (Sort order)

ASCII

ASCII (8-bit)

Aspect ratio

Auto backup

Autowrap

B size

Backup

Barista

Baseline

Baseline grid

Bezier curve

Binding Margin

Bit depth

Bitmap

Bitmap texture

Black and white

Black point

Bleed

BMP

Body Text

Bold

Border tag

Bounding box

Box character

Break

Brighten

Brightness

Brightness and Contrast filter

Bullet

Calibration

Calibration bar

Calligraphic

Callout

Cap height

Caption

Caption frame

Carding

CD-ROM

CDR

Cell

Center of rotation

CERN

CGI

CGM

Channel

Chapter

Character Code

Character set

Character tag

Check box

Chromaticity

Cicero

Click

Client application

Client-side

Clip

Clipart

Clipboard

Clipping hole

Clipping path

Closed Path

CMY

CMYK

CMYK255

Color channel

Color depth

Color gamut

Color Manager

Color model

Color palette

Color proof

Color Separation

Color space

Colorimetric

Column Balance

Column Guides

Command

Command button

Composite

Composite channel

Conditional objects

Conditions

Conical fill

Constrain

Continuous tone

Contrast

Control point

Conversion

Corel Barista

Corel PHOTO-PAINT

Corel SCRIPT

Corel SCRIPT binary file

Corel Versions

Counters

CPT

Crop

Crop marks

Crosshairs

Cross-reference

Cursor

Curve object

Cusp Node

Database

Default printer

Default settings

Delimiter

Densitometer scale

Descender

Descending (Sort order)

Deselect

Destination file

Device driver

Device dependent color model

Dialog box

DIC

Didot

Direction keys

Directory

Disable

Discretionary hyphen

Dither

Dithered color

DLL (Dynamically Linked Library)

Document Type Definition (DTD)

Dot gain

Double-click

Downloadable fonts

DPI

Drag

Drawn frames

Drop cap

Drive

DTD

Duotone

Dupont palette

Ellipse

Em

Em dash

Em space

Embedded object

Emboss

Ems %

Emulsion

En

En dash

En space

Enable

Endnotes

End node

EPS

Equation elements

Equation template

Executable

Extension

External file

External script

Feathering

Fields

Figures

Figure Space

File previewer

Fill

Film

Filter

Flyout

FOCOLTONE

Folder

Fonts

Footer

Footer frames

Footnote

Footnote frames

Force justification

Force Line Breaks

Formula

Fountain fill

Four-color process

Frame

Frame Anchor

Frame tags

Full-color pattern fill

Functions

Gamut

Gamut Mapping

Gaussian

GEM

Generated Tag

GIF

Gradient fill

Graphic object

Gray component replacement (GCR)

Grayscale

Grayscale image

Greeked text

Grid

Group

Guidelines

Gutter

Halftone

Halftone screen

Handles

Hanging Indent

Header

Header frames

Hierarchy

Hints

Histogram

HLS

Home node

Hourglass cursor

HPGL

HSB

HTML

HTML tag

Hue

Hyperlink

Icon

Image map

Imagesetter

Indent

Insertion point

Intensity

Internal script

Internet

Interruptible refresh

Italic

Jaggies

Java

JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group)

JPG

Justification

Kerning

Keyboard shortcuts

Knockout

LAB

Landscape

Layout

Leaders

Leading

Letter spacing

Library

Limitcheck error

Line art

Line break

Line length

Line style

Linear fill

Linked object

Lino

List box

LPI

Local working copy

Loose lines

Luminosity

Main word lists

Markup codes

Marquee

Marquee select

Master copy

Master pages

Mechanical

Menu

Menu Bar

Minimize

Moire pattern

Monochrome

Monospacing

Multimedia

Multiuser master copy

Multiuser publication

Multiuser working copy

NCSA

Negative

Newspaper-style columns

Nodes

Noise

Non-breaking hyphen

Non-breaking space

NTSC

Nudge

Object

Object Linking and Embedding (OLE)

OLE object

Open path

Open Prepress Interface (OPI)

Orientation

Orphan

Outdent

Outline

Out-of-gamut color

Overprint

Override

Page border

Page gap

Page tag

Palette

Paletted color mode

PANTONE® HEXACHROME (TM) palette

PANTONE® Process Color palette

PANTONE® Spot Color palette

Paragraph

Paragraph tag

Paste

Pasteboard

PAT

Path

Path name

Pattern fill

PCT

Photo CD

Photographic gamut mapping

Photoshop PSD

Pica

Picture

Pixel

PLT

Point

Polygon

Portable document

Portrait orientation

Positive

PostScript

PostScript textures

Primary mouse button

Printable page

Process color

Profile

Proof

Property

Property Bar

Proportional spacing

Publication

Pure color

Radial fill

Radio button

Rasterized image

Recipe

Recordings

Records

Rectangle

Registration color model

Registration mark

Repeating frame

Resample

Resident fonts

Resolution

RGB

Rich Text Format

Right click

Rotate

RTF

Ruler crosshairs

Rule tag

Rules

Rulers

Sans Serif

Saturation

Scale

Scanner

Scitext

Screen angles

Screen frequency

script

Scroll

Secondary mouse button

Segment

Select

Sentence element

Serif

Server

Server application

Server side

Service bureau

SGML

Shortcut keys

Skew

Slot

Smooth node

Snap

Source file

Spot color

Spreads

Square fill

Standard Generalized Markup Language (SGML)

Start node

Status Bar

Stretch

Styles

Stylesheet

Subpaths

Subscript

Superscript

Swatch

Symmetrical node

Synonym

Tab

Tag

Template

Text Link

Texture fill

Thin Space

Threshold

Thumbnail

Thumbnail link

TIFF (Tagged Image File Format)

Tile

Tiling

Tints

Title Bar

Toggle

Tone curve

Toolbar (Standard Toolbar)

Toolbox

TOYO Color Finder Palette

Tracking

Transfer time lag

Trap

True color

TrueType fonts

TRUMATCH®

Two-color pattern

Type style

Typeface

Typeset

Undercolor removal (UCR)

Uniform color

Uniform Resource Locator

User word list

Variable

Vector

Vertical Justification

Watermark

Web browser

Web document

Weight

White point

White Space

Widow

Wizard

Word list

Working copy

World Wide Web

WPG

WYSIWYG (What-you-see-is-what-you-get)

X-height

YIQ

Zero point

Zoom


A


16-color mode

A 16-color, or 4-bit, mode uses a fixed palette of the 16 VGA colors to reproduce all the colors in an image. Dithering (alternating pixels of different colors) gives the illusion of creating a color not in the palette. For example, orange might be represented by dithering red and yellow pixels.


A sizes

Paper sizes measured in metric units. You can choose from A2 to A6 sizes.


Accelerator keys, definition
Accelerator keys

Also known as shortcut keys or keyboard shortcuts, accelerator keys execute menu commands when pressed in combination.


Active window, definition
Active window

The window that you are working in. The next action you perform applies to the active window.


Agates, definition
Agates

A type size about 5.25 inches in height.

See also Agate lines


Agate lines, definition
Agate lines

A unit of measure used in classified advertising: one column wide and 1/4 inch deep.

See also Agates


anchor, definition
Anchor

A code inserted in text linking a frame to a particular location on the page.


ANSI, definition
ANSI

The American National Standards Institute character set. It consists of 256 characters; the first 128 are the same as the ASCII character set.


Anti-aliasing (definition)
Anti-aliasing

A method of smoothing jagged edges in bitmap images. Anti-aliasing partially fills intermediate pixels along those edges to smooth the transition between the edge and the surrounding image.


Overview: Antonym
Antonym

A word that means the opposite of another word. For example, the word "hot" is an antonym of the word "cold."


Artistic Text, definition
Artistic Text

Use Artistic Text [image] when you want to apply special effects, such as shaping text to a path. You can add Artistic Text objects containing up to 32,000 characters.


Ascender, definition
Ascender

In lowercase letters, the part of the letter that extends above the main body (x-height).


ascending (Sort order), definition
Ascending (sort order)

An ascending sort order displays items in order from least to greatest. For example, ascending alphabetical order is a, b, c, g, l, x, z; ascending numeric order is 1, 2, 3, 5, 8, 13, 21.


ASCII, definition
ASCII

The American Standard Code for Information Interchange character set, which consists of the characters available on a standard 128-character keyboard, including nonprintable control codes such as carriage returns and page breaks.


ASCII (8-bit), definition
ASCII (8-bit)

A text file format that lets you import non-English characters. The ASCII standard uses 7 bits for data and 1 bit for parity, which allows for 128-characters. ASCII 8 bit uses the parity bit as data, which lets the Corel VENTURA character set be represented in a psuedo-ASCII format.


Aspect ratio, definition
Aspect ratio

The ratio of the image's width to its height (x:y). For example, the aspect ratio of an image 640 x 480 pixels is 4:3. You can change an object's aspect ratio by stretching it in one direction.


Overview: Auto backup
Auto backup

The Auto backup feature automatically saves your work at set intervals.


Autowrap, definition
Autowrap

Autowrap lets you draw a path around the perimeter of an irregularly shaped picture. You can use the Node Edit tool ( [image]) to modify the shape of the path. Once you have applied Autowrap to a picture, text can flow around the shape of the picture.


B


B size, definition
B size

A paper size that is measured in metric units. You can choose from either the B4 or B5 size.


Backup, definition
Backup

The last saved version of a publication. You can set Corel VENTURA to automatically make a copy of your publication every time.


Corel Barista, definition
Barista (Corel Barista)

A Java-based publishing technology that lets you use Corel VENTURA to publish Web documents in the Java Programming Language.

See also Java and World Wide Web


Baseline, definition
Baseline

The imaginary line along which text characters align horizontally.


Baseline grid, definition
Baseline grid

An invisible grid used to align frames. The baseline grid, which descends from the top of the base page frame, does not change to reflect new tags, attributes, or spacing. It is always based on the inter line spacing of the Body Text paragraph tag.


Bezier curve, definition
Bezier curve

A path defined by the position of four control points (at the ends of the tangents of the vertices). The length and angle of the tangents describe the deviation from linear that a path follows between vertices.


Binding Margin, definition
Binding margin

The additional space added to the inside edge of pages to allow for drilling or punching before binding. Use different margins for left and right pages to create binding margins.


Bit depth

The number of bits used to define the shade or color of each pixel in an image. A 1-bit image is black and white. An 8-bit grayscale image provides 256 shades of gray. An 8-bit color image provides 256 colors. A 24-bit image provides more than 16 million colors.


Bitmap, definition
Bitmap

An image composed of a series of pixels or dots. Scanners and paint programs, such as Corel PHOTO-PAINT, generate this type of image. By contrast, CorelDRAW creates images using vector objects [image] shapes stored internally as mathematical equations.


Bitmap texture, definition
Bitmap texture

Variable fills that can look like clouds, water, gravel, minerals, and dozens of other natural and manufactured substances. Bitmap textures display on your screen and print to any printer.


Black and white (definition)
Black-and-White

A 1-bit color mode that stores images as two solid colors [image] black and white [image] with no gradations. This mode is useful for line art and simple graphics.


Black point, definition
Black point

The blackness level relative to a four-color and a three-color black. A four-color black is produced by printing 100% cyan, 100% magenta, 100% yellow, and 100% black. A three-color black is produced using 100% of each of the CMY (cyan, magenta, and yellow) inks and is not as dark as a four-color black.


Bleed, definition
Bleed

Part of a printed page that extends beyond the edge of the paper.


BMP, definition
BMP

The filename extension for Windows bitmap files.


Body Text, definition
Body text

The name of the default tag in a Corel VENTURA stylesheet. By default, all text in a Corel VENTURA publication is formatted with the Body Text tag unless you change the formatting or assign another tag to specific paragraphs using the Paragraph tool.


bold, definition
Bold

A darker, heavier version of normal type, often used for headlines and text emphasis.


Border tag, definition
Border tag

See Rule tag


Overview: Bounding box
Bounding box

The gray rectangle, with eight handles, that encloses a selected frame or graphic object. When you move or otherwise transform a frame or graphic, a dotted rectangle representing the bounding box appears instead of the object frame or graphic.


Box character, definition
Box character

Prior to version 7 of Corel VENTURA, the box character was a special item that you could insert. The hollow box used the <$B0> markup code and the filled box used the <$B1> markup code. Many fonts now support this type of special character.

Corel VENTURA 8 supports box characters by converting them to a font. You need to install Wingdings or Zapf Dingbats fonts on your computer to print and display these characters. If you do not have either font, the box character is not displayed.


Borders, definition
Borders

See Rules.


Break, definition
Break

The interruption in the flow of text from one paragraph to the next. Normally each paragraph continues directly below the previous paragraph, or if no more room is left on the current column or page, it continues at the top of the next column or page. By changing the break settings, you can control where a paragraph begins [image] for example, at the top of a column, at the top of the next left or right page, or at the same vertical position as the previous paragraph.


Brighten, definition
Brighten

To increase the level of white or light in colors. The effect lightens the image or a particular area.


Brightness, definition
Brightness

The amount of light that is transmitted or reflected from a given pixel. In the HSB color model, brightness is a measure of how much white a color contains. In this case, a brightness value of 0 produces black, and a brightness value of 255 produces white.


Brightness and Contrast filter, definition
Brightness And Contrast filter

Use the Brightness And Contrast filter to lighten or darken a bitmap image (brightness) or to alter the distinction between light and dark areas (contrast). Intensity affects the brighter areas of a picture by making them brighter or darker.


Bullet, definition
Bullet

A dot or other character used to differentiate or add emphasis to items in a list.


C


Calibration, definition
Calibration

The process of adjusting a monitor, printer, or scanner to display, print, and capture colors more accurately.


Calibration bar, definition
Calibration bar

Strips of color printed with an illustration. Used as a reference for calibrating a monitor so that it displays colors as they appear in the printed output.


Calligraphic, definition
Calligraphic

An effect created with the Outline tool in which graphic objects are given an outline that varies in thickness. Gives curved objects a hand-drawn appearance.


Callout, definition
Callout

A graphic object that lets you label publication elements, such as illustrations.


Cap height, definition
Cap height

The distance from the baseline to the top of an uppercase character.


Caption, definition
Caption

Text used to describe or label the contents of a frame.

See also Caption frames.


Caption frames

A frame attached to another frame to describe or explain that frame's contents. You can add caption frames to any side of a frame.


Carding, definition
Carding

One of the methods used to vertically justify text in frames or on pages. Carding adds space in increments equal to the interline spacing of a selected paragraph, paragraph tag, or custom setting to align baselines across columns and facing pages.

See also vertical justification and feathering


CD-ROM, definition
CD-ROM

Compact Disk Read Only Memory. A CD-ROM is a means of data storage that uses optical storage technology. A single CD-ROM disk can hold more than 650 megabytes of information, or half a billion characters of text. Unlike floppy disks, most CD-ROM disks can be read from but not written to.


CDR, definition
CDR

The filename extension for the CorelDRAW vector-based file format.


Cell, definition
Cell

The basic unit of a table in which data is entered and stored. The intersection of a row and a column forms one cell in a table.


Center of rotation, definition
Center of rotation

The point around which an object rotates. It is represented by a round marker that originally appears in the middle of a selected frame or graphic object. You can change the axis of rotation by moving the center of rotation away from the center of the object.


CERN (definition)
CERN

CERN (Conseil Europeen pour la Recherche Nucleaire) is the scientific laboratory in which the World Wide Web was developed. There are two World Wide Web server systems: CERN and NCSA (National Center for Supercomputing Applications). Contact your server administrator to find out which system your server uses.


CGI (definition)
CGI

The standard for the methods that Web servers and external programs and scripts use to communicate. CGI (Common Gateway Interface) is the command protocol between the server and a program. Image maps, forms, and index handling programs use CGI conventions.

If you are creating server-side image maps, you must have the image map CGI program installed on the server. Confirm with your server administrator that you can create server-side image maps.


CGM, definition
CGM

The filename extension for Computer Graphics Metafile, a vector graphic file format.


Channel, definition
Channel

Similar to a plate used in the printing process. Each channel is a color. For example, if you have an RGB image, the channels are red ( R), green (G), and blue (B). When all the channels combine, they mix to create the entire range of colors in the image.


Chapter, definition
Chapter

A subsection within a publication. Each Corel VENTURA publication consists of at least one chapter.


Character code, definition
Character code

The number corresponding to a character in a character set, such as the ASCII or ANSI character sets.


Character set, definition
Character set

The letters, punctuation marks, and special characters in a font. Foreign language accents and mathematical symbols are examples of special characters.


Character tag, definition
Character tag

Contains information about the font, size, color, appearance, and hyphenation characteristics of a single character or selected text within your publication.


Check box, definition
Check box

A square box in a dialog box used to enable or disable options. An option is enabled when an X or a check mark appears in the check box and is disabled when the check box is empty.


Chromaticity, definition
Chromaticity

In monitor calibration, chromaticity refers to the chroma (hue adjustment) of your monitor.


Cicero, definition
Cicero

A unit of measure equivalent to 12 didots. 5.63 ciceros equals 1 inch.

See also didots


Click, definition
Click

To press and release the left mouse button.


Client Application, definition
Client application

The application receiving data from another through a Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) or Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) link.


Client-side (definition)
Client-side image maps

Client-side image maps do not depend on the server to process the map information, but the user's browser must support image map display. It is always possible that your audience will not have a suitable browser to view the map.


Clip, definition
Clip

In Corel VENTURA, to mask out portions of a picture by applying a path to it. The path acts as a window through which the remainder of the picture shows. Text on the same page as the picture flows around the path.


Clipart, definition
Clipart

Images that can be brought into Corel applications and edited or used as is. Corel offers a large selection of clipart in many formats. You can purchase additional images, including some in bitmap format, from commercial suppliers.


Clipboard, definition
Clipboard

A temporary storage area used to hold cut or copied information. You can paste the contents of the clipboard into other programs that support the type of information that has been cut or copied. Information remains on the clipboard until another cut or copy command is executed.


Overview: Clipping hole
Clipping hole

A transparent hole in a curve object through which underlying objects are visible. You can create clipping holes by combining overlapping objects using the Combine command.


clipping path, definition
Clipping path

A shape drawn or placed over a picture that acts as a window through which only parts of the picture inside the shape show. You can create clipping paths in Corel VENTURA and import pictures that contain them.

See also Autowrap


Closed path, definition
Closed path

A continuous line that is joined at a point (or node) to form an object that can be colored, filled, outlined, or patterned.


CMY, definition
CMY

A color model made up of cyan ( C), magenta (M), and yellow (Y). Use this color model if the picture will be produced on a CMY device, such as a three-ink printer. C, M, and Y values range between 0 and 255.


CMYK, definition
CMYK

A color mode made up of cyan (C), magenta (M), yellow (Y), and black (K). In the CMYK color mode, color values are expressed as percentages, so a value of 100 for any ink means that it is being applied at full saturation. Used in most full-color commercial printing, CMYK is like CMY, but the addition of black allows for true blacks and a wider tonal range. The CMYK color mode is based on the CMYK color model.


CMYK255 (definition)
 CMYK255

A subtractive color model created by assembling different densities of cyan ( C), magenta (M), yellow (Y), and black (K) pigments on a surface. C, M, Y, and K values range from 0 to 255.


Color channel (definition)
Color channel

A channel is an 8-bit grayscale version of your picture that functions like a plate used in the commercial printing process: each channel represents one level of color in your picture. When all of the channels are printed together, they produce the entire range of colors in the picture.

For example, an RGB picture comprises three channels: red ( R), green (G), and blue (B). When all three channels are printed or displayed together, they create the entire range of colors in the picture.


Color depth, definition
Color depth

Determines the range of colors and tones that are available in a picture, and is usually measured by the number of colors displayed, e.g., 256 colors, or 16 million colors.

The color depth you select for your picture affects the file size, as well as the quality of the final picture that is printed or displayed on a monitor. Color depth is identified by a number of bits.


Overview: Color gamut
Color gamut

The range of colors that a device, such as a monitor or color printer, can produce or detect.


Color Manager, definition
Color Manager

A tool that uses your monitor, scanner, and printer information to create a System Color Profile. The System Color Profile helps Corel applications capture, display, and print color more accurately on different devices.


Color model (definition)
Color model

A simple color chart that defines the range of colors displayed in a color mode. RGB (red, green, blue), CMY (cyan, magenta, yellow), CMYK (cyan, magenta, yellow, black), HSB (hue, saturation, brightness), and HLS (hue, lightness, saturation) are examples of color models.


Palette, definition
Color palette

A collection of solid colors. You can choose outline and fill colors using the color palette.


Color proof, definition
Color proof

Sometimes called a prepress proof, this preliminary step in the color-printing process shows how an image will look when it's printed. Proofing provides an opportunity to make corrections and adjustments before final printing.


Color separation, definition
Color separation

The process of separating the colors in an image into the primary printing colors cyan, magenta, yellow, and black.


Color space (definition)
Color space

A virtual representation of a device or color model's color gamut in electronic color management. The boundaries and contours of a device's color space are mapped by color management software.

See also Color gamut.


Colorimetric, definition
Colorimetric

See Gamut mapping.


Column Balance, definition
Column balance

Automatically distributes text evenly among the columns on a page. Column balance settings are made for each chapter, but you can turn column balancing on or off for individual pages.


Column Guides, definition
Column guides

Nonprinting lines that show a column's margins.


Command, definition
Command

A word or control that initiates an action when selected or clicked. Commands can be accessed either from a menu or by clicking buttons on a toolbar.


Command button, definition
Command button

A button in a dialog box used to carry out an action such as resetting values or displaying another dialog box.


Composite, definition
Composite

In commercial printing, a preliminary version of a design that combines all picture, line art, and text elements. Color composites are often printed on color PostScript printers to check the artwork before they are color separated for four-color process printing. Also called a comprehensive, proof, or comp.


Composite channel (definition)
Composite channel

Combines all color channels for the current bitmap's color model to represent the picture in full color. When viewing a bitmap in the Publication Window, you are seeing its composite channel.


Conditional objects, definition
Conditional objects

Text, frames, or pictures that may be included or excluded from a publication, depending on the parameters (conditions) you set. For example, you can create a multilingual publication that includes the same pictures and style settings but uses different text depending on the chosen language.


Conditions, definition
Conditions

Parameters you can set to include or exclude publication elements when you want to create variations of a publication. For example, you can create a multilingual publication that includes the same pictures and style settings but uses different text depending on the chosen language.


Conical fill, definition
Conical fill

A type of fountain fill in which the color changes in conical shapes from the start color to the end color in clockwise and counterclockwise directions.


Constrain, definition
Constrain

To restrict object movement to a particular angle. Holding down CTRL while transforming (e.g., rotating) or creating an object lets you control the constraint angle.


Continuous tone, definition
Continuous tone

An image represented by graduated tones from black to white as in a photograph.


Contrast, definition
Contrast

The difference in tone between the dark and light areas of an image. Higher contrast values indicate greater differences between dark and light, with fewer gradations between them.


Control point, definition
Control point

Determine the curve of a segment as it passes through a node. You can control the curve of a segment by varying the control point's angle and its distance from the node. A node at the end of a path only has one control point, while a node in the middle of a path has two control points. However, because straight segments don't bend, a node at the end of a straight segment won't have a control point.


Conversion, definition
Conversion

The process of translating a Corel VENTURA publication, with its coding and structural information, into another type of publication, such as HTML or Java, complete with the appropriate markup tags.

You can convert a Corel VENTURA publication using the Publish As command (File menu).


Corel PHOTO-PAINT, definition
Corel PHOTO-PAINT

A program that lets you retouch scanned photographs and edit bitmap pictures. Corel PHOTO-PAINT combines impressive painting tools with powerful masking and object handling, allowing you to produce innovative, one-of-a-kind images for your Corel VENTURA publications.


Corel SCRIPT, definition
Corel SCRIPT

A programming language that you can use either as a standalone application or to create and run application script files.


Corel SCRIPT binary file, definition
Corel SCRIPT Binary file

Corel SCRIPT Binary (CSB) files are created by compiling a script into computer binary format. Binary also means a system of counting based on a unit of two.


Corel Versions, definition
Corel Versions

An archiving program that lets you store previous versions of your Corel publications. It organizes all archived publications by version number and by the date and time the version was stored.


Counters, definition
Counters

Number codes inserted in your publication for numbering pages, chapters, and captions. Counters update automatically, based on the position of the counter in the publication.


CPT, definition
CPT

The filename extension for bitmap files created in Corel PHOTO-PAINT. Corel VENTURA can import files in this format, including those containing color and grayscale information.


Crop, definition
Crop

The process of cutting away unwanted areas of a picture without affecting the resolution of the information that remains. The portions not displayed in the publication are still stored in the original picture file.


Crop marks, definition
Crop marks

Alignment marks at the four corners of a printed page. Crop marks make it easier to trim the paper to the proper size and appear only when the page size is smaller than the paper used by the printer.


Crosshairs, definition
Cross hairs

The pair of intersecting lines that can be dragged from the spot where the rulers meet to set the ruler origin.


Cross-reference, definition
Cross-reference

A pointer or marker (usually a page number) that directs the reader to another part of a publication.


Cursor, definition
Cursor

Indicates the position of the mouse or equivalent pointing device on the computer screen. Use the cursor to point to where you want to create an object or text, or to point to an item you want to select. The shape of the cursor changes depending on the tool or command you use.


Curve object, definition
Curve object

An object with nodes (the points on a path that determine its shape) and control points (points that extend from nodes to further define a path's shape) that you manipulate to change the object's shape. Curve objects are drawn with the Freehand and Bezier tools. You can also convert frames and objects drawn with the other Graphics tool (except callouts) into curve objects using the Convert To Curves command (Edit menu).


Cusp node, definition
Cusp node

A Bezier node that lets you move two control points independently. This means you can edit the line segments on either side of a node separately. Use a cusp node when you want to add a sharp bend to a curve.


D


Database, definition
Database

A tool for storing and organizing information.


Default printer, definition
Default printer

The printing device that is used automatically when you choose the Print command. You can select only one default printer at a time.


Default settings, definition
Default settings

Preset options built into a program. Unless you alter these options, each new publication you create uses the default settings.


Delimiter, definition
Delimiter

An SGML term for a character such as "<" or "/" that serves to distinguish markup and content in a document.


Densitometer scale, definition
Densitometer scale

Scales that are printed on each page of a color-separated image for the purposes of gauging the accuracy, quality, and consistency of the output.


Descender, definition
Descender

In lowercase letters, the part of the letter that extends below the main body, or x-height, as shown in the bitmap.


Descending (Sort order), definition
Descending (sort order)

A sort order determines the order in which items in a list are displayed. A descending sort order displays items in order from greatest to least. For example, descending alphabetical order is z, x, l, g, c, b, a; descending numeric order is 21, 13, 8, 5, 3, 2, 1.


Deselect, definition
Deselect

The action of clicking on white space or selecting another object to move the focus of the next command or action away from the selected object.


Destination file, definition
Destination file

The file into which an embedded or linked object is being inserted.

See also Embedded object and Linked object.


Device dependent color model (definition)
Device-dependent color model

A color model that bases color values on the color characteristics of a specific device. For example, since CMYK is a device-dependent color model, CMYK color values used to produce an image on one device may produce different colors on another device.


Device driver, definition
Device driver

A program through which a computer and devices, such as a mouse or printer communicate. A mouse driver, for example, displays a cursor on the screen and translates clicks into actions.


Overview: Device-independent color model
Device-independent color model

A color model that bases color values on fixed standards rather than on the color characteristics of a specific device. For example, since Lab is a device-independent color model, Lab values remain constant, even if a file moves between devices.


Dialog box, definition
Dialog box

A window displayed when additional information is needed to perform an action.


DIC, definition
DIC

Offers colors that are available through the DIC Color Guide, DIC Color Guide Part II, and DIC Traditional Colors of Japan. Colors in these palettes are created by mixing DIC brand inks.


Didot, definition
Didot

A unit of measure equivalent to 1.07 times a U.S. point. One inch equals 67.567 didots.


Direction keys, definition
Direction keys

Direction keys are the Arrow keys and HOME, END, PgUp, and PgDn on your keyboard. The Arrow keys move selected objects in small steps and move the insertion point when you type or edit text on-screen or in a dialog box. HOME and END select the start and end nodes on a curve object when the Shape tool is selected and move the insertion point in a block of text to the beginning or end of a line. Pressing CTRL and HOME or END moves the insertion point to the start or end of the current publication.


Directory, definition
Directory

Part of a structure that organizes files on a disk, like drawers in a filing cabinet. Directories have names and can be divided into subdirectories. For example, you could store all your logo designs in a directory called LOGOS. In Windows 95, directories are called folders.


Disable, definition
Disable

A button or check box is disabled when there is no check mark beside it.


Discretionary hyphen, definition
Discretionary hyphen

A manually inserted hyphen. You can insert discretionary hyphens to customize your own hyphenation points for a word or to suppress automatic hyphenation in a word.


Dither (definition)
Dithering

Randomization of pixels on devices or images that use a limited color palette to simulate continuous tone progressions. Screen dithering is a method of enhancing the display of monitors that are capable of 16-bit color or less. It works by averaging the depth of pixels in a given area to create additional colors or shades of gray. Image Dithering is a method of enhancing the appearance of photographic images that use a limited color palette.


Dithered color, definition
Dithered color

Color simulated by putting dots of another color very close together. Windows uses dithering to display colors that the graphics adapter can't display.

See also Pure color.


DLL (Dynamically Linked Library), definition
DLL (Dynamically Linked Library)

A set of small computer programs (also called routines or macros) that can expand the functionality of a script language.


Document Type Definition

A file containing information about a Standard Generalized Markup Language (SGML) document, including the names of elements (e.g., title page, table of contents, chapters, titles, paragraphs, and pictures) that can be used in the document and the order in which the elements can occur.

See also SGML


Dot gain, definition
Dot gain

The result of a printing press increasing the size of the dots that make up a bitmap when the picture is printed. Dot gain can cause the image to appear darker than intended.


Double-click, definition
Double-click

To press and release the left mouse button twice in quick succession.


Downloadable fonts, definition
Downloadable fonts

Fonts stored on disk that, unlike printer-resident fonts, must be transmitted to a printer before you can print your publication. If you have purchased downloadable PostScript fonts, you can use them instead of Corel's TrueType fonts by selecting an option in the Print Options dialog box.


DPI, definition
dpi

A measure of a printer's resolution in dots per inch. Typical desktop laser printers print at 300 dpi, while imagesetters are capable of printing at resolutions of 1270 or 2540 dpi. A higher dpi creates a smoother and cleaner output.


Drag, definition
Drag

To move the mouse while holding down a mouse button. Releasing the button completes the action.


Drawn frames

You create a drawn frame with the Frame tool. Drawn frames are generally used for creating special text flow or to place pictures in a publication. Corel VENTURA provides a wide range of preset frame shapes in the Frame Tool flyout.


Drop cap, definition
Drop cap

The initial letter of a paragraph that is enlarged and often set in a different font than the rest of the paragraph.


Drive, definition
Drive

A device in a computer that spins disks that are used to store information.


Duotone, definition
Duotone

An 8-bit color mode that displays images using 256 shades of up to four tones. An image in the Duotone color mode is simply a grayscale image that has been enhanced with one to four additional colors. Use the Duotone color mode to add a touch of color to grayscale images or to create interesting effects using tone curve settings. A duotone image can be monotone, duotone, tritone, or quadtone.


Dupont palette, definition
DuPont palette

A standard color matching system for selecting DuPont high performance automotive-quality paint colors. The 3,368 paint chips of the SpectraMaster Solid Color Library can be used for accurate specification and selection of 10 types of paint worldwide.

The colors are based on Lab and converted to RGB for display and CMYK printing.


E


Ellipse, definition
Ellipse

An oval or a circle.


em, definition
Em

A unit of measurement that is equal in height and width in the current font size; for example, if the font size is 12 points, an em is 12 points wide.


em dash, definition
Em dash

A unit of measurement that is equal in height and width in the current font size; for example, if the font size is 12 points, an em dash is 12 points wide. It is used to separate parenthetical statements from the surrounding text.


em space, definition
Em space

An em is a unit of measurement that is equal in height and width in the current font size; for example, if the font size is 12 points, an em space is 12 points wide.


embedded object, definition
Embedded object

Information from a file created in one application (the source application) that has been inserted into a file in another application (the destination application). For example, you can embed a graphic created in CorelDRAW into a Corel VENTURA publication. You can edit the embedded information from within the application into which it is embedded.


Emboss (definition)
Emboss

The process of creating three-dimensional relief on a two-dimensional surface.

The Emboss effect filter evaluates tonal values and exaggerates edges between dark and light areas, darkens shadows, and brightens highlights to give the appearance of texture and greater depth.


emulsion, definition
Emulsion

The light-sensitive coating material on a piece of film.


en, definition
En

A unit of measure used in typesetting that is half the width of an em.

See Em.


en dash, definition
En dash

Half the width of an em dash. It is used between numbers (e.g., Figure 3 [image] 15) or in place of a hyphen in a compound adjective in which one element consists of two words or a hyphenated word.

See Em dash.


en space, definition
En space

An en space is half the width of an em space.

See Em space.


Enable, definition
Enable

A check box or button is enabled when there is a check mark beside it.


Endnote, definition
Endnote

Explanatory text that is referenced to a location at the end of a chapter by a number or symbol.

See also Footnotes


End node, definition
End node

The small square at the end of an open path that appears when you select the path with the Node Edit tool. The end node is smaller than the start node.


EPS, definition
EPS

The filename extension for Encapsulated PostScript files. Corel VENTURA can import EPS files. You can also export individual pages as EPS files, and then import the page as a graphic or print it to an EPS printer.


Equation elements, definition
Equation elements

Items used in the construction of a typeset equation. Elements include special characters, symbols, and templates. Templates are a preset form, such as a numerator over a denominator, into which you can insert characters, symbols, or other equation elements.


Equation template, definition
Equation template

A preset equation symbol with spaces, called slots, for specifying variables. A slot is a writable space in an equation template in which variables, symbols, words, or phrases can be placed. For example, a fraction template has two slots, one for the numerator and one for the denominator.


Executable, definition
Executable

Before a script is executed, it is compiled internally into an executable program file, and is re-compiled each time the script is run. To save compile time, Corel SCRIPT Editor includes a feature that complies your scripts into executable program files. Compiling your scripts into executables not only speeds up their runtime, but allows you to hide the programming code that has gone into creating the script.


Extension, definition
Extension

The characters following the period in a filename that identify the type of information in the file. A .VP extension, for example, indicates that the file is a Corel VENTURA publication.


External file, definition
External file

An external file is a file that has been imported into a Corel VENTURA publication but has remained a separate file that is stored outside of the publication.


External script, script, definition
External script

External scripts are scripted commands that are saved as separate text files onto your hard drive. External scripts can be edited using a basic word processor, as long as the scripting language used in them is maintained. Internal scripts can be made into external scripts by simply exporting them so that they appear as a separate text file. As well, external scripts can be imported into a particular publication and made into an internal script.


F


Feathering, definition
Feathering

One of the methods used to vertically justify text in frames or on pages. Feathering adds the exact amount of space needed to make the text align with the bottom of the frame or page.

See also Vertical justification and carding


fields (definition)
Fields

A column of information in a database that contains information about a specific characteristic of an entity. For example, the names, addresses, and telephone numbers in a database of people in your company would each constitute a field.


figures (definition)
Figures

Corel VENTURA provides two numbering schemes for caption frames: table numbers and figure numbers. Either scheme can be used to number the contents of the frames, such as tables, pictures, or text. Figures can refer to any information contained within a captioned frame.


Figure Space, definition
Figure space

A figure space equals the width of a number in the current point size. Since all numbers in a given point size have the same width [image] even in a proportionally spaced font [image] you can use figure spaces between numbers in tables to keep tabular information aligned properly.

See also Em space and thin space


File previewer, definition
File previewer

In the Import Picture dialog box, a thumbnail picture that lets you see what the selected file contains before you import it.


Fill, definition
Fill

Fills are colors, bitmaps, color gradients, or patterns that are applied to areas of your picture.


Film, definition
Film

Photo-sensitive sheets of paper onto which images are transferred as positives or negatives. These sheets are then used to create printing plates.


Filter, definition
Filter

A program that translates one file format to another or that processes the information in a file to produce a special effect, such as embossing.


Flyout, definition
Flyout

A tool or menu command that displays additional tools or commands when selected. Tools or commands that have a flyout have a small arrow located in the bottom right corner of the tool button or to the right of the command name.


FOCOLTONE, definition
FOCOLTONE

A color system that provides a range of spot colors built with the process colors cyan, magenta, yellow, and black (CMYK). FOCOLTONE colors are organized so that you can choose FOCOLTONE colors with at least 10% of one process color in common with another FOCOLTONE color. This minimizes the need for trapping and makes it a good color palette to use for color separating.


Folder, definition
Folder

Folders are used to store and organize your documents, programs, and other files. For example, you could create a folder called LOGOS for keeping your logo designs. In previous versions of Windows, folders were called directories.


Font, definition
Fonts

A set of characters in a given typeface and point size such as 10 point Times New Roman. Most fonts are available in families that include different point sizes, such as 8 points, 18 points, and 36 points, and styles, such as bold and italic.


Footer, definition
Footer

Text that appears in the bottom margin of a page in the publication.


Overview: Footer frames
Footer frames

Footer frames appear at the top or bottom of pages and can be set to automatically adjust to fit the text they contain. You can type or edit text directly in the footer frames, and make changes to the margins, spacing, and other formatting (e.g., fills, outlines, ruling lines).


Footnote frames

Corel VENTURA automatically creates footnote frames when you insert a footnote reference. They appear at the bottom of the page and automatically adjust to accommodate the footnote reference text.


footnotes, definition
Footnotes

Explanatory text that is referenced to a location on the page by a number or symbol. Footnotes appear on the same page as the reference.

See also Endnotes


Force justification, definition
Force justification

Stretches the last line of a paragraph to the right margin.


Force line breaks, definition
Force line breaks

A line break you "force" in a paragraph by pressing SHIFT + ENTER. Unlike hard returns (created by pressing Enter), which cause the end of a paragraph, force line breaks cause a line break but do not start a new paragraph.

No spacing is added between lines separated by a force line break. Where effects such as bullets apply to the first line of a paragraph, the next bullet does not appear until you enter a regular hard return.


Formula, definition
Formula

An arithmetic operation or mathematical expression.

See also Function


Fountain fill, definition
Fountain fill

A complex fill that displays a progression between two colors that follow a linear, radial, conical, or square path. By using fountain fills [image] also known as gradient or graduated fills [image] you can create a direct blend from one color to another or a cascade of different colors. You can also use pregenerated fountain fills to create neon tubes, metal cylinders, and a variety of similar effects.


Four-color process, definition
Four-color process

The four-color printing process, or process color, reproduces all color artwork with just four colors: cyan( C), magenta (M), yellow (Y), and black (K), often referred to as CMYK.


Frame, definition
Frame

A box used to hold text or pictures. You can use the Frame tool to draw frames and then set other attributes using the Frame Properties command (Format menu).

Each page in a Corel VENTURA publication is a frame into which publication elements can be placed. Unlike the frames that you create with the Frame tool, additional pages are created automatically to accommodate text.


Frame Anchor, definition
Frame anchor

A code that you insert in text. The anchor lets you align a frame relative to the text surrounding it. If the text the frame is anchored to moves, then the frame also moves.


Frame tags, definition
Frame tag

Frame tags let you quickly apply identical formatting to multiple frames in your publication. Frame tags contain information about frame attributes such as fills, columns, and margins. For example, you can create a sidebar frame tag for a newsletter. Then each time you need to create a sidebar, you can apply the frame tag and that frame will have the same properties as the other sidebar frames in your publication.


full-color pattern, definition
Full-color pattern fill

A full-color patter fill is composed of repeating vector pictures. Corel supplies a collection of vector patterns to which you can add your own.


Functions, definition
Function

A mathematical expression that depends on and varies with another expression: for example, height is a function of age.

See also Formula


G


Gamut, definition
Gamut

The range of colors that a device, such as a monitor or color printer, can produce or detect.

See also Gamut mapping


Gamut mapping, definition
Gamut mapping

The electronic assessment of the gamut of devices in your system and the reassignment of out-of-gamut colors to others that can be reproduced. Gamut mapping is handled by Corel Color Manager for all Corel graphics applications. Colorimeter gamut mapping is used for spot colors and vector-based art, and photographic gamut mapping is used for bitmap art.

See also Color space


Gaussian (definition)
Gaussian

Refers to gaussian distribution, which applies an effect using bell-shaped distribution curves rather than straight lines.


GEM (Graphics Environment Manager), definition
GEM (Graphics Environment Manager)

A filename extension for files created by programs such as GEM Artline. Corel VENTURA can import pictures in this format.


generated tag, definition
Generated tag

A paragraph tag created automatically for certain types of text, such as headers, footers, tables of contents, and index titles. All generated tag names begin with the characters Z_ (Z + underscore) and only appear if the item they are created for has been enabled. For example, if you have not created an index, then the Z_INDEX TITLE paragraph tag will not be created.


GIF, definition
GIF

The filename extension for files in a bitmap format commonly used to store digitized color photographs. Corel applications can import files in this format.

GIF files are the most commonly used graphics format on the Internet and are known for their fast access time.


Gradient, definition
Gradient fill

A complex fill that displays a progression between two colors that follow a linear, radial, conical, or square path. By using gradient fills [image] also known as fountain or graduated fills [image] you can create a direct blend from one color to another or a cascade of different colors. You can also use pregenerated gradient fills to create neon tubes, metal cylinders, and a variety of similar effects.


Graphic object, definition
Graphic object

Any object created with the Corel VENTURA drawing tools.


Gray Component Replacement (GCR), definition
Gray Component Replacement (GCR)

In commercial full-color printing, GCR substitutes black ink for some or all of the gray component of each color. This process reduces total area coverage in CMYK output, as well as replacing expensive colored inks with less expensive black ink.


Grayscale (definition)
Grayscale

A color mode that displays images using 256 shades of gray. Each color is defined as a single value between 0 and 255, where 0 is darkest (black) and 255 is lightest (white). In the RGB color mode, a grayscale value corresponds to equal amounts of all RGB colors; in CMYK, a grayscale value corresponds to zero C, M, and Y values, with a positive K value; in HSB, a grayscale value corresponds to zero H and S values, with a positive B value. The Grayscale color mode is based on the Grayscale color model.


Grayscale image, definition
Grayscale image

An image that uses the Grayscale color model, which can display up to 256 shades of gray ranging from white to black. Grayscale images, especially photographs, are commonly referred to as "black-and-white."

Grayscale values can also be thought of in terms of the other color models. In RGB, a grayscale value corresponds to equal amounts of all RGB colors. In CMYK, a grayscale value corresponds to zero C, M, and Y values with a positive K value. In HSB, a grayscale value corresponds to zero H and S values with a positive B value.


Greeked text, definition
Greeked text

Greeking text displays fonts using fewer pixels than specified. Thus, text appears on the screen as a series of gray bars rather than as recognizable type. This process reduces the time it takes to redraw a screen that includes text that is too small to be legible at the given zoom level.


Grid, definition
Grid

A series of evenly spaced horizontal and vertical lines used to align objects.


Group, definition
Group

A set of collected objects. Grouping enables a set of simple objects to behave as one.


Guidelines, definition
Guidelines

Nonprinting lines used to align objects. You can place guidelines anywhere in the Publication Window by dragging them from the rulers.


Gutter, definition
Gutter

The space between columns. The term is sometimes used for the space on the inside of two facing pages in a bound document.

See also Binding margin


H


halftone, definition
Halftone

An image that has been converted from a continuous tone image to a series of dots of various sizes to represent different tones. A photograph must be converted to a halftone before it can be printed on conventional devices and printing presses. Halftones are often referred to as PMTs. On laser printers that cannot print different sizes of dots, the halftone is produced by printing different numbers of dots in a given area.


Halftone screen, definition
Halftone screen

A grid pattern that simulates the appearance of shading in a printed image by converting a continuous-tone image to an image composed of tiny dots of various sizes. The resolution of a halftone screen, or screen frequency, is expressed in lpi (lines per inch).


Handles, definition
Handles

Small squares that appear on the corners and sides of an object's bounding box when the object is selected. Use the square handles to resize and transform an object. Click a selected object and the handles change to arrows, which permit you to rotate and skew the object.


Hanging Indent, definition
Hanging Indent

A format applied to text in which the first line of a paragraph begins farther left than subsequent lines.


Header, definition
Header

Text that appears in the top margin of a page in a publication.


Header and footer frames
Header frames

Header appear at the top or bottom of pages and can be set to automatically adjust to fit the text they contain. You can type or edit text directly in the header frames, and make changes to the margins, spacing, and other formatting (e.g., fills, outlines, ruling lines).


Hierarchy, definition
Hierarchy

The tree structure in the Hierarchy window that shows the logical relationships of linked and grouped objects and allows you to change their relationships.


Hints, definition
Hints

Information included with fonts to improve their appearance when printed at small point sizes. Hints are included with the TrueType and Adobe Type 1 fonts supplied with Corel applications.


Histogram(definition)
Histogram

A chart that represents the range of tonal values in a bitmap image.

The tonal values are arranged on the histogram from dark to light; the spikes represent the relative number of pixels at any given level. When you adjust tonal values, you can change the level and distribution of dark and light areas of an image by moving the threshold sliders left or right.


HLS (definition)
HLS (hue, lightness, and saturation)

Hue, lightness, and saturation are the components of the HLS color model, a variation of HSB and an alternative to RGB. Hue determines color (yellow, orange, red, etc.), lightness determines perceived intensity (lighter or darker color), and saturation determines color depth (from dull to intense). The circular visual selector defines the hue value (0 to 360) and the saturation value (0 to 100); the vertical visual selector defines the lightness value (0 to 100).


Home node, definition
Home node

The first node in a path. It is the square at the end of an open path that appears when you select the path with the Node Edit tool. The home node is larger than the end node.


Hourglass cursor, definition
Hourglass cursor

The cursor changes to an hourglass when Corel VENTURA is performing an operation during which no other actions can be performed.


HPGL, definition
HPGL

Acronym for Hewlett Packard Graphics Language, a file format created by programs such as AutoCAD for printing pictures on plotters.


HSB, definition
HSB

A color model that approximates the way the human eye perceives color. In the HSB model, color is defined by three components: hue, saturation, and brightness. Hue (H) determines color (yellow, orange, red, etc.), saturation (S) determines color depth (from dull to intense), and brightness (B) determines perceived intensity (brighter or darker color). In the HSB color model, hue is expressed as a degree of rotation on a circular color wheel. Saturation and brightness are expressed as percentages of full intensity.


HTML, definition
HTML

Hypertext Markup Language is the World Wide Web authoring standard. HTML is comprised of markup tags that define the structure and components of a publication. The tags are used to tag text and integrate resources (such as pictures, sound, video, and animation) when creating a Web page.


HTML, tag definition
HTML tag

A phrase contained by angle brackets [ <x> ] that is used to indicate structure in a document. The majority of HTML tags require a start tag and an end tag; the end tag is denoted by a forward slash included in the tag code [ </x> ].

Example

<HTML>

<TITLE>This is my title.</TITLE>

<BODY>This is the body of my HTML document.</BODY>

</HTML>


Hue, definition
Hue

In the HSB color model, hue (H) is the main attribute in a color that distinguishes it from other colors. Blue, green, and red, for example, are all hues.

See also Saturation and Brightness.


Hyperlink, definition
Hyperlink

An item (highlighted text or an image map) in an Adobe Acrobat or World Wide Web document that allows you to jump to another part of the same document or, in the case of a Web document, to another document on the World Wide Web.


I


Icon, definition
Icon

A pictorial representation of a tool, object, file, or other program item. An item is selected by clicking or double-clicking its icon.


Overview: Image map
Image map

A hypergraphic found in an HyperText Markup Language (HTML) document that contains clickable areas that link to Universal Resource Locators (URLs) on the World Wide Web. When you click one of the clickable areas (also called hot spots) in the image, the browser displays the HTML document named in the URL. An image map graphic is made up of a bitmap and a series of coordinates describing the location of the hot spots on the bitmap.


Imagesetter, definition
Imagesetter

A generic term for printers capable of printing text and graphics (line art and photographs) at resolutions of 1200 dpi or greater on film or photographic paper.


Indent, definition
Indent

The blank space between the margins and the text. Normally, only the first line in a paragraph is indented, but you can indent any number of lines.


Insertion point, definition
Insertion point

A vertical bar that indicates where text will be inserted when you type.


Intensity, definition
Intensity

Intensity increases the brightness of the lighter pixels and decreases the darker mid-tones and dark pixels. The result is that the image looks brighter without being washed out.


Internal script, definition
Internal script

A series of recorded commands that are embedded into a publication's stylesheet and can only be executed or edited if a publication using that stylesheet is opened. Internal scripts can be exported as external scripts and used in other Corel VENTURA publications. As well, external scripts can be imported into a publication and made to be internal scripts.


Internet, definition
Internet

A world-wide collection of networks set up to facilitate the exchange of information, using conventions for language and markup (HTML), picture format (GIF and JPEG), and file transfer (FTP, or file transfer protocol). You can use the Internet to exchange email or to transfer information using FTP. If you have a browser, you can explore the World Wide Web.


Interruptible refresh, definition
Interruptible refresh

A feature in Corel VENTURA that stops the screen during a redraw whenever the mouse button or a key is pressed. If you are working on a page with illustrations, interruptible refresh can save time by allowing you to select tools and commands without waiting for the screen to redraw completely.


Italic, definition
Italic

A type style where characters are slanted to the right. Typically used for emphasis, quotations, or for distinguishing text.


J


Jaggies, definition
Jaggies

A stair-step effect that often occurs when a bitmap image is enlarged. A jagged looking image can be reduced using anti-aliasing.


Java, definition
Java

A programming language that allows you to create self-contained "applets" (mini-applications), which can be executed on any Java-enabled browser. Java was designed for creating Internet-based applications. A Java applet is downloaded to the local computer and recompiled there prior to being executed. For this reason, Java applets are extremely useful for conveying time-sensitive, changeable, Web-based information.


JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group), definition
JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group)

An international standard for image compression that offers compression with almost no losses at ratios up to 20 to 1.


glos_JPG
JPG

The filename extension for the Joint Photographic Experts Group file format, used to display graphics. JPG is known for its relatively small file size.


Justification, definition
Justification

A text alignment that lines text evenly along both the left and right margins.


K


Kerning, definition
Kerning

Reduces the spacing between two consecutive characters. With certain letter pairs, such as "AV", moving the letters closer together improves their appearance when printed. Corel VENTURA provides both automatic and manual kerning.


Knockout, definition
Knockout

In color printing a knockout occurs when the background color is not printed and the text or object over the background is printed in place of the background color. The opposite of knockout is overprint.


L


LAB, definition
LAB

The color model developed by Commission internationale de l'eclairage (CIE). It contains a luminance (or lightness) component (L) and two chromatic components: "a" (green to red) and "b" (blue to yellow). This model is device-independent and encompasses the color gamuts of both the CMYK and the RGB color models.


Landscape, definition
Landscape

A page oriented so that it prints from left to right across its longest dimension.

See also Portrait


Layout, definition
Layout

The arrangement of text, pictures, and other elements on the pages of a document. Corel VENTURA offers layouts for single-page publications, such as brochures, and multipage publications, such as books, booklets, and pamphlets.


Leaders, definition
Leaders

Characters placed in the blank space between items in a list. For example, the periods in the following example:

Item 1 . . . . Item 2 . . . . Item 3


Leading, definition
Leading

The distance between the baselines of type. In Corel VENTURA, leading is adjusted using the Inter-Line setting.


Letter spacing, definition
Letter spacing

Adjusts the horizontal spacing between characters in an entire word, line, or text block. A negative value decreases spacing, while a positive value increases it.


Library, definition
Library

Files created by Corel VENTURA that display as small windows in the Corel VENTURA Publication Window. You can store any of the data or formatting in your publication in a library [image] text, pictures, tags, page tags, stylesheets, graphic or OLE objects, frames, tables, and even the content of an entire chapter.


Limitcheck error, definition
Limitcheck error

A PostScript printing error that occurs when a picture contains too many line segments or when the picture is too large for the printer to reproduce.


Line art, definition
Line art

A picture that is produced on a computer and stored as mathematically defined objects. In traditional typesetting, line art refers to illustrations containing only black or white, with no shades of gray.


Line Break, definition
Line break

When text reaches the right margin Corel VENTURA "breaks" the line and continues the text on the next line. To enter a manual line break, place the insertion point where you want the line to end, then press SHIFT + ENTER.


Line Length, definition
Line Length

The length of a line of type. Usually expressed in picas and points.


Line style, definition
Line style

Solid, dashed, dotted, or dashed-and-dotted line types selected from the Outline Pen dialog box.


Linear fill, definition
Linear fill

A fountain fill that shows a progression of colors in a straight line.


Linked object, definition
Linked object

In Object Linking and Embedding (OLE), information from a source file has been inserted into another file (the destination file) and maintains a link to the source file. Changes made to the information in the source file are automatically made to the information in the destination file.


Lino, definition
Lino

Abbreviation of "linotronic", a type of PostScript imagesetter used for high-resolution printing. Over the years, the term has come to mean any type of imagesetter used by a service bureau.


List box, definition
List box

 A control that lets you choose from a list of options. If the list cannot accommodate all available options, scroll bars are provided.


LPI, definition
lpi

Lines per inch. The screen frequency used for halftone screens for photos and tints is described in lpi.


Loose lines, definition
Loose lines

A line of justified text in which word spacing exceeds the limits set by the Maximum Word setting on the Typography page of the Paragraph Tag Properties and Paragraph Properties dialog boxes. Loose lines occur when a line contains too many long words. You can tighten the spacing by inserting a discretionary hyphen in one or more words in the line.


Luminosity, definition
Luminosity

A value corresponding to the brightness of a color.


M


main word list, definition
Main word list

A large list of specialized words used by Spell Checker for a particular language, profession, or company. The main word list file included with the English, French, Spanish, Italian, German, and Dutch versions of Corel VENTURA is WT80XX.MOR (where "XX" is the code for the language). Corel VENTURA uses the same word lists as Corel WordPerfect.


Markup codes, definition
Markup codes

The coding Corel VENTURA applies to your publication in order to format it. Markup codes are visible and can be edited in Copy Editor view. The following is an example of the markup code for underlined text: <U>underlined text<U*>.


Marquee, definition
Marquee

When you drag diagonally to select a set of elements or a region of an image, the rectangle created between the start point (mouse down) and the end point (mouse up) is called a marquee.


Marquee, select definition
Marquee select

A method of selecting multiple objects by dragging a dotted rectangle around them using the Marquee tool.


Master Pages, definition
Master page

Master pages are now referred to as page tags. Page tags allow you to apply consistent page formatting to any number of pages in your publication.

See also Page tag


Mechanical, definition
Mechanical

A finished camera-ready layout.


Menu, definition
Menu

A list of commands that appears when you click a title on the Menu Bar. The Menu Bar appears below the Title Bar, which is at the top of the Application Window.


Menu bar , definition
Menu Bar

The bar near the top of the Application Window that contains the names of the program's menus.


Minimize, definition
Minimize

To reduce an Application Window to an icon on the Windows taskbar. You can also minimize the Corel VENTURA Tag window and the VENTURA Navigator window to an edge of the Application Window.


Moire pattern, definition
Moire pattern

Undesirable wave patterns that are created in an image by conflicting dot patterns. A moire pattern is created when halftone screens of two different frequencies are superimposed on the same image. For example, if you scan a halftone image, you will likely see moire patterns on your monitor because the original halftone screen is different than the dpi frequency of the scanned image.

These patterns can be especially damaging when they occur in color separations. It is crucial to set the screen angles and frequencies of your halftone screen correctly to avoid this problem.

CorelSCAN provides a moire removal feature to remove these patterns before opening the scanned image.


Monochrome, definition
Monochrome

An image containing a single color, usually black, on a background that uses a different color, usually white.


Monospace, definition
Monospace

Type that has an equal amount of horizontal space allotted for each character, regardless of its width (an "I" is given as much space as a "w"). Typewriters use monospaced type. Laser printers and typesetters adjust the space proportionally to the character width (an "I" is given less space than a "w"), resulting in a more readable appearance.

See also Proportional spacing


Multimedia, definition
Multimedia

A mix of different media, such as text, graphics, sound, and video, in a single published work.


Multiuser master copy, definition
Multiuser master copy

The copy of a multiuser publication in which changes from each user are stored. When each user checks in a chapter of a multiuser publication, the changes are updated in the master copy. The master copy of a multiuser publication is typically kept on a network or shared drive. A master copy cannot be opened [image] changes to the publication are made through the working copy.


Multiuser publication, definition
Multiuser publication

Multiuser publications let various users contribute to a publication at the same time. The stylesheet and chapters are treated as a unit that can be opened and edited individually.


Multiuser working copy, definition
Multiuser working copy

The copy of a multiuser publication or chapter the user edits. When a user checks out a publication or chapter, a working copy is created on their computer. When a publication or chapter is checked in, the master copy of the publication is updated with the changes in the working copy.


N


NCSA, definition
NCSA

The National Center for Supercomputing Applications (NCSA), which developed a Web server system.

If you create an image map, you need to know whether the server you are using runs CERN or NCSA, because each uses different codes in the map files. Contact your server administrator for more information.


Negative, definition
Negative

An image in which the values in the original are reversed so that black areas appear white, white appears black, and colors are represented by their complements (as displayed on the color wheel).


Newspaper-style columns, definition
Newspaper-style columns

Columns in which text-wrap causes text to flow downward from paragraph to paragraph in the first left-hand column. The text flow continues at the top of the next column to the right and repeats with subsequent text.


Nodes, definition
Nodes

Square points located at the end of each line and curve segment that make up a path. There are three types of path nodes: smooth, symmetrical, and cusp. Nodes can also be used to change the shape of tone curves, objects, and selections in your image. When working with a gradient, nodes are used to change its start and end points, its colors, and its transparency values.


Noise (definition)
Noise

In bitmap editing, random pixels on the surface of a bitmap, resembling static on a television screen.


Non-breaking hyphen, definition
Nonbreaking hyphen

A hyphen (also called a discretionary hyphen) which is placed at the beginning of a hyphenated word or number to keep the word or number from being divided at the hyphen during text wrap.


Non-breaking space, definition
Nonbreaking space

A space used to keep words from being separated at the end of a line.


NTSC (definition)
NTSC

National Television Standards Committee. A video color filter that is commonly used to define the gamut of colors supported by television monitors in North America.


Overview: Nudge
Nudge

To move objects in set increments using the Arrow keys: ( [image], [image], [image], or [image]).


O


Object, definition
Object

The collective term for frames and graphic objects created in Corel VENTURA.


Object Linking and Embedding (OLE), definition
Object Linking and Embedding (OLE)

A method of bringing data objects from one Windows application into another. For example, if you want to display a picture from Corel PHOTO-PAINT in Corel VENTURA, with OLE you can share and update the information easily.


OLE object

Information from a file created in one program (the source program) that has been inserted into a file in another program (the destination program). For example, you can embed a picture created in CorelDRAW into a Corel VENTURA publication.


open path (definition)
Open path

A line or curve in which the start point and the end point are not connected. If you apply a fill to an open path, it will not be visible unless you close the path.

See also Closed path


Open Prepress Interface (OPI), definition
Open Prepress Interface (OPI)

A method for having high-resolution bitmaps on the printed page while using low-resolution replicas for placement. Two images are created using a high-quality scanner [image] a high-resolution version (which is kept on file) and a low-resolution equivalent. You import the low-resolution images into your publications, using them "for position only" (FPO). Working with FPO images keeps your publication size smaller and speeds up screen redrawing time. When you send your artwork back to the service bureau for final imaging to film, your high-resolution files are automatically substituted.


Orientation (definition)
Orientation

The direction in which a publication or document is displayed on the page. A page has a landscape orientation when its horizontal dimension is greater than its vertical dimension. When the page's vertical dimension is greater than its horizontal dimension, it has a portrait orientation.


Orphan, definition
Orphan

The first lines of a paragraph that appear at the bottom of a column, frame, or page, while the rest of the paragraph appears in the following column, frame, or page.

See also Widow


Outdent, definition
Outdent

A typographical effect where text is placed to the left of the paragraph margin. Either the first line of a paragraph or a specified number of lines can be outdented.


Outline, definition
Outline

A graphic object's outline defines the appearance of the object's edges. The outline can be different colors and thicknesses. You can also change the line style (e.g., make it dashed) and add arrowheads to the ends of lines and curves.


Out-of-gamut color, definition
Out-of-gamut color

A color that is beyond the capabilities (outside the gamut) of a given device.


Overprint, definition
Overprint

Overprinting is a method of color trapping. When you print on a commercial color press, color trapping is necessary to avoid white gaps between adjoining colors caused by printing plates that are not aligned properly.

Normally, portions of an object that are obscured by another object are not printed. However, if the top object is set to overprint, the obscured portions of any underlying objects will also print. This eliminates potential white gaps between different colors. Overprinting is best used when the top color is much darker than the underlying color; otherwise, an undesirable third color might result (e.g., red over yellow might result in an orange object).

See also Trap


Override, definition
Override

Formatting which overrides the formatting specified in the selected paragraph's tag or the selected page's master page. Such formatting affects only the selected item rather than all items formatted with that tag.


P


Page border, definition
Page border

 In the Publication Window, the rectangle with the drop shadow that represents the printable area. It is also called the Printable Page.


Page gap, defintion
Page gap

The blank space between pages in a multiple-page view. The page gap can be set for the top, bottom, left, and right side of each page displayed in Corel VENTURA.


Page tag, definition
Page tag

Page tags were referred to as Master Pages in previous versions of Corel VENTURA. Page tags let you set up such things as headers and footers, repeating frames, page margins, sizes, and orientation for any number of pages in your publication. Each time you create a publication, Corel VENTURA creates a single default page tag automatically. The number of page tags that a publication has depends on the number that you create; however, by default, there always has to be at least one.


Palette (definition)
Palette

See Color Palette


Paletted color mode (definition)
Paletted color mode

An 8-bit color mode that displays images using up to 256 colors. You can convert a complex image to the Paletted color mode to reduce file size and to allow more precise control over the colors used throughout the conversion process.


PANTONE hexachrome palette(definition)
PANTONE HEXACHROME palette

Colors that are available through the PANTONE Hexachrome system, which is based on the CMYK color model but adds two additional inks for a total of six inks and a broader range of colors.


PANTONE Process color palette, definition
PANTONE Process Color palette

Colors that are available through the PANTONE Process Color system, which is based on the CMYK color model (cyan, magenta, yellow, and black). The first 2,000 colors are two-color combinations; the remainder are three- and four-color combinations.


PANTONE Spot colors palette, definition
PANTONE Spot colors palette

A palette that uses colors available through the PANTONE Spot Colors. Since spot colors correspond to solid inks and are not CMYK-based, each unique color applied to an object results in an additional color separation plate.


Paragraph, definition
Paragraph

A character, word, or block of text ended with a hard return. Pressing ENTER inserts a hard return. A hard return alone is also considered a paragraph.


Paragraph tag, definition
Paragraph tag

A set of rules that define paragraph attributes, including font, alignment, and spacing.


Paste, definition
Paste

To copy an item from the Clipboard to the active area.


Pasteboard, definition
Pasteboard

The area around the page that acts as a worktable. You can set elements of your publication, such as frames, on the pasteboard and then position them on the page as you design it. The pasteboard does not print with the page.


PAT, definition
PAT

The filename extension for files containing full-color patterns used to fill frames and graphic objects.


Path, definition
Path

The basic component from which objects are constructed. Paths can be open (e.g., a line or curve) or closed (e.g., a circle or polygon). They can also constitute a single line or curve segment or many segments joined together.


Path name, definition
Path name

The location of a folder or file on your computer. For example, Corel application files are stored in the path C:\COREL\ by default. This means that the files are stored in a folder called COREL on the C: drive.


Pattern fill (definition)
Pattern fill

Pattern fills are pregenerated, symmetrical images that are tiled to fill selected objects. You can import bitmaps or vector graphics for use as pattern fills, or you can create simple two-color bitmap patterns yourself. There are three types of pattern fills [image] two-color bitmap, full-color bitmap, and vector pattern.


PCT, definition
PCT

The filename extension for vector graphics files used by Macintosh computers.


Photo CD, definition
Photo CD

A process developed by the Eastman Kodak company that converts 35.mm film negatives or slides to digital format and stores them on a compact disc (CD).


Photographic, definition
Photographic

A technique in which the entire range of picture color is compressed to fit the color space of the destination device, maintaining smooth transitions between colors.

Photographic gamut mapping (also called photometric) is suited to photographs and continuous tone artwork.


Photoshop PSD, definition
Photoshop PSD

A raster (bitmapped) image file format, created by Adobe Photoshop, used frequently by DOS and Windows applications.


Pica, definition
Pica

A unit of measurement used primarily in typesetting. One pica equals approximately 1/6 of an inch (exactly 12 points).


Picture, definition
Picture

In Corel VENTURA, a picture is either a bitmap or a vector graphic. Graphic objects, which are created with the drawing tools in Corel VENTURA, are not pictures.


Pixel, definition
Pixel

Abbreviation of "picture element". Pixels are dots on a computer or television screen that combine to form an image. Computer images are created as an array of such dots, each having a specific color.

See also Resolution and bit depth


PLT, definition
PLT

The filename extension for vector graphics files conforming to the HPGL format. These are primarily files created by programs such as AutoCAD for printing pictures on plotters.


Point, definition
Point

A typographical unit of measure used primarily in typesetting. There are approximately 72 points (pts.) to an inch and exactly 12 points to a pica.

For example: 8 pts 18 pts 36 pts 72 pts


Polygon, definition
Polygon

A shape with three or more sides. Polygons can be simple (such as triangle or a pentagon) or complex (such as a star shape).


Portable document, definition
Portable document

An electronic document complete with text, graphics, and photos that can be read by anyone [image] regardless of the type of computer, application, operating system, or fonts they use. Corel VENTURA provides built-in support for the Adobe Acrobat portable document format.


Portrait, definition
Portrait orientation

A page oriented so that it prints from left to right across its shortest dimension.


Positive, definition
Positive

A reproduction of a picture in which dark, light, and color values are the same as the original picture.

See also Negative


PostScript, definition
PostScript

A page-description language used to send instructions to a PostScript printer. All the objects in a print job are represented by lines of PostScript code, which the printer uses to reproduce the objects.


PostScript textures, definition, definition
PostScript textures

A type of pattern fill designed using the PostScript language. Some textures are extremely complicated and require several minutes or more to either print or to update on the screen. Therefore, PostScript fills are displayed on screen as the letters "PS" rather than as the actual texture.


Primary mouse button, definition
Primary mouse button

Normally the left mouse button. However, you can customize the mouse buttons, so that the right mouse button is the primary button.


Printable page, definition
Printable page

The area of the physical page that your printer can use to print objects. This area depends on the paper size and type of printer and is approximated by the dotted borders in the Print Preview box in the Print Options dialog box. The area surrounding the printable page is referred to as the pasteboard.


Process color, definition
Process color

In commercial printing, colors that are produced from a blend of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black.

See also Four-color process


Profile

A profile contains a specific set of information about a computer or an application. For example, a Microsoft Windows profile contains information such as customized settings, program groups, and the desktop patterns and icons. A Corel VENTURA profile contains customized settings for the application. A multiuser profile contains a user name, computer name, access rights, and multiuser publication file locations.

In Corel VENTURA, you can create an individual profile by starting Corel VENTURA with a user name.


Proof, definition
Proof

To print a trial version of a picture to see how it will look when output in its final form. Laser printers are commonly used to proof monochrome artwork, while color artwork is often proofed on thermal color printers. High-quality proofing systems, such as Chromalin (Du Pont) or Matchprint (3M), can be used to proof color separations.


Property, definition
Property

A characteristic or an attribute of an object. For example, an object's color, a paragraph's font, or a frame's dimensions.


Property bar, definition
Property Bar

A context-sensitive toolbar that displays different information and controls depending upon the selected tool or object. You can use the Property Bar to do almost everything [image] from changing the size of an object to formatting text and positioning objects on the screen.


Proportional Spacing, definition
Proportional spacing

Type that has the space given to individual letters allotted proportionally to the character width, for example an "i" is given less space than a "w". Proportional spacing resulting in less space between characters and better text flow.

See also Monospacing


Publication, definition
Publication

Corel VENTURA files are called publications and use the .VP filename extension. Publications consist of a stylesheet, which specifies page layout information, and one or more chapters, which contain the publication elements.


Pure color, definition
Pure color

Any color that individual pixels on a computer screen can assume. On a monochrome screen, there are only two pure colors: black and white. Color screens typically display 16 or 256 pure colors. Newer video cards will display 32 or 64 thousand colors, and 24-bit cards display 16.7 million colors.

See also Dithered color


R


Radial fill, definition
Radial fill

A type of fountain fill that shows a progression of colors in a series of concentric circles that radiate from the center of the fill.


Radio button, definition
Radio button

A round button in a dialog box that enables or disables (toggles) an option. Radio buttons are usually used when only one of the options in a list can be selected. When one radio button is enable, the others will be disabled.


Rasterized image, definition
Rasterized image

An image that has been rendered into pixels. When you convert vector graphic files to bitmap files, you create rasterized images.


Recipe, definition
Recipe

A Corel Database Publisher file that contains a user-defined list of instructions that specify how the data in a database is to be published.


Recordings, definition
Recordings

A temporarily stored series of actions that, when replayed, instruct Corel VENTURA to perform the same actions on the selected text, image, or item. Recordings work like macros or scripts but are only stored until another recording is made or until the publication is closed.

See also Script


Records (definition)
Records

A row of information in a database that contains related information about a specific entity. For example, in a database containing the names, addresses, and telephone numbers of people in an organization, the data for each person constitutes a record.


Rectangle, definition
Rectangle

A shape consisting of four straight sides and four right angles. A rectangle can be square.


Registration color model

The Registration color model consists of a single color in the CMYK color space, for which C, M, Y, and K are at 100%. You can use this color on any object that you want to appear on all separation plates. It is ideal for company logos, job numbers, or any other identifying marks that you may need for the job. This color cannot be added to the custom palette.


Registration mark, definition
Registration mark

Cross hairs or other marks that are used to align the film produced from color separations. Corel VENTURA automatically adds registration marks outside the printable page when you print color separations to a PostScript printer. Registration marks can be printed on non-PostScript printers.


Repeating Frame, definition
Repeating frame

A frame that, along with its contents, background, and formatting is placed in a page tag and so is present on every page to which that page tag is applied.


Resample, definition
Resample

Changing the size and resolution of a bitmap image to alter the number of pixels it contains. Upsampling increases the resolution, increasing the number of pixels; downsampling reduces the resolution, decreasing the number of pixels in an image.


Resident fonts, definition
Resident fonts

Typefaces permanently stored in the printer's memory. PostScript printers typically have 35 resident typefaces, such as Times and Helvetica.

See also Downloadable fonts


Resolution, definition
Resolution

The amount of detail and information a picture file contains, as well as the level of detail an input, output, or display device is capable of producing. When you work with bitmaps, resolution affects both the quality of your final output and the file size.

Picture resolution

Refers to the spacing of pixels in the picture and is measured in pixels per inch (ppi) or dots per inch (dpi).

Output resolution

Refers to the number of dots per inch (dpi) that an output device, such as an imagesetter or laser printer, produces.


RGB, definition
RGB

A color mode that contains three components: red (R), green (G), and blue (B). The RGB color mode is based on the RGB color model. In the RGB color mode, a value between 0 and 255 is assigned to each channel of red, green, and blue. An RGB color with the component values 0:25:118, for example, contains no red, some green, and more blue, and results in a slightly greenish blue. Monitors, scanners, and the human eye use RGB to produce or detect color.


RTF, definition
Rich Text Format (RTF)

A text file format used to exchange formatted text data between platforms and word processing applications.


Right-click (definition)
Right-click

To press and release the right button on your mouse.


Rotate, definition
Rotate

To reposition or reorient an object by turning it around its center of rotation.


Ruler crosshairs, definition
Ruler crosshairs

 The pair of intersecting lines that can be dragged from the spot where the rulers meet. Used to check the alignment of objects and to reset the 0,0 points on the rulers.


Rule tag, definition
Rule tag

Rule tags store information about rules, which are the lines that you can apply around pages, paragraphs, frames, and tables. Rule tags define the location, size, thickness, and color of the rules.


rules, definition
Rules

Rules are formatted lines that are used for frame borders, table and table-cell borders, and borders around paragraphs and pages. A single rule defines the attributes of one line. Each line can consist of up to three parallel lines.


Rulers (definition)
Rulers

Measuring tools displayed along the top and the left side of the Publication Window. The rulers help you size and position the elements of your publication.


S


Sans Serif, definition
Sans Serif

 A font or typeface that lacks serifs, which are the short strokes at the ends of individual letters. Helvetica is an example of a sans serif typeface.


Saturation, definition
Saturation

The purity or vividness of a color, expressed as the absence of white. A color that has 100% saturation contains no white, whereas a color with 0% saturation is a shade of gray.

See also Hue and Brightness


Scale, definition
Scale

To change an object's horizontal and vertical dimensions or to maintain the aspect ratio. Scaling alters the object's dimensions by a specified percentage.


Scanner, definition
Scanner

A device that converts images on a page or transparency to digital format. Corel applications can import scanned images (also called bitmaps) in PCX or TIF format.


Scitex, definition
Scitex

A file format that saves pictures in a 32-bit color format which can be processed or modified for output by high-end film houses and film recorders. Scitex is ideal for color-separated images as it is a native, 32-bit CMYK.


Screen angles, definition
Screen angles

When printing color separations, the angles at which each of the four process colors are printed to avoid undesirable moire patterns. These angles can be specified in Corel VENTURA.

See also Halftone screen


Screen frequency, definition
Screen frequency

Screen frequency, also called screen ruling and halftone frequency, is a measure of a halftone screen in lines per inch (lpi). Screen frequency is related to, but is not the same as, printer resolution.

A laser printer with a resolution of 300 dpi might produce an acceptable screen at 60 lpi. A high-resolution image setter may be capable of producing a 150 lpi screen.

See also Halftone screen


Script, definition
Script

A series of commands or actions that have been either recorded or programmed and can be invoked to make Corel VENTURA perform that same series of commands or actions. Scripts work the same as recordings but are saved so that they can be used in other Corel VENTURA publications. Scripts can be edited using Corel SCRIPT editor.


Scroll, definition
Scroll

To shift the view in the Publication Window to see portions of a publication outside the current viewing area. Scroll bars along the edges of the Publication Window enable you to shift the view horizontally and vertically.


Secondary mouse button, definition
Secondary mouse button

Normally the right mouse button. However, you can customize the mouse button settings, so that the left mouse button is the secondary button.

See also Right-click


Segment, definition
Segment

Lines or curves between nodes in a curve object. A path is a series of segments.


Select, definition
Select

To choose an item with a tool such as the Pick Tool. After an item is selected, you can choose a command or perform an action to edit the object.


Sentence element, definition
Sentence element

A word or punctuation mark that a proof reader treats as a unit.


Serif, definition
Serif

 The short strokes at the ends of individual letters in some typefaces, such as Times Roman.


Server, definition
Server

A computer that shares its resources (such as printers and files) and to which other computers on a network connect.


Server application, definition
Server application

An OLE (Object Linking and Embedding) application used to create OLE objects (e.g., pictures, charts, and text). These OLE objects can be placed in other OLE applications. Not all OLE applications can be servers. For example, CorelDRAW can be a client or a server, but Corel PHOTO-PAINT can only be a server. If you are uncertain about whether an application is capable of performing as a server, check its documentation.


Server side (definition)
Server-side

Server-side image maps are not dependent on any browser to process the map information, but the server must be able to recognize the code in the map file. NCSA and CERN use different codes, so you must know whether the server you are using runs CERN or NCSA. Contact your server administrator for more information.

Image maps are graphics with clickable areas, also called hyperlinks, that are used on the World Wide Web (WWW).


Service bureau, definition
Service bureau

In commercial printing, a commercial business that is separate from the printer and prepares documents and artwork for commercial printing. Generally, a service bureau will be able to prepare halftones, separations, and proofs using high-resolution PostScript devices.


Shortcut keys, definition
Shortcut keys

Also known as accelerators and keyboard shortcuts, shortcut keys are mapped to execute menu commands.


Skew, definition
Skew

To slant a frame or graphic object by dragging a side handle revealed when you click twice on the item. A skew can also be applied to the first row or first column in a table.


Slot, definition
Slot

A writeable space in an equation template in which variables, symbols, words, or phrases can be placed. For example, a fraction template has two slots, one for the numerator and one for the denominator.


Smooth node, definition
Smooth node

A node where the control points are always directly opposite each other. When you move one of these control points, the other also moves. However, you can vary the distance between the control points and the node independently. Smooth nodes produce a smooth transition between line segments.


Snap, definition
Snap

To force a frame or graphic object to align with the nearest grid line or guideline.


Source file, definition
Source file

The file that contains information being embedded or linked using Object Linking and Embedding (OLE).

See also Embedded object and Linked object


Spot color, definition
Spot color

In commercial printing, a solid ink color printed individually, one plate per spot color.


Spreads, definition
Spreads

A type of trap created by extending the foreground object into the background object. Corel VENTURA provides an Overprint feature which allows you to create spreads manually, as well as an Autotrapping feature, which creates them automatically.


Square fill, definition
Square fill

A type of fountain fill that shows a progression of colors in a series of concentric squares that radiate from the center of the fill. You can apply custom or built-in square fountain fills that use either a direct progression from one color to another or a cascade of different colors.


Standard Generalized Markup Language (SGML), definition
Standard Generalized Markup Language (SGML)

A markup language used to define document structure. Document elements such as headings, subheadings, and body text are defined by different tags. SGML is an international standard, and SGML documents are application and platform independent. HTML, a subset of SGML, is used to define documents for the World Wide Web.


Start node, definition
Start node

The small square at the beginning of an open path that is revealed when you select the path with the Node Edit tool. The start node is larger than the end node.


Status Bar, definition
Status Bar

The Status Bar appears at the bottom of the Publication Window and shows information about the publication, the selected item, and the action you are performing.


Stretch, definition
Stretch

To size an object horizontally or vertically. Stretching changes the size of an object in one direction only; therefore, the aspect ratio (the ratio of height to width) is not maintained.


Styles, definition
Styles

In other applications, styles are used to apply specific formatting to text. Corel VENTURA uses tags to perform the same function. Tags are a collection of formatting attributes that can be applied to paragraphs, selected text, pages, frames, and rules or borders in your publication.

See also Paragraph tag, Character tag, Page tag, Frame tag, Rule tag.


Stylesheet, definition
Stylesheet

A collection of all of the tags used in a publication. Each publication contains one stylesheet, and stylesheets from one publication can be imported into other publications. You can also store your stylesheets in a VENTURA library file for use in any publication.


Subpaths, definition
Subpaths

Individual paths created by breaking a curve object at a node using the Node Edit tool.

See also Paths


Subscript, definition
Subscript

 Characters smaller than and positioned below the baseline of other characters in a word or line of text.


Superscript, definition
Superscript

 Characters smaller than and positioned above the x-height of other characters in a word or text string.


Swatch (definition)
Swatch

A sample color in the color palette.


Symmetrical node, definition
Symmetrical node

A node of which the control points are always directly opposite each other. Symmetrical nodes produce the same curvature on both sides of the node. The distance between the node and each control point is always the same.

See also Nodes


Overview: Synonym
Synonym

A word that has a similar meaning to another word(s). For example, the word "cat" is a synonym of the word "feline."


T


Tab, definition
Tab

A set amount of space that is inserted in the current line when you press Tab. The spot where the insertion point stops is called a tab stop.


Tag (definition)
Tag

A tag, called a style in many word processing applications, is a collection of formatting attributes applied to paragraphs, text, frames, pages, and rules. Formatting items with tags ensures consistent formatting throughout your publication. Whenever you change the formatting in a tag, you change the appearance of all items that use that tag.


Template, definition
Template

In Corel VENTURA, a template is a shell that consists of publication elements such as chapters, a stylesheet, frames, and graphic objects. This shell provides the layout for your publication and you provide the content.


Text link, definition
Text link

A text link is a phrase that is a hyperlink. By clicking the phrase, you can jump to the information referenced by the link.


Texture fill, definition
Texture fill

A texture fill is a fractally generated fill, such as water, minerals, and clouds, that you can use to give your objects a natural appearance. Texture fills fill a designated area with a single image instead of a series of repeating images.


Thin Space, definition
Thin space

The width of a period in the given font.

See also Em space and figure space


Threshold (definition)
Threshold

A level of tolerance for tonal variation in a bitmap image. For example, when converting your image to the Black-and-White color mode, the threshold you set determines how many tonal values are converted to black and how many become white. Threshold settings are also used in color-sensitive masks and some Effects filters.


Thumbnail, definition
Thumbnail

Displays a miniature version of an image or defined area.


Thumbnail link, definition
Thumbnail link

A miniature representation of a graphic, which is displayed as a hotspot. By clicking the thumbnail, you can jump to the full-sized graphic referenced by the link.


TIFF (Tagged Image File Format), definition
TIFF (Tagged Image File Format)

A file format that was specifically developed for page-layout applications and is supported by all image-editing applications. TIFF files can save RGB, CMYK, and LAB color mode information but not duotones.

See also Bitmap


Tile, definition
Tile

To use multiple pages to print a document that is larger than the printer's paper size.


Tiling, definition
Tiling

The technique of repeating a small image across a larger surface to cover it. Tiling is often used to create a patterned background for World Wide Web pages.


Tints, definition
Tints

Lighter shades of a spot color created by adjusting the %Tint value in the Outline Color or Uniform Fill dialog boxes.


Title bar, definition
Title Bar

The bar that appears along the top of the Application Window. It contains the name of the application or file, the Maximize and Minimize buttons, and the Close button. Dialog boxes in Corel applications also have Title Bars but not Maximize and Minimize buttons.


Toggle, definition
Toggle

To alternately enable and disable a program function.


Tone curve (definition)
Tone curve

A color grid that displays the dynamic ink curves used in duotone conversion. The horizontal plane, or x-axis, displays the 256 shades of gray possible in a grayscale image (0 is black; 256 is white). The vertical plane, or y-axis, illustrates the intensity of an ink (from 1 to 100 percent) that is applied to the corresponding grayscale values.


Toolbar, definition
Toolbar

A group of buttons that provide quick access to a series of related commands. In Corel applications, you can either use any combination of the preset toolbars or create your own toolbar that contains the buttons and button arrangements you find most efficient.


Toolbox, definition
Toolbox

A collection of buttons (normally found on the left side of the Application Window) that is used for quick access to an application's set of tools.


TOYO palette, definition
TOYO Color Finder palette

Colors that are available through the TOYO 88 Color Finder system. The range of colors includes those created using TOYO process inks and those that are reproduced using TOYO standard inks. These colors are defined using the Lab color mode and are converted to RGB for display and to CMYK for printing.


Tracking, definition
Tracking

The adjustment of space between characters and words. Tracking is used to expand or contract text to fit within a given space.


Transfer time lag, definition
Transfer time lag

The period of time between the initiation of data transmission and the data's arrival at the receiving station.


Trap, definition
Trap

The process of adding a slight overlap between adjacent areas of color to avoid gaps caused by registration errors. You can create a trap if you are printing color separations.


True color, definition
True color

Digital RGB color that is composed of 24-bits, or 16.7 million colors.


TrueType fonts, definition
TrueType fonts

Fonts that print as vectors or bitmaps, depending on the capabilities of your printer. TrueType fonts print as they appear on screen and can be resized to any height.


TRUMATCH, definition
TRUMATCH

A color matching system for specifying process colors. The TRUMATCH color system is based on the CMYK color model, therefore, colors do not add additional color separation plates. Colors are organized by hue (red to violet), saturation (deep to pastel), and brightness (adding or removing black).


Two-color pattern, definition
Two-color pattern

 A fill composed of repeating bitmap images. Corel VENTURA supplies a collection of bitmap patterns to which you can add your own custom patterns.


Type style, definition
Type style

Variations within a typeface. Some common styles include roman (regular or normal), bold, italic, and bold italic.


Typeface, definition
Typeface

A set of characters of a single design such as Avant Garde, Garamond, or Times New Roman. Typeface is also referred to as font. Most typefaces are available in different variations or styles. Some common styles include roman (regular or normal), bold, italic, and bold italic.


Typeset, definition
Typeset

A publication that has been produced on a professional typesetting machine. Corel VENTURA allows your computer and laser printer to produce near typeset-quality publications.


U


Undercolor removal (UCR), definition
Undercolor removal (UCR)

In color printing, a technique for reducing the amount of cyan, magenta, and yellow ink in shadows and neutral areas of an image by replacing them with an appropriate amount of black. This reduces the total area of ink coverage (TAC). TAC is the sum of dot percentages of all four inks (CMYK) contributing to a printed color.

Another technique, called Gray Component Replacement (GCR), also substitutes amounts of CMY ink with black but over a greater color range.


Uniform color, definition
Uniform color

A solid color, for example, black, white, or a shade of gray, used to outline or fill objects. You can select uniform colors from the Outline Color and Uniform Fill dialog boxes.


Overview: Uniform Resource Locator (URL)
Uniform Resource Locator (URL)

The unique address of a Web document. It indicates the Internet server on which the document is stored, as well as its directory and filename.


user word list, definition
User word list

A list of words and phrases that Spell Checker and Grammatik use when checking for errors. You can add words to the user word list so these writing tools will skip, replace, or display alternatives for them. For example, you can specify replacements for words you often mistype or misspell. Also, you can add words (such as your name) that you don't want Spell Checker or Grammatik to flag as incorrect. The user word list complements the main word list.


V


Variable, definition
Variable

A placeholder for text that changes according to the variable's definition. You can insert variables for information that is likely to change during preparation of the publication [image] such as dates, publication version numbers, and names of customers and products [image] and when you change the variable definitions, all of the variable markers show the new information.


Overview: Vector
Vectors

Images are stored as algebraic equations that define the various lines and curves of pictures. They can also include bitmap information. They are created in illustration applications, such as CorelDRAW, or bitmap tracing applications, such as Corel OCR-TRACE. Vector formats are not restricted to certain color depths.

Vectors are also referred to as object-based graphics or line art.


Vertical Justification, definition
Vertical justification

The process that forces text to reach the exact bottom of each column or page by adding vertical space between paragraphs, between lines of text, and above and below frames and tables.


W


watermark (definition)
Watermark

A watermark is usually a faint picture on paper which looks as if it is part of the background, and is often used in letterhead or on official documents.


Web browser, definition
Web browser

A program used to view a Web document. A browser allows you to see Web files and accesses (or loads) additional files as you request them.


Web document, definition
Web document

An ASCII text file with Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) tags. One or more related Web documents can comprise a Web publication.


Weight, definition
Weight

The relative thickness of the strokes of a character in a typeface. For example, a pale typeface has a light weight and a bold typeface has a heavy weight. In addition, some typeface designs use heavy left-leaning strokes, and light right-leaning strokes, to add readability or creativity to the designs.


White point, definition
White point

In monitor calibration, white point is the color of "pure" white (RGB 255:255:255), expressed as an absolute temperature (in degrees Kelvin). Adjusting the white point of your monitor allows you to ensure that on-screen colors appear accurately given the lighting in your work environment.


White Space, definition
White space

Areas of a page that contain no text or graphics. Used to aid in design clarity and text readability.


Widow, definition
Widow

The last lines of a paragraph that appear at the top of a column, frame, or page while the rest of the paragraph appears in the previous column, frame, or page.

See also Orphan


Wizard, definition
Wizard

An interactive function or operation that "walks you through" a complicated or time-consuming task.


word list, definition
Word list

Each language provided with Corel VENTURA contains a main word list. Spell Checker, Grammatik, and Thesaurus all use this word list to verify the spelling and grammar in your publication. Words and spellings of words that you add, are added to a user word list. User word lists complement the main word list. You can add words, delete words, and edit words in your user word lists.


World Wide Web (WWW), definition
World Wide Web (WWW)

The graphical component of the Internet. Text and images are displayed on Web sites using HTML coding and GIF and JPEG picture formats. Web documents can be created in Corel VENTURA and viewed using a browser.


WPG, definition
WPG

The filename extension for Corel WordPerfect 5.0 and 5.1 graphics files.


WYSIWYG (What-you-see-is-what-you-get), definition
WYSIWYG (What You See Is What You Get)

A program's ability to provide an accurate on-screen representation of what an image or document will look like when printed.


X


X-height, definition
X-height

The main body of a lowercase letter.


Y


YIQ, definition
YIQ

A color model used in television broadcast systems (North American video standard - NTSC). Colors are split into a luminance value (Y) and two chromaticity values (I and Q). On a color monitor all three components are visible; on a monochrome monitor only the Y component is visible. The square, two-dimensional visual selector defines the I and Q values, and the vertical visual selector defines the Y value. All values are scaled from 0 to 255.


Z


Zero point, definition
Zero point

The zero point is the position of zero on the rulers. You can set the zero point relative to the page or to the selected frame.


Zoom, definition
Zoom

To enlarge or reduce the viewing size of a publication on screen. Zooming has no effect on the publication; rather, zooming resembles moving toward or away from a picture to get a better look at it.


Pop-up help for functions terms


Real number

Real numbers include all numbers except complex numbers (e.g., 0, 5, -2, 4.75, pi, [image]). They include all whole numbers, numbers, and fractions.


Integer

Integers include all positive whole numbers, their negatives, and zero (e.g., -3, 0, 5).


Array

An array is an arrangement of numbers in rows and columns (a matrix). An array can be one-dimensional or multi-dimensional.

A one-dimensional array is expressed in table formulas as a list of numbers separated by commas and enclosed in brackets { } e.g., {1,3,6,8,9} or as a cell range e.g., R1C1:R8C1 which refers to values in the table. (Note: Financial functions require one-dimensional arrays).

A multi-dimensional array such as

2     3     6

5     8     1

4     9     7

is represented in the table by typing

{{2,3,6},{5,8,1},{4,9,7}}

 Note

•	The array shown above can be entered into a formula:

- as a cell range R1C1:R3C3, or

- in the form {{2,3,6},{5,8,1},{4,9,7}}.


Whole number, definition
Whole number

Whole numbers include all positive integers and zero (e.g., 0, 1, 2, 3, 4).


Serial value, definition
Serial value

Dates which are normally displayed in the format month/day/year need to be converted in the table to serial values which are similar to Julian dates. Serial date values start at 1, which represents January 1, 1900, and end at 65 380 in the year 2099. Serial date values are always represented by the numbers to the left of the decimal point.

To convert a standard date to its serial value, type DATEVALUE("mm/dd/yy"); e.g., to convert 6/29/95 to its serial value, type DATEVALUE("6/29/95"), which will give the serial value 34879.

Serial time values begin at 00:00:00, or midnight, and are counted in seconds. They are always represented by the numbers to the right of the decimal point.

To convert a standard time to its serial value, type TIMEVALUE("hh:mm:ss AM/PM"); e.g., to convert 5:15 PM to its serial value, type TIMEVALUE("5:15:00 PM"), which will give the serial value 0.71875.

Therefore, the serial value for 6/29/95 at 5:15 PM is 34879.71875.


Serial Date Number, definition
Serial date number

Dates which are normally displayed in the format month/day/year need to be converted in the table to serial values which are similar to Julian dates. Serial date values start at 1, which represents January 1, 1900, and end at 65 380 in the year 2099. Serial date values are always represented by the numbers to the left of the decimal point.

To convert a standard date to its serial value, type DATEVALUE("mm/dd/yy"); e.g., to convert 6/29/95 to its serial value, type DATEVALUE("6/29/95"), which will give the serial value 34879.

Serial time values begin at 00:00:00, or midnight, and are counted in seconds. They are always represented by the numbers to the right of the decimal point.

To convert a standard time to its serial value, type TIMEVALUE("hh:mm:ss AM/PM"); e.g., to convert 5:15 PM to its serial value, type TIMEVALUE("5:15:00 PM"), which will give the serial value 0.71875.

Therefore, the serial value for 6/29/95 at 5:15 PM is 34879.71875.


Serial date value

Dates which are normally displayed in the format month/day/year need to be converted in the table to serial values which are similar to Julian dates. Serial date values start at 1, which represents January 1, 1900, and end at 65 380 in the year 2099. Serial date values are always represented by the numbers to the left of the decimal point.

To convert a standard date to its serial value, type DATEVALUE("mm/dd/yy"); e.g., to convert 6/29/95 to its serial value, type DATEVALUE("6/29/95"), which will give the serial value 34879.

Serial time values begin at 00:00:00, or midnight, and are counted in seconds. They are always represented by the numbers to the right of the decimal point.

To convert a standard time to its serial value, type TIMEVALUE("hh:mm:ss AM/PM"); e.g., to convert 5:15 PM to its serial value, type TIMEVALUE("5:15:00 PM"), which will give the serial value 0.71875.

Therefore, the serial value for 6/29/95 at 5:15 PM is 34879.71875.


Basis

Basis	Day Count Basis

0 or omitted	US (NASD) 30/360

1	Actual/actual

2	Actual/360

3	Actual/365

4	European 30/360


Complex number, definition
Complex number

A complex number is any number of the form a+ib, where a and b are real numbers and i is an imaginary number.


Degrees of freedom, definition
Degrees of freedom

The number of free choices one can make in repeated random samples that constitute sampling distribution. If, for example, one is allowed to pick two numbers freely, there are two degrees of freedom. If, on the other hand, the two numbers must sum to 100 there is only one free choice or one degree of freedom. The degree of freedom is often one less than the number of variables.


Serial value, definition
Serial value

Dates which are normally displayed in the format month/day/year are converted by the table to serial values which are similar to Julian dates. Serial date values start at 1, which represents January 1, 1900, and end at 65 380 in the year 2099. Serial date values are always represented by the numbers to the left of the decimal point.

Serial time values begin at 00:00:00, or midnight, and are counted in seconds. They are always represented by the numbers to the right of the decimal point.


Working with graphic objects


Overview: Working with graphic objects
Working with graphic objects

In Corel VENTURA, graphic objects are objects created with the drawing tools Corel VENTURA provides. These tools include the Rectangle tool, the Ellipse tool, the Polygon tool, the Star tool, the Freehand tool, the Bezier tool, the Callout tool, and the Artistic text tool.

The following picture shows a picture of a book made from basic shapes:

The Rectangle tool lets you draw rectangles and squares; the Ellipse tool lets you draw ellipses and circles; the Polygon tool lets you draw polygons; the Star tool lets you draw star-shaped objects; the Freehand tool lets you draw lines and curves as though you were using a pencil on paper; the Bezier tool, useful for precise drawing of curves and lines, lets you draw in a connect-the-dots style; the Callout tool lets you add labels to your objects; and the Artistic text tool lets you create text that behaves like a graphic object but still remains editable.

You use the drawing tools to create paths. A path is the basic component from which graphic objects are constructed. A path can be open (a line) or closed (a circle, square, polygon, star, or irregular shape). You create paths using the drawing tools, and you edit their shape using the Node Edit tool. When you use the Node Edit tool, you need to refresh the screen in order to see the changes you make. You can manipulate several nodes and then refresh the screen, but all of the changes you made between each screen refresh are counted as one action. If you use the Undo command, all the actions between the two screen refreshes are undone.

Corel VENTURA allows you to fill graphic objects with uniform, fountain, pattern, and texture fills. For information about adding fills to graphic objects, see "Filling objects."

 More Detailed Information


Creating, selecting, copying, and deleting graphic objects


Overview: Creating, selecting, copying, and deleting graphic objects
Creating, selecting, copying, and deleting graphic objects

Graphic objects are objects, such as rectangles, circles, ellipses, rectangles, lines and polygons, that you create using the drawing tools in the Graphic Tools flyout. Graphic objects can be also created by duplicating and repeating existing objects.

Corel VENTURA lets you create, select, and delete graphic objects. You can also copy, cut, and paste graphic objects.

 More Detailed Information
 Related Topics


Creating graphic objects


Overview: Creating graphic objects
Creating graphic objects

You use the drawing tools in Corel VENTURA to create graphic objects. When you create graphic objects, they appear with surrounding handles around them. The handles are small squares that appear on the corners and sides of a graphic object's highlighting box when you create or select the object (see the picture below). All graphic objects you create use the current default fill, outline width, and outline color attributes.

Once you have created a graphic object, you can quickly apply changes to it by using the Object Properties dialog box. To access the Object Properties dialog box, select a graphic object, right-click it, and choose Graphics Properties.

 Related Topics


Drawing rectangles, squares, and triangles

Rectangles, squares, and triangles are predesigned shapes in Corel VENTURA. You can draw any one of these shapes in the size you want using the Rectangle tool.

To draw a rectangle

1.	Open the Graphic Tools flyout, and click the Rectangle tool.

2.	Position the cursor where you want to start drawing.

3.	Click and drag to draw the rectangle.

To draw a square

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Hold down CTRL and click and drag to draw the square.

 Tips

•	Hold down SHIFT while dragging to draw a rectangle from its center.

•	Hold down CTRL and SHIFT while dragging to draw a square from its center.

To draw a triangle

1.	Open the Graphic Tools flyout, and click the Polygon tool.

2.	Position the cursor where you want to start drawing.

3.	Click and drag to draw the polygon.

4.	Right-click the polygon, and click Graphic Properties.

5.	Click the Polygon tab.

6.	Type 3 in the Number Of Points box.

To draw a triangle using the Node Edit tool

1.	Open the Graphic Tools flyout, and click the Rectangle tool.

2.	Position the cursor where you want to start drawing.

3.	Click and drag to draw a rectangle.

4.	Click Format, Arrange, Convert To Curves.

5.	Using the Node Edit tool, select a node at any corner of the rectangle.

6.	Click the Delete Node(s) button on the Property Bar.

To see your changes, click the Refresh Window button on the Node Edit toolbar.

 Related Topics


Drawing ellipses and circles

Ellipses and circles are predesigned shapes in Corel VENTURA. You can draw any one of these shapes in the size you want using the Ellipse tool.

To draw an ellipse

1.	Open the Graphic Tools flyout, and click the Ellipse tool.

2.	Position the cursor where you want to start drawing.

3.	Click and drag to draw the ellipse.

To draw a circle

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Hold down CTRL and click and drag to draw the circle.

 Note

•	You can shape circles and ellipses into arcs and pie shapes. For more information, see "Shaping circles and ellipses."

 Tips

•	Hold down SHIFT while dragging to draw an ellipse from its center.

•	Hold down CTRL and SHIFT while dragging to draw a circle from its center.

 Related Topics


Drawing polygons and stars

Corel VENTURA provides separate tools for creating polygons and 10-sided stars. A polygon is a graphic object with 3 or more sides.

The following picture shows a 5-sided polygon, a 10-sided polygon, and a star:

To draw a polygon

1.	Open the Graphic Tools flyout, and click the Polygon tool.

2.	Position the cursor where you want to start drawing.

3.	Click and drag to draw the polygon.

To change the number of sides of a polygon

1.	Select the polygon.

2.	Right-click the polygon, and click Graphics Properties.

3.	Click the Polygon tab.

4.	Type a value in the Number Of Points box.

To draw a star

1.	Open the Graphic Tools flyout, and click the Star tool.

2.	Position the cursor to start drawing.

3.	Click and drag to draw the star.

 Tip

•	Hold down SHIFT while dragging to draw a polygon or a star from its center.

 Related Topics


Drawing lines and curves

Corel VENTURA provides two tools [image] the Freehand tool and the Bezier tool [image] for drawing lines, curves, and irregular shapes. The Freehand tool lets you draw freehand lines and shapes by using a click-and-drag style of drawing; the Bezier tool lets you create curves by using a connect-the-dots style of drawing. You specify the start and end points of the line or curve you want to draw, and Corel VENTURA connects these points.

To draw a line with the Freehand tool

1.	Open the Graphic Tools flyout, and click the Freehand tool.

2.	Click where you want the line to begin.

3.	Click where you want the line to end.

To draw a curve with the Freehand tool

1.	Open the Graphic Tools flyout, and click the Freehand tool.

2.	Position the cursor where you want to start drawing.

3.	Click and drag along the desired path.

To draw a line with the Bezier tool

1.	Open the Graphic Tools flyout, and click the Bezier tool.

2.	Click where you want to place the first node.

3.	Click where you want to place the second node.

4.	To draw another line, repeat step 3.

To draw a curve with the Bezier tool

1.	Open the Graphic Tools flyout, and click the Bezier tool.

2.	Click and drag from where you want to place the first node.

As you drag, one control point appears.

3.	Click and drag from where you want to place the second node.

As you drag, two more control points appear.

4.	To draw another curve, repeat step 3.

 Tips

•	To create closed path objects with the Freehand tool, draw a curve, or a series of connected straight lines, that begins and ends at the same point; double-click when you place the last node to finish the path object. To create closed path objects with the Bezier tool, draw a curve that begins and ends at the same point.

•	To stop drawing with the Freehand and Bezier tools, press SPACEBAR or click another tool.

 Related Topics


Drawing callouts

The Callout tool lets you label graphic objects. A callout consists of a two-segment line and a frame that are grouped together. You can edit the line of the callout, but you have to ungroup the callout first. For more information about grouping and ungrouping graphic objects, see "Grouping and ungrouping graphic objects."

The following picture shows examples of callouts:

To draw a callout

1.	Open the Graphic Tools flyout, and click the Callout tool.

2.	Position the cursor where you want to start the callout line.

3.	Click and drag to draw the callout.

4.	Click inside the frame and type the text.

To make a straight callout line from a two-segment callout line

1.	Select the callout line with the Node Edit tool.

2.	Drag the nodes of the callout to create a straight line.

To see your changes, click the Refresh Window button on the Workspace toolbar.

To add a node to a callout line

1.	Select the node with the Node Edit tool.

2.	Click the Add Node(s) button on the Property Bar.

To see your changes, click the Refresh Window button on the Workspace toolbar.

 Notes

•	You can format text in a callout the same way you format regular text. For more information about formatting text, see "Working with text."

•	You can add pictures to a callout frame.

 Related Topics


Duplicating and repeating graphic objects


Overview: Duplicating and repeating graphic objects
Duplicating and repeating graphic objects

In Corel VENTURA, you can duplicate and repeat graphic objects. By using the Duplicate command, you can create copies of graphic objects, which contain all of the attributes of the original graphic object. By placing a graphic object on the publication's page tag, you can have the same graphic object repeat on all the pages of your publication.

 Related Topics


Duplicating graphic objects

The Duplicate command copies a graphic object directly on screen and places the duplicate graphic object slightly off from the original object. The duplicate graphic object has all of the original graphic object's attributes but has no lasting connection to it.

You can specify the horizontal and vertical distance between the original graphic object and the duplicate graphic object by changing the offset value for duplicates.

To duplicate a graphic object

1.	Select a graphic object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Edit, Duplicate.

To change the offset value for duplicated objects

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, click Selection.

3.	Type values in the Horizontal and Vertical boxes in the Duplicate Offset row.

 Note

•	Positive values offset the duplicate graphic object to the right or down; negative values offset the duplicate graphic object to the left or up.

 Related Topics


Repeating graphic objects

If you want a graphic object to appear on all the pages of your publication, you can place it on the publication's page tag.

To repeat a graphic object

1.	Click View, Page Tags.

2.	Draw a graphic object, or cut and paste it from a page in the publication.

To delete a repeating graphic object

1.	Click View, Page Tags.

2.	Using the Pick tool, click the graphic object.

3.	Click Edit, Delete.

To delete a repeating graphic object from a specific page

1.	Click Publication, Publication Properties.

2.	Click the General tab.

3.	Disable the Lock Page Tag Objects check box.

4.	Using the Pick tool, select a graphic object on a specific page.

5.	Click Edit, Delete.

 Note

•	When you delete a repeating graphic object from page, the graphic object is removed from the page but remains on the page tag. For more information about working with page tags, see "Using page tags."

 Tip

•	To reinsert a repeating graphic object you deleted, reapply the page tag to the page. For more information about applying page tags, see "Applying a page tag to a single page" or "Applying page tags to multiple pages".

To delete a repeating graphic object from your publication

1.	Click, View, Page Tags.

2.	Select a graphic object with the Pick tool.

3.	Click, Edit, Delete.

 Related Topics


Selecting graphic objects


Overview: Selecting graphic objects
Selecting graphic objects

Graphic objects can be selected individually or as a group. The advantage of selecting graphic objects as a group is that you can apply a change to multiple graphic objects at the same time.

 Related Topics


Selecting graphic objects

Before applying any changes to graphic objects, you have to select them. All selected graphic objects appear with handles around them. Corel VENTURA lets you select and deselect a single graphic object or multiple graphic objects. The easiest way to select multiple graphic objects is to use the Marquee tool. You can also select an obscured graphic object and add a graphic object to a selection.

The following picture shows a selected object with eight selection handles around it:

To select a graphic object

•	Click a graphic object with the Pick tool.

To select multiple graphic objects

•	Hold down SHIFT, and click each graphic object with Pick tool.

To marquee select multiple graphic objects

1.	Click the Marquee tool.

2.	Click and drag diagonally until a marquee box encloses the graphic objects you want to select.

To add a graphic object to a selection

1.	Select a graphic object with the Pick tool.

2.	Hold down SHIFT, and click another graphic object.

To select an obscured graphic object

1.	Click the base frame with the Pick tool.

2.	Press TAB to toggle to the graphic object.

The Status Bar tells you which object is selected.

To deselect a graphic object

•	Using the Pick tool, click outside the selection box of a graphic object.

 Note

•	When you marquee select multiple graphic objects, make sure all the graphic objects you want to select are enclosed in the marquee box. Graphic objects that are not entirely enclosed are not included in the selection.


Cutting, copying, and pasting graphic objects


Overview: Cutting, copying, and pasting graphic objects
Cutting, copying, and pasting graphic objects

The Copy, Cut, and Paste commands let you use the Clipboard to create copies of graphic objects. The Copy command places a copy of the graphic object on the Clipboard, while the Cut command removes the graphic object from the publication and places it on the Clipboard. Once a graphic object is on the Clipboard, you can use the Paste command to place it in a publication. The graphic object remains on the Clipboard until you cut or copy another object to the Clipboard. Only one object can be placed on the Clipboard at a time.

Using the Cut, Copy, and Paste commands in the Edit menu of Corel VENTURA, you can cut, or copy any graphic object and paste it anywhere in your publication.

To cut and paste graphic objects

1.	Select a graphic object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Edit, Cut.

3.	Click the graphic object's new location in the publication.

4.	Click Edit, Paste.

To copy and paste graphic objects

1.	Select a graphic object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Edit, Copy.

3.	Click the graphic object's next location in the publication.

4.	Click Edit, Paste.

 Note

•	When you paste a graphic object to another page in a publication, it appears in the same relative position as its position on the page you cut and copied it from. You can then move the graphic object to a new position.

 Related Topics


Deleting graphic objects


Overview: Deleting graphic objects
Deleting graphic objects

You can delete graphic objects you no longer want in your publication individually or as a group.

 Related Topics


Deleting graphic objects

You can delete a single graphic object or multiple graphic objects.

To delete a graphic object

1.	Select a graphic object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Edit, Delete.

To delete multiple graphic objects

1.	Click the Marquee tool.

2.	Click and drag until a marquee box encloses the graphic objects you want to delete.

3.	Click Edit, Delete.

 Note

•	When you delete a graphic object, it is removed from the page, but it is still accessible from the File List on the Property Bar.

 Tip

•	You can also delete the graphic object(s) you select by pressing DELETE.


Moving, anchoring, and rotating graphic objects


Overview: Moving, anchoring, and rotating graphic objects
Moving, anchoring, and rotating graphic objects

You can move graphic objects by using the mouse, the Property Bar, or the Arrow keys. When you use the mouse, you move graphic objects to new locations quickly but imprecisely; when you use the Property Bar, you move graphic objects to specific locations. If you specify a nudge distance, you can move graphic objects by using the Arrow keys.

After you set a graphic object's position, you can group it to a frame and lock the frame into place so that the graphic object cannot be moved. If you prefer, you can anchor the frame relative to the text around it. An anchored frame moves whenever the text it is anchored to moves.

You can rotate a graphic object by dragging its rotation handles. By default, a graphic object rotates around its center of rotation, but you can move this center to any location on the page.

 Related Topics


Moving graphic objects

You can use the mouse to drag graphic objects to new locations, or you can set specific locations for them by using the X origin and Y origin settings on the Property Bar.

You can also move graphic objects by using any of the Arrow keys to nudge the graphic object along the grid, one increment at a time. The default nudge distance is 0.10 inches, but you can change this setting in the Options dialog box. For more information, see "Changing the nudge distance".

To move a graphic object using the mouse

1.	Select a graphic object with the Pick tool.

2.	Drag the graphic object to a new location on the page.

To move a graphic object to a specific location using the Property Bar

1.	Select a graphic object with the Pick tool.

2.	Type values in the X Origin box (the horizontal origin) and the Y Origin box (the vertical origin) on the Property Bar.

 Note

•	You can only type values in the X and Y Origin if the Property Bar is docked horizontally. If the Property Bar is docked vertically, clicking the X Origin or Y Origin button opens the Object Properties dialog box, and you can move the graphic object by setting values on the Details tab.

To nudge a graphic object

1.	Select a graphic object with the Pick tool.

2.	Press any of the Arrow keys to move the graphic object.

 Related Topics


Changing the nudge distance

The nudge distance determines how far a selected graphic object will move when you press an Arrow key. In the Options dialog box, you can adjust the nudge distance to any distance and unit of measurement you choose. You can also choose different settings for horizontal and vertical nudging. For more information about nudging objects, see "Moving graphic objects."

To change the nudge distance

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, click Selection.

3.	Type values for the nudge distance in the Horizontal and Vertical boxes in the Nudge row.

 Related Topics


Anchoring graphic objects

Corel VENTURA lets you anchor a graphic object by putting the graphic object in a frame and anchoring the frame. Anchoring allows you to align the frame relative to the text surrounding it. If the text the frame is anchored to moves, then the frame, and the graphic objects in it, also moves. For more information about anchoring frames, see "Anchoring frames."

To anchor a graphic object

1.	Select the graphic object and the frame.

2.	Click Format, Arrange, Group.

3.	Click the Frame Anchor tool.

4.	Select the frame.

5.	Click the page where you want to anchor the frame containing the graphic object.

 Tips

•	You can change the position and alignment of a frame anchor on the Placement page of the Frame Properties dialog box.

•	If you want to create a frame that stays in one place and is not positioned relative to the text around it, you can lock the frame. For information about locking frames, see "Locking and unlocking frame size and position."

 Related Topics


Rotating graphic objects

You can rotate a graphic object by dragging its rotation handles. You can rotate a graphic object around its default center of rotation, or you can move the center of rotation to a new location.

The following picture shows the rotation of an object.

To rotate a graphic object using the mouse

1.	Double-click a graphic object with the Pick tool.

The rotation handles appear as two-way arrows on each corner of the graphic object.

2.	Drag a rotation handle in a clockwise or counter-clockwise direction to rotate the graphic object.

 Tip

•	You can also hold down CTRL and rotate the graphic object in 15-degree increments, the default rotation setting. You can change this setting in the Options dialog box.

To change the center of rotation of a graphic object

1.	Double-click a graphic object with the Pick tool.

The center of rotation marker appears in the middle of the selection box.

2.	Drag the center of rotation marker to a new location, inside or outside of the graphic object.

 Note

•	You cannot rotate OLE objects; however, you can rotate the frame that contains an OLE object.

 Related Topics


Manipulating graphic objects


Overview: Manipulating graphic objects
Manipulating graphic objects

Once you create graphic objects, you can manipulate them in a variety of ways: you can group graphic objects and apply changes to all of them at the same time; you can combine graphic objects and create a completely new object or shape; you can layer graphic objects and control the order the objects in which are layered; and you can convert graphic objects to frames and vectors to graphic objects.

 More Detailed Information
 Related Topics


Grouping, combining, and layering graphic objects


Overview: Grouping, combining, and layering graphic objects
Grouping, combining, and layering graphic objects

You group, combine, and layer graphic objects. When graphic objects are grouped, commands and actions affect all objects in the group. However, you can select and edit a single graphic object in the group without breaking up the group. Corel VENTURA also allows you to create groups within groups.

You can change the layering order of a single graphic object, or multiple graphic objects at the same time.

 Related Topics


Grouping and ungrouping graphic objects

You can group an unlimited number of graphic objects. You can also ungroup a graphic object to make a change to a single item in a group without changing other graphic objects in the group.

The following picture shows a single object created from three graphic objects:

To group graphic objects

1.	Hold down SHIFT, and select the graphic objects that you want to group with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Format, Arrange, Group.

To group graphic objects using the Marquee tool

1.	Click the Marquee tool.

2.	Click and drag until a marquee box encloses the graphic objects you want to group.

3.	Click Format, Arrange, Group.

To ungroup graphic objects

1.	Select the group by clicking one of its graphic objects with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Format, Arrange, Ungroup.

To select a single graphic object within a group

•	Hold down ALT and select a graphic object with the Pick tool.

 Tips

•	If you have grouped together two or more groups, click Format, Arrange, Ungroup to ungroup the groups one at a time.

•	You can group and ungroup graphic objects by right-clicking a graphic object and clicking Arrange, Ungroup.

 Related Topics


Combining graphic objects

You can fuse multiple objects [image] curves, lines, or graphic objects [image] to create a completely new shape. The object that is produced is a curve object.

If the original objects overlap, the overlapping areas are removed to create clipping holes that allow you to see what's underneath. If the objects don't overlap, they still become part of a single object but maintain their spatial separation.

The following picture shows that clipping holes are created when the combined objects overlap:

To combine graphic objects

1.	Select graphic objects with the Pick tool.

2.	Right-click one of the graphic objects, and click Combine.

 Related Topics


Changing the layering order of graphic objects

You can change the layering order of a graphic object, or you can reverse the layering order of multiple graphic objects. The layering order of graphic objects affects the flow of text around them and the ordering of frames and other objects.

You can use layers to separate and organize different elements in a complex drawing.

To change the layering order of a graphic object

1.	Select a graphic object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Format, Arrange, and click one of the following:

•	To Front

•	To Back

•	Forward One

•	Back One

To reverse the layering order of multiple graphic objects

1.	Select the graphic objects with the Marquee tool.

2.	Click Format, Arrange, Reverse Order.

 Notes

•	The Reverse Order command works only with graphic objects and ungrouped frames.

•	You can also put graphic objects behind text to enhance the visual impact of your publication.

 Tip

•	You can change the order of a single graphic object or multiple graphic objects by clicking the Order button on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Graphic object alignment


Overview: Graphic object alignment
Graphic object alignment

The Align, Space, and Snap To commands on the Format menu allow you to align graphic objects quickly and accurately. You can align graphic objects to each other or to an object, guideline, grid, column, or text.

You can align objects horizontally or vertically.

 Related Topics


Aligning graphic objects to each other

The Align commands lets you align the edges of selected graphic objects. You can align objects by their left or right edges, or you can align them by their top or bottom edges.

The Space command lets you distribute graphic objects vertically or horizontally with equal distances between each graphic object.

To align the left edges of graphic objects

1.	Select the graphic objects you want to align.

2.	Click Format, Align, Align Left.

To align the right edges of graphic objects

1.	Select the graphic objects you want to align.

2.	Click Format, Align, Align Right.

To align the top edges of graphic objects

1.	Select the graphic objects you want to align.

2.	Click Format, Align, Align Top.

To align the bottom edges of graphic objects

1.	Select the graphic objects you want to align.

2.	Click Format, Align, Align Bottom.

To align graphic objects to the vertical center of the page

1.	Select the graphic objects you want to align.

2.	Click Format, Align, Center Vertical.

To align graphic objects to the horizontal center of the page

1.	Select the graphic objects you want to align.

2.	Click Format, Align, Center Horizontal.

To set the horizontal space between graphic objects

1.	Select the graphic objects you want to distribute horizontally.

This procedure aligns three or more graphic objects evenly across the page.

2.	Click Format, Align, Space Across.

To set the vertical space between graphic objects

1.	Select the graphic objects you want to distribute vertically.

This procedure aligns three or more graphic objects evenly across the page.

2.	Click Format, Align, Space Down.

 Related Topics


Using the Snap To commands

By using the Snap To commands, you can align graphic objects with a guideline, grid, column, text baseline, or another graphic object.

When you use the Snap To Objects command, the graphic objects you move automatically align with stationary objects, that is, the objects you drag align to snap points that are located at each node of a graphic object. Snap points are displayed as blue squares when alignment occurs.

When you use the Snap To Guidelines command, the graphic objects you move near any guideline automatically align with the guideline. With horizontal and vertical guidelines, the edge of a graphic object aligns with the guideline. Horizontal edges align with horizontal guidelines; vertical edges align with vertical guidelines.

When you enable the Snap To Grid check box, the graphic objects you move automatically snap to the grid and align vertically and horizontally with the nearest grid marker.

You can also use the Snap To Columns command to snap to the edge of a column, and use the Snap To Inter-line command to align graphic objects with a grid that coincides with interline spacing defined for Body Text.

To enable snap to objects

•	Click Format, Snap To, Objects.

To enable snap to guidelines

•	Click Format, Snap To, Guidelines.

To enable snap to grid

•	Click Format, Snap To, Grid.

To enable snap to columns

•	Click Format, Snap To, Columns.

To enable snap to inter-line

•	Click Format, Snap To, Inter-Line.

 Note

•	For information about setting snapping options, see "Using the on-screen alignment tools."

 Tips

•	You can also enable the snap to settings on the Page page of the Options dialog box.

 Related Topics


Changing the snapping sensitivity

Snapping sensitivity is the distance you have to move a graphic object before it snaps to a gridline or guideline.

To change the graphic snapping sensitivity

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, click Selection.

3.	Type values in the Horizontal and Vertical boxes in the Frame And Graphic Snap row.

 Note

•	To change the units of measurement for the snapping sensitivity, right-click the number box on the Property Bar, click Units, and click a unit.

 Related Topics


Adjusting the size of graphic objects


Overview: Adjusting the size of graphic objects
Adjusting the size of graphic objects

Corel VENTURA lets you resize graphic objects at any time during the creation of a publication. You can resize graphic objects by scaling or skewing them.

 Related Topics


Scaling graphic objects

You can resize a graphic object with the mouse by scaling it horizontally, vertically, or both. You can also resize graphic objects by specifying exact measurements.

The following picture shows that you can use the corner selection handles to increase the size of an object proportionally.

To scale a graphic object with the mouse

1.	Select a frame that contains a graphic object.

2.	Drag a selection handle to scale the graphic object.

 Note

•	If you drag a corner selection handle, you scale a graphic object both horizontally and vertically. If you drag a side selection handle, you scale only that side of the graphic object.

 Tips

•	Hold down CTRL while dragging to maintain aspect ratio.

•	Hold down SHIFT while dragging to enlarge or reduce a graphic object from its center.

•	Hold down CTRL and SHIFT while dragging to enlarge or reduce a graphic object from its center and to maintain aspect ratio.

To specify exact measurements for a graphic object

1.	Select a graphic object with the Pick tool.

2.	Type values in the Width and Height boxes on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Skewing graphic objects

Corel VENTURA allows you to skew graphic objects by dragging the skewing handles. To skew a graphic object with precision, you can adjust the constrain angle setting.

The following picture shows the skewing of an object horizontally and to the right.

To skew a graphic object

1.	Double-click a graphic object with the Pick tool.

The skewing handles appear as two-way arrows on each side of the graphic object.

2.	Drag a skewing handle to skew the graphic object.

 Tip

•	To control the amount of skew, hold down CTRL and drag to skew in 15-degree increments.

To change the default constrain angle

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, click Selection.

3.	Type a value in the Constrain Angle box.

 Related Topics


Converting graphic objects and vector pictures


Overview: Converting graphic objects and vector pictures
Converting graphic objects and vector pictures

In Corel VENTURA, you can convert graphic objects to frames and imported pictures to shapes. The pictures must be vectors; you cannot convert bitmaps. You convert a graphic object to a frame when you want to place a text or picture file in the graphic object. If you want to edit an imported picture in Corel VENTURA, you must convert the vector graphic to a graphic object before you can convert it to a frame.

 Related Topics


Converting a graphic object to a frame

You can convert graphic objects you draw in Corel VENTURA to frames.

To convert a graphic object to a frame

1.	Select a graphic object with the Pick tool.

2.	Right-click the graphic object, and click Convert, Convert To Frame.

To convert a graphic object to a frame using the Property Bar

1.	Select a graphic object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click the Convert To Frame button on the Property Bar.

 Notes

•	If you convert a graphic object that has an open path, Corel VENTURA closes the open path by adding a line between the start and end points of the path.

•	Corel VENTURA allows you to customize the size of a frame handle. For information, see "Setting the frame handle size."

 Related Topics


Converting pictures in vector format to graphic objects

You can convert pictures to graphic objects and then edit them by resizing, filling, outlining, and even reshaping them using the Node Edit tool. After converting the picture, use the Edit, Ungroup command to separate it into individual objects.

To convert a vector picture to a graphic object

1.	Select a frame that contains a vector picture.

2.	Right-click the frame, and click Convert, Convert Picture To Graphic Object(s).

A graphic object and an empty frame are the result.

 Tips

•	You cannot convert externally referenced pictures, or pictures inserted as OLE objects, unless you incorporate them into the document. For more information, see "Importing pictures"

•	If you want to turn the objects that make up the converted picture into frames, use the Outline tool to remove the objects' outlines before converting them to frames. Otherwise, the frames created from the objects could take a long time to generate, especially if the picture is complex.

 Note

•	You may need to ungroup the resulting objects to select a specific shape.

 Related Topics


Converting graphic objects to pictures and frames

Graphic objects can be converted to pictures of vector format. Graphic objects can also be converted to frames to hold pictures or text.

To convert a graphic object to a picture

1.	Select a frame that contains a graphic object.

2.	Right-click the frame and click Convert, Convert To Picture.

To convert a graphic object to a frame

1.	Select a frame that contains a graphic object.

2.	Right-click the frame and click Convert, Convert To Picture.

 Related Topics


Shaping graphic objects


Overview: Shaping graphic objects
Shaping graphic objects

Corel VENTURA allows you to shape graphic objects by using the Node Edit tool. You can round all the corners of squares and rectangles at once, and you can shape circles and ellipses into arcs or pie shapes.

You can also shape curve objects. Curve objects are graphic objects that are created by using the Freehand and Bezier tools or by converting graphic objects into curves.

 More Detailed Information
 Related Topics


Basic shaping techniques


Overview: Basic shaping techniques
Basic shaping techniques

In Corel VENTURA, you shape graphic objects with the Node Edit tool. When you use the Node Edit tool, you need to refresh the screen in order to see the changes you make. You can manipulate several nodes and then refresh the screen, but all of the changes you've made between each screen refresh are counted as one action. If you use the Undo command, all the actions between the two screen refreshes are undone.

The following picture shows a control point (item 1), a node (item 2), and a subpath (item 3).

 Related Topics


Shaping squares and rectangles

You can use the Node Edit tool to round all the corners of a square or rectangle at the same time. When you round the corners, each corner node splits into two, and an arc is drawn between the two nodes. The amount of rounding is determined by how far apart you separate the two nodes.

To round the corners of a square or rectangle

1.	Select the square or rectangle with the Node Edit tool.

2.	Drag one of the corner nodes clockwise along the outline of the square or rectangle.

As you drag, each of the four corner nodes divides into two nodes, and the corners are rounded. As you continue to drag, the corners become increasingly round.

3.	Release the mouse button when the corners are as round as you want.

To see your changes, click the Refresh Window button on the Workspace toolbar.

 Note

•	To be able to round the corners of a square or rectangular graphic object, you have to convert the graphic object to curves.

 Related Topics


Shaping circles and ellipses

You can use the Node Edit tool to shape a circle or an ellipse into an arc or a pie shape. Circles and ellipses have only one node, but when you drag the node, it splits in two.

To shape a circle or an ellipse into an arc

1.	Select a circle or an ellipse with the Node Edit tool.

A single node appears on the circle or ellipse.

2.	Drag the node along the outer edge of the circle or ellipse.

As you drag, the node divides into two nodes, and the arc forms.

To see your changes, click the Refresh Window button on the Workspace toolbar.

To shape a circle or an ellipse into a pie shape

1.	Select a circle or an ellipse with the Node Edit tool.

A single node appears on the circle or ellipse.

2.	Drag the node along the inner edge of the circle or ellipse.

As you drag, the node divides into two nodes, and the pie shape forms.

To see your changes, click the Refresh Window button on the Workspace toolbar.

 Notes

•	If you create a pie shape, a line extends from each node to the center of the circle or ellipse.

•	If you want to create an arc or pie shape with a specific angle, hold down CTRL as you drag to constrain the angle to 15-degree increments.

 Related Topics


Shaping curve objects


Overview: Shaping curve objects
Shaping curve objects

Corel VENTURA allows you to shape curve objects by using the Node Edit tool. Curve objects are constructed from basic elements called paths. You can think of a path as the skeleton that gives an object its underlying shape. A path can be open (a line, for example) or closed (a circle, for example). It can be made up of a single segment or of many segments that are joined together.

Using the Node Edit tool, you can change the characteristics of the path and the points (called nodes) along it, and thereby alter the shape of the object. You can also shape the path by manipulating the control points that extend from each node.

The following picture shows a node (item 1) and a segment (item 2) on a single path.

Nodes

When you select a curve object with the Node Edit tool, Corel VENTURA displays all of that object's nodes. You can shape a curve object by moving a node or a segment, or by moving the control points that appear when you select a node. When you use the Node Edit tool, you need to refresh the screen in order to see the changes you make. You can manipulate several nodes and then refresh the screen, but all of the changes you made between each screen refresh are counted as one action. If you use the Undo command, all the actions between the two screen refreshes are undone.

Segments

A segment is the portion of a curve that lies between two nodes. A curve object can have two types of segments: curved or straight. You can bend a curved segment by dragging it with the Node Edit tool. When you move the segment's nodes, the curve changes shape. A straight segment never bends, regardless of the position of its nodes.

Control points determine the curve of a segment as it passes through a node. You can control the curve of a segment by varying the control point's angle and its distance from the node. Each node, when it is at the end of a segment, has only one control point for that segment. Therefore, a node at the end of a path will only have one control point, and a node in the middle of a path will have two control points. However, because straight segments don't bend, a node at the end of a straight segment won't have a control point for that segment.

 Related Topics


Converting a graphic object to curves

Corel VENTURA allows you to convert a graphic object to a curve so that you can reshape it by manipulating its nodes and control points with the Node Edit tool.

To convert a graphic object to a curve object

1.	Select a graphic object with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Format, Arrange, Convert To Curves.

 Note

•	The original graphic object and the curve into which it is converted look exactly the same.

 Tip

•	To convert a graphic object to curves, select the graphic object with the Node Edit tool and click the Convert To Curves button on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Selecting and deselecting nodes

When you convert graphic objects to curve objects, you can select and manipulate their nodes. The star-shaped graphic object is the only exception. You can select and manipulate the nodes on a star without converting it to a curve object. For more information about converting a graphic object to curves, see "Converting a graphic object to curves."

When you select a node, it becomes highlighted in one of two ways: hollow, if the associated segment is a line, or solid, if the associated segment is a curve. If the selected node is on a curve, control points extend from the selected node, and the nodes on either side of the selected node appear.

After you select a node, you can change its characteristics by using the Property Bar. For more information about changing node characteristics, see "Adding, joining, and deleting nodes." You can also move a selected node and its associated control points.

To select a single node

1.	Select a curve object with the Node Edit tool.

2.	Click a node.

To select multiple nodes using the mouse

1.	Click the Node Edit tool.

2.	Hold down SHIFT, and click the nodes you want to select.

To select all nodes

1.	Click the Node Edit tool.

2.	Hold down SHIFT + CTRL, and click any one of the object's nodes.

To deselect one or more nodes

1.	Click the Node Edit tool.

2.	Hold down SHIFT, and click the nodes you want to deselect.

To select a segment

1.	Select a curve object with the Node Edit tool.

2.	Click a segment.

To deselect a segment

1.	Click the Node Edit tool.

2.	Hold down SHIFT, and click the segment you want to deselect.

 Tip

•	To deselect all nodes, click outside the outline of the curve.

 Related Topics


Adding, joining, and deleting nodes

When working with curve objects, you can add, join, and delete nodes. You can close an open path by joining its two end nodes. You can join the nodes of two open paths by combining the paths and then using the Join Nodes tool. For more information about combining paths, see "Combining graphic objects."

After you select a node, you can change its characteristics by using the Property Bar. For more information about changing node characteristics, see "Adding, joining, and deleting nodes." You can also move a selected node and its associated control points.

If you can't shape the path to the desired shape by moving the existing nodes, you can add nodes to a path. You can also remove unwanted nodes to smooth the shape of an object. If you want to reduce the redraw and printing time, remove nodes from the graphic object you are working with. You can select the nodes that you want to remove yourself, or you can use the Auto-Reduce feature that automatically removes unnecessary nodes within a specified distance of each other.

This illustration shows a symmetrical node (item 1), a smooth node (item 2), and a cusp node (item 3).

To add a single node

1.	Select a curve object with the Node Edit tool.

2.	Click where you want to add the node on the curve object.

3.	Click the Add Node button on the Property Bar.

To delete a node

1.	Select a curve object with the Node Edit tool.

2.	Click the node you want to delete.

3.	Click the Remove Node button on the Property Bar.

To delete extraneous nodes automatically

1.	Select a curve object with the Node Edit tool.

2.	Select the nodes you want to simplify.

3.	Click the Auto-reduce Curve button on the Property Bar.

The shape will be maintained, but extra nodes that can be deleted.

To join two nodes to close a path

1.	Select a curve object with the Node Edit tool.

2.	Select the nodes you want to join.

3.	Click the Join Two Nodes button on the Property Bar.

To split a curve object

1.	Select a curve object with the Node Edit tool.

2.	Click where you want to break the path.

3.	Click the Break Curve button on the Property Bar.

To make a node smooth, cusped, or symmetrical

1.	Select a curve object with the Node Edit tool.

2.	Click the node you want to change.

3.	Click one of the following node buttons on the Property Bar:

•	Smooth

•	Cusp

•	Symmetrical

 Notes

•	When you break a path using the Split Curve button, any subpaths and nodes that are created remain a part of the original curve object. Two superimposed nodes appear at each break.

•	If you change a node type, you alter the position of the node's control points. Unless the curve passes through the node on a fairly sharp angle, the change in the node's type does not noticeably affect the shape of the curve object. It does, however, affect the way in which you can reshape the curve when you adjust the control points of the nodes.

 Tip

•	If you do not see your changes on the screen, click the Refresh Window button on the Workspace toolbar. You can also refresh by clicking Window, Refresh Window.

 Related Topics


Determining whether you need to add or delete nodes

A curve requires more nodes if you cannot shape it the way you want by moving the existing nodes. You need to delete nodes to remove unwanted dips or bumps associated with them.

There are three rules of thumb for determining whether you need to add or delete nodes on a curve.

For curves moving in one direction, you need a node every 120 degrees.

For curves changing direction smoothly, you need a node for at least every two points at which the curve changes direction.

For curves changing direction at a cusp (pointed corner) you need a node at every cusp.

 Related Topics


Shaping curves

You can change the shape of a curve object by moving its segments, nodes, and control points. Normally, you move the segments and nodes to make coarse adjustments, and then fine-tune the shape by moving the control points of the nodes.

As you drag a node, the segments on either side of the node move. If the node is on a curved segment, the control points also move so that the angles at which the curve enters and leaves the node remains unchanged. If the node is on a straight segment, you must convert the segment to a curve and then shape it.

Control points only extend from a selected node and from the nodes on either side of the selected node if the node is on a curved segment. The movement of the control points depends on whether the node they are associated with is smooth, cusped, or symmetrical. This, in turn, affects the shape of the curve. You can also change straight lines to curves, and curves to straight lines, automatically.

To change the shape of a curve by moving its segments

1.	Select a curve object with the Node Edit tool.

2.	Click and drag the segment.

To shape a curve object by moving its nodes

1.	Select a curve object with the Node Edit tool.

2.	Click and drag a node.

 Tips

•	To move several nodes at once, hold down SHIFT, click each node, and drag one of the nodes.

•	Press the Refresh Window button to see the results of the node editing. You can also refresh by clicking Window, Refresh Window.

To shape a curve object by moving its control points

1.	Select a curve object with the Node Edit tool.

2.	Click the node you want to manipulate.

3.	Drag the control points.

To convert a curved segment to a straight segment

1.	Select a curve object with the Node Edit tool.

2.	Click a curved segment.

3.	Click the Convert To Line button.

The curved segment redraws as a straight line.

To convert a straight segment to a curved segment

1.	Select a curve object with the Node Edit tool.

2.	Click a straight segment.

3.	Click Convert To Curve.

The straight segment appears unchanged, but if you select a node at either end of the straight segment, control points appear to indicate that it is now a curve.

4.	Drag the nodes to create a curve.

 Tips

•	To convert a segment, select a node at the end of the segment.

•	To convert several segments at once, select the segments or their nodes.

 Related Topics


Working with Artistic text


Overview: Working with Artistic text
Working with Artistic text

Artistic text is similar to regular text in the way you type it in and use editing tools on it, like Spell Checker and Grammatik, but Artistic text is different than regular text because you can apply special effects to it like a graphic object. Artistic text is created by using the Text tool.

The following picture shows an example of Artistic text:

You use Artistic text when you want to apply graphic effects to text, such as fitting text to a path. An Artistic text object can contain up to 32,000 characters.

If you want to edit the shape of individual letters, you can convert Artistic text to curves and use the Node Edit tool to make the changes. However, once you convert Artistic text to curves, it can no longer be edited as text.

You can also convert Artistic text to a frame and place a picture or text within it.

 Related Topics


Adding, editing, and manipulating Artistic text

After you add Artistic text to your publication, you can modify it by changing the wording of the text or by changing the shape of individual characters. You can also use text editing tools such as the Spell Check. For more information about using the text editing tools on Artistic text, see "Setting Artistic text options."

To add Artistic text

1.	Open the Graphic Tools flyout, and click the Artistic Text tool.

2.	Click where you want to place the text.

3.	Type text in the Edit Text dialog box.

4.	Use the controls in the dialog box to format the text.

To edit Artistic text

1.	Select a frame that contains Artistic Text.

2.	Click Format, Graphics, Edit Artistic Text.

3.	Type the changes you want to make to the text.

To change the shape of a character

1.	Select the Artistic text with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Format, Arrange, Convert To Curves.

3.	Click the Node Edit tool.

4.	Drag the nodes along the edges of a character to change its shape.

 Notes

•	Once you convert Artistic text to curves, it can no longer be edited as text.

•	You can import a picture into Artistic text. Add the Artistic text to your publication. Right-click the Artistic text, and click Convert, Convert To Curves. Right-click the Artistic text again, and click Convert, Convert To Frame. Click the Artistic text. Click File, Import Picture and select the picture to import.

 Tip

•	If you do not see your changes on screen, click the Refresh Window button on the Workspace toolbar. You can also refresh by clicking Window, Refresh Window.

 Related Topics


Fitting Artistic text to a path

Fitting text to a path is a great way to create eye-catching designs for mastheads, brochures, and logos. A path is a line or series of lines that make up a curve object. Fitting text to a path lets you make text follow a curve or angled line, or follow the edge of a graphic object.

The following picture shows Artistic text fit to a closed path.

For more information about formatting Artistic text, see "Setting font options for Artistic text".

To fit Artistic text to a path

1.	Select a graphic object.

2.	Hold down SHIFT and select the Artistic text you want to adjust.

3.	Click Format, Graphics, Fit Artistic Text To Path.

4.	Use the controls in the Fit Text To Path dialog box to format the text.

To edit Artistic text

1.	Select a frame that contains Artistic text.

2.	Click Format, Graphics, Edit Artistic Text.

3.	Use the controls in the Edit Text dialog box to format the text.

To move Artistic text on a path

1.	Click the Node Edit tool.

2.	Click the Artistic text that you want to move.

3.	Hold down SHIFT and click the nodes next to the characters you want to move.

4.	Drag the nodes in the desired direction.

 Note

•	If you do not see your changes on screen, click the Refresh Window button on the Workspace toolbar.

•	If you cut/copy and paste Artistic text that has been fit to a path, make sure that you place both the path and the text on the Clipboard, or the text will have no path to fit to in the new location.

 Tip

•	To select both the Artistic text and the path, hold down SHIFT while clicking them.

 Related Topics


Setting Artistic text options


Overview: Setting Artistic text options
Setting Artistic text options

You can apply many of the text tools, such as Spell Check and Grammatik, to Artistic text.


Setting spelling options for Artistic text

You can use the Spell Checker to correct misspelled words in Artistic text. In Corel VENTURA, you can customize the Spell Checking options to suit your needs. You can also control whether corrections are added to Type Assist. For more information about Type Assist, see "Using Type Assist."

To set the spelling options

1.	Select a frame that contains Artistic text.

2.	Click Format, Graphics, Edit Artistic Text.

3.	Click the Options button, and click Text Options.

4.	Enable the Perform Automatic Spell Checking check box.

5.	In the Visibility Of Errors section, enable one of the following buttons:

•	Show Errors In All Text Frames [image] shows spelling errors in all text frames

•	Show Errors In Selected Text Frame Only [image] shows only the spelling errors in the currently selected frame

6.	In the Display Spelling Suggestions box, type the number of alternate words to appear in the Spell Checker.

7.	Enable the Add Corrections To Type Assist check box to add the spelling corrections you make to Type Assist.

8.	Enable the Show Errors Which Have Been Ignored check box to show the spelling mistakes you have not fixed.

 Note

•	For more information about Corel VENTURA writing tools, see "Using the writing tools and languages."

 Related Topics


Setting font options for Artistic text

You can choose your font and point size for Artistic text, as well as apply underlining, modify uppercase lettering, and make the text subscript or superscript.

To set the font options

1.	Select a frame that contains Artistic text.

2.	Click Format, Graphics, Edit Artistic Text.

3.	Click the Format Text button.

4.	Click the Font tab.

5.	Choose a font from the Font list box.

6.	Type a value in the Size box to change the font size.

7.	Choose a style from the Style list box.

8.	Type a value in the Range Kerning box to adjust the spacing between characters.

 Note

•	In order for the Range Kerning option to be available, text must be selected.

To apply an underline to Artistic text

1.	Select a frame that contains Artistic text.

2.	Click Format, Graphics, Edit Artistic Text.

3.	Click the Format Text button.

4.	Click the Font tab.

5.	Choose an underline style from the Underline list box.

To apply a strike-thru to Artistic text

1.	Select a frame that contains Artistic text.

2.	Click Format, Graphics, Edit Artistic Text.

3.	Click the Format Text button.

4.	Click the Font tab.

5.	Choose a strike-thru style from the Strike-thru list box.

To apply an overscore to Artistic text

1.	Select a frame that contains Artistic text.

2.	Click Format, Graphics, Edit Artistic Text.

3.	Click the Format Text button.

4.	Click the Font tab.

5.	Choose an overscore style from the Overscore list box.

Choosing one of the Word options applies a line to each word, but not to the spaces between the words.

 Note

•	If you select a double line, you can change the properties for each line individually.

 Tip

•	To modify the thickness, baseline shift, and units of measurement for a line, click the Edit button next to the line box on the Font page of the Format Text dialog box.

To modify uppercase lettering

1.	Select a frame that contains Artistic text.

2.	Click Format, Graphics, Edit Artistic Text.

3.	Click the Format Text button.

4.	Click the Font tab.

5.	Choose one of the following from the Uppercase list box:

•	Small CAPS [image] lets you type capital letters with a smaller point size

•	All CAPS [image] lets you type capital letters with the standard point size

To make Artistic text subscript

1.	Select a frame that contains Artistic text.

2.	Click Format, Graphics, Edit Artistic Text.

3.	Click the Format Text button.

4.	Click the Font tab.

5.	Choose Subscript from the Position list box.

To make Artistic text superscript

1.	Select a frame that contains Artistic text.

2.	Click Format, Graphics, Edit Artistic Text.

3.	Click the Format Text button.

4.	Click the Font tab.

5.	Choose Superscript from the Position list box.

 Related Topics


Setting alignment options for Artistic text

You can align Artistic text to suit your preferences.

To align Artistic text

1.	Select a frame that contains Artistic text.

2.	Click Format, Graphics, Edit Artistic Text.

3.	Click the Format Text button.

4.	Click the Align tab.

5.	Enable one of the following buttons:

•	None [image] aligns Artistic text at the left margin without affecting any shifting you may have applied to individual characters with the Node Edit tool

•	Left [image] aligns Artistic text at the left margin, removing any shifting you may have applied to individual characters with the Node Edit tool

•	Center [image] centers Artistic text between the margins

•	Right [image] aligns Artistic text at the right margin

•	Fully Justify [image] stretches the last line of Artistic text to the right margin

•	Force Justify [image] aligns text at both right and left margins

 Notes

•	You can also use the alignment buttons in the Edit Text dialog box to align Artistic text.

•	Artistic text does not wrap across the page. To create multiple lines of text in Artistic text, you must press ENTER to break each line.

 Related Topics


Setting spacing options for Artistic text

You can specify the spacing between characters, words, and lines in Artistic text by using the Format text dialog box.

To set spacing for Artistic text

1.	Select a frame that contains Artistic text.

2.	Click Format, Graphics, Edit Artistic Text.

3.	Click the Format Text button.

4.	Click the Space tab.

5.	Type a value in the Character box to set the percentage of space width between characters.

6.	Type a value in the Word box to set the percentage of space width between words.

7.	Type a value in the Line box to set the spacing between lines.

8.	Choose an option from the Line list box.

 Related Topics


Page layout and design


Overview: Page layout and design
Page layout and design

The fundamental aspects of a desktop publishing application are its page layout settings and features. Corel VENTURA page layout settings include choosing a page size and orientation, using single-sided or double-sided pages, and using the grid, guidelines, and the rulers to align frames and graphic objects on a page. The page layout features include publication wide typographical settings for text placement, spacing between characters and words, and vertical spacing on a page or in frames. You can also create page tags to apply the same page layout and design settings throughout your publication.

The picture below displays the basic components of a Corel VENTURA page: the pasteboard (1) which allows you to select pages and place frames when designing the publication, a header (2) to display information such as page and chapter numbers and headings, a page margin (3), a footnote frame (4) used to reference other information, and a footer (5) to display the same kind of information as a header. The header and footer occupy the top and bottom margins of the page, and footnote frames, if used, appear above the footer.

Page layout settings are defined for both chapters and pages. The chapter settings let you choose whether to lay out your publication on one side or both sides of a page and whether to start a chapter with a left or right page. The page settings allow you to define page size, columns, margins, and color or texture fills.

Using templates

To help you with page layout, Corel VENTURA allows you to use other publications as templates for new publications. Templates include the tags used to format the original publication and can include different chapters, text files, and picture files used in the original publication. For more information about templates, see "Creating and opening publications."

This section discusses the following elements of page layout:

•	setting page size and orientation

•	defining single-sided or double-sided pages

•	formatting pages

•	creating, formatting, and applying page tags

•	creating headers and footers

•	using the on-screen alignment tools, such as the grid, guidelines, and rulers

•	applying tracking, kerning, and vertical justification to fine tune the text flow in your publication

 More Detailed Information


Setting page size and chapter layout


Overview: Setting page size and chapter layout
Setting page size and chapter layout

Corel VENTURA includes many preset page sizes, including standard North American sizes, such as legal or letter, and European sizes, such as A4. You can also specify a custom page size if you do not find the size you require.

In Corel VENTURA, the chapter layout settings determine whether that chapter is using single-sided or double-sided pages and whether the chapter starts on the left or right page. These settings are used more for formatting pages using page tags and setting page flow between chapters. For more information about page tags, see "Using page tags."

 Related Topics


Setting page size and orientation

You can choose a preset page size or define a custom page size for any single page in your publication, and you can set a page's orientation. If you want to apply the page size and orientation to other pages in your publication, you can use a page tag. For more information, see "Setting page size and orientation for a page tag."

To choose a preset page size

1.	Click View, Page Layout.

2.	Click a page using the Pick tool.

3.	Click Page, Page Properties.

4.	Click the Layout tab.

5.	In the Page Size section, choose a preset page size from the list box.

To define a custom page size

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the previous procedure.

2.	Type values in the Width and Height boxes.

 Note

•	Corel VENTURA lets you define a custom page size up to 1800 X 1800 inches (45720 X 45720 millimeters).

To set page orientation

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the "To choose a preset page size" procedure.

2.	In the Page Size section, enable one of the following buttons:

•	Portrait [image] sets the height of the page as greater than the width

•	Landscape [image] sets the width of the page as greater than the height

 Related Topics


Setting single- or double-sided pages for a chapter

You can define whether each chapter uses single-sided or double-sided pages. Choosing single-sided pages lets you design the publication to use one side of a page. Choosing double-sided pages lets you design your publication using both sides of a page.

You can also set on which page each chapter begins. The setting applies to both single-sided and double-sided chapters. For example, if you choose single-sided pages for a chapter and set each chapter to begin on the left page, each page in the chapter will be a left page. If you are using page tags, only the left page tag will be applied to each page in that chapter. For more information about page tags, see "Using page tags." Whereas, if you choose double-sided pages for a chapter and set each chapter to begin on a left page, no matter which page the previous chapter ends, the next chapter will begin on a left page.

To set single-sided pages for a chapter

1.	Click Publication, Chapter Properties.

2.	Click the General tab.

3.	Enable the Single-sided button.

To set double-sided pages for a chapter

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Enable the Double-sided button.

To set the page on which a chapter starts

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the "To set single-sided pages for a chapter" procedure.

2.	In the Layout section, choose one of the following from the Start On list box:

•	Left Page [image] starts the chapter on the left page

•	Right Page [image] starts the chapter on the right page

•	Left/Either Page [image] starts the chapter on the left page if it is the first chapter in the publication, or starts the chapter on the page immediately following the previous chapter

•	Right/Either Page [image] starts the chapter on the right page if it is the first chapter in the publication, or starts the chapter on the page immediately following the previous chapter

 Note

•	The initial page setting for the chapter applies to both single-sided and double-sided pages. For example, a single-sided chapter that begins on the left page, will contain all left pages.

 Related Topics


Choosing a publication layout

Corel VENTURA offers layouts for single-page publications, such as brochures, and multipage publications, such as books, booklets, and pamphlets. Although the pages display sequentially on screen, they do not necessarily print in that order. Instead, Corel VENTURA automatically arranges the pages so that they print in the proper order.

The following picture provides examples of the preset publication layouts you can choose from.

The publication layout you choose will be the default for all of the pages in your publication. However, you can customize the settings for individual pages. For more information, see "Setting page size and orientation."

To choosing a publication layout

1.	Click Publication, Publication Properties.

2.	Click the General tab.

3.	Choose a style from the Layout list box.

An example of each style is provided in the preview window. The Full Page layout will print one page of your publication per sheet of paper. The Book, Booklet, or any of the various card layouts will print either two, three, or four pages per sheet, depending on the layout you choose.

 Related Topics


Formatting pages


Overview: Formatting pages
Formatting pages

Each page in your publication can be formatted individually or by applying a page tag. When you format a page, you can set the margins and choose the number of columns. You can also set text flow and use the column balance feature to equally distribute text among columns on a page. You can also add frames, graphic objects, and import and type text directly on a page. Text that you type or import automatically flows onto the next page. If you have not inserted other pages, Corel VENTURA will add them for you.

You can apply any color or fill to the pages in your publication. Colors and fills are applied as a background, and any text or objects you have on your page are brought to the forefront. For more information about using fills and colors, see "Filling objects."

You can also create rules around the borders of your pages and vertical rules which you can position anywhere on the page. The application of rules is done the same way for pages as it is for frames and paragraphs. For more information, see "Creating and formatting rules."

Page tags, called master pages in previous versions of Corel VENTURA, allow you to set the formatting attributes of a page once and then apply that formatting to other pages in your publication. Page tags can save you time and ensure consistent formatting, and are especially useful for longer publications. For more information, see "Using page tags."

 Note

•	If the text you are placing on a page is too large for the space, a red X will appear on the page indicating a text formatting error. Formatting errors can be caused when the font size is too large, or the interline spacing is too large for the text to fit onto the page. You can manually fix the error by changing the properties of the text, or you can let Corel VENTURA diagnose and provide suggestions for correcting the error. To let Corel VENTURA help correct the error, right-click the page, and click Format Error. For more information, see "Fixing text formatting errors in frames and pages."

 Related Topics


Selecting and deselecting pages

Corel VENTURA gives you two ways of selecting pages to apply formatting. You can explicitly select a page by clicking the page's pasteboard. The pasteboard is the white space on which each page lies. You can also implicitly select a page by clicking anywhere on the page, selecting text on the page, clicking a paragraph on the page, and clicking in or selecting a frame on the page. Either method allows you to access the page properties dialog box when you click Page, Page Properties.

Deselecting a page allows you to set default fills for graphic objects, and displays the No Selection Property Bar which gives you shortcuts for the Snap To commands and for displaying the rulers, the grid, and guidelines. For more information about the Snap To commands, see "Enabling Snap To." For more information about the rulers, the grid and guidelines, see "Using the on-screen alignment tools."

To explicitly select a page

•	Click the pasteboard of a page.

Selection handles appear around the selected page.

To implicitly select a page

•	Click any of the following:

•	a paragraph on a page

•	a frame on a page

•	a graphic object on a page

To deselect a page

•	Hold SHIFT and click the pasteboard of a page.

 Related Topics


Setting page margins

You can set page margins using the Page Properties dialog box, or directly on the page by dragging ruler margins. You can also drag the outside column guides to set the left and right page margins. Column guides are vertical lines that mark the boundary of columns and pages. If your page has two or more columns, the margins can be set by dragging the outermost column guides.

When you set margins in the Page Properties dialog box, you can specify whether the page margins will remain the same, be mirrored, or use independent settings if the page changes from a left page to a right page or vice versa. A page will change sides if an odd number of pages are added before it, or if the side on which a chapter begins changes. If you use only single-sided pages, then this setting will have no effect. For more information about single-sided pages, see "Setting single- or double-sided pages for a chapter."

To set the page margins using the Page Properties dialog box

1.	Click View, Page Layout.

2.	Click a page.

3.	Click Page, Page Properties.

4.	Click the Margins tab.

5.	From the Margins Layout list box, choose one of the following:

•	Same On Left And Right Pages [image] keeps the margin settings the same if an odd number of pages are inserted before the page

•	Mirrored On Left And Right Pages [image] mirrors the margin settings on facing pages

•	Different On Left And Right Pages [image] allows you to set the margins independently for facing pages

6.	Type the margin dimensions in the following boxes:

•	Left

•	Right

•	Top

•	Bottom

To set the left and right margins using the column guides

1.	Click View, Page Layout.

2.	Pass the mouse over the left or right column guide so that the cursor becomes a double arrow.

3.	Drag the column guide to the position you want.

To set the page margins using the ruler

1.	Click View, Page Layout.

2.	Click View, Rulers so that a check mark appears beside the Rulers option.

3.	Click a page.

4.	Drag the horizontal and vertical margin boundary markers to the positions you want.

 Related Topics


Applying preset columns to a page

Columns can be applied to any page. Applying preset columns to a page will evenly divide the width of the page or frame into each column. For information about defining your own column settings, see "Applying custom columns to a page."

To apply preset columns to a page

1.	Click View, Page Layout.

2.	Click a page.

3.	Click Page, Page Properties.

4.	Click the Columns tab.

If the Presets button is displayed, proceed to step 5. If the Details button is displayed, proceed to step 6.

5.	Click the Presets button.

6.	Click in one of the following boxes:

•	One Column

•	Two Columns

•	Three Columns

•	Four Columns

 Tip

•	You can also apply columns to a page using a Property Bar shortcut. Click the pasteboard of a page, then click the Frame Columns button on the Property Bar, and choose one of the column options.

 Related Topics


Applying custom columns to a page

When you apply custom columns to a page, you can specify whether the columns will remain the same, be mirrored, or have different settings if the page changes from a left page to a right page or from a right page to a left page. A page will change sides if an odd number of pages are added before it, or if the side on which a chapter begins changes.

To apply custom columns to a page

1.	Click View, Page Layout.

2.	Click a page.

3.	Click Page, Page Properties.

4.	Click the Columns tab.

If the Details button is displayed on the Columns page, proceed to step 5. If the Presets button is displayed, proceed to step 6.

5.	Click the Details button.

6.	From the Column Layout list box, choose one of the following:

•	Same On Left And Right Pages [image] keeps the column settings the same if pages are inserted before the page

•	Mirrored On Left And Right Pages [image] mirrors the column settings on facing pages

•	Different On Left And Right Pages [image] lets you set the column settings independently for facing pages

7.	Type the number of columns you want in the Number Of Columns box.

8.	Type a value in the Width column for each column on your page.

The columns are numbered from left to right.

9.	Type a value in the Gutter column to add space between the columns on your page.

 Related Topics


Applying intercolumn rules between columns

You can use vertical lines to separate the columns on your page. These lines are referred to as intercolumn rules. You can choose from a preset rule, or you can define a custom rule.

To apply preset intercolumn rules between columns

1.	Click View, Page Layout.

2.	Click a page.

3.	Click Page, Page Properties.

4.	Click the Columns tab.

If the Presets button is displayed, proceed to step 5. If the Details button is displayed, proceed to step 6.

5.	Click the Presets button.

6.	Click in the Intercolumn Rules box.

 Tip

•	You can turn off the intercolumn rules at any time by clicking in the No Intercolumn Rules box.

To apply custom intercolumn rules between columns

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the previous procedure.

If the Details button is displayed, proceed to step 2. If the Presets button is displayed, proceed to step 3.

2.	Click the Details button.

3.	Type a value in the Rules column for each intercolumn rule you want to apply.

4.	Click the Color button in the Color column, and click a color for the vertical rule.

5.	Click the Outline Pen button in the Style column, and use the Outline Pen dialog box to define a style for each vertical rule.

 Note

•	You must have more than one column on a page to be able to apply an intercolumn rule. For information about applying columns to a page see, "Applying preset columns to a page" or "Applying custom columns to a page."

 Related Topics


Allowing paragraphs to span columns

You can allow paragraphs to span across columns in a multicolumn layout. For example, if you have text that occupies two-columns in your publication, you can set the title to span both columns. The column spanning setting is set for each paragraph. For more information about formatting paragraphs, see "Formatting paragraphs."

To allow paragraphs to span columns

1.	Click a paragraph.

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Properties.

3.	Click the Breaks tab.

4.	In the Column Spanning section of the dialog box, enable one of the following buttons:

•	Span Across All Columns to allow the paragraph to span across all of the columns on the page.

•	Span Across Only, and type the number of columns you want your text to span across in the Columns box.

 Related Topics


Setting text flow options among columns

Corel VENTURA allows you to set the text flow among your columns from left to right or right to left.

To set the text flow options among columns

1.	Click View, Page Layout

2.	Click a page.

3.	Click Page, Page Properties.

4.	Click the Columns tab.

If the Details button is displayed, proceed to step 5. If the Presets button is displayed, proceed to step 6.

5.	Click the Details button.

6.	From the Column Text Flow list box, choose one of the following:

•	First Left Then Right [image] flows text from the left side of the page to the right side

•	First Right Then Left [image] flows text from the right side of the page to the left side

 Related Topics


Distributing text evenly among columns

Column balancing automatically distributes text evenly among the columns on a page. Column balance settings are made for each chapter, but you can turn column balancing on or off for individual pages.

The following picture shows an example of a page without column balance, and an example of a page with column balance applied.

To set the default column balancing for a chapter

1.	Click Publication, Chapter Properties.

2.	Click the Typography tab.

3.	Enable the Column Balance check box in the Chapter Defaults section.

To set column balance for a page

1.	Click View, Page Layout.

2.	Click a page.

3.	Click Page, Page Properties.

4.	Click the Columns tab.

If the Presets button is displayed, proceed to step 5. If the Details button is displayed, proceed to step 6.

5.	Click the Presets button.

6.	Click in one of the following boxes:

•	No Column Balance [image] turns off column balance for the page

•	Column Balance [image] turns on column balance for the page

 Notes

•	Column balancing does not add space between lines of text to make your columns balance. For information about adding space to force your text to fill the page, see "Using vertical justification."

•	If you use vertical justification with column balancing, the vertical justification is calculated using the column with the largest amount of text rather than the bottom of the page or column.

 Tip

•	You can also choose a column balance setting for the page from the Details page of Page Properties dialog box by choosing Default, to apply the chapter setting, On, or Off from the Column Balance list box.

 Related Topics


Controlling widows and orphans

A widow refers to the first few lines of a paragraph that appear at the top of a page, frame, or column, with the rest of the paragraph on the previous page, frame, or column. An orphan refers to the first few lines of a paragraph that appear at the bottom of a page, frame, or column while most of the paragraph is on the following page, frame, or column. The default settings for a chapter will apply to every page or frame unless you change the settings for a specific page or frame.

In the following picture, the widow and orphan are indicated in red.

To set the default widow and orphan settings for a chapter

1.	Click Publication, Chapter Properties.

2.	Click the Typography tab.

3.	In the Chapter Defaults section, type a value in each of the following boxes:

•	Widows

•	Orphans

To set widows and orphans for a page

1.	Click View, Page Layout.

2.	Click a page.

3.	Click Page, Page Properties.

4.	Click the Typography tab.

5.	In the Widows And Orphans section, choose an option from the following boxes:

•	Widows

•	Orphans

 Related Topics


Importing a picture or text file onto a page

Pictures and text files can be imported into your publication and placed directly onto a page. A picture will automatically appear in the background, such as a watermark, and any text, if longer than one page, will automatically flow to the next page. For more information about importing pictures, see "Importing and exporting pictures." For more information about importing text see "Importing and exporting text."

To import a picture onto a page

1.	Click View, Page Layout.

2.	Click a page.

3.	Click Page, Page Properties.

4.	Click the Contents tab.

5.	Choose Import Picture File from the Picture File list box.

6.	In the Import Picture dialog box, choose the picture you want to import.

7.	Click the Import button.

 Tips

•	You can click the Properties button to access the Picture File Properties dialog box which lets you choose whether the picture is embedded in your publication, lets you select screen display options, and view the pictures details.

•	If you want to specify dimensions for the picture, type values in the Width and Height boxes. You must disable the Fit Picture In Frame and Maintain Aspect Ratio buttons before setting the dimensions of the picture.

•	If you want to set the picture's placement, type values in the Horizontal Shift and Vertical Shift boxes. A positive value shifts the picture to the left or up; a negative value shifts it to the right or down.

•	If you want the picture to adjust to the size of the page, enable the Fit Picture In Frame check box.

•	If you want to automatically adjust the Height value as you change the Width value, enable the Maintain Aspect Ratio check box.

•	If you want to restore the picture's original dimensions, click the Reset button.

To import a text file onto a page

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the previous procedure.

2.	Choose Import Text File from the Text File list box.

3.	In the Import text dialog box, choose the text file you want to import.

4.	Click the Import button.

 Note

•	If you want the picture or text file to repeat on pages throughout your publication, you can import the picture or text file onto a page tag. For more information about page tags, see "Using page tags."

 Related Topics


Rotating the contents of a page

Corel VENTURA lets you rotate the text on a page. Frames and their contents on the page do not rotate. For more information about rotating frames, see "Rotating frames."

To rotate the contents of a page

1.	Click View, Page Layout.

2.	Click a page.

3.	Click Page, Page Properties.

4.	Click the Layout tab.

5.	Type a value in the Contents Rotation box.

You can rotate your page contents by any angle from -360 degrees to 360 degrees.

 Related Topics


Using page tags


Overview: Using page tags
Using page tags

Although you can format any page individually, you can also create and format page tags, which you can apply to any page in your publication. Using page tags to format your publication ensures consistent formatting because the same page tag can be applied to more than one page in your publication. Using page tags also allows you to easily make formatting changes because you only have to change the formatting once and each page using that tag is automatically updated.

Page tags provide a blueprint for the layout of your pages by letting you format headers and footers, repeating frames, page margins, size, and orientation for your publication without formatting each page individually.

The Default Page tag is automatically applied to each new page in your publication, unless you specify another page tag. You can format each page individually without using page tags, you can change the formatting of the Default Page tag, or you can create your own page tags. The number of page tags that a publication has depends entirely on the number that you create; however, there must always be at least one page tag.

Each page tag consists of a left- and right-facing page. This means that when you apply a page tag, the left- or right-facing page formatting will be applied, depending on the position of the page to which the tag is applied. Page tags do not allow you to specify whether they are a single-sided page tag or a double-sided page tag. Single-sided or double-sided pages are set for each chapter individually. For more information, see "Setting single- or double-sided pages for a chapter."

A tag does not prevent you from formatting a page. If you want to apply formatting to a specific page, such as adjusting the margins or adding columns, you can do so without affecting the tag and without affecting the other pages using that tag. This is called overriding a tag. For more information about overriding tags, see "Overriding and updating tag properties."

Viewing page tags

Page Tag view displays two facing pages: a left-facing page, and a right-facing page. When you establish the size, layout, and orientation for one of the facing pages, those attributes are automatically copied to the facing page. When you apply a page tag to a page, the page will display the properties of either the page tag's left-facing or right-facing page, depending on whether it is a left or right page in your publication. If an odd number of pages are added before a page, that page will, in effect, switch to the opposite facing page.

The following picture shows a left-facing and right-facing page tag.

 Notes

•	Previous versions of Corel VENTURA, and some other desktop publishing applications, refer to page tags as master pages.

•	If you are opening a publication created in an earlier version of Corel VENTURA, a Default Page tag will be created. If the publication contains a Default Master page, Corel VENTURA duplicates the formatting and applies it to a Default Page tag. If a Default Page master page exists, then Corel VENTURA will use that as the Default Page tag. Every Corel VENTURA publication must contain a Default Page tag.

•	Although you can import and type text directly into frames placed on a page tag, the files do not appear in the VENTURA Navigator window. As well, you cannot export text from a frame placed on a page tag.


Creating page tags

There is no limit to the number of page tags you can create for your publication. Each page tag has both a left- and right-facing page, which you can format independently. You can use the Tag Window or the Property Bar to create new page tags.

To create a page tag

1.	Click Tools, Tag Window.

2.	Click the Page tab.

3.	Click the New Tag button.

4.	Type a name in the New Tag Name box.

5.	Click the New Tag Properties button.

6.	In the Page Tag Properties dialog box, choose the formatting options for your page tag.

Formatting a page tag is identical to formatting a page. For more information about formatting pages, see "Formatting pages."

 Tip

•	You can also create a new page tag from a formatted page, by clicking the pasteboard of the page, and then following steps 1 to 4 from the previous procedure.

To create a page tag from a formatted page using the Property Bar

1.	Click View, Page Layout.

2.	Click the pasteboard of a page to display the Page/Page Tag Property Bar.

3.	Choose New Page Tag from the Page Tag list box on the Property Bar.

4.	Type a name in the New Tag Name box.

 Notes

•	You can also create a page tag using VENTURA Navigator. Click Tools, VENTURA Navigator, and choose Page Tags from the VENTURA Navigator list box. Right-click a publication, and click New Page Tag to create a page tag based on the Default Page tag. Or, right-click a page tag, and click New Page Tag to create a page tag based on the selected page tag.

•	Your page tags can also include frames containing text or pictures and graphic objects. For more information, see "Creating a repeating frame or graphic object."

•	The New Page Tag dialog box allows you to select existing page tags or the currently selected page on which to base the new page tag. If you want to base the new page tag on an existing page tag, choose the page tag from the Copy Properties From list box. If you have selected a page, that page will be used as the basis for your new page tag.

 Related Topics


Displaying page tags

If you have many different page tags in your publication, you can use the Page Tag list box on the Property Bar or VENTURA Navigator to display a page tag.

To display a page tag using the Property Bar

1.	Click View, Page Tags.

2.	Choose a page tag from the Page Tag list box on the Property Bar.

The page tag is displayed in Page Tag view showing both the left-facing and right-facing page of the page tags.

To display a page tag using VENTURA Navigator

1.	Click Tools, VENTURA Navigator.

2.	Choose Page Tags from the VENTURA Navigator list box.

3.	Right-click a page tag, and click Go To.

 Related Topics


Applying a page tag to a single page

Page tags are created with a left-facing and a right-facing page. When you apply a page tag, the left- or right-facing page formatting is applied to a page depending on the position of that page in your publication. For example, if the page is a left page, the left-facing page of the page tag is applied.

You can apply a page tag using the Apply Page Tag dialog box, the Property Bar, the Tag Window, and VENTURA Navigator.

To apply a page tag

1.	Click View, Page Layout.

2.	Click a page.

3.	Click Page, Apply Page Tag.

4.	Choose a page tag from the Apply Page Tag list box.

5.	Enable the Current Page button.

To apply a page tag from the Property Bar

1.	Click View, Page Layout.

2.	Click the pasteboard of a page to display the Page/Page Tag Property Bar.

3.	Choose a page tag from the Page Tag list box on the Property Bar.

To apply a page tag using the Tag Window

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the "To apply a page tag" procedure.

2.	Click Tools, Tag Window.

3.	Click the Page tab.

4.	Double-click the page tag you want to apply to the page.

 Tip

•	You can also apply a page tag from the VENTURA Navigator window by choosing Page Tags from the VENTURA Navigator list box and dragging the page tag to a page.

 Related Topics


Applying page tags to multiple pages

You can apply page tags to a series of pages, to all of the pages in a chapter, or to pages that use another page tag. If you choose to apply page tags to a series of pages or to entire chapters, you can apply the page tag to only the left pages, only the right pages, or both.

To apply a page tag to multiple pages

1.	Click Page, Apply Page Tag.

2.	Choose the page tag you want to apply from the Apply Page Tag list box.

3.	Click the Pages button

4.	Type the page-number range in the number boxes.

To apply a page tag to all of the pages in a chapter

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Click the Current Chapter button.

 Tip

•	If you do not want the page tag applied to either the left- or right-facing pages, disable the Left Pages or Right Pages check box.

 Related Topics


Replacing page tags in your publication

You can replace the page tags applied in your publication. Each occurrence of the selected page tag will be replaced throughout your publication.

To replace page tags

1.	Click Page, Apply Page Tag.

2.	Choose the page tag you want to apply from the Apply Page Tag list box.

3.	Click the To Pages That Currently Use Page Tag button.

4.	Choose the page tag you want to replace from the list box.

 Related Topics


Setting page size and orientation for a page tag

When you set the page size and orientation for a page tag, the settings are applied to both the left-facing and right-facing page of the page tag.

To set the page size for a page tag

1.	Click View, Page Tags.

2.	Choose a page tag from the Page Tag list box on the Property Bar.

The page tag is displayed in Page Tag view, showing both the left-facing and right-facing page of the page tag.

3.	Click the left- or right-facing page.

4.	Click Page, Page Tag Properties.

5.	Click the Layout tab.

6.	Type dimensions in the Width and Height boxes.

 Tip

•	You can also choose a preset page size from the list box in the Page Size section of the dialog box.

To set page orientation for a page tag

1.	Follow steps 1 to 5 from the previous procedure.

2.	In the Page Size section, enable one of the following buttons:

•	Portrait [image] sets the height of the page as greater than the width

•	Landscape [image] sets the width of the page as greater than the height

 Related Topics


Editing a page tag's formatting

The Page Tag Properties dialog box lets you define margins, columns, page sizes, and orientation for a page tag. You can change the settings of any page tag at any time. The changes will automatically apply to each page which uses that page tag.

To edit a page tag's formatting

1.	Click View, Page Tags.

2.	Choose a page tag from the Page Tag list box on the Property Bar.

3.	Click the left- or right-facing page.

4.	Click Page, Page Tag Properties.

5.	In the Page Tag Properties dialog box, set the formatting options for your page tag.

Page tag formatting is identical to page formatting. For more information about formatting pages, see "Formatting pages."

To edit a page tag's formatting using the Tag Window

1.	Click Tools, Tag Window.

2.	Click the Page tab.

3.	Click the page tag you want to format.

4.	Click the Tag Properties button.

5.	In the Page Tag Properties dialog box, set the formatting options for your page tag.

 Tip

•	Frames or graphic objects cannot be created using the Page Tag Properties dialog box. For more information about adding frames and graphic objects to a page tag, see "Creating a repeating frame or graphic object."

 Related Topics


Copying or mirroring page tag properties to a facing page tag

Page Tag view displays both the left- and the right-facing page tag. When formatting your page tags, you can format one of the facing pages, and then either mirror or copy the properties from the formatted page to the facing page of the page tag.

When you copy or mirror page tag properties, the columns, margins, and color fills on your page tag are automatically copied or mirrored. Frames and graphic objects do not automatically copy or mirror.

To copy or mirror page tag properties to a facing page tag

1.	Click View, Page Tags.

2.	Choose a page tag from the Page Tag list box on the Property Bar.

3.	Right-click the left- or right-facing page tag, and click one of the following:

•	Copy Properties To Facing Page

•	Mirror Properties To Facing Page

To copy or mirror frames or graphic objects to a facing page tag

1.	Click View, Page Tags.

2.	Right-click a frame or graphic object, and click one of the following:

•	Copy Properties To Facing Page

•	Mirror Properties To Facing Page

To copy or mirror multiple frames or graphic objects to a facing page tag

1.	Click View, Page Tags.

2.	Click the Marquee tool.

3.	Select the frames or graphic objects you want to mirror or copy to a facing page tag.

4.	Right-click the selected frames or graphic object, and click one of the following:

•	Copy Properties To Facing Page

•	Mirror Properties To Facing Page

 Notes

•	Fountain fills, pattern fills, and texture fills can only be copied to a facing page. If you choose Mirror Properties To Facing Page, the fill is copied to the facing page as if you had chosen Copy Properties To Facing Page. For more information about fills, see "Filling and outlining."

•	Headers and footers can also be copied or mirrored to the facing page tag. For more information, see "Copying or mirroring header and footer formatting to facing pages."

 Related Topics


Creating a repeating frame or graphic object

Frames, and the text or pictures they contain, and graphic objects created on a page tag will appear on every page using that page tag. This is referred to as a repeating frame. Repeating frames or graphic objects can be created directly on a page tag or added to a page tag in Page Layout view. For more information about adding frames and graphic objects to a page tag in Page Layout view, see "Moving frames and graphic objects to a page tag in Page Layout view."

To create a repeating frame on a page tag

1.	Click View, Page Tags.

2.	Choose a page tag from the Page Tag list box on the Property Bar.

3.	Click the Frame tool in the Toolbox.

4.	Click and drag to size the frame.

For more information about drawing frames, see "Creating and deleting frames."

To create a repeating graphic object on a page tag

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Open the Graphics Tool flyout, and click a tool.

3.	Click and drag to draw your graphic object.

For more information about creating graphic objects, see "Creating graphic objects."

 Related Topics


Moving frames and graphic objects to a page tag in Page Layout view

You can move frames and graphic objects that are created on a page in Page Layout view to that page's page tag. The frame or graphic object will appear on each page which uses that page tag.

To move a frame or graphic object to a page tag in Page Layout view

1.	Click View, Page Layout.

2.	Right-click the frame or graphic object.

3.	Click Arrange, Move To Page Tag.

 Related Topics


Allowing page tag objects to be edited from Page Layout view

Corel VENTURA lets you edit page tag objects, such as frames and graphic objects, directly in Page Layout view. This means that you can change the page tag object for that page only, or you can apply the change to every page using that page tag. For more information about applying changes to a page tag, see "Updating page tag properties."

To allow page tag objects to be edited from Page Layout view

1.	Click Publication, Publication Properties.

2.	Click the General tab.

3.	Disable the Lock Page Tag Objects check box.

You can select page tag objects in Page Layout view. With the Lock Page Tag Objects check box enabled, you can only select page tag objects in Page Tag view.

 Tip

•	Enabling or disabling the Lock Page Tag Objects check box applies to the active publication.

 Related Topics


Updating page tag properties

Every page in a Corel VENTURA publication uses a page tag. A page tag contains preset formatting that you can apply to any page in your publication. When you change a page's formatting, the new properties are applied to the current page but do not affect the tag. You can apply that page's formatting to the page tag, or you can create a new page tag from the formatted page. For information about creating a page tag, see "Creating page tags."

When you change the properties of a page without updating or changing its page tag, a flag ( [image]) appears in the Page Tag list box on the Property Bar. This flag indicates that the selected page has the page tag applied but has additional formatting not defined by the tag. In the Page Properties dialog box, the Update Tag button becomes active if the page has formatting differences from the tag.

To update page tag properties using the Page Properties dialog box

1.	Click a page using the Pick tool.

2.	Click Page, Page Properties.

3.	Click the Update Tag button.

 Tip

•	If you want to view the differences from the tag, click the General tab in the Page Properties dialog box. The page's page tag is shown in the Tag list box. The differences between the page and the page tag applied to it are displayed in the Differences From Tag section. For more information about viewing the formatting differences from the page tag, see "Viewing formatting differences from an item's tag."

To update page tag properties using the Property Bar

1.	Click View, Page Layout.

2.	Click the pasteboard of a page.

If a flag ( [image]) appears in the Page Tag list box, proceed to step 3. If a flag does not appear, the page does not have any formatting differences that can be applied to the tag.

3.	Choose Update "selected page tag name" from the Page Tag list box on the Property Bar.

 Note

•	If you have made changes to your header or footer frame tags, updating the page tag will update the changes made to your header and footer frames to the current page tag.

 Tips

•	If you want to apply a new page tag to a page but keep the changes you have made to its formatting, hold down SHIFT, and choose a new page tag from the Page Tag list box on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Using headers and footers


Overview: Using headers and footers
Using headers and footers

With larger publications, headers and footers provide a good way to help your readers keep track of where they are. Even in short publications, headers and footers can display titles, chapter names, page numbers, dates, times, company logos, and publication names.

Corel VENTURA automatically enables headers and footers for your publications. You can hide them on any page, and with double-sided pages, you can specify different headers and footers for the left- and right-facing pages.

The following picture shows a header, occupying the top of the page, and a footer, occupying the bottom of the page.

Using running headers or footers

You can create headers or footers that change depending on the contents of each page. This kind of a header or footer is called a running or continuation header or footer. When you use running headers or footers, you select a paragraph tag and Corel VENTURA automatically inserts text from paragraphs with that tag applied in the header or footer. For example, a running header can display the current section heading or section title and change automatically when the next section is reached. As your running headers cross many pages in your publication, they are more effective if they are part of your page tags rather than individual pages. Regular headers and footers can be formatted on each page individually or on a page tag. For more information about page tags, see "Using page tags."

 Related Topics


Creating and displaying headers and footers

Headers and footers must be enabled for a page tag before you can create them on a page. By default, Corel VENTURA enables headers and footers on each page tag and each page, and automatically displays them. For information about hiding headers and footers, see "Hiding headers or footers on a page."

To create headers and footers

1.	Click View, Page Tags.

2.	Choose a page tag from the Page Tag list box on the Property Bar.

3.	Click the left- or right-facing page.

4.	Click Page, Page Tag Properties.

5.	Click the Layout tab.

6.	Enable the following check boxes:

•	Show Header

•	Show Footer

To display headers and footers on a page

1.	Click View, Page Layout.

2.	Click a page.

3.	Click Page, Page Properties.

4.	Follow steps 5 and 6 from the previous procedure.

 Tip

•	You can also create headers and footers by clicking the page or page tag, and clicking Page, Show Header or Page, Show Footer.

 Related Topics


Adding text to headers and footers

Text that is added in Page Tag view, will appear on each page with that page tag applied. Text that is added to a header or footer in Page Layout view will only appear on that page.

Corel VENTURA headers and footers have preset tabs in the left, right, or center of the header or footer frame. The left tab is left aligned, the right tab is right aligned, and the center tab is center aligned. When you insert text into header or footer frames you can click to position the insertion point at the left, center, or right tab setting. For information about changing the tab settings, see "Changing the default tab settings in headers and footers."

To add text to a header or footer on a page tag

1.	Click View, Page Tags.

2.	Click in the header or footer frame, and type the text.

To add text to a header or footer on a page

1.	Click View, Page Layout.

2.	Click in the header or footer frame, and type the text.

 Notes

•	When formatting headers and footers for page tags, you can choose to format one header or footer, and then copy or mirror the attributes to the facing page. For more information, see "Using page tags."

•	Any formatting that you apply to headers and footers can be automatically updated to the current page tag and applied to other pages referencing that tag. For more information about page tags, see "Using page tags." For more information about updating page tags, see "Updating page tag properties."

 Related Topics


Inserting chapter and page numbers in headers and footers

You can insert the current chapter and page number in your headers and footers. When you do this, Corel VENTURA inserts a code that will automatically update the chapter or page number if your chapter or page changes position in your publication. For more information about chapter and page numbers, see "Using counters."

To insert chapter and page numbers in headers and footers on a page tag

1.	Click View, Page Tags.

2	Choose a page tag from the Page Tag list box on the Property Bar.

3.	Click in the header or footer frame of the left- or right-facing page.

4.	Click the Insert button on the Property Bar.

5.	Click one of the following buttons:

•	Insert Chapter Number

•	Insert Page Number

 Tip

•	You can also insert chapter or page numbers by clicking Insert, Number/Cross-reference, and choosing Chapter Number or Page Number from the Display list box. The inserted numbers will use the numbering style defined for the chapter. For more information about changing a chapter's numbering styles, see "Setting counters in a chapter."

To insert chapter and page numbers in headers and footers on a page

1.	Click View, Page Layout.

2.	Click in the header or footer frame.

3.	Follow steps 4 and 5 from the previous procedure.

 Note

•	Corel VENTURA headers and footers have preset tabs in the left, right, or center of the header or footer frame. The left tab is left aligned, the right tab is right aligned, and the center tab is center aligned. When you insert text into header or footer frames you can click to position the insertion point at the left, center, or right tab setting. For information about changing the tab settings, see "Changing the default tab settings in headers and footers."

 Related Topics


Inserting date and time codes in headers and footers

You can either insert the date and time in a header or footer or you can insert a date or time code. If you simply insert the date and time, the current date and time will appear and it will not update. If you insert a date or time code, Corel VENTURA automatically inserts the current date and time and will update the date and time whenever the publication is updated. For more information about inserting the date and time, see "Adding the date and time to a publication."

To insert the date and time in headers and footers on a page tag

1.	Click View, Page Tags.

2	Choose a page tag from the Page Tag list box on the Property Bar.

3.	Click in the header or footer frame of the left- or right-facing page.

4.	Click Insert, Date & Time.

5.	Choose an option from the Formats list.

 Tip

•	If you enable the Update With Publication Numbering check box, the date and time will be updated when you update the publication. To update the publication, click Publication, Update Publication, and enable the Numbering check box.

•	You can also click the Custom button, and type a date and time format.

To insert date and time in headers and footers on a page

1.	Click View, Page Layout.

2. Click in a header or footer frame.

3.	Follow steps 4 and 5 from the previous procedure.

 Note

•	Corel VENTURA headers and footers have preset tabs in the left, right, or center of the header or footer frame. The left tab is left aligned, the right tab is right aligned, and the center tab is center aligned. When you insert text into header or footer frames you can click to position the insertion point at the left, center, or right tab setting. For information about change the tab settings, see "Changing the default tab settings in headers and footers."

 Related Topics


Creating running headers and footers

Running, or continuous, headers and footers are used to indicate that the text on a page is part of a topic or section started on an earlier page. The text that Corel VENTURA places in the running header or footer changes depending on the contents of a page. Because running headers and footers are more effective if they span many pages, they should be set up on your page tags.

Running headers or footers use a paragraph tag you select to determine what is included in the header or footer. Each time that tag appears on a page, the running header or footer uses that text in the header or footer. The header or footer only changes when that paragraph tag appears on the page.

Corel VENTURA gives you three different running header or footer options:

•	First Match [image] takes text in the first paragraph on the current page that is formatted with a specified tag and places it in the header or footer frame

•	Last Match [image] takes text in the last paragraph on the current page that is formatted with a specified tag and places it in the header or footer frame

•	Current Match [image] takes text in the first paragraph formatted with the specified primary or secondary paragraph tag that appears at the top of a page. If the primary tag is not used on the current page, the secondary tag is used. If the secondary tag is not used on the current page, the last occurrence of the secondary tag is used.

To create a first or last match running header or footer

1.	Click View, Page Tags.

2	Choose a page tag from the Page Tag list box on the Property Bar.

3.	Click in the header or footer frame of the left- or right-facing page.

4.	Click one of the following buttons on the Property Bar:

•	First Match

•	Last Match

5.	Choose a paragraph tag from the list.

To create a current match running header or footer

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	Click the Current Match button on the Property Bar.

3.	Choose a paragraph tag from the Primary Tag list box.

4.	Choose a paragraph tag from the Secondary Tag list box.

 Notes

•	Corel VENTURA also copies any index entries in the first, last, or current match paragraph to the header or footer; as a result, you can create index entries that specify an entire range of pages in a section. For example, if a paragraph has one of the specified first, last, or current match paragraph tags applied and contains an index entry, the index will display each page on which that first, last, or current match header or footer reference appears. For more information about indexes, see "Indexing your publication."

•	When you use the First, Last, or Current Match option, enable the Size Frame To Fit Text check box in the Frame Properties dialog box to allow the header or footer frame to automatically adjust to fit the text. For more information, see "Allowing header and footer frames to automatically fit the text."

 Related Topics


Copying or mirroring header and footer formatting to facing pages

When you format headers and footers on a page tag, Corel VENTURA lets you copy or mirror the header or footer properties to the facing page. This lets you apply the same formatting to both left- and right-facing pages while only formatting one header or footer.

To copy a header or footer to a facing page

1.	Click View, Page Tags.

2	Choose a page tag from the Page Tag list box on the Property Bar.

3.	Click in the header or footer frame of the left- or right-facing page.

4.	Click the Copy To Facing Page button on the Property Bar.

To mirror a header or footer to a facing page

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	Click the Mirror To Facing Page button on the Property Bar.

 Tip

•	You can also right-click the header or footer frame, and click Copy Properties To Facing Page or Mirror Properties To Facing Page.

 Related Topics


Formatting header and footer frames

Header and footer frames can be formatted like any other frame in your publication. You can either format the header or footer frame on the page tag or on individual pages.

To format a header or footer frame on a page tag

1.	Click View, Page Tags.

2	Choose a page tag from the Page Tag list box on the Property Bar.

3.	Click in the header or footer frame of the left- or right-facing page.

4.	Click Format, Frame Tag Properties.

5.	In the Frame Tag Properties dialog box, choose the formatting options for your frame.

To format a header or footer frame on a page

1.	Click View, Page Layout.

2.	Click the header or footer frame.

3.	Click Format, Frame Properties.

4.	In the Frame Properties dialog box, choose the formatting options for your frame.

 Tip

•	For information about frames, see "Using frames."

 Related Topics


Allowing header and footer frames to automatically fit the text

You can set your header and footer frames to automatically change size to fit the text they contain. You can set this option for header or footer frames on a page tag, and have it apply to each page using that page tag, or you can set it for a specific page.

To allow headers and footers to automatically fit the text on a page tag

1.	Click View, Page Tags.

2	Choose a page tag from the Page Tag list box on the Property Bar.

3.	Click in the header or footer frame of the left- or right-facing page.

4.	Click Format, Frame Tag Properties.

5.	Enable the Size Frame To Fit Text check box.

To allow headers and footers to automatically fit the text on a page

1.	Click View, Page Layout.

2.	Click the header or footer frame.

3.	Click Format, Frame Properties.

4.	Enable the Size Frame To Fit Text check box.

 Notes

•	If the Size Frame To Fit Text check box is disabled, a red X will appear in headers and footers that have more text than will fit into the frame. The red X indicates a formatting error. For more information about frame formatting errors, see "Fixing text formatting errors in frames and pages."

•	The Size Frame To Fit Text check box is enabled by default.

 Related Topics


Updating header and footer formatting to a page tag

Any formatting changes you make to your headers and footers in Page Layout view, including adding pictures, fills, and other elements, can be automatically updated to the page tag.

When you change the headers or footers and click the pasteboard of the page or select the header or footer frame, a flag ( [image]) appears in the Page Tag list box on the Property Bar. This flag indicates that a change you have made can be updated to the page tag applied to that page. When you update the header or footer formatting to the page, the formatting will be applied to each page using that page tag.

To update header formatting to a page tag

1.	Click View, Page Layout.

2.	Select a header frame that you have formatted by clicking its border.

3.	Choose Update Page Tag Header from the Page Tag list box on the Property Bar.

To update footer formatting to a page tag

1.	Click View, Page Layout.

2.	Select a footer frame that you have formatted by clicking its border.

3.	Choose Update Page Tag Footer from the Page Tag list box on the Property Bar.

 Tip

•	You can also update the header or footer formatting to the page tag by updating the entire page tag. If you update the entire page tag, any other formatting that is different from the tag, such as margins and columns, will also be updated to the page tag. For more information about updating page tags, see "Updating page tag properties."

 Related Topics


Changing the default tab settings in headers and footers

Corel VENTURA headers and footers have preset tabs so that you can enter text left aligned, right aligned, or centered just by clicking your mouse in the left, right, or center of the header or footer frame. You can add tabs or remove them by editing the header or footer paragraph tags or by using the rulers.

To add a tab for headers or footers

1.	Click Tools, Tag Window.

2.	Click the Paragraph tab.

3.	Click one of the following tags:

•	Z_HEADER

•	Z_FOOTER

4.	Click the Tag Properties button.

5.	Click the Tabs tab.

6.	Click the Add Tab button.

7.	Set the properties for the tab stop.

 Tip

•	For more information about setting tabs, see "Working with tabs."

To add a tab using the ruler

1.	Click View, Rulers so that a check mark appears next to the option.

2.	Click in the header or footer frame.

3.	Click the horizontal ruler where you want the tab to appear.

To delete a tab from headers or footers

1.	Follow steps 1 to 5 from the previous procedure.

2.	Click one of the columns for a tab.

3.	Click the Delete Tab button to remove a tab.

To delete a tab using the ruler

1.	Click View, Rulers so that a check mark appears next to the option.

2.	Click in the header or footer frame.

3.	Drag a tab from the ruler.

 Notes

•	For more information about using the rulers, see "Using rulers."

•	If you use pages with different widths in the same publication, the header or footer paragraphs will indicate that properties have been overridden from the default settings. The default Z_HEADER and Z_FOOTER paragraph tag settings are based on the Default Page tag.

If you click the header or footer text, a flag ( [image]) will appear next to the Z_HEADER or Z_FOOTER tag in the Paragraph Tag list box. This flag appears because, the tab settings for the Z_HEADER and Z_FOOTER paragraph tags had to be overridden for the tab settings to reflect the different page widths. To avoid this flag, you can create new header and footer paragraph tags for the narrower pages. For more information about formatting header and footer text, see "Formatting header and footer text." For more information about overriding tags, see "Updating and overriding tag formatting."

 Related Topics


Formatting header and footer text

You can format the header and footer text by changing the formatting of the paragraph tags applied to the header and footer text or by formatting the header or footer text individually. If you change the formatting of the paragraph tags, the formatting will be applied to all of your headers or footers. You can also apply other paragraph tags to header or footer text. For information about applying paragraph tags, see "Applying paragraph tags."

To format header and footer paragraph tags

1.	Click Tools, Tag Window.

2.	Click the Paragraph tab.

3.	Click one of the following tags:

•	Z_HEADER

•	Z_FOOTER

4.	Click the Tag Properties button.

5.	In the Paragraph Tag Properties dialog box, set the formatting options for the paragraph tag.

To format header or footer text on a specific page

1.	Click View, Page Layout.

2.	Click the text in the header or footer frame using the Paragraph tool.

3.	Click Paragraph, Paragraph Properties.

4.	In the Paragraph Properties dialog box, set the formatting options for the text.

 Note

•	The Z_FOOTER and Z_HEADER paragraph tags have preset tab settings: a left aligned tab, a center aligned tab, and a right aligned tab. If you want to set alignment for these tags, you must remove the preset tabs first. For more information, see "Changing the default tab settings in headers and footers."

 Related Topics


Hiding headers or footers on a page

You can hide headers or footers on an individual page. The headers and footers on the other pages will not be affected; for example, if page numbers are one of the elements in your header, they will still appear correctly on the other pages.

You can also hide the headers and footers on a page tag. If you have any information in your page tag headers or footers, hiding the headers or footers will delete the information.

To hide a header or footer on a page

1.	Click View, Page Layout.

2.	Click a page.

3.	Click Page, Page Properties.

4.	Disable the one of the following check boxes:

•	Show Header

•	Show Footer

To hide the headers and footers on a page tag

1.	Click View, Page Tags.

2.	Choose a page tag from the Page Tag list box on the Property Bar.

3.	Click Page, Page Properties.

4.	Disable the one of the following check boxes:

•	Show Header

•	Show Footer

 Related Topics


Using the on-screen alignment tools


Overview: Using the on-screen alignment tools
Using the on-screen alignment tools

Grids, rulers, and guidelines help you line up text, frames, graphic objects, and pictures with precision. These tools are on-screen visual aids that do not appear on a printed version of your publication.

The on-screen alignment tools include

•	a grid [image] a series of horizontal and vertical lines that overlay your publication

•	guidelines [image] vertical and horizontal lines that you can drag from the ruler to the page. You can also place guidelines on a page tag so that the page alignment is consistent throughout your publication.

•	rulers [image] measurement and alignment aid that normally appears at the top and left sides of the Publication Window

 More Detailed Information
 Related Topics


Using the grid


Overview: Using the grid
Using the grid

The grid is a series of horizontal and vertical lines which you can use to align frames and graphic objects on your pages.

 Related Topics


Displaying and hiding the grid

You can display the grid from the Options dialog box or the View menu.

To display the grid using the Options dialog box

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, click Page.

3.	Enable the Show Grid check box in the Page Guides section.

 Tip

•	You can hide the grid by disabling the Show Grid check box.

•	For information about changing the color of the grid, see "Changing the color of frame borders, guidelines, and other screen guides."

To display the grid using the View menu

•	Click View, Grid so that a check mark appears beside the option.

 Tip

•	You can hide the grid by clicking View, Grid so that the check mark no longer appears beside the option.

 Related Topics


Automatically snapping frames and graphic objects to the grid

As you move your frames and graphic objects on the page, you can have them automatically align to the horizontal and vertical lines of the grid. This is referred to as snapping. You can also set the snapping sensitivity which determines how close the frame or graphic object must be to the grid before it snaps.

To automatically snap frames and graphic objects to the grid

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, click Page.

3.	Enable the Snap To Grid check box.

 Tips

•	You can disable automatic snapping by disabling the Snap To Grid check box.

•	You can also click Format, Snap To, Grid so that a check mark appears beside the option to enable automatic snapping.

To set the snapping sensitivity

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, click Selection.

3.	In the Frame & Graphic Snap row, type values for the snapping sensitivity in the following boxes:

•	Horizontal

•	Vertical

 Related Topics


Setting the grid spacing, origin, and unit of measurement

You can set the space between the horizontal and vertical lines of the grid and define the grid's origin. You can also change the units of measurement for the grid.

To set the grid spacing

1.	Click Tools, Grid & Guidelines Properties.

2.	Click the Grid tab.

3.	In the Grid Frequency section, type values in the following boxes:

•	Horizontal

•	Vertical

To set the grid origin

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	In the Location section, type values in the following boxes:

•	X [image] sets the horizontal starting point for the grid, relative to the origin of the horizontal ruler

•	Y [image] sets the vertical starting point for the grid, relative to the origin of the vertical ruler

 Tip

•	For more information about setting the origin of the rulers, see "Setting the rulers' origin, zero point, and unit of measurement."

To set the unit of measurement for the grid

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the "To set the grid spacing"procedure.

2.	In the Grid Frequency section, right-click in one of the following boxes:

•	Horizontal

•	Vertical

3.	Click Units, and click a unit of measurement.

 Note

•	Changing the horizontal unit of measurement also changes the vertical unit of measurement, whereas changing the vertical unit of measurement does not change the horizontal unit of measurement. If you want to use the same units, change the horizontal unit of measurement.

 Related Topics


Using guidelines


Overview: Using guidelines
Using guidelines

Guidelines are horizontal and vertical nonprinting lines that you can use to align frames, graphic objects, and text on a page.

 Related Topics


Creating guidelines

You can create guidelines using the Grid & Guidelines Properties dialog box, or you can create guidelines by dragging them from the horizontal and vertical rulers. Guidelines are automatically displayed when you create them. If you want the same guidelines to appear on different pages in your publication, you can create guidelines on page tags. For more information about page tags, see "Using page tags."

To create horizontal guidelines

1.	Click a page.

2.	Click Tools, Grid & Guidelines Properties.

3.	Click the Guidelines tab.

4.	Type a value in the Horizontal box.

5.	Click the Add button.

6.	Repeat steps 4 and 5 for each guideline you want to add.

 Tip

•	If you want to change the units, right-click the Horizontal or Vertical box, click Units, and click a unit of measurement.

To create horizontal guidelines on a page tag

1.	Click View, Page Tags.

2.	Choose a page tag from the Page Tag list box on the Property Bar.

3.	Click the left- or right-facing page tag.

4.	Follow steps 2 to 6 from the previous procedure.

To create vertical guidelines

1.	Click a page.

2.	Click Tools, Grid & Guidelines Properties.

3.	Click the Guidelines tab.

4.	Type a value in the Vertical box.

5.	Click the Add button.

6.	Repeat steps 4 and 5 for each guideline you want to add.

To create vertical guidelines on a page tag

1.	Click View, Page Tags.

2.	Choose a page tag from the Page Tag list box on the Property Bar.

3.	Click the left- or right-facing page tag.

4.	Follow steps 2 to 6 from the previous procedure.

To create guidelines by dragging them from the ruler

1.	Click View, Rulers.

2.	Click the solid area of the ruler, and drag the guideline to a position on the page.

 Tips

•	When you initially place a guideline you are creating from the ruler, you can scroll through the entire publication. However, you cannot scroll through the publication when you move a guideline that has already been placed.

•	You can also create a guideline by holding down CTRL, and dragging an existing guideline.

•	For information about changing the color of guidelines, see "Changing the color of frame borders, guidelines, and other screen guides."

 Related Topics


Creating guidelines using a script

Corel VENTURA provides a script to help set up guidelines in your publication. A script is a series of commands that are automatically performed for you when you run the script. The Guide Wizard script creates horizontal and vertical guidelines on a specific page or on a page tag. You can choose from preset guideline settings or set your own using the script. For more information about using scripts, see "Using Corel SCRIPT."

To create guidelines using a script

1.	Click Tools, Corel SCRIPT, Run/Manage Scripts.

2.	Choose Guide Wizard from the Available Scripts list box.

3.	Click the Run button.

4.	Follow the on-screen instructions provided by the Guidelines Wizard dialog box.

 Related Topics


Automatically snapping frames and graphic objects to guidelines

As you move your frames and graphic objects on the page, you can have them automatically align to the guidelines on a page. This is referred to as snapping. You can also set the snapping sensitivity which determines how close the frame or graphic object must be to the guideline before it snaps.

To automatically snap frames and graphic objects to guidelines

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, click Page.

3.	Enable the Snap To Guidelines check box.

 Tips

•	You can disable automatic snapping by disabling the Snap To Guidelines check box.

•	You can also click Format, Snap To, Guidelines so that a check mark appears beside the option to enable automatic snapping.

To set the snapping sensitivity

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, click Selection.

3.	In the Frame & Graphic Snap row, type values for the snapping sensitivity in the following boxes:

•	Horizontal

•	Vertical

 Related Topics


Locking guidelines

You can lock guidelines so they cannot be moved using the mouse.

To lock guidelines

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, click Page.

3.	Enable the Lock Guidelines check box in the Page Guides section.

 Related Topics


Hiding and removing guidelines

You can hide you guidelines while working on your publication. Hiding guidelines does not remove them. If you want to remove guidelines, you can remove them using the Grid & Guidelines Properties dialog box or by dragging the guidelines from the page. If you use the Grid & Guidelines Properties dialog box, you can remove all of the horizontal or vertical guidelines at the same time.

To hide guidelines

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, click Page.

3.	Disable the Show Guidelines check box in the Page Guides section.

 Tip

•	You can also click View, Guidelines so that a check mark no longer appears next to the option to hide guidelines.

To remove a guideline

1.	Click Tools, Grid & Guidelines Properties.

2.	Click the Guidelines tab.

3.	Click a guideline in one of the following boxes:

•	Horizontal

•	Vertical

4.	Click the Delete button.

To remove all of the horizontal guidelines on a page

1.	Click Tools, Grid & Guidelines Properties.

2.	Click the Guidelines tab.

3.	Click the Horizontal box.

4.	Click the Clear All button.

To remove all of the vertical guidelines on a page

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Click the Vertical box.

3.	Click the Clear All button.

To remove a guideline by dragging it from the page

1.	Click View, Rulers.

2.	Pass the cursor over a guideline so that it becomes a double arrow.

3.	Drag the guideline to the solid area of the ruler.

 Related Topics


Using rulers


Overview: Using rulers
Using rulers

Corel VENTURA provides both a horizontal and a vertical ruler. You can use these rulers to help you align frames and graphic objects, to set objects a specific distance apart, and to measure items on your page.

 Related Topics


Displaying and hiding the rulers

You can display or hide the rulers using the Options dialog box or using the View menu. The horizontal and vertical rulers are always displayed together.

To display the rulers

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, click Page.

3.	Enable the Show Rulers check box in the Page Guides section.

 Tip

•	You can also click View, Rulers so that a check mark appears beside the option.

To hide the rulers

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the "To display the rulers" procedure.

2.	Disable the Show Rulers check box.

 Tip

•	You can also hide the rulers by right-clicking a ruler, and clicking Hide Ruler.

 Related Topics


Adding columns and tabs using the horizontal ruler

You can quickly add columns to pages and tabs to paragraphs using the horizontal ruler. You can also set the default alignment for each new tab you create using the horizontal ruler. For information about adding columns, see "Formatting pages." For more information about adding tabs, see "Working with tabs."

To add a column using the horizontal ruler

1.	Click the pasteboard of a page.

2.	Click the horizontal ruler where you want to position the columns.

To add a tab using the horizontal ruler

1.	Click a paragraph using the Pick tool.

2.	Click the horizontal ruler where you want to place the tab.

 Tip

•	You can remove all of the tabs on a ruler by right-clicking in the white area of a horizontal ruler, and clicking Clear All Tabs.

To set the default alignment of tabs added using the horizontal ruler

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, double-click Page, and click Rulers.

3.	In the Tab Style section, choose one of the following from the list box:

•	Left

•	Right

•	Center

•	Decimal

 Tip

•	You can also change the alignment of tabs by right-clicking a tab on the horizontal ruler, and clicking an alignment.

 Related Topics


Setting the rulers' origin, zero point, and unit of measurement

You can set the position from which the rulers start measuring. This position is referred to as the origin. You can also set the zero point relative to the page margin or edge of a selected frame. You can also change the units of measurement for your rulers.

To set the origin of a ruler

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, double-click Page, and click Rulers.

3.	In the Origin section, type values in one or both of the following boxes:

•	Horizontal

•	Vertical

 Tip

•	You can also set the origin by dragging from the intersection of the horizontal and vertical rulers. Pass the cursor over the white triangle at the bottom right corner of the intersection of the horizontal and vertical rulers until it becomes a Precision Select cursor ( [image]), click and drag the crosshairs to the new position.

To set the zero point of a ruler

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	In the Ruler Zero Point section, enable one of the following buttons:

•	Page [image] sets the zero point of the rulers relative to the page

•	Current Frame [image] sets the zero points of the rulers relative to the selected frame

To set the unit of measurement of a ruler

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the "To set the ruler's origin" procedure.

2.	In the Ruler Units section, choose a unit of measurement from one or both of the following list boxes:

•	Horizontal

•	Vertical

 Tips

•	You can also access the ruler options by right-clicking a ruler, and clicking Properties.

•	You can choose a unit of measurement for the rulers by right-clicking a ruler, and clicking a unit.

 Related Topics


Moving the rulers

The rulers are always positioned horizontally and vertically and usually appear in the top and left edges of the Publication Window, but you can move the rulers to another location.

To move the rulers

1.	Click View, Rulers.

2.	Hold down SHIFT, and pass the cursor over the intersection of the horizontal and vertical ruler so that the cursor becomes a Move cursor.

You must pass the cursor over the triangle at the bottom right corner of the intersection of the horizontal and vertical rulers.

3.	Drag the intersection of the rulers to the position you want.

 Related Topics


Fine-tuning typography settings


Overview: Fine-tuning typography settings
Fine-tuning typography settings

You can use typography settings to enhance readability or to preserve page layout by adjusting the spacing between paragraphs, lines in a paragraph, words, and characters. These typography settings are first baselines, tracking, kerning, and vertical justification.

Baselines

Baselines are invisible horizontal lines on which your text sits. You can set where the first baseline on a page or in a frame appears using the paragraph's interline spacing or cap-height. With the first baseline set, Corel VENTURA then sets the position of the other baselines on a page or in a frame.

In the following picture, the baseline is indicated by the red line.

Tracking

Tracking sets the spacing between all characters and words. You can adjust the tracking to increase or reduce the horizontal spacing of individual paragraphs or paragraphs assigned to a tag. Tracking is often used to expand or condense text to fit a given space.

Kerning

Kerning sets the spacing between defined character pairs in a font any time they appear together in words. For example, you can set the kerning for A and W to make them shift closer together. You can adjust kerning to reduce white space and to enhance your publication's look.

Tracking and kerning settings are specific to each publication. Your tracking and kerning settings only change how the font is displayed. They do not change the actual font. You can also import the kerning and tracking values from other publications.

Vertical justification

You can use vertical justification to automatically adjust your text so that it reaches the bottom of a page, column, or frame. When applied, vertical justification works by adding space between paragraphs, between the lines of a paragraph, and before and after frames and tables so that your text flows to the page, column, or frame baseline.

 More Detailed Information
 Related Topics


Using interline and cap-height settings for first baselines


Overview: Using interline and cap-height settings for first baselines
Using interline and cap-height settings for first baselines

Corel VENTURA has two settings to determine the position of the first baseline on a page or in a frame: Interline spacing and Cap-height.

Interline spacing

The Interline setting places the first baseline the distance equal to the interline spacing of the first paragraph on a page or in the frame. The interline spacing is the distance between baselines in a paragraph, as shown in the picture below.

Corel VENTURA then calculates the distance between other paragraphs on the page or in a frame using the following formula:

•	either the Below value for the first paragraph or the Above value for the second paragraph, whichever is greater,

plus

•	the Inter-paragraph value, if it is the same value for both the first and second paragraphs,

plus

•	the Interline value of the second paragraph.

Cap-height

The Cap-height setting places the first baseline so that the highest character in a given font, usually Ê, is aligned with the top margin of the page or frame, as shown in the picture below.

Corel VENTURA then calculates the distance between other paragraphs on the page or in the frame using the following formulas:

1.	When the type size is the same for the first and second paragraphs on the page or in the frame, the space between paragraphs equals:

•	either the Below value for the first paragraph or the Above value for the second paragraph, whichever is greater

plus

•	the Inter-paragraph value, if it is the same value for both the first and second paragraphs

plus

•	the Interline value of the first paragraph

2.	When the type size is larger in the first paragraph than in the second paragraph, the space between paragraphs equals:

•	either the Below value for the first paragraph or the Above value for the second paragraph, whichever is greater

plus

•	the Inter-paragraph value, if it is the same value for both the first and second paragraphs

plus

•	the Inter-line value for the first paragraph

plus

•	the difference in type sizes between the first and second paragraphs

3.	When the type size is larger in the second paragraph than in the first paragraph, the space between paragraphs equals:

•	either the Below value for the first paragraph or the Above value for the second paragraph, whichever is greater

plus

•	the Inter-paragraph value, if it is the same value for both the first and second paragraphs

plus

•	the Inter-line value for the first paragraph

minus

•	difference in type sizes between the first and second paragraphs

Other paragraph formatting, such as a ruling line below the first paragraph or a ruling line above the second paragraph, affects the spacing between paragraphs. However, the overall space of these attributes is added to the total paragraph space for these calculations.

 Note

•	The Above, Below, Inter-paragraph, and Inter-line space values are set on the Space tab of the Paragraph Properties or Paragraph Tag Properties dialog boxes. For more information about setting paragraph spacing, see "Using breaks and spacing."

 Related Topics


Setting the default first baseline for a chapter

The baseline is an invisible line on which the text lies as shown in the picture below. The default baseline settings are made for each chapter.

To set the first baseline default for a chapter

1.	Click Publication, Chapter Properties.

2.	Click the Typography tab.

3.	Choose one of the following from the First Baseline list box:

•	Cap-Height [image] places the first baseline so that the highest character in a given font, usually Ê, is aligned with the top margin

•	Inter-Line [image] places the baseline at the distance of the interline spacing set for the paragraphs

 Related Topics


Setting the first baseline for a page or a frame

The default baseline settings are made for each chapter and apply to each page and frame in that chapter. However, you can change the setting for a specific page or frame, and you can change the setting for a page tag or frame tag.

To set the first baseline for a page

1.	Click a page.

2.	Click Page, Page Properties.

3.	Click the Typography tab.

4.	Choose one of the following from the First Baseline list box:

•	Cap-Height [image] places the first baseline so that the highest character in a given font, usually Ê, is aligned with the top margin

•	Inter-Line [image] places the baseline at the distance of the interline spacing set for the paragraphs

To set the first baseline for a page tag

1.	Click Tools, Tag Window.

2.	Click the Page tab.

3.	Click a page tag.

4.	Click the Tag Properties button.

5.	Follow steps 3 and 4 from the previous procedure.

To set the first baseline for a frame

1.	Select a frame using the Pick tool.

2.	Click Format, Frame Properties.

3.	Click the Typography tab.

4.	Choose one of the following from the First Baseline list box:

•	Cap-Height [image] places the first baseline so that the highest character in a given font, usually Ê, is aligned with the top margin

•	Inter-line [image] places the baseline at the distance of the interline spacing set for the paragraphs

To set the first baseline for a frame tag

1.	Click Tools, Tag Window.

2.	Click the Frame tab.

3.	Click a frame tag.

4.	Click the Tag Properties button.

5.	Follow steps 3 and 4 from the previous procedure.

 Tip

•	For more information about interline spacing, see "Changing interline spacing."

 Related Topics


Adjusting tracking


Overview: Adjusting tracking
Adjusting tracking

Setting the tracking allows you to increase or reduce the horizontal spacing between characters and words in a font. The tracking settings can be applied to a paragraph or a paragraph tag. When you set the tracking for a paragraph, only the selected paragraph is affected. When you apply the tracking settings to a paragraph tag, every paragraph in your publication which uses that paragraph tag is affected. For more information about paragraph tags, see "Using paragraph tags."

 Note

•	You can also import tracking values created in another publication. For more information, see "Managing tracking and kerning values."

 Related Topics


Setting tracking for a paragraph or paragraph tag

You can adjust the tracking of characters and words and apply the settings to a paragraph or a paragraph tag.

To set tracking for a paragraph

1.	Click a paragraph using the Pick tool.

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Properties.

3.	Click the Font tab.

4.	Click the Settings button.

5.	In the Character Tracking section, choose one of the following from the Type list box:

•	Very Loose

•	Looser

•	Normal

•	Tighter

•	Very Tight

To set a custom tracking value for a paragraph

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the previous procedure.

2.	In the Character Tracking section, choose Custom from the Type list box.

3.	Type a value in the Custom box

 Tip

•	A negative value tightens the tracking; a positive value loosens the tracking.

To set tracking for a paragraph tag

1.	Click Tools, Tag Window.

2.	Click the Paragraph tab.

3.	Click a paragraph tag.

4.	Click the Tag Properties button.

5.	Follow steps 3 to 5 from the "To set tracking for a paragraph" procedure.

To set a custom tracking value for a paragraph tag

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the previous procedure.

2.	Click the Font tab.

3.	Click the Settings button.

4.	Follow steps 2 and 3 from the "To set a custom tracking value for a paragraph" procedure.

 Note

•	The tracking value applies even if you change the font used for the paragraph or paragraph tag.

 Related Topics


Adjusting the tracking of characters and words

Tracking can be set as either a proportion of the font's regular word spacing or as a fraction of an em space. A proportional value of 100 uses the default word spacing of each font. In most instances, you do not need to change the default setting. For text set in large size, such as headlines, you may want to reduce the word spacing to fit on a single line or any other amount of space. An em space is a relative unit of measurement equal to the point size of the current font; for example, in a 12 point font, an em space is 12 points wide. Since the value is relative to the font size, you do not need to change the word spacing values when the font size changes.

To adjust tracking in normal text

1.	Click a paragraph using the Pick tool.

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Properties.

3.	Click the Typography tab.

4.	Type a value in the Normal Word Spacing box under the following columns:

•	Proportion % [image] sets the tracking proportional to the default word spacing of each font

•	Ems % [image] sets the tracking proportional to an em space

 Tip

•	Typing a value in one column, automatically changes the value in the other column.

To adjust tracking or words in justified text

1.	Click a justified paragraph using the Pick tool.

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Properties.

3.	Click the Align tab.

If the Details button is displayed, proceed to step 4. If the Presets button is displayed, proceed to step 5.

4.	Click the Details button.

5.	Click the Justified Settings button in the Text Alignment section.

6.	Type a value in the Minimum Word Spacing box under the following columns:

•	Proportion % [image] sets the tracking proportional to the default word spacing of each font

•	Ems % [image] sets the tracking proportional to an em space

7.	Type a value in the Maximum Word Spacing box under the following columns:

•	Proportion % [image] sets the tracking proportional to the default word spacing of each font

•	Ems % [image] sets the tracking proportional to an em space

To set an automatic character spacing value

1.	Follow steps 1 to 5 from the previous procedure.

2.	Enable the Automatic Letter Spacing check box.

3.	Type a value in Maximum Limit box.

Letter spacing can only be set proportional to an em space.

 Note

•	You can also set automatic character spacing, called kerning, for a paragraph. Kerning adjusts the spacing between certain pairs of letters such as A and W. For more information about kerning, see "Adjusting kerning."

 Related Topics


Adjusting the tracking for a font

Each font has a default tracking setting, but you can change how Corel VENTURA displays and prints a font. You can change the preset tracking values for a font, a font style, and a point size. You can preview your changes in either Sample view or Graph view. Sample view shows how the text will look with the tracking values you have defined. Graph view shows how your changes affect other point sizes of that font, and allows you to see which other point sizes you may want to change.

To adjust tracking values using Sample view

1.	Click Publication, Tracking & Kerning.

2.	Click the Tracking tab.

3.	Choose a font and style from the list boxes at the top of the Edit Tracking & Kerning dialog box.

4.	Enable the Sample View button.

5.	Type a value in one of the following boxes:

•	Very Tight

•	Tighter

•	Normal

•	Looser

•	Very Loose

The Sample view updates when you press TAB or click in another box.

 Tips

•	You can change the text that appears in the Sample window by typing text in the Sample box.

•	You can change the size of the sample font by typing a value in the Point Size box.

•	You can change the display by typing a value in the Zoom box.

•	If you want to see how your tracking settings affect text in your publication, you can select text before opening the Edit Tracking & Kerning dialog box. The selected text appears in the Sample box and in the Sample window.

To adjust tracking values using Graph view

1.	Repeat steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	Enable the Graph View button.

3.	Do one of the following:

•	Choose a tracking option from the list box above the Graph window, and drag a node in the graph window to a new position. The horizontal axis represents the font size, and the vertical axis represents the tracking value relative to an em space.

•	Type a value in the boxes to the left of the Graph Window.

 Note

•	The lines joining the nodes in the Graph window represent the tracking settings between nodes. For example, if a node is at 12 points and is set to have very loose tracking, the tracking gets looser as the font point size gets closer to 12.

 Tip

•	You can change the display size of the graph by typing a value in the Zoom box. The coordinates on the graph's axes change automatically.

 Related Topics


Adjusting kerning


Overview: Adjusting kerning
Adjusting kerning

Kerning is used to adjust the spacing between pairs of characters when they appear next to one another in a given font, for example "WA." The two characters are referred to as kern pairs. Corel VENTURA provides both automatic and manual kerning to help you fine-tune the spacing between kern pairs.

Automatic kerning lets you apply the setting in the Edit Tracking & Kerning dialog box to paragraphs and paragraph tags used in your publication. You can also set automatic kerning for frames, frame tags, pages, and page tags. With automatic kerning applied, Corel VENTURA will apply the kerning settings to all of the text in the frames or on the pages. For more information about adjusting the kerning settings, see "Adding and editing kern pairs for a font."

Manual kerning lets you change the spacing between kern pairs that you select. For example, If you want to adjust one instance of a kern pair, you can use manual kerning. If you want that kern setting to apply throughout your publication, in that font, you can adjust the automatic kerning value.

The following table identifies when to apply manual kerning and automatic kerning.

Use	For

Manual kerning	Manually selected character pairs

Automatic kerning	Paragraphs and paragraphs tags

Automatic kerning	Text in frames and on pages

Kerning settings are stored with the publication and do not change the original font on your computer. You can also import kerning values used in another publication, and you can export kerning values as a text file.

 Related Topics


Applying manual kerning

You can apply manual kerning to selected character pairs in your publication. Kerning values use an Ems % value. This value is proportional to an em space in the given font.

To apply manual kerning to selected character pairs

1.	Select a pair of characters.

2.	Click Format, Text Properties.

3.	Type a value in the Kerning box.

 Tip

•	You can also apply manual kerning by selecting the characters and pressing CTRL + ], to increase the kerning value, or CTRL + [, to decrease the kerning value.

 Related Topics


Enabling automatic kerning for a chapter

With automatic kerning enabled for a chapter, you can apply it to paragraphs, paragraph tags, frames, frames tags, pages, and page tags.

To enable automatic kerning for a chapter

1.	Click Publication, Chapter Properties.

2.	Click the Typography tab.

3.	Enable the Pair Kerning check box.

 Related Topics


Applying automatic kerning to paragraphs and paragraph tags

Corel VENTURA can automatically apply the kerning settings defined in the Edit Tracking & Kerning dialog box to paragraphs and paragraphs tags in your publication.

For automatic kerning to have an effect for a paragraph or paragraph tag, the Pair Kerning check box in the Chapter Properties dialog box must be enabled. For more information, see "Enabling automatic kerning for a chapter."

To apply automatic kerning to a paragraph

1.	Click a paragraph using the Pick tool.

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Properties.

3.	Click the Typography tab.

4.	Enable the Automatic Kerning check box.

To apply automatic kerning to a paragraph tag

1.	Click Tools, Tag Window.

2.	Click the Paragraph tab.

3.	Click a paragraph tag.

4.	Click the Tag Properties button.

5.	Follow steps 3 and 4 from the previous procedure.

 Related Topics


Applying automatic kerning to a frame or a frame tag

Corel VENTURA can automatically apply the kerning settings defined in the Tracking & Kerning dialog box to a frame or a frame tag.

To apply automatic kerning to a frame

1.	Select a frame.

2.	Click Format, Frame Properties.

3.	Click the Typography tab.

4.	Choose one of the following options from the Pair Kerning list box:

•	On [image] applies automatic kerning to the text in the frame

•	Off [image] disables automatic kerning to the text in the frame

To apply automatic kerning to a frame tag

1.	Click Tools, Tag Window.

2.	Click the Frame tab.

3.	Click a frame tag.

4.	Click the Tag Properties button.

5.	Follow steps 3 and 4 from the previous procedure.

 Tip

•	You can enable automatic kerning for your frames and frame tags by enabling the Kern Pairs check box in the Chapter Properties dialog box. For more information, see "Enabling automatic kerning for a chapter."

 Related Topics


Applying automatic kerning to a page or a page tag

Corel VENTURA can automatically apply the kerning settings defined in the Tracking & Kerning dialog box to a page or a page tag.

To apply automatic kerning to a page

1.	Click a page.

2.	Click Page, Page Properties.

3.	Click the Typography tab.

4.	Choose one of the following options from the Pair Kerning list box:

•	On [image] applies automatic kerning to the text on the page

•	Off [image] disables automatic kerning to the text on the page

To apply automatic kerning to a page tag

1.	Click Tools, Tag Window.

2.	Click the Page tab.

3.	Click a page tag.

4.	Click the Tag Properties button.

5.	Follow steps 3 and 4 from the previous procedure.

 Tip

•	You can enable automatic kerning for your pages and page tags by enabling the Kern Pairs check box in the Chapter Properties dialog box. For more information, see "Enabling automatic kerning for a chapter."

 Related Topics


Adding and editing kern pairs for a font

Kern pairs are built-in character pairs in a font (such as Ly, ff, or AT) that use specific spacing values. You can add character pairs and edit the kerning settings of others. Corel VENTURA uses these settings when automatic kerning is applied. Only fonts that contain these built-in kerning pairs are affected by automatic kerning. Each kern setting is made for a specific font and style and is case sensitive, for example, the setting for "WO" will not apply to "wo."

To add a kern pair

1.	Click Publication, Tracking & Kerning.

2.	Click the Kerning tab.

3.	Choose the font and style of the kern pair you want to add from the list boxes at the top of the Edit Tracking & Kerning dialog box.

4.	Type the kern pair in the Kern Pair box.

For example, if you want to add a kerning setting for W and O, type WO in the Kern Pair box.

5.	Do one of the following:

•	Click, and drag the slider below the Sample box to adjust the kerning value.

•	In the Kern Controls section, type a value proportional to an em space in the Value box.

6.	Click the Add button.

To edit the spacing of a kern pair

1.	Click Publication, Tracking & Kerning.

2.	Click the Kerning tab.

3.	Choose the font and style for the kern pair you want to adjust from the list boxes at the top of the Edit Tracking & Kerning dialog box.

4.	Choose a kern pair from the Kerning Values list.

5.	Do one of the following:

•	Click, and drag the slider below the Sample box to adjust the kerning value.

•	In the Kern Controls section, type a value proportional to an em space in the Value box.

6.	Click the Replace button.

 Tip

•	If you want to see how your kerning settings affect text in your publication, you can select text before opening the Tracking & Kerning dialog box. The selected text appears in the Sample box. It also appears in the Sample window if you click the Preview button.

•	You can also click the Preview button and type text to view how the kerning settings are applied for a font size.

 Related Topics


Resetting and deleting kern pair settings for a font

You can reset or delete kerning settings for character pairs in a given font. You cannot reset kern pairs that you have added. For information about adding or editing kern pair settings, see "Adding and editing kern pairs for a font."

To reset a single kern pair

1.	Click Publication, Tracking & Kerning.

2.	Click the Kerning tab.

3.	Choose the font and style for the kern pair you want to adjust from the list boxes at the top of the Edit Tracking & Kerning dialog box.

4.	Choose a kern pair from the Kerning Values list.

5.	Click the Reset To Default button.

To reset all kern pairs to the default settings

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	Click the Reset All button.

To delete a kern pair

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the "To reset a single kern pair" procedure.

2.	Choose a kern pair from the Kerning Values list.

3.	Click the Delete button.

 Related Topics


Managing tracking and kerning values


Overview: Managing tracking and kerning values
Managing tracking and kerning values

Corel VENTURA lets you import tracking values and import or export kerning values you have defined in a publication. As well, you can create examples of how your settings are applied. For information about setting tracking values, see "Adjusting tracking." For information about setting kerning values, see "Adjusting kerning."

 Note

•	When you import tracking values and import or export kerning values, the values are dependent on the font and font style selected.

 Related Topics


Importing tracking values from another publication

If you have defined tracking values for a publication, you can use those settings in another publication by importing the tracking values. This means that you can set tracking values once, and import them into other publications.

Imported tracking values are dependent upon the font and font style. The point size of the font does not affect tracking values.

To import tracking values from another publication

1.	Click Publication, Tracking & Kerning.

2.	Click the Tracking tab.

3.	Choose a font and style from the list boxes at the top of the Edit Tracking & Kerning dialog box.

4.	Click the Import/Export button.

5.	Click the Import Tracking From Publication button.

6.	In the Open dialog box, choose a publication, and click Open.

The imported tracking values automatically replace the current publication's tracking values.

 Related Topics


Importing and exporting kerning values

Kerning values that you have set in a particular publication can be used in other publications. You can import kerning values to the current publication, and you can export your kerning values to a text file. This text file can be edited in Corel VENTURA or any text editor, and then imported back into a publication.

Imported kerning values are dependent upon the font and font style. The point size of the font does not affect kerning values.

To import kerning pairs from another publication

1.	Click Publication, Tracking & Kerning.

2.	Click the Kerning tab.

3.	Choose the font and style from the list boxes at the top of the Edit Tracking & Kerning dialog box.

4.	Click the Import/Export button.

5.	Click the Import Kerning From Publication button.

6.	In the Open dialog box, choose a publication, and click Open.

7.	Click Yes for each kern pair you want to import.

To export a kern pair set as text

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the previous procedure.

2.	Click the Import/Export button.

3.	Click Export Kern Pair Sets.

4.	In the Save As dialog box, choose the folder where you want to save the file, and type a filename in the File Name box.

5.	Click Save.

To import a kern pair set from a text file

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the "To import kerning pairs from another publication" procedure.

2.	Click the Load Kern Pair Sets button.

3.	In the Open dialog box, choose the file containing the kerning values, and click Open.

 Related Topics


Creating examples of tracking and kerning values

Corel VENTURA lets you create examples of tracking and kerning values. You can use the examples to choose font settings or to compare tracking and kerning across different fonts and font sizes. The examples are created in a separate Corel VENTURA publication.

To create a tracking example

1.	Click Publication, Tracking & Kerning.

2.	Click the Tracking tab.

3.	Click the Generate Example button.

4.	In the Include Font list, enable the check box for each font that you want to include in the example.

5.	In the Select Point Sizes section, choose a point size from the list on the left.

6.	Click the Add button.

7.	Repeat steps 5 and 6 for each point size you want to include.

 Tip

•	You can also click the Add All button to generate an example with each point size.

To create a kerning example

1.	Click Publication, Tracking & Kerning.

2.	Click the Kerning tab.

3.	Follow steps 3 to 7 from the previous procedure.

 Tip

•	If you enable the Include Tracking check box, Corel VENTURA will create an example of tracking along with the kerning example.

 Related Topics


Using vertical justification


Overview: Using vertical justification
Using vertical justification

The vertical justification feature of Corel VENTURA automatically adjusts your text so that it reaches the bottom of a page, column, or frame. Vertical justification adjusts your text by adding space before and after frames, tables, paragraphs, and between each line of text. In the example below, the page on the left does not have vertical justification applied, and the page on the right does.

When you set vertical justification, you specify the default setting in the Chapter Properties dialog box. Settings for frames, pages, and paragraphs are specified independently. The maximum settings for frames, pages, and paragraphs limits the amount of space that Corel VENTURA can add before, between, or after frames, tables, paragraphs, and lines of text.

When applied, vertical justification uses one of two methods to add space [image] feathering or carding [image] and lets you set properties for adding space around your frames and between paragraphs.

Carding

Carding adds space in increments equal to the interline spacing of a selected paragraph, paragraph tag, or a custom setting made in the Chapter Properties dialog box to align baselines across columns and facing pages. For example, if the selected paragraph tag is the default Body Text paragraph tag, with 12 point Times New Roman and an interline space of 14 points, vertical justification using carding will add space in increments of 14 points. Because only multiples of the interline spacing are used, you can minimize any discrepancies in the alignment of the text across columns.

Feathering

Feathering adds the exact amount of space needed to align text baselines to the bottom of a page, frame, or column. When you apply feathering, Corel VENTURA adds spacing in any amount up to the maximum setting specified on the Typography page in the Chapter, Paragraph, Frame, or Page Properties dialog boxes and the Position tab in the Table Properties dialog box. For example, if vertical justification is set to a maximum of 10 points and the Body Text interline setting is 12 points, feathering will add any amount of space from 0 to 10 points to make the text reach the bottom baseline.

 Note

•	Vertical justification can only add the maximum space set for each paragraph or paragraph tag. If the space on the page or in the frame is more than what can be applied to each paragraph or paragraph tag, no space will be added. Once enough text is added to the frame or page, vertical justification will adjust the text.

Adding space around frames

Corel VENTURA has a number of setting choices that control how space is added above and below frames during vertical justification:

•	Default [image] adds space based on the Around Frame Spacing setting in the Typography tab of the Chapter Properties dialog box

•	Moveable [image] allows space to be added above a frame during vertical justification

•	Fixed [image] does not allow space to be added above a frame during vertical justification

•	Off [image] turns vertical justification off for the frame

 Note

•	Because vertical justification only makes the text line up at the bottom of the page, frame, or column, aligning text across columns can be difficult. In fact, the need to use vertical justification can often be reduced, or eliminated, by planning. If you want to try to maintain text alignment across columns while making your text reach the baselines, you can try to use the following rule [image] set all of your font sizes, interline spacing, and page dimensions to be multiples of the interline spacing of the main body text. For example, if the main body text is 12 points and the interline spacing is 14 points, the interline settings for other paragraphs should be a multiple, for example, 28, 42, or 56. If aligning text across columns is not a significant issue for you, then vertical justification is an extremely useful tool in assisting in the design and layout of your publication.

 Related Topics


Setting the interline spacing used during vertical justification

The interline spacing which is used during vertical justification is set for each chapter. You can set the interline spacing based on a paragraph tag or you can choose a custom setting.

To set interline spacing based on a paragraph tag to be used during vertical justification

1.	Click Publication, Chapter Properties.

2.	Click the General tab.

3.	Click the Paragraph Tag button in the Interline Snap/Vertical Justification Setting section.

4.	Choose a paragraph tag.

To set a custom interline spacing to be used during vertical justification

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Click the Custom button.

3.	Type a value in the Custom box.

 Tip

•	The Interline Snap/Vertical Justification Setting also applies to the Snap To Interline setting. For more information, see "Enabling Snap To."

 Related Topics


Setting the default vertical justification for a chapter

To apply vertical justification in a publication, you must first set the default vertical justification for each chapter. After the vertical justification for each chapter is set, you can set the vertical justification options for the pages, frames, and paragraphs. If you do not change the settings for these items, Corel VENTURA automatically applies the default chapter settings.

You can also set whether your frames can be moved as vertical justification is applied.

To set the default vertical justification for a chapter

1.	Click Publication, Chapter Properties.

2.	Click the Typography tab.

3.	From the Within Frame/Page list box, choose one of the following:

•	Off [image] disables vertical justification

•	Feathering [image] enables vertical justification using feathering

•	Carding [image] enables vertical justification using carding

If you choose Feathering or Carding, proceed to step 4.

4.	In the Maximum Justification box, type the maximum percentage value of the interline spacing that Corel VENTURA can apply to vertically justify text.

 Note

•	The default vertical justification value sets the maximum amount of space between items (frames, paragraphs, and tables) that Corel VENTURA can apply. For example, 100% vertical justification means that 100% of the interline space for each paragraph can be applied; 200% vertical justification means that 200% of the interline space for each paragraph can be applied. If you set the value to 0%, vertical justification will, essentially, be turned off.

To set default options for allowing frames to move during vertical justification

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	From the Around Frame list box, choose one of the following:

•	Fixed [image] does not allow frames to move

•	Moveable [image] allows frames to move

•	Off [image] turns vertical justification off for frames

3.	Type a value in the following boxes:

•	Maximum At Top [image] sets the maximum amount of space that can be added above frames

•	Maximum At Bottom [image] sets the maximum amount of space that can be added below frames

 Related Topics


Setting vertical justification for paragraphs and paragraph tags

You can apply vertical justification to paragraphs in your publication. For more effective vertical justification throughout your publication, you can set vertical justification for the paragraph tags that you are using, and have the settings apply to each paragraph using that tag.

To set vertical justification for a paragraph

1.	Click a paragraph using the Pick tool.

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Properties.

3.	Click the Typography tab.

4.	In the Vertical Justification section, type a value in the following boxes:

•	Max Above [image] sets the maximum amount of space that can be added above a paragraph during vertical justification

•	Max Below [image] sets the maximum amount of space that can be added below a paragraph during vertical justification

•	Max Interline [image] sets the maximum amount of space that can be added between lines of text in a paragraph during vertical justification

To set vertical justification for a paragraph tag

1.	Click Tools, Tag Window.

2.	Click the Paragraph tab.

3.	Click a paragraph tag.

4.	Click the Tag Properties button.

5.	Follow steps 3 and 4 from the previous procedure.

 Notes

•	The space added to your publication during vertical justification is dispersed among many paragraphs. Therefore, the actual space added may be less than the maximum you specified in step 4 of the "To apply vertical justification to a paragraph" procedure.

•	The default vertical justification settings are made for each chapter, and can be set for frames and pages independently of the chapter. For vertical justification to be applied to paragraphs and paragraph tags, vertical justification must be enabled for the chapter, page, or frame. For more information about setting the vertical justification for a chapter, see "Setting the default vertical justification for a chapter." For information about setting vertical justification for a page, see "Setting vertical justification for pages and page tags." For information about setting vertical justification for a frame, see "Setting vertical justification for frames and frame tags."

 Related Topics


Setting vertical justification for frames and frame tags

The default vertical justification settings for frames are set for each chapter. However, you can change the vertical justification settings for a frame or frame tag. With vertical justification enabled for a frame, the vertical justification settings for the paragraphs in the frame can be applied. If vertical justification is disabled for a frame, vertical justification will not be applied even if it is set for the paragraphs. For information about setting the default vertical justification settings, see "Setting the default vertical justification for a chapter." For information about setting vertical justification for paragraphs and paragraph tags, see "Setting vertical justification for paragraphs and paragraph tags."

To set vertical justification for text in a frame

1.	Select a frame.

2.	Click Format, Frame Properties.

3.	Click the Typography tab.

4.	From the Within Frame list box, choose one of the following:

•	Off [image] disables vertical justification

•	Feathering [image] enables vertical justification using feathering

•	Carding [image] enables vertical justification using carding

If you choose Feathering or Carding, proceed to step 5.

5.	In the Maximum Justification box, type the maximum percentage value of the interline spacing that Corel VENTURA can apply to vertically justify text.

To set vertical justification for a frame tag

1.	Click Tools, Tag Window.

2.	Click the Frame tab.

3.	Click a frame tag.

4.	Click the Tag Properties button.

5.	Follow steps 3 to 5 from the previous procedure.

To set vertical justification around a frame

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the "To set vertical justification for text in a frame" procedure.

2.	From the Around Frame list box, choose one of the following:

•	Fixed [image] does not allow frames to move

•	Moveable [image] allows frames to move

•	Off [image] turns vertical justification off for frames

3.	Type a value in the following boxes:

•	Maximum At Top [image] sets the maximum amount of space that can be added above the frame

•	Maximum At Bottom [image] sets the maximum amount of space that can be added below the frame

To set vertical justification around a frame tag

1.	Click Tools, Tag Window.

2.	Click the Frame tab.

3.	Click a frame tag.

4.	Click the Tag Properties button.

5.	Click the Typography tab.

6.	Follow steps 2 and 3 from the previous procedure.

 Tip

•	For more information about frames, see "Using frames." For more information about frame tags, see "Using frame tags."

 Related Topics


Setting vertical justification for pages and page tags

The default vertical justification settings for frames are set for each chapter. However, you can change the vertical justification settings for a page or page tag. With vertical justification enabled for a page, the vertical justification settings for the paragraphs on the page can be applied. If vertical justification is disabled for a page, vertical justification will not be applied even if it is set for the paragraphs. For information about setting the default vertical justification settings, see "Setting the default vertical justification for a chapter." For information about setting vertical justification for paragraphs and paragraph tags, see "Setting vertical justification for paragraphs and paragraph tags."

To set vertical justification for a page

1.	Click a page.

2.	Click Page, Page Properties.

3.	Click the Typography tab.

4.	From the Within Page list box, choose one of the following:

•	Off [image] disables vertical justification

•	Feathering [image] enables vertical justification using feathering

•	Carding [image] enables vertical justification using carding

If you choose Feathering or Carding, proceed to step 5.

5.	In the Maximum Justification box, type the maximum percentage value of the text interline spacing that can be added to vertically justify text.

To set vertical justification for a page tag

1.	Click Tools, Tag Window.

2.	Click the Page tab.

3.	Click a page tag.

4.	Click the Tag Properties button.

5.	Follow steps 3 to 5 from the previous procedure.

 Related Topics


Multiuser publishing and archiving publications


Overview: Multiuser publishing and archiving publications
Multiuser publishing and archiving publications

Multiuser publishing and archiving publications help you manage electronically created and shared documents. In multiuser publications, various users can contribute to a publication at the same time. You can assign privileges to users and control the use and modification of files and stylesheets.

Archiving lets you store multiple versions of a Corel VENTURA 8 publication. If you want to get rid of the changes you made to a file, or recover some text you deleted last week, you can revert back to a previously archived version of your publication.

 More Detailed Information


Multiuser publishing


Overview: Multiuser publishing
Multiuser publishing

Multiuser publications let various users contribute to a publication at the same time. The stylesheet and chapters are treated as a units that can be opened and edited individually. A single-user publication, by contrast, is treated as one unit [image] when the user opens the publication, the stylesheet, the chapters, and the text and graphic files in the chapters are not available to other users.

Multiuser publications also let you control the look of your publication when more than one person is working on it.

The following illustration shows how multiuser publishing lets more than one user contribute to a publication.

Administrating a multiuser publication

The administrator creates the multiuser publication, controls the number of users and their access to the publication, and keeps track of user passwords. The administrator can share administrative authority with others.

As the administrator of a publication, you can place the responsibility for the stylesheet of the publication with one person. In this way, you know that there will be a consistent look to your publication despite the many authors.

Using a multiuser publication

Using a multiuser publication involves a few steps not required when working on a single-user publication. The master copy of a multiuser publication is typically kept on a network or shared drive. When a user first opens a multiuser publication, a working copy is created on the user's computer. To work on the publication, the user "checks out" components of the publication to be edited, makes the changes, then "checks in" the components of the publication. A multiuser publication cannot be edited until it is checked out and when changes are made, the publication needs to be checked in for the changes to be reflected in the master copy of the publication. Instead of working with an entire publication, the user may only be editing one or two chapters, allowing other users to edit the remaining chapters in the publication. Each chapter in a publication must be checked out individually [image] when you check out a publication (as opposed to a chapter) you can edit the publication properties and stylesheet of the publication.

 Notes

•	You cannot create or use a multiuser publication if you do not have a user name. If you are not logged onto a network or you do not have a computer user name, you must create one before you can create or use a multiuser publication. For more information, see "Starting Corel VENTURA with a user name."

•	Multiuser is a publication property. To access publication properties, click Format, Publication Properties.

 More Detailed Information
 Related Topics


Overview: Basic concepts
Basic concepts

Before you begin working with multiuser publications, you should be familiar with the following concepts:

Administrator

The administrator is the person who creates the multiuser publication and is responsible for adding and deleting other users, giving users access rights, and changing user passwords. An administrator has the highest level of access to a publication and that access cannot be taken away by another user.

User

A user is a person who can access, format, or edit the multiuser publication.

Access rights

Access rights are the permission a user has been given to check out, view, format, and edit a multiuser publication. There are four levels of access rights. Admin allows a user to alter the access rights of other users; Publication allows a user to edit the publication properties and stylesheet of a publication; Chapter allows a user to edit the chapters of a publication; View allows a user to view a read-only copy of the publication.

Check out

Checking out a publication or chapter gives you exclusive rights to edit that publication's stylesheet and publication properties or chapter. While one user has a chapter or publication checked out, all other users can view a read-only copy of that publication or chapter, but cannot edit it. You check out a chapter or publication through the VENTURA Navigator.

Check in

To check in a publication is to update that chapter in the master copy of the publication. When you check in a chapter or publication, the working copy on your computer becomes read-only. You should check in often so that your changes are made to the master copy of the publication. You check in a chapter or publication through the VENTURA Navigator.

Read-only

A read-only copy of a publication is for viewing purposes only and cannot be edited.

Master copy

The master copy of a multiuser publication is the copy where changes from each user are stored. When each user checks in a chapter of a multiuser publication, the changes are updated in the master copy. The master copy of a multiuser publication is typically kept on a network or shared drive. A master copy cannot be opened [image] changes to the publication are made through the working copy.

Working copy

The working copy of a multiuser publication or chapter is the copy the user edits. When a user checks out a publication or chapter, a working copy is created on their computer. When a publication or chapter is checked in, the master copy of the publication is updated with the changes in the working copy.

 Note

•	You cannot create or use a multiuser publication if you do not have a user name. If you are not logged onto a network or you do not have a computer user name, you must create one before you can create or use a multiuser publication. For more information, see "Starting Corel VENTURA with a user name."

 More Detailed Information
 Related Topics


Administrating a multiuser publication


Overview: Administrating a multiuser publication
Administrating a multiuser publication

The administrator is the person who creates the multiuser publication from a single-user publication. The administrator's responsibilities include adding users, giving them the appropriate level of access rights, creating and changing user passwords, and deleting users who will no longer be working on the publication. All levels of access rights to the publication are given to the administrator when it is created. An administrator can also share administrative responsibilities with other users by giving them Admin level access rights.

The information in this section is for those who will be creating and administrating multiuser publications. For information about using multiuser publications, see "Working on a multiuser publication."

 Related Topics


Making a multiuser publication from a single-user publication

When you make a multiuser publication, you have to start with a single-user publication. The single-user publication can have many chapters or be a blank publication.

You then have to name and set the location of the master copy of the publication and the working copy.

The master copy of a multiuser publication stores a profile for each user. The profile contains information about each user's user name, network login name, access rights, and the location of each user's working copy. You set the location where the master copy is stored when you first create a multiuser publication.

The working copy is a copy of the publication or chapter that the user has checked out on their computer. After the user has edited and checked in the publication or chapter in, the master copy is updated with the changes the user has made.

To make a multiuser publication from a single-user publication

1.	Open the single-user publication.

2.	Click Publication, Publication Properties.

3.	Click the Multiuser tab.

4.	Enable the Multiuser Access check box.

5.	Click OK twice.

6.	In the Create Master Multiuser Publication dialog box, choose a folder from the Save As box.

7.	Type a name for the master copy of the publication in the Filename box.

The master copy of a multiuser publication is saved with a different filename extension than a working copy of a publication (.MVP), so it is possible to use the same filename for both a master copy and a working copy in the same folder.

The master copy of a publication needs to be in a location accessible to other users through the network.

8.	In the Create Multiuser Working Copy dialog box, choose a folder from the Save As box.

9.	Type a name for the working copy of the publication in the Filename box.

 Notes

•	If you copy and paste a multiuser publication with links in Windows Explorer, the resulting publication will not be multiuser.

•	You cannot create or use a multiuser publication if you do not have a user name. If you are not logged onto a network or you do not have a computer user name, you must create one before you can create or use a multiuser publication. For more information, see "Starting Corel VENTURA with a user name."

 Related Topics


Checking out a multiuser publication

Before performing administrative functions on a publication, for example, adding users, you must first check out the publication. For information about how to check in your publication, see "Checking in a multiuser publication or chapter."

To check out a multiuser publication

1.	Click File, Open.

2.	Choose the drive where the working copy of your publication is stored in the Look In list box.

3.	Double-click the folder where the working copy of your publication is stored.

4.	Double-click the filename of the working copy of your publication.

A read-only copy of the file is opened.

5.	Right-click the publication in the VENTURA Navigator window.

6.	Click Multiuser, Check Out.

 Related Topics


Overview: Users
Users

Users are the people who access, format, and edit the multiuser publication.

When you make a publication into a multiuser publication, two users are automatically added and given access rights. The first user is Everyone. The second user is you.

Everyone

Everyone represents all the individuals on your computer network. The level of access rights you assign Everyone will apply to every person on the network. If you give Everyone Publication access rights, every person on your computer network can format the publication stylesheet and add and delete chapters from the multiuser publication.

When you add a new user, they are automatically assigned the same level of access rights you have assigned to Everyone. For example, if Everyone had View access rights, and you added the new user "JohnP", then John P. would automatically have View access rights. If you alter the added user's access rights, it overrides the Everyone access rights they already had.

You

As the administrator of the multiuser publication, your name is automatically added as a user given the highest level of access rights to the publication. No one can take away the administrator's access rights. You can add and remove users, change user passwords, and assign different levels of access rights.

Other users

The administrator can add users to the publication. By default, a new user is given the same level of access rights as Everyone, but the administrator can change the access rights when the user is created, or at any time. In order for you to add a person as a user, they must be on the same computer network as you.

 Related Topics


Adding and deleting users

When you want a person to have access to a publication, you need to add that person as a user. If a user has finished working on a publication, you can delete the user so that they will no longer have access to the publication.

To add a user

1.	Check out the publication.

2.	Click Publication, Publication Properties.

3.	Click the Multiuser tab.

4.	Click the Add User button.

5.	Type the user's computer network identification name in the Name box.

 Tip

•	If you want the user to have a password, type it in the New Password and Confirm New Password boxes.

To delete a user

1.	Check out the publication.

2.	Click Publication, Publication Properties.

3.	Click the Multiuser tab.

4.	Click the name of the user you want to delete.

5.	Click the Delete User button.

 Note

•	For information about how to check out a publication, see "Checking out a multiuser publication."

 Related Topics


Overview: User access rights
User access rights

User access rights define what actions each user can perform on the publication. There are four levels of access rights.

Admin

Admin is the highest level of access rights. Admin lets the user assign and edit the access rights of other users, and change user passwords. Users with Admin rights cannot remove Admin and View access rights from the publication's administrator.

You might assign a user Admin access rights if you were going to be unable to perform administration duties for a time.

Publication

Publication access rights gives the user access rights to publication and stylesheet formatting. Users with these rights can also add chapters. Giving a user Publication access rights, however, does not automatically give them Chapter access rights.

You might assign a user Publication access rights if that person is the leader of a project and is going to be making the decisions on the style of the publication. It is a good idea to have one person dedicated to changing the stylesheet of a publication.

Chapter

Chapter access rights allows the user to format and edit chapters and files within chapters, such as text and graphics.

View

View access rights allows a user to open a read-only copy of the file, and also to copy components of the publication. When you assign Admin, Publication, or Chapter access rights, View access rights are automatically assigned. When you revoke View access rights, all other access rights are revoked as well.

You might assign a user View access rights if that person is interested in reading the publication as it progresses, for example, a manager.

 Related Topics


Assigning user access rights

User access rights define what actions each user can perform on the publication. Each user has individual access rights, so the administrator of a multiuser publication can allow one user to check out and edit chapters, and allow another to check out and edit the publication stylesheet.

For more information about user access rights, see "User access rights."

To assign user access rights

1.	Check out the publication.

2.	Click Publication, Publication Properties.

3.	Click the Multiuser tab.

4.	In the Access Rights section, enable the check boxes of the access rights you want the user to have.

 Note

•	For information about how to check out a publication, see "Checking out a multiuser publication."

 Related Topics


Changing user passwords

Only the administrator of a publication or a user with Admin access rights can change the password of a user. To change a password, you must know the current user password.

To change a user's password

1.	Check out the publication.

2.	Click Publication, Publication Properties.

3.	Click the name of the user.

4.	Click the Change Password button.

5.	Type the current password in the Old Password box.

6.	Type the new password in the New Password and Confirm New Password boxes.

 Notes

•	For information about how to check out a publication, see "Checking out a multiuser publication."

•	A new password does not change the access rights of a user.

 Tip

•	If a user forgets their password, delete the user's name from the Access Rights list. Then, add the user again. For more information about how to add and delete users, see "Adding and deleting users."

 Related Topics


Undoing a user's check out

The administrator of a publication can undo the check out of any user. All the changes the user has made since the previous check in are lost, the publication or chapter on the user's computer becomes read-only, and the publication or chapter becomes available for anyone else to check out.

This is a useful procedure if a user forgets to check in a publication or chapter and cannot check it in himself.

To undo a user's check out

1.	Click Tools, VENTURA Navigator.

You need to have the publication or chapter open in the Publication window.

2.	Right-click the publication or chapter in the VENTURA Navigator window.

3.	Click Multiuser, Check Out Status.

4.	Click the name of the publication or chapter and right-click.

5.	Click Undo Check Out.

 Related Topics


Working on a multiuser publication


Overview: Working on a multiuser publication
Working on a multiuser publication

Working on a multiuser publication is not very different from working on a single-user publication. The way you edit and format the publication are the same. The most significant difference is that before you can edit a publication or chapter, you must get a working copy of the publication on your computer and check it out, and after you are finished an editing session, you must check the publication or chapter in so that the master copy of the publication is updated.

Passwords

If you want to set or change your password, see the administrator of the publication.

Access rights

Access rights define what elements of the publication you can change. Check with your administrator to see what level of access rights you have been assigned.

Before you continue learning to use a multiuser publication, you should review Basic Concepts.

The VENTURA Navigator

The VENTURA Navigator has special icons to indicate the status of multiuser publications, stylesheets, and chapters.

Icon	Indicates

Open multiuser publication

Active multiuser publication

Checked out multiuser stylesheet

Checked out multiuser chapter

 Notes

•	You cannot create or use a multiuser publication if you do not have a user name. If you are not logged onto a network or you do not have a computer user name, you must create one before you can create or use a multiuser publication. For more information, see "Starting Corel VENTURA with a user name."

•	The information in this section is for users of multiuser publications. For information about administrating multiuser publications, see "Administrating a multiuser publication."

 Related Topics


Checking out a multiuser publication or chapter

Before you can check out a publication or chapter, you must choose the location where the working copy of that publication will be stored. You must then check out the publication or chapter you want to edit.

To choose the location for your working copy

1.	Click File, Open.

2.	Choose VENTURA Multiuser Publication (MVP) from the Files Of Type box.

3.	Choose the drive where the publication is stored from the Look In list box.

4.	Double-click the folder where the publication is stored.

5.	Double-click the filename of the publication.

6.	Click OK in the Open Multiuser Publication dialog box.

7.	Choose the drive where you want to place the working copy of the publication.

8.	Double-click the folder where you want to place the working copy.

9.	Type a filename for your working copy in the File Name box.

 Notes

•	You can use the same filename as the multiuser publication for your working copy without over-writing the multiuser publication.

•	You cannot make changes to your publication or chapter unless you check it out.

•	When you check out a publication or chapter, it becomes unavailable to other users. Only one user can have a specific publication or chapter checked out at a time.

To check out a publication or chapter

1.	Click File, Open.

2.	Choose the drive where the file is stored in the Look In list box.

3.	Double-click the folder where the publication is stored.

4.	Double-click the filename of the publication.

A read-only copy of the file opens.

5.	In VENTURA Navigator, right-click the publication or chapter you want to check out.

6.	Click Multiuser, Check Out.

 Notes

•	You cannot create or use a multiuser publication if you do not have a user name. If you are not logged onto a network or you do not have a computer user name, you must create one before you can create or use a multiuser publication. For more information, see "Starting Corel VENTURA with a user name."

•	When you check out a chapter, the VENTURA Library file items in that chapter are not checked out. For information about VENTURA Library files, see "Using VENTURA Library files."

 Tip

•	To check out the publication and all chapters, click Multiuser, Check Out All.

 Related Topics


Checking in a multiuser publication or chapter

When you check in a publication or chapter, the changes you've made are updated in the master copy of the publication. The copy you have open on your desktop becomes read-only. To continue working on the publication or chapter, you have to check it out.

To check in a multiuser publication or chapter

1.	Click Tools, VENTURA Navigator.

You need to have the publication or chapter open in the Publication window.

2.	Right-click the publication or chapter in the VENTURA Navigator window.

3.	Click Multiuser, Check In.

 Notes

•	When you check out a chapter, the VENTURA Library file items in that chapter are also checked out. For information about the multiuser functions of VENTURA Library files, see "Using VENTURA Library files."

•	When you check in a chapter, changes made to external files are also saved.

•	When you save a working copy of a multiuser publication or chapter, the changes you have made are saved in the working copy only, not to the master copy of the publication.

 Tip

•	To check in the publication and all chapters, click Multiuser, Check In All.

 Related Topics


Undoing a check out

If you have checked out a publication or chapter and undo the check out, any changes you made are lost, even if you saved them, and the copy of the publication or chapter you have open on your desktop becomes read-only. You can use this procedure to revert to an older copy of the publication or chapter, discarding recent changes you have made.

To undo a check out

1.	Click Tools, VENTURA Navigator.

You need to have the publication or chapter open in the Publication window.

2.	Right-click the publication or chapter in the VENTURA Navigator window.

3.	Click Multiuser, Undo Check Out.

 Note

•	Undoing a check out does not undo changes made to external files. When you undo a check out, changes you have made to external files are saved.

 Tip

•	To undo a check out of the publication and all chapters, click Multiuser, Undo Check Out All.

 Related Topics


Getting the latest version of a multiuser publication or chapter

You can get the latest version of any publication or chapter, even if you do not have the access rights to edit it, and even if it is currently checked out. This allows you to read and print out recent changes to the publication.

To get the latest version of a multiuser publication or chapter

1.	Click Tools, VENTURA Navigator.

You need to have the publication or chapter open in the Publication window.

2.	Right-click the publication or chapter in the VENTURA Navigator window.

3.	Click Multiuser, Get Latest Version.

 Note

•	Getting the latest version of a publication or chapter updates your working copy with most recent changes to the master copy.

 Tip

•	To get the latest version of the publication and all chapters, click Multiuser, Get Latest Version All.

 Related Topics


Viewing a multiuser publication's check out status

By viewing a publication's check out status, you can find out if that publication or its chapters are checked out and by whom.

To view the check out status of a multiuser publication

1.	Click Tools, VENTURA Navigator.

You need to have the publication or chapter open in the Publication window.

2.	Right-click the publication or chapter in the VENTURA Navigator window.

3.	Click Multiuser, Check Out Status.

 Related Topics


Saving the working copy of your publication

You can save the working copy of the publication without updating the master copy. You can close your working copy with components checked out. This allows you to edit the working copy over several sessions before committing to the changes you've made by checking in the publication or chapter and updating the master copy.

To save a working copy of your publication

•	Click File, Save.

 Note

•	If the Make Backup On Save check box is enabled in the Save section of the Options dialog box, a backup copy of the publication will be created when you save your publication. However, the backup copy will not be multiuser.

 Related Topics


Archiving publications


Overview: Archiving publications
Archiving publications

Corel Versions is an archiving program that lets you store previous versions of your Corel publications. It organizes all archived publications by version number and by the date and time the version was stored.

If you did not use Corel Versions to archive publications and you wanted to store old versions of a publication, you would have to save each version of a publication you wanted to keep with a different filename.

Using Corel Versions on the Windows desktop

Corel Versions operates directly with your operating system. You will find the icon for Corel Versions in the Control Panel in Windows. From the Control Panel, you can

•	enable or disable Corel Versions

•	enable file compression options

•	set where archived versions of your publications are stored; in a single location or the current folder

•	set the maximum number of temporary versions for a publication

•	set the file types that will not be archived

Using Corel Versions on the Corel VENTURA 8 desktop

Corel Versions is also available in the Corel VENTURA 8 desktop in the File menu. From the Corel VENTURA 8 desktop, you can

•	archive the current publication

•	retrieve an archived publication

•	save versions of the current publication

File types

Corel Versions stores its archived files with the extension ".CV". These Corel Versions files may be kept in the folder specified in the Enable Versions Control dialog box or in the same folder as the original file. .CV files can only be accessed through Corel Versions.

 Notes

•	Archives of multiuser publications are based on the working copy.

•	You can use Corel Versions to archive any kind of file, not just Corel VENTURA 8 publications. For more information on Corel Versions, see the Corel Versions online Help file.

 Related Topics


Enabling Corel Versions

To use Corel Versions, you have to first enable version control from the Control Panel on the Windows desktop.

To enable Corel Versions

1.	Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar and click Settings, Control Panel.

2.	Double-click Corel Versions.

3.	Enable the Enable Version Control check box.

 Note

•	If you can't find the icon for Corel Versions in the Control Panel, Corel Versions is not installed on your computer. Do a custom install of Corel VENTURA 8 and enable the Corel Versions check box.

 Related Topics


Setting Corel Versions options

Corel Versions includes a number of different options for archiving your publications.

To set options

1.	Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar, and click Settings, Control Panel.

2.	Double-click Corel Versions.

3.	In the Corel Versions dialog box, enable the Enable Version Control check box.

4.	Enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Use Compression [image] saves disk space by reducing the amount of memory your publication uses. For larger publications, using compression adds to the time it takes to retrieve.

•	Default Maximum Number Of Temporary [image] sets the number of temporary, archived versions of the publication that Corel Versions will store. Temporary versions are replaced by newer versions when the maximum number of temporary versions for the file is reached.

•	Default Archiving To Single Location [image] sets Corel Versions to archive to a single folder on your computer by default. You also choose the location archived publications are stored in.

•	File Types To Exclude From Corel Versions [image] file extensions in this box are not archived.

 Related Topics


Creating a publication archive

When you archive a publication that has not previously been archived, a dialog box appears, prompting you to set options to be applied to publication archive.

To create a publication archive

1.	In Corel VENTURA 8, click File, Corel Versions, Archive Current.

2.	In the New Archive Properties dialog box, enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Make First Version Permanent [image] creates a copy of the publication at the present time that will be kept until you choose to delete it. Permanent versions of a publication are kept unless you choose to delete them.

•	Use Compression [image] saves disk space by reducing the amount of memory your publication uses. For larger publications, using compression adds to the time it takes to retrieve.

•	Archive To Single Location [image] sets Corel Versions to archive the publication to the folder on your computer that you chose in the "Setting Corel Versions Options" procedure.

•	Maximum Number Of Temporary Versions [image] sets the number of temporary, archived versions that Corel Versions will store for this publication. Temporary versions are replaced by newer versions when the maximum number of temporary versions for the file is reached.

 Notes

•	To use Corel Versions, you must ensure Corel Version is enabled in the Windows Control Panel. For more information, see Enabling Corel Versions.

•	A publication must be saved before it is archived.

 Related Topics


Archiving a version of a publication

When you archive a publication, Corel Versions saves a copy of that publication in the folder you indicated in the "Setting Corel Versions Options" procedure. You can create a permanent version of the publication that is kept until you delete it, or you can create a temporary version that is replaced by a newer version when the maximum number of temporary versions for the file is reached.

To archive the current version of a publication

1.	In Corel VENTURA 8, click File, Corel Versions, Archive Current.

2.	Enable or disable the Permanent check box.

3.	Type a comment about this version of the publication in the Comment box.

 Note

•	A publication must be saved before it is archived.

 Related Topics


Retrieving archived publications

You can retrieve any publication from the list of archived files. Retrieving a publication opens a copy of the old version which you can then save on your computer. Once retrieved, you can use the file like any other.

To retrieve an archived publication

1.	In Corel VENTURA 8, click File, Corel Versions, Retrieve Publication.

2.	Choose the folder where the publication is stored from the Look In list box.

3.	Choose the type of file from the Files Of Type list box.

4.	Type the filename in the File Name box.

5.	Click the Open button.

6.	In the Choose A Version To Retrieve dialog box, click the version.

7.	Click the Retrieve button.

 Related Topics


Viewing versions of archived publications

Corel Versions comes with a viewing utility that allows you to view a version of your publication without having to retrieve it.

To view a version of an archived publication

1.	In Corel VENTURA 8, click File, Corel Versions, Retrieve Publication.

2.	Choose the folder where the publication is stored from the Look In list box.

3.	Choose the type of file from the Files Of Type list box.

4.	Type the filename in the File Name box.

5.	Click the Open button.

6.	In the Choose A Version To Retrieve dialog box, click the version.

7.	Click the View button.

 Related Topics


Comparing versions of an archived publication

You can compare any two versions of a publication from the list of versions. Corel Versions displays the text of the two files side by side in a text viewer. The differences between the text of the two versions are highlighted in three colors: red text has been deleted in the newer version; blue text has been added to the newer version; green text has been changed in the newer version.

To compare versions of an archived publication

1.	In Corel VENTURA 8, click File, Corel Versions, Retrieve Publication.

2.	Choose the folder where the publication is stored from the Look In list box.

3.	Choose the type of file from the Files Of Type list box.

4.	Type the filename in the File Name box.

5.	Click the Open button.

6.	In the Choose A Version To Retrieve dialog box, click the first version to compare.

7.	Hold down CTRL and click the second version to compare.

8.	Click the Compare button.

 Related Topics


Moving, renaming, and copying archived publications

Corel Versions allows you to move and rename archived publications. When archived publications are moved, Corel Versions maps the new archive path.

When you copy a publication to another location, the copy is not recognized as an archived publication and past versions of the publication are not available for retrieval.

To move or rename an archived publication

1.	In Windows Explorer, open the folder where the publication is stored.

2.	Right-click the filename, and click Corel Versions.

3.	Click File, Move.

4.	Choose a folder in the Save In box.

5.	Type a filename in the File Name box.

6.	Click Save.

To copy an archived publication

1.	In Windows Explorer, open the folder where the publication is stored.

2.	Right-click the filename, click Corel Versions.

3.	Click File, Copy.

4.	Choose a folder from the Save In box.

5.	Click Save.

 Related Topics


Deleting archived publications

Temporary versions of publications are automatically deleted by Corel Versions. If the number of current temporary versions exceeds the maximum number of temporary versions, the oldest temporary version is discarded. If you want to keep a particular version, enable the Permanent option for that version. To remove a Permanent version, you must use the Delete command in the properties dialog box.

You can delete any version of a publication, whether it is permanent or temporary.

To delete an archived publication

1.	In Windows Explorer, open the folder where the publication is stored.

2.	Right-click the filename, and click Corel Versions.

3.	Click File, Delete.

To delete a version of a publication

1.	In Windows Explorer, open the folder where the publication is stored.

2.	Right-click the filename, click Corel Versions.

3.	Click Retrieve.

4.	Click the version you want to delete.

5.	Click the Delete button.

 Related Topics


Reference information


Overview: Reference information
Reference information

This section contains information on higher level functions in Corel VENTURA. You may find this information useful as you become more familiar with Corel VENTURA.

Shortcuts

Most Corel VENTURA mouse operations have keyboard equivalents, called shortcuts or accelerators. The shortcuts in this section are divided by menu and feature to help you quickly find the information you need.

Import and export file formats

This section contains a complete list of the many text, picture, spreadsheet and database file formats that can be imported into and exported from Corel VENTURA.

Corel VENTURA table functions

Corel VENTURA table functions are ready-made formulas you can use while working in a table. You can use Corel VENTURA table functions to perform most functions that are found in spreadsheet programs. This section has information about the seven table function categories [image] conversion, date and time, engineering, financial, logical, mathematical, and statistical.

Corel VENTURA markup codes

Corel VENTURA markup codes contain the formatting used in Corel VENTURA publications. These codes are displayed when you view your publication in Copy Editor view and when you export a publication with its codes intact. Corel VENTURA markup codes can be inserted into text before importing into Corel VENTURA from a text editor [image] this will apply the formatting in the markup codes automatically when you import the text into Corel VENTURA. This section contains a list of Corel VENTURA markup codes.

Character sets and ANSI codes

Character sets and ANSI codes are used to enter special characters that are not available on most keyboards, such as mathematical symbols and non-English characters. This section contains a list of ANSI codes.

Working with equations

Corel VENTURA lets you typeset complex mathematical, statistical, and other equations in your publications. Not to be confused with the functions and spreadsheet formulas used in tables, Corel VENTURA equations are strictly for typesetting purposes. A number of preset equations are provided as well as the tools to let you develop your own equations. This section contains information about working with equations and using the Corel VENTURA EQN (equation) Language.

Developing add-ons for Corel VENTURA

Add-ons are separate software modules that enhance the capabilities of Corel VENTURA. The information in this section will help you develop your own add-ons. If you want more information about using the add-ons, see "Using Corel add-ons."

Developing third-party hyphenation lists

Hyphenation lists determine where to place hyphens in words when you are using Automatic Hyphenation. You can develop your own hyphenation lists to supplement those that are already provided. Specialized hyphenation lists are useful when you create publications in different languages or dialects, or when you use scientific, medical, or other technical word sets. This section contains information about developing and distributing your own hyphenation lists.

Object linking and embedding (OLE)

Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) is a standard method intended to facilitate sharing of formatted, freely editable information among Windows programs. For example, OLE lets you display a presentation from Corel WordPerfect in Corel VENTURA, and update the information easily. This section contains information about adding and editing OLE objects.

Language support for the writing tools

This section contains a list of the language writing tools included with Corel VENTURA.

Differences between Corel VENTURA 7/8 and previous versions

This section includes information about the new features of Corel VENTURA, to help users who have upgraded from a previous version of Corel VENTURA.

Year 2000

This section contains information about how to avoid Year 2000 problems.

Microsoft IntelliMouse support

Corel VENTURA is designed to work with the Microsoft IntelliMouse to give you enhanced zoom and scrolling features. The IntelliMouse wheel provides scrolling and rapid zooming capabilities. This section contains information about the capabilities of the Microsoft IntelliMouse in Corel VENTURA.

Troubleshooting

This section provides information about troubleshooting techniques, printing problems, and error messages. Before calling Technical Support, you may want to refer to this section. The information in Troubleshooting may save you a call to Corel Technical Support.

 More Detailed Information


Recordings, scripts, and automation features


Overview: Recordings, scripts, and automation features
Recordings, scripts, and automation features

Recordings, scripts, and other automation features can make Corel VENTURA work better and more efficiently for you. For example, you can automate a sequence of complex or repetitive steps in Corel VENTURA by recording the steps and then replaying the recording each time you want to perform the same actions. You can also save the recording as a script that can be used later in the same publication or other publications. Scripts are either recordings that you have saved for later use or commands that you have written instructing Corel VENTURA, or another Corel application, to perform.

Depending on the application you use, you may come across the terms "script" or "macro." Both refer to the same thing [image] they describe a series of actions recorded or written in a programming language. Included with Corel VENTURA is Corel SCRIPT Editor, which lets you use the Corel SCRIPT programming language to manually create your scripts using the Corel VENTURA scripts commands. However, the easiest way to create a script is to record your actions.

Let's say you want to adjust a setting for all of the pictures embedded in your publication, such as changing the picture color to grayscale because you do not have a color printer. If you have only a couple of pictures that you want to convert, you can easily perform the operations. If you have 20 pictures, then performing the operation becomes a little more time consuming and certainly more tedious. In that case, you can easily record the actions you must perform to convert the pictures and play back the recording for each picture you want to change. Recordings allow you to save time by doing the actions for you. For a list of commands and actions that you cannot record, see "Corel VENTURA recording limitations."

About OLE Automation

OLE Automation is an integration standard that allows applications to expose their programmable objects so that other applications, called OLE Automation Controllers, can control them. Exposing an object means that an application makes its scripting or macro commands available to the OLE Automation Controller, and the exposed commands become an extension of the controller application.

About Corel add-ons

Corel add-ons allow you to extend the functionality of Corel VENTURA by letting you use separate software modules to perform tasks. For example, one of the supplied Corel add-ons allow you convert text to tables, create preformatted tables, and perform word counts.

 More Detailed Information


Recordings and scripts


Overview: Recordings and scripts
Recordings and scripts

Recordings and scripts can increase the power and flexibility of Corel VENTURA by combining many actions into a single command. If you need to perform the same actions many times, you can record the keystrokes, mouse actions, and menu and toolbar commands as you make them in Corel VENTURA. After you make a recording, you can replay it to apply the same actions to other text, graphic objects, pictures, frames, or tables. Each recording you make will last until you make another recording or you exit the application.

If you find you're frequently repeating tasks in many Corel VENTURA sessions, or you want to be able to use a recording later or in another Corel VENTURA publication, you can save the recording as a script. When you save a recording as a script, your recorded actions are translated into script commands and stored in a text file. In the text file, each command is stored on a separate line, and when the script is executed or run, each line instructs Corel VENTURA to perform a command. The script allows you to perform a sequence of recorded actions with a single mouse click. Because the script is essentially a text file, it can be edited in a word processor or by using Corel SCRIPT Editor.

 Tip

•	If you find you are often using recordings and scripts, you may want to use the Recording & Script toolbar. You can keep this toolbar open by clicking View, Toolbars, and enabling the Recording & Script checkbox.

 Related Topics


Scripts and wizards included with Corel VENTURA

Scripts and wizards both use the same Corel SCRIPT programming language, but wizards provide a more interactive interface. Wizards automate complicated and time-consuming tasks, based on your input into the wizard's dialog boxes.

The following list contains brief descriptions of the sample scripts and wizards that are included with Corel VENTURA. You can use these scripts and wizards as they are, modify them to better suit your needs, or use them as templates or guides for writing your own scripts. Corel SCRIPT scripts use the CSC extension.

Script/Wizard	Function

7to8Converter.CSC	Launches an executable file which converts Corel VENTURA 7 publications into the version 8 format.

BusinessForms.CSB	Creates professional business forms such as letterhead, invoices, and business cards. This script has been compiled as a Corel SCRIPT binary file. Binary files are executed from Corel SCRIPT Editor, and do not appear in the Scripts dialog box in Corel VENTURA.

CalendarMaker.CSB	Creates a calendar for a specified month and year. This script has been compiled as a Corel SCRIPT binary file. Binary files are executed from Corel SCRIPT Editor, and do not appear in the Scripts dialog box in Corel VENTURA.

ClipArtManual.CSC	Automates the process of importing a large number of pictures into a Corel VENTURA publication.

CreateLibrary.CSC	Creates a new (or opens an existing) Corel VENTURA library and fills it with the selected files from a specified folder.

CSCConverter.CSC	Updates Corel VENTURA version 7 scripts to version 8.

DBPScheduler.CSC	Executes multiple Corel DataBase Publisher recipes.

EnableExportOnSave.CSC	Displays a list of all text files in the current publication, and prompts you to set Export On Save preferences for each one.

EPSInformation.CSC	Launches the EPS Information wizard to list the colors and fonts in an Encapsulated Postscript (EPS) file.

FileList.CSC	Lists all files in the current publication on a chapter-by-chapter basis.

FindUnusedFiles.CSC	Finds files in a publication or the current chapter that do not appear in frames.

FindUnusedTags.CSC	Searches the publication for all unused tags. Unused tags can be deleted or a list of the unused tags can be saved to a text file.

GuideWizard.CSC	Sets up horizontal and vertical guidelines for your publication.

HyphenationEditor.CSC	Edits hyphenation exceptions list.

KeyboardShortcuts.CSC	Produces a list of the keyboard shortcut keys.

LibraryList.CSC	Creates a list of all the items in a specified Corel VENTURA library.

PrintOnePage.CSC	Prints the active Corel VENTURA publication to a file, one page at a time, using the default print settings.

PrintScheduler.CSC	Preschedules printing of publications; for example, you can use this wizard to preprogram the printing of publications at off-peak hours if you use a network printer.

ResizeObjects.CSC	Rescales selected objects and maintains the aspect ratio of the original layout.

RTFFormatter.CSC	Formats RTF files.

StylesheetInformation.CSC	Generates paragraph tag information in Corel VENTURA, Corel Quattro Pro, Corel SCRIPT, Microsoft Excel, or plain-text formats.

TagSampler.CSC 	Creates samples of tags used in a stylesheet.

UnSpace.CSC	Changes double spaces to single spaces.

VConvert.CSC	Launches an executable file which converts publications from Corel VENTURA 5 (and older versions) into Corel VENTURA single-file format.

Watermark.CSC	Creates on watermark.

The following list contains brief descriptions of sample scripts which use Windows API calls.

DLL example	Function

FindWindow.CSC	Uses the FindWindow() function from the Windows library USER32.DLL.

GetPrivateProfileString.CSC	Uses the GetPrivateProfileString() function from the Windows library KERNEL32.DLL.

GetPrivateProfileStringSection.CSC	Uses the GetPrivateProfileStringSection() function from the Windows library KERNEL32.DLL.

Also included with Corel VENTURA are other sample scripts which highlight some of the Corel SCRIPT programming capabilities.

 Related Topics


Tips for recordings and scripts

The following is a list of things to keep in mind when you are making recordings or scripts:

•	The status bar, while recording, displays the recording icon ( [image]).

•	Use the shortest steps possible to perform your task. The longer a recording session lasts, the more chances for errors.

•	You cannot record a script that pauses for user input. If you want the script to ask for user input, you must write a custom dialog box into your script. For more information about creating custom dialog boxes, see the Corel SCRIPT Editor online Help.

•	Save your publication before you play back a recording or script. You can then restore your original publication if the recording or script does not produce the results you expect. You can easily do this by recording a file-saving command as the first command in your recording session; for example, you can add a .FileSave or .FileSaveAs command in your recording.

•	You cannot record the running of another script. If you run a script while a recording is being made, the script runs, but nothing records.

•	Although Corel VENTURA records both keyboard and mouse actions, in some cases it may be more prudent to use keystrokes instead of mouse actions to place the cursor in your publication and to select items. Some mouse actions are recorded, but they may not give the expected results in other publications.

•	Remember to position the cursor or select an object correctly before you play back recordings that depend on the location of the cursor.

•	Recordings that switch from one publication window to another might not behave as you expect when you play them back. If you must switch between publication windows, use the commands on the Window menu rather than using your mouse.

•	Scripts that you have recorded may not run appropriately in every situation; for example, if a script expects certain options or settings and does not find them, it may not run correctly. If a script cannot run, a message appears to indicate the reason and the line number(s) that are causing the difficulty. In these cases, you can use Corel SCRIPT Editor to correct the script. For more information about using Corel SCRIPT Editor, see "Using Corel SCRIPT Editor."

 Related Topics


Corel VENTURA recording limitations

You can use Corel SCRIPT to record almost every keystroke, mouse selection, and menu and toolbar command in Corel VENTURA except for the commands listed below; however, many of these commands have corresponding scripting commands that you can write into your scripts. For information about scripting commands, see the Corel SCRIPT Editor online Help.

The following list some of the commands that cannot be recorded by Corel VENTURA:

File menu commands	Insert menu commands

Acquire Image commands	Equation

Export Page As EPS

Send	Publication menu commands

Print	Tracking & Kerning

Print Preview

Publish As commands	Format menu commands

Corel Versions commands	Snap To commands

Prepare for Service Bureau

Edit menu commands	Tools menu commands

Undo	Options

Redo	VENTURA Navigator

Repeat	VENTURA Library commands

Edit Item	Tag Window

Object	Spell Check

Links	Grammatik

Thesaurus

View menu commands	Type Assist

Hide This Picture	Corel DataBase Publisher commands

Hide All Pictures	Corel SCRIPT commands

Toolbars	Palette Editor

Property Bar	Add-ons

Status Bar

Rulers	Window menu commands

Grid	New Window

Guidelines	Cascade

Column Guides	Tile Horizontally

Frame Borders	Tile Vertically

Arrange Icons

Split

 Related Topics


Internal and external scripts

Corel VENTURA uses two types of script files: internal and external. An internal script is embedded into a publication's stylesheet and can only be executed or edited if a publication that uses that stylesheet is open and active. One advantage of using an internal script is that if you move your publication to another folder on your hard drive or on a network, the script moves with the publication. If your script will only be used with one publication, then an internal script is usually adequate. When you save a Corel VENTURA recording as a script, it will be saved by default as an internal script.

External scripts are saved as separate text files with the filename extension .CSC. External scripts can be accessed at any time, used with any Corel VENTURA publication, and passed to coworkers through a network or on a disk, without having to send the entire Corel VENTURA publication.

If you have an internal script that you want to make external, Corel VENTURA can create a copy of the script as a separate file that can be used in any Corel VENTURA publication. As well, if you have an external script that you want to import into a publication, Corel VENTURA can import a copy of the script and make it part of the publication's stylesheet. For more information about importing and exporting scripts, see "Exporting and importing scripts."

 Note

•	Internal scripts in Corel VENTURA 7 publications are not converted into Corel VENTURA 8 format when the publication is opened. These scripts should be updated. For example, the WITHOBJECT script statement should be changed to:

  WITHOBJECT "CorelVentura.Automation.8"

•	The CSCConverter.CSC script updates Corel VENTURA version 7 scripts to version 8. For more information about scripts included with Corel VENTURA 8, see "Scripts and wizards included with Corel VENTURA."

 Related Topics


Measurement units in Corel VENTURA recordings and scripts

Most recordable Corel VENTURA scripting commands that use measurement parameters use tenths of a micron as the base unit of measurement. For example, the first four parameters of the .FilePrintOptionsLayout command set unit measurements using tenths of a micron.

.FilePrintOptionsLayout .Left=long, .Top=long, .Width=long, .Height=long, ...

If you record setting the four parameters to 1.5, 2, 6, and 8 inches, respectively, the following command is recorded (an inch equals 254,000 tenths of a micron):

.FilePrintOptionsLayout 381000, 508000, 1524000, 2032000

When you write a script that uses this command, you can specify your measurement units in inches by multiplying each measurement parameter by 254,000:

.FilePrintOptionsLayout 1.5*254000, 2*254000, 6*254000, 8*254000

Alternatively, you can use the Corel SCRIPT LENGTHCONVERT function to create a variable equal to the number of tenths of a micron in an inch:

M_INCH = LENGTHCONVERT (1 , 7 , 1)
.FilePrintOptionsLayout 1.5*M_INCH, 2*M_INCH, 6*M_INCH, 8*M_INCH

The following table provides conversions for other measurement units to tenths of a micron:

Unit of measurement	Number of tenths of a micron per unit

Inch	254,000

Centimeters	100,000

Points	3,527.78

Ciceros	45,108

Didots	3,759

Picas	42,333.33

 Note

•	You can use the Corel SCRIPT ANGLECONVERT function to convert angle measurements.

 Related Topics


Coordinates in Corel VENTURA recordings and scripts

Corel VENTURA scripting commands that specify graphic or frame locations on a page use coordinates as parameters. Coordinates use tenths of a micron as the base unit of measurement, and are expressed as being relative to the page frame's top left corner, as shown below.

Most Corel VENTURA commands that use coordinates, such as DrawRectangle (draws a rectangle graphic), specify four coordinate parameters. For example,

.DrawRectangle .Left=long, .Top=long, .Width=long, .Height=long

•	The Left parameter specifies the distance from the left side of the rectangle to the left side of the page frame, in tenths of a micron. Negative values indicate that the left side is to the left of the page frame.

•	The Top parameter specifies the distance from the top of the rectangle to the top side of the page frame, in tenths of a micron. Negative values indicate that the top side is above the top of the page frame.

•	The Width parameter specifies the distance from the left side of the rectangle to the right side of the rectangle, in tenths of a micron.

•	The Height parameter specifies the distance from the top of the rectangle to the bottom of the rectangle, in tenths of a micron.

 Note

•	For more information about using microns, see "Measurement units in Corel VENTURA recordings and scripts."

 Related Topics


Line-by-line Corel VENTURA script examples

Below are three scripts that you can use with Corel VENTURA. The first script reverses the last two characters you typed. The second script inserts the date and a salutation, which could be used at the beginning of a letter. The third script creates a VENTURA Library file and copies all the paragraph tags from the active publication into the new VENTURA Library file.

Each line in the scripts is identified with a line number, and each line has a corresponding description below the script.

Script Example #1

REM Reversing the last two characters     'Line 1
WITHOBJECT "CorelVentura.Automation.8"    'Line 2
   .TextCharLeft 1, TRUE                  'Line 3
   .EditCut                               'Line 4
   .TextCharLeft 1, FALSE                 'Line 5
   .EditPaste                             'Line 6
   .TextCharRight 1, FALSE                'Line 7
END WITHOBJECT                            'Line 8

Line 1: Nonexecuting script statement that provides a comment about the script's function.

Line 2: Identifies Corel VENTURA as the application that will receive script commands.

Line 3: Moves the insertion point one character to the left and selects the character.

Line 4: Cuts the current selection (a single character) to the Clipboard.

Line 5: Moves the insertion point one character to the left.

Line 6: Pastes the Clipboard contents at the insertion point (previously cut character).

Line 7: Moves the insertion point one character to the right.

Line 8: Closes the path by which scripting commands are sent to Corel VENTURA.

Script Example #2

REM Begins a letter                              'Line 1
WITHOBJECT "CorelVentura.Automation.8"           'Line 2
   .TypeText CHR(10)                             'Line 3
   .InsertDateTime "MMMM d, yyyy", 0, FALSE      'Line 4
   .TypeText CHR(10)                             'Line 5
   .TypeText "To whom it may concern," + CHR(10) 'Line 6
END WITHOBJECT                                   'Line 7

Line 1: Nonexecuting script statement that provides a comment about the script's function.

Line 2: Identifies Corel VENTURA as the application that will receive script commands.

Line 3: Inserts a paragraph return (CHR(10)) in the text.

Line 4: Inserts the date in the text, with a specified format.

Line 5: Inserts a paragraph return (CHR(10)) in the text.

Line 6: Inserts a salutation and a paragraph return in the text.

Line 7: Closes the path by which scripting commands are sent to Corel VENTURA.

Script Example #3

REM VENTURA Library with paragraph tags            'Line 1
WITHOBJECT "CorelVentura.Automation.8"             'Line 2
.FileLibraryNew "C:\Win95\Desktop\ParaTag.VLB"     'Line 3
NumberOfPTags = .ParaTagCount ()                   'Line 4
FOR i = 1 TO NumberOfPTags                         'Line 5
   .TagName$ = .ParaTagGetAt (i)                   'Line 6
   .ParaTagCopy TagName$                           'Line 7
   .FileLibraryPaste                               'Line 8
NEXT i                                             'Line 9
END WITHOBJECT                                     'Line 10

Line 1: Nonexecuting script statement that provides a comment about the script's function.

Line 2: Identifies Corel VENTURA as the application that will receive script commands.

Line 3: Creates a Corel VENTURA Library file named ParaTag.

Line 4: Counts the number of paragraph tags in the active publication and assigns this value to the numeric variable NumberOfPTags.

Line 5: Repeats the instructions enclosed by the FOR and NEXT statements. The instructions are repeated by the number of paragraph tags in the active publication.

Line 6: Assigns the name of a paragraph tag to the TagName$ variable. The name that is assigned is based on the index value (i).

Line 7: Copies the paragraph tag specified with TagName$ variable to the Clipboard.

Line 8: Pastes the Clipboard contents (a paragraph tag) into the newly created Corel VENTURA Library file (ParaTag.VLB).

Line 9: Repeats the instructions enclosed by the FOR and NEXT statements. The instructions are repeated by the number of paragraph tags in the active publication.

Line 10: Closes the path by which scripting commands are sent to Corel VENTURA.

 Related Topics


Recording Corel VENTURA commands

Most Corel VENTURA commands can be recorded and saved as a script. For more information about commands that cannot be recorded, see "Corel VENTURA recording limitations." For a list of tips for making recordings, see "Tips for recordings and scripts."

An existing recording is overwritten when you record another set of commands. Save your recording as a script before you record other commands if you want to reuse your initial recording. For more information about saving your recordings, see "Saving recordings as internal or external scripts."

To record Corel VENTURA commands

1.	Click Tools, Corel SCRIPT, Start Recording.

2.	Perform the task you want to record.

3.	Click Tools, Corel SCRIPT, Stop Recording.

 Related Topics


Saving recordings as internal or external scripts

After you make a recording, you can save it as a script that you can use later either in the same publication or in other publications. If the script is only applicable to one publication you can save it as an internal script. If the script can be applied in different publications, you can save it as an external script.

To save a recording as an internal script

1.	Click Tools, Corel SCRIPT, Save Recording.

2.	Type a name for your script in the Name box.

3.	If you want to add a description of what your script does, type a description in the Description box.

To save a recording as an external script

1.	Click Tools, Corel SCRIPT, Save Recording.

2.	Click the External button.

3.	Type a name for your script in the File name box.

4.	If you want to add a description of what your script does, type a description in the Description box.

5.	Click Save.

 Notes

•	A description is saved in the script's first line as a remark statement (REM). In addition, if a script with a description is assigned to a Corel VENTURA toolbar, the description will appear in the Status Bar when you point to the toolbar button.

•	Saved recordings, in addition to recorded commands and a description, include other Corel SCRIPT syntax. The second line is a remark statement (REM) that notes the date the script was saved and other system information.

 Related Topics


Playing back a recording and running a script

Recordings and scripts are played back in the active Corel VENTURA publication. Some recordings and scripts depend on the position of the insertion point. Others may only apply to a specific item, such as a frame or paragraph. If this is the case you may need to select the item before running the recording or script. If the script does not apply to a specific item, like many of the scripts provided with Corel VENTURA, you can run it at any time.

In the Scripts dialog box, the Available Scripts list box indicates both the internal and external scripts that are available. To search in other folders click the Browse button and locate the folder that contains the script you want to run.

To playback a recording

•	Click Tools, Corel SCRIPT, Playback Recording.

To run a script

1.	Click Tools, Corel SCRIPT, Run/Manage Scripts.

2.	Choose a script from the Available Scripts list box.

A description of the script you choose may be provided in the Description section.

3.	Click the Run button.

To run a script from the VENTURA Navigator

1.	Click Tools, VENTURA Navigator.

2.	Choose Scripts from the VENTURA Navigator list box.

3.	Do one of the following:

•	Click the plus sign ( [image]) to expand the publication containing the internal script you want to run.

•	Click the plus sign ( [image]) to expand the script folder to display external scripts.

•	Right-click the script folder, click Change Folder, and choose the folder in which the external script you want to run is stored.

4.	Right-click a script.

5.	Click Run.

 Tips

•	You can also run a script by double-clicking on it in the Scripts dialog box or in the VENTURA Navigator.

•	You can also run external scripts from the Corel SCRIPT Editor.

 Related Topics


Editing scripts in Corel VENTURA

You can edit both external and internal scripts using Corel SCRIPT Editor. If you want to edit an internal script, you must open the publication that contains the script before you can edit the script. External scripts can be edited at any time.

To edit an internal or external script

1.	Click Tools, Corel SCRIPT, Run/Manage Script.

2.	From the Available Scripts list, choose one of the following:

•	An internal script

•	An external script

3.	Click the Edit Button.

4.	Edit the script.

 Tips

•	If the external script you want to edit does not appear in the Available Scripts list box, click Browse, and choose the script.

•	For more information about using the Corel SCRIPT Editor, see "Using Corel SCRIPT Editor."

To edit an internal or external script from VENTURA Navigator

1.	Click Tools, VENTURA Navigator.

2.	Choose Scripts from the VENTURA Navigator list box.

3.	Do one of the following:

•	Click the plus sign ( [image]) to expand the publication containing the internal script you want to edit.

•	Click the plus sign ( [image]) to expand the script folder to display external scripts.

4.	Right-click the script you want to edit and click Edit.

5.	Edit the script.

 Note

•	Changes to edited internal scripts are not saved until the Corel SCRIPT Editor is closed and the publication the script is embedded in is saved.

 Tip

•	You can also edit external scripts directly from the Corel SCRIPT Editor.

 Related Topics


Renaming and deleting internal scripts

If you find that you no longer need an internal script script, you can easily remove it from a publication. You can also rename internal scripts.

To rename an internal script

1.	Click Tools, Corel SCRIPT, Run/Manage Script.

2.	Choose an internal script from the Available Scripts list box.

3.	Click the Rename button.

4.	Type the new script name.

5.	Press ENTER.

To rename an internal script using VENTURA Navigator

1.	Click Tools, VENTURA Navigator.

2.	Choose Scripts from the VENTURA Navigator list box.

3.	Click the plus sign ( [image]) to expand the publication containing the internal script you want to rename.

4.	Right-click the internal script you want to rename, and click Rename.

5.	Type the new script name.

6.	Press ENTER.

To delete an internal script

1.	Click Tools, Corel SCRIPT, Run/Manage Script.

2.	Choose an internal script from the Available Scripts list box.

3.	Click the Delete button.

To delete an internal script using VENTURA Navigator

1.	Click Tools, VENTURA Navigator.

2.	Choose Scripts from the VENTURA Navigator list box.

3.	Click the plus sign ( [image]) to expand the publication containing the internal script you want to delete.

4.	Right-click the internal script you want to delete.

5.	Click Delete.

 Note

•	Internal script names follow the Windows file naming rules (maximum 255 characters, including spaces).

•	You cannot delete or rename external script scripts from the Script dialog box.

 Related Topics


Exporting and importing scripts

Corel VENTURA lets you export internal scripts to make external scripts, and import external scripts making them internal scripts. Because internal scripts are part of a publication's stylesheet, the publication containing the internal script you want to export must be open. As well, when you want to import an external script into a publication, you must have the publication open.

To export an internal script

1.	Open the publication containing the internal script you want to export.

2.	Click Tools, Corel SCRIPT, Run/Manage Script.

3.	Choose the internal script from the Available Scripts list.

4.	Click the Export button.

5.	In the Save As dialog box, click the Save button.

To export an internal script using VENTURA Navigator

1.	Click Tools, VENTURA Navigator.

2.	Choose Scripts from the VENTURA Navigator list box.

3.	Click the plus sign ( [image]) to expand the publication containing the internal script you want to export.

4.	Right-click an internal script and click Export.

5.	In the Save As dialog box, click the Save button.

To import an external script

1.	Open the publication into which you want to import an external script.

2.	Click Tools, Corel SCRIPT, Run/Manage Script.

3.	Choose an external script from the Available Scripts list box.

If the script is not in the Available Scripts list box, click Browse, and choose the script.

4.	Click the Import button.

To import an external script using the VENTURA Navigator

1.	Click Tools, VENTURA Navigator.

2.	Choose Scripts from the VENTURA Navigator list box.

3.	Double-click the publication into which you want to import an external script.

4.	Click the plus sign ( [image]) to expand the script folder to display external scripts.

5.	Right-click the external script you want to import, and click Import.

 Related Topics


Assigning a script to a toolbar, menu, or keyboard shortcut

If you use a script often, you can assign it to a menu, a toolbar, or a keyboard shortcut to save time. For more information about customizing Corel VENTURA, see "Customizing menus, toolbars, and keyboard shortcuts."

If you assign an internal script to a menu, toolbar, or keyboard shortcut, Corel VENTURA only executes the script when the publication that contains the script is open and active. External scripts are executable at anytime.

To assign a script to a menu

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, double-click Customize, and click Menus.

3.	Do one of the following:

•	Double-click Ventura Scripts in the Commands list if you want to assign an external script.

•	Double-click Document Scripts in the Commands list if you want to assign an internal script.

4.	Choose the script you want to assign to a menu.

5.	Choose Main Menu from the Menu list box.

6.	Double-click the menu to which you want to add the script.

7.	Click the Add button.

8.	Click the Up or Down buttons to position the script command at the location you want.

To assign a script to a toolbar button

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, double-click Customize, and click Toolbars.

3.	Follow step 3 from the previous procedure.

4.	Choose the script you want to assign to a toolbar button.

5.	Drag one of the available buttons to the toolbar to which you want to add the script.

 Tip

•	You can also customize toolbar button icons. For more information, see "Editing a toolbar button icon."

To assign a script to a keyboard shortcut

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, double-click Customize, and click Shortcut Keys.

3.	Follow step 3 from the "To assign a script to a menu" procedure.

4.	Choose the script you want to assign to a keyboard shortcut.

5.	Type the keyboard shortcut in the Press New Shortcut Key box.

You can have up to four layers in a keyboard shortcut. For example, the key combination CTRL + ALT + 1, 2, 3, 4 is accomplished by holding down CTRL and ALT and pressing 1, 2, 3, and 4 in succession.

6.	Click the Assign button.

 Note

•	If you make a mistake in the keyboard shortcut combination, press BACKSPACE, and retype the combination.

 Related Topics


Using Corel SCRIPT with Corel VENTURA


Overview: Using Corel SCRIPT with Corel VENTURA
Using Corel SCRIPT with Corel VENTURA

The Corel SCRIPT programming language is made of Corel VENTURA application commands and functions and programming statements and functions. Scripts can do more than perform your recorded Corel VENTURA commands [image] scripts can extend the functionality of Corel VENTURA in a number of ways, such as prompting the user for input, displaying messages, controlling other Corel and Windows-based applications, and performing and repeating commands. As well, you can build complete applications or Wizards that people with limited Corel VENTURA experience can use for some of the more complex actions. For more information about Corel SCRIPT syntax, see the Corel SCRIPT Editor online Help.

 More Detailed Information
 Related Topics


Using Corel SCRIPT


Overview: Using Corel SCRIPT
Using Corel SCRIPT

A Corel SCRIPT script can increase the power and flexibility of Corel VENTURA by combining many actions into a single command. A script is a text file that contains commands that instruct Corel VENTURA to perform specific tasks. The commands can either be created in any text editor or recorded while using Corel VENTURA. Included with Corel VENTURA is Corel SCRIPT Editor, a powerful application that lets you write, edit, test, and run your scripts.

Corel VENTURA also lets you use auto scripts to enhance the functionality of menu commands. For example, you can create a script that automatically launches the spell check utility each time you click File, Print. Other scripts can be created to run when other menu commands are accessed. For more information, see "Using Corel VENTURA auto scripts."

 Related Topics


Corel SCRIPT application commands and functions

When you record a series of actions or steps, Corel VENTURA only records the results of each keystroke or mouse selection, rather than recording the keystrokes or mouse selections themselves. For example, instead of recording each keystroke involved in changing the font of selected text to Courier, Corel VENTURA records the command .FormatSelectedText "Courier". These kinds of commands are referred to as application commands.

The application commands listed in a script are generally easy to use, and most are derived from the Corel VENTURA user interface. For example, if you record an action that includes opening a publication and pasting the Clipboard contents, the script includes the .FileOpen and .EditPaste commands. The .FileOpen command opens a publication or file in the same way that clicking File, Open does. The .EditPaste command is the same as clicking Edit, Paste to paste the contents of the Clipboard into a publication. You can use menu commands, keyboard shortcuts, or toolbar buttons to record your scripts. Customizing your menu structure does not affect the Corel VENTURA application commands. For a list of Corel VENTURA application commands, see the Corel VENTURA commands and functions list in the Corel SCRIPT Editor online Help.

Application functions

Application functions ask questions about the status of Corel applications, selected items in Corel applications, or properties. For example, a function may ask Corel VENTURA about a frame's dimensions. Application functions are not recordable; they must be written into a script.

 Note

•	Each Corel application that supports scripts has a unique set of application commands and functions. However, some Corel applications use the same name for a command or a function. For example, the .FileNew command is available in Corel VENTURA, CorelDRAW and Corel PHOTO-PAINT.

 Related Topics


Corel SCRIPT programming statements and functions

Corel SCRIPT programming statements and functions are a common set of instructions that can be used with any Corel application that supports automation. These programming statements and functions are based on the BASIC programming language. If you are already familiar with a version of BASIC, then you'll find the Corel SCRIPT programming language familiar.

Corel SCRIPT programming statements and functions send instructions or perform actions that are not part of Corel VENTURA or any other Corel application. For example, Corel SCRIPT programming statements can be used to display custom dialog boxes; include flow-control statements and constructs, such as loops; create and manipulate variables, and retrieve information about your computer's setup. A script containing only Corel SCRIPT programming statements can be executed even if Corel VENTURA or another Corel application is not running.

In the Corel SCRIPT online Help, Corel SCRIPT programming statements and functions appear in uppercase, for example, LEFT, IF, and MESSAGEBOX.

 Related Topics


Using Corel SCRIPT Editor


Overview: Using Corel SCRIPT Editor
Using Corel SCRIPT Editor

You can use the Corel SCRIPT Editor to create or modify any script. Although scripts are saved as standard text files and can be edited with any Windows-based text editor or word processor, Corel SCRIPT Editor includes features that test, debug, and run your script files. Corel SCRIPT Editor also includes tools to quickly create and edit interactive scripts that let you include custom dialog boxes that obtain user input during the running of a script. Corel SCRIPT scripts are text only and have no compiled binary component to them [image] the script is compiled internally into a program file before it is executed.

 Related Topics


Accessing Corel SCRIPT Editor

Corel SCRIPT Editor is one of the programs that comes with Corel VENTURA. If you did not install Corel SCRIPT Editor when you installed Corel VENTURA, or Corel SCRIPT Editor is not available in the Tools, Scripts menu, you will have to run a custom install to install Corel SCRIPT Editor. For more information about installing components of Corel VENTURA, see "Installing, uninstalling, and launching applications."

To open Corel SCRIPT Editor

1.	Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.

2.	Click Programs, Corel VENTURA 8, Corel SCRIPT Editor 8.

To open Corel SCRIPT Editor from Corel VENTURA

•	Click Tools, Corel SCRIPT, Corel SCRIPT Editor.

 Tip

•	You can also launch Corel SCRIPT Editor by clicking the Application Launcher button on the Standard toolbar, and choosing Corel SCRIPT Editor.

 Related Topics


Creating dialog boxes using Corel SCRIPT

You can use a custom dialog box to get user input returned to a running script. Dialog boxes are created using Corel SCRIPT programming statements that support Windows options and controls such as push buttons, list boxes, option buttons, and progress indicators. The following custom dialog box shows some of the dialog box controls available in Corel SCRIPT.

You have two options for creating the Corel SCRIPT statements used to produce a dialog box. Your first option is to use Corel SCRIPT Editor and type in the dialog box definition statements. This can prove to be a time-consuming option, because each statement's parameters are specific, and because it is difficult to visualize the dialog box based on coordinate positions, that is, the location of the buttons within the dialog box.

Your second option is to use dialog windows in Corel SCRIPT Editor. In dialog windows, you draw what you want your dialog box to look like. The dialog box and the controls within it are graphical representations of Corel SCRIPT statements. Working with the dialog boxes in Corel SCRIPT Editor is similar to using a drawing or painting application. In dialog windows, dialog box controls are graphic objects that can be inserted, moved, resized, and aligned in a dialog box. You can create or edit a dialog box in a few steps using Corel SCRIPT Editor.

Dynamic dialog boxes

Many of the dialog boxes in Corel VENTURA are modeless, that is, they do not have to be closed before you can perform another action. Dialog boxes such as the Frame Properties, Page Properties, and Paragraph Properties dialog boxes are examples of modeless dialog boxes.

Corel SCRIPT dialog boxes are modal, that is, a running script cannot continue until a dialog box is closed. However, a Corel SCRIPT dialog box can change the information it displays when a user triggers an event by, for example, clicking an option button or check box. Dialog boxes that change in appearance are called dynamic dialog boxes. For example, you can create a dynamic dialog box that changes the bitmap it displays, based on a selection made from a list box. Or parts of your dialog box can be hidden until the user chooses an option. You can also enable and disable push buttons until an option is chosen.

 Related Topics


Corel SCRIPT resources and support

The Corel SCRIPT online Help contains basic script information for novice script writers and reference material for experienced script writers and programmers. The amount of information you'll need to know about scripting will depend on the complexity of your scripts. Corel SCRIPT online Help contains information about the following areas:

•	programming scripts

•	running scripts

•	debugging scripts

•	syntax reference and examples

•	using Corel SCRIPT Editor

•	creating and using dialog boxes for your scripts

•	advanced Corel SCRIPT techniques

Other sources of information

You may want to check with some of the following sources for more information about Corel SCRIPT and Corel VENTURA application commands:

•	The Corel VENTURA User Guide or online Help can provide for more information on how a command works since Corel VENTURA application commands work the same way as their corresponding native Corel VENTURA menu commands.

•	Product information available from Corel's Web site (www.corel.com) can provide more information about scripting. Often times, sample scripts are made available from this site. Corel Internet forums or user groups may also be of some assistance.

•	Magazines such as Corel Magazine or VUE Point can be an invaluable source of information.

•	Corel Technical Support can provide information about using Corel SCRIPT and individual application commands, but the technical support representatives cannot debug your scripts for you.

 Related Topics


Using Corel VENTURA auto scripts


Overview: Using Corel VENTURA auto scripts
Using Corel VENTURA auto scripts

You can set Corel VENTURA to automatically run a script each time you call certain commands from the File menu. This type of script is called an auto script. Auto scripts can enhance the way the commands they are associated with work. For example, you can create an auto script that counts the number of words in a publication whenever you click File, Close, or you can create an auto script that automatically starts the spell checker when you click File, Print. For more information about using scripts with Corel VENTURA, see "Using Corel SCRIPT."

Corel VENTURA auto script commands

The following list contains the Corel VENTURA File menu auto-script events (the name of the auto script that is executed) with the corresponding File menu command.

Auto script name	Event (Menu Command)

OnStart	Starting Corel VENTURA

OnNew	Creating a new document (clicking File, New)

OnOpen	Opening a document (clicking File, Open)

OnClose	Closing a document (clicking File, Close)

OnPrint	Printing a document (clicking File, Print)

OnSave	Saving a document (clicking File, Save)

OnExit	Ending your Corel VENTURA session (clicking File, Exit)

For Corel VENTURA to automatically run an auto script, the auto script's name must replicate the names listed above.

The following auto scripts must reside in X:\COREL\GRAPHICS8\VENTURA\STARTUP as external scripts (where "X" indicates the drive where Corel VENTURA is installed). If the folder does not exist, you will have to create it.

•	OnStart

•	OnNew

•	OnExit

The following auto scripts must be internal scripts in the Corel VENTURA publication that uses them:

•	OnOpen

•	OnClose

•	OnPrint

•	OnSave

 Notes

•	Auto scripts replace the functionality of the original File menu command. For example, if you record or write a script for OnPrint, you must still execute the .FilePrint command within your script if you want the command to print a publication.

•	If you use a toolbar button or a keyboard shortcut instead of the menu command, the auto script still executes.

•	If you hold down SHIFT and click a File menu command that has an associated auto script, you will override the script's execution. For more information about overriding auto scripts, see "Start-up switches for Corel VENTURA."

 Related Topics


Creating a Corel SCRIPT executable


Overview: Creating a Corel SCRIPT executable
Creating a Corel SCRIPT executable

Since Corel SCRIPT scripts are text files, they have no compiled binary executable component. Before a script is executed, it is compiled internally into an executable program file, and is re-compiled each time the script is run. To save the compile time, Corel SCRIPT Editor includes a feature that compiles your scripts into executable program files. Compiling your scripts into executables not only speeds up their runtime, but allows you to hide the programming code that has gone into creating the script.

Executables can be run without Corel SCRIPT Editor being opened and can be assigned to a toolbar button, keyboard shortcut, or menu command for faster access. You can also include resources such as bitmaps and icons in your executable. For example, you may want to use bitmaps in a wizard or provide a customized icon for your executable.

All Corel SCRIPT executables use the SCINT80.DLL dynamic-linked library file which must be in the executable's path. The SCINT80.DLL comes with Corel SCRIPT and can be freely distributed with your executables, but it cannot be modified or changed in any way. For the latest name and version number of this file, see the Corel SCRIPT online Help.

 Related Topics


Creating and accessing DLLs using Corel SCRIPT


Overview: Creating and accessing DLLs using Corel SCRIPT
Creating and accessing DLLs using Corel SCRIPT

Corel SCRIPT can call functions and subroutines in Windows DLLs (dynamic-linked libraries) such as those supplied with Windows, other applications' DLLs, or any custom DLL files. To find out how to use procedures in a DLL, you need the DLL's specific technical reference material. For example, to use the Windows DLLs, you need the Windows Software Development Kit.

Before you can use a DLL routine, you must declare it using the Corel SCRIPT DECLARE...LIB statement. See the "Corel SCRIPT online Help" for more information about using DLLs.

You can use the Corel SCRIPT programming language and Corel SCRIPT Editor to develop your own custom Windows DLLs for your functions and subroutines. You can access your custom DLLs from Corel SCRIPT or from other popular programming environments such as PASCAL, C, and C++.

There are three major advantages to using DLLs with your scripts and executables:

•	Performance [image] You can improve a script execution significantly by accessing functions and subroutines in a compiled DLL.

•	Encryption [image] If you are distributing your functions and subroutines widely, you may not want anyone to be able to see the scripting code used to create them. You can encrypt your routines by compiling them into a DLL.

•	Reusability [image] By storing your functions and subroutines in a compiled DLL, you can use and reuse them with any script or executable you create. This also makes for better structured programs by separating your scripts and executables by functionality.

For more information about creating and using DLLs, see the Corel SCRIPT online Help.

 Tip

•	You should save or backup essential files and programs before using functions and subroutines in DLL files. Passing an invalid argument to a function can result in a Windows General Protection Fault (GPF) or unstable system behavior.

 Related Topics


OLE Automation


Overview: OLE Automation
OLE Automation

OLE Automation for Corel VENTURA is a flexible and powerful feature you can use to quickly build applications that use Corel VENTURA components. OLE Automation is an integration standard that has developed to allow applications to "expose" their programmable objects so that other applications can access them. The exposed commands become an extension of the controlling programming language.

Applications that support OLE Automation are called OLE Automation servers. Programming applications that can use a server's scripting or macro commands are called OLE Automation controllers.

As shown in the following diagram, an OLE Automation server application exposes its programmable objects to the OLE Automation controller. The OLE Automation controller then incorporates the server application's scripting or macro commands as part of its own language. The controller can then send these commands back to the server.

You can use OLE Automation for long and complicated manual processes that transfer data between two or more applications. For example, you may have a manual process that puts data into a spreadsheet to be used to create a presentation graphic. The graphic is then used in a desktop publishing application. If you use OLE Automation, you may be able to create a program that automatically does these steps for you. OLE Automation gives you almost total control over a variety of different applications, letting you build the applications you need through its seamless integration capabilities.

At a basic level, you can think of OLE Automation as a way for applications to speak to and control each other through their own scripting or macro programming languages. For example, you could have Corel VENTURA speak to and control Microsoft Word, another OLE Automation server. Because Corel VENTURA, in this case the OLE Automation controller, is a desktop publishing application and does not know about the inner workings of Microsoft Word, the OLE Automation server, it needs a way to get information from the server. By using the commands the server exposes in its macro language and the Corel SCRIPT programming language (an OLE Automation controller), Corel VENTURA can get the information it needs.

Conversely, Corel VENTURA can be controlled by other OLE Automation applications through its Corel SCRIPT application commands and a programming language. Some of the most widely used programming languages can support OLE automation, including Microsoft Visual Basic, Microsoft Visual Basic for Applications, and most versions of C++.

 Related Topics


Corel VENTURA, Corel SCRIPT, and OLE Automation

If you have ever used a script to send commands to Corel VENTURA or another Corel application, you've used OLE Automation. When you run a script that sends commands to a Corel application, you must use the WithObject statement to enable a programmable object in the application.

Any Corel application, including Corel VENTURA, that supports OLE Automation provides one programmable object that allows the Corel SCRIPT controller to send it commands. The following table lists all of the Corel applications that support OLE Automation (and Corel SCRIPT) and the name of their programmable object:

Corel application	Programmable object name

CorelDRAW 6	CorelDraw.Automation.6

CorelDRAW 7	CorelDraw.Automation.7

CorelDRAW 8	CorelDraw.Automation.8

Corel PHOTO-PAINT 6	CorelPaint.Automation.6

Corel PHOTO-PAINT 7	CorelPaint.Automation.7

Corel PHOTO-PAINT 8	CorelPaint.Automation.8

Corel VENTURA 7	CorelVentura.Automation.7

Corel VENTURA 8	CorelVentura.Automation.8

Since the Corel applications listed above provide one programmable object, their documents cannot be directly accessed as objects from a controller. The Microsoft Visual Basic GetObject command, for example, cannot be used to access a Corel document. Additionally, Corel applications do not support properties and methods. The only way to access a Corel document through OLE Automation is by using Corel SCRIPT application commands.

Corel SCRIPT is not compatible with macros and PerfectScript used with Corel WordPerfect, Corel Quattro Pro, and Corel Presentations. These applications do support OLE Automation and you could use the Corel SCRIPT Editor to create a script that sends instructions to any of these applications using the Corel application's macro or PerfectScript commands.

You can also use Corel SCRIPT to call non-Corel OLE Automation applications. For example, you can call the Microsoft Word "Word.Basic" object using the WithObject statement. For example, the following Corel SCRIPT script creates a new Microsoft Word 6 document called NAMEDATE.DOC that contains the user's name and the current date:

WITHOBJECT "Word.Basic"
   .FileNew .Template = "Normal", .NewTemplate = 0
   .InsertField .Field = "USERNAME \* MERGEFORMAT"
   .Insert Chr$(9)
   .InsertDateTime .DateTimePic = "dddd, MMMM dd, yyyy", .InsertAsField = 1
   .FileSaveAs .Name = "NAMEDATE.DOC", .Format = 0
END WITHOBJECT

 Note

•	As in the example above, the Word Basic commands, or any other OLE automation application commands, must be preceded by a period.

 Related Topics


Other OLE Automation controllers

Rather than only using Corel SCRIPT, you can use other applications as your OLE Automation controller. For example, you can use either Microsoft Visual Basic, Microsoft Visual Basic for Applications, or Microsoft C++, as your OLE Automation controller for Corel applications.

However, if you use a programming language other than Corel SCRIPT to send commands to Corel applications, you cannot use Corel SCRIPT programming statements and functions such as FOR...NEXT or MESSAGE, or Corel dialog box definition statements [image] you can only use the Corel application commands.

The "Corel application commands and functions" book in the Corel SCRIPT online Help provides a reference for all Corel application commands and functions and Corel SCRIPT OLE Automation overviews. However, it does not provide procedural and reference information about programming using OLE automation controllers other than Corel SCRIPT. For more information about other OLE automation controllers, see the following reference sources:

•	Microsoft Visual Basic Programmer's Guide

•	Microsoft Windows Developer's Kit

•	Microsoft Office Developer's Kit

 Related Topics


Using Corel add-ons


Overview: Using Corel add-ons
Using Corel add-ons

Corel VENTURA can recognize and use externally developed add-ons to enhance its functionality and features. Corel add-ons are programs written in a standard computing language that add custom features to Corel VENTURA. Along with the add-on that is provided with Corel VENTURA, many third-party software developers are making commercially available add-ons to meet the specific needs of Corel VENTURA users and the desktop publishing community.

What are Corel add-ons?

Corel add-ons are software modules or programs that are Windows DLL files that have access to the Corel VENTURA application programming interface (API) and use the filename extension CAO. Other functions of the add-on can be registered in Corel VENTURA through the VENTURA.INI file. Because add-ons are registered with the application, they can be assigned to toolbar buttons, keystroke combinations, or to a menu.

In some ways, Corel add-ons are like scripts and recorded commands that Corel VENTURA can run; however, the big advantage of using an add-on is speed. Other advantages of using Corel add-ons include the following:

•	Corel add-ons can contain functions that can be called by scripts or executable programs.

•	Corel add-ons can be written in any programming language that will create a Windows DLL file (for example, Microsoft Visual C++ or Microsoft Visual Basic).

•	Corel add-ons can use the Corel VENTURA API and have full access to all of the Corel VENTURA application commands.

 Note

•	For more information about developing add-ons, see "Developing add-ons for Corel VENTURA."

Included Corel add-ons

Included with Corel VENTURA are two Corel add-ons: VENTURA8.CAO and S2V8.CAO. The following list contains a brief description of the functions included in these add-ons.

VENTURA8.CAO Functions	Purpose

IndexConcordance	This function searches the publication for a list of words and inserts an index entry for each occurrence of a listed word. For more information, see "Creating an index using the Index Concordance addon."

TextToTable	This function converts selected text to a table that you can define. For more information, see "Converting text to a table and a table to text."

TablePresets	This function inserts a table that has preset weekly or monthly column headings or increment range values in the first column. For more information, see "Creating a preset table."

WordCount	This function counts the occurrence of all words or a specific word in a chapter or the entire publication. For more information, see "Counting words in your publication."

S2V8.CAO Functions	Purpose

SGMLImport	This function imports SGML documents into Corel VENTURA.

Click [image] for more information about this add-on.

 Note

•	Add-ons created for Corel VENTURA 7 may not function properly if used in version 8.

 Related Topics


Installing and removing Corel add-ons

For Corel VENTURA to be able to apply or use a Corel add-on, you must first install the add-on. This process registers the Corel add-on and its functions with Corel VENTURA by adding information about the add-on to the VENTURA.INI file. The VENTURA.INI file outlines the parameters, conditions, and properties for Corel VENTURA when it starts.

When you install the VENTURA8.CAO add-on, which is included with Corel VENTURA, a separate menu is created to give you quicker access to the add-on's functions. If you have third-party add-ons, you can manually create menus, or you can add them to existing menus. For more information, see "Assigning Corel add-ons to menus, toolbars, and shortcut keys."

Alternatively, if there is an add-on that you are no longer using, you can remove or uninstall it from the list of available Corel add-ons. The add-on will disappear from the list, but it will still be in the same folder and can be reinstalled at any time

To install a Corel add-on

1.	Click Tools, Add-Ons.

2.	Click New.

3.	In the Open dialog box, double-click the Corel add-on you want to install.

If the add-on you want to install is not displayed, choose its location from the Look In box.

4.	Click the Open button.

To remove a Corel add-on

1.	Click Tools, Add-Ons.

2.	In the Currently installed Add-ons list box choose the Corel add-on you want to remove.

3.	Click the Uninstall button.

 Note

•	Menus that have been created for add-ons will not be removed if the add-on is removed. You must remove these menus manually. For more information, see "Customizing menus."

 Related Topics


Running a Corel add-on function

Corel add-ons can contain a number of functions that perform different tasks. Because each function is different, you are prompted for specific information about how the add-on function operates. For information about installing Corel add-ons, see "Installing and removing Corel add-ons."

To run a Corel add-on function

1.	Click Tools, Add-Ons.

2.	Double click the add-on to display the functions it contains.

3.	Choose the add-on function you want to run.

4. Click the Run button.

 Related Topics


Assigning Corel add-ons to menus, toolbars, and shortcut keys

As with many other features of Corel VENTURA, you can create a toolbar button, a special Corel add-on menu, or a keyboard shortcut to run a Corel add-on function. The included VENTURA8 add-on automatically creates a menu containing the add-on functions. For more information about customizing your menus, toolbars, and keyboard shortcuts see "Customizing menus, toolbars, and keyboard shortcuts."

To assign an add-on function to a menu

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, double-click Customize, and click Menus.

3.	Double-click Add-ons in the Commands list.

4.	Choose the add-on function you want to assign to a menu.

5.	Choose Main Menu from the Menu list box.

6.	Double-click the menu to which you want to add a command.

7.	Click the Add button.

8.	Click the Up or Down buttons to position the add-on function at the location you want.

To assign an add-on function to a toolbar button

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, double-click Customize, and click Toolbars.

3.	Double-click Add-ons in the Commands list.

4.	Choose the add-on function you want to assign to a toolbar button.

5.	Drag one of the available buttons to a toolbar.

To assign an add-on function to a keyboard shortcut

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, double-click Customize, and click Shortcut Keys.

3.	Double-click Add-ons in the Commands list.

4.	Choose the add-on function you want to assign to a keyboard shortcut.

5.	Type the keyboard shortcut in the Press New Shortcut Key box.

You can have up to four layers in a keyboard shortcut. For example, the key combination CTRL + ALT + 1, 2, 3, 4 is accomplished by holding down CTRL and ALT and pressing 1, 2, 3, and 4 in succession.

6.	Click the Assign button.

 Notes

•	Menus that have been created for add-ons will not be removed if the add-on is removed. You must remove these menus manually. For more information, see "Customizing menus." For more information about removing add-ons, see "Installing and removing Corel add-ons."

•	If you make a mistake in the keyboard shortcut combination, press BACKSPACE, and retype the combination.

 Related Topics


Using tables in your publications


Overview: Using tables in your publications
Using tables in your publications

A table allows you to organize information in rows and columns of cells. You can use tables as an effective way to present lists, schedules, financial data, comparisons, summaries, and many other types of data. Corel VENTURA allows you to choose from a number of preset table formats or to create your own format.

Corel VENTURA lets you create tables anywhere in your publication, open files created by other spreadsheet applications, and create tables from database files using Corel DataBase Publisher. Once you create your table, you can

•	type in or copy text and data to cells

•	move text and data between cells or tables

•	place pictures in table cells

•	add shading, coloring, and preset fills to cells

•	change cell margins and border styles

•	skew the first row or column of the table

•	insert additional rows and columns

•	drag cells to create new rows

•	perform spreadsheet calculations

•	apply multiple paragraph tags in cells

•	sort data alphabetically, numerically, or chronologically

•	use the Autofill feature to input data automatically

•	attach footnotes or endnotes to text or data in the cells

•	cross-reference text or data in cells

•	create index entries for text or data in cells

 More Detailed Information


Creating, importing, and deleting tables


Overview: Creating, importing, and deleting tables
Creating, importing, and deleting tables

Corel VENTURA lets you create tables, open tables created in word processing applications, and import spreadsheet information as a table. You can also convert text in your publication into a table and convert tables to tab-separated text.

Corel DataBase Publisher, included with a Typical installation of Corel VENTURA, lets you create tables from many different database applications. You can choose the database information to include in your table, and even set a number of formatting options.

 Related Topics


Creating tables

You can create a table on a page or within a frame. If you create a Table in a frame, you can move it within the publication and include captions or numbers. For more information about captions, see "Working with caption frames." For more information about numbering tables, see "Inserting figure or table numbers in a publication."

To create a table

1.	Click the page where you want to place the table.

2.	Click Table, New Table.

3.	Click the General tab.

4.	Type the number of rows you want in the Rows box.

5.	Type the number of columns you want in the Columns box.

The table width is automatically set to the width of the page.

To create a table in a frame

1.	Click the Frame tool flyout and click a frame.

2.	Click the page and drag to size the frame.

3.	Click in the frame.

4.	Follow steps 2 to 5 from the previous procedure.

The table width is automatically set to the width of the frame.

 Note

•	The maximum number of rows a table can have is 999. The maximum number of columns you can add at one time is 32. If you want to add more than 32 columns, you will have to do it in two or more steps. For more information about inserting rows and columns, see "Inserting new columns and rows."

 Tips

•	If you have created your table at the top of the page or frame, you can click in the top left cell, and press ENTER to move the table down one line. You can then insert text before the table. If you have text or data in the first cell, click in front of the text or data, and press ENTER to move the table down one line.

•	You can also create a table by clicking the Create Table button on the Property Bar, and specifying the number of rows and columns.

 Related Topics


Creating a preset table

Corel VENTURA allows you to create a table with preset weekdays, months, or number ranges using a Corel add-on. Add-ons are separate programs that expand some of the features of Corel VENTURA. For more information about Corel add-ons, see "Using Corel add-ons."

To create a preset table

1.	Click the page or frame where you want to insert the table.

2.	Click Tools, Add-Ons.

3.	Double-click VENTURA8 in the Currently Installed Add-Ons list.

If VENTURA8 is not displayed in the Currently Installed Add-Ons dialog box, click the New Button, click VENTURA8.CAO, and click Open.

4.	Click Table Preset, and click the Run button.

5.	In the Table Type section, choose one of the following:

•	Weekdays, to create a table listing the weekdays across the table's top row

•	Months, to create a table listing the months across the table's top row

•	Range, to create a table listing number ranges in the table's first column

•	Others, to create a blank table

6.	Type the settings in the available number boxes:

•	If you select Weekdays or Months, only the Rows box is available. The number of Weekdays and Months is set by default.

•	If you select Range, the Rows and Columns boxes are available as are the Start and Increment boxes. The Rows and Columns boxes set the dimensions of your table. The Start box sets the start of the range. The Increment box sets the range within each column cell. For example, if you want your first column number range to be 1 to 3 in the first cell, 4 to 6 in the second cell , and 7 to 9 in the third, type 1 in the Start box and 3 in the Increment box. The end of the range is determined by the number of columns in your table.

•	If you select Others, the Rows and Columns boxes are available.

 Related Topics


Converting text to a table, and a table to text

You can convert text to a table using a Corel add-on. Add-ons are separate programs that expand the features of Corel VENTURA. For more information about Corel add-ons, see "Using Corel add-ons."

Text that you want to convert to a table must use a separator. A separator can be a paragraph marker, tab, comma, or another character that you can specify. You can also convert a table to text in Corel VENTURA. When the table is converted, the text from each cell is separated by a tab, and each row is a new line of text.

To convert text to a table

1.	Select the text.

2.	Click Tools, Add-Ons.

3.	Double-click VENTURA8 in the Currently Installed Add-Ons list.

If VENTURA8 is not displayed in the Currently Installed Add-Ons dialog box, click the New Button, click VENTURA8.CAO, and click Open.

4.	Click Text To Table, and click the Run button.

5.	Type the dimensions of the table in the Rows and Columns boxes.

6.	In the Separate Cells At section, enable one of the following buttons:

•	Paragraphs, to use paragraph markers as separators

•	Tabs, to use tabs as separators

•	Commas, to use commas as separators

•	Others, to choose a separator

7.	Click OK to create your table.

8.	Click the Close button in the Corel Add-ons dialog box.

To convert a table to text

1.	Click in a table.

2.	Click Table, Select, Table.

3.	Click Edit, Cut.

4.	Click the page where you want to insert the table text.

5.	Click Edit, Paste Special.

6.	Choose Text from the As list.

 Tip

•	You can also click Edit, Copy to copy the table contents you want to convert to text, and keep the table in your publication.

 Related Topics


Opening a table created in another application

Corel VENTURA can open tables created by word processors like Corel WordPerfect, Ami Professional, and Microsoft Word and files from spreadsheet applications like Corel Quattro Pro, Lotus 1-2-3, and Microsoft Excel.

To open a table created in another application

1.	Click a page or frame.

2.	Click File, Import Text.

3.	From the Files Of Type list box, choose the format of the file you are importing.

4.	Select the file you want to import.

5.	Click the Import button.

 Notes

•	For more information about importing, see "Importing text." For more information about importing into a frame, see "Adding text files to frames."

•	When you import a spreadsheet workbook, Corel VENTURA can only import the first sheet as the table.

•	A spreadsheet's functions will not work within Corel VENTURA after the spreadsheet has been imported.

•	Tables that are part of word processor documents are automatically converted to Corel VENTURA tables when the document is opened in Corel VENTURA.

•	Tables are imported as having fixed-width columns rather than proportional-width columns and may result in the table being wider than the width of the page. For information about setting the width of a table's columns, see "Changing table and column widths."

 Tip

•	If you have created your table at the top of the page or frame, you can click in the top left cell, and press ENTER to move the table down one line. You can then insert text before the table. If you have text or data in the first cell, click in front of the text or data, and press ENTER to move the table down one line.

 Related Topics


Creating tables from a database using Corel DataBase Publisher

Corel DataBase Publisher, a program included with Corel VENTURA, lets you import information from a database or spreadsheet application, and convert it to a table. You can import information from applications such as Corel Paradox and Microsoft Access.

When Corel DataBase Publisher converts database information into a Corel VENTURA table, it uses a recipe. A recipe is a file that contains a list of instructions that specifies how the data from your database is to be published. A recipe can be used for importing other database tables.

To create a table from a database using Corel DataBase Publisher

1.	Click the page where you want to place the table.

2.	Click, Tools, Corel DataBase Publisher, New Recipe Wizard.

3.	Follow the instructions in the New Recipe Wizard to import the database information.

 Notes

•	Corel DataBase Publisher can only import information from existing database files; whereas Corel DataBase Editor lets you create and edit database files. Database files created using Corel DataBase Editor can be imported using Corel DataBase Publisher.

•	Corel DataBase Editor is included with Corel VENTURA, but is not installed following a Typical install. If you did not install Corel DataBase Editor when you installed Corel VENTURA, see "Installing, uninstalling, and launching applications" for information about installing the program (Corel DataBase Editor is in the Tools And Utilities installation folder). For instructions on using Corel DataBase Editor, see its online Help.

 Related Topics


Deleting tables

When you delete a table, both the table and the data it contains are deleted from your publication. For information about deleting a table without deleting its contents, see "Converting text to a table, and a table to text."

To delete a table

1.	Click in the table.

2.	Click Table, Delete, Table.

 Tip

•	You can also delete a table by selecting the entire table and clicking Edit, Delete or by right-clicking the selected table, and clicking Delete.

 Related Topics


Working in tables


Overview: Working in tables
Working in tables

After you create a table, you can easily select cells, navigate between cells, move data from one cell to another, and input information in any cell. You can also drag data from other parts of your publication into your table.

Corel VENTURA also allows you to move, create, select, and delete columns and rows and create new rows by dragging and dropping individual cells. You can also merge cells into one cells.

 Related Topics


Navigating through your table

When you create a table, the cursor appears in the top left cell. You can then move from cell to cell using the mouse or the keyboard.

To navigate through a table using the mouse

•	Click in the cell where you want to place the cursor.

To navigate through a table using the keyboard

•	Click in a cell, and press any of the following keys:

•	moves up one cell

•	moves down one cell

•	moves to the right one cell

•	moves to the left one cell

 Note

•	You cannot move from one cell to another by pressing TAB. Pressing TAB inserts a tab in the cell in which the cursor is located.

 Related Topics


Selecting cells, columns, rows, and data in tables

You can select table cells, columns, or rows using menu commands or the Property Bar. You can select table data as you would select other text in your publication.

To select a cell

•	Click in the cell, and click Table, Select, Cell.

To select multiple adjacent cells

•	Click the first cell of the cells you want to select, and drag to the last of the cells you want to select.

 Tips

•	You can also select multiple adjacent cells by clicking in the first cell you want to select, holding down SHIFT, and clicking in the last cell you want to select.

To select a column, row, or table

1.	Click in a cell.

2.	Click Table, Select, and click one of the following:

•	Column

•	Row

•	Table

 Note

•	If you want to select a column and the cell in the top row of the column has been merged with cells from adjacent columns, all of the columns are selected. To select a single column, click in the first cell after the merged cell, and drag to select the column.

To select data in cells

1.	Click in a cell.

2.	Hold SHIFT, and press [image], [image], [image], or [image].

 Tips

•	To select a cell, column, row, or table, you can also right-click in the table, click Select, and then click Cell, Column, Row, or Table.

•	You can also select table data by clicking and dragging over the data.

 Related Topics


Entering and moving table data

You can enter data in your table by typing directly or by cut and paste. You can rearrange table data by using the cut and paste or drag functions.

To enter data in a cell

1.	Click in the cell.

2.	Type your data.

To move data into a table from your publication

1.	Select the data you want to move into your table.

2.	Click Edit, Cut.

3.	Click the cell to which you want the data placed.

4.	Click Edit, Paste.

To move table data between cells

1.	Select the data you want to move.

2.	Follow steps 2 to 4 from the previous procedure.

 Tip

•	You can also drag data between table cells or you can drag data from other parts of your publication into your table.

•	You can also drag data from another application, such as Corel WordPerfect or Corel QuattroPro into a Corel VENTURA table.

 Related Topics


Merging and splitting cells

Merging combines two or more cells into a single cell. When you merge cells that contain data, only the data in the upper-left cell of the selected group is visible after the cells have been merged. When you split cells, the data reappears.

To merge cells

1.	Click in the first cell you want to merge, and drag to the last cell.

2.	Click the Table, Merge Cells.

To split a merged cell

1.	Click in the merged cell you want to split.

2.	Click Table, Select, Cell.

3.	Click the Table, Split Cells.

 Note

•	The data that is hidden after cells are merged remains hidden even after the publication has been saved. When the cells are split, the data will reappear in its original cell.

 Tips

•	You can also right-click the selected cells, and click Merge Cells or Split Cells.

•	You can also select the cells you want to merge or split, and click the Merge Cells button or the Split Cells button on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Inserting new columns and rows

You can insert any number of columns or rows into existing tables.

To insert new columns

1.	Click in a column beside which you want to add the new column(s).

2.	Click Table, Insert, Column.

3.	Type the number of columns you want to add in the Number box.

4.	Enable the Right or Left button to indicate where the new column(s) will be placed in relation to the selected cell.

 Tip

•	You can also insert a new column by clicking a cell, and clicking the Insert Column button on the Property Bar.

To insert new rows

1.	Click in a cell above or below which you want to add the new row(s).

2.	Click Table, Insert, Row.

3.	Type the number of rows you want to add in the Number box.

4.	Enable the Above or Below button to indicate where the new row(s) will be placed in relation to the selected cell.

 Tip

•	You can also insert a new row by clicking a cell, and clicking the Insert Row button on the Property Bar.

To insert a new row from an existing cell

1.	Click in a cell.

2.	Click Table, Select, Cell.

3.	Drag the cell to the row above which you want to insert a row.

The selected cell becomes the first cell in the row.

 Note

•	The maximum number of rows a table can have is 999. The maximum number of columns you can add at one time is 32. If you want to add more than 32 columns, you will have to do it in two or more steps.

 Related Topics


Moving columns and rows

Corel VENTURA lets you rearrange your tables by moving columns and rows.

To move a column

1.	Click in a cell in the column you want to move.

2.	Click Table, Select, Column.

3.	Drag the column to its new position in the table.

The column appears to the left of the column where you release the mouse button.

 Tip

•	You can also click in a cell, and click the Select Column button on the Property Bar.

To move a row

1.	Click a cell in the row you want to move.

2.	Click Table, Select, Row.

3.	Drag the row to its new position in the table.

The row appears above the row where you release the mouse button.

 Tip

•	You can also click in a cell, and click the Select Row button on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Deleting columns and rows

When you delete a column or row, both column or row and its contents are deleted from your publication.

To delete a column

1.	Click in a cell in the column you want to delete.

2.	Click Table, Delete, Column.

 Tip

•	You can also click in a cell, and click the Delete Column button on the Property Bar.

To delete a row

1.	Click in a cell in the row you want to delete.

2.	Click Table, Delete, Row.

 Tip

•	You can also click in a cell, and click the Delete Row button on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Formatting tables


Overview: Formatting tables
Formatting tables

Corel VENTURA provides a wide variety of options you can use to format a table. For example, you can insert pictures in and add color, texture or pattern fills to cells, and change cell border formatting. You can also skew, or change the angle of, the top row or left column of a table and skew the text in a skewed row or column. The table settings also allow you to control the spacing around and the alignment of your tables.

Tables can contain pictures and use fills and colors to enhance the presentation of your data.

 Related Topics


Changing table and column widths

Table and cell height changes automatically as you enter or add data to a table. The Table and column width do not change. However, you can adjust both the table and column width using the Table Properties dialog box.

To change the width of the table

1.	Click in the table.

2.	Click Table, Table Properties.

3.	Click the Position tab.

4.	Enable the Custom Width check box in the Alignment And Indent section.

5.	Type a value in the Custom Width box.

A table can only be as wide as the page, for example, if your standard page size is 8.5 inches, the table can only be a maximum of 8.5 inches wide.

To set a fixed width column

1.	Click in the table.

2.	Click Table, Table Properties.

3.	Click the General tab.

4.	In the Column Properties section, type the number of the column you want to adjust in the Column box.

The columns are referenced numerically from left to right, for example, the first column on the left is column 1.

5.	Enable the Fixed button.

6.	Type a value in the box to the right of the Fixed button to set the column's width.

To set a proportional width column

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the previous procedure.

2.	Enable the Proportional button.

3.	Type a value in the box to the right of the Proportional button to set the column's width relative to the other columns.

For example, 2 sets that column to be twice as wide as the other proportional columns.

 Note

•	The width of proportional columns depends on the amount of space that remains after fixed columns are established. If no fixed columns are set, the width of the table is divided equally by the number of columns. If all of the columns are fixed, the width of the table is equal to the combined width of the columns.

 Tip

•	To change column widths by using the mouse, place the cursor over the column boundary and click and drag to move the boundary to the desired setting. Each column you adjust becomes a fixed-width column; the remaining space is divided equally among the remaining proportional-width columns.

 Related Topics


Aligning and indenting your table

A table can be horizontally aligned to the right, left, or center of its frame, page, or column and indented from the left or right margin. However, if the width of the frame, page, or column is the same as the width of the table, changing the alignment or indenting the table will have no effect on the table's position. For more information about setting table widths, see "Changing table and column widths."

To change the horizontal alignment of a table

1.	Click inside the table.

2.	Click Table, Table Properties.

3.	Click the Position tab.

4.	Enable the Custom Width check box in the Alignment And Indent section.

5.	Type a value in the Custom Width box.

The value must be less than the width of the frame, page, or column.

6.	Choose one of the following from the Alignment list box:

•	Center

•	Left

•	Right

To indent a table

1.	Follow steps 1 to 5 from the previous procedure.

2.	Type a value in the Table Indent box.

3.	Choose one of the following from the Alignment list box:

•	Right [image] indents the table from the right margin

•	Left [image] indents the table from the left margin

 Note

•	If the table is centered within the frame or column, the indent feature is disabled.

 Related Topics


Changing the spacing in and around your table

Corel VENTURA lets you control the amount of space between a table and the text above or below it, and between the cell borders and the cell contents. You can also specify how much space Corel VENTURA can add around your table when vertical justification is applied. For more information about vertical justification, see "Using vertical justification."

To adjust the spacing above or below a table

1.	Click inside the table.

2.	Click Table, Table Properties.

3.	Click the Position tab.

4.	In the Table Spacing section, type values in the following boxes:

•	Above

•	Below

To change the spacing within rows

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	Type a value in the Inter-Row box in the Cell Spacing section.

This sets the amount of space between the top and bottom of the cell contents and the cell borders.

To change the spacing within columns

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the "To adjust the spacing above or below a table" procedure.

2.	Type a value in the Inter-Column box in the Cell Spacing section.

This sets the space between either side of the cell contents and the cell borders

To adjust the spacing above and below during vertical justification

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the "To adjust the spacing above or below a table" procedure.

2.	In the Vertical Justification section, type values in the following boxes:

•	At Top

•	At Bottom

These settings specify the amount of space Corel VENTURA can add above and below the table as it vertically justifies a column or page.

 Note

•	The vertical justification settings apply only when vertical justification is enabled for the chapter. For more information, see "Using vertical justification."

 Related Topics


Changing table and cell border properties

When you create a table, Corel VENTURA uses a single line, or rule, for the horizontal and vertical borders around each cell, and a double line, or rule, for the table's outer border. You can change the border by choosing a preset rule.

To change a table's outer border

1.	Click anywhere within the table.

2.	Click Table, Table Properties.

3.	Click the General tab.

4.	In the Table Rules section, choose a rule for the table's outer border from the Around list box.

To change a table's inner borders

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	In the Table Rules section, choose a rule from the following list boxes:

•	Horizontal [image] defines the horizontal cell borders

•	Vertical [image] defines the vertical cell borders

 Tip

•	You can also click the Table Properties button on the Property Bar to access the Table Properties dialog box.

 Related Topics


Applying rule tags to selected cells

You can set borders for a table using the Table Properties dialog box, or by selecting cells and using the Cell Properties dialog box. You can also apply rules from the Property Bar. For information about using the Table Properties dialog box, see "Changing table and cell border properties."

To change the borders for selected cells

1.	Select the cell(s) or table.

2.	Click Table, Cell Properties.

3.	Choose a rule tag from the Rule Tag list box.

4.	Choose one of the border options.

To apply a rule tag to selected cells using the Property Bar

1.	Select the cell(s) or table.

2.	Choose a ruletag from any of the following list boxes on the Property Bar:

•	Left Rule Tag [image] applies the rule tag to the left border of the selected cell(s)

•	Right Rule Tag [image] applies the rule tag to the right border of the selected cell(s)

•	Above Rule Tag [image] applies the rule tag to the top border of the selected cell(s)

•	Below Rule Tag [image] applies the rule tag to the bottom border of the selected cell(s)

 Note

•	If you select more than one cell to which to apply a cell border, the cell border is applied to the outer perimeter of all of the selected cells and not to all of the cell borders, that is, the inner cell borders remain unchanged.

 Tip

•	You can also create a new rule tag by choosing New Rule Tag from the rule tag list boxes on the Property Bar. For more information about rule tags, see "Using rule tags."

 Related Topics


Applying multiple paragraph tags within cells

The text in your tables is automatically formatted with the Table Text default tag. However, you can apply any formatting or paragraph tag you want to the text in each cell. As well, each cell can contain different paragraphs, and you can apply different paragraph tags or format each paragraph in the cell individually. For more information about paragraph tags, see "Using paragraph tags."

To apply multiple paragraph tags within a table cell

1.	Click a paragraph in the table cell using the Pick tool.

2.	Choose a tag from the Paragraph Tag list box on the Property Bar.

3.	Click another paragraph in the table cell using the Pick tool.

4.	Choose another tag from the Paragraph Tag list box on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Skewing your table using presets

Corel VENTURA lets you change the angle of, or skew, the top row and the left column of your tables, including the text. You can choose from a preset skew angle, or you can define your own. For information about defining custom skew settings, see "Skewing your table using custom settings."

To apply a preset skew to a table's top row

1.	Click in the table

2.	Click Table, Table Properties.

3.	Click the Skew tab.

If the Presets button is displayed, proceed to step 4. If the Details button is displayed, proceed to step 5.

4.	Click the Presets button.

5.	Click one of the following preset options:

•	Skew Left [image] skews the table's top row to the left

•	Skew Right [image] skews the table's top row to the right

6.	Click any of the following options for additional formatting:

•	Skip Skew In 1st [image] prevents the first cell in the row from skewing

•	Crop Skew [image] prevents the skewed cell from extending beyond the page, frame, or column boundary

To skew the text in the top row

1.	Follow steps 1 to 5 from the previous procedure.

2.	Click the Skew Text option.

To apply a preset skew to a table's first column

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the "To apply a preset skew to a table's top row" procedure.

2.	Click one of the following preset options:

•	Skew Down [image] skews the table's first column down

•	Skew Up [image] skews the table's first column up

 Note

•	If you set a skew angle for the top row and a skew angle for the left column, the top left cell disappears. This happens because a table cannot be skewed in two directions simultaneously. The cell reappears when one of the skew angles is removed.

 Related Topics


Skewing your table using custom settings

The Table Properties dialog box allows you to apply a preset skew or custom skew. For information about preset skews, see "Skewing your table using presets."

To apply a custom skew to a table's top row

1.	Click in the table

2.	Click Table, Table Properties.

3.	Click the Skew tab.

If the Details button is displayed, proceed to step 4. If the Presets button is displayed, proceed to step 5.

4.	Click the Details button.

5.	In the Top Row Skew section, type a value in the Skew Angle box.

The skew angle can be between -70.0° and 70.0°. The degree increment is rounded down to the nearest 1.0°; for example, if you specify the skew angle to be 15.8°, Corel VENTURA makes the angle of the skew 15.0°.

6.	Enable any of the following check boxes to apply additional formatting:

•	Skip Skew In 1st Cell [image] prevents the first cell in the row from skewing

•	Crop Skew [image] prevents the skewed row from extending beyond the frame, page, or column boundary

To skew the text in the top row

1.	Follow steps 1 to 6 from the previous procedure.

2.	In the Skew Text In Top Row section, enable the check boxes for each column cell in which you want to skew the text.

To apply a custom skew to a table's left column

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the "To apply a custom skew to a table's top row" procedure.

2.	In the Left Column Skew section, type a value in the Skew Angle box.

The skew angle can be between -45.0° and 45.0°. The degree increment is rounded down to the nearest 1.0°; for example, if you specify the skew angle to be 15.8°, Corel VENTURA makes the angle of the skew 15.0°.

To skew the text in the first column

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the "To apply a custom skew to a table's top row" procedure.

2.	Follow step 2 from the previous procedure.

3.	Enable the Skew Text In Column check box.

 Note

•	If you set a skew angle for the top row and a skew angle for the left column, the top left cell disappears. This happens because a table cannot be skewed in two directions simultaneously. The cell reappears when one of the skews is removed.

 Tip

•	If you are working with a large table, and you want to skew the text in each cell in the top row, click the Skew Text check box on the Presets page.

 Related Topics


Controlling table flow and setting repeating headers

By default, tables will flow to the next page or column when it crosses a page or column break. You can set your table so that it will not be broken by a page or column break. If you do not allow the table to break, the entire table will move to the next page or column. If you do allow the table to break, you can set repeating header rows so that the data in your table's header rows is duplicated on each page or column that the table occupies.

To prevent a table from breaking to the next page or column

1.	Click in the table.

2.	Click Table, Table Properties.

3.	Click the General tab.

4.	Disable the Allow Table To Break Across Pages check box.

To set header rows

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	Type the number of header rows in the Header Rows box.

 Notes

•	You can only edit the text data or text in a header row from the first page, frame, or column that the table occupies.

•	Headers rows will also repeat if the table is continued from one frame to another. For more information about continuous frames, see "Setting text flow between frames."

 Tip

•	If your table is larger than one page and the Allow Table To Break Across Pages check box is disabled, the table will disappear and a red X will appear on the page. The red X indicates a formatting error. For more information, see "Fixing text formatting errors in frames and pages." To redisplay the table, enable the Allow Table To Break Across Pages check box.

 Related Topics


Applying preset formats, colors, and fills to table cells

You can apply any of the preset formats to your table or you can define your own format by applying colors or fills to the table cells. The preset formats include different shading options and border styles.

The following picture shows examples of the many preset formats you can apply to a table.

To apply a preset table format

1.	Click in the table.

2.	Click Table, Auto Format.

3.	Click one of the preset formats.

To apply a color or fill to cells

1.	Select the cells you want to color.

2.	Click the Fill tools flyout.

3.	Click one of the flyout options.

4.	Specify the attributes for the fill.

For more information about colors and fills, see "Working with color" and "Filling and outlining."

 Note

•	Fills are applied to each cell individually. When you apply a fill to a group of cells, the pattern repeats in each cell and does not flow across the cell borders.

 Related Topics


Placing a picture in a cell

To place a picture in a table cell, you must import the picture into a frame and then anchor the frame in the table cell. For more information about importing pictures, see "Importing pictures." For more information about anchoring frames, see "Anchoring frames."

To place a picture in a cell

1.	Click the Frame tool flyout and click a frame.

2.	Click outside of the table, and drag to draw a frame for the picture.

3.	Click File, Import Picture.

4.	In the Import Picture dialog box, choose the picture you want to place in your table, and click Import.

5.	Click the Frame Anchor tool.

6.	Click the frame containing the picture.

7.	Click in the cell where you want to place the picture.

 Note

•	While the column height adjusts automatically to fit the anchored frame, the column width does not. To resize the column width, drag the column to fit around the frame.

 Related Topics


Sorting data in tables


Overview: Sorting data in tables
Sorting data in tables

Corel VENTURA allows you to sort data alphabetically, numerically, or chronologically. You can sort data in a single column or sort the entire table. When you sort the entire table, you can use up to 3 different columns to resolve duplicated entries.

Sorting order for Corel VENTURA tables

•	You can sort the data in either ascending (A to Z or 0 to 9) or descending (Z to A or 9 to 0) order.

•	If there are two or more paragraphs in a cell, only the first is used for sorting.

•	Corel VENTURA sorts information in the following order: entries beginning with symbols, then entries beginning with numbers, then entries beginning with letters.

•	Dates and times used in sorting must be in a format recognized by Corel VENTURA. To verify a date or time format, see "Adding the date and time to a publication."

 Related Topics


Sorting data in a table

You can sort your tables by a single column or up to three columns. Sorting by two or three columns allows you to resolve duplicated entries in the first column by which your table is sorted. For information about sorting data in a single column, see "Sorting data in a single column."

To sort data in ascending order

1.	Click in a table.

2.	Click Table, Select, Table.

3.	Click Table, Sort.

4.	In the Sort By section, do the following:

•	From the first list box, choose the column by which you want to sort your table. The columns are referenced numerically from left to right.

•	From the second list box, choose the type of data to sort.

5.	Enable the Ascending button.

 Tip

•	You can also sort table data by selecting the column or cells, then clicking the Sort Ascending button on the Property Bar.

To sort data in descending order

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the previous procedure.

2.	Enable the Descending button.

 Tip

•	You can also sort table data by selecting the column or cells, then clicking the Sort Descending button on the Property Bar.

To sort data by two or three columns

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the "To sort data in ascending order" procedure.

2.	Enable one of the following buttons:

•	Ascending

•	Descending

3.	Follow step 4 from the "To sort data in ascending order" procedure for each Then By section.

Use the first Then By section to resolve duplicated entries for the first column by which your table is sorted, and the second Then By section to resolve any duplicated entries in the second column used for sorting.

 Note

•	If you use header rows in your tables, they will not be sorted with the rest of the data in the table.

 Tips

•	If you want to apply case-sensitive sorting, enable the Case Sensitive check box in Sort By section of the Sort dialog box.

•	You can also access the Sort dialog box by clicking the Sort button on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Sorting data in a single column

The Sort Column Only option allows you to sort only the contents of an individual column. The data in the other columns is not sorted.

To sort data in a single column

1.	Click in a table.

2.	Click Table, Select, Table.

3.	Click Table, Sort.

4.	In the Sort By section, do the following:

•	From the first list box, choose the column you want to sort. The columns are referenced numerically from left to right.

•	From the second list box, choose the type of data to sort.

5.	Enable one of the following buttons:

•	Ascending

•	Descending

6.	Enable the Sort Column Only check box.

 Related Topics


Automatically filling table cells with data


Overview: Automatically filling table cells with data
Automatically filling table cells with data

The Corel VENTURA Autofill feature can save you time and reduce data-entry errors. You can automatically fill rows or columns with exact copies of cell data, sequential data, or data that follows a pattern. For example, you can use the Autofill feature to list the months of the year across a row. You are only required to type January in the first cell and Corel VENTURA can do the rest. The Autofill feature can also analyze selected rows or columns and fill in the rest of the cells with values that follow the detected growth curve, line, or pattern.

Recognized patterns

The Autofill feature automatically recognizes the following patterns:

•	months (either Jan, Feb, Mar or January, February, March)

•	weekdays (either Mon, Tues, Wed, or Monday, Tuesday, or Wednesday)

•	quarters (Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4)

 Related Topics


Filling table cells automatically

The Autofill feature uses the data in the first cell(s) of a sequence to determine the data for the rest of the sequence. For example, if the data in the first cell is a numerical date or a month and date combination, the Autofill feature copies that data into each cell in the sequence. However, if the data in the first cell is a weekday or month, the other cells are filled with the subsequent weekdays or months.

To fill table cells automatically

1.	Click in the cell that contains the data with which you want the sequence to begin, and drag to the last cell you want to fill.

2.	Click Table, Autofill, and click one of the following buttons:

•	Down

•	Up

•	Left

•	Right

 Tips

•	Constants or prefixes can be included in an Autofill series if the series is numerical. For example, if the first two cells in the series are Volume 1 and Volume 2, the AutoFill feature inserts Volume 3, Volume 4, etc., in the cells that follow.

•	You can also select the cells for which you want to use the Autofill feature by clicking the first cell, holding SHIFT, and clicking the final cell.

 Related Topics


Filling cells with values that follow a trend

You can use the Autofill feature to fill in growth or linear trend values that, when placed on a graph, produce a straight line or curve. A growth trend increases a value by multiplication by a constant. For example, if the starting values are 1 and 3, the growth trend produced is 1, 3, 9, 27, and so on. Whereas, a linear trend increases a value by addition of a constant. For example, if the starting values are 1 and 3, the linear trend produced is 1, 3, 5, 7, and so on.

To fill cells with values that follow a trend

1.	Click in the cell that contains the value with which you want the sequence to begin, and drag to the last cell you want to fill.

2.	Click Table, Autofill, Series.

3.	In the Direction section, enable one of the following buttons:

•	Down

•	Up

•	Left

•	Right

4.	In the Type section, enable one of the following buttons:

•	Growth [image] extends a simple growth trend

•	Linear [image] extends a simple linear trend

5.	Enable the Trend button in the Options section.

 Note

•	If the starting values do not fit the identified trend (for example, if the values form a more complex line or curve), Corel VENTURA changes the starting values to fit the identified trend as closely as possible.

 Tips

•	You can also select the cells for which you want to use the Autofill feature by clicking the first cell, holding SHIFT, and clicking the final cell.

•	You can also access the Fill Series dialog box by clicking the Table Autofill Series button on the Property Bar.

 Related Topics


Filling table cells with incremental dates

The Autofill feature allows you to insert dates in your table cells. For example, if you use a starting value of 04/15/1998, enable the Month to change, and use a step value, or constant, of 2, the series produced is 04/15/1998, 06/15/1998, 08/15/1998, 10/15/1998, and so on.

For the AutoFill feature to work, the date must be a format that is recognized by Corel VENTURA. For information about date formats, see "Inserting the date and time."

To fill cells with incremental dates

1.	Click in the cell that contains the date with which you want the sequence to begin, and drag to the last cell you want to fill.

2.	Click Table, Autofill, Series.

3.	In the Direction section, enable one of the following buttons:

•	Down

•	Up

•	Left

•	Right

4.	Enable the Date button in the Type section.

5.	In the Date Unit section, enable of the following buttons:

•	Day

•	Weekday

•	Month

•	Year

6.	Enable the Step button in the Options section.

7.	Type the value you want to use as the increment in the Step Value box.

 Tip

•	You can also select the cells for which you want to use the Autofill feature by clicking the first cell, holding SHIFT, and clicking the final cell.

 Related Topics


Filling cells with incremental values

The AutoFill feature can automatically fill table cells with incremental values that follow either a geometric growth pattern or a linear pattern.

To fill cells with incremental values

1.	Click in the cell that contains the value with which you want the sequence to begin, and drag to the last cell you want to fill.

2.	Click Table, Autofill, Series.

3.	In the Direction section, enable one of the following buttons:

•	Down

•	Up

•	Left

•	Right

4.	In the Type section, enable one of the following buttons:

•	Growth [image] multiplies the information by the value indicated in the Step Value box

•	Linear [image] adds the value indicated in the Step Value box

5.	In the Step Value box, type the value you want to use as the increment.

•	If you enabled the Growth button, a starting value of 1 and a step value of 2 produces the series 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, and so on.

•	If you enabled the Linear button, a starting value of 1 and a step value of 2 produces the series 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, and so on.

 Note

•	If you want the sequence to end at a particular value, you can enable the Stop Value check box and type a stop value in the Stop Value box. For example, if you specify a growth value of 1, with a step value of 2, and a stop value of 10, the resulting series is 1, 2, 4, 8.

 Related Topics


Working with formulas and functions


Overview: Working with formulas and functions
Working with formulas and functions

Corel VENTURA lets you add formulas or functions to your tables so that you can perform spreadsheet calculations on table data. Corel VENTURA offers many of the most common formulas and functions found in spreadsheet programs, as well as financial, scientific, engineering, date and time, and conversion functions.

Referencing cells in a table

Table cells are referenced as follows:

A cell referenced in a spreadsheet formula uses the same pattern: an "R" followed by a number indicates the row and a "C" followed by a number indicates the column, for example, row 1 column 1 is represented by "R1C1." A comma is used to separate individual cell references; for example, if you want to add the contents of R2C1 and R4C1, you would use the formula =SUM(R2C1,R4C1). A colon is used to separate two references in a range; for example, to add all of the contents of row 1 column 1 through row 4 column 1, you would use =SUM(R1C1:R4C1). Table cell references can be uppercase or lowercase.

 Related Topics


Inserting formulas into cells

Formulas include many different operations such as addition, subtraction, multiplication, division, and averages. When formulas are entered manually, the equal sign (=) must always precede the function name. For example, to add the first four cells in the first column, you must enter the function as follows: =SUM(R1C1, R4C1) or =SUM(R1C1:R4C1)

To insert a formula into a cell

1.	Click View, Toolbars.

2.	Enable the Table Functions option in the Toolbars list.

3.	Click OK.

4.	Click in the cell where you want to insert the formula.

5.	Click the Insert Formula box on the Table Functions toolbar.

6.	Type an equal sign followed by the formula you want to use.

7.	Press ENTER.

 Related Topics


Adding data in cells

The Autosum feature automatically adds the values in the cells above or to the right of a cell. If there are no values above the selected cell, the values to the right of the cell will be added.

To add the data in cells

1.	Click View, Toolbars.

2.	Enable the Table Functions check box in the Toolbars list.

3.	Click OK.

4.	Click in the cell where you want to place the sum.

5.	Click the Sum button on the Table Functions toolbar.

 Notes

•	If you change any values in or add values to the calculation, you can update the calculation by clicking the Sum button again.

 Tip

•	You can also access the Table Functions toolbar by clicking the Table Functions button on the Workspace toolbar.

 Related Topics


Creating functions using the Function Wizard dialog box

Corel VENTURA includes more than 200 preset functions for mathematical, engineering, or scientific calculations. For information about each function, see Corel VENTURA table functions in the Reference section of the online Help.

The Function Wizard dialog box helps you use the preset functions. As you become more familiar with the functions, you can enter them manually; however, for complex calculations, such as imbedding other functions in a main function, using the Function Wizard dialog box can help prevent errors in the construction of the function.

To create a function using the Function Wizard dialog box

1.	Click in the cell in which you want to place the function.

2.	Click Table, Function.

3.	Choose a function type from the Function Category list.

4.	Choose a specific function from the Function Name list.

A description of each function appears in the section below the Function Category and Function Name lists.

5.	Follow the instructions in the Function Wizard dialog box to create your function.

 Note

•	When you use the Functions Wizard dialog box, you can also select a range of cells by dragging over the cells in your table. To do this click the first cell in the range and drag to the last cell in the range with the Function Wizard dialog box open.

 Related Topics


Nesting functions using the Function Wizard dialog box

The Function Wizard dialog box lets you nest a function within another function. For example, if you want to add the values in a range of cells, but the values in two of the cells must be multiplied first, you can use a nested function.

To nest functions using the Function Wizard dialog box

1.	Click in the cell in which you want to place the function.

2.	Click Table, Function.

3.	Choose a function type from the Function Category list, and a specific function from the Function Name list.

A description of each function appears in the section below the Function Category and Function Name lists.

4.	Type any parameters of the initial function.

Your nested function can be placed in any location in the function parameters. If you want the nested function to be placed first, proceed to step 7, then add the other parameters of your function.

5.	Click the Function button.

6.	Choose a function type from the Function Category list, and a specific function from the Function Name list for the function you want to nest.

7.	Click the Next button.

8.	Type the parameters of the nested function

9.	Click the Finish button twice.

 Related Topics


Editing and recalculating formulas or functions

You can manually edit a formula or function at any time. When you have edited a formula or function, added rows or columns to the range used in the calculation, or changed the data in the table, you must let Corel VENTURA recalculate the results. Functions and formulas will not update automatically.

To edit a formula or function

1.	Click View, Toolbars.

2.	Enable the Table Functions check box, and click OK.

3.	Click in a cell, placing the insertion point to the left of the formula you want to edit.

The formula is displayed in the Insert Formula box of the Table Functions toolbar. If the formula does not appear, ensure that the insertion point is to the left of the cell data.

4.	Edit the formula or function in the Insert Formula box.

5.	Press ENTER.

To recalculate the result of a formula or function

1.	Click in the cell that contains the formula or function.

2.	Click Table, Recalculate.

 Tip

•	You can recalculate a formula by clicking the Recalculate button on the Property Bar or the Table Functions toolbar. For information about displaying the Table Functions toolbar, see "Shortcuts for working with formulas and functions."

 Related Topics


Shortcuts for working with formulas and functions

If you are using the Corel VENTURA table functions often, you can display the Table Functions toolbar to give you access to the following shortcut buttons:

Click ...	To ...

Access the Function Wizard dialog box

Add the values in columns or rows

Recalculate table functions and formulas

To display the Table Functions toolbar

1.	Click View, Toolbars.

2.	Enable the Table Functions check box in the Toolbars list.

 Tip

•	You can dock the toolbar along any edge of the Application Window, or you can leave it floating.

 Related Topics


Managing tags and stylesheets


Overview: Managing tags and stylesheets
Managing tags and stylesheets

One of the most most useful and powerful formatting features of Corel VENTURA are tags. Sometimes referred to as styles in other applications, tags are collections of formatting properties that you can apply to pages, paragraphs, selected text, frames, and borders. Tags allow you to ensure a consistent look throughout your publication, while only defining your formatting once.

The tags for each publication are stored in an internal stylesheet. A stylesheet used in one publication can be imported into another publication or saved to a VENTURA Library file and accessed from other publications. This way you can maintain consistent formatting between publications.

Using tags

Each page, paragraph, frame, and border in your publication has a tag applied to it as a default. For example, when you insert a page in your publication, the Default Page tag is applied to that page, and the Body Text paragraph tag is applied to each paragraph you add. You can also create tags for frames, pages, paragraphs, selected text, and rules which you can apply as borders.

For information about applying, updating, and formatting tags, see the following:

•	"Using page tags"

•	"Using paragraph tags"

•	"Using character tags"

•	"Using frame tags"

•	"Using rule tags"

Corel VENTURA also creates a number of tags for specific things in your publication; for example, text in page headers has the Z_HEADER paragraph tag automatically applied to it. These kinds of tags are referred to as generated tags. For more information, see "Using generated tags."

Overriding tags

A tag does not prevent you from formatting an item. If you want to apply formatting to a paragraph, such as aligning it to the right margin, you can do so without affecting the tag and without affecting the other paragraphs using that tag. This is called overriding a tag.

Previous versions of Corel VENTURA only allowed you to override paragraph tags. Corel VENTURA 8 allows you to override paragraph, page, and frame tags. You can even update a tag with the new formatting or create a new tag from the tag that has been overridden. When you override a paragraph, page, or frame tag, a flag ( [image]) appears in the tag list box on the Property Bar. You can then create a new tag from the formatting or update the existing tag. For more information, see "Overriding and updating tag properties."

The Tag Window

The Tag Window allows you to create, apply, modify, import and delete tags all from one location. Previous versions of Corel VENTURA used the Manage Tags dialog box which allowed you to create, format, and import tags, and the Tag Window which allowed you to create, apply, rename, and delete tags. The Corel VENTURA 8 Tag Window incorporates all of the functionality of the Manage Tags dialog box and the previous version Tag Window, and gives you added functionality. For example, you can change tag properties directly in the Tag Window, and you can change the properties of several tags at the same time.

 More Detailed Information


Viewing and customizing the Tag Window


Overview: Viewing and customizing the Tag Window
Viewing and customizing the Tag Window

The main tool for managing the tags in your publication is the Tag Window. Depending on the item you select, the Tag Window displays all of the existing tags for that item. For example, when you select a frame, the Tag Window displays the all of the Frame tags used in the publication. You can also set which tag properties are displayed in the Tag Window and you can change the size of the columns in the Tag Window.

 Note

•	The Tag Window also displays the name of the active publication and automatically updates when you switch between publications.

 Related Topics


Viewing the Tag Window

You can keep the tag window open while you work on your publication. You can dock it to the side of the Application Window and minimize it when you are not using it, or you can leave it floating.

To display the Tag Window

•	Click Tools, Tag Window.

To dock the Tag Window

•	Click the Title Bar of the Tag Window, and drag the Tag Window to any edge of the Application Window.

 Tip

•	You can also dock the Tag Window by double-clicking its Title Bar.

To minimize the Tag Window

•	Click the Minimize button on the Title Bar of the docked Tag Window.

To maximize the Tag Window

•	Click the Maximize button on the Title Bar of the docked Tag Window.

To float the Tag Window

•	Double-click the Title Bar of the docked Tag Window.

To resize the Tag Window

1.	Pass the cursor over the edge of the Tag Window so that the cursor becomes a double arrow.

2.	Click, and drag the edge of the Tag Window until the Tag Window is the size you want.

 Tip

•	You can sort the tags in the Tag Window by clicking the column header for the property by which you want the tags sorted; for example, you can sort tags by name and you can sort paragraph tags by font or by font size.

 Related Topics


Customizing the Tag Window

Tags are displayed in the Tag Window when you select a page, paragraph, or frame, or when you select text. Each column in the Tag Window displays a tag property. You can customize the Tag Window by resizing, adding, or removing columns or by changing the order in which the columns are displayed.

To resize a column in the Tag Window

1.	Pass your mouse over the edge of a column's Title Bar so that the cursor becomes a double arrow.

2.	Drag the edge of the column until the column is the size you want.

To add a column to the Tag Window

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, double-click Customize, and click Tag Window Columns.

3.	Choose a tag type from the Tag Type list box.

4.	Choose a tag property from the Tag Properties list.

5.	Click the Add button.

To move a Tag Window column

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	Choose a tag property from the Selected Properties list.

3.	Click the Move Up or the Move Down button to position the property.

The top-to-bottom order is displayed from left to right in the Tag Window.

To remove a column from the Tag Window display

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the "To add columns to the Tag Window display" procedure.

2.	Choose a tag property from the Selected Properties list.

3.	Click the Remove button.

 Related Topics


Editing, renaming, and deleting tags


Overview: Editing, renaming, and deleting tags
Editing, renaming, and deleting tags

The Tag Window is the main tool for managing the tags in your publication. Using the Tag Window, you can edit a tag's properties, and rename and delete tags. You can also use VENTURA Navigator to edit, rename, and delete page tags and import or remove pictures from a page tag.

 Related Topics


Editing tag properties

You can edit the properties of any tag using the Tag Window. When you edit a tag's properties, each item which references that tag is automatically updated to display the changed properties.

To edit a tag's properties

1.	Click Tools, Tag Window.

2.	Click one of the following tabs:

•	Paragraph

•	Frame

•	Character

•	Page

•	Rule

3.	Click the tag you want to edit.

The selected tag is highlighted and has a double arrow (>>) in the first column of the Tag Window.

4.	Click the Tag Properties button.

5.	Set the formatting options for the selected tag.

To edit a tag's properties using the Tag Window

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Click the tag property you want to change, and click it again to display a drop down list or properties.

3.	Choose the property you want to apply to the tag from the list.

 Notes

•	If the property is displayed as a number box, such as Font Size for a paragraph tag or Height for a page tag, you can type a value in the box.

•	If the property is displayed as a check box, such as Underline for a paragraph tag and Left Header for a frame tag, you can enable the check box to apply the property or disable the check box to remove the property.

 Related Topics


Editing the same property for two or more tags

Corel VENTURA lets you change the same property in different tags at the same time. For example, if you want to use a particular font in some of your paragraph tags, you can make the formatting change for all of those tags at the same time.

To edit the same property for two or more tags

1.	Click Tools, Tag Window.

2.	Click the tab for the type of tag you want to copy.

3.	Hold down CTRL, and click the tags you want to modify.

The selected tags are highlighted and have a double arrow (>>) in the first column of the Tag Window.

4.	Click the Tag Properties button.

5.	Set the formatting options for the selected tags.

 Tip

•	You can also click a tag, hold down SHIFT, and click another tag to select all of the tags in between.

 Related Topics


Renaming and deleting tags

You can rename or delete tags using the Tag Window. When you delete a tag, you must choose another tag to use as a replacement for the deleted tag. You can also rename and delete page tags using VENTURA Navigator.

To rename a tag using the Tag Window

1.	Click Tools, Tag Window.

2.	Click the tab for the type of tag you want to copy.

3.	Click the tag you want to rename.

The selected tag is highlighted.

4.	Click the Rename Tag button.

5.	Type the tag's new name.

To rename a page tag using VENTURA Navigator

1.	Click Tools, VENTURA Navigator.

2.	Choose Page Tags from the VENTURA Navigator list box.

3.	Right-click a page tag, and click Rename.

4.	Type the tag's new name.

To delete a tag using the Tag Window

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the "To rename a tag using the Tag Window" procedure.

2.	Click the Delete Tag button.

3.	Choose a replacement tag from the Reformat As list box.

To delete a page tag using VENTURA Navigator

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the "To rename a page tag using VENTURA Navigator" procedure.

2.	Right-click a page tag, and click Delete.

3.	Choose a replacement page tag from the Reformat As list box.

 Note

•	Default tags cannot be renamed or deleted. Default tags include the Body Text paragraph tag, the Default Frame tag, the Default Page tag, the Bold, Italic, and Underline character tags, and the Double, Hidden, Single, and Thick rule tags. However, you can change the formatting of the default tags.

 Tip

•	You can also rename and delete tags in the Tag Window by right-clicking the tag, and clicking Rename or Delete.

 Related Topics


Copying, saving, and importing tags and stylesheets


Overview: Copying, saving, and importing tags and stylesheets
Copying, saving, and importing tags and stylesheets

Corel VENTURA lets you maintain consistent formatting from one publication to another by letting you copy, save, and import tags. The tags you create in one publication can be copied or imported into another publication. You can also save your tags to a VENTURA Library file, and access them from any of your publications.

When you import tags, you can either import individual tags, one at a time, or you can import a stylesheet. A stylesheet contains all of the tags used in a publication; for example, every page, paragraph, frame, character, and rule tag is contained in the stylesheet. When you create a publication, a default stylesheet with default tags is created for it. As you create other tags, they are added to your publication's stylesheet. Each publication has one stylesheet. When you import a stylesheet, the current stylesheet used in the publication is replaced with the imported stylesheet.

Using stylesheets

It is important to note a few points about how stylesheets work. If you open a publication created in a version of Corel VENTURA earlier than version 7 which has more than one stylesheet attached to it, a conversion wizard will guide you through the steps required to merge the stylesheets. If you apply a new stylesheet to a publication that uses the same tag names, the formatting is replaced automatically. For information about importing individual tags, see "Importing tags from other publications."

 Related Topics


Copying tags from other publications

You can copy a tag from one publication and paste it into another publication using the Tag Window. You can also use VENTURA Navigator to copy page tags from one publication to another.

To copy a tag using the Tag Window

1.	Click Tools, Tag Window.

2.	Click the tab for the type of tag you want to copy.

3.	Click the tag.

The selected tags are highlighted and have a double arrow (>>) in the first column of the Tag Window.

4.	Click one of the following buttons:

•	Cut

•	Copy

5.	Open the publication to which you want to copy the tag.

6.	In the Tag Window, click the tab for the type of tag that you are copying.

7.	Click the Paste button.

 Tip

•	You can also drag a tag from the Tag Window to a publication icon in the VENTURA Navigator window to copy a tag. You can keep both the VENTURA Navigator window and the Tag Window open at the same time.

To copy a page tag from a publication using VENTURA Navigator

1.	Open both publications.

2.	Click Tools, VENTURA Navigator.

3.	Choose Page Tags from the VENTURA Navigator list box.

4.	Click the plus sign ( [image]) to expand the publication containing the page tag you want to copy.

5.	Drag the page tag to the other publication's icon.

A publication is represented by a [image] or [image] icon. The latter indicates an active publication.

 Notes

•	If you want to copy a tag that contains other tags, you must copy all of the tags to retain all of the formatting. For example, if you want to copy a page tag that contains a frame to which a frame tag is applied, you must copy both the page tag and the frame tag. As well, if you want to copy a paragraph tag to which a rule tag is applied, you must copy both the paragraph tag and the rule tag.

•	If you copy a chapter from one publication to another, tags that have been applied in that chapter but do not appear in the publication to which the chapter has been copied will not be copied. Instead, Corel VENTURA displays the tag's name in uppercase in the Tag Window, and applies the properties of a default tag. If you want to maintain the tag's properties, you must copy the tag.

 Related Topics


Saving tags to a VENTURA Library file

If you want to use a tag in other publications, you can save the tag to a VENTURA Library file using the Tag Window. The tags can then be copied to any publication. For more information about using VENTURA Library files, see "Using VENTURA Library files."

You can also use VENTURA Navigator to save a page tag to a VENTURA Library file.

To save a tag to a VENTURA Library file using the Tag Window

1.	Open a VENTURA Library file.

2.	Click the Check Out button in the VENTURA Navigator window.

3.	Click Tools, Tag Window.

4.	Click the tab for the type of tag you want to copy.

5.	Drag the tag from the Tag Window to the VENTURA Library file window.

To save a page tag to a VENTURA Library file using VENTURA Navigator

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Click Tools, VENTURA Navigator.

3.	Choose Page Tags from the VENTURA Navigator list box.

4.	Click the plus sign ( [image]) to expand the publication containing the page tag.

5.	Drag the page tag from the VENTURA Navigator window to the VENTURA Library file window

 Related Topics


Copying tags from a VENTURA Library file to a publication

Tags that you have saved to a VENTURA Library file can be copied to other publications using the Tag Window or VENTURA Navigator. For information about saving tags to a VENTURA Library file, see "Saving tags to a VENTURA Library file."

To copy a tag from a VENTURA Library file using the Tag Window

1.	Click Tools, VENTURA Library, Open and open the VENTURA Library file that contains the tag.

2.	Click Tools, Tag Window.

3.	Click the tab for the type of tag you want to copy.

4.	Drag the tag from the VENTURA Library file window to the Tag Window.

To copy a tag from a VENTURA Library file using VENTURA Navigator

1.	Click Tools, VENTURA Library, Open and open the VENTURA Library file that contains the tag.

2.	Click Tools, VENTURA Navigator.

3.	Drag the tag from the VENTURA Library file window to the publication's icon in the VENTURA Navigator window.

A publication is represented by a [image] or [image] icon. The latter indicates an active publication.

 Note

•	If the tag you want to copy has the same name as a tag in your publication, you can choose to replace or rename the tag in the publication. If you rename the tag, Corel VENTURA adds a number after the copied tag's name.

 Related Topics


Importing tags from other publications

The Import Tag feature lets you import tags from another publication, including publications created in previous versions of Corel VENTURA. You can import single or multiple tags. For information about importing all of the tags used in a publication, see "Copying and importing stylesheets."

To import a tag from another publication

1.	Click Tools, Tag Window.

2.	Click the tab for to the type of tag you want to import.

3.	Click the Import Tag button.

4.	In the Open Publication dialog box, choose one of the following:

•	a publication file (VP)

•	a stylesheet file (STY)

•	a chapter file (CHP)

5.	Click Open.

5.	In the Import Tag(s) dialog box, choose the tag you want to import.

6.	Click the Import button.

To import multiple tags from a publication

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the previous procedure.

2.	In the Import Tag(s) dialog box, choose the tag(s) you want to import by doing any of the following:

•	Hold down SHIFT or CTRL, and select two or more tags.

•	Click the Select All button.

3.	Click the Import button.

 Notes

•	If the tag you want to import has the same name as a tag in your publication, you can choose to replace or rename the tag in the publication. If you rename the tag, Corel VENTURA adds a number after the imported tag's name.

•	Versions 3 to 5 save stylesheets externally with the filename extension STY. Versions later than version 5 save the stylesheet as part of the publication file. If you are importing tags from version 3 to version 5 publications, open the stylesheet file. If you are importing tags from a version later than version 5, open the publication file. Frame tags in versions 4 and 5 publications are stored in a chapter file with the filename extension CHP.

 Related Topics


Copying and importing stylesheets

You can copy all of the tags used in another publication by copying or importing a publication's stylesheet. When you copy or import a stylesheet, the existing stylesheet is replaced and cannot be restored. If you do not want to replace the entire stylesheet, you can copy tags individually. For more information about copying tags, see "Copying tags from other publications." For more information about importing tags, see "Importing tags from other publications."

To copy a stylesheet from another publication

1.	Click Tools, VENTURA Navigator.

2.	Choose Publication Manager from the VENTURA Navigator list box.

3.	Drag the stylesheet icon to the publication icon to which you want to copy the stylesheet.

A stylesheet is represented by the [image] icon, and a publication is represented by a [image] or [image] icon. The latter indicates the active publication.

To import a stylesheet from another publication

1.	Click Publication, Import Stylesheet.

2.	In the Import Stylesheet dialog box, choose one of the following:

•	the publication file (VP) that contains the stylesheet

•	the stylesheet file (STY)

3.	Click Open.

 Note

•	Versions 3 to 5 save stylesheets externally with the filename extension STY. Versions later than version 5 save the stylesheet as part of the publication file. If you are importing a stylesheet from version 3 to version 5 publications, open the stylesheet file. If you are importing a stylesheet from a version later than version 5, open the publication file.

 Related Topics


Saving and copying stylesheets using a VENTURA Library file

If you want to use a stylesheet in other publications, you can save the stylesheet to a VENTURA Library file. The stylesheet can then be copied to any publication.

To save a stylesheet to a VENTURA Library file

1.	Click Tools, VENTURA Navigator.

2.	Choose Publication Manager from the VENTURA Navigator list box.

3.	Open a VENTURA Library file.

4.	Click the Check Out button in the VENTURA Navigator window.

5.	Drag the stylesheet's icon from the VENTURA Navigator window to the VENTURA Library file window.

A stylesheet is represented by the [image] icon.

To copy a stylesheet from a VENTURA Library file to a publication

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	Drag the stylesheet's icon from the VENTURA Library file window to the publication's icon in the VENTURA Navigator window.

A publication is represented by a [image] or [image] icon. The latter indicates an active publication.

 Related Topics


Overriding and updating tag properties


Overview: Overriding and updating tag properties
Overriding and updating tag properties

You can change the formatting of a page, frame, or paragraph without affecting the tag that is applied to that item. This is referred to as overriding a tag. When you override a tag, a flag ( [image]) appears in the tag list box on the Property Bar indicating that the selected item has a tag applied to it but also has additional formatting not defined by the tag. You can then create a new tag from the item, or you can update the tag with the new properties. For information about creating new tags, see the following:

•	"Creating page tags"

•	"Creating paragraph tags"

•	"Creating frame tags"

 Related Topics


Overriding tag properties

Each page, paragraph, and frame used in your publication has a tag applied to it. The tag specifies a number of different formatting attributes. If you have not applied another tag, the item will have one of the Corel VENTURA default tags applied.

If you want to format the item, but do not want to create a new tag or change the tag already applied, you can override the tag properties. Corel VENTURA lets you override page, paragraph, and frame tags.

To override a page tag's properties

1.	Click View, Page Layout.

2.	Click a page using the Pick tool.

3.	Click Page, Page Properties.

4.	Use the Page Properties dialog box to format the selected page.

To override a paragraph tag's properties

1.	Click View, Page Layout.

2.	Click the paragraph using the Pick tool.

3.	Click Format, Paragraph Properties.

4.	Use the Paragraph Properties dialog box to format the selected paragraph.

To override a frame tag's properties

1.	Click View, Page Layout.

2.	Click the frame using the Pick tool.

You can either click the border of the frame or click within the frame.

3.	Click Format, Frame Properties.

4.	Use the Frame Properties dialog box to format the selected frame.

 Related Topics


Viewing formatting differences from an item's tag

If you have overridden a page, paragraph, or frame tag's formatting, Corel VENTURA lists the differences in the item's properties dialog box. For example, if a paragraph uses the Body Text default paragraph tag, and you change the font without changing the font for the tag, you have overridden the paragraph tag's formatting. You can then see these differences in the Paragraph Properties dialog box for that paragraph.

If you want to update these differences to the item's tag, you can click the Update Tag button in the dialog box. For more information about updating tags, see "Updating a tag."

To view a page's formatting differences from its tag

1.	Click View, Page Layout.

2.	Click a page using the Pick tool.

3.	Click Page, Page Properties.

4.	Click the General tab.

The page's formatting differences are displayed in the Differences From Tag section.

To view a paragraph's formatting differences from its tag

1.	Click View, Page Layout.

2.	Click the paragraph using the Pick tool.

3.	Click Format, Paragraph Properties.

4.	Click the General tab.

The paragraph's formatting differences are displayed in the Differences From Tag section.

To view a frame's formatting differences from its tag

1.	Click View, Page Layout.

2.	Click the frame using the Pick tool.

3.	Click Format, Frame Properties.

4.	Click the General tab.

The frame's formatting differences are displayed in the Differences From Tag section.

 Related Topics


Updating a tag

If you format a page, frame, or paragraph without formatting the tag that is applied to that item, a flag ( [image]) appears in the tag list box on the Property Bar. This flag indicates that the selected item has a tag applied to it but also has additional formatting not defined by the tag.

If you have changed the formatting of a page, paragraph, or frame and want that formatting to apply to each item referencing the tag, you can update the tag.

To update a page tag

1.	Click View, Page Layout.

2.	Click the pasteboard of a page.

If a flag ( [image]) appears in the Page Tag list box, proceed to step 3. If a flag does not appear, the page does not have any properties to be updated to the page tag.

3.	Choose Update "selected page tag name" from the Page Tag list box on the Property Bar.

 Note

•	If you have formatted the headers or footers on the selected page, updating the page tag will apply the header or footer formatting to the page tag.

To update a paragraph tag

1.	Click a paragraph.

If a flag ( [image]) appears in the Paragraph Tag list box, proceed to step 2. If a flag does not appear, the paragraph does not have any properties to be updated to the paragraph tag.

2.	Choose Update "selected paragraph tag name" from the Paragraph Tag list box on the Property Bar.

 Tip

•	You can also update formatting changes to a paragraph tag automatically. For more information, see "Allowing paragraph tags to be updated automatically."

To update a frame tag

1.	Select a frame by clicking its border using the Pick tool.

If a flag ( [image]) appears in the Frame Tag list box, proceed to step 2. If a flag does not appear, the frame does not have any properties to be updated to the frame tag.

2.	Choose Update "selected frame tag name" from the Frame Tag list box on the Property Bar.

 Tip

•	You can also update a tag by clicking the Update Tag button in the Page Properties, Paragraph Properties, or Frame Properties dialog boxes.

 Related Topics


Allowing paragraph tags to be updated automatically

Corel VENTURA lets you automatically update paragraph tags when you change formatting options from the Property Bar, including setting the alignment, font size, font, color, and the bold, italic, and underline styles. If you allow the paragraph tag to be updated automatically, all of the paragraphs in your publication that reference that tag are also updated.

To allow paragraph tags to be updated automatically

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, click General.

3.	Enable the Tag Paragraph Mode button.

 Note

•	For users of Corel VENTURA 7, enabling the Tag Paragraph Mode option is similar to working with the Implicit Overrides option or the right-click Override Mode option disabled.

 Related Topics


Finding and replacing tags


Overview: Finding and replacing tags
Finding and replacing tags

Corel VENTURA lets you find text to which a paragraph tag or character tag has been applied, and frames to which a frame tag has been applied. You can replace each occurrence of the tags, or you can replace them individually. You can also find text to which a character tag has been applied and replace the tag with a paragraph tag, and you can replace a paragraph tag with a character tag.

 Related Topics


Finding tags in your publication

You can search your publication for occurrences of paragraph, character, or frame tags.

To find tags in your publication

1.	Click Edit, Find & Replace.

2.	Choose one of the following from the list box to the right of the Find list box:

•	Paragraph Tag

•	Character Tag

•	Frame Tag

3.	Choose a tag from the Find list box.

4.	Click the Find Next button.

 Tip

•	To specify the direction and scope of the search, click the Options button and enable the Search and Attribute check boxes that correspond to the options you want to use.

 Related Topics


Replacing tags in your publication

You can replace tags that you have applied in your publication using the Find & Replace command. For example, you can replace a character tag with a paragraph tag, and a paragraph tag with a character tag. However, you can only replace a frame tag with another frame tag.

To replace a paragraph or character tag

1.	Click Edit, Find & Replace.

2.	Choose one of the following from the list box to the right of the Find list box:

•	Paragraph Tag

•	Character Tag

3.	Choose a tag from the Find list box.

4.	Choose one of the following from the list box to the right of the Replace list box:

•	Paragraph Tag

•	Character Tag

5.	Choose a replacement tag from the Replace list box.

6.	Click the Find Next button

7.	Click the Replace button to replace each occurrence of the tag.

 Tips

•	If you replace a character tag with a paragraph tag, the character tag is removed and the text becomes a new paragraph with the paragraph tag applied.

•	If you replace a paragraph tag with a character tag, the character tag is applied to the entire paragraph.

To replace a frame tag

1.	Click Edit, Find & Replace.

2.	Choose Frame Tag from the list box to the right of the Find list box.

3.	Choose a tag from the Find list box.

4.	Choose a replacement tag from the Replace list box.

5.	Click the Find Next button

6.	Click the Replace button to replace each occurrence of the tag.

 Note

•	You can replace page tags in your publication using the Apply Page Tag command. For more information, see "Replacing page tags in your publication."

 Tips

•	To specify the direction and scope of the search, click the Options button and enable the Search and Attribute check boxes that correspond to the options you want to use.

•	You can click the Replace All button to replace each occurrence of the tag.

 Related Topics


Applying a tag to text using the Find & Replace command

You can use the Find & Replace command to apply a character or paragraph tag to text in your publication. For example, you can apply a character tag to each occurrence of your company's name throughout your publication, no matter what formatting was applied before.

To apply a tag to text using the Find & Replace command

1.	Click Edit, Find & Replace.

2.	Choose Text from the list box to the right of the Find list box:

3.	Type the text to which you want the tag applied in the Find list box.

4.	Choose one of the following from the list box to the right of the Replace list box:

•	Paragraph Tag

•	Character Tag

5.	Choose the tag you want applied to the text from the Replace list box.

6.	Click the Find Next button

7.	Click the Replace button to replace each occurrence of the tag.

 Tip

•	You can click the Replace All button to apply the tag to each occurrence of the text.

 Related Topics


Finding paragraphs which have overridden tag properties

Even with a tag applied to a paragraph in your publication, you can still apply formatting to it. For example, if a paragraph tag uses the Times New Roman font, you can still select a paragraph which has that tag applied and change the font to Wingdings. The formatting change applies only to that paragraph and does not affect the tag. This is referred to as overriding a tag.

You can find paragraphs that have tag properties that have been overridden. You can also use Find & Replace to remove overridden paragraph tag properties.

To find paragraphs which have overridden tag properties

1.	Click Edit, Find & Replace.

2.	Click Items, Paragraph Properties.

3.	Click the Find Next button.

To remove overridden paragraph tag properties using Find & Replace

1.	Click Edit, Find & Replace.

2.	Click Items, Paragraph Properties.

3.	Remove all text from the Replace box, if any.

4.	Click the Find Next button.

5.	Click the Replace button to remove each occurrence of a paragraph with overridden tag properties.

You can click the Replace All button to remove all occurrences.

 Tip

•	You can remove overridden paragraph tag properties in paragraphs which use a specific tag. After performing step 2 in the "To remove overridden paragraph tag properties using Find & Replace" procedure, insert the name of the tag you want to remove overridden properties from after the T in the <$T> code in the Find box. For example, to remove overridden properties from the Bullet paragraph tag, the contents of the Find box would include <$TBullet>.

 Related Topics


Generating a list of unused tags in a publication

If you want to remove tags that you have created but have not used, you can use the Find Unused Tags script included with Corel VENTURA. A script is a series of commands that are automatically performed for you. For more information about using scripts, see "Using Corel SCRIPT."

To generate a list of unused tags in a publication

1.	Click Tools, Corel SCRIPT, Run/Manage Scripts.

2.	Choose Find Unused Tags from the Available Scripts list box.

3.	Click the Run button.

4.	Follow the on-screen instructions provided by the Find Unused Tags wizard.

 Tip

•	For information about removing tags from your publication, see "Renaming and deleting tags."

 Related Topics


Using generated tags


Overview: Using generated tags
Using generated tags

Corel VENTURA automatically creates tags for text for headers, footers, table of contents, and indexes. These tags are referred to as generated tags and are created when the items are created; for example, when you create a table of contents, the default table of contents title tag Z_TOC TITLE is created. If you do not create a table of contents, the Z_TOC TITLE tag does not appear. Generated tags use the naming convention Z_ITEM NAME. Generated tags cannot be renamed, and they cannot be manually created. However, you can change their formatting properties.

For more information about generated tags, see the following:

•	"Creating a table of contents"

•	"Indexing your publication"

•	"Formatting footnotes and endnotes"

•	"Using headers and footers"

•	"Autonumbering paragraphs formatted with tags"

 Related Topics


Indexing, creating lists, and inserting notes


Overview: Indexing, creating lists, and inserting notes
Indexing, creating lists, and inserting notes

Corel VENTURA automates the generation and maintenance of publication-wide referencing features like indexes, tables of contents, cross-references, endnotes, and footnotes. Indexes, tables of contents, and endnotes are created as separate text files that you insert into your publication. Cross-references are created when you insert a cross-reference marker in your publication and then cross-reference to that marker. Indexes, tables of contents, and cross-references are easily updated and maintained using VENTURA Navigator. Endnotes and footnotes also reference markers that you insert in your publication, but they are controlled through the Publication Properties dialog box. Counters are used to automatically number chapters, pages, and frames.

Indexes

An index is a list of important words used in your publication and the location(s) where these words appear. When you mark a word as an index entry, a marker is inserted in the publication and the word is saved to the index text file. If the index marker is moved to another page, the page reference is updated when you update the index.

Tables of contents

A table of contents is a list of the chapters and sections in a publication. It is created from paragraph tags that you apply in your publication. Like an index, if a paragraph which has a tag used for the table of contents applied moves to another page, the page reference is updated when you update the table of contents.

Cross-references

A cross-reference tells the reader where to find related information about a topic. Like indexes, a cross-reference uses a marker. You insert a marker in text or a frame and then cross-reference to that marker. If the cross-reference marker is moved, the cross-reference is automatically updated.

Footnotes and endnotes

Footnotes and endnotes are notes that identify information quoted directly from another source or to further explain a point or issue raised in the publication. Footnotes appear at the bottom of a page; endnotes appear at the end of a chapter.

Counters

Counters automatically number the chapters, pages, tables, and figures in your publication. You can specify different numbering styles and starting numbers for each chapter, and whether the numbering is continued from the previous chapter.

 More Detailed Information


Indexing your publication


Overview: Indexing your publication
Indexing your publication

An index gives the reader an efficient way to locate a specific topic by providing a list of the important words in your publication and the location in which these words can be found.

In Corel VENTURA, an index is a text file that contains the words that you mark as index entries. Each time you update the index, Corel VENTURA scans the publication for words marked as index entries and inserts them in the index. For more information about marking words, see "Marking words as index entries." For more information about updating an index file, see "Updating an index file."

You can also create multiple indexes in the same publication by marking words as index entries using categories. For more information, see "Using categories to create multiple indexes."

Corel VENTURA also allows you to create an index from a text file listing the words you want indexed. For more information, see "Creating an index using the Index Concordance add-on."

After you have created your index, marked words that you want included in the index, and updated the index, you can insert the index into your publication. The index does not automatically appear in your publication, you must insert it manually.

Index levels

Your index can use up to 14 different index levels. Levels can be used for subentries or for "See" or "See Also" references. The example below shows two levels:

H

Horse	(level 1)

Clydesdale	(level 2)

Colt	(level 2)

House	(level 1)

Managing your indexes using VENTURA Navigator

VENTURA Navigator allows you to view the different levels in your index, to quickly move to the pages where your index entries appear using the Go To command, and to update your index.

Indexes used in online documents

In online documents, such as Web pages and Adobe Acrobat documents created using Corel VENTURA, index entries become hypertext links. When the reader clicks a link, the referenced information is displayed. For more information about publishing to online documents, see "Internet and electronic publishing and distribution."

 Related Topics


Creating an index file

An index is a separate text file to which words that you have marked as index entries are saved. For more information about marking words as index entries, see "Marking words as index entries."

You can create any number of index files in the same publication, and you can create different categories within the same index. For more information about index categories, see "Using categories to create multiple indexes."

To create an index file

1.	Click Publication, Table Of Contents/Index.

2.	Click the Index tab.

3.	Type a title for the index in the Title list box.

4.	Click the Add button.

5.	In the Chapter list box, type a name for the chapter in which you want to place your index.

6.	Type a name for the index file in the File list box.

To create an index file using VENTURA Navigator

1.	Click Tools, VENTURA Navigator.

2.	Choose index from the VENTURA Navigator list box.

3.	Right-click the publication.

4.	Click New Index.

5.	Follow steps 2 to 6 from the previous procedure.

 Note

•	You do not have to create an index file before you mark words as index entries. The words you mark will be added when you create and then update the index file. For more information about marking words as index entries, see "Marking words as index entries." For more information about updating an index file, see "Updating an index file."

 Tips

•	You can also choose an existing chapter in which to place the index from the Chapter list box.

•	You can also choose an existing text file to which your index entries are saved from the File list box. The index entries will replace the existing file.

 Related Topics


Displaying chapter and page numbers and letter headings in an index

You can display page and chapter numbers with your index entries. You can also include prefixes or suffixes for the page and chapter numbers. If the location of the index entry changes, the page or chapter numbers are updated when you update the index. For more information about updating an index, see "Updating an index file."

For index entries that appear in more than one location, you can specify a character to separate each page or chapter number.

Corel VENTURA automatically displays letter headings for an index. For example, if you mark "horse" as a level 1 entry, an "H" heading will appear in the index. If you do not want to display letter headings, you can disable the option.

To display chapter and page numbers with index entries

1.	Click Publication, Table Of Contents/Index.

2.	Click the Index tab.

3.	Choose an index from the Title list box.

4.	Click in the Number Format box, and do one of the following:

•	Click the arrow button at the side of the box, and choose a format.

•	Click the Insert button, and choose a numbering format.

•	Type a number format to apply a custom number format.

5.	In the Prefix box, type any text you want to precede the chapter or page number.

6.	In the Suffix box, type any text you want to follow the chapter or page number.

 Tip

•	You can apply formatting to the page numbers, chapter numbers, prefixes, and suffixes. Select the item, and click the Properties button. In the Text Properties dialog box, set the formatting options for the selected item. You can also format an index by formatting the tags used when you insert the index into the publication. For more information, see "Formatting an index."

To select a separator for multiple index entries

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	Choose a character from the Delimiter list box.

 Tip

•	You can also type any characters you want to use as separators in the Delimiter list box.

To disable letter headings in an index

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the "To display chapter and page numbers with index entries" procedure.

2.	Disable the Letter Headings check box.

 Related Topics


Marking words as index entries

You must mark the words you want included in your index. When you mark words, you can choose to use levels. Levels allow you to include subentries (level 2, level 3, etc.) under a main entry (level 1). For example, you can mark "horse" as a level 1 entry and "colt" as a level 2 entry, so that "colt" is displayed under "horse." "Horse," as a level 1 entry is displayed under "H." Words that are marked without a level are marked as level 1 entries. If you do not use levels, each entry appears as a main entry (level 1).

To mark words as index entries

1.	Select the word you want to mark as an index entry.

2.	Click Insert, Index Entry.

3.	Choose Index Entry from the Type list box.

 Tip

•	If you want to format the index entry when it is displayed in your publication, select the word in the Index Entry column, and click the Properties button. Use the Text Properties dialog box to format the index entry.

To mark words as index entries using levels

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	In the Level box, type the number of levels you want to use.

3.	In the Index Entry box, type the entries you want to use for each level.

 Tip

•	You can edit an index entry by selecting the indexed word in the Insert Index Entry dialog box and typing a new word.

•	You do not have to create an index file before you mark words as index entries using the Insert Index Entry dialog box. The words you mark will be added when you create and then update the index file. For more information about creating an index file, see "Creating an index file." For more information about updating an index file, see "Updating an index file."

To mark words as index entries using VENTURA Navigator

1.	Select the word you want to mark as an index entry.

2.	Click Tools, VENTURA Navigator.

3.	Choose Index from the VENTURA Navigator list box.

4.	Click the index to which you want to add the entry.

5.	Click the Add button in the VENTURA Navigator window.

The word is added as a level 1 entry in the index.

 Note

•	Index entries are case sensitive. This means that a separate entry will be inserted into the index for each variation of a word you mark. For example, marking "house," "House," and "HOUSE" as index entries will produce three separate entries.

 Tips

•	To mark words as index entries using VENTURA Navigator, you must first create an index. For more information, see "Creating an index file."

•	You can also mark words as level 2 or higher index entries using VENTURA Navigator. Select the word in the publication, then click the index entry under which you want to add the word in VENTURA Navigator, and then click the Add button.

•	Indexes are not updated automatically. It is good practice to update an index regularly to ensure it is accurate. For more information about updating an index, see "Updating an index file."

 Related Topics


Updating an index file

When you update an index file, Corel VENTURA scans your publication for words that you have marked as index entries and adds them to the index file. For more information about marking words as index entries, see "Marking words and index entries."

To update an index file

1.	Click Publication, Update Publication.

2.	Enable the Indexes check box.

To update an index file using VENTURA Navigator

1.	Click Tools, VENTURA Navigator.

2.	Choose Index from the VENTURA Navigator list box.

3.	Click the index file you want to update.

4.	Click the Update button in the VENTURA Navigator window.

 Notes

•	Each time you update an index file in Corel VENTURA, you are prompted to replace the contents of the existing index file.

•	If you have already inserted the index file into your publication, updating the index file automatically replaces the index file in your publication with the updated file.

•	Indexes are not updated automatically. It is good practice to update an index regularly to ensure it is accurate.

•	Changing the printer settings can affect the page flow in your publication. Update the index file after you change a printer setting to ensure that the correct page references appear in the index.

 Related Topics


Viewing an index using VENTURA Navigator

You can use VENTURA Navigator to view your index. Below is a list of the index icons displayed in the VENTURA Navigator window and what each indicates.

Icon	Indicates

An active publication

An open, but not active publication

An index file

An index letter heading

An index file does not exist for the publication

To view an index using VENTURA Navigator

1.	Click Tools, VENTURA Navigator.

2.	Choose index from the VENTURA Navigator list box.

3.	Click the plus sign ( [image]) to expand the publication.

4.	Right-click the index, and click Expand All.

 Note

•	If No Indexes is displayed in VENTURA Navigator, that means that you have not created an index file. For more information about creating an index file, see "Creating an index file."

 Tip

•	Indexes are not updated automatically. It is good practice to update an index regularly to ensure it is accurate. For more information about updating an index, see "Updating an index file."

 Related Topics


Inserting an index file into a publication

The words that you have marked as index entries are saved to an index file. To display the index in the publication, the index file must be inserted onto a page or into a frame in the publication.

To insert an index file into a publication

1.	Click Tools, VENTURA Navigator.

2.	Choose Publication Manager from the VENTURA Navigator list box.

3.	Right-click the chapter that contains the index, and click Go To.

4.	Click the plus sign ( [image]) to expand the chapter that contains the index.

5.	Drag the index to a page or frame in that chapter.

 Note

•	Indexes are not updated automatically. It is good practice to update an index regularly to ensure it is accurate. If you have already inserted the index file into your publication, the index information will be replaced when you update the index. For more information about updating an index, see "Updating an index file."

 Tip

•	You can also choose Index from the VENTURA Navigator list box to drag the index file into a publication.

 Related Topics


Formatting an index

After you insert an index into your publication, you can format how the index is displayed by editing its paragraph tags. Paragraph tags allow you to set the font attributes, alignment, spacing, tabs, and other formatting for the text to which the tag is applied. For more information about paragraph tags, see "Using paragraph tags."

The following paragraph tags are created when you create an index:

•	Z_INDEX TITLE [image] the tag used for the index title

•	Z_INDEX LTR [image] the tag used for the letter category for each entry, for example, A, B, C, etc.

•	Z_INDEX LVL X [image] the tag used for the index entries. The "X" indicates the level. If you have 14 levels in your index, there will be a tag created for each level, for example, Z_INDEX LVL 1, Z_INDEX LVL 2, etc.

These paragraph tags are called generated tags. Generated tags are created when the items they refer to are created. If you do not create an index, the tags listed above do not appear in your publication. You can change the formatting attributes of the generated tags. If you apply other tags, the tags you have applied will be replaced with the generated tag each time you update the index.

To format index paragraph tags

1.	Click Tools, Tag Window.

2.	Click the Paragraph tab.

3.	Click one of the following:

•	Z_INDEX TITLE

•	Z_INDEX LTR

•	Z_INDEX LVL

4.	Click the Tag Properties button.

5.	In the Paragraph Tag Properties dialog box, set the formatting attributes for the tag.

 Tip

•	For information about defining the attributes that are displayed in your index, such as chapter and page numbers, see "Displaying chapter and page numbers and letter headings in an index."

 Related Topics


Creating an index using the Index Concordance add-on

Rather than searching for occurrences of words in your publication, you can create a list of the words you want indexed and let Corel VENTURA create the index for you. The Index Concordance add-on, supplied with Corel VENTURA, lets you create an index from a list of words made in Corel VENTURA or another text editor, such as Corel WordPerfect or Microsoft Notepad. For more information about add-ons, see "Using Corel add-ons."

You must save the list of words you want included in the index as a text file before you run the add-on. The text file can have any of the following extensions: ICC, IDX, or TXT. Each word in the list must be followed by a hard return.

To create an index using the Index Concordance add-on

1.	Click Tools, Add-Ons.

2.	In the Currently Installed Add-Ons list, double-click VENTURA8 to display its functions.

If VENTURA8 is not displayed, click the New Button, choose VENTURA8.CAO, and click Open.

3.	Click Index Concordance, and click the Run button.

4.	Do one of the following:

•	Type the full name and path of the file containing the words you want indexed in the File Name box.

•	Click the Browse button, and locate the file containing the words you want indexed.

5.	Enable the Update Now checkbox to automatically update the index file.

6.	Type a title for the index in the Title box.

7.	Type a name for the chapter into which the index will be inserted in the Chapter box.

If the chapter does not exist, Corel VENTURA will create a new chapter.

8.	Type a name for the index file in the File box.

9.	Click the Chapters button, and enable the checkbox next to each chapter you want indexed.

 Notes

•	If you want to include a category for the index entry, the word you want indexed must use the following format: (Category Name)Entry, where "Category Name" is the name of the category, and "Entry" is the word you want indexed.

•	If you want to make the word a "See" or a "See Also" reference, the word you want indexed must use the following format: (,Reference Type)Entry. The "Reference Type" is a value, either "0" for a regular index entry, "1" for a "See" index entry, or "2" for a "See Also" index entry. "Entry" indicates the word you want indexed. The comma must appear before the "Reference Type," and if you want to include a category, the category must be inserted before the Reference Type," for example, (Category Name,1)Entry.

•	If you want to sort your index entry, the word you want indexed must use the following format: Entry(Sort Key), where "Sort Key" is the letter or word under which you want the word to appear.

•	If you want to add levels to your index entry, the word you want indexed must use the following format: Entry;Level 2 Entry;Level 3 Entry; etc., where "Entry" is the word you want indexed, "Level 2 Entry" is the second level entry, and "Level 3 Entry" is the third level entry.

•	You can combine any of the above formatting for index entries. However, the format must always follow the same format: (Category Name,Reference Type)Entry(Sort Key);Level 2 Entry(Sort Key);Level 3 Entry(Sort Key).

 Related Topics


Using categories to create multiple indexes

Corel VENTURA allows you to create multiple indexes for the same publication by assigning words to categories as you mark them as index entries. A category allows you to differentiate words marked as index entries. When you update the index, you can enable which categories you want Corel VENTURA to include in the index as it scans the publication. For example, in a publication about plants, you can have one index for the scientific names of plants and another for their common names.

To mark words as index entries using a category

1.	Select the word you want to mark as an index entry.

2.	Click Insert, Index Entry.

3.	Choose Index Entry from the Type list box.

4.	In the Category list box, type the name of the category to which you want to add the index entry.

5.	Click the Add button.

 Tip

•	You can also choose an existing category from the Category list box.

To create an index using categories

1.	Click Publication, Table Of Contents/Index.

2.	Click the Index tab.

3.	Type a title for the index in the Title list box.

4.	Click the Add button.

5.	In the Retrieve Entries list, enable the check box next to each category you want to include in the index.

6.	In the Chapter list box, type a name for the chapter in which you want to place your index.

7.	Type a name for the index file in the File list box.

8.	Click the Update button.

 Tip

•	You can also choose an existing index from the Title list box. The new index will overwrite the existing index.

 Related Topics


Changing the sort order of and cross-referencing index entries

Corel VENTURA sorts index entries in alphabetical or numerical order. For example, "apple," appears under the letter "A." An entry that does not begin with a letter, for example "1998," appears under "!" in the index.

Sort keys allow you to insert index entries under different letters in the index. For example, you can insert "1998" under "N," by changing the Sort Key entry in the Insert Index Entry or Edit Index Entry dialog box. If you use sort keys, you cannot assign the same sort key to more than one index entry. For example, an "N" cannot be used as the sort key for the index entries 1997, 1998, and 1999. To have these entries appear under N, you could use N as the sort key for one of the entries, NN or NI for another, and NNN or NIN for another entry.

Corel VENTURA also allows you to cross-reference index entries. By default, cross-references appear with "See" or "See Also" prefixes; however, you can change the prefixes.

To change the sort order of an index entry

1.	Click Tools, VENTURA Navigator.

2.	Choose Index from the VENTURA Navigator list box.

3.	Right-click the index containing the index entry, and click Expand All.

4.	Right-click the index entry, and click Go To.

5.	Click Edit, Edit Index Entry.

6.	In the Sort Key column, type the letter(s) under which you want the index entry to appear.

7.	Click OK.

8.	Click the Update button in the VENTURA Navigator window.

 Tip

•	You can also click the Edit Item button on the Property Bar to open the Edit Index Entry dialog box.

To cross-reference an index entry

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	Right-click an index entry for which you want to add a cross-reference, and click Go To.

3.	Click Edit, Edit Index Entry.

4.	Choose one of the following from the Type list box:

•	See

•	See Also

5.	Type 2 in the Level box.

6.	In the Level 2 Index Entry box, type the entry you want to cross-reference.

For example, to create a cross-reference to "horses" for the entry "galloping," type "galloping" in the Index Entry box and "horses" in the level 2 Index Entry box.

7.	Click OK.

8.	Click the Update button in the VENTURA Navigator window.

To change "See" and "See Also" reference prefixes

1.	Click Publication, Table Of Contents/Index.

2.	Click the Index tab.

3.	Choose an index from the Title list box.

4.	Type prefixes in one or both of the following boxes:

•	See

•	See Also

 Related Topics


Editing and deleting index entries

You can edit your index entries at any time. The changes will be applied when you update the index. For more information about updating indexes, see "Updating an index file."

If you delete a word marked as an index entry, the index entry is also deleted. However, you can delete an index entry without affecting the word marked as an index entry by deleting the index entry marker.

To edit an index entry

1.	Click Tools, VENTURA Navigator.

2.	Choose Index from the VENTURA Navigator list box.

3.	Right-click the index containing the index entry you want to edit, and click Expand All.

4.	Right-click the index entry you want to edit, and click Go To.

5.	Click Edit, Edit Index Entry.

6.	In the Edit Index Entry dialog box, edit the index entry, and click OK.

7.	Click the Update button in the VENTURA Navigator window.

To delete an index entry

1.	Click View, Page Layout.

2.	Click the Show Tabs & Returns button on the Property Bar.

3.	Click Tools, VENTURA Navigator.

4.	Choose Index from the VENTURA Navigator list box.

5.	Right-click the index from which you want to delete an index entry, and click Expand All.

6.	Right-click the index entry you want to delete, and click Go To.

7.	Position the cursor to the left of the index marker ( [image]).

When the cursor is to the left of the index marker, Index Entry appears in the Selection Indicator information field on the Status Bar.

8.	Press DELETE.

9.	Click the Update button in the VENTURA Navigator window.

 Notes

•	Anytime you create or update an index in Corel VENTURA, you are prompted to replace the contents of the existing index file. If you click OK to replace the contents of the index file, your changes are automatically applied to the index.

•	If you are viewing a publication in Copy Editor view, Corel VENTURA can only search the current text file. If you want to search the entire publication, click View, Page Layout, and then resume your search.

 Tip

•	You can also delete an index entry in Copy Editor view by deleting the Corel VENTURA markup code used to mark the index entry. For more information about what the markup codes for index entries look like, see "Example index entry markers and codes."

 Related Topics


Example index entry markers and codes

When you mark a word as an index entry, Corel VENTURA inserts a marker, or code, in the word. When you update the index, Corel VENTURA scans the publication for the index markers you have inserted in words. In Page Layout view, an index marker appears as a red circle ( [image]), which you can see by clicking the Show Tabs & Returns button on the Standard toolbar. In Copy Editor view, the marker appears in angle brackets (<$I>), which you can see by clicking the Show Codes button on the Property Bar.

Viewing these markers or codes is helpful when moving words that have been marked as index entries or deleting index entries. If you move a word that has been marked as an index entry, you must also move the marker or code so that the page reference for the word is correct when you update the index. If you want to delete an index entry, you can delete the marker or code without deleting the word. For more information, see "Editing and deleting index entries."

Examples of index entry markers and codes

In Page Layout view, an index marker for the word "horse" appears as:

The code for the index marker displayed in Copy Editor view appears as:

In this example, the word "horse" is inserted in the index in the Default index category.

The code for an index entry that is assigned to the category of "animal" appears in Copy Editor view as:

<$I[animal]horse>

The code for an index entry that is inserted with "horse" as a level 1 entry and "colt" as a level 2 entry appears in Copy Editor view as:

<$I[]horse;colt;etc.>

The code for an index entry that is inserted as a "See" reference appears in Copy Editor view as:

<$S[]colt;horse>

The code for an index entry that is inserted as a "See Also" reference appears in Copy Editor view as:

<$A[]clydesdale;horse>

 Note

•	In Page Layout view, an index entry code always appears as a red marker ( [image]).

 Related Topics


Creating a table of contents


Overview: Creating a table of contents
Creating a table of contents

A table of contents provides a list of chapters, sections, headings, or subheadings in a publication. Corel VENTURA uses paragraph tags applied in your publication to create a table of contents. You choose the paragraph tags you want to include in the table of contents from the Table Of Contents/Index dialog box. When you update the table of contents, Corel VENTURA searches the publication for each occurrence of the tags and creates a list of the paragraphs to which the tags are applied. This list is saved as a separate text file that you must insert into the publication. For more information about paragraph tags, see "Using paragraph tags."

A table of contents presents an outline of your publication.

You can use multiple tables of contents in a publication. For example, you can create one table of contents for the chapter titles, and you can create another for the captions used for your tables. The only difference between the tables of contents are the paragraph tags used to create each table of contents.

Managing your table of contents using VENTURA Navigator

Once you create your table of contents, VENTURA Navigator becomes the main tool for updating, viewing, and inserting it into your publication.

Tables of contents used in online documents

In online documents, such as Web pages and Adobe Acrobat documents created using Corel VENTURA, table of contents entries become hypertext links. When the reader clicks a link, the referenced information is displayed. For more information about publishing to online documents, see "Internet and electronic publishing and distribution."

 Related Topics


Creating a table of contents file

A table of contents is a text file to which paragraphs with specific paragraph tags applied to them are saved. The table of contents can also display the page number and chapter number of each paragraph to which a specific tag is applied. You can create different table of contents files for the same publication and define which tags are used for each file. For information about defining your table of contents, see "Specifying the paragraph tags used to create a table of contents file."

To create a table of contents file

1.	Click Publication, Table Of Contents/Index.

2.	Click the Table Of Contents tab.

3.	Type a title for the table of contents in the Title list box.

4.	Click the Add button.

5.	In the Chapter list box, type a name for the chapter in which to place your table of contents.

6.	Type a name for the table of contents file in the File list box.

By default the file name will be the same as the title.

 Tips

•	You can also choose an existing chapter in which to place the table of contents file from the Chapter list box.

•	You can also choose an existing text file to which to save your table of contents entries from the File list box. The table of contents entries will replace the existing file.

 Related Topics


Specifying the paragraph tags used to create a table of contents file

Corel VENTURA creates a table of contents by scanning a publication for specified paragraph tags, and then saving the text from each occurrence of those tags to the table of contents text file. Each time you update the table of contents, Corel VENTURA scans the publication and updates the information in the table of contents file.

Levels in a table of contents allow you to differentiate main headings, secondary or minor headings, and other tags in the table of contents. You can use up to 10 different levels in a table of contents, and each level can be formatted differently. For more information about formatting a table of contents, see "Formatting a table of contents."

To specify the paragraph tags used to create a table of contents file

1.	Click Publication, Table of Contents/Index.

2.	Click the Table Of Contents tab.

3.	Choose a table of contents file from the Title list box.

4.	Click the Add Level button for each level you want to use.

5.	Choose a paragraph tag from the Match Tag list box for each level.

 Tip

•	You can also access the Table of Contents/Index Properties dialog box from VENTURA Navigator. Click Tools, VENTURA Navigator, and choose Table of Contents from the VENTURA Navigator list box. Right-click a table of contents file, and click TOC Properties.

•	You can also format the text in the table of contents by selecting the text codes in the Format column of the Table Of Contents/Index dialog box, and clicking the Properties button. The formatting you choose from the Text Properties dialog box will be applied over the properties set when you format the table of contents tags.

 Related Topics


Displaying chapter, page, and section numbers in a table of contents

You can display chapter, page, and section numbers in a table of contents. You can also include prefixes or suffixes for the table of contents entries and the chapter, page, and section numbers. If the location of the entry changes, the chapter, page, and section number is updated when you update the table of contents. For more information about updating a table of contents, see "Updating a table of contents file."

To display chapter, page, and section numbers in a table of contents

1.	Click Publication, Table Of Contents/Index.

2.	Click the Table Of Contents tab.

3.	Choose a table of contents file from the Title list box.

4.	Click in the Format box, and position the insertion point where you want to insert the chapter, page, or section number.

You can insert page and chapter numbers before or after the text by placing the insertion point before or after the <Paragraph Tag text> code in the format column.

5.	Click the Insert button, and click one of the following options:

•	Page Number [image] inserts a page number code at the position of the insertion point

•	Chapter Number [image] inserts a chapter number code at the position of the insertion point

•	Section Number [image] inserts a section number code at the position of the insertion point

•	Tab [image] inserts a tab at the position of the insertion point

6.	Type any text that you want to include as a prefix or suffix in the Format box.

7.	Repeat steps 4 to 6 for each level in your table of contents.

 Tip

•	You can format the text in the table of contents by selecting the text codes in the Format column of the Table Of Contents/Index dialog box, and clicking the Properties button. You can also format the table of contents by formatting the tags used to display the table of contents. For more information, see "Formatting a table of contents."

 Related Topics


Updating a table of contents file

When you update a table of contents, Corel VENTURA scans the publication for each occurrence of the paragraph tags specified for the table of contents and saves the text of the paragraphs to which the tags are applied to the table of contents file.

To update a table of contents file

1.	Click Publication, Update Publication.

2.	Enable the Table Of Contents check box.

To update a table of contents file using VENTURA Navigator

1.	Click Tools, VENTURA Navigator.

2.	Choose Table Of Contents from the list box in the VENTURA Navigator.

3.	Click the plus sign ( [image]) to expand the publication containing the table of contents.

4.	Right-click the table of contents, and click Update.

 Note

•	Changing the printer settings can affect the page flow in your publication. Update the table of contents file after you change a printer to ensure that the correct page references appear in the table of contents.

 Related Topics


Viewing a table of contents using VENTURA Navigator

You can use VENTURA Navigator to view your table of contents. Below is a list of the table of contents icons displayed in the VENTURA Navigator window and what each indicates.

Icon	Indicates

An active publication

An open but not active publication

A table of contents file

A table of contents file does not exist for the publication

To view a table of contents using VENTURA Navigator

1.	Click Tools, VENTURA Navigator.

2.	Choose Table Of Contents from the VENTURA Navigator list box.

3.	Click the plus sign ( [image]) to expand the publication containing the table of contents.

4.	Right-click the table of contents.

5.	Click Expand All.

 Note

•	If No Table Of Contents is displayed in VENTURA Navigator, that means that you have not created a table of contents file. For more information about creating a table of contents file, see "Creating a table of contents file."

 Related Topics


Inserting a table of contents file into a publication

To display the table of contents in your publication, you must insert the table of contents file into the publication.

To insert a table of contents file into a publication

1.	Click Tools, VENTURA Navigator.

2.	Choose Publication Manager from the VENTURA Navigator list box.

3.	Right-click the chapter that contains the table of contents text file, and click Go To.

4.	Click the plus sign ( [image]) to expand the chapter that contains the table of contents file.

5.	Drag the table of contents file to a page or frame in the chapter.

 Tip

•	You can also choose Table Of Contents from the VENTURA Navigator list box to drag the table of contents file into a publication.

•	You can view a table of contents in VENTURA Navigator without having to insert it into the publication. For more information, see "Viewing a table of contents using VENTURA Navigator."

 Related Topics


Formatting a table of contents

After you insert a table of contents file into a publication, you can format it by editing its paragraph tags. Paragraph tags allow you to set the font attributes, alignment, spacing, tabs, and other formatting for the text to which the tag is applied. For more information about paragraph tags, see "Using paragraph tags."

The following paragraph tags are created when you create a table of contents:

•	Z_TOC TITLE [image] the tag used for the title of the table of contents

•	Z_TOC LVL X [image] the tag used for the table of contents entries. The "X" indicates the level. If you have 10 levels in your table of contents, there will be a tag created for each level, for example, Z_TOC LVL 1, Z_TOC LVL 2, etc.

These paragraph tags are called generated tags. Generated tags are created when the items they refer to are created. If you do not create a table of contents, the tags listed above do not appear in your publication. You can change the formatting attributes of the generated tags. If you apply other tags, the tags you have applied will be replaced with the generated tag each time you update the table of contents.

To format table of contents paragraph tags

1.	Click Tools, Tag Window.

2.	Click the Paragraph tab.

3.	Click one of the following:

•	Z_TOC TITLE

•	Z_TOC LVL

4.	Click the Tag Properties button.

5.	In the Paragraph Tag Properties dialog box, set the formatting attributes for the tag.

 Tip

•	For information about defining the attributes that are displayed in your table of contents, such as page numbers and chapter numbers, see "Displaying chapter, page, and section numbers in a table of contents."

 Related Topics


Using cross-references


Overview: Using cross-references
Using cross-references

Cross-references are used to direct readers to information in another part of the publication. Cross-references can be used to identify related information, for example, "For more information, see Topic X on page Y," or they can be used to indicate that a story continues on another page, for example, "The Horse Jumped Over The House is continued on page Z."

There are two steps to creating a cross-reference. The first step is to insert a marker in the text or for a frame. The second step is to make a cross-reference to the marker. If a marker moves, Corel VENTURA can automatically update cross-references. However, if a cross-reference is in another chapter, the cross-reference is not automatically updated.

A cross-reference can display any of the following information about the referenced item:

•	page number [image] the page number of the marker

•	chapter number [image] the chapter number of the marker

•	figure number [image] the number of the current frame, if the figure number is inserted into a caption for the current frame

•	table number [image] the number of the current frame, if the table number is inserted into a caption for the current frame

•	section number [image] the number of an autonumbered paragraph. The marker which is cross-referenced must be inserted into the autonumbered paragraph.

•	caption text [image] the caption text of a frame used as a cross-reference marker. The frame must have a name and a caption

•	chapter and page numbers [image] the chapter and page number of the marker

•	chapter and section numbers [image] the chapter number and number of the autonumbered paragraph in which the marker is located

•	page and section numbers [image] the page number and number of the autonumbered paragraph in which the marker is located

Cross-references used in online documents

In online documents, such as Web pages and Adobe Acrobat documents created using Corel VENTURA, cross-references become hypertext links. If the reader clicks a link, the referenced information is displayed. Corel VENTURA online Help uses cross-references for glossary terms, related topics, and "For more information" references. For more information about publishing to online documents, see "Internet and electronic publishing and distribution."

 Related Topics


Cross-referencing text

To make a cross-reference, you must insert a marker in the text to which you want the cross-reference to point. The marker acts as the target for the cross-reference.

Cross-references refer to text that appears in another part of a publication.

To insert a marker for a cross-reference to text

1.	Click where you want to insert a marker for a cross-reference.

2.	Click Insert, Marker.

3.	Type a marker name in the Name list box.

 Tips

•	You can insert the same marker in different locations in your publication by choosing an existing marker from the Name list box.

•	You can use up to 62 characters for a marker name.

To cross-reference a text marker

1.	Click where you want to insert the cross-reference.

2.	Click Insert, Number/Cross-Reference.

3.	From the Display list box, choose one of the following:

•	Page Number

•	Chapter Number

•	Chapter And Page Number

4.	From the Using Numbering Style list box, choose a format for the displayed information.

5.	From the For list box, choose the marker name you want to cross-reference.

 Tip

•	If you want the cross-reference to list every location of the marker, enable the Reference All Occurrences check box. You can choose the style you want to use to separate each cross-reference from the Delimiters list box.

 Related Topics


Cross-referencing a frame

When you cross-reference a frame, you must create a frame name which acts as the marker for the cross-reference. Pictures, tables, or caption text contained in a frame can be cross-referenced by cross-referencing to the frame name. For more information about cross-referencing caption text, see "Cross-referencing caption text."

To create a name for a cross-reference to a frame

1.	Select a frame.

2.	Click Format, Frame Properties.

3.	Click the General tab.

4.	In the Frame Details section, type a name for the frame in the Name box.

 Tip

•	You can use up to 62 characters for a marker name.

To cross-reference a frame name

1.	Click where you want to insert the cross-reference.

2.	Click Insert, Number/Cross-Reference.

3.	From the Display list box, choose one of the following:

•	Page Number

•	Chapter Number

•	Chapter And Page Number

4.	From the Using Numbering Style list box, choose a format for the displayed information.

5.	From the For list box, choose the frame name you want to cross-reference.

 Related Topics


Cross-referencing caption text

When you cross-reference caption text, the text contained in the caption is displayed at the location of the cross-reference. For example, if the caption reads "Figure 2,", the information that appears in the cross-reference is "Figure 2."

To be able to cross-reference caption text, the frame to which the caption is applied must have a name to act as the cross-reference marker. For more information about creating a cross-reference to a frame, see "Cross-referencing a frame." For more information about applying captions, see "Working with caption frames."

To cross-reference caption text

1.	Click where you want to insert the cross-reference.

2.	Click Insert, Number/Cross-Reference.

3.	Choose Caption Text from the Display list box.

4.	From the Using Numbering Style list box, choose a format for the displayed information.

5.	From the For list box, choose the frame name you want to cross-reference.

 Note

•	When you cross-reference caption text for a frame that has two captions (for example, a caption above and below the frame or a caption on the left and right sides of the frame) the cross-reference will only reference the text in the top or left caption.

 Related Topics


Cross-referencing sections

Sections are created in your publication when you use the Autonumbering feature for paragraphs. When you cross-reference a section, the number of the paragraph in which the marker is placed is displayed as the cross-reference information. For more information about Autonumbering, see "Autonumbering paragraphs formatted with tags."

To insert a marker for a cross-reference to a section

1.	Click in an autonumbered paragraph.

2.	Click Insert, Marker.

3.	Type a marker name in the Name list box.

 Tip

•	You can insert the same marker in different locations in your publication by choosing an existing marker from the Name list box.

To cross-reference a section

1.	Click where you want to insert the cross-reference.

2.	Click Insert, Number/Cross-Reference.

3.	Choose Section Number from the Display list box.

4.	From the Using Numbering Style list box, choose a format for the displayed information.

5.	From the For list box, choose the marker name you want to cross-reference.

 Related Topics


Viewing and updating markers and cross-references

Once you have inserted markers and made cross-references to them, VENTURA Navigator becomes the main tool for viewing, locating, updating, and managing your cross-references and markers. VENTURA Navigator displays the marker name and location and location of the cross-reference. If a marker moves, Corel VENTURA can automatically update cross-references. However, if a cross-reference is in another chapter, the cross-reference cannot be automatically updated. You can use VENTURA Navigator to update all of the cross-references in the publication at the same time. For information about locating a marker or cross-reference, see "Locating markers and cross-references."

Below is a list of the cross-reference icons displayed in the VENTURA Navigator window and what each indicates.

Icon	Indicates

An active publication

A publication is open but not active

A cross-reference

A text marker

A cross-reference for a text marker that has been removed (the cross-reference is shown below the marker)

A frame acting as a marker

A cross-reference to a frame that has been removed

A cross-reference or marker does not exist

To view markers and cross-references using VENTURA Navigator

1.	Click Tools, VENTURA Navigator.

2.	Choose Markers/Cross-references from the VENTURA Navigator list box.

3.	Click the plus sign ( [image]) to expand the publication.

To update markers and cross-references

1.	Click Publication, Update Publication.

2.	Enable the Numbering check box.

To update markers and cross-references using VENTURA Navigator

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	Right-click a marker or cross-reference, and click Update.

All of the cross-references in the publication are updated, not just the cross-reference or marker you right-clicked.

 Note

•	If No Markers Or Cross-references is displayed for the publication, that means that you have not inserted a marker. For more information about inserting markers for text, see "Cross-referencing text." For more information about inserting markers for a frame, see "Cross-referencing a frame."

•	VENTURA Navigator also displays any variable markers inserted in your publication when you choose Markers/Cross-references from the VENTURA Navigator list box. A variable marker is displayed as the [image] icon.

 Related Topics


Locating markers and cross-references

You can use VENTURA Navigator and the Find & Replace command to locate markers and cross-references in a publication.

To locate a marker

1.	Click Tools, VENTURA Navigator.

2.	Choose Markers/Cross-References from the VENTURA Navigator list box.

3.	Right-click a marker, and click Go To.

A marker for text is indicated by the [image] icon in the VENTURA Navigator window. A marker for a frame is indicated by the [image] icon.

To locate a marker using the Find & Replace command

1.	Click Edit, Find & Replace.

2.	Click in the Find list box.

3.	Click the Items button, and click Marker.

4.	Choose a marker from the Name list box.

5.	Click the Find Next button.

To locate a cross-reference

1.	Click Tools, VENTURA Navigator.

2.	Choose Markers/Cross-References from the VENTURA Navigator list box.

3.	Click the plus sign ( [image]) to expand the marker that is cross-referenced.

4.	Right-click a cross-reference, and click Go To.

A cross-reference is indicated by the [image] icon in the VENTURA Navigator window.

To locate a cross-reference using the Find & Replace command

1.	Click Edit, Find & Replace.

2.	Click in the Find list box.

3.	Click the Items button, and click Number/Cross-Reference.

4.	From the Name list box, choose a marker that is cross-referenced.

5.	Click the Find Next button.

 Note

•	If you are viewing a publication in Copy Editor view, Corel VENTURA can only search the current text file. If you want to search the entire publication, click View, Page Layout, and then resume your search.

 Related Topics


Replacing markers and cross-references

You can replace markers and cross-references that you have inserted in your publication using the Find & Replace command.

To replace a marker

1.	Click Edit, Find & Replace.

2.	Click in the Find list box.

3.	Click the Items button, and click Marker.

4.	Choose a marker from the Name list box.

5.	Click the Replace list box.

6.	Click the Items button, and click Marker.

7.	Choose a marker from the Name list box.

8.	Click the Find Next button.

9.	Click the Replace button to replace each found occurrence of the marker.

To replace a cross-reference

1.	Click Edit, Find & Replace.

2.	Click in the Find list box.

3.	Click the Items button, and click Number/Cross-reference.

4.	From the Name list box, choose a marker which is cross-referenced.

5.	Click the Replace list box.

6.	Click the Items button, and click Number/Cross-reference.

7.	From the Name list box, choose a new marker to apply to the cross-reference.

8.	Click the Find Next button.

9.	Click the Replace button to replace each found occurrence of the cross-reference.

 Tip

•	You can also click the Replace All button to replace every occurrence of a marker or cross-reference in a publication.

 Related Topics


Moving markers and cross-references

Both cross-references and markers can be moved to other locations in your publication. When you move a marker, the cross-references to that marker are automatically updated. Moving a cross-reference does not affect the marker. You can move markers and cross-references in both Copy Editor view and Page Layout view.

To move a marker or a cross-reference in Copy Editor view

1.	Click Tools, VENTURA Navigator.

2.	Choose Markers/Cross-References from the VENTURA Navigator list box.

3.	Right-click the cross-reference or marker, and click Go To.

A marker is indicated by the [image] icon in the VENTURA Navigator window. A cross-reference is indicated by the [image] icon.

4.	Click View, Copy Editor.

5.	Click the Show Codes button on the Property Bar.

6.	Select the cross-reference or marker.

In Copy Editor view, the characters <$R precede the cross-reference; the characters <$M precede the marker.

7.	Click Edit, Cut.

8.	Click where you want the cross-reference or marker to appear.

9.	Click Edit, Paste.

To move a marker or a cross-reference in Page Layout view

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	Click View, Page Layout.

3.	Click the Show Tabs & Returns button on the Standard toolbar.

4.	Select the cross-reference or marker.

Both the marker and the cross-reference are indicated by the [image] symbol in Page Layout view.

5.	Click Edit, Cut.

6.	Click where you want the cross-reference or marker to appear.

7.	Click Edit, Paste.

 Related Topics


Copying markers and cross-references

Because you can insert the same marker in different locations in a publication, you can also copy existing markers. When a marker is used in different places, the cross-reference appears as: "For more information, see X on pages 3, 6, 9." Copying a cross-reference to a marker does not affect the marker. You can copy markers and cross-references in both Copy Editor view and Page Layout view.

To copy a marker or a cross-reference in Copy Editor view

1.	Click Tools, VENTURA Navigator.

2.	Choose Markers/Cross-References from the VENTURA Navigator list box.

3.	Right-click the cross-reference or marker, and click Go To.

A marker is indicated by the [image] icon in the VENTURA Navigator window. A cross-reference is indicated by the [image] icon.

4.	Click View, Copy Editor.

5.	Click the Show Codes button on the Property Bar.

6.	Select the cross-reference or marker.

In Copy Editor view, the characters <$R precede the cross-reference; the characters <$M precede the marker.

7.	Click Edit, Copy.

8.	Click where you want the cross-reference or marker to appear.

9.	Click Edit, Paste.

To copy a marker or a cross-reference in Page Layout view

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	Click View, Page Layout.

3.	Click the Show Tabs & Returns button on the Standard toolbar.

4.	Select the cross-reference or marker.

Both the marker and the cross-reference are indicated by the symbol [image] in Page Layout view.

5.	Click Edit, Copy.

6.	Click where you want the cross-reference or marker to appear.

7.	Click Edit, Paste.

 Related Topics


Deleting markers and cross-references

Cross-references and markers are indicated by codes inserted into your publication. To delete a cross-reference or a marker you must delete the code. When you delete a cross-reference code, the marker stays in the text or frame, but the cross-reference no longer points to that marker. When you delete a marker, you create an unresolved cross-reference. This means that a cross-reference is pointing to a marker that does not appear in the publication. If you insert the marker again, the cross-reference will point to that marker. For more information about deleting unresolved cross-references, see "Finding and deleting cross-references to removed markers." You can delete markers and cross-references in both Copy Editor view and Page Layout view.

To delete a marker or a cross-reference in Copy Editor view

1.	Click Tools, VENTURA Navigator.

2.	Choose Markers/Cross-References from the VENTURA Navigator list box.

3.	Right-click the cross-reference or marker, and click Go To.

A marker is indicated by the [image] icon in the VENTURA Navigator window. A cross-reference is indicated by the [image] icon.

4.	Click View, Copy Editor.

5.	Click the Show Codes button on the Property Bar.

6.	Select the cross-reference or marker.

In Copy Editor view, the characters <$R precede the cross-reference; the characters <$M precede the marker.

7.	Press DELETE.

To delete a marker or a cross-reference in Page Layout view

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	Click View, Page Layout.

3.	Click the Show Tabs & Returns button on the Standard toolbar.

4.	Select the cross-reference or marker.

Both the marker and the cross-reference are indicated by the symbol [image] in Page Layout view.

5.	Press DELETE.

 Related Topics


Editing markers and cross-references

You can edit a cross-reference or marker at any time. By editing a cross-reference, you change the information that is displayed; by editing a marker, you can change a marker that is inserted into a publication or you can rename a marker. If you change or rename a marker, any cross-references to the previous marker become unresolved. For information about unresolved cross-references, see "Finding and deleting cross-references to removed markers."

To edit a marker or a cross-reference

1.	Click Tools, VENTURA Navigator.

2.	Choose Markers/Cross-References from the VENTURA Navigator list box.

3.	Right-click the cross-reference, and click Go To.

4.	Click the Edit Item button on the Property Bar.

 Note

•	If you are viewing a publication in Copy Editor view, Corel VENTURA can only search the current text file. If you want to search the entire publication, click View, Page Layout, and then resume your search.

 Related Topics


Finding and deleting cross-references to removed markers

If you remove a marker after making cross-references to it, you create an unresolved cross-reference. An unresolved cross-reference points to a marker that is no longer in the current publication. A removed marker still exists in the list of markers, but the marker no longer appears in the publication.

When you delete an unresolved cross-reference, the marker to which the cross-reference points is automatically deleted from your publication. A deleted marker is deleted from the publication and no longer appears in the list of markers.

To find and delete cross-references to removed markers

1.	Click Tools, VENTURA Navigator.

2.	Choose Markers/Cross-References from the VENTURA Navigator list box.

3.	Right-click the cross-reference to the removed marker, and click Go To.

An unresolved cross-reference to a removed marker is indicated by the [image] icon in the VENTURA Navigator window. A cross-reference is indicated by the [image] icon.

4.	Click View, Page Layout.

5.	Press DELETE.

 Related Topics


Using footnotes and endnotes


Overview: Using footnotes and endnotes
Using footnotes and endnotes

Footnotes and endnotes allow you to provide more information about a topic discussed in your publication. A footnote makes a reference on the bottom of the page. An endnote makes a reference to a separate endnotes text file that you must insert into your publication. An endnote file is created for each chapter in which endnotes are inserted.

The following picture shows how footnotes appear on a page. The footnote appears as number or symbol in the text, and reference text at the foot of the page.

When you create a footnote or an endnote, you must first insert a footnote or endnote marker in the publication, then you can type the information in the footnote frame or in the endnotes text file. If you move the footnotes or endnotes, Corel VENTURA automatically updates the footnote or endnote references to reflect the changes. You can use footnotes and endnotes together in the same publication, and you can convert endnotes to footnotes and footnotes to endnotes.

 Note

•	When you import documents created with other applications, footnote and endnote references are imported as well. To display the footnotes and endnotes, you must enable the Footnote or Endnote check boxes in the Chapter Properties dialog box.

 More Detailed Information
 Related Topics


Using footnotes


Overview: Using footnotes
Using footnotes

When you create a footnote, you must first insert a footnote marker. The cursor is automatically positioned in the footnote frame and you can type the text you want as your footnote reference. The footnote frame is automatically created. You can hide footnotes as you work on your publication and display them when you are finished. When you add additional footnotes, the footnote frame is automatically displayed.

 Related Topics


Inserting footnotes

Footnotes can be inserted in any text, frame, or table in your publication.

To insert a footnote

1.	Click where you want the footnote reference to appear in your text.

2.	Click Insert, Footnote.

A footnote reference is placed in the text and in the footnote frame.

3.	Type the footnote text in the footnote frame.

 Note

•	Footnote numbering uses a specific pattern. Footnotes inserted on a page are numbered first, and footnotes that are inserted in frames on a page are numbered after footnotes on the page, according to the creation order of the frames. For example, if you insert an footnote in a frame and then insert footnotes in the text on the page, the footnote reference numbers in the text will precede the footnote reference numbers in the frame. Captions are numbered before the frames to which they are attached.

 Tip

•	If you are inserting footnotes in frames as well as in text on a page, the numbering is not always updated automatically. To update footnote numbering, click Publication, Update Publication, and enable the Numbering check box.

 Related Topics


Hiding and displaying footnotes

Footnotes are displayed in a footnote frame at the bottom of each page. You can hide them as you work on your publication, and you can redisplay them at any time. When you insert additional footnotes in your publication, all of your footnotes will reappear. For more information about inserting footnotes, see "Inserting footnotes."

To hide footnotes

1.	Click Publication, Chapter Properties.

2.	Click the Footnotes tab.

3.	Disable the Footnotes check box.

To display footnotes

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Enable the Footnotes check box.

 Related Topics


Restarting footnote numbering

You can set Corel VENTURA to restart the numbering of footnotes on every page or every chapter.

To restart footnote numbering

1.	Click Publication, Chapter Properties.

2.	Click the Footnotes tab.

3.	From the Restart Footnote On list box, choose one of the following options:

•	Each Page

•	Each Chapter

 Related Topics


Keeping a footnote on the same page as its reference marker

To ensure that your footnotes do not get pushed onto subsequent pages, you can use the Keep With Reference option to ensure that footnotes always stay on the same page as the footnote reference marker. When you use this option, settings for widows and orphans may be ignored in certain cases. For example, if you have orphans set to "2," a footnote reference in the last line of a paragraph, and the Keep With Reference option enabled, Corel VENTURA will push the last line of the paragraph to the next column or page if the footnote information cannot be accommodated in the footnote frame. For more information about widows and orphans, see "Controlling widows and orphans."

To keep a footnote on the same page as its reference marker

1.	Click Publication, Chapter Properties.

2.	Click the Footnotes tab.

3.	Enable the Keep With Reference check box.

 Related Topics


Formatting footnote frames

Footnote frames appear at the bottom of each page that has a footnote reference. By default, footnote frames expand to accommodate the text in them, but you can set the maximum height of the footnote frame. You can also separate footnote frames from your main text by including a horizontal line separator and by setting the amount of space between your footnote frame and your main text. If you use columns, you can set the footnote frames to copy the column settings of the page.

To set the maximum height of the footnote frame

1.	Click Publication, Chapter Properties.

2.	Click the Footnotes tab.

3.	Enable the Maximum Height check box.

4.	Type a value in the Maximum Height box.

To add separator lines between the main text and the footnote text

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Click the Add Separator Line check box.

3.	In the Space Above box, type a value for the amount of space you want to have between the separator line and the page text.

4.	Type the dimensions of the separator line in the Width and Height boxes.

To adjust the space between footnotes and the main text

1.	Select the footnote frame.

2.	Click Format, Frame Properties.

3.	Click the Margins tab.

4.	In the Top box, type a value for the distance between the main text and the footnote frame.

To use the page columns for your footnote frame

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the "To set the maximum height of the footnote frame" procedure.

2.	Enable the Use Page Columns check box.

 Related Topics


Using endnotes


Overview: Using endnotes
Using endnotes

When you insert an endnote into a publication, the endnote reference is inserted into the text and a separate endnote text file is created. Each additional endnote in that chapter is inserted into the same text file. An endnote file is created for each chapter in which you insert endnotes. You can edit the endnote file in Copy Editor view. You can also edit the endnote file in Page Layout view by inserting the endnote file into a frame or onto a page in the chapter.

 Related Topics


Inserting endnotes

Endnotes can be inserted in any text, frame, or table in your publication. When you insert an endnote, an endnote file is created for that chapter. You can use both Copy Editor view and Page Layout view to insert endnote reference information in the endnote file.

To insert an endnote

1.	Click where you want the endnote reference to appear.

2.	Click Insert, Endnote.

An endnote reference is placed in the text, and an endnote text file is created. Each additional endnote in that chapter is added to the same file.

To insert endnote reference information using Copy Editor view

1.	Click View, Copy Editor.

2.	Click Tools, VENTURA Navigator.

3.	Choose Publication Manager from the VENTURA Navigator list box.

4.	Click the plus sign ( [image]) to expand the chapter that contains the endnotes file.

5.	Right-click Endnotes, and click Go To.

6.	Type your endnote reference information next to an endnote reference number.

To insert endnote reference information using Page Layout view

1.	Click View, Page Layout.

2.	Click Tools, VENTURA Navigator.

3.	Choose Publication Manager from the VENTURA Navigator list box.

4.	Double-click the chapter that contains the endnotes file.

5.	Click the plus sign ( [image]) to expand the chapter that contains the endnotes file.

6.	Drag the Endnotes file from the VENTURA Navigator window to the page.

7.	Type your endnote reference information next to an endnote reference number.

 Notes

•	Endnote numbering uses a specific pattern. Endnotes inserted on a page are numbered first, and endnotes that are inserted in frames on a page are numbered after endnotes on the page, according to the creation order of the frames. For example, if you insert an endnote in a frame and then insert endnotes in the text on the page, the endnote reference numbers in the text will precede the endnote reference numbers in the frame. Captions are numbered before the frames to which they are attached.

 Tip

•	If you are inserting endnotes in frames as well as in text on a page, the numbering is not always updated automatically. To update endnote numbering, click Publication, Update Publication, and enable the Numbering check box.

 Related Topics


Displaying endnotes in a publication

Endnotes are saved to a text file that you must insert into the publication to display the endnote reference information. For information about editing endnote files, see "Inserting endnotes."

To display endnotes in a publication

1.	Click View, Page Layout.

2.	Click Tools, VENTURA Navigator.

3.	Choose Publication Manager from the VENTURA Navigator list box.

4.	Double-click the chapter that contains the endnotes file.

5.	Click the plus sign ( [image]) to expand the chapter that contains the endnotes file.

6.	Drag the Endnotes file from the VENTURA Navigator window to a page in the chapter.

 Related Topics


Moving, copying, and deleting footnotes and endnotes


Overview: Moving, copying, and deleting footnotes and endnotes
Moving, copying, and deleting footnotes and endnotes

If you copy, move, or delete text that has a footnote or endnote reference, both the footnote or endnote reference marker and the reference information are moved, copied, or deleted. If you copy or move a footnote or endnote, Corel VENTURA moves the footnote or endnote marker and the reference information and updates your footnotes or endnotes so that your reference numbers will always flow correctly. If you delete a footnote or endnote, the footnotes and endnotes that follow are renumbered.

 Related Topics


Moving footnotes or endnotes

Both footnotes and endnotes can be moved to other locations in your publication. When you move a footnote or endnote, the reference numbers are automatically updated and reordered. You can move footnotes or endnotes in Page Layout view and Copy editor view.

To move a footnote or endnote reference in Page Layout view

1.	Click View, Page Layout.

2.	Click the Show Tabs & Returns button on the Property Bar.

3.	Select the text, including the footnote or endnote reference marker.

In Page Layout view, footnotes and endnotes are indicated by the [image] symbol and a reference number.

4.	Click Edit, Cut.

5.	Click where you want to paste the footnote or endnote reference.

6.	Click Edit, Paste.

To move a footnote or endnote reference in Copy Editor view

1.	Click View, Copy Editor.

2.	Click the Show Codes button on the Property Bar.

3.	Select the text, including the footnote or endnote reference marker.

In Copy Editor view, <$F> indicates a footnote, and <$NEndnote Text> indicates an endnote.

4.	Click Edit, Cut.

5.	Click where you want to paste the footnote or endnote reference.

6.	Click Edit, Paste.

 Tip

•	You can also move footnote and endnote references by selecting the footnote or endnote reference marker and dragging it to a new position.

 Related Topics


Copying footnotes and endnotes

When you copy footnote or endnote references, Corel VENTURA creates a correctly numbered footnote or endnote in the new position, automatically renumbers the footnotes or endnotes that follow, and copies the footnote or endnote reference text to the appropriate position. You can copy footnotes or endnotes in Page Layout view and Copy editor view.

To copy a footnote or endnote reference in Page Layout view

1.	Click View, Page Layout.

2.	Click the Show Tabs & Returns button on the Property Bar.

3.	Select the text, including the footnote or endnote reference marker.

Footnotes and endnotes are indicated by the symbol [image] and a reference number.

4.	Click Edit, Copy.

5.	Click where you want to paste the footnote or endnote reference.

6.	Click Edit, Paste.

To copy a footnote or endnote reference in Copy Editor view

1.	Click View, Copy Editor.

2.	Click the Show Codes button on the Property Bar.

3.	Select the text, including the footnote or endnote reference marker.

In Copy Editor view, <$F> indicates a footnote, and <$NEndnote Text> indicates an endnote.

4.	Click Edit, Copy.

5.	Click where you want to paste the footnote or endnote reference.

6.	Click Edit, Paste.

 Related Topics


Deleting footnotes and endnotes

When you delete a footnote or endnote reference marker, Corel VENTURA deletes also the reference text for that footnote or endnote, and then renumbers the footnotes or endnotes that follow. You can delete footnotes or endnotes in Page Layout view and Copy editor view.

To delete a footnote or endnote reference in Page Layout view

1.	Click View, Page Layout.

2.	Click the Show Tabs & Returns button on the Property Bar.

3.	Select the text, including the footnote or endnote reference marker.

Footnotes and endnotes are indicated by the symbol [image] and a reference number.

4.	Press DELETE.

To delete a footnote or endnote reference in Copy Editor view

1.	Click View, Copy Editor.

2.	Click the Show Codes button on the Property Bar.

3.	Select the text, including the footnote or endnote reference marker.

In Copy Editor view, <$F> indicates a footnote, and <$NEndnote Text> indicates an endnote.

4.	Press DELETE.

 Related Topics


Formatting footnotes and endnotes


Overview: Formatting footnotes and endnotes
Formatting footnotes and endnotes

By default, Corel VENTURA uses superscript numbers for footnote references inserted in your text and normal numbers for endnote references inserted in your text. You can choose your own numbering styles and set the formatting attributes for the footnote and endnote numbers inserted in the text of the publication.

To format the reference numbers and the reference text that appears with the reference numbers in the footnote frame or the endnotes file, you must edit their paragraph tags. Paragraph tags allow you to set the font attributes, alignment, spacing, tabs, and other formatting for the text to which the tag is applied. For more information about paragraph tags, see "Using paragraph tags."

 Related Topics


Customizing footnote or endnote numbering styles

The style used for your footnote and endnote references is entirely up to you. You can choose from preset numbering or lettering, or you can create your own style. You can also define the font properties of the references, for example, you can make the references superscript or you can change the color of the font.

To customize footnote or endnote numbering styles

1.	Click Publication, Chapter Properties.

2.	Click one of the following tabs:

•	Footnotes

•	Endnotes

3.	Enable one of the following check boxes:

•	Footnotes

•	Endnotes

If you have already created footnotes or endnotes, the respective check box will already be enabled.

4.	Click the Number Style button.

5.	Choose a style option from the Number Style list box.

6.	Choose a format style from the Format list box.

7.	Click the Properties button.

8.	In the Text Properties dialog box, set the attributes for the footnote or endnote reference numbers.

To create your own footnote or endnote reference style

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	Click the Custom Mark button.

3.	In the Custom Mark box, type the footnote or endnote numbering style you want to use.

You can type any characters you want. Each reference marker must be separated by a space; for example, if you want to use an asterisk (*) as your footnote reference, you must type * ** *** **** ***** in the Custom Mark box, with spaces between each incremental marker. Corel VENTURA uses the following scheme as a default for custom footnote or endnote references: * ** *** **** + ++ +++ ++++. This means that the first footnote or endnote uses the symbol * and the fifth uses +.

 Note

•	If you want your footnotes or endnotes to start with a number other than 1, type that number in the Start Number box.

 Related Topics


Formatting the tags used for footnote and endnote references

The following paragraph tags are created when you insert a footnote:

•	Z_FNOT # [image] the tag used for the footnote reference numbers

•	Z_FNOT ENTRY [image] the tag used to format your footnote reference text

The following paragraph tags are created when you insert an endnote:

•	Z_ENOT # [image] the tag used for the endnote reference numbers

•	Z_ENOT ENTRY [image] the tag used to format your endnote reference text

These paragraph tags are called generated tags. Generated tags are created when the items they refer to are created. If you do not insert footnotes or endnotes, the tags listed above do not appear in your publication. You can change the formatting attributes of the generated tags, or you can apply other tags to your footnotes or endnotes reference text. You cannot apply another paragraph tag to the footnote or endnote reference numbers.

To format your footnote and endnote paragraph tags

1.	Click Tools, Tag Window.

2.	Click the Paragraph tab.

3.	Click one of the following tags:

•	Z_FNOT #

•	Z_FNOT ENTRY

•	Z_ENOT #

•	Z_ENOT ENTRY

4.	Click the Tag Properties button.

5.	In the Paragraph Tag Properties dialog box, set the formatting attributes for the tag.

 Tips

•	For information about setting attributes and styles for your footnote or endnote reference numbers, see "Customizing footnote or endnote numbering styles."

•	You cannot override the formatting of the generated tags created for footnotes and endnotes. Each time that the footnotes and endnotes are updated, the overridden properties will be lost.

 Related Topics


Converting footnotes and endnotes


Overview: Converting footnotes and endnotes
Converting footnotes and endnotes

You can convert footnotes to endnotes and endnotes to footnotes at any time. The reference numbering will adjust automatically. However, when you convert the footnotes or endnotes in your publication, all of the footnotes or endnotes are converted, not just selected entries.

 Related Topics


Converting footnotes to endnotes, and endnotes to footnotes

When you convert footnotes to endnotes, an endnotes text file is automatically created, if one does not already exist for the chapter, and the new endnotes are saved to that file. For more information about endnotes, see "Using endnotes."

When you convert endnotes to footnotes, the new footnotes appear in a footnote frame at the bottom of the page on which the reference marker appears.

To convert footnotes to endnotes

1.	Click Publication, Chapter Properties.

2.	Click the Footnotes tab.

3.	Click the Convert button.

4.	Enable the Convert All Footnotes To Endnotes button.

To convert endnotes to footnotes

1.	Click Publication, Chapter Properties.

2.	Click the Endnotes tab.

3.	Follow steps 3 and 4 from the previous procedure.


Using counters


Overview: Using counters
Using counters

Counters are numbers that are used to number chapters, pages, and figures or tables in frames. Chapter and page numbers are automatically applied, and you can display them in any frame, text, header, or footer. Figure and table numbers provide two numbering schemes for numbering items in frames. For example, you can use table and figure numbers to number frames that contain tables, graphics, pictures, or text.

Counter settings for page, chapter, figure, and table numbers are set for each chapter individually. You can also choose to continue the numbering from the previous chapter, and you can specify the starting number and style for any counter.

Updating counters in your publication

Corel VENTURA updates counters based on their position in the publication. If you change the formatting of your counters or rearrange your publication, the counters are automatically updated.

 Related Topics


Setting counters in a chapter

Chapter, page, table, and figure numbering is set for each chapter individually. For example, you can use Roman numerals for the page numbers in one chapter and letters for the page numbers in another.

To set the counters in a chapter

1.	Click Publication, Chapter Properties.

2.	Click the Counters tab.

3.	Choose an option from the Numbering Style list box for any of the following:

•	Chapter

•	Initial Page

•	Initial Figure

•	Initial Table

 Tips

•	If you want to continue the numbering from the previous chapter, enable the Continue from Previous check box.

•	If you want to set a starting number for your counter, type a number in the Start Number box.

 Related Topics


Inserting chapter and page numbers in a publication

You can insert the current chapter and page number in a header, footer, frame, or in the text of your publication. The number is automatically updated if your publication is rearranged.

To insert a chapter or page number in your publication

1.	Click where you want to insert the page or chapter number.

2.	Click Insert, Number/Cross-reference.

3.	Choose one of the following from the Display list box:

•	Page Number

•	Chapter Number

•	Chapter And Page Number

4.	Choose a numbering style from the Using Numbering Style list box.

5.	From the For list box, choose one of the following:

•	Current Page

•	Current Chapter

•	Current Chapter And Page

 Related Topics


Changing page numbering and numbering styles

You can change the number and numbering style for any page within a chapter.

To change page numbering

1.	Click the page on which you want to restart the page numbering.

2.	Click Page, Page Numbering.

3.	Disable the Increment From Last Counter check box.

4.	Type a start number in the Starting Number box.

To change numbering styles

1.	Click a page.

2.	Click Page, Page Numbering.

3.	Choose a numbering style from the Number Style list box.

 Related Topics


Inserting figure or table numbers in a publication

Figure and table numbers are provided to give you two different numbering schemes for frames in a publication. For example, you can use figure numbers to number pictures contained in frames and you can use table numbers to number tables contained in frames. Figure and table numbers are inserted into a frame's caption. For more information about captions, see "Working with caption frames."

To insert a figure or table number in a publication

1.	Select the frame to which you want to add a caption for a figure or table number.

2.	Click Format, Frame Properties.

3.	Click the General tab.

4.	Choose the location for the caption from the Caption Location list box.

5.	Click in the Caption frame.

6.	Click Insert, Number/Cross-reference.

7.	Choose one of the following from the Display list box:

•	Figure Number

•	Table Number

8.	Choose a numbering style from the Using Numbering Style list box.

9.	Choose Current Frame from the For list box.

 Related Topics


Changing figure or table numbering and numbering styles

You can change the number and numbering style for the figure or table numbering in a chapter. For more information about inserting figure and table numbers, see "Inserting figure or table numbers in a publication."

To change figure or table numbering

1.	Right-click a caption in which a figure or table number has been inserted.

2.	Click one of the following:

•	Figure Numbering

•	Table Numbering

3.	Disable the Increment From Last Counter check box.

4.	Type a start number in the Starting Number box.

To change numbering styles

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Choose a numbering style from the Number Style list box.

 Related Topics


Updating counters

Corel VENTURA automatically updates counters in most circumstances. However, you can also update counters manually.

To update counters

1.	Click Publication, Update Publication.

2.	Enable the Numbering check box.

 Related Topics


Working with color


Overview: Working with color
Working with color

There are many ways for you to choose the colors for a project. You can choose a color from a palette or create your own color using several different methods. You can assemble your own custom palettes or use one of the palettes included with this product. The range of colors from which you can choose is extremely large.

Because there are so many color variations, a precise method for defining each color is required. For example, once you've found the perfect shade of light orange, you need to be able to reproduce that color and possibly tell others how to reproduce that color. Color models let you accurately define colors by breaking them down into components.

 Note

•	This section deals with color basics and using colors in Corel VENTURA. For detailed information about applying color to graphics, frames, and text, see "Filling and outlining."

Color models

Your computer's monitor produces colors by combining red, green, and blue light. This means that the millions of colors that your monitor produces can all be described as amounts of red, green, and blue. These three color components form the basis for the RGB (Red, Green, and Blue) color model. Each of the three colors that make up the RGB color model have values ranging from 0 to 255.

Because the RGB model is based on colors of light, higher RGB values correspond to greater quantities of light. Consequently, higher RGB values result in lighter colors. When all three color components are at the maximum value (255), the resulting color is white. Because the RGB model creates colors by adding light, it is called an additive color model.

When the colors you see on your monitor are reproduced on paper, they are created using ink instead of light. The most common method of reproducing color images on paper is by combining cyan, magenta, yellow, and black inks. These four colors are the color components of the CMYK (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and blacK) color model. Each of the colors that make up the CMYK color model are described as percentages (from 0 to 100).

Inks produce color by reflecting certain colors of light while absorbing others. Darker inks absorb more light. Because the CMYK color model is based on colors of ink, higher percentages of color result in darker inks. In theory, when 100% cyan, 100% magenta, and 100% yellow are combined, the resulting color is black. In reality, black ink must be added to the color model to compensate for the limitations of inks. Because the CMYK color model creates colors by absorbing light, it is called a subtractive color model.

The RGB and CMYK color models are both based on practical methods of reproducing color. There are other color models that aren't based on color reproduction methods but offer different ways of working with color. There are several of these alternate color models available for you to use. The most common of these is the HSB color model.

The HSB color model is based on values of Hue, Saturation and Brightness. Hue is the basic color. Saturation is the strength of the color or the color's distance from gray on a color wheel. Brightness is the amount of white that a color contains. A color with a saturation of 0 is a shade of gray (from white to black). A color with a brightness of 0 is black, and a color with a brightness of 100 is white. Because it is not based on mixing colors, the HSB color model makes it easy to find the color you want.

Reproducing colors accurately

Each piece of equipment used to produce a document [image] from scanners to printers [image] handles color differently. If you don't take these differences into account, the colors you see on your screen may not match the colors on the printed page. For more information, see "Reproducing colors accurately."

 More Detailed Information


Choosing colors


Overview: Choosing colors
Choosing colors

Corel VENTURA 8 offers several methods for choosing colors. Each method provides different ways of working with color to find the perfect shade. In most cases, the method you choose is based on your personal preference.

Choosing a color using a color viewer

The color viewers offer a visual representation of the full spectrum of colors. You can change the color by manipulating the controls associated with the color viewer. For example, when you use the default color viewer, you can change the hue (the color) by moving a slider.

Choosing a color by blending or mixing colors

The color blender and color mixer let you define colors by combining other colors. The color blender displays a grid of colors that it creates from four base colors that you select. The color mixer uses a bitmap as a palette on which you can paint and mix colors.

Choosing a color using color harmonies

Color harmonies are most useful when you're selecting several colors for a project. Color harmonies guarantee that the colors you choose look good together by superimposing a shape [image] such as a square or a triangle [image] over a color wheel. As you move one corner of the shape around the wheel, the other corners also move. The colors at each corner are always complimentary, contrasting, or harmonious, depending on the shape you select.

Choosing a color from a color palette

There are two types of color palettes from which you can choose colors: fixed color palettes and custom color palettes. Don't confuse color palettes with the MRU Color Palette. The MRU (Most Recently Used) Color Palette is used to display and select colors from both fixed and custom color palettes. It also displays the last five colors chosen. You can use the MRU to fill and outline selected text, graphic objects, and frames. To fill a selected item, click a color. To outline a selected item, right-click a color.

Fixed color palettes are provided by third-party manufacturers and are most useful when accompanied by a color swatch book. A swatch book is a collection of color samples that shows exactly what each color looks like when it is printed. Using a color from a fixed color palette gives the opportunity to see how that color appears when it's printed correctly. Swatch books are available at most art supply stores or directly from the swatch book manufacturer.

Several of the fixed color palettes are collections of spot color inks. If you select a color from one of these palettes, then that color requires its own color separation. For more information about spot colors and color separations, see "Creating color separations."

Custom color palettes are collections of colors saved as a color palette file (.CPL extension). For more information about custom color palettes, see "Customizing color palettes."

 Related Topics


Choosing a color from the color viewer

The default color viewer is based on the HSB color model. The slider at the right represents the hue, the x-axis represents the saturation, and the y-axis represents the brightness. You can select different color models for the color you're choosing, but the color viewer remains based on the HSB model. You can select other color viewers if you don't want to use the HSB color viewer. For more information about color models, see "Working with color."

To choose the uniform fill of a frame, graphic object, text, or page

1.	Select the frame, graphic object, text, or page with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click the Fill Color Dialog button to change the fill color.

3.	Click the Color Viewers button.

4.	Move the color slider up or down to change the range of colors displayed in the color selection area on the left.

5.	Drag the small box in the color selection area to the color you want to use.

To choose the outline color of a frame, graphic object, text, or page

1.	Select the frame, graphic object, text, or page with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Outline Tool flyout, and click the Outline Color Dialog button to change the outline color.

3.	Follow steps 3 to 5 of the previous procedure.

To use an alternate color viewer

1.	Follow steps 1 to 2 of the "To choose the uniform fill of a frame, graphic object, text, or page" procedure.

3.	Click and hold the Color Viewers button to display the color viewer list.

4.	Click an alternate color viewer.

Each color viewer lets you use a slider and a color selection area to choose a color.

To change the color model used in the color viewer

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	Choose a color model from the Model list box.

 Related Topics


Choosing a color by blending other colors

You can only blend colors that are in the active Color Palette. You can view more or less blended colors by changing the grid size of the color selection area.

To choose the uniform fill of a frame, graphic object, text, or page

1.	Select the frame, graphic object, text, or page with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click the Fill Color Dialog button to change the fill color.

3.	Click and hold the Mixers button to display the mixers list.

4.	Click Color Blend.

5.	Open each of the four color pickers, and click a color.

6.	In the color selection area, click the color you want to use.

To choose the outline color of a frame, graphic object, text, or page

1.	Select the frame, graphic object, text, or page with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Outline Tool flyout, and click the Outline Color Dialog button to change the outline color.

3.	Follow steps 3 to 6 of the previous procedure.

To change the grid size of the color selection area

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 of the "To choose the uniform fill of a frame, graphic object, text, or page" procedure.

2.	Click the More button to expand the Outline Color dialog box.

3.	Click the Options button, click Grid Size, and click the grid size you want to use.

 Related Topics


Choosing a color using color harmonies

Each of the options in the Hues list box correspond to a shape that is superimposed on the color wheel. As you move the corner of the shape that is covered by a black circle, the grid of color swatches below the color wheel fills with new colors. According to proven color theories, the colors in this grid are harmonious [image] they look good together. Since color harmonies are most useful when you are selecting several colors, use them when working with custom palettes. For more information, see "Customizing color palettes".

To choose the uniform fill of a frame, graphic object, text, or page

1.	Select the frame, graphic object, text, or page with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click the Fill Color Dialog button to change the fill color.

3.	Click and hold the Mixers button to display the mixers list.

4.	Click Color Harmonies.

5.	Drag the black circle around the color wheel to change the color swatches below the wheel.

6.	From the color grid below the color wheel, click the color swatch you want to use.

To choose the outline color of a frame, graphic object, text, or page

1.	Select the frame, graphic object, text, or page with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Outline Tool flyout, and click the Outline Color Dialog button to change the outline color.

3.	Follow steps 3 to 6 from the previous procedure.

To change the relationship between the colors on the color wheel

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the "To choose the uniform fill of a frame, graphic frame, graphic object, text, or page, text, or page" procedure.

2.	Choose a hue option from the Hues list box.

Each hue option corresponds to a different configuration of circles on the color wheel. Experiment to find the configuration that provides the color set you prefer.

To change the appearance of colors in the color swatches

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the "To choose the uniform fill of a frame, graphic frame, graphic object, text, or page, text, or page" procedure.

2.	Choose a color variation option from the Variations list box.

3.	Type a number in the Number box to change the number of swatches in the color grid.

 Related Topics


Choosing a color by mixing colors

The color mixer lets you select colors from the bitmap in the color selection area and then paint on the bitmap to create new colors. You can use the preset bitmap, or you can load a different bitmap. You can save the bitmap that appears in the color selection area for future use.

To choose the uniform fill of a frame, graphic object, text, or page

1.	Select the frame, graphic object, text, or page with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click the Fill Color Dialog button to change the fill color.

3.	Click and hold the Mixers button to display the mixers list.

4.	Click Mixing Area.

5.	Click the Pick Color button.

6.	In the color selection area, click the color you want to use.

To choose the outline color of a frame, graphic object, text, or page

1.	Select the frame, graphic object, text, or page with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Outline Tool flyout, and click the Outline Color Dialog button to change the outline color.

3.	Follow steps 3 to 6 of the previous procedure.

To mix colors in the color selection area

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the "To choose the uniform fill of a frame, graphic object, text, or page" procedure.

2.	Click the Paint button.

3.	Paint inside the color selection area.

 Tip

•	The color you paint is the current color. To change the color follow the steps in the "To choose the uniform fill or outline color of a frame, graphic object, text, or page" procedure.

•	You can vary the amount of color that you place in the color selection area by moving the Blend slider to the left or right. Move the slider to the left to add more color or move it to the right to add less.

To change the properties of the paint brush

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the "To choose the uniform fill of a frame, graphic object, text, or page" procedure.

2.	Click the More button to expand the Uniform Fill dialog box.

3.	Click the Options button, click Brush Size, and click the size you want to use.

4.	Click the Options button, click Brush Type, and click the type you want to use.

To change the image in the color selection area

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the "To choose the uniform fill of a frame, graphic object, text, or page" procedure.

2.	Click the More button to expand the Uniform Fill dialog box.

3.	Click the Options button, and click Load Bitmap.

4.	Specify the folder and filename of the bitmap you want to use.

5.	Click Open.

 Tips

•	To use an empty color selection area, click the Options button and click Clear Bitmap.

•	Click the Options button and click Save Bitmap to save the image from the color selection area.

 Related Topics


Choosing a color from a fixed color palette

The PANTONE MATCHING SYSTEM, Focoltone, TOYO COLOR FINDER, and DIC fixed color palettes are all spot colors. If you create color separations when you print, each color from these palettes requires a separate printing plate. This can significantly increase the cost of your print job.

To choose the uniform fill of a frame, graphic object, text, or page

1.	Select the frame, graphic object, text, or page with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click the Fill Color Dialog button to change the fill color.

3.	Click the Fixed Palettes button.

4.	Choose a palette from the Type list box.

5.	Click the color scroll bar to change the range of colors displayed in the color selection area on the left.

6.	Click the color swatch you want to use.

To choose the outline color of a frame, graphic object, text, or page

1.	Select the frame, graphic object, text, or page with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Outline Tool flyout, and click the Outline Color Dialog button to change the outline color.

3.	Follow steps 3 to 6 of the previous procedure.

To hide or display the names of the colors

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the "To choose the uniform fill of a frame, graphic object, text, or page" procedure.

2.	Click the More button to expand the Uniform Fill dialog box.

3.	Click the Options button, and enable or disable Show Color Names.

If a check mark appears beside the Show Color Names command, the names of the colors are displayed. If a check mark does not appear beside the Show Color Names command, the names of the colors are hidden.

 Tip

•	If you want to use these colors but you don't want to use costly spot colors, then you can convert the spot colors to process colors when you print. For more information, See "Creating color separations".

 Note

•	If a fixed color palette supports tints for each of its colors, you can change the tint by typing a value in the Tint box.

 Related Topics


Choosing a color from a custom color palette

A custom color palette can include colors from any color model or fixed color palette.

To choose the uniform fill of a frame, graphic object, text, or page

1.	Select the frame, graphic object, text, or page with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click the Fill Color Dialog button to change the fill color.

3.	Click the Custom Palettes button.

4.	Choose a palette from the Type list box.

5.	Click the color scroll bar to change the range of colors displayed in the color selection area on the left.

6.	Click the color swatch you want to use.

To choose the outline color of a frame, graphic object, text, or page

1.	Select the frame, graphic object, text, or page with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Outline Tool flyout, and click the Outline Color Dialog button to change the outline color.

3.	Follow steps 3 to 6 of the previous procedure.

To display or hide the names of the colors

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the "To choose the uniform fill of a frame, graphic object, text, or page" procedure.

2.	Click the More to expand the Uniform Fill dialog box.

3.	Click the Options button and enable or disable Show Color Names.

 Note

•	Only the currently loaded palettes are displayed in the Type list box. You can load another palette by choosing Open Palette and specifying a folder and filename.

 Tip

•	The User Defined Inks are all custom spot colors. If you create color separations when you print, each color from this palette requires a separate printing plate. This can significantly increase the cost of your print job. If you want to use these colors but you don't want to use spot colors, then you can convert spot colors to process colors when you print. See "Creating color separations" for more information.

 Related Topics


Choosing a color using a color measurement device

Color measurement devices are external devices that convert the colors of frame, graphic object, text, or page to color values that a computer can understand. These devices are called colorimeters or spectrophotometers. It is important to calibrate a color measurement device before you capture colors.

To choose the uniform fill of a frame, graphic object, text, or page

1.	Select the frame, graphic object, text, or page with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click the Fill Color Dialog button to change the fill color.

3.	Click the More button to expand the Uniform Fill dialog box.

4.	Click the Options button, click Measure From, and click the color measurement device you want to use.

To choose the outline color of a frame, graphic object, text, or page

1.	Select the frame, graphic object, text, or page with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Outline Tool flyout, and click the Outline Color Dialog button to change the outline color.

3.	Follow steps 3 to 4 of the previous procedure.

To calibrate a color measurement device

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the "To choose the uniform fill of a frame, graphic object, text, or page" procedure.

2.	Click the Calibrate button, and follow the on-screen instructions.

 Note

•	You do not have to calibrate the Gretag SPM55 color measurement device.

 Related Topics


Choosing a color by setting numeric values

You can change a color by changing the values of its color components. The color components you can change depend on the color model being used to define the color. For more information about color models, see "Working with color".

To choose the uniform fill of a frame, graphic object, text, or page

1.	Select the frame, graphic object, text, or page with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click the Fill Color Dialog button to change the fill color.

3.	Click the Color Viewers button.

4.	Click the More button to expand the Outline Color dialog box.

5.	Choose a color model from the Model list box.

The color model you choose determines the color values that you can change. For example, if you choose RGB, the color values are Red, Green, and Blue. If you choose HSB, the values are Hue, Saturation, and Brightness.

6.	Type values in the color value boxes.

The range of acceptable values varies from one color model to another.

To choose the outline color of a frame, graphic object, text, or page

1.	Select the frame, graphic object, text, or page with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Outline Tool flyout, and click the Outline Color Dialog button to change the outline color.

3.	Follow steps 3 to 6 of the previous procedure.

To view RGB, CMYK, HSB, or Lab color values

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the "To choose the uniform fill of a frame, graphic object, text, or page" procedure.

2.	Click the Options button, click Value 1, and click a color model.

3.	Click the Options button, click Value 2, and click a color model.

 Related Topics


Choosing the default fill and outline colors
Choosing the default fill and outline colors for graphic objects

You can change the default outline and fill colors by choosing a color when no frame, graphic object, text, or page is selected.

To choose the default fill or outline color

1.	Hold doen SHIFT and click in the pasteboard area to ensure that no frame, graphic object, text, or page is selected.

2.	Do one of the following:

•	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click the Fill Color Dialog button to change the fill color.

•	Open the Outline Tool flyout, and click the Outline Color Dialog button to change the outline color.

 Related Topics


Comparing and swapping colors

You can see the new color of a frame, graphic object, text, or page next to the frame, graphic object, text, or page's current color before choosing a color. This lets you compare the two colors.

To compare the new color of a frame, graphic object, text, or page with the current color

1.	Select the frame, graphic object, text, or page with the Pick tool.

2.	Open the Fill Tool flyout, and click the Fill Color Dialog button to change the fill color.

3.	Click the Color Viewers button.

4.	Click the More button if the dialog box isn't expanded.

5.	Select the color you want to use.

In the top right corner of the Uniform Fill dialog box, the New Color box displays the selected color, and the Reference Color box displays the current color of the frame, graphic object, text, or page.

To swap the reference color with the new color

1.	Follow steps 1 to 5 from the previous procedure.

2.	Click the Options button, and click Swap Color.

 Related Topics


Customizing color palettes


Overview: Customizing color palettes
Customizing color palettes

Custom color palettes are collections of colors saved as a color palette file (.CPL file extension). These palettes can contain both spot colors and colors created using any color model. You can use any of the application's previously created custom palettes, or you can create new palettes from scratch. Use custom palettes when you use the same colors frequently or when you want to work with a set of colors that all look good together.

 Related Topics


Editing an existing custom palette

You can add colors to palettes to help you access colors you use often.

To open an existing custom palette

1.	Click Tools, Palette Editor.

2.	Click the Open button.

3.	Choose a folder in the Look In list box.

4.	Choose Custom Palette (*.CPL) in the Files Of Type List box.

5.	Type a file name in the File Name list box.

To edit a palette that is currently loaded

1.	Click Tools, Palette Editor.

2.	Choose the palette from the Palette list box.

Add and remove colors from the palette as you choose.

 Related Topics


Creating a custom palette

A custom palette contains only those colors that you add to it using the Palette Editor.

To create a palette

1.	Click Tools, Palette Editor.

2.	Click the New button.

3.	Choose a folder in the Look In list box.

4.	Choose Custom Palette (*.CPL) in the Files Of Type List box.

5.	Type a file name in the File Name list box.

6.	Type a description of the palette in the Description box.

 Related Topics


Saving a custom palette

If you create or edit a custom palette, you need to save your changes before exiting the Palette Editor.

To save a palette

1.	Click Tools, Palette Editor.

2.	Click the Save button.

To save a palette with a new filename

1.	Click Tools, Palette Editor.

2.	Click the Save As button.

3.	Choose a folder in the Look In list box.

4.	Choose Custom Palette (*.CPL) in the Files Of Type List box.

5.	Type a file name in the File Name list box.

 Related Topics


Changing the colors in a custom palette

Custom palettes are useful tools to let you access colors you use often. If you have a favorite color, or a color you work with often, you can have it constantly available to you by adding it to a custom palette. For example, you could have a palette that consists of all the colors in the publication you are working on.

To add a color to a custom palette

1.	Click Tools, Palette Editor.

2.	Choose a color from the color selection area.

3.	Click a color swatch in the palette area to specify the position of the new color.

The color is added immediately before the selected color swatch.

4.	Click the Add button.

To add multiple colors to a custom palette

1.	Click Tools, Palette Editor.

2.	In the color selection area, hold down SHIFT and click the color swatches that you want to add to the palette.

You can add multiple colors when you choose colors using the color blend grid, color harmonies, fixed color palettes, or other custom palettes however, you can only select groups of colors that appear consecutively.

3.	Follow steps 3 and 4 from the previous procedure.

 Tips

•	If the current MRU Color Palette is a custom color palette, you can click the Add To Palette button to add a color from the Uniform Fill and Outline Color dialog boxes. The color is placed at the end of the color palette.

•	You can add all the colors in a blended colors grid or a color harmonies grid to the current MRU Color Palette from the Uniform Fill and Outline Color dialog boxes. Add the entire grid by clicking the Options button and clicking Add All Grid Colors To Palette. The colors are placed at the end of the palette.

To replace a color in a custom palette

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the "To add a color to a custom palette" procedure.

2.	Click the Replace button.

To remove a color from a custom palette

1.	Click Tools, Palette Editor.

2.	Click a color swatch in the palette area.

3.	Click the Remove button.

To remove multiple colors from a custom palette

1.	Click Tools, Palette Editor.

2.	In the color selection area, hold down SHIFT, and click the color swatches that you want to remove from the palette.

You can only select groups of colors that appear consecutively.

3.	Click the Remove button.

 Tips

•	If you want to know if a color similar to the one you have selected in the color selection area is already included in the custom palette, click the Find Closest button. This button finds the color in the current custom palette that is closest to the color you have selected.

•	Click the Reset button to return the palette to its original state.

•	You can change the order of colors in a custom color palette by clicking the Sort button and clicking an option. You can also move individual colors by dragging them to a new position in the palette area.

 Related Topics


Naming colors in a custom palette

Naming colors helps you to keep track of the colors you add to a custom palette.

To name a color

1.	Click Tools, Palette Editor.

2.	Choose a color in the palette area.

3.	Type a name in Name box.

To display or hide the names of the colors in a custom palette

1.	Click Tools, Palette Editor.

2.	Right-click in the list of colors, and click Show Color Names.

If a check mark appears beside the Show Color Names command, the names of the colors are displayed. If a check mark does not appear beside the Show Color Names command, the names of the colors are hidden.

 Related Topics


Reproducing colors accurately


Overview: Reproducing colors accurately
Reproducing colors accurately

Each piece of equipment used to produce a document [image] from scanners to printers [image] handles color differently. If you don't take these differences into account, the colors you see on screen may not match the colors that appear on the printed page. For example, a monitor displays a range of colors, or color gamut, that differs from the color gamut that is reproduced on a printing press. This means that your document might include colors that appear properly on your monitor but can't be reproduced on paper. Furthermore, different monitors, scanners, printers, and other types of computer hardware all have slightly different color gamuts. To be translated from one device to another, you must use color profiles to account for the differences.

A color profile is a description of a device's color handling capabilities and characteristics. Accurate color profiles of your scanner, monitor, and printer let you match the colors you see on screen to the colors you see in the final output.

Color profiles are used to correct on-screen colors so that each color is displayed as accurately as possible, based on its color values. Color profiles are also used to display colors on screen as they appear when printed. Accurate color profiles can also warn you when a color you have selected lies outside of the printer's color gamut.

 Note

•	If you enable color correction, on-screen colors may appear duller.

 Related Topics


Correcting color

Color correction adjusts your on-screen colors so that they are displayed as accurately as possible. If you color correct display colors only, the on-screen colors are adjusted according to your monitor's color profile. If you also display simulated printer colors, the on-screen colors are adjusted according to your monitor's color profile and your printer's color profile. The color matching mode determines how colors are adjusted when corrections are necessary.

To color correct display colors

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, double-click Global, and click Color Management.

3.	Enable the Calibrate Colors For Display check box.

To display colors as they will print

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	Enable the Display Simulated Printer Colors check box.

3.	Click one of the following buttons:

•	Simulate Composite Printer [image] to display colors as they will print on a composite printer

•	Simulate Separations Printer [image] to display colors as they will print on a printer that uses color separations

To change the color matching mode

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the "To correct display colors" procedure.

2.	In the list of categories, click General.

3.	Choose one of the following from the Color Matching Mode list box.

•	Illustration mode [image] changes colors that are out of gamut. This means that two colors that look different before you enable color correction may look identical afterwards. This happens because the out-of-gamut color is adjusted, but the other color is not.

•	Photographic mode [image] shifts all the colors in an image so that the range of colors lies within the color gamut. This ensures that the relationship between each color is unchanged. In this case, two colors that look different before you enable color correction will still look different afterwards, but the colors themselves may shift.

•	Automatic mode [image] uses either illustration mode or photographic mode, depending on the image. Automatic mode is the default.

 Note

•	To see the effects of changing the color mode on screen, enable color correction.

 Related Topics


Viewing out-of-gamut colors

When enabled, the gamut alarm overlays out-of-gamut colors with a warning color. You can then view and change the out-of-gamut color to one that is in the printer's color gamut.

The bright green portions of the telephone represent out of gamut colors.

To enable the gamut alarm

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, double-click Global, and click Color Management.

3.	Enable the Calibrate Colors For Display check box.

4.	Enable the Display Simulated Printer Colors check box.

5.	Enable the Highlight Colors Out Of Printer Gamut check box.

To change the warning color

1.	Follow the steps from the previous procedure.

2.	Choose a color from the Warning Color color picker.

3.	Move the transparency slider to the right to make the warning color more transparent, or to the left to make the warning color less transparent.

To view out-of-gamut colors in the Palette Editor dialog box

•	Right-click the color selection area or any color swatch, and click Gamut Alarm.

To view out-of-gamut colors in the Color dialog box

1.	Click the More button to expand the color dialog box.

2.	Click the Options button, and click Gamut Alarm.

 Tip

•	A picture of a printer with a red line through it is displayed beside the color preview swatch when the current or new colors are outside the printer's color gamut. Click the right side of the color preview swatch to convert the color on the left to the closet color in the color gamut.

 Related Topics


Setting and tuning color profiles

Accurate color profiles are necessary to reproduce colors accurately in your final output. Corel VENTURA 8 includes many profiles that you can use. If you can't find the profile you need, use the Corel Color Profile wizard. The specific information you need to tune each color profile is available in the wizard.

You can also contact the manufacturer of the device to obtain a professionally created profile. Alternatively, color profiles are often available through the Internet.

To set the appropriate color profiles

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the list of categories, double-click Global, Color Management, and click Profiles.

3.	Choose a profile from the Monitor, Scanner, Composite Printer, and Separations Printer list boxes.

To tune a color profile

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Click the Color Profile Wizard button, and follow the on-screen instructions or click the Help button for more information.

 Note

•	For more information about tuning a color profile, click the Help button in the Color Profile wizard.

 Related Topics


Welcome to Corel VENTURA 8


Overview: Welcome to Corel VENTURA 8
Welcome to Corel VENTURA 8

Corel VENTURA 8 is an easy-to-use desktop publishing program that lets you combine text, pictures, tables, databases, and other elements into high-quality, professional publications. It provides everything you need to create books, magazine layouts, graphic-intensive newsletters, web pages, portable documents, and any other type of publication. With Corel VENTURA 8, you can create one document and publish it to paper, electronic media, and the World Wide Web.

 More Detailed Information
 Related Topics


Overview: About Corel Corporation
About Corel Corporation

Corel Corporation is recognized internationally as an award-winning developer and marketer of productivity applications, graphics, and Internet software. We pride ourselves in delivering high-quality products by actively seeking your input. We use this feedback and respond quickly to you, the users of Corel products worldwide.

Corel ships its products through a network of more than 160 distributors in 70 countries worldwide. Corel is traded on the Toronto Stock Exchange (symbol: COS) and the NASDAQ [image] National Market System (symbol: COSFF).

For more information about Corel and our products, check out our World Wide Web site at http://www.corel.com.

 More Detailed Information
 Related Topics


Using Corel VENTURA documentation


Overview: Using Corel VENTURA documentation
Using Corel VENTURA documentation

Corel VENTURA 8 includes online and paper documentation to help you learn and use the program efficiently.

The Corel VENTURA 8 documentation set

Online Help	The online Help system enables you to retrieve all the information you need quickly, and then return to your work. Help appears in a separate window on your screen. For quick access, you can keep the Help window displayed on top of the application window. Corel Database Publisher, a program included with Corel VENTURA 8, includes its own online Help system.

Online Tutorial	The online tutorial teaches you how to use Corel VENTURA. The tutorial is very useful for both beginners who want to learn Corel VENTURA and for users of previous versions who want to learn the new features in Corel VENTURA 8.

Context-sensitive Help	The context-sensitive Help displays information that is relevant to the task you are currently performing. You access it by clicking the Context Help button, then clicking the item you want information about. Context-sensitive Help provides help for menu commands, toolbar buttons, dialog boxes, and dialog box controls.

ToolTips	ToolTips provide information about icons and buttons on the toolbars and the Toolbox. ToolTips display in a balloon when you position the cursor over a button.

User Guide	The Corel VENTURA User Guide contains most of the information from the online Help. Some reference information, such as the glossary, table functions, and details about equations, is included only in online Help.

We want your feedback

In our continuing efforts to help you get the most from Corel VENTURA, we look for new and better ways to document our products. If you have any suggestions for improvements to the documentation, please let us know. Address your letter to:

Corel VENTURA Documentation Manager
Corel Corporation
1600 Carling Avenue
Ottawa, Ontario, Canada
KIZ 8R7
Fax: (613) 728-9790
email: venturaprodman@corel.ca

 Related Topics


Overview: Documentation conventions
Documentation conventions

Before you start using Corel VENTURA 8, it's important to understand the conventions used in the documentation.

Mouse conventions

The following are conventions related to using the mouse:

When you see this ...	Do this ...

Click File, New	Click the File menu with the mouse, and click the word New in the menu.

Click Format, Arrange, To Back	Click the Format menu, click Arrange, and click To Back from the submenu that appears.

Enable a check box	Click the check box to place a check mark or an "X" inside the box.

Disable a check box	Click the check box to remove the check mark or "X."

Select text	Click and drag to highlight text.

Click a paragraph	Click to plant the cursor in the paragraph.

Click a frame	Click anywhere in a frame or click the border of the frame.

Click a page	Click anywhere on the page or click the pasteboard of the page.

Choose a chapter from the Chapter list box	Click the Chapter list box, and click the chapter you want.

Right-click, and click Paste	Click the right mouse button, and click the Paste command from the submenu that appears.

Keyboard conventions

The following are conventions related to keyboard actions:

When you see this ...	Do this ...

Press ENTER	Press the Enter key on your keyboard.

CTRL + SHIFT	Press the Control key and the Shift key at the same time.

 Related Topics


Using online Help

The Help Topics dialog box, accessed by clicking Help, Help Topics, provides three ways to find information. You can select a topic from the Contents page, use the Index page to search for a topic, or use the Find page to search for specific words and phrases in Help topics.

To access Help topics

1.	Click Help, Help Topics.

2.	Do one of the following:

•	Click the Contents tab to browse through topics by category.

•	Click the Index tab to see a list of index entries, then type the first few letters of the subject about which you want information.

•	Click the Find tab to search for a particular word or phrase in the online Help.

 Related Topics


Accessing the online tutorial

The online tutorial provides lessons that teach you how to use many of the features of Corel VENTURA 8. It will provide you with the basic skills you'll require to start creating your own publications. If you are familiar with previous versions of Corel VENTURA, the tutorial will teach you how to use new features in the program.

To access the online tutorial

•	Click Help, Tutorial.

 Related Topics


Accessing context-sensitive Help

Context-sensitive Help is accessible from wherever you are in Corel VENTURA. You can access context-sensitive Help from the menus, dialog boxes, Property Bars, and all other toolbars in Corel VENTURA.

The most common ways to access context-sensitive Help are as follows:

To get help on ...	Do this ...

Dialog boxes	Click the Help button in the dialog box.

Press F1.

Menu commands	Click the Context Help button [image] on the toolbar, click a menu, and click a command from the menu.

Press F1 when a command is highlighted.

Tools and dialog controls	Click the Context Help button [image] on the toolbar, and click the item for which you want help.

Click Help, What's This?, then click the item for which you want help.

Right-click the item and from the pop-up menu click What's This?, then click the item for which you want help.

Click the What's This Help button [image] in a dialog box, then click the dialog control for which you want help.

Selected objects	Right-click an object, and click Properties. Information about the object's type, fill type, outline type, and any applied special effects appears in the Properties dialog box.

 Note

•	You can also get context-sensitive Help by pressing SHIFT + F1, and then clicking the item for which you want help

 Tip

•	Use the Status Bar at the bottom of the Application Window to familiarize yourself with the tools. The Status Bar displays information about buttons, controls, and menu commands as you move the cursor over them.

 Related Topics


Printing Help

You can print specific Help topics or print entire sections of online Help.

To ...	Do this ...

Print an entire section	On the Contents page, select the section you want to print, then click the Print button that appears at the bottom of the Help dialog box.

Print a selected topic	Click the Print button at the top of the Help window, or right-click the window and click Print Topic.

 Related Topics


Corel Services and Support


Overview: Corel services and support
Corel services and support

Corel is committed to providing customers with high-quality technical support. The following sections describe the variety of support services available. The terms of Corel technical support offerings are subject to change without notice.

Basic services

Corel offers the following technical support options, most of which are available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. These services are useful if you prefer not to pay for support or encounter problems during off-hours.

IVAN (Interactive Voice Answering Network)

IVAN, the Interactive Voice Answering Network contains, answers to commonly asked questions about Corel products and is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. It is regularly updated with the latest information, tips, and tricks. You can also request that IVAN solutions be faxed to you. There is no charge for this service beyond the cost of the telephone call.

•	North America 1-613-728-6398

•	Europe (English only) (++353)-1-708 2525

Automated FAX on Demand

Corel's Technical Support personnel maintain an automated FAX on Demand system of numbered documents that contain up-to-date information about common issues, tips, and tricks. This service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.

•	North America (613) 728-0826, extension 3080

•	Worldwide (English only) (++353)-1-708 2525

You will be asked for a document number and your fax number. The document you request is automatically sent to you. To fax a catalog of documents to yourself, call the Automated FAX on Demand system number and request document 2000.

AnswerPerfect

Customers can now submit support incidents (questions) by e-mail to Corel's Web site for the introductory price of $14.95 US per incident, payable by credit card for English language products only. Corel is committed to responding to AnswerPerfect support incidents within one business day.

Bulletin Board System (BBS)

If you have a modem and a communications software package, you can access the Corel BBS. You can download files, troubleshooting information, and utilities. You can also transfer problem files to Customer Support through the BBS.

•	North American BBS (613) 728-4752

•	European BBS (++353)-1-708 2700

 Note

•	Before calling Technical Support, you may want to refer to Troubleshooting in the Reference section of the Corel VENTURA online Help. This section provides information about troubleshooting techniques, printing problems, and error messages. The information in this section may save you a call to Technical Support.

 Related Topics


Overview: CompuServe
CompuServe

Interact with others and Corel technicians to obtain product information and support. CompuServe is available 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, including holidays. Corel representatives will respond from 8:30 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. eastern standard time, from Monday to Friday, excluding holidays.

If you have a CompuServe membership, you can access Corel technical information by entering one of the following at the Compuserve prompt:

•	GO VENTURA (for English)

•	GO COREL (for English)

•	GO CORELGER (for German)

•	GO CORELFR (for French)

•	GO CORELNL (for Dutch)

•	GO CORELSCAN (for Scandinavian)

•	GO CORELLATIN (for Spanish)

 Related Topics


Overview: World Wide Web Site (WWW)
World Wide Web Site (WWW)

The World Wide Web address for Corel products on the Internet is http://www.corel.com. At this location, you can quickly search Corel's Searchable Knowledge Base. From the database you can read, print, or download documents that contain answers to many of your technical questions or problems. This site also contains files you can download.

File Transfer Protocol (FTP)

You can download printer files and other files through our anonymous FTP site at ftp.corel.com.

Priority technical support services

For information about the support options available to you after your classic support expires, please contact Corel Technical Support at (613) 728-6398.

Support Newsgroups

The Support Newsgroup, accessible from the Corel homepage, is intended to provide users the opportunity to exchange information, tips, and techniques with other users of Corel products. The newsgroup is located at http://www.corel.com/support/newsgroup.htm.

 Related Topics


Overview: Worldwide technical support
Worldwide technical support

Corel customers residing outside North America can contact Corel Technical Support representatives in Dublin, Ireland, or a local Authorized Support Partner. Technical support outside North America is available to you at the following locations. If your country is not listed below, please check the Support section on our World Wide Web site at http://www.corel.com. You can also call (353)-1-7082600 for information about contacting Technical Support.

Priority technical support services

To request an up-to-date listing of Corel Authorized Support Partners worldwide, and a copy of Corel Priority Technical Support Policy, contact Corel Technical Support at (353)-1-7082600.

Latin America

Argentina	(541) 954-6500

Brazil	011 5505 4725

Chile	562 236-1036

Columbia	57-1-2150411

Mexico	01-800-024-2673

Europe

Czech Republic	420-2-312-3871

France	(1)-40-92-76-20

Germany	0180-52-58-211

Hungary	36 1 327 57 37

Poland	48-0-71-347-72-79

Russia	095-361-2000

United Kingdom	0171-298 85 10

Rest of Europe (Ireland)	(353)-1-7082600

Middle East

Dubai	971.4.523.526

Israel	972 2 679 3726

Asia Pacific

Australia	02 9898 6860

Hong Kong	8100-3729

India	91 11 3351948

Indonesia	001 803 65 7266

Japan	03-5645-8379

Malaysia	1-800-800-1090

New Zealand	09 526 1155

Singapore	1-800-773-1400

South Korea	82-2-639-8778

Taiwan	886 2 2550 9500

Africa

South Africa	021-658-4222

 Related Topics


Overview: Before calling Corel Technical Support
Before calling Corel Technical Support

Before calling Corel Technical Support, please have the following information available. This information assists the Technical Support representative in helping you more quickly and efficiently:

•	A brief description of the problem, including the exact text of any error messages received and the steps to recreate the problem.

•	The type of computer, monitor, pointing device (for example, mouse, tablet), printer, and video card (display adapter) in use.

•	The version of Microsoft Windows and the Corel product in use. Choose the About Windows 95 or About Windows NT command from the Help menu in Windows Explorer to find which version of Windows you are running.

•	A list of any programs loaded into RAM (for example, TSRs). Check the Startup folder in the Programs menu to determine if you are running any other programs.

 Note

•	Before calling Technical Support, you may want to refer to Troubleshooting in the Reference section of the Corel VENTURA online Help. This section provides information about troubleshooting techniques, printing problems, and error messages. The information in this section may save you a call to Corel Technical Support.

 Related Topics


Viewing program and system information

Corel VENTURA provides easy access to information about the program and your system.

Program information consists of the program name, version number, serial number, and user name. This information doesn't change. You'll find it particularly useful if you ever need help from Corel Technical Support Services.

System Information consists of details about any of the following five categories: system, display, printing, Corel .EXE and .DLL files, and system .DLL files. For example, you can see how much memory you have on the drive to which you want to save a file. You can save any system information in a text file called SYSINFO.TXT.

To view program and system information

1.	Click Help, About Corel VENTURA.

The About Corel VENTURA dialog box displays the version number and registration information for your software.

2.	Click the System Info button to view system information.

3.	Choose a category from the Choose A Category list box.

 Tip

•	Use the Save button to store system information for printing. System information is saved as SYSINFO.TXT. A message box tells you where the file is saved.


Overview: Customer service worldwide
Customer service worldwide

Corel Customer Service is operated by a number of third-party companies on behalf of Corel. If you would like additional information about Corel products or services, please call one of the telephone numbers listed below. If your country is not listed, please call the general number listed below. General customer service and product information can also be accessed through the World Wide Web at http://www.corel.com.

Country	Call this number

United States	1-800-772-6735

Canada	1-800-772-6735

Argentina	0-800-3-9192

Australia	1-800-658-850

Austria	0660-5875

Belgium	0800 11930

Denmark	800 187 55

Finland	0800-1-13502

France	05 90 65 12

Germany	0130 815074

Hong Kong	810-COREL

Ireland	1800-242800

Italy	06-52362602

Japan	03-5645-8567

Korea	82-2-639-8778

Luxembourg	0800-2213

Mexico	1-800-024-2673

Netherlands	06-022-2084

New Zealand	0800-267351

Norway	800 11661

Portugal	05055-3001

South Africa	0800-23-4211

Spain	900 95 35 38

Sweden	020 791 085

Switzerland	0800-55-8224

United Kingdom	0800-581028

General	353-1-706-3912

 Related Topics


Exploring the work area


Overview: Exploring the work area
Exploring the work area

The work area in Corel VENTURA includes everything you see on your screen when you start the program. The large open area is the Publication Window. Depending on the view you choose, the Publication Window displays one or more pages. For information about changing the settings for your Publication Window, see "Viewing your publication."

The Menu Bar, which is located at the top of the work area, just below the Title Bar, provides access to most of the Corel VENTURA commands. Many of these commands can also be accessed through toolbars and flyouts.

The Property Bar, which is located above the Publication Window, is a context-sensitive toolbar. It gives you quick access to frequently used functions and commands that are relevant to the task you're performing.

In Corel VENTURA 8, you can create multiple workspaces. A workspace contains the workspace settings from the Options dialog box. When you set the options the way you want them, you can save them to an existing workspace or create a new workspace. If several people are using a single version of Corel VENTURA, or if you find you need different settings for different tasks, you can use workspaces to save the settings for each user or task.

Modeless cursors and dialog boxes

Modeless cursors allow you to select frames and graphic objects, type text, and edit table data without having to manually switch tools. In many cases, Corel VENTURA automatically changes the cursor to provide the correct tool for the different types of objects you are working on. However, some operations, such as drawing graphic objects, editing nodes, or anchoring frames require you to manually change tools.

Many Corel VENTURA dialog boxes are also modeless. This means that you can leave the dialog box open while working on your publication, and you can keep more than one modeless dialog box open at the same time. For example, the Paragraph Properties, Frame Properties, and Page Properties dialog boxes are all modeless and can remain open as you format the paragraphs, frames, and pages in your publication. This provides easy access to the item's properties without having to access the dialog boxes using the Main Menu bar. Each of the modeless dialog boxes has an Apply button that allows you to apply your changes and keep the dialog box open.

 Related Topics


Using toolbars

Toolbars provide quick, one-click access to commands. The Standard toolbar, shown below, is displayed by default above the Publication Window. Other toolbars can be displayed by enabling them in the Toolbar dialog box or by dragging a flyout off its toolbar. Toolbars can be docked at the side, top, or bottom of the Application Window, or left floating in the Publication Window.

To display or hide toolbars

1.	Click View, Toolbars, to display the Options dialog box.

2.	Enable the check box beside each toolbar you want to display and disable the check box beside each toolbar you want to hide.

To display a toolbar by tearing off a flyout

1.	Open a flyout from the Toolbox.

2.	Click anywhere on the background of the flyout, and drag the flyout to the Publication Window.

To dock a toolbar

•	Drag the Title Bar of the toolbar to the top, bottom, or a side of the Application Window, and place its outline where you want it docked.

To size floating toolbars

1.	Place the cursor over an edge of the toolbar.

2.	When the cursor becomes a two-sided arrow, click and drag the edge to create the size and shape you want.

 Notes

•	You can only change the shape of floating toolbars. When you dock a toolbar, it is oriented horizontally when placed at the top or bottom of the Application Window or vertically when placed on the left or right side.

•	The toolbars are optimized for 800 x 600 resolution. Therefore, if you are working in a lower resolution, portions of toolbars might appear cut off.

 Related Topics


Accessing flyouts

Flyouts are toolbars that are accessible from a tool on another toolbar. A small black arrow at the bottom right corner of a tool button indicates that you can access a flyout from that tool.

You can drag a flyout off its host toolbar button and display it as a separate toolbar in the Publication Window.

To display a flyout

•	Click the black arrow at the bottom right corner of a tool button, or hold the mouse button down on the tool until the flyout is displayed.

To tear a flyout off a toolbar

1.	Open a flyout.

2.	Click anywhere on the background of the flyout, and drag the flyout to the Publication Window.

 Related Topics


Using the Property Bar

The Property Bar is a context-sensitive toolbar that displays buttons and options related to the task you are performing. For example, when text is selected, the Property Bar contains only text-related commands.

By default, the Property Bar is located above the Publication Window, but it can be moved, docked, or hidden like any other toolbar.

To dock the Property Bar

•	Drag the Title Bar of the Property Bar to the top, bottom, or a side of the Application Window and place its outline where you want it docked.

To display or hide the Property Bar

•	Click View, Property Bar.

If a check mark appears beside the command name, the Property Bar is displayed. If no check mark appears, the Property Bar is hidden.

 Related Topics


 Internet and electronic publishing and distribution


Overview: Internet and electronic publishing and distribution
Internet and electronic publishing and distribution

With Corel VENTURA, you can publish to the Internet or to an Adobe Acrobat file. You can publish to the Internet using either the Publish As HTML (Hyper Text Markup Language) command or Corel Barista. Publishing as HTML turns your Corel VENTURA publication into an HTML document with a .HTM extension. Corel Barista is provided with Corel VENTURA and converts your publication to the Java Programming Language. Java gives you formatting options, such as multiple column layout and complex fills, that aren't available in HTML. Documents saved in the Corel Barista format are saved as Java applets. Once you have created a document that is ready for the Internet, you must see your system administrator or Internet service provider to make your document accessible to Internet users.

If you publish to Adobe Acrobat, you create an electronic document in Portable Document Format (PDF), which is accessible to anyone who installs the free Adobe Acrobat Reader software. The Adobe Acrobat version of your publication can be distributed across platforms while maintaining the original appearance of the publication.

You can also distribute your publication electronically through email. If you access your email program directly from Corel VENTURA, the active publication is automatically attached to the email message.

 More Detailed Information


Publishing as HTML


Overview: Publishing as HTML
Publishing as HTML

When you convert your Corel VENTURA publication to an HTML publication, you choose between a default conversion and a custom conversion. If you choose the default conversion, Corel VENTURA automatically maps its tags to HTML tags.

If you choose a custom conversion, you map Corel VENTURA tags to HTML tags. You can modify the formatting of HTML tags by changing attributes such as font size, horizontal alignment, and spacing. If you decide you don't like your mapping and formatting changes, you can reverse the changes for a selected tag or for all the tags you modified. However, you don't have to map and format each tag to control the appearance of an HTML document. You can also import the HTML conversion setup from another publication or you can use Cascading Style Sheets.

Along with tag mapping and formatting, components such as frames, headers, hyperlinks, and image maps can be customized in an HTML document. When you add frames, you can specify the background and contents of each frame. Headers let you include information with your document that only you need to know. They are only visible in the HTML source code and do not appear on the Internet page that readers see. Hyperlinks and image maps let your readers jump to different areas within your document, or to other documents on the Internet.

You can also customize overall settings for an HTML document. Because HTML does not support tabs, you can set whether tabs in the Corel VENTURA publication are converted to spaces or if they are omitted from the HTML document. By default, tabs are converted to spaces. You can also set how pictures display and the font size for text.

Corel VENTURA features not supported by HTML

HTML does not support all of the desktop-publishing capabilities provided by Corel VENTURA. For this reason, your HTML document may not look exactly like the original Corel VENTURA publication. If you publish to Corel Barista, more of the Corel VENTURA formatting is supported. HTML does not support the following Corel VENTURA formatting:

•	multiple column layout

•	booklet and tent-card layouts

•	tabs and indents

•	vertical rules

•	headers and footers

•	frame captions on picture frames (supported on text frames)

•	type effects, such as background color and drop caps

•	frame rules

•	text and picture in the same frame (the text takes precedence and the picture appears as a tiled background)

•	rotated frames and text

•	unanchored frames and frames anchored outside page margins (placement is unpredictable)

 More Detailed Information
 Related Topics


Working with HTML tags


Overview: Working with HTML tags
Working with HTML tags

When you convert your publication to HTML, Corel VENTURA can convert your publication automatically or you can customize the conversion. For example, you can modify the attributes of HTML tags and you can specify which Corel VENTURA tag corresponds to which HTML tag. If you don't like the changes you've made to a tag, you can reverse them.

 Related Topics


Publishing to HTML without customizing tags

The fastest way to convert your publication to HTML is to let Corel VENTURA automatically map its tags to HTML tags.

To publish to HTML without customization

1.	Click File, Publish As, HTML.

2.	Type the location where you want to save the HTML document and the HTML document's name in the Main HTML Document text box.

3.	Click one of the following buttons to specify the range of the publication that you want to convert:

•	Publication

•	Current Chapter

•	Current Page

4.	Enable the Launch Browser check box to open your browser when you publish to HTML.

5.	Click the Publish button.

 Related Topics


Mapping Corel VENTURA tags to HTML tags

Instead of using the conversion defaults, you can map each Corel VENTURA tag to the HTML tag of your choice. Any tags you don't map are converted using the default setting. You can also set the position each tag should occupy in relation to the paragraph tag.

To map Corel VENTURA tags to HTML tags

1.	Click File, Publish As, HTML.

2.	Click the Setup button if the HTML Setup option buttons are not displayed.

3.	Click the Text button.

4.	Enable the Enable Customization check box.

5.	In the HTML tag list, click the tag that you want to change.

6.	Choose the new HTML tag from the list box that appears.

To position mapped HTML tags in relation to the paragraph tag

1.	Repeat steps 1 to 4 from the previous procedure.

2.	In the Tag Name list, click the tag whose HTML attributes you want to modify.

3.	Click the Attributes button.

4.	Click the Custom Tags tab.

5.	Type the beginning tag in the Open Tags box.

The Open tag will be displayed on the first line of the Formatting details box when you return to the Text HTML Formatting dialog box.

6.	Type the ending tag in the Close Tags box.

The Close tag will be displayed on the last line of the Formatting details box when you return to the Text HTML Formatting dialog box.

7.	Click one of the following buttons:

•	Inside [image] places the beginning and ending tags inside the paragraph tags

•	Outside [image] places the beginning and ending tags outside the paragraph tags

 Related Topics


Formatting HTML tags

When you choose a custom conversion for your publication, you can associate icons, rules, horizontal alignment, spacing, and fonts with a selected HTML tag. Rules are lines or pictures that you use to delineate areas of your HTML document. The Fonts option lets you choose the font type, size, and color for the selected tag. HTML font sizes are unitless and browser-dependent. A value of one displays text using the browser's smallest font size; whereas, a value of seven uses the browser's largest font size.

To associate icons with an HTML tag

1.	Click File, Publish As, HTML.

2.	Click the Setup button if the HTML Setup option buttons are not displayed.

3.	Click the Text button.

4.	Enable the Enable Customization check box.

5.	In the Tag Name list, click the tag whose HTML attributes you want to modify.

6.	Click the Attributes button.

7.	Click the Icons tab.

8.	Enable one of the following check boxes:

•	Icon Before [image] adds an icon immediately before the tag. In the File box, type the location of the icon you want to add or click the Browse button and locate the file in the Open dialog box.

•	Icon After [image] adds an icon immediately after the tag. In the File box, type the location of the icon you want to add or click the Browse button and locate the file in the Open dialog box.

To modify the list item tag

1.	Follow steps 1 to 6 from the previous procedure.

2.	Click the List Item tab.

3.	Choose which level in the list you want to format from the Level list box.

4.	Enable the Strip Past First Whitespace check box to remove spaces at the beginning of each paragraph in the list.

5.	Enable one of the following buttons:

•	Bulleted List [image] creates a bulleted list

•	Numbered List [image] creates a numbered list. Choose the type of numbering you want from the Numbering Style list box.

To customize the font the HTML tag uses

1.	Follow steps 1 to 6 from "To associate icons with an HTML tag".

2.	Click the Font tab.

3.	Enable one of the following buttons:

•	Absolute [image] sets the tag's font size to correspond to one of the HTML font sizes. Choose the font size from the Absolute list box.

•	Relative To Base [image] sets the tag's font size relative to the base font size. For example, typing +1 sets a font size that's one size larger than the base font size. Choose the size from the Relative To Base list box.

•	Default [image] sets the tag's font size to the current base font size.

4.	Enable the Font check box, and choose the font you want from the Font list box.

5.	Enable the Color check box, and choose the color you want from the Color list box.

6.	Enable any of the following check boxes to apply font attributes to the tag:

•	Bold

•	Italic

•	Underline

•	Strike-thru

•	Superscript

•	Subscript

 Tip

•	For information about setting the base font size, see "Setting the font size in an HTML document."

To place rules above or below an HTML tag

1.	Follow steps 1 to 6 from "To associate icons with an HTML tag."

2.	Click the Rules tab.

3.	Enable one or both of the following check boxes:

•	Above [image] adds a rule above the text to which the tag applies

•	Below [image] adds a rule below the text to which the tag applies

4.	Choose one of the following from the Horizontal Alignment list box:

•	left

•	center

•	right

5.	Enable the 3D Shading check box if you want the rule to have a three-dimensional appearance.

6.	Enable the Height check box to specify the thickness of the rule, and type the height in pixels in the Pixels box.

7.	Enable the Width check box to specify the length of the rule, and type the width in the text box. Enable either the Percent or the Pixels button. Percent refers to the percentage of the page covered by the line.

8.	Enable the Custom Graphic check box if you want to use a picture as a rule, and type the name and location of the picture in the text box.

To set the horizontal alignment and the spacing for an HTML tag

1.	Click File, Publish As, HTML.

2.	Click the Setup button if the HTML Setup option buttons are not displayed.

3.	Click the Text button.

4.	Enable the Enable Customization check box.

5.	In the Tag Name list, click the tag whose HTML attributes you want to modify.

6.	Click the Attributes button.

7.	Click the Align/Space tab.

8.	Choose one of the following horizontal alignments from the Alignment list box:

•	left

•	right

•	center

9.	Enable one of the following check boxes:

•	Blank Line Before [image] places a blank line above the text the tag applies to

•	Blank Line After [image] places a blank line below the text the tag applies to

 Related Topics


Reversing HTML tag mapping and formatting

If you customize an individual tag and subsequently decide you preferred the original mapping and formatting, you can reset the tag to its original settings. You can also reset all of the tags you have customized the mapping and formatting for.

To reverse mapping and formatting for one tag

1.	Click File, Publish As, HTML.

2.	Click the Setup button if the HTML Setup option buttons are not displayed.

3.	Click the Text button.

4.	Enable the Enable Customization check box.

5.	In the Tag Name list, click the tag whose HTML attributes you want to modify.

6.	Click the Reset Tag button.

To reverse mapping and formatting for all tags

1.	Click File, Publish As, HTML.

2.	Click the Setup button if the HTML Setup option buttons are not displayed.

3.	Click the Text button.

4.	Enable the Enable Customization check box.

5.	Click the Reset All button.

 Related Topics


Formatting an HTML document


Overview: Formatting an HTML document
Formatting an HTML document

You can format an HTML document by adding frames and headers to it. You can also set picture display and font size options and specify whether tabs are converted to spaces.

 Related Topics


Adding frames to an HTML document

Corel VENTURA lets you divide your HTML document into several on-screen sections, called frames. The Corel VENTURA default divides your publication into two frames. However, you can choose to have up to four frames. You must publish your entire publication to HTML (including items such as a table of contents, an index, a list of chapters, and a list of figures) in order to add frames to your publication.

To add frames to an HTML document

1.	Click File, Publish As, HTML.

2.	Enable the Publication button in the Range section.

3.	Click the Setup button if the HTML Setup option buttons are not displayed.

4.	Click the Options button.

5.	Click the Frames tab.

6.	Enable the Create HTML Frames check box.

To add publication elements to frames in an HTML document

1.	Follow steps 1 to 6 from "To add frames to an HTML document."

2.	In the Ventura Generated Combobox section, enable one or all of the following check boxes:

•	Table Of Contents

•	Index

•	List Of Chapters

•	List Of Figures

To customize the background of the main frame of an HTML document

1.	Follow steps 1 to 6 from "To add frames to an HTML document."

2.	Choose a background color from the Main Frame color picker.

3.	Enable one of the following check boxes:

•	Picture [image] adds a picture to the background. Click the Browse button to specify the location of the picture.

•	Auto [image] uses the background that Corel VENTURA applies by default.

To customize the background of the publication element frames

1.	Follow steps 1 to 6 from "To add frames to an HTML document."

2.	Choose a background color from the Ventura Generated color picker.

3.	Enable the Picture check box to add a picture to the background.

4.	Click the Browse button to specify the location of the picture.

To add additional frames to an HTML document

1.	Follow steps 1 to 6 from "To add frames to an HTML document."

2.	Click the Frame Properties button.

3.	Click the Contents tab.

4.	Enable one of the following check boxes:

•	Left Banner [image] places a frame lengthwise on the left side of your screen

•	Full Height [image] makes your left banner the full height of your screen, even when other frames are added

•	Top Banner [image] places a frame widthwise at the top of your screen

•	Bottom Banner [image] places a frame widthwise at the bottom of your screen

To specify the contents of a frame

1.	Follow steps 1 to 6 from "To add frames to an HTML document."

2.	Click the Frame Properties button.

3.	Click the Contents tab.

4.	Choose one of the following frames from the Content list box:

•	Main

•	List Of Chapters

•	Table Of Contents

•	Index

•	List Of Figures

5.	Click the Browse button to specify the location of the contents.

To change the attributes of a frame

1.	Follow steps 1 to 6 from "To add frames to an HTML document."

2.	Click the Frame Properties button.

3.	Click the Attributes tab.

4.	In the Frame box, click the frame to which you want to apply attributes.

5.	From the Scrolling list box, choose one of the following:

•	Auto [image] scroll bars appear if the contents of a frame are too large to fully appear in the frame

•	Yes [image] scroll bars are present at all times

•	No [image] scroll bars never appear

6.	Type the width of the margin in pixels in the Margin Width box.

7.	Type the height of the margin in pixels in the Margin Height box.

8.	Enable the Resizable check box to let the people who view your HTML document change the size of the frames.

9.	Enable the Border check box to add a border between your frames.

 Related Topics


Setting picture options in an HTML document

You use the options in the HTML Pictures dialog box to set how pictures in a Corel VENTURA publication display in an HTML document. By default, Corel VENTURA embeds pictures in your HTML document and converts them to .JPG format. If you prefer, you can convert the pictures to .GIF format or leave them out of your HTML publication entirely.

To make a picture an inline image

1.	Click File, Publish As, HTML.

2.	Click the Setup button if the HTML Setup option buttons are not displayed.

3.	Click the Pictures button.

4.	Enable the Publish Pictures check box.

5.	From the Convert Pictures To list box, choose one of the following formats:

•	.JPG

•	.GIF

•	.PNG

6.	Enable the Copy Linked GIF/JPG check box if you want to copy the linked GIF/JPG files to the HTML directory with no processing.

This means that none of the scaling you performed on the picture in Corel VENTURA will have an effect in the HTML document.

7.	Choose Inline Image from the Show As list box.

8.	In the Border Thickness box, type the pixel width of the border surrounding the picture.

9.	Type the amount of space surrounding a picture in one or both of the following boxes:

•	Vertical Spacing [image] specifies the amount of space above and below the picture

•	Horizontal Spacing [image] specifies the amount of space on the left and right sides of the picture

To make a picture a Thumbnail Link

1.	Click File, Publish As, HTML.

2.	Click the Setup button if the HTML Setup option buttons are not displayed.

3.	Click the Pictures button.

4.	Enable the Publish Pictures check box.

5.	From the Convert Pictures To list box, choose one of the following formats:

•	.JPG

•	.GIF

•	.PNG

6.	Enable the Copy Linked GIF/JPG check box if you want to copy the linked GIF/JPG files to the HTML directory with no processing.

This means that none of the scaling you performed on the picture in Corel VENTURA will have an effect in the HTML document.

7.	Choose Thumbnail Link from the Save As list box.

8.	Click the Percent Of Original button, and type the size of the thumbnail as a percentage of the original picture in the text box.

9.	Click the Size In Pixels button, and type the height and width of the thumbnail in pixels in the two text boxes.

To make a picture a text link

1.	Click File, Publish As, HTML.

2.	Click the Setup button if the HTML Setup option buttons are not displayed.

3.	Click the Pictures button.

4.	Enable the Publish Pictures check box.

5.	From the Convert Pictures To list box, choose one of the following formats:

•	.JPG

•	.GIF

•	.PNG

6.	Enable the Copy Linked GIF/JPG check box if you want to copy the linked GIF/JPG files to the HTML directory with no processing.

This means that none of the scaling you performed on the picture in Corel VENTURA will have an effect in the HTML document.

7.	Choose Text Link from the Show As list box.

To disable the publish pictures option

1.	Click File, Publish As, HTML.

2.	Click the Setup button if the HTML Setup option buttons are not displayed.

3.	Click the Pictures button.

4.	Disable the Publish Pictures check box.

 Related Topics


Using headers in HTML documents

Headers are useful for attaching information to your HTML document that you want to see, but that you don't want your audience to see. Header information only appears in the source code of an HTML document, which can be seen in an HTML or text editor and can't be seen by people who view your document normally.

To set header options

1.	Click File, Publish As, HTML.

2.	Click the Setup button if the HTML Setup option buttons are not displayed.

3.	Click the Options button.

4.	Click the Header tab.

5.	In the Comment box, type the information you want to appear in the header.

6.	Type the name of the publication in the Title box.

7.	In the Base URL box, type the Uniform Resource Locator (URL) you want referenced for relative addressing.

8.	Type the META tag in the META Information box.

The META tag lets you specify the refresh properties for your HTML page.

 Related Topics


Setting the font size in an HTML document

You can map font sizes in your Corel VENTURA publication to the seven font sizes HTML supports. You can designate one of the HTML font sizes as the base font size and then set the font sizes in each of the HTML tags relative to this base font size. Specifying font sizes relative to the base font size lets you change the font sizes in the entire HTML document simply by changing the size of the base font.

To set HTML font sizes

1.	Click File, Publish As, HTML.

2.	Click the Setup button if the HTML Setup option buttons are not displayed.

3.	Click the Options button.

4.	Click the General tab.

5.	Choose the base font size in the Base HTML Font Size box.

6.	In the Upper Point Range column, type a corresponding point size for each HTML font size.

 Note

•	The actual font size depends on the browser that is used to view the publication. A value of 1 displays text using the browser's smallest font size; whereas, a value of 7 uses the browser's largest font size.

 Related Topics


Converting tabs to spaces in an HTML document

Because HTML does not support tabs, Corel VENTURA converts tabs to spaces. If you do not want the tabs in your HTML document, you can disable the Convert Tabs To Spaces check box.

To convert tabs to spaces

1.	Click File, Publish As, HTML.

2.	Click the Setup button if the HTML Setup option buttons are not displayed.

3.	Click the Options button.

4.	Click the General tab.

5.	Enable the Convert Tabs To Spaces check box.

6.	In the Spaces Per Tab box, type the number of spaces you want to replace each tab.

To disable the convert tabs to spaces setting

1.	Click File, Publish As, HTML.

2.	Click the Setup button if the HTML Setup option buttons are not displayed.

3.	Click the Options button.

4.	Click the General tab.

5.	Disable the Convert Tabs To Spaces check box.

 Related Topics


Creating links in an HTML document


Overview: Creating links in an HTML document
Creating links in an HTML document

You can create links in an HTML document using either text hyperlinks or image maps. Corel VENTURA lets you create and format your own hyperlinks. It also lets you convert tables of contents, indexes, and cross-references in your Corel VENTURA publication into HTML hyperlinks. Corel VENTURA also supports image maps; however you must create the image map in Corel PHOTO-PAINT and then import it into Corel VENTURA.

 Related Topics


Creating hyperlinks

You can create a hyperlink within your publication to link to another part of your publication or to link to another document on the World Wide Web. If you are creating a hyperlink to another part of the same Corel VENTURA publication, then you need to create a marker. A marker acts as a target for the hyperlink. You can insert the same marker in different locations in your publication.

You can control the appearance of your hyperlinks in both the Corel VENTURA version of your publication and in the HTML version. The attributes you apply to the hyperlink in the HTML document are HTML codes. You must know the HTML codes that apply to hyperlinks, and the values that correspond to these codes, in order to format the hyperlink.

To create a Marker

1.	Select the text you want to use as a marker.

2.	Click Insert, Marker.

3.	Type the name you want to give the marker in the Marker box.

This name appears in the Marker list box of the Insert Hyperlink dialog box.

To create a hyperlink using an Internet URL

1.	Click your publication at the location where you want a hyperlink.

2.	Click Insert, Hyperlink.

3.	In the Display Text box, type the text you want to appear in your publication at the location of the hyperlink.

4.	Click the Internet URL button.

5.	Choose a type of protocol from the URL list box.

6.	Type the Internet URL in the URL list box.

7.	From the Target Frame list box, choose one of the following:

•	Default [image] loads the hyperlink to your browser's default

•	Top [image] redraws the window with the new URL, regardless of the current frame layout

•	Parent [image] loads the hyperlink in the Frameset parent of the document

•	Self [image] loads the URL into the same frame from which the hyperlink was launched

•	Blank [image] launches a new browser and blank window and displays the document there

To create a hyperlink using an email address

1.	Click your publication at the location where you want a hyperlink.

2.	Click Insert, Hyperlink.

3.	In the Display Text box, type the text you want to appear in your publication at the location of the hyperlink.

4.	Type the email address in the Address box.

To create a hyperlink using a file

1.	Click your publication at the location where you want a hyperlink.

2.	Click Insert, Hyperlink.

3.	In the Display Text box, type the text you want to appear in your publication at the location of the hyperlink.

4.	Type the file's location and name in the File box.

5.	From the Target Frame list box, choose one of the following:

•	Default [image] loads the hyperlink to your browser's default

•	Top [image] redraws the window with the new URL, regardless of the current frame layout

•	Parent [image] loads the hyperlink in the Frameset parent of the document

•	Self [image] loads the URL into the same frame from which the hyperlink was launched

•	Blank [image] launches a new browser and blank window and displays the document there

To create a hyperlink using a chapter

1.	Click your publication at the location where you want a hyperlink.

2.	Click Insert, Hyperlink.

3.	In the Display Text box, type the text you want to appear in your publication at the location of the hyperlink.

4.	Type the chapter name in the Chapter box.

5.	Choose the text marker that you want the hyperlink to be associated with from the Marker list box.

6.	From the Target Frame list box, choose one of the following:

•	Default [image] loads the hyperlink to your browser's default

•	Top [image] redraws the window with the new URL, regardless of the current frame layout

•	Parent [image] loads the hyperlink in the Frameset parent of the document

•	Self [image] loads the URL into the same frame from which the hyperlink was launched

•	Blank [image] launches a new browser and blank window and displays the document there

To add an attribute to a hyperlink in an HTML document

1.	Click your publication where you want a hyperlink.

2.	Create a hyperlink using any of the four creating hyperlink procedures.

3.	Click the HTML Attributes button.

4.	Click the Add button.

5.	Type the HTML code for the attribute in the Name box.

6.	Type the value you want in the Value box.

 Tip

•	You can remove a hyperlink attribute by clicking the Delete button in the Additional Attributes dialog box. The Delete button removes the last attribute from the list.

To control a hyperlink's appearance in a Corel VENTURA document

1.	Click your publication at the location where you want a hyperlink.

2.	Create a hyperlink using any of the four creating hyperlink procedures.

3.	Click the Global Properties button.

4.	Customize the properties you want to change.

 Related Topics


Converting tables of contents, indexes, and cross-references to HTML hyperlinks

You can set Corel VENTURA to convert your table of contents, index, and cross-references into HTML hyperlinks. Users can click on the hyperlinks to access information elsewhere in the publication. To create a table of contents in a Corel VENTURA publication, see "Creating a table of contents." To create an index in a Corel VENTURA publication, see "Indexing your publication." To use cross-references in a Corel VENTURA publication, see "Using cross-references."

To convert a table of contents to HTML hyperlinks

1.	Click File, Publish As, HTML.

2.	Click the Setup button if the HTML Setup option buttons are not displayed.

3.	Click the Links button.

4.	Click the Main Table Of Contents tab.

5.	Enable the Create From Publication And Table Of Contents check box.

6.	Choose a table of contents to make into hyperlinks from the list box.

7.	Enable one of the following buttons:

•	Bulleted List [image] formats the table of contents as a bulleted list

•	Numbered List [image] formats the table of contents as a numbered list

To convert an index and cross-references to HTML hyperlinks

1.	Click File, Publish As, HTML.

2.	Click the Setup button if the HTML Setup option buttons are not displayed.

3.	Click the Links button.

4.	Click the Index And Cross-References tab.

5.	Enable the Create HTML Index check box to create an index.

6.	Choose an index file to make into hyperlinks from the Use Publication Index list box.

7.	Enable the Convert Cross-References To Hyperlinks check box to convert your cross-references to hyperlinks.

 Related Topics


Using image maps

Corel VENTURA lets you publish image maps as part of an HTML publication, but you can't create image maps in Corel VENTURA. You can create an image map in Corel PHOTO-PAINT and then import the picture that contains the image map into Corel VENTURA. For information about creating image maps, see the Creating Image Maps And Backgrounds Help topic in Corel PHOTO-PAINT. For information about importing pictures into Corel VENTURA, see "Importing and exporting pictures."

Image maps must be saved at a resolution of 96 dpi and be placed in frames which are sized to picture (right-click the frame, and click Picture, Size Frame To Picture).

To open Corel PHOTO-PAINT from Corel VENTURA

1.	Click the Application Launcher button.

2.	Click Corel PHOTO-PAINT.

 Related Topics


Converting a publication to HTML using pre-defined settings


Overview: Converting a publication to HTML using pre-defined settings
Converting a publication to HTML using pre-defined settings

Instead of mapping HTML tags, you can customize your HTML conversion by importing a conversion setup or by applying a Cascading Style Sheet. When you import a conversion setup, you apply the settings you created for another publication to the current publication. With a Cascading Style Sheet, the formatting settings of the style sheet are used to define the formatting for your HTML document.

 Related Topics


Importing an HTML conversion setup

If you want to use another publication's conversion settings for the current publication, you can import the first publication's HTML setup. You can still modify any of the HTML settings for the current publication.

To import an HTML conversion setup

1.	Open the publication you want to use as a model.

2.	Click Tools, Navigator, and click the name of the publication you want to convert.

This makes the publication you want to convert the active publication.

3.	Click File, Publish As, HTML.

4.	Click the Import Setup button.

5.	Choose the publication you want to use as a model from the Import From Ventura Publication list box.

6.	Enable any or all of the following check boxes to specify the setting types you want to import from the publication:

•	Text

•	Pictures

•	Links

•	Options

 Related Topics


Using Cascading Style Sheets

When you link a Cascading Style Sheet to an HTML document, the document uses the Cascading Style Sheet to define its style formatting. You choose which Cascading Style Sheet to apply to an HTML document and what portion of the document uses the Cascading Style Sheet. You also have the ability to modify the Cascading Style Sheet by editing it in a text editor.

You can control the format settings of a Cascading Style Sheet using the CSS Layout option. When you publish a page using the CSS Layout option, you enable absolute positioning. Absolute positioning places all of the publication elements that are on the Corel VENTURA page in the same position on the HTML page. When you publish with a Cascading Style Sheet and don't use the CSS Layout option, publication elements do not occupy the same position on the HTML page as they occupy on the Corel VENTURA page.

You can create your own, external Cascading Style Sheet using the Publish As, CSS command. Once you create this Cascading Style Sheet, you can apply it to a publication by choosing the Link To External Style Sheet option in the HTML Options dialog box.

When you use a Cascading Style Sheet, you need to ensure that none of the tag names in your Corel VENTURA publication are identical to HTML tag names. Your publication will not convert to HTML properly if these tag names are the same. If you find that some of the tag names are identical, you must rename the Corel VENTURA tags. For more information about renaming tags, see "Renaming and deleting tags."

To publish with Cascading Style Sheets

1.	Click File, Publish As, HTML.

2.	Click one of the following buttons to specify the range of the publication you want to convert:

•	Publication

•	Current Chapter

•	Current Page

3.	Click the Setup button if the HTML Setup option buttons are not displayed.

4.	Click the Options button.

5.	Click the Cascading Style Sheet tab.

6.	Enable the Use Cascading Style Sheet check box.

7.	Enable one of the following buttons:

•	Link To Generated Style Sheet [image] generates and uses a Cascading Style Sheet based on the Corel VENTURA style sheet

•	Embed Style Sheet In Each File [image] embeds the style sheet into each of your files

•	Link To External Style Sheet [image] links the Cascading Style Sheet to an external style sheet that has been previously created

8.	Click the OK button.

9.	Click the Publish button.

To publish the current page with Cascading Style Sheet layout

1.	Click File, Publish As, HTML.

2.	Click the Current Page With CSS Layout button.

3.	Click the Setup button if the HTML Setup option buttons are not displayed.

4.	Click the Options button.

5.	Click the Cascading Style Sheet tab.

6.	Enable one of the following buttons:

•	Link To Generated Style Sheet [image] links the Cascading Style Sheet to the Corel VENTURA style sheet

•	Embed Style Sheet In Each File [image] embeds the style sheet into each of your files

•	Link To External Style Sheet [image] links the Cascading Style Sheet to an external style sheet

7.	Click the OK button.

8.	Click the Publish button.

 Note

•	The Use Cascading Style Sheet check box is automatically enabled when you click the Current Page With CSS Layout button.

To create an external Cascading Style Sheet

1.	Click File, Publish As, CSS.

2.	Type the location where you want to save the Cascading Style Sheet in the Cascading Style Sheet (CSS) File box.

3.	Choose the tag you want to use for the body style from the Tag For BODY Element Style list box.

4.	Enable the Styles for HTML Tag Names Only check box to export only tags that are HTML elements.

5.	Enable the Specify Only Differences From BODY In Styles check box to make the individual style sheet shorter.

For example if you create a style sheet with a body text point size of 12 and the default style sheet has a point size of 12, then your style sheet will inherit the 12 point text size from the default style sheet.

 Tip

•	To use an external Cascading Style Sheet, enable the Link To External Style Sheet button on the Cascading Style Sheet page of the HTML Options dialog box.

 Related Topics


Publishing as Corel Barista


Overview: Publishing as Corel Barista
Publishing as Corel Barista

Corel Barista is a Java-based publishing technology that allows you to use Corel VENTURA to publish Web documents in Java Programming Language. Corel Barista also supports HTML features like hyperlinks, pictures, tables, and multicolumn WYSIWYG (What You See Is What You Get) documents.

You can view documents published in Corel Barista format with your Web browser. To display your Web document, place the Corel Barista class files in the same folder as your Web document. The Corel Barista class files are installed in the subdirectory called BARISTA when you install Corel VENTURA.

When you publish your Corel VENTURA publication in Corel Barista format, you can export the pictures in your publication to the JPEG or .GIF image type format.

 Related Topics


Publishing to Corel Barista

When you publish your Corel VENTURA publication in Corel Barista format, a Web page, or an .HTM file, is automatically created with the filename you specify and in the location you specify. A subdirectory with the same name as your Web page is also created automatically and placed with your output file. The page contents are stored in this subdirectory. Multiple subdirectories are created if you publish multipage documents.

To publish as Corel Barista

1.	Click File, Publish As, Corel Barista.

2.	Type the location where you want to save the Corel Barista document in the Main Corel Barista Document box.

3.	Type the location of the Corel Barista class files in the Location Of Corel Barista Class Files box.

4.	Choose one of the following publication range options from the Range list box:

•	Entire Publication

•	Current Page

5.	Choose the format of your pictures from the Graphic Format list box.

6.	Enable one of the following buttons:

•	All Pages To A Single File [image] publishes all of the pages in your publication to a single file

•	Each Page To A Separate File button [image] publishes each page in your publication to a different file

7.	Enable the Launch Browser check box to launch your browser when you click the Publish button.

8.	Click the Publish button.

 Tip

•	If you save your Corel Barista file to another location, you must copy the information in the Barista folder to the new location.

•	The Java Programming Language only supports three fonts [image] Times New Roman, Arial, and Courier New.

 Related Topics


Loading Corel Barista onto a World Wide Web server

When you want to make your Corel Barista document available on a World Wide Web server, you must copy the entire Corel Barista folder to the World Wide Web server along with your publication.

To load Corel Barista onto a World Wide Web server

1.	Copy the Barista folder (or the folder in which you saved your publication) to the Server.

2.	Refer to your World Wide Web site administrator for information about opening your publication.

 Related Topics


Publishing in Adobe Acrobat format


Overview: Publishing in Adobe Acrobat format
Publishing in Adobe Acrobat format

To create an Adobe Acrobat .PDF (Portable Document Format) file, you print your publication to a PostScript file, which you then process with the Adobe Acrobat Distiller. The .PDF file preserves the appearance of the original publication and can be viewed and printed using the Acrobat Reader or a Web browser which has the Acrobat Reader plug-in. Acrobat Distiller and Acrobat Reader are not included with Corel VENTURA.

 Note

•	When you publish as Adobe Acrobat, you can control the print options by creating a print style and setting it as the default print style. For example, if you want to disable all PostScript printer warnings, you can create a style with the options you want, then change the default printer style to the new style in the Options dialog box.

 Related Topics


Publishing to Adobe Acrobat

Adobe Acrobat lets you share a publication across platforms while maintaining the publication's original appearance. You can publish an entire publication or a portion of a publication to an Adobe Acrobat file.

If you enable the Generate Hyperlinks check box, users can move around your publication using hypertext links. Tables of contents and indexes in the Corel VENTURA publication become hypertext links and are typically displayed in windows that are separate from the main publication. Cross-references also become hypertext links that let users jump from place to place in the publication. For more information about tables of contents, indexes, and cross-references, see "Indexing, creating lists, and inserting notes."

To generate Adobe Acrobat hypertext links before publishing

1.	Click Publication, Update Publication.

2.	Enable the Generate Hyperlinks For Adobe Acrobat check box.

To publish a publication to Adobe Acrobat

1.	Click File, Publish As, Adobe Acrobat.

2.	Choose a PostScript printer from the printer list box.

3.	Enable the Include Notes check box to include hidden text from the Corel VENTURA publication in the file.

4.	Enable the Include URLs (Acrobat TM 3.0 only) check box to include URLs in the file.

5.	Click Publish.

6.	In the Print To File dialog box, choose the location where you want to save the file.

7.	Type the name of the publication in the Filename box.

8.	Click the Save button.

9.	Open Adobe Acrobat Distiller, and create the .PDF file using the file you printed in Corel VENTURA.

Adobe Acrobat Distiller is not included with Corel VENTURA.

To publish a portion of a publication to Adobe Acrobat

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click the Options tab.

3.	Enable any or all of the following check boxes:

•	Generate Hyperlinks

•	Include Notes

•	Include URLs (Acrobat TM 3.0 only)

4.	Click the General tab.

5.	Choose a PostScript printer from the Name list box.

6.	Click one of the following buttons to choose a publication range:

•	Publication

•	Pages

•	Current Page

•	Chapters

7.	Enable the Print To File check box.

8.	Click the Print button.

9.	Follow steps 6 to 9 from the previous procedure.

To publish using the Adobe Acrobat printer driver

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Choose the Acrobat PDFWriter 3.0 from the Name box.

3.	Click the Properties button and set the options you want.

4.	Click OK.

5.	Click Print.

 Tip

•	To create files that can be processed into an Adobe Acrobat document you must have a PostScript printer driver. You can use the Acrobat PDFWriter 3.0, but it is not included with Corel VENTURA and you must install it yourself.

•	If the document you are publishing contains colors and you want the colors to appear in the Acrobat document, use a driver for a color printer.


Using email to distribute publications


Overview: Using e-mail to distribute publications
Using email to distribute publications

You can send a publication as an attachment to an email message directly from Corel VENTURA. To mail a publication you need to have an email program installed on your computer. Corel VENTURA does not provide an email program.

 Related Topics


Sending publications through e-mail
Sending publications through email

You must have a MAPI-compliant email application installed on your computer to send publications through email. Some email applications that support MAPI include Novell Groupwise (version 4.1 or higher), Microsoft Exchange, and Microsoft Outlook.

To send a file through email

1.	Click File, Send.

2.	Select a profile using your mail client or set mail options according to your mail system.

3.	Send the email.

 Note

•	Whenever you send a file through email, Corel VENTURA automatically saves it first.


Using the writing tools and languages


Overview: Using the writing tools and languages
Using the writing tools and languages

Corel VENTURA includes writing tools to count the words in your publication, correct errors in spelling and grammar, correct typing mistakes automatically, and help you refine your writing style. The writing tools include:

•	Spell Checker [image] checks for spelling errors, irregular capitalization, and duplicate words

•	Grammatik [image] proofreads publications or parts of publications for errors in grammar and style

•	Thesaurus [image] provides antonyms and synonyms for selected words or words you type in the Thesaurus Insert box

•	Type Assist [image] corrects common misspelled words and capitalization errors as you type

•	Spell Utility [image] lets you create and edit main word lists for your business or field, such as medicine or law

Using languages

Corel VENTURA allows you to use different languages with the writing tools. When Spell Checker, Grammatik, or Thesaurus analyze the text, that language's word lists are used to verify the spelling and grammar. The word lists are part of the language that is specified for each paragraph, paragraph tag, or character tag. For more information about languages, see "Using languages." For a list of the languages supported by the Corel VENTURA writing tools, see Language support for the writing tools in the Reference section of the online Help.

You can add words to a user word list which is associated with each language, and you can edit the main word list used by the writing tools using Spell Utility. For more information about word lists, see "Managing word lists."

 Note

•	The writing tools can be used in Page Layout view, Page Tag view, and Copy Editor view. The writing tools will also check Artistic text. For more information about using Artistic text, see "Working with Artistic text."

 More Detailed Information


Counting words in your publication


Overview: Counting words in your publication
Counting words in your publication

Corel VENTURA lets you count the words in a chapter or a publication. You can also count the occurrences of a specific word in a chapter or a publication.

 Related Topics


Counting the words in a publication

You can count all of the words or specific words in a publication using a Corel add-on. Add-ons are separate programs that expand the features of Corel VENTURA. For more information about Corel add-ons, see "Using Corel add-ons."

To count the words in a publication

1.	Click Tools, Add-Ons.

2.	Double-click VENTURA8 in the Currently Installed Add-Ons list.

If VENTURA8 is not displayed in the Currently Installed Add-Ons dialog box, click the New Button, click VENTURA8.CAO, and click Open.

3.	Click Word Count, and click the Run button.

4.	Click the Count All Words button.

5.	In the Search section, click the Entire Publication button.

6.	Click the Search button.

To count specific words in a publication

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	Click the Count Specific Words button.

3.	Type the word you want counted in the Count Specific Word box.

4.	In the Search section, click the Entire Publication button.

5.	Click the Search button.

 Tip

•	If you enable the Match Case check box, Corel VENTURA will only count the words that match the case of the word you typed in the Count Specific Word box.

 Related Topics


Counting the words in a chapter

You can count all of the words or specific words in a chapter using a Corel add-on. Add-ons are separate programs that expand the features of Corel VENTURA. For more information about Corel add-ons, see "Using Corel add-ons."

To count the words in a chapter

1.	Click a page in the chapter for which you want the words counted.

2.	Click Tools, Add-Ons.

3.	Double-click VENTURA8 in the Currently Installed Add-Ons list.

If VENTURA8 is not displayed in the Currently Installed Add-Ons dialog box, click the New Button, click VENTURA8.CAO, and click Open.

4.	Click Word Count, and click the Run button.

5.	Click the Count All Words button.

6.	In the Search section, click the Current Chapter button.

7.	Click the Search button.

To count specific words in a chapter

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the previous procedure.

2.	Click the Count Specific Words button.

3.	Type the word you want counted in the Count Specific Word box.

4.	In the Search section, click the Current Chapter button.

5.	Click the Search button.

 Tip

•	If you enable the Match Case check box, Corel VENTURA will only count the words that match the case of the word you typed in the Count Specific Word box.

 Related Topics


Using Spell Checker


Overview: Using Spell Checker
Using Spell Checker

Spell Checker checks your publication for spelling and common typing errors. By default, the Spell Checker starts at the position of the cursor or selected text. You can select the range of text you want to check, and you can check the spelling of words which include numbers, check for duplicated words, and check for words with irregular capitalization.

When Spell Checker encounters a misspelled word, you can choose from a list of suggestions or manually correct the word.

How Spell Checker checks your publication

In Corel VENTURA you can assign a language to paragraphs, paragraph tags, and character tags. When Spell Checker encounters a word, it verifies the spelling in the appropriate language using that language's word lists. Word lists are lists of correctly spelled words and alternate spellings. Each language has two word lists: a main word list and a user word list. A main word list is a list of words for a language, such as English, French, or Spanish, or words that are particular to a field, such as law or medicine. A user word list is a list of words and phrases to which you can add words that Spell Checker will skip or replace, or for which it will provide alternative spellings. A user word list compliments the main word list for each language. For more information about word lists, see "Managing word lists."

You can also create and edit main word lists using Spell Utility, an application included with Corel VENTURA. For more information, see "Using Spell Utility."

 Notes

•	If you have installed Corel VENTURA using a Typical installation, only the English language module for the writing tools is installed. You can perform a custom installation of Corel VENTURA and select the language modules you want installed. For more information, see "Installing, uninstalling, and launching applications."

•	For a list of the languages supported by the Corel VENTURA writing tools, see Language support for the writing tools in the Reference section of the online Help.

 Related Topics


Using automatic spell checking

Automatic spell checking verifies the spelling of text as you type. Words that are misspelled are displayed with a red X ( [image]) in the Spell Check And Thesaurus list box on the Property Bar. You can also enable the Automatic Spell Check option to underline misspelled words with a wavy red line, for example, [image]. Automatic Spell Check is disabled by default. For information about automatically correcting words as you type, see "Using Type Assist."

To correct a misspelled word

1.	Click the word.

2.	Choose an alternate spelling from the Spell Check And Thesaurus list box on the Property Bar.

To enable automatic underlining of spelling errors

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, click General.

3.	Enable the Automatic Spell Check check box.

 Tip

•	You can also click the Automatic Spell Check button on the Property Bar to automatically underline misspelled words.

To correct a misspelled word by right-clicking

1.	Right-click the word.

2.	Click one of the following:

•	a suggested spelling [image] replaces the misspelled word

•	Ignore All [image] skips all occurrence of that word for the current session

•	Add To User Word List [image] adds that word to the user word list and Spell Checker skips all occurrences of the word

 Tip

•	Automatic Spell Check must be enabled before you can correct a misspelled word by right-clicking.

 Related Topics


Checking the spelling in your publication

When Spell Checker finds a misspelled word, it displays a list of suggested replacement words. You can replace the misspelled word with a suggested word, edit the word manually, or skip the word. You can also add the word to a user word list. For more information about user word lists, see "Managing word lists."

To check the spelling in your publication

1.	Click where you want to begin checking.

2.	Click Tools, Spell Check.

3.	When Spell Checker stops on a word, do any of the following:

•	Choose a word from the Replacements list box, and click the Replace button.

•	Type a replacement in the Replace With box, and click the Replace button.

•	Click the Skip Once button to ignore this occurrence of the word.

•	Click the Skip All button to ignore all occurrences of the word.

•	Choose a replacement word, and click the Auto Replace button to replace all occurrences of the word.

•	Click in the publication, and type the correction yourself, then click the Resume button.

To check the spelling in a frame

1.	Select the frame.

2.	Click Tools, Spell Check.

3.	When Spell Checker stops on a word, do any of the following:

•	Choose a word from the Replacements list box, and click the Replace button.

•	Type a replacement in the Replace With box, and click the Replace button.

•	Click the Skip Once button to ignore this occurrence of the word.

•	Click the Skip All button to ignore all occurrences of the word.

•	Choose a replacement word, and click the Auto Replace button to replace all occurrences of the word.

•	Click in the frame, and type the correction yourself, then click the Resume button.

To check the spelling of selected text

1.	Select the text using the Pick tool.

2.	Click Tools, Spell Check.

3.	When Spell Checker stops on a word, do any of the following:

•	Choose a word from the Replacements list box, and click the Replace button.

•	Type a replacement in the Replace With box, and click the Replace button.

•	Click the Skip Once button to ignore this occurrence of the word.

•	Click the Skip All button to ignore all occurrences of the word.

•	Choose a replacement word, and click the Auto Replace button to replace all occurrences of the word.

•	Click in the publication, and type the correction yourself, then click the Resume button.

 Notes

•	By default, Spell Checker starts checking your publication as soon as you open the Spell Checker dialog box. For information about disabling the Auto Start option, see "Setting Spell Checker options."

•	After you edit the text in a frame manually, you need to reselect the frame before you can resume checking text within the frame.

•	If you are using Spell Checker in Copy Editor view, you can only check the spelling of the current text file. For more information about Copy Editor view, see "Editing text in Page Layout view and Copy Editor view."

 Tips

•	If you want to undo a replacement you have made, click Edit, Undo Proofread.

•	You can choose the range of text you want to check from the Check list box.

•	If you want to check the spelling of text in another language, you can change the language used for the current Spell Check session. In the Spell Check dialog box, click the Options button, and click Language. Click a language from the Current Language list, and click OK. The language will be used to check the current paragraph or the publication as long as no other language is used in the publication. The Save As Default Writing Tool Language check box does not change the language applied to the paragraph, paragraph tag, or character tag of which you are checking the spelling, nor does it change the default language used to check other text. For more information about setting the default language, see "Changing the language for the default template."

 Related Topics


Adding words to the user word list using Spell Checker

When Spell Checker finds a word that is not recognized but is correct, you can add it to the default user word list. For information about word lists, see "Managing word lists."

To add a word to the default user word list using Spell Checker

1.	Click Tools, Spell Check.

2.	When Spell Checker stops on an unrecognized word that is correct, click the Add button.

The word is added to the default user word list and Spell Checker skips all subsequent occurrences of the word.

 Related Topics


Setting Spell Checker options

You can set a number of options to determine how Spell Checker functions and the kinds of common errors it will check for in your publication.

To set Spell Checker options

1.	Click Tools, Spell Check.

2.	Click the Options button.

3.	Click any of the following so that a check mark appears beside the option:

•	Auto Start [image] starts checking your publication as soon as you open Spell Checker

•	Beep On Misspelled [image] makes Spell Checker beep on misspelled words

•	Recheck All Text [image] checks the entire publication each time you access Spell Checker

•	Check Words With Numbers [image] checks words containing numbers

•	Check Duplicate Words [image] checks for duplicated instances of words, for example, "the horse jumped over the the cow"

•	Check Irregular Capitalization [image] checks for instances of words with capital letters which do not begin the word, for example, "THe"

•	Prompt Before Auto Replacement [image] lets you preview each occurrence of a word that has a replacement entry in the default user word list

•	Show Phonetic Suggestions [image] provides a list of alternative words that sound like the misspelled word

 Tip

•	After you change an option, you can click the Resume button to restart Spell Checker.

 Related Topics


Using Grammatik


Overview: Using Grammatik
Using Grammatik

Grammatik checks for grammar errors in your publication using customizable grammatical rules and by using styles. Styles are predefined sets of rules designed for the type of writing you are checking, such as a formal memo or a personal letter. You can also use Grammatik as a tool to analyze your writing style.

When Grammatik finds an error, you can choose from a list of suggestions or manually correct the error.

Grammar checking styles

Below is a list of the styles Grammatik can use when it checks your publication. Each style uses a number of grammar rules. You can add or remove rules and change the formality level used by each style. You can also create new grammar checking styles.

•	Spelling Plus [image] designed to quickly check spelling and simple grammatical errors, such as capitalization and punctuation

•	Quick Check [image] designed for writing to a general audience. Quick Check is the default grammar checking style used by Grammatik.

•	Very Strict [image] designed for formal writing and a strict interpretation of grammar and style rules

•	Formal Memo or Letter [image] designed for formal writing and a strict interpretation of grammar and style rules

•	Informal Memo or Letter [image] designed for informal writing and allows the use of industry-specific jargon

•	Technical or Scientific [image] designed for writing that uses long, complex noun phrases and a technical vocabulary

•	Documentation or Speech [image] designed for writing to a general, nonscientific audience

•	Student Composition [image] designed for longer publications

•	Advertising [image] designed for advertising, marketing, and sales writing

•	Fiction [image] designed to allow the writer some artistic freedom from oppressive grammatical rules

 Notes

•	Grammatik is installed when you perform a custom installation of Corel VENTURA. For information, see "Installing Grammatik."

•	You can also use word lists and check the spelling of text. For more information about word lists and spelling, see "Using Spell Checker."

•	For a list of the languages supported by the Corel VENTURA writing tools, see Language support for the writing tools in the Reference section of the online Help.

 Related Topics


Installing Grammatik

Grammatik is only installed when you perform a custom installation of Corel VENTURA. For more information about custom installations of Corel VENTURA, see "Installing, uninstalling, and launching applications."

To install Grammatik

1.	Close all applications, including Corel VENTURA.

2.	Insert the Corel VENTURA installation CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.

3.	Follow the instructions on your screen.

The Corel Setup Wizard guides you through the installation process.

4.	When you get to the Corel VENTURA 8 Setup Options, click Custom Setup.

 Related Topics


Checking the grammar in your publication

Grammatik automatically checks your publication for grammar errors and misspelled words, and provides warnings about grammar usage. Grammatical errors are checked by using a grammar checking style. For information about choosing a grammar checking style, see "Using grammar checking styles."

To check the grammar in your publication

1.	Click in the publication where you want Grammatik to start.

2.	Click Tools, Grammatik.

3.	When Grammatik stops at a grammar error, warning, or misspelled word, do one of the following:

•	Choose a suggested word or phrase from the Replacements list box, and click the Replace button.

•	Click the Skip Once button to ignore this occurrence of the error.

•	Click the Skip All button to ignore all occurrences of the error.

•	Choose a suggested word or phrase from the Replacements list box, and click the Auto Replace button to replace all occurrences of the error.

•	Click the Turn Off button to disable the grammar checking rule for the current session.

•	Manually edit the error in the publication, and click the Resume button.

To check grammar for a part of a publication

1.	Click Tools, Grammatik.

2.	Click the cursor in the text you want to check.

3.	Choose the part of the publication from the Check list box.

4.	When Grammatik stops at a grammar error, warning, or misspelled word, do one of the following:

•	Choose a suggested word or phrase from the Replacements list box, and click the Replace button.

•	Click the Skip Once button to ignore this occurrence of the error.

•	Click the Skip All button to ignore all occurrences of the error.

•	Choose a suggested word or phrase from the Replacements list box, and click the Auto Replace button to replace all occurrences of the error.

•	Click the Turn Off button to disable the grammar checking rule for the current session.

•	Manually edit the error in the publication, and click the Resume button.

To check grammar in a frame

1.	Select the frame.

2.	Click Tools, Grammatik.

3.	When Grammatik stops at a grammar error, warning, or misspelled word, do one of the following:

•	Choose a suggested word or phrase from the Replacements list box, and click the Replace button.

•	Click the Skip Once button to ignore this occurrence of the error.

•	Click the Skip All button to ignore all occurrences of the error.

•	Choose a suggested word or phrase from the Replacements list box, and click the Auto Replace button to replace all occurrences of the error.

•	Click the Turn Off button to disable the grammar checking rule for the current session.

•	Manually edit the error in the publication, and click the Resume button.

 Notes

•	When Grammatik finds a misspelled word, you can add it to the user word list by clicking the Add button. The user word list is used by both Grammatik and Spell Checker. For more information about word lists, see "Managing word lists."

•	If you edit the text in a frame manually, you must reselect the frame before you can resume checking text within the frame.

 Tip

•	If you want to check the grammar of text in another language, you can change the language used for the current Grammatik session. In the Grammatik dialog box, click the Options button, and click Language. Click a language from the Current Language list, and click OK. The language will be used to check the current paragraph or the publication as long as no other language is used in the publication. The Save As Default Writing Tool Language check box does not change the language applied to the paragraph, paragraph tag, or character tag of which you are checking the grammar, nor does it change the default language used to check other text. For more information about setting the default language, see "Changing the language for the default template."

 Related Topics


Setting options for Grammatik

You can determine how Grammatik works by specifying options in the Grammatik dialog box. A check mark appears beside enabled options.

To set options for Grammatik

1.	Click Tools, Grammatik.

2.	Click the Options button.

3.	Click any of the following options:

•	Auto Start [image] begins proofreading as soon as you open Grammatik

•	Prompt Before Auto Replacement [image] displays a prompt before Grammatik inserts an automatic replacement

•	Suggest Spelling Replacements [image] automatically displays suggestions for replacements

 Related Topics


Using grammar checking styles

Grammatik uses grammar checking styles to check the text in your publication for grammatical errors. A style is a predefined set of rules used for a particular type of writing. If there are rules that you do not want Grammatik to check, you can disable the rule.

To choose a grammar checking style

1.	Click Tools, Grammatik.

2.	Click the Options button, and click Checking Styles.

3.	Click a style, and click the Select button.

For more information about grammar checking styles, see "Using Grammatik."

To disable a rule in a proofreading session

1.	Click in the publication.

2.	Click Tools, Grammatik.

3.	When Grammatik stops at a grammatical error, click the Turn Off button.

Rules are only turned off for the current proofreading session. The next time you access Grammatik, the rules will be restored.

To save a grammar checking style with disabled rules

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	Click the Options button, and click Save Rules.

3.	Do one of the following:

•	Click Save to replace the existing grammar checking style.

•	Click Save As, and type a name for the new style in the Custom Style Name box to create a new grammar checking style.

 Note

•	After you edit a preset checking style, an asterisk is displayed after the style name in the Checking Styles dialog box. You can later restore the style to its original settings. For more information, see "Restoring a customized grammar checking style."

 Tip

•	You can reset any rules you have disabled in a proofreading session by clicking the Options button and clicking Turn On Rules. Enable the rules you want restored, and click OK.

 Related Topics


Customizing a grammar checking style

You can change the settings for each grammar checking style. You can either save the changes to the existing styles or create new grammar checking styles using your customized settings.

To customize the rules applied for a grammar checking style

1.	Click Tools, Grammatik.

2.	Click the Options button, and click Checking Styles.

3.	Click a grammar checking style from the list.

4.	Click the Edit button.

5.	Enable the grammar rules you want applied in the Rule Classes list box.

6.	Click one of the following:

•	Save [image] replaces the existing grammar checking style.

•	Save As to create a new grammar checking style. Type the name for the new style in the Custom Style Name box.

To change grammar checking style settings

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the previous procedure.

2.	In the Maximum Allowed section, type a value in any of the following boxes:

•	Consecutive Nouns [image] specifies the number of consecutive nouns allowed

•	Consecutive Prepositional Phrases [image] specifies the number of consecutive prepositional phrases allowed

•	Long Sentence Length [image] specifies the maximum number of words allowed in a sentence

•	Spell Numbers Below Or Equal To [image] specifies the range of numbers to be spelled out. Set this value to zero if you do not want figures to be considered errors.

•	Words Allowed In Split Infinitive [image] specifies the number of words allowed in a split infinitive

3.	Click one of the following:

•	Save [image] replaces the existing grammar checking style.

•	Save As to create a new grammar checking style. Type the name for the new style in the Custom Style Name box.

To choose a formality level for a grammar checking style

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the "To customize the rules applied for a grammar checking style" procedure.

2.	In the Formality Level section, click one of the following:

•	Informal [image] applies relaxed language usage and colloquial expressions

•	Standard [image] applies moderate, quotidian language

•	Formal [image] applies strict rules of diction and usage

3.	Click one of the following:

•	Save [image] replaces the existing grammar checking style.

•	Save As to create a new grammar checking style. Type the name for the new style in the Custom Style Name box.

 Note

•	When you save a grammar checking style after making changes to it an asterisk (*) appears beside the style name in the Checking Styles dialog box. For information about restoring grammar checking styles, see "Restoring a customized grammar checking style."

 Related Topics


Restoring a customized grammar checking style

You can restore the default settings for any preset grammar checking style that you have customized. Grammar checking styles that have been customized appear with an asterisk (*) beside them in the Checking Styles dialog box. For more information about customizing grammar checking styles, see "Customizing a grammar checking style."

To restore a customized grammar checking style

1.	Click Tools, Grammatik.

2.	Click the Options button, and click Checking Styles.

3.	Click a customized style from the list.

4.	Click the Edit button.

5.	Click the Restore button.

 Related Topics


Deleting a customized grammar checking style

You can delete grammar checking styles that you have created. The grammar checking styles provided with Grammatik cannot be deleted.

To delete a customized grammar checking style

1.	Click Tools, Grammatik.

2.	Click the Options button, and click Checking Styles.

3.	Click the checking style you want to delete.

4.	Click the Delete button.

 Related Topics


Counting text elements and grammar errors

Grammatik provides statistical summaries to count elements encountered in your writing style. These include

•	Basic Counts [image] displays the number of syllables, words, sentences, and paragraphs in your text and gives values for sentence complexity and averages

•	Flagged Lists [image] displays the number of times each rule error was encountered. Rules are specified for each of the grammar checking styles that Grammatik provides. For more information about grammar checking styles, see "Using Grammatik."

To count text elements and grammar errors

1.	Click the sentence you want to analyze using the Pick tool.

2.	Click Tools, Grammatik.

3.	Click the Options button, and click Analysis.

4.	Click one of the following:

•	Basic Counts [image] counts the text elements, such as syllables, words, sentences

•	Flagged [image] displays the number and type of grammar errors

 Related Topics


Testing the readability of a publication

Readability is an estimation of the amount of skill required for a reader to understand the sentence. Grammatik analyzes the readability of your publication by comparing it to one of the included samples. For more information about readability, see "About readability analysis."

Grammatik evaluates the publication according to

•	a readability formula, which is dependent on the language you select

•	the level of difficulty required to read it

•	how often the passive voice is used

•	the length and complexity of sentence structure

•	the complexity of words

To test the readability of a sentence

1.	Click in a sentence using the Pick tool.

2.	Click Tools, Grammatik.

3.	Click the Options button, click Analysis, and click Readability.

To change the comparison document

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	Choose a comparison document from the Comparison Document list box.

To add a new comparison document

1.	Click File, Open and open the publication you want to use as the comparison document.

2.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the "To test the readability of a sentence" procedure.

3.	Click the Add Document button.

 Note

•	You can only add the current publication to the list of comparison documents.

•	The comparison document list can only contain a total of four comparison documents. There are three comparison documents included by default. If you want to add comparison documents, you can only add one at a time. To change comparison documents, you must remove one you have added.

 Related Topics


About readability analysis

Grammatik can analyze the readability of your publication to estimate the amount of skill required for a reader to understand it. Readability is estimated for your publication and a comparison document. This lets you compare your publication's readability against the comparison document's readability. You can choose from the sample comparison documents or add a comparison document of your own.

The following information is displayed when Grammatik analyzes the readability of your publication:

•	Grammatik displays a readability formula based on the language you use. For example, English-US uses the Flesch-Kincaid formula. This is a commonly used formula that estimates the school grade level required to understand the text. A grade level score of 6-10 is considered the most effective for a general audience.

Languages other than United States English might use different scoring systems. For example, English-UK uses the Flesch Reading Ease Score formula. This formula displays a high score for easy to read writing and a lower score for more complex writing. The ranges are listed below:

Score	Reading level

90-100	Very easy

80-90	Easy

70-80	Fairly easy

60-70	Standard

50-60	Fairly difficult

30-50	Difficult

0-30	Very difficult

•	Sentences written in the passive voice. The passive voice suggests that the subject is being acted upon and too many passive sentences can make your work boring to read or difficult to understand. When Grammatik finds sentences written in the passive voice, it displays suggestions for rewriting them in the active voice. For example, Grammatik suggests three replacements for the sentence "A good time was had" if the Very Strict grammar checking style is used.

•	They had a good time.

•	We had a good time.

•	<SUBJECT> had a good time.

If you choose a replacement beginning with <SUBJECT>, Grammatik prompts you to type a new subject for the sentence.

•	Long or complex sentences. These sentences are often difficult to understand.

•	Sentences using long or unusual words which may be difficult for many readers to understand.

 Note

•	For more information about testing readability, see "Testing the readability of a publication."

 Related Topics


Analyzing parts of speech

When you use Grammatik to analyze your writing, it assigns a part of speech to each word or group of words in a sentence; for example, subject, noun phrase, verb, etc. This information can be displayed in the Parts Of Speech view. The Parts Of Speech view shows whether a word has been identified as a noun, pronoun, verb, adverb, adjective, or another part of speech.

The following table lists the abbreviations that Grammatik uses to identify the parts of speech.

Abbreviation	Part of speech

3v	Third person, present form of a verb

<>	Punctuation

abrv	Abbreviation

adj	Adjective

adv	Adverb

aux	Auxiliary verb

bv	Base verb

cj	Conjunction

c/s	Comparative or superlative forms of adjectives or adverbs

det	Determiner

ij	Interjection

inf	Infinitive

mod	Modal

num	Number

pn	Plural noun

poss	Possessive noun

ppt	Past participle

prep	Preposition

pres-p	Present participle

prn	Pronoun

pv	Past tense of a verb

sn	Singular noun

To view the parts of speech

1.	Click the sentence you want to analyze.

2.	Click Tools, Grammatik.

3.	Click the Options button, click Analysis, and click Parts Of Speech.

 Note

•	The Parts Of Speech dialog box automatically updates as new errors are found.

 Tip

•	You can click the Parse Tree button to provide an analysis of the structure of the clauses in your sentences. For more information, see "Analyzing parts of a sentence."

 Related Topics


Analyzing parts of a sentence

When you analyze a sentence using Grammatik, it assigns a sentence part to each word or group of words. This information can be displayed in the Parse Tree view. The Parse Tree view shows whether a group of words in a sentence has been identified as a clause and identifies the elements of the clause.

The following table lists the abbreviations that Grammatik uses to identify the parts of a sentence.

Abbreviation	Meaning

adv	Adverb

cj	Conjunction

direct object	Direct object

ij	Interjection

indirect object	Indirect object

main clause	Main clause

phrasal	Phrasal

prep phr	Prepositional phrase

relative clause	Relative clause

rel prn	Relative pronoun

subject	Subject

subordinate clause	Subordinate clause, referred to as "Clause #Subord"

that clause	A specialized subordinate clause starting with "that"

verb or verb phrase	Verb or verb phrase. Verb is used for a single word; verb phrase is used when several words make up the verb

wh- clause	Subordinate clause starting with "when," "how," "why," or "where"

To view a parse tree

1.	Click the sentence you want to analyze.

2.	Click Tools, Grammatik.

3.	Click the Options button, click Analysis, and click Parse Tree.

 Note

•	The Parts Of Speech dialog box automatically updates as new errors are found.

 Tip

•	You can click the Parts Of Speech button to provide an analysis of the parts of speech used in your sentences. For more information, see "Analyzing parts of speech."

 Related Topics


Using Thesaurus


Overview: Using Thesaurus
Using Thesaurus

Thesaurus helps you find synonyms and antonyms for words used in your publication. Using Thesaurus, you can look up a specific word used in your publication, or you can type a word in the Insert box. Each word you look up is displayed in a new window, and when you select a suggested word, Thesaurus provides alternative suggestions for that word as well.

 Notes

•	Thesaurus is installed when you perform a custom installation of Corel VENTURA. For information, see "Installing Thesaurus."

•	The expanded Thesaurus file contains words that may be offensive to some people. These words are included in the file to enable relational searches. It is not our intention to offend nor to promote the use of these terms.

•	For a list of the languages supported by the Corel VENTURA writing tools, see Language support for the writing tools in the Reference section of the online Help.

 Related Topics


Installing Thesaurus

Thesaurus is only installed when you perform a custom installation of Corel VENTURA. For more information about custom installations of Corel VENTURA, see "Installing, uninstalling, and launching applications."

To install Thesaurus

1.	Close all applications, including Corel VENTURA.

2.	Insert the Corel VENTURA installation CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.

3.	Follow the instructions on your screen.

The Corel Setup Wizard guides you through the installation process.

4.	When you get to the Corel VENTURA 8 Setup Options, click Custom Setup.

5.	When you get to the writing tools, enable at least one Thesaurus language option.

 Related Topics


Looking up and replacing words using Thesaurus

You can use Thesaurus to look up selected words in your publication, or you can type a word you want to look up in the Thesaurus dialog box. You can also replace words by choosing an alternative provided by Thesaurus from the Spell Check & Thesaurus list box on the Property Bar.

By default, Thesaurus closes when you click the Replace or the Insert button. For more information about changing the default settings, see "Customizing Thesaurus settings."

To look up a word using Thesaurus

1.	Click a word in your publication.

2.	Click Tools, Thesaurus.

The suggested replacement words appear in the Replacements list.

To replace a word using Thesaurus

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Click a word from the Replacements list.

3.	Click the Replace button.

To replace a word using the Spell Check & Thesaurus list box on the Property Bar

1.	Click a word in your publication.

2.	Choose a replacement from the Spell Check & Thesaurus list box.

 Notes

•	Words that are misspelled are displayed with a red X ( [image]) in the Spell Check & Thesaurus list box on the Property Bar. For information about using Spell Checker, see "Using automatic spell checking."

•	By default, Thesaurus starts checking your publication as soon as you open Thesaurus. For information about disabling the Auto Start option, see "Customizing Thesaurus settings."

 Tip

•	If you want to undo a replacement you have made, click Edit, Undo.

 Related Topics


Customizing Thesaurus settings

You can customize the way Thesaurus checks your publication.

To customize Thesaurus settings

1.	Click Tools, Thesaurus.

2.	Click the Options button.

3.	Enable any of the following options:

•	Auto Look Up [image] automatically looks up the word at the cursor position as soon as Thesaurus opens

•	Auto Close [image] automatically closes Thesaurus as soon as you click the Replace or Insert button

•	Show Definitions [image] display definitions for the word you look up, and of any word you choose in the Replacements box

•	Spelling Assist [image] displays spelling suggestions as you type a word in the Insert box

•	Words For One Definition [image] display words that are associated with a definition you choose in the Definitions list

•	Related Words [image] displays related words

 Note

•	Some of these options are enabled by default. A check mark appears beside enabled options.

To look up synonyms and antonyms

1.	Click Tools, Thesaurus.

2.	Click the Options button.

3.	Click any of the following so that a check mark appears beside the option:

•	Synonyms

•	Antonyms

 Note

•	The expanded Thesaurus file contains words that may be offensive to some people. These words are included in the file to enable relational searches. It is not our intention to offend nor to promote the use of these terms.

 Related Topics


Using Type Assist


Overview: Using Type Assist
Using Type Assist

Type Assist can automatically make corrections to text as you type. Type Assist can correct predictable errors in typing, spelling, and capitalization, and can automatically insert words and phrases that you use frequently.

Type Assist has default settings that automatically correct a number of common typing errors, for example "teh" is replaced with "the" and "RObert" with "Robert." You can add to or edit the list of typing replacements. You can also use Type Assist to insert special characters that do not appear on your keyboard. For example, you can create a replacement for "/R" that would automatically insert the ® character.

 Related Topics


Correcting typing errors automatically

Type Assist automatically corrects a misspelled word when you press SPACEBAR, TAB, or ENTER after you type the word. Type Assist uses a list of replacements for commonly misspelled words and symbols. There are a number of default replacements, but you can add or delete replacements. For more information about adding and deleting Type Assist replacements, see "Adding and deleting Type Assist replacements."

To correct typing errors automatically

1.	Click Tools, Type Assist.

2.	Enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Capitalize First Letter Of Sentence [image] capitalizes the first letter following the end of a sentence and a space. The end of a sentence is defined by a period (.), an exclamation mark (!), or a question mark (?), followed by a space.

•	Change Straight Quotes To Typographic Quotes [image] changes the straight quotation marks (") to curly, typographical quotes ( [image] or [image])

•	Correct Two Initial, Consecutive Capitals [image] corrects the second capitalized letter in a word to lowercase, for example, "THe" is corrected to "The"

•	Capitalize Names Of Days [image] automatically capitalizes the names of days

•	Replace Text While Typing [image] automatically corrects errors listed in the Replacement Text list box as you type

 Related Topics


Adding and deleting Type Assist replacements

Type Assist provides many preset replacements. You can add to the list or remove replacement settings. You can also use Type Assist to automatically replace abbreviations and other text shortcuts for frequently used words and phrases. For instance, you can use Type Assist to replace "asap" with the phrase "as soon as possible."

To add a Type Assist replacement

1.	Click Tools, Type Assist.

2.	Type the word you want Type Assist to automatically replace in the Replace box.

3.	Type the word or phrase you want to use as the replacement in the With box.

4.	Click the Add button.

To delete a Type Assist replacement

1.	Click Tools, Type Assist.

2.	Click the replacement setting you want to delete.

3.	Click the Delete button.

To edit a replacement word in Type Assist

1.	Click Tools, Type Assist.

2.	Choose the shortcut from the list of replacements.

3.	Edit the word in the With box.

4.	Click the Replace button.

 Notes

•	Type Assist only corrects words when you press SPACEBAR, TAB, or ENTER after typing the word.

 Related Topics


Using languages


Overview: Using languages
Using languages

Corel VENTURA lets you assign different languages to paragraphs, paragraph tags, and character tags used in your publication. The writing tools automatically use the correct language when checking through your publication. For example, you can create a publication using French and English text. If the language for the French text is set to French and the language for the English text is set to English, the writing tools automatically change to the correct language to test the spelling and grammar.

For a list of the languages supported by the Corel VENTURA writing tools, see Language support for the writing tools in the Reference section of the online Help.

 Note

•	The writing tools can only check your publication in a language if the language module has been installed. You can select the language modules using a custom installation of Corel VENTURA. For more information, see "Installing, uninstalling, and launching applications."

 Related Topics


Assigning a language to text

You can assign a language to paragraphs, paragraph tags, and character tags used in your publication. The writing tools automatically use the correct language when checking spelling and grammar.

To assign a language to a paragraph

1.	Click a paragraph.

2.	Click Format, Paragraph Properties.

3.	Click the General tab.

4.	Choose a language from the Language list box.

To assign a language to a paragraph tag

1.	Click Tools, Tag Window.

2.	Click the Paragraph tab.

3.	Click the paragraph tag to which you want to assign a language.

4.	Click the Tag Properties button.

5.	Click the General tab.

6.	Choose a language from the Language list box.

To assign a language to a character tag

1.	Click Tools, Tag Window.

2.	Click the Character tab.

3.	Click the character tag to which you want to assign a language.

4.	Follow steps 4 to 6 from the previous procedure.

 Note

•	If you select a German language, you can choose whether you want to use Old, New, or both grammatical rule styles. To set the grammatical style, click a paragraph that you have assigned to be German-National or German-Switzerland, click Tools, Spell Check or Grammatik. Click the Options button, and click Main Word Lists. In the dialog box, enable the grammar style you want to apply.

 Related Topics


Changing the language for the default template

Each new Corel VENTURA publication that is created when you click File, New, is based on the DEFAULT.VP template file. If you want to set the default language for new publications, you can edit the DEFAULT.VP template file's paragraph tags or you can automatically change the default language setting. For more information about changing the DEFAULT.VP template, see "Editing and restoring the default template."

To manually change the language of the default template

1.	Click File, New.

2.	Click Tools, Tag Window, and click the Paragraph tab.

3.	Hold CTRL, and click the tags for which you want to change the language.

4.	Click the Tag Properties button.

5.	Click the General tab.

6.	Choose a language from the Language list box.

7.	Click File, Save As.

8.	Choose the X:\COREL\GRAPHICS8\VENTURA\SAMPLES folder from the Save In list box, where "X" indicates the drive where you installed Corel VENTURA.

9.	Type DEFAULT.VP in the Filename box, and click the Save button.

 Note

•	Character tags will use the language settings specific for the paragraph in which the character tag is applied. Therefore, you do not have to specifically set a language for each character tag.

To automatically change the language of the default template

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	In the Workspace category, click Save.

3.	Choose a language from the Default Language list box.

4.	Click the Reset Default Template button.

 Note

•	Automatically changing the language of the default template will reset all default template settings (including page size, margins, and tag properties) to their original settings. Use the "To manually change the language of the default template" procedure if you only want to change the language.

 Related Topics


Managing word lists


Overview: Managing word lists
Managing word lists

A word list is a list of words or phrases used by Spell Checker and Grammatik. Spell Checker and Grammatik use two types of word lists: a main word list and a user word list. Main word lists are preset lists of words for a language, such as English, French, or Spanish, or particular to a field, such as law or medicine. You can add words to your user word list while using Spell Checker and Grammatik, or you can manually add words to your word lists.

 Note

•	Each language supported by Corel VENTURA has a main word list and a user word list.

 Tip

•	You can edit main word lists using Spell Utility. For more information, see "Using Spell Utility."

 Related Topics


Adding words to a user word list using Spell Checker or Grammatik

When you use Spell Checker and Grammatik to proofread your publication, they search both the main word list and the user word list. You can add words to the user word list when Spell Checker or Grammatik encounters them.

To add a word to the default user word list using Spell Checker

1.	Click Tools, Spell Check.

2.	When Spell Checker stops on a word, click the Add button.

To add a word to the default user word list using Grammatik

1.	Click Tools, Grammatik.

2.	When Grammatik stops on a misspelled word, click the Add button.

 Note

•	Spell Checker and Grammatik use the same word list.

 Related Topics


Adding to and editing user word lists

Word lists contain alternate spellings of words and replacement phrases. You can manually add words to a user word list. You can also edit and delete entries in your user word list.

To add a word to a user word list

1.	Click Tools, Spell Check.

2.	Click the Options button, and click User Word Lists.

3.	If you have more than one user word list, click a user word list from the Word Lists box.

4.	In the Word List Contents section, type a word you want to define a replacement for in the Word/Phrase box.

5.	Click the Add Entry button.

To add a replacement to a user word list

1.	Follow steps 1 to 4 from the previous procedure.

2.	Type the replacement in the Replace With box.

3.	Click the Add Entry button.

 Tip

•	You can also add words and replacements to a user word list from Grammatik.

To delete a word or replacement from a user word list

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the "To add a word to a user word list" procedure.

2.	In the Word List Contents section, click a word list entry.

3.	Click the Delete Entry button.

To edit replacements in a user word list

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the "To add a word to a user word list" procedure.

2.	Choose the entry you want to edit from the word list in the Word List Contents section.

3.	Type the corrected replacement in the Replace With box.

4.	Click the Replace Entry button.

 Related Topics


Creating user word lists

You can manually edit existing user word lists, or you can create new user word lists. If you want information about creating new main word lists, see "Using Spell Utility."

To create a user word list

1.	Click Tools, Spell Check.

2.	Click the Options button, and click User Word Lists.

3.	Click the Add List button.

4.	Type the filename for the new user word list in the File Name box, and click Open.

Corel VENTURA adds the proper extension automatically. User word lists use the filename extension UWL.

 Related Topics


Applying user word lists to a language

You can apply up to 10 different user word lists to any language that Corel VENTURA supports. With different word lists applied to a language, Spell Checker and Grammatik search each word list before indicating a word has been misspelled. You can also remove user word lists that you have applied, and you can set the default user word list for that language. You cannot delete the default user word list for a particular language.

To apply a user word list to a language

1.	Click Tools, Spell Check.

2.	Click the Options button, and click User Word Lists.

3.	Click the Add List button.

4.	Click the user word list, and click Open.

To remove a user word list from a language

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the "To add a user word list to a language" procedure.

2.	Select the user word list you want to remove from the Word lists list.

3.	Click the Remove List button.

To set a default user word list

1.	Click Tools, Spell Check.

2.	Click the Options button, and click User Word Lists.

3.	Choose a user word list from the Word Lists list.

4.	Click the Set Default button.

 Note

•	An "X" must appear in the check box next to the user word list you want to set as the default.

 Tip

•	You can also perform these procedures from Grammatik.

 Related Topics


Applying a main word list to a language

You can apply up to 10 different main word lists to any language that Corel VENTURA supports. With different word lists applied to a language, Spell Checker and Grammatik search each word list before indicating a word has been misspelled. You can also remove main word lists that you have applied, and you can set a default main word list. You cannot delete the default main word list for a particular language.

To apply a main word list to a language

1.	Click Tools, Spell Check.

2.	Click the Options button, and click Main Word Lists.

3.	Click the Add button.

4.	Click a main word list file.

5.	Click Open.

To remove a main word list from a language

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Click the main word list you want to remove.

3.	Click the Remove button.

 Notes

•	You cannot remove the default main word list for a language.

•	Main word list files use the filename extensions LEX and MOR.

•	Word lists you have removed are not deleted from your computer.

 Related Topics


Using Spell Utility


Overview: Using Spell Utility
Using Spell Utility

Spell Utility lets you create and edit main word lists that you can use with Spell Checker and Grammatik. A main word list is a list of words for a language, such as English, French, or Spanish, or particular to a field, such as law or medicine. You can also use Spell Utility to join main word lists and to convert main word lists used in previous versions to the format used in the current version.

Corel VENTURA uses the same main and user word lists as Corel WordPerfect. Spell Utility allows you to:

•	add words to existing main word lists

•	convert ANSI or ASCII text documents and Corel WordPerfect documents to main word lists, convert main word lists to text documents, and convert main word lists from previous version word lists to version 8 word lists

•	delete words that you have added to main word lists. You cannot delete words that are included in the word list by default.

•	merge Corel WordPerfect documents and ANSI or ASCII text documents into an existing main word list

•	view the contents of a main word list. Spell Utility displays the closest matches to words that you type in the Word box.

 Related Topics


Installing Spell Utility

Spell Utility is automatically installed when you perform a custom installation of Corel VENTURA. For more information about custom installations of Corel VENTURA, see "Installing, uninstalling, and launching applications."

To install Spell Utility

1.	Close all applications, including Corel VENTURA.

2.	Insert the Corel VENTURA installation CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.

3.	Follow the instructions on your screen.

The Corel Setup Wizard guides you through the installation process.

4.	When you get to the Corel VENTURA 8 Setup Options, click Custom Setup.

 Note

•	If you have already installed Corel VENTURA, you can install Spell Utility without reinstalling the application. In the Corel VENTURA 8 Components list, click the plus sign ( [image]) to expand Productivity Tools, and enable the Corel Spell Utility check box. Disable the check boxes for the components you do not want to reinstall; for example, you can disable the Corel VENTURA check box if you have already installed the application.

 Related Topics


Running Spell Utility

You can run Spell Utility from the Start button on the Windows taskbar.

To run Spell Utility

1.	Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.

2.	Click Programs, Corel VENTURA 8, Productivity Tools, Spell Utility.

 Note

•	To access the Spell Utility online Help, click the Help button.

•	If Spell Utility does not appear in the Corel VENTURA, Productivity Tools folder, you can click the Start button on the Windows taskbar, and click Find, Files Or Folders. Type WTSPTLEN.EXE in the Named box, and click Find Now. Spell Utility is located in the same folder as Corel VENTURA (X:\COREL\GRAPHICS8\PROGRAMS, where "X" indicates the drive where you installed Corel VENTURA.)

 Related Topics


Prints crop marks. These marks are used as alignment aids when trimming the printed output down to its final size.

To see the crop marks, you must define a working page size that is smaller than the dimensions of the actual sheet of paper or film that is used to image the work.


Allows you to print on both sides of the page. When you enable this option, and you print to a non-double sided printer, the application automatically runs a wizard that ensures all of the pages are ordered and oriented correctly.


Prints a negative image when enabled.


Prints a backwards image when enabled.


Lets you add, remove, and position printers' marks.


Places page numbers on the printed sheets. To see the page numbers, you must define a working page size that is smaller than the dimensions of the actual sheet of paper or film that is used to image the work.


Lets you select, position, and scale images in your document.


Prints registration marks on each sheet. These marks serve as guides for aligning color separations.

To see the registration marks, you must define a working page size that is smaller than the dimensions of the actual sheet of paper or film that is used to image the work.


Lets you specify and edit signature layout styles.


Lets you magnify portions of the document.


Lets you specify and edit an N-up format.


The Toolbox


The Pick tool lets you select, move, and resize objects using the mouse. After you select an object, you can use commands in the menus or the toolbar to change its appearance.


The Freehand tool lets you draw freehand lines and shapes using a click-and-drag style of drawing similar to the way you move a pencil on paper.


The Bezier tool lets you create curves using a connect-the-dots style of drawing where you specify the start and end points of the line or curve you want to draw. Corel VENTURA then connects these points.


The Paragraph tool lets you select paragraphs with a single mouse click. Using the Paragraph tool changes the Property bar to give you a number of formatting options that are different than what are available from selecting paragraphs with the Pick tool. These options include tracking options, alignment, and paragraph spacing options. Using the Paragraph tool in Tag Paragraph Mode lets you update certain formatting attributes of the tag automatically.


The Graphics Tools lets you draw graphics objects, including circles, ellipses, squares, rectangles, polygons, stars, lines, callouts, and artistic text.


The Frame tool lets you draw frames in which to place pictures, text, or fills.


The Frame Anchor tool allows you to anchor frames on the page.


The Node Edit tool lets you modify the shape graphic objects, frames, and curve objects.


The Marquee tool lets you select multiple objects at once by drawing a box around them.


The Outline tool lets you format that outline of the selected item using the Outline Tools flyout (shown below).


Standard toolbar


The New button creates a new blank publication based on the default template.


The Update Publication button updates tables of contents, indexes, cross-references, and page tags in your publication at the same time.


The Autoscroll central point determines the position from which Corel VENTURA will automatically scroll. Once the central point is established, Corel VENTURA will automatically scroll as you move the mouse around the central point in the direction that you are from the central point. The closer you are to the central point the slower Corel VENTURA will scroll.


Property bar


The Insert Table button lets you quickly define and insert a table into your publication. The table can be formatted and resized at anytime.


The X-origin button is used to position a frame or graphic object horizontally relative to the left edge of the base page frame.


The Y-origin button is used to position a frame or graphic object vertically relative to the top edge of the base page frame.


The Center Vertical button aligns the center of the selected frame  or graphic object with the vertical center of the page.


The Center Horizontal button aligns the center of the selected frame or graphic object with the horizontal center of the page.


The Width button is used to change the width of a drawn frame or graphic object.


The Height button is used to change the height of a drawn frame or graphic object.


The Arrowhead list box is used to apply an arrowhead to the start point of a line drawn with the graphics tool.


The Line Styles list box changes the outline style of objects and frames.


The Endpoint list box is used to apply an arrowhead endpoint to a line drawn with the graphic tool.


The Line Thickness list box is used to change the outline thickness of graphic objects and frames.


The Convert To Frame button is used to convert graphics objects to frames.


The Add Node button is used to add a node to the selected object.


The Smooth Node button is used to change the selected node into a node with control points that are directly opposite each other.


The Cusp Node button is used to change the selected node into a node with control points that can be moved independently.


The Symmetrical Node button is used to change the selected node into a node with symmetrical control points.


The Connect Nodes button lets you merge two nodes.


The Break Curve button lets you split a curve object.


The Auto-reduce Curve button automatically removes extraneous nodes while maintaining the object's shape.


The Convert Curve To Line button allows you to change a curved segment of a curve object to a straight segment.


The Convert Line To Curve button allows you to change a straight segment of a curve object to a curved segment.


The Convert To Curves button lets you convert a graphic object or frame to a curve object.


The Tracking list box lets you select preset tracking values for your text.


The Frame Columns button lets you apply columns to a selected frame or page.


The Side-By-Side Paragraphs button lets you arrange two or more paragraphs evenly across a page. If this button doesn't appear on your toolbar, use the Tools, Options command to add it.


The Insert Symbol button allows you to insert symbols (for example, [image] and [image]) and special typographical characters (for example, [image] and [image]) in your publication.


The Edit Item button lets you quickly edit markers used for cross-references, equation, index entries, other objects. For the Edit Item button to be enabled, the cursor must be directly to the left of the item.


Characters smaller than and positioned below the baseline of other characters in a word or line of text.


Characters smaller than and positioned above the x-height of other characters in a word or text string.


The Undo button reverses the last action you performed.


The Automatic Spell Check button allows you to check your text for spelling errors.


Status bar


The Page layout button switches the active document to Page Layout view which displays the document the way it looks when printed.


The Copy Editor button switches the active document to Copy Editor view, which displays text without formatting, pictures, or frames, and shows markup codes.


The Page Tag button switches the publication to Page Tag View, allowing you to make formatting changes to the page tag.


The Open VENTURA Library button opens an existing library. Libraries can contain items such as text, pictures, tags, and chapters. You can move items from the library into publications and from publications into the library.


The Zoom Value box changes the magnification level of the active publication anywhere from 25 to 1250 per cent.


Zoom tools


The Zoom To Page button displays the entire page.


The Magnify To Full Height button makes the page fit within the top and bottom of the Publication Window.


The Magnify To Full Width button makes the page fit within the left and right edges of the Publication Window.


The Zoom To Multiple Pages button displays multiple pages at the same time.


The Facing Pages Zoom button displays adjacent pages in a double-sided publication side by side.


The Zoom To Selected button zooms to the selected object.


The Zoom To Actual Size button displays the publication at the size at which it will print.


The Double Down Arrow button moves to the next page.


The Double Up Arrow button moves to the previous page.


Fill tool flyout


Holding down the mouse button on this tool opens the Fill flyout which contains tools for preset fills, as well as various tools for setting uniform, fountain, texture, and pattern fills (shown below).


The Uniform Fill dialog opens the Uniform Fill dialog box, which allows you to create and apply a uniform fill color.


The No Fill dialog removes the fill from the current fame or graphic object, leaving it transparent.


Opens the Full-Color Bitmap Pattern dialog box used to apply full-color bitmap pattern fills to your frames and graphic objects.


Opens the Vector Pattern dialog box used to apply vector pattern fills to your frames and graphic objects.


Opens the Two-Color Bitmap Pattern dialog box, used to apply two-color bitmap pattern fills to your frames and graphic objects.


The Go To Previous Chapter button moves to the first page of the previous chapter.


The Go To Next Chapter button moves to the first page of the next chapter.


Fountain fills


A type of fountain fill that shows a progression of colors in a straight line. You can apply custom or built-in linear fills that use a direct progression from one color to another or a cascade of different colors.


A type of fountain fill that shows a progression of colors in a series of concentric circles that radiates from the center of the object outwards. You can apply custom or built-in conical fills that use a direct progression from one color to another or a cascade of different colors.


A type of fountain fill that shows a progression of colors in a circular path that radiates from the center of the object. You can apply custom or built-in radial fills that use a direct progression from one color to another or a cascade of different colors.


A type of fountain fill that shows a progression of colors in a series of concentric squares that radiate from the center of the object outwards. You can apply custom or built-in square fills that use a direct progression from one color to another or a cascade of different colors.


Displays a thumbnail image of the selected fountain fill. You can change the fill's orientation by dragging the pointer in the preview box. Hold down the CTRL key while dragging to constrain the angle of the arrow to 15 degree intervals.


Used for specifying fountain fills. You can choose from a Linear, Radial, Conical, or Square path.


Determines the intermediate fill colors according to hue and saturation changes along a straight line, beginning at the From color and continuing across the color wheel to the To color.


Intermediate colors change in the fountain fill using a counter-clockwise path around the color wheel.


Intermediate colors change in the fountain fill using a clockwise path around the color wheel.


Shows the color path that determines your intermediate fill colors.


Displays a thumbnail image of the currently selected pattern. Click the preview box to display a list of available patterns.


Displays a thumbnail image of the currently selected pattern. Click the preview box to display a list of available patterns.


Displays a thumbnail image of the currently selected pattern. Click the preview box to display a list of available patterns.


Uniform Fill dialog box


Saves the current custom label setting under a name you specify.


Removes the current label style from the Label Style list.


Outline Tool flyout


Removes the outline from the current object.


Opens the Outline Pen dialog box, which allows you to set and apply Outline Pen attributes such as color, width, style, nib shape, and arrowheads.


Opens the Outline Color dialog box, which allows you to create and apply a custom outline color. You can also create and select colors from a custom palette.


Outline Pen dialog box


Beveled Corners produces blunted corners.


Setting the corner shape can greatly affect the appearance of lines and curves, especially if the object has a particularly thick line weight or the object is particularly small.


Mitered Corners produces mitered (pointed) corners.


Rounded Corners produces round corners.


Line Caps determine the shape of the end of the line.


Square Line Caps cuts the line off exactly at the end points.


Rounds off the ends of each line segment so that it appears to be dotted.


Extended Square Line Caps squares off the ends of the line.


Displays the colors available for the CMYK and CMYK255 color models. Modify the level of cyan, magenta, and yellow using the three-dimensional visual selector; the vertical slider defines the level of black.


Displays the colors available based on the color model selected. Select a color by adjusting the vertical slider that appears. You can modify the color by clicking and dragging the small square that appears inside the preview box.


Arrowheads


The nodes marked in red stretch the arrowhead in one direction.


The nodes marked in red scale the arrowhead evenly.


The nodes marked in red move the arrowhead without changing its size or shape.


Graphics tool flyout


The Rectangle tool lets you draw rectangles and squares.


The Ellipse tool lets you draw ellipses and circles.


The Polygon tool lets you draw objects with three or more sides.


The Star tool lets you draw stars.


The Freehand tool lets you draw straight lines and curves as though you are using a pencil on paper.


The Callout tool lets you add labels to an illustration. A callout line points to the illustration at one end, and has a text box attached to the other end. The text box holds any amount of text, so that you can type either brief captions or long descriptions. You can use callouts to identify different parts of an illustration, or to highlight one specific area.


The Artistic text tool lets you create artistic text. Artistic text is similar to regular text in the way you type it in and use editing tools on it, like Spell Checker and Grammatik, but you can apply special effects to it like a graphic object.


The Node delete button lets you delete the selected node(s) in a graphic.


VENTURA Navigator Icons


The Navigator button opens a VENTURA Navigator window. You can have up to five VENTURA Navigator windows open at one time. If you do have five open, clicking the Navigator button displays each VENTURA Navigator window in succession.


The Close Navigator button closes VENTURA Navigator windows.


In the VENTURA Navigator, indicates the active publication.


In the VENTURA Navigator, indicates a publication that is open but not active.


In the VENTURA Navigator, indicates a table of contents.


In the VENTURA Navigator, indicates an index.


In the VENTURA Navigator, indicates a chapter.


In the VENTURA Navigator indicates an embedded picture.


In the VENTURA Navigator, indicates a page tag.


In the VENTURA Navigator, indicates a stylesheet.


In the VENTURA Navigator, indicates a text file.


In the VENTURA Navigator, indicates an externally-referenced picture.


In the VENTURA Navigator, indicates than an externally-referenced file or a file linked to a document from a library is not found.


In the VENTURA Navigator, indicates a file that is linked from the library.


In the VENTURA Navigator, indicates a cross-reference to a frame.


In the VENTURA Navigator, indicates a cross-reference.


In the VENTURA Navigator, indicates an unresolved cross-reference marker.


In the VENTURA Navigator, indicates an unresolved cross-reference marker for a frame.


In the VENTURA Navigator, indicates that the index, table of contents, or cross-reference list does not exist.


In the VENTURA Navigator, indicates a text marker.


Table and function buttons


The Vertical Grid list box lets you choose a style for the vertical borders of your table.


The Horizontal Grid list box lets you choose a style for the vertical borders of your table.


The Merge Cells button merges the selected cells into one cell. Only the contents of the top left cell will be displayed after the cells have been merged. Information in the other cells will reappear if the cells are split.


The Split Cells button changes the selected merged cell into individual cells.


The Select Table button selects the table in which the cursor is planted.


The Select Row button selects the row in which the cursor is planted.


The Select Column button selects the column in which the cursor is planted.


The Insert Column button opens the Insert Column(s) dialog box, from which you can insert any number of columns to the left or right of the column in which your cursor is planted.


The Insert Row button opens the Insert Row(s) dialog box, from which you can insert any number of rows above or below the row in which your cursor is planted.


The Delete Column button deletes the column in which the cursor is planted.


The Delete Row button deletes the row in which the cursor is planted.


Autosum will automatically add the contents of the table row or column, depending upon the cell selected. To use autosum, first click in the table cell you wish the sum to be placed in and then click the autosum button.


The Nest Function button is used to embed a second function within another function in the Function Wizard.


The Recalculate button recalculates the products from formulas and functions within your tables. Formulas and functions will not automatically update the results if the parameters or values calculated change.


The Table Function button on the Workspace toolbar toggles display of the Table Function toolbar.


The Sort button opens the Sort dialog box, which you can use to sort your table by 1, 2, or 3 columns. The Sort button appears on the Property Bar if you have table cells selected.


The Sort Ascending button sorts the information in your table by the column or cells selected.


The Sort Descending button sorts the information in your table by the column or cells selected.


The Table Autofill Series button opens the Fill Series dialog box which you use to define your autofill options.


The Table Properties button open the Table Properties dialog box to allow you to format the selected table.


The Below Rule Tag list box applied the selected rule tag to the bottom cell border of the selected cell(s).


The Above Rule Tag list box applied the selected rule tag to the top cell border of the selected cell(s).


The Left Rule Tag list box applied the selected rule tag to the left cell border of the selected cell(s).


The Right Rule Tag list box applied the selected rule tag to the right cell border of the selected cell(s).


Equations popgraphics


The Spaces/Ellipses palette provides quick access to the various styles of ellipses and the options for adding spaces to your equation.


Corel SCRIPT


An external script is a series of recorded commands which is saved as a separate text file onto your hard drive. External scripts can be edited using a basic word processor as long as the scripting language used in them is maintained. An internal script can be made into an external script by simply exporting it so that it appear as a separate text file. As well, an external script can be imported into a particular publication and made into an internal script.


An internal script is a series of recorded commands which is embedded into a publication's stylesheet and can only be executed or edited if a publication using that stylesheet is open. An internal script can be exported as a separate text file and used in other Ventura publications. As well, an external scripts can be imported into a publication and made to be an internal script.


The Start Recording button on the Recording And Script toolbar starts recording a series of actions that you want to repeat.


The Playback Recording button on the Recording And Script toolbar replays the last recording you made. A recording lasts until another recording is made or until you exit the application.


The Save Recording button on the Recording And Script toolbar saves the current recording as an internal or external script.


The Stop Recording button on the Recording And Script toolbar ends the current recording session.


The Run/Manage Scripts button on the Recording And Script toolbar opens the Scripts dialog box.


The Corel SCRIPT Editor button on the Recording And Script toolbar opens Corel SCRIPT Editor which you can use to manually edit your scripts and recordings.


Miscellaneous - reference type-o-things


The Outline Pen lets you adjust the thickness, color, and style of your lines.


The Add button lets you add a new title in the Table of Contents/Index Properties dialog box.


An example of typographic quotation marks.


An example of French style quotation marks.


 An example of German style quotation marks.


The Add button creates a new tag.


The Outline/Fill button lets you modify the fill or outline for text.


The Fill button lets you choose fills (for example, fountain fills or pattern fills) for the background of a selected paragraph.


The Cut button copies the selected item or text  to the clipboard and removes it from the original location.


The Paste button copies the item or text in the clipboard to the selected location.


The Copy button copies the selected item to the clipboard.


The Inside Rules button places your rules inside a frame.


The Outside Rules button places your rules outside a frame.


Page layout


The Move cursor allows you to move rulers within the Publication Window.


The margin boundary markers make it easy for you to set your margins by simply dragging them to the appropriate positions. If you change the margins in Page Tag view, the margins for all pages using that page tag will change. If you change the margins in page layout view, only the margins for that particular page change. If you have selected a frame, the margin boundary markers will let you adjust the margins around the selected frame.


The First Match button lets you use the text in the first paragraph on a given page formatted with a specified tag, in a header or footer.


The Last Match button lets you use the text in the last paragraph on a given page formatted with a specified tag, in a header or footer.


The Current Match button lets you use the text from the first paragraph formatted with the specified tag that appears at the top of a page in a header or footer. The header or footer does not change until another paragraph with the specified tag appears.


The Insert Chapter Number button places the current chapter number in the header or footer.


The Insert Page Number button places the current page number in the header or footer.


The Insert Date and Time button places the current date and time (according to the system date and time on your computer) in the header or footer.


The Time button places the current time (according to the system time on your computer) in the header or footer, depending on the settings for your computer.


The Insert Table Number button automatically inserts the current number for the table. The table number can be inserted anywhere in your publication.


The Insert Figure Number button automatically inserts the current number for the figure. The figure number can be inserted anywhere in your publication.


The Zoom tool allows you to zoom in to a selected area of the publication. You can either draw a rectangle with Zoom tool to select the area you want to view or click the Zoom tool on the area you want to view.


The Zoom Out tool allows you to show more of the publication page or pages. Click the Zoom Out tool on the area from which you want to expand the view.


The Insert button displays the following options from the Insert Flyout (shown below): the Insert Page Number, Insert Chapter Number, Insert Figure Number, Insert Table Number, Insert Footnote, Insert Endnote, Insert Symbol, Insert Date And Time, Insert Number/Cross-reference, Insert Equation, Insert Index Entry, Insert Marker, Insert Variable, and Insert Hyperlink. The flyout displays many of the options available from the Insert menu, and can be left floating or docked.


The Copy Properties To Facing Page button lets you quickly copy header or footer frames to facing page tags in Page Tag view. The button appears on the Property Bar when the cursor is planted in the header or footer frame.


The Mirror Properties To Facing Page button lets you quickly mirror header or footer frames to facing page tags in Page Tag view. The button appears on the Property Bar when the cursor is planted in the header or footer frame.


Copy Editor


The Show Codes button lets you hide or display the Corel VENTURA markup codes in Copy Editor view.


Fill&Outline


Displays a thumbnail image of the currently selected pattern. Click the preview box to display a list of available patterns.


Displays a thumbnail image of the currently selected outline. Click the scroll arrows to adjust the thickness of your line by 0.01 inches.


Opens the Pen Roll-Up, which allows you to define and apply pen attributes such as thickness, arrowheads, and color.


Lets you adjust the tiling in the current object.


The Auto Create Color Styles button allows you to create color styles automatically based on the colors used in your current drawing.


The Edit Color Style button allows you to change a parent or child color. When you change a parent color, the child colors that are linked to the parent also change.


The New Child Color button allows you to create a child color. The link between parent and child colors is based on a common hue. You create the different shades by adjusting levels of saturation and brightness for the child colors.


Gives you quick access to the most commonly-used outline styles, such as outline thickness, line pattern, calligraphic pen effects, and arrowheads.


The Add button saves the current custom fountain fill. If you have created the fill from scratch, you must first type a name in the Presets field.


Removes the fill or outline color from the current object, leaving it transparent.


The Application Launcher gives you fast access to other applications included with Corel VENTURA that you installed.


The PostScript Fill dialog is used to fill the selected object with a special type of pattern fill designed using the PostScript language.


The Add button lets you add a new texture to one of your libraries, or overwrite an existing texture with the current one.


The Create Shades button allows you to create child colors automatically, based on the hue of the parent color. You can automatically create up to 20 children colors.


Opens a flyout where you can choose from a variety of line styles. Press the ESC key to exit without making a selection.


Previews your custom fountain fill. You can add, remove, or edit color markers by clicking just above the preview ribbon.


The Texture Fill dialog lets you apply texture fills to your objects.


When applying an outline color to an object using drag and drop, the mouse pointer changes to [image] as you move over the object, to show where the color will be applied.


Opens a flyout where you can choose from a variety of line-ending shapes. Press the ESC key to exit without making a selection.


The Delete button deletes a texture fill from the list of available textures.


Applies an outline to all edges of your selected frame.


Removes the outline from all edges of your selected frame.


Locks and unlocks the Steps box. The Steps box is unlocked when the button is depressed.


The Pattern Picker allows you to choose from different full color patterns.


The Color list box allows you to choose a color from the Fountain Fill dialog.


The Color list box allows you to choose a color from the Pattern Picker dialog.


Tag Window


The New Tag button allows you to create a new tag for your publication.


The Delete Tag button lets you delete a tag from your publication.


The Tag Properties button opens the selected tag's properties dialog box.


The Rename Tag button lets you rename the selected tag.


Minimizes the docked Tag Window or VENTURA Navigator.


Maximizes the docked Tag Window or VENTURA Navigator.


The Import Tag button lets you import tags used in other publication.


The Lock Page Tag Objects button, which is only added through customizing your workspace, lets you quickly toggle between having your page tag objects locked, (only accessible from Page Tag view) or unlocked, (accessible from Page Layout view). The same command is available by clicking Publication, Publication Properties, and clicking the General tab.


The Artistic Text tool lets you add artistic text to your publication.


The Refresh Window button updates the window to reflect changes you recently made to your publication.


The Show Tabs & Returns button hides and displays paragraph returns, tab symbols, insert item indicators, and end of file markers.


The Non-Printing Items button hides and displays all nonprinting items, such as guidelines, column guides, the grid, and paragraph returns.


The Show Tabs & Returns button hides and displays paragraph returns, tab symbols, insert item indicators, and end of file markers.


Find & Replace toolbar


The Find Next button lets you search for the next occurrence of the item specified in the Find list box.


The Find Previous button lets you search for the last found occurrence of the item specified in the Find list box.


The Replace button replaces the found item with the item specified in the Replace list box and searches for the next occurrence.


The Replace All button replaces all occurrences of the item specified in the Find list box with the item in the Replace list box.


The Search Options button lets you control the direction and scope (the entire document or the current chapter only) of the search and whether Corel VENTURA searches for whole words only and words with case as the item in the Find list box.


The Find & Replace button lets you search for and replace text or items.


Bitmap Effects tools


Selects colors from an open image. Use the left mouse button to select a paint color. Use the right mouse button to select a fill color. Hold down CTRL and click either mouse button to select a paper color. The Eyedropper tool is used in several dialog boxes in Corel VENTURA.


Click and drag the arm of the dial to set the direction in which a special effect will be applied.


Click to reveal or hide the light source in the preview window.


Click to determine the center of a radial effect.


Click to indicate which light source in the Lighting Effects dialog box is being edited.


Click the Add Light Source button to add a light source to your image; click the Remove Light Source button to remove the active light source.


 Toggles the display of the applied color changes on and off.


 Saves the conversion options that you set for use on other bitmaps later on.


 Removes the selected preset. The conversion options specified in the preset are no longer available.


Tutorial popups


Publication

A publication is file with a .VP extension. It consists of two major components [image] a stylesheet that specifies page layout information and one or more chapters that contain text and graphics.


Stylesheet

The stylesheet contains information that determines the layout of the publication. This information is organized into tags that contain the attributes that are applied to pages, paragraphs, characters, frames, and rules. You can change the layout of your publication by changing any of the attribute settings in a stylesheet or by loading a different stylesheet.

Each VENTURA 8 publication contains only one stylesheet. In Corel VENTURA 5 and earlier versions, stylesheets were associated with chapters, and a publication could contain several stylesheets. Multiple stylesheets are no longer necessary in a publication since you can apply different page tags within a publication. When you import a publication from an earlier version of Corel VENTURA, you will be given the option of merging multiple stylesheets or selecting one of the available stylesheets.


Page Tags

Page tags let you define a page's layout, for example, you can define page size and orientation, headers and footers, and repeating frames. You can then apply that layout to any page in your publication by applying the page tag. Every publication includes at least one page tag, and you can create as many page tags as you need. In previous versions of Corel VENTURA, page tags were referred to as Master Pages.


Paragraph tags

Paragraph tags include information about the text properties that apply to a paragraph. The text properties include font, alignment, and spacing. When you change the text properties for a paragraph tag, the changes are applied to all paragraphs that share the tag.


Character tags

Character tags include text attributes that you can apply to selected text. You can use character tags to format any characters in your publication without affecting any other text.


Frame tags

Frame tags contain information about frame properties, including size, shape, and position. When you apply a frame tag to a frame, the properties contained in the tag are applied to the frame. If you change the settings for a frame tag, all frames that share the tag change.


Rule tags

Rule tags contain information about ruling lines. A rule tag can be applied to a page, paragraph, frame, or table cell. Properties for rules include location, size, thickness, and color.


Internal Scripts

Scripts, sometimes called macros, are computer programs which have been recorded or written using the Corel SCRIPT programming language. Scripts can automate repetitive tasks for you. An internal script is embedded into a publication's stylesheet and can only be executed or edited if a publication that uses that stylesheet is open and active. For more information about scripting, see "Recordings and scripts."


Chapter

A chapter is the component of a publication that holds the text, graphic objects, and pictures. A publication must contain at least one chapter, and you can add as many chapters as you need.


Text

Text can be typed directly into Corel VENTURA or imported from text editors or word processing applications.


Graphics
Graphic objects

Graphic objects are any objects created with the Corel VENTURA drawing tools.


Pictures

Pictures are graphic images, such as bitmaps or vectors that are imported into a VENTURA publication. They can be embedded in your publication or referenced as external files.


Year 2000


Overview: Year 2000
Year 2000

Date storage

Corel VENTURA stores dates using serial date values, which allows for date storage that includes century information. Day 1 is set to a given date, and all following days are represented by adding an integer to the original value. For example, in Corel VENTURA, Day 1 is January 1, 1900. January 1, 2000 has a serial date value of 36525.

Date entry

There are several ways you can work with dates in Corel VENTURA. For example, the Insert Date & Time command allows you to enter and choose a format for the current system date. You can also enter dates into a table or use the Date and Time table functions.

When you enter dates in table cells that use the Date/Time numeric format, you can type shortcuts (such as 4/26/99) for the date. If you enter 00-50 for the year, Corel VENTURA will assume you are entering dates for 2000 through 2050. If you enter 51-99 for the year, Corel VENTURA will assume 1951-1999. You can override the century assumption by entering four digits for the year, such as 4/26/2099.

Operating system (OS) date limitation of Jan 18, 2038.

For many applications, including non-Corel applications, when the operating system date is Jan 18, 2038 or later, using the application can result in an IPF (Internal Program Fault) or other problems. This is not specific to Corel software, but is due to the way the C library code itself handles date/time information.

Date range

The range for valid dates entered in a Corel VENTURA table is from January 1, 100 AD to December 31, 9999. Individual Corel VENTURA table functions have differing date ranges. See the Corel VENTURA Table Functions section below for details.

Setting dates to display all 4 digits

We recommend that you set your operating system to display all four digits of the year in your applications by default (MM/DD/YYYY). Then you can then easily see what dates are being entered and stored.

To change your date display

1.	Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.

2.	Click, Settings, Control Panel, and double-click Regional Settings.

3.	Click the Date tab, and choose M/D/YYYY or MM/DD/YYYY from the Short Date Style list box.

4.	Close the Regional Settings dialog box and then exit and restart Corel VENTURA.

Editing dates entered in Corel VENTURA

If you have entered a date using only two digits to represent the year and then edit that date by removing and reentering the last two digits, the application will assign the century based on the two digit window of 00-50 = 2000-2050 and 51-99 = 1951-1999 as described in the Date Entry section above.

If you have entered a date using only two digits to represent the year and then edit that date by removing the last two digits and re-entering all four digits, the application will store the year as reentered.

If you have entered a date using all four digits to represent the year and then edit that date by removing all four digits and re-entering only the last two digits, the application will not maintain the previous century designation. It will assign the century based on the two digit window of 00-50 = 2000-2050 and 51-99 = 1951-1999 as described in the Date Entry section above.

If you have entered a date using all four digits to represent the year and then edit that date by removing and reentering the last two digits, the application will maintain the previous century designation.

Inserting the current date to display four digits in Corel VENTURA

You can insert the current date into your Corel VENTURA publication by positioning the cursor where you want the date to appear. Then click Insert, Date & Time, and choose a format that has a four digit century, such as M/D/YYYY. You can also click custom and create your own four digit, or explicit century, date, such as YYYY/M/D.

For more information on inserting the date and time in Corel VENTURA, see "Adding the date and time to a publication."

Corel VENTURA table functions

Corel VENTURA allows you to add tables to your publications to organize information in rows and columns. Corel VENTURA also allows you to insert mathematical functions in the table cells. You can use the Date and Time functions to perform date related calculations.

Serial date functions

Date and Time functions such as DAY, MONTH and YEAR, give you the corresponding day, month, or year, when you enter a serial date value. All functions that require a serial date value entry have a range from Jan 1, 1900 up to, and including, the serial date 65380 (January 1, 2079).

The date ranges for the other Date and Time functions are as follows:

Function	Date range

DATE 	Jan 1, 1900 - Dec 31, 2099

NOW	Jan 1, 1980 - Dec 31, 2099 (same as OS date range)

TODAY	Jan 1, 1980 - Dec 31, 2099 (same as OS date range)

DAYS360	Jan 1, 1900 - Dec. 17, 2077

All Other Date & Time Functions	Jan 1, 1900-Jan 1, 2079

NETWORKDAYS function

The NETWORKDAYS function returns the number of working days between any two given days. The function returns an incorrect value if the End date is a Sunday. The function returns the correct value if the End date is any other day.

Autosum function

When using this function to return the serial values of dates imported from other applications, ensure that the date separator in the dates that you are importing (the character used to separate the month from the day and year in a date string, usually a dash or a slash) is the same one that has been selected in the Windows 95® Regional Settings of the application that you are importing into.

Autofill function

The Autofill table function fills a sequence of cells, in any direction, based on a given numeric value, including dates. For best results, you should use the Autofill function to fill the cells from top to bottom or from left to right.

Corel's Year 2000 website

Corel Corporation has a Year 2000 policy Web site. For the latest information, see "What Does the Year 2000 Mean to Corel Users?" at http://www.corel.com/2000.htm.


Developing add-ons for Corel VENTURA


Developing add-ons for Corel VENTURA

Corel VENTURA has the capability to recognize and use externally developed add-ons to enhance its functionality and features. Corel add-ons are programs, or modules, written in a standard computing language that add custom features to Corel VENTURA. Along with the add-on that is provided with Corel VENTURA, many third-party software developers are making commercially available add-ons to meet the specific needs of Corel VENTURA users and the desktop-publishing community. If you are interesting in information about using add-ons, see "Using Corel add-ons."

You can use Corel SCRIPT to add your own compiled software modules to Corel VENTURA to customize and enhance its feature set and user-interface. These software modules, or add-ons, are special Windows DLL type files with a CAO file extension, which have access to the Corel VENTURA application programming interface (API).

The main difference between a CAO file and a DLL file is that the add-on has a special function, which Corel VENTURA calls when the add-on is installed. Because an add-on is registered with Corel VENTURA, the functions contained in the add-on can be assigned to a toolbar button, a menu, or a keyboard shortcut to give you faster access to the add-on functions you use most often. For example, you can create your own spell checker add-on and assign it to a Corel VENTURA toolbar button.

In some ways, Corel add-ons are like scripts and recorded commands that Corel VENTURA can run; however, the big advantage of using an add-on is speed. Other advantages of using Corel add-ons include the following:

•	Corel add-ons can contain functions that can be called by scripts or executable programs.

•	Corel add-ons can be written in any programming language that will create a Windows DLL file (e.g., C++ or Visual Basic).

•	Corel add-ons can use the Corel VENTURA API and have full access to all of the Corel VENTURA application commands.

Corel add-on sample

Included on the Corel VENTURA installation CD is the folder DEVKITS\ADDONS, which contains a sample add-on for Corel VENTURA (CAOBASE.CAO) and the source files used to generate it. While add-ons can be written in any programming language that can create a Windows DLL file, the source files for the sample add-on are written in C++.

 Related Topics


Developing a Corel add-on

To be able to develop a Corel add-on, you should know how to develop a Windows DLL file in a programming language such as C++ or Microsoft Visual Basic. You should also be familiar with using Corel VENTURA, including the Corel VENTURA automation commands and functions.

You should also know that Corel add-ons are OLE automation clients, which are developed as Windows DLL files. As an OLE automation client, they can manipulate objects exposed by Corel VENTURA. For more information about OLE automation clients, see "OLE Automation."

For an add-on to work properly with Corel VENTURA, it must be developed as a dynamic linked library (DLL) which exports two types of functions to Corel VENTURA: an installation function, and a specific function which performs a specific task. Exporting a function, means that the add-on, as an OLE Automation client, adds a function to Corel VENTURA that manipulates objects in the application. Add-ons can have any number of specific functions, but must have an installation function so that it properly registers with Corel VENTURA. For example, an add-on which supports the encoding and decoding of text can contain the following functions: CAOInstall (the installation function), EncodeText (the encoding function), and DecodeText (the decoding function). The exported functions must follow the C programming language calling conventions.

When a user invokes an add-on function, either from the Corel Add-Ons dialog box, accessed by clicking Tools, Add-Ons, or a customized menu item, toolbar button, or keyboard shortcut, the corresponding add-on function is initiated by Corel VENTURA. The add-on performs the intended task by executing its own programming code, or by getting and setting the required information using the exposed Corel VENTURA automation commands.

 Related Topics


Corel add-on sample file

The Corel VENTURA installation CD-ROM contains a folder named DEVKITS\ADDONS. This folder contains a sample Corel add-on named CAOBASE.CAO. The CAOBASE add-on performs the following functions:

Add-On Function Name	Purpose

New Publication	Creates a new publication.

New Article	Inserts text into a specified frame.

Encode	Encrypts selected text with a password.

Decode	Decrypts text encrypted using the Encode function by using the encoding password.

Source files

CAOBASE was written in the C++ programming language. The source files used to created CAOBASE are included in the DEVKITS\ADDONS\SOURCE folder.

 Related Topics


Add-on installation information

To run an add-on function in Corel VENTURA, the add-on must first be installed. For more information about installing an existing add-on, see "Installing and removing Corel add-ons."

In terms of add-on development, the following CAOInstall function must be used to properly install the add-on in Corel VENTURA:

INT CAOInstall(const char *szProductName)

This function acts as the add-on's entry point into Corel VENTURA. When a user installs an add-on in Corel VENTURA, the CAOInstall function passes the name of the Corel VENTURA exposed automation object to the add-on. For Corel VENTURA 8, the exposed automation object is CorelVentura.Automation.8.

The CAOInstall function provides a way to identify the application (including the version number) in which the add-on is being installed. This enables developers to flag errors in cases of incorrect applications or versions. In case of error, the CAOInstall function returns -1. Any other value indicates successful add-on installation.

 Related Topics


Add-on registration information

Corel VENTURA exposes the CAORegister automation function for the add-on to use to register its functions, for example:

CAORegister(const char *szPath, const char *szFunc, const char *szDesc)

where,

•	szPath specifies the full path name of the add-on

•	szFunc specifies the name of the function

•	szDesc specifies an optional description of the function [image] if you do not want to include a description, szDesc can remain empty

During installation, the add-on must attach to the automation object and call CAORegister for each function it exposes.

 Related Topics


Assigning an add-on function to the Corel VENTURA user-interface

Add-on functions for Corel VENTURA can be automatically assigned to a menu item or a toolbar button during installation. This makes the add-on functions easier to access by the users. For example, the VENTURA8.CAO add-on, supplied with Corel VENTURA, automatically creates a VENTURA8 menu in which there is a menu command for each of the add-on's functions. However, each user can easily assign add-on functions to menus, toolbar buttons, or keyboard shortcuts. For more information, see "Assigning Corel add-ons to menus, toolbars, and shortcut keys."

To assign a user function to a menu item, the CustomAddMenu automation command must be used, for example:

CustomAddMenu (Menu, Group, Command, MenuItem, Position)

To assign a user function to a toolbar button, the CustomAddButton automation command must be used, for example:

CustomAddButton(Toolbar, Group, Command, ButtonFace)

 Note

•	You cannot assign a Corel add-on function to a keyboard shortcut using a Corel VENTURA automation command.

 Related Topics


SCRIPT commands


.FileSave command
.FileSave

.FileSave is a CorelSCRIPT command which saves the active Corel VENTURA publication using its current name and location. FileSave corresponds to the Save command in the Corel VENTURA File menu; i.e., click File, Save. If the publication is not yet named, the Save As dialog box opens.


.FileSaveAs command
.FileSaveAs

.FileSaveAs is a CorelSCRIPT command which saves the active publication under a new name or in a different location. This command corresponds to the Save As command in the Corel VENTURA File menu; i.e., click File, Save As.

In a CorelSCRIPT, an example of using the .FileSaveAs command would like the following: .FileSaveAs "X:\MyBox\TEST1.VP". The open publication is saved as TEST1.VP in the X:\MyBox directory, where X indicates a drive letter.


Hypnenation info


BOOL VPHYPH_Init( LPBYTE lpszIniFileName );

This is the first function called after enumeration, and it allows the .DLL to initialize any internal data. The lpszIniFileName can be used to load any user preferences.


void VPHYPH_Capabilities( LPVPHYPHCAPS lpCaps );

struct VPHYPHLANG

{

INT nLanguageID; // supplied by Corel

INT nLanguageDialect;

BYTE byLanguageName[32];

};

struct VPHYPHCAPS

{

INT nLanguagesSupported;

BOOL bHyphenationSupported;

BOOL bSpellCheckingSupported;

VPHYPHLANG LanguageDescriptions[16];

};

This is the second function called following enumeration. Each supported hyphenation dictionary must have a unique language identification number. The language identification numbers are supplied by the Corel Solutions Partners.


BOOL VPHYPH_Terminate( void );

This function is called when the application terminates to allow the .DLL to clean up any internal data.


BOOL VPHYPH_InitLanguage( INT nLanguageID, INT nLanguageDialect, INT nMinCharsBeforefirst, INT nMinCharsAfterLast );

This function is called to identify the language set internally by the .DLL. This language will be used by all subsequent calls to VPHYPH_Hyphenate( ) or VPHYPH_SpellCheck( ).


BOOL VPHYPH_Hyphenate( LPVPHYPHWORD lpHyphWord );

struct VPHYPHWORD

{

BYTE byOriginalWord[64];

BYTE byHyphenatedWord[64]; // with embedded codes

}

This function is called to hyphenate byOriginalWord and to place the hyphenated word in byHyphenatedWord with the following hyphenation codes:

#define VPCPRV_HYPHEN	0x03 // Copy previous char to before hyphen

#define VPCNXT_HYPHEN	0x05 // Copy 2nd next char to before hyphen

#define VPCTOK_HYPHEN	0x07 // Convert previous C TO K if hyphen is used

#define VPSOFT_HYPHEN	0x17 // Normal SOFT hyphen points


BOOL VPHYPH_SpellCheck( void )

{

return (FALSE);

}

When a hyphenation dictionary is set as a hyphenation language and the function returns FALSE, the spell checker and the thesaurus use the default language specified in the VENTURA.INI file.


Character sets and ANSI codes


Overview: Character sets and ANSI codes
Character sets and ANSI codes

Corel VENTURA supports Windows character sets which include many special characters, such as mathematical symbols and letters from other languages, that are not available on most keyboards. You can enter these characters by clicking Insert, or by holding the ALT key and typing the ANSI code for the character you want. In addition, Corel VENTURA provides a number of keyboard shortcuts for more commonly used symbols, such as © and ®.

 Related Topics


Entering ANSI codes

Windows reads all keyboard entries as ANSI code characters and then passes the code to Corel VENTURA. When using a non-Windows word processor to create text files for importing into Corel VENTURA, you must enter characters above ANSI 0127 by enclosing the ANSI code in angle brackets < >, with the initial 0 in the ANSI code replaced by the @ character, such as <@162> for ¢.

For word processors which support foreign characters, Corel VENTURA will accept these characters without having to place the code numbers in angle brackets. However, the ANSI equivalent for these characters must be below 0169, and the foreign characters in your word processor must have the same ANSI equivalents as those shown in the "ANSI Code table." For characters above 169, use the @ code enclosed in angle brackets, such as <@185> for §.

To enter characters not available on the keyboard

•	Do one of the following:

•	Click Insert, Symbol and choose the character you want from the Symbol dialog box. For more information about inserting symbols and special characters, see "Inserting symbols and special characters."

•	Hold the ALT key and enter the ANSI code for the desired character.

 Note

•	The ANSI code must be entered using the numeric keypad, not the number keys across the top of the keyboard. ANSI codes over 128 must be entered as four digits with a preceding zero to ensure the correct character is entered, for example 162 produces ó, whereas 0162 produces ¢ (which is the correct character). ANSI codes up to 126 can be entered with any number of preceding zeros. If the code is listed as three digits, such as 038 (for &), the code can be entered as 0038, or 38. The code 0127 is the equivalent of CTRL + BACKSPACE, which will delete the preceding word in your text. For a listing of the ANSI codes, see the "ANSI Code table."


Overview: ANSI Code table
ANSI Code table

The following table lists the ANSI codes for the character sets used in Windows-based applications. For information on entering ANSI codes in Corel VENTURA, see "Entering ANSI codes" or "Inserting symbols and special characters."

ANSI code	Symbol	Character

032	space

033	!	exclamation mark

034	"	double quote

035	#	pound symbol

036	$	dollar sign

037	%	per cent

038	&	ampersand

039	'	single quote

040	(	left parenthesis

041	)	right parenthesis

042	*	asterisk

043	+	plus sign

044	,	comma

045	-	hyphen / dash

046	.	period

047	/	forward slash

048	0

049	1

050	2

051	3

052	4

053	5

054	6

055	7

056	8

057	9

058	:	colon

059	;	semi colon

060	<	less than

061	=	equal sign

062	>	greater than

063	?	question mark

064	@	at symbol

065	A

066	B

067	C

068	D

069	E

070	F

071	G

072	H

073	I

074	J

075	K

076	L

077	M

078	N

079	O

080	P

081	Q

082	R

083	S

084	T

085	U

086	V

087	W

088	X

089	Y

090	Z

091	[	left bracket

092	\	back slash

093	]	right bracket

094	^	caret

095	_	underscore

096	`	grave

097	a

098	b

099	c

0100	d

0101	e

0102	f

0103	g

0104	h

0105	i

0106	j

0107	k

0108	l

0109	m

0110	n

0111	o

0112	p

0113	q

0114	r

0115	s

0116	t

0117	u

0118	v

0119	w

0120	x

0121	y

0122	z

0123	{	left brace

0124	|	bar

0125	}	right brace

0126	~	tilde

0127	CTRL + BACKSPACE

0128

0129

0130	,	single quote (baseline)

0131	florin

0132	double quote (baseline)

0133	...	ellipses

0134	dagger

0135	double dagger

0136	circumflex

0137	per thousand

0138	Scaron

0139	single left guil

0140

0141

0142

0143

0144

0145	'	single left quote

0146	'	single right quote

0147	"	double left quote

0148	"	double right quote

0149	•	bullet

0150	–	en dash

0151	em dash

0152	ansi tilde

0153	trade mark symbol

0154	scaron

0155	single right guil

0156

0157

0158

0159	Y dieresis

0160	non-breaking space

0161	¡	exclamation down

0162	¢	cent

0163	£	pound sterling

0164	¤	currency

0165	¥	yen

0166	¦	broken bar

0167	§	section

0168	¨	dieresis

0169	©	copyright symbol

0170	ª	ord feminine

0171	«	left guillemot

0172	¬	logical not

0173	­	minus

0174	®	registered symbol

0175	¯	overscore

0176	°	degree

0177	±	plus / minus

0178	²	two superior

0179	³	three superior

0180	´	acute

0181	µ	mu

0182	¶	paragraph symbol

0183	·	period centered

0184	¸	cedilla

0185	¹	one superior

0186	º	ord masculine

0187	»	right guillemot

0188	¼	one quarter

0189	½	one half

0190	¾	three quarters

0191	¿	question down

0192	À	A grave

0193	Á	A acute

0194	Â	A circumflex

0195	Ã	A tilde

0196	Ä	A dieresis

0197	Å

0198	Æ

0199	Ç	C cedilla

0200	È	E grave

0201	É	E acute

0202	Ê	E circumflex

0203	Ë	E dieresis

0204	Ì	I grave

0205	Í	I acute

0206	Î	I circumflex

0207	Ï	I diresis

0208	Ð	Eth

0209	Ñ	N tilde

0210	Ò	O grave

0211	Ó	O acute

0212	Ô	O circumflex

0213	Õ	O tilde

0214	Ö	O dieresis

0215	×	multiply

0216	Ø

0217	Ù	U grave

0218	Ú	U acute

0219	Û	U circumflex

0220	Ü	U dieresis

0221	Ý	Y acute

0222	Þ	t horn

0223	ß	germanbls

0224	à	a grave

0225	á	a acute

0226	â	a circumflex

0227	ã	a tilde

0228	ä	a dieresis

0229	å

0230	æ

0231	ç	c cedilla

0232	è	e acute

0233	é	e grave

0234	ê	e circumflex

0235	ë	e dieresis

0236	ì	i grave

0237	í	i acute

0238	î	i circumflex

0239	ï	i dieresis

0240	ð	eth

0241	ñ	n tilde

0242	ò	o grave

0243	ó	o acute

0244	ô	o circumflex

0245	õ	o tilde

0246	ö	o dieresis

0247	÷	divide

0248	ø

0249	ù	u grave

0250	ú	u acute

0251	û	u circumflex

0252	ü	u dieresis

0253	ý	y acute

0254	þ	t horn

0255	ÿ	y dieresis

 Related Topics


Differences between Corel VENTURA 7/8 and previous versions


Overview: Differences between Corel VENTURA 7/8 and previous versions
Differences between Corel VENTURA 7/8 and previous versions

This chapter details the differences between earlier versions of VENTURA and Corel VENTURA and Corel VENTURA 7/8. When you convert publications from earlier versions, this information will help you understand formatting differences that may appear in your publications in Corel VENTURA 8.

 Related Topics


Overview: Text flow and alignment
Text flow and alignment

Decimal Alignment

In previous versions of Corel VENTURA, chapters and publications with decimal-aligned paragraphs extended beyond margins. Corel VENTURA 7/8 places text accurately within margins within a micron (1/1/1000th of a millimeter). This may cause some of your decimal-aligned text that was previously outside the margin to wrap to the next line.

Line Endings calculated in microns vs 1200 dpi

In previous versions, the point at which a line of text wraps to the next line or when a word must hyphenate to the next line was calculated to the nearest 1200th of an inch. Corel VENTURA 7/8 calculates these points to the nearest micron. This may cause changes in line endings and text flow.

Updated hyphenation modules

Corel VENTURA 8 uses the same hyphenation modules found in other Corel products. This will result in improved hyphenation for your publications. Changes in hyphenation points should be rare, however, a change in hyphenation affects line endings and text flow.

Corel VENTURA 8 respects the right margin

In previous versions, the right margin was not always respected when elements such as tabs and tracking were applied to text near to the margin. Text that flowed outside of the margin in previous versions will be flowed within the margins. In Corel VENTURA 7/8, this may cause lines to wrap at an earlier point in the text than they did in previous versions.

Vertical justification

Improvements have been made to vertical justification in Corel VENTURA 8. Vertical justification (when turned on) may be performed on text in areas of the publication where previous versions could not.

Precision differences

Corel VENTURA 7/8 displays values to 2 decimal places. Values indicated for paragraph properties, selected text, tracking and kerning changes, and other settings will reflect this increased precision and the value indicated may be more or less than originally entered. Text is shifted or tracked to the precise values. Although the differences may not be visible to the human eye, in extreme cases, this may cause the appearance of a red X, indicating that the text no longer fits in the designated frame.

 Related Topics


Overview: Filters
Filters

Multimate file format not supported

Corel VENTURA 7/8 does not support Multimate files. To accurately open a previous version chapter/publication containing a Multimate file in Corel VENTURA 7/8, you need to open the publication/chapter in the earlier version or Corel VENTURA and use File/Type Rename to change the text file format to a format that is supported in version 7/8, such as RTF, WordPerfect or ASCII.

Autocad SLD format not supported

Corel VENTURA 7/8 does not import Autocad SLD files. Use Autocad to export the information in a supported graphic file format (such as EPS, DXF or HPGL) and re-import the files into Corel VENTURA.

 Related Topics


Overview: Headers and footers
Headers and footers

Paragraph marker must exist in headers and footers

Previous versions allowed headers and footers to be created which contained no text. This is still possible in Corel VENTURA 8. A paragraph marker will always appear in a header or footer. The paragraph marker will also have an associated paragraph tag (normally Z_HEADER or Z_FOOTER) and paragraph tag properties. The generated paragraph and its associated tag properties may cause viewable paragraph properties, such as rules, to appear where they did not in the previous version publications.

Rules appearing in headers and footers

When rules were applied to Z_HEADER or Z_FOOTER tags in previous versions of Corel VENTURA, the rules did not appear if header or footer text was not present. Corel VENTURA 7/8 places a paragraph in the header or footer and the rules associated with the Z_HEADER or Z_FOOTER tags will appear. To prevent the rules from appearing, disable the header or footer for that page.

Enabling headers and footers in chapters created in previous versions

In previous versions, headers and footers were enabled in the Chapter dialog box. Corel VENTURA 7/8 provides header and footer functionality using page tags. A header or footer must be created on the page tag before it can be enabled in the page menu in Page Layout view.

Text in paragraphs for headers and footers

In previous versions, there were specific areas in the headers and footers where text could be placed. In Corel VENTURA 7/8, text in a header or footer is now considered a paragraph, as any other paragraph in any frame. This allows for multiple lines and multiple paragraphs within a header or footer.

Header and footer frames adjust to accommodate text

Header and footer frames automatically adjust in size to accommodate text when possible. This also occurred in previous versions. If you need to adjust header and footer frame height, you cannot do it in Page Tag view. To adjust the size of a header or footer frame in page tag view the text within the header or footer must have tag or text properties that cause the frame to resize to the desired height.

Headers and Footers displaying a red X

A red X in a frame indicates that the text designated to appear in that frame cannot be placed in the frame due to an error in the formatting of the paragraph or frame settings. In the case of headers or footers, the setting causing the problem is normally a paragraph property. Because text in headers and footers is now treated as a paragraph in a frame, Corel VENTURA 7/8 will apply the paragraph properties that may have been ignored in previous versions. The following are some specific examples you may encounter.

•	Booklets with header and footers created in previous versions

In previous versions, a booklet layout that contained headers or footers would create an In-From-Left setting that was wider than the page and the text would appear only on the left page. When these publications are opened in Corel VENTURA 7/8, a red X will appear in the header indicating that the text does not fit in the header or footer. To correct this error, you can adjust the In-From-Left setting for the header or footer paragraph tag.

•	Tab setting causing a red x to appear in headers and footers

In previous versions, tab settings that caused text to wrap to a second line would have been ignored in a header or footer. In Corel VENTURA 7/8, tab settings display a red X if the second line does not fit in the header/footer frame. To correct this, adjust the tab settings for the text in the header or footer frames.

•	Headers and footers with no text causing red x to appear

In previous versions, you could create headers or footers that contained no text. In Corel VENTURA 7/8, a paragraph always exists in a header or footer frame. A red X appears if the paragraph tag settings do not permit the paragraph to fit in the header or footer frame. The paragraph tag can be changed to allow the text to fit in the header or footer frame or the header or footer can be disabled for that page.

 Related Topics


Overview: Special items
Special items

Cross-reference text from 5.0

Corel VENTURA 5.0 allowed you to insert the words "Chapter" or "Page" as additional options into cross-references. This option is not available in Corel VENTURA 7/8.

Hollow & Solid Box Characters from previous versions

Corel VENTURA 7/8 supports box characters by converting them into a font. However, you must have Wingdings or Zapf Dingbats fonts installed on your computer to print and display box characters.

 Related Topics


Overview: Tables
Tables

Paragraphs wrapping to next line in table cells

Corel VENTURA 7/8 supports multiple paragraphs in a table cell. Greater measurement accuracy creates some situations where text wraps to an additional line in table cells. In previous versions, when dealing with text and tables, certain text/paragraph attributes were ignored or text was allowed to flow outside of the table cells. The following are some specific examples you may encounter.

•	Tabs in tables

In previous versions, if you inserted a tab in text within a table, the text could appear outside of the table cell. In Corel VENTURA 7/8, the same tab will cause text to wrap to the next line in the table cell.

•	Text in narrow table cells

In previous versions, if your text was too large to fit in a table cell, text was permitted to flow over the table cell boundary. When opened in Corel VENTURA 7/8, the same text will wrap to the next line to fit the text within the table cells.

•	Columns too narrow for tag settings

In previous versions, if a table column was narrower than the In-From-Right decimal alignment setting for a paragraph tag, the text would still display on the line but may have appeared to flow outside the table cell. In Corel VENTURA 7/8, the text will wrap to the next line. You may need to adjust the paragraph tab settings or the table column width to achieve the desired results.

•	Columns too narrow for tag settings

Previous versions ignored certain tag settings; for example, if the table column was narrower than the In-From-Right decimal alignment setting for a paragraph tag, the text would still display. In Corel VENTURA 7/8, the text will wrap to the next line. To resolve this problem, make the table, columns, or margins larger. Changing the paragraph tag settings may also correct this.

Space above tables

In previous versions, if frames of less than full column width existed above a table, the space above it was ignored, or unpredictable. In Corel VENTURA 7/8, the space above a table is applied correctly.

Space below tables

Corel VENTURA 7/8 sets the distance to the baseline of text following a table from the bottom edge of the table border, whereas previous versions set the baseline of text following a table from the upper edge of the table border. The position of text below some tables may be affected by this change.

 Related Topics


Overview: Publication structure
Publication structure

Files in different directories with the same name in the publication

Previous versions stored the file path in the chapter file [image] making it possible to have several files (from different directories) with the same name loaded in a chapter. In Corel VENTURA 7/8, the duplicate file names will have a number appended to their name.

Loading older version chapters and publications

Corel VENTURA 7/8 includes a script called VCONVERT.CSC that opens publications or chapters created in previous versions and saves them in the new file format with a .VP extension. The script includes a setting to specify the size threshold above which pictures should be left external to the new single file format. Leaving pictures external decreases the time it takes to convert publications and makes the publication file smaller.

AutoNumbering

Corel VENTURA 7/8 can apply auto-numbering across separate text files within a chapter. This may alter the numbering in chapters created in previous versions when you open them in Corel VENTURA 8. You can restart the autonumbering sequence by setting the number style to none in a single first level auto-numbered paragraph. None is the Corel VENTURA 7/8 autonumbering default setting.

Single stylesheets affecting generated tags and text

The introduction of single stylesheets may create problems if you have the same tag names in different stylesheets in a single publication. Corel VENTURA 7/8 opens a wizard to assist you in correctly mapping the tags. The wizard lets you choose the tag attributes from the stylesheet that should be used for a particular paragraph. For example, the Z_TOC tags should be taken from the stylesheet previously assigned to the table of contents, whereas the Z_CAPTION tag attributes should be taken from chapters containing captions.

Single stylesheets affecting table of contents generation

If you choose to rename the tags that were used to generate your table of contents when you open the publication in Corel VENTURA 8, you may wish to restructure the table of contents to use several different tags as the same level of the table of contents. For example mainheading_1, mainheading_2, and mainheading_3, and so on can all be assigned to one level of your generated table of contents.

 Related Topics


Overview: Fonts
Fonts

Finding substituted fonts used in text

You can use Copy Editor view to display font attribute codes for selected text. The Copy Editor view will display the original font in the attribute code, rather than the substituted font. You can use the Find & Replace command to replace the fonts.

 Related Topics


Overview: Frames
Frames

Autowrapped frames from 5.0 change text flow

In Corel VENTURA 5.0, text auto-wrapped down the left side, then down the right side of a frame. By default, Corel VENTURA 7/8 flows text continuously from left to right around the autowrapped frame so you can read from left to right across the page. You can change the text flow around the frame using the Frame Properties dialog box.

Version 8 improvements in text positioning around frames

Improvements have been made to the precision of baseline and interline positioning relative to the frame around which text is flowing.

Moving text behind a frame

In previous versions, moving a frame behind a page would hide the text in the frame. Corel VENTURA 8 gives you the option of displaying the text. Click Page, Page Properties and click the Layout tab. Enable the Show Text Behind Page check box to display the text that is layered behind the page.

Fills and rules

In previous versions of Corel VENTURA, rules around the inside of frames stopped the fill at the inside edge of the rule. However, text could be set to flow to the frame margin and could be visible between the line and the frame edge. In Corel VENTURA 7/8, text and fills are treated consistently and are allowed to go right to the edge of the frame. If you have filled frames with inside rules applied, you may notice the fill between the rules. Rules can be set to appear outside the frame in the frames properties dialog.

Anchored frames

In previous versions of Corel VENTURA, anchored frames only moved upon a re-anchor command. This could leave frames in a position where they were not meeting the frame anchor criteria. In Corel VENTURA 7/8, frames are re-anchored each time a page is re-flowed, and, as a result, the frames are frequently moved to meet the frame anchor criteria. Publications created in previous versions of Corel VENTURA that include frames that were left incorrectly anchored will be moved to the correct anchor position when viewed in Corel VENTURA7/8.

Frames affecting the text flow in other frames

In previous versions, you were able to place frames slightly over the top of other frames which had text and the text flow was not affected in either frame. In Corel VENTURA 7/8, spacing is taken into consideration. If the frames overlap slightly, you will see your text move in the frame. To correct this, use Snap To to position the frames correctly.

Cross-references in frames

Corel VENTURA 7 did not support cross-references in frames found on Page Tags (formerly known as master pages). Corel VENTURA 8 does support cross-references in frames.

 Related Topics


Overview: Indexes
Indexes

Previous versions of Corel VENTURA generated Z_INDEX MAIN and Z_INDEX SUB tags and applied them to long paragraphs of index entries in generated files. To provide greater flexibility for index tags and multiple level indexes, Corel VENTURA 7/8 tags makes a paragraph for each index entry. The index entry is tagged as Z_INDEX LVL followed by the number of the index level being tagged, such as Z_INDEX_LVL 2. This will causes the index to change the first time the publication is re-indexed in Corel VENTURA 7/8. You may want to rename the Z_INDEX MAIN tag to Z_INDEX LVL1 to minimize the effects of the new tags applied by indexing.

 Related Topics


Overview: Workgroup publishing and document management
Workgroup publishing and document management

Multiuser publications

When you open a multiuser publication created in Corel VENTURA 7 in version 8, it becomes a single user publication. You must make the publication a multiuser publication again. Click Publication, Publication Properties, click the MultiUser tab, and enable the MultiUser Access check box.

Linked Library items

All linked pictures or chapters from version 7 VENTURA Library files are not supported in Corel VENTURA 8. These items are embedded in the publication when opened in Corel VENTURA 8.

Corel VENTURA 7 Library files

All VENTURA Library files created in version 7 must be converted prior to opening them in Corel VENTURA 8. When opening a version 7 VENTURA Library file in version 8, a script automatically opens which lets you convert the VENTURA Library file.

 Related Topics


Overview: New support for picture files
New support for picture files

Masks

Previous versions of Corel VENTURA, including Corel VENTURA 7, did not support masks (except in EPS files). Corel VENTURA 8 does support masks if they are created in a file type that appears in the Corel VENTURA 8 file filter format list.

 Related Topics


Working with equations


Overview: Working with equations
Working with equations

Apart from the working formulas and functions that can be used in your Corel VENTURA tables, Corel VENTURA allows you to insert complex mathematical equations or expressions into your publications as typeset text. For example, if your publication is a scientific newsletter, you can easily add any necessary equation. A number of preset equations are available as are the tools and symbols necessary to develop your own equations.

Equations differ from functions or formulas in that functions and formulas are used in tables to perform a defined calculation and to produce a result in a specified cell. Equations are inserted as objects in your publication and do not have to be placed within a table nor do they produce a result. For more information about formulas and functions, see "Working with formulas and functions."

When you create an equation, Corel VENTURA inserts it into your publication as a single item, or object, within the text or, if you prefer, within a frame. Therefore, you cannot edit the equation within the body of the text. You can only edit an equation using the Edit Equation dialog box.

 More Detailed Information
 Related Topics


Adding and editing equations


Overview: Adding and editing equations
Adding and editing equations

Both the Insert Equation and Edit Equation dialog boxes perform the same function: they allow you to construct an equation using various template and symbol buttons. The only difference between the Edit Equation and Insert Equation dialog boxes is whether you are altering an existing equation or developing a new equation. The features and functionality of both dialog boxes are the same.

After you insert an equation into your publication, it is treated as one item rather than individual symbols or characters. To edit an equation you have to use the Edit Equation dialog box. Most of the procedures in this section use the Edit Equation or Insert Equation dialog boxes.

 Related Topics


Inserting and editing equations

Corel VENTURA lets you create and insert equations into your publications. You can also insert any of the preset equations. Both the equations that you create and the preset equations can be edited at any time. Once the equation is inserted in your publication it is treated as a single item.

To insert an equation

1.	Click the page where you want to insert a equation.

2.	Click Insert, Equation.

3.	Using the Insert Equation dialog box, construct your equation by doing the following:

•	Type your equation variables using the keyboard shortcuts. For more information about keyboard shortcuts, see "Inserting symbols and spaces in your equations" and "Inserting templates in your equations."

•	Choose the necessary elements for your equation from the drop down buttons. The symbols or elements are grouped by type; e.g., relational symbols or operational symbols. You can add elements to your equation by clicking the drop down buttons and choosing an element from the list.

Some of the symbols allow you to add variables either below, beside, above, or in combination; e.g., square roots, fractions, and matrix templates. These writable areas, which are referred to as slots, are indicated by a dashed-line box in the corresponding location next to the equation symbol or element.

4.	Click OK to insert the equation into your publication.

To insert an equation from the list of presets

1.	Click the page where you want to insert the preset equation.

2.	Click Insert, Equation.

3.	In the Insert Equation dialog box, click the Presets button.

4.	In the Equation Presets dialog box, choose an equation from the Choose A Preset list and click OK.

You can edit or format the equation within the Insert Equation dialog box.

5.	In the Insert Equation dialog box, click OK to insert the equation into your publication.

To edit an equation

1.	Click in front of an equation in your publication.

2.	Click Edit, Edit Item.

3.	In the Edit Equation dialog box, click the Edit Equation tab.

4.	Make any changes to the equation.

5.	Click OK to update the equation in your publication.

 Tips

•	You can also click the page where you want to insert an equation, right-click, and choose Insert, Equation.

•	You can also click in front of an equation, right click, and choose Edit Item.

 Note

•	You can edit preset equations, as you would your own, when they are in the Insert Equation or Edit Equation dialog boxes. This includes adding color to the elements, changing the size of the elements, and adding or deleting elements of the preset equation. For more information on formatting equations, see "Formatting equation elements."

 Related Topics


Inserting symbols and spaces in your equations

Both the Edit Equation and Insert Equation dialog boxes allow you to insert equation symbols and spaces either by using the drop down buttons on the right side of the dialog box or by using keyboard shortcuts. The following keyboard shortcuts can only be used in the Edit Equation or Insert Equation dialog boxes. For more information about accessing the Insert or Edit Equation dialog boxes, see "Inserting and editing equations."

To insert...	Press CTRL+ K, release those keys, and press ...

I

A

D

< or SHIFT + <

> or SHIFT + >

T

E

SHIFT + E

C

SHIFT + C

To insert...	Press ...

a Thin space	CTRL + ALT +SPACEBAR

a Figure space	CRTL + SPACEBAR

an Em space	CTRL + SHIFT + SPACEBAR

To insert equation symbols using drop down buttons

•	Click the drop down buttons on the right side of the Edit Equation or Insert Equation dialog boxes and select a symbol from the list.

The symbols or elements are grouped by type; e.g., relational symbols or operational symbols.

To insert spaces into your equations using drop down buttons

1.	Click where you want to insert spaces.

2.	Click the Spaces/Ellipses drop down button (second column, top button) and select one of the options.

 Notes

•	The keyboard shortcuts listed above are all two-step processes. In the first step, press CTRL and K and then release those keys. In the second step, press the key from the list for the specific character you require.

•	An Em space is the space used by an uppercase M in the chosen font. Figure and thin spaces are one third and one sixth, respectively, of the Em space.

 Related Topics


Inserting templates in your equations

A template consists of a symbol and, in some cases, slots for adding variables or numbers into a preset format, or template. Slots appear as dashed-line boxes in the corresponding location next to the equation symbol or element. For example, a fraction template provides two slots, one for the numerator and one for the denominator, that are separated by a line ( [image]). Components can be placed in the slots by selecting the slot and inserting a variable, number, symbol, word, or phrase.

The following keyboard shortcuts can only be used in the Edit Equation or Insert Equation dialog boxes. For more information about accessing the Insert or Edit Equation dialog boxes, see "Inserting and editing equations."

To insert ...	Press ...

CTRL + ) or CTRL+ (

CTRL + ] or CTRL+ [

CTRL + SHIFT + } or CTRL+SHIFT+ {

CTRL + F

CTRL + /

CTRL + H

CTRL + L

CTRL + J

CTRL + R

CTRL + I

CTRL + T, then N

CTRL + T, then S

CTRL + T, then P

CTRL + T, then M

CTRL + T, then U

 Note

•	For keyboard shortcuts such as CTRL + T, then N, the format indicates that this is a two-step process; i.e., in the first step you press CTRL and T then release those keys, and in the second step press N.

 Related Topics


Moving the cursor in a equation

You can move around in your equation by using either your mouse or keyboard shortcuts. The following commands can only be used in the Edit Equation or Insert Equation dialog boxes. For more information about accessing the Insert or Edit Equation dialog boxes, see "Inserting and editing equations."

To position the cursor in an equation

•	Point and click.

To move the cursor to the next character

•	Press [image] or [image].

To move the cursor to the next slot

•	Press TAB or INSERT.

To move the cursor to the end of the previous slot

1.	Click in a slot.

2.	Press SHIFT + TAB.

To move the cursor to the beginning of the current slot

1.	Click in a slot.

2.	Press HOME.

To move the cursor to the end of the current slot

1.	Click in a slot.

2.	Press END.

 Note

•	The position of the cursor within the equation is shown by a horizontal line that runs along the bottom edge and a vertical line that runs along the right edge of the equation element.

 Related Topics


Selecting and moving equation elements

You can format an equation in your publication as a single item in the same way you format text. For example, if you want to change the font, font size, or color, you can select the entire equation using your mouse, or by double-clicking it, and then apply the formatting you want. For more information about formatting text, see "Applying text attributes."

However, to select and format equation elements you must use the Edit Equation or Insert Equation dialog boxes. For more information on formatting equation elements, see "Formatting equation elements."

To select equation elements

1.	Click in front an equation in your publication.

2.	Click Edit, Edit Item.

3.	In the Edit Equation dialog box, click the Edit Equation tab.

4.	Click the start point, or end point, of the part of the equation you want to select.

5.	Hold down SHIFT and press one of the following arrow keys:

•

•

To select a template within an equation

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	Double-click the template.

To select a slot within a template of an equation

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the "To select equation elements" procedure.

2.	Double-click the slot.

To select an equation

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the "To select equation elements" procedure.

2.	Double-click the equation.

To move an equation element by nudging

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the "To select equation elements" procedure.

2.	Select the element(s) you want to move by dragging with your mouse or by clicking to place the cursor next to the element, holding SHIFT, and pressing [image] or [image].

•	Press CTRL +

•	Press CTRL +

•	Press CTRL +

•	Press CTRL +

The selected items are moved in small increments in the indicated direction. The size of the increment depends on the current display scale: at 100%, the increment is 1 point; at 200%, it's 0.5 point, and at 400%, it's 0.25 point.

 Note

•	If the equation contains a slot or template and you want to select the entire equation, double-click outside of the slot or template. If you click inside the slot or template you will only select the contents of the slot or template.

 Related Topics


Formatting equation elements

When you have an equation in your Corel VENTURA publication you can format it as a single item; e.g., you can change the font, size, and color attributes as you would with text. To format the individual equation elements, you must do so through the Edit Equation or Insert Equation dialog boxes.

To change the color of equation elements

1.	Click in front of an equation.

2.	Click Edit, Edit Item.

3.	In the Edit Equation dialog box, click the Edit Equation tab.

4.	Select the element(s) for which you want to change the color by dragging with your mouse.

5.	Click the Color button, and choose a color.

To display more color choices, click the Other button.

To change the style of selected equation elements

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	Select the element(s) for which you want to change the style by dragging with your mouse.

3.	Choose one of the following options from the Style list box:

•	Standard, to use the predefined style or font that conforms to mathematical typesetting conventions

•	Greek, to use Greek characters

•	Other, to define a style or font

4.	Choose one of the following options from the Size list box:

•	Normal, to use the formatting of the paragraph into which the equation is being inserted

•	Subscript, to use the defined subscript size

•	Sub-Subscript, to use the defined sub-subscript size

•	Symbol, to use the defined symbol size

•	Sub-Symbol, to use the defined subsymbol size

•	Other, to define a specific font size

To change the default formatting for equations

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the "To change the color of equation elements" procedure.

2.	In the Edit Equation dialog box, click the Font tab.

3.	In the Size section of the dialog box, choose a unit of measure from the list box and type a value for any of the following elements you want to change:

•	Subscript/Superscript, to change the subscript and superscript sizes

•	Sub-Subscript/Superscript, to change the sub-subscript and super-superscript sizes

•	Symbol, to change the symbol size

•	Subsymbol, to change the subsymbol size

If you specify a percentage (%) in the units list box, the font size changes in proportion to any changes in the font size of the paragraph into which you are inserting the equation.

4.	In the Font section of the dialog box, choose the font and style you want for the Greek and Symbol characters from the list boxes.

 Notes

•	The font selected for Symbols should be the Symbol font to ensure that all symbols appear correctly.

•	To restore the original size or font, click the appropriate Defaults button.

 Related Topics


Setting default spacing for equation elements

You can move individual elements within your equations individually or by setting the default space settings. Changing the default space settings will affect all of the similarly placed elements in your equations. For more information about moving individual equation elements, see "Selecting and moving equation elements."

To set the default spacing for your equation elements

1.	Do one of the following:

•	Click immediately in front of an equation in your publication, and click Edit, Edit Item.

•	Click anywhere on the page, and click Insert, Equation.

2.	In the Edit Equation dialog box, click the Spacing tab.

3.	Choose the element for which you want to change the default spacing from the list box on the right of the dialog box.

The corresponding dimension is indicated in the image on the left.

4.	Choose a unit of measurement from the list box, and type a value in the number box.

Percentage is the default unit of measure. Using percentages means that the spacing will remain proportional to the rest of the text in the paragraph. For example, if you change the font size of the paragraph, the equation will change proportionally. If you use any other units, your equation will not adjust if the font size of the paragraph into which it is inserted changes.

 Note

•	To restore the default space settings, click the Defaults button.

 Related Topics


Deleting equation elements

Once an equation has been inserted into a Corel VENTURA publication, it is treated as a single item. To delete equation elements you must use the Edit Equation or Insert Equation dialog boxes. For more information about accessing the Edit Equation or Insert Equation dialog boxes, see "Inserting and editing equations."

To delete equation elements

1.	Click immediately in front of the equation.

2.	Click Edit, Edit Item.

3.	 In the Edit Equation dialog box, click the Edit Equation tab.

4.	Place the cursor next to the element you want to delete using the arrow keys or your mouse.

5.	Do one of the following:

•	If the cursor is in front of the character or symbol, press DELETE.

•	If the cursor is behind the character or symbol, press BACKSPACE.

To delete the contents of a slot

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	Double-click the slot and press DELETE.

To delete a template

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the "To delete equation elements" procedure.

2.	Double-click the template and press DELETE.

To delete an equation

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the "To delete equation elements" procedure.

2.	Double-click the equation and press DELETE.

To delete an equation from your publication

•	Double-click the equation and press DELETE.

 Note

•	If you want to remove a slot from a template, not just the contents of the slot, you must remove the entire template and replace it with the correct one.

 Related Topics


Using Corel VENTURA EQN Language


Overview: Using Corel VENTURA EQN Language
Using Corel VENTURA EQN Language

Corel VENTURA gives you the option to construct your equations either by using the Edit Equation or Insert Equation dialog boxes or by using the Corel VENTURA EQN (equation) Language. Although the Corel VENTURA EQN Language is more complicated to use than the Edit or Insert Equation dialog boxes, it does allow you to use a standard word processor to build equations and then import them into Corel VENTURA. It also allows you to add to the existing or create a new list of presets. For more information about using the Edit Equation and Insert Equation dialog boxes, see "Inserting and editing equations."

The Corel VENTURA EQN Language uses natural names and a simple syntax that lets you build equations in a logical manner. For example, to create

you would type cos ( theta sub 1 ) + sin ( theta sub 2 ) and the Corel VENTURA EQN Language would make the necessary conversions to produce the correct equation format.

The Corel VENTURA EQN Language enables you to use a simple word processor to build equations that print with typeset quality when they are imported into Corel VENTURA. For more information on importing equations, see "Adding an equation to the list of presets."

Corel VENTURA EQN Language rules

The Corel VENTURA EQN Language has very few formal rules, but these few rules must be followed for the Corel VENTURA EQN Language to work correctly.

Rule 1: Expressions must be separated by non-printing spaces

You must place a space before and after all commands, special words, braces, and characters. The Corel VENTURA EQN Language comprises numerous commands and special words that get translated into symbols, characters, or commands. If you do not place a space before and after one of these special words, the word prints as typed and is not translated into mathematical symbols or characters.

Rule 2: Commands must be typed as lowercase characters

The Corel VENTURA EQN Language commands must always be typed in lowercase letters. Commands typed with initial caps or in uppercase are not translated into mathematical characters or symbols.

Rule 3: A command modifies the expression that follows

Commands modify the expression immediately following them. The only exceptions to this rule are the diacritical mark commands, which modify the preceding expression; e.g., xyz bar produces [image] For more information about diacritical marks, see "Inserting diacritical marks using the EQN Language"

Expressions

An expression is:

•	any character

•	any special word

•	any group of characters not separated by a space

•	anything placed inside braces; e.g., { x + y }

 Related Topics


Inserting equations using Corel VENTURA EQN Language

The Corel VENTURA EQN Language lets you create equations by typing commands and special characters. You can also add equations to the list of presets available in the Edit Equation or Insert Equation dialog boxes. For more information about adding preset equations, see "Adding an equation to the list of presets"

To insert an equation using the Corel VENTURA EQN Language

1.	Click the page where you want to insert your equation.

2.	Click Insert, Equation.

3.	Click the EQN button.

4.	In the Insert Equation Using Ventura EQN Language, type the equation using the Corel VENTURA EQN Language format. For more information about Corel VENTURA EQN language commands see the following:

•	"Building Corel VENTURA EQN Language equations"

•	"Corel VENTURA EQN Language commands"

•	"Corel VENTURA EQN Language characters"

•	"Inserting diacritical marks using the EQN Language"

•	"Corel VENTURA EQN Language font commands."

5.	Click Apply to view your equation in the Insert Equation dialog box.

Each time you click the Apply button, the entire equation in the Insert Equation Using Ventura EQN Language dialog box is placed in the Insert Equation dialog box. To avoid duplication or confusion, delete what you have already applied from the Insert Equation Using Ventura EQN Language dialog box before typing new equation elements.

6.	Click OK to insert the equation in the Insert Equation dialog box and close the Insert Equation Using Ventura EQN Language dialog box.

 Note

•	You cannot edit an equation using the Corel VENTURA EQN Language after you have clicked OK and inserted it into the Insert Equation dialog box.

 Related Topics


Building Corel VENTURA EQN Language equations

The Corel VENTURA EQN Language is meant to be intuitive. Therefore, the equation structures follow quite closely to a verbal description of the equation; e.g., to describe a fraction you would say x over y, which is the exact command that the Corel VENTURA EQN Language uses for a fraction. It is useful to practice with small equations to familiarize yourself with the language before you create larger, more complex equations.

Building equations

Simple equations, such as x over y = z can be typed directly in to Insert Equation Using Ventura EQN Language dialog box and produce

Larger, more complex equations often require the use of braces. For example, the equation

requires braces around everything in the numerator and braces around everything in the denominator (with the exception of the command for the square root [image] sqrt) to properly place one expression over the other. The actual expression used to produce this equation is:

{ a sub 1 ~ + ~ b sub 1 } over sqrt { c sub 1 ~ + ~ d sub 1 }

In this case, you must type both the opening and closing braces. If both braces do not appear, a syntax error will result.

In cases where you want to use a single brace, such as a pile, the brace must be preceded by the word "right" or "left" to indicate an opening or closing brace. The single brace will appear in the equation.

Inserting spaces

The tilde ( ~ ) in the previous expression is used to add a figure space between equation elements. A carat ( ^ ) adds a thin space, which is half the size of the figure space.

 Related Topics


Corel VENTURA EQN Language commands

The following is a list of Corel VENTURA EQN Language commands. The commands are indicated in bold and the examples show the syntax used to build the equation.

Use ...	To ...

above	Place one expression directly over the other in a matrix or pile (a pile is like a matrix except that adjacent elements are not forced to align). The command can only be used in conjunction with either the matrix or pile command.

braces; e.g., { or }	Group expressions together into a single expression. Braces are always be used in pairs when they are used to group equation elements together. Braces do not appear when the equation appears in the Insert Equation or Edit Equation dialog boxes. If the words left or right precede the actual brace, such as is the case with a pile, the brace will appear and will expand to contain all of the elements in the pile, for example, you can use a command line left { pile { x above y above z } to produce

ccol, lcol, rcol	Align expressions within a matrix. There are three possible alignment options that you can use; ccol for the center of the column, lcol for the left edge of the column, or rcol for the right edge of the column. The command matrix { ccol { { x sub I + y sub I } above y sub I above z sub I } } produces:

/ (fraction bar)	Produce a fraction that looks like ½; for example, ½ is produced by typing 1 / 2 (with or without spaces between the elements).

from	Place the text that follows the from command directly under the preceding expression. From is primarily used in conjunction with the sum, prod, and union commands, and occasionally with the int command.

The command to is often used in conjunction with from and must follow the from command; for example sum from i = 0 to inf.

int	Produce an integral sign ( [image] ).

The limits for the integral are set by using the sub and sup commands, which place the limits in the typical positions to the right of the integral near the top (sup) and bottom (sub). If you require the limits to be placed directly underneath and above the integral, use from and to in place of sub and sup; for example, 0 = int sub { -1 } sup { 1 } ~ x sup 2 ~ dx or 0 = int from { -1 } to { 1 } ~ x sup 2 ~ dx.

inter	Produces an intersection symbol ( [image] ).

left	Place large braces { }, brackets [ ], parentheses ( ), or bars | | around the expression that follows. These symbols automatically grow vertically to fit the equation. The command left { produces a large left brace: the command left [ produces a large left bracket.

The left command can be used with any character, although not all characters grow in the same way as a brace, bracket, parenthesis, or bar.

lpile, rpile	Align the equations within the pile. The syntax and use are identical to ccol, lcol, and rcol. You can also use cpile, which produces the same result as pile.

mark / lineup	Align subsequent equations to a position indicated in a previous equation. For example, to align the equal signs in a series of equations, you can place the command mark where you want to align the equations following it. When you create the subsequent equations, place the command lineup where you want that equation to align with the mark in the previous equation.

The mark / lineup commands cannot be used within one equation. Within a single equation, use matrix or pile.

For example, if you use two equations, typing x ~ mark = ~ y ~ + ~ z and y ~ + ~ z ~ lineup = ~ x aligns the two equals signs if the equations occupy two separate lines. It doesn't matter if the equation with the mark command is separated from the equation with the lineup command by other equations.

The mark / lineup commands only work within multiple equations inserted as the same object. They do not work in equations inserted separately into your equation.

matrix	Create a matrix with even vertical spacing between rows, regardless of whether each element in the matrix is of the same height. The matrix's internal spacing is determined by the contents of the cells. In contrast, the space between rows in each column of a pile varies depending on the height of each expression. Each column within the matrix must have the same number of elements, for example, matrix { lcol { a sub 1 above a sub 2 } ~ lcol { b sub 1 above b sub 2 } }.

over	Place the expression before over in the numerator position and the expression after the command in the denominator position; for example, a standard fraction can be made with the command x over y.

pile	Position identical equations, which should align vertically, above each other.

See the example given for the brace commands.

prod	Create a product symbol ( [image] ). This command is usually used in conjunction with the from and to commands.

sqrt	Create a square root symbol, which automatically grows to fit the expression that follows the command.

sub, sup	Subscript (sub) or superscript (sup) the expression that follows.

The sub and sup commands are also used with the int command to place limits above and below the integral sign.

union	Create the union character ( [image] ).

quoted text	Insert one of the special characters or words as the word rather than translate it into its corresponding symbol or command. Text placed within quotation marks (with or without a space between the quotation mark and the text) appears exactly as typed.

 Related Topics


Corel VENTURA EQN Language characters

The following tables list special characters and words that are used to build equations using the Corel VENTURA EQN Language.

Greek characters

Greek characters can be added to your equation by typing the proper name of the Greek character. Depending on your choice of uppercase or lowercase letters, Corel VENTURA inserts the uppercase or lowercase Greek characters into the Insert Equation dialog box. For example; typing OMEGA in the Insert Equation Using VENTURA EQN Language dialog box produces [image]; whereas, typing omega produces [image]. The rest of the Greek alphabet works the same way.

Special characters	Result

,...,	,...,

...	...

!=

+-	±

->

<-

<=

==

>=

Special words	Result

approx

cdot	.

ceiling

del or partial

floor

grad

inf

nothing

prime	´

times

Space characters	Result

~	Figure space

^	Thin space

 Related Topics


Inserting diacritical marks using the EQN Language

A diacritical mark is any character, symbol, or accent that is displayed above, or below, a letter or group of letters. To place a diacritical mark above a lowercase letter, type the following commands in lowercase; e.g., x hat produces [image]. To place the diacritical mark above an uppercase letter, type the command with the first letter capitalized; e.g, X Hat produces [image].

Command	Example	Result

bar	xyz bar

dot	xyz dot

dotdot	xyz dotdot

dyad	xyz dyad

hat	xyz hat

tilde	xyz tilde

under	xyz under

vec	xyz vec

 Related Topics


Corel VENTURA EQN Language font commands

The following font commands are specific to the Corel VENTURA EQN Language. If you want to format the equation elements after they have been placed in the Insert Equation or Edit Equation dialog box, you can do so. For information about formatting equation elements, see "Formatting equation elements.".

The symbol command changes the font from the default, Times New Roman, to Symbol. If you are changing the formatting, ensure that the Symbol font is selected for that particular item; otherwise, the font reverts to the default setting and changes the character.

Command	Example	Result

bold	This ~ is ~ bold BOLD ~ text	This is BOLD text

fat	This ~ is ~ fat FAT ~ text	This is FAT text (same as bold)

italic	cos ( theta ) ~ or ~ italic cos ( theta )	cos( [image] ) or cos( [image] )

roman	This ~ is ~ roman ROMAN ~ text	This is ROMAN text

symbol	cos ( symbol f ) ~ + ~ sin ( symbol g)	cos( [image] ) or sin( [image] )

Font color

You can change the font color of individual elements directly in the Corel VENTURA EQN Language. For example, the command line x sub color 4 y produces [image]. White text on a white background is invisible, so be careful when choosing colors.

You can change the font color after the equation has been built by using the Color button in the Insert Equation or Edit Equation dialog boxes. For more information, see "Formatting equation elements."

 Related Topics


Adding an equation to the list of presets

Corel VENTURA provides a number of preset equations that you can insert into your publication from the Insert Equation or Edit Equation dialog boxes. You can also create your own equation files or add to the existing preset equation file using a text editor such as Windows Notepad and the Corel VENTURA EQN Language commands.

To add an equation to the list of presets

1.	Click the publication page.

2.	Click Insert, Equation.

3.	In the Insert Equation dialog box, click the Presets button.

4.	In the Equation Presets dialog box, click the File button.

5.	Right-click the DEFAULT.EPF file and click Open.

The DEFAULT.EPF file opens in Windows Notepad.

6.	Type your equation using the Corel VENTURA EQN Language commands and the formatting instructions provided in the DEFAULT.EPF file.

 Note

•	If you want to create your own list of preset, follow the instructions provided in the DEFAULT.EPF file and use the Corel VENTURA EQN Language commands. Equation preset files must be saved in ASCII format and use the filename extension .EPF. If you save your preset to the same location as the DEFAULT.EPF your preset equation list will display with the DEFAULT.EPF. If not, locate your file from the Look In list box.

 Related Topics


Import and export file formats


Overview: Import and export file formats
Import and export file formats

Whatever format the information you want to include in your publication, Corel VENTURA provides a number of filters to allow you to import many different file formats, either text, pictures, or spreadsheet or database information. Many of the same filters also allow you to export information from Corel VENTURA to other formats. The listings of the filter types are broken up as follows:

•	imported text

•	exported text

•	imported pictures

•	exported pictures

•	spreadsheets and databases

For more information about importing and exporting text, see "Importing and exporting text." Spreadsheet and database files can be imported or opened in the same manner as text files.

For information about importing and exporting pictures, see "Importing and exporting pictures."

For information on customizing Corel VENTURA to display only the filters you need to use, see "Changing the filters and associate options."

 More Detailed Information


Imported text file formats


Overview: Imported text file formats
Imported text file formats

The following is a list of the file formats that Corel VENTURA can import as text. Corel VENTURA can also open various file formats as text, see Opening documents that were not created in Corel VENTURA. For more information about each file format, click the highlighted text.

All Files

Adobe FrameMaker 3.0, 4.0, 5.0 (MIF)

Ami Professional (SAM)

ANSI text (TXT)

ASCII text (TXT)

ASCII text (8-bit) (TXT)

Corel VENTURA Generated (GEN)

Corel WordPerfect 6.0, 7.0, 8.0 (WPD)

Corel WordPerfect 5.1 (WP5)

Corel WordPerfect 5.0 (WP5)

Corel WordPerfect 4.2 (WP4)

Corel WordPerfect 1.0, 2x for Macintosh (WPM)

Microsoft Word 97 (DOC)

Microsoft Word 6.0 and 7.0 (95) (DOC)

Microsoft Word 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 5.5 (DOC)

Microsoft Word for Windows 2x (DOC)

Microsoft Word 4.0, 5.0 for Macintosh (DOC)

Rich Text Format (RTF)

Standard Generalized Markup Language (SGML)

WordStar 2000 (WSD)

WordStar 7.0 (WSD)

WordStar 5.0, 5.5, 6.0 (WSD)

WordStar 3.3, 3.31, 3.45, 4.0 (WSD)

WordStar for Windows 1X, 2.0 (WSW)

Xywrite for Windows 4.0 (XY)

 More Detailed Information
 Related Topics


Imported picture file formats


Overview: Imported picture file formats
Imported picture file formats

The following is a list of the file formats from which Corel VENTURA can import pictures. Pictures in Corel VENTURA refer to both vector images, as from CorelDRAW, and bitmaps, as from Corel PHOTO-PAINT. For more information about each file format, click the highlighted text. For information about file formats to which Corel VENTURA can export pictures, see "Exported picture file formats."

Imported vector images display as bitmaps in Corel VENTURA. To change the default display settings, click Publication, Publication Properties, click the Content Defaults tab, and adjust the settings in the Picture Display section of the dialog box.

Imported picture file formats

All Files

3D Model (3DMF/VRML)

Adobe Illustrator (AI)

Adobe Photoshop (PSD)

Adobe Portable Document Format (PDF)

Adobe Placed PDF Page (PDF)

AutoCAD (DXF)

AutoCAD Drawing (DWG)

CALS Compressed Bitmap (CAL)

CompuServe Bitmap (GIF)

Computer Graphics Metafile (CGM)

Corel CMX Compressed (CPX)

Corel PHOTO-PAINT 6 (CPT)

Corel PHOTO-PAINT 7 and 8 (CPT)

Corel Presentation Exchange (CMX)

Corel WordPerfect Graphic (WPG)

CorelDRAW (CDR)

CorelDRAW Compressed (CDX)

Desktop Color Separation (DCS)

Encapsulated PostScript (EPS)

Enhanced Windows Metafile (EMF)

Frame Vector Metafile (FMV)

GEM File (GEM)

GEM Paint File (IMG)

HPGL Plotter File (PLT)

IBM PIF (PF)

JPEG Bitmap (JPG)

Kodak FlashPix Image (FPX)

Kodak Photo CD Image (PCD)

Lotus Pic (PIC)

Macintosh PICT (PCT)

MACPaint Bitmap (MAC)

MET MetaFile (MET)

Micrografx 2.x, 3.x (DRW)

Micrografx Designer 6.0 (DSF)

NAP MetaFile (NAP)

OS/2 Bitmap (BMP)

PaintBrush (PCX)

Picture Publisher 4.0 (PP4)

Picture Publisher 5.0 (PP5)

Portable Network Graphics (PNG)

PostScript Interpreted (PS, PRN, and EPS)

SCITEX CT Bitmap (SCT)

Targa Bitmap (TGA)

TIFF Bitmap (TIF)

Wavelet Compressed Bitmap (WI)

Windows 3.x/NT Cursor Resource (CUR)

Windows 3.x/NT Bitmap Resource (EXE)

Windows 3.x/NT Icon Resource (ICO)

Windows Bitmap (BMP)

Windows Metafile (WMF)


Exported picture file formats


Overview: Exported picture file formats
Exported picture file formats

The following is a list of the file formats to which Corel VENTURA can export pictures. For more information about each file format, click the highlighted text. For information about file formats from which Corel VENTURA can import pictures, see "Imported picture file formats."

Exported picture file formats

Adobe Illustrator (AI)

Adobe Photoshop (PSD)

AutoCAD (DXF)

CALS Compressed Bitmap (CAL)

CompuServe Bitmap (GIF)

Computer Graphics Metafile (CGM)

Corel PHOTO-PAINT 6 (CPT)

Corel PHOTO-PAINT 7 and 8 (CPT)

Corel Presentation Exchange (CMX)

Corel WordPerfect Graphic (WPG)

Encapsulated PostScript (EPS)

Enhanced Windows Metafile (EMF)

Frame Vector Metafile (FMV)

GEM File (GEM)

GEM Paint File (IMG)

HPGL Plotter File (PLT)

IBM PIF (PF)

JPEG Bitmap (JPG)

Kodak FlashPix Image (FPX)

Macintosh PICT (PCT)

MACPaint Bitmap (MAC)

Micrografx 2.x, 3.x (DRW)

OS/2 Bitmap (BMP)

PaintBrush (PCX)

Portable Network Graphics (PNG)

SCITEX CT Bitmap (SCT)

ScodI (SCD)

Targa Bitmap (TGA)

TIFF Bitmap (TIF)

Wavelet Compressed Bitmap (WI)

Windows Bitmap (BMP)

Windows Metafile (WMF)

 Related Topics


Spreadsheet and database file formats


Overview: Spreadsheet and database file formats
Spreadsheet and database file formats

The following is a list of the file formats that Corel VENTURA can import or open. For more information about each spreadsheet and database file format and how Corel VENTURA treats different file formats, click the highlighted text.

Corel Quattro Pro (WQ, WB)

Lotus 1-2-3 (WK))

Lotus/Excel Print Table (PRN)

Microsoft Excel (XLS)

 Related Topics


If you can't determine the format of the file you are importing, import the file by choosing the All Files option. The All Files option analyzes the file and selects the appropriate filter for you. Your file will be imported successfully if the file format is recognized by Corel VENTURA. If Corel VENTURA is unable to determine the format, import the file by choosing the appropriate file format from the List Files of Type box.


Corel VENTURA table functions


Corel VENTURA table functions

The Corel VENTURA table functions are ready-made formulas you can use while working in a table. You can perform most functions that are found in spreadsheet programs such as Corel Quattro Pro. Corel VENTURA has seven table function categories, including conversion, date and time, engineering, financial, logical, mathematical, and statistical.

By using table functions, you will save time and effort because Corel VENTURA performs the calculations for you. All you have to do is type the data, and Corel VENTURA generates an answer. For example, you can use functions to calculate sums, averages, standard deviation, mortgage payments, or return on investments.

Each function has a specific name that describes what the function does. Each function also has arguments, or data, that you insert so that the function will return an answer. For example, the SUM function adds all the given arguments.

Arguments usually consist of numbers or references to cells that contain numbers; however, in some functions the arguments can be text or logical values. See the online Help for more information about each function.

Arguments always follow the name of the function and are enclosed in parentheses. If a function requires multiple arguments, each argument must be separated by a list separator, which, depending on your system settings, is either a comma or a semi-colon. For example, if you want to add the numbers #1, #5, #8 and #10, you can use the SUM function by calling the Function wizard, and typing the function name and the arguments into a cell as follows:

=SUM(1,5,8,10)

 Note

•	An equal sign (=) must always precede the function name.

•	If you want to add the values contained in a set of cells, for example, R1C1, R2C1, R3C1, and R4C1, you can access the Function wizard to use the SUM function as follows:

=SUM(R1C1, R2C1, R3C1, R4C1)

or you can type:

=SUM(R1C1:R4C1)

Both methods, add the values, in the cells R1C1, R2C1, R3C1, and R4C1.

The equal sign, function name, and arguments typed in a cell in the form shown above is considered a formula. Once a formula is entered into a cell, Corel VENTURA calculates the answer and displays the result in the cell.

•	When the result of a formula is displayed in the cell, the formula is not deleted. To view the formula, select the cell and look at the Formula Bar near the top of your screen. If you change an argument in the Formula Bar, a new result will be generated.

Using a function within a function

Functions can also be used as arguments within other functions. For example, if you want to add 220 to the square root of 100, you can use the SUM function and place the square root function (SQRT) in it as follows:

=SUM(220,SQRT(100))

 Note

•	For more information about using a particular function within another function, see the Online Help topic for that function.

 Related Topics


Conversion functions


Overview: Corel VENTURA Conversion table functions
Corel VENTURA conversion table functions

The Corel VENTURA conversion table functions allow you to convert a number from one measurement system to another. The following measurements can be converted: angles, force, linear, mass, power, temperature, time, and volume.

Syntax

CONVERT(number, from_unit, to_unit)

Arguments	Definitions

number	Any real number

from_unit	The measurement system in which a number is currently expressed

to_unit	The measurement system to which you want to convert a number

The following measurement categories are used with the CONVERT function. Click categories to display a list of the measurement units available:

•	Angles

•	Force

•	Linear

•	Mass

•	Power

•	Temperature

•	Time

•	Volume

 Notes

•	The functions for all units are case sensitive.

•	A number can only be converted from one measurement system to another measurement system in the same group. For example, a number expressed in "degrees" can only be converted to another unit of angular measurement, such as radians.

•	The metric prefixes below can be used in conversion formulas involving metric measures:

Prefix (Abbreviation)	Value	Prefix (Abbreviation)	Value
EXA (E)		DECI (d)
PETA (P)		CENTI (c)
TERA (T)		MILLI (m)
GIGA (G)		MICRO (u)
MEGA (M)		NANO (n)
KILO (k)		PICO (p)
HECTO (h)		FEMTO (f)
DEKA (da)		ATTO (a)
For example, if you wish to use KILOGRAMS instead of GRAMS add the appropriate prefix KILO to GRAMS by typing KILOGRAMS.

Similarly, if you wish to use CENTIMETERS instead of METERS add the appropriate prefix CENTI to METERS by typing CENTIMETERS.

Error Messages

•	CONVERT returns the #VALUE! error if number is non-numeric.

•	CONVERT returns the #N/A error if the unit does not exist or is not recognized.

•	CONVERT returns the #N/A error if a metric prefix is added to a non-metric unit.

•	CONVERT returns the #N/A error if from_unit and to_unit do not belong to the same measurement group.

Examples

CONVERT(25,DEGREES,RADIANS) = 0.436332312998

CONVERT(90,FAHRENHEIT,CELCIUS) = 32.222222222222

CONVERT(150,POUNDSMASS,KILOGRAMS) = 68.03884646

 Related Topics


Function	Function as it appears in Corel VENTURA

Degrees	DEGREES

Radians	RADIANS

Rotations	ROTATIONS


Function	Function as it appears in Corel VENTURA

Dynes	DYNES

Newtons	NEWTONS

Poundforces	POUNDFORCES


Function	Function as it appears in Corel VENTURA

Angstroms	ANGSTROMS

Feet	FEET

Inches	INCHES

Meters	METERS

NMiles	NMILES

Picas	PICAS

SMiles	SMILES

Yards	YARDS


Function	Function as it appears in Corel VENTURA

Atommas	ATOMMAS

Carats	CARATS

Grams	GRAMS

Ounces	OUNCES

Poods	POODS

Pounds	POUNDS

Slugs	SLUGS

Tons	TONS


Function	Function as it appears in Corel VENTURA

Horsepower	HORSEPOWS

Watts	WATTS


Function	Function as it appears in Corel VENTURA

Celcius	CELSIUS

Fahrenheit	FAHRENH

Kelvin	KELVIN

Rankine	RANKINE


Function	Function as it appears in Corel VENTURA

Days	DAYS

Hours	HOURS

Minutes	MINUTES

Seconds	SECONDS

Years	YEARS


Function	Function as it appears in Corel VENTURA

Cups	CUPS

Fluid ounces	FLUIDOUNCES

Liters	LITERS

Pints	PINTS

Quarts	QUARTS

Tablespoons	TABLESPS

Teaspoons	TEASPS

U.S. Gallons	U.S.GALLONS


Date and time functions


Overview: Corel VENTURA Date and Time table functions
Corel VENTURA date and time table functions

Functions to calculate dates and times and perform calculations involving business days. The date and time functions are multipliers that help you compute serial values for dates and times for use in a wide range of mathematical calculations. For example, you can use the NETWORKDAYS function if you want to know how many working days there will be between mid-November, 1999, and the project due date early the next January.

Click any of the date and time functions shown below for more details on how they work.

 Note

•	DATEVALUE, DAYS360 and TIMEVALUE are the only date and time functions that normally recognize alphanumeric values.

Date Function	Description

DATE	Returns the serial value of a specified date

DATEVALUE	Converts date values to serial values for use in formulas

DAY	Returns the day of the month for the given serial value, i.e., an integer from 1 to 31, inclusive

DAYS360	Returns a value for the number of days between two dates, based on a 360-day year

MONTH	Converts a serial value for a month to an integer from 1 to 12, inclusive

NETWORKDAYS	Returns the number of whole workdays between two dates

WEEKDAY	Returns a day of the week for a given serial value. The value returned is a positive integer between 1 and 7, where 1 is equal to Sunday, 2 is equal to Monday, and so on.

YEAR	Returns a year between 1900 and 2077 for a given serial value

YEARFRAC	Returns the year fraction representing the number of whole days between two dates

Time Functions	Description

HOUR	Converts the serial value for a given time value to an integer representing hours from 0 to 23, inclusive

MINUTE	Returns a minute value from 0 to 59, inclusive, for a serial value

SECOND	Returns seconds given as a serial value to an integer from 0 to 59, inclusive

TIME	Returns a serial value for a specified time. The returning value is a decimal fraction from 0 to 0.9999999999, inclusive

TIMEVALUE	Converts the user specified time from text to a serial value

 Related Topics


DATE
DATE (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the serial value of a specified date.

Syntax

DATE(year,month,day)

Arguments	Description

year	an integer from 1900 to 2099 inclusive

month	an integer from 1 to 12 inclusive

day	an integer from 1 to 31 inclusive

 Notes

•	The day value must be valid for the month; e.g., if month is 6 (June) then day cannot be greater than 30, because June has only 30 days.

•	To convert the value returned by the DATE function from a serial value to a regular date format (e.g., mm/dd/yy), select one of the predefined options listed in the Numeric Format list box.

•	Use commas as separators.

Example

DATE(1994,2,25) = 34390, the serial value for February 25, 1994

 Related Topics


DATEVALUE
DATEVALUE (Corel VENTURA table function)

Converts date values to serial values for use in formulas.

Syntax

DATEVALUE("text")

Argument	Description

"text"	any alphanumeric date enclosed in quotation marks

 Note

•	To convert the value returned by the DATEVALUE function from a serial value to a regular date format, select one of the predefined options listed in the Numeric Format list box.

•	You can nest (i.e., combine) the DATEVALUE function in other Date functions to display a serial value as a regular date, for example 34346 as Jan 12, 1994. For instructions nesting, click Related Topics.

Examples

DATEVALUE("Jan 12, 1994") = 34346

 Related Topics


DAY
DAY (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the day of the month for the given serial value, returning an integer from 1 to 31 inclusive.

Syntax

DAY(number)

Argument	Description

number	any serial date number

 Note

•	The argument should be expressed as a serial number. However, if the function DATEVALUE is placed in the formula, it can be expressed as text, such as "February 14, 1995". For instructions on placing functions within formulas, click Related Topics and choose "To nest functions in the Function Wizard."

Examples

DAY(34531) = 16

DATEVALUE(34531)=July, 16, 1994

 Related Topics


DAYS360
DAYS360 (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the number of days between two dates based on a 360-day year.

Syntax

DAYS360(date1,date2,method)

Arguments	Description

date1	the serial date number representing the start date

date2	the serial date number representing the end date

method	logical value which specifies whether the European or U.S. method of calculation is used. The default is the U.S. (NASD) method, or FALSE. This argument is optional.

 Notes

•	The arguments should be expressed as serial numbers. However, if the function DATEVALUE is placed in the formula they can also be given as text, such as "February 14, 1996". For instructions on placing functions within formulas, click Related Topics and choose "To nest functions in the Function Wizard."

•	If date1 occurs after date2, the function returns a negative value.

•	The upper date limit for DAYS360 is December 16, 2077.

Examples

DAYS360(33660,33690) = 31

DAYS360 (33690, 33660) = -31

DAYS360(DATEVALUE("February 15, 1996"),DATEVALUE("February 17, 1996")) = 2

 Related Topics


HOUR
HOUR (Corel VENTURA table function)

Converts the serial value of a given time to an integer representing hours from 0 to 23 inclusive.

Syntax

HOUR(number)

Argument	Description

number	any serial value

 Note

•	In a serial value the numbers shown to the right of the decimal point represent seconds from midnight for the day entered.

•	The argument should be expressed as a serial number. However, if the function TIMEVALUE is placed in the formula it can also be given as text, such as "1:15:00 AM". (See the second example.) For instructions on placing functions within formulas, click Related Topics and choose "To nest functions in the Function Wizard."

Examples

HOUR(0.4999) = 11

HOUR(TIMEVALUE("1:15:00 AM")) = 1

 Related Topics


MINUTE
MINUTE (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns a minute value from 0 to 59 inclusive for a serial value.

Syntax

MINUTE(number)

Argument	Description

number	any serial value

 Notes

•	In a serial value the numbers to the right of the decimal point represent seconds from midnight for the day entered.

•	The argument should be expressed as a serial number. However, if the function TIMEVALUE is placed in the formula it can also be given as text, such as "1:15:00 PM". (See the second example.) For instructions on placing functions within formulas, click Related Topics and choose "To nest functions in the Function Wizard."

Examples

MINUTE(9.48) = 31

MINUTE(TIMEVALUE("1:15:00 PM")) = 15

 Related Topics


MONTH
MONTH (Corel VENTURA table function)

Converts a serial date value for a month to an integer from 1 to 12 inclusive.

Syntax

MONTH(number)

Argument	Description

number	any serial value

 Note

•	The argument should be expressed as a serial number. However, if the function DATEVALUE is placed in the formula it can also be given as text, such as "February 14, 1995". For instructions on placing functions within formulas, click Related Topics and choose "To nest functions in the Function Wizard."

Examples

MONTH(15666) = 11

MONTH(345) = 12

MONTH(202) = 7

MONTH(DATEVALUE("July 12, 1996")) = 7

 Related Topics


NETWORKDAYS
NETWORKDAYS (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the number of whole workdays between two dates.

Syntax

NETWORKDAYS(start, end, holidays)

Arguments	Descriptions

start	the serial date number representing the start date

end	the serial date number representing the end date

holidays	one or more serial date numbers of non-workdays to exclude from the workdays calendar, such as federal holidays and floating holidays

 Notes

•	The arguments should be expressed as serial numbers. However, if the function DATEVALUE is placed in the formula they can also be given as text, such as "February 14, 1995". For instructions on placing functions within formulas, click Related Topics and choose "To nest functions in the Function Wizard."

•	If an argument is non-numeric this function returns the #VALUE! error.

•	If holidays is left blank it is assumed to be 0.

Examples

NETWORKDAYS(34750,34850) = 73

NETWORKDAYS(DATEVALUE("May 18, 1996"),DATEVALUE("May 24, 1996")) = 5

 Related Topics


SECOND
SECOND (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns seconds given as a serial value to an integer from 0 to 59 inclusive.

Syntax

SECOND(serial_value)

Argument	Description

serial_value	any serial value

 Notes

•	In serial values the numbers shown to the right of the decimal point are measured in seconds, beginning with 0 at midnight for the day entered.

•	The argument should be expressed as a serial number. However, if the function TIMEVALUE is placed in the formula it can also be given as text, such as "1:15:23 PM". For instructions on placing functions within formulas, click Related Topics and choose "To nest functions in the Function Wizard."

Examples

SECOND(0.4999) = 51

SECOND(555.4999) = 51

SECOND(TIMEVALUE("1:15:23 PM")) = 23

 Related Topics


TIME
TIME (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the serial value for a specified time. The returning value is a decimal fraction.

Syntax

TIME(hour,minute,second)

Arguments	Description

hour	integers from 0 (representing midnight) to 23 inclusive

minute	integers from 0 to 59 inclusive

second	integers from 0 to 59 inclusive

 Note

•	To convert the value returned by the TIME function from a serial value to a regular time format (e.g., hh:mm AM/PM), select one of the predefined options listed in the Numeric Format list box.

•	To properly display the result, change your number formatting to "0.0########".

Example

TIME(16,15,50) computes the serial value for 4:15:50 PM, which is 0.6777 with the Numeric Format set to Default.

 Related Topics


TIMEVALUE
TIMEVALUE (Corel VENTURA table function)

Converts a given time from text to a serial value.

Syntax

TIMEVALUE(text)

Argument	Description

text	any textual time format recognized by Ventura enclosed in double quotation marks (e.g., "1:45:00 PM")

 Notes

•	Use TIMEVALUE to convert time entered as text to its serial value for use in calculations.

•	To convert the value returned by the TIMEVALUE function from a serial value to a regular time format (e.g., hh:mm AM/PM), select one of the predefined options listed in the Numeric Format list box.

•	You can nest (i.e., combine) the TIMEVALUE function in other Time functions to display a serial value as a regular time, for example 0.572916667 as 1:45 PM. For instructions nesting, click Related Topics.

Example

TIMEVALUE("1:45 PM") produces the serial value 0.572916667

 Related Topics


WEEKDAY
WEEKDAY (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the day of the week for a serial date value. The value returned is a positive integer between zero and seven.

Syntax

WEEKDAY(number, type)

Arguments	Description

number	any serial value

type	an integer between 1 and 3 that determines the type of return;

1 or omitted will return the value 1 if the date falls on a Sunday, 2 if it is a Monday, and so on (Default);

2 will return the value 1 if the date falls on a Monday, 2 if it is a Tuesday, and so on;

3 will return the value 0 if the date falls on a Monday, 1 if it is a Tuesday, and so on;

 Note

•	The argument should be expressed as a serial number. However, if the function DATEVALUE is placed in the formula it can also be given as text, such as "February 14, 1996". For instructions on placing functions within formulas, click Related Topics and choose "To nest functions in the Function Wizard."

Examples

WEEKDAY(34885) = 4

WEEKDAY(TODAY()) = 3, if today is Tuesday

DATEVALUE(34567) = Sunday, August 21, 1994

 Related Topics


YEAR
YEAR (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns a year between 1900 and 2099 for a given serial date value.

Syntax

YEAR(number)

Argument	Description

number	any serial value

 Notes

•	The argument should be expressed as a serial number. However, if the function DATEVALUE is placed in the formula it can also be given as text, such as "February 14, 1996". For instructions on placing functions within formulas, click Related Topics and choose "To nest functions in the Function Wizard."

•	If an argument is non-numeric or out of range the YEAR function returns an #INVALID DATA! error.

Examples

YEAR(34328) = 1993

YEAR(34750) = 1995

YEAR(DATEVALUE("June 30, 1995")) = 1995

 Related Topics


YEARFRAC
YEARFRAC (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the year fraction representing the number of whole days between two dates.

Syntax

YEARFRAC(start_date,end_date,basis)

Argument	Description

start	the serial date number representing the start date

end	the serial date number representing the end date

basis	specifies what type of day count to use

Basis	Day count basis

0 or omitted	US (NASD) 30/360

1	Actual/actual

2	Actual/360

3	Actual/365

4	European 30/360

 Notes

•	The arguments start and end should be expressed as serial numbers. However, if the function DATEVALUE is placed in the formula they can also be given as text, such as "February 14, 1995". For instructions on placing functions within formulas, click Related Topics and choose "To nest functions in the Function Wizard."

•	If an argument is non-numeric this function returns the #INVALID DATA! error.

•	If an argument is out of the range this function returns the #NUMBER! error.

Examples

YEARFRAC(3700,3805,2) = 0.2917

YEARFRAC(DATEVALUE("February 14, 1995"),DATEVALUE("April 22, 1995"),2) = 0.1861

 Related Topics


Engineering functions


Corel VENTURA Engineering table functions

The Corel VENTURA engineering table functions allow you to perform Bessel engineering operations and some calculations involving complex numbers.

Function	Description

BESSELI	Returns the modified Bessel function In(x)

BESSELJ	Returns the Bessel function Jn(x)

BESSELK	Returns the modified Bessel function Kn(x)

BESSELY	Returns the Bessel function Yn(x)

COMPLEX	Converts real and imaginary coefficients to a complex number

DELTA	Tests whether two numbers are equal

ERF	Returns the error function

ERFC	Returns the value of the complementary error function integrated between x and infinity

GAMMA	Calculates the Gamma function G(x)

GAMMALN	Calculates a value for the natural logarithm of the gamma function G(x)

GESTEP	Compares two values; result is 1 if num is [image] step and 0 if not

IMABS	Returns the absolute value of a complex number in the form x+yi or x+yj

IMAGINARY	Returns the imaginary coefficient of a complex number

IMARGUMENT	Returns the argument theta, an angle expressed in radians

IMCONJUGATE	Returns the complex conjugate of a complex number

IMCOS	Returns the cosine of a complex number

IMDIV	Returns the quotient of two complex numbers

IMEXP	Returns the exponential expression of a complex number

IMLN	Returns the natural logarithm of a complex number

IMLOG	Returns the logarithm of a complex number

IMLOG10	Returns the base 10 (common) logarithm of a complex number

IMLOG2	Returns the base 2 logarithm of a complex number

IMPOWER	Returns a complex number raised to a complex power

IMPRODUCT	Returns the product of two or more complex numbers

IMREAL	Returns the real coefficient of a complex number

IMSIN	Returns the sine of a complex number

IMSQRT	Returns the square root of a complex number

IMSUB	Returns the remainder of two complex numbers

IMSUM	Returns the sum of two or more complex numbers

 Related Topics


BESSELI
BESSELI (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the modified Bessel function ln(x).

Syntax

BESSELI(x, n)

Arguments	Definitions

x	any real number which specifies the value at which to evaluate the function

n	an integer which specifies the order of the Bessel function

Notes and Error Messages

If n is not an integer, it is truncated.

BESSELI returns the #VALUE! error if any argument is non-numeric.

BESSELI returns the #NUMBER! error if n<0.

Example

BESSELI(1.2, 2) = 0.2026

 Related Topics


BESSELJ
BESSELJ (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the Bessel function Jn(x).

Syntax

BESSELJ(x, n)

Arguments	Definitions

x	any real number which specifies the value to be used in evaluating BESSELJ

n	an integer which specifies the order of the Bessel function

Notes and Error Messages

BESSELJ truncates n if it is not an integer.

BESSELJ returns the #VALUE! error if any arguement is non-numeric.

BESSELJ returns the #NUMBER! error if n is less than 0.

Example

BESSELJ(1.2, 2) = 0.1593

 Related Topics


BESSELK
BESSELK (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the modified Bessel function kn(x).

Syntax

BESSELK(x, n)

Arguments	Definitions

x	any real number which specifies the value to be used to evaluate BESSELK

n	an integer which specifies the order of the Bessel function

Notes and Error Messages

BESSELK truncates n if it is a non-integer.

BESSELK returns the #VALUE! error if any argument is non-numeric.

BESSELK returns the #NUMBER! error if n < 0

Example

BESSELK(1.7,1) = 0.2094

 Related Topics


BESSELY
BESSELY (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the modified Bessel function yn(x).

Syntax

BESSELY(x, n)

Argument	Definitions

x	any real number which specifies the value to use in evaluating BESSELY

n	an integer which specifies the order of the Bessel function

Notes and Error Messages

If n is not an integer, it is truncated.

BESSELY returns the #VALUE! error if any argument is non-numeric.

BESSELY returns the #NUMBER! error if n < 0.

Example

BESSELY(1.2, 2) = -1.2633

 Related Topics


COMPLEX
COMPLEX (Corel VENTURA table function)

Converts real and imaginary coefficients into a complex number (x+yi or x+yj).

Syntax

COMPLEX(real_number, imaginary_number, suffix)

Arguments	Definitions

real_number	any real number which specifies the real coefficient of the complex number

imaginary_number	the imaginary coefficient of the complex number

suffix	the suffix for the imaginary component of the complex number; if the suffix is not specified, "i" is used

Notes and Error Messages

COMPLEX returns the #VALUE! error if real_number or imaginary_number is non-numeric.

COMPLEX returns the #VALUE! error if the suffix is neither "i" nor "j".

Examples

COMPLEX(1,2) = 1+2i

COMPLEX(1,2,"j") = 1+2j

COMPLEX(0,2) = 2i

COMPLEX(2,0) = 2

 Related Topics


DELTA
DELTA (Corel VENTURA table function)

Compares two values and returns the value 1 if they are equal and 0 if they are not.

Syntax

DELTA(number1, number2)

Arguments	Definitions

number1	any real number

number2	any real number; if omitted, it is assumed to be zero

Notes and Error Messages

If the second argument is omitted, it is assumed to be equal to 0.

DELTA returns the #VALUE! error if any argument is non-numeric.

Examples

DELTA(11.23654, 12.253) = 0

DELTA(12.735, 12.735) = 1

 Related Topics


ERF
ERF (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the value of the error function integrated between lower and upper limits.

Syntax

ERF(lower, upper)

Arguments	Definitions

lower	any real number which specifies the lower bound for integration

upper	any real number which specifies the upper bound for integration; if omitted, it integrates between zero and lower

Notes and Error Messages

ERF returns the #VALUE! error if any argument is non-numeric.

ERF returns the #NUMBER! error for negative arguments, or if upper limit is less than lower limit.

Example

ERF(1.2, 2) = 0.085

ERF(1) = 0.8427

 Related Topics


ERFC
ERFC (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the value of the complementary error function integrated from x to infinity.

Syntax

ERFC(x)

Argument	Definition

x	any real number which specifies the lower limit of integration

Notes and Error Messages

ERFC returns the #VALUE! error if the argument is non-numeric.

ERFC returns the #NUMBER! error if the argument is negative.

Example

ERFC(1)	 = 0.1573

 Related Topics


GAMMA
GAMMA (Corel VENTURA table function)

Calculates the value of the Gamma function. Commonly used to perform real number  factorials.

Syntax

GAMMA(x)

Arguments	Definitions

x	any positive real number which specifies the value at which to evaluate the function

Notes and Error Messages

GAMMA returns the #VALUE! error if the argument is non-numeric.

GAMMA returns the #NUMBER! error if the argument is negative.

The formula for the GAMMA function is:

Example

GAMMA(6.1)= 142.4519

 Related Topics


GAMMALN
GAMMALN (Corel VENTURA table function)

Calculates a value for the natural logarithm of the gamma function.

Syntax

GAMMALN(x)

Argument	Definition

x	a positive real number for which you want to determine GAMMALN

Error Messages

GAMMALN returns the #NUMBER! error if x [image] 0.

GAMMALN returns the #VALUE! error if x is non-numeric.

Examples

GAMMALN(9) = 10.6046

GAMMALN(3) = 0.6931

 Related Topics


GESTEP
GESTEP (Corel VENTURA table function)

Compares two values; result is 1 if number is [image] step and 0 if not.

Syntax

GESTEP(number, step)

Arguments	Definitions

number	any real number to be compared to step

step	any real number which is the threshold value; if a value is omitted, zero is used

Notes and Error Messages

GESTEP returns the #VALUE! error if any argument is non-numeric.

Examples

GESTEP( 5, 2) = 1

GESTEP( -5, 2) = 0

GESTEP( 2.5, 2.5) = 1

GESTEP(2) = 1

 Related Topics


IMABS
IMABS (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the absolute value of a complex number in the form x+yi or x+yj.

Syntax

IMABS(complex)

Argument	Definition

complex	any complex number for which you want to determine the absolute value, placed between double quotation marks

Notes and Error Messages

IMABS returns the #NUMBER! error if complex is not in the form x+yi or x+yj.

IMABS returns the #VALUE! error if complex is not placed in double quotation marks.

Examples

IMABS("3+24i") = 24.1868

IMABS("3+24j") = 24.1868

IMABS("6+8i") = 10

 Related Topics


IMAGINARY
IMAGINARY (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the imaginary coefficient of a complex number in the form x+yi or x+yj.

Syntax

IMAGINARY(complex)

Argument	Definition

complex	any complex number for which you want to determine the imaginary coefficient, placed in double quotation marks

Notes and Error Messages

IMAGINARY returns the #NUMBER! error if complex is not in the form x+yi or x+yj.

IMAGINARY returns the #VALUE! error if complex is not placed in double quotation marks.

Examples

IMAGINARY("5+6i") = 6

IMAGINARY("5+6j") = 6

IMAGINARY("6+8i") = 8

 Related Topics


IMARGUMENT
IMARGUMENT (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the angle, A, in radians, of a complex number, such that:

Syntax

IMARGUMENT(complex)

Argument	Definition

complex	any complex number for which you want to determine the angle [image], placed in double quotation marks

Notes and Error Messages

IMARGUMENT returns the #NUMBER! error if complex is not in the form x+yi or x+yj.

IMARGUMENT returns the #VALUE! error if complex is not placed in double quotation marks.

Examples

IMARGUMENT("5+6i") = 0.8761

IMARGUMENT("5+6j") = 0.8761

IMARGUMENT("6+8i") = 0.9273

 Related Topics


IMCONJUGATE
IMCONJUGATE (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the complex conjugate of a complex number in the form x+yi or x+yj.

Syntax

IMCONJUGATE(complex)

Argument	Definition

complex	any complex number for which you want to determine the conjugate, placed in double quotation marks

Notes and Error Messages

IMCONJUGATE returns the #NUMBER! error if complex is not in the form x+yi or x+yj.

IMCONJUGATE returns the #VALUE! error if complex is not placed in double quotation marks.

Examples

IMCONJUGATE("5+6i") = 5-6i

IMCONJUGATE("5+6j") = 5-6j

IMCONJUGATE("6+8i") = 6-8i

 Related Topics


IMCOS
IMCOS (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the cosine of a complex number in the form x+yi or x+yj.

Syntax

IMCOS(complex)

Argument	Definition

complex	any complex number; the number you wish to determine the cosine of, placed in double quotation marks

Notes and Error Messages

IMCOS returns the #NUMBER! error if complex is not in the form x+yi or x+yj.

IMCOS returns the #VALUE! error if complex is not placed in double quotation marks.

Examples

IMCOS("5+6i") = 57.2191 + 193.4276

IMCOS("5+6j") = 57.2191 + 193.4276j

IMCOS("6+8i") = 1431.1138 + 416.4629i

 Related Topics


IMDIV
IMDIV (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the quotient of two complex numbers in the form x+yi or x+yj.

Syntax

IMDIV(complex1, complex2)

Arguments	Definitions

complex1	the complex numerator or dividend, enclosed in double quotation marks

complex2	the complex denominator or divisor, enclosed in double quotation marks

Notes and Error Messages

IMDIV returns the #NUMBER! error if complex1 or complex2 is not in the form x+yi or x+yj.

IMDIV returns the #VALUE! error if complex1 or complex2 is not placed in double quotation marks.

Examples

IMDIV("300+150i","5+6i") = 39.3443 - 17.2131i

IMDIV("300+150j","5+6j") = 39.3443 - 17.2131j

IMDIV("-100+200i","6+8i") = 10 + 20i

 Related Topics


IMEXP
IMEXP (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the exponential of a complex number in the form x+yi or x+yj.

Syntax

IMEXP(complex)

Argument	Definition

complex	any complex number for which you want to determine the exponential, placed in double quotation marks

Notes and Error Messages

IMEXP returns the #NUMBER! error if complex is not in the form x+yi or x+yj.

IMEXP returns the #VALUE! error if complex is not placed in double quotation marks.

Examples

IMEXP("5+6i") = 142.5019 - 41.4689i

IMEXP("5+6j") = 142.5019 - 41.4689j

IMEXP("6+8i") = -58.6989 + 399.1356i

 Related Topics


IMLN
IMLN (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the natural logarithm of a complex number in the form x+yi or x+yj. The natural logarithm is the logarithm base e.

Syntax

IMLN(complex)

Argument	Definition

complex	any complex number for which you want to determine the natural logarithm, placed in double quotation marks

Notes and Error Messages

IMLN returns the #NUMBER! error if complex is not in the form x+yi or x+yj.

IMLN returns the #VALUE! error if complex is not placed in double quotation marks.

Examples

IMLN("9+12i") = 2.7081 + 0.9273i

IMLN("9+12j") = 2.7081 + 0.9273j

IMLN("15+22i") = 3.2819 + 0.9724i

 Related Topics


IMLOG
IMLOG (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the logarithm of a complex number in the form x+yi or x+yj.

Syntax

IMLOG(complex, number)

Argument	Definition

complex	any complex number; the number you wish to determine the logarithm of, placed in double quotation marks

number	any real number, the number for which you wish to determine the base of the logarithm

Notes and Error Messages

IMLOG returns the #NUMBER! error if complex is not in the form x+yi or x+yj.

IMLOG returns the #VALUE! error if complex is not placed in double quotation marks.

If number is omitted, it is assumed to be 10.

Examples

IMLOG("9+12i", 10) = 1.1761 + 0.4027i

IMLOG("9+12j") = 1.1761 + 0.4027j

IMLOG("15+22i", 3) = 2.9874 + 0.8851i

 Related Topics


IMLOG10
IMLOG10 (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the base 10 (common) logarithm of a complex number in the form x+yi or x+yj.

Syntax

IMLOG10(complex)

Argument	Definition

complex	any complex number; the number you wish to determine the common logarithm of, placed in double quotation marks

Notes and Error Messages

IMLOG10 returns the #NUMBER! error if complex is not in the form x+yi or x+yj.

IMLOG10 returns the #VALUE! error if complex is not placed in double quotation marks.

Examples

IMLOG10("9+12i") = 1.1761 + 0.4027i

IMLOG10("9+12j") = 1.1761 + 0.4027j

IMLOG10("15+22i") = 1.4253 + 0.4223i

 Related Topics


IMLOG2
IMLOG2 (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the base 2 logarithm of a complex number in the form x+yi or x+yj.

Syntax

IMLOG2(complex)

Argument	Definition

complex	any complex number; the number you wish to determine the base 2 logarithm of, placed in double quotation marks

Notes and Error Messages

IMLOG2 returns the #NUMBER! error if complex is not in the form x+yi or x+yj.

IMLOG2 returns the #VALUE! error if complex is not placed in double quotation marks.

Examples

IMLOG2("9+12i") = 3.9069 + 1.3378i

IMLOG2("9+12j") = 3.9069 + 1.3378j

IMLOG2("15+22i") = 4.7348 + 1.4028i

 Related Topics


IMPOWER
IMPOWER (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the result of a complex number in the form x+yi or x+yj raised to a power.

Syntax

IMPOWER(complex, power)

Argument	Definition

complex	any complex number; the number you wish to raise to a power, placed in double quotation marks

power	any real number; the power you wish to raise the complex number to

Notes and Error Messages

IMPOWER returns the #NUMBER! error if complex is not in the form x+yi or x+yj.

IMPOWER returns the #VALUE! error if complex is not placed in double quotation marks.

IMPOWER returns the #VALUE! error if power is non-numeric.

Examples

IMPOWER("6+10i",2) = -64 + 120i

IMPOWER("6+10j",2) = -64 + 120j

IMPOWER("9+11i",3) = -2538 + 1342i

 Related Topics


IMPRODUCT
IMPRODUCT (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the product of two or more complex numbers in the form x+yi or x+yj.

Syntax

IMPRODUCT(complex)

Arguments	Definitions

complexlist	any complex number; a number you wish to multiply, placed in double quotation marks

Notes and Error Messages

IMPRODUCT returns the #NUMBER! error if the arguments are not in the form x+yi or x+yj.

IMPRODUCT returns the #VALUE! error if the arguments are not placed in double quotation marks.

IMPRODUCT limits the number of arguments to 30.

Examples

IMPRODUCT("6+10i","2+5i") = -38 + 50i

IMPRODUCT("6+10j","2+5j") = -38 + 50j

IMPRODUCT("9+11i","3+7i","5+8i") = -1018 + 80i

 Related Topics


IMREAL
IMREAL (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the real coefficient of a complex number in the form x+yi or x+yj.

Syntax

IMREAL(complex)

Argument	Definition

complex	any complex number; the number you wish to determine the real coefficient of, placed in double quotation marks

Notes and Error Messages

IMREAL returns the #NUMBER! error if complex is not in the form x+yi or x+yj.

IMREAL returns the #VALUE! error if complex is not placed in double quotation marks.

Examples

IMREAL("9+12i") = 9

IMREAL("9+12j") = 9

IMREAL("15+22i") = 15

 Related Topics


IMSIN
IMSIN (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the sine of a complex number in the form x+yi or x+yj.

Syntax

IMSIN(complex)

Argument	Definition

complex	any complex number; the number you wish to determine the sine of, placed in double quotation marks

Notes and Error Messages

IMSIN returns the #NUMBER! error if complex is not in the form x+yi or x+yj.

IMSIN returns the #VALUE! error if complex is not placed in double quotation marks.

Examples

IMSIN("4+9i") = -3066.2171 - 2648.2645i

IMSIN("4+9j") = -3066.2171 - 2648.2645j

IMSIN("7+8i") = 979.2248 + 1123.6753i

 Related Topics


IMSQRT
IMSQRT (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the square root of a complex number in the form x+yi or x+yj.

Syntax

IMSQRT(complex)

Argument	Definition

complex	any complex number; the number you wish to determine the square root of, placed in double quotation marks

Notes and Error Messages

IMSQRT returns the #NUMBER! error if complex is not in the form x+yi or x+yj.

IMSQRT returns the #VALUE! error if complex is not placed in double quotation marks.

Examples

IMSQRT("4+9i") = 2.6314 + 1.7101i

IMSQRT("4+9j") = 2.6314 + 1.7101j

IMSQRT("7+8i") = 2.9690 + 1.3472i

 Related Topics


IMSUB
IMSUB (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the difference of two complex numbers in the form x+yi or x+yj.

Syntax

IMSUB(complex1, complex2)

Arguments	Definitions

complex1	any complex number; the number from which you wish to subtract complex2, placed in double quotation marks

complex2	any complex number; the number you wish to subtract from complex1, placed in double quotation marks

Notes and Error Messages

IMSUB returns the #NUMBER! error if complex1 or complex2 is not in the form x+yi or x+yj.

IMSUB returns the #VALUE! error if complex1 or complex2 is not placed in double quotation marks.

Examples

IMSUB("6+10i","2+5i") = 4 + 5i

IMSUB("6+10j","2+5j") = 4 + 5j

IMSUB("9+11i","3+7i") = 6 + 4i

 Related Topics


IMSUM
IMSUM (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the sum of two or more complex numbers in the form x+yi or x+yj.

Syntax

IMSUM(complexlist)

Arguments	Definitions

complexlist	a list of complex numbers you wish to add, placed in double quotation marks

Notes and Error Messages

IMSUM returns the #NUMBER! error if the arguments are not in the form x+yi or x+yj.

IMSUM returns the #VALUE! error if the arguments are not placed in double quotation marks.

IMSUM limits the number of arguments to 30.

Examples

IMSUM("6+10i","2+5i") = 8 + 15i

IMSUM("6+10j","2+5j") = 8 + 15j

IMSUM("9+11i","3+7i","5+8i") = 17 + 26i

 Related Topics


Financial functions


Corel VENTURA financial table functions

The Corel VENTURA financial table functions enable you to calculate financial data in your table. You can create budgets, develop financial projections, determine costs, calculate investments, and perform many other financial operations.

Function	Description

ACCRINT	Returns the accrued interest on a bond

ACCRINTM	Returns interest accrued on a security that returns interest upon maturation

COUPDAYBS	Returns the number of days from the beginning of the coupon period to the date of settlement

COUPDAYS	Returns the duration of the coupon period (in days) when the settlement occurs

COUPDAYSNC	Returns the number of days between the date of settlement and the next coupon date

COUPNCD	Returns the next coupon date following the date of settlement

COUPNUM	Returns the number of coupons payable between the date of settlement and date of maturation

COUPPCD	Returns the coupon date before the date of settlement

CUMIPMT	Returns the cumulative interest paid on a loan from the start period to the end period

CUMPRINC	Returns the cumulative principal paid on a loan from the start period to the end period

DB	Uses the fixed-declining balance method to calculate depreciation of assets over a given period

DDB	Uses the double-declining balance method to calculate asset depreciation

DISC	Returns a securities discount rate

DOLLARDE	Converts dollar prices from fractions to decimals

DOLLARFR	Converts dollar prices from decimals to fractions

DURATION	Returns the Macaulay duration of a security with par value of 100

EFFECT	Returns the effective annual interest rate, given the nominal annual interest rate and the number of compounding periods per year

FV	Returns the future value of an investment

FVSCHEDULE	Applies a series of compound interest rates and returns the future value of the initial principal

INTRATE	Returns the interest rate for an invested security

IPMT	Returns the interest payment for an investment for a set period based on a constant interest rate and constant payments

IRR	Returns the internal rate of return for a series of cash flows

MDURATION	Returns the modified Macauley duration for a security with an assumed par value of 100

MIRR	Calculates the modified internal rate of return for a series of periodic cash flows

NOMINAL	Returns the annual nominal interest rate given the effective rate of interest and the number of compounding periods per year

NPER	Returns the number of periods specified the interest rate, payment amount, present value, and optional future value and type

NPV	Returns the net present value of a future cash flow

PMT	Returns the periodic payment required to fully amortize the principal during the term, specified present value, interest rate, and number of payments

PPMT	Returns the payment on the principal for an investment for a given period based on periodic, constant payments and a constant interest rate

PRICE	Returns the price for each $100 face value of a security that returns periodic interest

PRICEDISC	Returns the price for each $100 face value of a discounted security

PRICEMAT	Returns the price for each $100 face value of a security that pays interest upon maturation

PV	Returns an investment's present value

RATE	Returns the interest rate per period of an annuity

RECEIVED	Returns the amount received at maturity for a fully invested security

SLN	Returns the straight-line depreciation of an asset for a single period

SYD	Returns sum-of-years' digits depreciation of an asset for a given period

TBILLEQ	Returns the bond-equivalent yield for a Treasury bill

TBILLPRICE	Returns the price per $100 face value for a Treasury bill

TBILLYIELD	Returns the yield for a Treasury bill

VDB	Calculates the depreciation of an asset for a specified period using the double declining balance

XIRR	Returns the internal rate of return for regular or irregular cash flow schedules

XNPV	Calculates the net present value for regular or irregular cash flow schedules

YIELD	Returns the yield on a security that returns periodic interest

YIELDDISC	Returns the annual yield for a discounted security

YIELDMAT	Returns the annual yield of a security that pays interest at maturity

 Related Topics


ACCRINT
ACCRINT (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns interest accrued on a security that returns interest periodically.

Syntax

ACCRINT(issue, firstinterest, settlement, coupon, par, frequency, basis)

Arguments	Definitions

issue	the serial date value for the issue date of the security

firstinterest	the serial date value for the date of the security's first interest

settlement	the serial date value for the date of the security's settlement

coupon	the annual coupon rate for the security

par	the par value; if no par value is entered, $1000 is used as a default

frequency	the number of annual coupon payments; for annual payments, frequency = 1; for semiannual, frequency = 2; for quarterly, frequency = 4

basis	the day-count basis used

Notes and Error Messages

Issue, firstinterest, settlement, frequency, and basis are rounded to integers.

ACCRINT returns the #NUMBER! error value if:

•	issue, firstinterest, or settlement is not a valid serial date value (between the years 1900 and 2099)

•	coupon is less than or equal to 0 or if par is less than or equal to 0

•	frequency is not 1, 2, or 4

•	basis is not 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4

•	issue [image] settlement [image] firstinterest

•	The #VALUE! error is returned if any argument is non-numeric.

Example

ACCRINT(datevalue("January 27, 1995"),datevalue("June 25, 1995"),datevalue("March 25, 1995"), 0.1,1000,4,2) = 15.8333

 Related Topics


ACCRINTM
ACCRINTM (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns interest accrued on a security that returns interest upon maturation.

Syntax

ACCRINTM(issue, maturation, coupon, par, basis)

Arguments	Definitions

issue	the serial date value for issue date of the security

maturation	the serial date value for the date of maturation of the security

coupon	the annual coupon rate for the security

par	the par value; if no par value is entered, $1000 is used as a default

basis	the day-count basis used

Notes and Error Messages

Issue, maturation, and basis are rounded to integers.

ACCRINTM returns the #NUMBER! error value if:

•	issue or maturation is not a valid serial date value

•	coupon < 0 or if par < 0

•	basis is not 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4

•	issue [image] maturation

•	The #VALUE! error is returned if any argument is non-numeric.

Example

ACCRINTM(datevalue("June 1, 1990"),datevalue("January 1, 1991"),0.1,100,1) = 5.863014

 Related Topics


COUPDAYBS
COUPDAYBS (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the number of days from the beginning of the coupon period to the date of settlement.

Syntax

COUPDAYBS(settlement, maturation, frequency, basis)

Arguments	Definitions

settlement	the serial date value for the date of settlement of the security

maturation	the serial date value for the date of maturation of the security

frequency	the number of annual coupon payments; frequency = 1 for annual, 2 for semiannual, and 4 for quarterly payments

basis	the day-count basis used

Notes and Error Messages

The arguments are rounded to integers.

COUPDAYBS returns the #NUMBER! error value if:

•	settlement or maturation is not a valid serial date value

•	frequency is not 1, 2, or 4

•	basis is not 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4

•	settlement [image] maturation

•	The #VALUE! error is returned if any argument is non-numeric.

Example

COUPDAYBS(datevalue("January 1, 1993"),datevalue("June 1, 1994"),2,0) = 30

 Related Topics


COUPDAYS
COUPDAYS (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the duration of the coupon period (in days) when the settlement occurs.

Syntax

COUPDAYS(settlement, maturation, frequency, basis)

Arguments	Definitions

settlement	the serial date value for the date of settlement of the security

maturation	the serial date value for the date of maturation of the security

frequency	the number of annual coupon payments; frequency = 1 for annual, 2 for semiannual, and 4 for quarterly payments

basis	the day-count basis used

Notes and Error Messages

COUPDAYS returns the #NUMBER! error value if:

•	settlement or maturation is not a valid serial date value

•	frequency is not 1, 2, or 4

•	basis is not 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4

•	settlement [image] maturation

•	The #VALUE! error is returned if any argument is non-numeric.

The arguments are rounded to integers.

Example

COUPDAYS(datevalue("January 1, 1993"),datevalue("June 3, 1994"),2,1) = 182

 Related Topics


COUPDAYSNC
COUPDAYSNC (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the number of days between the date of settlement and the next coupon date.

Syntax

COUPDAYSNC(settlement, maturation, frequency, basis)

Arguments	Definitions

settlement	the serial date value for the date of settlement of the security

maturation	the serial date value for the date of maturation of the security

frequency	the number of annual coupon payments; frequency = 1 for annual, 2 for semiannual, and 4 for quarterly payments

basis	the day-count basis used

Notes and Error Messages

The arguments are rounded to integers.

COUPDAYSNC returns the #NUMBER! error value if:

•	frequency is not 1, 2, or 4

•	basis is not 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4

•	settlement or maturation is not a valid serial date value

•	settlement [image] maturation

•	The #VALUE! error is returned if any argument is non-numeric.

Example

COUPDAYSNC(datevalue("January 27, 1994"),datevalue("March 1, 1994"),2,1) = 33

 Related Topics


COUPNCD
COUPNCD (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the next coupon date following the date of settlement.

Syntax

COUPNCD(settlement, maturation, frequency, basis)

Arguments	Definitions

settlement	the serial date value for the date of settlement of the security

maturation	the serial date value for the date of maturation of the security

frequency	the number of annual coupon payments; frequency = 1 for annual, 2 for semiannual, and 4 for quarterly payments

basis	the day-count basis used

Notes and Error Messages

To learn how to convert the result of COUPNCD from a serial value to a regular date format (e.g., mm/dd/yy), click the "How to" button in the top right hand corner.

The arguments are rounded to integers.

COUPNCD returns the #NUMBER! error value if:

•	settlement or maturation is not a valid serial date value

•	frequency is not 1, 2, or 4

•	basis is not 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4

•	settlement [image] maturation

•	The #VALUE! error is returned if any argument is non-numeric.

Example

COUPNCD(datevalue("January 27, 1993"),datevalue("March 1, 1994"),2,1) = 34029 which is equal to March 1, 1993

 Related Topics


COUPNUM
COUPNUM (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the number of coupons payable between the date of settlement and date of maturation.

Syntax

COUPNUM(settlement, maturation, frequency, basis)

Arguments	Definitions

settlement	the serial date value for the date of settlement of the security

maturation	the serial date value for the date of maturation of the security

frequency	the number of annual coupon payments; frequency = 1 for annual, 2 for semiannual, and 4 for quarterly payments

basis	the day-count basis used

Notes and Error Messages

The arguments are truncated to integers.

The result is rounded up to the nearest whole coupon.

COUPNUM returns the #NUMBER! error value if:

•	settlement or maturation is not a valid serial date value

•	frequency is not 1, 2, or 4

•	basis is not 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4

•	settlement [image] maturation

•	The #VALUE! error is returned if any argument is non-numeric.

Example

COUPNUM(datevalue("January 27, 1994"),datevalue("March 1, 1995"),2,1) = 3

 Related Topics


COUPPCD
COUPPCD (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the coupon date prior to the date of settlement.

Syntax

COUPPCD(settlement, maturation, frequency, basis)

Arguments	Definitions

settlement	the serial date value for the date of settlement of the security

maturation	the serial date value for the date of maturation of the security

frequency	the number of annual coupon payments; frequency = 1 for annual, 2 for semiannual, and 4 for quarterly payments

basis	the day-count basis used

Notes and Error Messages

To learn how to convert the result from a serial value to a regular date format (e.g., mm/dd/yy), click the "How to" button in the top right hand corner.

The arguments are rounded to integers.

COUPPCD returns the #NUMBER! error value if:

•	settlement or maturation is not a valid serial date value

•	frequency is not 1, 2, or 4

•	basis is not 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4

•	settlement [image] maturation

•	The #VALUE! error is returned if any argument is non-numeric.

Example

COUPPCD(datevalue("January 27, 1994"),datevalue("March 1, 1994"),2,1) = 34213 which is equal to 1-Sep-1993

 Related Topics


CUMIPMT
CUMIPMT (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the cumulative interest paid on a loan from the start period to the end period.

Syntax

CUMIPMT(rate, nper, pv, start, end, time)

Arguments	Definitions

rate	a real number representing the interest rate.

nper	an integer representing the total number of payment periods.

pv	a number representing the present value

start	start period in the calculation; period numbers begin at 1

end	final period in the calculation

time	the time payments are due (0 or 1):

use 0 if payments are due at the end of the period (default)

use 1 if payments are due at the beginning of the period

(if omitted, it is assumed to be 0)

Notes and Error Messages

The units for specifying rate and nper must be consistent. If you make monthly payments on a five year loan at 11% annual interest, use 11%/12 for rate and 5*12 for nper. If you make annual payments on the same loan, use 11% for rate and 5 for nper.

Nper, start and end are rounded to integers.

CUMIPMT returns the #NUMBER! error value if:

•	rate is less than or equal to 0, or nper is less than or equal to 0, or pv is less than or equal to 0

•	start < 1, end < 1, or start > end

•	time [image] •	 0 or 1

CUMIPMT returns the #VALUE! error if any argument is non-numeric.

Example

Let rate be 3% annual (rate = 0.03 / 12 = 0.0025 )

Term, 1 year (nper = 1*12 = 12 )

Present value $10,000

The total interest paid in the first half-year (periods 1 through 6) is:

CUMIPMT(0.0025,12,10000,1,6,0) = -119

 Related Topics


CUMPRINC
CUMPRINC (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the cumulative principal paid on a loan from the start period to the end period.

Syntax

CUMPRINC(rate, nper, pv, start_period, end_period, time)

Arguments	Definitions

rate	a real number representing the interest rate

nper	an integer representing the total number of payment periods.

pv	present value

start	an integer representing the start period in the calculation; period numbers begin at 1

end	an integer representing the end period in the calculation.

time	the payments are due(0 or 1):

use 0 if payments are due at the end of the period (default)

use 1 if payments are due at the beginning of the period

(if omitted, it is assumed to be 0)

Notes and Error Messages

The units for specifying rate and nper must be consistent. If you make monthly payments on a five year loan at 11% annual interest, use 11%/12 for rate and 5*12 for nper. If you make annual payments on the same loan, use 11% for rate and 5 for nper.

Nper, start and end are rounded to integers.

CUMPRINC returns the #NUMBER! error value if:

•	rate is less than or equal to 0, nper is less than or equal to 0, or pv is less than or equal to 0

•	start < 1, end < 1, or start > end

•	time [image] •	0 or 1

CUMPRINC returns the #VALUE! error if any argument is non-numeric.

Example

Let annual interest rate be 3% (rate = 0.03 / 12 = 0.0025 )

Term, 1 year (nper = 1*12 = 12 )

Present value $10,000

The cumulative principal paid in the first half-year (periods 1 through 6) is:

CUMPRINC(0.0025,12,10000,1,6,0) = -4962.5475

 Related Topics


DB
DB (Corel VENTURA table function)

Uses the fixed-declining balance method to calculate depreciation of assets over a given period.

Syntax

DB(cost, salvage, lifetime, periods, months)

Arguments	Definitions

cost	an integer representing the original asset cost

salvage	an integer representing the value after depreciation

lifetime	a real number specifying the number of periods, or lifetime, over which you want to determine asset depreciation

periods	the number of periods for which depreciation is calculated

months	the number of months in the first year; if omitted, it is assumed to be 12

Notes and Error Messages

DB returns the #NUMBER! error if salvage > cost, or periods > lifetime or months > 12.

DB returns the #VALUE! error if any argument is non-numeric.

Examples

If an equipment purchase costs $20000000 and is used for two years, its salvage value is $20000. The following example shows depreciation over its lifetime:

DB(20000000,20000,2,1) = 19360000

DB(20000000,20000,2,2) = 619520

 Related Topics


DDB
DDB (Corel VENTURA table function)

Uses the double-declining balance method to calculate asset depreciation.

Syntax

DDB(cost, salvage, lifetime, periods, factor)

Arguments	Definitions

cost	an integer representing original cost of the asset

salvage	an integer representing the value after depreciation

lifetime	a real number specifying the number of periods over which the asset is being depreciated (useful life of the asset)

periods	the number of periods for which depreciation is calculated, represented in the same units as lifetime

factor	the rate at which the balance declines; if omitted, it is assumed to be 2 (the double-declining balance method)

Notes and Error Messages

DDB returns the #NUMBER! error if salvage > cost, or periods > lifetime, or any argument is non-positive.

DDB returns the #VALUE! error if any of the arguments are non-numeric.

Examples

A tool costs $20000000 and requires replacement every two years. The salvage value of the tool is $20000. The following example shows depreciation according to the double-declining balance method over the life of the tool.

DDB(20000000,20000,2,1) = $20000000

DDB(20000000,20000,2,2) = $0

 Related Topics


DISC
DISC (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns a securities discount rate.

Syntax

DISC(settlement, maturation, price, redemption, basis)

Arguments	Definitions

settlement	the serial date value for the date of settlement of the security

maturation	the serial date value for the date of maturation of the security

price	the price for each $100 face value of the security

redemption	the redemption value for each $100 face value of the security

basis	the day-count basis used

Notes and Error Messages

Settlement, maturation and basis are rounded to integers.

DISC returns the #NUMBER! error value if:

•	settlement or maturation is not a valid serial date value

•	basis is not 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4

•	settlement [image] maturation

•	price [image] 0 or redemption [image] 0

•	The #VALUE! error is returned if any argument is non-numeric.

Example

DISC(datevalue("January 1, 1994"),datevalue("June 1, 1994"),90,100) = 0.24 or 24%

 Related Topics


DOLLARDE
DOLLARDE (Corel VENTURA table function)

Converts dollar prices from fractions to decimals.

Syntax

DOLLARDE(fractional, denominator)

Arguments	Definitions

fractional	a fractional number representing a price

denominator	the fraction's denominator

Notes and Error Messages

DOLLARDE returns the #NUMBER! error if denominator is zero or negative.

DOLLARDE returns the #VALUE! error if either argument is non-numeric.

Denominator is truncated if it is not an integer.

Example

DOLLARDE(1.04,40) = 1.1

 Related Topics


DOLLARFR
DOLLARFR (Corel VENTURA table function)

Converts dollar prices from decimals to fractions.

Syntax

DOLLARFR(number, denominator)

Arguments	Definitions

number	a real number

denominator	the fraction's denominator

Notes and Error Messages

DOLLARFR returns the #NUMBER! error if denominator is zero or negative.

DOLLARFR returns the #VALUE! error if either argument is non-numeric.

Denominator is truncated if it is not an integer.

Example

DOLLARFR(1.1,40) = 1.04

 Related Topics


DURATION
DURATION (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the annual duration for a security with periodic interest payments. Duration is the weighted average of the present value of the cash flows. It is used to measure a bond price's response to changes in yield.

Syntax

DURATION(settlement, maturation, coupon, yield, frequency, basis)

Arguments	Definitions

settlement	the serial date value for the date of the security's settlement

maturation	the serial date value for the date of maturation of the security

coupon	the annual coupon rate for the security

yield	the annual yield for the security

frequency	the number of annual coupon payments; for annual payments, frequency = 1; for semiannual, frequency = 2; for quarterly, frequency = 4

basis	the day-count basis used

Notes and Error Messages

Settlement, maturation, frequency, and basis are rounded to integers.

DURATION returns the #NUMBER! error value if:

•	settlement or maturation is not a valid serial date value

•	coupon is less than 0 or if yield is less than 0

•	frequency is not 1, 2, or 4

•	basis is not 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4

•	settlement is greater than or equal to maturation

•	The #VALUE! error is returned if any argument is non-numeric.

Example

DURATION(datevalue("January 1, 1995"),datevalue("December 31, 1995"),0.1,0.11,4,1) = 0.9610

 Related Topics


EFFECT
EFFECT (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the effective annual interest rate, given the nominal annual interest rate and the number of compounding periods per year.

Syntax

EFFECT(nominal, npery)

Arguments	Definitions

nominal	nominal interest rate

npery	an integer representing the number of annual compounding periods

Notes and Error Messages

Npery is rounded to an integer.

EFFECT returns the #NUMBER! error if nominal is less than or equal to 0 or npery < 1.

EFFECT returns the #VALUE! error if any argument is non-numeric.

Example

EFFECT(0.1, 4) = 0.1038 or 10.38%

 Related Topics


FV
FV (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the future value of an investment where the interest rate and periodic payments are constant.

Syntax

FV(rate, nper, payment, pv, time)

Arguments	Definitions

rate	a real number representing the interest rate for each period

nper	an integer representing the total number of payment periods

payment	is a number representing the payment you make per period.

pv	a number representing the present value; the full amount that a series of future payments is worth right now; if it is omitted, it is assumed to be 0.

time	the time payments are due (0 or 1):

use 0 if payments are due at the end of the period (default)

use 1 if payments are due at the beginning of the period

(if omitted, it is assumed to be 0)

Notes and Error Messages

Units for rate and nper must be consistent. For monthly payments on a five-year loan at 15 percent annual interest, use 15%/12 for rate and 5*12 for nper. If annual payments are made on the same loan, use 15% for rate and 5 for nper.

Cash paid out, such as deposits to savings, should be represented by negative numbers; cash received, such as dividend checks, should be represented by positive numbers.

FV returns the #VALUE! error if any of the arguments are non-numeric.

Example

If you make a $100 payment each month (payment = 100) to a bank account in the bank which pays 2% annual interest (rate = 0.02/12 = 0.001667). The future value of your investment is:

FV(0.001667, 12, 100) = -$1211.0636

Suppose you have $500 in an account initially (pv=-500) and make a $100 payment each month (payment = -100). The bank pays 2% annual interest (rate = .02/12 = 0.001667) and returns in 12 months:

FV(0.001667,12,-100,-500) = $1721.1578

 Related Topics


FVSCHEDULE
FVSCHEDULE (Corel VENTURA table function)

Applies a series of compound interest rates and Returns the future value of the initial principal. It is used to calculate the future value of an investment with a variable or adjustable interest rate.

Syntax

FVSCHEDULE(principal, schedule)

Arguments	Definitions

principal	a number representing the initial sum

schedule	the series of interest rates charged

Notes and Error Messages

FVSCHEDULE returns the #VALUE! error if principal is non-numeric, or if schedule consists of anything other than numbers and spaces.

Example

An account with an opening balance of $100 which grows 10% each period will have the balance shown below at the end of the 12th period.

FVSCHEDULE(100,{0.1,0.1,0.1,0.1,0.1,0.1,0.1,0.1,0.1,0.1,0.1,0.1}) = $313.8428

 Related Topics


INTRATE
INTRATE (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the simple annualized yield for a fully invested security.

Syntax

INTRATE(settlement, maturation, investment, redemption, basis)

Arguments	Definitions

settlement	the serial date value for the date of settlement of the security

maturation	the serial date value for the date of maturation of the security

investment	is a number representing the sum invested in the security.

redemption	the redemption value for each $100 face value of the security.

basis	the type of day-count basis used

Notes and Error Messages

Settlement, maturation, and basis are rounded to integers.

INTRATE returns the #NUMBER! error value if:

•	settlement or maturation is not a valid serial date value

•	basis is not 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4

•	settlement [image] maturation

•	The #VALUE! error is returned if any argument is non-numeric.

Example

INTRATE(datevalue("March 1, 1994"),datevalue("May 1, 1994"),500,550) = 0.6 or 60% annually

 Related Topics


IPMT
IPMT (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the interest payment for an investment for a set period based on a constant interest rate and constant payments.

Syntax

IPMT(rate, period, nper, pv, fv, time)

Arguments	Definitions

rate	a real number representing the rate of interest

period	the period for which interest must be found

nper	is an integer representing the total number of payment periods

pv	a number representing the present value; the full amount that a series of future payments is worth right now

fv	the future value; the full amount you want to attain after the last payment is made; if omitted, it is assumed to be 0

time	the time payments are due (0 or 1):

use 0 if payments are due at the end of the period (default)

use 1 if payments are due at the beginning of the period

(if omitted, it is assumed to be 0)

Notes and Error Messages

•	The units for specifying rate and nper must be consistent. If you make monthly payments on a five year loan at 11% annual interest, use 11%/12 for rate and 5*12 for nper. If you make annual payments on the same loan, use 11% for rate and 5 for nper.

•	IPMT returns the #VALUE! error if any of the arguments are non-numeric.

•	Periods must be in the range 1 to nper inclusive.

•	Cash debits are to be represented as negative values; cash revenues are to be represented by positive values.

Example

To calculate the interest due after one year for a two-year $1,000 loan at 12% annual interest:

IPMT(0.12/12,12,24,1000)= -$5.71

 Related Topics


IRR
IRR (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the internal rate of return for a series of cash flows. The internal rate of return is the rate of interest for an investment which consists of payments (negative values) and income (positive values).

Syntax

IRR(values, estimate)

Arguments	Definitions

values	an array or a reference to a range of cells containing values whose internal rate of return you wish to calculate

estimate	your estimate of the result of the function

 Notes

•	An array can be expressed as a cell range such as R2C2:R6C2 or in the form {2,3,4,5,6}.

•	At least one of the values must be negative and at least one positive to calculate IRR.

•	IRR uses the order of values as the order of cash flow. You must enter your payment and income values in the sequence you want with the correct signs (positive values for cash received and negative values for cash paid).

•	The #VALUE! error is returned if any argument is non-numeric.

•	If estimate is omitted, an estimate of 0.1 is used.

Example

Suppose you invest $1000 and expect $200, $300, $400, and $500 incomes within the next four periods respectively. Let cells R1C2 to R5C2 contain: -1000, 200, 300, 400, 500. Your internal rate will amount to:

IRR(b1:b6) = 0.128 or 12.8%

 Related Topics


MDURATION
MDURATION (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the modified Macauley duration for a security with a par value of $100.

Syntax

MDURATION(settlement_date, maturation_date, coupon, yield, frequency, basis)

Arguments	Definitions

settlement	the serial date value for the date of the security's settlement

maturation	the serial date value for the date of maturation of the security

coupon	the annual coupon rate for the security

yield	the annual yield for the security

frequency	an integer representing the number of annual coupon payments; for annual payments, frequency = 1; for semiannual, frequency = 2; for quarterly, frequency = 4

basis	an integer indicating the type of day-count basis used

Notes and Error Messages

Settlement, maturation, frequency, and basis are rounded to integers.

MDURATION returns the #NUMBER! error value if:

•	settlement or maturation is not a valid serial date value

•	coupon is less than 0 or if yield is less than 0

•	frequency is not 1, 2, or 4

•	basis is not 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4

•	settlement is greater than or equal to maturation

•	The #VALUE! error is returned if any argument is non-numeric.

Example

MDURATION(datevalue("January 26, 1995"),datevalue("June 20, 1995"),0.08,0.1,4,1) = 0.3827

 Related Topics


MIRR
MIRR (Corel VENTURA table function)

Calculates the modified internal rate of return for a series of periodic cash flows, taking into account both the cost of the initial investment and the interest received on reinvestment of income.

Syntax

MIRR(values, finance, reinvest)

Arguments	Definitions

values	an array or a reference to cells that contain payments (negative values) and income (positive values)

finance	the interest rate paid on funds borrowed for investment

reinvest	the interest rate you receive on reinvested funds

Notes and Error Messages

•	An array can be expressed as a cell range such as B2:B6 or in the form {2,3,4,5,6}.

•	MIRR uses the order of values as the order of cash flow. You must enter your payment and income values in the sequence you want with the correct signs (positive values for cash received and negative values for cash paid).

•	At least one of the values must be negative, and at least one positive. Otherwise, the function returns the #NUMBER! error value.

•	The #VALUE! error is returned if any argument is non-numeric.

Example

If cells R1C2 to R5C2 contain -1000, 200, 300, 400, and 500 respectively,
MIRR(R1C2:R5C2, 0.08, 0.009) = .0906 or 9%

 Related Topics


NOMINAL
NOMINAL (Corel VENTURA table function)

Calculates the annual nominal interest rate given the effective rate of interest and the number of compounding periods per year.

Syntax

NOMINAL(rate, npery)

Arguments	Definitions

rate	a real number representing the rate of interest

npery	an integer representing the number of annual compounding periods

Notes and Error Messages

•	Npery is rounded to an integer.

•	NOMINAL returns the #NUMBER! error if e_rate is less than or equal to 0 or npery is less than 1.

•	NOMINAL returns the #VALUE! error if either of the arguments are non-numeric.

Example

NOMINAL(0.1,12) = 0.09569 or 9.569%

 Related Topics


NPER
NPER (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the number of periods or payments needed to repay a loan based on the given payment, interest rate for each period, and amount of principal.

Syntax

NPER(rate, payment, pv, fv, time)

Arguments	Definitions

rate	a real number representing the interest rate for each period

payment	a real number representing the payment you make per period

pv	a number representing the present value (the full amount that a series of future payments is worth right now)

fv	a number representing the future value (the full amount you want to attain after the last payment is made; if omitted, it is assumed to be 0)

time	is an integer (either 0 or 1) indicating the time payments are due:

use 0 if payments are due at the end of the period (default)

use 1 if payments are due at the beginning of the period

(if omitted, it is assumed to be 0)

Notes and Error Messages

•	NPER returns the #VALUE! error if any of the arguments are non-numeric.

Example

This example assumes payment is made at the end of the period.

NPER(0.3/12, 100, 1000) =-9.0369

 Related Topics


NPV
NPV (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the net present value of an investment based on a series of periodic cash flows and a discount rate. Use this function when payments will not be constant.

Syntax

NPV(rate, list)

Arguments	Definitions

rate	a real number indicating the rate of discount

list	a list of payments (negative values) and income (positive values) expressed as an array

Notes and Error Messages

•	An array can be expressed as a cell range such as R2C2:R6C2 or in the form {2,3,4,5,6}.

•	NPV returns the #VALUE! error if any of the arguments are non-numeric.

•	Funds paid out are to be written as negative values, funds you receive are positive.

•	NPV uses the order of the values as the order of cash flow. You must enter your payment and income values in the sequence you want with the correct signs (positive values for cash received and negative values for cash paid).

Example

NPV(0.1,{-1000,100,1000}) = ($75.1315) (assuming payment of $1000 is made at the end of the first period)

 Related Topics


PMT
PMT (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the periodic payment for an annuity based on constant payments and a constant interest rate. PMT assumes that interest is paid at the end of each period.

Syntax

PMT(rate, nper, pv, fv, time)

Arguments	Definitions

rate	a real number specifying the interest rate

nper	an integer representing the total number of payment periods

pv	a number representing the present value (the full amount that a series of future payments is worth right now)

fv	a number representing the future value (the full amount you want to attain after the last payment is made; if omitted, it is assumed to be 0)

time	an integer indicating when payments are due (0 or 1):

use 0 if payments are due at the end of the period (default)

use 1 if payments are due at the beginning of the period

(if omitted, it is assumed to be 0)

Notes and Error Messages

•	PMT returns the #VALUE! error if any of the arguments are non-numeric.

•	Cash debits are represented by negative values; cash revenues are represented by positive values.

•	The result of PMT includes principal and interest but no taxes, reserve payments, or fees that are sometimes associated with annuities.

•	The units for specifying rate and nper must be consistent. If you make monthly payments on a five year loan at 11% annual interest, use 11%/12 for rate and 5*12 for nper. If you make annual payments on the same loan, use 11% for rate and 5 for nper.

Example

To calculate the monthly payment for a 5-year loan of $20,000 at an annual 12% interest rate, enter the following:
PMT(0.12/12, 5*12, 20000) = ($444.889)

 Related Topics


PPMT
PPMT (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the payment on the principal for an investment for a given period based on periodic, constant payments and a constant interest rate.

Syntax

PPMT(rate, period, nper, pv, fv, time)

Arguments	Definitions

rate	a real number specifying the interest rate

period	a real number specifying the period; must be from 1 to nper

nper	an integer representing the total number of payment periods.

pv	a number representing the present value (the full amount that a series of future payments is worth right now)

fv	a number representing the future value (the full amount you want to attain after the last payment is made; if omitted, it is assumed to be 0)

time	an integer indicating the time payments are due (0 or 1):

use 0 if payments are due at the end of the period (default)

use 1 if payments are due at the beginning of the period

(if omitted, it is assumed to be 0)

Notes and Error Messages

•	The units for specifying rate and nper must be consistent. If you make monthly payments on a five year loan at 11% annual interest, use 11%/12 for rate and 5*12 for nper. If you make annual payments on the same loan, use 11% for rate and 5 for nper.

•	PPMT returns the #NUMBER! error if periods is outside the range 1 to nper.

•	PPMT returns the #VALUE! error if any of the arguments are non-numeric.

Example

The following function returns the principal payment for the last year of an 11-year, $2500 loan at 7% annual interest:

PPMT(0.07, 11, 11, 2500) = -$311.58

 Related Topics


PRICE
PRICE (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the price for each $100 face value of a security that returns periodic interest.

Syntax

PRICE(settlement, maturation, rate, yield, redemption, frequency, basis)

Arguments	Definitions

settlement	a serial date value specifying the security's date of settlement

maturation	a serial date value specifying the security's date of maturation

rate	a real number specifying the interest rate

yield	a real number specifying the security's annual yield

redemption	a real number for the security's redemption value for each $100 face value

frequency	an integer indicating the number of annual coupon payments; for annual payments, frequency = 1; for semiannual, frequency = 2; for quarterly, frequency = 4

basis	an integer from 0 to 4, specifying the type of day-count basis to use; if omitted, 0 is assumed

Notes and Error Messages

PRICE returns the #NUMBER! error value if:

•	settlement or maturation is not a valid serial date value

•	rate or yield is negative

•	basis or frequency is out of range

•	settlement is greater than or equal to maturation

PRICE returns the #VALUE! error if any of the arguments are non-numeric.

If settlement, maturation, frequency and basis are non-integers they are truncated.

Example

PRICE could be used for a bond with the terms shown below:

The date of settlement is February 10, 1991
The date of maturation is November 15, 1991
The semiannual coupon is 5.89%
The yield is 7.12%
The redemption value is $80
The frequency is semiannual and based on 30/360

The bond price (using the appropriate serial date values) is:
PRICE(33279, 33557, 0.0589, 0.0712, 80, 2, 0) = 80.1289

 Related Topics


PRICEDISC
PRICEDISC (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the price for each $100 face value of a discounted security.

Syntax

PRICEDISC(settlement, maturation, disc, redemption, basis)

Arguments	Definitions

settlement	a serial date value specifying the security's date of settlement

maturation	a serial date value specifying the security's date of maturation

disc	a real number specifying the security's discount rate

redemption	a real number indicating the security's redemption value for each $100 face value

basis	an integer from 0 to 4 specifying the type of day-count basis to use; if omitted, 0 is assumed

Notes and Error Messages

PRICEDISC returns the #NUMBER! error value if:

•	settlement or maturation is not a valid serial date value

•	disc or redemption is negative

•	basis is out of the range

•	settlement is greater than or equal to maturation

•	PRICEDISC returns the #VALUE! error if any of the arguments are non-numeric.

If settlement, maturation and basis are non-integers they are truncated.

Example

PRICEDISC works as shown in the bond calculation below:

The date of settlement is February 10, 1991
The date of maturation is November 15, 1991
The discount rate is 5.89%
The redemption value is $80 and based on 30/360

The bond price (using the appropriate serial date values) is:
PRICEDISC(33279, 33557, 0.0589, 80, 0) = 76.4005

 Related Topics


PRICEMAT
PRICEMAT (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the price for each $100 face value of a security that pays interest upon maturation.

Syntax

PRICEMAT(settlement, maturation, issue, rate, yield, basis)

Arguments	Definitions

settlement	a serial date value specifying the security's date of settlement

maturation	a serial date value specifying the security's date of maturation

issue	a serial date value specifying the security's date of issue

rate	a real number specifying the interest rate

yield	a real number specifying the security's annual yield

basis	an integer from 0 to 4 specifying the type of day-count basis to use; if omitted, 0 is assumed

Notes and Error Messages

If settlement, maturation, issue and basis are non-integers they are truncated.

PRICEMAT returns the #NUMBER! error value if:

•	settlement, issue or maturation is not a valid serial date value

•	rate or yield is negative

•	basis is out of the range

•	settlement is greater than or equal to maturation

PRICEMAT returns the #VALUE! error if any of the arguments are non-numeric.

Example

PRICEMAT could be used for a bond with the terms shown below:

The date of settlement is February 10, 1991
The date of maturation is November 15, 1991
The date of issue is September 12, 1990
The semiannual coupon is 5.75%
The yield is 5.77% and based on 30/360

The price (using the appropriate serial date values) is:
PRICEMAT(33279, 33557, 33128, 0.0575, 0.0577, 0) = $99.89

 Related Topics


PV
PV (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns an investment's present value (the total present worth of a series of future payments.)

Syntax

PV(rate, nper, payment, fv, time)

Arguments	Definitions

rate	a real number specifying the interest rate

nper	an integer specifying the total number of payment periods

payment	a real number specifying the payment made each period; it cannot change over the life of the annuity

fv	a number indicating the future value; the full amount you want to attain after the last payment is made; if omitted, it is assumed to be 0

time	is an integer indicating when payments are due (0 or 1):

use 0 if payments are due at the end of the period (default)

use 1 if payments are due at the beginning of the period

(if omitted, it is assumed to be 0)

Notes and Error Messages

•	The units for specifying rate and nper must be consistent. If you make monthly payments on a five year loan at 11% annual interest, use 11%/12 for rate and 5*12 for nper. If you make annual payments on the same loan, use 11% for rate and 5 for nper.

•	PV returns the #VALUE! error if any of the arguments are non-numeric.

•	Cash debits are represented by negative values; cash revenues are represented by positive values.

Example

PV is useful in the following type of analysis. Which is better, to pay $25000 up front, or $450 per month for the next 10 years at 7.5% interest?

PV(0.075/12, 12*10, 450) = ($37910.1342)

This tells you that the loan's present value is $12910.13 more than the initial $25000 payment.

 Related Topics


RATE
RATE (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the interest rate per period of an annuity.

Syntax

RATE(nper, payment, pv, fv, time, estimate)

Arguments	Definitions

nper	a real number specifying the total number of payment periods

payment	a real number specifying the payment made each period; fixed for the life of the annuity

pv	a real number specifying the present value

fv	a real number specifying the future value; if omitted, it is assumed to be 0

time	an integer indicating the time payments are due (0 or 1):

use 0 if payments are due at the end of the period (default)

use 1 if payments are due at the beginning of the period

(if omitted, it is assumed to be 0)

estimate	your estimate of the result; if omitted, it is assumed to be 10%

Notes and Error Messages

•	The units for specifying estimate and nper must be consistent. If you make monthly payments on a five year loan at 11% annual interest, use 11%/12 for estimate and 5*12 for nper. If you make annual payments on the same loan, use 11% for estimate and 5 for nper.

•	RATE returns the #VALUE! error if any of the arguments are non-numeric.

Example

The following example shows how to calculate the rate of a three-year, $5000 loan with monthly payments of $300:
RATE(3*12, -300, 5000) = 0.049 or 4.9%

 Related Topics


RECEIVED
RECEIVED (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the amount received at maturity for a fully invested security.

Syntax

RECEIVED(settlement, maturation, investment, disc, basis)

Arguments	Definitions

settlement	a serial date value specifying the security's date of settlement

maturation	a serial date value specifying the security's date of maturation

investment	an integer representing the sum invested in the security

disc	a real number specifying the security's discount rate

basis	an integer from 0 to 4 specifying the type of day-count basis to use; if omitted, 0 is assumed

Notes and Error Messages

RECEIVED returns the #NUMBER! error value if:

•	settlement or maturation is not a valid serial date value

•	basis is out of the range

•	settlement is greater than or equal to maturation

RECEIVED returns the #VALUE! error if any of the arguments are non-numeric.

If settlement, maturation and basis are non-integers they are truncated.

Example

RECEIVED could be used for a bond with the terms shown below:

The date of settlement is February 10, 1990
The date of maturation is November 15, 1993
The discount rate is 5.75%

Amount invested in the security is $100000
and based on 30/360

The total to be received upon maturation (using the appropriate serial date values) is:
RECEIVED(32914, 34288, 100000, 0.0575, 0) = 127619.9761

 Related Topics


SLN
SLN (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the straight-line depreciation of an asset for a single period.

Syntax

SLN(cost, salvage, lifetime)

Arguments	Definitions

cost	a real number specifying the original asset cost

salvage	a real number specifying the asset's salvage value after depreciation

lifetime	a real number specifying the number of periods, or lifetime, over which you want to determine asset depreciation (also called the useful life of the asset)

Notes and Error Messages

•	SLN returns the #VALUE! error if any of the arguments are non-numeric.

Example

If the original purchase price of a given piece of equipment is $15000, useful lifetime is 15 years, and salvage value is $2300, the annual depreciation allowance would be:
SLN(15000, 2300, 15) = $846.67

 Related Topics


SYD
SYD (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns sum-of-years' digits depreciation of an asset for a given period.

Syntax

SYD(cost, salvage, lifetime, period)

Arguments	Definitions

cost	a real number specifying the original asset cost

salvage	a real number specifying the salvage value after depreciation

lifetime	a real number specifying the number of periods, or lifetime, over which you want to determine asset depreciation (also called the useful life of the asset)

period	a real number specifying the period; must use the same units as lifetime

Notes and Error Messages

•	SYD returns the #VALUE! error if any of the arguments are non-numeric.

Examples

If the original purchase price of a given piece of equipment is $15000, useful lifetime is 15 years, and salvage value is $2300, the first-year's depreciation allowance would be:
SYD(15000, 2300, 15, 1) = $1587.50

The yearly depreciation allowance for the 12th year would be:
SYD(15000, 2300, 15, 12) = $423.33

 Related Topics


TBILLEQ
TBILLEQ (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the bond-equivalent yield for a Treasury bill.

Syntax

TBILLEQ(settlement, maturation, disc)

Arguments	Definitions

settlement	a serial date value specifying the security's date of settlement

maturation	a serial date value specifying the security's date of maturation

disc	a real number specifying the security's discount rate

Notes and Error Messages

TBILLEQ returns the #NUMBER! error value if:

•	settlement or maturation is not a valid serial date value

•	disc is [image] 0

•	settlement falls after maturation, or if maturation is more than one year after settlement

TBILLEQ returns the #VALUE! error if any of the arguments are non-numeric.

If settlement and maturation are non-integers they are truncated.

Example

TBILLEQ could be used for a Treasury bill with the terms shown below:

The date of settlement is February 10, 1990
The date of maturation is November 15, 1990
The discount rate is equal to 7%

The Treasury bill bond-equivalent yield is:
TBILLEQ(datevalue("February 10, 1990"),datevalue("November 15, 1990"),0.07) = 0.07408 or 7.4%

 Related Topics


TBILLPRICE
TBILLPRICE (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the price per $100 face value for a Treasury bill.

Syntax

TBILLPRICE(settlement, maturation, disc)

Arguments	Definitions

settlement	a serial date value specifying the security's date of settlement

maturation	a serial date value specifying the security's date of maturation

disc	a real number specifying the security's discount rate

Notes and Error Messages

TBILLPRICE returns the #NUMBER! error value if:

•	settlement or maturation is not a valid serial date value

•	disc is [image] 0

•	settlement falls after maturation, or if maturation is more than one year after settlement

TBILLPRICE returns the #VALUE! error if any of the arguments are non-numeric.

If settlement and maturation are non-integers they are truncated.

Example

TBILLPRICE could be used for a Treasury bill with the terms shown below:

The date of settlement is February 10, 1990
The date of maturation is November 15, 1990
The discount rate is equal to 7%

The Treasury bill price is:
TBILLPRICE(datevalue("February 10, 1990"),datevalue("November 15, 1990"),0.07) = 94.5944

 Related Topics


TBILLYIELD
TBILLYIELD (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the yield for a Treasury bill.

Syntax

TBILLYIELD(settlement, maturation, price)

Arguments	Definitions

settlement	a serial date value specifying the security's date of settlement

maturation	a serial date value specifying the security's date of maturation

price	a real number specifying the Treasury bill's price for each $100 face value

Notes and Error Messages

TBILLYIELD returns the #NUMBER! error value if:

•	settlement or maturation is not a valid serial date value

•	price is a negative or 0

•	settlement falls after maturation, or if maturation is more than one year after settlement

TBILLYIELD returns the #VALUE! error if any of the arguments are non-numeric.

If settlement and maturation are non-integers they are truncated.

Example

TBILLYIELD could be used for a Treasury bill with the terms shown below:

The date of settlement is February 10, 1990
The date of maturation is November 15, 1990
The price for each $100 face value is equal to 72.22

The Treasury bill yield is:
TBILLYIELD(datevalue("February 10, 1990"),datevalue("November 15, 1990"),72.22) = 0.4981 or 49.81%

 Related Topics


VDB
VDB (Corel VENTURA table function)

Calculates the depreciation of an asset for a specified period using the double declining balance or any other specified method.

Syntax

VDB(cost, salvage, lifetime, start, end, factor, no_switch)

Arguments	Definitions

cost	an integer indicating the initial asset cost

salvage	an integer indicating the salvage value after depreciation

lifetime	a real number specifying the number of periods, or lifetime, over which you want to determine asset depreciation

start	an integer specifying the starting period for which depreciation is to be calculated

end	an integer specifying the ending period for which depreciation is to be calculated

factor	the rate at which the balance declines; if omitted, it is assumed to be 2 (the double-declining balance method); see DDB function

no_switch	a logical value specifying whether to switch to straight-line depreciation when depreciation is greater than the declining balance calculation; to prevent a switch to straight-line depreciation, even when the depreciation is greater than the declining balance calculation, use TRUE; if no_switch is FALSE or omitted, the spreadsheet will switch to straight line depreciation when the depreciation is greater than the declining balance calculation

Notes and Error Messages

•	VDB returns the #NUMBER! error for negative arguments.

•	VDB returns the #VALUE! error for non-numeric arguments.

Examples

The following examples show depreciation for a pair of new microcomputers purchased for $4,000 with lifetimes of five years and salvage value of $490.

VDB(4000, 490, 5*365, 0, 1) = $4.38, the first day's depreciation

VDB(4000, 490, 5*12, 0, 1) = $133.33, the first month's depreciation

VDB(4000, 490, 5, 0, 1) = $1600.00, the first year's depreciation

VDB(4000, 490, 5*12, 4, 15) = $1087.21, the depreciation calculated between the 4th and 15th months

 Related Topics


XIRR
XIRR (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the internal rate of return for regular or irregular cash flow schedules.

Syntax

XIRR(values, dates, estimate)

Arguments	Definitions

values	an array of cash flows matched to a series of payments in dates

dates	an array of payment dates matched with cash flow payments

estimate	an estimate; your speculated result of XIRR; if omitted, it is assumed to be 0.1 (10%)

Notes and Error Messages

An array can be given as a cell range such as R2C2:R6C2 or in the form {2,3,4,5,6}.

Numbers in dates are truncated to integers.

XIRR returns the #NUMBER! error value if:

•	values and dates contain a different number of values

•	values doesn't contain at least one positive cash flow and one negative cash flow

•	dates contains numbers which are not serial value(s)

•	any serial date value is earlier than the serial date value of the starting date

XIRR returns the #VALUE! error if any argument is non-numeric.

Examples

If you invested $5000 on January 1, 1994, and the return was $1000 on the first of each month for the next 6 months, you would compute Cash Internal Rate of Return as follows:

XIRR({-5000,1000,1000,1000,1000,1000,1000}, {34335,34366,34394,34425,34455,34486,34516}) = .9082

Suppose that you invested $24000 in an enterprise on December 15, 1992 and the payment returned $3500 on March 15, 1993; $2835 on June 15, 1993; $4750 on September 15, 1993; and $6000 on December 15, 1993. Compute Cash Internal Rate of Return as follows:

XIRR({-14000,3500,2835,4750,6000},A1:A5,0.1) = 0.33958219 or - 33.9582%, if range R1C1:R5C1 contains =DATEVALUE("December 15, 1992"), =DATEVALUE("March 15, 1993"), =DATEVALUE("June 15, 1993"), =DATEVALUE("September 15, 1993"), =DATEVALUE("December 15, 1993")

 Related Topics


XNPV
XNPV (Corel VENTURA table function)

Calculates the net present value for regular or irregular cash flow schedules.

Syntax

XNPV(rate, values, dates)

Arguments	Definitions

rate	a real number specifying the discount rate to apply to cash flows

values	an array containing a series of cash flows that correspond with the schedule of payments in dates

dates	an array containing payment dates that correspond with the cash flow payments; the dates must be expressed as serial values

Notes and Error Messages

An array can be expressed as a range such as B2:B6 or in the form {2,3,4,5,6}.

Numbers in dates are truncated to integers.

XNPV returns the #NUMBER! error value if:

•	values and dates contain a different number of values

•	dates contains invalid serial value(s)

•	any serial date value is less than the serial date value of the starting date

XNPV returns the #VALUE! error if any of the arguments are non-numeric.

Examples

If you invested $5000 on January 1, 1994, the investment returned $1000 on the first of each month for the next six months, and you wanted to discount the cash flow at 10%, you would compute Cash Net Present Value as follows:

XNPV(0.1,{-5000,1000,1000,1000,1000,1000,1000}, {34335,34366,34394,34425,34455,34486,34516}) = 837.7471

Suppose you invested $24000 in an enterprise on December 15, 1992 and the payment returned $3500 on March 15, 1993; $2835 on June 15, 1993; $4750 on September 15, 1993; and $6000 on December 15, 1993, based on a 5% interest rate. You would compute Cash Net Present Value as follows:

XNPV(0.05,{-14000,3500,2835,4750,6000},A1:A5,0.1) = 2518.4668 if range R1C1:R5C1 contains DATEVALUE("December 15, 1992"),DATEVALUE("March 15, 1993"),DATEVALUE("June 15, 1993"),DATEVALUE("September 15, 1993"),DATEVALUE("December 15, 1993")

 Related Topics


YIELD
YIELD (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the yield on a security that returns periodic interest.

Syntax

YIELD(settlement, maturation, rate, price, redemption, frequency, basis)

Arguments	Definitions

settlement	a serial date value specifying the security's date of settlement

maturation	a serial date value specifying the security's date of maturation

rate	a real number specifying the security's annual coupon rate

price	a real number specifying the security's price for each $100 face value

redemption	a real number representing the security's redemption value for each $100 face value

frequency	the number, or frequency, of annual coupon payments; for annual payments, frequency = 1; for semiannual, frequency = 2; for quarterly, frequency = 4

basis	an integer from 0 to 4 specifying the type of day-count basis to use; if omitted, 0 is assumed

Notes and Error Messages

YIELD returns the #NUMBER! error value if:

•	settlement or maturation is an invalid serial date value

•	price or redemption is 0 or negative

•	rate is negative

•	basis or frequency is out of range

•	settlement [image] maturation

YIELD returns the #VALUE! error if any of the arguments are non-numeric.

YIELD truncates settlement, maturation and basis to integers.

Example

YIELD works as shown in the bond calculation below:

The date of settlement is February 10, 1991
The date of maturation is November 15, 1991
The coupon rate is 5.75%
The price is equal to 120.2222
The redemption value is $80
The frequency is semiannual and based on 1

The bond yield (using the appropriate serial date values) is:

YIELD(33279,33557,0.0575,120.2222,80,1) = -0.3858 or -38.58%

 Related Topics


YIELDDISC
YIELDDISC (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the annual yield for a discounted security.

Syntax

YIELDDISC(settlement, maturation, price, redemption, basis)

Arguments	Definitions

settlement	a serial date value specifying the security's date of settlement

maturation	a serial date value specifying the security's date of maturation

price	a real number specifying the security's price for each $100 face value

redemption	a real number for the security's redemption value for each $100 face value

basis	an integer from 0 to 4 specifying the type of day-count basis to use; if omitted, 0 is assumed

Notes and Error Messages

Convert dates to serial values before proceeding or type them into another cell and reference them in the formula.

YIELDDISC returns the #NUMBER! error value if:

•	settlement or maturation is an invalid serial date value

•	redemption or price is 0 or negative

•	basis is out of range

•	settlement is greater than or equal to maturation

YIELDDISC returns the #VALUE! error if any of the arguments are non-numeric.

If settlement, maturation, and basis are non-integers they are truncated.

Example

YIELDDISC works as shown in the bond calculation below:

The date of settlement is February 10, 1991
The date of maturation is November 15, 1991
The price is equal to 120.2222
The redemption value is $80
and based on 30/360

The bond yield (using the appropriate serial date values) is:
YIELDDISC(33279,33557,120.2222,80,0) = -0.4380 or -43.80%

 Related Topics


YIELDMAT
YIELDMAT (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the annual yield of a security that pays interest at maturity.

Syntax

YIELDMAT(settlement, maturation, issue, rate, price, basis)

Arguments	Definitions

settlement	a serial date value specifying the security's date of settlement

maturation	a serial date value specifying the security's date of maturation

issue	a serial date value specifying the security's date of issue

rate	a real number specifying the security's interest rate at date of issue

price	a real number specifying the security's price for each $100 face value

basis	an integer from 0 to 4 specifying the type of day-count basis to use; if omitted, 0 is assumed

Notes and Error Messages

Convert dates to serial values before proceeding or type them into another cell and reference them in the formula.

YIELDMAT returns the #NUMBER! error value if:

•	settlement, issue, or maturation is an invalid serial date value

•	rate is negative

•	price is 0 or negative

•	basis is out of range

•	settlement is greater than or equal to maturation

YIELDMAT returns the #VALUE! error if any of the arguments are non-numeric.

If settlement, maturation, issue, and basis are non-integers they are truncated.

Example

YIELDMAT could be used for a bond with the terms shown below:

The date of settlement is February 10, 1991
The date of maturation is November 15, 1991
The date of issue is September 12, 1990
The semiannual coupon rate is 5.75%
The price is equal to 120.2222 and based on 30/360

The yield (using the appropriate serial date values) is:
YIELDMAT(33279,33557,33128,0.0575,120.2222,0) = -0.1691 or -16.91%

 Related Topics


Logical functions


Corel VENTURA logical table functions

Corel Ventura logical table functions allow you to compare and evaluate relationships between values in your table.

Function	Description

AND	Returns 1 (true) if all arguments are true, 0 (false) if even one argument is false

CHAR	Returns the character specified by a user-specified code number from 1 to 255

CONCATENATE	Links two arguments

FALSE	Returns the logical value 0

IF	Returns one of the specified values, depending on the logical condition

NAND	Calculates the logical NAND function

NOR	Calculates the logical NOR function

NOT	Returns the reverse of the logical expression

OR	Returns 1 (true) if any argument is true, 0 (false) if all arguments are false.

TRUE	Returns the logical value 1

XOR	Calculates the logical XOR function

 Related Topics


AND
AND (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the logical AND function. The result is TRUE if all arguments in the list are TRUE, and FALSE if at least one is FALSE. Any numeric input that is 0 is treated as FALSE and any numeric input that is not 0 is treated as TRUE.

Syntax

AND(condlist)

Argument	Definition

condlist	represents any combination of numbers, expressions, cell references separated by commas; or an array of values

Notes and Error Messages

•	AND returns the #INVALID DATA! error if arguments are not logical values or arrays whose references contain logical values.

Examples

AND(1+2=4, 3+4=7, 4+4=8) = FALSE

AND(TRUE, TRUE, TRUE) = TRUE

AND(TRUE, FALSE, TRUE) = FALSE

Enter the value 12 in cell R1C2, then:

AND(3< R1C2, R1C2<20) = TRUE

AND(1,2,3,4,5,0) = FALSE

AND(1,2,3,4,5,6) = TRUE

 Related Topics


CHAR
CHAR (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the ANSI character referenced by an input value from 32 to 255.

Syntax

CHAR(exp)

Argument	Definition

exp	any integer number from 32 to 255 inclusive

Examples

CHAR(68) = D

CHAR(82) = R

CHAR(65) = A

CHAR(87) = W

 Related Topics


CONCATENATE
CONCATENATE (Corel VENTURA table function)

Concatenates the two arguments.

Syntax

CONCATENATE(text, text)

Argument	Definition

text	any text string

Examples

CONCATENATE(my, car) =mycar

CONCATENATE(FRONT, back) =FRONTback

 Related Topics


FALSE
FALSE (Corel VENTURA table function)

Result is the logical value FALSE. It is often used to evaluate Boolean expressions and bi-conditional responses. FALSE is evaluated as the opposite of TRUE and is a Boolean input as well as a function.

Syntax

FALSE() or FALSE

Notes and Error Messages

•	FALSE can be used with or without brackets i.e., FALSE() or FALSE.

•	Many types of spreadsheets and formulas interpret FALSE as the logical value 0.

Example

AND(TRUE(), FALSE(), TRUE()) = FALSE

AND(TRUE, FALSE, TRUE) = FALSE

NAND(TRUE(), FALSE(), TRUE()) = TRUE

 Related Topics


IF
IF (Corel VENTURA table function)

Calculates a result based on a conditional IF statement. It returns the value contained in true_case if the condition expression is true, otherwise it returns the value contained in false_case. Any numeric input that is 0 is treated as FALSE and any numeric input that is not 0 is treated as TRUE.

Syntax

IF(test, truevalue, falsevalue)

Arguments	Definitions

test	any logical expression that can be evaluated as TRUE or FALSE

truevalue	the value that is returned if test is TRUE; if omitted and test is TRUE, TRUE is returned

falsevalue	the value that is returned if test is FALSE; if omitted and test is FALSE, FALSE is returned

Example

IF( R3C3>= 1000, "Large Cash") Large Cash will be returned if the cell reference is [image] 1000

IF( R3C3>= 1000, "Large Cash", "Small Cash") Large Cash will be returned if the cell reference is [image] 1000 and Small Cash will be returned if the cell reference is < 1000.

 Related Topics


NAND
NAND (Corel VENTURA table function)

Calculates the logical NAND function. The result is FALSE if all the arguments are TRUE and TRUE if at least one is FALSE. Any numeric input that is 0 is treated as FALSE and any numeric input that is not 0 is treated as TRUE.

Syntax

NAND(logiclist)

Argument	Definition

logiclist	represents any combination of numbers, expressions, cell references separated by commas; or an array of values

Notes and Error Messages

•	NAND returns the #VALUE! error if arguments are not logical values or arrays whose references contain logical values.

Examples

NAND(1+2=4, 3+4=7, 4+4=8) = TRUE

NAND(1+2=4, 3+4=10, 4+4=11) = TRUE

NAND(TRUE, TRUE, TRUE) = FALSE

NAND(TRUE, FALSE, TRUE) = TRUE

NAND(FALSE, FALSE, FALSE) = TRUE

Enter the value 12 in cell R1C2, then:

NAND(3<R1C2, R1C2<20) = FALSE

 Related Topics


NOR
NOR (Corel VENTURA table function)

Calculates the logical NOR function. The result is FALSE if any argument in the list is TRUE and TRUE if all arguments are FALSE. Any numeric input that is 0 is treated as FALSE and any numeric input that is not 0 is treated as TRUE.

Syntax

NOR(logiclist)

Argument	Definition

logiclist	represents any combination of numbers, expressions, cell references separated by commas; or an array of values

Notes and Error Messages

•	NOR returns the #VALUE! error if the arguments are not logical values or arrays of references containing logical values.

Examples

NOR(1+2=4, 3+4=7, 4+4=8) = FALSE

NOR((1+2=4, 3+4=10, 4+4=11) = TRUE

NOR(TRUE, TRUE, TRUE) = FALSE

NOR(FALSE, FALSE, FALSE) = TRUE

If cell R1C2 contains the value 2, then:

NOR(3< R1C2, R1C2 <20) = FALSE

 Related Topics


NOT
NOT (Corel VENTURA table function)

Result is the reverse of the logical expression. All numerical inputs not equal to 0 are evaluated as TRUE and the result of the NOT function on a TRUE input is FALSE. Inputs equal to 0 are evaluated as FALSE and the result of the NOT function on a FALSE input is TRUE.

Syntax

NOT(logical)

Argument	Definition

logical	any logical value

Examples

NOT(TRUE) = FALSE

AND(NOT(2+1=5), TRUE) = TRUE

 Related Topics


OR
OR (Corel VENTURA table function)

Calculates the logical OR function. The result is TRUE if any argument in the list is TRUE and FALSE if all arguments are FALSE. Any numeric input that is 0 is treated as FALSE and any numeric input that is not 0 is treated as TRUE.

Syntax

OR(logiclist)

Argument	Definition

logiclist	represents any combination of numbers, expressions, cell references separated by commas; or an array of values

Notes and Error Messages

•	OR returns the #VALUE! error if the arguments are not logical values or arrays of references containing logical values.

Examples

OR(1+2=4, 3+4=7, 4+4=8) = TRUE

OR(TRUE, TRUE, TRUE) = TRUE

OR(FALSE, FALSE, FALSE) = FALSE

If cell R1C2 contains the value 2, then:

OR(3< R1C2, R1C2 <20) = TRUE

 Related Topics


TRUE
TRUE (Corel VENTURA table function)

Result is the logical value TRUE. It is often used to evaluate Boolean expressions and bi-conditional responses. TRUE is evaluated as the opposite of FALSE and is a Boolean input as well as a function.

Syntax

TRUE() or TRUE

Notes and Error Messages

•	TRUE can be used with or without brackets i.e., TRUE() or TRUE.

•	TRUE is interpreted as the logical value 1 in many types of spreadsheets and formulas.

Example

OR(TRUE(),FALSE()) = TRUE

OR(TRUE, FALSE) = TRUE

NAND(TRUE(),TRUE()) = FALSE

 Related Topics


XOR
XOR (Corel VENTURA table function)

Calculates the logical XOR function. The result is TRUE if either logiclistA or logiclistB is FALSE but not both; the result is FALSE in all other cases. Any numeric input that is 0 is treated as FALSE and any numeric input that is not 0 is treated as TRUE.

Syntax

XOR(logiclistA, logiclistB)

Argument	Definition

logiclistA	represents any combination of numbers, expressions, cell references separated by commas; or an array of values

logiclistB	represents any combination of numbers, expressions, cell references separated by commas; or an array of values

Notes and Error Messages

•	XOR returns the #VALUE! error if the arguments are not logical values or arrays of references containing logical values.

Examples

XOR(1+2=4, 3+4=7) = TRUE

XOR(TRUE, TRUE) = FALSE

XOR(FALSE, FALSE) = FALSE

XOR(TRUE, FALSE) = TRUE

If cell R1C2 contains the value 2, then:

XOR(3< R1C2, R1C2 <20) = TRUE

 Related Topics


Mathematical functions


Corel VENTURA mathematical table functions

The Corel VENTURA mathematical table functions allow you to perform a variety of mathematical calculations, such as trigonometric functions.

Function	Description

ABS	Returns the absolute value of a real number

ACOS	Returns the inverse cosine (arccosine) of a number

ACOSH	Returns the inverse hyperbolic cosine (hyperbolic arccosine) of a number

ASIN	Returns the inverse sine (arcsine) of a number

ASINH	Returns the inverse hyperbolic sine (hyperbolic arcsine) of a number

ATAN	Returns the inverse tangent (arctangent) of a number

ATAN2	Returns the inverse tangent (arctangent) of specified x and y coordinates

ATANH	Returns the inverse hyperbolic tangent (hyperbolic arctangent) of a number

CEILING	Rounds a number up to the nearest integer

COMBIN	Returns the number of unordered subgroup combinations that can be formed from a given group

COS	Returns the cosine of an angle in radians

COSH	Returns the hyperbolic cosine of a number

COT	Returns the cotangent of an angle in radians

CSC	Returns the cosecant of an angle in radians

DEGTORAD	Converts degrees to radians

EVEN	Rounds a number up from 0 to the nearest even integer

EXP	Raises value e to a given exponent, where e is the base of the natural logarithm which is approximated by 2.7183

FACT	Calculates the factorial of a number

FACTDOUBLE	Returns the double factorial of a number

FLOOR	Returns a number rounded down to the nearest multiple of significance

GCD	Returns the greatest common divisor of a group of numbers

INT	Returns a number rounded down to the nearest integer

INVERSE	Returns the multiplicative inverse of a real number

LCM	Returns the least common multiple of a group of numbers

LN	Returns the natural logarithm of a number

LOG	Returns the logarithm of a number to a given base

LOG10	Returns the base 10 logarithm of a number

LOG2	Returns the base 2 logarithm of a number

MOD	Returns the modulus (or the remainder) of a number divided by another number

MROUND	Rounds a number to the nearest specified multiple

MULTINOMIAL	Returns the multinomial of a group of numbers

ODD	Rounds a number away from 0 to the nearest odd integer

PCT	Divides a number argument by 100, returning the decimal version of a percentage

PI	Returns the value of pi

POWER	Returns the result of a number raised to a power

PRODUCT	Calculates the product of a list of numbers

QUOTIENT	Returns the integer portion of a division

RADTODEG	Converts radians to degrees. One radian is equal to 180/ [image] degrees

RAND	Returns an evenly distributed random number between 0 and 1

RANDBETWEEN	Returns an evenly distributed random integer between two specified numbers

ROUND	Rounds a number to a specified number of decimal places

SEC	Returns the secant of an angle in radians

SERIESSUM	Returns the sum of a power series

SIGN	Returns 1 if X is positive, 0 if X is zero, and -1 if X is negative

SIN	Returns the sine of a specified angle

SINH	Returns the hyperbolic sine of a number

SQRT	Returns the positive square root of a non-negative real number

SQRTPI	Returns the square root of a number multiplied by pi

SUM	Adds the values of a list of arguments

SUMPRODUCT	Multiplies corresponding components in the given arrays and returns the sum of those products

SUMSQ	Returns the sum of the squares of the arguments

SUMX2MY2	Returns the sum of the difference of squares of corresponding values in two arrays

SUMX2PY2	Returns the sum of the sum of squares of corresponding values in two arrays

SUMXMY2	Returns the sum of squares of differences of corresponding values in two arrays

TAN	Returns the tangent of an angle

TANH	Returns the hyperbolic tangent of a number

TRUNC	Truncates a number to the precision you specify

 Related Topics


ABS
ABS (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the absolute value of a real number. Absolute value is the positive value of a number or, in other words, the number without its sign.

Syntax

ABS(x)

Argument	Definition

x	any real number

Examples

ABS(-3) = 3

ABS(3) = 3

ABS(0) = 0

 Related Topics


ACOS
ACOS (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the inverse cosine (arccosine) of a number. The result is an angle measured in radians between 0 and PI.

Syntax

ACOS(x)

Argument	Definition

x	a real number  from -1 to 1, inclusive that specifies the cosine of the angle

 Note

•	To convert the result from radians to degrees, use the RADTODEG function or multiply the result by 180/PI().

RADTODEG(ACOS(-0.75)) = 138.59038 (degrees)

ACOS(-0.75)*180/PI() = 138.59038 (degrees)

Examples

ACOS(-0.75) = 2.41886

ACOS(0.75) = 0.7227

ACOS(0) = 1.5708

ACOS(1) = 0

 Related Topics


ACOSH
ACOSH (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the inverse hyperbolic cosine (hyperbolic arccosine) of a number.

Syntax

ACOSH(x)

Argument	Definition

x	a real number equal to or greater than 1; specifies the hyperbolic cosine of an angle

 Note

•	The ACOSH function operates as the inverse function to COSH, such that ACOSH(COSH(x)) equals x.

Examples

ACOSH(1) = 0

ACOSH(12.5) = 3.21727

 Related Topics


ASIN
ASIN (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the inverse sine (arcsine) of a number. The result is an angle in radians bounded by - [image] /2 and [image] /2.

Syntax

ASIN(x)

Argument	Definition

x	a real number from -1 to 1, inclusive, which specifies the sine of the angle

 Note

•	To convert the result from radians to degrees, use the RADTODEG function or multiply the result by 180/PI().

RADTODEG(ASIN(-0.75)) = -48.59038 (degrees)

ASIN(-0.75)*180/PI() = -48.59038 (degrees)

Examples

ASIN(-0.75) = -0.8481

ASIN(0.75) = 0.8481

ASIN(0) = 0

ASIN(1) = 1.5708

 Related Topics


ASINH
ASINH (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the inverse hyperbolic sine (hyperbolic arcsine) of a number.

Syntax

ASINH(x)

Argument	Definition

x	a real number; specifies the hyperbolic sine of an angle

 Note

•	The ASINH function operates as the inverse function to SINH, such that ASINH(SINH(x)) equals x.

Examples

ASINH(10.5) = 3.04678

ASINH(-0.75) = -0.6931

 Related Topics


ATAN
ATAN (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the inverse tangent (arctangent) of a number. The result is an angle bounded by - [image] /2 (-90 degrees) and [image] /2 (90 degrees) measured in radians.

Syntax

ATAN(x)

Argument	Definition

x	a real number; specifies the tangent of an angle

 Note

•	To convert the result from radians to degrees, use the RADTODEG function or multiply the result by 180/PI().

RADTODEG(ATAN(-0.75)) = -36.8699 (degrees)

ATAN(-0.75)*180/PI() = -36.8699 (degrees)

Examples

ATAN(-0.75) = -0.6435

ATAN(0.75) = 0.6435

ATAN(0) = 0

ATAN(1) = 0.7854

 Related Topics


ATAN2
ATAN2 (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the inverse tangent (arctangent) of specified x and y coordinates. The result is an angle bounded by - [image] and [image], measured in radians.

Syntax

ATAN2(x,y)

Argument	Definition

x	a real number representing the x coordinate

y	a real number representing the y coordinate

 Note

•	To convert the result from radians to degrees, use the RADTODEG function or multiply the result by 180/PI().

RADTODEG(ATAN2(3,6)) = 63. 43502 (degrees)

ATAN2(3,6)*180/PI = 63. 43502 (degrees)

Examples

ATAN2(3,6) = 1.10715

ATAN2(-3,-6) = 2.03444

 Related Topics


ATANH
ATANH (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the inverse hyperbolic tangent (hyperbolic arctangent) of a number.

Syntax

ATANH(x)

Argument	Definition

x	a real number between -1 to 1; specifies the hyperbolic tangent of an angle

 Note

•	The ATANH function operates as the inverse function to TANH, such that ATANH(TANH(x)) equals x.

Examples

ATANH(-0.75) = -0.973

ATANH(0.9) = 1.47222

 Related Topics


CEILING
CEILING (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns a number rounded away from zero, to the nearest integer, or multiple of significance.

Syntax

CEILING(x,significance)

Argument	Definition

x	a real number; specifies the number to round

significance	a real number; specifies the multiple of significance [image] that is, the number by which x can be evenly divided without leaving a remainder

 Note

•	Numbers are rounded away from zero.

Examples

CEILING(9,2) = 10

CEILING(1.64,0.25) = 1.75

CEILING(-1.64,-0.25) = -1.75

 Related Topics


COMBIN
COMBIN (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the number of unordered subgroup combinations that can be formed from a given group.

Syntax

COMBIN(group,subgroup)

Argument	Definition

group	a positive integer

subgroup	a positive integer equal to or less than group

Notes and Error Messages

•	Non-integers arguments are truncated.

•	COMBIN returns the #VALUE! error if either argument is non-numeric.

•	COMBIN returns the #NUMBER! error if group < 0, subgroup < 0, or group < subgroup.

The formula to calculate combinations is as follows, where n = group and k = subgroup:

Example

You want to know the possible winning combinations in a lottery where 6 numbers out of 49 are selected. The winning lottery ticket has all 6 selected numbers. The order in which the numbers are selected does not matter. The number of potential winning combinations is 13983816.

COMBIN(49,6) = 13983816

 Related Topics


COS
COS (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the cosine of an angle in radians.

Syntax

COS(x)

Argument	Definition

x	a real number; specifies the angle measured in radians

 Notes

•	The result of COS is between -1 and 1.

•	Use the DEGTORAD function if the angle is expressed in degrees.

COS(DEGTORAD(45)) = 0.7071

Example

COS(0.7) = 0.7648

 Related Topics


COSH
COSH (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the hyperbolic cosine of a number.

Syntax

COSH(x)

Argument	Definition

x	a real number

 Notes

•	The result of COSH is equal to or greater than 1.

•	The hyperbolic cosine formula is:

Examples

COSH(0.75) = 1.29468

COSH(-5) = 74.20995

 Related Topics


COT
COT (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the cotangent of an angle in radians. The cotangent of an angle is equal to 1 divided by the tangent of x.

Syntax

COT(x)

Argument	Definition

x	a real number; specifies the angle measured in radians for which you wish to determine the cotangent

 Notes

Use the DEGTORAD function if the angle is expressed in degrees.

COT(DEGTORAD(60)) = 0.5774

Example

COT(0.5) = 1.83049

 Related Topics


CSC
CSC (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the cosecant of an angle in radians.

Syntax

CSC(x)

Argument	Definition

x	a real number; specifies the angle measured in radians for which you wish to determine the cosecant

 Notes

Use the DEGTORAD function if the angle is expressed in degrees.

CSC(DEGTORAD(60)) = 1.1547

Example

CSC(0.5) = 2.08583

 Related Topics


DEGTORAD
DEGTORAD (Corel VENTURA table function)

Converts degrees to radians. One degree is equal to /180 radians.

Syntax

DEGTORAD(angle_in_degrees)

Arguments	Definitions

angle_in_degrees	an angle in degrees to be converted into radians

Examples

DEGTORAD(180) = pi (3.14159)

DEGTORAD(-70.473809) = -1.23

 Related Topics


EVEN
EVEN (Corel VENTURA table function)

Rounds a number away from 0 to the nearest even integer.

Syntax

EVEN(x)

Argument	Definition

x	a real number

Notes and Error Messages

•	EVEN returns the #INVALID DATA! error for non-numeric expressions.

•	Positive and negative numbers are rounded away from zero.

•	Even integers are not rounded.

Examples

EVEN(2.6) = 4

EVEN(-2.1) = -4

EVEN(6) = 6

EVEN(-10) = -10

EVEN(5) =6

 Related Topics


EXP
EXP (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the exponential of a specified value, which is the value of e (the mathematical constant) raised to the power of the specified value. The value must be less than or equal to 709.

Syntax

EXP(x)

Argument	Definition

x	a real number; specifies the exponent that e is raised to

 Note

•	EXP is the inverse of the natural logarithm of number (LN).

Examples

EXP(-3.25) = 0.0388

EXP( 7.89) = 2670.44392

EXP(1) = 2.71828

EXP(0) = 1

 Related Topics


FACT
FACT (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the factorial of a number. A number's factorial equals the product of all the integers from one up to and including the number itself. For example, the factorial of 5 equals 1*2*3*4*5 or 120.

Syntax

FACT(x)

Argument	Definition

x	a real number greater than or equal to 0; if x is a non-integer it is truncated

Notes and Error Messages

•	The mathematical symbol for a factorial is an exclamation mark (!).

•	FACT returns the #INVALID DATA! error if x is non-numeric.

•	FACT returns the #NUMBER! error if x is negative.

•	If x is not an integer then it will be truncated.

•	The factorial formula is:

Examples

FACT(5) = 120

FACT(5.3) = 120

FACT(0) = 1

 Related Topics


FACTDOUBLE
FACTDOUBLE (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the double factorial of a number.

Syntax

FACTDOUBLE(x)

Argument	Definition

x	a real number greater than or equal to 0; if x is a non-integer, it is truncated

Notes and Error Messages

•	The mathematical symbol for a double factorial is two exclamation marks (!!).

•	FACTDOUBLE returns the #INVALID DATA! error for non-numeric arguments.

•	FACTDOUBLE returns the #NUMBER! error for negative arguments.

•	If x is not an integer then it will be truncated.

•	If x is even:

•	If x is odd:

Examples

FACTDOUBLE(8) = 384

FACTDOUBLE(9) = 945

FACTDOUBLE(0) = 1

 Related Topics


FLOOR
FLOOR (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns a number rounded towards zero, to the nearest multiple of significance.

Syntax

FLOOR(x,significant)

Argument	Definition

x	a real number; specifies the number to round

significant	a real number; specifies the multiple of significance [image] that is, the number by which x can evenly be divided by without leaving a remainder

 Note

•	Numbers are towards zero.

Examples

FLOOR(9,2) = 8

FLOOR(1.64,0.25) = 1.5

FLOOR(-1.64,-0.25) = -1.5

 Related Topics


GCD
GCD (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the greatest common divisor of a group of numbers. The greatest common divisor is the largest integer that divides into a group of integers without leaving a remainder.

Syntax

GCD(number1,number2, ...,number30)

Argument	Definition

number1	any positive integer

number2	any positive integer

Notes and Error Messages

•	GCD truncates non-integers.

•	GCD returns the #INVALID DATA! error if any argument is non-numeric or negative.

Examples

GCD(2,4) = 2

GCD(2.5,4.01) = 2

GCD(14,56,77) = 7

GCD(13,17) = 1

GCD(R1C1:R3C1,25)=5, where R1C1=5, R2C1=10, and R3C1=15.

 Related Topics


INT
INT (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns a number rounded down to the nearest integer.

Syntax

INT(x)

Argument	Definition

x	a real number

 Note

•	You should use the ROUND function to round to the nearest integer.

Examples

INT(33.27) = 33

INT(33.95) = 33

INT(99.99999) = 99

INT(-33.95) = -34

INT(-34) =-34

 Related Topics


INVERSE
INVERSE (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the multiplicative inverse of a real number.

Syntax

INVERSE(number)

Argument	Definition

number	a real number for which you wish to determine the multiplicative inverse

Notes and Error Messages

•	INVERSE returns the #INVALID DATA! error if the argument is non-numeric.

Examples

INVERSE(4) = 0.25

INVERSE(-10) = -0.1

INVERSE(0.5) = 2

 Related Topics


LCM
LCM (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the least common multiple of a group of numbers. The LCM is the smallest positive integer that can be divided by each of the arguments without leaving a remainder.

Syntax

LCM(number1,number2, ...,number30)

Argument	Definition

number1	any positive integer

number2	any positive integer

Notes and Error Messages

•	LCM truncates non-integers.

•	LCM returns the #VALUE! error if any argument is non-numeric or negative.

Examples

LCM(4,8,6) = 24

LCM(3,5,2) = 30

LCM(R1C1:R3C1,25)=150, where cell R1C1=5, R2C1=10, and R3C1=15.

 Related Topics


LN
LN (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the natural logarithm of a number. The natural logarithm is the logarithm of a number with base e (2.7183).

Syntax

LN(x)

Argument	Definition

x	a positive real number

Notes and Error Messages

•	LN is the inverse of the EXP function, so LN(EXP(x)) equals x.

•	LN returns the #NUMBER! error value if x is equal to or less than 0.

Examples

LN(1.2) = 0.1823

LN(30) = 3.4012

LN(1) = 0

LN(EXP(30)) = 30

 Related Topics


LOG
LOG (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the logarithm of a number to a given base.

Syntax

LOG(x,base)

Argument	Definition

x	a positive real number

base	a positive real number; specifies the base of the logarithm; if omitted, it is assumed to be 10

Notes and Error Messages

•	If a base isn't specified, 10 is used as the base.

Examples

LOG(3,2) = 1.585

LOG(3,10) = 0.4771

LOG(3) =0.4771

 Related Topics


LOG10
LOG10 (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the base 10 logarithm of a number.

Syntax

LOG10(x)

Argument	Definition

x	a positive real number

Examples

LOG10(3) = 0.4771

LOG10(100) = 2

LOG10(R1C1) = 0.4771 where cell R1C1=3

 Related Topics


LOG2
LOG2 (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the base 2 logarithm of a number.

Syntax

LOG2(x)

Argument	Definition

x	a positive real number

Examples

LOG2(3) = 1.58496

LOG2(1) = 0

LOG2(32) = 5

 Related Topics


MOD
MOD (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the modulus (or the remainder) of a number divided by another number.

Syntax

MOD(x,base)

Argument	Definition

x	a real number; specifies the number to divide

base	a real number; specifies the divisor

Notes and Error Messages

•	The result has the same sign (+ or -) as base.

•	MOD returns the #DIV/0! error value if base equals 0.

•	MOD can be expressed in terms of the INT function: MOD(x, base) = x - base*INT(x/base)

Examples

MOD(10,3) = 1

MOD(10,3.3) = 0.1

MOD(-14, 3) = 2

MOD(14, -3) = 2

 Related Topics


MROUND
MROUND (Corel VENTURA table function)

Rounds a number to the nearest specified multiple.

Syntax

MROUND(x,mult)

Argument	Definition

x	a real number; specifies the value to be rounded

mult	a real number; specifies the multiple to which you want to round x

Notes

•	If the remainder of dividing x by mult is equal to or greater than half the value of the multiple, MROUND rounds up (away from zero).

•	If the remainder of dividing x by mult is less than half the value of the multiple, MROUND rounds down (towards zero).

Examples

MROUND(11,3) = 12

MROUND(10,3) = 9

MROUND(11.3,3) = 12

MROUND(11.3,3.1) = 12.4

MROUND(-10,-3) = -9

MROUND(11,-3) = #NUMBER

 Related Topics


MULTINOMIAL
MULTINOMIAL (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the multinomial of a group of numbers. The multinomial is a ratio of the factorial of the sum of the group to the product of factorials.

Syntax

MULTINOMIAL(number1,number2, ...,number30)

Argument	Definition

list	a list of positive real numbers

Notes and Error Messages

•	MULTINOMIAL returns the #INVALID DATA! error for non-numeric arguments.

•	MULTINOMIAL returns the #NUMBER! error for arguments less than 1.

•	If any argument is not an integer, it will be truncated into an integer.

•	The formula of the MULTINOMIAL is:

Examples

MULTINOMIAL(5,6,7) = 14702688

MULTINOMIAL(3,5,8) = 720720

MULTINOMIAL(R1C1,R2C2,R3C2=720720 where cell R1C1=3, R2C2=5, and R3C2=8.

 Related Topics


ODD
ODD (Corel VENTURA table function)

Rounds a number away from 0 to the nearest odd integer.

Syntax

ODD(x)

Argument	Definition

x	a real number

Notes and Error Messages

•	ODD returns the #INVALID DATA! error for non-numeric expressions.

•	Positive and negative numbers are rounded away from zero.

•	Odd integers are not rounded.

Examples

ODD(2.6) = 3

ODD(-2.1) = -3

ODD(7) = 7

ODD(-9) = -9

ODD(1.19) = 3

ODD(-1.19) = -3

 Related Topics


PCT
PCT (Corel VENTURA table function)

Divides a number argument by 100, returning the decimal version of a percentage.

Syntax

PCT(x)

Argument	Definition

x	a real number; specifies the number to divide

Notes and Error Messages

•	PCT returns the #INVALID DATA! error for non-numeric arguments.

Examples

PCT(50) = 0.5

PCT(0.5) = 0.005

PCT(56) = 0.56

PCT(-20) = -0.2

 Related Topics


PI
PI (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the value of the mathematical approximation constant [image] (3.141592654).  is the ratio of a circle's circumference to its diameter.

Syntax

PI()

 Notes

•	PI() is most commonly used in trigonometric calculations using radian measurements such as sin(x) and cos(x).

•	You cannot specify a number format for this function.

Examples

PI()/2 = 1.5708

SIN(PI()/4) = 0.7071

 Related Topics


POWER
POWER (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the result of a number raised to a power.

Syntax

POWER(number,power)

Argument	Definition

number	any real number

power	any real number

Examples

POWER(10,2) = 100

POWER (-5,3) = -125

POWER (-0.25,2) = 0.0625

POWER (16,0.5) = 4

POWER (34.5,0) = 1

 Related Topics


PRODUCT
PRODUCT (Corel VENTURA table function)

Calculates the product of a list of numbers.

Syntax

PRODUCT(number1,number2, ...,number30)

Argument	Definition

list	a list of real numbers

Notes and Error Messages

•	References to non-numeric cells are ignored except in cases where logical values and text strings can be translated to numeric values.

Examples

PRODUCT(2,4,8) = 64

PRODUCT(2,-4,8,2) = -128

PRODUCT(3,65.3,12.4) = 2429.16

 Related Topics


QUOTIENT
QUOTIENT (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the division of two numbers. Returns the integer portion of the division, discarding the remainder.

Syntax

QUOTIENT(x,y)

Argument	Definition

x	a real number; specifies the dividend (numerator)

y	a real number (except 0); specifies the divisor (denominator) of x

Notes and Error Messages

•	QUOTIENT returns the #INVALID DATA! error for non-numeric arguments.

•	QUOTIENT returns the #DIV/0! error if y is equal to zero.

•	You should use the ROUND function to round a division result to the nearest integer.

Examples

QUOTIENT(7,7) = 1

QUOTIENT(33.5,3.1) = 10

QUOTIENT(-11,5.35) = -2

 Related Topics


RADTODEG
RADTODEG (Corel VENTURA table function)

Converts radians to degrees. One radian is equal to 180/ [image] degrees.

Syntax

RADTODEG(angle_in_radians)

Arguments	Definitions

angle_in_radians	a real value in radians to be converted to degrees

Examples

RADTODEG(-1.23) = -70.47381 degrees

 Related Topics


RAND
RAND (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns an evenly distributed random number between 0 and 1. A new random number is calculated whenever the table is recalculated.

Syntax

RAND()

 Notes

•	Use the RANDBETWEEN function to generate a random integer.

•	Use the ROUND function to set the desired decimal places on the random result.

•	You cannot specify a number format for this function.

Example

To compute a random number in a range other than 0 to 1, use the following formula: RAND()*(y-x)+x, where y equals the largest number possible and x equals the smallest number possible.

Therefore, to calculate a random number between 10 and 60, the formula would equal: RAND()*(60-10)+10

To calculate a random number between 0 and 100: type RAND()*100

To calculate a random number between 10 and 11: type RAND()+10

 Related Topics


RANDBETWEEN
RANDBETWEEN (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns an evenly distributed random integer between two specified numbers. A new random number is calculated whenever the worksheet is calculated.

Syntax

RANDBETWEEN(bottom,top)

Argument	Definition

bottom	an integer; specifies the smallest random value

top	an integer; specifies the largest random value

 Note

•	Use the ROUND function to set the desired decimal places on the random result.

Example

To compute a random number between 1 and 100 inclusive:

RANDBETWEEN(1,100)

 Related Topics


ROUND
ROUND (Corel VENTURA table function)

Rounds a number to a specified number of decimal places.

Syntax

ROUND(x,decimal)

Argument	Definition

x	a real number; specifies the number to round

decimal	a real number; specifies the number of decimal places to round x to

 Notes

•	ROUND truncates decimal if it is a non-integer.

•	x is rounded to the indicated number of decimal places if decimal is greater than 0.

•	x is rounded to the left of the decimal point if decimal is less than 0. For example, if decimal = -2, then x is rounded to the nearest hundred.

•	ROUND rounds the number to the nearest integer if decimal equals 0.

Examples

ROUND(3.55,1) = 3.6

ROUND(-3.1499,1) = -3.1

ROUND(-115.33,-1) = -120

ROUND(221.5,-1) = 220

 Related Topics


SEC
SEC (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the secant of an angle in radians. The secant of an angle is equal to 1 divided by the cosine of the angle.

Syntax

SEC(x)

Argument	Definition

x	a real number; specifies the angle measured in radians for which you wish to determine the secant

 Notes

Use the DEGTORAD function if the angle is expressed in degrees.

SEC(DEGTORAD(60)) = 2.0

Example

SEC(0.5) = 1.13949

 Related Topics


SERIESSUM
SERIESSUM (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the sum of a power series. The following formula is the basis for SERIESSUM:

Syntax

SERIESSUM(x,n,m,coefficient)

Argument	Definition

x	a real number; specifies the input value to the power series

n	a real number; specifies the initial degree to raise x

m	a real number; specifies the amount to increase or decrease n for each term in the series

coefficient	a real number or an array of real numbers; specifies the coefficients by which successive powers of x are multiplied

Notes and Error Messages

•	The quantity of values in coefficient dictates the number of terms in the power series.

•	SERIESSUM returns the #VALUE! error if any argument is non-numeric.

Examples

SERIESSUM(2,-1.5,0.05,2) = 0.7071

SERIESSUM(2,-1.5,0.05, R9C1:R1C1) = 3.07796 where cell R9C1 = 5.6 and R1C1 = 3

 Related Topics


SIGN
SIGN (Corel VENTURA table function)

Determines the sign (+ or -) of a number and returns -1 if the number is negative, 1 if the number is positive, and 0 if the number is 0.

Syntax

SIGN(x)

Argument	Definition

x	a real number

Examples

SIGN(5) = 1

SIGN(0) = 0

SIGN(-0.021) = -1

 Related Topics


SIN
SIN (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the sine of an angle measured in radians.

Syntax

SIN(x)

Argument	Definition

x	a real number; specifies the angle measured in radians

 Note

•	The result of SIN is between -1 and 1, inclusive.

Examples

Use the DEGTORAD function if the angle is expressed in degrees.

SIN(DEGTORAD(45)) = 0.7071

 Related Topics


SINH
SINH (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the hyperbolic sine of a number.

Syntax

SINH(x)

Argument	Definition

x	a real number

 Note

The hyperbolic sine formula is:

Examples

SINH(0.5) = 0.5211

SINH(-0.25) = -0.2526

 Related Topics


SQRT
SQRT (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the positive square root of a non-negative real number.

Syntax

SQRT(x)

Argument	Definition

x	a non-negative real number

Notes and Error Messages

•	SQRT returns the #NUMBER! error value if x is a negative number.

Examples

SQRT(4) = 2

SQRT(0.175) = 0.4183

SQRT(R1C1) = 0.4183 where cell R1C1=0.175

SQRT(-4) = #NUMBER!

 Related Topics


SQRTPI
SQRTPI (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the square root of the product of a real number and pi, [image].

Syntax

SQRTPI(x)

Argument	Definition

x	a non-negative real number

Notes and Error Messages

•	SQRTPI returns the #NUMBER! error value if x is a negative number.

Examples

SQRTPI(0.175) = 0.7415

SQRTPI(1) = 1.77245

SQRTPI(-4) = #NUMBER!

SQRTPI(PI()) = PI (3.14159)

 Related Topics


SUM
SUM (Corel VENTURA table function)

Adds the values of a list of arguments.

Syntax

SUM(number1,number2,...,number30)

Argument	Definition

list	any real number, or reference to a set of real numbers

Notes and Error Messages

•	References to non-numeric cells are ignored except in cases where logical values and text strings can be translated to numeric values.

Examples

SUM(12,156,0.87,-10) = 158.87

SUM(5,TRUE,3) = 9, because the logical value TRUE is translated into the number 1

SUM(R1C1:R2C1) = 35 where cells R1C1=25 and R2C1=10

 Related Topics


SUMPRODUCT
SUMPRODUCT (Corel VENTURA table function)

Multiplies corresponding components in the given arrays and returns the sum of those products.

Syntax

SUMPRODUCT(array1, array2, array3, ..., array30)

Argument	Definition

arraylist	a list of arrays of real numbers

Notes and Error Messages

•	Array arguments must have equal dimensions. If not, SUMPRODUCT returns the #VALUE! error.

•	Non-numeric array entries are treated as zeros.

Example

Two arrays are defined: array1(R6C11:R8C12) and array2(R6C13:R8C14).

SUMPRODUCT can be used as follows:

SUMPRODUCT(R6C11:R8C12, R6C13:R8C14) = 119

SUMPRODUCT({{1,2},{3,4},{5,6}},{{9,8},{7,6},{5,4}}) = 119

The formula for SUMPRODUCT calculates as follows for the above example:

1*9 + 2*8 + 3*7 + 4*6 + 5*5 + 6*4 = 119

 Related Topics


SUMSQ
SUMSQ (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the sum of the squares of the arguments.

Syntax

SUMSQ(number1,number2, ...,number30)

Argument	Definition

list	a list of real numbers

 Note

•	You can also use an array or a reference to an array.

Examples

SUMSQ(12,-3) = 153

SUMSQ(12,3) = 153

 Related Topics


SUMX2MY2
SUMX2MY2 (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the sum of the difference of squares of corresponding values in two arrays.

Syntax

SUMX2MY2(array1,array2)

Argument	Definition

array1	a range or array of real numbers

array2	a range or array of real numbers

Notes and Error Messages

•	The expression for the sum of the difference of squares is:

•	Arrays or arguments containing text, logical values, or empty cells are excluded; however, cells with the value zero are included.

•	SUMX2MY2 returns the #N/A error value if array1 and array2 do not contain the same number of values.

Examples

SUMX2MY2({2, 3, 5}, {6, 12, 4}) = -158

SUMX2MY2(R1C1:R3C1, R1C2:R3C2) = -158 where cell R1C1=2, R2C1=3, R3C1=5, R1C2=6, R2C2=12, R3C2=4

 Related Topics


SUMX2PY2
SUMX2PY2 (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the sum of the sum of squares of corresponding values in two arrays.

Syntax

SUMX2PY2(array1, array2)

Argument	Definition

array1	a range or array of real numbers

array2	a range or array of real numbers

Notes and Error Messages

•	The expression for the sum of the sum of squares is:

•	All arguments must be numeric, but may include arrays or references containing numbers.

•	SUMX2PY2 returns the #N/A error value if array1 and array2 do not contain the same number of values.

Examples

SUMX2PY2({2, 3, 5}, {6, 12, 4}) = 234

SUMX2PY2(R1C1: R3C1, R1C2: R3C2) = 234 where cell R1C1=2, R2C1=3, R3C1=5, R1C2=6, R2C2=12, R3C2=4

 Related Topics


SUMXMY2
SUMXMY2 (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the sum of squares of differences of corresponding values in two arrays.

Syntax

SUMXMY2(array1,array2)

Argument	Definition

array1	a range or array of real numbers

array2	a range or array of real numbers

Notes and Error Messages

•	The expression for the sum of squared differences is:

•	All arguments must be numeric, but may include arrays or references containing numbers.

•	SUMXMY2 returns the #N/A error value if array1 and array2 have a different number of values.

Examples

SUMXMY2({2,3,5},{6,12,4}) = 98

SUMXMY2(R1C1:R3C1,R1C2:R3C2) = 98 where cell R1C1=2, R2C1=3, R3C1=5, R1C2=6, R2C2=12, R3C2=4

 Related Topics


TAN
TAN (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the tangent of an angle in radians. The tangent of an angle is equal to the sine of the angle divided by the cosine of the angle.

Syntax

TAN(x)

Argument 	Definition

x	a real number; specifies the angle measured in radians

 Notes

•	Use the DEGTORAD function if the angle is expressed in degrees.

TAN(DEGTORAD(60)) = 1.73205

Example

TAN(0.5) = 0.5463

 Related Topics


TANH
TANH (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the hyperbolic tangent of a number.

Syntax

TANH(x)

Argument	Definition

x	a real number

 Notes

•	The result of TANH is between -1 and 1, inclusive.

•	The formula for the hyperbolic tangent is:

Examples

TANH(0.75) = 0.6351

TANH(-0.5) = -0.4621

 Related Topics


TRUNC
TRUNC (Corel VENTURA table function)

Truncates an expression to an integer with a specified number of digits. The number is rounded towards 0.

Syntax

TRUNC(x, digits)

Argument	Definition

x	a real number; specifies the number to truncate

digits	an integer specifying the precision of the truncation; if digits is omitted, 0 is the default value

 Notes

•	TRUNC truncates digits if it is a non-integer.

•	x is rounded to the left of the decimal point if digits is less than 0. For example, if digits=-2, then x is rounded to the nearest hundred.

•	TRUNC rounds towards zero.

•	A difference exists between TRUNC and INT when x is a negative number. TRUNC(-5.4) returns -5, but INT(-5.4) returns -6. The difference is due to TRUNC rounding towards 0 while INT rounds down.

Examples

TRUNC(14.9) = 14

TRUNC(-14.9) = -14

TRUNC(A4) = 3 where cell A4=3.999

 Related Topics


Statistical functions


Corel VENTURA statistical table functions

Corel VENTURA statistical table functions enable you to perform analytic calculations on a list of given arguments. The statistical functions perform aggregation, counting, and analysis operations on a group of values expressed as a list (or lists) of one or more arguments.

Function	Description

AVEDEV	Performs the average of the absolute deviations of data points from their means

AVERAGE	Returns the average (arithmetic mean) of a list of arguments

BETADIST	Returns the cumulative beta probability density function

BETAINV	Returns the inverse value of the cumulative beta probability density function

BINOMDIST	Returns the magnitude of the individual term binomial probability distribution

CHIDIST	Returns the one-tailed probability of the chi-squared distribution

CHIINV	Returns the inverse of the cumulative chi-square distribution

CHITEST	Returns the result of the test of independence

CONFIDENCE	Returns the confidence interval for a population mean

CORREL	Returns the correlation coefficient between two ranges of data

COUNT	Returns the number of nonblank cells in a list

COUNTA	Calculates the number of nonblank cells in a range containing data

COVAR	Returns the covariance of two data sets

CRITBINOM	Returns the smallest value for which the cumulative binomial distribution is greater than or equal to a criterion value

DEVSQ	Returns the sum of the squared deviations of data points from their sample mean

EXPONDIST	Returns the exponential distribution

FDIST	Returns the F distribution

FINV	Returns the inverse of the F distribution

FISHER	Returns the Fisher transformation

FISHERINV	Returns the inverse of the Fisher transformation

FORECAST	Returns a value along a linear trend

FTEST	Returns the result of the F-test

GAMMADIST	Returns the gamma distribution

GAMMAINV	Returns the inverse of the gamma cumulative distribution

GEOMEAN	Returns the geometric mean of the data range containing only positive values

HARMEAN	Returns the harmonic mean of a data range

HYPGEOMDIST	Returns the hypergeometric distribution

INTERCEPT	Returns the intercept of the linear regression

KURT	Returns the kurtosis coefficient of a data range

LARGE	Finds the k-th largest value in a data range

LOGINV	Returns the inverse magnitude of the lognormal distribution

LOGNORMDIST	Returns the lognormal distribution

MAX	Returns the largest number in the data range

MEDIAN	Returns the median value in the data range

MIN	Returns the smallest number in the data range

MODE	Returns the value of the most frequently repeated data points in the data range

NEGBINOMDIST	Returns the negative binomial distribution

NORMDIST	Returns the normal distribution for the specified mean and standard deviation

NORMINV	Returns the inverse of the normal distribution

NORMSDIST	Returns the standard cumulative normal distribution

NORMSINV	Returns the inverse of the standard cumulative normal distribution

PEARSON	Returns the Pearson product moment correlation coefficient

PERCENTILE	Returns the k-th percentile of the values contained in a data range

PERCENTRANK	Returns the percentage rank of a value contained in a data range compared with the other values

PERMUT	Returns how many permutations may result from a defined number of given objects

POISSON	Returns the Poisson distribution

PROB	Returns the probability that values in a range are between two limits

QUARTILE	Returns the quartile of a data set

RANK	Returns the rank of a number in an array of values

RSQ	Returns the square of the coefficient of correlation of the linear regression line through data points in known xs and known ys

SKEW	Returns the skewness of a distribution

SLOPE	Returns the slope of the linear regression

SMALL	Returns the specified smallest value in a data range

STANDARDIZE	Returns a normalized value

STD	Returns the estimate of standard deviation based on a sample

STDP	Returns the standard deviation based on the entire population

STEYX	Returns the standard error of the forecast y-value for the x-values of a regression

TDIST	Returns the Student's t-distribution

TINV	Returns the inverse of the student's T-distribution

TRIMMEAN	Returns the mean of a range within a data set

TTEST	Returns the probability associated with a student's T-test

VAR	Estimates variance based on a sample of the population

VARP	Calculates variance based on the entire population

WEIBULL	Returns the Weibull distribution

ZTEST	Returns the two-tailed probability of a z-test

 Related Topics


AVEDEV
AVEDEV (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the mean of the absolute deviations of a list of arguments from their mean. AVEDEV measures variation in a data set.

Syntax

AVEDEV(numberlist)

Argument	Definition

numberlist	any list of real numbers

 Note

•	The arguments should be numbers, arrays, or references to cells that contain numbers.

•	AVEDEV ignores empty cells and cells containing text or logical values; however, cells containing values equal to 0 are included.

Examples

AVEDEV(2,4,6) = 1.33333

AVEDEV(1, R1C1:R2C1, {3,5,-6}) = 3.14444 where cell R1C1 = 0.5, R2C1 = -3.4

 Related Topics


AVERAGE
AVERAGE (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the average (arithmetic mean) of a list of arguments.

Syntax

AVERAGE(numberlist)

Argument	Definition

numberlist	represents any combination of real numbers

 Note

•	The arguments should be numbers, arrays, or references to cells that contain numbers.

•	AVERAGE ignores empty cells and cells containing text or logical values; however, cells containing values equal to 0 are included.

Examples

AVERAGE(5,10,25,30 ) = 17.5

AVERAGE(5,10,25,R1C1...R3C1) = 12.16667 where cell R1C1= 32, R2C1= 0, R3C1= 1

AVERAGE(1,R1C1:R2C1,{3,5,-6}) = 0.0167 where cell R1C1 = 0.5, R2C1 = -3.4

 Related Topics


BETADIST
BETADIST (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the cumulative beta probability density function. The cumulative beta probability density function is used for studying the variability of a sample's percentage response. For example, many methods of a production quality estimation are based on the assumption that low quality products have a beta distribution.

Syntax

BETADIST(x,alpha,beta,A,B)

Arguments	Definitions

x	a real number from A to B, inclusive

alpha	a positive real number specifying the distribution parameter

beta	a positive real number specifying the distribution parameter

A	a real number specifying the lower limit of x; if A is omitted, 0 is the default value

B	a real number specifying the upper limit of x; if B is omitted, 1 is the default value.

Notes and Error Messages

•	If A and B are omitted the function returns the standard cumulative beta distribution, assuming A = 0 and B = 1.

•	BETADIST returns the #NUMBER! error if any argument is out of range.

•	BETADIST returns the #INVALID DATA! error if any argument is non-numeric.

•	BETADIST returns the #INVALID DATA! error if x is less than A, x is greater than B, or A = B.

Examples

BETADIST(3,2.3,3.5,1,8) = 0.3126

BETADIST(0.32,3,5) = 0.3987

BETADIST(0.32,3,5,0,1) = 0.3987

 Related Topics


BETAINV
BETAINV (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the inverse value of the cumulative beta probability density function such that if p=BETADIST(x,alpha,beta,A,B), then x=BETAINV(p,alpha,beta,A,B).

Syntax

BETAINV(p,alpha,beta,A, B)

Arguments	Definitions

p	a probability value to be used with the beta distribution; a non-negative real number

alpha	a positive real number specifying the distribution parameter

beta	a number between A and B

A	a real number specifying the lower limit to the interval of x; if A is omitted, 0 is the default value

B	a real number specifying the upper limit to the interval of x; if B is omitted, 1 is the default value

Notes and Error Messages

•	BETAINV returns the #INVALID DATA! error if any argument is non-numeric.

•	BETAINV returns the #NUMBER! error value if p is negative or greater than 1.

•	BETAINV returns the #NUMBER! error value if any argument is out of the range.

•	If values A and B are omitted, BETAINV returns the inverse standard cumulative beta distribution, that A = 0 and B = 1.

•	BETAINV returns the #NUMBER! error if A>=B.

Examples

BETAINV(0.3126,2.3,3.5,1, 8) = 3.00007

BETAINV(0.32,3,5) = 0.2854

BETAINV(0.32,3,5,0,1) = 0.2854

 Related Topics


BINOMDIST
BINOMDIST (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the magnitude of the individual term binomial probability distribution.

Syntax

BINOMDIST(num_s,num_t,prob,cumulative)

Arguments	Definitions

num_s	an integer which specifies the number of successes in trials

num_t	an integer which specifies the number of independent trials

prob	a non-negative real number between 0 and 1 which specifies the probability of success of each trial

cumulative	a logical value (TRUE or FALSE) which specifies the form of the function

Notes and Error Messages

•	If num_s or num_t is real, BINOMDIST rounds it to an integer.

•	BINOMDIST returns the #NUMBER! error value if prob is negative or greater than 1.

•	If cumulative is FALSE, BINOMDIST returns the binomial probability of obtaining exactly num_s successes in num_t trial; if TRUE, BINOMDIST returns the cumulative binomial function which is the probability of obtaining at most num_s successes in the num_t independent trials.

•	The binomial probability formula is:

where [image] is COMBIN(t, s), s is the number of successes in trials, t is the number of independent trials, and p is the probability of success on each trial.

Examples

BINOMDIST(0,50,0.5,FALSE) = 8.88E-016

 Related Topics


CHIDIST
CHIDIST (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the one-tailed probability of the chi-squared (2) distribution.

Syntax

CHIDIST(x,df)

Arguments	Definitions

x	a non-negative real number

df	a positive integer which specifies the number of degrees of freedom

Notes and Error Messages

•	CHIDIST returns the #NUMBER! error value if x is < 0 or if df is [image] 0.

Example

CHIDIST(1.345,9) = 0.9981

 Related Topics


CHIINV
CHIINV (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the inverse of the chi-squared (X2) distribution, such that if p=CHIDIST(x, df), then x=CHIINV(p, df).

Syntax

CHIINV(prob,df)

Arguments	Definitions

prob	a non-negative real number between 0.0 and 1.0 which specifies the probability to be used with the chi-squared distribution

df	a positive integer which specifies the number of degrees of freedom

Notes and Error Messages

•	CHIINV returns the #NUMBER! error value if prob is negative or greater than 1, or if df is less than 1 or equal to 0.

Example

CHIINV(R1C1,9) = 1.345, if A1 contains the formula CHIDIST(1.345,9)

 Related Topics


CHITEST
CHITEST (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the result of the test of independence. The chi-squared (X2) test can be used to verify hypothesized results.

Syntax

CHITEST(act_range,expect_range)

Arguments	Definitions

act_range	a list of values separated by commas; or an array of values which specifies the observations to test

expect_range	a list of values separated by commas; or an array of values which specifies the expected data

Notes and Error Messages

•	CHITEST returns the #N/A error value if the arrays have a different number of references, or if >1 or <0.

•	CHITEST does not include empty cells and cells containing text in its calculations; however, cells with values equal to 0 are included.

Example

The hypothetical example below shows the data for expected and actual results for 100 students and 100 employees taking the same training course. In this case, the expectation is that the students will retain more or less of the training information than the employees.

	Students	Employees
Actual
Improved	60	40
Worse	5	20
Unchanged	35	40
Expected
Improved	70	60
Worse	5	10
Unchanged	25	30
The result of the chi-squared test of independence computes as follows:

= CHITEST(R3C2:R5C3,R7C2:R9C3) = 0.0001151

Therefore, the return probability is low.

 Related Topics


CONFIDENCE
CONFIDENCE (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the confidence interval for a population mean. The confidence interval is a range on either side of a sample mean.

Syntax

CONFIDENCE(alpha,st_dev,size)

Argument	Definitions

alpha	a positive real number which is the significance level; it is used to determine the confidence level; the confidence level equals 100(1-alpha)%; e.g., if alpha = 0.03 then there is a 97% confidence level

st_dev	a positive real number which specifies the standard deviation for the range of data

size	a variable integer greater than 1, representing sample size

Notes and Error Messages

•	CONFIDENCE returns the #INVALID DATA! error for any non-numeric argument.

•	St_dev is assumed to be known.

•	If size contains a decimal, it is rounded down to the nearest integer.

Example

Suppose that 16 apples have an average weight equal to 120 grams with the standard mean square deviation of 15. With 90 percent of confidence, the population mean is within the interval from 113.8318 to 126.1682, because

90% = 100(1-alpha)%, therefore alpha = 0.1

CONFIDENCE(0.1,15,16) = 6.1682

113.8318 = 120 - 6.1682 which equals 113.8318

126.1682 = 120 + 6.1682 which equals 126.1682

 Related Topics


CORREL
CORREL (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the correlation coefficient between two ranges of data. The correlation coefficient is a standardized covariance and determines linear relationship between two random variables. The function returns the value from -1 to 1, inclusive. Two random variables are called non-correlated variables if their correlation coefficient equals 0. Two random variables have a function dependence if the correlation coefficient equals 1 or -1.

Syntax

CORREL(array1,array2)

Arguments	Definitions

array1	an array of real numbers or a data range of values

array2	an array of real number or a data range of values

Notes and Error Messages

•	CORREL returns the #N/A error value if the arrays have a different number of references.

•	CORREL returns the #DIV/0! error value if the standard deviation of any random variable equals 0.

•	CORREL does not include empty cells and cells containing text in its calculations; however, the cells with values equal to 0 are included.

•	The correlation coefficient is expressed in the following formula:

where Cov(X,Y) is covariance (see COVAR) and [image], [image] are standard deviations.

Example

Suppose that the first array contains the height of a number of trees and the second one contains their mean diameters.

CORREL({17,18,19,20,21,22,23,24,25},{19,19,18,20,23,25,27,30,32}) = 0.9576, which means those two random events are interdependent.

 Related Topics


COUNT
COUNT (Corel VENTURA table function)

COUNT returns the number of non-blank cells in List.

Syntax

COUNT(valuelist)

Argument	Definition

valuelist	any combination of numbers, expressions, or cell references separated by commas; or an array of values

 Notes

•	The arguments should be numbers, arrays, or references to cells that contain numbers.

•	COUNT does not include empty cells and cells containing text in its calculations; however, cells with values equal to 0 are included.

Examples

COUNT(2,3.4,5,"Hello") = 3

COUNT(R1C1,R2C1,R3C1,R4C1) = 2, if R1C1="Hello", R2C1 is empty, R3C1=2, R4C1=34

 Related Topics


COUNTA
COUNTA (Corel VENTURA table function)

Calculates the number of nonblank cells in a range containing data.

Syntax

COUNTA(valuelist)

Argument	Definition

valuelist	represents any combination of numbers, expressions, cell references separated by commas; or an array of values

 Note

•	COUNTA includes cells with values equal to 0 in its calculations.

Examples

COUNTA(2,3.4,5, "Hello") = 4

COUNTA(R1C1,R2C1,R3C1,R4C1) = 3, if R1C1="Hello", R2C1is blank, R3C1=2, R4C1=34

 Related Topics


COVAR
COVAR (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns covariance, which is the average of the products of paired deviations of two data ranges. Use this function to determine the relationship between two sets of data. The positive value of the function means that two events have common dependencies, otherwise the events are not interdependent.

Syntax

COVAR(array1,array2)

Arguments	Definitions

array1	an array of real numbers or a range of data values

array2	an array of real number or a range of data values

Notes and Error Messages

•	COVAR returns the #N/A error value if the arrays have a different number of references.

•	COVAR does not include empty cells and cells containing text in its calculations; however, cells with values equal to 0 are included.

•	The formula for covariance is:

where [image], [image] are the mean values of the arrays

Example

COVAR({17,18,19,20,21,22,23,24,25},{19,19,18,20,23,25,27,30,32}) = 12

 Related Topics


CRITBINOM
CRITBINOM (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the smallest value for which the cumulative binomial distribution is greater than or equal to a criterion value. This function is usually used for quality assurance applications.

Syntax

CRITBINOM(trials,prob,alpha)

Arguments	Definitions

trials	an integer which specifies the number of Bernoulli trials

prob	a non-negative real number between 0 and 1 which specifies the probability of success for each trial

alpha	a positive real number that defines the parameter of the distribution

Notes and Error Messages

•	If trials is real, CRITBINOM truncates it to an integer.

•	CRITBINOM returns the #NUMBER! error value if prob is greater than 1 or less than 0.

•	CRITBINOM returns the #NUMBER error value alpha is greater than 1 or less than 0.

Example

CRITBINOM(12,0.9,BINOMDIST(4,12,0.9,TRUE)) = 4

 Related Topics


DEVSQ
DEVSQ (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the sum of the squared deviations of data points from their sample mean. The returning value is always positive.

Syntax

DEVSQ(numberlist)

Argument	Definition

numberlist	represents any combination of numbers, expressions, cell references separated by commas; or an array of values

Notes

•	The arguments should be numbers, arrays, or references to cells that contain numbers.

•	The formula for DEVSQ is:

where N is the number of values in the list.

Example

DEVSQ(3, -4.5, 75, 22) = 3858.1875

 Related Topics


EXPONDIST
EXPONDIST (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the exponential distribution. The exponential distribution is often used to model the time between events, such as how long it takes the spreadsheet to compute a result. This function could be used to determine the probability that the process takes at most ten seconds.

Syntax

EXPONDIST(x,lambda,cumulative)

Arguments	Definitions

x	a non-negative real number

lambda	a positive real number which specifies the function's parameter

cumulative	a logical value (TRUE or FALSE) which specifies the form of the function

Notes and Error Messages

•	EXPONDIST returns the #NUMBER! error value if any argument is out of the range.

•	EXPONDIST returns the #INVALID DATA! error value if any argument is non-numeric.

•	If cumulative is FALSE, EXPONDIST returns the value of the probability exponential distribution; if TRUE, EXPONDIST returns the cumulative probability exponential distribution function.

•	The formula of the exponential distribution function is:

Examples

EXPONDIST(2.76,3.2,TRUE) = 0.9999

EXPONDIST(2.76,3.2,FALSE) = 0.0004672

 Related Topics


FDIST
FDIST (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the F distribution. This function is useful in determining degrees of diversity between data ranges.

Syntax

FDIST(x,df1,df2)

Arguments	Definitions

x	a non-negative real number

df1	a positive integer which specifies the number of degrees of freedom

df2	a positive integer which specifies the number of degrees of freedom

Notes and Error Messages

FDIST returns the #NUMBER! error value if:

•	x is negative

•	df1 or df2 is less than 1 or if df1 or df2 is greater than or equal to

If df1 or df2 is a real number, the function truncates it to an integer.

Examples

FDIST(7.146381829,5,50) = 0.0

FDIST(3.251,2,8) = 0.0926

 Related Topics


FINV
FINV (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the inverse of the F distribution, such that if p=FDIST(x, df1, df2), then FINV(p, df1, df2)=x.

Syntax

FINV(prob,df1,df2)

Arguments	Definitions

prob	a non-negative real number between 0 and 1 which specifies the probability of success on each trial used with the F distribution

df1	a positive integer which specifies the numerator degrees of freedom

df2	a positive integer which specifies the denominator degrees of freedom

Notes and Error Messages

•	FINV returns the #NUMBER! error value if:

- prob is negative or greater than 1

- df1 or df2 is less than 1

•	If df1 or df2 is a real number, the function truncates it to an integer.

Examples

FINV(0.25,5,5) = 1.89466

FINV(0.09261,2,8) = 3.25096

 Related Topics


FISHER
FISHER (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the Fisher transformation. The transformation produces a normally distributed function approximation. It is used to perform hypothesis testing on the correlation coefficient.

Syntax

FISHER(x)

Argument	Definition

x	a real number from -1 to 1, exclusive

Notes and Error Messages

•	FISHER returns the #NUMBER! error if x is less than -1 or greater than 1.

•	FISHER returns the #INVALID DATA! error if x is a non-numeric value.

•	The formula of the Fisher transformation is:

Example

FISHER(0.832) = 1.1946

 Related Topics


FISHERINV
FISHERINV (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the inverse of the Fisher transformation. If FISHER(x)=y, then FISHERINV(y)=x. It is used to analyze correlations between data.

Syntax

FISHERINV(y)

Arguments	Definition

y	a real number

Notes and Error Messages

•	FISHERINV returns the #INVALID DATA! error if y is non-numeric.

•	The formula for the inverse of the Fisher transformation is:

Example

FISHERINV(1.1946) = 0.832

 Related Topics


FORECAST
FORECAST (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns a predicted value of the dependent variable for the given independent variable x based on a linear regression of the values in array_X and array_Y. The values in array_X depend on values contained in array_Y. This function is useful in forecasting sales and consumer trends.

Syntax

FORECAST(x, array_X, array_Y)

Arguments	Definitions

x	a real number which represents a data point

array_X	the dependent arraywhich represents a range of data values

array_Y	the independent array which represents a range of data values

Notes and Error Messages

•	FORECAST returns the #VALUE! error if x is non-numeric.

•	FORECAST returns the #N/A error if the arrays have a different number of references.

•	FORECAST does not include empty cells and cells containing text in its calculations; however, cells with values equal to 0 are included.

•	FORECAST returns #DIV/0! If the variance of the array_X is equal to zero.

Example

Suppose that in a laboratory experiment the outcome of product Y (kg per hour) depends on the reaction temperature x (C). The following table shows dependence of outcome from the reaction temperature:

x: 	R1C1=51, R2C1=32, R3C1=80, R4C1=73, R5C1=64, R6C1=45, R7C1=83, R8C1=44, R9C1=93, R10C1=28, R11C1=35, R12C1=40, R13C1=29, R14C1=53, R15C1=58, R16C1=65 (independent variables)

y:	R1C2=52.7, R2C2=15.2, R3C2=89.5, R4C2=94.8, R5C2=76, R6C2=39.3, R7C2=114.8, R8C2=36.5, R9C2=137.4, R10C2=5.3, R11C2=20.7, R12C2=21.7, R13C2=9.19, R14C2=55.4, R15C2=64.3, R16C2=79.1 (dependent variables)

Predict the outcome of the product when the reaction temperature equals 75 (C).

FORECAST(75, R1C2:R16C2, R1C1:R16C1) = 93.3139, if R1C1:R16C1 contains independent variables, R1C2:R16C2 contains dependent variables.

 Related Topics


FTEST
FTEST (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the result of a one-tailed probability that the variances in array1 and array2 are not significantly different. The F-test tests the hypothesis that two samples have different variances by trying to reject the null hypothesis that their variances are actually consistent.

Syntax

FTEST(array1,array2)

Arguments	Definitions

array1	an array or range of real numbers

array2	another array or range of real number

Notes and Error Messages

•	FTEST returns the #N/A error value if the arrays have a different number of references.

•	FTEST does not include empty cells and cells containing text in its calculations; however, cells with 0 values are included.

•	FTEST returns #DIV/0! if either array1 or array2 have a variance of zero.

Examples

FTEST({5,4,7,8,12,11},{14,23,21,16,19,25}) = 0.567

FTEST({12,14,12.5},{17,18,16}) = 0.96

 Related Topics


GAMMADIST
GAMMADIST (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the gamma distribution.

Syntax

GAMMADIST(x,alpha,beta,cumulative)

Arguments	Definitions

x	a non-negative real number which specifies the value at which the distribution must be evaluated

alpha	a positive real number which specifies the alpha parameter of the distribution

beta	a positive real number which specifies the beta parameter of the distribution

cumulative	a logical value (TRUE or FALSE) which specifies the form of the function

Notes and Error Messages

•	GAMMADIST returns the standard Gamma distribution if beta equals 1.

•	GAMMADIST returns the #NUMBER! error if x<0.

•	GAMMADIST returns the #NUMBER! error if alpha<=0 or beta<=0.

•	GAMMADIST returns the #INVALID DATA! error if any argument is non-numeric.

•	If cumulative is FALSE, GAMMADIST returns the value of the distribution density function; if TRUE, GAMMADIST returns the cumulative distribution function.

•	The formula of the distribution density function is:

where [image] is the gamma function.

Examples

GAMMADIST(7,4.67,3.44,FALSE) = 0.0349

GAMMADIST(7,4.67,3.44,TRUE) = 0.0787

 Related Topics


GAMMAINV
GAMMAINV (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the inverse of the gamma cumulative distribution. If p=GAMMADIST(x, alpha, beta, TRUE), then GAMMAINV(p, alpha, beta)=x.

Syntax

GAMMAINV(prob,alpha,beta)

Arguments	Definitions

prob	a non-negative real number between 0 and 1 which specifies the probability to be used with the gamma distribution

alpha	a positive real number which specifies the parameter of the distribution

beta	a positive real number which specifies the parameter of the distribution

Notes and Error Messages

•	GAMMAINV returns the #INVALID DATA! error if any argument value is non-numeric.

•	GAMMAINV returns the #NUMBER! error if prob is negative or greater than 1.

•	GAMMAINV returns the #NUMBER! error if alpha [image] 0 or beta [image] 0.

Example

GAMMAINV(0.07869,4.67,3.44) = 6.99996

 Related Topics


GEOMEAN
GEOMEAN (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the geometric mean of the data range containing only positive values.

Syntax

GEOMEAN(numberlist)

Arguments	Definition

numberlist	any combination of positive numbers or expressions, or an array of values

Notes and Error Messages

•	The arguments should be positive numbers or arrays that contain positive numbers.

•	If an array or reference argument contains text, logical values, or empty cells, those values are ignored.

•	Cells with the value 0 are included.

•	GEOMEAN returns the #NUMBER! error value if any value in the list is negative.

•	The formula of the geometric mean is:

Examples

GEOMEAN( 2, 1, 2) = 1.5874

GEOMEAN( R1C1, 1, 2) = 1.5874, if R1C1 contains 2

 Related Topics


HARMEAN
HARMEAN (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the harmonic mean of a data range. The harmonic mean is the ratio of the number of data points in the list to the sum of the reciprocals.

Syntax

HARMEAN(numberlist)

Argument	Definition

numberlist	any combination of numbers or expressions, or an array of values

Notes and Error Messages

•	The arguments should be numbers, arrays, or references to cells that contain numbers.

•	If an array or reference argument contains text or logical values, those values are ignored.

•	HARMEAN returns the #NUMBER! error value if any value in the list is less than or equal to zero.

•	The formula of the harmonic mean is:

Examples

HARMEAN( 2, 1, 2) = 1.5

HARMEAN( R1C1, 1, 2) = 1.5, if R1C1 contains 2

 Related Topics


HYPGEOMDIST
HYPGEOMDIST (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the hypergeometric distribution. The HYPGEOMDIST function evaluates the probability of sample success based on sample size, population successes, and population size.

Syntax

HYPGEOMDIST(sample_successes,sample_size,population_successes,population_size)

Arguments	Definitions

sample_successes	a positive integer which specifies the number of successes in the sample

sample_size	a positive integer which specifies the size of the sample

population_successes	a positive integer which specifies the number of successes in the population

population_size	a positive integer which specifies the population size

Notes and Error Messages

•	The function truncates all arguments that are not integers.

•	HYPGEOMDIST returns the #INVALID DATA! error value if:

- sample_successes is greater than the lesser of sample_size or population_successes

- sample_successes is less than the larger of 0 or (sample_size - population_size + population_successes)

- sample_size > population_size

 -population_successes > population_size

 -any negative arguments are used.

•	The hypergeometric distribution is calculated as follows:

where:
x is the number of successes in the sample
n is the size of the sample
M is the number of successes in the population
N is the population size

Examples

Suppose you have 25 golf balls, 6 of which are fluorescent yellow, and you randomly select 12. Find the probability that only two will turn out to be fluorescent yellow.

HYPGEOMDIST(2,12,6,24) = 0.2427

Suppose you have 14 coins in your pocket. Ten of them are nickels and the others are quarters. Find the probability that if you randomly take three coins from your pocket two will be nickels.

HYPGEOMDIST(2,3,10,14) = 0.4945

 Related Topics


INTERCEPT
INTERCEPT (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the intercept of the linear regression. Calculations are based on the dependent and independent arrays of data points. The intercept value indicates the point of intersection between the linear regression and the y-axis.

Syntax

INTERCEPT(array_y,array_x)

Arguments	Definitions

array_y	the dependent array or data range of values

array_x	the independent array or range of regression variables

Notes and Error Messages

•	INTERCEPT returns the #N/A error if the arrays have a different number of references.

•	INTERCEPT does not include empty cells and cells containing text in its calculations; however, zero values are included.

•	INTERCEPT returns the #DIV/0! Error if the variance of array_x is zero.

•	The intercept of the linear regression has the following equation:

where

and the slope is calculated as:

Example

Evaluate the intercept of the linear regression for the following data:

x: 51, 32, 80, 73, 64, 45, 83, 44, 93, 28, 35, 40, 29, 53, 58, 65

y: 52.7, 15.2, 89.5, 94.8, 76, 39.3, 114.8, 36.5, 137.4, 5.3, 20.7, 21.7, 9.19, 55.4, 64.3, 79.1

INTERCEPT(R1C2:R16C2,R1C1:R16C1) = -47.98244. If R1C1:R16C1 contains independent variables, R1C2:R16C2 contains dependent variables.

 Related Topics


KURT
KURT (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the kurtosis coefficient of a data range. The kurtosis coefficient reflects the relative peakedness or flatness of a distribution relative to the normal distribution. A positive result indicates a relatively peaked distribution. A negative value of the coefficient indicates a relatively flat distribution.

Syntax

KURT(numberlist)

Argument	Definition

numberlist	any combination of numbers or expressions, or an array of values

Notes and Error Messages

•	The arguments should be numbers, arrays, or references to cells that contain numbers.

•	KURT does not include empty cells and cells containing text in its calculations; however, zero values are included.

•	KURT returns the #DIV/0! error value if the list contains less than four numeric values.

Example

KURT({3,-4,5},{6,7.77}) = 2.43242

KURT({3,-4,5,6}) = 2.41709

KURT({1,2,-5,7,12,-21}) = 1.77431

 Related Topics


LARGE
LARGE (Corel VENTURA table function)

Finds the k-th largest value in a data range.

Syntax

LARGE(array,k)

Arguments	Definitions

array	an array or range reference of real numbers

k	a positive integer less than or equal to the number of values in array; the position from the largest value to return.

Notes and Error Messages

•	LARGE returns the #NUMBER! error value if k is greater than the number of values in the array.

•	If the array is empty LARGE returns the #NAME! error

•	If k = 1, LARGE returns the largest value in the array.

•	If k = N, LARGE returns the smallest value in the array; where N is the number of data values in the array.

Examples

LARGE({1,2,3,4,5,6},2) = 5

If R1C1:R16C1 contains the following data:

52.7, 15.2, 89.5, 94.8, 76, 39.3, 114.8, 36.5, 137.4, 5.3, 20.7, 21.7, 9.19, 55.4, 64.3, 79.1

LARGE(R1C1:R16C1, 2) = 114.8

 Related Topics


LOGINV
LOGINV (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the inverse magnitude of the lognormal distribution. If p=LOGNORDIST(x,m,s), then LOGINV(p,m,s)=x.

Syntax

LOGINV(prob,mean,st_dev)

Arguments	Definitions

prob	a positive real number between 0 and 1 which specifies the probability to be used with the lognormal distribution

mean	a real number which specifies the mean value of the random variable

st_dev	a positive real number which specifies the standard deviation of the random variable.

Error Messages

•	LOGINV returns the #NUMBER! error value if:

- st_dev is less than or equal to zero.

- prob is negative or greater than 1

•	LOGINV returns the #INVALID DATA! error if any argument is non-numeric.

Example

LOGINV(0.118678153,3,1.75) = 2.54

 Related Topics


LOGNORMDIST
LOGNORMDIST (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the cumulative lognormal distribution of x, where ln(x) is normally distributed with parameters mean and st_dev. It is used to analyze data that has been logarithmically transformed.

Syntax

LOGNORMDIST(x,mean,st_dev)

Arguments	Definitions

x	a positive real number which specifies the value at which the distribution must be evaluated

mean	a real number which specifies the mean value of the random variable

st_dev	a positive real number which specifies the standard deviation of the random variable

Notes and Error Messages

•	LOGNORMDIST returns the #NUMBER! error if x is [image] 0 or if st_dev is [image] 0.

•	LOGNORMDIST returns the #INVALID DATA! error if any argument is non-numeric.

•	The formula of the distribution density function is:

where [image] is the mean value and [image] is the standard deviation of the random variable.

Example

LOGNORMDIST(2.54,3,1.75) = 0.1187

 Related Topics


MAX
MAX (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the largest number in the data range.

Syntax

MAX(numberlist)

Argument	Definition

numberlist	any combination of real numbers or expressions, or an array of values

 Notes

•	The arguments should be numbers, arrays, or references to cells that contain numbers.

•	MAX does not include empty cells and cells containing text in its calculations; however, cells with zero values are included.

•	If all arguments in the list are non-numeric, MAX returns #INVALID DATA!.

Example

MAX(3,-4,2.999, {5,4.32}) = 5

MAX(1,2,3,4,5,6) = 6

 Related Topics


MEDIAN
MEDIAN (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the median value in the data range. The median value is the value at the mid-point of a list of data points in sorted order; half the values in the list are greater than the median and half are smaller.

Syntax

MEDIAN(numberlist)

Argument	Definition

numberlist	any combination of numbers or expressions, or an array of values

 Notes

•	The arguments should be numbers, arrays, or references to cells that contain numbers.

•	MEDIAN does not include empty cells and cells containing text in its calculations; however, zeros are included.

Example

MEDIAN(10,20,30,40,50) = 30

MEDIAN(3,9,7.6,4.5,7.6,3,3) = 4.5

 Related Topics


MIN
MIN (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the smallest number in the data range.

Syntax

MIN(numberlist)

Argument	Definition

numberlist	any combination of numbers or expressions, or an array of values

 Notes

•	The arguments should be numbers or arrays.

•	MIN does not include empty cells and cells containing text in its calculations; however, cells with zero values are included.

•	If all arguments in the list are non-numeric, MIN returns #INVALID DATA!.

Example

MIN(1,2,3,4,5,6) = 1

MIN(3,-4,2.999,{5,4.32}) = -4

MIN(SUM(1,-1,-3,-4),5,1,-1,2,-6) = -7

 Related Topics


MODE
MODE (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the value of the most frequently repeated data points in the data range.

Syntax

MODE(numberlist)

Argument	Definition

numberlist	any combination of numbers or expressions, or an array of values

Notes and Error Messages

•	The arguments should be numbers, arrays, or references to cells that contain numbers.

•	MODE returns the #N/A error value if the list does not contain duplicated data points.

•	MODE does not include empty cells and cells containing text in its calculations; however, zero values are included.

Example

MODE(3,9,7.6,4.5,7.6,3, 3) = 3

MODE(3,3,4,4) = 3 (because if there is more than one mode, MODE returns only one of them)

MODE(1,2,3,4,5,6) = #N/A

 Related Topics


NEGBINOMDIST
NEGBINOMDIST (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the negative binomial distribution. The returned value specifies the probability that a set number of failures will occur before a set number of successes.

Syntax

NEGBINOMDIST(failures,successes,prob)

Arguments	Definitions

failures	a non-negative integer which specifies the number of failures on each trial

successes	a non-negative integer which specifies the threshold number of successes on each trial

prob	a non-negative real number between 0 and 1 which specifies the probability of success on each trial

Notes and Error Messages

•	NEGBINOMDIST returns the #NUMBER! error value if:

- an argument is negative

- prob is less than 0 or greater than 1

•	NEGBINOMDIST truncates failures or successes to integers.

•	If any argument is non-numeric the #INVALID DATA! error is returned.

Example

NEGBINOMDIST(1,5,0.9) = 0.2952

 Related Topics


NORMDIST
NORMDIST (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the normal distribution for the specified mean and standard deviation.

Syntax

NORMDIST(x,mean,st_dev,cumulative)

Arguments	Definitions

x	a real number to be measured for its distribution

mean	a real number which specifies the mean value of the random variable

st_dev	a positive real number which specifies the standard deviation of the random variable

cumulative	a logical value (TRUE or FALSE); specifies the form of the function

Notes and Error Messages

•	NORMDIST returns the #NUMBER! error if st_dev [image] 0).

•	NORMDIST returns the #INVALID DATA! error if any argument is non-numeric.

•	If mean = 0 and st_dev = 1, the standard normal distribution is returned.

•	If cumulative is FALSE, NORMDIST returns the probability of the normal distribution; if TRUE, it returns the cumulative normal distribution function.

•	The formula of the normal distribution function is:

where [image] is the mean value and [image] is the standard deviation of the random variable.

Example

NORMDIST(12,11,1.75,TRUE) = 0.7161

NORMDIST(12,11,1.75,FALSE) = 0.1936

 Related Topics


NORMINV
NORMINV (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the inverse of the normal distribution. If p=NORMDIST(x,m,s,TRUE), then NORMINV(p,m,s)=x.

Syntax

NORMINV(prob,mean,st_dev)

Arguments	Definitions

prob	a positive real number between 0 and 1 which specifies the probability to be used with the standard normal distribution

mean	a real number which specifies the mean value of the random variable

st_dev	a positive real number which specifies the standard deviation of the random variable

Notes and Error Messages

•	NORMINV returns the #NUMBER! error value if:

- prob is negative or greater than 1

- st_dev is equal to or less than 0

- NORMINV returns the #INVALID DATA! error if any argument is non-numeric.

Example

NORMINV(0.7161454169,11,1.75) = 12

 Related Topics


NORMSDIST
NORMSDIST (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the standard cumulative normal distribution. The distribution is the special case of the normal distribution, which has a mean value equal to zero and a standard deviation equal to one.

Syntax

NORMSDIST(z)

Argument	Definition

z	a real number which specifies the value at which the standard distribution is to be evaluated

Notes and Error Messages

•	NORMSDIST returns the #INVALID DATA! error if the argument is non-numeric.

•	The formula is:

Example

NORMSDIST(2.34553) = 0.9905

 Related Topics


NORMSINV
NORMSINV (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the inverse of the standard cumulative normal distribution. This distribution has a mean value equal to 0 and standard deviation equal to one.

Syntax

NORMSINV(prob)

Argument	Definition

prob	a non-negative real number between 0 and 1 which specifies the probability to be used with the standard normal distribution

Error Message

•	NORMSINV returns the #NUMBER! error value if prob is negative or greater than 1.

Example

NORMSINV(0.9905) = 2.3454

 Related Topics


PEARSON
PEARSON (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the Pearson product moment correlation coefficient, r, reflecting the extent of a linear relationship between two data sets. The returning value is in the range from -1.0 to 1.0 inclusive.

Syntax

PEARSON(array1,array2)

Arguments	Definitions

array1	the dependent array or a data range of values

array2	the independent array or range of regression variables

Notes and Error Messages

•	PEARSON returns the #N/A error value if the arrays have a different number of references.

•	PEARSON does not include empty cells and cells containing text in its calculations; however, cells with zero values are included.

•	PEARSON returns the #div/0! error if either array1 or array2 has a variance of zero.

•	The formula for the r value of the regression is:

Example

PEARSON({2,4,5,2,1,2},{4,2,6,3,7,1}) = -0.0191

 Related Topics


PERCENTILE
PERCENTILE (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the k-th percentile of the values contained in a data range. It can be used to establish the threshold of acceptance (e.g., to examine all scores above the 70th percentile).

Syntax

PERCENTILE(array,k)

Arguments	Definitions

array	an array or range reference of real numbers

k	a real number from 0 to 1 inclusive

Notes and Error Messages

•	PERCENTILE returns the #NAME error value if:

- k is < 0 or if k is > 1

- array is empty

•	If k is not a multiple of 1/(n-1), the function interpolates to determine the value at the k-th percentile.

•	PERCENTILE returns the #INVALID DATA! error if any argument is non-numeric.

Example

A 10-cell range (R11C3 to R20C3) containing the values 1 to 10, returns the following PERCENTILE result:

PERCENTILE(R11C3:R20C3,0.5) = 5.5

 Related Topics


PERCENTRANK
PERCENTRANK (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the percentage rank of a value contained in a data range compared with the other values.

Syntax

PERCENTRANK(array,x,s)

Arguments	Definitions

array	an array or range reference of real numbers

x	the number of an element in array whose percentage rank you want to establish

s	an integer value which specifies the number of significant digits for the percentage value returned; if omitted, 3 digits are returned (i.e., 0.xxx%)

Notes and Error Messages

•	PERCENTRANK returns a decimal representation of the percentage rank; therefore, to find the percentage multiply the result by 100.

•	PERCENTRANK returns the #NUMBER! error value if:

- array is empty

- s is less than 1

- PERCENTRANK returns the #INVALID DATA! error if any argument is non-numeric.

- PERCENTRANK returns the #N/A error if x is greater than every element in the array or less than every -- --element in the array.

Examples

If the cell range (R11C3 to R20C3) contains the values 1 to 10 (therefore, R16C3 contains the value 6):

PERCENTRANK(R11C3:R20C3,R16C3,3) = 0.555 , which multiplied by 100 = 55.5%

 Related Topics


PERMUT
PERMUT (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns how many permutations may result from a defined number of given objects. A permutation is any set or subset of objects or events where the internal order of objects is significant. It can be used to calculate the possible permutations of a lottery.

Syntax

PERMUT(number_objects,number_chosen)

Arguments	Definitions

number_objects	a non-negative integer which specifies the number of objects

number_chosen	a non-negative integer which specifies the number of objects in each permutation

Notes and Error Messages

•	PERMUT returns the #NUMBER! error value if:

- an argument is negative

- number_chosen is greater than number_objects

- If any argument is non-numeric the #INVALID DATA! error is returned.

•	The number of permutations is determined by the following formula:

Example

PERMUT(15,4) = 32760

 Related Topics


POISSON
POISSON (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the Poisson distribution. The Poisson distribution can be obtained from the binomial distribution when the number of trials is very large and the probability of success is small, provided that their product is constant.

Syntax

POISSON(x,mean,cumulative)

Arguments	Definitions

x	a positive real number which specifies the value at which the distribution must be evaluated

mean	a positive real number which specifies the mean value of the random variable

cumulative	a logical value (TRUE or FALSE) which specifies the form of the function

Notes and Error Messages

•	POISSON returns the #NUMBER! error if x<=0.

•	POISSON returns the #NUMBER! error if mean<=0.

•	POISSON returns the #INVALID DATA! error if x or mean is non-numeric.

•	If cumulative is FALSE, POISSON returns the value of the Poisson distribution; if TRUE, it returns the cumulative Poisson distribution function.

•	The formula of the Poisson distribution is:

•	The formula of the cumulative Poisson distribution is:

Examples

Suppose that 500 students were enrolled in a faculty. Find the probability that September 1 is the birthday of k students simultaneously. Where k can be 0,1,2,...

Let R1C1 equal 500/365, then

POISSON(0,R1C1,FALSE) = 0.2541

POISSON(1,R1C1,FALSE) = 0.3481

POISSON(2,R1C1,FALSE) = 0.2385

 Related Topics


PROB
PROB (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the probability that the values in xrange belong to the interval bounded by limit1 and limit2.

Syntax

PROB(xrange,probrange,limit1,limit2)

Arguments	Definitions

xrange	the array for which you wish to associate probabilities

probrange	the probabilities to be used with values in the xrange

limit1	a real number which specifies the lower limit of the interval

limit2	a real number which specifies the upper limit of the interval

Notes and Error Messages

•	PROB returns the #N/A error value if the arrays have a different number of data points.

•	PROB returns the #NUMBER! error value if:

- any value in probrange is [image] 0 or if any value in probrange is > 1

- the sum of the values in probrange are not equal to 1

 -PROB returns the probability of being equal to limit1, if limit2 is omitted.

Examples

PROB({20.33,25.87,26,23.57},{0.6,0.1,0.16,0.14},23,34) = 0.4

PROB({20.33,25.87,26,23.57},{0.6,0.1,0.16,0.14},12,19) = 0

 Related Topics


QUARTILE
QUARTILE (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the quartile of a data set. This function is often used to divide populations into groups.

Syntax

QUARTILE(array,q)

Arguments	Definitions

array	an array or range reference of real numbers

q	an integer number from 0 to 4 which specifies which value is to be returned

Notes and Error Messages

•	If q = 0, the function returns the minimum value in the array.
If q = 1, the function returns the first quartile of the array (25%).
If q = 2, the function returns the median value in the array (50%).
If q = 3, the function returns the third quartile of the array (75%).
If q = 4, the function returns the maximum value in the array.

•	QUARTILE returns the #NUMBER! error if:

- q is not 0,1,2,3, or 4

- array is empty

•	QUARTILE returns the #INVALID DATA! error if any argument contains non-numeric values.

Examples

QUARTILE({2,3,5,2.1,-3.4},1) = 2

QUARTILE({2,3,5,2.1,-3.4},2) = 2.1

 Related Topics


RANK
RANK (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the rank of a number in an array of values. Numbers are ranked by sorted order. By default, the sorted order is descending.

Syntax

RANK(num,ref,ord)

Arguments	Definitions

num	a real number whose rank you want to determine

ref	an array or range of reference of real numbers

ord	a number specifying how to rank num; if ord is 0 or omitted, the list is sorted as if ref were in descending order; if ord is any number other than zero, list is sorted as if ref were in ascending order

Notes and Error Messages

•	RANK does not include empty cells and cells containing text in its calculations; however, cells with zero values are included.

•	If ord is omitted or equals zero, RANK returns the rank of the num as if the ref is sorted by descending order; otherwise RANK returns the rank of the num as if the ref is sorted by ascending order.

•	Rank gives duplicated numbers the same rank; however, duplicated numbers affect the ranks of subsequent numbers. For example, if the number 5 appears twice and is ranked number 2, the number 6 would be ranked 4 (no number would have a rank of 3).

Examples

RANK(2,{3,5,6,1,2},1) = 2

RANK(2,{3,5,6,1,2}) = 4

 Related Topics


RSQ
RSQ (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the square of the Pearson product-moment correlation coefficient, r, based on two known arrays of data. The interpretation of the r-squared value reflects the proportion of the variance in array_y to the variance in array_x. The Pearson product-moment correlation coefficient is also known as the Sample Correlation Coefficient.

Syntax

RSQ(array_y,array_x)

Arguments	Definitions

array_y	the dependent array or data range of values

array_x	the independent array or range of regression variables

Notes and Error Messages

•	RSQ returns the #N/A error value if the arrays have a different number of data points.

•	RSQ does not include empty cells and cells containing text in its calculations; however, cells with zero values are included.

•	RSQ returns the #NUMBER error if either array_x or array_y has a variance of zero.

•	The formula for the r value of the regression is:

Example

RSQ({2,4,5,2,1,2},{4,2,6,3,7,1}) = 0.0004

 Related Topics


SKEW
SKEW (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the skewness of a distribution. The concept of skewness specifies the degree of a distribution around its mean. Skewness can be positive, negative, or zero. If the function returns a positive value, it means that a distribution has an asymmetric tail extended toward positive values; if the function returns a negative value, a distribution has an asymmetric tail extended toward negative values. A distribution has symmetric tails if the function returns zero.

Syntax

SKEW(numberlist)

Argument	Definition

numberlist	any combination of numbers or expressions, or an array of values (limited to 30 arguments)

Notes and Error Messages

•	The arguments should be numbers, arrays, or references to cells that contain numbers.

•	SKEW returns the #DIV/0! error value if there are fewer than three data points, or sample standard deviation is zero.

•	SKEW does not include empty cells and cells containing text in its calculations; however, cells with zero values are included.

•	The formula for skewness is:

where [image] is the mean value of the data contained in the list and [image] is the standard deviation.

Example

SKEW({4,-3.22, 2},-12.345) = -1.09826

 Related Topics


SLOPE
SLOPE (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the slope of the linear regression. Calculations are based on the dependent and independent arrays of data points.

Syntax

SLOPE(array_y,array_x)

Arguments	Definitions

array_y	the dependent array or data range of values

array_x	the independent array or range of regression variables

Notes and Error Messages

•	SLOPE returns the #N/A error value if the arrays have a different number of data points.

•	SLOPE does not include empty cells and cells containing text in its calculations; however, cells with zero values are included.

•	The formula of the linear regression slope is:

where

•	The y intercept of the linear regression has the following equation:

Example

Evaluate the slope of the linear regression for the following data:

x:	51, 32, 80, 73, 64, 45, 83, 44, 93, 28, 35, 40, 29, 53, 58, 65

Y:	52.7, 15.2, 89.5, 94.8, 76, 39.3, 114.8, 36.5, 137.4, 5.3, 20.7, 21.7, 9.19, 55.4, 64.3, 79.1

SLOPE(R1C2:R16C2,R1C1:R16C1) = 1.92395. If A1:A16 contains independent variables, B1:B16 contains dependent variables.

 Related Topics


SMALL
SMALL (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the specified smallest value in a data range.

Syntax

SMALL(array,k)

Arguments	Definitions

array	an array or range reference of real numbers for which you want to determine the specified smallest value

k	a positive integer less than the number of values in array; the position (from the smallest) in the array or data range to return

Notes and Error Messages

•	SMALL returns the #NAME! error value if:

- array is empty or k is greater than the number of values in array

- k is less than or equal to 0

- If k = 1, the function returns the smallest value in array.

•	If k = the total number of values in array, SMALL returns the largest value in array.

Example

SMALL({1,3,4,2,5,6},2) = 2

Let R1C1:R16C1 contain the following data:

52.7, 15.2, 89.5, 94.8, 76, 39.3, 114.8, 36.5, 137.4, 5.3, 20.7, 21.7, 9.19, 55.4, 64.3, 79.1

SMALL(R1C1:R16C1, 2) = 9.19

 Related Topics


STANDARDIZE
STANDARDIZE (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns standardized value of the variable x from a distribution characterized by the mean value (mean) and standard deviation (st_dev).

Syntax

STANDARDIZE(x, mean, st_dev)

Arguments	Definitions

x	a real number that you want to normalize

mean	a real number which specifies the arithmetic mean value of the distribution

st_dev	a positive real number which specifies the standard deviation of the distribution

Notes and Error Messages

•	STANDARDIZE returns the #INVALID DATA! error if any argument is non-numeric.

•	STANDARDIZE returns the #NUMBER! error if st_dev is negative or zero.

•	The formula of standardization is:

where [image] is the mean value of the distribution and [image] is the standard deviation.

Example

STANDARDIZE(24,20,1.75) = 2.28571

 Related Topics


STD
STD (Corel VENTURA table function)

Calculates the estimate of standard deviation based on a sample. The standard deviation is a measure of data dispersion from the mean.

Syntax

STD(numberlist)

Argument	Definition

numberlist	any combination of numbers or expressions, or an array of values (must be a sample of the entire population)

Notes

•	STD does not include empty cells and cells containing text in its calculations; however, cells with zero values are included.

•	STD is calculated using the non-biased or n-1 method.

•	The formula of the estimate of standard deviation is:

Example

Let R1C1:R16C1 contain the following sample data:

52.7, 15.2, 89.5, 94.8, 76, 39.3, 114.8, 36.5, 137.4, 5.3, 20.7, 21.7, 9.19, 55.4, 64.3, 79.1

STD(R1C1:R16C1) = 39.34216

 Related Topics


STDP
STDP (Corel VENTURA table function)

Calculates the standard deviation based on the entire population. The standard deviation is a measure of data dispersion from the mean.

Syntax

STDP(numberlist)

Argument	Definition

numberlist	any combination of numbers, expressions, cell references separated by commas, or an array of values (must be the entire population)

Notes

•	STDP does not include empty cells and cells containing text in its calculations; however, cells with zero values are included.

•	STDP is calculated using the biased or n method.

•	The formula of the standard deviation is:

Example

Let R1C1:R16C1 contain the following data:

52.7, 15.2, 89.5, 94.8, 76, 39.3, 114.8, 36.5, 137.4, 5.3, 20.7, 21.7, 9.19, 55.4, 64.3, 79.1

STDP(R1C1:R16C1) = 38.09288

 Related Topics


STEYX
STEYX (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the standard error of the forecast y-value for the x-values of a regression. The standard error is a measure of the quality of approximation x by y.

Syntax

STEYX(array_y,array_x)

Arguments	Definitions

array_y 	the dependent array or a data range of values

array_x	the independent array or range of regression variables

Notes and Error Messages

•	STEYX returns the #N/A error value if the arrays have a different number of references.

•	STEYX does not include empty cells and cells containing text in its calculations; however, cells with zero values are included.

•	The formula of the standard error of the linear regression is:

Example

x:	51, 32, 80, 73, 64, 45, 83, 44, 93, 28, 35, 40, 29, 53, 58, 65

y:	52.7, 15.2, 89.5, 94.8, 76, 39.3, 114.8, 36.5, 137.4, 5.3, 20.7, 21.7, 9.19, 55.4, 64.3, 79.1

STEYX(R1C2:R16C2, R1C1:R16C1) = 5.3502, if R1C1:R16C1 contains independent variables, R1C2:R16C2 contains dependent variables

 Related Topics


TDIST
TDIST (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the student's T-distribution with df (degrees of freedom). The T-distribution is widely used in hypothesis testing of small sample data sets.

Syntax

TDIST(x, df, tails)

Arguments	Definitions

x	a real number specifying the numeric value at which to evaluate the distribution

df	a positive integer number which specifies the degrees of freedom of the distribution

tails	an integer which specifies the number of distribution tails to be returned; 1= one-tailed, 2 = two-tailed

Notes and Error Messages

•	TDIST returns the #INVALID DATA! error if any argument is non-numeric.

•	TDIST returns the #NUMBER! error if:

- df < 1

- tails is not 1 or 2

- df and tails are truncated to integers.

•	The formula of the student's T-distribution density function is:

where G(z) is the gamma function, k is the degrees of freedom of the distribution.

Example

TDIST(1.4, 34, 1) = 0.08529

 Related Topics


TINV
TINV (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the inverse of the student's T-distribution with df (degrees of freedom).

Syntax

TINV(prob,df)

Arguments	Definitions

prob	a non-negative real number between 0 and 1 which specifies the probability to be used with the student's T-distribution

df	a positive integer which specifies the degrees of freedom of the distribution

Notes and Error Messages

•	TINV returns the #INVALID DATA! error if any argument is non-numeric.

•	TINV returns the #NUMBER! error value if prob is negative or greater than 1.

•	TINV returns the #NUMBER! error value if df < 1.

•	If df is not an integer it is truncated.

Examples

TINV(0.054587,60) = 1.96048

TINV(0.100032988,3) = 2.353

 Related Topics


TRIMMEAN
TRIMMEAN (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the mean of a range within a data set. This function can be used to exclude extraneous data from your analysis since it will exclude a percentage of data from the top and bottom tails of the data set when calculating the mean.

Syntax

TRIMMEAN(array,percent)

Arguments	Definitions

array	an array or range reference of real numbers

percent	a real number from 0 to 1, exclusive, which specifies the fractional number of values to be excluded from the calculation

Notes and Error Messages

•	TRIMMEAN does not include empty cells and cells containing text in its calculations; however, cells with zero values are included.

•	TRIMMEAN returns the #NUMBER! error if percent is negative or if percent is greater than 1.

Examples

If the range R11C3 to R20C3 contains the values 1 to 10,

TRIMMEAN(c11:c20,0.33) = 5.5

TRIMMEAN({2,3,5,2.1,-3.4},0.25) = 1.74

 Related Topics


TTEST
TTEST (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the probability associated with a student's T-test. The TTEST determines the homogeneity or similarity of two normal samples.

Syntax

TTEST(array1, array2, tails, type)

Arguments	Definitions

array1	an array or range reference of real numbers

array2	an array or range reference of real numbers

tails	an integer which specifies the number of distribution tails to be returned; 1= one-tailed, 2 = two-tailed

type	an integer (either 1, 2, or 3) which specifies the type of test to perform (see notes in Help)

Notes and Error Messages

•	If type equals 1, the function performs the paired test.
If type equals 2, the function performs the homoscedastic test (two-sample equal variance).
If type equals 3, the function performs the heteroscedastic test (two-sample unequal variance).

•	TTEST returns the #N/A error value if the arrays have a different number of data points and type =1.

•	If any of the arguments are non-numeric, TTEST returns the #INVALID DATA! error.

•	TTEST returns the #INVALID DATA! error if tails is not 1 or 2.

•	TTEST returns the # INVALID DATA! error if type is not 1, 2, or 3.

•	The function does not include empty cells and cells containing text in its calculations; however, cells with zero values are included.

•	The tails and type arguments are truncated to integers.

Examples

TTEST({2,3,4,5},{4.5,6.7,7.8901,10},2,2) = 0.0287

TTEST({5,6,7,4,6,7,7,8,6,5},{8,6,7,7,9,8,7,5,7,9},2,1) = 0.1039

 Related Topics


VAR
VAR (Corel VENTURA table function)

Estimates variance based on a sample of the population.

Syntax

VAR(numberlist)

Argument	Definition

numberlist	any combination of numbers or expressions, or an array of values (must be a sample of the entire population)

 Notes

•	VAR does not include empty cells and cells containing text in its calculations; however, cells with zero values are included.

•	The formula of an estimate for the variance of the numbers is:

Example

VAR(12,14,14.74,11.24,10.5,16.8,10.8) = 5.5890

 Related Topics


VARP
VARP (Corel VENTURA table function)

Calculates variance based on the entire population.

Syntax

VARP(numberlist)

Argument	Definition

numberlist	any combination of numbers or expressions, or an array of values (must be a sample of the entire population)

 Notes

•	VARP does not include empty cells and cells containing text in its calculations; however, cells with zero values are included.

•	The formula of the variance of a population is:

Example

VARP(12,14,14.74,11.24,10.5,16.8,10.8) = 4.7906

 Related Topics


WEIBULL
WEIBULL (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the Weibull distribution. The Weibull distribution is used to estimate the probable life of electronic equipment and approximate different non-symmetrical distributions in mathematical statistics.

Syntax

WEIBULL(x,alpha,beta,cumulative)

Arguments	Definitions

x	a real number which specifies the value at which the distribution has to be evaluated

alpha	a real number which specifies the parameter of the distribution

beta	a real number which specifies the parameter of the distribution

cumulative	a logical value (TRUE or FALSE) which specifies the form of the WEIBULL function

Notes and Error Messages

•	WEIBULL returns the #NUMBER! error if:

- x is negative

- alpha [image] 0

- beta [image] 0

•	WEIBULL returns the #INVALID DATA! error if x, alpha, or beta is non-numeric.

•	If cumulative is FALSE, WEIBULL returns the value of the distribution density function; if TRUE, WEIBULL returns the cumulative distribution function.

•	The formula of the cumulative distribution function is:

•	The formula of the distribution density function is:

Examples

WEIBULL(75,43,81,FALSE) = 0.0202

WEIBULL(75,43,81,TRUE) = 0.0359

 Related Topics


ZTEST
ZTEST (Corel VENTURA table function)

Returns the two-tailed probability of a z-test. The z-test calculates the two-tailed probability for the standard normal distribution and a standard score for x relative to the data set.

Syntax

ZTEST(array,x,sigma)

Arguments	Definitions

array	an array or range reference of real numbers against which to test x

x	a real number which specifies the value to be tested

sigma	the known population standard deviation; if omitted, the sample standard deviation is used

Notes and Error Messages

•	ZTEST returns the #N/A error if array contains no data.

•	ZTEST returns the #INVALID DATA! error if x is non-numeric.

•	The formula of the z-test is:

where [image] is the mean value of the distribution, [image] is the standard deviation and n is the number of values in the array.

Examples

ZTEST({80,76,70,60,90,87,67,89,77,76,56,60,95,66,57},75) = 0.6498

ZTEST({1,2,3,4,5,6},3) = 0.2563

 Related Topics


Microsoft IntelliMouse support


Overview: Microsoft IntelliMouse support
Microsoft IntelliMouse support

Corel VENTURA provides Microsoft IntelliMouse users with all of the enhanced zoom and scrolling features that the IntelliMouse was designed for. The IntelliMouse wheel provides both scrolling and autoscrolling, and, when used in conjunction with CTRL, rapid zooming capabilities.

For the IntelliMouse to work correctly it must be installed properly with the necessary software. For more information about using your IntelliMouse, see its accompanying documentation.


Microsoft IntelliMouse scrolling

For Microsoft IntelliMouse users, Corel VENTURA has been designed to provide powerful scrolling functionality that can save you time, effort, and a sore mouse button finger.

To scroll using the IntelliMouse

•	Rotate the IntelliMouse wheel in the direction you want to scroll.

The scrolling increment is defined by your IntelliMouse settings.

To change your IntelliMouse settings

1.	Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.

2.	Click Settings, Control Panel, and double-click the Mouse icon.

3.	In the Mouse Properties dialog box, click the Wheel tab.

4.	Enable the Turn On The Wheel check box in the Wheel section of the dialog box. If Turn On The Wheel is already enabled, move on to the next step.

5.	Click the Settings button.

6.	In the Settings For Wheel dialog box, adjust the settings in the Scrolling section of the dialog box.

 Related Topics


Using Auto Scroll with your Microsoft IntelliMouse

Corel VENTURA lets you use the Auto Scroll feature with your Microsoft IntelliMouse. Auto Scroll allows you to quickly scroll up, down, left, or right through your publication. For users with a conventional mouse, you can also access the Auto Scroll button from the Zoom Tool flyout. IntelliMouse users can enable Auto Scroll each time the IntelliMouse Wheel is clicked. For more information about using Auto Scroll with a conventional mouse, see "Using Auto Scroll."

To use Auto Scroll with your IntelliMouse

1.	Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.

2.	Click Settings, Control Panel, and double-click the Mouse icon.

3.	In the Mouse Properties dialog box, click the Wheel tab.

4.	Enable the Turn On The Wheel Button check box in the Wheel Button section of the dialog box. If Turn On The Wheel Button is already enabled move on to the next step.

5.	Choose Default from the Button Assignment list box.

6.	Click the IntelliMouse wheel within the publication to position the Auto Scroll central point.

The Auto Scroll central point determines the direction and speed of the Auto Scroll.

7.	Move your mouse in the direction you want to scroll.

Corel VENTURA automatically scrolls in the direction you move from the central point. The speed increases as you move the mouse away from the Auto Scroll central point.

To stop Auto Scroll

•	Press any key or mouse button.

 Related Topics


Microsoft IntelliMouse zooming

Microsoft IntelliMouse users also benefit from the enhanced zoom control of the IntelliMouse wheel. The enhanced zoom control lets you quickly zoom in or out to the exact view you need.

To zoom in or out with your Microsoft IntelliMouse

1.	Hold down the CTRL key.

2.	Rotate the IntelliMouse wheel.

Corel VENTURA will zoom in or out at intervals of 10% for each notch on the IntelliMouse wheel.

 Related Topics


Language support for the writing tools


Overview: Language support for the writing tools
Language support for the writing tools

The Corel VENTURA writing tools support the following languages. For more information about using languages, see "Using languages."

Spell Check

Africaans, Catalan, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (US)/(UK), Finnish, French, Galician, German, Greek, Hungarian, Icelandic, Italian, Norwegian, Polish, Portuguese-Brazilian, Russian, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish

Grammatik

Dutch, English (US)/(UK), French, German, Spanish

Thesaurus

Dutch, English, French, German, Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese-Brazilian, Spanish, Swedish

The following table contains a list of the filenames for each language module, a description of the module, and the language that the module is used for.

Filename	Description	Language

WT80AF.CBT	Thesaurus	Africaans

WT80AF.HYD	Hyphenation Dictionary	Africaans

WT80AF.ICR	Speller - Dialect	Africaans

WT80AF.LEX	All Writing Tools - Dictionary	Africaans

WTLD80AF.DLL	All Writing Tools - Dictionary	Africaans

WTLI80.DLL	All Writing Tools - Default	All

WTGKI80.DLL	Grammar Interface	All

WTLD80XX.DLL	All Writing Tools - Default	All

WT80CA.ICR	Speller - Dialect	Catalan

WT80CA.LEX	All Writing Tools - Dictionary	Catalan

WTLD80CA.DLL	All Writing Tools - Dictionary	Catalan

WT80CA.HYD	Hyphenation Dictionary	Catalan

WT80CA.CBT	Thesaurus - Catalan	Catalan

WT80CZ.ICR	Speller - Dialect	Czech

WT80CZ.LEX	All Writing Tools - Dictionary	Czech

WT80CZ.SAV	Speller - Dialect	Czech

WTLD80CZ.DLL	All Writing Tools - Dictionary	Czech

WT80CZ.CBT	Thesaurus	Czech

WTLD80DK.DLL	All Writing Tools - Dictionary	Danish

WT80DK.SAV	Speller - Dialect	Danish

WT80DK.HYD	Hyphenation Dictionary	Danish

WT80DK.CBT	Thesaurus	Danish

WT80DK.ICR	Speller - Dialect	Danish

WT80DK.LEX	All Writing Tools - Dictionary	Danish

WTLD80NL.DLL	All Writing Tools - Dictionary	Dutch

WT80NL.MOR	All Writing Tools - Dictionary	Dutch

WTLD80NL.ADV	Grammar - Advice and Rules	Dutch

WTLD80NL.RUL	Grammar - Advice and Rules	Dutch

WTLD80NL.CNT	Grammar Check Help	Dutch

WTLD80NL.HLP	Grammar Check Help	Dutch

WT80NL.HYD	Hyphenation Dictionary	Dutch

WT80NL.HTD	Hyphenation Dictionary	Dutch

WT80NL.ICR	Speller - Dialect	Dutch

WT80NL.SAV	Speller - Dialect	Dutch

WT80NL.CBT	Thesaurus	Dutch

WTLD80EN.DLL	All Writing Tools - Dictionary	English

WT80EN.MOR	All Writing Tools - Dictionary	English - Canadian (CE)

WTUI80EN.DLL	All Writing Tools	All (for English Product)

WTLD80UK.ADV	Grammar - Advice and Rules	English - British/Australian

WTLD80US.ADV	Grammar - Advice and Rules	English - US/Canadian

WTGI80EN.CNT	Grammar Check Help - English	English

WTGI80EN.HLP	Grammar Check Help - English	English

WTLD80UK.CNT	Grammar Help (Advice and Rules)	English - British/Australian

WTLD80UK.RUL	Grammar Help (Advice and Rules)	English - British/Australian

WTLD80UK.HLP	Grammar Help (Advice and Rules)	English - British/Australian

WTLD80US.RUL	Grammar Help (Advice and Rules)	English - US/Canadian

WTLD80US.HLP	Grammar Help (Advice and Rules)	English - US/Canadian

WTLD80US.CNT	Grammar Help (Advice and Rules)	English - US/Canadian

WTSPTLEN.HLP	Spell Utility Help file	English

WT80UK.SAV	Speller - Dialect -  British (CE)	English - British (UK)

WT80UK.ICR	Speller - Dialect -  British (UK)	English - British (UK)

WT80OZ.SAV	Speller - Dialect - Australian (CE)	English - Australian (OZ)

WT80OZ.ICR	Speller - Dialect - Australian (OZ)	English - Australian (OZ)

WT80CE.SAV	Speller - Dialect - Canadian (CE)	English - Canadian

WT80CE.ICR	Speller - Dialect - Canadian (CE)	English - Canadian

WT80US.SAV	Speller - Dialect - United States (CE)	English - United States (US)

WT80US.ICR	Speller - Dialect - United States (CE)	English - United States (US)

WTSI80EN.HLP	Speller - English Speller Help	English

WTSI80EN.CNT	Speller - English Speller Help	English

WTWI80EN.CNT	Speller - English User Word Help	English

WTWI80EN.HLP	Speller - English User Word Help	English

WT80EN.HWL	Speller - Help Word List	English

WTTI80EN.CNT	Thesaurus Help	English

WT80EN.CBD	Thesaurus	English

WT80EN.CBT	Thesaurus	English

WTCB80EN.DLL	Thesaurus	English

WTTI80EN.HLP	Thesaurus Help	English

WT80SU.LEX	All Writing Tools - Dictionary	Finnish

WTLD80SU.DLL	All Writing Tools	Finnish

WT80SU.HTD	Hyphenation Dictionary	Finnish

WT80SU.HYD	Hyphenation Dictionary	Finnish

WT80SU.ICR	Speller - Dialect	Finnish

WT80SU.SAV	Speller - Dialect	Finnish

WTWI80SU.CNT	Speller - User Word Help	Finnish

WT80SU.CBT	Thesaurus	Finnish

WT80FR.MOR	All Writing Tools - Dictionary	French - National (FR)

WTLD80FR.DLL	All Writing Tools	French

WTLD80FR.RUL	Grammar - Advice and Rules	French

WTLD80FR.ADV	Grammar - Advice and Rules	French

WTGI80FR.HLP	Grammar Check Help	French

WTGI80FR.CNT	Grammar Check Help	French

WTLD80FR.CNT	Grammar Help (Advice and Rules)	French

WTLD80FR.HLP	Grammar Help (Advice and Rules)	French

WT80FR.HYD	Hyphenation Dictionary	French

WT80FR.SAV	Speller - Dialect	French - Canadian (CF)

WT80FR.ICR	Speller - Dialect	French - National (FR)

WT80CF.SAV	Speller - Dialect - French Canadian (CF)	French - Canadian

WT80CF.ICR	Speller - Dialect - French Canadian (CF)	French - Canadian

WT80FR.CBT	Thesaurus	French

WT80GA.CBT	Thesaurus	Galician

WTLD80GA.DLL	All Writing Tools	Galician

WT80GA.LEX	All Writing Tools - Dictionary	Galician

WT80GA.ICR	Speller - Dialect	Galician

WT80KD.MOR	All Writing Tools - Dictionary	German

WT80DE.MOR	All Writing Tools - Dictionary	German

WTLD80DE.DLL	All Writing Tools	German

WTLD80DE.ADV	Grammar Help (Advice and Rules)	German

WTLD80KD.RUL	Grammar Help (Advice and Rules)	German

WTLD80DE.CNT	Grammar Help (Advice and Rules)	German

WTLD80KD.ADV	Grammar Help (Advice and Rules)	German

WTLD80DE.RUL	Grammar Help (Advice and Rules)	German

WTLD80DE.HLP	Grammar Help (Advice and Rules)	German

WT80KD.HYD	Hyphenation Dictionary	German

WT80DE.HYD	Hyphenation Dictionary	German

WT80DE.SAV	Speller - Dialect	German

WT80DE.ICR	Speller - Dialect	German

WT80ND.SAV	Speller - Dialect	German

WT80KD.CBT	Thesaurus	German

WT80DE.CBT	Thesaurus	German

WT80GR.CBT	Thesaurus	Greek

WTLD80GR.DLL	All Writing Tools	Greek

WT80GR.ICR	Speller - Dialect	Greek

WT80GR.LEX	All Writing Tools - Dictionary	Greek

WT80MA.LEX	All Writing Tools - Dictionary	Hungarian

WT80MA.ICR	All Writing Tools	Hungarian

WT80MA.HPC	All Writing Tools	Hungarian

WT80MA.HPV	All Writing Tools	Hungarian

WTLD80MA.DLL	All Writing Tools	Hungarian

WT80MA.CBT	All Writing Tools	Hungarian

WT80MA.STR	All Writing Tools	Hungarian

WT80MA.STG	All Writing Tools	Hungarian

WT80MA.CGT	All Writing Tools	Hungarian

WT80IS.CBT	Thesaurus	Icelandic

WT80IS.LEX	All Writing Tools - Dictionary	Icelandic

WT80IS.ICR	Speller - Dialect	Icelandic

WTLD80IS.DLL	All Writing Tools	Icelandic

WTLD80IT.DLL	All Writing Tools	Italian

WT80IT.MOR	All Writing Tools - Dictionary	Italian

WT80IT.ICR	Speller - Dialect	Italian

WT80IT.SAV	Speller - Dialect	Italian

WT80IT.CBT	Thesaurus	Italian

WT80JP.CBT	Thesaurus	Japanese

WTLD80JP.DLL	All Writing Tools	Japanese

WT80JP.ICR	Speller - Dialect	Japanese

WTLD80NO.DLL	All Writing Tools	Norwegian

WT80NO.CBT	Thesaurus	Norwegian

WT80NO.LEX	All Writing Tools - Dictionary	Norwegian

WT80NO.SAV	Speller - Dialect	Norwegian

WT80NO.ICR	Speller - Dialect	Norwegian

WTLD80PL.DLL	All Writing Tools	Polish

WT80PL.LEX	All Writing Tools - Dictionary	Polish

WT80PL.ICR	Speller - Dialect	Polish

WT80PL.SAV	Speller - Dialect	Polish

WT80PL.HYP	Hyphenation Dictionary	Polish

WT80PL.HYD	Hyphenation Dictionary	Polish

WT80PL.CBT	Thesaurus	Polish

WT80PO.LEX	All Writing Tools - Dictionary	Portuguese-Brazilian

WTLD80PO.DLL	All Writing Tools	Portuguese-Brazilian

WT80PO.ICR	Speller - Dialect	Portuguese-Brazilian

WT80PO.SAV	Speller - Dialect	Portuguese-Brazilian

WT80PO.CBT	Thesaurus	Portuguese-Brazilian

WT80RU.SAV	Speller - Dialect	Russian

WT80RU.LEX	All Writing Tools - Dictionary	Russian

WTLD80RU.DLL	All Writing Tools	Russian

WT80RU.CBT	Thesaurus	Russian

WT80RU.ICR	Speller - Dialect	Russian

WTLD80ES.DLL	All Writing Tools	Spanish

WTLD80ES.CNT	Grammar Help (Advice and Rules)	Spanish

WT80ES.HYD	Hyphenation Dictionary	Spanish

WTLD80ES.HLP	Grammar Help (Advice and Rules)	Spanish

WT80ES.MOR	All Writing Tools - Dictionary	Spanish

WTLD80ES.RUL	Grammar Help (Advice and Rules)	Spanish

WT80ES.SAV	Speller - Dialect	Spanish

WTLD80ES.ADV	Grammar Help (Advice and Rules)	Spanish

WT80ES.CBT	Thesaurus	Spanish

WT80ES.ICR	Speller - Dialect	Spanish

WT80SV.CBT	Thesaurus 	Swedish

WT80SV.HYD	Hyphenation Dictionary	Swedish

WT80SV.SAV	Speller - Dialect	Swedish

WT80SV.ICR	Speller - Dialect	Swedish

WTLD80SV.DLL	All Writing Tools	Swedish

WT80SV.LEX	All Writing Tools - Dictionary	Swedish

WT80TR.CBT	Thesaurus	Turkish

WT80TR.ICR	Speller - Dialect	Turkish

WT80TR.LEX	All Writing Tools - Dictionary	Turkish

WTLD80TR.DLL	All Writing Tools	Turkish


Corel VENTURA markup codes


Overview: Corel VENTURA markup codes
Corel VENTURA markup codes

Corel VENTURA markup codes allow you to edit the formatting of your publication in Copy Editor View. You can create typeset publications that contain formatting codes for margins, indents, hyphenation, page breaks, bullets, page numbering, headers and footers, footnotes, tab settings, picture anchoring, font information, tables of content, index entries, and entering section numbering in the publication.

You can also use markup codes to format a text file before you import it into Corel VENTURA. However, markup codes are not added to the text files, Corel VENTURA adds formatting codes as the text file is imported. If you want to export your text file back to the word processor file format, you can choose to leave the Corel VENTURA formatting codes out. Without the codes, all of the Corel VENTURA formatting must be reapplied when you re-import the file.

In addition, much of the format information used by the word processor is ignored when the text file is imported to Corel VENTURA. For instance, a command to center text in a word processor is used to center text across a page. In Corel VENTURA, text can be centered across a page, within a column, across two columns, or within a frame. The word processor's center command, then, does not provide sufficient information to define what Corel VENTURA should do with imported centered text.

All attributes assigned to text in Corel VENTURA, such as underline, bold, and the font settings, can be exported to any word processor file format or to the ASCII file format. If you want to store typesetting information in word processor format, much of the word processor's format information [image] other than text attributes [image] is replaced by attribute codes when the publication is exported.

For more information about a Corel VENTURA markup code category, click one of the following:

•	Corel VENTURA paragraph tags and characters tags

•	Corel VENTURA non-keyboard characters

•	Corel VENTURA tab markup codes

•	Corel VENTURA text attribute codes

•	Corel VENTURA text color codes

•	Other Corel VENTURA markup codes


Corel VENTURA paragraph tags and characters tags

Corel VENTURA paragraph tags can be applied to word processor text files  using the following coding:

@TAGNAME ^ = ^

The @ must be the first character in the line at the beginning of a paragraph.

TAGNAME replaces the name of the tag assigned to the paragraph. The ^ symbol indicates where you should insert a space.

Character tags can be applied at any point in a text file by typing <$[CHARACTER_TAG> immediately before the text you want to format. Type <$]CHARACTER_TAG> immediately after the text you want to format.

 Related Topics


Corel VENTURA non-keyboard characters
Corel VENTURA nonkeyboard characters

Characters not found on the keyboard can be inserted as text in a Corel VENTURA publication by enclosing the ASCII decimal equivalent, or ANSI, code within angle brackets. For example, the ANSI code <191> from a word processor adds a trademark symbol code ( [image]) in Corel VENTURA. For a list of codes, see the "ANSI Code table."

To use the < > characters without having them interpreted as part of a character attribute code, use two brackets in a row. For instance, to produce

<text in brackets>

type

<<text in brackets>>

If the word processor can create and edit foreign characters, Corel VENTURA will translate them without having to use the < > codes.

 Related Topics


Corel VENTURA tab markup codes

When you press TAB key on the keyboard, you insert a tab character into the text. The word processor then moves the cursor to the next tab stop setting for that paragraph. If the tab settings in the Corel VENTURA stylesheet are at different locations than the tab stops in the word processor, the text may not be formatted correctly.

To avoid this problem, use tab settings in the word processor that are similar to those defined in the Corel VENTURA stylesheet you will be using. Because word processor tab stops are set according to the number of characters you want to skip over and Corel VENTURA tab stops are set according to a distance from the left column edge, matching them may require a little experimentation. You can approximate the word processor's tab stops by setting the tab position to Left and the distance in inches to a value determined by the following formula:

(Tab Stop/Pitch) - (Left Margin/Pitch) = Distance

The tab stop and left margin variables are measured in numbers of characters. Pitch is measured in characters per inch. Distance is measured in inches. For instance, if your word processor prints at 10 pitch (e.g., 10 characters per inch) and you have a tab stop set at 30 characters from edge of the page, as well as a left margin of 15 characters, set the Corel VENTURA tab stop at 1.50 inches; i.e., (30/10) - (15/10) = 1.50 inches.

 Note

•	Make sure the word processor is configured to insert tabs. If configured incorrectly, some word processors add spaces rather than tabs.

 Related Topics


Corel VENTURA text attribute codes

Corel VENTURA places codes in your text when it applies formatting to your publications. When text is imported from supported word processors, Corel VENTURA correctly translates, displays, and prints text attributes, such as boldface and underline. Similarly, any Corel VENTURA codes added, such as boldface and underline, can be retained if you export the text files to their original format. The text attribute codes can be added by applying the associated formatting in Corel VENTURA using a word processor manually. To view the codes in Corel VENTURA, click View, Copy Editor.

The table below lists the syntax used in the Corel VENTURA codes. For instance, the beginning of medium italic text is set by inserting <MI> directly before the text to be formatted with a medium italic style.

When used alone, attributes native to the word processor, such as boldface are translated back to the original attribute when you save the publication in Corel VENTURA. When used in combination with other attributes, native attributes are translated back to the original attribute, using combinations of the following Corel VENTURA codes.

Text Attributes	Codes	In Corel VENTURA

Small Caps	<SA>	Right-mouse click with text selected

Base Line Jump	<Jn> baseline jump	Right-mouse click with text selected

Enter a Shift Up value.

Begin/End (%0) Kerning	<%n>	N/A

Bold weight type	<B>	CTRL + B

Changed Point Size 	<Pn> point size	CTRL + Alt + U to increase

CTRL + Alt + J to decrease

Double underline	<=>	Right-mouse click with text selected

Italics	<I>	CTRL + I

Kerning/Tracking	<Kn> {text}<D>	CTRL + Alt + I to increase

CTRL + Alt + K to decrease

Line Break	<R>	Shift + Enter

Medium weight type	<M>	N/A

Lowercase	N/A	Right-mouse click with text selected

Overscore	<O>	Right-mouse click with text selected

Resume Normal	<D>	Right-mouse click with text selected

Typeface	<F" typeface name">	CTRL+F

Underline	<U>	CTRL+U

Word Underline	<L>	N/A

Uppercase	<A>	Right-mouse click with text selected

Strike-thru	<X>	Right-mouse click with text selected

Subscript	<V>	Right-mouse click with text selected

Superscript	<^>	Right-mouse click with text selected

 Notes

•	For information about color index codes, see "Corel VENTURA text color codes."

•	All attributes are terminated at the end of a paragraph, even if the Resume Normal character code (<D>) is not encountered. Also, all previous attributes are terminated any time new attributes are defined.

 Related Topics


Text attribute examples

Attributes can be grouped together into sequences. For example, to set bold, italic, blue text, the code is <BIC4>. Any new text attribute sequence encountered will cancel all previous attributes. Attributes native to the word processor and the codes described in "Corel VENTURA text attribute codes" can be grouped together.

For example, to create the following effect using WordStar:

airplane automobile

Here the first word is boldfaced and underlined, and the second word is boldface only, requires the following coding:

^U^Bairplane^U automobile^B

This effect can also be produced using the codes described in "Corel VENTURA text attribute codes." For example:

<BU>airplane <B>automobile<D>

You can use either the attribute set shown above, or you can place attributes in the text using the word processor's own commands.

 Related Topics


Corel VENTURA text color codes

When color is applied to text in Corel VENTURA, codes corresponding to the selected color model, palette, and color are stored with the text file. The codes can also be inserted manually in the text file in a word processor. Later, when the text file is imported into Corel VENTURA, the color information is correctly translated, displayed and printed.

The codes for text color are as follows:

Color Model	Code

RGB	<C5,P,K,r,g,b>

C5=RGB identifier

P=Palette Number*

K=Knockout/Overprint (0/1)

r=Red, g=green, b=blue

PANTONE	<C1,P,K,Id,Density>

C1=PANTONE identifier

P=Palette Number*

K=Knockout/Overprint (0/1)

Id=Pantone Id

Density=Color Density

CMYK	<C2,P,K,c,m,y,k>

C2=CMYK identifier

P=Palette Number*

K=Knockout/Overprint (0/1)

c=Cyan, m=Magenta, y=Yellow,k=Black

CMY	<C4,P,K,c,m,y>

C4=CMY identifier

P=Palette Number*

K=Knockout/Overprint (0/1)

c=Cyan, m=Magenta, y=Yellow

CMYK255	<C3,P,K,c,m,y,k>

C3=CMYK255 identifier

P=Palette Number*

K=Knockout/Overprint (0/1)

c=Cyan, m=Magenta, y=Yellow,k=Black

HSB	<C6,P,K,h,s,b>

C6=HSB identifier

P=Palette Number*

K=Knockout/Overprint (0/1)

h=Hue; S=Saturation; b=Brightness

HLS	<C7,P,K,h,l,s>

C7=HLS identifier

P=Palette Number*

K=Knockout/Overprint (0/1)

H=Hue, L=Lightness, S=Saturation

HSB	<C6P,K,h,s,b>

C6=HSB identifier

P=Palette Number*

K=Knockout/Overprint (0/1)

h=Hue, s=Saturation, b=Brightness

BW	<C8,P,K,b>

C8=BW identifier

P=Palette Number*

K=Knockout/Overprint (0/1)

b=1(B) or 0(W)

Grayscale	<C9,P,K,Gray>

C9=Grayscale identifier

P=Palette Number*

K=Knockout/Overprint (0/1)

Gray=Gray Value

YIQ255	<C11,P,K,Cy,Ci,Cq>

C11=YIQ255 identifier

P=Palette Number

K=Knockout/Overprint (0/1)

Cy=Luminance Component

Ci=I Chroma Component

Cq=Q Chroma Component

LAB	<C12,P,K,l,a,b>

C12=LAB identifier

P=Palette Number*

K=Knockout/Overprint (0/1)

l=l Component

a=a Component

b=b Component

*Palette Number (P in the codes described above):

1= PAL_TRUMATCH

2= PAL_PANTONE_PROCESS

3= PAL_PANTONE_SPOT

4= PAL_IMAGE

5= PAL_USER

6= PAL_CUSTOMFIXED

7= PAL_RGBSTANDARD

8= PAL_FOCOLTONE

 Related Topics


Other Corel VENTURA markup codes

All of the following characters, items, and styles have equivalent markup codes that can be inserted into text that is imported into Corel VENTURA and that will appear if a Corel VENTURA publication is exported with the Export Without VENTURA Markup check box enabled in the Export Text dialog box.

Box characters

Cross-references

Current page number or chapter number

Date and time

Discretionary hyphens

Equations

Footnotes and endnotes

Formulas

Frame anchors

Hidden text

Index entries

Line breaks

Tables

TrueType font weights

Typographical spaces

Variables

 Related Topics


Other Corel VENTURA markup code reference


Tables markup code
Tables

Tables begin with a @Z_TBL_BEG = statement and end with a @Z_TBL_END = statement. The information directly after the @Z_TBL_BEG = statement defines the structure of the table as described below. Each row in the table is entered in a separate paragraph. Each column in each row is separated by a comma followed by a space. Type two commas followed by a space if you want to make a comma followed by a space appear within a column. If no space follows the comma, for example, within a number, only one comma is needed.

The table below provides a definition for each element in a table. These elements should appear in the order shown.

Command	Use

@Z_TBL_BEG 	Placed at the beginning of a table to specify how the table is defined and initialized

@Z_TBL_COL_TAGS	Specifies the default parameter tag to use for text in a column

@Z_TBL_ROW_BEG	Defines the beginning of a row in the table

@Z_TBL_ROW_END	Defines the end of the most recently defined row in the table

@Z_TBL_CELL_BEG	Defines the beginning of a cell in the most recently defined row

@Z_TBL_CELL_END	Defines the end of the most recently defined cell

@tag = <paragraph>	Defines a paragraph within a table cell

@Z_TBL_END 	Indicates the end of the table

The following parameters are used after the previous commands.

Parameter	Use

VERSION()	Compulsory for a Corel VENTURA 8 table text file. Specifies that the table is a particular version of Corel VENTURA. If omitted, version 5 is assumed.

COLUMNS()	Optional parameter. Defines the number of columns in the table. If omitted, one column is assumed.

DIMENSION()	Optional parameter. Defines the dimensions used for the following parameters:
IN specifies inches
PT specifies points
CM specifies centimeters
PI specifies picas
TM specifies tenths of a micron

You can locally override the global setting by placing these parameters immediately after the parameter.

COLWIDTHS()	Optional parameter. Defines the width of each cell in the table. The prefix E specifies variable width.

HEADERS()	Optional parameter. Defines the number of header rows for this table. Only the first header row can be skewed by specifying a TOPROWSKEW angle.

TOPROWSKEW()	Specifies the skew angle, in degrees, for the first header row

TOPROWSKEWTEXT()	Specifies whether to skew text with each cell in the skewed top row

SKIPFIRSTCELLSKEW	Optional parameter. Specifies that the first cell in the row not be skewed

CLIPLASTCELLSKEW	Optional parameter. Specifies that the last cell in the row be clip formatted

LEFTCOLSKEW()	Optional parameter. Specifies the skew angle, in degrees, for the left row

SKEWLEFTCOLTEXT	Optional parameter. Specifies that the text in each cell of the skewed left column be skewed

ROWHEIGHT	Defines the height of the top row skew

ALIGN()	Optional parameter. Specifies whether a fixed width table is left aligned (LT), right-aligned (RT), or center aligned(CT)

WIDTH()	Optional parameter. Width of the table if Custom is specified

INDENT()	Optional parameter. Specifies the amount of indentation from the left or the right, depending on the alignment

ABOVE()	Optional parameter. Specifies the amount of space above the table

BELOW()	Optional parameter. Specifies the amount of space below the table

VJTOP()	Optional parameter. Specifies the amount of vertical justification above the table

VJBOT()	Optional parameter. Specifies the amount of vertical justification below the table

HGUTTER()	Optional parameter. Specifies the amount of space between columns

VGUTTER()	Optional parameter. Specifies the amount of space between rows

BOX()	Optional parameter. Specifies the border tag to be used for drawing the grid around the table

HGRID()	Optional parameter. Specifies the border tag to be used for drawing the grid between rows

VGRID()	Optional parameter. Specifies the border tag to be used for drawing the grid between columns

KEEP()	Optional parameter. Specifies whether a table can break across pages, columns, etc. Breaks are allowed (OFF) or not allowed (ON). The default is OFF.

RULE()	Optional parameter. Defines ruling line overrides for a range of cells. Lists all ruling line overrides by commas separated in one paragraph at the beginning of the table.

L0()	Optional parameter. Specifies a hidden line as the border for a certain range of cells

L1()	Optional parameter. Specifies a single line as the border for a certain range of cells

L2()	Optional parameter. Specifies a double line as the border for a certain range of cells

L3()	Optional parameter. Specifies a thick line as the border for a range of cells


Index entries markup code
Index entries

To index information, you can use the Index tag. Insert

<$I[index]Level_1_Entry[sort_key]; Level_2_Entry[sort_key]; etc.>,

where required. Up to 14 levels can be used.

See

To direct to another index entry, you can use the See phrase. Insert

<$S[index]Level_1_Entry[sort_key]; Level_2_Entry[sort_key]; etc.>,

where required. Up to 14 levels can be used.

See Also

To reference another area, you can use the See Also phrase. Insert

<$A[index]Level_1_Entry[sort_key]; Level_2_Entry[sort_key]; etc.>,

where required. Up to 14 levels can be used.

 Note

•	Do not place entries containing commas, semicolons, and brackets.


Crossreference markup code
Cross-references

A cross-reference consists of two elements: a marker and a reference. The marker identifies the point in the text file you want to refer the reader to. The reference identifies the location of the marker.

Marker

<$M> - Text marker used to provide a reference point in a text stream that may be referenced (forward or backward) by a <$R> code. Syntax:

<$M[label]>

label is the identifying label (name) of the marker. Note that case will be ignored.

Reference

<$R> - Reference used to cause a reference substitution into the text stream. Syntax:

<$R[type,label,format]string>

type may be one of the following:

•	C# to designate the chapter number of the referenced frame or marker

•	P# to designate the page number of the referenced frame or marker

•	F# to designate the figure number of the referenced frame

•	T# to designate the table number of the referenced frame

•	S* to designate the section number string of the referenced marker. For example, the text is derived from the section number paragraph immediately preceding the paragraph in which the marker appears.

•	C* to designate the caption label text of the referenced frame

•	V* to designate a string variable substitution

label is the name of the desired string variable or marker, or the anchor name of the desired frame. This parameter is optional. Refer to restrictions below. Note that case will be ignored.

format is a format identifier, using the same syntax as is used for the format identifier for chapter, page, figure, and table counters. This parameter is optional. Refer to restrictions below.

string is the text which is last determined to be the appropriate substitution during publication reference generation. Initially, it may be an empty string or any default string. A specified default string will be overwritten when publication cross-referencing is performed. Optional parameters in the <$R> code may be used only when appropriate. Specifically, the following formats are the only valid ones.

•	[C#] or [P#]: substitute the current chapter or page number in the format specified for the current chapter or page

•	[C#,label], [P#,label], [F#,label], or [T#,label]: substitute the chapter, page, figure, or table number of the object or position referenced by label, using the format currently defined for the object/location's chapter or page. The label must reference a frame for figure and table numbers. It may reference either a frame or a text marker for chapter and page numbers.

•	[C#,label,format], [P#,label,format], [F#,label,format], or [T#,label,format]: see previous optional format. The specified format is to be used.

•	[S*]: substitute the section number string of the current paragraph

•	[S*,label]: substitute the section number string of the paragraph that holds the marker referenced by label. The label must reference a text marker.

•	[C*,label]: substitute the caption label string of the frame referenced by label.

•	[V*,label]: substitute the variable string referenced (and already defined) by label.


footnote and endnote markup code
Footnotes and endnotes

Footnotes can be inserted at any point in a text file by specifying <$Ftext>, where text is the footnote text that will appear at the bottom of the page. In Corel VENTURA, the appropriate footnote number is generated at the location in the text where the <$Ftext> appears.

Endnotes are defined by the <$Nendnote_text > tag, where endnote_text is the information provided in the endnote.


Equation markup code
Equations

Equations are entered in a word processor using the Corel VENTURA equation language. Precede the equation with <$E and end it with >. For example

<$E2~sqrt { -^{ a over 3 } cos theta sub 1 }>

Greater than and less than symbols should be entered twice; for example, type "<" as << and ">" as >>.

Do not include attributes, such as <B> in the equation. Use font and size instead.

For more information about using the Corel VENTURA EQN (equation) language, see "Building Corel VENTURA EQN Language equations."


Formula markup code
Formulas

Formulas can be inserted in tables by using the <$=formula > tag, where the formula is inserted at formula. All formulas begin with an equal sign.


Variable markup code
Variables

A variable is a placeholder for text that changes according to the variable's current definition. You can insert only the placeholder in the text file and define the variable in Corel VENTURA, or you can define the variable in the text file.

Variable placeholder

<$V> - String variable used to define a string variable that may later be backward referenced by a <$R> code. The most recent declaration of a string variable is the one used when referenced.

Variable definition

<$V[label]string>

Here label is the identifying label (name) of the string variable. Note that case will be ignored.

string is the string that is to be substituted when the variable is referenced. The string is not limited in length and may be an empty string.


Frame anchor markup code
Frame anchors

A frame anchor is a code inserted into text that links the frame to a particular location on the page. When you insert a frame, you can specify the relationship between the text and the location.

The Corel VENTURA markup code for a frame anchor is the frame name. For example, <$&~Frame1> indicates that Frame1 is inserted at that location in the text. The characteristics of Frame1, such as the type of frame anchor (for example, inline or above current line) are stored internally and can be edited outside Corel VENTURA.


Current page number or chapter number markup code
Current page number or chapter number

The codes for inserting the current page number and chapter number are the same as those used to insert cross-references.

Page number

<$R[V*,[P#],,,0]>

Chapter number

<$R[V*,[C#],,,0]>


Hidden text markup code
Hidden text

Hidden text are comments and other text in your files that Corel VENTURA does not display or print. Thus, if you place the following hidden text in a text file

<$!Note: this section revised on February 12, 1998>

It does not appear in your publication saved to, but will be available for editing in the word processor.

Hidden text appears as a note in publications saved to Adobe Acrobat format.


Line break markup code
Line breaks

A line break begins a new line without creating a new paragraph. Use line breaks when printing large database files to separate individual lines within a record. The fewer paragraphs in a database printout, the larger the database file can be. Make sure, however, that you do not create a paragraph longer then 4–6K bytes.

Key sequence: SHIFT + ENTER


Date and time markup code
Date and Time

You can insert date and time codes that update automatically. Typing <$Xenudate&time>, where date&time is the format string as it appears in the Insert Date And Time dialog box (Insert menu).

To display the date/time as	Insert

10/7/96	<$XenuM/d/yy>

Monday, October 07, 1996	<$Xenudddd, MMMM dd, yyyy>

10/7/96 11:32:43 AM 	<$XenuM/d/yy h:mm:ss AM>

4th quarter, 96	<$Xenuqt 'quarter', yy>


Box character markup code
Box characters

To place box characters in your publication, type:

<$B0> or <$B1>

 Note

•	Box characters in publications created in earlier versions of Corel VENTURA won't display unless you have the ZapfDingbat or Wingding font installed on your computer.


Discretionary hyphen markup code
Discretionary hyphens

Placing a discretionary hyphen at the beginning of a word disables hyphenation for the one occurrence of that word.

If the word that contains a discretionary hyphen is not placed at the end of a line, no hyphen is shown on the screen and no hyphen is printed.


Typographical space markup code
Typographical spaces

Typographical spaces are typed as follows:

Type of space	Codes

Em	<_>

En	<~>

Figure	<+>

Non-Breaking	<N>

Thin Space	<|>


True Type font weight markup code
TrueType font weights

The following table lists the TrueType text attribute weight codes. These codes are entered in the text in exactly the same manner as other text attribute bracket codes.

TrueType Weight	Attribute Code

Thin	<W1>

Extra Light or Ultra Light	<W2>

Light	<W3>

Normal or Regular	<W4>

Medium	<W5>

Semi Bold or Demi Bold	<W6>

Bold	<W7>

Extra Bold or Ultra Bold	<W8>

Black or Heavy	<W9>


Object linking and embedding (OLE)


Overview: Object linking and embedding (OLE)
Object linking and embedding (OLE)

Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) is a standard method used to share formatted, freely editable information among Windows applications. For example, you can use OLE to display a presentation from Corel WordPerfect in Corel VENTURA or a vector image from CorelDRAW, and to update the information easily.

For OLE to work, the application used to create the OLE object and the application in which you want to place the object must both support OLE functionality. Corel VENTURA supports all OLE features, but certain applications support only some. If you are uncertain about an application's OLE compatiblity, refer to its documentation.

Server and client applications

Whenever you use OLE, two applications are involved: a server application and a client application. The server application is used to create and edit the OLE object; for example, a picture, a chart, or text. The client application is the application in which you place the OLE object; for example, if you create a picture in CorelDRAW and use OLE to place it in Corel VENTURA, CorelDRAW is the server application and Corel VENTURA is the client application.

Linking and embedding

OLE objects can be either linked or embedded in client applications. A linked OLE object is an already existing file in the server application The appearance of the OLE object in the client application is controlled by the information stored in this external file. When the external file is changed in the server application, the OLE object updates to reflect these changes.

An embedded OLE object is completely contained in the client application file; therefore, there isn't a link to an external file. When you create a new object by launching a server application from CorelDRAW, the object is an embedded object.

Using the Clipboard

You can cut or copy an object from a server application into a client application. This object becomes an OLE object. If you simply copy and paste an object, it becomes an embedded OLE object. However, if you use the Paste Special command, the object becomes a linked OLE object.

When you use the clipboard, the object you paste will not always become an OLE object. For example, text pasted into Corel VENTURA becomes part of a Corel VENTURA text file. If you want complete control of the objects you paste, use the Paste Special command.

Dragging

Dragging is the easiest way to create OLE objects. You can select an object with the mouse in a server application, drag it to a client application, and it automatically becomes an OLE object. If you simply drag the object it becomes an embedded OLE object. If you hold down CTRL + SHIFT while you drag the object, it becomes a linked OLE object.

If you drag files from the Windows 95 desktop into Corel VENTURA, Corel VENTURA will try to import the files before it tries to create an OLE object. However, if you use the right mouse button to drag the object, you can choose how the object is to be placed.

In-place editing

In-place editing is an OLE feature that opens a special editing session of the program in which the OLE object was created without leaving Corel VENTURA. When you double-click a linked object, the source program is launched in a separate window and Corel VENTURA remains open. For example, to edit an embedded Corel PHOTO-PAINT image, the Corel PHOTO-PAINT menu structure and tools temporarily replace the Corel VENTURA interface. When you make your changes and update them from the File menu, your Corel VENTURA publication reflects the changes you have made.

If the source file supports in-place editing, this procedure will work in any Corel program for Windows 95 or Windows NT.

If In-place editing is not supported, when you double-click the OLE object in the client program, the server program will open. You can then make changes and choose Update to make your changes appear in the client program.

OLE notes

Conditions of exchanging information with other programs:

•	OLE objects inserted with the Paste Special or Insert Object commands can be scaled, moved, or have other basic transformations applied to them.

•	OLE objects can be copied. Copies of linked objects are linked to the same file as the original object.

•	OLE objects cannot be rotated within the frame, but they can be rotated or skewed with the frame.

•	Irregular text wrap does not work with OLE objects because the content is dynamic and could change at any time.

•	Bitmaps inserted as OLE objects cannot be manipulated using the Format, Bitmap commands.

 Related Topics


Overview: Limitations of using OLE objects in Corel VENTURA
Limitations of using OLE objects in Corel VENTURA

In most cases, you can only edit OLE objects using the server application. If you attempt to edit an OLE object using Corel VENTURA, you will notice the following limitations:

OLE objects cannot:

•	be rotated

•	be skewed

•	have any bitmap effects applied to them

•	be edited in their native application using the Edit In command accessed by right-clicking the object

•	have autowrap applied to them

•	be converted to graphic objects

•	be exported

Other limitations:

•	OLE objects do not appear in the File List for the publication, but do appear in the File List for the frame into which they are inserted.

•	You cannot insert text into a frame that contains an OLE object.

 Note

•	If you use the Edit, Paste Special command, you can insert an object as a Picture (Metafile) or Device Independent Bitmap which allows you to use the Edit In command, to export the object, and to edit the object as you would any other bitmap. You cannot use the sever application to edit the object.

There are a limited number of ways that you can change an OLE object without actually editing it using the server application. For example, OLE objects can:

•	be sized and moved

•	be copied

Copies of linked objects are linked to the same file as the original object.

 Related Topics


Creating OLE objects

You can create an OLE objects from within Corel VENTURA or by launching the server application and the using the Edit, Paste Special command in Corel VENTURA. New objects are always embedded objects and cannot be linked.

To create an OLE object in Corel VENTURA

1.	Click Insert, Object.

2.	Choose the type of object you want to create from the Object Type list box.

3.	Create your object once the server application is launched.

4.	Click the Publication widow (outside of the OLE object frame) to return to Corel VENTURA.

To create an OLE object from the server application

1.	Start the source application.

2.	Open the file that contains the object you want to link to your Corel VENTURA file.

3.	Copy the object.

4.	Open Corel VENTURA and click Edit, Paste Special.

5.	Click Paste Link.

6.	Choose the type of information you want to add to your Corel VENTURA file from the Data Type box.

 Note

•	If you enable the Display As Icon check box, the server application is launched outside of Corel VENTURA instead of within Corel VENTURA. As well, the object appears as an icon. When you have created the object you can update the publication or return to Corel VENTURA from the File Menu.


Linking OLE objects


Overview: Linking OLE objects
Linking OLE objects

Linking is one of two ways to insert an OLE object into a client application. The other way is to embed the object. For more information about embedding objects, see "Embedding OLE objects."

When you link an OLE object to a client application file, a connection is created between the OLE object (the object that appears in the client application; for example, Corel VENTURA) and the source file (the file created in the server application). When the source file is altered, the object in the client application updates to reflect this change. The object updates automatically unless you specifically choose to update the OLE link manually. If you want to change the content or appearance of a linked OLE object, you must make the changes in the source file. Consequently, when you copy a file containing linked OLE objects to another computer, you must include the source files.

Linking is most useful when you want to use the same OLE object several times in the same publication or in many different publications. Linking allows you to change every instance of the OLE object by simply changing the source file.

Editing linked objects

When you want to edit a linked OLE object, you must edit the source file in the server application. You can launch the server application and open the source file directly from the client application, or you can launch the server application, and then open the source file. The source file must be saved for any changes to appear in the client application.

Linking portions of files

For the most part, using a portion of a file as a linked OLE object should not present any problems. However, different applications use different methods for determining which changes should be reflected when you update the linked object. For example, if you link one object from a CorelDRAW file into Corel VENTURA, the link is made to the entire CorelDRAW page, not to the individual object. This means that when you update the link, the entire page will appear in Corel VENTURA. For more information about an application's OLE functionality, see its documentation.

 Related Topics


Linking OLE objects

Linking an OLE object allows you to edit the object in the server application and have it update in the client application. This is especially useful if you use the same object in different publications.

To insert a linked OLE object

1.	Click Insert, Object.

2.	Click the Create From File button.

3.	Click the Browse button, and choose the file you want to link.

4.	Enable the Link check box.

 Note

•	If you enable the Display As Icon check box, the server application is launched outside of Corel VENTURA instead of within Corel VENTURA. As well, the object appears as an icon. When you have created the object you can update the publication or return to Corel VENTURA from the File Menu.

To insert a linked OLE object using the clipboard

1.	In the server application select the object(s) you want to link.

2.	Click Edit, Copy.

3.	In Corel VENTURA, open the publication into which you want to insert the object.

4.	Click Edit, Paste Special.

5.	Enable the Paste Link button.

 Notes

•	To be able to insert a linked OLE object using the Edit, Paste Special command, you must save the file containing the object; specifically, the file containing the object must have a filename for the link to be established.

•	To return to Corel VENTURA, click the Publication widow (outside of the OLE object frame).

 Related Topics


Editing and converting linked OLE objects

When you want to edit a linked OLE object, you must edit the source file in the server application.

Sometimes it is possible to edit an OLE object as if it were a different type of OLE object or to convert an OLE object to a different type of object. These features allow you to choose the application with which you can edit the OLE object; however, these features are rarely available.

To edit a linked object

1.	Click the OLE object using the Pick tool.

2.	Click Edit, Linked Object, Edit.

The Server application is automatically launched and the linked file is opened.

The exact text for the Edit menu item changes depending on the object type. For example, if the selected a CorelDRAW object, the Edit menu item reads CorelDRAW Object.

3.	Edit the object as required.

 Tip

•	You can also double-click the OLE object to launch the server application.

To edit an OLE object as a different type of OLE object

1.	Click the OLE object using the Pick tool.

2.	Click Edit, Linked Object, Convert.

The exact text for the Edit menu item changes depending on the object type. For example, if the selected a CorelDRAW object, the Edit menu item reads CorelDRAW Object.

3.	Enable the Activate As button.

4.	Choose an object type from the Object Type list box.

When you perform this task, you do not change the actual object type, only the way the object is edited.

5.	Edit the object as required.

 Note

•	To return to Corel VENTURA, click the Publication widow (outside of the OLE object frame).

To convert an OLE object to a different type of OLE object

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Enable the Convert To button.

3.	Choose an object type from the Object Type list box.

 Related Topics


Breaking an OLE link

If you do not want to update a linked OLE object again, you can break its OLE link. Once the OLE link is broken, it cannot be restored and you will not be able to edit the OLE object.

To break an OLE link

1.	Click the OLE object using the Pick tool.

2.	Click Edit, Links.

3.	Click the Break Link button.

 Related Topics


Changing the source for a linked file

Changing the source of a linked object allows you to either update the location of the linked object, if the file has been moved, or to change the content of the linked object by selecting a new file.

To change the source for a linked file

1.	Click the OLE object using the Pick tool.

2.	Click Edit, Links.

3.	Click the linked object in the Links list.

4.	Click the Change Source button.

5.	Browse to the folder where the file is located.

6.	Double-click the filename.

 Related Topics


Updating linked OLE objects

You can set your OLE objects to update automatically or manually.

To set linked OLE objects to update automatically

1.	Click the OLE object using the Pick tool.

2.	Click Edit, Links.

3.	Click the linked object in the Links list.

4.	Enable the Automatic button.

To set linked OLE objects to update manually

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure.

2.	Enable the Manual button.

To update linked OLE objects manually

1.	Follow steps 1 to 3 from the "To set linked OLE objects to update automatically" procedure.

2.	Click the Update Now button.

 Related Topics


Embedding OLE objects


Overview: Embedding OLE objects
Embedding OLE objects

Embedding is one of two ways to insert an OLE object into a client application. The other way is to link the object. For more information about linking objects, see "Linking OLE objects."

Editing embedded objects

When you edit an embedded OLE object, you can do so from within the client application. This is referred to as "in-place" editing. Rather the launching the server application, all of the controls, toolbars, and menu commands of the server application appear in the client application. You must have the server application installed on your computer to use in-place editing and the application must support this OLE feature. For more information about an application's OLE functionality, see its documentation.

 Related Topics


Embedding OLE objects

When you embed an OLE object in a client application file, that file contains all of the information required to edit and display the OLE object. No source file is required.

To embed an OLE object in Corel VENTURA

1.	Click Insert, Object.

2.	Enable the Create From File button.

3.	Click the Browse button, and select the file you want to embed.

4.	Disable the Link check box.

To embed an OLE object using the Clipboard

1.	In the server application select the object you want to embed.

2.	Click Edit, Copy.

3.	In Corel VENTURA, open the publication into which you want to insert the object.

4.	Click Edit, Paste.

To embed an object by dragging

1.	In Corel VENTURA, open the publication into which you want to insert the object.

Make sure the server and client application windows are visible at the same time.

2.	In the server application, select the object you want to embed.

3.	Drag the selected object into the Corel VENTURA Publication window.

 Notes

•	Dragging deletes the object from the server application and moves it to the client application. If you want to copy the object, hold CTRL while dragging the object.

•	To return to Corel VENTURA, click the Publication widow (outside of the OLE object frame).

 Related Topics


Editing and converting embedded OLE objects

When you edit an embedded OLE object, the toolbars, menus, and other controls of the server application become available in the client application. This is referred to as in-place editing.

Sometimes it is possible to edit an OLE object as if it were a different type of OLE object or to convert an OLE object to a different type of object. These features allow you to choose the application with which you can edit the OLE object; however, these features are rarely available.

To edit an embedded object

1.	Click the OLE object using the Pick tool.

2.	Click Edit, Object, Edit.

The exact text for the Edit menu item changes depending on the object type. For example, if the selected a CorelDRAW object, the Edit menu item reads CorelDRAW Object.

3.	Edit the object as required.

 Tip

•	You can also double-click the OLE object to access the server application's controls to edit the object.

To edit an OLE object as a different type of OLE object

1.	Click the OLE object using the Pick tool.

2.	Click Edit, Object, Convert.

The exact text for the Edit menu item changes depending on the object type. For example, if the selected a CorelDRAW object, the Edit menu item reads CorelDRAW Object.

3.	Click the Activate As button.

4.	Choose an object type from the Object Type list box.

When you perform this task, you do not change the actual object type, only the way the object is edited.

5.	Edit the object as required.

 Note

•	To return to Corel VENTURA, click the Publication widow (outside of the OLE object frame).

To convert an OLE object to a different type of OLE object

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.

2.	Enable the Convert To button.

3.	Choose an object type from the Object Type list box.

 Related Topics


Shortcuts


Overview: Shortcuts
Shortcuts

Corel VENTURA offers many ways to save you time. For example, you can access many of the dialog boxes and commands by using keystrokes or by clicking buttons on the various toolbars. You can customize many of the keyboard shortcuts and create buttons for other commands by using the Customize dialog box, which you access by clicking Tools, Customize. Included in this section are the default shortcuts that come with Corel VENTURA.

You can create your own list of assigned shortcuts by running the keyboard shortcut script or from the Options dialog box. For more information, see "Viewing and printing current keyboard shortcuts."V Other shortcuts appear as buttons on the toolbars. Just as with keyboard shortcuts, buttons can be customized and assigned to various things. For information on customizing keyboard shortcuts and buttons, see "Customizing menus, toolbars, and keyboard shortcuts."

Shortcuts

File and Edit menu command shortcuts

Other menu command shortcuts

Text shortcuts

Graphic object editing shortcuts

Toolbox shortcuts

Navigation shortcuts

Tagging shortcuts

 Related Topics


File and Edit menu command shortcuts

The shortcuts below are default Corel VENTURA shortcuts. For information on customizing your shortcuts, see "Customizing menus, toolbars, and keyboard shortcuts."

File menu shortcuts

Press...	To...

CTRL + N	Open a new publication using the default template

CTRL + O	Open an existing publication

CTRL + S	Save your publication

CRTL + SHIFT + W	Add a chapter to the selected publication

F9	Import text

F8	Import a picture

CTRL + ALT + Q	Acquire a picture using CorelSCAN

CTRL + ALT + X	Export the picture in the selected frame

CTRL + P	Print your publication

CTRL + F4	Close the active publication

ALT + F4	Exit Corel VENTURA

Edit menu shortcuts

Press...	To...

CTRL + Z or ALT + BACKSPACE	Undo your last action (up to the number of Undo/Redo Levels indicated: to check the number of levels, click Tools, Options, click the General tab, and locate the Undo/Redo Levels number box.)

CTRL + SHIFT + Z	Reverses the last Undo

CTRL + ALT + Y	Repeats the last action

CTRL + X or SHIFT + DELETE	Cut the selection to the Clipboard and remove it from the active publication

CTRL + C or CRTL + INSERT	Copy the selection to the Clipboard and leave it in the active publication

CTRL + V or SHIFT + INSERT	Paste the contents of the Clipboard at the cursor

CTRL + SHIFT + INSERT	Duplicates the selected object(s)

DELETE	Delete the selected item or text

CTRL + A	Select all

CTRL + F	Open the Find And Replace dialog box

CTRL + D	Edit a special item (footnote, marker, etc.)

 Related Topics


Other menu command shortcuts

The shortcuts below are default Corel VENTURA shortcuts. For information on customizing your shortcuts, see "Customizing menus, toolbars, and keyboard shortcuts."

View menu shortcuts

Press...	To...

ALT + F10	Switch to Copy Editor view

ALT + F11	Switch to Page Layout view

ALT + F12	Switch to Page Tag view

SHIFT + F2	Open the Zoom dialog box

CTRL + G	Open the Go To Page dialog box

CTRL + K	Hide/display frame borders

CTRL + H	Hide/display tabs and returns

CTRL + ALT + G	Hide/display column guides

F7	Opens the last dialog box used

CTRL + Y	Snaps objects to the grid

CTRL + W	Refresh the Document Window

Insert menu shortcuts

Press...	To...

CTRL + SHIFT + D	Insert the current date and time

CTRL + SHIFT + E	Insert an endnote reference

CTRL + SHIFT + Q	Insert an equation

CTRL + SHIFT + F	Insert a footnote reference

ALT + SHIFT + H	Insert hidden text

CTRL + SHIFT + L	Insert a hyperlink

CTRL + SHIFT + I	Insert an index entry

CTRL + SHIFT + K	Insert a marker

CTRL + SHIFT + C	Insert a number or cross reference

CTRL + ENTER	Insert a page break

CTRL + SHIFT + Y	Insert a symbol

CTRL + SHIFT + V	Insert a variable marker

CTRL + SHIFT + O	Insert an object from another application

Publication menu shortcuts

Press...	To...

CTRL + SHIFT + B	Open the Publication Properties dialog box

CTRL + SHIFT + X	Open the Table Of Contents/Index Properties dialog box

ALT + K	Open the Edit Tracking & Kerning dialog box

CTRL + F2	Update the automatic paragraph numbering for the current chapter

CTRL + SHIFT + W	Add a chapter to the current publication

Page menu shortcuts

Press...	To...

ALT + DELETE	Delete pages from the publication

ALT + SHIFT + I	insert pages into the publication

Format menu shortcuts

Press...	To...

CTRL + SHIFT + S	Open the Text Properties dialog box

CTRL + F7	Open the Frame Properties dialog box

CTRL + SHIFT + T	Open the Edit Text dialog box (you must have Artistic Text selected to use this command)

CTRL + F10	Open the Paragraph Properties dialog box

SHIFT + F9	Open the Tag window

CTRL + F2	Update Auto Numbering

F7	Open the last-used dialog box

ALT + ENTER	Open the Properties dialog box for the selection (Paragraph Properties, Table Text Properties, Frame Properties)

ALT + G	Group the selected objects

ALT + U	Ungroup the selected grouped objects

ALT + N	Edit page numbering

CTRL + SHIFT + B	Edit publication properties

ALT + K	Edit tracking and kerning

CTRL + F2	Update automatic page numbering in the current chapter

CTRL + . (period)	Select the next frame on the page

CTRL + , (comma)	Select the previous frame on the page

CTRL + SHIFT + SPACEBAR	Toggle the selection between a frame and the text in the frame

SHIFT + F12	Send object to back

SHIFT + F11	Bring object to front

CTRL + F11	Bring object forward one layer

CTRL + F12	Send object back one layer

CTRL + Q	Convert selected object to curves

ALT + 1	Align the left edges of selected objects

ALT + 2	Align the right edges of selected objects

ALT + 3	Align the top edges of selected objects

ALT + 4	Align the bottom edges of selected objects

ALT + 5	Center object(s) vertically

ALT + 6	Center object(s) horizontally

ALT + 7	Place an even amount of horizontal space between selected objects

ALT + 8	Place an even amount of vertical space between selected objects

Table menu shortcuts

Press...	To...

CTRL + F9	Open the Table Properties dialog box

ALT + SHIFT + T	Create a new table

Tools menu shortcuts

Press...	To...

CTRL + J	Set Corel VENTURA options

CTRL + F8	Open the Spell Checker dialog box

CTRL + ALT + H	Open the Hyphenation For Selected Word dialog box

Window menu shortcuts

Press...	To...

ALT + CTRL + S	Split the publication window

CTRL + W	Refresh the Document Window

Help menu shortcuts

Press...	To...

CTRL + F1	Open the online Help

SHIFT + F1	Enable the What's This tool to access context-sensitive Help about a clicked item

 Related Topics


Text shortcuts

The shortcuts below are default Corel VENTURA shortcuts. For information on customizing your shortcuts, see "Customizing menus, toolbars, and keyboard shortcuts."

Text-formatting shortcuts

Press...	To...

ALT + SHIFT + F	Access the Font List

CTRL + SHIFT + G	Access the Paragraph Tag list

CTRL + <	Decrease the font size of the selected text by one point

CTRL + >	Increase the font size of the selected text by one point

CTRL + M	Format selected text as normal

CTRL + B	Apply/remove bold formatting to/from the selected text

CTRL + I	Apply/remove italic formatting to/from the selected text

CTRL + U	Apply/remove single underline to/from the selected text

ALT + SHIFT + D	Apply/remove double underline to/from the selected text

CTRL + =	Apply/remove Subscript to/from the selected text

CTRL + +	Apply/remove Superscript to/from the selected text

CTRL + L	Left align the selected text or paragraph

CTRL + E	Center align the selected text or paragraph

CTRL + R	Right align the selected text or paragraph

ALT + J	Justifies the selected text or paragraph

CTRL + SHIFT + U	Change the selected text to uppercase

CTRL + {	Decrease interline spacing by .5 point

CTRL + }	Increase interline spacing by .5 point

CTRL + [	Loosen the tracking of the selected text by .01 ems

CTRL + ]	Tighten the tracking of the selected text by .01 ems

Symbols and special characters shortcuts

Press...	To insert a...

CTRL + ALT + C	Copyright mark

CTRL + ALT + R	Registered trademark

CTRL + ALT + T	Trademark

CTRL + SHIFT + H	Hyphen

ALT + . (period)	Ellipsis

ALT + _	Em dash

ALT + -	En dash

CTRL + SHIFT + M	Em space

CTRL + SHIFT + N	En space

CTRL + ALT + F	Figure space

CTRL + SPACEBAR	Non breaking space

CTRL + T	Thin space

CTRL + '	Quote (single opening)

ALT + '	Quote (single closing)

ALT + "	Quote (double opening)

CTRL + "	Quote (double closing)

Text selection shortcuts

Press...	To...

CTRL + click a sentence	Select a sentence

ALT + click a paragraph	Select a paragraph

CTRL + ALT + click each	Select multiple paragraphs
paragraph

SHIFT + click each paragraph	Select sequential paragraphs
with the Paragraph tool

SHIFT + click at the end of	Select text from the cursor to another point
a selection

 Related Topics


Graphic object editing shortcuts

The shortcuts below are default Corel VENTURA shortcuts. For information on customizing your shortcuts, see "Customizing menus, toolbars, and keyboard shortcuts."

Node-editing shortcuts

Press...	To...

ALT + SHIFT + A	Add a node to an edited curve

the left arrow key	Nudge the selected node(s) to the left

the right arrow key	Nudge the selected node(s) to the right

the up arrow key	Nudge the selected node(s) up

the down arrow key	Nudge the selected node(s) down

Delete	Delete the curve

CTRL + ALT + A	Opens the Alignment toolbar

 Related Topics


Toolbox shortcuts

The shortcuts below are default Corel VENTURA shortcuts. For information on customizing your shortcuts, see "Customizing menus, toolbars, and keyboard shortcuts."

Toolbox shortcuts

Press...	To...

SHIFT + F3	Open the Uniform Fill dialog box

ALT + F3	Open the Fountain Fill dialog box

SHIFT + F5	Opens the Outline Color dialog box

ALT + F5	Open the Outline Pen dialog box

ALT + L	Opens the Frame Tools toolbar

 Related Topics


Navigation shortcuts

The shortcuts below are default Corel VENTURA shortcuts. For information on customizing your shortcuts, see "Customizing menus, toolbars, and keyboard shortcuts."

Publication-navigation shortcuts

Press...	To...

ALT + HOME	Go to the beginning of the chapter

ALT +END	Go to the end of the chapter

CTRL + HOME	Go to the beginning of the publication (moves to the beginning of the text file in Copy Editor view)

CTRL + END 	Go to the end of the publication (moves to end of the text file in Copy Editor view)

ALT + PAGE DOWN	Go to the next chapter

ALT + PAGE UP	Go to the previous chapter

CTRL + PAGE DOWN	Go to the next page

CTRL + PAGE UP	Go to the previous page

PAGE DOWN	Go to the next page or screen

PAGE UP	Go to the previous page or screen

SHIFT + PAGE DOWN	Select the next screen

SHIFT + PAGE UP	Select the previous screen

CTRL + G	Open the Go To dialog box

F2	Zoom in

F3	Zoom out

F4	Zoom to actual size

F5	Zoom to page

F6	Zoom to facing pages

SHIFT + F6	Zoom to selected object(s)

Dialog box navigation

Press...	To...

F7	Open the most recently used dialog box

TAB	Move to the next option

SHIFT + TAB	Move to the previous option

ESC	Close the dialog box without applying any changes

SPACEBAR	Enable or disable the active check box

ENTER	Choose the selected option in a list box

 Related Topics


Tagging shortcuts

The shortcuts below are default Corel VENTURA shortcuts. For information on customizing your shortcuts, see "Customizing menus, toolbars, and keyboard shortcuts."

Tagging shortcuts

Press...	To...

CTRL + ALT + P	Lock page tag objects (Page Layout view)

CTRL + SHIFT + P	Create a new paragraph tag

CTRL + ALT + O	Update a paragraph tag

 Related Topics


Developing third-party hyphenation lists


Developing third-party hyphenation lists

Corel VENTURA allows you to create and use custom hyphenation lists to supplement those that are already supplied with Corel VENTURA. For example, you may want to use hyphenation lists for cases where:

•	you are using a language that was not supplied with Corel VENTURA

•	you are using a dialect of a language supplied with Corel VENTURA

•	you are using word sets with large, complex words, such as scientific, engineering, or medical terminology

If you are interested in the development of hyphenation lists, it may be useful to know that they are basically Windows DLL files, with a .VPH filename extension.

Although Corel VENTURA provides you with a standard hyphenation list to which you can add words, there may be times when a third-party hyphenation list may be quite handy: however, as these are third-party tools, Corel makes no warranty, expressed or implied, regarding the use of hyphenation lists you create, nor does Corel assume any obligation or liability for their use.

 Related Topics


Distributing third-party hyphenation lists

You can freely distribute the hyphenation lists you create, provided:

•	You do not use the logo, name, or trademarks of Corel.

•	You include a valid copyright notice in the hyphenation lists you create.

•	You agree to indemnify Corel against any claims or lawsuits arising from your use or distribution of the hyphenation lists you create and distribute.

Corel makes no warranty, expressed or implied, regarding the use of hyphenation lists you create, nor does Corel assume any obligation or liability for their use.

 Related Topics


Technical support for your third-party hyphenation lists

Corel technical support representatives cannot assist you in the development or sale of hyphenation lists, nor can they provide support for third-party hyphenation lists that you may acquire or use.

 Related Topics


Third-party hyphenation APIs

The third-party hyphenation algorithms, in the form of DLLs, are enumerated, or registered, when Corel VENTURA is launched, if they use the filename extension (.VPH). For the hyphenation list to be enumerated properly, the following exported APIs must be supported by the third-party hyphenation list's DLL files:

•	INIT	VPHYPH_Init

•	Capabilities	VPHYPH_Capabilities

•	Terminate	VPHYPH_Terminate

•	InitLanguage	VPHYPH_InitLanguage

The following APIs are optional:

•	Hyphenate	VPHYPH_Hyphenate

•	SpellCheck	VPHYPH_SpellCheck

The Corel VENTURA installation CD-ROM contains a folder named DEVKITS\HYPHENATORS. In this folder is a sample hyphenation list named DISHYPH.VPH. DISHYPH was written in the C++ programming language. The source files used to created DISHYPH are included in the DEVKITS\HYPHENATORS\SOURCE folder.

 Related Topics


Hyphenation identification numbers

Each list is internally referenced in Corel VENTURA by a unique identification number. Because each hyphenation list has a unique identification number, you must ensure that any hyphenation lists you create do not use numbers already reserved for the lists supplied with Corel VENTURA or, if you use other third-party hyphenation lists, by other third-party developers. For information on these identification numbers and to get your own list identification number you can contact the Corel Solutions Partners by email at partners@corel.com or by phone at 801-765-4151. There is no charge for reserving an identification number. Toll charges apply to the phone call. It should be stressed that this procedure is very important if you plan to distribute your hyphenation lists.

 Related Topics


The Corel VENTURA Hyphenation Tester

Corel VENTURA includes the Corel VENTURA Hyphenation Tester, a tool you can use to check your hyphenation entries. This utility is not installed with Corel VENTURA but is available from the Corel VENTURA installation CD-ROM in the DEVKITS\HYPHENATORS folder.

To start the Corel VENTURA Hyphenation Tester

•	In Microsoft Explorer, double-click the Corel VENTURA Hyphenation Tester icon (HYPHAPP.EXE).

To test a word in the Corel VENTURA Hyphenation Tester

1.	Choose the hyphenation list to test from the Language list box.

2.	Type a number in the Minimum Letters In Word box.

3.	Type a number in the Minimum Letters Before Hyphen.

4.	Type a number in the Minimum Letters After Hyphen.

5.	Type a word in the Sample Word box.

6.	Click the Execute button.

The suggested hyphenation appears in the Output box.

 Related Topics


Troubleshooting


Overview: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting

The information in this section will help you deal with printing problems, customizable files, and error messages that may occur as you use Corel VENTURA. If you have any technical problems, you should read the information in this section before contacting Corel Technical Support. For information about your support options, see Corel services and support

 More Detailed Information
 Related Topics


Overview: Troubleshooting techniques
Troubleshooting techniques

While working in Corel VENTURA, you may encounter problems printing, saving files, opening files, importing, exporting, and so on. Though each individual problem may have a different cause, there are some general steps you can follow in attempting to troubleshoot your problem. In many cases it will save you a call to Technical Support!

1.	Can you duplicate the problem?

Try performing the same function again. This is the first step in troubleshooting. Occasionally, a temporary memory problem will interrupt a function, and simply trying again will allow you to complete that task.

•	No

It is difficult to identify the cause of a problem that can't be reproduced. Continue working, but take note of operating conditions if the problem does occur again. This will enable Technical Support to assist you more effectively if you decide to call.

•	Yes

If you can duplicate the problem, it may be file, program, or system specific. Proceed to Step 2.

2.	Is the problem system specific?

•	This step is sometimes appropriate at the beginning of a troubleshooting session and is sometimes left to the end. Before spending a lot of time analyzing the cause of a problem, it is often a good idea to determine if the problems occur only on one system.

•	If you have access to another computer, try the function or file there. Or, if the problems are printing related, try using a different printer. If the problems persist on more than one computer, zero in on file-specific issues. If not, concentrate on the system settings, installation, and finally hardware issues.

•	If you do not have access to another computer running Corel VENTURA, proceed to the next step.

3.	Is the problem file specific?

•	If you can reproduce the problem consistently, the culprit may be the file itself, Corel VENTURA, or your computer. This step attempts to determine if the problem is unique to this file or if it may be caused by a program or system issue.

•	If you are having problems saving, printing, or exporting, etc., try opening another file of the same type and performing the same function. If the function works properly with the second file, then the first file likely contains one or more corrupted objects, or is too corrupted for the function you are trying to perform. If this is the case, see the notes below "Dealing with complexity issues "or" "Dealing with corrupted objects or files."

•	If you are having problems opening or importing a file, try opening or importing other files into the same application. Also, try importing the problem file into other applications. For example, if you have trouble importing a .TXT file into Corel VENTURA, try taking it into a different Windows application. The goal, again, is to determine whether problems are contained in the file or are caused by something else.

4.	Is the problem software specific?

•	If a problem can be reproduced but is not limited to just one file, then the problem is being caused by Corel VENTURA, by hardware, or by other software on the computer, such as drivers or Windows.

•	If it is possible, try the same files and functions on another system running Corel VENTURA, determine whether the root of the problem is based on one system as opposed to being software generated. If this test is not possible, try to collect as much information as possible about whether the problem occurs only in Corel VENTURA. You can do this by trying to perform similar functions; e.g., printing, or importing into other Windows applications. If problems appear in other applications, then the cause is within the operating system of the computer hardware itself. Sometimes video or printer drivers can cause problems. There may even be problems with a particular Windows setup.

If following the above steps does not resolve your problem, you may wish to contact Technical Support.

 More Detailed Information
 Related Topics


Overview: INI files and other customizable files
INI files and other customizable files

The user interface in Corel VENTURA has been modified in such a way that you rarely need to open the VENTURA.INI (configuration) file to customize the program settings. Most controls can be set through the user interface.

The VENTURA.INI file contains a few switches for users to modify but primarily it keeps track of settings made through the user interface. If this file is damaged, problems with functions such as printing or saving can occur. You can delete the VENTURA.INI file if you suspect it has become damaged. Corel VENTURA will automatically regenerate the file the next time you open the application. Make sure you exit from the Corel VENTURA before deleting this file.

Server Busy

The AppResponseTimeout setting in the [Settings] section of the VENTURA.INI file sets the default timeout for OLE Server commands. This setting is expressed in seconds. If you often receive Server Busy warnings you may want to increase this setting (the default is 45) or set it to 0 to disable it. The VENTURA.INI file can be edited with any text editor and is located in C:\COREL\GRAPHICS8\WORKSPACE\VENTURA8\_BOOTDEFAULT folder. You should not have Corel VENTURA running when editing VENTURA.INI.

Damaged program files

If you suspect problems with program files including import and export filters, you may want to consider running the setup program again and reinstalling the portions of the application that may be causing problems.

 More Detailed Information
 Related Topics


Printing troubleshooting


Overview: Printing troubleshooting
Printing troubleshooting

When you print a file through Corel VENTURA:

1.	You will see a progress meter increase to 100% as the file is processed.

2.	If the process is completed successfully, the print job will be passed to the Windows print spooler.

3.	If everything runs smoothly, the print job will then be passed to the printer.

At any one of these stages, the process may break down. The first step in determining where the problem lies is to identify at which of the above three steps printing stopped.

If you encounter problems while printing a file, consider the following troubleshooting tips in an attempt to determine where the problem lies and how to resolve it

Printing stops in Corel VENTURA

•	Exit and restart Corel VENTURA

•	Has the file printed before? Is this a repeatable problem?

•	Is it one file or all files that are having print problems?

•	Ensure that the default printer is correct.

•	While working in an application, temporary files are created and stored on your computer. Exit Windows completely and delete any .TMP files in the Windows TEMP folder. While here, ensure that you have at least 100 MB of free disk space.

•	Check system resources under Programs\ACCESSORIES\SYSTEM TOOLS\RESOURCE METER and free memory for each drive from Windows Explorer by highlighting the drive icon, right-clicking, and choosing Properties. If these values are low, exit and restart Windows. Also make sure you do not have other Windows applications running.

•	Is the print spooler on? Try disabling it.

•	Does a backup copy of the publication exist. Try printing it.

Printing stops in the print queue

•	Select the Printer Properties for the Printer from the Printer folder in the Windows Control Panel. Click the Details tab and increase the value for the Transmission retry.

•	Check Load and Run statements in WIN.INI. Programs and utilities can be set to run automatically when Windows is started by adding references to these lines. Type a semi-colon (;) in front of either line if there is anything referenced. Remember to save, exit, and restart Windows after making changes to WIN.INI.

•	Move any icons in the Windows Startup group to another icon group.

•	While working in an application, temporary files are created and stored on your computer. Exit Windows completely and delete any .TMP files in the Windows TEMP folder. While here, ensure that you have at least 100 MB of free disk space.

•	Make sure you are using a Windows 95-or Windows NT-compatible printer driver.

•	Will other Windows applications print? If not, look at Windows setup or configuration issues, as the problem may be occurring within the operating system or the system hardware.

Printing stops in the printer

•	Maximize time-outs on the printer if possible. Refer to your printer documentation for instructions.

•	Check time-outs on the network, if applicable.

•	Check to see how much RAM is resident in the printer. A minimum of 1.5 MB is required to print a full page of graphics to a 300 dpi device. To print fairly complex files, we recommend a minimum of 8 MB of RAM in the printer. (Note: some files may require more than 8 MB).

•	Make sure the amount of RAM selected in the printer driver matches the physical RAM on the printer.

•	Do you print directly or through a switchbox or network? If possible, try connecting directly.

•	Make sure you are using an up-to-date printer driver.

Bitmap resolution

•	Bitmaps are often scanned at a high resolution. Contact your service bureau to request the optimum resolution (often between 75 and 150 dpi). If the file is not being outputted to film or a high output device, a resolution of 75 to 90 dpi should be adequate.

Reducing the complexity of the file

•	In the Print dialog box, click the PostScript tab. Here you will find a setting called Maximum Points Per Curves. This setting can be modified to enable complex files to print. You can set values between 20 and 20,000. The default setting is 1500. When printing files that have complex fills (i.e. fountain fills, vector fills, bitmap fills, and PostScript textures) within complex shapes (text or a freehand drawn shape) set the value to 600 or less to help simplify the data sent to the printer. Lowering this value will lengthen print times; however, the file will be more likely to print.

•	Click File, Print, PostScript tab. Here you will find an option called Set Flatness To. Increasing this value will simplify the print job. As a general rule, try increasing the value to a maximum of 3 or 4, otherwise you will impact image quality. A better step is to enable Auto Increase Flatness. This value will simplify printing while reducing the quality of the image only to the point where degradation becomes noticeable.

 Note

•	When Bezier curves are used to describe a path on a PostScript printer, the interpreter must first "flatten" the path in order to render it as a series of straight lines. The "Flatness" setting affects the degree of accuracy used during the "flattening" process, hence the number of straight lines that are used to describe the curved path. The higher the value, the less accurate the "flattened" or "approximated" path will be. A circle, for example, will start to look more like an octagon as the Flatness setting is raised.

PostScript-specific checklist

Enable the PostScript error information for the printer. This option is available on the PostScript page of the Printers Properties in the Windows Control Panel. If PostScript is having difficulty interpreting the file, an error code will be printed.

 Related Topics


Overview: Troubleshooting printing problems
Troubleshooting printing problems

Printer drivers

Corel does not develop or distribute printer drivers. We rely on the printer manufacturer or Microsoft to provide drivers that are supported in the Windows environment. If you can print in Windows, you should be able to print from Corel VENTURA.

Printed output is incorrect

•	Check the print preview. The print preview displays the file exactly as it should print out. If this screen does not look correct, the print-out will not be correct either.

•	Check cables and connections for potential communication problems. A communication problem is indicated by the appearance of ASCII characters on your page where graphic objects should be (e.g., happy faces, stars, etc.)

•	Make sure you are using the most up-to-date printer driver.

•	Check the Automated Fax on Demand System catalog for topics dealing with specific printing problems.

Dealing with complexity issues

•	For PostScript printing problems, try setting the Number of Points in Curves to 300 (on the PostScript page), and enabling Auto Increase Flatness.

 Related Topics


Error messages


Overview: Unexpected condition error messages
Unexpected condition error messages

Please check the following items after restarting your computer:

•	Can you repeat the error?

•	Does it occur at the same time consistently?

If the answer to either question is yes, please make note of the steps taken to reproduce or cause this error, along with information about your computer and its setup and call Technical Support.

If the answer is no, try using the suggestions provided in "Diagnosing IPFs and system lockups."

 Related Topics


Overview: Diagnosing IPFs and system lockups
Diagnosing IPFs and system lockups

The operation of current computer systems depends upon the dynamic and interactive manipulation of data in computer memory. Invalid Page Faults (IPFs) or Illegal Operation Error messages are caused by a misallocation of available memory by the operating system. Optimal performance of your computer is essential for the correct operation of true 32-bit software and can be achieved by following the steps outlined in this document. Before attempting to diagnose and correct errors within the Windows 95 environment, the following precautions are strongly recommended:

A. Create a Startup disk to allow recovery of basic computer function in the event of complete system failure. The Startup disk may be created during the Windows 95 installation or after installation is complete by clicking Start, Settings, Control Panel. Double-click the Add/Remove Programs icon, and click the Startup disk tab. Click Create Disk.

B. Copy the SYSTEM.DAT, USER.DAT, CONFIG.SYS, AUTOEXEC.BAT, WIN.INI and SYSTEM.INI files, plus CD-ROM and other device drivers to a folder on the Startup disk, and to an additional disk, if there is not enough space on the Startup disk.

 Note

•	These files are essential to the operating system. If you are unsure about how to edit these files, contact a Microsoft representative for further assistance. Please back up all files before making any changes by copying these files to a disk, or to another folder.

Troubleshooting Steps

A system IPF may be eliminated by one or a combination of the following troubleshooting steps. Try to recreate the IPF error after completing each of the steps to determine whether the problem has been solved.

1.	Exit all applications; click Shut Down. Restart The Computer. Try to duplicate the error that caused the original failure. The error condition may not reappear if it was caused by a momentary memory conflict.

2.	Simultaneously press CONTROL, ALT, and DELETE on the keyboard. The Close Program dialog box opens. With the exception of Explorer, highlight an item and click End Task. You will have to repeat this sequence of steps for each item you disable. Launch the application again and test for the IPF error. If the error has been eliminated, restart the tasks that you ended until the conflicting program or device has been identified.

3.	Disable the Windows background, screen saver and any third-party memory managers, then test for the IPF error.

4.	Remove all applications from the STARTUP folder.

5.	Verify that all devices (CD-ROM, display adapters, monitor, mouse, sound) are operating properly. Click Start, Settings, Control Panel, System, Device Manager. By double-clicking a device and viewing the properties of that device, the device status may be viewed. Any device with a memory conflict will display a yellow 'flag' with an exclamation point inside it. Devices that are not recognized by Windows 95 will be displayed with a red X. Devices with missing or incorrect software drivers will be identified as Other Devices.

6.	All applications require an area of hard drive space to be set aside for the creation of temporary files used during the course of normal operations. At the DOS Command Prompt, enter the command SET to find the TEMP folder path(s). A TEMP folder path will be generated:

TMP=C:\WINDOWS\TEMP

TEMP=C:\WINDOWS\TEMP

Windows 95 supports TEMP files in the WINDOWS\TEMP folder by default. This TEMP folder must be located on a drive with ample space for expansion. If the drive where the TEMP folder is located has less than 100-200 MB of free space (increase this space if performing intensive graphics work), relocate the TEMP directory to an uncompressed drive by modifying or constructing appropriate statements in the AUTOEXEC.BAT file as follows:

SET TEMP=D:\TEMP	(where D: represents any drive with adequate disk space)

SET TMP=D:\TEMP

7.	Click Start, Control Panel, System, Performance. Select the following settings:

•	Graphics > Turn OFF any video acceleration. This prevents possible memory conflicts.

•	Virtual Memory > Virtual Memory (Swap File) is space reserved on the hard drive to store information the computer memory requires on an ongoing basis. You may specify your own settings to redirect this space as follows:

Select "Let Me Specify My Own Virtual Memory Settings."

Relocate the virtual memory to a non-compressed drive with ample space for expansion, and specify a Minimum value roughly twice as large as the amount of RAM on the computer. Allow Windows 95 to set its own Maximum value.

Start the computer when prompted. Windows will revert to managing the virtual memory by expanding or contracting it within the boundaries of your specified settings.

 Note

•	In addition to Temp space, allow 100 MB for virtual memory (if you are performing intensive graphics work).

8.	Click Start, Run, and type the command SYSEDIT in the Open list box. Click OK. A series of windows containing system configuration files will cascade within this dialog box.

Edit each configuration file by placing the letters REM or a semicolon (followed by a space) in front of inappropriate statements as follows:

AUTOEXEC.BAT

REM out any lines that reference: Set mouse..., set lmouse..., set msinput..., set temp=C:\DOS..., set sound..., set sb16..., set midi..., set vibra..., DOS command line entries (i.e.: Display.SYS..., Power.EXE..., Share.EXE).

CONFIG.SYS

REM out any lines that reference: HIMEM.SYS, EMM386.EXE..., SETVER.EXE...,

Close window and save changes if prompted.

In the WIN.INI file, two lines must be disabled by placing a semicolon (; [space] ) in front of the line: (if applicable) "

load=..." becomes "; load=" and "run=..." becomes "; run="

 Note

•	Some terminate-and-stay-resident programs (TSRs) require system resources that may conflict with the normal operation of your computer. If this step resolves the IPF error, contact the manufacturer of that program or driver.

To determine if any of these TSRs are being loaded by WIN.INI, click Search, Find, and then type in the name of the TSR (e.g., Search / Find "POINTER.EXE"). If an entry is found, disable the line by placing a semicolon (; [space]) at the beginning of the line. Close the window and save your changes if prompted.

9.	Run the Scandisk* utility. Click Start, Programs, Accessories, System Tools, ScanDisk. The Automatically Fix Errors check box should be enabled. This will repair lost clusters and corrupted sectors of the hard drive.

10.	The drive partitions should be defragmented. Defragmentation consolidates the information stored on the hard drive so that it is more easily accessed and prevents read–write errors when the hard drive is activated. Click Start, Programs, Accessories, System Tools, Disk Defragmenter.

11.	Start the computer. When "Starting Windows 95" appears, press F8. Choose Step-by-Step Confirmation. Choose NO to avoid executing the AUTOEXEC.BAT and CONFIG.SYS files. Choose YES when prompted for all other questions.

12.	Install the Standard VGA display driver. Click Start, Settings, Control Panel. Double-click the Display icon and click the Settings tab. Click Change Display Type. Click Change beside the Adapter Type box. Click the Show All Devices button. Choose Standard display types, Standard Display Adapter (VGA) from the Models list box. If the video card installed on the computer is not supported by Windows 95, have a backup copy of the driver on hand.

13.	Check system resources. Click Start, Programs, Accessories, System Tools, Resource Meter*. This will place the resource meter in the bottom right corner of the display. Double-clicking this icon will display system statistics. Low values for System Resources, User Resources, or GDI Resources indicate that system performance is deficient and may be the cause of IPF errors.

14.	Uninstall the application. Click Start, Settings, Control Panel. Double-click the Add/Remove Programs icon. Choose the application to uninstall, or run the Corel Uninstall utility located in the Corel folder. Start the computer and reinstall the application when finished.

15.	Safe Mode removes all specific system configuration settings and loads generic Windows 95 device drivers. It is a method of determining if system settings and device-specific drivers, etc., are interfering with the normal operation of hardware and software. To operate in Safe Mode, start the computer. When "Starting Windows 95" appears, press F8. Select Safe Mode. This will bypass all startup routines including registry entries, CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT files, and the [Boot] and [386Enh] sections of the SYSTEM.INI file. The standard VGA display driver will also be installed at this time. If the installed video card is not supported by Windows 95, be sure to have a backup copy of the driver on hand.

 Note

•	You will notice reduced system speed and lower display resolution during this test. Safe Mode may also disable any CD-ROM devices. Starting the computer will return the system to the default configuration at any time.

16.	Empty the RECYCLE BIN (if activated) of unwanted files. Right-Click the Recycle Bin icon, and click Properties and choose Use One Setting For All Drives. Select 0%, then select "Do not move files to the Recycle Bin..." This procedure prevents WINDOWS 95 from filling the hard disk with copies of deleted files. Because the Recycle Bin uses hard drive space, disabling it allows resource-intensive software to access the previously-reserved space.

 Note

•	All subsequently deleted files will be irretrievable.

17.	Start the computer. When "Starting Windows 95" appears, press F8 and select Command prompt only. Start Windows 95 by entering these commands on consecutive starts, or enter either of these commands if a specific condition is suspected:

WIN /D:X >This disables the adapter area (from A000 to FFFF) which Windows 95 scans for unused space. This may resolve memory problems on systems using video accelerator cards.

18.	If the system locks up while using text of any kind, reinstall the font currently in use.

19.	Click Start, Settings, Control Panel. Double-click the System icon. Click the Performance tab, and click File System. Click the Troubleshooting tab, and enable the Disable New File Sharing And Locking Semantics check box.

 Related Topics


Overview: Troubleshooting Windows NT
Troubleshooting Windows NT

The operation of current computer systems depends upon the dynamic and interactive manipulation of data. Optimal performance of system hardware is essential for the correct operation of Corel VENTURA. Before attempting to diagnose problems within the Windows NT environment, the following precaution is strongly recommended.

Create a repair disk

This is invaluable for the recovery of basic computer function in the event of complete system failure. To do this click File, Run, and type RDISK.

 Note

•	The following files, are essential to the operating system. If you are unsure as to how to edit the contents of these specific files, please contact a Microsoft representative for further assistance. Please back up all files before making any changes by copying these files to a disk.

Troubleshooting Steps

A system error may be eliminated by one or a combination of the following troubleshooting steps. It is advisable, therefore, to try to recreate the error after completing each of the following steps. This will indicate whether the problem has been solved and will prevent the user from taking any unnecessary steps.

1.	Verify that the version of Windows NT is 4.0. Corel products are not supported on earlier versions of this operating system. To do this click Help, About Windows NT in Windows NT Explorer. The version number should read version 4.0 #(Build 1381) or higher.

2.	Verify that a BETA version of Windows NT is not being used. Corel products are not supported on BETA versions of any operating system. The version number should read version 4.0 (Build 1381) or higher.

3.	Verify that the operating system in question conforms to the minimum hardware/system requirements for Corel VENTURA. These can usually be found on the outside sleeve of the packaging.

4.	Exit all applications. Shut down and then restart the computer. Try to duplicate the error that caused the original failure. The error condition may not reappear if it was caused by a momentary memory conflict.

5.	Disable the Windows background, screen saver and any third-party applications to free up active memory space. The background and any Windows screen savers that are being used can be disabled by going into the Settings, Control Panel, Display icon and selecting (none) as the setting for both of these items.

6.	Remove all applications from the Startup group. This can be done by simply dragging the icons from the startup group to another program group.

7.	If the lockup occurs when you type using a specific font, reinstall that font. Remove the font from the Fonts list, via the Control Panel, and reinstall the font from the original source disks. The fonts can be reinstalled by clicking Settings, Control Panel and clicking the Fonts icon. Click File, Install New Font.

8.	All applications (including Corel VENTURA 8 Setup) require an area of hard drive space to be set aside for the creation of temporary files used during the course of normal operations. Empty the TEMP folder and the Recycle Bin on a regular basis. At a Command prompt, enter the command SET to locate the current TEMP folder. The TEMP folder must be located on a drive with ample space for expansion. If the drive where the Temp directory is located has less than 100-200 MB of free space (increase this space if performing intensive graphics work), relocate the TEMP folder to an uncompressed drive by modifying or constructing appropriate statements in the Settings, Control Panel, System, Environment Tab:

SET TEMP=D:\TEMP (where D: represents any drive with adequate disk space)

SET TMP=D:\TEMP

9.	Restart the computer in VGA mode. This is done by shutting down the computer then choosing Windows NT 4.0 (VGA) from the Windows NT start menu.

10.	Virtual Memory (Swap File or Paging File) is space reserved on the hard drive for RAM to store information it requires on an ongoing basis. You may specify your own settings to increase this space as follows: Click Settings, Control Panel. Double-click the System icon, then click the Performance tab; click Change in the Virtual Memory section. Relocate the virtual memory to a non-compressed drive, and specify a Minimum of 20 MB and a Maximum of 50 MB (increase as necessary) or a static figure of 50 MB, for example, as this is often better for troubleshooting purposes.

Windows will manage the virtual memory by expanding or contracting it within the boundaries of your specified settings.

11.	Uninstall the application by running the Corel Uninstaller utility (if applicable) located in the Corel folder. Start the computer and reinstall the application when finished.

12.	If Permissions are suspected, try logging in as Administrator in order to verify that the user has sufficient access rights to perform the desired actions. If you are not the Administrator, please contact the administrator.

13.	Under Windows NT, if applications (such as 16-bit TSRs or device drivers) attempt to access hardware directly, they will immediately be terminated by the operating system. Therefore, it is always a good idea to disable these applications, especially for troubleshooting purposes.

 Related Topics


Overview: Enhancing system performance
Enhancing system performance

Here are a number of considerations for improving your system performance of Corel VENTURA:

•	The microprocessor and clock speed are important; e.g., a 586-60 will run Corel applications more quickly than a 486-33.

•	A math co-processor will enhance the performance of some functions.

•	Ensure that you have at least 100 MB of free disk space on the drive where Windows .TMP files will be created. You can determine the location of this folder by running the SET command at the DOS prompt.

•	Ensure that you have 100 MB of free space on the drive where you store your Corel files.

•	Follow the suggestions in the chapter on Optimizing Windows in your Windows 95 or Windows NT User's Guide.

•	Establish a SWAP file to provide Windows with extra memory. See your Windows 95 or Windows NT User's Guide for more details.

•	Consider an accelerated video card. We cannot make recommendations on any hardware.

 Related Topics